JP7629620B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Conventionally, a starting hole and a big prize hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a lottery for a special symbol is held, and when the lottery for this special symbol is won, the big prize game state is controlled (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), and when the game ball enters the starting hole, the big prize hole is changed to an open state, and the big prize game state is controlled on the condition that the game ball that entered the big prize hole enters a specific area (so-called type 2 pachinko game machine) are known.

In order to enhance the interest of the game, pachinko gaming machines are provided with a plurality of game states, such as game states with different probability of winning special symbols (low probability game state, high probability game state) and game states with different ball entry rates into the starting hole (time-saving game state, non-time-saving game state) (see Patent Document 1). In such pachinko gaming machines, the jackpot game state can be controlled in a short period of time in the high probability game state or the time-saving game state, and the player can obtain a large amount of game value (game balls).

JP 2013-59682 A

However, as the cumulative gaming value acquired by a player increases (as the number of balls won increases), there is a risk that the gambling nature of the game will increase, and it was necessary to appropriately suppress the gambling nature of the game.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately suppresses the gambling aspect of the game .

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a fifth pachinko gaming machine) comprises: a storage means having a working area; a power interruption recovery setting means for setting the working area of the storage means when power is supplied; a specific operation initialization means for initializing a predetermined working area of the storage means by a specific operation; a game control means capable of controlling a game; a game value granting means for granting a game value acquired according to the result of the game to a player; a difference number calculation means for calculating a difference number of the game value from a predetermined reference value based on an increase in the game value granted to the player and the amount of game value consumed in the game; a game stop means capable of stopping a game controlled by the game control means on the condition that the difference number of the game value calculated by the difference number calculation means becomes a regulation value; and a presentation control means capable of controlling a predetermined suggestion.
the game control means has a special game state control means for controlling a special game state capable of awarding a game value to a player when a game result satisfies a special result;
the game stopping means, when the special game state is controlled by the special game state control means, does not stop the game if the difference number of the game values calculated by the difference number calculation means becomes the regulation value, but can stop the game after the control of the special game state is terminated;
the presentation control means is capable of controlling at least a first game stop notice which is executable when the difference number of the game values calculated by the difference number calculation means is a boundary value smaller than the regulated value, a second game stop notice which can suggest in advance that the game will be stopped after the special game state ends when the difference number of the game values calculated by the difference number calculation means becomes the regulated value while the special game state is being controlled by the special game state control means, and a game stop suggestion which can suggest the stop of the game when the game is stopped by the game stop means;
When the first game stop notice is being controlled, a difference suggestion that suggests a difference in game value calculated by the difference calculation means can be controlled;
When the presentation control means is controlling the second game stop notice, the presentation control means continues the control of the second game stop notice without terminating it even if the difference number of the game value calculated by the difference number calculation means becomes a value smaller than the regulated value from the regulated value, and terminates the control of the second game stop notice and starts the control of the game stop suggestion on the condition that the control of the special game state is terminated;
The game control means is capable of transmitting difference ball information corresponding to the difference in the game value to the presentation control means when there is a predetermined change in the difference in the game value,
As the difference ball information, it is possible to transmit information on a higher-order difference consisting of a value in units of a predetermined number of digits, without including information on a lower-order difference consisting of a value less than a predetermined number of digits, among the difference in game value;
The performance control means includes:
When a power outage occurs while the first game stop notice is being executed, and the power is restored by the power outage restoration setting means without the specific operation being performed after the power outage, the first game stop notice is not executed,
When a power outage occurs while the game stop suggestion is being executed, and when the power is restored by the power outage restoration setting means without the specific operation being performed after the power outage, the game stop suggestion is executed;
The device is characterized in that a power outage occurs while the second game stop notice is being executed, and when power is restored by the power outage restoration setting means without the specific operation being performed after the power outage, the second game stop notice is executed .

According to the present invention, the gambling aspect of the game can be appropriately suppressed .

1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. 1 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction. 1 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit of a first pachinko game machine. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view showing an LED unit of the first pachinko gaming machine. 2 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine; 1 is an example of a game flow of a pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of a game state. 1 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (estimate) for each setting value in a first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. 1A is an example of a special symbol stopping mode determination table in a first pachinko gaming machine; and FIG. 1B is an example of a decorative symbol stopping mode determination table in a first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is a modified example of the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol determination table of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol winning type determination table for the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table for the first pachinko gaming machine. 1 is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of a main control process in a first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart (part 3) showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart (part 4) showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of an initial setting process at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a power cut process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving management process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a counter update process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving counter update process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a ceiling counter update process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a counter determination process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving transition determination process of a first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving transition process of a first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving setting process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a system timer interrupt process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting confirmation process in a first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a first normal game pre-processing in a first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a switch input detection process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a starting hole winning detection process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a sub-control circuit process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a sub-variable presentation pattern determination table in the normal game mode of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a table for determining a pre-reading winning type presentation pattern in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a winning combination occurs) in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when losing) in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a flowchart showing a process for determining a pre-reading presentation pattern in a first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and shows the process by which the jackpot-related look-ahead presentation format changes. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and shows the process by which the time-saving hit look-ahead presentation form changes. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern for the first pachinko gaming machine, and shows the process by which the reserved image changes from a common win type look-ahead presentation form to a big win type look-ahead presentation form. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern for the first pachinko gaming machine, and shows the process by which the reserved image changes from a dedicated common win type look-ahead presentation form to a jackpot type look-ahead presentation form. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern for the first pachinko gaming machine, and shows the process by which the reserved image changes from a dedicated common win type look-ahead presentation form to a time-saving win type look-ahead presentation form. 11 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a timing chart of the signal "prize ball information 1" among the signals outputted to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine depending on the gaming status. 13 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit of the second pachinko game machine. FIG. FIG. 13 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols for a low start of the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols for a high start of the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of a special pattern game determination process in a second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of a special pattern game determination process in the second pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a preparation process for opening a large prize opening in a second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit of the third pachinko game machine. FIG. 13 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a V winning device opening preparation process in a third pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the large prize opening and the opening timing of a specific area in a specific round of play during execution of an extended example of a large prize game control process, and shows the cases where (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in an extended example. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in an extended example. This is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the large prize opening and the opening timing of a specific area in a specific round of play during execution of an extended example of a large prize game control process, showing (A) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, and (B) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode. A block diagram showing the circuit configuration of the fourth pachinko game machine. A configuration diagram of various registers possessed by the main CPU of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. A diagram showing a memory map of the main control circuit of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. A diagram to explain an overview of the main RAM clearing process of the fourth pachinko game machine. A diagram to explain an overview of the main RAM clearing process of the fourth pachinko game machine. A diagram to explain the outline of external interrupt processing related to power outage detection in the fourth pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a main control process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a main control process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a main control process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a designated area CRC inspection process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a startup status check process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a designated range clearing process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outside area designated area clearing process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a data storage process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting change confirmation process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting change confirmation process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a power interruption determination process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a power cut setting process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a designated area CRC generation process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance display monitor tallying and dividing process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an out-of-area RAM clear check process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a main control command transmission and reception process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a main control command transmission start process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an external maskable interrupt process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a system timer interrupt process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a switch input detection process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an abnormal state monitoring process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an abnormal state monitoring process (outside area) executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a game LED lighting data output process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a game status information update process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance control command transmission process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit of the fifth pachinko game machine. FIG. FIG. 5 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a conceptual diagram of the internal configuration of the main RAM of the main control circuit of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 5 is an example of an explanatory diagram for explaining the data contents relating to the game stop function of a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of main control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of main control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a designated range clearing process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of an outside area designated area clearing process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of an outside area designated area clearing process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of processing during game stop of the game stop function in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game stop function initialization process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a main control command transmission and reception process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a state monitoring process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of processing during the closing of a small win game in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of processing during opening of a small win game in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot game state ending process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a system timer interrupt process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a switch input detection process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance display monitor control process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game stop function control process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a game stop function status check process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game stop function counter update process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a 3-byte addition process of the difference ball counter in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a 3 byte subtraction process of the difference ball counter in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game stop function counter check process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a game stop function status management process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. An example of a configuration diagram of commands related to the game stop function in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 13 is an example of a configuration diagram of other commands in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a sub-control circuit process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a command receiving process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a command receiving process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a command receiving process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of time charts 1 to 4 of notifications by the game stop function in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 5 is an example of a time chart 5 of notifications by the game stop function in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a time chart 6 of notifications by the game stop function in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image of a game stop notice in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image of a game stop notification in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. An example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the seventh pachinko game machine. An example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in a normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in a time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a transition diagram of a special symbol variation pattern table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of data relating to pre-reading of special symbols in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a table for determining the opening pattern of a normal electric device in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the operation of a normal electric device in the first time-saving play state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a right-hit instruction period setting table for the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving management process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving counter update process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a small win game state setting process in the seventh pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a small win game state control process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot game state ending process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol variable display start process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a switch input detection process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of game states in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a presentation flow of a gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table for the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a start time determination table for the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table for the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table for the first time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table other than the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table at the time of final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a preview performance pattern determination table for a window preview in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hold notice presentation pattern determination table for the hold change notice in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a winning notice presentation pattern determination table for a flash notice in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a prohibition condition setting table for the pre-reading performance in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a small win presentation pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a V passing performance pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a presentation stage selection table after a jackpot gaming state ends in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a sub-control circuit process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation mode determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of a presentation pattern determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 23 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of a presentation pattern determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 3) showing an example of a presentation pattern determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading performance determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal display image in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the card effects and door effects in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the presentation of a Sengoku entry chance in the first time-saving gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the selection of a presentation stage by a player in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the Sengoku Time presentation when a male character stage is selected in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the Sengoku Time presentation when a female character stage is selected in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image that explains the presentation that takes place when the game ball does not pass through the V winning hole during a small win game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the presentation when Sengoku Time ends in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the presentation of a continuous battle in the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. An example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the eighth pachinko game machine. An example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of an eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a jackpot type determination table for the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a small win type determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a game status related setting table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in a normal game state or a special time-saving game state in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the general time-saving game state in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of data relating to pre-reading of special symbols in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a table for determining the opening pattern of a normal electric device in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern variable display start process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern variable display ending process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving management process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern game determination process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for updating the number of small wins in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern game ending process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of processing during the closing of a small win game in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of processing during opening of a small win game in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot game state ending process in the eighth pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a limiter information update process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of variable normal symbol display start processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 23 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a switch input detection process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a preview performance pattern determination table for the time-saving game state in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a sub-control circuit process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation mode determination process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. An example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of game states in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a presentation flow of the gaming state in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating a battle presentation in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating card effects in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the ending presentation in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating card effects in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating a preview performance in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the ninth pachinko game machine. An example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a small win type determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a game status related setting table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in a normal game state in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in a time-saving game state in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of data relating to pre-reading of special symbols in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a second starting hole opening pattern determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of special pattern management processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern variable display start process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern variable display ending process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a B time-saving gaming state transition determination process in a ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern game determination process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern game ending process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of processing during the closing of a small hit game in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of processing during opening of a small win game in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a preparation process for opening a large prize opening in a ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot game state ending process in the ninth pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal pattern variable display start process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol winning end process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a switch input detection process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a sub-control circuit process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation mode determination process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of game states in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. An example of an explanatory diagram of the basic configuration of a display image displayed in the display area of a display device in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the presentation of the BONUS state in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. An example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the tenth pachinko game machine. An example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a jackpot type determination table for the tenth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a small win type determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a game status related setting table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in a normal gaming state and a general gaming state in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a RUSH game state in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of data relating to pre-reading of special symbols in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a second starting hole opening pattern determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a game stop command determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of main control processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of main control processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a game return process in the tenth pachinko game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a game stop function initial value setting process in the tenth pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of special pattern management processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern variable display start process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern variable display ending process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a time-saving management process in a tenth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a B time-saving gaming state transition determination process in the 10th pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a C time-saving game state transition determination process in the 10th pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern game determination process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern game ending process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of processing during the closing of a small hit game in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of processing during opening of a small win game in the tenth pachinko game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in a tenth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot game state ending process in the tenth pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal pattern variable display start process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a game stop function setting process in the tenth pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game stop data update process in the tenth pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game stop data update process in the tenth pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a switch input detection process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a presentation mode determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a caption presentation pattern determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a prohibition condition setting table for the pre-reading performance in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a first game stop notice end judgment table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a sub-control circuit process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation mode determination process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation pattern determination process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation pattern determination process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation pattern determination process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading performance determination process in the 10th pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of data input processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. An example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of game states in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a presentation flow of a presentation mode in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a time chart of a game stop notice by a game stop command in the tenth pachinko game machine. An example of an explanatory diagram of the basic configuration of a display image displayed in the display area of a display device in a tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the card presentation in the chance presentation mode in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the RUSH entry presentation of the chance presentation mode in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the caption effects in the heaven effect mode in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the pre-reading effect in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image of a game stop notice in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image for a game stop notification in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. An example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the eleventh pachinko game machine. An example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a jackpot type determination table for the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a small win type determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a game status related setting table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in a normal game state in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in a general gaming state in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in a RUSH gaming state in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of special symbol pre-reading related data in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a second starting hole opening pattern determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a game stop command determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of main control processing in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of main control processing in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a game return process in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a game stop function initial value setting process in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of special pattern management processing in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern variable display start process in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern variable display ending process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a time-saving management process in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a B time-saving game state transition determination process in an eleventh pachinko game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a C time-saving game state transition determination process in an eleventh pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern game determination process in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern game ending process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of processing during the closing of a small win game in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of processing during opening of a small win game in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a preparation process for opening a large prize opening in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot game state ending process in an eleventh pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of variable normal symbol display start processing in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol winning end process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a game stop function setting process in an eleventh pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game stop data update process in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game stop data update process in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of a switch input detection process in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a presentation mode determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a caption presentation pattern determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a look-ahead performance pattern determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a prohibition condition setting table for the pre-reading performance in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a first game stop notice end judgment table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a sub-control circuit process in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation mode determination process in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation pattern determination process in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation pattern determination process in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation pattern determination process in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading performance determination process in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of data input processing in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. An example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of game states in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a presentation flow of a presentation mode in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a time chart of a game stop notice by a game stop command in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. An example of an explanatory diagram of the basic configuration of a display image displayed in the display area of a display device in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the card presentation in the chance presentation mode in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating a RUSH entry presentation of a chance presentation mode in an eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the caption effect of the heaven effect mode in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the pre-reading effect in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image explaining the general presentation mode, premonition presentation mode, and mode transition presentation in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image of a game stop notice in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image for a game stop notification in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

As examples of gaming machines according to an embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, and a third pachinko gaming machine will be described.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko machine is defined as the front direction, the back side of the pachinko machine is defined as the rear direction, the left side when viewed from the front is defined as the left direction, the right side when viewed from the front is defined as the right direction, the top side of the pachinko machine is defined as the up direction, the bottom side of the pachinko machine is defined as the down direction, the clockwise direction when viewed from the front is defined as the rightward direction, and the conversely, the counterclockwise direction is defined as the leftward direction.

The first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine are both so-called type one pachinko gaming machines known as digital pachinko. Of these, the first pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, but only one of them is variably displayed. In contrast, the second pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel.

The third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a type 1/2 mixed machine, which is a combination of a type 1 gaming machine called a digital pachinko machine and a type 2 gaming machine called a feather mono. The third pachinko gaming machine described in this specification also has a first special symbol and a second special symbol, but this specification describes an example in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, but only one of them is variably displayed. However, this is not intended to exclude type 1/2 mixed pachinko gaming machines in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel.

In this specification, when the term "special design" is used, it means both the first special design and the second special design unless otherwise specified.

In addition, the term "variable display" in this specification includes, for example, both "variable display" in which the pattern is displayed by changing, and "stop display" in which the pattern is displayed by stopping, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is called one "variable display". When the variable display pattern is stopped (hereinafter also referred to as "derivation"), the result of the special pattern hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "special pattern lottery") and the result of the normal pattern hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "normal pattern lottery") described later are determined. Note that although the pattern appears to be stopped, there are cases where the pattern is displayed in a state where the result of the special pattern hit determination process or the normal pattern hit determination process is not determined (for example, a state where it is temporarily stopped), and such a state is included in the variable display. Note that even if the pattern is temporarily stopped, for example, the result of the special pattern hit determination process or the normal pattern hit determination process is not determined at this point, so the pattern can be displayed again by changing.

In addition, in this specification, when explaining the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine, the case where there are two special symbols (a first special symbol and a second special symbol) will be explained as an example. However, for the first pachinko gaming machine and the third pachinko gaming machine, the number of special symbols may be one.

[1. The first pachinko game machine]
First, the first pachinko gaming machine will be described.

As for pachinko gaming machines in which the first and second special symbols are not displayed in parallel, but only one of them is displayed, there are pachinko gaming machines in which, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are on hold, the starting conditions of the second special symbol are established with priority over the starting conditions of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variable machine"), and pachinko gaming machines in which the starting conditions are established in the order of winning, including the first and second starting holes (hereinafter referred to as a "sequential variable machine").

In a priority variable machine, the start conditions for the first special symbol are met when certain requirements are met, such as neither the first nor the second special symbol being in a variable display, the game not being in a jackpot game state, the variable display of the second special symbol not being on hold, and the variable display of the first special symbol being on hold. Also, in a priority variable machine, the start conditions for the second special symbol are met when certain requirements are met, such as neither the first nor the second special symbol being in a variable display, the game not being in a jackpot game state, and the variable display of the second special symbol being on hold.

In a sequential variable machine, the start conditions for the first special symbol are met when at least all of the following are met: neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the game is not in a jackpot game state or the like, the variable display of the first special symbol is on hold, and the earliest reserved symbol is the reserved variable display of the first special symbol. In a sequential variable machine, the start conditions for the second special symbol are met when at least all of the following are met: neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the game is not in a jackpot game state or the like, the variable display of the second special symbol is on hold, and the earliest reserved symbol is the reserved variable display of the second special symbol.

The following explains using a priority variable machine as an example.

[1-1. Appearance]
Fig. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above the front right. Fig. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above the front right. Fig. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above the rear right.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration]
As shown in Figs. 1 to 3, the first pachinko game machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a tray unit 5, a launching device 6, a display device 7 (see Fig. 2), a payout unit 8 (see Figs. 2 and 3), a board unit 9 (see Figs. 2 and 3), and a game board unit 10 (see Fig. 2). In addition, an LED unit 160 (see Fig. 2) is provided at the lower right of the game board unit 10. Here, the outer frame 2, the base door 3, the glass door 4, the tray unit 5, the launching device 6, the display device 7, the payout unit 8, and the board unit 9 will be briefly described, and the game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be described in detail later. Note that the above parentheses indicate reference drawings for configurations not shown in Fig. 1.

(Outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a frame body having a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. This outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to an island facility of an amusement park. A hinge (no reference number) is provided on the front side of, for example, the left end of the outer frame 2, and the base door 3 is supported on this hinge. In this way, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward relative to the outer frame 2 with the hinge as an axis.

The outer frame 2 must be strong to support many components, such as the payout unit 8, base unit 9, display device 7, game board unit 10, glass door 4, and tray unit 5, via the base door 3. On the other hand, there is a demand for larger display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and game board unit 10 to enhance the presentation effect. For this reason, by constructing the outer frame 2 from, for example, a thin metal plate, it is possible to increase the size of the display device 7 and game board unit 10 while maintaining high strength. In particular, if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum, it is possible to reduce the weight.

(Base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a dispensing unit 8 and a base unit 9 attached to its back side and supports these.

A game board unit 10 is fitted onto the front side of the base door 3. In addition, hinges (not referenced) are provided at the top end, the middle part below the vertical center, and the bottom end on the front side, for example the left end, of the base door 3, and the glass door 4 is journaled on the hinges at the top end and the middle part, and the plate unit 5 is journaled on the hinges at the middle part and the bottom end. In this way, the glass door 4 and the plate unit 5 can be rotated forward, either together or individually, relative to the base door 3, with the hinges as an axis.

The launcher 6 is fixedly attached, for example, to the lower right side of the front surface of the base door 3, and speakers 32 (see FIG. 2) are fixedly attached, for example, to the left and right of the upper side. The speakers 32 output, for example, sound effects of characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, audio notifications, error notifications, and other sound effects.

In addition, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the side of the base door 3 opposite the hinge (i.e., the right end). This locking device has the function of locking the base door 3 to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 to the base door 3.

(Glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member in which an opening 41 is formed. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear side. When the glass door 4 is closed to the base door 3, the protective glass 43 faces a game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later) formed in the game board unit 10. In this way, the game area 105 can be viewed from the front with the glass door 4 closed to the base door 3, and game balls flowing down the game area 105 can be prevented from flying out forward.

The protective glass 43 may be made of multiple pieces of glass (e.g., two pieces) attached with a gap between them, or multiple pieces of glass may be unitized with a gap between them. Furthermore, if the protective glass 43 is unitized, a light guide plate, for example, may be provided between the pieces of glass. The protective glass 43 is not limited to being made of glass, and may be made of, for example, transparent resin.

In addition, an operation unit 66 is provided at the bottom of the glass door 4, which can be operated by, for example, a player to receive gaming information services (such as "Unimemo (registered trademark)"). This operation unit 66 can also function as an operation unit that can be operated by an arcade manager or the like on the hall menu screen.

A speaker cover 45 is provided on the top of the glass door 4, located in front of the speaker 32. A large number of LED groups 46 used for light-emitting effects and the like are arranged around the periphery of the opening 41 of the glass door 4, and an LED cover is provided in front of these LED groups 46. Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 46 shown in Figs. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for convenience, it will be described as an LED group 46. The LED group 46 is, for example, a light-emitting means for use in light announcements and light-emitting effects in various variations, but is not limited to LEDs as long as it can perform such light-emitting effects and the like, and may be, for example, liquid crystal or a lamp.

(Dish unit)
The dish unit 5 is a unit consisting of an upper dish 51 and a lower dish 52. The dish unit 5 is located at the front lower part of the base door 3, below the glass door 4. As described above, the dish unit 5 is configured to be rotated relative to the base door 3 to open and close, so that, for example, when balls become jammed, an amusement arcade staff member can clear the jam. Note that the dish unit 5 does not necessarily have to have an upper dish 51 and a lower dish 52, and may be configured as an integrated dish.

The upper tray 51 is provided so that game balls can be stored therein, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 are launched from the launching device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described below). The upper tray 51 is provided with a payout outlet 53 and a performance button 54. Game balls to be lent out or paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout outlet 53 to the upper tray 51. The performance button 54 is what is called a "CHANCE button" or "push button". The performance button 54 may have a predetermined performance function in addition to an operation function operated by a player. An example of the predetermined performance function is a function to vibrate or protrude upward based on the result of a process to determine whether a special symbol has been hit. It may also serve the function of the operation unit 66.

The lower tray 52 is primarily intended to store game balls that have spilled over from the upper tray 51. The lower tray 52 is provided with a payout outlet 55 that communicates with the upper tray 51, and game balls that have spilled over from the upper tray 51 are paid out from the payout outlet 55 to the lower tray 52.

An opening (no reference number) is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 52, which can be opened and closed by the player. When the opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 52 is opened, the game balls stored in the lower tray 52 can be transferred to a ball box placed below the lower tray 52. If a so-called per-machine counting system is installed on each machine, not only is the ball box unnecessary, but the game balls counted by the per-machine counting system can be stored and the stored game balls can be used again for play.

(Launch device)
The launching device 6 is for launching the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The launching device 6 is disposed in the lower right front portion of the base door 3 and below the right of the tray unit 5. The launching device 6 includes a panel body 61, a drive device (not shown), and a launching handle 62.

The panel body 61 is arranged so that when the plate unit 5 is closed relative to the base door 3, the plate unit 5 and the launching device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 appear integrated in appearance.

The launch handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is disposed on the front side of the panel body 61. The drive device is disposed on the back side of the panel body 61, and is configured, for example, by a launch solenoid (not shown). When the player operates the launch handle 62, the game ball is launched by the operation of the drive device. Note that when operating the launch handle 62, the greater the amount of clockwise rotation (amount of operation), the stronger the launch strength of the game ball.

The game balls launched from the launching device 6 located at the lower right of the dish unit 5 roll in an arc along the guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described below) via the launching rail (not shown) and are launched into the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described below). The location of the launching device 6 is not limited to the lower right of the dish unit 5, but may be the lower left of the dish unit 5. In this case, the launching rail is not necessary, and the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively utilized, making it possible to increase versatility.

(Display Device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various effect images related to the game, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100. The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device composed of electroluminescence, or may be a device that projects images using a projection device such as a projector. In the display area of the display device 7, for example, an effect identification pattern (for example, a decorative pattern) is variably displayed to display the result of a hit determination process of a special pattern, an effect image according to the result of a hit determination process of a special pattern, an effect image during a big win game state, a demo effect image, an effect image showing the pending status of the variable display of a special pattern, etc. are displayed. In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10, but the display device 7 may be attached to the base door 3 as long as the display area of the display device 7 is arranged to face the opening of the game panel 100.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided to display the various performance images described above, but multiple display devices (e.g., two) may be provided and the performance images may be displayed using these multiple display devices.

(Payout unit)
The payout unit 8 (see Figures 2 and 3) is disposed on the rear side of the base door 3, and is composed of a ball passage 81, a payout device 82, etc. Game balls are supplied to the ball passage 81 from a storage tank 80 (see Figures 2 and 3). Game balls are supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). When a payout condition is met, the payout device 82 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from the game balls supplied to the ball passage 81 from the storage tank 80, for example, to the upper tray 51. Also, a power switch 95 is provided on the rear side of the payout unit 8, as shown in Figure 3.

(Board unit)
The board unit 9 (see Figs. 2 and 3) is disposed on the rear side of the base door 3. The board unit 9 is provided with various control boards and the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the board unit 9 is provided with a main control board 91 on which a main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described below) is mounted, a sub-control board 92 on which a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described below) is mounted, a payout/launch control board 93 on which a payout/launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described below) that controls the payout/launch of game balls is mounted, and a power supply board on which a power supply circuit 450 (see FIG. 6 described below) that supplies power is mounted.

For the sake of convenience, in FIG. 3, the main control board 91, the sub-control board 92, the payout/launch control board 93, and the power supply board 94 are indicated by reference numerals, but all of these boards are housed in a board case.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (a board on which one control LSI or multiple LSIs are provided). However, this is not limited to this, and the sub-control board 92 may be configured with multiple boards, for example, by making all or part of the display control circuit 304, audio control circuit 305, LED control circuit 306, and role control circuit 307 (all of which are shown in FIG. 6, described below) separate boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10 included in the first pachinko game machine. A game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 10, in which the launched game balls can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 is formed in which a launched game ball can roll down, a guide rail 110, a center role 115 located approximately in the center of the game area 105, a first starting hole 120, a general winning hole 122, a passing gate unit 125, a special electric role unit 130, a second starting hole 140, a normal electric role unit 145, an LED unit 160, an outlet 178, and a back unit (not shown) located behind the game board unit 10. As mentioned above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference number) is formed in the gaming panel 100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 7. A guide rail 110 is provided on the front surface of the gaming panel 100, and gaming pegs (no reference number) and the like are planted therein. A gaming ball launched from the launching device 6 (see Figs. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 110 toward the gaming area 105, collides with the gaming pegs, etc., and flows downward below the gaming area 105 while changing its direction of travel.

In addition, a back unit (not shown) with decorative bodies is disposed behind the gaming panel 100 to enhance the presentation effect. The gaming panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front. In this case, the entire gaming panel 100 may be made of transparent materials, or, for example, only the parts of the gaming panel 100 where the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front may be made of transparent materials. In addition, the gaming panel 100 may be made of materials that do not have transparent parts (for example, wood), and transparent materials may be provided in some parts to enhance the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the gaming panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the rear unit can be seen from the front, but the entire gaming panel 100 may be made transparent, or only a portion of it may be made transparent.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (both of which have no reference numerals). The play area 105 is defined by the guide rail 110. The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game balls launched from the launching device 6 (see FIG. 6 described later) to the upper part of the play area 105.

(Center role)
The center device 115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference number) of the game panel 100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 116 at its upper portion. Game balls launched toward the game area 105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116.

In this first pachinko gaming machine, the area of the gaming area 105 to the left of the center role 115 is referred to as the left area 106, and the area to the right of the center role 115 is referred to as the right area 107. The definitions of the left area and the right area are the same for the second and third pachinko gaming machines described below.

A game ball launched by the launching device 6 toward the game area 105 flows down the left area 106 or the right area 107. A game ball flowing down the left area 106 or the right area 107 changes direction as it flows downward due to collision with game pegs or the like planted in the game panel 100. If the amount of operation of the launching handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left area 106. On the other hand, if the amount of operation of the launching handle 62 (see Figure 1) is large, the launched game ball flows down the right area 107.

In this specification, as the manner of operation (hitting) of the launch handle 62, a hitting manner in which the game ball is launched so as to flow down the left side area 106 is referred to as a "left hit," and a hitting manner in which the game ball is launched so as to flow down the right side area 107 is referred to as a "right hit." In this way, the player can hit the game ball toward either the left side area 106 or the right side area 107.

The center device 115 also has a warp entrance 117 formed on the outer periphery on the left side, through which game balls flowing down the left area 106 can enter. Game balls that enter the warp entrance 117 are configured to be guided to a stage 118 formed in the center device 115. The stage 118 is formed in front of the lower edge of the display area of the display device 7 so that the game balls can roll in the left-right direction. The stage 118 may be formed in multiple stages, such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

A chance entrance 119 through which game balls can enter is formed at the rear of the stage 118, approximately in the center in the left-right direction, and game balls that enter the chance entrance 119 are configured to be released directly above the first start entrance 120. Therefore, game balls that enter the chance entrance 119 have a higher probability of entering (passing through) the first start entrance 120 than game balls that do not enter the warp entrance 117, or game balls that enter the warp entrance 117 but do not enter the chance entrance 119.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 120 is disposed below the display area of the display device 7, and is disposed so that a game ball hit from the left can win (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or is impossible to win). When a game ball wins in the first starting hole 120, it is detected by a first starting hole switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later). It is also possible that a game ball hit from the right can win in the first starting hole 120. Also, instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting hole 120, a first starting hole that allows a game ball hit from the right to win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or is impossible to win) may be provided.

When the first start hole switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the first start hole 120, various data related to the first special symbol (for example, various random numbers such as a random number value for determining a big win of the first special symbol, a random number value for the symbol of the first special symbol, a random number value for determining the reach of the first special symbol, and a random number value for selecting the performance of the first special symbol) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition of the first special symbol (also referred to as the "variation start condition of the first special symbol" in this specification) is established, the stored various data is used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol. When a game ball enters the first start hole 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 120 is referred to as the starting entry of the first special pattern, and various data related to the first special pattern (for example, various random number values such as the random number value for determining a jackpot for the first special pattern, the pattern random number value for the first special pattern, the random number value for determining reach for the first special pattern, and the random number value for selecting effects for the first special pattern) are referred to as the starting information of the first special pattern. In addition, storing the starting information of the first special pattern until the starting conditions are met is referred to as holding. The same applies to the second special pattern.

(General prize entry)
A plurality of general winning openings 122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, and are arranged so that a game ball hit from the left can win a prize (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or cannot win a prize). When a game ball wins in any of the plurality of general winning openings 122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the general prize opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the general prize opening 122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 122 is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 122 is positioned so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit from the right to win, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the general winning opening 122 described above, a general winning opening through which a game ball hit from the right can win may be provided.

(Passing gate unit)
The pass gate unit 125 is located in the right area 107 and is a unitary body that integrates a pass gate 126 that is configured to allow almost all game balls hit to the right to pass through, and a pass gate switch 127 (see Figure 6 described below) that detects the passage of the game ball through the pass gate 126.

When the passing gate switch 127 detects the passage of a gaming ball through the passing gate 126, various data related to the normal symbols (e.g., random number values for determining whether the normal symbols are winning) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (e.g., up to four). The stored various data are used in the process of determining whether the normal symbols are winning. Note that even if the passing gate switch 127 detects the passage of a gaming ball through the passing gate 126, no prize balls are paid out. The passing gate unit 125 may be located in the left area 106 instead of or in addition to the right area 107.

In this specification, the passage of the gaming ball through the passing gate 126 is referred to as a start passing, and various data related to the normal symbol extracted by the passing of the gaming ball through the passing gate 126 (for example, a random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a winning symbol, etc.) is referred to as the start information of the normal symbol. In addition, storing the start information of the normal symbol until the start condition is met is referred to as holding.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric device unit 130 is a unit body that integrates a big winning opening 131, a count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described later) that detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the big winning opening 131, and a special electric device 133. The special electric device unit 130 is disposed below the passing gate unit 125 in the right side area 107.

The large prize opening 131 is arranged so that game balls hit from the right can win (game balls hit from the left have difficulty or difficulty winning). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the large prize opening 131 described above, a large prize opening that can win game balls hit from the left may be arranged, or a large prize opening that can win game balls may be arranged above the center gimmick 115.

The large prize opening 131 is an opening that is opened to allow a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) to enter (pass through) when the game is controlled to a large win game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. When the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described below) detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric device 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 135 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 134. The special electric device 133, i.e., the special electric shutter 134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for game balls to enter (pass) through the large prize opening 131, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for game balls to enter (pass) through the large prize opening 131. In addition, in the large prize game state, the transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the large prize game state is a game state in which a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the large prize opening 131 transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period over multiple rounds.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 140 is disposed in the left area 106 (more specifically, below the left side of the first starting hole 120). However, the second starting hole 140 is configured such that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit from the left to win, for example, due to game pins, etc., and a game ball hit from the right is guided to the vicinity of the second starting hole 140 so that it can win. However, it is not essential to configure the second starting hole 140 in this way, and it may be provided in the right area 107, for example. The second starting hole 140 may also be configured such that a game ball hit from the left can win.

When the second start hole switch 141 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the second start hole 140, various data related to the second special symbol (for example, various random numbers such as a random number value for determining a big win of the second special symbol, a random number value for the symbol of the second special symbol, a random number value for determining the reach of the second special symbol, and a random number value for selecting the performance of the second special symbol) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition of the second special symbol (also referred to as the "variation start condition of the second special symbol" in this specification) is established, the stored various data is used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball enters the second start hole 140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 140 is not limited to this.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 145 is disposed in the left area 106 (more specifically, below the left side of the first starting hole 120), and is a unit body that integrates a winning hole through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters (passes through) the winning hole, a switch that detects the entry of the game ball into the winning hole, and the normal electric accessory 146. In this embodiment, the winning hole is the second starting hole 140, and the switch is the second starting hole switch 141.

The normal electric device 146 includes a normal power movable member 147, which is a so-called electric chute and is made of, for example, a blade member, and a normal power solenoid 148 (see FIG. 6 described below) that operates the normal power movable member 147. The normal electric device 146, i.e., the normal power movable member 147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second start hole 140, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second start hole 140. The normal power movable member 147 includes blade types, door types, protruding plate types, etc.

(Outlet)
The outlet 178 is for discharging game balls that have been shot toward the game area 105 but have not won any of the various winning ports (e.g., the first starting port 120, the second starting port 140, the big winning port 131, the general winning port 122, etc.) to the outside of the machine. This outlet 178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 105 so that both game balls hit from the left and game balls hit from the right can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between multiple general winning ports 122, so that game balls flowing down the game area 105 can be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) is for decorating the game board unit 10, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 100. This back unit includes a group of performance-use props 58 (see FIG. 6 described later) such as movable props controlled by the sub-control circuit 300. The group of performance-use props 58 are arranged, for example, around the display area of the display device 7. At least one of the props or prop-use prop component members constituting the props among the group of performance-use props 58 functions as a performance-use prop that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is disposed in the lower right portion of the game board unit 10, outside the game area 105 (see FIG. 4, for example). The LED unit 160 is a unit body in which various display sections are integrated.

Figure 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display section 161, a normal symbol hold display section 162, a first special symbol display section 163, a second special symbol display section 164, a first special symbol hold display section 165, a second special symbol hold display section 166, a probability change notification display section 167, and a time-saving notification display section 168.

(Normal pattern display section)
The normal symbol display unit 161 displays the result of the normal symbol winning judgment process, and includes normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the conditions for starting the variable display of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "normal symbol starting conditions") are met, the variable display of the normal symbol is started, in which the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b alternately turn on and off. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the normal symbol started, the variable display of the normal symbol stops, and the result of the normal symbol winning judgment process is derived.

When the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the combination of the lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b becomes a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a lights up and the normal symbol display LED 161b turns off. On the other hand, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a miss, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a turns off and the normal symbol display LED 161b lights up. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b that indicate the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is not limited to this. Then, when the normal symbol is displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is decided to operate the normal electric role 146, and the normal electric movable member 147 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, making it easier for the game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting hole 140.

(Regular pattern reserved display section)
The reserved display unit 162 for normal symbols displays the number of reserved variable displays of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as the "reserved number of normal symbols") when the start information of the normal symbols, i.e., the variable display, is reserved, and is equipped with reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols. The above "variable display of normal symbols is reserved" refers to the state from when the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 126 is detected and various data related to the normal symbols (for example, random number values for determining whether the normal symbols are hit, etc.) are extracted until the start condition of the normal symbols is established. The start condition of the normal symbols is established when at least the following is satisfied: the normal symbols are not being variable displayed, and the variable display of the normal symbols is reserved.

The normal symbol reserved display unit 162 displays the number of reserved ordinary symbols by a combination of the on/off state of the normal symbol reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b. For example, when the number of reserved ordinary symbols is one, the normal symbol reserved display LED 162a is lit and the normal symbol reserved display LED 162b is turned off. When the number of reserved ordinary symbols is two, both the normal symbol reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b are lit. When the number of reserved ordinary symbols is three, the normal symbol reserved display LED 162a flashes and the normal symbol reserved display LED 162b is lit. When the number of reserved ordinary symbols is four, both the normal symbol reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b flash. However, the display mode of the normal symbol reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b, which indicate the number of reserved ordinary symbols, is not limited to this.

(Special design display section)
The special symbol display unit displays the result of the special symbol winning determination process, and includes a first special symbol display unit 163 and a second special symbol display unit 164. The first special symbol display unit 163 includes a first special symbol display LED group consisting of, for example, eight LEDs 163a to 163h. Similarly, the second special symbol display unit 164 includes a second special symbol display LED group consisting of, for example, eight LEDs 164a to 164h.

When the conditions for starting the variable display of the first special pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "initiation conditions for the first special pattern") are met, the variable display of the first special pattern is started in which all or some of the eight LEDs 163a-163h that make up the first special pattern display unit 163 alternately or mutually turn on and off. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the first special pattern was started, the variable display of the first special pattern stops, and the result of the winning determination process for the first special pattern is derived.

If the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the combination of on/off of the eight LEDs 163a-163h that make up the first special symbol display section 163 will be a specific stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display section 163 is displayed as stopped in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

When the conditions for starting the variable display of the second special pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "start condition of the second special pattern") are met, the variable display of the second special pattern is started in which all or some of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h that make up the second special pattern display unit 164 alternately or mutually turn on and off. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the second special pattern was started, the variable display of the second special pattern stops, and the result of the winning determination process for the second special pattern is derived.

If the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a jackpot, the combination of on/off of the eight LEDs 164a-164h that make up the second special symbol display section 164 will be a specific stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display section 164 is displayed as stopped in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

(Special design reserved display section)
The special pattern reserve display unit displays the number of reserved special pattern variable displays (hereinafter referred to as the "reserved number of special patterns") when start information for a special pattern, i.e., a variable display, is reserved, and is provided with a first special pattern reserve display unit 165 and a second special pattern reserve display unit 166.

The first special symbol reserved display unit 165 displays the number of reserved first special symbols when the variable display of the first special symbol is reserved, and is equipped with first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a, 165b. "The variable display of the first special symbol is reserved" refers to the state from when the entry (passage) of the game ball into the first start hole 120 is detected and the start information of the first special symbol is extracted, until the start condition of the first special symbol is established.

The first special symbol reserved display unit 165 displays the number of reserved symbols of the variable display of the first special symbol by a combination of the lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b. For example, when the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is one, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a is lit and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b is extinguished. When the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is two, both the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b are lit. When the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is three, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a flashes and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b is lit. When the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is four, both the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b flash. However, the display mode of the first special pattern reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b, which indicate the reserved number of first special patterns, is not limited to this.

The second special symbol reserved display unit 166 displays the number of reserved second special symbols when the variable display of the second special symbol is reserved, and is equipped with second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a, 166b. "Variable display of the second special symbol is reserved" refers to the state from when the entry (passage) of the game ball into the second start hole 140 is detected and the start information of the second special symbol is extracted, until the start condition of the second special symbol is established.

The second special symbol reserved display unit 166 displays the number of reserved symbols of the variable display of the second special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b. For example, when the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol is one, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a is lit and the second special symbol reserved display LED 166b is extinguished. When the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol is two, both the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b are lit. When the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol is three, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a flashes and the second special symbol reserved display LED 166b is lit. When the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol is four, both the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b flash. However, the display mode of the second special pattern reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b, which indicate the reserved number of second special patterns, is not limited to this.

(Display unit for probability change notification)
The probability change notification display unit 167 can be turned on while the probability change control described below is being executed, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

The probability change notification display unit 167 may be lit while probability change control is being executed, but may also be configured to not light up so that it is not possible to tell from the outside that probability change control is being executed, thereby concealing the fact that probability change control is being executed.

However, when the power is cut off while the special rate control is being executed, the data indicating that the special rate control is being executed is not lost due to the function of the backup capacitor 207 described below. Therefore, if the power is cut off while the special rate control is being executed and then turned on, the special rate notification display unit 167 lights up in a manner that allows the user to know from the outside that the special rate control is being executed.

Even if whether or not the special rate control is being executed is kept secret before the power is cut off, when the power is turned on, the special rate notification display unit 167 is turned on so that it is possible to know that the special rate control is being executed.

(Time-saving notification display unit)
The time-saving notification display unit 168 can be turned on while the time-saving control described below is being executed, and is configured with, for example, an LED or a lamp.

In this embodiment, the time-saving notification display unit 168 has, for example, a first time-saving notification display unit 168a and a second time-saving notification display unit 168b, but the number of time-saving notification display units 168 is not limited to this.

The time-saving game state includes time-saving game state A, time-saving game state B, and time-saving game state C, which will be described in detail later. And, for example, it is configured so that it is possible to know which time-saving game state is being used by the combination of lighting or extinguishing of the first time-saving notification display unit 168a and the second time-saving notification display unit 168b.

The time-saving notification display unit 168 may light up the first time-saving notification display unit 168a and/or the second time-saving notification display unit 168b depending on the time-saving control being executed, but may be turned on or off in a manner that makes it impossible to know from the outside whether or not time-saving control is being executed or the type of time-saving control being executed (for example, all lights off, all lights on, or a manner unrelated to the time-saving control being executed), thereby concealing the fact that time-saving control is being executed or the type of time-saving control being executed. In particular, while it may be possible to know from the outside whether or not time-saving control is being executed, it may be difficult to know from the outside which time-saving control is being executed, so by concealing the type of time-saving control being executed, it is possible to increase interest.

However, when the power supply is cut off while time-saving control is being executed, due to the function of the backup capacitor 207 described below, not only the data indicating that time-saving control is being executed, but also the data indicating the type of time-saving control being executed is not lost. Therefore, if the power supply is cut off while time-saving control is being executed and then turned on, the time-saving notification display unit 168 turns on or off in a manner that allows the user to know from the outside that time-saving control is being executed and the type of time-saving control being executed.

Even if the fact that time-saving control is being executed and the type of time-saving control being executed are concealed so that they cannot be seen from the outside before the power is cut off, when the power is turned on, the time-saving notification display unit 168 is configured to light and/or turn off in a manner that allows the fact that time-saving control is being executed and the type of time-saving control being executed to be seen from the outside.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 6. Fig. 6 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko game machine is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, processes executed when the power is turned on and processes related to game operations, and is equipped with a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (read/write memory), an initial reset circuit 204, and a backup capacitor 207, and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 201 is connected to a main ROM 202, a main RAM 203, an initial reset circuit 204, etc. The main CPU 201 has built-in functions such as a watchdog timer (WDT) that monitors operation and a function for preventing fraud.

The main ROM 202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the first pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, etc. The main CPU 201 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the main ROM 202.

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. This main RAM 203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201. Note that, although in this embodiment, RAM is used as the temporary storage area for the main CPU 201, this is not limiting and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal when necessary.

The backup capacitor 207 has the function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 203 from being lost in the event of a power outage, etc.

The main control circuit 200 also includes an I/O port 205 that is connected to various devices and other devices so as to be able to communicate with each other, and a command output port 206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 300 so as to be able to output various commands to the sub-control circuit 300.

In addition, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200. For example, the above-mentioned normal symbol display unit 161, normal symbol reserved display unit 162, first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164, first special symbol reserved display unit 165, second special symbol reserved display unit 166, probability change notification display unit 167, time reduction notification display unit 168, normal power solenoid 148, and special power solenoid 135 are connected to the main control circuit 200. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 170 and error notification monitor 172 are also connected to the main control circuit 200. The main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals via the I/O port 205.

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data and setting values (described later) under the control of the main CPU 201. The performance display data is data that indicates, for example, the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state for a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 60,000 balls) shot, and is also called a base value.

The error notification monitor 172 displays an error code. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 172 can also display a setting change code indicating that a setting change process is in progress, a setting confirmation code indicating that a setting confirmation process is in progress, etc., in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, which will be described later. Note that the setting change code may be configured to display a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that a setting change is in progress).

The main control circuit 200 is also connected to the first start port switch 121, the second start port switch 141, the pass gate switch 127, the count switch 132, and the general winning port switch 123. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to the main control circuit 200 via the I/O port 205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 200 is connected to a calling device (not shown) having functions such as calling a hall attendant and displaying the number of jackpots, an external terminal board 184 used to send data to a hall computer 186 that manages the pachinko machines in the hall, a setting key 174 that is operated to change or check the setting value in the case of a pachinko machine with a setting function described later, and a backup clear switch 176 that can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 203 in response to the operation of the gaming center manager. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing the setting value described later, but is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing the setting value may also be provided.

The setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are preferably housed in a specified case so that they cannot be easily touched by third parties (e.g., players) other than the arcade manager. "Inside a specified case" does not only mean a case in which the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also a case in which notches are provided only at the locations corresponding to the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176, so that the arcade manager can touch the setting key 174 and/or the backup clear switch 176 when the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the arcade manager to expose the back.

In this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but this is not limited thereto, and they may be configured to be connected to the payout/launch control circuit 400 or the power supply circuit 450, for example. In this case, too, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the arcade manager from easily touching the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176.

[1-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 includes a sub-CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a role control circuit 307, and a command input port 308. The sub-control circuit 300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to commands from the main control circuit 200. Although not shown in Fig. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected to effect buttons 54 (see Fig. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores programs for controlling the game presentation of the first pachinko game machine by the sub-CPU 301, various tables, etc. The sub-CPU 301 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the program ROM 302. In particular, the sub-CPU 301 controls the game presentation according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 200.

The work RAM 303 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub-CPU 301.

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for controlling the display of the display device 7. The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various types of image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, a D/A converter for converting image data into an image signal, and the like.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub-CPU 301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 7 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data showing decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 7, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7. In this way, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 32. The audio control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC for controlling the audio, an audio data ROM for storing various types of audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as an AMP) for amplifying the audio signal, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 32. In response to a sound generation command from the sub-CPU 301, the sound source IC selects one piece of sound data from multiple pieces of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. The sound source IC also reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a specified sound signal, and supplies the converted sound signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as sound and sound effects output from the speaker 32.

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46, which includes decorative LEDs. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which multiple types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The reel control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each reel (for example, one or more reels among the group of performance reels 58). The reel control circuit 307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each reel, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a reel data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored.

The reel control circuit 307 selects one of the multiple operation patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a reel operation command from the sub-CPU 301. The selected operation pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each reel. The lighting circuit selects one of the multiple lighting patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a lighting command from the sub-CPU 301. The selected lighting pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is supplied to control the lighting operation of each reel.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands sent from the main control circuit 200.

[1-2-3. Payout/launch control circuit]
The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls, and is connected to a payout device 82 capable of paying out game balls, a launch device 6 capable of launching game balls, a card unit 180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

When the payout/launch control circuit 400 receives a prize ball control command sent from the main control circuit 200, it sends a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 and controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls.

The card unit 180 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 182. The ball lending operation panel 182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a loan/return button for receiving the return of a ball lending card on which cache data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a loan ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180. The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls based on the loan ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 180. The operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

In addition, when the launch handle 62 is rotated clockwise, the payout/launch control circuit 400 supplies power to a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation), and controls the launch of the game ball.

[1-2-4. Power supply circuit]
The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required during play to the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.

The power supply circuit 450 is connected to a power switch 95 and other components. The power switch 95 is turned on when the necessary power is to be supplied to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, an example of a game flow will be described with reference to Fig. 7 and Fig. 8. Fig. 7 is an example of a game flow. Fig. 8 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of a game state. Note that the game flow shown in Fig. 7 is not a control flow, but a flow that can be grasped from the outside.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is launched by a user operation such as a player, and when the game ball enters one of the various winning holes (for example, the first starting hole 120, etc.), a payout control process for the game ball is performed. Pachinko games include a "special symbol game" using a special symbol and a "normal symbol game" using a normal symbol. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a hit determination process for a special symbol is performed based on the winning of a game ball into the starting hole 120, 140, and whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state is determined. The normal symbol game is, for example, a game in which a hit determination process for a normal symbol is performed based on the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 126, and whether or not to open the winning hole (in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140) by operating the normal electric role 146 is determined. In this specification, "special symbol games" are sometimes referred to as "games," but "games" is a term used in a broad sense, and for example, normal symbol games and games with effects that use operation units such as the effect button 54 (see, for example, Figure 1) are also included in "games."

In addition, in this specification, one special pattern game is defined as the period from when the variable display of the special pattern begins until this variable display ends and the result of the special pattern hit determination process is definitively displayed (derived) (more specifically, until the special pattern determination time has passed). However, if the game is controlled to a big hit game state after the result of the special pattern hit determination process is derived, one special pattern game is defined as the period until the end of the big hit game state. Note that in the first pachinko game machine, small hits are not included in the result of the special pattern hit determination process, but in the pachinko game machine in which small hits are included in the result of the special pattern hit determination process, one special pattern game is defined as the period until the end of the small hit game state after the result of the special pattern hit determination process is derived and the game is controlled to a small hit game state.

When a stop display mode indicating a jackpot in a special symbol game is output to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, a round game is executed in which the special electric device 133 is operated to keep the jackpot winning hole 131 open for a predetermined time (for example, up to 30,000 msec), and the possibility of winning in the jackpot winning hole 131 is relatively increased.

In addition, when a stop display mode indicating a normal symbol win is output to the normal symbol display unit 161 in a normal symbol game, the normal electric device 146 is activated to open the winning hole (for example, the second starting hole 140 in this embodiment), and the possibility of winning through the second starting hole 140, for example, is relatively increased.

The games that can be played in a pachinko game are not limited to special symbol games and normal symbol games, and new games other than these may also be playable.

The following provides an overview of the game flow for special symbol games and regular symbol games.

[1-3-1. Special symbol game]
As shown in Figure 7, the special pattern game mainly includes a special pattern start winning process which is carried out when there is a winning (passing) through the first start port 120 or the second start port 140, and a special pattern control process which is carried out based on the establishment of the start conditions for the special pattern.

When a game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 140, a special symbol start winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data related to the special symbol (e.g., various random number values such as a random number value for determining a jackpot, a random number value for a pattern, a random number value for determining a reach, and a random number value for selecting a performance) are extracted (obtained) from various counters for the special symbol (e.g., a counter for determining a jackpot, a counter for determining a pattern, etc.). Each extracted random number value is reserved as start information. This special symbol start winning process is performed even when the special symbol control process is being executed.

In addition, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the start conditions for the special symbol are met. When the start conditions for the special symbol are met, a special symbol hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not there is a "jackpot" by referring to the random number value for jackpot determination extracted from the special symbol's jackpot determination counter. After that, a stop symbol determination process is performed to determine the stop symbol. In the stop symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped is determined by referring to the random number value for pattern determination extracted from the special symbol's pattern determination counter and the result of the special symbol hit determination process.

In this embodiment, if the probability of a special symbol being played is turned on, the probability of a special symbol being played is controlled. In the process of determining whether or not a special symbol is played, if the probability of a special symbol being played is turned off, the probability of a special symbol being played is relatively low, whereas if the probability of a special symbol being played is turned on, the probability of a special symbol being played is relatively high. In the following description, the probability of a special symbol being determined to be a special symbol being played is referred to as the probability of a special symbol being played.

The high probability flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not high probability control is executed. When the high probability flag is on, the game proceeds in a game state in which high probability control is executed (for example, in this embodiment, a high probability time-saving game state). On the other hand, when the high probability flag is off, the game proceeds in a game state in which high probability control is not executed (for example, a normal game state or a low probability time-saving game state).

Next, a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol is performed. In this process, a random number is extracted from the variation pattern determination counter, and the variation pattern of the special symbol (variable display pattern) is determined by referencing the random number, the result of the special symbol winning judgment process described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed as described above. Then, a process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol is performed based on the result of the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

Once the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined, a presentation pattern determination process is then performed to determine the presentation pattern. Then, based on the results of the presentation pattern determination process, presentation control process is performed for display presentation such as decorative symbols and character presentations displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and sound presentation such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 32. The presentation control process is performed by the sub-CPU 301.

Then, when the special pattern variable display control process and the presentation control process are completed and a jackpot has been hit, a jackpot game control process is carried out. The jackpot game control process is a process executed in the jackpot game state. When the jackpot game state ends, the special pattern game ends, and a game state transition control process to a non-jackpot game state is carried out. In this case, the game state transitions depending on the type of jackpot. For example, if the jackpot type is one in which both the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag are set to on, the game transitions to a high-probability time-saving game state after the jackpot game state ends.

On the other hand, if there is no big win, i.e., if it is a miss, the special symbol game ends. Note that in the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small win, but in pachinko gaming machines in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small win, a small win game control process is performed when a small win is won. Also, if there is no big win but a time-saving hit, which will be described later, the game will transition to a time-saving game state.

Then, each time the conditions for starting the special symbol are met, the various processes of the special symbol control process described above are repeated.

If a game ball enters the start hole 120, 140 during the special symbol control process, the special symbol start entry process is executed. In addition, the start information of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the start hole 120, 140 (for example, various data such as random numbers for determining a jackpot, random numbers for the special symbol, random numbers for reaching a jackpot, and random numbers for selecting effects) is held until the start condition of the special symbol is met.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a maximum of eight pieces of start information for special patterns can be reserved, consisting of four pieces of start information for the first special pattern and four pieces of start information for the second special pattern, but the number of start information for special patterns that can be reserved is not limited to this. For example, more start information for the first special pattern may be reserved than start information for the second special pattern, or more start information for the second special pattern may be reserved than start information for the first special pattern.

Also, although not shown in FIG. 7, a look-ahead determination (see, for example, S396 in FIG. 52 described below) may be made between the start of the special symbol and the establishment of the start condition of the special symbol, to determine whether or not a "jackpot" has been won and the change pattern prior to the hit determination process of the special symbol based on the start information extracted when the game ball enters (passes) the start hole 120, 140, and a look-ahead performance function may be provided to perform a predetermined performance based on the result of this look-ahead determination. Note that the look-ahead determination may be made before or after the start information extracted by the game ball entering the start hole 120, 140 is reserved.

[1-3-2. Normal symbol game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the normal pattern game mainly includes a normal pattern start passing process which is carried out when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126, and a normal pattern control process which is carried out based on the establishment of the normal pattern start condition.

When a game ball passes through the passing gate 126, a normal symbol start passing process is executed. In this normal symbol start passing process, start information for the normal symbol (e.g., a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is a hit) is extracted (obtained) from the winning determination counter for the normal symbol, and the extracted start information is reserved.

In addition, in the normal pattern control process, the main CPU 201 judges whether or not the start condition for the normal pattern has been met. When starting the variable display of the normal pattern, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal pattern hit judgment random number value extracted from the hit judgment counter for the normal pattern, executes the normal pattern hit judgment process to determine whether or not the "normal pattern hit" has occurred, and then executes the variation pattern determination process. In this process, the result of the normal pattern hit judgment process is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal pattern is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the result of the winning judgment process for the normal symbol and the determined variation pattern of the normal symbol, and executes a variable display control process that controls the variable display of the normal symbol, and a performance control process that performs a predetermined performance. Note that there are cases in which the performance control process is not executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the performance control process of the normal symbol are completed, the main CPU 201 judges whether or not a normal winning symbol indicating a "normal winning symbol" has been derived to the normal symbol display unit 161 (see FIG. 5 and FIG. 6). When it is judged that a stop display mode indicating a normal winning symbol has been derived, the main CPU 201 executes a normal symbol winning game control process. In this normal symbol winning game control process, the normal electric device 146 (see FIG. 4) is operated, and the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)) is opened so that the game ball can enter (pass through) the winning hole or it is easy to open the winning hole. On the other hand, when it is judged that a stop display mode indicating a normal winning symbol has not been derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol winning game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In addition, in a game state where the time-saving control is not executed (for example, a normal game state), the probability that a stop display mode indicating a normal win will be derived may be set to 0. The time-saving control corresponds to at least one of the following controls: special symbol shortening control, which shortens the variable display time of the special symbol, and electric support control, which operates the normal electric role device 146 to increase the frequency with which the winning hole (for example, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment) is opened, compared to when the time-saving control is not executed. This time-saving control may be a control that performs both the special symbol shortening control and the electric support control, or a control that performs only one of the special symbol shortening control and the electric support control.

The electric support control is a control that improves the time-saving performance of at least one of the winning probability of a "normal pattern hit", the variable display time of the normal pattern, and the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (number of openings, opening time, wait time). The time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of a game ball entering a winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)), and refers to the winning probability of a "normal pattern hit", the variable display time of the normal pattern, and/or the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.). In addition, improving the time-saving performance means, for example, making it easier for a game ball to enter a winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)). In other words, when electric support control is executed, the winning probability of a "normal symbol hit" increases, the variable display time of the normal symbol is shortened, and/or winning is made easier with the normal electric device 146 (increasing the number of times it opens, extending the opening time, shortening the wait time, etc.) compared to when electric support control is not executed.

Then, each time the normal symbol start conditions are met, the various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

When the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 during the normal symbol control process, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. In addition, the start information of the normal symbol (for example, a random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a hit, etc.) extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 is held until the start condition of the normal symbol is met.

The variable display of normal symbols will start in the order they were reserved, and when the start conditions for the normal symbols are met, the variable display will be performed for the earliest reserved start information of the reserved normal symbols.

The method for extracting various random numbers (for example, the random number value for determining whether the first special symbol is a jackpot, the pattern random number value for the first special symbol, the random number value for determining whether the first special symbol is in reach, the random number value for determining whether the second special symbol is a jackpot, the pattern random number value for the second special symbol, the random number value for determining whether the second special symbol is in reach, and the random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is in reach, etc.) may be a soft random number method in which a program is executed by the main CPU 201 to generate random numbers within a predetermined range (width), or a hard random number method in which random numbers are extracted from a counter in a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at a predetermined cycle.

[1-3-3. Game state transition]
As shown in FIG. 8, the game state can be roughly divided into a non-jackpot game state and a jackpot game state. In the non-jackpot game state, the special symbol game is executed as described above, and when a jackpot is derived as a result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the game state transitions from the non-jackpot game state to the jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, the round game is executed as described above, and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. However, the variable display of the normal symbol can be executed even in the jackpot game state. Note that the explanation of the small jackpot game state will be omitted.

Non-jackpot game states can be broadly divided into low-probability states in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively low, and high-probability game states in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively high.

The high probability game state includes a high probability time-saving game state (high probability, high base) in which time-saving control is executed. Note that, although not included in the high probability game state in the first pachinko game machine, a high probability non-time-saving game state (high probability, low base state) in which time-saving control is not executed may also be included in the high probability game state, as shown in FIG. 8.

The low probability state includes a normal game state (low probability, low base) in which time-saving control is not executed, and a time-saving game state (low probability, high base) in which time-saving control is executed.

Furthermore, the time-saving play state includes time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B, and time-saving play state C.

The A time-saving game state is a time-saving game state to which a player can transition after a specific jackpot game state ends, and the A time-saving game state ends when a specified number of special symbol games are played or when a transition to the jackpot game state occurs. When the A time-saving game state ends due to a specified number of special symbol games being played, the game will generally transition to the normal game state.

The B time-saving game state is a time-saving game state to which a player can enter when, for example, a jackpot game state ends and the variable display of special symbols begins in a non-high probability game state (i.e., a game state in which the probability flag is off), or when the number of times the special symbols are variable displayed (e.g., a ceiling counter) reaches a ceiling value (e.g., 1,000 times), starting from when the RAM is cleared (described below). The B time-saving game state ends when a specified number of special symbol games are played or when a transition is made to the jackpot game state. When the B time-saving game state ends as a result of a specified number of special symbol games being played, the game will generally transition to the normal game state.

The time-saving C game state is a time-saving game state that can be entered when the result of the special symbol hit determination process performed in the low probability state is a "time-saving hit" and the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived, and the time-saving C game state ends when a specified number of special symbol games determined by winning the "time-saving hit" are played or when a transition is made to a jackpot game state. When the time-saving C game state ends by playing the specified number of special symbol games, as a general rule, a transition is made to a normal game state. Note that, for example, if multiple time-saving game states overlap, even if the specified number of special symbol games are played, the time-saving C game state continues rather than transitioning to a normal game state.

In this specification, whether or not multiple time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, the time-saving game states are said to "overlap" when the transition conditions to the time-saving game state are satisfied in the time-saving game state, or when the transition conditions to multiple time-saving game states are satisfied simultaneously. When multiple time-saving game states overlap, the main CPU 201 internally operates all of the overlapping time-saving game states, that is, operates the overlapping time-saving game states internally in parallel, which is called "executing in an overlapping manner." However, even if the main CPU 201 internally executes multiple time-saving game states in an overlapping manner, the time-saving control that is actually executed is only the time-saving control that corresponds to one of the time-saving game states. In other words, even when multiple time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, the player understands that the game is controlled to one of the multiple time-saving game states.

Next, we will explain how the game state changes.

Even if the game is controlled in the normal game state, the time-saving game state (time-saving game state A, time-saving game state B, time-saving game state C), or the high-probability game state (for example, the high-probability time-saving game state), if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a jackpot, the game will transition to the jackpot game state.

When the jackpot game state ends, depending on the game specifications, it is possible to transition to any of the following game states: normal game state, time-saving game state, and high-probability game state (e.g. high-probability time-saving game state). However, the time-saving game state to which you can transition when the jackpot game state ends is limited to the A time-saving game state.

When controlled to a high probability game state, there is no transition from the high probability game state to a time-limited game state or a normal game state, except for some pachinko game machines such as so-called ST machines and loop machines. Similarly, there is no transition from the time-limited game state or the normal game state to the high probability game state unless the jackpot game state is passed through.

When controlled to the normal game state, it is possible to transition to the time-saving game state B or time-saving game state C, but it is not possible to transition to the time-saving game state A without passing through the jackpot game state. However, when a specified number of special symbol games are played in the time-saving game state A, the game transitions to the normal game state, so it is possible to transition from the time-saving game state A to the normal game state. Note that, regardless of whether the game is controlled to the time-saving game state B or time-saving game state C, the game transitions to the normal game state when a specified number of special symbol games are played, so it is also possible to transition from the time-saving game state B or time-saving game state C to the normal game state.

Next, we will explain how to transition between time-saving play states.

When controlled in the time-saving game state A, the number of time-saving plays that can be performed in the time-saving game state A is set to a number less than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition for the time-saving game state B, so there is no transition from the time-saving game state A to the time-saving game state B. Also, since the time-saving game state A is controlled via the jackpot game state, there is no transition from the time-saving game state B to the time-saving game state A. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the time-saving game state A is a "time-saving hit," the transition condition for the time-saving game state C is met, so the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state C may overlap. However, as described above, since the time-saving game state A is controlled via the jackpot game state, there is no transition from the time-saving game state C to the time-saving game state A.

When controlled to the B time-saving game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the condition for transitioning to the C time-saving game state is met, and the B time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state may overlap. Also, if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state may overlap.

When controlled to the C time-saving play state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the condition for transitioning to the C time-saving play state is met, and the C time-saving play state and the C time-saving play state may overlap.

More details about overlapping time-saving game modes will be provided later.

[1-4. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 9 to FIG.

The first pachinko game machine is provided with a normal game state in which neither probability variable control nor time-saving control is executed, a high-probability time-saving game state in which both probability variable control and time-saving control are executed, and a low-probability time-saving game state in which probability variable control is not executed but time-saving control is executed, and the main CPU 201 is capable of progressing the game in any of these game states. However, the game states progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 are not limited to these.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, hitting to the left is considered to be the regular game mode, and in the high-probability time-saving game state and the low-probability time-saving game state, hitting to the right is considered to be the regular game mode. The sub-CPU 301 executes control to display the hitting method considered to be the regular game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 7. Note that the "regular game mode" corresponds to the game mode that is the least disadvantageous to the player (the most advantageous to the player) among multiple game modes (for example, firing modes).

[1-4-1. Jackpot Probability for Each Setting Value]
9 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (estimate) for each setting value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in Fig. 9, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176 (see Fig. 6) can be used to set one of a number of settings, for example, settings 1 to 6. In the case of such a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting value, and the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol winning judgment process based on the set setting value.

Specifically, the probability of winning in a game state where the probability variable flag is off and the probability variable control is not executed (for example, in the normal game state and the low probability time-saving game state in this embodiment), regardless of whether the first special symbol hit determination process or the second special symbol hit determination process is executed, is, for example, about 1 in 319 in setting 1, about 1 in 314 in setting 2, about 1 in 309 in setting 3, about 1 in 304 in setting 4, about 1 in 299 in setting 5, and about 1 in 294 in setting 6. In addition, the probability of winning in a game state where the probability variable flag is on and the probability variable control is executed (for example, in the high probability time-saving game state in this embodiment), is about 1 in 77 in setting 1, about 1 in 76 in setting 2, about 1 in 75 in setting 3, about 1 in 74 in setting 4, about 1 in 73 in setting 5, and about 1 in 72 in setting 6.

The probability of a time-saving hit is the same for all settings, unlike the probability of a jackpot. For example, the probability of a time-saving hit when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed is 1 in 160, and the probability of a time-saving hit when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is executed is 1 in 240. The probability of a time-saving hit may be different when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed and when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is executed, or it may be the same.

However, even if the probability of a time-saving hit is the same for all setting values, the time-saving continuation rate (e.g., the number of time-saving times set) may be different depending on the setting value. For example, if the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving times may be set to 50 for setting 1, and 100 for setting 6.

In the first pachinko game machine, small wins are not included in the lottery, but small wins may be included in the lottery. When small wins are included in the lottery, the probability of a small win may be set to a common probability for all setting values. When small wins are included in the lottery, a small win may be won only when a hit determination process for one of the first special pattern and the second special pattern (e.g., the second special pattern) has been performed. In this case, the hit determination process for the other special pattern (e.g., the first special pattern) may not determine whether or not a small win has been won, or may determine whether or not a small win has been won with the small win probability set to 0.

The above-mentioned probability of winning the time-saving feature and the probability of winning the small jackpot when the small jackpot is included in the lottery are the same for all setting values as described above, but are not limited to this and may be different probabilities depending on the setting value.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability is different for each setting value, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the jackpot probability may be the same for multiple setting values, such as a common jackpot probability for setting 1 and setting 2, a common jackpot probability for setting 3 and setting 4, and a common jackpot probability for setting 5 and setting 6.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot differs depending on the setting value, but if the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on the setting value, the target that differs depending on the setting value is not necessarily limited to the probability of winning a jackpot. For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state when a gaming ball enters a specific winning hole, the probability of winning a prize in the specific winning hole may be made to differ depending on the setting value. Note that it is not essential that the pachinko gaming machine be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Special symbol winning judgment table]
10 is an example of a special symbol winning judgment table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 10 is an example of the case of setting 1 shown in FIG.

The special symbol winning judgment table is a table referenced in the winning judgment process for the special symbol, that is, a table referenced when determining by lottery whether a "time-saving win", "jackpot", or "miss" is to be obtained based on the random number value for jackpot judgment extracted when a game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140. In this embodiment, the objects to be selected are "time-saving win", "jackpot", and "miss", and other objects to be selected (e.g., small win) are not included, but other objects to be selected may be determined when a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 and/or the second starting hole 140.

As described above, the random number value for determining a jackpot is a random number value used in the process of determining whether or not a special symbol has won. In this embodiment, the random number value for determining a jackpot is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "miss" based on the extracted jackpot determination random number value in the hit determination process for the first special symbol. The hit determination table for the first special symbol specifies, for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1), the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number value determined as "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number value determined as "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number value determined as "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data.

In this specification, when the value of the probability change flag is "0", the probability change flag is off, and when the value of the probability change flag is "1", the probability change flag is on.

In addition, in the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines whether the result is a "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "miss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination, just as in the hit determination process for the first special symbol. In the hit determination table for the second special symbol, for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1), the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data are specified.

In this embodiment, for example, if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and determines the hit/loss determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines the hit/loss determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." Also, if the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

For example, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." If the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." If the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

Similarly, for example, if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 273 to 477, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." Furthermore, if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 478 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

For example, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." If the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 273 to 1123, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." If the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 1124 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

In this embodiment, for example, of the random numbers for determining a jackpot that are generated in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined range from 0 (for example, 0 to 408 for the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to other determination value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data) excluding the jackpot determination value data and the miss determination value data. Also, the end of the predetermined range (for example, 614 to 65535 if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to the miss determination value data. Furthermore, the jackpot determination value data and the miss determination value data are assigned adjacent to each other. By doing this, for example, when the probability variable flag goes from off to on (or on to off), it is possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the range of other determination value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data) by simply narrowing (or widening) the width of the miss determination value data by the amount that the width of the jackpot determination value data is widened (or narrowed).

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special pattern is performed is different from the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special pattern is performed, thereby adding variety to the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 10, by making the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed higher than the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the normal game state, which tends to become monotonous.

However, the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed may be made higher than the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed. In this case, for example, by overlapping the time-saving play state when a "time-saving hit" is won during the time-saving play state, if the "time-saving hit" is won just before the end of the time-saving play state, the time-saving play state is effectively extended, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

As shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, a "time-shortened win" can be won whether the special chance flag is on or off. However, when the special chance flag is off (normal game state, time-shortened game state), the main CPU 201 controls the game to the time-shortened game state if the result of the win determination process is a "time-shortened win", but when the special chance flag is on, the main CPU 201 does not control the game to the time-shortened game state even if the result of the win determination process is a "time-shortened win".

[1-4-3. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 11 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "select symbol command" and a "symbol designation command" that determine the stopping symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140 and the aforementioned determination value data. The "select symbol command" is a command for designating the winning symbol determined according to the type of jackpot when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating the symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 70 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 0 and 9, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 10 and 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 60 and 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning determination process for the first special symbol, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z6" as the selected symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any value from 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z8" as the selected symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z9" as the selected symbol command and "zA8" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 60 and 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z10" as the selected symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning determination process for the second special symbol, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z11" as the selected symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

In this embodiment, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10) is referenced to determine the hit/lose determination value data based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination, and then the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11) is referenced to determine the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but this is not limited to this. For example, the hit/lose of the special symbol, the selected symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination and the symbol random number value of the special symbol.

[1-4-4. Special symbol stop mode determination table]
12A is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol to be output to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 5) when the variable display of the special symbol stops, in response to the selected symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 12(A), the stopping mode of the special symbol output to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 5) is composed of a 1-byte control signal composed of areas 0 to 7, for example. Each of the areas 0 to 7 of the first special symbol corresponds one-to-one to one of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h (see FIG. 5) that compose the first special symbol display unit 163. For example, area 0 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163a, area 1 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163b, area 2 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163c, area 3 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163d, area 4 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163e, area 5 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163f, area 6 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163g, and area 7 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163h.

Similarly, each of the areas 0 to 7 of the second special symbol corresponds one-to-one to one of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h (see FIG. 5) that make up the second special symbol display unit 164. For example, area 0 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164a, area 1 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164b, area 2 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164c, area 3 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164d, area 4 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164e, area 5 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164f, area 6 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164g, and area 7 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164h.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the display mode (time-saving hit display mode) of the LEDs output to the special symbol display units 163, 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0," the main CPU 201 determines to stop displaying the first special symbol display unit 163 by turning on LED 163a corresponding to area 0 of the first special symbol and LED 163h corresponding to area 7 of the first special symbol, out of the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 determines to display the first special symbol display unit 163 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol, the LED 163b corresponding to the area 1 of the first special symbol, and the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol, among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 determines to display the first special symbol display unit 163 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol, the LED 163c corresponding to the area 2 of the first special symbol, and the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol, among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and turning off the other LEDs. Also, when the selected symbol command is "z7", the main CPU 201 determines to display the second special symbol display unit 164 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 164a corresponding to the second special symbol area 0, the LED 164b corresponding to the second special symbol area 1, and the LED 164h corresponding to the second special symbol area 7 of the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z8", the main CPU 201 determines to display the second special symbol display unit 164 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 164a corresponding to the second special symbol area 0, the LED 164c corresponding to the second special symbol area 2, and the LED 164h corresponding to the second special symbol area 7 of the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, and turning off the other LEDs.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot," the display mode (jackpot display mode) of the LEDs output to the special symbol display units 163, 164 is determined as follows. For example, if the selected symbol command is "z3," the main CPU 201 determines that the first special symbol display unit 163 should be displayed in a stopped state such that, of the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, LED 163d corresponding to area 3 of the first special symbol, LED 163e corresponding to area 4 of the first special symbol, and LED 163g corresponding to area 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 determines to display the first special symbol display unit 163 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 163d corresponding to the first special symbol area 3, the LED 163f corresponding to the first special symbol area 5, and the LED 163g corresponding to the first special symbol area 6, among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 determines to display the first special symbol display unit 163 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 163d corresponding to the first special symbol area 3, the LED 163e corresponding to the first special symbol area 4, the LED 163f corresponding to the first special symbol area 5, and the LED 163g corresponding to the first special symbol area 6, among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z9", the main CPU 201 determines to display the second special symbol display unit 164 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3, the LED 164e corresponding to the second special symbol area 4, and the LED 164g corresponding to the second special symbol area 6, among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 determines to display the second special symbol display unit 164 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 and the LED 164f corresponding to the second special symbol area 5, among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, and turning off the other LEDs.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "miss," the display mode of the LEDs (miss display mode) output to the special symbol display units 163, 164 is determined as follows. For example, if the selected symbol command is "z6," the main CPU 201 determines to display the first special symbol display unit 163 in a stopped state with only LED 163h corresponding to area 7 of the first special symbol out of the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163 lit and the other LEDs turned off. If the selected symbol command is "z11," the main CPU 201 determines to display the second special symbol display unit 164 in a stopped state with only LED 164h corresponding to area 7 of the second special symbol out of the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164 lit and the other LEDs turned off.

When the main CPU 201 determines the stopping mode of the special pattern based on the result of the special pattern winning judgment process, it outputs a control signal corresponding to the determined mode to each LED constituting the first special pattern display unit 163 or the second special pattern display unit 164, and controls the stopping mode of the special pattern output to the first special pattern display unit 163 or the second special pattern display unit 164.

In FIG. 12(A), for convenience, the display mode of the LEDs led to the first special symbol display unit 163 and the display mode of the LEDs led to the second special symbol display unit 164 are shown in the same table. However, it is preferable that the control signals are transmitted separately for the first special symbol display unit 163 and the second special symbol display unit 164.

Figure 12 (B) is an example of a decorative symbol stop mode determination table stored in the program ROM of the sub-control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine. The decorative symbol stop mode determination table is referenced when determining the stop mode (symbol combination) of the decorative symbols derived when the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the display device 7 stops in response to a symbol designation command. Note that the "Notes" column shown in Figure 12 (B) is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed, so the sub-CPU 1301 controls the display device 7 to perform a display effect for the variably displayed special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, it is preferable for the sub-CPU 301 to perform the display effect in a manner that allows the player to know whether the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, the decorative symbols displayed on the display device 7 are, for example, nine symbols 1 to 9 on the left, ten symbols 1 to 9 and a time-saving symbol on the middle, and nine symbols 1 to 9 on the right. The time-saving symbol is a symbol that is displayed as a stop when the game state transitions to a time-saving game state, for example, when the result of a special symbol lottery is a time-saving hit. By displaying the middle symbol as a time-saving symbol, the player can know that he or she has won the time-saving hit. In this embodiment, odd symbols are defined as symbols that are more advantageous to the player than even symbols, but this is not limited to this.

In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special pattern lottery does not include a small win, but if the result of the special pattern lottery includes a small win, for example, the patterns that make up the middle pattern may include a small win pattern (a pattern that stops and is displayed when the result of the special pattern lottery is a small win). In this case, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a small win, the sub-CPU 301 stops and displays the middle pattern as a small win pattern, so that the player can know that he or she has won a small win.

As shown in FIG. 12(B), when the symbol designation command is "zA1" or "zA6" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time-saving hit"), the sub-CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols, for example, by stopping the left and right symbols as even-numbered symbols and stopping the center symbol as a time-saving symbol.

When the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time-saving hit"), the sub-CPU 301 stops the left and right symbols as odd symbols and stops the center symbol as a time-saving symbol as the stopping mode of the decorative symbols, for example. Note that when the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"), as can be seen by referring to FIG. 13 described below, the number of time-saving times set is greater than when the symbol designation command is "zA1" or "zA6" (when the selected symbol command is "z0", "z1", or "z7"), and the degree of advantage for the player is high.

If the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8" (if the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot"), the sub-CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols, for example, by stopping the left symbol, right symbol, and center symbol in a matching odd-numbered pattern (double number).

When the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot"), the sub-CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols, for example, by stopping the left symbol, right symbol, and center symbol in a matching even number pattern (double number). As can be seen by referring to FIG. 13 described below, the symbol designation command "zA4" may cause the probability variable flag to be set on after the jackpot game state ends (when the selected symbol command is "z4") or the probability variable flag to not be set on (when the selected symbol command is "z5"). Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the selected symbol command is "z4" or "z5," the sub-CPU 301 controls the decorative symbols to stop on a matching even-numbered symbol (a triplet), and in the jackpot game state, performs an upgrade effect to indicate a jackpot win (a jackpot win where the jackpot flag is set to ON).

Also, as can be seen by referring to FIG. 13 described below, when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9", the expected value of the probability ...

When the symbol designation command is "zA5" or "zA10" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "miss"), the sub-CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols in a scattered pattern. A scattered pattern corresponds to, for example, a stopping mode in which at least one of the left, right, and center symbols is different from the other symbols.

Figure 12 (B) shows an example of the stopping mode of the decorative pattern according to the pattern designation command (for example, when the pattern designation command is "zA1", the left pattern is "2", the middle pattern is "time saving", and the right pattern is "4"), but the stopping modes shown in the decorative pattern stopping mode column in Figure 12 (B) are merely examples and are not limited to these.

[1-4-5. Winning Type Determination Table]
13 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first pachinko game machine. The winning type determination table is referred to when determining the mode of the big win game state (more specifically, for example, the number of rounds) or/and the mode of the subsequent game state according to the selection symbol command determined in response to the symbol random number value of the special symbol. The mode of the subsequent game state indicates the mode of the game state after the big win game state ends. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time-saving hit, the game state is controlled to the C time-saving game state without being controlled to the big win game state, so the mode of the subsequent game state indicates the mode of the C time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the mode of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0," the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 10. When the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7," the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 50. When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8," the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 100. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 derives the display mode of the above-mentioned time-saving hit to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, and then sets the time-saving flag on and the determined number of time-saving times without controlling to the jackpot game state, and can control to the C time-saving game state. Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the game is not controlled to the jackpot game state, so the mode of the jackpot game state is not determined. Note that in this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the number of time-saving times set is the same regardless of the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of time-saving times set may be different depending on the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving turns that is set varies depending on the selected symbol command that is determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol. By doing this, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," it is possible to provide variety to the progress of the game thereafter, and to prevent a decline in interest.

As described above, when the probability variable flag is on, the main CPU 201 does not control to the time-saving game state even if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving hit." For example, even if the probability variable flag is on (high probability game state), the main CPU 201 may draw a "time-saving hit" as shown in FIG. 10, and when the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the main CPU 201 may derive a time-saving hit display mode indicating that a "time-saving hit" has been won on the special pattern display units 163, 164, but may continue the high probability game state without controlling to the C time-saving game state.

The main CPU 201 may also draw a "time-saving hit" when the probability-changing flag is on, and forcibly derive a losing display mode to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 even if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving hit."

Furthermore, when the probability variable flag is on, the time-saving hit determination value data is not assigned to the random number value for jackpot determination, i.e., the hit determination process may be performed in which the "time-saving hit" is not included in the lottery result (the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern). In this case, when the probability variable flag is off, the time-saving hit determination value data is assigned to the random number value for jackpot determination, and when the probability variable flag is on, the time-saving hit determination value data is not assigned. Therefore, the range of random numbers that was assigned to the time-saving hit determination value data when the probability variable flag is off is assigned to the miss determination value data, the jackpot determination value data, or both the miss determination value data and the jackpot determination value data, instead of the time-saving hit determination value data.

In this embodiment, when the probability variable flag is on, the game is configured not to transition to the C time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, in a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is off even if the probability variable flag is on, the game may be configured to transition to a high-probability time-saving game state if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving hit."

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot," the winning game state and the subsequent game state are determined as follows:

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" or "z9", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state to be 10 rounds. In addition, as the mode of the subsequent game state, it determines to set both the high probability flag and the time-saving flag on, and determines to set both the number of high probability rounds and the number of time-saving rounds to 10,000. In these cases, the main CPU 201 controls the game state to a jackpot game state after deriving the display mode of the jackpot described above to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control the game state to a high probability time-saving game state.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state to be 4 rounds. In addition, as the mode of the subsequent game state, it determines to set both the high probability flag and the time-saving flag on, and determines to set both the number of high probability rounds and the number of time-saving rounds to 10,000. In this case, the main CPU 201 controls the game state to a jackpot game state after deriving the display mode of the jackpot described above to the first special symbol display unit 163, and after the end of this jackpot game state, it becomes possible to control the game state to a high probability time-saving game state.

Furthermore, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state to be 4 rounds. Furthermore, as the mode of the subsequent game state, it determines that only the time-saving flag out of the probability change flag and the time-saving flag is set to on. It also determines that the number of time-saving times to be set is set to, for example, 200 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 controls the jackpot game state after deriving the display mode of the jackpot described above to the first special symbol display unit 163, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control to the time-saving game state. The time-saving game state controlled here is the A time-saving game state.

Furthermore, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state to be 10 rounds. Furthermore, as the mode of the subsequent game state, it determines that only the time-saving flag out of the probability change flag and the time-saving flag is set to on. It also determines that the number of time-saving times to be set is set to, for example, 300 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 controls the jackpot game state after deriving the display mode of the jackpot described above to the second special symbol display unit 164, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control it to the time-saving game state. The time-saving game state controlled here is also the A time-saving game state.

It is preferable that the time-saving performance in the high-probability time-saving game state is the same as the time-saving performance in the A time-saving game state, but it may be different from the time-saving performance in the A time-saving game state.

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z6" or "z11"), the main CPU 201 does not set either the state of the big win game state or the state of the game state thereafter. In other words, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the main CPU 201 does not change the game state, but continues to control the game state up to that point.

Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z6" or "z11"), neither the state of the jackpot game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is set as described above, so there is no need to illustrate this in the hit type determination table of FIG. 13. However, in this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, it is illustrated in FIG. 13 to clearly show that neither the state of the jackpot game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss".

Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table of Figure 10, determines the hit/lose determination value data based on the jackpot determination random number value extracted when the gaming ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 140 (performs a hit/lose determination), and determines the hit/lose ("time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "miss"). After that, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol determination table of Figure 11, determines the selected symbol command based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the gaming ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 140 and the hit/lose determination value data, and determines the type of display mode (type of time-saving hit or type of jackpot) to be derived to the special symbol display units 163, 164. Note that the above winning/losing judgment and selection of the symbol command are performed when the variable display of the special symbol begins, but this is not intended to exclude the possibility of performing this between the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the final display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state that is controlled after the end of the big win game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5") or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z10"). In contrast, the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state that is controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7"), or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"). In other words, the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state is higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state. In this way, the positioning of a "big win" can be increased by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the C time-saving game state.

In addition, instead of making the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state, for example, as shown in FIG. 14, the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state may be made higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state. FIG. 14 is a modified example of the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 13. In this FIG. 14, the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5" or "z10"). In contrast, the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7"), or 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"). In this way, by making the C time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the A time-saving game state, the positioning of the "time-saving win" can be increased. For example, even if a long period of time passes without a "jackpot" being won, if a "time-saving hit" is won, the player will be put into the relatively advantageous C time-saving game state, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

In this specification, as with the special bonus flag, when the value of the time-saving flag is "0", the time-saving flag is off, and when the value of the time-saving flag is "1", the time-saving flag is on.

The time-saving flag, like the probability change flag, is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute time-saving control.

The number of time-saving times is the number of times that the special symbols can be displayed variably while the time-saving control is being continued. That is, for example, if the number of time-saving times is determined to be "50," and 50 times of variable display of special symbols are performed without winning a jackpot in this time-saving game state, this time-saving game state ends and transitions to a non-time-saving game state (for example, a normal game state).

The "10,000" number of times the special mode and the time-saving mode are shown in FIG. 13 and other figures indicates that the special mode control can be continued after the end of the special mode game state until a special mode is determined to have occurred (i.e., the next special mode).

[1-4-6. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 15 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the first pachinko game machine. The "Notes" column in FIG. 15 is shown for convenience in order to make it easier to understand. The time-saving hit-type reaches A, B, and C shown in the "Notes" column in FIG. 15 are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is likely to be a time-saving hit (no possibility of a jackpot). Similarly, the jackpot-type reaches A, B, and C are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, the common reaches A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is likely to be both a time-saving hit and a jackpot. Note that FIG. 15 is a variation pattern table of a special symbol when the probability variable flag is off, and the illustration of the variation pattern table of a special symbol when the probability variable flag is on is omitted.

The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when it is based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 140. The special symbol variation pattern table in FIG. 15 is a table that is referenced when executing the special symbol variation pattern determination process of S96 in FIG. 28 described below.

As shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win/lose), the value of the time-saving flag (0 or 1), the random number value for reach determination, and/or the random number value for performance selection, but is not limited to this and may be determined based on other values instead of or in addition to any of the above.

The random number value for reach determination is selected from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for effect selection is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 sets a look-ahead flag if the random number value for effect selection extracted based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 120 is a specific random number value. The sub-CPU 301, which receives the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the main CPU 201, performs a look-ahead effect if the look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 sets the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is off, and does not set the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is on or the probability-change flag is on.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 decides whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance, but this is not limited to this, and the sub-CPU 301 may decide.

The main CPU 201 may also set the look-ahead flag (to perform a look-ahead performance) when the time-saving flag or the probability-change flag is on. The main CPU 201 may also set the look-ahead flag (to perform a look-ahead performance) when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol.

When the time-saving flag is on, the expected number of changes per unit time for the special symbol fluctuation pattern determined is smaller than when the time-saving flag is off. In other words, the time it takes for the special symbol to fluctuate when the time-saving flag is on is likely to be shorter than the time it takes for the special symbol to fluctuate when the time-saving flag is off.

The determined variation pattern information is sent from the main CPU 201 to the command input port 308 of the sub-CPU 301 via the command output port 206. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern information sent from the main CPU 201.

Although not shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbol that is determined may be different for each setting value, for example by changing the range of the random number value for effect selection.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, when the result of the hit determination process is a miss, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined depending on whether the time-saving flag is on or not, regardless of the type of time-saving, but this is not limited to this. For example, the expected value of the number of times the special symbol is variably displayed per unit time may be made different depending on the type of time-saving. For example, the expected value of the number of times the special symbol is variably displayed per unit time may be made different between time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B, and time-saving play state C.

[1-4-7. Time-saving game state]
As described above, in this embodiment, the time-saving gaming states are the time-saving gaming state A, the time-saving gaming state B, and the time-saving gaming state C. These time-saving gaming states will be described below.

The A time-saving game state is a time-saving game state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the selected symbol command is, for example, "z5" or "z10". That is, in this embodiment, the condition for transitioning to the A time-saving game state is winning a jackpot (a jackpot with a selected symbol command of "z5" or "z10"). However, even if the condition for transitioning to the A time-saving game state is met, transition to the A time-saving game state is not necessarily made; if a condition that prevents transition to the A time-saving game state is met (for example, if the backup is cleared), transition to the A time-saving game state is not made.

The condition for ending the A time-saving game state is when either of the following conditions is met: the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and a jackpot game state based on the "jackpot" is initiated, or the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) for the number of time-saving times determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as the "A time-saving specified number of times") is executed (see the "Number of time-saving times" column in Figure 13).

The B time-saving game state is a time-saving game state that is controlled when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value by updating (adding 1) the ceiling counter, starting from, for example, when the jackpot game state ends and the variable display of the special symbol in the non-high probability game state (for example, the normal game state and the low probability time-saving game state in this embodiment) starts. That is, the condition for transitioning to the B time-saving game state is that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. The transition to the B time-saving game state may be when the variable display of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value (hereinafter referred to as the "ceiling final fluctuation") starts, when the ceiling final fluctuation ends, or when the variable display of the special symbol next to the ceiling final fluctuation starts. That is, the timing of transition to the B time-saving game state may be any time between the start of the ceiling final fluctuation and the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. In addition, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is "miss", the display mode of miss is derived on the special symbol display section 163, 164, but the game will transition to the B time-saving game state. In this case, the sub-CPU 301 may control the display device 7 to display a display effect (for example, a decorative symbol is stopped with a special symbol, a special effect by a character is performed, or both of these are performed) that indicates to the player that the transition condition to the B time-saving game state has been established (for example, in this embodiment, the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value). Note that even if the transition condition to the B time-saving game state is established, the game will not necessarily transition to the B time-saving game state, but if a condition that prevents the transition to the B time-saving game state is established (for example, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is a jackpot, etc.), the game will not transition to the B time-saving game state.

The ceiling counter is not updated when the probability variable flag is on, and when the probability variable flag is off, it is always counted regardless of whether the time-saving flag is on or off. When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it is controlled to the B time-saving game state unless the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a "big hit". In a pachinko game machine in which the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol includes a small hit, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "small hit", the B time-saving game state may be started when the display mode of the small hit is derived to the special symbol display unit 163, 164, or the B time-saving game state may be started after the small hit game state ends. In other words, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "small hit", only the display mode of the small hit is displayed on the special symbol display unit 163, 164, and no display effect is displayed to indicate to the player that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value as described above. In addition, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the ceiling value may be different depending on the setting value. Also, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "jackpot," the machine is controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the B time-saving game state.

The ceiling counter is reset when a specific condition is met, such as when the power is turned on, when the machine is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, when the working area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clearing), when a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, the setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, or when the high probability of winning a normal symbol ends in a gaming machine in which the probability of winning a normal symbol can be changed. When updating of the ceiling counter is permitted, the ceiling counter is updated each time a variable display of a special symbol is executed. For example, when the probability flag is on, updating of the ceiling counter is not permitted.

After clearing the ceiling counter, the main CPU 201 starts counting the ceiling counter from the next variable display of the special symbol. The ceiling value may be set by the main CPU 201 each time the ceiling counter is cleared, or may be predetermined as a value specific to the pachinko game machine rather than being set each time.

When the ceiling counter is cleared due to control to the jackpot gaming state, if the probability variable flag is not on after the jackpot gaming state ends, the main CPU 201 updates (+1) the ceiling counter at the start or end of the first variable display of the special pattern. Also, if the probability variable flag is on after the jackpot gaming state ends, the ceiling counter is not updated even if the variable display of the special pattern is performed, but for example, in the case of an ST machine or a specification that performs a probability variable drop lottery, the ceiling counter is updated at the start or end of the first variable display of the special pattern after the probability variable flag is turned off. Note that in the case of a specification that performs a probability variable drop lottery, the probability variable flag is changed from on to off at the start of the variable display of the special pattern, so when updating the ceiling counter at the end of the variable display of the special pattern, if the probability variable flag is off at the end of the variable display of the special pattern, the ceiling counter may be updated.

In the case of a pachinko game machine in which the main CPU 201 performs a lottery for a drop to a high probability game, it is preferable that the sub-CPU 301, upon receiving a command sent from the main CPU 201, does not perform any effects suggesting that the lottery for a drop to a high probability game has been won or any effects suggesting a transition from a high probability game state to a low probability game state. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the start point of the count by the ceiling counter, i.e., the timing of the transition to the B time-saving game state, based on the display effects displayed on the display device 7, making it possible to provide an interesting game. If it is difficult to grasp the timing of the transition to the B time-saving game state, for example, a countdown effect suggesting the timing of the transition to the B time-saving game state or a false countdown effect can be displayed on the display device 7 under the control of the sub-CPU 301, thereby making it possible to further increase interest.

In addition, when a clearing process (backup clearing process) is performed on the working area (volatile area) in RAM 203, the main CPU 201 updates (increments by 1) the ceiling counter at the start or end of the first variable display of the special pattern after the clearing process of the working area in RAM 203.

Furthermore, if a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, the setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, the main CPU 201 updates (+1) the ceiling counter at the start or end of the first variable display of the special pattern after the other switch is operated.

The end condition of the B time-saving game state is when either of the following conditions is met: the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a "jackpot" and a jackpot game state based on the "jackpot" is started, or the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as the "prescribed number of B time-saving times"). One of the end conditions of the B time-saving game state, "the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times for B time-saving", may be when the variable display of the special symbol for the prescribed number of B time-saving times (hereinafter referred to as the "final variation of B time-saving") is started, or when the final variation of B time-saving is completed. In other words, the end timing of the B time-saving game state may be any time between the start of the final variation of B time-saving and the end of the variable display of the special symbols related to this final variation of B time-saving.

The C time-saving game state is a time-saving game state that is controlled when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a "time-saving hit". In other words, the condition for transitioning to the C time-saving game state is that a time-saving hit (the selected symbol command is a time-saving hit of "z0" to "z2", "z7" or "z8") is won, and the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived (determined display) on the special symbol display unit 163, 164. Note that even if the transition condition to the C time-saving game state is met, the game does not necessarily transition to the C time-saving game state. If a condition that prevents the transition to the C time-saving game state is met (for example, when the specifications are such that the B time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state are not executed at the same time (details will be described later), and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the B time-saving game state is a "time-saving hit"), the game will not transition to the C time-saving game state. In addition, if a condition for transitioning to the C time-saving game state is met but a condition for preventing transition to the C time-saving game state is met, the main CPU 201 executes control to derive the display mode for the time-saving win to the special symbol display units 163, 164, even though it does not transition to the C time-saving game state.

The end condition of the C time-saving game state is when either of the following conditions is met: the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a "jackpot" and a jackpot game state based on the "jackpot" is started; or the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) for the number of time-saving times determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as the "prescribed number of C time-saving times") is executed (see the "number of time-saving times" column in FIG. 13). The prescribed number of C time-saving times, which is one of the end conditions of the C time-saving game state, may be when the variable display of the special symbol for the number of time-saving times determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as the "final C time-saving change") starts, or when the final C time-saving change ends. In other words, the end timing of the C time-saving game state may be any time between the start of the final C time-saving change and the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to this final C time-saving change.

The time-saving performance may be different between the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, and the C time-saving play state. Also, the time-saving performance of two of the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, and the C time-saving play state may be the same, and the time-saving performance of these two time-saving play states may be different from the time-saving performance of the other one of the time-saving play states. Furthermore, the time-saving performance of the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, and the C time-saving play state may be the same.

In addition, the end conditions for the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C may include, in addition to the above, for example, the number of times the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner has reached a specified number of times, the normal electric device 146 has been opened a specified number of times, a specific opening mode has been selected as the opening mode of the normal electric device 146, etc. In addition, in a pachinko game machine in which the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol includes a small hit, the above end conditions may include the number of small hits having reached a specified number of times. Furthermore, the above end conditions may include holding a time-saving drop lottery and winning the time-saving drop lottery.

[1-4-8. Normal symbol winning judgment table]
FIG. 16 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table referenced in the normal symbol hit determination process, i.e., when determining whether a normal symbol hits or misses by lottery based on the game state and the normal symbol hit determination random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see Figure 4) (i.e., when executing the normal symbol game determination process of S295 in Figure 43 described below).

As described above, the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol is a random number value used in the winning determination process for the normal symbol. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 selects the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines whether the normal symbol is a hit or a miss based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value. The normal symbol hit determination table specifies, for each type of time reduction, the relationship between the range (width) of the normal symbol hit determination random number value determined as a "normal symbol hit" and the corresponding normal symbol hit determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the normal symbol hit determination random number value determined as a "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data.

In this embodiment, in a non-time-saving game state (for example, a normal game state), if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 79, the main CPU 201 determines that the win/loss determination value is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data." Also, in a non-time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 80 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the win is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 98, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data."In addition, in the A time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 79, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data."In addition, in the B time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 80 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 79, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data."In addition, in the C time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 80 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In this way, in this embodiment, the probability of winning on a normal symbol in the time-saving game state A (selection rate (estimate) shown in Figure 16) is the highest among the non-time-saving game state, the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C.

In addition, the winning probability of a normal symbol in the B time-saving game state (selection rate (estimate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability of a normal symbol in the non-time-saving game state. Similarly, the winning probability of a normal symbol in the C time-saving game state (selection rate (estimate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability of a normal symbol in the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, even if the game state shifts between the non-time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, the winning probability of a normal symbol will not change.

The winning probability for a normal symbol may be the same in the non-time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. In this case, the winning probability for a normal symbol does not change, and the ratio of the types of normal symbols described below only needs to be changed for each state, simplifying the control process.

[1-4-9. Normal symbol determination table]
FIG. 17 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "normal symbol winning symbol selection command" that determines the normal symbol stopping symbol based on the type of time reduction, the aforementioned winning/losing determination value data, and the normal symbol random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see FIG. 4). The "normal symbol winning symbol selection command" is a command for specifying the winning normal symbol determined according to the normal symbol winning type when the result of the normal symbol winning determination process is a normal symbol winning symbol. The normal symbol random number value is extracted, for example, from 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 17, when normal symbol winning determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol winning determination process, for example, the selected symbol command when a normal symbol wins is selected as follows:

For example, in a non-time-saving game state, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "fz0" as the normal symbol hit selection pattern command, regardless of whether the normal symbol random number value is 0 to 99.

In addition, in the A time-saving play state, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "fz1" as the symbol command to be selected when a normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 0 and 29, selects "fz2" as the symbol command to be selected when a normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 30 and 69, and selects "fz3" as the symbol command to be selected when a normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 70 and 99.

In addition, in the B time-saving play state, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "fz4" as the symbol command to be selected when a normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 0 and 29, selects "fz5" as the symbol command to be selected when a normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 30 and 69, and selects "fz6" as the symbol command to be selected when a normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 70 and 99.

In addition, in the C time-saving play state, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "fz7" as the symbol command to be selected when a normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 0 and 29, selects "fz8" as the symbol command to be selected when a normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 30 and 69, and selects "fz9" as the symbol command to be selected when a normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 70 and 99.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern (see FIG. 16) to determine the winning/losing judgment value data based on the extracted random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern, and then refers to the normal pattern judgment table (see FIG. 17) to determine the pattern command selected when the normal pattern is a winning pattern based on the pattern random number value of the normal pattern, but is not limited to this. For example, the winning/losing of the normal pattern and the pattern command selected when the normal pattern is a winning pattern may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern and the pattern random number value of the normal pattern.

[1-4-10. Normal pattern type determination table]
18 is an example of a normal symbol winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first pachinko game machine. The normal symbol winning type determination table is referenced when determining the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric role 146 (see FIG. 4), in response to the normal symbol winning time selection symbol command determined in response to the normal symbol random number value (i.e., when executing the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric role 146 executed in the variable display start process of the normal symbol in S293 in FIG. 43 described later).

In this embodiment, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, if the symbol command selected when a normal symbol hits is "fz0", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric device 146 (see FIG. 4), to be a first opening time of 1000 msec, no wait time, and no second opening. In other words, the opening pattern is determined to be one in which the normal electric device 146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

In addition, when the selection pattern command for a normal symbol hit is "fz1", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 2000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a second opening time of 2000 msec.

In addition, when the selection pattern command for a normal symbol hit is "fz2", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 2500 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a second opening time of 2500 msec.

In addition, when the selection pattern command when a normal pattern is hit is "fz3", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric role device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 3000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a second opening time of 3000 msec.

In addition, when the selected symbol command when a normal symbol is hit is "fz4" or "fz7", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric role device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 2500 msec, no wait time, and no second opening.

In addition, when the selected pattern command when a normal pattern is hit is "fz5" or "fz8", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric role device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 2000 msec, a wait time of 600 msec, and a second opening time of 2000 msec.

In addition, when the selected pattern command when a normal pattern is hit is "fz6" or "fz9", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric role device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 2500 msec, a wait time of 600 msec, and a second opening time of 2500 msec.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the non-time-saving play state is "normal symbol hit," the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (see FIG. 4) will be the most unfavorable mode among the opening patterns of the normal electric device 146 in the non-time-saving play state, the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, and the C time-saving play state.

The degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 is the degree of ease with which the game ball will enter the second starting hole 140 when the normal electric device 146 is opened.

When the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the A time-saving play state is "normal symbol hit," the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (see FIG. 4) will be the most advantageous pattern among the opening patterns of the normal electric device 146 in the non-time-saving play state, the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, and the C time-saving play state.

In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (see FIG. 4) when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the B time-saving play state is a "normal symbol hit" has the same degree of advantage as the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the C time-saving play state is a "normal symbol hit", but is not limited to this.

[1-4-11. Normal pattern variation table]
FIG. 19 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko game machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table is referred to when determining the normal symbol variation pattern (i.e., when executing the normal symbol variation pattern determination process executed in the normal symbol variable display start process of S293 in FIG. 43 described later). The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and determines the normal symbol variation pattern based on the game state and the normal symbol effect selection random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see FIG. 4). The normal symbol effect selection random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the non-time-saving game state, regardless of whether the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 0 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 300,000 msec. The variable display time of the normal symbol in the non-time-saving game state is the longest among the non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state A, time-saving game state B, and time-saving game state C.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any value between 0 and 89, the variable display time for the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any value between 90 and 99, the variable display time for the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 800 msec.

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 0 to 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 40 to 79, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 0 to 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 40 to 79, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec.

In this way, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal pattern per variable display is the shortest among the variable display times of the normal pattern in the non-time-saving game state, the A-time-saving game state, the B-time-saving game state, and the C-time-saving game state. Therefore, the A-time-saving game state has the shortest time until the normal electric device 146 is opened among the non-time-saving game state, the A-time-saving game state, the B-time-saving game state, and the C-time-saving game state.

In addition, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the B time-saving play state is the same as the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the C time-saving play state, but is not limited to this.

[1-5. Details of processing related to time-saving gaming state]
[1-5-1. Number of time-saving times set when time-saving hits]
In the above description, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving times to be set is the same regardless of the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of time-saving times to be set when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" may be determined according to the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

Even in a high probability game state where the probability flag is set to ON, the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include "time-saving hit". In this case, the main CPU derives the display mode of the time-saving hit on the special symbol display section, but does not execute control to transition to the time-saving game state, and continues to control the high probability game state. However, there are known gaming machines, such as pachinko gaming machines called ST machines, that change the probability flag from ON to OFF when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a prescribed number of times. In such ST machines, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process performed in the final game in the high probability game state is "time-saving hit", if the process of deriving the display mode of the time-saving hit is later than the process of turning off the probability flag, the main CPU may control to the C time-saving game state after deriving the display mode of the time-saving hit.

[1-5-2. Overlapping of time-saving game states]
When a plurality of time-saving game states are provided, the time-saving game states may overlap. For example, in the A time-saving game state, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time-saving hit", the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state will overlap. Also, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state will overlap. When the time-saving game states overlap in this way, the time-saving game states may be executed in an overlapping manner, or the time-saving game states may not be overlapped (i.e., the "time-saving hit" may be ignored). In order to prevent the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state from overlapping, the A time-saving prescribed number of times, which is the end condition of the A time-saving game state, is specified to be smaller than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time-saving game state.

Below is an explanation of how the time-saving game states overlap when they are executed in a overlapping manner, and how they do not overlap.

[1-5-2-1. Mode of overlapping execution of time-saving gaming state]
Possible modes of overlapping the time-shortened game states when the time-shortened game states overlap include a mode in which the time-shortened game state C is overlapped and executed when a time-shortened prize is won in any one of the time-shortened game states A, B, and C, and a mode in which the time-shortened game state B is overlapped and executed when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the time-shortened game state C.

[1-5-2-1-1. Mode of executing C time-saving gaming state on one time-saving gaming state]
When a "time-saving win" is won in any one of the time-saving game states A, B, and C, the main CPU 201 derives a display mode of the time-saving win on the special symbol display units 163 and 164. In this case, the main CPU 201 adopts, as the number of times of time-saving, the state which has the greater number of variable displays of the special symbols that can be executed until the end condition of the time-saving game state is established while maintaining the time-saving performance of the one time-saving game state.

For example, if a "time-saving hit" is won in the A time-saving game state, and the remaining number of time-saving plays in the A time-saving game state is greater than the number of time-saving plays that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 controls the game state to the time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving plays in the A time-saving game state is consumed, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. To explain using specific numbers, for example, if a "time-saving hit" is won when the remaining number of time-saving plays in the A time-saving game state is 200, and the number of time-saving plays that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit" is 50, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived on the special pattern display units 163 and 164, but the number of time-saving plays from this point on is 200, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. Therefore, even if a "time-saving hit" is won in one of the time-saving game states A, B, or C, the appearance of the number of time-saving hits and time-saving performance will be the same as if the time-saving game state A had not been won and the game continued.

On the other hand, for example, if a "time-saving hit" is won in the A time-saving game state, and the number of time-saving times that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit" is greater than the number of time-saving times remaining in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, and controls the game state to the time-saving game state until the number of time-saving times set based on the "time-saving hit" is consumed, unless a "jackpot" is derived. To explain this using specific numbers, for example, if a "time-saving hit" is won when the number of time-saving times remaining in the A time-saving game state is 20, and the number of time-saving times that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit" is 50, the number of time-saving times from this point on will be 50, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. In other words, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed 20 times, which is the remaining number of times of time-saving in the A time-saving play state, the variable display of the special symbol is further executed 30 times, which is the difference between the two, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving play state.

[1-5-2-1-2. Mode in which the time-saving gaming state B is superimposed on the time-saving gaming state C]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value during the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 executes control according to the display mode (i.e., the result of the special pattern hit determination process) output to the special pattern display sections 163, 164 during the final ceiling fluctuation.

Note that in the first pachinko gaming machine, the results of the special symbol hit determination process do not include small hits, but the following explanation also includes cases where the results of the special symbol hit determination process include small hits.

First, we will explain the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process during the final ceiling fluctuation is a "small hit" or "miss."

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the time-saving C state, if the remaining number of time-saving times in the time-saving C state is greater than the specified number of time-saving B times, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the time-saving C state and controls the time-saving C state until the remaining number of time-saving times in the time-saving C state is consumed, unless a "jackpot" is derived. To explain using specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of time-saving times in the time-saving C state is 300, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value and the specified number of time-saving B times is 200, the number of time-saving times from this point on will be 300, unless a "jackpot" is derived, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the time-saving C state. Therefore, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the time-saving C state, the appearance of the number of time-saving times and the time-saving performance is the same as when the time-saving C state continues without the ceiling counter reaching the ceiling value.

On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the time-saving C game state, if the B time-saving prescribed number of times is greater than the remaining number of time-saving times in the time-saving C game state, the main CPU 201 controls the time-saving game state until the B time-saving prescribed number of times is consumed, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. To explain using specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state is 20 times, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the number of time-saving times that can be executed in the B time-saving game state is 300 times, the number of time-saving times from this point on will be 300 times while maintaining the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. In other words, even if the variable display of the special pattern is executed for 20 times, which is the remaining number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state, the variable display of the special pattern is then further executed for 280 times, which is the difference between the two, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state.

When the variable display of the special symbol ends during the final ceiling variation, the main CPU 201 derives a display mode in the special symbol display sections 163, 164 according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process. That is, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit", a small hit display mode is derived, and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss", a miss display mode is derived. When the small hit display mode is derived, control is given to the small hit game state, but the main CPU 201 keeps the time-saving flag on even during the small hit game state.

Next, we will explain the case where the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol at the final ceiling fluctuation is a "time-shortened hit," that is, the case where the transition condition to the B time-shortened play state and the transition condition to the C time-shortened play state are met at the final ceiling fluctuation. In this case, the main CPU 201 can execute different controls depending on whether it starts control of the B time-shortened play state before the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164 or whether it starts control of the B time-shortened play state after the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164.

First, when control of the B time-shortened game state is started before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164, the game is already controlled to the B time-shortened game state at the time when the display mode of the time-shortened hit is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164. Therefore, while maintaining the time-shortened performance of the B time-shortened game state, the main CPU 201 controls the game to the time-shortened game state until the greater of the B time-shortened prescribed number of times or the C time-shortened game state number of times is consumed, unless a "jackpot" is output.

Next, when control of the B time-shortened game state is started after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164, the time-shortened game state is not yet controlled to the B time-shortened game state at the time when the display mode of the time-shortened hit is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164. Therefore, while maintaining the time-shortened performance of the C time-shortened game state, the main CPU 201 controls the time-shortened game state until the greater of the B time-shortened prescribed number of times and the C time-shortened number of times is consumed, unless the end condition of the time-shortened game state in which the time-shortened performance is maintained or executed is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to end the time-shortened game state when the end condition of the time-shortened game state in which the time-shortened performance is maintained or executed is satisfied.

In addition, when the conditions for transition to the time-saving B game state and the conditions for transition to the time-saving C game state are satisfied at the final change of the ceiling, the sub-CPU 301 may perform a special display effect different from the B time-saving transition display effect performed when only the conditions for transition to the time-saving B game state are satisfied, and the C time-saving transition display effect performed when only the conditions for transition to the time-saving C game state are satisfied. Alternatively, for example, if the time-saving performance of the time-saving B game state is maintained, the B time-saving transition display effect is performed, and if the time-saving performance of the time-saving C game state is maintained, the C time-saving transition display effect is performed, and so on.

In addition, if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state and the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is a "jackpot," the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving game state and controls the game state to the jackpot game state without also controlling the game state to the B time-saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-3. Time-saving performance when multiple time-saving game states are executed at the same time]
The above describes a mode in which a time-shortened game state C is superimposed on one time-shortened game state, and a mode in which a time-shortened game state B is superimposed on a time-shortened game state C.

When multiple time-saving game states can be executed in a stacked manner, the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving game state is maintained. In a pachinko game machine with such specifications, the time-saving performance of the multiple time-saving game states that can be executed in a stacked manner may be different, but it is preferable to make the time-saving performance of the multiple time-saving game states that can be executed in a stacked manner the same.

For example, if the specifications allow a time-saving play state C to be overlaid on a time-saving play state, it is preferable to make the time-saving performance of the time-saving play state C the same as that of the time-saving play state C. Also, if the specifications allow a time-saving play state B to be overlaid on a time-saving play state C, it is preferable to make the time-saving performance of the time-saving play state C the same as that of the time-saving play state B.

In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine that is capable of executing multiple time-saving game states in a superimposed manner, a time-saving game state that can be executed later on a previously executed time-saving game state may be provided with, for example, one time-saving performance that is the same as the previously executed time-saving game state, and another time-saving performance that is different from the one time-saving performance. When a time-saving game state is executed in a superimposed manner on a previously executed time-saving game state, the one time-saving performance may be activated, and when a time-saving game state is not executed in a superimposed manner, such as when a time-saving game state is activated in a normal game state, the other time-saving performance may be activated.

For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine that can execute the time-saving gaming state B in a C time-saving gaming state by overlapping it with the time-saving gaming state C, the time-saving performance of the B time-saving gaming state may be set to, for example, two time-saving performances: one time-saving performance that is the same as the time-saving gaming state C, and another time-saving performance that is different from the one time-saving performance. Then, for example, if the ceiling counter reaches a ceiling value in the time-saving gaming state C, the one time-saving performance may be activated, and, for example, if the ceiling counter reaches a ceiling value in a normal gaming state that is not one of the time-saving gaming states, the other time-saving performance may be activated.

[1-5-3. Mode in which time-saving gaming states are not executed in succession]
As a mode in which the time-saving game state is not executed in a superimposed manner, there are a mode in which the hit determination process is performed so that the "time-saving hit" is not included in the lottery object in the time-saving game state, and a mode in which the hit determination process is performed so that the "time-saving hit" is included in the lottery object in the time-saving game state, and even if the time-saving game state is overlapped, the time-saving game state is not executed in a superimposed manner (hereinafter referred to as the "latter mode"). As the latter mode, there are two modes that are considered: a mode in which the time-saving hit is ignored even if a time-saving hit is won in any one of the time-saving game states A, B, and C, and the time-saving game state C is not executed in a superimposed manner, and even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the time-saving game state C, the time-saving game state B is not executed in a superimposed manner. The above two modes that can be considered as the latter mode will be described below.

[1-5-3-1. Mode in which the C time-saving gaming state is not executed in addition to one time-saving gaming state]
When a "time-saving win" is won in any one of the time-saving game states A, B, and C, the main CPU 201 derives the display mode of the time-saving win on the special symbol display units 163 and 164, as described above. However, unless the final variable display of the special symbol in one time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as "final time-saving change") is the last, the main CPU 201 does not control the game to the time-saving game state C based on the "time-saving win", but controls the game to the time-saving game state until the remaining number of times of time-saving in the time-saving game state in the time-saving game state is consumed. In this case, being controlled to the time-saving game state (excluding the final time-saving change) is a condition that prevents a transition to the time-saving game state C.

On the other hand, if a "time-saving hit" is won in the final time-saving fluctuation in one time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 can execute different control depending on whether the one time-saving game state ends before the display mode of the time-saving hit is introduced to the special pattern display units 163, 164 or whether the one time-saving game state ends when the display mode of the time-saving hit is introduced to the special pattern display units 163, 164.

First, if one time-saving game state ends before the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived on the special pattern display units 163 and 164, the main CPU 201 will derive the display mode of the time-saving hit and then start controlling the C time-saving game state.

Next, if one time-shortened game state ends when the display mode of the time-shortened win is derived on the special symbol display units 163, 164, i.e., if the derivation of the display mode of the time-shortened win and the end of one time-shortened game state are performed within the same interrupt process, the main CPU 201 may or may not start control of the C time-shortened game state depending on the program processing. Specifically, if the process of deriving (determined display) the display mode of the time-shortened win is performed before the end process of one time-shortened game state, the main CPU 201 ends one time-shortened game state without controlling it to the C time-shortened game state. In this case, performing the process of deriving the display mode of the time-shortened win before the end process of one time-shortened game state is a condition that prevents transition to the C time-shortened game state.

On the other hand, if the process of deriving (determining) the display mode of the time-saving hit is performed after the end process of the first time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the first time-saving game state and controls it to the C time-saving game state. In this case, the main CPU 201 does not maintain the time-saving performance of the first time-saving game state, but sets it to the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state. In other words, at the time when the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived, if the end process of the first time-saving game state has not been processed, the main CPU 201 ends the first time-saving game state without controlling it to the C time-saving game state, and if the end process of the first time-saving game state has already been processed, the main CPU 201 controls it to the C time-saving game state.

[1-5-3-2. Mode in which the B time-saving gaming state is not executed in parallel with the C time-saving gaming state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value during the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 executes control according to the display mode (i.e., the result of the special pattern hit determination process) output to the special pattern display sections 163, 164 during the final ceiling fluctuation.

First, we will explain the cases where the result of the special symbol hit determination process during the final ceiling fluctuation is a "time-saving hit," "small hit," or "miss."

In the C time-saving play state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the final ceiling fluctuation is a "time-saving hit," "small hit," or "miss," the main CPU 201 controls the game to the C time-saving play state until the remaining number of time-saving plays in the C time-saving play state is consumed.

However, when the remaining number of time-shortened times in the C time-shortened game state is 0 at the final ceiling fluctuation, the main CPU 201 may or may not start control of the B time-shortened game state, depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the end processing of the C time-shortened game state is performed before the start processing of the B time-shortened game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-shortened game state and controls it to the B time-shortened game state. On the other hand, when the end processing of the C time-shortened game state is performed after the start processing of the B time-shortened game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-shortened game state without controlling it to the B time-shortened game state. In other words, when the main CPU 201 is about to start the B time-shortened game state, if the end processing of the C time-shortened game state has not been processed, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-shortened game state without controlling it to the B time-shortened game state, and if the end processing of the C time-shortened game state has already been processed, the main CPU 201 controls it to the B time-shortened game state. In this case, performing the end process of the time-saving play state C after the start process of the time-saving play state B is a condition that prevents transition to the time-saving play state B.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process at the final ceiling fluctuation is a "jackpot," the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving game state and starts control of the jackpot game state.

[1-6. Main control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be described.
[1-6-1. Main control main processing]
First, the main processing (main control main processing) executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Figures 20 to 23. Figures 20 to 23 are flow charts showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether the power interruption signal is at a high level (S11). Although not shown, it goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the interrupt vector table prior to S11.

If it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is not at a high level (if S11 is determined as NO), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process of S11.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is at a high level (if S11 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing for the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 (S12). In this processing, a process of saving the on/off state of the backup clear switch 176 and the on/off state of the setting key 174 is performed. In other words, the on/off state of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is stored in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. Also, in this processing, the play permission flag is set to off. After executing the processing of S12, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs a wait process. In this process, the sub-control circuit 300 waits for startup. In this case, the startup wait time (wait period) is, for example, 12000.07 msec. After executing the process of S13, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S14.

In addition, while waiting for the sub-control circuit 300 to start up, the main CPU 201 may perform, for example, checking an interrupt request signal, outputting a WDT when an interrupt request signal is generated, and outputting various sensor initialization signals at predetermined timing.

In S14, the main CPU 201 determines whether the power interruption before startup (the previous time) was normal or not. In this process, it is determined whether the power interruption was normal or abnormal based on the value stored in the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S14 that the power interruption was not normal (if S14 is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S18.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S14 that the power interruption was normal (YES in S14), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15), and then performs a comparison process of the checksum value of the work area (S16). After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 proceeds to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether the comparison result is abnormal.

If the comparison result is not abnormal in S17, that is, if it is determined that the result is normal (if S17 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S22. Note that the process from S22 onwards will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S17 that the comparison result is abnormal, i.e., that the result is not normal (if S17 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off. In other words, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the result is NO. If both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, or if either the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176 is off, the result is YES.

If it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not OFF, i.e., that both are ON (if S18 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S21. The process of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off (if S18 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 sets the security signal of the external terminal to ON. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs an error display process on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). This process sets data for displaying an error to the output port of the I/O port 205 that outputs a signal to the performance display monitor 170. This causes a specified LED in the performance display monitor 170 to light up, displaying an error. After executing the process of S20, the main CPU 201 enters an endless loop.

In this way, if the previous power outage was not normal, or if the checksum value of the working area stored in the main RAM 203 does not match the normal value, the first pachinko game machine will not be able to play until it is determined that both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on.

Next, the process of S21 will be described. In S21, the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating a setting change in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. This process is performed upon abnormal startup, and is intended to store again the value indicating a setting change. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S22.

In S22, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing S22, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs a startup state determination process. In this process, the current startup state (power failure recovery/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear) is determined based on the value of the startup control flag stored in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S23, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM setting process at startup. In this process, a clearing process (e.g., construction of a work area and address setting) is performed on the working area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags and the like. Note that this process is performed both when power is restored after a power outage and when initialization is performed, and the backup area is not cleared. After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S25.

In S25, the main CPU 201 performs startup initial setting processing. In this processing, the initial setting processing is performed according to the current startup state (power outage recovery/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear). Details of the startup initial setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. After executing the processing of S25, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt inhibition processing. After executing the processing of S26, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs power cut processing. After executing the processing of S27, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S28. Details of the power cut processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

In S28, the main CPU 201 performs an update process of the initial random numbers. In this process, the initial random numbers of various random number counters (e.g., random number counters for determining whether a special symbol has won) are updated. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S29.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether play is permitted. This determination is made based on the value of the play permission flag.

If it is determined in S29 that play is not permitted (if S29 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S30.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S29 that play is permitted (if S29 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onward.

In S31, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing the process of S31, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 201 performs a performance display monitor tabulation calculation process. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. This process is also performed using an area separate from (outside) the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S32, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the registers that were saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the processing of S34, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether the system cycle time has elapsed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 msec, which is three times the interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec).

If it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (if S35 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (if S35 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process. After executing the process of S36, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S37.

In this embodiment, within the main control process, an interrupt prohibition section (processing section S26 to S35) of, for example, 6 msec is provided before various processes related to game control (for example, processes S37 to S44) described below are executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control (described below) are executed, for example, every 6 msec (every system cycle). In this embodiment, an example has been described in which the interrupt prohibition section is three times the interrupt cycle, but this is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 performs a process of updating the system timer. The system timer is a timer that manages the system period (e.g., 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in a system period management timer area in the working area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission/reception processing. In this processing, payout control command transmission/reception processing is mainly performed. After executing S38, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the special symbol game is performed. Details of this special symbol control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 26. After executing the processing of S39, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the normal symbol game is performed. Details of this normal symbol control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. After executing the processing of S40, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs a game action display unit control process. In this process, a process for setting the display data to be output to each display section of the LED unit 160 (e.g., the first special symbol display section 163, the second special symbol display section 164, etc.) is performed. After executing the process of S41, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S42.

In S42, the main CPU 201 performs a game information data generation process. In this process, control of the external terminal board pulse signal, setting of output data, generation of the test firing signal, etc. are performed. Note that the generation of the test firing signal is performed using an area separate from (outside) the working area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs a port output process. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs a status monitoring process. In this process, a launch position determination process, a game abnormality detection determination process, a payout abnormality detection determination process, and the like are performed. In the launch position determination process, if there is a change in the launch position (e.g., right hit or left hit), a launch position command is reserved for transmission. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

[1-6-2. Initial setting process at startup]
Next, the startup initial setting process performed in S25 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 24. Fig. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the startup initial setting process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process to load the start control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S52.

In S52, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating power recovery.

If it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating power recovery (if S52 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S54.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating power recovery (if S52 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs a second normal game pre-processing. Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. When the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. After executing the process of S53, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup control flag indicates a setting change or setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S54 that the value of the startup status flag is not a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation, i.e., a value indicating RAM clear (if S54 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S56.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S54 that the value of the startup status flag is a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation (if S54 is determined to be YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a setting operation command. The setting operation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S336 in FIG. 46 described below). After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S56, the main CPU 201 performs a first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. When the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. After executing the process of S56, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

[1-6-3. Electrical disconnection processing]
Next, the power cut process performed in S27 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 25. Fig. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the power cut process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the XINT detection flag is on (S61).

If it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not on (if S61 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the power cut processing and returns processing to the main control main processing (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is on (if S61 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs a process of calculating a checksum value. After executing the process of S62, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the power interruption detection flag value in corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203. In this case, they are stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag. After executing S64, the main CPU 201 executes a RAM access inhibition value setting process (S65). After executing S65, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset wait process until power is cut off.

[1-6-4. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S39 in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 26. Fig. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 26, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S71. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S71, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S72.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the process of S71, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register.

Although not shown, when executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 also performs a process to check the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol. Then, if the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol are both "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a process to reserve the transmission of a demo display command. Note that the demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later). Then, when the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demo display command, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demo display performance.

In S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S71 is 0, i.e., whether the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (if S72 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S75.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (if S72 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S73.

In S73, the main CPU 201 determines whether the second special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., whether start information for the second special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol has not started to be variable displayed, i.e., that the start information for the second special symbol is not pending (if S73 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S74.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., that the start information for the second special symbol is pending (if S73 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S75.

In S74, the main CPU 201 determines whether the first special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., whether start information for the first special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol has not started to be variable displayed, i.e., that the start information for the first special symbol is not pending (if S74 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., that the start information for the first special symbol is pending (if S74 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S75.

In S75, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. After executing the processing of S75, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S71 to S75) within the interrupt prohibited section.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the first pachinko gaming machine is described as a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S75) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved, but this is not limited to this. For example, the first pachinko gaming machine may be a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S75) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, or a sequential variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning in the first start port 120 or the second start port 140.

[1-6-5. Special design management process]
Next, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S75 of the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26) will be described with reference to Fig. 27. Fig. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When the control state number is "0", the special pattern management process processes the second special pattern when the process of S73 (see FIG. 26) is judged as YES, and processes the first special pattern when the process of S74 (see FIG. 26) is judged as YES. Also, when the control state number is not "0", the special pattern management process processes the special pattern currently being executed.

The numbers ("0" to "5") in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 27 are the control state numbers for the special symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the waiting time for the special pattern is 0 (S81).

If it is determined in S81 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (if S81 is determined to be NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S81 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (if S81 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S83. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S83 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S82.

In S83, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. This S83 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. This S84 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S85.

In S85, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This S85 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S86.

In S86, the main CPU 201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process of S86 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S87.

In S87, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process of S87 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S88.

In S88, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end process. This process in S88 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

After completing steps S83 to S88, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26).

[1-6-6. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S83 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described with reference to Fig. 28. Fig. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 28, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S91).

If it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (if S91 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (if S91 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 201 performs a hit determination process for the special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the hit determination table for the special symbol (see FIG. 10) and uses the random number value for the special symbol hit determination to determine whether the special symbol is a hit. In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving hit flag to ON if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a time-saving hit, and sets the big hit flag to ON if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a big hit. In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the case of a pachinko game machine in which the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol includes a small hit, the small hit flag is set to ON if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a small hit. After executing the process of S93, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S94. The time-saving hit flag is turned off when transitioning to the C time-saving game state, and the big hit flag is turned off when the big hit game state begins. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process for a pachinko game machine includes a small hit, the small hit flag is turned off when the small hit game state begins.

In the special symbol hit determination process (see S93), first, a process is performed to determine whether or not there is a jackpot, and if this process determines that there is no jackpot, a process is performed to determine whether or not there is a time-saving hit, and if this process determines that there is no time-saving hit, it is determined that there is a miss.

In S94, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the stopping symbol of the special symbol that corresponds to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S93) (e.g., a time-saving hit, a big hit, or a miss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11) is referenced, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol is used to determine the above-mentioned "select symbol command" or "symbol designation command." After executing the process of S94, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 201 performs a win type determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the type of win when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit (time-saving hit, big win). In this process, the win type determination table (see FIG. 13) is referenced and the type of win is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S94). In this embodiment, there are multiple types of wins, but there may be only one type of big win, or one type of time-saving hit. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to multiple types of wins, multiple types of misses may be provided. In this embodiment, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small win, but the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include a small win, and multiple types of such small wins may be provided. After executing the process of S95, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 201 performs a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. This process is a process for judging or determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referenced, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, for example, according to the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit judgment process (S93), the value of the time-saving flag (0 or 1), the random number value for reach judgment and/or the random number value for effect selection, etc. Note that the variation pattern table referenced when performing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol may differ depending on the game state, etc. After executing the process of S96, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S97.

In S97, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbol. In this process, the change pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referenced, and the change time corresponding to the change pattern determined in the change pattern determination process for the special symbol (S96) is determined as the change time for the special symbol. After executing the process of S97, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S98.

In S98, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (see S84 in FIG. 27) is performed. After executing the process of S98, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S99.

In S99, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state (e.g., the number of times remaining in the special mode and the number of times remaining in the time-saving mode) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 is performed. After executing the process of S99, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S100.

In S100, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In this processing, the main CPU 201 performs update processing of various flags related to the management of the game status (e.g., probability bonus flag, time-saving flag, etc.). After executing the processing of S100, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly the game state management process (S100) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S101)) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[1-6-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S84 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described with reference to Fig. 29. Fig. 29 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S111).

If it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (if S111 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (if S111 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (see S85 in FIG. 27) is performed after the special symbol variable display ending process is completed. After executing the process of S112, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S113.

In S113, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. This process also includes a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later). After executing the process of S113, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S114.

In S114, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol counter. The determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol is determined (the number of times the special symbol game has been played), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. For example, a counter may be provided for managing the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state, such as the number of remaining times of the special symbol game or the number of remaining times of the time-saving game, or the determined symbol counter may be used to manage the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state. After executing the process of S114, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-6-8. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S85 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described with reference to Fig. 30. Fig. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S121).

If it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (if S121 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game play determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (if S121 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S122.

At S122, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot.

If it is determined in S122 that a jackpot has been reached, i.e., that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display pattern that indicates a jackpot (if S122 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S123.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S122 that the jackpot has not been reached, i.e., that the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S122 is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S130.

In S123, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing for the jackpot game control processing. In this processing, signals (e.g., jackpot signals, etc.) output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6 for both) via the external terminal board 184 are generated and updated. Note that the signals generated and updated in this processing are signals related to the special symbols that are the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After executing the processing of S123, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S124. Note that the signals output to, for example, the hall computer 186 or the island computer via the external terminal board 184 will be described later.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control in S123, the main CPU 201 also performs processing to clear various flags and counters, such as the special chance flag, special chance counter, time-saving flag, and time-saving counter.

In S124, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening 131 can be opened (S125), a process of setting a large prize signal to the external terminal board 184 (S126), a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S127), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S128), and a process of reserving the transmission of a large prize start display command (S129). Note that by performing a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S127) to switch the control state number, the large prize opening preparation process (see S86 in FIG. 27) will be performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game judgment process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In S130, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S121 to S130) within the interrupt prohibited period.

[1-6-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 in S130 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30) will be described with reference to Fig. 31. Fig. 31 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game ending process in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time-saving management process (S131). Details of this time-saving management process will be described later with reference to Figures 32 to 39 for the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process of S131, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" in this way, it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game. After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S133.

In S133, the main CPU 201 performs a process for setting game state designation parameters for the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving transmission of a special symbol game end command (S134). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later). Then, after processing S134, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30).

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28) is a miss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the probability hit flag or the time-saving flag. Therefore, even if a miss display mode is derived, the game state does not change.

[1-6-10. Time-saving management process]
Next, the time-saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 32. Fig. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S131 during the special symbol game ending process (see Fig. 31) in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a counter update process (S141). Details of this counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. After executing the process of S141, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 performs a counter determination process. Details of this counter determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. After executing the process of S142, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving management process and returns the process to the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 31).

[1-6-11. Counter update process]
Next, the counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 33. Fig. 33 is a flow chart showing an example of the counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S141 during the time-shortening management process (see Fig. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time-saving counter update process (S151). Details of this time-saving counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. After executing the process of S151, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S152.

In S152, the main CPU 201 performs a ceiling counter update process. Details of this ceiling counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. After executing the process of S152, the main CPU 201 ends the counter update process and returns the process to the time-saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-12. Time-saving counter update process]
Next, a time-saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 34. Fig. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S151 during the counter update process (see Fig. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The time-saving counter update process shown in FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the process when multiple time-saving game states overlap and multiple time-saving game states are executed at the same time.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0 (S161). In this process, if both the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made, and if either of these conditions is not met, a NO determination is made.

The time-saving flag is set to ON when transitioning to time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B, or time-saving play state C. When transitioning to a high probability play state, the probability change flag is set to ON.

The time-saving counter indicates the number of time-saving operations that are executed in the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, or the C time-saving play state.

When the conditions for transitioning to time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B and/or time-saving play state C are met, the time-saving counter for the time-saving play state for which the transition conditions are met is set.

In this embodiment, a subtraction method is adopted in which the time-saving counter is subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol ends, and the time-saving game state ends when the time-saving counter reaches 0. However, this is not limited to this, and an addition method may be adopted in which the time-saving counter is added when the variable display of the special symbol ends, and the time-saving game state ends when the time-saving counter reaches the set number of time-saving times. Also, instead of updating (subtracting or adding) the time-saving counter when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the time-saving counter may be updated when the variable display of the special symbol begins, and the time-saving game state may end when the time-saving counter reaches 0 (in the case of the subtraction method) or when the time-saving counter reaches the set number of time-saving times (in the case of the addition method).

If it is determined in S161 that both the time-saving flag on and the time-saving counter are not greater than 0 (if S161 is determined to be NO), the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (Figure 33).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S161 that the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0 (YES in S161), the main CPU 201 performs a process to subtract 1 from the time-saving counter (S162). After executing the process of S162, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S163.

In S163, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving mode is 3 and the C time-saving counter is greater than 0. In this process, if the time-saving mode is 3 and the C time-saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made. If a YES determination is made in S163, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S164.

The C time-saving counter is a counter that is set when the conditions for transitioning to the C time-saving game state are met during the time-saving game state. Although this C time-saving counter is not shown in the flowchart, it is reset by the main CPU 201 when the B time-saving counter described below is set.

The time-saving mode is a flag that is set when multiple time-saving game states are executed in overlapping fashion. In this embodiment, the time-saving mode is configured, for example, with 2 bits, and is set to "time-saving mode = 3" when time-saving game state C is executed in overlapping fashion with a previously executed time-saving game state. Also, when time-saving game state B is executed in overlapping fashion with a previously executed time-saving game state, it is set to "time-saving mode = 2."

On the other hand, if it is determined in S163 that both the time-saving mode = 3 and the C time-saving counter is not greater than 0 are not satisfied (if S163 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S165.

In S164, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the C time-saving counter. This process may also be an addition process instead of a subtraction process. After executing the process of S164, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S165.

In S165, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving mode is 2 and the B time-saving counter is greater than 0. In this process, if the time-saving mode is 2 and the B time-saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made. If a YES determination is made in S165, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S166.

The B time-saving counter is a counter that is set when the conditions for transitioning to the B time-saving game state are met during the time-saving game state (in this embodiment, during the C time-saving game state). Although this B time-saving counter is not shown in the flowchart, it is reset by the main CPU 201 when the C time-saving counter is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S165 that both the time-saving mode = 2 and the B time-saving counter being greater than 0 are not met (if S165 is determined to be NO), the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In S166, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the B time-saving counter. This process may also be an addition process rather than a subtraction process. After executing the process of S166, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

Although not shown, if the C time-saving counter = 0 as a result of processing S164, or if the B time-saving counter = 0 as a result of processing S166, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving mode to off (= 0).

When multiple time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, it is not limited to overlapping two time-saving game states, but three or more time-saving game states may be executed in an overlapping manner. In this case, as described above, the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state do not overlap, so a case in which three or more time-saving game states overlap corresponds to a case in which the A time-saving game state or the B time-saving game state overlaps with two or more C time-saving game states, and a case in which three or more C time-saving game states overlap.

[1-6-13. Ceiling counter update process]
Next, the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 35. Fig. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S152 during the counter update process (see Fig. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (S171). The ceiling count prohibition flag is a flag that is set on when the probability variable flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. In other words, when the probability variable flag is off and the ceiling counter has not reached the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is off. The value of the ceiling counter is saved in the main RAM 203.

The ceiling value is a predetermined value specific to the pachinko gaming machine as a condition for transitioning to the B time-saving gaming state. However, instead of this, the main CPU 201 may perform processing to set the ceiling value when the big win gaming state ends, when a backup clear process is performed, when a dedicated operating means for resetting the value of the ceiling counter is operated, etc.

In S171, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (if S171 is judged as NO), i.e., if the ceiling count prohibition flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

If the ceiling count prohibition flag is off in S171 (if S171 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S172.

In S172, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

[1-6-14. Counter Determination Process]
Next, the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 36. Fig. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S142 during the time-shortening management process (see Fig. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time-saving transition determination process (S181). Details of this time-saving transition determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. After executing the process of S181, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S182.

In S182, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving transition process. Details of this time-saving transition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S183.

In S183, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving counter is less than 1.

If it is determined in S183 that the time-saving counter is not less than 1 (NO in S183), i.e., the time-saving counter is 1 or greater, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S185.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S183 that the time-saving counter is less than 1 (YES in S183), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S184.

In S184, the main CPU 201 turns off the time-saving flag. After executing the process of S184, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S185.

If the time-saving counter is judged to be less than 1 in S183 (if S183 is judged YES), both the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter should be less than 1 (i.e., 0). However, in consideration of the possibility that some malfunction may occur in the execution of processing by the main CPU 201, for example, if the B time-saving counter or the time-saving counter is 1 or more despite the judgement of YES in S183, an abnormality process such as outputting an abnormality warning may be executed. Also, instead of or in addition to this abnormality process, when the judgement of YES in S183 is made, not only the time-saving flag may be turned off (see S184), but also the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter may be reset to ensure consistency between the time-saving counter, the B time-saving counter, and the C time-saving counter.

In S185, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process for the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving transition command transmission reservation process (S186). The time-saving transition command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described below). Then, after processing S186, the main CPU 201 ends the counter determination process and returns the process to the time-saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-15. Time-saving transition determination process]
Next, the time-saving transition judgment process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 37. In this process, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, a judgment process for transitioning to the B time-saving game state is performed. Fig. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving transition judgment process executed by the main CPU 201 in S181 during the counter judgment process (see Fig. 36) in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the special chance flag is off (S191).

If it is determined in S191 that the high probability flag is not OFF (if S191 is a NO determination), i.e., if the high probability flag is ON, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36). In other words, if the high probability flag is ON, it is possible to prevent transition to the B time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S191 that the special chance flag is OFF (if S191 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling counter is at the ceiling value.

If it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is not at the ceiling value (if S192 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is at the ceiling value (if S192 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON. After executing the process of S193, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S194.

In S194, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling flag to ON. The ceiling flag is a flag that indicates that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S195.

In S195, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S195, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-16. Time-saving transition process]
Next, the time-saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 38. Fig. 38 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 in S182 during the counter determination process (see Fig. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the special chance flag is off (S202).

If it is determined in S202 that the high probability flag is not off (if S202 is determined as NO), that is, if the high probability flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36). By doing this, if the high probability flag is on, neither the B time-saving play state nor the C time-saving play state can be started.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S202 that the special chance flag is OFF (YES in S202), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S203.

In S203, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON.

If it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is not on (if S203 returns a NO judgment), i.e., if the ceiling flag is off, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S206.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is on (YES in S203), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S205.

In S205, the main CPU 201 executes a B time-saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the B time-saving game state. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines the number of time-saving times to be set in the B time-saving counter, whether the time-saving mode is set to 2, and the time-saving performance, etc. After executing the process of S205, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S208.

The number of time-saving times set in the B time-saving counter is a predetermined number. Among the time-saving performances, the winning probability of a "normal symbol hit" is as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16). Among the time-saving performances, the opening pattern (number of times opening, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric device 146 is as shown in the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the normal symbol hit type determination table (see FIG. 18). Among the time-saving performances, the variable display time of the normal symbol is as shown in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S206, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving hit flag is on.

If it is determined in S206 that the time-saving hit flag is not on (if S206 is judged as NO), i.e., if the time-saving hit flag is off, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition process and returns the process to the counter judgment process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S206 that the time-saving hit flag is on (YES in S206), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S207.

In S207, the main CPU 201 executes a C time-saving control mode determination process as a process related to the transition to the C time-saving game state. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines the number of time-saving times to be set in the C time-saving counter, whether the time-saving mode is set to 3, and the time-saving performance, etc. After executing the process of S207, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S208.

The number of time-saving times set in the C time-saving counter is determined according to the selected symbol command by referring to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 13, for example). Among the time-saving performances, the winning probability of a "normal symbol hit" is as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16). Among the time-saving performances, the opening pattern (number of times opened, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric roler 146 is as shown in the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the normal symbol hit type determination table (see FIG. 18). Among the time-saving performances, the variable display time of the normal symbol is as shown in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S208, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving setting process. Details of this time-saving setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. After executing the process of S208, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-17. Time-saving setting process]
Next, the time-saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 39. Fig. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 in S208 during the time-saving transition process (see Fig. 38) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the time-saving flag is on (S211).

If it is determined in S211 that the time-saving flag is on (if S211 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S212.

When S211 judges YES, this corresponds to the case where the sure-change flag is off and, for example, the time-saving play state B is executed in addition to the time-saving play state C being executed first (when the ceiling counter = ceiling value), or the time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B, or time-saving play state C is executed in addition to the time-saving play state C being executed (when a "time-saving win" is won).

Although not shown, when the time-saving game state B is executed after the time-saving game state C has been executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time-saving mode = 2" and sets the time-saving counter B determined in S205. When the time-saving game state C is executed after the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, or the time-saving game state C has been executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time-saving mode = 3" and sets the time-saving counter C determined in S207.

If it is determined in S211 that the time-saving flag is not on (S211 is a NO determination), i.e., if the time-saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S214.

In S212, the main CPU 201 compares the current time-saving counter (the number of remaining time-saving times in the previously executed time-saving game state) with the new number of time-saving times (the number of time-saving times determined in S205 or S207), and determines whether the current time-saving counter is smaller than the new number of time-saving times.

If it is determined in S212 that the current time-saving counter is not smaller than the new number of time-saving times (if S212 is a NO determination), i.e., if the current time-saving counter is greater than the new number of time-saving times, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving setting process and returns the process to the time-saving transition process (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S212 that the current time-saving counter is greater than the new number of time-saving times (if S212 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving counter reset process. In this process, when the time-saving game state B is executed while the time-saving game state C is executed first, or when the time-saving game state C is executed while the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, or the time-saving game state C is executed first, the larger of the current time-saving counter value (i.e., the remaining number of time-saving times) and the new number of time-saving times is reset as the new time-saving counter. However, even if the time-saving counter reset process (S213) is performed, the main CPU 201 does not reset the time-saving counter B and the time-saving counter C. After executing the process of S213, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving setting process and returns the process to the time-saving transition process (FIG. 38).

When the time-saving game state B is executed while the time-saving game state C is executed first, or when the time-saving game state C is executed while the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, or the time-saving game state C is executed first, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state that was executed first. In other words, the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state that was executed first is not changed to the time-saving performance of the new time-saving game state, nor is it changed to the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state that corresponds to the larger of the current time-saving counter and the new number of time-saving times.

As described above, the time-saving performance is the performance that changes the ease with which the game ball can enter the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)), and refers to the winning probability of a "normal symbol hit", the variable display time of the normal symbol, and/or the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (number of times it opens, opening time, wait time, etc.).

In this embodiment, the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter are provided to allow management of two time-saving game states being executed in a superimposed manner internally. In the above-mentioned time-saving counter resetting process (S213), the larger of the current time-saving counter value and the new time-saving count is reset as the new time-saving counter. However, even if two time-saving game states are executed in a superimposed manner internally, the time-saving performance that appears on the surface (that the player can grasp) is only the time-saving performance of one of the two time-saving game states that are executed in a superimposed manner internally. Therefore, when multiple time-saving game states are executed in a superimposed manner without managing the fact that two time-saving game states are executed in a superimposed manner internally (i.e., without providing the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter), the larger of the current time-saving counter value and the new time-saving count may be reset as the new time-saving counter.

In S214, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving mode setting process. This process is performed when S211 is judged as NO, that is, when a transition is made from a non-time-saving game state to a time-saving B game state (when the ceiling counter = the ceiling value) or when a transition is made from a non-time-saving game state to a time-saving C game state (when a "time-saving hit" is won). In this process, the number of time-saving times and the time-saving performance determined in the time-saving B control mode determination process (S205) or the time-saving C control mode determination process (S207) are set. After executing the process of S214, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S215.

In S215, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving flag to ON. After executing the process of S215, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving setting process and returns the process to the time-saving transition process (FIG. 38).

In this way, in the time-saving management process described above with reference to Figures 32 to 39, the main CPU 201 performs the process of transitioning to the B time-saving game state when the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation has ended. In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the case of a pachinko game machine in which the result of the hit determination process for the hit determination process includes a small hit, there may be cases in which the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol in the ceiling final variation is a small hit. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol in the ceiling final variation is a small hit, the main CPU 201 may perform the process of transitioning to the B time-saving game state based on the end of the small hit game state.

In the time-saving management process described above with reference to Figures 32 to 39, the main CPU 201 performs the transition process to the B time-saving game state when the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation ends, but this is not limited to this, and the transition process to the B time-saving game state may be performed based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation. In particular, in the first pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variable displayed in parallel, it is preferable to perform the transition process to the B time-saving game state based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation. This is because, if the transition to the B time-saving game state is made when the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation ends, if the variable display of one of the special symbols as the ceiling final variation begins during the variable display of the other special symbol, the benefit of the variable display of the other special symbol as the B time-saving game state cannot be obtained, and there is a risk of reducing interest. In the first pachinko game machine, the variable display of the special symbol is not performed with a long fluctuation of, for example, 600,000 msec. However, in a pachinko game machine in which the variable display of the special symbol can be performed with such a long fluctuation, by performing a transition process to the B time-saving game state based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final fluctuation, it is possible to avoid a delay in the start of the B time-saving game state even if the variable display of the special symbol, which is the ceiling final fluctuation, is performed with a long fluctuation.

In addition, in the time-saving management process described above with reference to Figures 32 to 39, the B time-saving control mode determination process (S205) as a process related to the transition to the B time-saving play state is performed with priority over the C time-saving control mode determination process (S207) as a process related to the transition to the C time-saving play state (see S203 to S207 in Figure 38), but this is not limited to this. For example, the C time-saving control mode determination process (S207) as a process related to the transition to the C time-saving play state may be performed with priority over the B time-saving control mode determination process (S205) as a process related to the transition to the B time-saving play state.

In addition, in the above-mentioned ceiling counter update process described with reference to FIG. 35, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not OFF (S171 in FIG. 35 judges NO), the ceiling counter is not updated, but this is not limited to the above. For example, in ST machines and pachinko gaming machines that perform a probability change drop lottery, the ceiling counter may be updated when a variable display of a special pattern is performed even if the probability change flag is ON. In this case, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the game may not transition to the B time-shortened game state, but may transition to the B time-shortened game state when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability change counter becomes the ceiling value. In this case, the main CPU 201 will not transition to the B time-shortened game state just because the "ceiling counter = ceiling value", but will perform processing to transition to the B time-shortened game state when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability change counter becomes the ceiling value.

The ceiling value, which is the condition for transitioning to the B time-saving game state, is preferably within a predetermined range of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the special symbol flag is off (for example, 2.5 to 3.0 times). In this embodiment, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10), for example, the jackpot probability when the special symbol flag is off is 1 in 319 (when the setting value is 1), so the ceiling value is preferably within the range of 319 x 2.5 to 319 x 3.0 (times).

The upper limit of the B time-saving specified number of times, which is the end condition of the B time-saving game state, is preferably set to a specified multiple (e.g., 3.8 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the special probability flag is off. Similarly, the upper limit of the C time-saving specified number of times, which is the end condition of the C time-saving game state, is preferably set to a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability when the special probability flag is off by a specified number (e.g., up to 3.8 times the denominator of the jackpot probability). In this embodiment, since the jackpot probability when the special probability flag is off is 1 in 319 (when the setting value is 1), it is preferable to set the upper limit of both the B time-saving specified number and the C time-saving specified number to approximately 1212 (319 x 3.8). Note that it is not essential that the upper limit of the B time-saving specified number and the upper limit of the C time-saving specified number be the same value.

In the case of a pachinko machine like the first one, which can be set to any one of a number of settings with different jackpot probabilities, such as settings 1 to 6, the time-saving hit probability is the same for all settings, as described above. In such a case, if the ceiling value, which is the condition for transitioning to the B time-saving game state, is set to a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the probability flag is off) by a specified number (for example, 3.0) regardless of the setting value, the ceiling value will differ depending on the setting value, and there is a risk that the set setting value will be discovered by the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is preferable to set the ceiling value to the same value regardless of the setting value, regardless of the set setting value, rather than determining it by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the probability flag is off) by a specified number.

[1-6-18. Modifications related to time-saving management processing]
In the time-saving management process described above with reference to Figs. 32 to 39 (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving management process of this embodiment"), the ceiling counter update process (see Fig. 35) is executed in the special symbol game end process (see Fig. 31). In addition, the process related to the transition to the B time-saving game state is given priority over the process related to the transition to the C time-saving game state. Furthermore, a transition flag (ceiling flag) to the B time-saving game state and a transition flag (time-saving hit flag) to the C time-saving game state are separately provided, and when the ceiling flag is on, the game is transitioned to the B time-saving game state, and when the time-saving hit flag is on, the game is transitioned to the C time-saving game state. However, the execution timing of the time-saving management process including the ceiling counter update process, the priority order between the transition to the B time-saving game state and the transition to the C time-saving game state, and whether the transition flag to the B time-saving game state and the transition flag to the C time-saving game state are separate or common are not limited to the above, and the time-saving management process can be executed in various variations.

For example, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be when the fluctuation stops, and the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the time-saving play state B, with a transition flag to the time-saving play state B and a transition flag to the time-saving play state C being set separately.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to when the fluctuation stops, and the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the time-saving play state C, with a transition flag to the time-saving play state B and a transition flag to the time-saving play state C being set separately.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to when the fluctuation stops, and the game may transition to time-saving game state B after confirming that the "time-saving hit" is not a winning combination when the ceiling is reached.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to the start of fluctuation, and the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the B time-saving play state, with a transition flag to the B time-saving play state and a transition flag to the C time-saving play state being set separately.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to the start of fluctuation, and the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the time-saving play state C, with a transition flag to the time-saving play state B and a transition flag to the time-saving play state C being set separately.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the B time-saving play state, and the transition flag to the B time-saving play state and the transition flag to the C time-saving play state may be set as a common flag.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the time-saving play state C, and the transition flag to the time-saving play state B and the transition flag to the time-saving play state C may be set as a common flag.

Furthermore, if multiple time-saving game states are not executed at the same time, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time-saving counter when the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0, and does not subtract 1 from the time-saving counter in other cases.

[1-7. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 40, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S86 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 27) will be described. Fig. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S251).

If it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (if S251 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (if S251 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S252.

In S252, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of rounds played in the jackpot game state. The count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S252, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of times the jackpot opening has been opened is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of times the round play has been performed in the jackpot play state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S253 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is the upper limit (if S253 is a YES judgement), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S254. On the other hand, if it is determined in S253 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is not the upper limit (if S253 is a NO judgement), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S257.

In S254, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5." In this way, by switching the control state number by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S254), the jackpot end process (see S88 in FIG. 27) is performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S254, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S255.

In S255, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command (S256). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described below). Then, after processing S256, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs processing to add 1 to the round counter value. After executing the processing of S257, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S258.

In S258, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize opening 131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 131, the maximum number of winning balls into the large prize opening 131, the number of winning balls when the large prize opening 131 wins, etc. are set. The number of times the large prize opening 131 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the large prize opening is opened multiple times in one round. In this case, however, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize opening is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S258, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S259.

In S259, the main CPU 201 performs a special prize opening/closing control process. In this process, the main CPU 201 generates data for controlling the opening/closing of the special prize opening 131. After executing S259, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S260.

In S260, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4." In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S260) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening opening control process (see S87 in FIG. 27) is performed after the large prize opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S260, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S261.

In S261, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S261, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S262.

In S262, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described below). After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-1. Large prize opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 41, a special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S87 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 27) will be described. Fig. 41 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S271).

If it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if S271 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (if S271 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S272.

In S272, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 131 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6), which counts the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 131, is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the large prize opening winning counter counted by the count switch 132 is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S272 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 131 is not the maximum number of winning balls (if S272 returns NO), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S273.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S272 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 131 is the maximum number of winning balls (if S272 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S274.

In S273, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the special prize opening 131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the special prize opening related various setting process (see S258 in FIG. 40) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 131 has not elapsed (if S273 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 131 has elapsed (if S273 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S274.

In S274, the main CPU 201 performs a process for setting the closure of the large prize opening 131. After executing the process of S274, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S275.

In S275, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S275) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening preparation process (see S86 in FIG. 27) will be performed again after this large prize opening control process is completed. After executing the process of S275, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S276.

In S276, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S276, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S277.

In S277, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described below) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S277, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-2. Big win end processing]
Next, the big win end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S88 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described with reference to Fig. 42. Fig. 42 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win end process in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S281).

If it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (if S281 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

If it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (if S281 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S282.

In S282, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various flags (e.g., a probability change flag, a time-saving flag, etc.) are set, and the values of various counters (e.g., a probability change counter, a time-saving counter, a number of confirmed symbols counter, a round counter, a large prize slot winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing S282, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S283.

In S283, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. After executing the processing of S283, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end processing and returns to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 set an interrupt prohibited area and perform the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibited area.

[1-7-3. Normal symbol control process]
Next, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S40 during the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 43. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in Fig. 43, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start condition for the normal symbol is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

Figure 43 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that the numbers ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in Figure 43 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol. Note that, for convenience, each process shown in Figure 43 is not shown as a subroutine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the waiting time for normal symbols is 0 (S291).

If it is determined in S291 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is not 0 (if S291 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S291 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (if S291 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S292.

In S292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S292, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S293. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S293 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S292.

In S293, the main CPU 201 performs variable display start processing for the normal symbol. This S293 processing is performed when the control state number for the normal symbol is "0". In this variable display start processing for the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 performs a win determination process for the normal symbol, a process to determine the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol, and if the result of the win determination process for the normal symbol is a win for the normal symbol, a process to set the opening pattern (number of times opening, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric role device 146. Note that if the control state number for the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs processing to end the variable display of the normal symbol. This processing of S294 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In this processing, the main CPU 201 performs various processing when ending the variable display of the normal symbol. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S295.

In S295, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol gameplay determination process. This S295 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal symbol gameplay determination process, a determination process is performed of the derived result of the normal symbol (for example, whether the normal symbol is a hit or a miss). Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S296.

In S296, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric role release process. This S296 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the normal electric role 146 is released in a predetermined manner. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S297.

In S297, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol win end processing. This S297 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol win end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see Figures 20 to 23).

In this embodiment, as shown in the winning judgment table for normal symbols (see FIG. 16), the random numbers for winning judgment for normal symbols are generated in a range (width) of, for example, 0 to 99, and the winning judgment value data for normal symbols is, for example, 0 to 79 (in the case of a non-time-saving game state). The winning probability of normal symbols is determined by the number of winning judgment value data for normal symbols relative to the total random numbers for winning judgment for normal symbols, so that, for example, the winning probability of normal symbols is 80/100 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, this winning probability of normal symbols is different when time-saving control is executed and when time-saving control is not executed, but may be the same or approximately the same. In addition, the variable display of normal symbols is executed for a relatively long time, for example, 600,000 msec, in a non-time-saving game state in which time-saving control is not executed, whereas it is executed for a relatively short time, for example, 1,000 msec, in a game state in which time-saving control is executed. In this way, when time-saving control is executed, the frequency with which the normal electric device opening process is executed, i.e., the frequency with which game balls enter the second starting hole 140, is increased.

[1-7-4. External Maskable Interrupt Processing]
Next, an external maskable interrupt process executed under the control of the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 44. This process is an interrupt process executed in response to an external interrupt request generated, for example, when power is interrupted. Fig. 44 is a flow chart showing an example of the external maskable interrupt process in the first pachinko game machine.

First, the main CPU 201 performs a process of saving the protection register (S301). After executing the process of S301, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S302.

In S302, the main CPU 201 reads the state of a specific input port of the I/O port 205. The specific input port is, for example, an input port in which the state of a power interruption detection line, a backup clear switch line, a sensor abnormality detection line, a radio wave sensor line, an open detection line, a magnetic sensor line, a vibration sensor line, a solenoid monitoring sensor line, etc. is set. After executing the process of S302, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S303.

In S303, the main CPU 201 determines whether a power outage has been detected.

If it is determined in S303 that a power interruption has not been detected (if S303 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S305. On the other hand, if it is determined in S303 that a power interruption has been detected (if S303 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S304.

In S304, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag that indicates a power outage, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S304, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S305.

In S305, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the protection register that was saved in S301. After executing the process of S305, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S306.

In S306, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 ends the external maskable interrupt processing.

[1-7-5. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt period of, for example, 2 msec will be described with reference to Fig. 45. Fig. 45 is a flow chart showing an example of the system timer interrupt process executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a protection register backup process (S311).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off (S312). If it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (i.e., a power interruption has been detected) (if S312 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S326. On the other hand, if it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (i.e., a power interruption has not been detected) (if S312 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reading the state of the input port of the I/O port 205 (S314) and moves the process to S315.

In S315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not play is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not play is permitted based on, for example, the value of the startup control flag. The startup control flag is a flag for determining whether the startup state when the power is turned on is one of power failure recovery, setting change, setting check, RAM clear, etc. For example, if power failure recovery is selected, it is determined that play is permitted, and if setting change, setting check, RAM clear, etc. is selected, it is determined that play is not permitted.

The startup control flag is composed of a combination of on/off information of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, it is determined that power has been restored; if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, it is determined that settings have been changed; if the backup clear switch 176 is off and the setting key 174 is on, it is determined that settings have been confirmed; and if the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, it is determined that the RAM has been cleared.

If it is determined in S315 that the game is not permitted (if S315 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 performs setting control processing (S316). In this setting control processing, a setting change processing or a setting confirmation processing is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change processing and the setting confirmation processing are performed within a system timer interrupt processing that is performed, for example, at a 2 msec cycle, and are performed when the game is not permitted, i.e., when the game is not permitted. After executing the setting control processing (S316), the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S326. Details of the setting control processing of S316 will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

If play is not permitted (if S315 is judged as NO), it is preferable for the main CPU 201 to prohibit the launch of game balls from the launching device 6 (see FIG. 6), disable various switches except for specific switches (e.g., setting key 174, backup clear switch 176, etc.), and prohibit the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S315 that play is permitted (if S315 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S317.

In S317, the main CPU 201 executes a process to increment the value of the interrupt counter by 1. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) the interrupt prohibited intervals during the main control main process (see Figures 20 to 23), and the count value of the interrupt counter is stored in an interrupt counter area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S317, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S318.

In S318, the main CPU 201 performs an update process for the interrupt cycle timer. After executing the process of S318, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S319. Note that the interrupt cycle timer is a timer for managing the interrupt cycle (e.g., 2 msec), and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area in the working area of the main RAM 203.

In S319, the main CPU 201 performs a random number update process. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a jackpot for a special symbol) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are an important factor in determining the number of balls dispensed. After executing the process of S319, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S320.

In S320, the main CPU 201 performs a switch input detection process. Details of this switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51. After executing the process of S320, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S321.

In S321, the main CPU 201 executes a winning information command setting process. In this process, a winning information command (payout information) setting process is performed. After executing S321, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S322.

In S322, the main CPU 201 performs a performance control command transmission process. In this process, the command that is scheduled for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300. After executing the process of S322, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S323.

In S323, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing the process of S323, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S324.

In S324, the main CPU 201 performs a performance display monitor control process. In this process, game judgment process, prize ball addition judgment process, display content update process of the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6), etc. are performed. The data stored in this process is stored in an area separate from (outside) the working area in which data necessary for the progress of the game is stored, that is, in an area that is backed up and where the data is not cleared even if, for example, the RAM is cleared. After executing the process of S324, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S325.

In S325, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the registers that were saved in S323. After executing the process of S325, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S326.

In S326, the main CPU 201 performs the process of restoring the protection registers that were saved in S311, and ends the system timer interrupt process.

[1-7-6. Setting control process]
Next, the setting control process performed in S316 during the system timer interrupt process (see Fig. 45) will be described with reference to Fig. 46. Fig. 46 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 46, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the value of the startup control flag indicates a setting change (S331).

If it is determined in S331 that the value of the launch control flag is a value indicating a setting change (if S331 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 performs a setting change process (S332). Details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. After executing the setting change process (S332), the main CPU 201 advances the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S331 that the value of the start-up control flag is not a value indicating a setting change (if S331 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S333.

At S333, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S333 that the value of the launch control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation (if S333 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 performs setting confirmation processing (S334). Details of this setting confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. After executing the setting confirmation processing (S334), the main CPU 201 advances the processing to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S333 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating confirmation of the setting, i.e., that the RAM is to be cleared (if S333 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S337.

In S335, the main CPU 201 executes a setting operation display process. In this process, the currently set setting value is displayed. After executing S335, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S336.

In S336, the main CPU 201 performs a performance control command transmission process. In this process, a command (initialization command, power interruption recovery command, or setting operation command) that is reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S332), setting confirmation process (S334), or startup initial setting process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300. After executing S336, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S337.

In S337, the main CPU 201 performs a WDT (watchdog timer) output process. In this process (WDT output process), a WDT clear register address read process, a WDT clear process, and a WDT restart process are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is performed as appropriate. Then, after processing of S337, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control process, and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45).

[1-7-7. Setting change process]
Next, the setting change process performed in S332 in the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described with reference to Fig. 47. Note that Fig. 47 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (S341). This process is performed by reading the information set in the input port of the I/O port 205.

If it is determined in S341 that the backup clear switch 176 has not been pressed (if S341 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S343. On the other hand, if it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (if S341 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S342.

In S342, the main CPU 201 performs a process of updating the set value within the range. After executing the process of S342, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S343.

In this embodiment, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176 in the setting change process, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, a setting switch may be provided so that the setting value can be changed by operating this setting switch.

In S343, the main CPU 201 determines whether the setting key 174 has been turned off (S343).

If it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 has not been turned off (if S343 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46). On the other hand, if it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 has been turned off (if S343 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S344.

In S344, the main CPU 201 performs a first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. As described above, when this first normal game pre-processing is performed, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. After executing the first normal game pre-processing (S344), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change processing, and returns the processing to the setting control processing (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-8. Setting confirmation process]
Next, the setting confirmation process performed in S334 in the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described with reference to Fig. 48. Note that Fig. 48 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting confirmation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the setting key 174 has been turned off (S351). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S343 in the setting change process described above (see FIG. 47).

If it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (if S351 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 has been turned off (if S351 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 performs a second normal game pre-processing (S352). Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. As described above, when this second normal game pre-processing is performed, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. After the second normal game pre-processing (S352) is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-9. First normal game pre-processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 49, the first normal game pre-processing performed at S344 during the setting change processing (see Fig. 47) will be described. Fig. 49 is a flow chart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that this first normal game pre-processing is also performed as the initial setting processing when the power failure recovery, setting change, and setting confirmation are not performed in the startup initial setting processing (see Fig. 24), that is, when the RAM is cleared.

The main CPU 201 first performs an initialization RAM setting process (S361). In this process, a clearing process (e.g., construction of a working area and address setting, etc.) is performed for the area in the main RAM 203 where backup data is stored when power is interrupted (hereinafter referred to as the "backup area"). Note that the area where data is stored in the performance display monitor control process (see S324 in FIG. 45) is not cleared. In addition, in this process, initial data is generated, and the generated initial data is stored in the constructed working area in the main RAM 203. That is, the data backed up when power is interrupted is erased, and it becomes possible to return the game state to the initialized state. Note that, although not shown, in this process, the game state is returned to the initialized state, making it possible to start playing, and the play permission flag is set to ON, resulting in a play permission state. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S361), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S362.

In S362, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving transmission of an initialization command. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in a performance control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 46). When the process of S362 is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal game pre-processing. When this first normal game pre-processing is ended, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted.

[1-7-10. Second normal game pre-processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 50, the second normal game pre-processing performed in S352 during the setting confirmation process (see Fig. 48) will be described. Fig. 50 is a flow chart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process when the power is restored in the startup initial setting process (see Fig. 24).

The main CPU 201 first performs a RAM setting process when power is restored (S371). In this process, for example, data stored in the backup area in the main RAM 203 is read, and the read data is stored in the work area in the main RAM 203 that has been constructed. The above data is, for example, various information required to proceed with the game, such as game status information, the on/off state of the hit flags for special and normal symbols, and reserved number information. In other words, by restoring the data backed up at the time of power loss to the work area in the main RAM 203 again, it is possible to return to the same game status as before the power loss. Although not shown, in this process, the game can be started by returning to the same game status as before the power loss, and the play permission flag is set to on, resulting in a play permission state. After executing the RAM setting process when power is restored (S371), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S372.

In S372, the main CPU 201 determines whether the probability of winning is increased or decreased. This process is performed by reading data stored in the working area of the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S372 that the special bonus flag is not on (if S372 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S374.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S372 that the high probability flag is ON (if S372 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S373.

In S373, the main CPU 201 sets the high probability notification flag to ON. This is done to notify the state of the high probability notification flag when power is restored after the power outage. If the high probability notification flag is ON, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, a high probability notification LED (not shown) to be lit. This makes it possible to know from the outside whether the high probability flag is ON or not when power is restored after the power outage. After executing the process of S373, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S374.

In S374, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a power interruption recovery command. The power interruption recovery command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in a performance control command transmission process (S336) during the setting control process (see FIG. 46). After executing the process of S374, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal game pre-processing.

[1-7-11. Switch input detection process]
Fig. 51 is a flow chart showing an example of the switch input detection process by the main CPU 201. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-mentioned system timer interrupt process. As shown in Fig. 51, the main CPU 201 executes the start hole winning detection process (S381). After executing the process of S381, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S382. The start hole winning detection process will be described later with reference to Fig. 52.

Next, the main CPU 201 executes a general prize opening passage detection process (S382). In the general prize opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts etc. when a prize is won through the general prize opening 122 is set. After executing the process of S382, the main CPU 201 proceeds to S383.

Next, the main CPU 201 executes a large prize opening passage detection process (S383). In the large prize opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts etc. when a prize is won through the large prize opening 131 is set. After executing the process of S383, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S384.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a ball passage detection process (S384). In the ball passage detection process, various random numbers (such as random numbers for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning symbol) for normal symbols are extracted based on the detection of the passage of the game ball through the pass gate 126 by the pass gate switch 127. The main RAM 203 has normal symbol start memory areas (1) to (4) that hold various random numbers (such as random numbers for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning symbol) extracted based on the passage of the game ball through the pass gate 126 until the start condition for the normal pattern is satisfied. In addition, in the ball passage detection process, it is also determined whether there is free space in the normal symbol start memory area (1) to (4), that is, whether the number of reserved normal symbols extracted based on the passage of the game ball through the pass gate 126 is, for example, less than four. When this process is completed, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process.

[1-7-12. Start gate winning detection process]
52 is a flow chart showing an example of the start hole winning detection process by the main CPU 201. The start hole winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-mentioned switch input detection process.

As shown in FIG. 52, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first start switch 121 (S391).

If it is determined that the first start switch 121 has not detected a game ball (if S391 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S398.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a game ball has been detected by the first start switch 121 (if S391 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S392.

In S392, the main CPU 201 extracts various random number values (for example, a random number value for determining whether the first special symbol is a jackpot, a symbol random number value for the first special symbol, a random number value for determining whether the first special symbol is in a reach state, and a random number value for selecting a performance for the first special symbol, etc.), and performs processing to set payout information according to the winning of the first starting port. After executing processing of S392, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S393.

In S393, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of reserved first special symbols extracted based on the winning of the first start hole 120 is, for example, less than four. The main RAM 203 has the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) in which various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the first start hole 120 are reserved until the start condition is met, and in this process, it is determined whether there is free space in the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4). In addition to the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4), the main RAM 203 also has the first special symbol start memory area (0), which will be described later.

If the number of reserved first special symbols is not less than four, i.e., the upper limit of four (if S393 judges NO), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S398.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved first special symbols is less than four (if S393 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S394.

In S394, the main CPU 201 performs a process to increment the number of reserved first special symbols by 1. After executing the process of S394, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S395.

In S395, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random number values extracted based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting hole 120 in the main RAM 203 until the condition for starting the variation of the first special symbol is met. As a result, the display of the variation of the first special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the condition for starting the variation is met. After executing the process of S395, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S396.

In S396, the main CPU 201 performs a look-ahead determination process. This process is a process that uses the random number value extracted in S392 to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol and perform a win determination process, etc., prior to the special symbol winning determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28). It also determines whether or not the look-ahead flag is set.

The look-ahead determination process may be performed at any time between the extraction of the random number value in S392 and the execution of the special symbol winning determination process. However, in consideration of the fact that the sub-control circuit 300 performs the look-ahead performance before the variable display of the special symbol begins, it is preferable to perform the look-ahead determination process, for example, around the time of S395. After executing S396, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S397.

In S397, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a winning command for the first special pattern. The winning command for the first special pattern is a command that includes information for increasing the number of reserved first special patterns by 1, information on the variation pattern of the first special pattern (i.e., the variation pattern command for the special pattern), and the winning command for the first special pattern reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45). After executing the process of S397, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S398.

In S398, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start switch 141.

If it is determined that the second start port switch 141 has not detected a game ball (if S398 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 ends the start port winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, if it is determined that a game ball has been detected by the second start switch 141 (if S398 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S399.

In S399, the main CPU 201 extracts various random number values (for example, a random number value for determining whether the second special symbol is a jackpot, a symbol random number value for the second special symbol, a random number value for determining whether the second special symbol is in a reach state, and a random number value for selecting a performance for the second special symbol, etc.), and performs processing to set payout information according to winning the second starting port. After executing processing in S399, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S400.

In S400, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of reserved second special symbols extracted based on winning at the second starting hole 140 is, for example, less than four.

The main RAM 203 has the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (4) in which various random number values extracted based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 140 are reserved until the start conditions are met, and in this process, it is determined whether there is free space in the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (4). The main RAM 203 also has the second special symbol start memory area (0) in addition to the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (4), but this will be described later.

If the number of reserved second special symbols is not less than four, i.e., the upper limit of four (if S400 judges NO), the main CPU 201 ends the start hole winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols is less than four (if S400 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S401.

In S401, the main CPU 201 performs a process to increment the number of reserved second special symbols by 1. After executing the process of S401, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S402.

In S402, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random number values extracted based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 140 in the main RAM 203 until the condition for starting the variation of the second special symbol is met. As a result, the display of the variation of the second special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the condition for starting the variation is met. After executing the process of S402, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S403.

In S403, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a winning command for the second special symbol (S403). The winning command for the second special symbol is a command that includes information for increasing the number of reserved second special symbols by 1 and information on the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the winning command for the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S403, the main CPU 201 ends the start hole winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

[1-8. Sub-control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 53, the sub-CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S501). In this initialization process, for example, RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S502.

The above-mentioned initialization process (S501) is executed when the power is turned on or the backup is cleared, and after the power is turned on, the processes of S502 to S508 described below are executed repeatedly.

In S502, the sub-CPU 301 performs a read process on the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). This process is performed by reading the command sent from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) that is set in the command input port 308. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S503.

In S503, the sub-CPU 301 executes a command analysis process. In this process, the command read in the process of S502 is analyzed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S504.

In S504, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation mode determination process. In this process, for example, the display presentation mode to be displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 4 and FIG. 6) and the sound presentation mode to be output from the speaker 32 (see FIG. 6) are determined based on the winning command sent from the main CPU 201.

In the performance mode determination process (S504), the sub-CPU 301 generates an animation request including designation information for the performance content, and generates various requests (e.g., drawing requests, sound requests, lamp requests, and prop requests) for operating various performance devices based on the generated animation request. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S505.

In S505, the sub-CPU 301 executes a drawing control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control to display an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on the message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S506.

In S506, the sub-CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305 (see FIG. 6). The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to output audio from the speaker 32 based on the message (sound request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S507.

In S507, the sub-CPU 301 executes an LED control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6). Based on the message (LED request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to light up or blink all or a portion of the LEDs that make up the LED group 46. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S508.

In S508, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends a reel request to the reel control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6). Based on the message (reel request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the reel control circuit 307 performs drive control to operate the performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the reels that make up the performance reel group 58. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the sub-control circuit main process.

[1-9. Specific example of the performance mode determination process by the sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 (more specifically, the sub-CPU 301) performs a presentation mode determination process (see S504 in FIG. 53) based on the winning command sent from the main control circuit 200.

As one of the various processes performed in the presentation mode determination process, the sub-CPU 301 performs, for example, a sub-variation presentation pattern determination process that determines the presentation pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "sub-variation presentation pattern") of the sub-variation presentation corresponding to the current special symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as the "variation"), and a look-ahead presentation pattern determination process that determines the presentation pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "look-ahead presentation pattern") of the look-ahead presentation. In addition, the presentation mode determination process also performs various presentation mode determination processes related to the progress of the game, such as the presentation mode of a countdown presentation that suggests that the ceiling counter is approaching the ceiling value, and the presentation mode of a B time-saving play state transition presentation that suggests that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value.

The sub-variation presentation pattern determination process is performed based on the results of the special symbol hit determination process. The sub-variation presentation pattern is a presentation pattern (e.g., decorative symbol variation pattern, character presentation pattern, etc.) that is performed by the sub-CPU 301 in the display area of the display device 7 in conjunction with the variable display of the special symbol as a presentation that indicates the expected outcome of the variation.

In the sub-variable performance, depending on the sub-variable performance pattern being executed, it is possible to show that the expectation level for the result of the special pattern winning determination process is maintained or increased as time passes from when the variable display of the special pattern starts to when the special pattern stops.

The sub-variable performance patterns include, for example, time-saving hit type reaches A, B, C, jackpot hit type reaches A, B, C, and common reaches A, B, C, D, E, etc., as shown in FIG. 54 described below. As described above, time-saving hit type reaches A, B, C are reach performances that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol (see S93 in FIG. 28) may be a time-saving hit (no possibility of a jackpot). Jackpot hit type reaches A, B, C are reach performances that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol may be a jackpot (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Common reaches A, B, C, D, E are reach performances that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol may be either a time-saving hit or a jackpot.

For example, if the timing of executing a countdown effect that indicates the timing of transition to the B time-saving game state overlaps with the timing of executing a reach effect, the sub-CPU 301 may give priority to executing one of the effects.

The pre-reading performance pattern determination process is performed based on, for example, the variation pattern of the special symbol determined as a result of the pre-reading judgment process. The pre-reading performance is a performance pattern performed by the sub-CPU 301 in the display area of the display device 7 while in a pending state (i.e., after a winning entry into the first starting hole 120, until the starting information such as various random numbers extracted based on this winning entry is provided to the winning judgment process of the special symbol (the variable display of the special symbol begins)) as a performance indicating the degree of expectation for the result of the pre-reading judgment process.

Depending on the look-ahead performance pattern being executed, when in a pending state, the look-ahead performance can show that the expectation level for the result of the look-ahead determination process is maintained or increased as time passes (more specifically, as the variable display of the previously pending start information progresses).

The preview effect is performed, for example, by using a pending image displayed on the display device 7. The pending image is an image that shows the current pending status.

The look-ahead performance pattern includes a look-ahead winning type performance pattern that can suggest the expected value for the result type (whether it is a time-saving winning or a jackpot) of the look-ahead judgment process, i.e., the special pattern winning judgment process, and a look-ahead expectation value performance pattern that can suggest the expected value for the result of the special pattern winning judgment process being a winning (jackpot or time-saving winning). In other words, the look-ahead performance can suggest both or either of the expected value for the result type of the special pattern winning judgment process and the expected value for the result of the special pattern winning judgment process being a winning. In addition, in the look-ahead performance pattern determination process (see FIG. 59 described below), a look-ahead winning type performance pattern determination process (see S3006 in FIG. 59 described below) and a look-ahead expectation value performance pattern determination process (see S3008, S3009 in FIG. 59 described below) are performed. Specific examples of the look-ahead hit type presentation pattern, the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern, the look-ahead hit type presentation pattern determination process, and the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination process will be described later.

[1-9-1. Sub-variable performance pattern determination process]
First, the sub-variation presentation pattern determination process will be described. Figure 54 is an example of a sub-variation presentation pattern determination table (detailed description omitted) in a game state where the time-saving flag is off (normal game state). This sub-variation presentation pattern determination table is stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 of the first pachinko game machine. The program ROM 302 also stores a sub-variation presentation pattern determination table in a game state where the time-saving flag is on (high-probability time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state), but the description will be omitted here.

The sub-CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation presentation pattern determination table in the normal game state of FIG. 54, and determines the sub-variation presentation pattern (shown as "variation pattern" in FIG. 54) to be displayed on the display device 7 as the variation presentation pattern corresponding to the variation based on the variation pattern command of the special symbol sent from the main control circuit 200. As described above, in this embodiment, the sub-variation presentation patterns include time-saving hit type reaches A, B, and C, big hit type reaches A, B, and C, and common reaches A, B, C, D, and E.

As described above, the time-saving hit system reaches A, B, and C are reach effects that indicate the possibility of a time-saving hit, and are reach effects that allow the player to understand the possibility of a time-saving hit from the appearance. The time-saving hit system reach A is not displayed if the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern is a miss or a big hit, and is a time-saving hit guaranteed reach effect that is displayed only when it is a "time-saving hit" (see FIG. 15). This time-saving hit system reach A is not a sub-variable performance pattern for the pre-reading target, but is not limited to this, and may be a sub-variable performance pattern for the pre-reading mode. The time-saving hit system reach B and the time-saving hit system reach C have the same or approximately the same performance mode in appearance. However, while the time-saving hit system reach B is not a sub-variable performance pattern for the pre-reading target, the time-saving hit system reach C is a sub-variable performance pattern for the pre-reading target (see the "pre-reading flag" column in FIG. 15, FIG. 54, and FIG. 55 described below).

As described above, the jackpot-related reaches A, B, and C are reach effects that indicate the possibility of a jackpot, and are reach effects that allow the player to grasp the possibility of a jackpot from the outside. The jackpot-related reach A is a jackpot-guaranteed reach effect that is not displayed if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss or a "time-saving hit" and is displayed only if the result is a "jackpot" (see FIG. 15). This jackpot-related reach A is not a sub-variation performance pattern that is a pre-reading target, but is not limited to this and may be a sub-variation performance pattern that is a pre-reading mode. The appearance of the jackpot-related reach B and the jackpot-related reach C is the same or approximately the same. However, while the jackpot-related reach B is not a sub-variation performance pattern that is a pre-reading target, the jackpot-related reach C is a sub-variation performance pattern that is a pre-reading target (see the "pre-reading flag" column in FIG. 15).

As described above, common reaches A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects that indicate the possibility of either a jackpot or a time-saving hit, and are reach effect modes that make it difficult to know from the outside whether there is a possibility of a time-saving hit or a jackpot. Common reach A is a hit (jackpot, time-saving hit) guaranteed reach effect that is not displayed if the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern is a miss, and is displayed only if there is a jackpot or a "time-saving hit" (see Figure 15). Common reach B and common reach C have the same or nearly the same appearance. Furthermore, common reach D is an effect that develops from common reach C to time-saving hit reach C. Furthermore, common reach E is an effect that develops from common reach C to jackpot reach C. Note that common reach A and common reach B are not sub-variable performance patterns that are subject to pre-reading, whereas common reach C, common reach D, and common reach E are sub-variable performance patterns that are subject to pre-reading (see the "Pre-reading flag" column in Figure 15).

In this way, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 54) and determines the sub-variation performance pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the main CPU 201. Then, the sub-CPU 301 controls the display device 7 to display the determined sub-variation performance pattern.

[1-9-2. Pre-reading performance pattern determination process]
Next, a pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination process and a pre-reading expected value presentation pattern determination process, which are performed as the pre-reading presentation pattern determination process, will be described.

In addition, the work RAM 303 (see FIG. 6) is provided with the first sub-reserved area (0), the first sub-reserved area (1), the first sub-reserved area (2), the first sub-reserved area (3), and the first sub-reserved area (4) as areas corresponding to the first special symbol start memory area (0), the first special symbol start memory area (1), the first special symbol start memory area (2), the first special symbol start memory area (3), and the first special symbol start memory area (4) provided in the main RAM 203, respectively. Various reserved information related to the extracted random number value is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) and the first sub-reserved area (1) to the first sub-reserved area (4). In addition, the first special symbol start memory area (0) and the first sub-reserved area (0) store information corresponding to the fluctuation. When the sub-CPU 301 receives a winning command for the first start port winning, it stores the received information in the first sub-reserve area that corresponds to the current first special symbol start memory area.

In addition, the work RAM 303 is provided with a second sub-reserve area (0), a second sub-reserve area (1), a second sub-reserve area (2), a second sub-reserve area (3), and a second sub-reserve area (4) as areas corresponding to the second special pattern start memory area (0), the second special pattern start memory area (1), the second special pattern start memory area (2), the second special pattern start memory area (3), and the second special pattern start memory area (4) provided in the main RAM 203, respectively.

In this embodiment, the pre-reading performance is performed for the first special symbol in the normal game state, but it is not limited to this and may be performed in other game states (e.g., high probability time-saving game state, low probability time-saving game state), or may be performed for the second special symbol.

The pre-reading performance is performed, for example, by using pending images displayed in the display area of the display device 7. The display area of the display device 7 has the following areas for displaying pending images: a zeroth area corresponding to the first sub-pending area (0), a first pending area corresponding to the first sub-pending area (1), a second pending area corresponding to the first sub-pending area (2), a third pending area corresponding to the first sub-pending area (3), and a fourth pending area corresponding to the first sub-pending area (4).

[1-9-2-1. Tables referenced in the pre-reading winning type performance pattern determination process]
The tables referenced in the pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination process will be described below.

The forms of the reserved images in which the pre-reading performance is executed with the determined pre-reading hit type performance pattern include a time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form that indicates that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit, a jackpot type pre-reading performance form that indicates that there is a possibility of a jackpot, and a common hit type pre-reading performance form that indicates that there is a possibility of both a time-saving hit and a jackpot.

The predictive hit type presentation pattern is a presentation pattern that can suggest a change in the expected value for the result type of the special symbol hit determination process by changing the form of the reserved image, for example, from a common hit type predictive presentation form to a time-saving hit type predictive presentation form, or from a common hit type predictive presentation form to a jackpot type predictive presentation form.

Figure 55 is an example of a pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table number determination table. This Figure 55 shows only the variation patterns that are the pre-reading targets among the variation patterns shown in Figure 54. Also, Figure 56 is an example of a pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table. These tables are stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in the pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table number determination table in FIG. 55, when the sub-CPU 301 receives a fluctuation pattern in which the pre-reading flag is set, the sub-CPU 301 determines the pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table number, for example, based on the fluctuation pattern and the reserved number. The reserved number here includes the start information to be pre-read. In other words, when the start information extracted based on the winning of the first start port 120 is reserved, the reserved number after the reservation corresponds to the reserved number shown in FIG. 55.

For example, if the fluctuation pattern is "03H" and the reserved number is "3", the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number is determined to be "3". Also, for example, if the fluctuation pattern is "0EH" and the reserved number is "2", the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number is determined to be "22".

When the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number is determined, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table in FIG. 56 to determine the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern. In more detail, as shown in the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table in FIG. 56, for example, the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined based on the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number and the sub-presentation selection random number value 1.

In FIG. 56, for the sake of convenience, the "pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table number" is shown as the "SASPT number" and the "pre-reading winning type presentation pattern" is shown as the "SAS presentation pattern." The random number value 1 for sub-presentation selection is a random number value extracted by the sub-CPU 301 based on a specified trigger, such as when a special symbol variation pattern command is received.

For example, if the table number for determining the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is "3" and the extracted random number value 1 for selecting sub-presentation is "55", the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined to be "07H". Also, if the table number for determining the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is "7" and the extracted random number value 1 for selecting sub-presentation is "77", the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined to be "16H".

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the Notes (Reserved) column in Figure 56 indicate the first to fourth reserved areas, respectively.

In addition, in each of the "1" to "4" columns of the notes (response to hold) in Figure 56, the "A" shown in correspondence with the look-ahead hit type presentation pattern determination table number and the random value 1 for sub-presentation selection indicates that the hold image is displayed in a time-saving hit type look-ahead presentation format, which indicates that the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern may be a time-saving hit. When the hold image is displayed in a time-saving hit type look-ahead presentation format, it can be seen from the outside that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit.

In addition, in each of the "1" to "4" columns of the Notes (Reserved) in Figure 56, the "B" shown in correspondence with the look-ahead hit type presentation pattern determination table number and the random value 1 for sub-presentation selection indicates that the reserved image is displayed in a jackpot-type look-ahead presentation format, which indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a jackpot. When the reserved image is displayed in a jackpot-type look-ahead presentation format, it can be seen from the outside that there is a possibility of a jackpot.

In addition, in each of the "1" to "4" columns of the Notes (Reserved) in Figure 56, the "C" shown in correspondence with the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number and the random value 1 for sub-presentation selection indicates that the reserved image is displayed in a common-hit pre-reading presentation format, which indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is either a time-saving hit or a jackpot. When the reserved image is displayed in a common-hit pre-reading presentation format, it is difficult to tell from the outside whether there is a possibility of a time-saving hit or a jackpot.

For example, if the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined to be "07H", the common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C" is displayed in the third reserved area, and the common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C" is also displayed in the second reserved area after shifting from the third reserved area. Then, when shifting from the second reserved area to the first reserved area, the common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C" changes to the time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form "A", and the time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form "A" is displayed in the first reserved area.

In addition, if the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined to be, for example, "16H", the common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C" is displayed in the third reserved area. Then, when shifting from the third reserved area to the second reserved area, the common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C" changes to the big hit type pre-reading presentation form "B", and the big hit type pre-reading presentation form "B" is displayed in the second reserved area and in the first reserved area after being shifted from the second reserved area.

That is, the pre-reading hit type performance pattern includes the following patterns A) to E) as shown in Fig. 56. In this embodiment, the pattern of changing from the big hit type pre-reading performance form "B" to the time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form "A" and the pattern of changing from the time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form "A" to the big short hit pre-reading performance form "B" are not included in the pre-reading hit type performance pattern, but these patterns may be included in the pre-reading hit type performance pattern.
(i) A pre-reading time-saving hit presentation pattern in which a pre-reading presentation form for a time-saving hit is displayed at the time of being put on hold, and the presentation form does not change thereafter, and a pre-reading presentation form for a time-saving hit is displayed (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern "09H").
(b) A pre-reading jackpot presentation pattern in which a jackpot-type pre-reading presentation form is displayed at the time of being put on hold, and the presentation form does not change thereafter, and the jackpot-type pre-reading presentation form is displayed (for example, pre-reading jackpot type presentation pattern "17H").
(c) At the time of being put on hold, a common hit type pre-reading presentation form is displayed, and then it changes to a time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form, pre-reading common hit presentation pattern A (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern "24H").
ii) When placed on hold, it is displayed in a common win type pre-reading presentation format, and then changes to a jackpot type pre-reading presentation format, a pre-reading common win presentation pattern B (for example, pre-reading win type presentation pattern "12H").
(e) When placed on hold, the display is in a common hit type pre-reading presentation format, and the presentation format does not change thereafter, and the common hit type pre-reading presentation format is displayed. Pre-reading common hit presentation pattern C (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern "06H")

In this way, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number determination table (see, for example, FIG. 55) and determines the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number (SASPT number) based on the fluctuation pattern and the number of reserved items. Then, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table (see FIG. 56) and determines the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern (SAS presentation pattern) based on the determined pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number (SASPT number) and the random number value 1 for sub-presentation selection.

In FIG. 56, the time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form "A" is displayed at the time of reservation, and the pre-reading hit type performance pattern that changes to the jackpot type pre-reading performance form "B" after that is not shown, but the pre-reading hit type performance pattern that changes from the time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form "A" to the jackpot type pre-reading performance form "B" in this way may be determined by the sub-CPU 301. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest that the pre-reading performance can provide to the player.

In addition, in Fig. 56, the big win type pre-reading performance form "B" is a big win type pre-reading performance form that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a big win (i.e., there is a possibility of a miss), as described above, but in addition to this, a big win confirmation pre-reading performance form that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big win may be displayed. In this case, the pre-reading hit type performance pattern determined by the sub-CPU 301 may include any or all of the following pre-reading type performance patterns E) to H).
(e) A pre-reading jackpot confirmed presentation form is displayed at the time of being put on hold, and the presentation form does not change thereafter, and the pre-reading jackpot confirmed presentation form is displayed.
(d) When the display is put on hold, other pre-reading presentation forms (for example, a time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form "A", a jackpot type pre-reading presentation form "B", a common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C", etc.) are displayed, and then the pre-reading jackpot confirmation presentation form changes to a jackpot confirmation pre-reading presentation form, pre-reading jackpot confirmation presentation pattern B.
(c) At the time of being put on hold, other pre-reading performance forms (for example, a time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form "A", a common hit type pre-reading performance form "C", etc.) are displayed, then a jackpot type pre-reading performance form "B" is displayed, and then further, a pre-reading jackpot confirmed performance pattern C which changes to a jackpot confirmed pre-reading performance form.

In addition, in FIG. 56, among the time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form "A", the jackpot type pre-reading performance form "B", and the common hit type pre-reading performance form "C", the common hit type pre-reading performance form "C" is most frequently displayed at the time of reservation, but this is not limited to this. For example, the time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form "A" may be displayed most frequently at the time of reservation, or the jackpot type pre-reading performance form "B" may be displayed most frequently at the time of reservation. Furthermore, the common hit type pre-reading performance form "C" may be displayed least frequently at the time of reservation.

In addition, in FIG. 56, a random number value of 1 for selecting sub-effects within a predetermined range is assigned to all "pre-reading winning type effect pattern determination table numbers (SASPT numbers)", but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to not assign a random number value for selecting sub-effects to only certain SASPT numbers (i.e., the allocation rate for certain SASPT numbers is set to 0 so that they are not selected).

[1-9-2-2. Tables referenced in the process of determining the expected value effect pattern ahead of time]
Next, a table to be referred to in the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination process will be described.

Figure 57 is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a win occurs) that is referenced when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot." Also, Figure 58 is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a miss occurs) that is referenced when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss.

The form of the reserved image in which the look-ahead performance is executed in the determined look-ahead expected value performance pattern differs depending on the expected value for a win (time-saving win, jackpot).

When a reserved image is displayed as a time-saving hit-reading performance format, for example, the reserved image, which is usually displayed as a triangle, can be changed in shape to show a change in expected value, such as "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star." In this case, the expected value is lowest when the reserved image is a square, and highest when the image is a star.

In addition, when a reserved image is displayed as a jackpot-type pre-reading performance, for example, the reserved image, which is usually displayed in white, can be changed in color to show a change in expected value, such as "blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow." In this case, when the reserved image is blue, the expected value is the lowest, and when the reserved image is rainbow, the expected value is the highest.

In addition, although details will be described later, when the reserved image is displayed as a common win type pre-reading presentation format that indicates the possibility of either a jackpot or a time-saving hit, the reserved image may be displayed, for example, with both a color indicating the expected value level for a jackpot and a shape indicating the expected value level for a time-saving hit, or it may be displayed in a dedicated common win type pre-reading presentation format.

Although the reserved image for which the look-ahead performance is performed can change from a performance form with a relatively low expected value to a performance form with a relatively high expected value, it is preferable not to change from a performance form with a relatively high expected value to a performance form with a relatively low expected value. In addition, when changing the performance form of the reserved image, it is not necessarily necessary to change one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star" or "blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow", but it may be changed, for example, from "pentagon → circle" or "yellow → rainbow". In addition, it is not necessarily necessary to start the reserved image form with a square or blue, which have the lowest expected value, but it may start with a circle or red, for example.

Note that the numbers "1" to "4" shown in the Notes (Reserved) column in Figure 57 indicate the first to fourth reserved areas, respectively, just like in Figure 56.

In addition, in each of the "1" to "4" columns in the "Notes (Reserved)" column in FIG. 57, the "0" to "5" shown in correspondence with the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number and the random number value 2 for selecting sub-presentations indicate the expected value for a hit (time-saving hit, big hit). For example, the above-mentioned "triangle" and "white" correspond to "0", the above-mentioned "square" and "blue" correspond to "1", the above-mentioned "pentagon" and "yellow" correspond to "2", the above-mentioned "hexagon" and "green" correspond to "3", the above-mentioned "circle" and "red" correspond to "4", and the above-mentioned "star" and "rainbow" correspond to "5".

Hereinafter, in the "1" to "4" columns of the Notes (Reserved) column in Figure 57, the "0" to "5" shown in correspondence with the pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table number and the random number value 2 for selecting sub-presentations will be referred to as expected value levels "0" to "5".

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot", the look-ahead expectation value presentation pattern is determined based on, for example, the reserved number and the random number value 2 for selecting the sub-effect, as shown in the look-ahead expectation value presentation pattern determination table (when a hit) in FIG. 57. Similarly, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the look-ahead expectation value presentation pattern is determined based on, for example, the reserved number and the random number value 2 for selecting the sub-effect, as shown in the look-ahead expectation value presentation pattern determination table (when a miss) in FIG. 58. The random number value 2 for selecting the sub-effect is a random number value extracted by the sub-CPU 301 based on a specified trigger, such as when a special symbol change pattern command is received. Note that in FIG. 57 and FIG. 58, only the reserved number values of "1" to "3" are illustrated, and the case where the reserved number is "4" is omitted for convenience.

For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the reserved number is "3", and the random number value 2 for selecting sub-effects is "750", the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "43H". If the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "43H", for example, the expected value level is "2" in the third reserved area, the expected value level changes from "2" to "3" when shifting from the third reserved area to the second reserved area, and the expected value level changes from "3" to "5" when shifting from the second reserved area to the first reserved area.

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the reserved number is "3", and the random number value 2 for selecting sub-effects is "680", the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "3FH". If the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "3FH", for example, the expected value level is "2" in the third reserved area, the expected value level is "2" in the second reserved area, and when shifting from the second reserved area to the first reserved area, the expected value level changes from "2" to "4".

In this way, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a win occurs) (see FIG. 57) or the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a miss occurs) (see FIG. 58) based on the result of the special pattern hit determination process, and determines the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern based on the number of reserved numbers and the random number value 2 for selecting sub-presentations.

In addition, if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot," the allocation rate of each pre-reading expected value presentation pattern is not limited to the allocation rate shown in FIG. 57 and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss," a bias is created by increasing the selection rate of pre-reading expected value presentation patterns with relatively low expected value levels (for example, "01H" or "0BH"), but this is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate, for example by distributing them evenly.

In addition, in Figures 57 and 58, a predetermined range of random number values 2 for selecting sub-effects are assigned to all "look-ahead expected value performance patterns", but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to not assign random number values 2 for selecting sub-effects to only certain "look-ahead expected value performance patterns" (i.e., the allocation rate of a certain "look-ahead expected value performance pattern" is set to 0 so that it is not selected).

[1-9-3. Pre-reading performance pattern determination process]
Next, the look-ahead performance pattern determination process executed by the sub-CPU 301 with reference to each table of Figures 54 to 58 will be described with reference to Figure 59. Figure 59 is an example of a flowchart showing the look-ahead performance pattern determination process executed by the sub-CPU 301. As described above, in this embodiment, the sub-CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance pattern determination process only in a normal game state in which hitting from the left is considered to be a regular game mode, but is not limited to this.

The sub-CPU 301 first determines whether or not a winning command has been received from the main CPU 201 (S3001).

If no winning command has been received (if S3001 returns NO), the sub-CPU 301 ends the pre-reading performance pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a winning command has been received (if S3001 returns a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3002.

In S3002, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether there are currently no pending items to be pre-read, i.e., whether a pre-read performance is being performed for the current pending items. If there are multiple pending items, the pre-read performance may be performed for multiple pending images, but in this embodiment, the pre-read performance is performed for only one pending image.

If a look-ahead performance is being performed for the current hold (if S3002 is judged as NO), the sub-CPU 301 ends the look-ahead performance pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if a look-ahead performance is not being performed for the current hold (if S3002 returns YES), the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3003.

In S3003, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the variation pattern information received in the winning command is subject to pre-reading (see FIG. 55).

If the variation pattern information received in the winning command is not subject to pre-reading (if S3003 is judged as NO), the sub-CPU 301 ends the pre-reading performance pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern information received in the winning command is to be pre-read (if S3003 returns YES), the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3004.

In S3004, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is greater than the upper limit number of reserved balls (e.g., 4 or 8). This process is to avoid a transition to time-saving game state B before the variable display of the special symbol is executed for the reserved ball for which the pre-reading performance has been executed, despite the pre-reading performance having been executed. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest. After executing this process, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S3005.

In this embodiment, in S3004, it is determined whether the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is greater than the maximum number that can be reserved, but this is not limited to this, and if the fluctuation pattern information received in the winning command is a target for pre-reading (if S3003 is determined to be YES), it may be determined whether the difference is greater than the number of reserved balls including the target for pre-reading. In addition, the ceiling value and ceiling counter may receive information as a command from the main CPU 201, or may be managed by the sub-CPU 301 separately from the main CPU 201.

In S3005, the sub-CPU 301 performs a pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number determination process. In this process, the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number determination table (see FIG. 55) is referenced to determine the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number. After executing this process, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3006.

In S3006, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process for determining a pre-reading hit type presentation pattern. In this process, the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined by referring to the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table (see FIG. 56). After executing this process, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3007.

In S3007, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot". In this process, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined based on the fluctuation pattern information received in the winning command sent from the main CPU 201, and if the result is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot", a YES determination is made. However, this is not limited to this, and a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot" may be determined by sending hit/loss information for the special symbol from the main CPU 201 to the sub-CPU 301.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot" (YES determination in S3007), the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3008.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is neither a "time-saving hit" nor a "jackpot" (S3007 judges NO), the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3009.

In S3008, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process for determining a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern (when a win occurs). In this process, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a win occurs) in FIG. 57 to determine a look-ahead presentation pattern (when a win occurs). After executing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the look-ahead presentation pattern determination process.

In addition, in S3009, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process for determining a look-ahead performance pattern when the result is a loss. In this process, the look-ahead expected value performance pattern determination table (when the result is a loss) in FIG. 58 is referenced, and a look-ahead expected value performance pattern (when the result is a loss) is determined. After executing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the look-ahead performance pattern determination process.

[1-9-4. Effects of pre-reading performance, examples of pre-reading performance extensions]
In the above-mentioned look-ahead performance, not only is it interesting to see whether the reserved image changes into a big win type look-ahead performance form or a time-saving hit type look-ahead performance form, but it is also possible to change the expected value level of a hit (big win, time-saving hit), and it is possible to increase interest by performing a new performance that has never been performed before. Note that the timing for changing the reserved image form is not limited to when the reserved image shifts, and may be, for example, during the variable display of the special pattern of the change.

In addition, the form of the reserved image used as a pre-reading effect (for example, the form of the reserved image displayed within the range of the first sub-reserved area (4) to the first sub-reserved area (1)) may be determined at the time of winning at the first starting port 120, and the form of the reserved image in the variable display of the special pattern of the change may be determined at the start of the variable display of the special pattern.

By the way, when comparing the probability of being determined as a variation pattern in which a look-ahead performance is executed in a look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern (see, for example, "03H" and "0EH" in FIG. 54) with the probability of being determined as a variation pattern in which a look-ahead performance is executed in a look-ahead jackpot performance pattern (see, for example, "06H" and "11H" in FIG. 54), the former probability is higher (see, for example, FIG. 15). In other words, the execution rate of the look-ahead performance is higher in the look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern than in the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern. Therefore, compared to conventional pachinko gaming machines in which a look-ahead performance is executed only when there is a possibility of a jackpot, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the look-ahead performance while suppressing the decrease in the expected value of a win, and to increase interest.

The execution rate of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern may be higher than the execution rate of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead time-saving performance pattern. In this case, when the look-ahead performance is executed, the expected value for a jackpot is higher than the expected value for a time-saving hit, making it possible to increase interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a game state where the probability change flag is off (in this embodiment, the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state), a "time-saving hit" can be won in the hit determination process of the special symbol (see FIG. 10). However, in this embodiment, a pre-reading performance is performed in the normal game state, but not in the low-probability time-saving game state. Even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving game state is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving times is unlikely to increase in either the case where the time-saving game state C is superimposed on the time-saving game state A, or the case where the time-saving game state C is not superimposed on the time-saving game state A. Therefore, by making it as much as possible for the player to not know that he or she may have won a "time-saving hit" in the time-saving game state A, it is possible to reduce the disappointment given to the player by winning a "time-saving hit," and to suppress a decrease in interest.

However, it is not essential to prevent the pre-reading effect from being performed in the low-probability time-saving play state, and the pre-reading effect may be performed not only in the normal play state but also in the low-probability time-saving play state and the high-probability low-time-saving play state. Also, in this embodiment, the pre-reading effect is performed only for the first special symbol, but it is not limited to this, and the pre-reading effect may also be performed for the second special symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, a time-saving hit type reach, a jackpot type reach, or a common reach can be executed as the sub-variation presentation pattern. In this embodiment, as can be seen by referring to FIG. 15 and FIG. 54 to FIG. 56, when the sub-CPU 301 executes a look-ahead presentation with a look-ahead time-saving hit presentation pattern, it executes a time-saving hit type reach as the sub-variation presentation pattern, and does not execute a jackpot type reach. In addition, when the sub-CPU 301 executes a look-ahead presentation with a look-ahead jackpot presentation pattern, it executes a jackpot type reach as the sub-variation presentation pattern, and does not execute a time-saving hit type reach.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the sub-CPU 301 executes a look-ahead performance with a look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern or a look-ahead common hit performance pattern, it can execute a time-saving hit type reach as a sub-variable performance pattern. However, when the sub-CPU 301 executes a look-ahead performance with a look-ahead big hit performance pattern, it does not execute a time-saving hit type reach as a sub-variable performance pattern.

In addition, regardless of whether a pre-reading jackpot presentation pattern (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern (SAS presentation pattern) "37H" shown in FIG. 56), a pre-reading time-saving hit presentation pattern (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern "29H" shown in FIG. 56), or a pre-reading common hit presentation pattern (for example, pre-reading presentation pattern (SAS presentation pattern) "27H" shown in FIG. 56) is executed, the sub-CPU 301 may execute a common reach (for example, the sub-variable presentation patterns "0AH" and "0BH" shown in FIG. 55) as a sub-variable presentation pattern.

Also, a presentation pattern may be set in which a time-saving hit type reach is executed, and after the time-saving hit type reach indicates a miss, a big win type reach is executed. In this case, the player can play with a sense of anticipation until the end, wondering whether or not a high-profit big win type reach will be executed, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Also, as shown in FIG. 15, in the variable display of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "target variation") performed for start information in which a pre-reading effect has been executed, if a common reach E is executed, an effect common to the common reach C is displayed, and then it is possible to transition to an effect common to the jackpot reach C. On the other hand, if no effect common to the common reach C is executed, it will not transition to the jackpot reach C. Similarly, in the target variation, if a common reach E is executed, an effect common to the common reach C is displayed, and then it is possible to transition to an effect common to the time-saving hit reach C. On the other hand, if no effect common to the common reach C is executed, it will not transition to the time-saving hit reach C.

In this embodiment, the look-ahead performance is performed only for one reserved image (see S3002). Therefore, even if a look-ahead performance mode (hereinafter referred to as a "jackpot look-ahead performance") that indicates that the result of the special pattern hit determination process may be a jackpot has already been performed, the sub-CPU 301 will not perform a new look-ahead performance. Note that even in a pachinko gaming machine in which look-ahead performance is performed for multiple reserved images, it is preferable not to perform a new look-ahead performance if a jackpot look-ahead performance has already been performed.

For example, if there are multiple reserves including one reserve (hereinafter referred to as the "first reserve") and another reserve (hereinafter referred to as the "second reserve") in which the variable display of the special pattern starts after the first reserve, and a look-ahead jackpot performance pattern (for example, the look-ahead hit type performance pattern "17H" in FIG. 56) is being executed in the first reserve, even if a look-ahead performance is executed in the second reserve, the look-ahead performance in the second reserve may be meaningless. In particular, if a jackpot is derived for the first reserve and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, and the game state is controlled to an A time-saving game state after the end of this jackpot game state, even if a "time-saving hit" is derived for the second reserve, the player may not be able to receive the benefit of this "time-saving hit", and in this case, the interest will be significantly reduced. Therefore, if a jackpot look-ahead performance has already been executed, it is preferable not to execute a look-ahead performance for a reserve that is consumed after the reserve in which the jackpot look-ahead performance is being executed.

In addition, even if the first hold is a jackpot hold (a hold from which a jackpot is derived), if a look-ahead performance has not been performed for the first hold, the look-ahead performance may or may not be performed for the second hold.

In addition, even if a false jackpot pre-reading effect (for example, pre-reading jackpot type effect pattern "53H" in FIG. 56) is being executed in the first hold, it is preferable not to execute the pre-reading effect in the second hold.

However, if a time-saving hit pre-reading effect (for example, the pre-reading hit type effect pattern "05H" in FIG. 56) is being executed in the first hold, a jackpot pre-reading effect or a time-saving hit pre-reading effect may be executed in the second hold. This is because even if a time-saving hit is derived for the first hold, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot that is more profitable than that.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol does not include a small hit, but in a pachinko gaming machine in which the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol includes a small hit, even if a small hit pre-reading effect is executed in the first reserve, a big hit pre-reading effect or a time-saving hit pre-reading effect may be executed in the second reserve. This is because even if a small hit is derived for the first reserve, it is possible to make the player expect a big hit that is more profitable than that.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small hit, and a look-ahead performance mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a small hit (hereinafter referred to as a "small hit look-ahead performance") is executed in the first hold, a big hit look-ahead performance or a time-saving hit look-ahead performance may be executed in the second hold. This is because, even if a small hit is derived for the first hold, it is possible to make the player expect a small hit that is more profitable than that.

In addition, if, for example, a winning ball is entered into the first starting hole 120 during the execution of a jackpot-related reach as a sub-variable performance pattern, and start information is reserved, the sub-CPU 301 will not execute a look-ahead performance for this reservation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sub-CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance only in the normal game state. Therefore, when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the jackpot display mode is derived, if the start information determined to be a "time-saving hit" by the look-ahead judgment made by the main CPU 201 is reserved (this reservation is referred to as a "specific reservation" in this paragraph), whether the look-ahead performance is executed for this specific reservation or not, the sub-CPU 301 will not execute the look-ahead performance for the specific reservation after the jackpot game state ends unless the normal game state is in effect. However, the sub-CPU 301 may be able to not execute the look-ahead performance for the specific reservation even if the normal game state is in effect after the jackpot game state ends. Furthermore, even in a pachinko game machine that executes a look-ahead performance in a game state other than the normal game state (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state or a low-probability time-saving game state), if there is a specific reserve when the jackpot display mode is derived, the sub-CPU 301 may be able to not execute a look-ahead performance for the specific reserve after the jackpot game state ends.

In addition, when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the jackpot display mode is derived, if the start information determined to be a "time-saving hit" by the pre-reading judgment made by the main CPU 201 is held (this hold is referred to as a "specific hold" in this paragraph), even if this specific hold is a "time-saving hit" hold, the main CPU 201 may not be controlled to the C time-saving play state based on the "time-saving hit" after the jackpot game state ends. For example, if the specifications are such that multiple time-saving play states are not executed in overlap when the time-saving play states overlap, and the A time-saving play state is executed after the jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 201 will not execute the C time-saving play state based on the "time-saving hit" even if the specific hold is a "time-saving hit" hold.

[1-10. Examples of pre-reading performance]
A specific example of the look-ahead effect will be described below with reference to Figures 60 to 64. In this embodiment, the sub-CPU 301 is capable of executing the look-ahead effect using a reserved image based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

[1-10-1. Specific examples of when a pre-reading performance is performed with a pre-reading jackpot performance pattern]
As described above, the look-ahead performance pattern includes a look-ahead winning type performance pattern and a look-ahead expectation value performance pattern. First, a specific example of a look-ahead performance in a look-ahead big win performance pattern as the look-ahead winning type performance pattern will be described with reference to FIG.

Figures 60(a) to 60(f) are examples of look-ahead presentation patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and show the process by which the big win look-ahead presentation form, which indicates the possibility of a big win, changes. Note that the look-ahead hit type presentation patterns shown in Figures 60(a) to 60(f) correspond to "1CH", "3CH", "58H", or "78H" in Figure 56. Also, the look-ahead expected value presentation patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value presentation patterns shown in Figures 60(a) to 60(f) are omitted from Figure 57.

As shown in Figures 60(a) to 60(f), the first hold area 411 to the fourth hold area 414 are displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7. As described above, the first hold area 411 to the fourth hold area 414 are areas that indicate whether hold information is stored in the first sub-hold area (1) to the first sub-hold area (4), respectively. In addition, the 0th area 410 is an area that corresponds to the first sub-hold area (0) in which information corresponding to the change is stored.

In this embodiment, when hold information is stored in the first sub-hold area, the sub-CPU 301 displays the hold areas 411-414 corresponding to the first sub-hold area in which the hold information is stored with a hold image (hereinafter simply referred to as a "hold image") indicated by a triangle. Also, when no hold information is stored in the first sub-hold area, the sub-CPU 301 does not display a hold image, but displays only the frame of the hold area.

In FIG. 60(a), the first hold area 411 to the third hold area 413 display normal hold images with no pre-reading effect being performed, and the fourth hold area 414 displays only a frame and no hold image. This indicates that hold information is stored in the first sub-hold areas (1) to (3), but no hold information is stored in the first sub-hold area (4).

In FIG. 60(b), a new reserved image is displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 60(a). This indicates that new reserved information has been stored in the first sub-reserved area (4) from the state shown in FIG. 60(a).

As described above, the sub-CPU 301 displays the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 in different forms (e.g., colors) depending on the expected value for a jackpot. In this embodiment, with the exception of rainbows, the differences in color are illustrated by shades of color.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 60(b), the color of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is white (expected value level "0"), and the color of the reserved image shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is blue (expected value level "1").

Figure 60 (c) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 60 (b), and shows that the color of the pending image displayed in the fourth pending area 414 in Figure 60 (b) has changed from blue to yellow (expected value level "2") when it is shifted to the third pending area 413.

Figure 60 (d) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 60 (c), and shows that the color of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in Figure 60 (c) has changed from yellow to green (expected value level "3") when it is shifted to the second pending area 412.

Figure 60 (e) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 60 (d), and shows that the color of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in Figure 60 (d) has changed from green to red (expected value level "4") when it is shifted to the first pending area 411.

Figure 60 (f) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 60 (e), and shows that the color of the pending image displayed in the first pending area 411 in Figure 60 (e) has changed from red to rainbow (expected value level "5") when it is shifted to the zeroth area 410.

In addition, the color (expected value level) of the reserved image indicating the expected value for a jackpot does not necessarily need to change when the reserved image shifts, and may change during the variable display of the special pattern for that change, for example.

In addition, in FIG. 60, the jackpot-based pre-reading presentation form is changed to indicate a change in the expected value from which a jackpot is derived, but instead of or in addition to this, a pre-reading presentation that changes from a jackpot-based pre-reading presentation form to a jackpot confirmation pre-reading presentation form may be executed by the sub-CPU 301. In this case, if it is before the change to the jackpot confirmation pre-reading presentation form, the expected value level may also be changed accordingly.

[1-10-2. Specific examples of when pre-reading effects are performed with pre-reading time-saving performance patterns]
Next, a specific example of a pre-reading performance performed with a pre-reading time-saving winning performance pattern as the above-mentioned pre-reading winning type performance pattern will be described with reference to Figure 61.

Figures 61(a) to 61(f) are examples of look-ahead presentation patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and are diagrams showing the process by which the time-saving hit type look-ahead presentation form, which indicates the possibility of a time-saving hit, changes. Note that the look-ahead time-saving hit type presentation patterns shown in Figures 61(a) to 61(f) correspond to "0EH", "2EH", "4AH", or "6AH" in Figure 56. Also, the look-ahead expected value presentation patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value presentation patterns shown in Figures 61(a) to 61(f) are omitted from Figure 57.

In FIG. 61(a), the first pending area 411 to the third pending area 413 display normal pending images with no preview performance being performed, and the fourth pending area 414 displays no pending images, only a frame.

In FIG. 61(b), a new reserved image is displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 61(a). As described above, the sub-CPU 301 displays the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 in different forms (e.g. shapes) depending on the expected value for the time reduction.

In this way, in this embodiment, the expected value for a jackpot is represented by the color of the reserved image, and the expected value for a time-saving hit is represented by the shape of the reserved image.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 61(b), the shape of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is a triangle (expected value level "0"), and the shape of the reserved image shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is a rectangle (expected value level "1").

Figure 61 (c) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 61 (b), and shows that the shape of the pending image displayed in the fourth pending area 414 in Figure 61 (b) has changed from a square to a pentagon (expected value level "2") when it is shifted to the third pending area 413.

Figure 61 (d) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 61 (c), and shows that the shape of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in Figure 61 (c) has changed from a pentagon to a hexagon (expected value level "3") when it is shifted to the second pending area 412.

Figure 61 (e) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 61 (d), and shows that the shape of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in Figure 61 (d) has changed from a hexagon to a circle (expected value level "4") when it is shifted to the first pending area 411.

Figure 61 (f) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 61 (e), and shows that the shape of the pending image displayed in the first pending area 411 in Figure 61 (e) has changed from a circle to a star (expected value level "5") when it is shifted to the zeroth area 410.

The shape of the reserved image, which indicates the expected value for the time-saving hit, does not necessarily have to change one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star" and may change, for example, from "pentagon to circle."

In addition, the shape of the reserved image (expected value level) indicating the expected value for the time reduction does not necessarily need to change when the reserved image shifts, and may change, for example, during the variable display of the special pattern for that change.

In addition, in Fig. 61, the time-saving hit system pre-reading performance form is changed to show the change in the expected value from which the time-saving hit is derived, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, the pre-reading performance shown below may be executed by the sub-CPU 301. In this case, if it is before changing to the big win confirmation pre-reading performance form, the expected value level may also be changed accordingly.
-A pre-reading performance that changes from a time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form to a jackpot type pre-reading performance form.
-A pre-reading performance that changes from a time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form to a guaranteed jackpot pre-reading performance form.
-A pre-reading performance that changes from a time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form to a jackpot type pre-reading performance form, and then changes to a jackpot confirmed pre-reading performance form.

[1-10-3. Specific examples of when pre-reading effects are performed with pre-reading common winning effects patterns]
Next, a specific example of a pre-reading effect performed with a pre-reading common winning effect pattern as the above-mentioned pre-reading winning type effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG.

Figures 62(a) to 62(d) are examples of look-ahead presentation patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and show the process by which the reserved image changes from a common win type look-ahead presentation form, which indicates that there is a possibility of either a big win or a time-saving win, to a big win type look-ahead presentation form. Changes in the common win type look-ahead presentation form include a change in the expected value level of a win (time-saving win, big win) and a change in the type of win to one that clearly indicates whether it is a big win or a time-saving win. The look-ahead type win presentation patterns shown in Figures 62(a) to 62(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H", or "71H" in Figure 56, and the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern shown in Figures 62(a) to 62(d) corresponds to "43H" in Figure 57.

In this embodiment, a common hit type pre-reading presentation form that indicates the possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving hit is displayed by displaying both a color that indicates the expected value level for a jackpot and a shape that indicates the expected value level for a time-saving hit.

In FIG. 62(a), the first pending area 411 and the second pending area 412 display normal pending images with no preview performance being performed, while the third pending area 413 and the fourth pending area 414 display only frames and no pending images.

In FIG. 62(b), a new reserved image is displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 62(a). The sub-CPU 301 displays the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 in different forms (e.g., color and shape) depending on the expected value for a win (big win or short-time win). In this embodiment, when the pre-reading performance is not executed or the expected value for a win is the lowest, the reserved image is displayed as a white triangle, and the expected value for a short win increases in the following order: "blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow star."

In this embodiment, in FIG. 62(b), the shape of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412 is a white triangle (expected value level "0"), and the shape of the reserved image shown in the third reserved area 413 is a yellow pentagon (expected value level "2").

Figure 62 (c) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 62 (b), and shows that the shape of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in Figure 62 (b) has changed from a yellow pentagon to a green hexagon (expected value level "3") when it is shifted to the second pending area 412.

Figure 62 (d) is an image in which the reserved image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 62 (c), and shows that the shape of the reserved image displayed in the second reserved area 412 in Figure 62 (c) has changed from a green hexagon (a common win-type pre-reading presentation form with an expected value level of "3") to a rainbow triangle (a big win-type pre-reading presentation form with an expected value level of "5") when it is shifted to the first reserved area 411.

In other words, the look-ahead effects shown in Figures 62(b) and 62(c) are effects in which it is difficult to determine from the shape of the reserved image whether the shape of the reserved image indicates the expected value for a jackpot or the expected value for a time-saving hit. In contrast, the look-ahead effect shown in Figure 62(d) is an effect in which it is possible to determine that the shape of the reserved image indicates the expected value for a jackpot, and that the expected value is extremely high (for example, expected value level "5").

In this way, in this embodiment, depending on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the look-ahead performance can be executed in one of the following patterns: a look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern that indicates the expected value for a time-saving hit, a look-ahead jackpot performance pattern that indicates the expected value for a jackpot, and a look-ahead common hit performance pattern that indicates the expected value for a hit (jackpot or time-saving hit). When the look-ahead performance is executed in the look-ahead common hit performance pattern, the player can enjoy the excitement of wondering whether the reserved image will change to a jackpot-type look-ahead performance form or a time-saving hit-type look-ahead performance form, which can increase the excitement.

The form of the reserved image showing the expected value for a time-saving hit does not necessarily have to change one by one in the order of "blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow star" and may change, for example, from "yellow pentagon (common hit type pre-reading presentation form) → red triangle (big hit type pre-reading presentation form)" or from "green hexagon (common hit type pre-reading presentation form) → triangular star (time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form)". Also, the form of the reserved image showing the expected value for a hit does not necessarily have to start from the blue square which has the lowest expected value and may start from, for example, a red circle.

In addition, the form of the reserved image showing the expected value for a win does not necessarily need to change when the reserved image shifts, and may change, for example, during the variable display of the special pattern for that change.

In addition, in Fig. 62, the common hit system pre-reading performance form is changed to change the expected value derived from any hit (big hit or time-saving hit) or to change the expected hit from an unknown state to a big hit, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, the pre-reading performance shown below may be executed by the sub-CPU 301. In this case, if it is before changing to the big hit confirmed pre-reading performance form, the expected value level may also be changed.
-A pre-reading performance that changes from a common hit type pre-reading performance form to a guaranteed jackpot pre-reading performance form.
-A pre-reading performance that changes from a common hit type pre-reading performance form to a jackpot type pre-reading performance form, and then changes to a jackpot confirmed pre-reading performance form.

[1-10-4. Variation of common hit type pre-reading performance form]
In addition, the common win type pre-reading presentation form, which indicates the possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving win as the form of the reserved image, is not necessarily limited to a form that indicates both a color indicating the expected value for a jackpot and a shape indicating the expected value for a time-saving win. Instead of this, for example, a dedicated common win type pre-reading presentation form may be provided. When a dedicated common win type pre-reading presentation form is provided, it becomes possible to have a sense of expectation for both a jackpot and a time-saving win, and since the expected values of each are unknown, it becomes possible to play with a sense of expectation for future changes in the presentation form, thereby improving interest.

Figures 63(a) to 63(d) are examples of look-ahead presentation patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and show the process by which the reserved image changes from a dedicated common win look-ahead presentation to a big win look-ahead presentation. Note that the look-ahead winning type presentation patterns shown in Figures 63(a) to 63(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H", or "71H" in Figure 56, and the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern shown in Figures 63(a) to 63(d) corresponds to "31H" in Figure 57 or Figure 58.

Figures 64(a) to 64(d) are examples of look-ahead presentation patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and show the process by which the reserved image changes from a dedicated common win look-ahead presentation to a time-saving win look-ahead presentation. The look-ahead winning type presentation patterns shown in Figures 64(a) to 64(d) correspond to "07H", "27H", "43H", or "63H" in Figure 56, and the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern shown in Figures 64(a) to 64(d) corresponds to "31H" in Figure 57 or Figure 58.

In Figures 63(a) and 64(a), the first pending area 411 and the second pending area 412 display a normal pending image in which no preview performance is being performed, and the third pending area 413 and the fourth pending area 414 display no pending image, only a frame.

In FIG. 63(b), a new reserved image is displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 63(a).

Similarly, in FIG. 64(b), a new reserved image is displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 64(a).

In both Figures 63(b) and 64(b), the form of the reserved image shown in the third reserved area 413 is a dedicated common winning type pre-reading performance form, for example, a shining form. By changing the degree of brightness of the light, the expected value level can be changed.

Figure 63 (c) is an image in which the reserve has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 63 (b), and shows that the dedicated common win type pre-reading presentation form displayed in the third reserve area 413 in Figure 63 (b) has been shifted in the same form to the second reserve area 412.

Similarly, Figure 64 (c) is an image in which the reserve has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 64 (b), and shows that the dedicated common win type pre-reading presentation form displayed in the third reserve area 413 in Figure 64 (b) has been shifted in the same form to the second reserve area 412.

Figure 63 (d) is an image in which the reserved position has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 63 (c), and shows that the form of the reserved image displayed in the second reserved area 412 in Figure 63 (c) has changed from a special common hit type pre-reading presentation form to a red triangle (expected value level of a jackpot "4") when it is shifted to the first reserved area 411.

On the other hand, Figure 64 (d) is an image in which the reserved position has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 64 (c), and shows that the form of the reserved image displayed in the second reserved area 412 in Figure 64 (c) has changed from a special common hit type pre-reading presentation form to a white circle (expected value level for time-saving hits of "4") when it is shifted to the first reserved area 411.

In this way, even if the look-ahead presentation form is expressed as a dedicated common win type look-ahead presentation form, the player can be entertained by wondering whether the dedicated common win type look-ahead presentation form will change to a jackpot type look-ahead presentation form or a time-saving win type look-ahead presentation form, thereby increasing the player's interest.

[1-11. Signals output to outside the device]
Next, a signal output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko game machine (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), an island computer (not shown) provided on each island) will be described. Note that, in this embodiment, a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be described, but it is also possible to input a signal from outside the first pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. The signals output from each CH of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine are, for example, various signals such as "prize ball information 1," "door/frame open," "external information 1" to "external information 8," "prize ball information 2," and "security." However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine are not limited to these, and there may be other signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals, or the machine may be configured so that none of these signals are output.

Figure 65 is a table showing an example of the output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in Figure 65, a "prize ball information 1" signal is output from CN1, a "door/frame open" signal is output from CH2, signals for "external information 1" to "external information 8" are output from CH3 to CH10 respectively, a "prize ball information 2" signal is output from CH11, and a "security" signal is output from CH12. The output conditions for signals from the first pachinko gaming machine to the outside of the machine are as shown in Figure 65.

Next, an example of a timing chart of signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained using the "prize ball information 1" signal as an example. As shown in Figure 65, in this embodiment, the "prize ball information 1" signal is output for 120 msec every time 10 prize balls are paid out.

Figure 66 is an example of a timing chart of the "prize ball information 1" signal, one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 66, the payout detection switch (not shown) turns from off to on each time a prize ball is paid out. As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the large prize opening 131 (see FIG. 4), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out, when a game ball enters a start opening (first start opening 120 or second start opening 140 (both see FIG. 4)), for example, 3 prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball enters the general prize opening 122 (see FIG. 4), for example, 4 prize balls are paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs the signal "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko game machine for, for example, 120 msec each time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 outputs the signal "prize ball information 1" for, for example, 120 msec, at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on, starting from the previous output of the signal "prize ball information 1". Note that outputting the signal "prize ball information 1" at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on is merely an example, and it may be any time between when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on and when it is turned off. Also, outputting the signal "prize ball information 1" each time 10 prize balls are paid out or for 120 msec is merely an example, and the output timing and output time of the signal "prize ball information 1" can be set appropriately.

Next, we will explain an example of a "security" signal, which is one of the signals output from the first pachinko gaming machine to the outside. The "security" signal is a signal that is mainly output when an error occurs.

Figure 67 is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, for each error name, the table shows the trigger for the error in the main control circuit 200, the trigger for the error to be released in the main control circuit 200 (see Figure 6), the output time of the "security" signal (shown as "security signal" in Figure 67), and any notes.

Note that the first pachinko game machine does not have a large prize opening for small wins, but for the sake of convenience, Figure 67 also describes an abnormal prize winning error at the large prize opening for small wins. Also, in Figure 67, the large prize opening 131 is described as a large prize opening for big wins.

The outline of the errors shown in FIG. 67 is an example, and only some of them may be judged to be errors, or, for example, those not shown in FIG. 67 may be judged to be errors. Examples of errors that are judged to be errors that are not shown in FIG. 67 include a solenoid monitoring sensor error when a solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is on or off for a predetermined time or more, a large prize opening entry/ejection abnormality error when there are undischarged game balls inside the large prize opening (large prize opening for a large win or large prize opening for a small win) or when a prize is won inside the large prize opening when the large prize opening is not open, and a vibration sensor error when the vibration sensor is on for a predetermined time. Also, for example, if a specific area is provided inside the big win opening, and the special probability control is executed after the big win game control ends based on the game ball passing through the specific area while the big win game control is being executed, it is preferable to configure it so that an error is determined when there is an abnormal passage to the specific area, or when the game ball passes through the specific area even though there are no game balls yet to be discharged inside the big win opening.

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, it sends a fraud detection-related command to the sub-CPU 301 (see FIG. 6). The sub-CPU 301, which receives the fraud detection-related command, executes notification control according to the content of the error.

The following briefly explains the control by the main CPU 201 and sub-CPU 301 (see Figure 6 for both), using the example of an abnormal winning error at the big win slot.

As shown in FIG. 67, for example, after the initial power is turned on, if one winning is detected before the first big win opening is opened, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an abnormal winning error has occurred at the big win opening, and outputs a "security" signal for 12 seconds. It also sends a fraud detection-related command to the sub-CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred at the big win opening.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds regardless of the type of error, so that an external device (e.g., hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or island computer (not shown)) can know that an error has occurred by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot know the content of the error. However, this is not limited to the above, and for example, the output time of the "security" signal may be changed depending on the content of the error, so that an external device that receives the "security" signal can know the content of the error.

When the sub-CPU 301 (see Figure 6) receives a fraud detection-related command indicating, for example, an abnormal winning error at the large winning port for a jackpot, it executes all or part of the notification control shown below, and when, for example, 30 seconds have elapsed since receiving the fraud detection-related command, it terminates the notification control shown below.
Notification control for displaying, for example, the text "Abnormal winning error at large prize port" on the display device 7 (see, for example, FIG. 6) via the display control circuit 304.
- Notification control to output a voice such as "There is an abnormal winning error at the large prize slot" from the speaker 32 (see, for example, Figure 6) via the voice control circuit 305.
Notification control for outputting, for example, a beep from the speaker 32 via the voice control circuit 305.
Notification control for lighting up all of the LEDs 46 (see FIG. 6, for example) in red via the LED control circuit 306.

If a power outage occurs, for example, before 30 seconds have elapsed since receiving the fraud detection-related command, the sub-CPU 301 ends the above-mentioned notification control.

In addition, for example, if the sub-CPU 301 receives a fraud detection-related command indicating an abnormal winning error at the large jackpot winning port while executing the above-mentioned notification control indicating the occurrence of an abnormal winning error at the large jackpot winning port, it will re-execute the above-mentioned notification control.

Next, the signals output from the first pachinko gaming machine according to the gaming status will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a table showing an example of the output conditions of signals output from the first pachinko gaming machine according to the gaming status. In FIG. 68, signals that are output are indicated by ◯, and signals that are not output are indicated by ×.

As shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, the signals output vary depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201. For example, during normal gameplay (other than during a big win or small win, other than during a special probability or time-saving mode), no signals are output, during low-probability time-saving gameplay (other than during a big win or small win), the signals "External Information 3" and "External Information 7" are output, and during high-probability time-saving gameplay (other than during a big win or small win), the signals "External Information 3", "External Information 5", and "External Information 7" are output. Also, in a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a high-probability non-time-saving gameplay state, the signals "External Information 3" and "External Information 6" are output during a high-probability non-time-saving gameplay (other than during a big win or small win).

In this way, by outputting different signals according to the game status controlled by the main CPU 201, devices outside the machine that can receive the signals (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (not shown)) can grasp the game status of the pachinko game machine that is the source of the external information.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the signal output during the small win game control process (in the normal game state) is the same as the signal output during the normal game state (other than during a big win or small win, other than during a special mode or time-saving mode). Similarly, the signal output during the small win game control process (in the low-probability time-saving game state) is the same as the signal output during the low-probability time-saving game state (other than during a big win or small win), the signal output during the small win game control process (in the high-probability time-saving game state) is the same as the signal output during the high-probability time-saving game state (other than during a big win or small win), and the signal output during the small win game control process (in the high-probability non-time-saving game state) is the same as the signal output during the high-probability non-time-saving game state (other than during a big win or small win). In other words, an external device capable of receiving the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (not shown)) cannot know whether or not the small win game control process is being executed in the pachinko game machine that sent the external information. However, instead of this, the signal output during the small win game control process may be made different from the signal output when the small win game control process is not being executed, so that an external device capable of receiving the signal can know whether or not the small win game control process is being executed in the pachinko game machine that sent the external information.

Also, during the low-probability time-saving game state (other than during a big win or a small win), during the high-probability time-saving game state (other than during a big win or a small win), during the small win game control process (low-probability time-saving game state), and during the small win game control process (high-probability time-saving game state) shown in FIG. 68, the signal is output during execution of the time-saving control. In this case, it may be considered that the time-saving control is being executed when both the electric support control and the special chart shortening control are being executed, or it may be considered that the time-saving control is being executed when only the electric support control of the electric support control and the special chart shortening control is being executed, or it may be considered that the time-saving control is being executed when only the special chart shortening control of the electric support control and the special chart shortening control is being executed.

In addition, in the above description of the first pachinko gaming machine, it is assumed that the main CPU can control the time-shortened game state to the A time-shortened game state, the B time-shortened game state, and the C time-shortened game state (the A time-shortened game state function, the B time-shortened game state function, and the C time-shortened game state function are installed), but this is not limited to the above. For example, the pachinko gaming machine may be equipped with only one of the A time-shortened game state function, the B time-shortened game state function, and the C time-shortened game state function (e.g., the A time-shortened game state function), but not the other functions (e.g., the B time-shortened game state function and the C time-shortened game state function). Also, the pachinko gaming machine may be equipped with only two of the functions of the time-saving play state A, the time-saving play state B, and the time-saving play state C (for example, the function of the time-saving play state A and the function of the time-saving play state B or the function of the time-saving play state C), and not equipped with the other functions (for example, the function of the time-saving play state B or the function of the time-saving play state C).

In addition, for example, in pachinko gaming machines called ST machines, where the probability of ...

[2. The second pachinko game machine]
Next, the second pachinko game machine will be described. As mentioned above, the second pachinko game machine is a so-called type one pachinko game machine called digital pachinko. However, the second pachinko game machine is different from the first pachinko game machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in parallel. Therefore, the game board unit and the electrical configuration are also different from the first pachinko game machine.

In the following explanation of the second pachinko gaming machine, we will omit as much as possible explanation of the functions, shapes, and positions that are common to the first pachinko gaming machine, such as the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and base door 3, and the signals output from the external terminal board 1184 (see Figure 70 described below) to outside the second pachinko gaming machine (for example, the hall computer 1186 (see Figure 70 described below) and the island computers (not shown) installed on each island).

In addition, when describing the second pachinko gaming machine, the configuration will be described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine, using the same reference numbers and step numbers as the first pachinko gaming machine. However, when describing the configuration with reference to new drawings adopted in the description of the second pachinko gaming machine, the configuration will be described with reference to different reference numbers and step numbers than the first pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has the same functions, etc. as the first pachinko gaming machine.

Incidentally, pachinko gaming machines that can changeably display the first and second special symbols in parallel include pachinko gaming machines in which, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are on hold, the start conditions of the second special symbol are established with priority over the start conditions of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "priority change machines"), and pachinko gaming machines in which the start conditions are established in the order of winning, including the first and second start ports (hereinafter referred to as "sequential change machines").

[2-1. Game board unit]
69 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. As shown in Fig. 69, a game area 1105 is formed on the game board unit 1010.

Note that the various components (e.g., the first starting hole 1120, etc.) arranged in the play area 1105 of the second pachinko gaming machine share some in common with the various components arranged in the play area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine (see Figure 4), but will be explained in detail again.

As shown in FIG. 69, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 is formed in which the launched game ball can roll down, a guide rail 1110, a center role 1115 located approximately in the center of the game area 1105, a first start port 1120, a general winning port 1122, a passing gate unit 1125, a special electric role unit 1130, a second start port 1140A, 1140B, a normal electric role unit 1145, a small win unit 1150, an LED unit 1160, an outlet 1178, and a back unit (not shown) located behind the game board unit 1010. Note that the LED unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and a description of the LED unit 1160 of the second pachinko game machine will be omitted.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference number) is formed in the gaming panel 1100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007. A guide rail 1110 is provided on the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, and gaming pegs (no reference number) and the like are planted thereon. A gaming ball launched from the launching device 6 (see Figs. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 1110 toward the gaming area 1105, collides with the gaming pegs, etc., and flows downward below the gaming area 1105 while changing its direction of travel.

In addition, a back unit (not shown) with decorative bodies is disposed behind the gaming panel 1100 to enhance the presentation effect. The gaming panel 1100 is made of transparent resin so that the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front. In this case, the entire gaming panel 1100 may be made of transparent materials, or, for example, only the parts where the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front may be made of transparent materials. In addition, the gaming panel 1100 may be made of materials that do not have transparent parts (for example, wood), and transparent materials may be provided in some parts to enhance the presentation effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (both of which have no reference number). The play area 1105 is defined by the guide rail 1110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game balls launched from the launching device 1006 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the upper part of the play area 1105.

(Center role)
The center device 1115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (without reference number) of the game panel 1100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 1116 at its upper portion. Game balls launched toward the game area 1105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116.

A game ball launched by the launching device 1006 toward the game area 1105 flows down the left area 1106 or the right area 1107. A game ball flowing down the left area 1106 or the right area 1107 changes direction as it flows downward due to collision with game pegs or the like planted in the game panel 1100. If the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left area 1106. On the other hand, if the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right area 1107.

The center device 1115 also has a warp entrance 1117 formed on the outer periphery on the left side, through which game balls flowing down the left area 1106 can enter. Game balls that enter the warp entrance 1117 are configured to be guided to a stage 1118 formed in the center device 1115. The stage 1118 is formed below and in front of the display area of the display device 1007 so that the game balls can roll left and right. The stage 1118 may be formed in multiple stages, such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

A chance entrance 1119 through which game balls can enter is formed at the rear of the stage 1118, approximately in the center in the left-right direction, and game balls that enter the chance entrance 1119 are configured to be released directly above the first start opening 1120. Therefore, game balls that enter the chance entrance 1119 have a higher probability of entering (passing through) the first start opening 1120 than game balls that do not enter the warp entrance 1117, or game balls that enter the warp entrance 1117 but do not enter the chance entrance 1119.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 1120 is disposed below the display area of the display device 1007, and is disposed so that a game ball hit from the left can win (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or is impossible to win). When a game ball wins in the first starting hole 1120, it is detected by a first starting hole switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described later). It is also possible that a game ball hit from the right can win in the first starting hole 1120. Also, instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting hole 1120, a first starting hole that allows a game ball hit from the right to win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or is impossible to win) may be provided.

When the first start hole switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the first start hole 1120, start information for the first special pattern is extracted, and a predetermined number of the extracted start information (for example, up to four) are held. When the start conditions are met, the held start information is used in the winning determination process for the first special pattern. When a game ball enters the first start hole 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 1120 is not limited to this.

(General Prize Winners)
The general winning openings 1122 are arranged in a plurality of locations on the lower left side of the display area of the display device 1007, and are arranged so that game balls hit from the left can win (game balls hit from the right have difficulty or no chance of winning). When a game ball wins in a general winning opening 1122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described later).

When the general prize opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the general prize opening 1122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 1122 is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 1122 is positioned so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit from the right to win, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the general winning opening 1122 described above, a general winning opening through which a game ball hit from the right can win may be provided.

(Passing gate unit)
The pass gate unit 1125 is located in the right area 1107 and is a unit that integrates a pass gate 1126 that is configured to allow almost all game balls hit to the right to pass through, and a pass gate switch 1127 (see Figure 70 described below) that detects the passage of the game ball through the pass gate 1126.

When the passing gate switch 1127 detects the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 1126, the start information of the normal pattern is extracted, and the extracted start information of the normal pattern is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to four). The reserved start information of the normal pattern is used for the winning determination process of the normal pattern. Note that even if the passing gate switch 1127 detects the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 1126, no prize balls are paid out. Also, the passing gate unit 1125 may be arranged in the left area 1106 instead of or in addition to the right area 1107.

The pass gate 1126 may also function as a trigger for activating the consecutive operation device of the special feature. In other words, the condition for transitioning from a non-jackpot gaming state (such as a normal gaming state) to a jackpot gaming state is that both the condition device and the consecutive operation device of the special feature are activated, but when a stop display mode (symbol combination) indicating a jackpot is derived, the condition device may be activated but the consecutive operation device of the special feature may not be activated. Then, assuming that the condition device is activated, the consecutive operation device of the special feature may be activated when a gaming ball passes through the pass gate 1126, i.e., when a gaming ball is detected by the pass gate switch 1127 (see FIG. 70 described below), thereby transitioning to the jackpot gaming state.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric accessory unit 1130 is a unit body that integrates a big winning hole 1131 for a big winning, a big winning hole count switch 1132 (see FIG. 70 described later) for detecting the entry (passage) of a game ball into the big winning hole 1131 for a big winning, and a special electric accessory 1133. The special electric accessory unit 1130 is disposed below the passing gate unit 1125 in the right side area 1107.

The big winning opening 1131 for big wins is arranged so that game balls hit from the right can win (game balls hit from the left have difficulty or cannot win). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the big winning opening 1131 for big wins described above, a big winning opening for big wins that can win game balls hit from the left may be arranged, or a big winning opening for big wins that can win game balls may be arranged above the center device 1115.

The big jackpot winning opening 1131 is an opening that is opened to allow a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) to enter (pass through) when the machine is controlled to a big jackpot game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. When the big jackpot winning opening count switch 1132 (see FIG. 70 described later) detects the entry of a game ball into the big jackpot winning opening 1131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the big jackpot winning opening 1131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric device 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 1135 (see FIG. 70 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 1134. The special electric device 1133, i.e., the special electric shutter 1134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass) through the big winning opening 1131 for a big win, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter (pass) through the big winning opening 1131 for a big win. The transition from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening 1131 for a big win is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the big winning game state is a game state in which a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big winning opening 1131 for a big win transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period over multiple rounds.

(Second starting hole)
In this embodiment, the second starting holes 1140A and 1140B are arranged in the game area 1105 as the second starting holes, and both of these second starting holes 1140A and 1140B are designed so that a game ball hit to the right can win (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win). However, this is not limited to this, and a game ball hit to the left may be able to win the second starting hole 1140A and/or the second starting hole 1140B.

When a game ball enters the second start hole 1140A, it is detected by the second start hole switch 1141A (see FIG. 70 described below). Also, when a game ball enters the second start hole 1140B, it is detected by the second start hole switch 1141B (see FIG. 70 described below). Regardless of whether the game ball enters the second start hole 1140A or 1140B, this triggers the process of determining whether the second special symbol has been won.

When the second start port switches 1141A, 1141B (see FIG. 70 described below) detect the entry (passage) of a game ball into the second start port 1140A, 1140B, the start information of the second special pattern is extracted, and the extracted start information is held for a predetermined number (for example, up to four). The held start information is used for the winning determination process of the second special pattern. When a game ball enters the second start port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second start port 1140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the second start port 1140A, 1140B is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, two flow paths 1107a, 1107b are formed on the downstream side of the flow direction of the game ball that is hit from the right but does not enter the big winning opening 1131 for the big win. A game ball that is hit from the right and does not enter the big winning opening 1131 for the big win and flows further downstream is sorted by a branching nail 1108 shown in FIG. 69, for example, to the upper flow path 1107a or the lower flow path 1107b.

The second starting port 1140A is arranged so that game balls sorted into the upper flow path 1107a can win, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a can win. However, it is not essential to configure most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a to win at the second starting port 1140A. For example, it may be configured so that almost no game balls can be expected to win at the second starting port 1140A, or it may be configured so that a predetermined expected value (for example, approximately one-third to one-fifth) of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a can win. Note that game balls that flow down the upper flow path 1107a but do not win at the second starting port 1140A are configured to be discharged outside the machine from the outlet 1178.

The second starting hole 1140B is positioned so that the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can enter, but details will be given later in the explanation of the normal electric role unit 1145.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 1145 is arranged on the lower flow path 1107b side, and is a unit body that integrates a winning hole through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game ball enters (passes through), a switch that detects the entry of the game ball into this winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 1146. In this embodiment, the winning hole is the second start hole 1140B, and the switch is the second start hole switch 1141B. However, it is not essential that the winning hole is the second start hole 1140B, and for example, the first start hole may be the winning hole.

The normal electric device 1146 is equipped with a protruding plate-type normal power shutter 1147 that can move back and forth, and a normal power solenoid 1148 (see FIG. 70 described below) that operates the normal power shutter 1147. The normal electric device 1146, i.e., the normal power shutter 1147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting hole 1140B, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 1140B. Note that instead of the above-mentioned normal power shutter 1147 that can move back and forth in the forward and backward directions, a movable member made of, for example, a blade member, known as a so-called electric tulip, may be used. The movable member may also be a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, or the like.

(Small hit unit)
The small win unit 1150 is a unitary body that integrates a small win large prize opening 1151, a small win large prize opening count switch 1152 (see Figure 70 described below) that detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the small win large prize opening 1151, a small win shutter 1153 that can move back and forth, and a small win solenoid 1154 that can operate this small win shutter 1153.

The small win shutter 1153 is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter (pass through) the large prize opening 1151 for small wins, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the large prize opening 1151 for small wins, by moving it back and forth.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening for small wins 1151 when it is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the large prize opening for small wins count switch 1152 (see FIG. 70 described below). When the large prize opening for small wins count switch 1152 detects a game ball, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening for small wins 1151 is not limited to 10.

The small win unit 1150 is located on the lower flow path 1107b downstream of the normal electric role unit 1145. Therefore, when the second starting port 1140B is opened by the operation of the normal electric role 1146, even if the small win large prize opening 1151 is open, the game ball that flows down the lower flow path 1107b will enter the second starting port 1140B located upstream before reaching the small win large prize opening 1151, making it difficult (or impossible) for the ball to enter the small win large prize opening 1151.

In this embodiment, the large prize opening 1131 for the large prize and the large prize opening 1151 for the small prize are provided separately, but this is not limited to this, and the large prize opening that is opened when the large prize game control process is executed and the large prize opening that is opened when the small prize game control process is executed may be the same large prize opening.

(Outlet)
The outlet 1178 is for discharging game balls that have been shot toward the game area 1105 but have not won any of the various winning holes (for example, the first starting hole 1120, the second starting hole 1140A, 1140B, the big winning hole 1131 for big wins, the general winning hole 1122, etc.) to the outside of the machine. This outlet 1178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 1105 so that both game balls hit from the left and game balls hit from the right can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 1178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between multiple general winning holes 1122 or between the normal electric role unit 1145 and the small winning unit 1150, so that game balls flowing down the game area 1105 can be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 1100 as described above. This back unit includes a group of performance-use accessories 1058 such as movable accessories controlled by a sub-control circuit 1300 (see FIG. 70 described later). The group of performance-use accessories 1058 is arranged around the display area of the display device 1007, for example. At least one of the performance-use accessory group 1058 or a performance-use accessory component constituting the accessory functions as a performance-use accessory that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

[2-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 70. Fig. 70 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine. Note that the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine has some parts in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, but they will be described in detail again.

As shown in FIG. 70, the second pachinko game machine is mainly composed of a main control circuit 1200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 1300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 1400, and a power supply circuit 1450.

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 controls, for example, processes executed when the power is turned on and processes related to game operations, and is equipped with a main CPU 1201, a main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 1203 (read/write memory), an initial reset circuit 1204, and a backup capacitor 1207, and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 1201 is connected to the main ROM 1202, the main RAM 1203, the initial reset circuit 1204, etc. The main CPU 1201 has built-in functions such as a watchdog timer (WDT) that monitors operation and a function to prevent fraud.

The main ROM 1202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the second pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, etc. The main CPU 1201 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the main ROM 1202.

The main RAM 1203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. This main RAM 1203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201. Note that, although in this embodiment, RAM is used as the temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201, this is not limited to this, and any readable and writable storage medium will do.

The initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 1207 has the function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 1203 from being lost in the event of a power outage, etc.

The main control circuit 1200 also includes an I/O port 1205 that is connected to various devices and other devices so as to be able to communicate with each other, and a command output port 1206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 1300 so as to be able to output various commands to the sub-control circuit 1300.

In addition, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200. For example, the main control circuit 1200 is connected to the normal symbol display unit 1161, the normal symbol reserved display unit 1162, the first special symbol display unit 1163, the second special symbol display unit 1164, the first special symbol reserved display unit 1165, the second special symbol reserved display unit 1166, the sure-change notification display unit 1167, the time-saving notification display unit 1168, the normal power solenoid 1148, the special power solenoid 1135, and the small win solenoid 1154. In addition to these, the main control circuit 1200 is also connected to the performance display monitor 1170 and the error notification monitor 1172. The main control circuit 1200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals via the I/O port 1205.

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data and setting values (described later) under the control of the main CPU 1201. The performance display data is data that indicates, for example, the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state for a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 60,000 balls) shot, and is also called a base value.

The error notification monitor 1172 displays an error code. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 1172 can also display a setting change code indicating that a setting change process is in progress, a setting confirmation code indicating that a setting confirmation process is in progress, etc., for example, in a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function described below. Note that the setting change code may be configured to display a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that a setting change is in progress).

The main control circuit 1200 is also connected to the first start port switch 1121, the second start port switches 1141A and 1141B, the pass gate switch 1127, the big win large prize port count switch 1132, the general prize port switch 1123, and the small win large prize port count switch 1152. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to the main control circuit 1200 via the I/O port 1205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 1200 is connected to a calling device (not shown) having functions such as calling a hall attendant and displaying the number of jackpots, an external terminal board 1184 used to send data to a hall computer 1186 that manages the pachinko machines in the hall, a setting key 1174 that is operated to change or check the setting value in the case of a pachinko machine with a setting function described later, and a backup clear switch 1176 that can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 1203 in response to the operation of the gaming center manager. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 1176 also serves as a switch for changing the setting value described later, but is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing the setting value may also be provided.

The setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are preferably housed in a specified case so that they cannot be easily touched by third parties (e.g., players) other than the arcade manager. "Inside a specified case" includes not only a case in which the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also a case in which notches are provided only at the locations corresponding to the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176, so that the arcade manager can touch the setting key 1174 and/or the backup clear switch 1176 when the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the arcade manager to expose the back.

In this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but this is not limited thereto, and they may be configured to be connected to the payout/launch control circuit 1400 or the power supply circuit 1450, for example. In this case, too, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the arcade manager from easily touching the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176.

[2-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 1300 includes a sub-CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work RAM 1303, a display control circuit 1304, a sound control circuit 1305, an LED control circuit 1306, a role control circuit 1307, and a command input port 1308. The sub-control circuit 1300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to commands from the main control circuit 1200. Although not shown in Fig. 70, the sub-control circuit 1300 is also connected to effect buttons 54 (see Fig. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 1302 stores programs for controlling the game presentation of the second pachinko game machine by the sub-CPU 1301, various tables, etc. The sub-CPU 1301 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the program ROM 1302. In particular, the sub-CPU 1301 controls the game presentation according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 1200.

The work RAM 1303 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub-CPU 1301.

The display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for controlling the display of the display device 1007. The display control circuit 1304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM in which data for generating various types of image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, a D/A converter for converting image data into an image signal, and the like.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub-CPU 1301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data showing decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. In this way, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 1032. The audio control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC for controlling the audio, an audio data ROM for storing various types of audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as an AMP) for amplifying the audio signal, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 1032. In response to a sound generation command from the sub-CPU 1301, the sound source IC selects one piece of sound data from multiple pieces of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. The sound source IC also reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a specified sound signal, and supplies the converted sound signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as sound and sound effects output from the speaker 1032.

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046, which includes decorative LEDs. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which multiple types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The reel control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each reel (for example, one or more reels among the group of reels for performance 1058). The reel control circuit 1307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each reel, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a reel data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored.

The reel control circuit 1307 selects one of the multiple operation patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a reel operation command from the sub-CPU 1301. The selected operation pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is then supplied to control the mechanical operation of each reel. The lighting circuit selects one of the multiple lighting patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a lighting command from the sub-CPU 1301. The selected lighting pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is then supplied to control the lighting operation of each reel.

The command input port 1308 is connected to the command output port 1206 and receives various commands sent from the main control circuit 1200.

The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls, and is connected to a payout device 1082 capable of paying out game balls, a launch device 1006 capable of launching game balls, a card unit 1180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

When the payout/launch control circuit 1400 receives a prize ball control command sent from the main control circuit 1200, it sends a specified signal to the payout device 1082 and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls.

The card unit 1180 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 1182. The ball lending operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a loan/return button for receiving the return of a ball lending card on which cache data is stored (neither is shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a loan ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180. The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls based on the loan ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180. The operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

In addition, when the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is rotated clockwise, the payout/launch control circuit 1400 supplies power to a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation), and controls the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required during play to the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.

The power supply circuit 1450 is connected to a power switch 1095 and other components. The power switch 1095 is turned on when the necessary power is to be supplied to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the second pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 71 to 75. The second pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In the second pachinko game machine, a normal game state in which neither the probability variable control nor the time-saving control is executed, a high-probability time-saving game state in which both the probability variable control and the time-saving control are executed, a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the probability variable control is executed but the time-saving control is not executed, and a low-probability time-saving game state in which the probability variable control is not executed but the time-saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 1201 is capable of progressing the game in any of these game states. However, the game states progressed by the control of the main CPU 1201 are not limited to these, and it is also possible to prevent any of the normal game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the low-probability time-saving game state from progressing. For example, it is possible to allow the game to progress in any of the normal game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, and the low-probability time-saving game state, and not allow the game to progress in the high-probability non-time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, hitting to the left is the normal game mode, and in the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the low-probability time-saving game state, hitting to the right is the normal game mode. The sub-CPU 1301 executes control to display the normal game mode (e.g., whether to hit to the right or left) in, for example, the display area of the display device 1007.

[2-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
FIG. 71 shows an example of a special symbol winning determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol winning judgment table is a table referenced in the winning judgment process for the special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78 described later), that is, a table referenced when determining by lottery whether a "time-saving winning", "small winning", "big winning" or "miss" is a winning result based on the winning judgment random number value extracted when the game ball enters the first starting hole 1120 or the second starting hole 1140A, 1140B. In this embodiment, the winning results are selected in the winning judgment process for the first special symbol for a "time-saving winning", "big winning", and "miss", and a "small winning" is not included in the winning results. In contrast, the winning results are selected in the winning judgment process for the second special symbol for a "time-saving winning", "small winning", "big winning", and "miss". However, a "small winning" may be included in the winning results in the winning judgment process for the first special symbol.

As described above, the random number value for determining a jackpot is a random number value used in the process of determining whether or not a special symbol has won. In this embodiment, the random number value for determining a jackpot is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "miss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination in the hit determination process for the first special symbol. The hit determination table for the first special symbol specifies, for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1), the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data.

In addition, in the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the result is a "time-saving hit", "small hit", "big hit", or "miss" based on the extracted random number value for determining a big hit. In the hit determination table for the second special symbol, for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1), the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit determined as a "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit determined as a "small hit" and the corresponding small hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit determined as a "big hit" and the corresponding big hit determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit determined as a "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data are specified.

In this embodiment, for example, if the probability of a win flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for determining a jackpot is any value between 0 and 408, the main CPU 1201 determines that there is a "time-saving hit" and determines the hit/loss determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." Also, if the probability of a win flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for determining a jackpot is any value between 409 and 613, the main CPU 1201 determines that there is a "jackpot" and determines the hit/loss determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." Also, if the extracted random number value for determining a jackpot is any value between 614 and 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that there is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

For example, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." If the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." If the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

Similarly, for example, if the probability variable flag is off during hit determination processing for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is off during hit determination processing for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "small hit" and determines the determination value data as "small hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is off during hit determination processing for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 22118 to 22322, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." Furthermore, if the probability of winning flag is OFF during the winning determination process for the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for determining a winning jackpot is any value between 22323 and 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

Also, for example, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "small hit" and determines the determination value data as "small hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 22118 to 22968, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." Furthermore, if the probability of a big win flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for determining a big win is any of 22969 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In this way, in this embodiment, of the random number values for determining a jackpot that are generated in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined range from 0 (for example, 0 to 22117 in the hit determination process for the second special symbol) is assigned to other determination value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data and small hit determination value data) excluding the jackpot determination value data and miss determination value data. In addition, the end of the predetermined value (for example, 22323 to 65535 if the special bonus flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol) is assigned to miss determination value data. Furthermore, the jackpot determination value data and miss determination value data are assigned adjacent to each other. By doing this, for example, when the probability change flag changes from OFF to ON (or ON to OFF), it is possible to change the probability of a jackpot without changing the width of other judgment value data (for example, time-saving hit judgment value data and small hit judgment value data) by simply narrowing (or widening) the width of the miss judgment value data by the same amount that the width of the jackpot judgment value data is widened (or narrowed).

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special pattern is performed is different from the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special pattern is performed, thereby adding variety to the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 71, by making the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed higher than the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the normal game state, which tends to become monotonous.

However, the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed may be made higher than the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed. In this case, for example, by overlapping the time-saving play state when a "time-saving hit" is won during a time-saving play state, if a "time-saving hit" is won just before the end of the time-saving play state, the time-saving play state is effectively extended, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

As shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 can determine that the result of the hit determination process is a "time-shortened hit" whether the special-hit flag is on or off. However, when the special-hit flag is off (normal game state, time-shortened game state), the main CPU 1201 controls the game to the time-shortened game state if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-shortened hit", but when the special-hit flag is on, the main CPU 1201 does not control the game to the time-shortened game state even if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-shortened hit".

[2-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 72 shows an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "selected symbol command" and a "symbol designation command" that determine the stopped symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the first starting hole 1120 or the second starting hole 1140A, 1140B and the aforementioned winning/losing determination value data (i.e., when executing the special symbol determination process of S1035 in FIG. 78 described below). The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a symbol that is determined according to the result of the special symbol winning/losing determination process, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating a symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted, for example, from 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 72, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 1201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 1201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 70 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 1201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, the main CPU 1201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 2 and 9, the main CPU 1201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 10 and 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, if the random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 60 and 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z6" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning determination process for the first special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z8" as the selected symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any value from 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z9" as the selected symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the win determination process for the second special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z10" as the selected symbol command and "zA8" as the symbol designation command.

When small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 1201 executes small win game control processing. In the small win game control processing, for example, the small win shutter 1153 (see FIG. 69) is operated to execute control so that the small win large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is opened so that the game ball can enter (pass through) the small win large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) or can be easily opened, and the prize ball can be paid out.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 29, the main CPU 1201 selects "z11" as the selected symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 30 and 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z12" as the selected symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 60 and 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z13" as the selected symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning determination process for the second special symbol, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected, for example, as follows. That is, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z14" as the selected symbol command and "zA11" as the symbol designation command.

In this embodiment, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71) is referenced to determine the hit/lose determination value data based on the extracted random number value for hit determination, and then the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 72) is referenced to determine the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but this is not limited to this. For example, the hit/lose of the special symbol, the selected symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for hit determination and the symbol random number value of the special symbol.

Although the second pachinko gaming machine will not be described, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is a table that is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol that is output to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164 (see FIG. 70) when the variable display of the special symbol stops, in response to a selected symbol command. In addition, the special symbol display units 1163 and 1164 derive the display mode of a time-saving hit, a big hit, a small hit, or a miss based on the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol. In addition, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table described in the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 12(B)) is also stored in the program ROM 1302 of the sub-control circuit 1300.

[2-3-3. Winning Type Determination Table]
FIG. 73 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 of the second pachinko game machine. The winning type determination table is referred to when determining the winning game state and/or the subsequent game state in response to the selection symbol command determined in response to the symbol random number value of the special symbol (i.e., when executing the winning type determination process of S1036 in FIG. 78 described later). The winning game state shown in FIG. 73 indicates the big win game state or the small win game state. In addition, the subsequent game state indicates the game state after the winning game state ends. However, if the result of the winning determination process of the special symbol is a time-saving winning, the game state is controlled to the C time-saving game state without being controlled to the winning game state, so that the subsequent game state indicates the C time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the mode of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0," the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 10. When the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z8," the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 50. When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z9," the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 100. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode of the above-mentioned time-saving hit to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then sets the time-saving flag on and the determined number of time-saving times without controlling to the big hit game state, and can control to the C time-saving game state. Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the hit game state is not controlled, so the mode of the hit game state is not determined. In this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the number of time-saving times set is the same regardless of the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of time-saving times set may be different depending on the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving turns that is set varies depending on the selected symbol command that is determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol. By doing this, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," it is possible to provide variety to the progress of the game thereafter, and to prevent a decline in interest.

As described above, when the probability variable flag is on, the main CPU 1201 does not control to the time-saving game state even if the result of the winning judgment process is a "time-saving win". For example, even if the probability variable flag is on (high probability game state), the main CPU 1201 performs a lottery for a "time-saving win" as shown in FIG. 72, and when the result of the winning judgment process is a "time-saving win", the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode of the time-saving win indicating that the "time-saving win" has been won to the special pattern display units 1163 and 1164, but does not control to the C time-saving game state. In addition, the main CPU 1201 may perform a lottery for a "time-saving win" even if the probability variable flag is on, and when the result of the winning judgment process is a "time-saving win", the main CPU 1201 may forcibly derive the display mode of a loss to the special pattern display units 1163 and 1164. Furthermore, if the probability of winning flag is on, the random number value for determining a jackpot may not be assigned time-saving hit determination value data, i.e., a win determination process may be performed in which the "time-saving hit" is not included in the lottery result.

In this embodiment, when the probability variable flag is on, the game is configured not to transition to the C time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, in a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the probability variable flag is on but the time-saving flag is off, if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the game may transition to a high-probability time-saving game state.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit", the mode of the hit game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows. For example, if the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of times the small hit large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is opened to be one time as the mode of the small hit game state. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit", the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode of the small hit described above to the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then sets the determined number of times the small hit large winning opening 1151 is opened, making it possible to control the game state to a small hit. Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit", after the small hit game state ends, the main CPU 1201 does not change either the probability change flag or the time reduction flag, and returns to the game state immediately before being controlled to the small hit game state.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot," the winning game state and the subsequent game state are determined as follows:

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" or "z11", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state to be 10 rounds, and as the mode of the subsequent game state, determines that only the high probability flag out of the high probability flag and the time-saving flag is set to on, and determines that the number of high probability flags is set to 10,000. In this case, the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode of the jackpot described above to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then becomes able to control the game state to a high probability non-time-saving game state after the jackpot game state ends.

When the selected symbol command is "z4", "z5", or "z12", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 10, 4, or 10, respectively, as the mode of the jackpot game state. In addition, in each case, as the mode of the subsequent game state, it determines to set both the high probability flag and the time-saving flag on, and determines to set both the number of high probability rounds and the number of time-saving rounds to 10,000. In these cases, the main CPU 1201 controls the jackpot game state after deriving the display mode of the jackpot described above to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then controls it to a jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control it to a high probability time-saving game state.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and when it is "z13", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state to be 4 rounds and 10, respectively. In addition, as the mode of the subsequent game state, in either case, it determines that only the time-saving flag out of the probability change flag and the time-saving flag is set to on. In addition, the number of time-saving times to be set is determined to be set to, for example, 200 times when the selected symbol command is "z6", and to be set to, for example, 300 times when the selected symbol command is "z13". In these cases, the main CPU 1201 controls the display mode of the jackpot game state described above to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then controls it to the jackpot game state, and after the end of this jackpot game state, it can be controlled to the time-saving game state. The time-saving game state controlled here is the A time-saving game state. In addition, the mode of time-saving control in the high-probability time-saving game state (hereinafter also referred to as "time-saving performance") is preferably the same as the time-saving performance in the A time-saving game state, but may be different from the time-saving performance in the A time-saving game state.

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z7" or "z14"), the main CPU 1201 does not set either the hit game state or the subsequent game state. In other words, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the main CPU 1201 does not change the game state, but continues to control the previous game state.

Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z7" or "z14"), neither the state of the winning game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is set as described above, so there is no need to illustrate this in the hit type determination table of FIG. 73. However, in this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, it is illustrated in FIG. 73 to clearly show that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss", neither the state of the winning game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is determined.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table in FIG. 71, and determines the hit/loss determination value data based on the random number value for jackpot determination extracted when the game ball enters the first start hole 1120 or the second start hole 1140A, 1140B (performs hit/loss determination), and determines the hit/loss ("time-saving hit", "small hit", "jackpot", or "miss"). After that, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol determination table in FIG. 72, and determines the selected symbol command based on the random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the first start hole 1120 or the second start hole 1140A, 1140B and the hit/loss determination value data, and determines the type of display mode (for example, the type of time-saving hit, the type of jackpot) to be derived to the special symbol display section 1163, 1164. Note that the above winning/losing judgment and selection of the symbol command are performed when the variable display of the special symbol begins, but this is not intended to exclude the possibility of performing this between the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the final display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 73, in this embodiment, the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z6") or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z13"). In contrast, the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state that is controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1"), or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2"). In other words, the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state is higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state. In this way, the positioning of the "jackpot" can be increased by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the C time-saving game state. For example, even if you win a "jackpot," it will be possible to suppress the decline in interest that can occur when you are at a disadvantage compared to not winning the "jackpot" (winning a "time-saving jackpot").

In addition, instead of making the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving play state higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving play state, the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving play state may be made higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving play state. In this way, by making the C time-saving play state more advantageous to the player than the A time-saving play state, the position of a "time-saving hit" can be increased. For example, even if a long period of time has passed without a "jackpot" being won, if a "time-saving hit" is won, the game will be controlled to the relatively advantageous C time-saving play state, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

[2-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 74 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a low start of the second pachinko game machine. FIG. 75 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a high start of the second pachinko game machine. All of these tables are stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 of the second pachinko game machine. The "Notes" column in FIG. 74 and FIG. 75 is shown for convenience of understanding. The main CPU 1201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the winning of the game ball is based on the winning of the game ball in the first start hole 1120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the winning of the game ball is based on the winning of the second start hole 1140A, 1140B. The variation pattern tables of the special symbols in FIG. 74 and FIG. 75 are tables that are referred to when executing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol in S1037 in FIG. 78 described later.

In normal game mode where hitting from the left is the normal game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low starts shown in FIG. 74, for example.

As shown in the special symbol variation pattern table for low starts in FIG. 74, the main CPU 1201 sets a look-ahead flag when the random number value for effect selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 1120 is a specific random number value. The sub-CPU 1301, which receives the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the main CPU 1201, performs a look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 decides whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance, but this is not limited to this, and the sub-CPU 1301 may decide.

On the other hand, in a game state where right-hand play is the normal game mode, i.e., in a high-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, or a low-probability time-saving game state, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table for special symbols for high starts shown in FIG. 75, for example.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 does not set a look-ahead flag when determining the special symbol variation pattern by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for high starts, but this is not limited to this.

As shown in Figures 74 and 75, the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win/lose), the reach determination random number value, and the performance selection random number value. However, this is not limited to this, and the variation pattern may be determined based on other values instead of or in addition to any of the above.

The random number value for reach determination is selected from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for effect selection is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start in FIG. 75, the expected number of times the special symbol is variably displayed per unit time is larger than when the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start in FIG. 74. In particular, when the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start, the second special symbol is variably displayed for an extremely long period of time, for example, approximately 600,000 msec (for example, long fluctuation A to C). On the other hand, when the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start, the second special symbol is variably displayed for only an extremely short period of time, for example, 1,000 msec (for example, super-fast fluctuation).

The main CPU 1201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub-CPU 1301. The sub-CPU 1301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and the sound effects output from the speaker 1032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201.

Although not shown in Figures 74 and 75, the variation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbols that are determined may be different for each setting value, for example by changing the range of the random number value for effect selection.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, in a normal game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to a special symbol fluctuation pattern table for a low start (see FIG. 74), and in a high-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, and a low-probability time-saving game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to a special symbol fluctuation pattern table for a high start (see FIG. 75), but this is not limited to this. For example, as a special symbol fluctuation pattern table for a high start, multiple fluctuation pattern tables with different expected values for the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed per unit time may be provided, and the table to be referenced when determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern may be different depending on the type of time-saving game state, for example.

In addition, the time-saving hit type reaches A and B shown in the "Notes" column of Figures 74 and 75 are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern may be a time-saving hit (no possibility of a jackpot). Similarly, the jackpot type reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern may be a jackpot (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, the common reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern may be either a time-saving hit or a jackpot.

Although the second pachinko gaming machine will not be described, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 stores a normal symbol winning determination table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17), a normal symbol winning type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19). The main CPU 1201 then determines the opening pattern of the normal electric device 1146 (see FIG. 69) in the same way as the first pachinko gaming machine, and controls the operating mode of the normal electric device 1146 based on this.

[2-4. Main control processing]
In the second pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 are the same as those executed by the main CPU 1201 except for the special symbol control process executed in S39 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23). Therefore, the special symbol control process will be described below, and the other processes executed by the main CPU 1201 will not be described. Note that the special symbol control process in the second pachinko game machine includes the same processes as those executed in the first pachinko game machine (e.g., the jackpot end process (Figs. 42 and 86)), but the special symbol control process will be described again below, including the same processes as those executed in the first pachinko game machine, with the step numbers changed.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S39 in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 76. Fig. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 76, the main CPU 1201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S1001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of each special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S1001, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1002.

Although not shown, when executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 1201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the working area of each special symbol in the main RAM 1203 in a specified register prior to the process of S1001.

Although not shown, when executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process to check the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol. If the reserved number of the first special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 1201 performs a process to reserve the transmission of a demo display command for the first special symbol, and if the reserved number of the second special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 1201 performs a process to reserve the transmission of a demo display command for the second special symbol. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. If the sub-control circuit 1300 receives the demo display command, and the demo display command is a demo display command for the main special symbol, the sub-CPU 1301 performs a demo display performance.

Although the second pachinko game machine can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the sub-CPU 1301 sets one of the first and second special symbols as the main special symbol and the other as the sub-special symbol, and mainly controls the presentation of the main special symbol. In this embodiment, in the normal game state in which left-handed play is the regular game mode, the first special symbol is the main special symbol, and in the game state in which right-handed play is the regular game mode (for example, high-probability time-saving game state, high-probability non-time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state), the second special symbol is the main special symbol. The sub-CPU 1301 then performs variably displaying decorative symbols and displaying characters, etc., for the main special symbol, as well as sound presentation, etc., for the main special symbol. For example, if the result of the hit determination process for the sub-special symbol is, for example, a jackpot, the main special symbol may be displayed while the sub-special symbol is displayed. In addition, in a low-probability time-saving game state among game states in which right-hitting is the regular game mode, another display image (for example, a countdown display of the remaining number of time-saving plays until the time-saving game state ends) may be displayed instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the main special symbol.

In S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time for the second special symbol to start being variably displayed based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1001.

If it is determined in S1002 that it is not the timing to start the variable display of the second special symbol (if S1002 is a NO judgment), that is, if any processing related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1003. For example, if a jackpot game control processing based on the result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is being executed, a NO judgment is made in S1002.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1002 that it is time for the second special symbol to start being variable displayed (if S1002 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1004.

In S1003, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the processing of S1003, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1004, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time for the first special symbol to start being variably displayed based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1004.

If it is determined in S1005 that it is not the timing to start the variable display of the first special symbol (if S1005 is a NO judgment), that is, if any processing related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1006. For example, if a jackpot game control processing based on the result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is being executed, a NO judgment is made in S1005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1005 that it is time for the first special symbol to begin to change display (if S1005 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1007.

In S1006, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, details of the special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the processing of S1006, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1007.

In S1007, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S1007, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1008.

In S1008, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time for the second special symbol to start being variably displayed based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1007.

If it is determined in S1008 that it is not time for the second special symbol to start being variable displayed (if S1008 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1010.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (if S1008 returns a YES judgment), that is, if no processing related to the second special symbol has been performed and variable display can begin, the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1009.

In S1009, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, details of the special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the processing of S1009, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1010.

In S1010, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1010, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1011.

In S1011, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time for the first special symbol to start being variable displayed based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1010.

If it is determined in S1011 that it is not time for the first special symbol to start being variable displayed (if S1011 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1011 that it is time to start the variable display of the first special symbol (if S1011 returns a YES judgment), that is, if no processing related to the first special symbol has been performed and variable display can begin, the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1012.

In S1012, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, details of the special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the processing of S1012, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S1001 to S1012) within the interrupt prohibited period.

In this way, in this embodiment, the special pattern management process described below is executed in the following order of priority: when any process related to the second special pattern is being executed, when any process related to the first special pattern is being executed, when no process related to the second special pattern is being executed and variable display can be started, when no process related to the first special pattern is being executed and variable display can be started.

[2-4-2. Special symbol management process]
Next, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1003, S1006, S1009, and S1012 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76) will be described with reference to Fig. 77. Fig. 77 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

For example, if the special pattern management process is called and executed in S1003 or S1009 during the special pattern control process, the second special pattern is the target of processing, and if the special pattern management process is called and executed in S1006 or S1012 during the special pattern control process, the first special pattern is the target of processing.

The numbers ("0" to "5") in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 77 are the control state numbers of the special symbols that are the subject of the process. The main CPU 1201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process that corresponds to the control state number.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the waiting time for the special pattern is 0 (S1021).

If it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time for the special pattern is not 0 (if S1021 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special pattern management process and returns the process to the special pattern control process (see FIG. 76).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (if S1021 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1022.

In S1022, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1022, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1023. The main CPU 1201 performs the process from S1023 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S1022.

In S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This S1023 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 78. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1024.

In S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This S1024 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to Figures 79 and 80. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1025.

In S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This S1025 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 81 and 82. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1026.

In S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process of S1026 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 84. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1027.

In S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process of S1027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1028.

In S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs a jackpot end process. This S1028 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

After completing the processes of S1023 to S1028, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). If the special symbol management process is called in S1003 during the special symbol control process, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1004; if it is called in S1006, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1007; if it is called in S1009, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1010; and if it is called in S1012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described with reference to Fig. 78. Fig. 78 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the second pachinko game machine.

When the special symbol variable display start process is called in S1023 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S1023 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S1031).

If it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (if S1031 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (if S1031 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1032.

In S1032, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the special symbol pause flag is off. The special symbol pause flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so that it does not proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S1032, even if S1031 is judged as YES (i.e., even if the start condition of the special symbol is met), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, i.e., it is on (S1032 is judged as NO), the special symbol variable display start process ends without proceeding.

If it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol pause flag is not OFF, i.e., is ON (if S1032 is a NO determination), as described above, the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed, and the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process. After that, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1032 that the special pattern pause flag is off (if S1032 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1033.

In S1033, the main CPU 1201 performs a shift process of the start information of the special pattern. After executing the process of S1033, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1034.

In S1034, the main CPU 1201 performs a hit determination process for the special symbol. In this process, the hit determination process for the special symbol is performed by referring to the hit determination table for the special symbol (see FIG. 71) and using a random number value for determining whether the special symbol is a big hit. In this embodiment, the first special symbol is determined to be a time-saving hit, a big hit, or a miss, and the second special symbol is determined to be a time-saving hit, a small hit, a big hit, or a miss. In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets the time-saving hit flag on when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a time-saving hit, sets the small hit flag on when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a small hit, and sets the big hit flag on when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a big hit. After executing the process of S1034, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1035. The time-saving hit flag is turned off when transitioning to the C time-saving play state, the small hit flag is turned off when the small hit play state begins, and the big hit flag is turned off when the big hit play state begins.

In the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034), first, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a big hit, and if this process determines that it is not a big hit, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a small hit, and if this process determines that it is not a small hit, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a time-saving hit, and if this process determines that it is not a time-saving hit, it is determined to be a miss.

In S1035, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the stopping symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1034) (for example, a time-saving hit, a small hit, a big hit, or a miss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 72) is referenced, and the random number value of the special symbol is used to determine the above-mentioned "selection symbol command" or "symbol designation command". In this embodiment, since there is only one type of miss, it is not necessary to determine the stopping symbol when the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, but multiple types of misses may be provided and the stopping symbol may be determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss. After executing the process of S1035, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1036.

In S1036, the main CPU 1201 performs a win type determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the type of win when the result of the special symbol win determination process is, for example, a win (time-saving win, small win, or big win). In this process, the win type determination table (see FIG. 73) is referenced and the type of win is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S1035). Note that in this embodiment, there are multiple types of wins, but there may be only one type of big win, or there may be only one type of time-saving win. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to multiple types of wins, multiple types of other wins (for example, small wins) may be provided, or multiple types of misses may be provided. After executing the process of S1036, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1037.

In S1037, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. This process is a process for judging or determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table (see Figs. 74 and 75), for example, according to the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit judgment process (S1034), the random number value for reach judgment and/or the random number value for performance selection, etc. In this embodiment, in a normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see Fig. 74), and in a game state in which right-handed hitting is the regular game mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, a low-probability time-saving game state), the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start (see Fig. 75). After executing processing of S1037, the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1038.

In S1038, the main CPU 1201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see Figures 74 and 75) is referenced, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process for the special symbol (S1037) is determined as the variation time for the special symbol. After executing the process of S1038, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1039.

In S1039, the main CPU 1201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (see S1024 in FIG. 77) is performed. After executing the process of S1039, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1040.

In S1040, the main CPU 1201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 is performed. After executing the process of S1040, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1041.

In S1041, the main CPU 1201 performs game status management processing. In this processing, the main CPU 1201 performs update processing of various flags related to the management of the game status (e.g., probability bonus flag, time-saving flag, etc.). After executing the processing of S1041, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1042.

In S1042, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interruption prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly the game status management process (S1041) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S1042)) within the interruption prohibited section.

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 79 and Fig. 80, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1024 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 77) will be described. Fig. 79 and Fig. 80 are a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the second pachinko game machine.

When the special symbol variable display end process is called at S1024 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called at S1024 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target. Also, in the special symbol variable display end process described below, the special symbol that is the processing target is simply referred to as the "special symbol," and the special symbol that is not the processing target is referred to as the "other special symbol."

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1051).

If it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (if S1051 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (if S1051 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1052.

In S1052, the main CPU 1201 loads the special symbol pause flag value. After executing the process of S1052, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1053.

In S1053, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the special pattern pause flag is off based on the special pattern pause flag value loaded in S1052.

If it is determined in S1053 that the special pattern pause flag is not off, i.e., is on (if S1053 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special pattern variable display end process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1053 that the special pattern pause flag is off (if S1053 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1054.

In S1054, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (see S1025 in FIG. 77) is performed after the special symbol variable display ending process is completed. After executing the process of S1054, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1055.

In S1055, the main CPU 1201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. This process also includes a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1055, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1056.

In S1056, the main CPU 1201 increments the value of the determined symbol counter by 1. The determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol has been determined (the number of times the special symbol game has been played), and the count is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 1203. For example, a counter may be provided for managing the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state, such as the number of remaining chance bonuses or the number of remaining time-saving games, or the determined symbol counter may be used to manage the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state. After executing the process of S1056, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1057.

In S1057, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small hit.

In S1057, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is determined to be not a small hit (if S1057 returns a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1059.

On the other hand, in S1057, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is determined to be a small hit (if S1057 returns a YES determination), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1058.

In S1058, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting or stopping while the small win game control process is being executed. After executing the process of S1058, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1059.

In S1059, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a jackpot.

In S1059, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is determined to be not a big hit (if S1059 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1059, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is determined to be a jackpot (if S1059 returns a YES determination), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1060.

In S1060, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting while the jackpot game control process is being executed. After executing the process of S1060, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1061.

In S1061, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the other special symbol is being variably displayed.

If it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is not being variably displayed (if S1061 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variably display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is being variably displayed (if S1061 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1062.

In S1062, the main CPU 1201 increments the value of the determined symbol number counter by 1. After executing the process of S1062, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1063.

In S1063, the main CPU 1201 sets the variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, a test firing signal is output to the outside. This test firing signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped as a miss. After executing the process of S1063, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1064.

In S1064, the main CPU 1201 forcibly changes and sets the hit flag of the other special symbol to a miss. By performing this process, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol being processed (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a jackpot, the other special symbol will be forcibly stopped as a miss even if the other special symbol is being variably displayed and the result of the hit determination process for this other special symbol is a jackpot. After executing the process of S1064, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1065.

In S1065, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to clear the working area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing processing of S1065, the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1066.

In S1066, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to set a predetermined fixed waiting time on the timer for the other special symbol. In this processing, the fixed waiting time is set so that when the special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a jackpot, the other special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a miss. After executing processing in S1066, the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1067.

In S1067, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the other special symbol to "2." After executing the process of S1067, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1068.

In S1068, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1068, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1069.

In S1069, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the other special symbol effect stop command. The other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1069, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

In this way, in the special symbol variable display end processing of this embodiment, if the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol being processed, the result of the hit determination processing for this special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a jackpot, and the other special symbol is being variable displayed, processing is performed to forcibly change the variable display of the other special symbol to a miss.

[2-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to Figures 81 and 82, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1025 during the special symbol management process (see Figure 77) will be described. Figures 81 and 82 are a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

When this special symbol game judgment process is called at S1025 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game judgment process is called at S1025 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1071).

If it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (if S1071 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game play determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (if S1071 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1072.

At S1072, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot.

If it is determined in S1072 that the reel is not a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S1072 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1073. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1072 that the reel is a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S1072 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1075.

At S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not a small win has occurred, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a small win.

If it is determined in S1073 that the special symbol is not a small win, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a miss (if S1073 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1074.

In S1074, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 83. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1073 that a small win has occurred, i.e., that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a small win (if S1073 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1075.

In S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs start setting processing for the big win game control processing or the small win game control processing. In this processing, signals are generated and updated that are output via the external terminal board 1184 to, for example, the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 for both) or the island computer (not shown). Note that the signals generated and updated in this processing are signals related to the special symbol that is the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After performing processing in S1075, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1076.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control process of S1075, the main CPU 1201 also performs processing to clear various flags and counters, such as the special chance flag, special chance counter, time-saving flag, and time-saving counter.

In S1076, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs processes such as a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening (for example, the large prize opening for large prizes 1131 for large prizes or the large prize opening for small prizes 1151 for small prizes) to be opened (S1077), a process of setting a large prize signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S1078), a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S1080), and a process of reserving the transmission of a large prize start display command (S1081). In addition, by performing a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079) to switch the control state number, the large prize opening opening preparation process (see S1026 in FIG. 77) will be performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. The main CPU 1201 then ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S1071 to S1081) within the interrupt prohibited period.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1074 during the special symbol game determination process (see Figs. 81 and 82) will be described with reference to Fig. 83. Fig. 83 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game end process in the second pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 1201 first performs a time-saving management process (S1091). Details of this time-saving management process are similar to those described with reference to Figures 32 to 39 for the first pachinko gaming machine, so a detailed description will be omitted. After executing the process of S1091, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1092.

In S1092, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". When the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is thus performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S1092, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1093.

In S1093, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for setting game state designation parameters for the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving transmission of a special symbol game end command (S1094). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S1094, the main CPU 1201 terminates the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 81).

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a miss, the main CPU 1201 does not set or reset either the sure win flag or the time-saving flag. Therefore, even if a miss display mode is derived, the game state does not change.

[2-4-7. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 84, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1026 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 77) will be described. Fig. 84 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the second pachinko game machine.

When this large prize opening preparation process is called in S1026 during special pattern management process in which the first special pattern is the processing target, the first special pattern is the processing target. Similarly, when this large prize opening preparation process is called in S1026 during special pattern management process in which the second special pattern is the processing target, the second special pattern is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1101).

If it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (if S1101 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (if S1101 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1102.

In S1102, the main CPU 1201 loads the large prize opening counter value. When a large prize opening counter is being executed, the large prize opening counter is a counter that counts the number of rounds executed in a large prize game state. When a small prize game control process is being executed, the large prize opening counter is a counter that counts the number of times a small prize game control process is executed. The count value of the large prize opening counter (large prize opening counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 1203. After executing S1102, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1103.

In S1103, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the number of times a large prize opening (e.g., the large prize opening 1131 for a large prize or the large prize opening 1151 for a small prize) has been opened is at the upper limit. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of times the large prize opening 1131 for a large prize that is opened in a large prize game state, is 4 rounds or 10 rounds, as shown in the prize type determination table (see FIG. 73), for example. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening 1151 for a small prize that is opened in a small prize game state is 1 time, for example.

If it is determined in S1103 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened has reached the upper limit (if S1103 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1104.

In S1104, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5." In this way, by switching the control state number by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S1104), the jackpot end process (see S1028 in FIG. 77) is performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S1104, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1105.

In S1105, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command (S1106). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S1106, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

Returning to S1103, if it is determined that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is not the upper limit (if S1103 is judged as NO), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1107.

In S1107, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the large prize opening count counter. After executing the process of S1107, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1108.

In S1108, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of selecting the large prize opening to open. In this process, if a large prize game control process is being executed, the large prize opening for a large prize 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected as the large prize opening to open, and if a small prize game control process is being executed, the large prize opening for a small prize 1151 (see FIG. 69) is selected. After executing the process of S1108, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1109.

In S1109, the main CPU 1201 performs various setting processes related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize openings (large prize openings for large prizes 1131 for large prizes and large prize openings for small prizes 1151 for small prizes) are opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize openings, the maximum number of winning balls into the large prize openings, the number of winning balls when the large prize openings are opened, etc. are set. The number of times the large prize openings are opened corresponds to the number of rounds when the large prize opening control process is executed, and corresponds to the number of times the small prize opening 1151 is opened when the small prize opening control process is executed. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the large prize openings are opened multiple times in one round or small prize opening control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize openings are opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S1109, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1110.

In this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 30,000 msec when the large prize game control process is being executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 1,800 msec when the small prize game control process is being executed. The maximum number of winning balls entering the large prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 10 balls when the large prize game control process is being executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 5 balls when the small prize game control process is being executed. The number of winning balls entering the large prize opening is set to, for example, 10 balls for both the large prize opening 1131 for a large prize opening for a large prize opening for a small prize opening and the large prize opening 1151 for a small prize opening. However, the values set in the various setting processes related to the large prize opening are not limited to the above.

In S1110, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for controlling the opening and closing of the large prize opening. In this process, the main CPU 1201 generates data for controlling the opening and closing of the large prize openings (large prize opening 1131 for a large win, large prize opening 1151 for a small win). After executing the process of S1110, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1111.

In S1111, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4." In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S1111) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening opening control process (see S1027 in FIG. 77) is performed after the large prize opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S1111, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1112.

In S1112, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1112, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1113.

In S1113, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1113, the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-8. Large prize opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 85, a special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1027 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 77) will be described. Fig. 85 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the second pachinko game machine.

When this large prize opening control process is called in S1027 during special pattern management process in which the first special pattern is the processing target, the first special pattern is the processing target. Similarly, when this large prize opening control process is called in S1027 during special pattern management process in which the second special pattern is the processing target, the second special pattern is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1121).

If it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if S1121 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special pattern is "4" (if S1121 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1122.

In S1122, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings (large prize opening for big wins 1131, large prize opening for small wins 1151) is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the large prize opening entry counter (for example, the large prize opening count switch for big wins 1132, the large prize opening count switch for small wins 1152 (see FIG. 70 for both)) that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings is the maximum number of winning balls. The large prize opening entry counter value counted by the large prize opening entry counter is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 1203.

If it is determined in S1122 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings (large prize opening 1131 for large wins, large prize opening 1151 for small wins) is not the maximum number of winning balls (if S1122 returns NO), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1123.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1122 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings (large prize opening 1131 for large wins, large prize opening 1151 for small wins) is the maximum number of winning balls (if S1122 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1124.

In S1123, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the large prize openings (large prize opening 1131 for large prizes, large prize opening 1151 for small prizes) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the various settings process related to the large prize openings (see S1109 in FIG. 84) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening (large prize opening for large win 1131, large prize opening for small win 1151) has not elapsed (if S1123 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the large prize openings (large prize opening 1131 for large prizes, large prize opening 1151 for small prizes) has elapsed (if S1123 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1124.

In S1124, the main CPU 1201 performs a process to close the large prize openings (large prize opening 1131 for a large win, and large prize opening 1151 for a small win). After executing the process of S1124, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1125.

In S1125, the main CPU 1201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1125) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening preparation process (see S1026 in FIG. 77) will be performed again after this large prize opening control process is completed. After executing the process of S1125, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1126.

In S1126, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1126, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1127.

In S1127, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S1127, the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-9. Big hit end processing]
Next, the big win end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described with reference to Fig. 86. Fig. 86 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win end process in the second pachinko game machine.

If this jackpot end process is called in S1028 during special pattern management process in which the first special pattern is the processing target, the first special pattern is the processing target. Similarly, if this jackpot end process is called in S1028 during special pattern management process in which the second special pattern is the processing target, the second special pattern is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1131).

If it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (if S1131 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). In this case, it returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special pattern is "5" (if S1131 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1132.

In S1132, the main CPU 1201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, the values of various flags (e.g., probability variable flag, time-saving flag, ceiling count prohibition flag, etc.) are set or reset, and the values of various counters (e.g., probability variable counter, time-saving counter, number of confirmed symbols counter, number of times large prize openings have been opened counter, large prize opening winning counter, ceiling counter, etc.) are set or reset. The special symbol pause flag and ceiling counter are both reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S1132). In addition, when the probability variable flag is set to ON, the ceiling count prohibition flag is also set to ON. As a result, in a high probability game state where the probability variable flag is ON, the ceiling counter is not updated. After executing the process of S1132, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1133.

In S1133, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. After executing the processing of S1133, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 set an interrupt prohibited section and perform the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibited section.

[2-5. Small Hit Rush]
In the second pachinko gaming machine described above, a so-called small win rush can be realized. The small win rush will be described below.

In the second pachinko game machine, as described above, a normal game state, a high probability time-saving game state, a high probability non-time-saving game state, and a low probability time-saving game state are prepared, and the main CPU 1201 controls the game state to one of these game states. As described above, in the normal game state, hitting from the left is considered to be the regular game mode, so the first special symbol game based on the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 1120 is mainly executed. In the other game states (high probability time-saving game state, high probability non-time-saving game state, and low probability time-saving game state), hitting from the right is considered to be the regular game mode, so the second special symbol game based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 1140A, 1140B is mainly executed. In addition, if the winning hole included in the normal electric role unit 1145 is set as the first starting hole, the first special symbol game is primarily played in any one of the normal game state, the high probability time-saving game state, and the low probability time-saving game state, and the second special symbol game is primarily played in the high probability non-time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the high-probability non-time-saving game state, the frequency with which game balls enter the large winning port 1151 for small wins is increased compared to other game states (e.g., normal game state, high-probability time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state), resulting in a small win rush in which the expected value of the game value (e.g., number of winning balls, etc.) paid out per number of balls fired per unit time can exceed 1.

Here, an example of the mechanism of the small win rush will be described. First, the game ball hit to the right passes through the passing gate 1126. In the high probability non-time-saving game state, the electric support control that operates the normal electric device 1146 to increase the frequency of opening the winning port (for example, the second start port 1140B in this embodiment) is not executed. In addition, the big win large winning port 1131 will not be in an open state unless the big win game control process is executed, so the frequency of the second start port 1140B being in an open state in the high probability non-time-saving game state is lower than the game state in which the time-saving control is executed. Therefore, if the small win large winning port 1151 is open, the game ball hit to the right and distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can win the small win large winning port 1151. When the game ball wins the small win large winning port 1151, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out as described above. In addition, a game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can enter the second start port 1140A. When a game ball enters the second start port 1140A, 1140B, not only is a stop display mode that indicates a small win with a relatively high probability of 1 in 3 (approximately) as shown in the hit determination table for special symbols (see FIG. 71), but also a super-fast fluctuation (for example, variable display time 1000 msec) is executed as shown in the fluctuation pattern table for special symbols for high start (see FIG. 75), so that the frequency of game balls entering the large winning port 1151 for small wins is increased compared to other game states (for example, normal game state, high probability time-saving game state, low probability time-saving game state). In this way, it is possible to realize a small win rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time can exceed 1.

On the other hand, in a game state where time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state or a low-probability time-saving game state), the second start port 1140B is opened by the execution of the electric support control, and most of the game balls that are hit to the right and distributed to the downward flow path 1107b enter the second start port 1140B. Therefore, even if the small win large winning port 1151 is open, the expectation of a game ball entering the small win large winning port 1151 is low. Moreover, as described above, even if a game ball enters the second start port 1140B, for example, only one prize ball is paid out. When a game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a enters the second starting port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out, but only about one-third to one-fifth of the game balls that are hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a enter the second starting port 1140A. In this way, in a game state in which time-saving control is executed, the expected value of the game value (e.g., number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time does not exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, a left hit is considered to be the normal game mode, but if a right hit is performed, when the game ball hit from the right passes through the passing gate 1126 and a stop display mode indicating a normal pattern win is derived, the normal electric device 1146 is activated, and the game ball enters the second start port 1140B, which may open the large winning port for small wins 1151. However, in the normal game state, the variation pattern of the special pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special pattern for low start (see FIG. 74), so even if the game ball enters the second start port 1140A, 1140B, the variable display of the second special pattern is performed in one of the long variation A to C, which has an extremely long variation time, and the frequency with which the large winning port for small wins 1151 is opened is extremely low. Therefore, there is no practical benefit for the player to hit from the right in the normal game state. In addition, if the winning hole included in the normal electric role unit 1145 is the first starting hole, the probability of winning a normal symbol in the normal game state may be set to 0, for example, so that there is no practical benefit to hitting to the right. In the normal game state, the expected value of the game value (e.g., the number of winning balls) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time does not exceed 1, and is smaller than the game state in which the time-saving control is executed.

In this embodiment, the small win rush occurs in a high probability non-time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, the small win rush may occur in a high probability time-saving game state in which special symbol shortening control is executed to shorten the variable display time of the special symbol without executing electric support control.

[3. The third pachinko game machine]
Next, the third pachinko game machine will be described. As described above, the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine called a type 1/type 2 mixed machine, and there are a first route and a second route as routes until the machine is controlled to a jackpot game state. The first route is when a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" is derived. The second route is when the V attacker opens due to the derivation of a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is a "gimmick opening hit", and the game ball that entered the opened V attacker enters the V winning hole in the V attacker.

The third pachinko gaming machine is a priority variable machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in parallel, and the start condition of the second special symbol is established with priority over the start condition of the first special symbol. However, it is not limited to this, and may be a sequential variable machine as described above.

In the following explanation of the third pachinko gaming machine, we will omit as much as possible explanation of the functions, shapes, and positions that are common to the first pachinko gaming machine, such as the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and base door 3, and the signals output from the external terminal board 2184 (see Figure 88 described below) to outside the third pachinko gaming machine (for example, the hall computer 2186 (see Figure 88 described below) and the island computers (not shown) installed on each island).

In describing the third pachinko gaming machine, the configuration will be described with reference to the drawings used in describing the first pachinko gaming machine, using the same reference numbers and step numbers as the first pachinko gaming machine. However, the configuration will be described with reference to new drawings used in describing the third pachinko gaming machine, using different reference numbers and step numbers than the first pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has functions and the like in common with the first pachinko gaming machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
The game board unit 2010 of the third pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 87. This game board unit 2010 is also disposed in front of the base door 3 (see Fig. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see Fig. 2) like the first pachinko game machine.

Figure 87 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 provided in the third pachinko game machine. A game area 2105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 2010, in which the released game ball can roll and flow down.

Note that the various components (e.g., the first starting hole 2120, etc.) arranged in the play area 2105 of the third pachinko gaming machine share some in common with the various components arranged in the play area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine, but will be explained in detail again.

As shown in FIG. 87, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 in which a game area 2105 is formed in which a launched game ball can roll down, a guide rail 2110, a center role 2115 located approximately in the center of the game area 2105, a first start opening 2120, a second start opening 2140, a general winning opening 2122, a passing gate unit 2125, a special electric role unit 2130, a normal electric role unit 2145, an LED unit 2160, a V winning device 2150, an outlet 2178, and a back unit (not shown). Note that the LED unit 2160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and a description thereof will be omitted for this third pachinko game machine.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference number) is formed in the gaming panel 2100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007. A guide rail 2110 is provided on the front surface of the gaming panel 2100, and gaming nails (no reference number) and the like are planted therein. A gaming ball launched from the launching device 6 (see Figs. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 2110 toward the gaming area 2105, collides with the gaming nails, etc., and flows downward below the gaming area 2105 while changing its direction of travel.

In addition, a back unit (not shown) with decorative bodies is arranged behind the gaming panel 2100 to enhance the presentation effect. The gaming panel 2100 is made of transparent resin so that the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front. In this case, the entire gaming panel 2100 may be made of transparent materials, or, for example, only the parts where the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front may be made of transparent materials. In addition, the gaming panel 2100 may be made of materials that do not have transparent parts (for example, wood), and transparent materials may be provided in some parts to enhance the presentation effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (both of which have no reference number) similar to the first pachinko game machine. The play area 2105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 2110. The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game balls launched from the launching device 2006 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the upper part of the play area 2105.

(Center role)
The center device 2115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (without reference number) of the game panel 2100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 2116 at its upper portion. Game balls launched toward the game area 2105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116.

A game ball launched by the launching device 2006 towards the game area 2105 flows down the left area 2106 or the right area 2107. A game ball flowing down the left area 2106 or the right area 2107 changes direction as it flows downward due to collision with game pegs or the like planted in the game panel 2100. When the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left area 2106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right area 2107.

The center device 2115 also has a warp entrance 2117 formed on the outer periphery on the left side, through which game balls flowing down the left area 2106 can enter. Game balls that enter the warp entrance 2117 are configured to be guided to a stage 2118 formed in the center device 2115. The stage 2118 is formed in front of the lower edge of the display area of the display device 2007 so that the game balls can roll in the left-right direction. The stage 2118 may be formed in multiple stages, such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

A chance entrance 2119 through which game balls can enter is formed at the rear of the stage 2118, approximately in the center in the left-right direction, and game balls that enter the chance entrance 2119 are configured to be released directly above the first start opening 2120. Therefore, game balls that enter the chance entrance 2119 have a higher probability of entering (passing through) the first start opening 2120 than game balls that do not enter the warp entrance 2117, or game balls that enter the warp entrance 2117 but do not enter the chance entrance 2119.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 2120 is disposed below the display area of the display device 2007, and is disposed so that a game ball hit from the left can win (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or is impossible to win). When a game ball wins in the first starting hole 2120, it is detected by a first starting hole switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described later). It is to be noted that a game ball hit from the right may also be able to win in the first starting hole 2120. Also, instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting hole 2120, a first starting hole may be provided that allows a game ball hit from the right to win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or is impossible to win).

When the first start hole switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the first start hole 2120, start information for the first special pattern is extracted, and a predetermined number of the extracted start information (for example, a maximum of four) are held. When the start conditions are met, the held start information is used in the winning determination process for the first special pattern. When a game ball enters the first start hole 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 2120 is not limited to three.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 2140 is arranged so that a game ball hit from the right can win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or cannot win). However, this is not limited to this, and a game ball hit from the left may be able to win in the second starting hole 2140.

When a game ball enters the second start hole 2140, it is detected by the second start hole switch 2141. When the second start hole switch 2141 (see FIG. 88 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the second start hole 2140, start information for the second special pattern is extracted, and a predetermined number of the extracted start information (for example, a maximum of four) is reserved. The reserved start information is used in the winning determination process for the second special pattern. When a game ball enters the second start hole 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 2140 is not limited to this.

(General Prize Winners)
A plurality of general winning openings 2122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 2007, and are arranged so that a game ball hit from the left can win a prize (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or cannot win a prize). When a game ball wins in any of the plurality of general winning openings 2122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later).

When the general prize opening switch 2123 (see Figure 88 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the general prize opening 2122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 2122 is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 2122 is positioned so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit from the right to win, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the general winning opening 2122 described above, a general winning opening through which a game ball hit from the right can win may be provided.

(Passing gate unit)
The passing gate unit 2125 is located in the right area 2107 and is a unitary body that integrates a passing gate 2126 that is configured to allow almost all game balls hit to the right to pass through, and a passing gate switch 2127 (see Figure 88 described below) that detects the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 2126.

When the passage of a gaming ball through the passing gate 2126 is detected, start information for the normal pattern is extracted, and the extracted start information is held for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four). The various held data are used for the winning determination process for the normal pattern. Note that even if the passing gate switch 2127 detects the passage of a gaming ball through the passing gate 2126, no prize balls are paid out. Also, the passing gate unit 2125 may be located in the left area 2106 instead of or in addition to the right area 2107.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 is a unit body that integrates a large prize opening 2131, a large prize opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later) that detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the large prize opening 2131, and a special electric accessory 2133. The special electric accessory unit 2130 is disposed below the passing gate unit 2125 in the right side area 2107.

The large prize opening 2131 is positioned so that game balls hit from the right can win (game balls hit from the left have difficulty or difficulty winning). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the large prize opening 2131 described above, a large prize opening that allows game balls hit from the left to win may be arranged, or a large prize opening that allows game balls to win may be arranged above the center device 2115.

The large prize opening 2131 is an opening that is opened to allow a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10) to enter (pass through) when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous game state for the player. When the large prize opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described below) detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 2131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 2131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric device 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 2135 (see FIG. 88 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 2134. The special electric device 2133, i.e., the special electric shutter 2134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which the game ball can enter (pass through) the large prize opening 2131 or easily, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the large prize opening 2131 or is difficult to enter. The large prize opening 2131 transitions from a closed state to an open state when the game enters a jackpot game state via the first route described above. When the game enters a jackpot game state via the first route described above, the transition from the closed state to the open state is performed for a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the jackpot game state via the first route is a game state in which a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by playing multiple rounds of round play in which the jackpot opening 2131 transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 2145 is a unit body that integrates a winning hole through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters (passes through), a switch that detects the entry of the game ball into this winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 2146, and is disposed in the right area 2107. In this embodiment, the winning hole is referred to as a second start hole 2140, and the switch is referred to as a second start hole switch 2141.

The normal electric device 2146 is equipped with a protruding plate-type normal power shutter 2147 that can move back and forth, and a normal power solenoid 2148 (see FIG. 88 described below) that operates the normal power shutter 2147. The normal electric device 2146, i.e., the normal power shutter 2147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting hole 2140, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 2140. Note that instead of the above-mentioned normal power shutter 2147 that can move back and forth, a movable member known as an electric chute may be used.

(V prize device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided downstream of the passing gate 2126 in the right area 2107. The V winning device 2150 comprises an opening and closing winning port 2151 opened to allow a game ball to enter the inside of the V winning device 2150, a V attacker 2152 capable of opening and closing the opening and closing winning port 2151, a V attacker solenoid 2154 which operates the V attacker 2152 to open and close the opening and closing winning port 2151, a V attacker count switch 2153 which detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, a V winning port 2155 through which a game ball which has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening and closing winning port 2151 can pass, and a V attacker count switch 2153 which detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, and a V winning port 2155 through which a game ball which has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening and closing winning port 2151 can pass. The V winning device 2150 includes a V winning port switch 2156 for detecting that a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening/closing winning port 2151 has entered (passed) the V winning port 2155, a losing port 2157 through which game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening/closing winning port 2151 but have not entered the V winning port 2155 can enter (pass), a V shutter 2158 for opening and closing the V winning port 2155, a V shutter solenoid 2159 for operating the V shutter 2158 to open and close the V winning port 2155, and a locking member 2160 for holding only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150. The V winning device 2150 may be provided upstream of the passing gate 2126 or in the left area 2106.

The V attacker 2152 is made of an arc-shaped member, and is normally in a closed state in which the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is closed. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and a stop display mode is derived indicating a "hit on the opening of the special device" described below, the V attacker 2152 is activated, for example, once, almost simultaneously with the end of the variable display of the special symbol, by the activation of the V attacker solenoid 2154 (see FIG. 88 described below). When the V attacker 2152 is activated once, it enters an open state in which the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is open for, for example, 1800 msec. Then, while the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is open due to the activation of the V attacker 2152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 per opening is, for example, 10.

The manner in which the V attacker 2152 is opened when a stop display mode indicating a "hit on the opening of the special feature" is derived is not limited to the above, and for example, it may be opened twice for 900 msec, or may be closed when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., one) enter the interior of the V winning device 2150.

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning device 2150. When the V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning device 2150, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and increments the value of the V attacker winning counter, which is a function of the main CPU 2201. When the V attacker winning counter reaches a specified value, the V attacker 2152 is activated by the V attacker solenoid 2154, and the opening/closing winning port 2151 is closed, even if the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec) that the opening/closing winning port 2151 can be opened has not elapsed.

The V attacker 2152 continues to be controlled to open when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 2155. In other words, the V winning hole 2155 is the winning hole that triggers control to a jackpot game state via the second route described above.

The V winning hole switch 2156 detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 2155. When the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 88) detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 2155 within a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 msec) after the V attacker 2152 opens, it continues to control the opening of the V attacker 2152. In other words, it is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route. When it is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, a round game in which the V attacker 2152 transitions from a closed state to an open state is played for a predetermined number of rounds.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled via the first route, a round game is executed in which the large prize winning port 2131 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state, whereas when the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, a round game is executed in which the V attacker 2152 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, when the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, the V attacker 2152 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state in the first round, but a round game in which, for example, the large prize winning port 2131 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state may be executed midway through the round game.

In addition, for example, by providing a V entry port inside the special electric device 2133 (i.e., the area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is in the open state), it is possible to have one V entry port and one attacker that is opened in the jackpot game state. In this case, when a stop display mode indicating a "game device open hit" is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and when a game ball enters the V entry port 2155 provided inside the special electric device 2133, control is performed to the jackpot game state (jackpot game state via the second route).

The losing port 2157 is configured to allow game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but have not passed through the V winning port 2155 to enter (pass through). Game balls that pass through the losing port 2157 are discharged outside the machine. Note that if all game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the losing port 2157 and no game balls pass through the V winning port 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is not continued and ends.

The V shutter 2158 constantly operates between a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for game balls to pass through the V winning opening 2155 and an open state in which it is possible (or easy) for game balls to pass through the V winning opening 2155, by the operation of the V shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 88 described below). In this embodiment, for example, the V shutter 2158 constantly operates in a cycle (period) of 7000 msec, repeating the operation of "closed for 6000 msec -> open for 1000 msec -> closed for 6000 msec".

The locking member 2160 is provided above the V winning port 2155, and is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one of the game balls that enter the V winning device 2150. Game balls that enter the V winning device 2150 but are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged outside the machine from the losing port 2157. Even if multiple game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all game balls that are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged outside the machine from the losing port 2157.

In addition, after a certain time (e.g., 3000 msec) has elapsed since the V attacker 2152 was activated, the locking member 2160 releases the game ball by the activation of a locking solenoid (not shown). The game ball that has been released from the locking member 2160 falls towards the V winning port 2155, and if the V winning port 2155 is open at this time, it enters (passes through) the V winning port 2155, and if the V winning port 2155 is closed at this time, it passes through the losing port 2157. Note that the locking member 2160 may not be provided and game balls that enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning port 2155 or the losing port 2157.

(Outlet)
The outlet 2178 is for discharging game balls that have been shot toward the game area 2105 but have not won or entered any of the various winning ports (for example, the first start port 2120, the second start port 2140, the large winning port 2131, the V winning device 2150, the general winning port 2122, etc.) to the outside of the machine. This outlet 2178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 2105 so that both game balls hit from the left and game balls hit from the right can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 2178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between multiple general winning ports 2122 or between the special electric role unit 2130 and the second start port 2140, so that game balls flowing down the game area 2105 can be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) is used to decorate the game board unit 2010, as in the first pachinko game machine, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 2100. This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 2007, and is provided with a group of performance-use accessories 2058, such as movable accessories, controlled by the sub-control circuit 2300. At least one of the performance-use accessory group 2058 or a performance-use accessory component constituting the accessory functions as a performance-use accessory that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

[3-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 88. Fig. 88 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine. Note that the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine has some parts in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, but will be described again in detail.

As shown in FIG. 88, the third pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, is mainly composed of a main control circuit 2200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 2300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 2400, and a power supply circuit 2450.

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (read-write memory), an initial reset circuit 2204, a backup capacitor 2207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 2201 is connected to the main ROM 2202, the main RAM 2203, the initial reset circuit 2204, etc. The main CPU 2201 has built-in functions such as a WDT that monitors operation and a function for preventing fraud.

The main ROM 2202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the third pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, etc. The main CPU 2201 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the main ROM 2202.

The main RAM 2203 has a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and this main RAM 2203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201. Note that, although in this embodiment, RAM is used as the temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201, this is not limited to this, and any readable and writable storage medium can be used.

The initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 2207 has the function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 2203 from being lost in the event of a power outage, etc.

The main control circuit 2200 also includes an I/O port 2205 that is communicatively connected to various devices, and a command output port 2206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 2300 so that various commands can be output.

In addition, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200. For example, the main control circuit 2200 is connected to the normal symbol display unit 2161, the normal symbol reserved display unit 2162, the first special symbol display unit 2163, the second special symbol display unit 2164, the first special symbol reserved display unit 2165, the second special symbol reserved display unit 2166, the time-saving notification display unit 2168, the normal power solenoid 2148, the special power solenoid 2135, the V attacker solenoid 2154, and the V shutter solenoid 2159. In addition to these, the main control circuit 2200 is also connected to the performance display monitor 2170 and the error notification monitor 2172. The main control circuit 2200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals via the I/O port 2205.

The performance display monitor 2170 displays performance display data, setting values, etc. under the control of the main CPU 2201. The performance display data is data that indicates, for example, the proportion of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state for a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 60,000 balls) shot, and is also called a base value.

The error notification monitor 2172 displays an error code. In addition to the error code, for example, in a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, the error notification monitor 2172 can also display a setting change code indicating that a setting change process is in progress, a setting confirmation code indicating that a setting confirmation process is in progress, etc. Note that the setting change code may be a special symbol that is not normally displayed (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that a setting change is in progress).

The main control circuit 2200 is also connected to the first start port switch 2121, the second start port switch 2141, the pass gate switch 2127, the large prize port count switch 2132, the V attacker count switch 2153, the V prize port switch 2156, and the general prize port switch 2123. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to the main control circuit 2200 via the I/O port 2205.

The main control circuit 2200 is further connected to a calling device (not shown) having functions such as calling a hall attendant and displaying the number of jackpots, an external terminal board 2184 used to send data to a hall computer 2186 that manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall, a setting key 2174 operated to change or check the setting value if the pachinko machine has a setting function, and a backup clear switch 2176 that can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 2203 according to the operation of the gaming center manager. Note that if the pachinko machine has a setting function, the backup clear switch 2176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided.

The setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are preferably housed in a specified case so that they cannot be easily touched by third parties (e.g., players) other than the manager of the amusement facility. "Inside a specified case" includes not only a case in which the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also a case in which notches are provided only at the locations corresponding to the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176, and a case in which the manager of the amusement facility can touch the setting key 2174 and/or the backup clear switch 2176 when the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the amusement facility to expose the back.

In this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but this is not limited thereto, and they may be configured to be connected to the payout/launch control circuit 2400 or the power supply circuit 2450, for example. In this case, too, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the person in charge of the amusement facility from easily touching the setting key 2174 or the backup clear switch 2176.

[3-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 2300 includes a sub-CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work RAM 2303, a display control circuit 2304, a sound control circuit 2305, an LED control circuit 2306, a role control circuit 2307, and a command input port 2308. The sub-control circuit 2300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 2200. Although not shown in FIG. 88, the sub-control circuit 2300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player, as in the first pachinko game machine.

The program ROM 2302 stores programs for controlling the game presentation of the third pachinko game machine by the sub-CPU 2301, various tables, etc. The sub-CPU 2301 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the program ROM 2302. In particular, the sub-CPU 2301 controls the game presentation according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 2200.

The work RAM 2303 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub-CPU 2301.

The display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for controlling the display of the display device 2007. The display control circuit 2304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM in which data for generating various types of image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, a D/A converter for converting image data into an image signal, and the like.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub-CPU 2301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data showing decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. In this way, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 2032. The audio control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC for controlling the audio, an audio data ROM for storing various types of audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as an AMP) for amplifying the audio signal, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 2032. In response to a sound generation command supplied from the sub-CPU 2301, the sound source IC selects one piece of sound data from multiple pieces of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. The sound source IC also reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a specified sound signal, and supplies the converted sound signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as sound and sound effects output from the speaker 2032.

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046, which includes decorative LEDs. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which multiple types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The reel control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each reel (for example, one or more reels among the group of reels for performance 2058). The reel control circuit 2307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each reel, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a reel data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored.

The reel control circuit 2307 selects one operation pattern from among the multiple operation patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a reel operation command from the sub-CPU 2301. The selected operation pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is then supplied, thereby controlling the mechanical operation of each reel. The lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from among the multiple lighting patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a lighting command from the sub-CPU 2301. The selected lighting pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is then supplied, thereby controlling the lighting operation of each reel.

The command input port 2308 is connected to the command output port 2206 and receives commands sent from the main control circuit 2200.

The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls from the pachinko game machine, and is connected to a payout device 2082 for paying out game balls, a launch device 2006 for launching game balls, a card unit 2180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

When the payout/launch control circuit 2400 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082 and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls.

A ball lending operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180. The ball lending operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a loan/return button for receiving the return of a ball lending card on which cache data is stored (neither is shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a loan ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180. The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls based on the loan ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180. The operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

In addition, when the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is rotated clockwise, the payout/launch control circuit 2400 supplies power to a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation), and controls the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required during play to the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, etc.

The power supply circuit 2450 is connected to a power switch 2095 and other components. The power switch 2095 is turned on when the necessary power is to be supplied to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the third pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 89 to 92. The third pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

The third pachinko gaming machine does not execute the probability bonus control. The third pachinko gaming machine also has a normal gaming state in which the time-saving control is not executed, and a time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed, and the main CPU 2201 can proceed with the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state.

In this embodiment, in the normal game mode, left hitting is the regular game mode, and in the time-saving game mode, right hitting is the regular game mode. The sub-CPU 2301 executes control to display the hitting method that is the regular game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 2007.

[3-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
FIG. 89 shows an example of a special symbol winning determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 89, when a game ball enters (passes) the first start hole 2120, the main CPU 2201 determines the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol to be a "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "miss" based on the hit determination process for the first special symbol using a random number value for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol. Also, when a game ball enters (passes) the second start hole 2140, the main CPU 2201 determines the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol to be a "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "gimmick release hit" based on the hit determination process for the second special symbol using a random number value for determining a jackpot for the second special symbol.

It is not essential that a "hit on the release of the special feature" is not determined when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, but even if a "hit on the release of the special feature" is determined, it is preferable that the probability of the "hit on the release of the special feature" is extremely low compared to when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed (for example, a probability equal to or lower than a "jackpot"). Also, it is not essential that a "miss" is not determined when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, but if a "miss" is determined, the probability may be higher than the probability of the "hit on the release of the special feature" or lower than the probability of the "hit on the release of the special feature".

In the hit determination table for the special symbols stored in the main ROM 2202, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a hit that is determined to be a "time-saving hit", a "jackpot", or a "miss" and the corresponding determination value data ("time-saving hit determination value data", "jackpot determination value data", "miss determination value data") is specified as data used in the hit determination process for the first special symbol executed based on the winning of the first starting hole 2120. In addition, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a hit that is determined to be a "time-saving hit", a "jackpot", or a "gimmick release hit" and the corresponding determination value data ("time-saving hit determination value data", "jackpot determination value data", "gimmick release hit determination value data") is specified as data used in the hit determination process for the second special symbol executed based on the winning of the second starting hole 2140.

Note that this third pachinko game machine does not have a function to change the jackpot probability determined for a "jackpot," but this is not essential, and the jackpot probability may be increased, for example, by setting a probability-change flag to ON depending on the type of jackpot, etc.

In addition, in this third pachinko gaming machine, the total random number value for the random number value used to determine a jackpot for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 65536. In other words, the random number value for determining a jackpot is generated within the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

When the third pachinko machine is a pachinko machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting. In this case, for example, both the jackpot probability and the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting, or the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the jackpot probability may be higher in a high setting than in a low setting, or the probability of hitting the jackpot may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be higher in a high setting than in a low setting. However, even if the third pachinko machine is a pachinko machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable to set the probability of hitting the time-saving feature to be the same for all settings.

In addition to or instead of changing the jackpot probability or the probability of winning the special feature opening according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 may be changed for each set value to change the winning rate for the V winning device 2150, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning port 2155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning port 2155, or the number of times the time-saving continuation may be changed for each set value. In other words, by adopting one or more of the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the probability of winning the special feature opening, the opening frequency of the V winning port 2155 (i.e., the operation frequency of the V attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times the time-saving continuation may be changed, the expected value controlled for the jackpot game state may be configured to be higher for a high setting than for a low setting.

[3-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 90 shows an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "select symbol command" and a "symbol designation command" that determine the stopping symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the starting hole 2120, 2140 and the aforementioned determination value data. The "select symbol command" is a command for designating the winning symbol determined according to the type of jackpot when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating the symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 90, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 99.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 0 and 3, the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 4 and 60, the main CPU 2201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 61 and 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning determination process for the first special symbol, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z6" as the selected symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Furthermore, when the winning determination process for the second special symbol results in the obtaining of the winning determination value data for the release of the reel, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, regardless of whether the symbol random number value for the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command.

Although the third pachinko gaming machine will not be described, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is a table that is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol that is output to the first special symbol display unit 2163 or the second special symbol display unit 2164 (see FIG. 88) when the variable display of the special symbol stops, in response to a selected symbol command. In addition, the special symbol display units 2163 and 2164 derive the display mode of the time-saving hit, the display mode of the jackpot, the display mode of the gimmick opening hit, or the display mode of the miss based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. In addition, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table described in the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 12(B)) is also stored in the program ROM 2302 of the sub-control circuit 2300.

[3-3-3. Winning Type Determination Table]
FIG. 91 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 of the third pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table is referred to when determining the mode of the jackpot game state (more specifically, the number of rounds) and the mode of the subsequent game state (more specifically, the time-saving flag and the end condition of the time-saving) according to the selection pattern command determined in response to the pattern random number value of the special pattern. The mode of the subsequent game state indicates the mode of the game state after the jackpot game state ends. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special pattern is a time-saving hit, the game is controlled to the C time-saving game state without being controlled to the jackpot game state. "L" shown in the column of the time-saving end condition in FIG. 91 indicates the sum of the variable display number of the first special pattern and the variable display number of the second special pattern. Similarly, "M" indicates the variable display number of the second special pattern, and "N" indicates the number of times of the opening of the special device. Note that the remarks in the remarks column of FIG. 91 are written for convenience and to make it easier to understand.

In this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the mode of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, if the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time-saving flag on, and determines the time-saving end conditions to be L=30, M=6, and N=3. Also, if the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time-saving flag on, and determines the time-saving end conditions to be L=30, M=3, and N=3. Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state is not determined.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "jackpot", the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state and the mode of the subsequent game state (A time-saving game state) are determined as follows. For example, if the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time-saving flag on, and determines the end conditions of the time-saving to be L = 50, M = 5, N = 2. In addition, if the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, determines to set the time-saving flag on, and determines the end conditions of the time-saving to be L = 50, M = 5, N = 1. In addition, if the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, and determines not to set the time-saving flag on. Furthermore, if the selected symbol command is "z6," the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time-saving flag to ON, and determines the conditions for ending the time-saving mode to be L=50, M=5, and N=2.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "release of the special feature" (for example, the selected symbol command is "z7") and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, decides to set the time-saving flag to ON, and determines the time-saving end conditions to be L = 50, M = 5, and N = 2. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "release of the special feature", if the game state is not controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, the main CPU 2201 not only does not execute the jackpot game state, but also does not set the time-saving flag to ON, and after executing control based on the special feature hit, returns to the game state immediately before the special feature hit.

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z4"), the main CPU 2201 does not set either the mode of the big win game state or the mode of the game state thereafter. In other words, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the main CPU 2201 does not transition the game state, but continues to control the game state up to that point.

Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z4"), neither the state of the jackpot game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is set as described above, so there is no need to illustrate this in the hit type determination table of FIG. 91. However, in this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, it is illustrated in FIG. 91 to clearly show that neither the state of the jackpot game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss".

The "L", "M", and "N" shown in the column of the time-saving termination conditions in FIG. 91 are all the same conditions regardless of the game state, but are not limited to this and may be different conditions depending on the game state. For example, all of the termination conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different for the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, respectively, or may be different only for one of the time-saving game states among the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. Also, only one of the termination conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different for the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, respectively, or may be different only for one of the time-saving game states among the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. In other words, at least one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different in at least one of the time-saving play states A, B, and C.

[3-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
Fig. 92 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols of the third pachinko game machine. The "Notes" column in Fig. 92 is shown for convenience. The main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the winning is based on the winning of a game ball into the first start hole 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the winning is based on the winning of a game ball into the second start hole 2140.

As shown in FIG. 92, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the gaming ball enters the second starting hole 2140.

As shown in FIG. 92, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "time-saving hit," the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the random number value for effect selection extracted when the gaming ball enters (passes through) the first starting hole 2120.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot," the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the random number value for effect selection extracted when the gaming ball enters (passes through) the first starting hole 2120.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "miss," the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the value of the time-saving flag, the reach determination random number value extracted when the gaming ball enters (passes) the first starting hole 2120, and the effect selection random number value. Note that, since hitting to the right is considered the regular gaming mode in the time-saving gaming state, it is considered that the gaming ball will rarely enter the first starting hole 2120.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a "time-saving hit," the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the random number value for effect selection extracted when the gaming ball enters (passes through) the second starting hole 2140.

In addition, if the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "jackpot," the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the random number value for effect selection extracted when the gaming ball enters (passes through) the second starting hole 2140.

If the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a "hit with the release of the special feature" and the value of the time-saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol based on the reach determination random number value and the performance selection random number value extracted when the gaming ball enters the second start hole 2140.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a "hit on the release of the reel" and the value of the time-saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to be a long fluctuation presentation with an extremely long fluctuation time, for example, 600,000 msec. If the value of the time-saving flag is "0", the game ball will not basically enter (pass) the second start hole 2140, but even if an unforeseen event occurs and the game ball does enter the second start hole 2140, this is done in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous player, but this is not necessarily required.

The random number value for reach determination is selected from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for effect selection is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 2201 sets a look-ahead flag if the random number value for effect selection extracted based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 2120 is a specific random number value. The sub-CPU 2301, which receives the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the main CPU 2201, performs a look-ahead effect if the look-ahead flag is set.

For convenience, although it is not shown in the special symbol variation pattern table in FIG. 92, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 sets the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is off, and does not set the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is on or the probability bonus flag is on.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 decides whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance, but this is not limited to this, and the sub-CPU 2301 may decide.

The main CPU 2201 may set the look-ahead flag (to perform a look-ahead performance) even when the time-saving flag or the probability-change flag is on. The main CPU 2201 may also set the look-ahead flag (to perform a look-ahead performance) when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol.

When the time-saving flag is on, the expected number of changes per unit time for the special symbol fluctuation pattern determined is smaller than when the time-saving flag is off. In other words, the time it takes for the special symbol to fluctuate when the time-saving flag is on is likely to be shorter than the time it takes for the special symbol to fluctuate when the time-saving flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub-CPU 2301. The sub-CPU 2301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effects output from the speaker 2032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201.

In addition, the time-saving hit type reaches A and B shown in the "Notes" column of Figure 92 are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern may be a time-saving hit (no possibility of a jackpot). Similarly, the jackpot type reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern may be a jackpot (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, the common reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern may be either a time-saving hit or a jackpot.

Although the third pachinko gaming machine will not be described, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 stores a normal symbol winning determination table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17), a normal symbol winning type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19). The main CPU 2201 then determines the opening pattern of the normal electric device 2146 (see FIG. 87) in the same manner as the first pachinko gaming machine, and controls the operation mode of the normal electric device 2146 based on this.

[3-4. Main control processing]
In the third pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 are the same as those executed by the main CPU 2201 except for the special symbol control process executed in S39 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23). Therefore, the following will describe the special symbol control process, and will omit a description of the other processes executed by the main CPU 2201. Note that, although some of the processes executed in the special symbol control process in the third pachinko game machine are the same as those executed in the first pachinko game machine (for example, the jackpot end process (Figs. 42 and 103)), the following will describe the same processes as those executed in the first pachinko game machine with different step numbers.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S39 in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 93. Fig. 93 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 93, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S2001, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 2201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the processing of S2001, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the working area of the special symbol in the main RAM 2203, etc., in a predetermined register.

Although not shown, when executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 2201 also checks the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol. If the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol are both "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of reserving a demo display command. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. When the sub-control circuit 2300 receives the demo display command, the sub-CPU 2301 performs a demo display performance. The third pachinko game machine is not a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, and therefore does not have the concept of a main special symbol as described in the first pachinko game machine.

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, i.e., whether the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (if S2002 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (if S2002 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the second special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., whether start information for the second special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol has not started to be variable displayed, i.e., that the start information for the second special symbol is not pending (if S2003 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the first special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., whether start information for the first special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol has not started to be variable displayed, i.e., that the start information for the first special symbol is not pending (if S2004 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., that the start information for the first special symbol is pending (if S2004 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2005.

Returning to S2003, if it is determined that the second special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., that the start information for the second special symbol is pending (if S2003 returns YES), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2005.

In S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 94. After executing the processing of S2003, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S2001 to S2005) within the interrupt prohibited period.

In this manner, in this embodiment, a priority variation machine in which the special pattern management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the first special pattern when the start information of the second special pattern is reserved has been described as the third pachinko gaming machine, but this is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special pattern is reserved, the priority variation machine may be one in which the special pattern management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special pattern, or a sequential variation machine in which the special pattern management process is executed in the order of winning in the first start port 2120 or the second start port 2140.

[3-4-2. Special design management process]
Next, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93) will be described with reference to Fig. 94. Fig. 94 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

When the control state number is 0 (when S2002 is judged as YES), the special pattern management process processes the second special pattern if S2003 is judged as YES, and processes the first special pattern if S2004 is judged as YES. Also, when the control state number is not 0 (when S2002 is judged as NO), the special pattern management process processes the special pattern currently being executed.

The numbers ("0" to "7") in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 94 are the control state numbers of the special symbols that are the subject of the process. The main CPU 2201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process that corresponds to the control state number.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S2011).

If it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (if S2011 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (if S2011 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2012.

In S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2012, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2013. The main CPU 2201 performs the process from S2013 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S2012.

In S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This S2013 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 95. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2014.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This S2014 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 96. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2015.

In S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This process of S2015 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs a V winning device opening preparation process. This S2016 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2017.

In S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs a V winning device opening control process. This S2017 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 100. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2018.

In S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process in S2018 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 101. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process of S2019 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot end process. This S2020 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

After completing steps S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, the process returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described with reference to Fig. 95. Fig. 95 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the third pachinko game machine.

Note that if the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S2013 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, if the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S2013 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 95, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

If it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (if S2021 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (if S2021 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 performs a shift process of the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2022, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol hit determination process. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 89) is referenced, and a special symbol hit determination is performed using a random number value for determining whether the special symbol is a hit. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is the target of processing, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a jackpot, or a miss. Also, if the second special symbol is the target of processing, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a jackpot, or a special feature release hit. After executing S2023, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2024.

In S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the stopping symbol of the special symbol that corresponds to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) (for example, a time-saving hit, a big hit, a role-opening hit, or a miss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 90) is referenced, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol is used to determine the above-mentioned "select symbol command" or "symbol designation command." After executing the process of S2024, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot type determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the type of win when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (time-saving hit, jackpot, or special feature release hit). In this process, the type of win is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S2024) by referring to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 91). Note that the type of win determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a special feature release hit is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed by the game ball passing through the V winning hole 2155 opened based on the special feature release hit. In addition, in this embodiment, the types of time-saving hit, jackpot, and special feature release hit are all multiple types, but the type of time-saving hit, jackpot, and/or special feature release hit may be one type. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing multiple types of time-saving hits, jackpots, and/or feature release hits, multiple types of misses may be provided. After executing the process of S2025, the main CPU 2201 proceeds to S2026.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. This process is a process for judging or determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the special symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 92) is referenced, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, for example, according to the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit judgment process (S2023), the value of the time-saving flag, the random number value for reach judgment and/or the random number value for effect selection, etc. After executing the process of S2026, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 92) is referenced, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process for the special symbol (S2026) is determined as the variation time for the special symbol. After executing the process of S2027, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2028.

In S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1", after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 94) is performed. After executing the process of S2028, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2029.

In S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state (e.g., the number of times remaining in the special mode and the number of times remaining in the time-saving mode) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 is performed. After executing the process of S2029, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2030.

In S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs game status management processing. This processing mainly involves updating various flags related to game status management (e.g., probability bonus flags, time-saving flags, etc.). After executing S2030, the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2031.

In S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly the game state management process (S2030) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S2031)) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described with reference to Fig. 96. Fig. 96 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the third pachinko game machine.

If the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, if the special symbol variable display end process is a process called in S2014 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

If it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (if S2041 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (if S2041 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2042.

In S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. After executing the process of S2042, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2043.

In S2043, the main CPU 2201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. This process also includes a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2043, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2044.

In S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol counter. As described above in the explanation of the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine, the determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol is determined (the number of times a special symbol game has been played), but it may also manage the number of games of a special symbol game played under a specific state, such as the number of times a special symbol game is remaining or the number of times a time-saving game is remaining. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described with reference to Fig. 97. Fig. 97 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

Note that if this special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the target of processing, the first special symbol is the target of processing. Similarly, if the special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the target of processing, the second special symbol is the target of processing.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

If it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (if S2051 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game play determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (if S2051 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2052.

In S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot.

If it is determined in S2052 that the result is not a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S2052 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2060. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2052 that the result is a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S2052 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2053. Note that if the special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a win when the special symbol is released, or if the special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a miss, then a NO judgment is made in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing for jackpot game control. In this processing, signals (e.g., jackpot signals, etc.) that are output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 are generated and updated. Note that the signal that is generated and updated in this processing is a hit signal for the special symbol that is the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After executing the processing of S2053, the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2054.

In addition, during the start setting process for jackpot game control in S2053, the main CPU 2201 also performs processing to clear various flags and counters, such as the time-saving flag and time-saving counter.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs processes such as a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening 2131 can be opened (S2055), a process of setting a large prize signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2057), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S2058), and a process of reserving the transmission of a large prize start display command (S2059). By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2057), the large prize opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game judgment process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

At S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a special feature has been opened, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a special feature has been opened.

If it is determined in S2060 that the special symbol that has stopped is not a winning combination, i.e., that the special symbol that has stopped is a winning combination (if S2060 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2061. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2060 that the special symbol that has stopped is a winning combination, i.e., that the special symbol that has stopped is a winning combination (if S2060 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2061.

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing for game control when a special feature is opened. In this processing, signals (e.g., a special feature opening signal, etc.) that are output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 are generated and updated. Note that the signals generated and updated in this processing are signals related to the special symbol that is the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After executing the processing of S2061, the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2062.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs a process to set the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 can be opened. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 can be opened, set in this process, is, for example, 1 time. After executing the process of S2062, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2063.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processes such as setting a signal for opening a special device to the external terminal board 2184 (S2063), setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), setting a game state designation parameter (S2065), and reserving the transmission of a display command for starting a special device to be opened (S2066). By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game judgment process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 98. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt prohibited period.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97) will be described with reference to Fig. 98. Fig. 98 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first performs time-saving management processing (S2071). The third pachinko gaming machine, which is called a type 1/type 2 mixed machine, is not controlled to a high probability gaming state, so the time-saving management processing executed in the third pachinko gaming machine differs from the processing described with reference to Figures 32 to 39 for the first pachinko gaming machine. Specifically, in the first pachinko gaming machine, it was described that the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on when the probability variable flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, but the third pachinko gaming machine is not controlled to a high probability gaming state. Therefore, it differs in that the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, instead of being set to on when the probability variable flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. Also, in the first pachinko gaming machine, in the time-saving transition determination process (see FIG. 37), it is determined whether the probability variable flag is off (see S191), and then the process of S192 is performed on the condition that the probability variable flag is off. However, in the third pachinko gaming machine, as described above, it is not controlled to a high probability gaming state, so it differs in that it performs the process of S192 without performing the process of S191. The other processes in the time-saving management process are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 32 to FIG. 39 for the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process of S2071, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2072.

In S2072, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game. After executing the process of S2072, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2073.

In S2073, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process for the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S2074). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S2074, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97).

[3-4-7. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 99, a V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2016 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 94) will be described. Fig. 99 is a flow chart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

If it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (if S2081 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (if S2081 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of openings as the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (i.e., the operation pattern of the V attacker 2152). In this embodiment, the opening pattern is set to a maximum of 1800 msec opening only once, but the opening pattern is not limited to this. For example, a maximum of 900 msec opening may be performed a maximum of two times per opening, or the first opening may be performed for a maximum of 600 msec, and the second opening may be performed for a maximum of 1200 msec. Furthermore, multiple opening patterns may be provided for each opening of the role within a total time not exceeding a specified time (for example, 1800 msec), and one of these multiple opening patterns may be set based on, for example, the random number value of the special pattern. After executing the process of S2082, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2083.

In S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening/closing control processing. In this processing, processing is performed to generate opening/closing control data for the V winning port 2155. After executing the processing of S2083, the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2084.

In S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S2084), the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 94) is performed after the V winning device opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S2084, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2085.

In S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2085, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process for the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device open preparation process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-8. V winning device opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 100, a V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2017 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 94) will be described. Fig. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of a V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

If it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if S2091 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (if S2091 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of game balls that entered the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning port 2151 was opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88), which counts the number of winning game balls that entered the V winning device 2150, is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 2203.

If it is determined in S2092 that the number of game balls that have won in the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum number of winning balls (if S2092 is judged as NO), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2093.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2092 that the number of game balls that have won in the V winning device 2150 is the maximum number of winning balls (if S2092 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2094.

In S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 (i.e., the maximum opening time of the open/close winning port 2151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 99) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (if S2093 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (if S2093 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2094.

In S2094, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of closing the V winning device 2150 (i.e., the open/close winning port 2151). After executing the process of S2094, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2095.

In S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a V entry has been detected. In this process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the V entry port 2155 within a specified time (i.e., whether or not detection has occurred by the V entry port switch 2156). Note that the above-mentioned specified time may be any time related to the entry of a game ball into the V entry device 2150, and may be, for example, within a specified time from when the V attacker 2152 begins to operate, or within a specified time from when the game ball is released from the engagement by the engagement member 2160, etc.

If it is determined in S2095 that a V win has been detected (if S2095 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for V hit game control. In this process, a signal (e.g., a V hit signal, etc.) output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. The signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal for the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game judgment process. When the V hit game control is executed, for example, 10 rounds of round play are executed as shown in the hit type determination table (see FIG. 91), so that the player can win a large number of prize balls as in the case where the jackpot game control process is executed. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V hit game control and the jackpot game control process are distinguished and called, but the V hit game control can also be called the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S2096, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2097.

In addition, in the V hit game control start setting process of S2096, the main CPU 2201 also performs processing to clear various flags and counters, such as the time-saving flag and the time-saving counter.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (i.e., the operation of the V attacker 2152), which was first performed based on the opening of the reel, is processed as the first round of round play. In other words, the V winning game control, which is executed when it is determined that a V winning has been detected (S2095 is determined as YES), will start from the second round of round play. After performing the process of S2097, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs processes such as a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened (i.e., the number of times the V attacker 2152 is operated) (S2099), a process of setting a V hit signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2100), a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S2102), and a process of reserving the transmission of a V hit start display command (S2103). By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), a process of preparing to open the large winning port (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. The main CPU 2201 then ends the special pattern game determination process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2095, if it is determined that no V win was detected in S2095 (if S2095 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2104.

In S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. After executing the processing of S2104, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-9. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 101, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2018 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 94) will be described. Fig. 101 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

If it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (if S2111 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (if S2111 is judged as YES), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2112.

In S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of rounds played in the jackpot game state. The count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 2203. After executing the process of S2112, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2113.

In S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of times the jackpot opening has been opened is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of times the round play has been performed in the jackpot play state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S2113 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened has reached the upper limit (if S2113 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2114.

In S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" (S2114), the jackpot end process (see S2020 in FIG. 94) will be performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S2114, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2115.

In S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command (S2116). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S2116, the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2113, if it is determined that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is not the upper limit (if S2113 is judged as NO), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to add 1 to the round counter value. After executing processing of S2117, the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2118.

In S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of selecting the large prize opening to be opened. In this process, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 95) is a big prize, and the stop display mode indicating a big prize is derived (YES determination is made in S2052 in FIG. 97), and the big prize game control process is started by the result being a big prize, the large prize opening 2131 is selected as the large prize opening to be opened. On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a role release hit, and the stop display mode indicating the role release is derived (YES determination is made in S2060 in FIG. 97), and further, a V win is detected (YES determination is made in S2095 in FIG. 100), and the V win game control is started by the result being a V win device 2150 (i.e., the open/closed prize opening 2151) is selected as the large prize opening to be opened. After executing processing of S2118, the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2119.

In S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150, the maximum number of winning balls into the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150, the number of winning balls when the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is won, etc. are set. The number of times the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing processing of S2119, the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2120.

The above "large prize opening 2131 or V prize device 2150" corresponds to the large prize opening selected in S2118 as the large prize opening to be opened between the large prize opening 2131 and the V prize device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

In S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for controlling the opening and closing of the large prize opening. In this process, the process for generating the opening and closing control data for the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is performed. After executing the process of S2120, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2121.

In S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" (S2121), the large prize opening opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 94) is performed after the large prize opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S2121, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2122.

In S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2122, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2123.

In S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-10. Large prize opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 102, a special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2019 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 94) will be described. Fig. 102 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

If it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (if S2131 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (if S2131 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the large prize opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88), which counts the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 2131, or the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88), which counts the number of game balls that have entered the V prize device 2150, is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the large prize opening count switch 2132 or the V attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 2203.

If it is determined in S2132 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is not the maximum number of prizes (if S2132 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2133.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2132 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is the maximum number of prizes (if S2132 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2134.

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the large prize opening related various setting process (see S2119 in FIG. 101) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 has not elapsed (if S2133 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 has elapsed (if S2133 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2134.

In S2134, the main CPU 2201 performs a process to close the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150. After executing the process of S2134, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2135.

In S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2135), the large prize opening preparation processing (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed again after this large prize opening control processing is completed. After executing processing of S2135, the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2136.

In S2136, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2136, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-11. Jackpot end processing]
Next, the big win end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described with reference to Fig. 103. Fig. 103 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win end process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

If it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (if S2141 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, it returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

If it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (if S2141 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2142.

In S2142, the main CPU 2201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various flags (e.g., a probability change flag, a time-saving flag, etc.) are set, and the values of various counters (e.g., a probability change counter, a time-saving counter, a number of confirmed symbols counter, a round counter, a large prize slot winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing S2142, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2143.

In S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. After executing the processing of S2143, the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end processing and also ends the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94), and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 93). In this case, as described above, the processing returns to the processing from which the jackpot end processing was called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 set an interrupt prohibited section and perform the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibited section.

[4. Extension Example]
The following describes an example of an extension common to the first, second, and third pachinko game machines. Since the symbols attached to the components are different depending on the first, second, and third pachinko game machines, the symbols are omitted in the following description except when the description is limited to a specific pachinko game machine (especially the third pachinko game machine).

[4-1. Example of extended probability control]
In the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, whether or not to set the special probability flag on is determined depending on the type of jackpot, and when the special probability flag is set on, the number of special probability rounds is determined, but this is not limited to this and may be, for example, in the following manner.

For example, the machine may be a so-called V-type high probability machine that determines whether or not a specific area provided in a large prize opening has been passed during execution of the jackpot game control process, and sets a high probability flag to ON when it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific area at the end of the jackpot game control process. Note that the specific area can be changed between an open state where game balls can or easily pass through and a closed state where game balls cannot or have difficulty entering, for example, by the operation of a movable member during a specific round of play during execution of the jackpot game control process.

In such a V-type high probability machine, for example, the ease with which the game ball passes through the above-mentioned specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process, i.e., the probability that the high probability flag will be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process, may be made different between when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a jackpot, as will be described later with reference to Figures 104 to 107.

Figure 104 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the jackpot opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round of play during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, and shows a case where (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode. Note that the first opening mode and the second opening mode are modes in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through to the specific area, and the third opening mode is a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through to the specific area. Note that in the example shown in Figure 104, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

Note that, although FIG. 104 shows the large prize opening being opened for a short time and then opened for a long time, the opening manner of the large prize opening is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 104(A), in the first opening mode, the specific area is open while the large prize opening is open, except for a predetermined time after the long opening of the large prize opening has begun. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area. In other words, the special probability flag is likely to be set on when the jackpot game control process ends. However, if no game balls have passed through the specific area despite the specific area being open, the special probability flag is not set on when the jackpot game control process ends.

Also, as shown in FIG. 104(B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in an open state from the start of the short opening of the large prize opening to the end of the long opening of the large prize opening. Therefore, while the jackpot game control process is being executed, it is extremely easy for at least one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area. In other words, the special probability flag is very easily set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if the specific area is in an open state but no game balls have passed through the specific area, the special probability flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104(C), in the third opening mode, the specific area is closed except for the time when the large prize opening is short-open and for a predetermined time after the large prize opening has started to be long-opened (both of these times are short). Therefore, compared to either the first or second opening mode, it is more difficult for even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control. In other words, it is difficult for the probability variable flag to be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability variable flag will be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

In FIG. 104, an example is described in which two opening modes, a first opening mode and a second opening mode, are provided as examples of opening modes of a specific area in which at least one of a plurality of game balls that have entered a large prize opening can easily pass through the specific area during execution of a jackpot game control process. However, the number of opening modes of a specific area in which at least one of a plurality of game balls that have entered a large prize opening can easily pass through the specific area during execution of a jackpot game control process is not limited to two modes, and may be only one mode or three or more modes.

In addition, FIG. 104 describes an example of a third opening mode as an example of a specific area opening mode in which it is difficult for even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process. However, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which it is difficult for even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process is not limited to one mode, and two or more modes may be provided.

Figure 105 is an example of a special symbol determination table in an extended example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in this Figure 105, when the winning/losing determination value data is "jackpot determination value data" (when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a winning), the winning time selection symbol commands for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are selected as follows. That is, when the result of the first special symbol winning determination process is a winning, the winning time selection symbol command is, for example, "z0" with a selection rate of 40%, "z1" with a selection rate of 10%, and "z2" with a selection rate of 50%. Also, when the result of the second special symbol winning determination process is a winning, the winning time selection symbol command is, for example, "z3" with a selection rate of 15%, "z4" with a selection rate of 50%, and "z5" with a selection rate of 35%.

Figure 106 is an example of a jackpot type determination table in an extended example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in this Figure 106, the type of jackpot (for example, the number of rounds, the opening mode of the specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, when the winning time selection pattern command is "z0", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot of the third opening mode (3R normal jackpot A). Also, when the winning time selection pattern command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot of the third opening mode (10R normal jackpot A). Also, when the winning time selection pattern command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot of the first opening mode (10R special jackpot A). Also, if the symbol command selected at the time of winning is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the third opening mode of the jackpot (10R normal jackpot B). If the symbol command selected at the time of winning is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode of the jackpot (10R special jackpot B). If the symbol command selected at the time of winning is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the second opening mode of the jackpot (10R special jackpot C).

That is, according to the above-mentioned Figs. 104 to 106, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit, the type of the hit is determined to be 3R normal hit A with a selection rate of 40%, 10R normal hit A with a selection rate of 10%, and 10R sure-win A with a selection rate of 50%. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a hit, the type of the hit is determined to be 10R normal hit B with a selection rate of 15%, 10R sure-win B with a selection rate of 50%, and 10R sure-win C with a selection rate of 35. In this way, it is possible to make the probability that the sure-win flag is set to ON at the end of the hit game control process different between when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a hit.

In addition, in a specific round of play during execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to being opened by time control as shown in Figures 104 (A) to (C), but may be opened in response to a game ball entering a jackpot opening, for example, as shown in Figure 107 described below.

Figure 107 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the large prize opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round of play during execution of the expanded example of the jackpot game control process (an example in which the specific area is controlled to be in an open state based on a win in the large prize opening), showing (A) a case in which the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, and (B) a case in which the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode.

As shown in FIG. 107(A), in the first opening mode of another example, after the large prize opening is in an open state, when the first game ball enters the large prize opening and the entry of the first game ball is detected by the large prize opening count switch, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time based on this detection. Then, when the second game ball enters the large prize opening and the entry of the second game ball is detected by the large prize opening count switch, the specific area is opened based on this detection until the large prize opening is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the multiple game balls that entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area. In other words, the probability variable flag is easily set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball passes through the specific area despite the specific area being in an open state, the probability variable flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Also, as shown in FIG. 107(B), in the second opening mode of another example, after the large prize opening is opened, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time only when the first game ball enters the large prize opening and the entry of the first game ball is detected by the large prize opening count switch. Even if the second game ball enters the large prize opening and the entry of the second game ball is detected by the large prize opening count switch, the specific area does not become open and remains closed until the winning opening is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the large prize game control, it is more difficult for even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area than in the first opening mode. In other words, it is difficult for the probability variable flag to be set to ON at the end of the large prize game control process. However, even in this case, if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area while the jackpot game control is being executed, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability of winning flag is set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends.

In the above, an example was described in which if the game ball passes through a specific area while the jackpot game control process is being executed, the probability variable flag is set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends. However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the game ball passes through a specific area while the jackpot game control process is being executed, the time-saving flag may be set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends. This type of specification is particularly effective in the case of a type 1/type 2 mixed machine, such as a third type pachinko game machine.

In addition, in the above, an example was described in which the same opening pattern is set as the opening pattern of the specific area when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, but this is not limited to this, and for example, an opening pattern dedicated to the first special symbol and an opening pattern dedicated to the second special symbol may be set.

In addition, in the above, an example was described in which the third mode may be determined to be one in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that when the result of the hit determination process for either one of the special symbols (e.g. the second special symbol) is a hit, only the mode in which it is easy for at least one game ball to pass through the specific area (the first mode or the second mode) is determined.

Also, in the above, in the third mode in which it is difficult for game balls to pass through to the specific area, the specific area is in an open state twice (both for a short period of time) while the large prize opening is short-open and for a predetermined period of time after the large prize opening starts to be long-opened; however, if it is difficult for game balls to pass through to the specific area, the specific area may be in an open state once or multiple times.

The closure of a specific area may be controlled to occur after a predetermined opening time has elapsed, or after the round in which the specific area is open has ended, or in response to a set number of large prize openings or winnings in the specific area. There may also be one or more combinations of closure conditions.

It may also be a so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot game state and the game state in which the probability variable control is executed (for example, a high probability time-saving game state, a high probability non-time-saving game state, etc.) are alternately executed repeatedly until a predetermined upper limit number (hereinafter referred to as the "limiter number") is reached. In such a limiter machine, when the above-mentioned number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as the "loop number") reaches a predetermined limiter number, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to a game state in which the probability variable control is not executed (for example, a normal game state, a time-saving game state, etc.). At this time, the loop number is also reset. In such a gaming machine, the limiter number may be a fixed number, or may be determined according to, for example, the random number value of the special pattern, or may be determined by a predetermined lottery. In addition, if it is a setting machine, the limiter number may be different depending on the setting value.

In the above, we have described a so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot game state and the game state in which the probability variable control is executed are alternately and repeatedly executed until the limiter number of times is reached, but this is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot game state and the game state in which the time-saving control is executed may be alternately and repeatedly executed until the limiter number of times is reached. This is particularly effective in the case of a type 1/type 2 mixed machine such as the third type pachinko game machine.

In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned V-type high probability machine, if the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the game state in which the high probability control is executed continues. Therefore, in such a V-type high probability machine, if the limiter number is, for example, N times, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, it is considered that the predetermined limiter number has been reached, and the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to a game state in which the high probability control is not executed. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, although it is not considered that the predetermined limiter number has been reached, since the game ball has not passed through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, even in such a case, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to a game state in which the high probability control is not executed. The same applies to gaming machines in which, if a gaming ball passes through a specific area while a jackpot game control process is being executed, the time-saving flag is set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends.

In addition, after the end of the jackpot game control process, the machine is controlled to a game state (e.g., high probability time-saving game state, high probability non-time-saving game state, etc.) in which the probability variable control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are played, and when the predetermined number of special symbol games are played, the machine may be a so-called ST machine in which the probability variable control is not executed (e.g., normal game state, time-saving game state, etc.). In such a game machine, the number of special symbol games in which the probability variable control is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "ST number") may be a fixed number, or may be different each time. In addition, if it is a setting machine, the expected value of the ST number may be different depending on the setting value. Furthermore, the machine may be a so-called falling type game machine in which a falling lottery is performed and the probability variable control ends based on the result of the falling lottery, or it may be a so-called V probability variable type game machine in which the probability variable control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state when the game ball passes through a specific area during the jackpot game state.

[4-2. Example of time-saving control extension]
In the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a jackpot, the time-saving control can be executed after the jackpot game control process is completed, but the time-saving control may also be executed even if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is not a jackpot.

For example, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a miss, a time-saving hit/miss determination process may be performed separately from the special symbol hit determination process to determine whether or not to execute time-saving control, using a specific random number value (e.g., a random number value for special symbol hit determination, a pattern random number value of a special symbol, etc.) from among the random number values extracted based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole. When a time-saving hit/miss determination is performed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a miss, for example, when the pattern random number value of a special symbol extracted based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole is a specific pattern random number value, it can be determined to be a "time-saving hit" in which time-saving control is executed. Note that the time-saving hit/miss determination process may also be performed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit.

In addition, if the time-saving winning/losing determination process is performed separately from the special pattern winning/losing determination process, the time-saving winning/losing determination process may be performed prior to the special pattern winning/losing determination process in the same frame.

In addition, when performing the above-mentioned time-saving winning/losing judgment process, a random number for time-saving winning/losing judgment that is used exclusively for the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be generated within a predetermined range, and a random number value for time-saving winning/losing may be extracted based on, for example, the entry of a game ball into the starting hole, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be performed using the extracted random number value for time-saving winning/losing.

The random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process does not necessarily have to be extracted based on the game ball winning the start port, but may be extracted based on the game ball winning in other areas (for example, the general winning port, the small winning port, the large winning port, etc.). Furthermore, for example, a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be provided, and the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be extracted based on the game ball passing through this dedicated area.

For example, if the time-saving winning/losing determination process and the special pattern winning/losing determination process are executed at different times, the time-saving winning/losing determination process may be executed during the variable display of the special pattern, which, when confirmed, derives a stop display mode indicating a jackpot, and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process may be a "time-saving winning". In such a case, the main CPU may forcibly derive, for example, a display mode indicating a "time-saving losing" even though the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is a "time-saving winning".

The sub-CPU also preferably controls the display of a performance image (such as a decorative pattern change performance or a character display performance) on the display device that allows or makes it easy to understand from the outside whether the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is a "time-saving winning/losing" result. In this case, the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is displayed on the display device separately from the result of the special pattern winning/losing judgment process, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, instead of displaying on the display device an effect image that makes it possible or easy to grasp from the outside whether the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is a "time-saving winning" or a "time-saving losing" result, it is also possible to execute control to display on the display device an effect image (for example, a decorative pattern change effect or a character display effect, etc.) that makes it impossible or difficult to grasp from the outside whether the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is a "time-saving winning" or a "time-saving losing" result. In this case, it is possible to maintain interest until the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is disclosed.

In addition, in a typical pachinko game machine, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the sub-CPU controls the display device (e.g., liquid crystal display device) to display, for example, a performance image showing a right-hit instruction as the recommended method of launching game balls in a jackpot game state. In this regard, in this embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a jackpot, if the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the sub-CPU controls the display device to display, for example, a performance image showing a right-hit instruction as the recommended method of launching game balls when time-saving control is executed. However, if the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the performance image showing the recommended method of launching game balls when time-saving control is executed may be displayed on the display device at all times, or may be displayed only when a specific condition is met. For example, if the number of time-saving hits set based on the "time-saving hit" is a predetermined number or more (e.g., 2 or more), it may be displayed, but if it is less than the predetermined number (e.g., less than 2), it may not be displayed. Note that the above specific conditions are not limited to the number of time-saving conditions, but can be any conditions as appropriate.

In addition, if the time-saving hit/lose determination process is executed before the special pattern hit determination process is executed, the sub-CPU may execute control to display on the display device a performance image that is externally comprehensible or easily comprehensible as to whether or not the special pattern hit determination process will be executed under the "time-saving hit" condition (i.e., under the condition in which the time-saving flag is set to on).

The following is a summary of the processes related to time-saving, such as the type of random number used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the timing of extracting the random number used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the conditions for judging a time-saving winning/losing in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the execution timing of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the game state in which the time-saving winning/losing judgment process can be executed, the state of the time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times set when a time-saving winning/losing is achieved, the start timing of the time-saving game state, the end timing of the time-saving game state, the timing of rewriting the number of time-saving times, the probability of winning the time-saving game, and the display of the results of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process.

(Type of random numbers used in time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
The random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be any of a plurality of types of random number values, such as a random number value for special symbol winning judgment, a random number value for special symbol determination, a random number value for normal winning judgment, a random number value for normal symbol determination, a random number value for special symbol fall judgment, and a dedicated random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment. In addition, in the case of a setting machine, when the setting is changed, the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be performed using the changed setting value.

In addition, the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing determination process is not limited to one type (for example, only a random number value for time-saving winning/losing determination), but may be determined using multiple types of random number values (for example, a random number value for determining whether a special pattern has been won and a random number value for determining the pattern).

(Timing of extracting random numbers used in time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
The timing of extraction of the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be any timing, such as when the game ball enters the start port which triggers the special symbol winning judgment process, when the game ball passes through the pass gate which triggers the execution of the normal symbol winning judgment process, when the game ball passes through a dedicated area which triggers the execution of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, etc. The extraction of the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be performed based on the winning of a specific winning port or the like which has a prize ball payout, or may be performed based on the passing of a specific gate or a specific out port which has no prize ball payout.

In addition, if the random number value for the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is extracted based on the entry (passage) of the game ball into the start port, the random number value for the time-saving winning/losing judgment may be extracted regardless of whether the game ball enters the first start port or the second start port, or the random number value for the time-saving winning/losing judgment may be extracted only when the game ball enters one of the specific start ports.

(Conditions for determining whether a time-saving win has been won in the time-saving winning/losing determination process)
When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the extracted random number value for the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the extracted random number value for the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is a specific random number value for the time-saving winning/losing judgment process (for example, a specific time-saving winning/losing judgment value data). When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the random number value for the special pattern winning/losing judgment, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the data is a specific losing judgment value data, a specific small winning judgment value data, or/and a specific big winning judgment value data. When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the random number value for the special pattern falling judgment, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the data is a specific random number value for the special pattern falling judgment. Furthermore, when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is executed using the changed setting value, it is preferable to judge the time-saving winning when the setting value is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is executed using the random number value for normal winning judgment or the random number value for normal pattern determination. Furthermore, the conditions for judging the time-saving winning/losing in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process are not limited to the above conditions and can be arbitrarily determined to be various conditions.

In the third pachinko game machine, even if the result of the time-saving hit/loss judgment process is a "time-saving hit," if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is a hit to open the special symbol and the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 is opened passes through the V winning port 2155, it is preferable to determine whether or not to execute time-saving control and the number of time-saving times according to the type of hit to open the special symbol. And, if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is a hit to open the special symbol and the V attacker 2152 is opened but the passage of the game ball into the V winning port 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control process is not executed, if the result of the time-saving hit/loss judgment process is a "time-saving hit," the main CPU 2201 may determine whether or not to execute time-saving control and the number of time-saving times based on the "time-saving hit." However, if the result of the time-saving hit/miss determination process is "time-saving miss," and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit to open the special device, and the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 opens does not pass through the V winning port 2155, the time-saving control will not be executed.

(Time-saving winning/losing judgment processing execution timing)
When the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed at the start of the variable display of the special pattern using a random number value for time-saving winning/losing determination obtained based on the winning (passing) of the game ball at the starting hole, the main CPU may retain the obtained random number value for time-saving winning/losing determination, in the same manner as the start information of the special pattern.

The main CPU may execute the time-saving winning/losing judgment process immediately after extracting the random number value to be used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process (e.g., before it is reserved), or may reserve the extracted random number value and execute the time-saving winning/losing judgment process until the variable display of the special pattern begins, or may execute the time-saving winning/losing judgment process at the start of the variable display of the special pattern.

(Game state in which time-saving winning/losing judgment processing can be executed)
The time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be executed in any of the normal game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state, or may be executed only in a game state in which the time-saving control is not executed (for example, the normal game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.). In addition, for example, a condition for executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be determined in advance, such as executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process in any game state, or executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process only in a specific game state, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be executed when the determined condition is satisfied.

(Mode of time-saving control)
The mode of time-saving control executed according to the type of jackpot and the mode of time-saving control executed according to the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be the same or different. For example, a first time-saving flag and a second time-saving flag may be prepared, and when the time-saving control is executed according to the type of jackpot, the first time-saving flag may be set to on, and when the time-saving control is executed based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the second time-saving flag may be set to on. In this case, when the first time-saving flag is set to on and when the second time-saving flag is set to on, it is preferable to execute time-saving control with different functions. For example, when the first time-saving flag is set to on, both the special chart shortening control and the electric support control are performed, and when the second time-saving flag is set to on, only one of the special chart shortening control and the electric support control is performed. Also, when the first time-saving flag is set to on, the first time-saving game state is controlled in which only the special chart shortening control is performed among the special chart shortening control and the electric support control, and when the second time-saving flag is set to on, the second time-saving game state is controlled in which only the electric support control is performed among the special chart shortening control and the electric support control. However, which of the multiple time-saving flags is set to on is not limited to the above, and may be determined based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, for example, or may be determined according to the game state when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is executed.

(Number of time-saving times set when time-saving hits)
It is preferable that the number of time-saving times to be set when the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is "time-saving winning/losing", is determined according to the game state when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, when multiple random numbers for time-saving winning/losing judgment are specified as time-saving winning/losing judgment value data, the number of time-saving times to be set may be determined according to the extracted random numbers for time-saving winning/losing judgment instead of or in addition to the game state when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed. For example, when the random numbers for time-saving winning/losing judgment extracted based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole are the first time-saving winning/losing judgment value data, the number of time-saving times is determined to be "100", and when they are the second time-saving winning/losing judgment value data, the number of time-saving times is determined to be "50".

In addition, the time-saving winning/losing determination process may be executed even in a game state where time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, etc.), and if the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process is a "time-saving winning," the main CPU may set the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving winning" in place of the remaining number of time-saving times (i.e., reset the remaining number of time-saving times). In this case, the degree of benefit to the player changes depending on whether the newly set number of time-saving times is more or less than the remaining number of time-saving times, thereby expanding the scope of gameplay, and making the time-saving game state where the time-saving flag is on more interesting and increasing interest.

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed even in a game state in which time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, etc.), and if the result of this time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU may add the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving win" to the remaining number of time-saving times. In this case, the number of time-saving times will never be less than the current remaining number of time-saving times, allowing the player to play with peace of mind in a game state in which time-saving control is executed.

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed even in a game state in which time-saving control is executed (e.g., a high-probability time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, etc.), and if the result of this time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU may predetermine either a process of replacing the remaining number of time-saving wins with the number of time-saving wins determined based on the "time-saving win" and setting it as a new number, or a process of adding the number of time-saving wins determined based on the "time-saving win" to the remaining number of time-saving wins, and set the number of time-saving wins in a manner that satisfies the predetermining condition.

In addition, in a pachinko game machine in which a time-saving control having a different function is executed when the first time-saving flag is set to on and when the second time-saving flag is set to on, if the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is a "time-saving winning", the main CPU may change the process of setting the number of time-saving times depending on whether the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving winning" are time-saving controls of the same function or different functions. For example, if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving winning" are time-saving controls of the same function, the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving winning" may be added to the remaining number of time-saving times, and if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving winning" are time-saving controls of different functions, the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving winning" may be newly set (i.e., the remaining number of time-saving times may be reset) instead of the remaining number of time-saving times being executed. In addition, if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving hit" are time-saving controls with different functions, the time-saving control based on the "time-saving hit" may be executed after all remaining times of the time-saving being executed have been consumed.

When the number of time-saving times is set based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process being "time-saving winning", the number of time-saving times may be set to "0". In other words, if the number of time-saving times to be set is determined to be "0", the time-saving flag is set to on even though the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is "time-saving winning". Also, if the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process performed during the execution of time-saving control is "time-saving winning" and the number of time-saving times is set to "0", the time-saving control being executed will end.

(Time-saving control start timing)
The timing for starting the time-saving control, which is executed based on the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process being a "time-saving hit," can be the end of the special symbol game. For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the time-saving control can be started based on the passage of the special symbol determination time during which the special symbol is determined. Also, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, the time-saving control can be started based on the end of the small hit game control process. Also, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time-saving control can be started based on the end of the big hit game control process.

When the start timing of the time-saving control, which is executed based on the result of the time-saving hit/miss determination process being a "time-saving hit", is the end of the special pattern game, and the time-saving hit/miss determination process is performed prior to the special pattern hit determination process in the same frame, even if the result of the time-saving hit/miss determination process is a "time-saving hit", if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a jackpot, it is preferable to invalidate the "time-saving hit" (the time-saving flag is not set on based on the "time-saving hit") and set the time-saving flag on based on the hit time selection pattern command (the time-saving flag may not be set on depending on the type of jackpot).

In addition, the start timing of the time-saving control, which is executed based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process being a "time-saving winning/losing win," is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, if the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed prior to the special symbol winning/losing determination process in the same frame, the time-saving control may be started immediately (before the special symbol winning/losing determination process is executed) based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process. In this case, the game state (i.e., whether or not the time-saving control is executed) may differ between the time when the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing determination process is extracted and the time when the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed, which can increase interest.

Furthermore, the timing for starting the time-saving control, which is executed based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process being a "time-saving winning" may be after a predetermined number of games have been played. In this case, after the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is a "time-saving winning" and before the time-saving control starts, the sub-CPU can execute a teasing performance as to whether or not the time-saving control will start, which can increase interest.

In the third pachinko game machine, when the jackpot game control is executed based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol being a jackpot (a jackpot for which time-saving control is executed), the time-saving control based on the jackpot may be started based on the end of this jackpot game control. Also, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a role-opening hit (a role-opening hit for which time-saving control is executed) and the jackpot game control is executed because the passage of the game ball into the V winning hole 2155 is detected when the V attacker 2152 is opened, the time-saving control may be started based on the end of the jackpot game control. In addition, if the result of the time-saving hit/miss determination process is a "time-saving hit" and the result of the special pattern hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is a hit to open the special device, and therefore the V attacker 2152 opens, but the passage of the game ball into the V winning hole 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control is not executed, the main CPU may start time-saving control based on the "time-saving hit" based on the fact that the open/close winning hole 2151 has closed.

(End timing of time-saving game mode)
The timing at which the time-saving game state ends is, for example, "when, in a game state in which time-saving control is being executed, a variable display of a special pattern is executed for a set number of time-saving times,""when, in a game state in which time-saving control is being executed, the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the result of a special pattern hit determination process," or "when the number of time-saving times is set to 0 even though the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process is a time-saving hit," etc.

In addition, if a small win game control process is executed based on the results of the special symbol hit determination process during a game state in which time-saving control is executed, time-saving control will continue to be executed even after the small win game control process ends.

In the third pachinko game machine, if the opening and closing winning hole 2151 is opened when the special symbol hit determination process derives a stopped symbol pattern indicating a jackpot opening hit during execution of the time-saving control, but the passage of the game ball into the V winning hole 2155 is not detected when the V attacker 2152 opens, and the jackpot game control process is not started, the main CPU 2201 continues to execute the time-saving control even after the opening and closing winning hole 2151 is closed.

(Rewrite the number of time-saving times)
A time-saving win/loss determination process is executed in a game state in which time-saving control is executed (e.g., a high-probability time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, etc.), and if the result of this time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU may rewrite the number of time-saving times, or may not rewrite the number of time-saving times (i.e., execute the time-saving control until the number of time-saving times in the currently executing time-saving control has been exhausted).

When rewriting the number of time-saving times, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving hit" when the number of time-saving times in the currently running time-saving control has been consumed, or may set it when the special pattern hit determination process is executed, or may set it when the variable display of the special pattern starts or stops, or may set it during the time-saving hit/loss determination process, and may set it at various times. When setting it during the time-saving hit/loss determination process, the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving hit" will overwrite the number of time-saving times in the currently running time-saving control. Also, it may be set in advance to either "rewrite the number of time-saving times" or "add to the previous number of time-saving times," and the number of time-saving times may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

(Time-saving hit probability)
When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed based on the winning of a game ball into the first start port or the second start port, the time-saving winning/losing judgment process performed based on the winning of a game ball into the first start port (hereinafter referred to as the "first time-saving winning/losing judgment process") and the time-saving winning/losing judgment process performed based on the winning of a game ball into the second start port (hereinafter referred to as the "second time-saving winning/losing judgment process") may have different winning probabilities for time-saving. For example, the winning probability for time-saving when the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed may be higher than the winning probability for time-saving when the first time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed, the winning probability for time-saving when the first time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed may be higher than the winning probability for time-saving when the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed, or the winning probability for time-saving when the first time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed may be the same or approximately the same as the winning probability for time-saving when the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed.

(Displaying the results of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process)
A time-saving winning/losing judgment result display unit that displays the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process (whether the time-saving winning/losing is a winning or losing time-saving) and/or a winning number of time-saving times display unit that displays the number of time-saving times determined based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process (whether the time-saving winning/losing is a winning time-saving) may be provided. The time-saving winning/losing judgment result display unit and/or the winning number of time-saving times display unit may be provided in an LED display group that includes a special pattern display unit or the like, and may be controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub-CPU may display the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process and/or the number of time-saving times determined based on the winning of the time-saving on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device.

(Interval)
When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss and the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the main CPU may make the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss and the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving miss." Note that, since the variable display of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol, in this case, it is preferable that the sub-CPU displays an effect image indicating a "time-saving hit" on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device until the above-mentioned interval time has elapsed.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a special feature opening hit and the jackpot game control process is not executed based on this special feature opening hit, the main CPU 2201 may set the interval time after the end of the operation related to the special feature opening hit when the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process is a "time-saving hit" longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process is a "time-saving miss", or may set it to the same or approximately the same time.

[4-3. Examples of extensions related to management of game media]
The first, second and third pachinko game machines described in this specification can be applied to all gaming machines in which a game is played using a gaming medium and a bonus (e.g., prize balls, prize data, etc.) is awarded based on the result of the game. In other words, not only can the game be played by shooting or inserting a gaming medium (e.g., a gaming ball, a medal, etc.) by a physical action of a player, and the gaming medium is paid out based on the result of the game, but the main control circuit itself can electromagnetically manage the gaming medium held by the player and enable a game to be played by circulating the enclosed gaming balls or a medal-less game. In addition, the electromagnetic management of the gaming medium held by the player can be a gaming medium management device that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit and manages the gaming medium.

In the case of gaming machines that circulate enclosed gaming balls, the gaming balls serving as gaming media are configured to be playable without being discharged to the outside, so that when a prize is won, prize ball data serving as a gaming medium is awarded instead of prize balls being paid out. In this specification, "paid-out gaming value" includes both prize balls and prize ball data. For example, if 15 prize balls are entered into a prize slot, in the case of an enclosed gaming machine, prize ball data with a value corresponding to 15 prize balls is awarded. Furthermore, the gaming value is not necessarily limited to prize balls or prize ball data, and may be anything equivalent to prize balls or prize ball data.

In addition, when the game media are managed by a game media management device connected to the main control circuit, the game media management device is a device having a ROM and RWM (or RAM) and installed in the game machine, and is connected to an external game media handling device (not shown) via a specified interface with a two-way communication function, and can perform the operation of lending game media (i.e., the operation of providing game media necessary for the player to insert game media), or the operation of paying out game media when a winning combination related to the payout of game media is won (the winning combination is established) (i.e., the operation of making the player acquire the game media necessary for the payout of game media), or the operation of electromagnetically recording game media used for play. In addition, the game media management device can not only manage the actual number of game media, but also, for example, a game media number display device (not shown) that displays the number of game media held on the front of the pachinko game machine based on the management results of the game media number, and can manage the number of game media displayed on this game media number display device. In other words, the gaming media management device should be capable of electromagnetically recording and displaying the total number of gaming media that a player can use for gaming.

In this case, the gaming media management device has the capability to allow the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded gaming media to an external gaming media handling device, and also has the capability to prevent the number of recorded gaming media from being reduced except by direct operation by the player, and if an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the device and the external gaming media handling device, it is desirable that the device has the capability to prevent the player from transmitting a signal indicating the number of recorded gaming media except through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a loan operation means, a return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player, and the gaming medium handling device may be provided with an insertion slot for valuables such as bills, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal, and various other operation means such as a loan operation means and a return operation means, and an external connection terminal board on the gaming medium handling device side (all not shown).

In this case, the game flow is as follows: the player deposits a value into the game media handling device by any method, subtracts a predetermined amount of value by operating any of the above-mentioned lending operation means, and increases the game media corresponding to the subtracted value from the game media handling device to the game media management device. The player then plays the game, and repeats the above operation if more game media are required. After that, the player acquires a predetermined number of game media as a result of playing, and when the game ends, the player operates any of the return operation means to transmit the number of game media from the game media management device to the game media handling device, and the game media handling device ejects a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. When the game media number is transmitted, the game media management device clears the number of game media stored in itself. The player takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange it for a prize, or moves to another game machine to play based on the game media recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media were sent to the game media handling device, but the game machine or game media handling device may send only the number of game media desired by the player, and the game media owned by the player may be divided and processed. Also, instead of just discharging the recording medium, cash or cash equivalents may be dispensed, or the media may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Also, the game media handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the amusement center, and the member recording medium may be stored so that it can be played again at a later date.

In addition, in the gaming machine or gaming media handling device, a locking operation may be performed to lock the gaming media or valuable data communication to the gaming media handling device or gaming media management device by operating a specified operating means (not shown). In this case, information that only the player can know, such as a one-time password, may be set, and the player may be recorded by an imaging means provided in the gaming media handling device.

In addition, the above describes the application of the gaming media management device to a pachinko gaming machine, but gaming media management devices can also be installed in pachislot machines, slot machines that use gaming balls, and sealed gaming machines to manage players' gaming media.

In this way, by providing the gaming medium management device described above, it is possible to reduce the number of parts inside the gaming machine compared to when the gaming medium is physically provided for play, and not only can the cost and manufacturing costs of the gaming machine be reduced, but it is also possible to prevent the player from directly touching the gaming medium, improving the gaming environment and reducing noise, and the reduction in parts also reduces the power consumption of the gaming machine. It is also possible to prevent fraudulent activities via the gaming medium and the gaming medium insertion and payout slots. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, when the present invention is applied to a gaming system having an enclosed gaming machine configured so that gaming media can be played without being ejected to the outside, and a gaming media management device connected to the gaming machine so that data regarding increases and decreases in gaming media associated with consumption, lending, and dispensing of gaming media can be sent and received by optical signals via a communication cable, the gaming system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed gaming machine is explained below. In the enclosed gaming machine, the launching device is located above the game area and launches the game balls as the game medium from above into the game area. When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid, and the ball feed pestle pushes the waiting game ball toward the launching pad. This moves the game ball to the launching pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the waiting position to the launching pad to detect the game ball moving to the launching pad. When the subtraction sensor detects the game ball, the number of balls held is subtracted by one. In this way, since the enclosed gaming machine is configured to launch the game balls as the game medium from above into the game area, it is possible to avoid so-called return balls (foul balls). Then, the game balls discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area are polished by the ball polishing device. The game balls polished by the ball polishing device are transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launching device. The game balls are not discharged outside the enclosed game machine, but are configured so that a certain number of game balls (for example, 50 balls) circulate through a series of paths in the game machine. Alternatively, instead of providing a ball polishing device, a discharge mechanism that discharges game balls outside the game machine and a take-in mechanism that takes in the game balls that have been polished outside the game machine into the game machine may be provided. In this case, the take-in mechanism may be provided with a dedicated gutter for taking in the game balls, or may be configured to take in the game balls from a winning hole provided in the game area.

In an enclosed gaming machine, the game balls are not discharged to the outside of the gaming machine, so there is no upper or lower tray for temporarily holding the game balls. Since the game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed gaming machine, the player does not actually have the game balls in his/her hands, and the number of game balls does not actually increase or decrease as the player plays. In an enclosed gaming machine, the player starts playing after obtaining balls by loaning them from a gaming medium management device. Here, obtaining balls means that the player obtains gaming media for data management purposes. Then, the balls are consumed by the launching device when the game balls are launched, and the number of balls in hand decreases. In addition, when the game balls pass through each winning hole or the like provided in the playing area, the number of balls in hand is paid out according to the conditions set for each winning hole, and the number of balls in hand increases. Furthermore, the number of balls in hand increases by loaning them from the gaming medium management device. In addition, for example, when the game ends and all or a part of the balls are integrated into the game value managed by the game media management device by liquidating all of the game value (i.e., the balls in hand) stored in the enclosed game machine, or by performing an operation to transmit some of the balls in hand to the game media management device, the game value stored in the enclosed game machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls in hand is reduced. Furthermore, although there is no concept of foul balls in a game machine in which game balls are shot from above the game area, foul balls may occur when game balls are shot from below as in conventional game machines. Therefore, in the case of a game machine in which game balls are shot from below, the number of balls in hand increases or decreases depending on whether or not a foul ball occurs. Note that "consumption, lending, and payout of game media" refers to consumption, lending, and payout of balls in hand. Also, "increase or decrease in game media" refers to the increase or decrease in the number of balls in hand due to consumption, lending, and payout. In addition, "data regarding the increase and decrease in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" refers to data regarding the decrease in balls held due to game balls being fired, and the increase in balls held due to lending and payout.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of gaming balls through each winning hole, etc. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a gaming ball passes through each winning hole, the number of game balls paid out as a result is added to the number of balls held. Also, when a gaming ball is released, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to a gaming media management device by the player's operation. The above-mentioned liquid crystal display device is also located at the top of the gaming machine, and accepts requests to convert the gaming value managed by the gaming media management device to balls held (ball lending) and to count the number of balls held (return). Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the gaming media management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the payout control circuit to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held to the gaming media management device. Here, "game value" refers to currency/paper money, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into balls by the game media management device. In this embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept paper money, prepaid media, etc. Furthermore, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange, etc., in the game center where the game system is installed.

The enclosed gaming machine also has a backup power supply. This allows the data immediately prior to the power being turned off to be retained even if the power is turned off at night, etc. This backup power supply may also be used to, for example, continue to detect the opening of the door frame using a door opening sensor. This also makes it possible to prevent fraudulent activities at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

Enclosed gaming machines are only required to be configured so that players cannot touch the gaming balls. For example, machines that do not circulate gaming balls in an island facility but circulate them only in the gaming machine itself, and machines that circulate gaming balls in an island facility but do not allow players to touch them, are also included in enclosed gaming machines.

The gaming media management device has a gaming machine connection board. The gaming media management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signals) to and from the gaming machine via the gaming machine connection board. The transmitted and received data is information such as the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the gaming machine model code. Then, with either the gaming machine or the gaming media management device as the source and the other as the destination, when the source transmits a transmission signal, the destination that receives the transmission signal transmits a confirmation signal that is the same as the transmission signal to the source, and the source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether they are the same or not.

In this way, the source of transmission can compare the confirmation signal sent from the destination with the transmission signal to determine whether they are identical, thereby confirming that the signal sent from the source of transmission has been sent to the source without being tampered with. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent activities such as tampering with the transmitted and received signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device.

In addition, in the gaming system, the source may have a modulation unit that modulates a signal and transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit as the transmission signal, and the destination may have a demodulation unit that demodulates the signal modulated by the modulation unit.

As a result, even if the signals transmitted between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device are read, it is difficult to decipher these signals, and fraudulent activities such as tampering with the signals transmitted between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device can be prevented.

In addition, in the gaming system, when the destination receives the transmission signal from the source, the destination may transmit an acknowledgment signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, to the source separately from the confirmation signal.

By comparing the transmission signal with the confirmation signal, it is possible to not only confirm that a legitimate signal has been sent and received, but also to confirm that a legitimate signal has been sent and received based on the approval signal, thereby further strengthening the prevention of fraudulent activities. Also, instead of directly connecting the main control circuit and the gaming media management device for communication, a frame control circuit may be provided between the main control circuit and the gaming media management device, and the main control circuit and the gaming media management device may be connected for communication via the frame control circuit. Also, a firing control circuit may be provided separately from the main control circuit, and a frame control circuit may be provided between the firing control circuit and the gaming media management device. In this case, error control of the main control circuit and the firing control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU performs processing so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not stop at a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol.

In more detail, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are being displayed in a variable manner, if one of the special symbols stops in a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol, the main CPU controls the other special symbol to be forcibly stopped in a symbol combination that indicates a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one of the special symbols stops in a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol, as described above, the game transitions from the general game state to the jackpot game state, but in this jackpot game state, neither the start condition for the first special symbol nor the start condition for the second special symbol are met, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

In addition, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a small win symbol, it suspends the measurement of the variable time of the other special symbol based on the transition from the general game state to the small win game state (stopping at a symbol combination that indicates a small win symbol), and resumes the measurement of the variable time of the other special symbol based on the transition from the small win game state to the general game state (end of the small win game). When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a small win symbol, as described above, the general game state transitions to the small win game state, but in this small win game state, neither the start condition of the first special symbol nor the start condition of the second special symbol is met, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are being displayed in a variable manner, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a small win symbol, the main CPU will perform a variable display of the other special symbol that is being displayed in a similar manner to when it is being displayed in a variable manner, consisting of a group of LEDs, but as described above, timing of the variable time will be interrupted.

[4-4. Other extension examples]
In this specification, the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine are used as examples, but the technology described in this specification can be applied to other gaming machines, such as pachislots.

Regardless of whether the technology described in this specification is applied to a pachinko game machine or a pachislot, the effects involving a temporary stop of the symbols may include a temporary stop of the reels. Note that a "stop" of the symbols can be a permanent stop or a temporary stop, and the "stop" can be interpreted in either way. Furthermore, the operation by the player to play the game can be any of the following: operation of a lever, handle, button, etc., touch, etc.

In pachinko machines, the administrator of the machine may set the effects by operating the effect button, and the machine may be operated so that the player starts playing after the settings are made using the effect button. In this case, it is assumed that the operations by the administrator will ultimately be the operations by which the player plays the game. Similarly, in pachislot machines, it is assumed that the administrator plays a 2-bet game, and when the BB flag corresponding to the 2-bet game is established, the player plays a 3-bet game. In this case, although the player can play either a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game, the administrator of the machine may play the 2-bet game, and therefore the game played by the administrator (e.g., a 2-bet game, etc.) or the selection of the hall menu may be the operations by which the player plays the game.

In a pachinko game machine, the main CPU controls the player to inform them of whether they are hitting from the right or left, thereby managing the player's playing style, and if the player's playing style is not as intended, the sub-CPU may control the player to inform them of the unintended play, such as an error or warning.

In pachislot, the main CPU may control the player's playing method, such as the order in which the buttons are pressed (assist), but if the player's playing method is not as intended, the sub-CPU may control the player to issue an error, warning, or other notification that the play is unintended.

In pachinko machines, the main control board and payout control board are mounted on separate boards, but they may be on a single board. In pachislot machines, the payout control board may not exist, but the payout may be controlled by the main control board, or the board may be separated into the main control board and the payout control board.

Pachislot machines usually have a rectangular cabinet that houses various devices necessary for play, and a door that can be opened and closed relative to the cabinet, but the cabinet in a pachislot machine can be considered as the frame. In contrast, in a pachinko machine, the outer frame can be considered as the cabinet, the outer frame and base door can be considered as the cabinet, or the entire gaming machine consisting of the outer frame, base door, glass door and plate unit can be considered as the cabinet. Note that between the cabinet and the door, or between the frame and the door, there may be a unit with various control boards, a middle frame, an intermediate part, etc., and various control boards, display means, decorative parts, gimmicks, etc. may be present in the door, frame, cabinet, etc.

[4. The fourth pachinko game machine]
Next, the configuration and various operations of the fourth pachinko game machine (game machine) will be described with reference to the drawings. The inventions described in the first embodiment (first to third pachinko machines) and the second embodiment (enclosed game machine) can be applied to the fourth pachinko game machine described below.

The configuration of the fourth pachinko game machine is shown in FIG. 108. This configuration is the same as that of the first pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 6. For example, the main control circuit 4200, main CPU 4201, main ROM 4202, main RAM 4203, setting key insertion port 4174, setting key 4174a, RAM clear switch 4176, and power switch 4095 of the fourth pachinko game machine correspond to the main control circuit 200, main CPU 201, main ROM 202, main RAM 203, setting key 174, backup clear switch 176, and power switch 95 of the first pachinko game machine, respectively. Therefore, here, the configuration that differs from the first pachinko game machine and the configuration related to the present invention will be described.

<Various registers in the main CPU>
Here, various registers of the main CPU 4201 will be described with reference to Fig. 109. Fig. 109 is a schematic diagram of the various registers included in the main CPU 4201.

As shown in FIG. 109(A), the main CPU 4201 has, as main registers, extended registers (Q register, U register), general-purpose registers (A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register), flag register (F register), index register (IX register, IY register), and stack pointer (stack pointer SP).

The main CPU 4201 also has sub-registers, including an extended register (Q' register), general-purpose registers (A' register, B' register, C' register, D' register, E' register, H' register, L' register), a flag register (F' register), and an index register (IX' register, IY' register). Each of the main registers and sub-registers described above is composed of a 1-byte register.

In this embodiment, the B register and the C register are used as a pair of registers (BC registers), and the D register and the E register are used as a pair of registers (DE registers). Furthermore, in this embodiment, the H register and the L register are used as a pair of registers (HL registers).

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to control the processing to be performed by switching between two banks (bank 0 and bank 1), and with regard to the main registers and sub-registers described above, a main register and sub-register in bank 0 and a main register and sub-register in bank 1 are provided, and by switching the banks, the registers used and referenced by the program instructions can be switched between the registers in bank 0 and the registers in bank 1.

In the program of this embodiment, the address data (address value) on the upper side of the address is stored in the Q register. For example, when the main CPU 4201 is reset, the top address (upper side) "F0"H of the main RAM 4203 used in bank 0 is set in the Q register, and when the bank is switched to use bank 1, the top address (upper side) "F2"H of the main RAM 4203 used in bank 1 may be controlled (processed) to be set in the Q register.
In addition, in cases other than when the Q register is used as the upper address data, the first address (upper side) of the main RAM 4203, "F0"H, may be set in a register other than the Q register (for example, the H register), and the first address (upper side) of the main RAM 4203, "F2"H, may be set in a register other than the Q register (for example, the D register).
In particular, when referencing the game area and outside area of the main RAM 4203, the upper address of the game area may be referenced using an instruction that uses the Q register (a specific register), and when referencing the upper address of the outside area, the upper address may be referenced using an instruction that uses a register other than the Q register.In this case, control (processing) may be performed so that the top address (upper address) "F2"H is set in a register other than the Q register before or after switching to bank 1.
In the program of this embodiment, depending on the amount of control (processing) that references and writes to the game area and outside area of the main RAM 4203, it is desirable to set the starting address (upper side) of the main RAM 4203 to be set in the Q register to "F0"H or "F2"H.
For example, if the number of processes in which the first address (upper side) of the main RAM 4203 refers to and writes to the area "F0"H is large, then the Q register is set to "F0"H, and if the number of processes in which the first address (upper side) of the main RAM 4203 refers to and writes to the area "F2"H is large, then the Q register is set to "F2"H.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the control registers include an interrupt page address register (I register), a memory refresh register (R register), a program counter (PC), an interrupt enable register 1, and an interrupt enable register 2, each of which is a 1-byte register.

As shown in FIG. 109(B), in each of the flag registers, the F register and the F' register, predetermined flag information indicating the result of the arithmetic processing is set in each bit. For example, in bit 6 (D6), data (zero flag) indicating whether the arithmetic result is "0" or not is set in the arithmetic result determination process. Specifically, if the arithmetic result is "0", data "1" is set in bit 6, and if the arithmetic result is not "0", data "0" is set in bit 6. In the arithmetic result determination process, the main CPU 4201 determines the arithmetic result by referring to the data "0"/"1" in bit 6.

In addition, a parity flag or an overflow flag is set in bit 2 (D2) of the flag register. For example, when used as a parity flag, it counts the number of "1" bits in the destination where the result of a logical operation is stored when a logical operation is performed, and sets "0" if the total is odd, or sets "1" if the total is even. When used as an overflow flag, the overflow flag is set if an overflow occurs when a signed arithmetic operation is performed.

In addition, each bit of the flag register (e.g., bit 2) can be controlled to be set to the value of another register by using a specific command.

<Internal structure of main ROM and main RAM (memory map)>
Next, the internal configuration (hereinafter referred to as "memory map") of the main ROM 4202 and main RAM 4203 included in the main control circuit 4200 (microprocessor) will be described with reference to Fig. 110. Fig. 110(A) shows a memory map of the entire memory, Fig. 110(B) shows the configuration of the built-in ROM of the entire memory, and Fig. 110(C) shows the configuration of the built-in RAM of the entire memory. The built-in ROM of Fig. 110(A) corresponds to the main ROM 4202 of Fig. 108, for example, and the built-in RAM of Fig. 110(A) corresponds to the main RAM 4203 of Fig. 108.

In the memory map of the entire memory provided in the main control circuit 200, as shown in FIG. 110(A), starting from the top address (e.g., "0000"H), the memory area of the main ROM 4202, the memory area of the main RAM 4203, and the area of the functional registers are arranged in that order, with unused areas in between. Here, the functional registers include two types of built-in registers, consisting of a first register used to set the operation of each peripheral function, and a second register for monitoring and control.

As shown in FIG. 110(B), in the memory map of the main ROM 4202, from the top address ("0000"H) of the main ROM 4202, the game area (i.e., the program area (game area) and the data area (game area)), the outside area, and other areas are arranged in this order at predetermined addresses. In addition, there may be an unused area of a predetermined size between the game area and the outside area, and in this example, an unused area of 16 bytes is provided.

The program area (game area) stores control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 4201 in various control processes related to game progress and playability. The data area (game area) stores various data (for example, data tables such as a jackpot lottery data table, data for sending various control commands to the sub-control circuit 6300, etc.) used by the main CPU 4201 in various control processes related to game progress and playability.

In other words, the game area, which consists of a program area (game area) and a data area (game area), stores various programs and data necessary for control processing (game-related processing) related to the games that players actually play at the game establishment.

In addition, the out-of-area area stores control programs and data for various processes (processes that do not affect gameplay) that are not directly related to the game played by the player (game progress and gameplay). For example, programs and data used in the certification test (test firing test) of the pachinko game machine 6001, control programs and data used in the checksum generation process when power is cut off and the checksum process when power is restored (when power is restored), as well as fraud prevention programs and the data required for them, etc. are stored.

As shown in FIG. 110(C), in the memory map of the main RAM 4203, starting from the top address of the main RAM 4203 ("F000"H), the game area (i.e., the working area (game area) and stack area (game area)), the outside area (i.e., the working area (outside area)), and the stack area (outside area) are arranged in that order, each at a predetermined address. Also, similar to the main ROM 4202, there may be an unused area of a predetermined size between the game area and the outside area, and in this example, an unused area of 16 bytes is provided.

The working area (game area) and stack area (game area) temporarily store various data (various random number values, jackpot determination results, etc.) determined by the execution of a control program related to the game (game progress and playability) played by the player.

The working area (outside area area) and stack area (outside area area) are working areas for various processes that are not directly related to the game (progress and playability) played by the player. In this embodiment, the working area (outside area area) and stack area (outside area area) are used to execute various processes that are not directly related to the game played by the player, such as sum check processing.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of this embodiment, various programs and various data (tables) used for various processes not directly related to the game performed by the player are stored in an outside area located at an address different from the game area in the main ROM 4202. In addition, such various processes not directly related to the game performed by the player are performed using an outside area located at an address different from the game area in the main RAM 4203.

With such a configuration of the main ROM 4202, programs and data that are not necessary for the actual game played by the player can be placed in the outside area, thereby preventing the capacity of the game area from being strained.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, by switching the banks, it is possible to switch between processing related to bank 0 and processing related to bank 1. Here, the processing related to bank 0 uses the programs and data stored in the game area of main ROM 4202, and performs calculation processing to control the game action performed by the player while temporarily using the game area of main RAM 4203. In other words, the processing related to bank 0 can also be said to be processing related to the game area. Also, the main register and sub-register used at this time are the registers of bank 0 described in FIG. 109.

On the other hand, the processing related to bank 1 uses the programs and data stored in the outside area of main ROM 4202, while temporarily using the outside area of main RAM 4203, to perform processing that is not directly related to the game played by the player (arithmetic processing for performing processing other than the game). In other words, the processing related to bank 1 can also be said to be processing related to the outside area. Furthermore, the main register and sub-register used at this time are the registers of bank 1 described in FIG. 109.

The processing related to bank 0 (processing related to the game area) is started by a program stored in the program area (game area) of main ROM 4202, and in this processing, data stored in the data area (game area) of main ROM 4202 is referenced, and further, data is referenced and updated using the working area (game area) of main RAM 4203, but data stored in the working area (outside area) of main RAM 4203 may also be referenced.

Similarly, processing related to bank 1 (processing related to the out-of-area area) is initiated by a program stored in the out-of-area area of main ROM 4202, and in that processing, data stored in the out-of-area area of main ROM 4202 is referenced, and further, the working area (out-of-area area) of main RAM 4203 is used to reference and update data, but data stored in the working area (game area) of main RAM 4203 may also be referenced.

Switching from processing bank 0 to processing bank 1 is done, for example, by calling a specific subprogram with a specific call instruction, and returning from processing bank 1 to processing bank 0 is done, for example, by calling a specific return instruction in the specific subprogram called with the above-mentioned specific call instruction.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110(C), one area in the main RAM 4203 starting from address "F000"H is used as the work area (game area), but this is merely an example and the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. For example, the work area can be divided into multiple areas for specific processing units, such as using the area starting from "F000"H as the first work area (game area) and the area starting from "F100"H as the second work area (game area).

Figure 110 also shows a schematic representation of areas in memory, and the configuration of the present invention is not limited to the addresses shown, the apparent size (capacity) of each area, etc.

<Interrupt enable register>
Here, the interrupt permission register 1 and the interrupt permission register 2 shown in FIG. 109 will be described in more detail.

The value of interrupt enable register 1 determines whether to enable or disable maskable interrupts, which can be controlled so that interrupt processing is not performed for specific interrupt causes by the interrupt cause mask, and interrupt enable register 2 is used to restore the value of interrupt enable register 1 after non-maskable interrupt processing, which cannot be controlled so that interrupt processing is not performed for specific interrupt causes.

In addition, with regard to interrupt permission register 2, other than returning from non-maskable interrupt processing as described above, when an instruction to call processing related to the outside area (hereinafter referred to as an "outside area processing call instruction") is executed and then an instruction to return from processing related to the outside area to processing related to the game area (hereinafter referred to as a "game area processing return instruction") is given, the value that was stored in interrupt permission register 2 up to that point is copied to interrupt permission register 1 (the value of interrupt permission register 2 is restored to interrupt permission register 1).

In addition, when a non-maskable interrupt is accepted or an outside area processing call command is executed, the value of interrupt permission register 1 is cleared (its value becomes "0"), and as a result, maskable interrupts are prohibited while that value is maintained.

In addition, the value of the interrupt enable register 2 is stored in the parity/overflow flag of the flag register (F register) by a specific instruction, allowing the value of the interrupt enable register 2 to be referenced or temporarily saved.

Furthermore, when an interrupt enable command is executed, the value of interrupt enable register 1 becomes "1", indicating that an interrupt is enabled, and at the same time, the value of interrupt enable register 2 also becomes "1", indicating that an interrupt is enabled. In this way, when an interrupt enable command is executed, a maskable interrupt is enabled. Furthermore, when an interrupt disable command is executed, the value of interrupt enable register 1 becomes "0", indicating that an interrupt is disabled, and at the same time, the value of interrupt enable register 2 also becomes "0", indicating that interrupts are disabled.

<Clearing process for the game area and outside area of the main RAM>
111 and 112, an overview of the clearing process of the main RAM 4203 will be described. The extent of the main RAM 4203 to be cleared in this clearing process is determined according to the startup state, and this startup state is determined based on the operation of the setting key 4174a and the RAM clear switch 4176 when the power is turned on. This process will be described in detail in the startup state check process (FIG. 118) described later.

The clear range of the main RAM 4203 at the time of startup is determined according to the startup state shown in FIG. 111(A). As shown in FIG. 111(A), this startup state is determined according to a number of patterns based on whether or not there is an abnormality in the main RAM 4203 (the "Main RAM abnormality" column in FIG. 111(A)), the operation when the power of the pachinko game machine is turned on (the "Operation at power on" column in FIG. 111(A)), and whether or not a setting change was made at the time of the previous power outage (the "Power outage recovery during setting change" column in FIG. 111(A)). To determine whether or not there is an abnormality in the main RAM 4203, a CRC is calculated for a designated area of the main RAM 4203 before and after power is turned on, and the calculated CRC values are compared. If the two values are different, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the main RAM 4203.

The first pattern (No. 1) in FIG. 111(A) is a pattern in which there is no abnormality in the main RAM 4203, the operation when the power to the pachinko gaming machine is "A", and there is no power interruption recovery during a setting change (indicated by an X). Here, the operations when the power to the pachinko gaming machine is turned on are represented by "A" to "D", which correspond to the operation patterns "A" to "D" when the power to the pachinko gaming machine is turned on, shown in FIG. 111(B).

Pattern "A" in FIG. 111(B) is an operation in which, when the power is not turned on, the setting key 4174a is not turned on (i.e., it remains in the OFF state), the RAM clear switch 4176 is not turned on (i.e., it remains in the OFF state), and the power switch 4095 is turned on. This operation is the state at the start of normal business hours, and can also be considered in situations where the device needs to be restarted due to a voltage drop or other trouble, or a momentary interruption.

Pattern "B" is an operation in which, with the power off, the setting key 4174a is turned on (for example, by inserting it into the setting key socket 4174 and turning it in a specific direction), the RAM clear switch 4176 is not turned on (it is left off), and the power switch 4095 is turned on. This operation is usually performed to perform a setting confirmation process.

Pattern "C" is an operation in which, when the power is not on, the setting key 4174a is not turned on, the RAM clear switch 4176 is turned on, and the power switch 4095 is turned on. This operation is usually performed to clear the main RAM 4203.

Pattern "D" is an operation in which, with the power off, the setting key 4174a is turned on, and both the RAM clear switch 4176 and the power switch 4095 are turned on. This operation is usually performed to change settings.

As mentioned above, the operation when the power is turned on is one of patterns "A" to "D". In the case of the first pattern in Figure 111 (A), a "○" is placed in the column for pattern "A" to indicate that the operation of pattern "A" is being performed, and the other patterns "B" to "D" are marked with an "X".

In the case of the first pattern in FIG. 111(A), the startup state is determined to be "power recovery," and the clear range is the RAM clear range when power recovery occurs. This clear range will be described later with reference to FIG. 112. In this application, after the clear range is set to the RAM clear range when power recovery occurs in this manner, the main CPU 4201 clears the clear range, and then performs processing according to power recovery.

The second pattern (No. 2) in Figure 111 (A) is a pattern in which there is no abnormality in the main RAM 4203, the operation when the power to the pachinko game machine is turned on is "B", and there is no power interruption and recovery during a setting change (indicated by an X mark).

In the case of the second pattern in FIG. 111(A), the startup state is determined to be "settings check", and the clear range is the RAM clear range when power is restored. This clear range will be described later with reference to FIG. 112. In this application, after the clear range is set to the RAM clear range when power is restored in this manner, the main CPU 4201 clears the clear range, and then performs the setting check process.

The third pattern (No. 3) in Figure 111 (A) is a pattern in which there is no abnormality in the main RAM 4203, the operation when the power to the pachinko game machine is turned on is "C", and there is no power interruption and recovery during a setting change (indicated by an X mark).

In the case of the third pattern in FIG. 111(A), the startup state is determined to be "RAM clear" and the clear range is the setting change RAM clear range. This clear range will be described later with reference to FIG. 112. In this application, after the clear range is set to the setting change RAM clear range in this way, the main CPU 4201 clears the clear range and then performs processing according to the power outage recovery.

The fourth pattern (No. 4) in Figure 111 (A) is a pattern in which there is no abnormality in the main RAM 4203, the operation when the power to the pachinko game machine is turned on is "D", and there is no power interruption and recovery during a setting change (indicated by an X mark).

In the case of the fourth pattern in FIG. 111(A), the startup state is determined to be "settings change", and the clear range is the setting change RAM clear range. In this application, after the clear range is set to the setting change RAM clear range in this way, the main CPU 4201 clears the clear range and then performs the setting change process.

The fifth pattern (No. 5) in Figure 111 (A) is a pattern in which there is no abnormality in the main RAM 4203, the operation when the power is turned on for the pachinko game machine is "ANY" which means that any of "A" to "D" can be performed, and there is a power interruption and recovery during a setting change (indicated by a circle).

In the case of the fifth pattern in FIG. 111(A), the start-up state is determined to be "setting change", and the clear range is the RAM clear range at the time of setting change. In this way, if power is restored during a setting change, the clear range will be set to the RAM clear range at the time of setting change, regardless of the operation performed when the pachinko machine is turned on, unless there is an abnormality in the main RAM 4203. In this pattern, status information indicating the operation of the setting key 4174a and RAM clear switch 4176 before the power loss is set, and after the power is turned on, the operation of the setting key 4174a and RAM clear switch 4176 before the power loss is reproduced.

This clear range will be explained later with reference to FIG. 112. In this application, after the clear range is set as the setting change RAM clear range in this way, the main CPU 4201 clears the clear range and then performs the setting change processing.

The sixth pattern (No. 6) in Figure 111 (A) shows the clear range when there is an abnormality in the main RAM 4203 and the operation when the power is turned on for the pachinko game machine is "D". In this pattern, the question of whether or not the power is restored after an interruption during a setting change is indicated by "ANY", which means that it doesn't matter whether it is a power outage or not.

In the case of the sixth pattern in FIG. 111(A), the startup state is determined to be "RAM abnormality 1" and the clear range is the abnormal RAM clear range. This clear range will be described later with reference to FIG. 112. In this application, after the clear range is set to the abnormal RAM clear range in this way, the main CPU 4201 clears the clear range and then performs processing to change the settings.

The seventh pattern (No. 7) in Figure 111 (A) shows the clear range when there is an abnormality in the main RAM 4203 and the operation when the power is turned on for the pachinko game machine is anything other than "D". Also, in this pattern, as with the sixth pattern, whether or not the power is restored during a setting change is indicated by "ANY", which means that it doesn't matter whether it is a power outage recovery or not.

In the case of the seventh pattern in Figure 111 (A), the start-up state is determined to be "RAM abnormality 2" and the clear range is set to the abnormal RAM clear range, but ultimately, game return impossible error processing is performed and game play is stopped.

The startup state shown in FIG. 111(A) is intended to identify the status when the power of the pachinko game machine is turned on, and the clear range of the main RAM 4203 is determined according to this startup state. Here, the clear range set when power is restored is the clear range set when the startup state is power restoration (i.e., the "RAM clear range when power is restored"), and the clear range set when the setting is changed is the clear range set when the startup state is setting change (i.e., the "RAM clear range when setting is changed").

Note that even if the main CPU 6101 is to perform power interruption recovery processing when the power supply to the pachinko game machine is turned on, the "RAM clear range when power interruption recovery" is not necessarily set as the clear range. For example, in the first pattern in FIG. 111(A), the "RAM clear range when power interruption recovery" is set as the clear range, and after that clear range is cleared, the power interruption recovery processing is performed, whereas in the third pattern, the "RAM clear range when setting is changed" is set as the clear range, and after that clear range is cleared, the power interruption recovery processing is performed.

In addition, the "RAM clear range in case of abnormality," "RAM clear range when setting is changed," and "RAM clear range when power is restored" can each be set to the clear ranges shown in FIG. 112 described below, but it is also possible to design at least two of these clear ranges to be the same clear range.

Next, we will provide an overview of each clear range with reference to Figure 112.

Figure 112 (A) shows an example of the abnormal RAM clear range. In this embodiment, the abnormal RAM clear range for the game area of the main RAM 4203 is from the first address ("F000"H) to halfway through the stack area (game area). Because the main RAM is determined to be abnormal, the entire work area is cleared. Also, since the stack area is used in ascending address value order from address "F200"H, in this case, in order to protect the stack area in use, only the address up to "F1FC"H is cleared, and the entire stack area is not cleared. The stack area includes, for example, an area that stores the return address of a called program, and by not clearing this portion, the return address is protected.

The abnormal RAM clear range for the outside area of the main RAM 4203 is from the first address ("F210"H) to before the stack area (outside area). In other words, the entire work area (outside area) is cleared. Note that in this example, as described above, an unused area of 16 bytes is provided, so the first address of the outside area is "F210"H, which is the last address of the play area plus 16 bytes (the same applies to the outside areas in Figures 112 (B) and 112 (C)). The clear range of the outside area of the main RAM 4203 is determined based on the lowest byte (i.e., "00"H) of the first address ("F000"H) of the abnormal RAM clear range for the play area of the main RAM 4203.

Figure 112 (B) shows an example of the RAM clear range when a setting is changed. In this embodiment, the RAM clear range when a setting is changed for the game area of the main RAM 4203 is from the address ("F003"H) to the middle of the stack area (game area). Since it is determined that a setting change is occurring, the working area is set so that the setting values related to the setting change, which are secured as 3 bytes from the top address ("F000"H), are not cleared. Also, since the stack area is used in ascending order of address value from address "F200"H, in this case, in order to protect the stack area being used, only the address up to "F1FC"H is cleared, and the entire stack area is not cleared. For example, the stack area includes an area that stores the return address of a called program, and by not clearing this portion, the return address is protected.

The RAM clear range when changing settings for the outside area of the main RAM 4203 is from the address ("F232"H) to just before the stack area (outside area). In the working area (outside area), data related to performance display, etc. is left uncleared. The clear range of such outside areas of the main RAM 4203 is determined based on the lowest byte (i.e., "03"H) of the first address ("F003"H) of the RAM clear range when registering settings for the game area of the main RAM 4203.

Figure 112 (C) shows an example of the RAM clearing range when power is restored. In this embodiment, the RAM clearing range when power is restored for the game area of the main RAM 4203 is to clear 9 bytes from address ("F07B"H). Since it is determined that power has been restored, most of the working area and all of the stack area are left uncleared in order to preserve the game state before the power was lost. The part that is cleared is, for example, data such as the game abnormality detection flag. Note that, since the stack area is not subject to clearing when power is restored, it is possible to intentionally leave part of the stack area as in the above-mentioned abnormality RAM clearing range and setting change RAM clearing range, and control not to perform processing that attempts to secure the program return address.

The RAM clear range when power is restored for the outside area of the main RAM 4203 is from the address ("F232"H) to just before the stack area (outside area). In the working area (outside area), data related to performance display, etc. is left uncleared. The clear range for such outside areas of the main RAM 4203 is determined based on the lowest byte (i.e., "7B"H) of the first address ("F07B"H) of the RAM clear range when setting and registering the game area of the main RAM 4203.

As described above, when determining each clear range, for the outside area of the main RAM 4203, it is determined based on the lowest byte of the first address of the clear range of the corresponding game area, eliminating the need to refer to each condition to determine which clear range it is. Also, since the lowest byte of the first address of the clear range of the game area is intentionally set to be different for each clear range, the clear range of the outside area of the main RAM 4203 can be determined by that lowest byte.

As described above, in this application, the clear range of the non-game area (outside area) can be set according to the clear range of the game area (game area). In this case, the clear range of the game area is information that specifies the clear range of the game area, and is, for example, the lowest byte of the top address of the clear range of the game area.

Note that the address values used in FIG. 112 are for illustrative purposes only, and the layout, size, and clear range of each area in the main RAM 4203 can be set in various ways.

The clearing process of the play area and outside area as shown in FIG. 112 is performed synchronously (at roughly the same time) when the pachinko machine is started up, based on the result of comparing the CRC values for the play area and outside area. That is, (as will be explained in detail later) the outside area designated area clearing process in FIG. 120 is called in the designated area clearing process shown in FIG. 119, where the outside area clearing process is performed, and then immediately after that, the process returns to the designated area clearing process and the play area clearing process is performed.

<External interrupt processing related to power interruption detection>
Next, an overview of the external maskable interrupt processing when a power interruption is detected in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

When the main CPU 4201 receives an interrupt request signal from an external terminal (XINT terminal) via the parallel input port of the fourth pachinko game machine, it starts a program whose start address is the entry address of the setting area associated with this external terminal. This program is the external maskable interrupt processing of FIG. 131, which will be described later. This setting area also contains data indicating the priority of the interrupt processing. For example, the entry address is stored on the upper bit side of the setting area, and data indicating the priority is stored on the lower bit side, with at least one "0" bit being placed between the entry address and the data indicating the priority.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a timer interrupt signal is received from the timer counter of the pachinko game machine (e.g., timer counter PTC2), a program is started whose start address is the entry address of the setting area associated with this timer counter. This program is the system timer interrupt process of FIG. 132, which will be described later. This setting area also contains data indicating the priority of the interrupt process. For example, the entry address is stored on the upper bit side of the setting area, and data indicating the priority is stored on the lower bit side, with at least one "0" bit being placed between the entry address and the data indicating the priority.

In this way, the above-mentioned setting area is provided for each interrupt cause, such as an external interrupt from an external terminal (XINT terminal) or a timer interrupt from a timer counter, and the entry address of the processing program executed in response to the interrupt and the priority of the interrupt are determined by the data stored in the corresponding setting area.

When the above-mentioned external maskable interrupt processing is started, the main CPU 4201 checks a specific address of the input port to determine whether or not a power interruption signal has been received. This processing is to determine whether or not the interrupt cause is a power interruption, and if a power interruption signal is received, the interrupt mask register is updated with an interrupt cause mask as shown in FIG. 113(A) to mask the specific interrupt cause.

Here, in the interrupt mask register, the corresponding bits (for example, bit positions 2 and 3 of bits 0 to 7) are set to "0" in the initial setting after power is turned on, using the interrupt cause mask shown in FIG. 113(A) to accept, for example, an interrupt caused by a timer counter (timer counter interrupt) and an interrupt caused by a power outage (power outage interrupt). Then, in the above external maskable interrupt processing, when a power outage occurs, bit positions 2 and 3 of the interrupt mask register are set to "1".

In this way, when bit position 2 and bit position 3 of the interrupt mask register are set to "1", the main CPU 4201 is controlled not to accept timer counter interrupts and power interruption interrupts thereafter (i.e., the external maskable interrupt processing in FIG. 131 and the system timer interrupt processing in FIG. 132 are controlled not to be started anew).

Next, in the external maskable interrupt process, the XINT detection flag is set, and a status indicating that a power interruption has occurred is set. After that, in the power interruption determination process (step S4015 in FIG. 115, FIG. 124) called by the main control main process described below, the contents of this XINT detection flag are referenced to determine whether or not a power interruption has occurred, and if a power interruption has occurred, the power interruption setting process is executed.

Figure 113 (B) shows the interrupt initial setting data stored in the program management area that stores the information required for the main control circuit 4200 to execute a program. This data stores the setting value for the interrupt priority order.

Figure 113 (C) shows the priority order for each interrupt cause when the setting value is "01". As shown in Figure 113 (B), when the setting value for the interrupt priority order is bit "01", the timer counter interrupt (interrupt from timer counter PTC2) is set to have a higher priority order than the power interrupt (interrupt due to a signal from the XINT terminal). Note that this priority order is changed if the setting value is changed. Also, in this embodiment, it is not necessary to specify the priority order in the program.

In the interrupt mask register in FIG. 113(A), each bit is associated with an interrupt cause, but here, the interrupt causes shown in FIG. 113(C) are associated in descending order of priority from bit position 0 to bit position 5. That is, bit position 0 of the interrupt mask register is associated with an interrupt from timer counter PTC0, bit position 1 is associated with an interrupt from timer counter PTC1, bit position 2 is associated with an interrupt from timer counter PTC2, bit position 3 is associated with an external interrupt from an external terminal (XINT terminal), bit position 4 is associated with an interrupt due to asynchronous serial transmission/reception 0, and bit position 5 is associated with an interrupt due to asynchronous serial transmission/reception 1. Bit positions 7 and 6 are unused.

As described above, this embodiment is premised on the occurrence of timer counter interrupts and power interrupts, but as described above, it can handle at least interrupts caused by multiple timer counters, multiple interrupts caused by asynchronous serial transmission/reception, and external interrupts input from the XINT terminal.

This configuration, which uses an interrupt cause mask, can limit the occurrence of other interrupts after a power outage occurs, eliminating the need to write branch instructions to process those other interrupts. As a result, the program structure is simplified and the size is reduced.

In addition, by using an interrupt cause mask, it is possible to limit the occurrence of other interrupts after a power outage occurs, so that processing related to the power outage can be executed immediately after the power outage is detected, and there is no need to consider the execution timing or processing order of processing caused by the other interrupts.

In this way, depending on the bit position where "1" is set in the interrupt mask register, it is possible to adjust whether or not to detect the occurrence of each interrupt cause. For example, after an external maskable interrupt process is executed due to the detection of a power outage, it is possible to control the interrupt process related to a specific interrupt cause to be allowed.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the main processing (main control main processing) under the control of the main CPU 4201 will be described with reference to Fig. 114 to Fig. 116. Fig. 114 to Fig. 116 are flow charts showing the procedure of the main control main processing.

First, the main CPU 4201 starts processing bank 0 and determines whether the power interruption signal bit is "0" (step S4001). In step S4001, if the main CPU 4201 determines that the power interruption signal bit is "0" (if step S4001 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 4201 determines that a power interruption is being detected and repeats the judgment process of step S4001.

In step S4001, if the main CPU 4201 determines that the power interruption signal bit is not "0" (if step S4001 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 4201 determines that a power interruption is not being detected and proceeds to step S4002.

Next, in step S4002, the main CPU 4201 performs a process of setting a stack pointer (for bank 0) for the game area. Here, for example, the stack pointer SP is set to the final address of the stack area (game area) shown in FIG. 110 (C) + 1. Then, during subsequent processing, if a stack is used in bank 0, 1 is subtracted from the stack pointer SP, and register values, etc. are stored at that address, and thereafter, the stack areas (game areas) are used in the same manner, from areas with larger address values to areas with smaller address values.

Next, in step S4003, the built-in registers are initialized. Here, for example, the built-in register initial setting data table is referenced to initialize the built-in registers. Also, the top address (upper side) "F0"H of the working area (game area) of the main RAM 4203 used in bank 0 is set in the Q register.

Then, in step S4004, the status information of the RAM clear switch 4176 at startup and the status information of the setting key 4174a inserted into the setting key socket 4174 are stored (for example, in the E register) so that these states can be checked in a later startup status check process.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs wait processing (step S4005). In this processing, the main CPU 4201 performs startup waiting processing on the sub-control circuit 6300 side. The startup waiting time (wait period) is approximately 12000 msec. During this startup waiting time, the main CPU 4201 checks the occurrence of an interrupt request signal (XINT), outputs a WDT when an interrupt request signal occurs, and outputs a magnetic sensor initialization signal at a predetermined timing. This processing is performed using a timeout register. Even during interrupt inhibition, for example, it is possible to control the timer counter PTC2 to update its timer count, and to determine whether a PTC2 timeout has occurred with one instruction using the PTC2 timeout flag register, thereby branching the processing, so that the processing branches in a pseudo manner depending on whether a timer interrupt has occurred.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs RAM access settings (step S4006). In this process, the main CPU 4201 sends an access permission command to the main RAM 4203 to the corresponding register.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs a designated area CRC inspection process (step S4007). This process is called by an outside area processing call command, and performs processing related to bank 1 (outside area processing). The main CPU 4201 then performs a CRC inspection on the game area and outside area of the main RAM 4203, and when this processing is complete, it returns with a game area processing return command, and the subsequent processing performs processing related to bank 0 (game area processing). This process will be explained in detail later.

Note that a CRC check involves, for example, dividing the data in a specified area by a specific, predetermined value, and using the remainder as a value to check whether or not there is an abnormality. If this check value is calculated at different points in time and the values do not match, it can be determined that there has been a change in the data in the specified area (that there is an abnormality in the data's position or value).

Next, in step S4008, the main CPU 4201 performs a startup status check process. In this process, the main CPU 4201 determines the range of the main RAM 4203 to be cleared based on the CRC check result and the operation of a specific key when the power is turned on. This process will be described in detail later.

Next, in step S4009, the main CPU 4201 performs a designated area clear process. In this process, the main CPU 4201 clears the designated area for the game area and the outside area of the main RAM 4203. This process will be described in detail later.

Next, in step S4010, the main CPU 4201 sets (for example, in the HL register) the address of a data table for power-on initialization stored in an area outside the main RAM 4203, and references this HL register to store the data for power-on initialization in the working area.

Next, in step S4011, the main CPU 4201 sets the data of the power-on initialization data table in the storage target area using the address of the power-on initialization data table set in step S4010. Also, in this process, interrupts are disabled at the start, and the interrupt disabled/enabled state at the start of the process is restored at the end. This process will be described in detail later.

Next, in step S4012, the main CPU 4201 performs a setting change confirmation process. In this process, the main CPU 4201 controls to perform a setting update or setting change process when the setting key 4174a is inserted into the setting key slot 4174 and is in the "on" state. This process will be described in detail later.

Next, in step S4013, the main CPU 4201 performs a game resumption process. In this process, when the game machine is powered on (started up), the main CPU 4201 determines whether the RAM clear switch 4176 is "on" or not. If it is not "on," it determines that the power has been restored after a power outage, and performs initial setting processing for power restoration in order to resume gameplay. If it is "on," it determines that RAM clear (backup clear) has been specified, and performs initial setting processing for backup clear in order to resume gameplay.

Next, in step S4014, the main CPU 4201 performs interrupt disable processing. This process disables maskable interrupts. Also, as described above, the values of interrupt enable register 1 and interrupt enable register 2 are both set to "0".

In this process, the main CPU 4201 executes an interrupt disable command, and as a result, the value of interrupt enable register 1 becomes "0", and the value of interrupt enable register 2 also becomes "0". In this way, when the interrupt disable command is executed (while the value of interrupt enable register 1 is "0"), maskable interrupts are disabled.

Next, in step S4015, the main CPU 4201 performs a power interruption determination process. In this process, the main CPU 4201 determines whether a power interruption has been detected (i.e., whether XINT has been detected), and if a power interruption has been detected, performs a power interruption setting process. This process will be described in detail later.

Next, in step S4016, the main CPU 4201 performs an initial random number value update process. In this process, the main CPU 4201 performs an update process of the initial random number value for determining the special symbol.

After this, in step S4017, the main CPU 4201 performs a performance display monitor tally division process. This process is called by an outside area process call command, and becomes a process related to bank 1 (outside area process). The main CPU 4201 calculates and updates various base values, and each process is performed using the main RAM 4203 working area (outside area). This process will be explained in detail later.

Next, in step S4018, the main CPU 4201 performs interrupt permission processing. This processing allows maskable interrupts. Also, as described above, the values of interrupt permission register 1 and interrupt permission register 2 are both set to "1".

Next, in step S4019, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the system cycle time (6 msec: 3 times the interrupt cycle (2 msec)) has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the value (current interrupt counter count value) stored in the interrupt counter area of the working area (game area) of the main RAM 4203 minus 3 is "0". The interrupt counter value is incremented by 1 for each system timer interrupt process (see step S4402 in FIG. 133), and becomes "3" when the system cycle time has elapsed. Therefore, if the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the interrupt counter value is "0", the determination in step S4019 is "YES", and if the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the interrupt counter value is not "0", the determination in step S4019 is "NO".

If the main CPU 4201 determines in step S4019 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (if step S4019 is a NO determination), the main CPU 4201 returns the process to step S4014 and performs the processes from step S4014 onward.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 4201 determines in step S4019 that the system period has elapsed (if step S4019 is determined to be YES), the main CPU 4201 performs a timer counter update process in step S4020. This process subtracts 1 from the value stored in the interrupt counter area (interrupt counter value) three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process (to "0").

As described above, in this embodiment, within the main control process, a 6 msec interrupt inhibition period (the processing period from step S4014 to step S4018) is provided before the various processes related to game control described below are executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the various processes related to game control described below are executed every 6 msec (every system cycle). Note that, although an example in which the interrupt inhibition period is three times the interrupt cycle has been described in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the interrupt inhibition period may be more than twice the interrupt cycle but other than three times.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs main control command transmission/reception processing (step S4021). In this processing, the main CPU 4201 mainly performs payout control command transmission/reception processing. This processing will be described in detail later.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs special symbol control processing (step S4022). In this processing, the main CPU 4201 performs control processing of the special symbol game. Note that the special symbol control processing is similar to the processing described with reference to FIG. 26 etc.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs normal symbol control processing (step S4023). In this processing, the main CPU 4201 performs control processing of the normal symbol game. Note that the normal symbol control processing is similar to the processing described with reference to FIG. 43, etc.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs a game action display unit control process (step S4024). In this process, the main CPU 4201 performs a process of setting the display data to be output to the first special symbol display LED, the second special symbol display LED, the normal symbol display LED, the hold display LED, etc.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs a game information data generation process (step S4025). In this process, the main CPU 4201 performs control processing of the external terminal board pulse signal, setting processing of output data, etc. After that, in step S4026, the main CPU 4201 performs a test firing signal generation process. Note that the test firing signal generation process is performed using the working area (outside area area) of the main RAM 4203.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs port output processing (step S4027). In this processing, the main CPU 4201 sets (transfers) the output data to the output port and outputs the WDT.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs a status monitoring process (step S4028). In this process, the main CPU 4201 performs a launch position determination process (if there is a change in the launch position, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a launch position command), a game abnormality detection determination process (if there is an abnormality, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game abnormality detection command), and a payout abnormality detection determination process (if there is an abnormality, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a payout abnormality detection command).

Then, after processing step S4028, the main CPU 4201 returns the process to step S4014 and performs processing from step S4014 onwards.

As described above, in the main control main process of this embodiment, after startup, and before executing the wait process (step S4005), the status information of the RAM clear switch 4176 and the status information of the setting key 4174a are saved (step S4004). When such a process is provided, even if the setting key 4174a is operated (turned on/off) in the setting key slot 4174 during the wait period, this status information can be secured at the time of power-on. Therefore, in this embodiment, the operation status of the RAM clear switch 4176 and the operation status of the setting key 4174a at startup can be grasped more reliably, and the operation on the gaming machine can be accurately identified.

As described above, in this embodiment, a 6 msec interruption prohibited section (processing section from step S4014 to step S4018) is provided in the main control main processing before various processes related to game control (processing from step S4020 onwards), and power cut processing (step S4015), initial value random number update processing (step S4016), performance display monitor tally division processing (step S4017), etc. are performed in the interruption prohibited section. In other words, in this embodiment, management processing of values that affect the ball output performance of the game and values that are tally throughout the game is performed in the interruption prohibited section. Therefore, by providing such an interruption prohibited section, game management is simplified, the processing performed by the main control circuit 4200 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load on the main control circuit 4200 can be reduced.

[Designated Area CRC Check Processing]
Next, with reference to Fig. 117, a description will be given of the designated area CRC check processing (step S4007 in Fig. 114) called in the main processing (main control main processing) under the control of the main CPU 4201. Fig. 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the designated area CRC check processing.

As described above, the designated area CRC inspection process is called by the outside area process call command, and is therefore a process related to bank 1, and the program for executing this process is a program stored in the outside area of main ROM 4202, and uses the working area (outside area) and stack area (outside area), which are outside areas of main RAM 4203. However, this process also references the game area of main RAM 4203 to calculate the CRC.

First, in step S4041, the main CPU 4201 performs a process of setting a stack pointer (for bank 1) for the outside area. Here, for example, the stack pointer SP is set to the final address of the stack area (outside area) shown in FIG. 110(C) + 1. Then, during subsequent processing, if a stack is used in bank 1, 1 is subtracted from the stack pointer SP, and register values, etc. are stored at that address, and thereafter, the stack areas (outside area) are used in the order from the largest address value to the smallest address value in the same manner.

In this embodiment, when the gaming machine is started, the main control main processing shown in Figures 114 to 116 is started first, and the stack pointer setting process for the gaming area is performed first (step S4002), while for the outside area, the stack pointer setting process for the outside area is also performed in the designated area CRC inspection process executed for the first time after the gaming machine is started, as a process for the outside area. In this way, by separating the stack pointer for the gaming area from the stack pointer for the outside area, which is performed when the gaming area is processed, coding errors and the like can be prevented.

Next, in step S4042, the main CPU 4201 performs a designated area CRC calculation process. This process performs a CRC calculation on the data in the play area (work area (play area) and stack area (play area)) and outside area (work area (outside area) and stack area (outside area)) of the main RAM 4203.

Next, in step S4043, the main CPU 4201 obtains the CRC calculation result for the designated area at the time of power interruption. This process involves reading from the main RAM 4203 the stored CRC calculation result at the time of power interruption. The CRC calculation result at the time of power interruption is the result of the CRC calculation performed on the data in the designated area when the power interruption is detected, and is stored, for example, in the working area (outside area) of the main RAM 4203 after the CRC calculation. The process of performing the CRC calculation at the time of power interruption will be described in detail later.

Next, in step S4044, the main CPU 4201 compares the CRC calculation result calculated in step S4042 with the CRC calculation result at the (most recent) power outage obtained in step S4043, and in step S4045 sets a flag "1" indicating that there is a backup abnormality as an initial value (for example, in the B register).

Next, in step S4046, the main CPU 4201 checks the result of the comparison of the CRC calculation results performed in step S4044. If there is a mismatch (YES in step S4046), it determines that a backup abnormality has occurred and proceeds to step S4051. The flag "1" is set in the B register, which is the initial value.

If it is determined in step S4046 that the CRC calculation results match (if step S4046 returns NO), the main CPU 4201 sets a flag "2" in register B in step S4047, indicating that a power outage has not been detected.

Next, in step S4048, the main CPU 4201 acquires a power cut implementation flag indicating whether or not a power cut has been performed, and in step S4049, determines whether or not a power cut has been performed based on the power cut implementation flag. If it is determined that a power cut has not been performed (if step S4049 is a NO determination), the main CPU 4201 determines that a power cut has not been detected and proceeds to step S4051. The flag "2" (indicating that a power cut has not been detected) that was set in step S4047 is set in the B register.

If it is determined in step S4049 that a power cut has been performed (if step S4049 returns a YES determination), the main CPU 4201 sets a flag "0" in register B, indicating that no abnormality has occurred.

Next, in step S4051, the main CPU 4201 stores the comparison result (flag) stored in the B register as the "CRC comparison result" in the working area (outside area) of the main RAM 4203, and then in step S4052, clears the power cut execution flag.

Finally, the main CPU 4201 ends this processing by issuing a game area processing return command, and processing is switched from processing related to the outside area to processing related to the game area.

In this way, in the designated area CRC inspection process, the stack pointer SP for bank 1 is set when processing is first performed on the area outside the main RAM 4203 after power is turned on, so the initialization process is performed in an efficient and simple configuration.

[Startup status check process]
Next, referring to Fig. 118, the start-up state check process (step S4008 in Fig. 114) called in the main process (main control main process) under the control of the main CPU 4201 will be described. Fig. 118 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the start-up state check process. In this process, the start-up state is determined according to whether or not there is an abnormality in the main RAM 4203, the operation of the setting key 4174a and the RAM clear switch 4176 when the power is turned on, and whether or not a setting change was made at the time of the previous power outage, and the clear range of the main RAM 4203 (RAM clear range) is set based on the determined start-up state.

First, in step S4071, the main CPU 4201 acquires the CRC collation result stored in the working area (outside area) of the main RAM 4203. For example, in the above-mentioned designated area CRC inspection process, this CRC collation result indicates that there is a backup abnormality (flag "1"), that a power interruption has not been detected (flag "2"), or that there is no abnormality (flag "0") that has been set in this specified area CRC inspection process.

Next, in step S4072, the main CPU 4201 sets the first address of the abnormality RAM clear range as the initial value of the RAM clear range (e.g., the HL register).

Next, in step S4073, the main CPU 4201 refers to the CRC comparison result obtained in step S4071 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If there is an abnormality (if step S4073 is judged as YES), the process proceeds to step S4077. If there is no abnormality (if step S4073 is judged as NO), in step S4074, the main CPU 4201 sets the start address of the RAM clear range when the setting is changed in the HL register.

After step S4074, in step S4075, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the current process is a power interruption recovery during a setting change based on the previous state information of the RAM clear switch 4176. If it is not a power interruption recovery during a setting change (if step S4075 is judged as NO), the process proceeds to step S4077. If it is a power interruption recovery during a setting change (if step S4075 is judged as YES), in step S4076, the previous state information of the RAM clear switch 4176 and the state information of the setting key 4174a are set (for example, in the E register). This process rewrites the current state information of the RAM clear switch 4176 and the state information of the setting key 4174a to the previous information (before the power interruption recovery), so that if the power interruption recovery occurred during a setting change, the setting change is continued in the current process.

After step S4076, or if the judgment in step S4073 is YES, or if the judgment in step S4075 is NO, the main CPU 4201 proceeds to step S4077, where it judges from the current status information of the RAM clear switch 4176 and the status information of the setting key 4174a whether the RAM clear switch 4176 is on and whether the setting key 4174a is on, and if both are on (if the judgment in step S4077 is YES), ends the processing.

In this way, if the main RAM is abnormal (YES in step S4073) and the RAM clear switch 4176 is "ON" and the setting key 4174a is "ON" when the power is turned on, the start address of the abnormal RAM clear range is set as the RAM clear range, and after a YES judgment in step S4077 is made and this process is terminated, clearing processing is performed based on the clear range (see Figures 119 and 120), and then setting change processing is performed (see Figures 122 and 123). This startup state is "RAM abnormality 1" shown in Figure 111 (A) and corresponds to the sixth pattern.

Furthermore, if there is no abnormality in the main RAM (if step S4073 is a NO judgement), and power recovery did not occur during a setting change (if step S4075 is a NO judgement), and furthermore, when the RAM clear switch 4176 is "ON" and the setting key 4174a is "ON" during power-on operations, the RAM clear range is set to the first address of the RAM clear range at setting change, and after a YES judgement in step S4077 is performed and this process is terminated, clear processing is performed based on the clear range (see Figures 119 and 120), and then setting change processing is performed (see Figures 122 and 123). This startup state is the "setting change" shown in Figure 111 (A) and corresponds to the fourth pattern.

Furthermore, if there is no abnormality in the main RAM (if step S4073 is a NO judgement) and power has been restored during a setting change (if step S4075 is a NO judgement), then in step S4076, the operation at power-on is simulated as the RAM clear switch 4176 being "ON" and the setting key 4174a being "ON", so the RAM clear range is set to the first address of the RAM clear range at setting change, and after a YES judgement in step S4077, this process is terminated, and clear processing is performed based on the clear range (see Figures 119 and 120), after which setting change processing is performed (see Figures 122 and 123). This startup state is the "setting change" shown in Figure 111 (A) and corresponds to the fifth pattern.

In step S4077, if neither the RAM clear switch 4176 nor the setting key 4174a is on (if step S4077 returns NO), proceed to step S4078.

Next, in step S4078, the main CPU 4201 refers to the CRC collation result to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If there is an abnormality (YES in step S4078), the process proceeds to step S4079, where processing for the impossible-to-return-to-play error is performed. In the impossible-to-return-to-play error processing, the WDT clear processing and restart processing are repeated in an infinite loop, and, for example, the performance display monitor 6170 is controlled to display the letter "E", and the game is stopped. Note that in this case, as described above, the abnormality RAM clear range is set as the clear range, but here, this clear range (abnormality RAM clear range) may be cleared, or the game may be stopped without being cleared.

In this way, if the main RAM is abnormal (YES in step S4073) and neither the RAM clear switch 4176 nor the setting key 4174a are in the "ON" state when the power is turned on, the RAM clear range is set to the first address of the abnormal RAM clear range, and after a YES in step S4078, the game return impossible error processing is performed as described above. This startup state is "RAM abnormality 2" shown in Figure 111 (A) and corresponds to the seventh pattern.

If there is no abnormality in the main RAM 4203 (if step S4078 is judged as NO), then in step S4080 it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 4176 is in the "ON" state.

In step S4080, if the RAM clear switch 4176 is in the "on" state (if step S4080 returns YES), the process ends.

In this way, if there is no abnormality in the main RAM (if step S4078 is a NO judgement), and the RAM clear switch 4176 is "ON" when the power is turned on (if step S4080 is a YES judgement), the RAM clear range is set to the starting address of the RAM clear range at setting change, and after this process is terminated via a YES judgement in step S4080, clear processing is performed based on that clear range (see Figures 119 and 120), and then power interruption recovery processing is performed. This startup state is the "RAM clear" shown in Figure 111 (A) and corresponds to the third pattern.

In this case, when the status information of the RAM clear switch 4176 and the setting key 4174a is set in step S4076, a YES judgment is made in step S4077, so it can be said that the power was not restored during the setting change. Also, if the setting key 4174a is also in the "on" state, a YES judgment is made in step S4077, so it can be said that the setting key 4174a is in the "off" state here.

If the state of the RAM clear switch 4176 is "off" in step S4080 (if step S4080 is judged as NO), the start address of the RAM clear range when power is restored is set in the HL register in step S4081, and the process ends.

In this way, if there is no abnormality in the main RAM (if step S4078 is a NO judgement) and the RAM clear switch 4176 is not "ON" when the power is turned on (if step S4080 is a NO judgement), the RAM clear range is set to the first address of the RAM clear range when power is restored, and after this process is completed, the clear process is performed based on that clear range (see Figures 119 and 120). This startup state is "power restoration" or "settings confirmation" shown in Figure 111 (A), and corresponds to the first pattern or the second pattern. Note that here, as above, when the state information of the RAM clear switch 4176 and the setting key 4174a is set in step S4076, a YES judgement is made in step S4077, so it can be said that power restoration during a setting change is not occurring.

As described above, there are two start-up states in which the RAM clear range start address at power recovery is set in the RAM clear range, the first and second patterns shown in FIG. 111(A). In the first pattern, the setting key 4174a is in the "off" state and the RAM clear switch 4176 is in the "off" state, whereas in the second pattern, the setting key 4174a is in the "on" state and the RAM clear switch 4176 is in the "off" state. Subsequent processing is differentiated based on these differences. That is, the start-up state of the first pattern is "power recovery", and after clear processing based on the clear range, power recovery processing is performed, whereas the start-up state of the second pattern is "setting confirmation", and after clear processing based on the clear range, setting confirmation processing is performed (see FIG. 122 and FIG. 123).

[Clear specified range]
Next, with reference to Fig. 119, a description will be given of the designated range clear processing (step S4009 in Fig. 115) called in the main processing (main control main processing) under the control of the main CPU 4201. Fig. 119 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the designated range clear processing.

First, in step S4101, the main CPU 4201 saves information such as the state information of the RAM clear switch 4176 at startup and the state information of the setting key 4174a in a stack. This information is realized, for example, by saving data in the E register and D register in a stack.

Next, in step S4102, the main CPU 4201 stores the value of the register in which the RAM clear range start address (lower address) is set as RAM clear range determination data in the play area (work area (play area)) of the main RAM 4203. In this embodiment, as described in relation to the start-up status check process in FIG. 118, the corresponding RAM clear range start address is set in the HL register depending on each condition, such as an abnormality in the main RAM 4203, whether or not settings have been changed, and operation of the RAM clear switch 4176, and when clearing the outside area of the main RAM 4203, by referring to the lower of the RAM clear range start address stored in the HL register, it is possible to avoid making the determination shown in FIG. 118 again.

In addition, in this embodiment, by passing only the lower data of the RAM clear range start address stored in the HL register, it is possible to clear the ranges according to the corresponding conditions for the outside area (work area (outside area)) of the main RAM 4203 as well as the play area (work area (play area)) of the main RAM 4203. For example, when clearing an area of the play area of the main RAM 4203 (area starting at address "F07B"H) under certain conditions, by passing the lower data of the address, "7B"H, the area corresponding to the data of "7B"H in the outside area of the main RAM 4203 is determined, and the determined area can be controlled to be cleared.

In addition, here, the RAM clear range determination data is stored in the play area (work area (play area)) of the main RAM 4203, because the data cannot be stored in a register and passed on. When an outside area processing call command is issued, as shown in FIG. 109, bank 0 is switched to bank 1, and the register is switched accordingly.

Next, in step S4104, the main CPU 4201 performs outside area clear processing. This processing is called by an outside area processing call command, and performs processing related to bank 1 (outside area processing). The outside area clear processing clears the specified range of the outside area of the main RAM 4203 based on the lower address of the register in which the RAM clear range start address described above is set. This processing will be described in detail later.

Note that the out-of-area specified area clear processing called here does not execute an interrupt prohibition command or an interrupt permission command, but if the processing is configured to execute an interrupt prohibition command or an interrupt permission command, like the data storage processing called in step S4011 of the main control main processing shown in FIG. 115 (see FIG. 121), it can be configured to call a specified process without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time it is called, just like this data storage processing.

In other words, the value of the interrupt enable register 2 is saved before the interrupt disable command, and after the specified process executed after the interrupt disable command is completed, the saved value of the interrupt enable register 2 is used to determine the interrupt control state at the time the data storage process was called, and if the interrupt enable state is established, the interrupt enable command is executed, and if not, the process ends with the interrupt disabled state.

Next, the main CPU 4201 returns to the processing related to bank 0 (processing of the game area) and in step S4105 sets the size of the RAM clear range (for example, the size of the RAM clear range when power is restored).

Next, in step S4106, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the first address of the RAM clear range is the first address of the RAM clear range when power is restored, and if it is (YES in step S4106), proceeds to step S4109.

On the other hand, if it is not the first address of the RAM clear range when power is restored (if step S4106 is judged as NO), in this case, since it is different from the RAM clear range when power is restored, in step S4107, the final address in the RAM clear range other than when power is restored is set as the final address of the RAM clear range. The final address of the RAM clear range set here becomes the final address of the game area of the main RAM 4203, but is taken into consideration so as not to clear stacks in the stack area (game area) that are being used. For example, in the stack area (game area), stacks are used in order from the stack with the largest address value to the stack with the smallest address value, but the address obtained by subtracting 4 from the final address of the stack area (game area) is set as the final address of the RAM clear range, and a certain number of bytes (for example, 4 bytes) of stack is secured without being cleared. This protects the return address of the called program and the saved data, etc.

Then, in step S4108, the size of the RAM clear range when power is not restored is calculated from the start address (lower address) of the RAM clear range stored in step S4102 and the end address of the RAM clear range set in step S4107, and then the process proceeds to step S4109.

Next, in step S4109, the main CPU 4201 executes clearing of the RAM clear range. In this process, for example, when the top address of the RAM clear range to be cleared, which is stored in the HL register, and the size of the range to be cleared calculated in step S4105 or the size of the range to be cleared calculated in step S4108 are specified, all bytes of the data in that range are set to "00"H.

Next, in step S4110, the main CPU 4201 restores information from the stack, such as the state information of the RAM clear switch 4176 at startup and the state information of the setting key 4174a. This information is stored, for example, in the E register and D register (see step S4101).

By performing this designated range clearing process, the clear range (lower addresses) in the game area of the main RAM 4203 is effectively used to determine the clear range in the area outside the main RAM 4203, which not only makes the process more efficient, but also simplifies the program structure and reduces the program size.

[Clearing specified areas outside the area]
Next, with reference to Fig. 120, a description will be given of the outside area designated area clearing process (step S4104 in Fig. 119) called in the designated range clearing process under the control of the main CPU 4201. Fig. 120 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the outside area designated area clearing process.

As described above, the outside area clear processing is called by the outside area processing call command, and is therefore a processing related to bank 1, and the program for executing this processing is a program stored in the outside area of main ROM 4202, and uses the working area (outside area) and stack area (outside area), which are outside areas of main RAM 4203.

First, in step S4121, the main CPU 4201 acquires the RAM clear range determination data stored in the play area (work area (play area)) of the main RAM 4203. This RAM clear range determination data is data stored by the main CPU 4201 in step S4102 of FIG. 118.

Next, in step S4122, the main CPU 4201 saves the acquired RAM clear range determination data (e.g., in the E register). Then, in step S4123, the main CPU 4201 sets the start address of the abnormal RAM clear range in the outside area of the main RAM 4203 (e.g., in the HL register) to be compared with the RAM clear range determination data acquired in step S4121.

Next, in step S4124, the main CPU 4201 compares the lower address of the abnormality RAM clear range start address set in the HL register with the RAM clear range determination data, and if the RAM clear range determination data matches the lower address of the abnormality RAM clear range start address (YES in step S4124), the process proceeds to step S4128.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear range determination data does not match the lower address of the abnormality RAM clear range start address (if step S4124 is judged as NO), in step S4125, the setting change RAM clear range start address in the outside area of the main RAM 4203 is set in the HL register for comparison with the RAM clear range determination data obtained in step S4121.

Next, in step S4126, the main CPU 4201 compares the lower address of the start address of the RAM clear range when the setting is changed set in the HL register with the RAM clear range determination data, and if the RAM clear range determination data matches the lower address of the start address of the RAM clear range when the setting is changed (YES in step S4126), the process proceeds to step S4128.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear range determination data does not match the lower address of the first address of the RAM clear range when the setting is changed (if step S4126 is judged as NO), in step S4127, the first address of the RAM clear range when power is restored in the outside area of the main RAM 4203 is set in the HL register to be compared with the RAM clear range determination data obtained in step S4121, and the process proceeds to step S4128.

In step S4128, the size of each RAM clear range is calculated, and then in step S4129, clearing of the RAM clear range is executed for the area outside the area of the main RAM 4203. In this process, for example, when the top address of the RAM clear range to be cleared, which is stored in the HL register, and the size of the RAM clear range calculated in step S4128 are specified, all bytes of the data in that range are set to "00"H.

Next, in step S4130, the main CPU 4201 restores the RAM clear range determination data that was saved in step S4122 from the E register (e.g., to the A register).

Next, in step S4131, the main CPU 4201 compares the lower address of the abnormality RAM clear range start address with the RAM clear range determination data, and if the RAM clear range determination data does not match the lower address of the abnormality RAM clear range start address (if step S4131 is judged as NO), the process proceeds to step S4134. Note that the judgment in step S4131 is substantially the same as that in step S4124.

If the RAM clear range determination data matches the lower address of the abnormality RAM clear range start address (if step S4131 returns YES), then in step S4132, the address of the performance display monitor control initial table stored in main ROM 4202 is set (for example, in the HL register).

Next, in step S4133, the main CPU 4201 executes a table data setting process. This process refers to the HL register, which indicates the address of the performance display monitor control initial table stored in the main ROM 4202, and stores initial values related to the control of the performance display monitor in a working area (of the main RAM 4203). The initial values related to the control of the performance display monitor include, for example, the LED blinking switching timing and the number of blinking repetitions.

In step S4134, the main CPU 4201 sets (e.g., in the HL register) the address of the data table for power-on initialization stored in the main ROM 4202.

Next, in step S4135, the main CPU 4201 executes a table data setting process. This process refers to the HL register, which indicates the address of the power-on initialization data table stored in the main ROM 4202, and stores data for power-on initialization in a working area (of the main RAM 4203). The data for power-on initialization includes, for example, the multiplication result of the LED blinking switching timing and the number of blinking repetitions.

Finally, the main CPU 4201 ends this processing by issuing a game area processing return command, and processing is switched from processing related to the outside area to processing related to the game area.

In this way, in the outside area clearing process, the clear range for the outside area of the main RAM 4203 is determined using the clear range for the game area of the main RAM 4203 determined in the startup status check process shown in FIG. 118, so that the clearing process of the main RAM 4203 is executed in an efficient and simple configuration.

[Data storage process]
Next, referring to FIG. 121, the data storage process (step S4011 in FIG. 115) called by the main process (main control main process) under the control of the main CPU 4201 will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the data storage process. When called from the main process, for example, the address of the data table for power-on initialization is set in the HL register. In this embodiment, this data storage process is called at several places including step S4011 in FIG. 115 and is configured to be executed as a process related to bank 0 (a process related to an area within the region), but it can be configured to be executed as a process related to bank 1 (a process related to an area outside the region) by calling with the above-mentioned specific call command. Also, here, when the data storage process is executed as a process related to bank 0 (processing related to the area within the area), for example, by setting the top address (upper side) "F0"H of the area addresses of the main RAM 4203 in the Q register, the area to be processed in the area within the area of the main RAM 4203 can be specified only by the top address (lower side) of the area to be processed in the data storage process, and the length of the command related to the area to be processed can be shortened (compared to specifying an address by 4 bytes (upper side + lower side)). Similarly, when the data storage process is executed as a process related to bank 1 (processing related to the area outside the area), for example, by setting the top address (upper side) "F2"H of the area addresses outside the area of the main RAM 4203 in the Q register, the area to be processed in the area outside the area of the main RAM 4203 can be specified only by the top address (lower side) of the area to be processed.

First, in step S4151, the main CPU 4201 saves the value of the interrupt permission register 2 to a register (for example, the parity/overflow flag of the flag register F). As described above, when an interrupt disable command is issued, the value of the interrupt permission register 2 becomes "0" and any information prior to that is lost, so this value is saved at this time.

Next, in step S4152, the main CPU 4201 issues an interrupt disable command. As a result, if interrupts are not disabled at the start of the data storage process, maskable interrupts are disabled from this interrupt disable command until an interrupt enable command is issued in step S4162, which will be described later. Next, in step S4153, the main CPU 4201 saves the data in the register (flag register F) that stores the value of the interrupt enable register 2 in the stack.

Next, in step S4154, the main CPU 4201 references the HL register and obtains the data at the address stored in the HL register. As described above, when this process is called from the main process, the data table for power-on initialization is obtained.

Next, in step S4155, the main CPU 4201 determines the size of the data related to the clearing process from the data acquired in step S4154, and if the size is 0 and it is determined that there is no clearing process (if step S4155 returns NO), it proceeds to step S4158.

On the other hand, if the size of the data related to the clearing process is not 0 and it is determined that a clearing process is to be performed (if step S4155 is a YES judgment), in step S4156, the lower part of the storage target area address is obtained from the data obtained in step S4154, and in step S4157, the storage target area is cleared. The start address of the storage target area is specified by combining the upper part of a preset address (for example, "F0"H) with the lower part of the storage target area address obtained in step S4156, and the storage target area is cleared using the start address of this storage target area and the size of the data related to the clearing process obtained from the power-on initialization data table. Here, the clearing process is repeated in a predetermined unit, for example, in units of 1 byte, and each time the clearing process is performed, the storage target area address to be cleared is shifted and the size of the data related to the clearing process is subtracted by 1 byte.

In step S4158, the main CPU 4201 determines the size of the data related to the set process (storage process) from the data obtained from step S4154, and if it is determined that the size is 0 and there is no set process (if step S4158 returns NO), it proceeds to step S4160.

On the other hand, if the size of the data related to the set process is not 0 and it is determined that a set process is being performed (if step S4158 returns YES), then in step S4159 the data to be stored is stored in the data to be stored. This process is performed by obtaining the lower part of the storage target area address from the data obtained in step S4154, combining this with the upper part of the pre-set address to identify the start address of the storage target area, and then obtaining the data to be stored from the data obtained in step S4154.

Next, in step S4160, the main CPU 4201 restores the data in the register (flag register F) that stores the value of interrupt permission register 2, which was saved in the stack in step S4153.

Next, in step S4161, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the value of the interrupt permission register 2 stored in the flag register, which is the data returned in step S4160, is "0" or not. If it is determined to be "0" (if step S4161 is determined to be YES), it determines that the interrupt was disabled before the interrupt disable command was executed in this process, and ends the process without executing the interrupt enable command.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of interrupt enable register 2 is "1" (if step S4161 is a NO determination), it is determined that the interrupt was enabled before the interrupt disable command was executed in this process, and in step S4162, the interrupt enable command is executed and the process ends.

As a result of this processing of the data storage process, the interrupt disable command in step S4152 sets both interrupt enable register 1 and interrupt enable register 2 to "0", and the interrupt enable command in step S4162 sets both interrupt enable register 1 and interrupt enable register 2 to "1". However, if interrupt enable register 2 is "0" when the data storage process is called (i.e., if interrupts are disabled when the data storage process is called), step S4162 is not executed and interrupt enable register 2 remains at "0".

In addition, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the values of interrupt enable register 1 and interrupt enable register 2 are the same when the data storage process is called, but if a non-maskable interrupt occurs or the data storage process is called in processing related to bank 1, it is possible that the value of interrupt enable register 1 will be "0" and the value of interrupt enable register 2 will be "1" when the data storage process is called. However, even in such a case, by saving the values of interrupt enable register 1 and interrupt enable register 2, respectively, clearing the area and setting the data, and then restoring these register values, it is possible to return to the original interrupt enabled or disabled state when the data storage process is completed.

In this embodiment, the data storage processing program shown in FIG. 121 has the characteristics of a common module (general-purpose module) that is called at various points to clear areas and set data.

This data storage process configuration allows a specific process to be called without having to be aware of the interrupt control state at the time it was called. More specifically, when a specific process such as clearing a specific area or setting data is called, the interrupt control state at the time it was called is saved, and the called process is performed in an interrupt disabled state. Then, when returning to the caller, the interrupt control state can be restored to the saved state, so there is no need to worry about the timing or order of the processes, and the settings for interrupt disable and interrupt enable can be properly maintained without having to be aware of the interrupt control state at the time it was called.

In addition, in such a data storage processing program, the control of the interrupt control state, the process of clearing a specified area, and the process of setting data to that specified processing are written together, which further improves management and processing efficiency.

[Settings change confirmation process]
Next, with reference to Fig. 122 and Fig. 123, a setting change confirmation process (step S4012 in Fig. 115) called in the main process (main control main process) under the control of the main CPU 4201 will be described. Fig. 122 and Fig. 123 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the setting change confirmation process.

First, in step S4181, the main CPU 4201 acquires state information of the setting key 4174a at the time of startup (e.g., stored in the E register) and determines whether the setting key 4174a is operated to be "ON." If the setting key 4174a is operated to be "OFF" (if step S4181 is judged to be NO), the process ends.

In step S4181, if the setting key 4174a is operated to be "ON" (if step S4181 is judged as YES), in step S4182, the main CPU 4201 stores the status information of the setting key 4174a at the time of startup and the status information of the RAM clear switch 4176 at the time of startup in the setting change status area of the working area (play area) of the main RAM 4203. Note that the status information stored here is used in the startup status check process shown in FIG. 118 to determine whether or not a power outage occurred during the previous setting change.

Next, in step S4183, the main CPU 4201 sets the setting operation command and executes the performance control command transmission process. Through this process, the setting operation command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 6300.

Next, in step S4184, the main CPU 4201 determines whether an interrupt request signal (XINT) has occurred, and if it determines that an interrupt request signal (XINT) has occurred (YES in step S4184), it executes a power cut setting process in step S4194. On the other hand, if it determines that an interrupt request signal (XINT) has not occurred (NO in step S4184), it determines whether a PTC2 timeout has occurred, and if it determines that a PTC2 timeout has not occurred (NO in step S4185), it proceeds to step S4184 and again determines whether an interrupt request signal (XINT) has occurred.

If it is determined in step S4185 that a PTC2 timeout has occurred (YES in step S4185), the main CPU 4201 performs input port read processing in step S4186.

Next, in step S4188, the main CPU 4201 outputs a security signal to the output port, and in step S4189, sets a setting value (for example, in the A register).

Next, in step S4190, the main CPU 4201 sets the setting display data in the A register based on the setting display data table and the setting value set in step S4189, and then in step S4191, performs display LED data setting based on the setting display data in the A register, and further performs performance LED common setting in step S4192.

Next, in step S4193, the main CPU 4201 performs WDT clear processing and WDT restart processing.

Next, in step S4194, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the RAM clear switch 4176 is "off" or not, and if it is determined to be "off" (YES in step S4194), i.e., if the RAM clear switch 4176 was not operated and is in the "off" state at startup, it determines that this operation is a setting confirmation operation, and proceeds to step S4197.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4176 is "on" (if the judgment at step S4194 is NO), that is, if the RAM clear switch 4176 is operated and in the on state at startup, it is assumed that this operation is an operation to update settings, and in step S4195 it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 4176 has been operated. If in step S4195 the RAM clear switch 4176 has not been operated (if the judgment at step S4195 is NO), the process proceeds to step S4197.

On the other hand, in step S4195, if the RAM clear switch 4176 has been operated (if the determination in step S4195 is YES, for example, if the RAM clear switch 4176 has been clicked), in step S4196, the setting value is changed in response to the operation of the RAM clear switch 4176, and the setting value is updated.

Then, in step S4197, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the setting key 4174a has been operated to "off" or not, and if it is "on" (if the determination is NO in step S4197), i.e., if the setting key 4174a remains "on", the process returns to step S4184, where it is again determined whether an interrupt request signal has been generated.

On the other hand, if the setting key 4174a is operated to "OFF" (YES in step S4197), it is determined that the setting change processing has ended, and in step S4198, the setting change status area (work area related to the current setting change) is cleared, and processing ends. Note that by clearing the setting change status area in step S4198, when the status information saved here is referenced in the startup status check processing shown in FIG. 118, it is determined that no power interruption occurred during the previous setting change, and if the processing of step S4198 is not performed due to a power interruption or the like, it is determined in the startup status check processing shown in FIG. 118 that a power interruption occurred during the previous setting change. Also, here, the setting change status information is loaded into a register (e.g., register A) in preparation for the next game return processing.

[Power interruption determination process]
Next, with reference to Fig. 124, a power interruption determination process (step S4015 in Fig. 115) called in the main process (main control main process) under the control of the main CPU 4201 will be described. Fig. 124 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the power interruption determination process.

First, in step S4211, the main CPU 4201 determines whether or not XINT has been detected. If it is determined that XINT has not been detected (NO in step S4211), i.e., if a power interruption has not been detected, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that XINT has been detected (YES in step S4211), the process executes a power interruption setting process in step S4212. The power interruption determination process will be described in detail later.

In addition, in this process, XINT detection is performed by referencing the XINT detection flag, which is set when the external maskable interrupt process described below detects a power outage.

[Power off setting process]
Next, with reference to Fig. 125, a power interruption setting process (step S4194 in Fig. 122 and step S4212 in Fig. 124) called in the setting change confirmation process and power interruption determination process under the control of the main CPU 4201 will be described. Fig. 125 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the power interruption setting process.

First, in step S4231, the main CPU 4201 clears the XINT detection flag. Here, the XINT detection flag is a flag that is set when the external maskable interrupt process described below detects a power outage, as described above.

Next, in step S4232, a designated area CRC generation process is performed. This process is called by an outside area processing call command, and performs processing related to bank 1 (outside area processing). The main CPU 4201 then generates a CRC for the game area of the main RAM 4203 and the outside area of the main RAM 4203, and when this process is complete, a return is made by a game area processing return command, and the subsequent process performs processing related to bank 0 (game area processing). This process will be described in detail later.

Then, in step S4233, the main CPU 4201 performs RAM access prohibition processing to prohibit access to the main RAM 4203 by sending a RAM access prohibition command to a specified register.

[Specified area CRC generation process]
Next, with reference to Fig. 126, a description will be given of the designated area CRC generation process (step S4232 in Fig. 125) called in the power interruption setting process under the control of the main CPU 4201. Fig. 126 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the designated area CRC generation process.

As described above, the designated area CRC generation process is called by an outside area process call command, and is therefore a process related to bank 1, and the program for executing this process is a program stored in the outside area of main ROM 4202, and uses the working area (outside area) and stack area (outside area), which are outside areas of main RAM 4203. However, this process also references the game area of main RAM 4203 to calculate the CRC, as described below.

First, in step S4251, the main CPU 4201 stores the power interruption detection flag in the working area (outside area) of the main RAM 4203.

Next, in step S4252, the main CPU 4201 performs a designated area CRC calculation process. This process is executed, for example, by using a CRC16 calculation register and writing the data to be calculated to the CRC16 calculation register. The calculation targets include the game area of the main RAM 4203 and most of the outside area. Note that in this embodiment, this designated area CRC generation process is called by an outside area processing call command as it basically performs processing related to bank 1, but as described above, the calculation target for the CRC is configured to include the game area of the main RAM 4203.

Next, in step S4253, the main CPU 4201 stores the CRC calculation result (designated area CRC value) in (e.g., the HL register).

Finally, the main CPU 4201 ends this processing by issuing a game area processing return command, and processing is switched from processing related to the outside area to processing related to the game area.

[Performance display monitor aggregation division process]
Next, with reference to Fig. 127, a description will be given of the performance display monitor tally division process (step S4017 in Fig. 115) called in the main process (main control main process) under the control of the main CPU 4201. Fig. 127 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the performance display monitor tally division process.

As described above, the performance display monitor aggregation division process is called by an outside area process call command, and is therefore a process related to bank 1. The program for executing this process is a program stored in the outside area of main ROM 4202, and uses the working area (outside area) and stack area (outside area), which are outside areas of main RAM 4203.

First, in step S4271, the main CPU 4201 executes an out-of-area RAM clear check process. This process will be described in detail later.

Next, in step S4272, the main CPU 4201 sets the contents of the display data switching flag 1 area (for example, in the A register), and in step S4273, determines whether the value set in the A register is other than the section A flag value (0) (i.e., 299 has been reached).

If it is determined in step S4273 that the section A flag value is other than (0) (if step S4273 returns a YES judgment), it is assumed that 299 has been reached and the process proceeds to step S4280.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4273 that the section A flag value is (0) (if step S4273 is a NO judgement), it is determined that 299 has not been reached and the process proceeds to step S4272, where the total out counter value is compared with the section A judgement value.

Next, in step S4275, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the difference between the total out counter value and the section A judgment value is less than 299, and if it determines that the difference is less than 299 (if step S4275 is a YES judgment), it proceeds to step S4285. If it determines that the difference between the total out counter value and the section A judgment value is not less than 299 (if step S4275 is a NO judgment), it proceeds to step S4276, where it sets the section B flag value in the display data switch flag 1 area.

Next, in step S4278, the main CPU 4201 sets the normal prize ball count counter area to "0", and in step S4279, sets the normal out counter area to "0".

Next, in step S4284, the main CPU 4201 executes calculation work target acquisition process 5, and then the main CPU 4201 ends this process in response to a game area processing return command, and processing is switched from processing related to the outside area to processing related to the game area.

If it is determined in step S4273 that the value of the A register is other than the section A flag value (0) (if step S4273 returns a YES judgement), it is assumed that 299 has been reached, and the process proceeds to step S4280, where the total out counter value is compared with the section transition judgement value.

Next, in step S4281, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the difference between the total out counter value and the section transition determination value is less than 60,000, and if it determines that the difference is less than 60,000 (if step S4281 is a YES determination), it proceeds to step S4285. If it determines that the difference between the total out counter value and the section transition determination value is not less than 60,000 (if step S4281 is a NO determination), it proceeds to step S4282, where it corrects the value of the display data switching flag 1 area (i.e., adds 1 (however, if the specified upper limit value is reached, no addition is made)). It then proceeds to step S4284.

If it is determined in step S4275 that the difference between the total out counter value and the section A judgment value is less than 299 (if step S4275 is judged as YES), or if it is determined in step S4281 that the difference between the total out counter value and the section transition judgment value is less than 60,000 (if step S4281 is judged as YES), then in step S4285, a target module is determined from the division task module address table and the contents of the division task transition state area, and the determined target module is called.

Finally, the main CPU 4201 ends this processing by issuing a game area processing return command, and processing is switched from processing related to the outside area to processing related to the game area.

In this way, in this embodiment, an out-of-area RAM clear check process is performed at the beginning of the performance display monitor aggregation division process, which clears the area related to the performance display monitor if there is an abnormality in the main RAM 4203.

In this embodiment, as described with reference to Figures 112, 119, and 120, when the pachinko gaming machine is started up, the clearing process of the game area and the outside area is performed synchronously (at roughly the same timing), but in addition to this clearing process, here, if an abnormality occurs in the main RAM 4203 after the pachinko gaming machine is started up, the area related to the performance display monitor is cleared asynchronously at that point in time. This configuration makes it possible to continuously maintain the function of the performance display monitor, and also makes it possible to effectively avoid displays by an abnormal performance display monitor.

[Out-of-area RAM clear check process]
Next, with reference to Fig. 128, an explanation will be given of the outside RAM clear check process (step S4271 in Fig. 127) called in the performance display monitor tally division process under the control of the main CPU 4201. Fig. 128 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the outside RAM clear check process.

As described above, the out-of-area RAM clear check process is called by the performance display monitor aggregation division process called by the out-of-area process call command, and is therefore a process related to bank 1. The program for executing this process is a program stored in the out-of-area area of main ROM 4202, and uses the working area (out-of-area area) and stack area (out-of-area area), which are out-of-area areas of main RAM 4203.

First, in step S4301, the main CPU 4201 sets (e.g., in the HL register) the contents of the initialization flag area stored in the outer area of the main RAM 4203. Next, in step S4302, it is determined whether the value of the HL register and the initial flag value are the same, and if it is determined that they are different (if step S4302 is a NO judgement), the process proceeds to step S4309. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the HL register and the initial flag value are the same (if step S4302 is a YES judgement), in step S4303, the content of the division task transition state area is set (e.g., in the A register), and in step S4304, it is determined whether the value of the A register is within the normal range.

Next, if the main CPU 4201 determines in step S4304 that the value of the A register is not within the normal range (if step S4304 is a NO judgement), it proceeds to step S4309. On the other hand, if the main CPU 4201 determines that the value of the A register is within the normal range (if step S4304 is a YES judgement), it sets the contents of the display content pointer area (e.g., in the A register) in step S4305, and determines in step S4306 whether the value of the A register is within the normal range.

Next, if the main CPU 4201 determines in step S4306 that the value of the A register is not within the normal range (if step S4306 is a NO judgement), it proceeds to step S4309. On the other hand, if the main CPU 4201 determines that the value of the A register is within the normal range (if step S4306 is a YES judgement), it sets the contents of the display data switching flag 1 area (for example, in the A register) in step S4307, and determines in step S4308 whether the value of the A register is within the normal range.

Next, if the main CPU 4201 determines in step S4308 that the value of the A register is not within the normal range (if step S4308 is a NO judgment), it proceeds to step S4309. On the other hand, if the main CPU 4201 determines that the value of the A register is within the normal range (if step S4308 is a YES judgment), it ends the processing.

If the judgment is NO in step S4302, NO in step S4304, NO in step S4306, or NO in step S4308, the main CPU 4201 clears the performance display monitor related area located in the outside area of the main RAM 4203 in step S4309. Next, the main CPU 4201 performs initial settings for the performance display monitor control based on the performance display monitor control initial table, etc., in step S4310, and then ends the process.

[Main control command transmission/reception processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 129, a description will be given of the main control command transmission/reception process (step S4021 in Fig. 116) called in the main process (main control main process) under the control of the main CPU 4201. Fig. 129 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the main control command transmission/reception process.

First, in step S4331, the main CPU 4201 determines whether or not XINT has been detected, and if it is determined that XINT has been detected (YES in step S4331), i.e., if a power outage has been detected, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that XINT has not been detected (NO in step S4331), the main control command control state number is set (for example, in the A register) in step S4332. Here, the main control command control state number is "0" which represents the main control command transmission start value, "1" which represents the payout communication mode reception value, and "2" which represents the payout communication event reception value, and the main control command control state number is set in each of the main control command transmission start processing, payout communication mode reception processing, payout communication event reception processing, etc.

Next, in step S4333, the main CPU 4201 selects a process corresponding to the main control command control state number. This process, for example, refers to a payout communication control branch table that defines the address (program start address) of the process corresponding to the main control command control state number, and obtains the address of the process corresponding to the main control command control state number set in the A register.

Next, in step S4334, the main CPU 4201 refers to the receive FIFO status check value in a status register (e.g., a register for asynchronous serial transmission and reception) to determine whether a receive FIFO error has been detected. If it is determined that the receive FIFO error has not been detected (NO in step S4334), it determines that there is no abnormality and proceeds to step S4336.

If it is determined in step S4334 that a receive FIFO error has been detected (YES in step S4334), it is determined that there is an abnormality, and in step S4335, a command to clear the receive FIFO is sent to a specified command register, and the receive FIFO is cleared.

Next, in step S4336, the main CPU 4201 uses the address selected in step S4333 to call the corresponding process (i.e., the process corresponding to the main control command control state), and then ends the process. The corresponding process is, for example, a main control command transmission start process, a payout communication mode reception process, or a payout communication event reception process.

In the main control command transmission/reception process shown in FIG. 129, in order to continue processing regardless of whether there is received data or not, the reception FIFO is cleared according to the result of the reception FIFO error detection in step S4334. For example, if there is received data and there is no reception FIFO error, normal data is obtained and the selected process is called; if there is no received data and there is no reception FIFO error, 0 data is obtained and the selected process is called; if there is received data and there is an error in the reception FIFO, the reception FIFO is cleared, 0 data is obtained and the selected process is called; if there is no received data and there is an error in the reception FIFO, the reception FIFO is cleared, 0 data is obtained and the selected process is called.

[Main control command transmission start process]
Next, referring to Fig. 130, a main control command transmission start process (step S4336 in Fig. 129) that is called using a program address selected based on the main control command control state number in the main control command transmission/reception process under the control of the main CPU 4201 will be described. Fig. 130 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the main control command transmission start process.

First, in step S4351, the main CPU 4201 sets (saves) the startup information stored in the startup information area of the game area of the main RAM 4203 (e.g., the A register), and in step S4352, clears this startup information area.

Next, in step S4353, the main CPU 4201 refers to the A register to determine whether or not there is startup information. If it is determined that there is startup information (if step S4353 is a YES judgement), the process proceeds to step S4361. If it is determined that there is no startup information (if step S4353 is a NO judgement), in step S4354, the size of the payout management counter area of the game area of the main RAM 4203 is set (for example, in the B register). Here, the size of the payout management counter area is, for example, 15, which becomes the number of entries for the number of prize balls to be managed (for example, prize balls 1 to 15).

Next, in step S4355, the main CPU 4201 obtains the top address of the payout management counter area and sets the address of the 15th byte (the lowest byte) in (e.g., the HL register), and in step S4356, if the value (counter value) of the entry corresponding to the address set in the HL register is "0", it is left as is, otherwise "1" is subtracted, and a specified flag is changed depending on whether or not the subtraction was successful.

This process has a counter value indicating whether or not a payout has been made for each winning ball (if there are 3 wins out of 15 winning balls, the counter value is 3), and if the counter value can be decremented, a flag is set, and if the counter value is "0", it is left at "0", and is controlled to be performed in one process (one command).

Next, in step S4357, the main CPU 4201 determines whether or not there is a counter value for an entry corresponding to the address being determined in the payout management counter area. This determination is made by referring to the predetermined flag described above, which indicates whether or not "1" has been subtracted from the counter value in step S4356. If it is determined that there is a counter value (if step S4357 is a YES determination), i.e., if "1" has been subtracted, the process proceeds to step S4360.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no counter value (if step S4357 is a NO judgement), i.e., if "1" has not been subtracted, the process proceeds to step S4358, where the address of the HL register is subtracted so as to refer to the counter value of the next entry. For example, if the address of the HL register was the 15th byte (the lowest byte), it is changed to the 14th byte (the byte one level above the lowest).

Next, in step S4359, the main CPU 4201 determines whether or not processing has been performed for the payout management counter area of all entries (e.g., 15 entries defined as the size of the payout management counter area), and if processing of all entries has been completed (if step S4359 is judged as YES), proceeds to step S4360. On the other hand, if processing of all entries has not been completed (if step S4359 is judged as NO), proceeds to step S4355 to process the next address in the payout management counter area, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

If step S4353 is judged as YES, or if step S4359 is judged as YES, the process proceeds to step S4360, as described above, where the main CPU 4201 generates a main control command. In this embodiment, the payout management counter area has 15 entries, which correspond to the counters for the numbers of prize balls 1 to 15. If it is determined in step S4357 that the entry corresponding to the address to be judged has a counter value, a main control command is generated for the number of payouts according to the number of prize balls for the entry corresponding to the address to be judged.

Next, in step S4361, the main CPU 4201 transmits a main control command, for example, to a data register for asynchronous serial transmission and reception. When step S4361 is executed if step S4353 is judged as YES, the main control command is a main control command based on the startup information, and when step S4361 is executed after step S4360, the main control command is a main control command generated in step S4360.

Next, in step S4362, the main CPU 4201 sets the main control command in the main control command transmission area. This process is for determining whether or not normal communication has occurred. For example, in the payout communication mode reception process, if the two's complement value of the received command is added to the value set in the main control command transmission area and the result is 0, it is determined that normal communication has occurred, and if not, it controls to perform main control command playback processing.

Next, in step S4363, the value in the main control command control state number area is incremented by "1" and the process ends.

[External Maskable Interrupt Processing]
Next, the external maskable interrupt processing will be described with reference to Fig. 131. This processing is called based on the entry address (program address) of the external maskable interrupt defined in the setting area corresponding to the interrupt when an external interrupt input from the XINT terminal occurs. Fig. 131 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the external maskable interrupt processing.

First, in step S4381, the main CPU 4201 saves a protection register (e.g., an AF register) to the stack. Next, in step S4382, the main CPU 4201 checks the power interruption signal bit position of the input port, and if a power interruption is not detected (if step S4382 is a NO judgement), proceeds to step S4385. On the other hand, if a power interruption is detected (if step S4382 is a YES judgement), in step S4383, an interrupt cause mask is set in the interrupt mask register to prevent interrupt processing from occurring in subsequent processing. Next, in step S4384, the XINT detection flag is set, and the status is updated to indicate that a power interruption has occurred.

Next, in step S4381, the main CPU 4201 restores the protection registers that were saved in step S4381.

[System timer interrupt processing]
Next, the system timer interrupt process will be described with reference to Fig. 132. This process is called based on the entry address (program address) of the PTC2 timeout interrupt defined in the setting area corresponding to the timeout interrupt input from the timer counter (PTC2) when this interrupt occurs, and is executed, for example, at a cycle (interrupt cycle) of 2 msec. Fig. 132 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the system timer interrupt process.

First, in step S4401, the main CPU 4201 saves a protection register (e.g., the AF register) to the stack. Next, in step S4402, the main CPU 4201 adds "1" to the value of the interrupt counter area.

Next, the main CPU 4201 reads the state of the input port in step S4403, and performs switch input detection processing in step S4404. The switch input detection processing will be described in detail later.

Next, in step S4405, the main CPU 4201 performs a game LED lighting data output process. The game LED lighting data output process will be described in detail later. Next, in step S4406, the main CPU 4201 performs a winning information command setting process. In this process, the main CPU 4201 performs a transmission reservation process for a performance control command (winning information command).

Next, in step S4407, the main CPU 4201 performs a performance display monitor control process (outside area). In this process, the main CPU 4201 performs a game judgment process, a prize ball addition judgment process, a display content update process for the performance display monitor 6170, and the like. In addition, since this process is called by an outside area process call command, it is a process related to bank 1, and the program for executing this process is a program stored in the outside area of the main ROM 4202, and uses the working area (outside area) and stack area (outside area), which are outside areas of the main RAM 4203.

Next, in step S4408, the main CPU 4201 restores from the stack the contents of the protection register that were saved in step S4401, and then in step S4409, enables the interrupt.

As described above, in this embodiment, after a power interruption (XINT) occurs, the interrupt cause is masked, so there is no need to provide processing in the system timer interrupt process that takes into account the occurrence of a power interruption. As a result, the processing is simplified and the program size can be reduced.

[Switch input detection process]
Next, with reference to Fig. 133, a description will be given of the switch input detection process (step S4404 in Fig. 132) called by the system timer interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 4201. Fig. 133 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the switch input detection process.

First, the main CPU 4201 performs abnormal state monitoring processing in step S4421. Details of the abnormal state monitoring processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs a normal symbol-related check process in step S4422. In this process, the main CPU 4201 performs a check process of the first start port winning ball switch 6044a, the passing ball switch 6043a, and the second start port winning ball switch 6045a (normal electric device 6046). In this check process, if the on edge of the first start port winning ball switch 6044a or the on edge of the passing ball switch 6043a is detected, a random number acquisition process, a random number transfer process, etc. are performed. Also, in this check process, if the on edge of the second start port winning ball switch 6045a is detected, depending on the situation, a normal electric device winning counter update process, a winning invalidation process, etc. are performed.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs a special symbol-related check process in step S4423. In this process, the main CPU 4201 performs a check process on the count switch 6132, the first start port switch 6121, and the second start port switch 6141. In this check process, if an on-edge of the count switch 6132 is detected, depending on the situation, an update process of the special electric role winning counter, a winning invalidation process, etc. are performed. In addition, in this check process, if an on-edge of each start port winning ball switch is detected (the reserved number of special symbols is updated) and a pre-reading performance is performed, a transmission reservation process of a specific reserved addition command is performed. On the other hand, in this check process, if an on-edge of each start port winning ball switch is detected (the reserved number of special symbols is updated) and a pre-reading performance is not performed, a transmission reservation process of a reserved addition command is performed.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs touch state signal check processing in step S4424. This processing determines whether or not there has been a change in the touch state from the information of the input port, and if there has been a change in the touch state, distinguishes whether a touch state ON or a touch state OFF has been detected, and sets a specified flag.

Next, in step S4425, the main CPU 4201 performs a prize ball related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 4201 updates the data (designated prize ball management counter) stored in the payout management table when a prize ball is awarded.

After that, in step S4426, out ball related switch check processing is performed. This processing, for example, judges from the information of the input port whether or not a signal that detects the passage of a game ball has been supplied to the outlet switch of the outlet 178 of the first pachinko game machine described above, and ends the processing if the signal has not been supplied, and adds "1" to the out ball number management counter stored in the out ball number management counter area if the signal has been supplied. After step S4426, the processing ends.

[Abnormal state monitoring process]
Next, with reference to Fig. 134, a description will be given of the abnormal state monitoring process (step S4421 in Fig. 133) called in the switch input detection process under the control of the main CPU 4201. Fig. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the abnormal state monitoring process.

First, the main CPU 4201 performs abnormal state monitoring processing (outside area) in step S4441. Since this is called by an outside area processing call command, it is processing related to bank 1, and the program for executing this processing is a program stored in the outside area of the main ROM 4202, and uses the working area (outside area) and stack area (outside area), which are outside areas of the main RAM 4203. Details of the abnormal state monitoring processing (outside area) will be explained later.

Next, in step S4442, the main CPU 4201 performs input port effective edge information reflection processing. This processing uses predetermined mask data to extract effective edges from the edge information of the input ports (0 to 3) and sets (reflects) the input port effective edge information.

Next, in step S4443, the main CPU 4201 performs a game machine abnormality detection information reflection process. This process updates the game machine abnormality detection flag from the game machine abnormality detection flag area stored in the game area of the main RAM 4203 and the outside game machine abnormality detection flag area stored in the outside area of the main RAM 4203, and sets it in the game machine abnormality detection flag area.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs security signal request setting in step S4444. This process updates and sets the security signal request flag based on the security signal request flag stored in the game area of the main RAM 4203 and the outside area security signal request flag stored in the outside area of the main RAM 4203.

Next, in step S4445, the main CPU 4201 refers to the door/frame open/close status flag area stored in the outer area of the main RAM 4203 to determine whether the door and frame are open (e.g., whether the base door 6003 and/or the glass door 6004 are open). If the door and frame are not open (if step S4445 is a NO judgment), the process ends, and if the door and frame are open (if step S4445 is a YES judgment), the magnetic sensor is initialized in step S4446, and then the process ends.

With this process, in the case of abnormal winning, taking into consideration that winning has a large impact on the progress of the game, the process of detecting the abnormality is performed by the process related to the area outside the area of the main RAM 4203, and the process of reflecting the detection result is performed by the process related to the game area of the main RAM 4203. Also, in the case of gaming machine abnormalities, the process of detecting the abnormality and the synthesis of the detected contents are performed by the process related to the area outside the area of the main RAM 4203.

[Abnormal state monitoring process (outside area)]
Next, with reference to Fig. 135, a description will be given of the abnormal state monitoring process (outside area) (step S4441 in Fig. 134) called in the abnormal state monitoring process under the control of the main CPU 4201. Fig. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the abnormal state monitoring process (outside area).

As described above, the abnormal condition monitoring process (outside area) is called by the out-of-area process call command, and is therefore a process related to bank 1. The program for executing this process is a program stored in the out-of-area area of main ROM 4202, and uses the working area (outside area) and stack area (outside area), which are out-of-area areas of main RAM 4203.

First, in step S4461, the main CPU 4201 clears the outside security signal request flag area located in the outside area of the main RAM 4203. Then, in step S4462, it clears the outside gaming machine abnormality detection flag area located in the outside area of the main RAM 4203.

Next, in step S4463, the main CPU 4201 performs input port valid setting. This process sets the data "FF"H to all of the input port valid edge mask areas located in the outer area of the main RAM 4203.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs interrupt period timer counter update processing in step S4464.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs abnormal condition monitoring pre-processing in step S4465. In this process, the door/frame open/closed state flag area stored in the outside area of the main RAM 4203 is referenced to determine whether the door and frame are open (for example, whether the base door 6003 and/or glass door 6004 are open), and if it is determined that the door and frame are open, the magnetic sensor bit of the input port is reset for the abnormality detection information (input port buffer area). This turns off the detection level of the magnetic sensor, and abnormality detection by the magnetic sensor is no longer performed. After that, the abnormality detection information is set in the monitoring corrected input value area.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs general-purpose abnormality detection and determination processing in step S4466.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs an induced magnetic field monitoring process in step S4467. This process determines whether or not an induced magnetic field is being detected, and ends the process if an induced magnetic field is not being detected. On the other hand, if an induced magnetic field is being detected, the input port valid edge mask is cleared, "FF"H is set in the outside-area security signal request flag area, and the induced magnetic field detection information bit in the outside-area gaming machine abnormality detection flag area is set to on ("1").

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs a normal electric role illegal winning process in step S4468. This process determines whether the normal electric role 146 shown in the first pachinko game machine is in operation (based on the data in the normal electric role operation signal management data area), and if it is determined to be in operation, for example, a non-operation winning monitoring counter value (for example, 18) is set, and the operation winning monitoring counter value remains at its original value. Here, when a winning ball is detected in the second start hole 140, if the result of subtracting "1" from the operation winning monitoring counter value is "0", it is determined that an abnormality has been detected, and a request flag is set in the outside area security signal request flag area, and a request flag is set in the outside area game abnormality detection flag area. After this, it is determined whether the normal electric role 146 is in operation (based on the data in the normal electric role operation flag area), and if it is in operation, the bit position of the start port 2 switch in the input port valid edge mask is cleared, provided that the winning period is valid.

If the normal electric device 146 is not in operation, the active winning monitoring counter value (e.g., 4) is set, and the non-operating winning monitoring counter value remains at its original value. Here, when a game ball is detected to have entered the second start port 140, if the result of subtracting "1" from the non-operating winning monitoring counter value is "0", it is determined that an abnormality has been detected, and a request flag is set in the out-of-area security signal request flag area, and a request flag is set in the out-of-area game abnormality detection flag area. After this, it is determined whether the normal electric device 146 is in operation (based on the data in the normal electric device operation flag area), and if it is in operation, the bit position of the start port 2 switch in the input port valid edge mask is cleared, provided that the winning period is valid.

Next, the main CPU 4201 performs the special electric device illegal winning process in step S4469. This process includes the special electric device 1 illegal winning process and the special electric device 2 illegal winning process, and in both cases, similar to the normal electric device illegal winning process described above, detects an abnormality based on the active winning monitoring counter and the inactive winning monitoring counter, etc., and if an abnormality is detected, sets a request flag in the outside area security signal request flag area and sets a request flag in the outside area game abnormality detection flag area.

Finally, the main CPU 4201 ends this processing by issuing a game area processing return command, and processing is switched from processing related to the outside area to processing related to the game area.

[Game LED lighting data output process]
Next, with reference to Fig. 136, a description will be given of the game LED lighting data output process (step S4405 in Fig. 132) called by the system timer interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 4201. Fig. 136 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the game LED lighting data output process.

The game LED lighting data output process is a process that controls the output of LED data and LED common data for LEDs that serve both as LEDs for displaying patterns (game LEDs) and as LEDs for displaying performance (performance LEDs). The LED data for the game LEDs is set, for example, in the game action display unit control process (step S4024 in FIG. 116) called by the main control main process, and the LED data for the performance LEDs is set, for example, in the performance display monitor display process (not shown) called by the performance display monitor control process (outside area) (step S4407 in FIG. 132) called by the system timer interrupt process.

First, in step S4481, the main CPU 4201 sets a refresh value (for example, an 8-bit bit string "00000000") to the address of the output port 12.

In addition, output port 12 is a port for outputting LED data related to an LED that serves both as an LED for displaying symbols (game LED) and an LED for displaying performance (performance LED). Also, output port 11, which will be described later, is a port for outputting LED common data related to that LED.

Next, in step S4482, the game LED common value (LED common data) in the game LED common area (area that stores the LED common data of the game LED) of the game area of the main RAM 4203 is updated by adding "1". At this time, the address of the game LED common area is set to, for example, the address of the HL register, and the game LED common value is calculated.

However, if the updated value is equal to or greater than the specified value (maximum value), it is set to "0." The updated value is also stored in the address area indicated by the specified register in the game LED common area (e.g., the HL register), and is also stored in another register (e.g., the A register).

For example, if the range of the game LED data area (area that stores LED data for the game LEDs) in the game area is "4" and the range of the performance LED data area (area that stores LED data for the performance LEDs) in the outside area is "4", the specified value (maximum value) will be 4 + 4 - 1 = 7, and here, when the game LED common value is "1", this value is less than the maximum value, so the address area indicated by the HL register is updated to "2" and the value of the A register is also set to "2". Also, at this time, when the game LED common value is "7", this value is greater than or equal to the maximum value, so the address area indicated by the HL register is updated to "0" and the value of the A register is also set to "0".

This processing in step S4482 is performed by one process (one command).

Next, in step S4483, the main CPU 4201 divides the value in the A register by the range of the game LED data area (for example, "4" if there are four pieces of data), stores the quotient in the A register, and stores the remainder in another register (for example, the B register). It also adds "1" to the value in the B register to make a correction.

For example, if the address area indicated by the HL register is updated to "6" as a result of the processing in step S4482, and the value of the A register is set to "6", then 6 divided by 4 equals 1, leaving a remainder of 2, so "1" is stored in the A register and "2" is stored in the B register, and then a correction is made by adding "1" to the B register, resulting in the value of the B register becoming "3". In this way, the value of the B register can take on values between "1" and "4".

Next, in step S4484, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the value in the A register is a game LED common value. This determination can be made, for example, based on whether the value stored in the A register is "0" or "1". If the value in the A register is "0", the value is a game LED common value, and if the value in the A register is "1", the value is a performance LED common value. If it is determined to be a game LED common value (if step S4484 is judged as YES), the process proceeds to step S4487. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a performance LED common value (if step S4484 is judged as NO), in step S4485, a value in the range of the performance LED data area (for example, "4") is added to the value in the B register to correct the value in the B register. As a result, the value in the B register will be a value between "5" and "8".

Next, in step S4486, the main CPU 4201 sets the address of the performance LED common area (area that stores LED common data for the performance LEDs) in the outer area of the main RAM 4203 in the HL register.

Next, in step S4487, the main CPU 4201 sets the initial value of the dynamic lighting common data (for example, an 8-bit bit string "10000000") in the A register. The dynamic lighting common data is common data for performing dynamic lighting as a lighting method for the LED, and dynamic lighting is a lighting method that achieves lighting of the LED by blinking the LED at a constant frequency at high speed.

Next, in step S4488, the main CPU 4201 corrects the dynamic lighting common data set in the A register.

This process, for example, shifts the dynamic lighting common data (8-bit bit string) stored in the A register one bit to the left, and sets the bit value at the left end to the right end. Next, in step S4489, the address of the HL register is corrected to select the dynamic lighting common data area.

Next, in step S4490, the main CPU 4201 determines whether or not the process has been performed a predetermined number of times corresponding to the value of the B register. If the process has not been performed a predetermined number of times (if step S4490 returns NO), the process returns to step S4488 and is repeated.

For example, with this process, if the initial value of the dynamic lighting common data (8-bit bit string "10000000") is stored in the A register, then if the value of the B register is "1", the contents of the A register will become "00000001", if the value of the B register is "2", the contents of the A register will become "00000010", and thereafter, the value of the A register will be shifted in the same manner according to the value of the B register, and if the value of the B register is the maximum "8", the contents of the A register will return to the original value "10000000".

If it is determined in step S4490 that the processing has been performed a predetermined number of times (if step S4490 is determined to be YES), in step S4491, the LED data specified by the address indicated by the HL register is set in the H register. For example, if the address indicated by the HL register is a performance LED data area, data is set in the H register from one of the areas such as the ratio segment upper output driver buffer area, the identification segment lower output driver buffer area, and the identification segment upper output driver buffer area, depending on the value of the B register. Also, if the address indicated by the HL register is a game LED data area, data is set in the H register from one of the areas such as the game LED data 1 area (data area related to the special symbol 1 display LED), the game LED data 2 area (data area related to the special symbol 2 display LED), the game LED data 3 area (data area related to the probability change state LED and the time reduction state notification LED), and the game LED data 4 area (data area related to the round display LED and the launch position notification LED), depending on the value of the B register.

Next, in step S4492, the main CPU 4201 sets the dynamic lighting common data stored in the A register to the L register.

Next, in step S4493, the main CPU 4201 sets the value of the HL register to output port 11 and output port 12.

[Game Status Information Update Processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 137, the game status information update process will be described. This process is called by the game return process (step S4013 in FIG. 115) called by the main process (main control main process) controlled by the main CPU 4201. This process is also called by the special symbol game end process (not shown, but similar to the special symbol game end process in FIG. 31 described in the first pachinko game machine) called by the special symbol game determination process (not shown, but similar to the special symbol game determination process in FIG. 30 described in the first pachinko game machine) called by the special symbol control process (step S4022 in FIG. 116) called by the main process (main control main process) controlled by the main CPU 4201. Note that FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the game status information update process.

First, in step S4511, the main CPU 4201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process, and in step S4512, sets the address in a register (e.g., the HL register) that is located in the working area (game area) of the main RAM 4203 and stores the presentation change count counter value.

Next, in step S4513, the main CPU 4201 allocates the (1 byte) data in the area indicated by the address stored in the HL register at the specified bit position, and sets each value in the H register and L register. It also sets the upper bit of each register to "0", and sets the value of the HL register as a 2-byte command.

This process processes a 1-byte value for use in a command. For example, if bit position "6" is specified for the 1-byte bit string "11001001", the 7th bit (the most significant bit) is extracted as a result of sorting using the 6th bit as a boundary, and the data "00000001" with all the higher bits set to "0" is set in the H register. In the L register, "1001001" is extracted from the 0th to 6th bits, and the data "01001001" with the higher bit (7th bit) set to "0" is set.

This processing in step S4513 is executed as one process (one command).

Next, in step S4514, the main CPU 4201 sets the contents of the HL register in the parameter area for displaying the number of performance changes as a 2-byte command, and in step S4515, sets the register (e.g., the HL register) to the probability change state change count counter value.

Next, in step S4516, the main CPU 4201 doubles the value of the HL register, shifting all of the values of the H and L registers one bit to the left, and then shifts only the L register one bit to the right, making the value of the HL register a two-byte command.

For example, if the value of the HL register is the bit string "0000100111001001", doubling this will result in "0001001110010010". Here, the H register will have the bit string "00010011", and the L register will have the bit string "10010010". Then, shifting the L register one bit to the right will result in the bit string "01001001". As a result, the value of the HL register will become the bit string "0001001101001001".

Next, in step S4517, the main CPU 4201 sets the value of the HL register in the parameter area for displaying the number of times the probability of a state change is located in the working area (game area) of the main RAM 4203. If the upper 8 bits (the H register generated in step S4516) and the lower 8 bits (the L register generated in step S4516) of this parameter area for displaying the number of times the probability of a state change is changed are each defined as a management table for a specified command, in a program that has acquired this table, for example, the bit string of the H register "00010011" and the bit string of the L register "01001001" are acquired, the first "0" of the value of the L register is removed, the H register and the L register are joined, and the upper bits are filled with "0", resulting in the original bit string of the HL register "0000100111001001".

[Performance control command transmission process]
Next, the performance control command transmission process will be described with reference to Fig. 138. This process is executed in the setting change confirmation process under the control of the main CPU 4201 (step S4183 in Fig. 122). Fig. 138 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the performance control command transmission process. The performance control command transmission process is called from various programs, and in that case, the address of a table according to the purpose is set, but when it is executed from the setting change confirmation process, for example, the address of the setting operation command management data table is set in the HL register.

First, in step S4531, the main CPU 4201 saves the value of the interrupt permission register 2 to a register (for example, the parity/overflow flag of the flag register F). As described above, when an interrupt disable command is issued, the value of the interrupt permission register 2 becomes "0" and any information prior to that is lost, so this value is saved at this time.

Next, in step S4532, the main CPU 4201 issues an interrupt disable command. As a result, if interrupts are not disabled at the start of the performance control command transmission process, maskable interrupts are disabled from this interrupt disable command onwards until an interrupt enable command is issued in step S4541, which will be described later. Next, in step S4533, the main CPU 4201 saves the data in the register (flag register F) that stores the value of interrupt enable register 2 in the stack.

Next, in step S4534, the main CPU 4201 references the HL register and sets (for example, in the A register) the data of the address stored in the HL register (the command type code in the first byte). At this time, the address stored in the HL register is incremented by "1".

Next, in step S4535, the main CPU 4201 checks the bit position of the transmit FIFO trigger level flag in the STU2 (asynchronous serial communication) command status register and determines whether the transmit FIFO trigger level is 128 bytes or greater.

Since the transmission FIFO trigger level is restricted to less than 128 bytes, if it is determined that the transmission FIFO trigger level is 128 bytes or more (if step S4535 is judged as YES), the process proceeds to step S4539 to end the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transmission FIFO trigger level is less than 128 bytes (if step S4535 is judged as NO), in step S4536, the command type code (or command parameter work area) set in the A register is output to the STU2 (asynchronous serial communication) data register.

Next, in step S4537, the main CPU 4201 sets (for example, in the A register) the data of the address stored in the HL register (the command parameter work area included in the command management data table). After this setting, the address stored in the HL register is incremented by "1."

Next, in step S4538, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the 1-byte data set in the A register in step S4537 is an end code. If it is determined that the data in the A register is an end code (if step S4538 returns a YES judgment), the command transmission process has ended, and the process proceeds to step S4539. On the other hand, if it is determined that the data in the A register is not an end code (if step S4538 returns a YES judgment), the process proceeds to step S4535 to transmit the next command, and the processes of steps S4535 to S4538 are repeated.

In step S4539, the main CPU 4201 restores the data in the register (flag register F) that stores the value of interrupt permission register 2, which was saved in the stack in step S4533.

Next, in step S4540, the main CPU 4201 determines whether the value of the interrupt permission register 2 is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value is "0" (if step S4540 returns a YES determination), it determines that the interrupt was disabled before the interrupt prohibition command was executed in this process, and ends the process without executing the interrupt permission command.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of interrupt enable register 2 is "1" (if step S4540 is a NO determination), it is determined that the interrupt was enabled before the interrupt disable command was executed in this process, and in step S4541, the interrupt enable command is executed and the process ends.

As a result of this processing of the performance control command transmission process, the interrupt permission register 1 and interrupt permission register 2 both become "0" in response to the interrupt prohibition command in step S4532, and the interrupt permission register 1 and interrupt permission register 2 both become "1" in response to the interrupt permission command in step S4541. However, if interrupt permission register 2 is "0" at the time the data storage process is called (i.e., if interrupts are prohibited at the time the data storage process is called), step S4541 is not executed and interrupt permission register 2 remains at "0".

The mechanism for managing the interrupt disabled state of this type of data storage process is similar to that of the data storage process described with reference to FIG. 121, and this process can also achieve the same effects as the data storage process.

In addition, in the performance control command transmission process of FIG. 138, the above-described configuration eliminates the need to prepare a ring buffer for transmitting performance control commands, and therefore eliminates the need to perform processes to manage the ring buffer (e.g., processes to manage writing to and reading from the ring buffer). This allows the program size to be significantly reduced.

In addition, when allocating a ring buffer in the model-dependent main RAM 4203, etc., it is possible to eliminate the need for processes such as adjusting the size of the ring buffer.

The fourth pachinko gaming machine of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, but these configurations and processes are merely examples, and the technical idea of the present invention can be realized with various other configurations and methods. In addition, while the above describes the case where the technical idea of the present application is mainly applied to a pachinko gaming machine, it can also be applied to a pachislot machine or the enclosed gaming machine described as the second embodiment.

[5. The fifth pachinko game machine]
Next, the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be described. The fifth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a one-type two-type mixed machine, like the third pachinko gaming machine. The fifth pachinko gaming machine is different from the third pachinko gaming machine in terms of gameplay and presentation content, and accordingly, the configuration of various components arranged in the game area is also partially different.

The fifth pachinko game machine also has a game stop function that can stop the game when the difference in the number of game balls reaches a regulated value (for example, 95,000 balls). The "difference in the number of game balls" refers to the cumulative number of game balls that are paid out (number of paid out game balls) minus the cumulative number of game balls that are fired (number of fired game balls). The game stop function will be described in more detail later.

The fifth pachinko gaming machine, like the third pachinko gaming machine, is a priority variable machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in parallel, and the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. However, this is not limited to this, and the fifth pachinko gaming machine may be a sequential variable machine as described above.

Hereinafter, when explaining the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the same components as those in the first pachinko gaming machine will be given the same symbols and step numbers, and detailed explanations of their configuration and processing will be omitted.

In this embodiment, "entering a game ball" into an entry port (e.g., a starting port or a big prize entry port) that can give the player a certain benefit (payout of game balls, transition of game state) is also referred to as "winning", as appropriate. Also, in this embodiment, the "variable display" of the pattern is a concept that includes both a "variable display" in which the pattern changes and is displayed, and a "stationary display" in which the pattern stops and is displayed, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stationary display is referred to as one "variable display".

In addition, the "payout" of game balls is not limited to actually paying out game balls to a player, but in the case of gaming machines that progress the game by circulating enclosed game balls (so-called smart pachinko), it is a concept that also includes storing the number of game balls paid out (prize ball data) in the memory area of the gaming machine or in an electronic storage medium (game card).

[5-1. Game board unit]
The game board unit 5010 of the fifth pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 139. This game board unit 5010 is also disposed in front of the base door 3 (see Fig. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see Fig. 2) like the first pachinko game machine.

Figure 139 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 5010 equipped in a fifth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 5010 has a game panel 5100 as a game board, various components are arranged on the game panel 5100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game panel 5100, in which the released game balls can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 139, the game board unit 5010 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine differs from the first pachinko gaming machine mainly in the configuration and arrangement of the passing gate 5126, the second starting port 5140, the normal electric role unit 5145, the first special electric role unit 5130, and the second special electric role unit 5150. The configuration and arrangement of each of these are explained below.

The first start opening 5120 and passing gate 5126 located in the play area 105 of the fifth pachinko game machine are functionally the same as the first start opening 120 and passing gate 126 located in the play area 105 of the first pachinko game machine, but because of their relationship with the second start opening 5140, they will be explained again using different symbols than those in the first pachinko game machine.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 5120 is located in the game area 105 below the display area of the display device 7, and is configured so that game balls hit to the left can enter the hole, but game nails or the like make it difficult or impossible for game balls hit to the right to enter the hole.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 5120, a lottery for the first special symbol (a process for determining whether the first special symbol is a winning symbol) is performed, the first special symbol is displayed variably, and prize balls for the first starting hole (e.g., three game balls) are paid out.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 5140 is located in the right side area 107 below (downstream) the passing gate 5126 and is provided in a normal electric role unit 5145 described later, making it possible for game balls hit from the right to enter the hole (it is difficult or impossible for game balls hit from the left to enter the hole).

In addition, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 5140 is located below (downstream of) the passing gate 5126, so that a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 5126 can enter the second starting hole 5140 when the normal electric device 5146 described below is in operation.

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 5140, a lottery for the second special symbol (a process for determining whether the second special symbol is a winning symbol) is performed, the second special symbol is displayed variably, and a prize ball for the second starting hole (for example, one game ball) is paid out.

(Passing gate)
The passing gate 5126 is configured as a gate through which game balls can pass, and is arranged above (upstream of) the normal electric role unit 5145, so that game balls that pass through the passing gate 5126 can enter the normal electric role unit 5145. In addition, since the passing gate 5126 is arranged in the right side area 107, game balls hit from the right can pass through it (game balls hit from the left have difficulty or cannot pass through it).

When a game ball passes through the passing gate 5126, it is used to draw a normal symbol (a winning determination process for a normal symbol) and to variably display the normal symbol. Note that in this embodiment, no prize balls are paid out when a game ball passes through the passing gate 5126, but the passing gate 5126 may be configured as a winning port (a so-called normal symbol operation port) to pay out a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball).

The passing gate 5126 may also function as a trigger for activating a consecutive operation device for special features. Assuming that the condition device is in operation (the special symbol that will result in a jackpot is displayed frozen), the passing gate 5126 may activate the consecutive operation device for special features, causing a transition to a jackpot gaming state.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric role unit 5145 is located in the right area 107 below (downstream of) the passing gate 5126, and is located so that the game ball hit to the right can pass through it. The normal electric role unit 5145 is a unit body that integrates the second start hole 5140, the second start hole switch 5141 that detects the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 5140, and the normal electric role 5146.

The normal electric device 5146 is equipped with a protruding plate-type normal power shutter 5147 that can move forward and backward, and a normal power solenoid 5148 (see FIG. 140 described below) that operates the normal power shutter 5147. When the normal electric device 5146 operates (the normal power solenoid 5148 is excited), the normal power shutter 5147 transitions the open/closed state of the second starting hole 5140 from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 5140 to an open state in which it is possible or easy to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 5140.

The normal power shutter 5147 is composed of a substantially triangular ball entry prevention section located near the entrance of the second starting port 5140 and a flat ball entry guidance section inclined toward the second starting port 5140. When the second starting port 5140 is in a closed state, the normal power solenoid 5148 is de-energized, and the substantially triangular ball entry prevention section is located in an opposing area facing the entrance of the second starting port 5140 to prevent balls from entering the second starting port 5140, and the flat ball entry guidance section is embedded in the surface of the game panel 5100 and allows game balls to flow downward without accepting game balls flowing down to the right side area 107. On the other hand, when the second starting hole 5140 is open, the normal power solenoid 5148 is excited, and the approximately triangular ball entry prevention part is located in an avoidance area (for example, the front side of the nail head) that does not face the entrance of the second starting hole 5140, so as not to hinder the entry of the ball into the second starting hole 5140, and the flat ball entry guide part protrudes from the surface of the game panel 5100 to receive the game ball flowing down to the right area 107 and guide the received game ball to the second starting hole 5140. Note that instead of the above-mentioned normal power shutter 5147 that can move forward and backward, the normal power shutter 5147 may be configured with a movable member that can move left and right, called a so-called electric chute.

In addition, when the normal electric device 5146 is operating and the second starting hole 5140 is in an open state, if a specified number of game balls for normal power (for example, one) enter the hole, the operation of the normal electric device 5146 is terminated even if the opening time has not elapsed, and the second starting hole 5140 is closed.

In the time-saving game state, the normal electric device 5146 is set to be easily activated (the second starting hole 5140 is easily opened), and it is possible or easy to enter a winning state for a game ball into the second starting hole 5140. In contrast, in the normal game state, the normal electric device 5146 is set to be difficult to activate (the second starting hole 5140 is difficult to open), and it is difficult or impossible to enter a winning state for a game ball into the second starting hole 5140.

(First special electric feature unit)
The first special electric role unit 5130 is disposed below (downstream) the passing gate 5126, the normal electric role unit 5145, and the second special electric role unit 5150 described later in the right area 107. The first special electric role unit 5130 may be provided upstream of at least one of the passing gate 5126, the normal electric role unit 5145, and the second special electric role unit 5150 described later, or may be provided in the left area 106.

The first special electric device unit 5130 is a unitary body that integrates a first large prize opening 5131, a first large prize opening count switch 5132 (see FIG. 140 described below) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 5131, a first special electric shutter 5134 that can move forward and backward, and a first special electric solenoid 5135 (see FIG. 140 described below) that operates the first special electric shutter 5134.

The first large prize opening 5131 is an opening that opens when a jackpot is hit, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the first large prize opening 5131 in one round during one jackpot (for example, 10 balls) is specified. Each time a ball enters the first large prize opening 5131, prize balls for the first large prize opening (for example, 15 balls) are paid out.

The first large prize opening 5131 transitions from a closed state to an open state in the first route when a special stop display mode is derived indicating that the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a "big hit" and in the second route when a specific stop display mode is derived indicating that the result of the special pattern determination is a "small hit" and the second large prize opening 5151 opens, and a game ball that enters the opened second large prize opening 5151 enters the V prize opening 5156 within the second large prize opening 5151.

The first special electric shutter 5134 is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 5131, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 5131, by the operation of the first special electric solenoid 5135 (see Figure 140 described below).

Specifically, the first special electric shutter 5134 is composed of an opening and closing door with a pivot support at the bottom. When the first special electric shutter 5134 is in the open state, the opening and closing door falls to the front side to open the first large winning opening 5131, which receives game balls flowing down into the right side area 107 and guides the received game balls to the first large winning opening 5131. On the other hand, when the first special electric shutter 5134 is in the closed state, the opening and closing door stands up to close the first large winning opening 5131, making it impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the first large winning opening 5131.

(Second special electric feature unit)
The second special electric role unit 5150 is provided below (downstream) the passing gate 5126 and the normal electric role unit 5145 in the right area 107. The second special electric role unit 5150 may be provided upstream of at least one of the passing gate 5126 or the normal electric role unit 5145, or may be provided in the left area 106.

The second special electric device unit 5150 includes a second large prize opening 5151 that is opened to allow game balls to enter the inside of the second special electric device unit 5150, a second large prize opening count switch 5152 that detects the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 5151, a second special electric shutter 5154 that can open and close the second large prize opening 5151, a second special electric solenoid 5155 (see FIG. 140 described below) that operates the second special electric shutter 5154 to open and close the second large prize opening 5151, and a second special electric solenoid 5155 that operates the second special electric shutter 5154 to open and close the second large prize opening 5151. It is a unit that integrates a V winning opening 5156 through which game balls that enter 151 can pass, a V winning opening switch 5157 that detects when a game ball has passed through the V winning opening 5156, a normal opening 5158 through which game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 5151 but have not entered the V winning opening 5156 can pass, a V shutter 5159 that opens and closes the V winning opening 5156, and a V shutter solenoid 5160 (see FIG. 140 described below) that operates the V shutter 5159 to open and close the V winning opening 5156.

The second large prize opening 5151 is an opening that opens when a small win occurs, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the second large prize opening 5151 in one small win (for example, 10 balls) is specified. Each time one game ball enters this second large prize opening 5151, prize balls for the second large prize opening (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The second special electric shutter 5154 is made of a protruding plate-shaped member that can move forward and backward, and is configured so that by operating the second special electric solenoid 5155, the second special electric shutter 5154 can move forward to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 5151, and the second special electric shutter 5154 can move backward to an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 5151.

The V-entry port 5156 is an entry port that can be opened and closed by the V-shutter 5159, and is also an entry port through which the game ball passes, triggering control of the jackpot game state via the second route described above.

When the game is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, the opening of the second large prize opening 5151 when the game ball passes through the V prize opening 5156 is counted as the first round, and after the game ball passes through the V prize opening 5156 (from the second round onwards), a round game is executed in which the first large prize opening 5131 transitions from a closed state to an open state. Note that when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, a round game in which the second large prize opening 5151 transitions from a closed state to an open state may be executed for a predetermined number of rounds even after the game ball passes through the V prize opening 5156 (from the second round onwards).

In addition, for example, a V entry port may be provided inside the first large entry port 5131, so that there is one V entry port and one attacker that is opened in the big win game state. In this case, when a stop display mode indicating a "small win" is derived, the first large entry port 5131 is set to an open state, and when a game ball enters the V entry port provided inside the first large entry port 5131, the game is controlled to a big win game state (a big win game state via the second route).

The normal opening 5158 is configured to allow game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 5151 but have not passed through the V prize opening 5156 to enter (pass through). Game balls that pass through the normal opening 5158 are ejected outside the machine. Note that if all game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 5151 pass through the normal opening 5158 and no game balls pass through the V prize opening 5156, the jackpot game state will not be controlled.

The V-shutter 5159 is configured to be able to transition between a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for game balls to pass through the V-entry opening 5156, and an open state in which it is possible (or easy) for game balls to pass through the V-entry opening 5156, by the operation of the V-shutter solenoid 5160 (see Figure 140 described below).

The relative positions of the first special electric role unit 5130, the normal electric role unit 5145, the second special electric role unit 5150, and the passing gate 5126 arranged in the right area 107 can be freely changed as desired.

[5-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 140. Fig. 140 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 140, the fifth pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the fifth pachinko gaming machine differs from the first pachinko gaming machine in some respects in the configuration of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300. The configuration and layout of each are explained below.

[Main control circuit]
Compared to the first pachinko game machine, the main control circuit 200 has slightly different configurations in the normal power solenoid 5148, the first special power solenoid 5135, the second special power solenoid 5155, the V shutter solenoid 5160, the first start port switch 5121, the second start port switch 5141, the passing gate switch 5127, the first large prize port count switch 5132, the second large prize port count switch 5152, the V prize port switch 5157, and the game ball recovery switch 5179 which are connected to the main control circuit 200.

(Main CPU)
The main CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the main ROM 202, and is the same as the first pachinko gaming machine, but the main CPU 201 also has built-in registers. The various registers of the main CPU 201 include a plurality of dedicated registers (flag register, index register, stack pointer, etc.) and a plurality of general-purpose registers, and two general-purpose registers are combined and used as pair registers.

(Solenoid for general purpose power supply)
The normal power solenoid 5148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the normal power shutter 5147. When the normal power solenoid 5148 is energized by the main CPU 201 (excitation is ON), it advances the normal power shutter 5147 forward to open the second starting port 5140, and when it is not energized by the main CPU 201 (excitation is OFF), it moves the normal power shutter 5147 backward to close the second starting port 5140.

(First special solenoid)
The first special electric solenoid 5135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the first special electric shutter 5134, which is an opening and closing door. When the main CPU 201 applies electricity to the first special electric solenoid 5135 (excitation ON), the first special electric shutter 5134 is tilted forward to open the first large prize opening 5131, and when the main CPU 201 does not apply electricity to the first special electric solenoid 5135 (excitation OFF), the first special electric shutter 5134 is inverted backward to close the first large prize opening 5131.

(Second special solenoid)
The second special electric solenoid 5155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the second special electric shutter 5154. When the main CPU 201 applies electricity to the second special electric solenoid 5155 (excitation ON), the second special electric solenoid 5155 moves the second special electric shutter 5154 backward to open the second large winning opening 5151, and when the main CPU 201 does not apply electricity to the second special electric solenoid 5155 (excitation OFF), the second special electric shutter 5154 advances forward to close the second large winning opening 5151.

(Solenoid for V-shutter)
The V shutter solenoid 5160 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V shutter 5159. When the V shutter solenoid 5160 is energized by the main CPU 201 (excitation ON), it moves the V shutter 5159 backward to open the V winning opening 5156, and when it is not energized by the main CPU 201 (excitation OFF), it moves the V shutter 5159 forward to close the V winning opening 5156.

In addition, in this embodiment, the V shutter solenoid 5160 operates in conjunction with the opening of the second large prize opening 5151, opening the V prize opening 5156. In other words, the V prize opening 5156 is in an open state when the second large prize opening 5151 is opened, and when a game ball enters the second large prize opening 5151, it will in principle also pass through the V prize opening 5156.

(First start switch)
The first start port switch 5121 is provided in the first start port 5120 and is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first start port 5120.

When the first start hole switch 5121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 5120, the main CPU 201 determines that the first acquisition condition is met and acquires the start information of the first special pattern (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for a pattern, random number value for reaching a reach, random number value for selecting a performance, etc.). The acquired start information of the first special pattern is stored in the first special pattern start memory area (first special pattern start memory area (1) to first special pattern start memory area (4) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of first special patterns (for example, four)". When the judgment start condition of the first special pattern (for example, the special electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the special pattern is not being performed, etc.) is met, the information is used for the hit judgment process of the first special pattern and the variable display of the first special pattern. In addition, when the first start hole switch 5121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 5120, the main CPU 201 instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of the prize balls for the first start hole (e.g., three game balls).

(Second start switch)
The second start hole switch 5141 is provided in the second start hole 5140 and is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 5140.

When the second start hole switch 5141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 5140, the main CPU 201 determines that the second acquisition condition is met and acquires start information for the second special symbol (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for symbol, random number value for reaching a reach, random number value for selecting a performance, etc.). The acquired start information for the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start memory area (second special symbol start memory area (1) to second special symbol start memory area (4) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of second special symbols (e.g., four)." When the judgment start condition for the second special symbol (e.g., the special electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, etc.) is met, the information is used for the hit judgment process for the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, when the second start hole switch 5141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 5140, the main CPU 201 instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of a prize ball (e.g., one game ball) for the second start hole.

In addition, in the embodiment, the winning judgment process for the first special pattern based on the start information of the first special pattern is also called the "lottery for the first special pattern," and the winning judgment process for the second special pattern based on the start information of the second special pattern is also called the "lottery for the second special pattern," and the lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern are collectively called the "lottery for the special patterns."

(Passing gate switch)
The pass gate switch 5127 is provided in the pass gate 5126 and is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a game ball through the pass gate 5126.

When the passing gate switch 5127 detects the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 5126, the main CPU 201 acquires the start information of the normal symbol (random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a hit, random number value of the normal symbol, etc.). The acquired start information of the normal symbol is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (normal symbol start memory area (1) to normal symbol start memory area (4) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of normal symbols (for example, 4)". When the normal symbol judgment start condition (for example, the normal electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the normal symbol is not being performed, etc.) is met, it is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (the hit determination process of the normal symbol) and the variable display of the normal symbol.

(First prize slot count switch)
The first large prize opening count switch 5132 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 5131. When the first large prize opening count switch 5132 detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 5131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that have entered the first large prize opening 5131 per round, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of prize balls for the first large prize opening (e.g., 15 game balls).

(Second major prize slot count switch)
The second large prize opening count switch 5152 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 5151. When the second large prize opening count switch 5152 detects the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 5151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 5151 and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of prize balls for the second large prize opening (e.g., 15 game balls).

(V prize entry switch)
The V winning hole switch 5157 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a gaming ball into the V winning hole 5156. When the V winning hole switch 5157 detects the entry of a gaming ball into the V winning hole 5156, the main CPU 201 performs control to transition to a big win gaming state.

(Game ball recovery switch)
The game ball recovery switch 5179 is a through-type proximity switch that detects game balls launched from the launching device 6 into the game area 105. The game ball recovery switch 5179 is disposed on the rear side of the game board unit 5010 in a collecting flow path through which game balls that have entered the outlet 178 and various winning ports (for example, the first start port 5120, the second start port 5140, the first large winning port 5131, the second large winning port 5151, the general winning port 122, etc.) pass, and detects not only game balls that have entered the outlet 178 but also game balls that have entered various winning ports without distinction, and counts the number of game balls launched (the number of game balls used or consumed).

[Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300, like the first pachinko game machine, is equipped with a sub-CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a gimmick control circuit 307 and a command input port 308, but differs in that it further comprises a button control circuit 310 and a performance button 54.

(Button Control Circuit 310)
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving the effect button 54. In other words, the button control circuit 310 is a circuit for changing the operation mode of the effect button 54 and vibrating the effect button 54. The button control circuit 310 drives the effect button 54 in response to a drive command from the sub-CPU 301.

The button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal related to a player's operation detected by the effect button 54. When the button control circuit 310 inputs an operation signal from the effect button 54, it outputs predetermined operation information to the sub-CPU 301.

[Payout/firing control circuit]
The payout/launch control circuit 400, like the first pachinko game machine, controls the payout/launch of game balls, and this payout/launch control circuit 400 is connected to a payout device 82 capable of paying out game balls, a launch device 6 capable of launching game balls, a card unit 180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

The launching device 6 is connected to a payout motor 83 for paying out game balls, a counting switch 84 for counting the game balls paid out by the payout motor 83, a full tank switch 85 for detecting when the game balls stored in the lower tray 52 are full, and the like.

When the payout/launch control circuit 400 receives a prize ball control command sent from the main control circuit 200, it sends a specified signal to the payout device 82, and controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls. The payout/launch control circuit 400 also monitors the payout abnormalities of the payout device 82 (tray full, ball jam abnormality, payout motor abnormality), and if a payout abnormality occurs, it sends payout abnormality event information to the main control circuit 200.

In addition, when the launch handle 62 is rotated, the payout/launch control circuit 400 supplies power to a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation) and controls the launch of the game ball.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the payout/launch control circuit 400 receives a game stop signal from the main control circuit 200 indicating that the game has been stopped based on the difference in the number of game balls, the payout/launch control circuit 400 stops the launch of game balls by the launch device 6 (stops the supply of power to the launch solenoid). Note that even if the main control circuit 200 indicates that the game has been stopped based on the difference in the number of game balls, the payout/launch control circuit 400 does not need to stop the launch of game balls by the launch device 6.

[5-3. Internal structure of main RAM (memory map)]
Next, the internal configuration (memory map) of the main RAM 203 of the main control circuit 200 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 141. Fig. 141 is an example of a conceptual diagram of the internal configuration of the main RAM 203 of the main control circuit 200 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 141, in the memory map of the main RAM 203, from the top address ("F000"H) of the main RAM 203, the game area (work area and stack area) and the outside area (work area and stack area) are arranged in that order at predetermined addresses. In addition, there may be an unused area of a predetermined size between the game area and the outside area, and in this embodiment, an unused area of 16 bytes is provided.

In the "game area", various data determined by the execution of a control program that is directly related to the game (game progress and playability) performed by the player is temporarily stored. In addition, in the "outside area", data determined by various processes that are not directly related to the game (game progress and playability) performed by the player is temporarily stored.

Although not shown in the figure, the memory map of the main ROM 202 is also divided into a "game area" and an "outside area." The game area of the main ROM 202 stores control programs that are directly related to game progress and playability, and various data used to execute the control programs. The outside area of the main ROM 202 stores outside programs that are not directly related to game progress and playability, and various data used to execute the outside programs.

In this embodiment, the working area in the game area of the main RAM 203 is arranged in the following order from the beginning: a backup preparation data area, a setting operation related data area, a game stop function management area, a game LED output processing data area, an input processing data area, an interrupt/timer area, an external terminal board signal control data area, a pattern control data area, a payout control data area, a performance control data area, and various other data areas.

The "backup preparation data area" is an area that stores the CRC value of the play area that is calculated when power is restored, and the "setting operation related data area" is an area that stores data such as setting values for changing settings.

The "game stop function management area" is an area that stores data regarding whether the game stop function is activated or not, and has a "game stop state flag area" and a "stop function completion command transmission flag area." The "game stop state flag area" is an area that stores information on the game stop state, and the "stop function completion command transmission flag area" is an area that stores information on a request to transmit a command for the game stop function. The "game stop state flag area" and "stop function completion command transmission flag area" will be described in more detail later with reference to FIG. 142.

The "game LED output processing data area" is an area such as an output port buffer that stores data for lighting game LEDs such as the normal symbol display unit 161, the normal symbol reserved display unit 162, the first special symbol display unit 163, the second special symbol display unit 164, the first special symbol reserved display unit 165, the second special symbol reserved display unit 166, and the time-saving notification display unit 168. In addition, the "game LED output processing data area" also includes a "launch position designation signal management data area" as described below.

The "input processing data area" is an area such as an input port buffer that stores data input from various game ball switches such as the first start port switch 5121 for detecting game balls, the second start port switch 5141, the passing gate switch 5127, the first large prize port count switch 5132, the second large prize port count switch 5152, the game ball recovery switch 5179, and the general prize port switch 123.

The "interrupt/timer area" is an area that stores various timer counters such as the interrupt counter, special pattern wait time counter, normal pattern wait time counter, and notification interval management timer area.

The "external terminal board signal control data area" is an area that stores external signals that are output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184. The "external terminal board signal control data area" also has a "hit signal management data area," a "number of out balls management counter area," a "security signal request flag area," etc.

The "symbol control data area" is an area that stores random number values and control data related to the progress of special and normal symbols. In addition, the "symbol control data area" has a "special symbol control state number area," a "special symbol determination memory area," a "first special symbol start memory area," a "second special symbol start memory area," a "special symbol hit flag area," a "special symbol stop symbol number area," a "time-saving state flag area," a "time-saving count counter," a "round counter," a "small hit open count counter," a "big hit round count upper limit area," an "open state area," and the like, corresponding to the control data of the special symbols. In addition, it has a "normal symbol control state number area," a "normal symbol determination memory area," a "normal special symbol start memory area," and the like, corresponding to the control data of the normal symbols.

The "Payout control data area" is an area that stores data related to the payout control of game balls, and as described below, has a "main control command transmission area", a "main control command control state number area", etc.

The "performance control data area" is an area for storing data for notifying information devices such as the display device 7, speaker 32, and LED group 46 regarding the game status, game stop function, and the like.
As described below, the "performance control data area" has a game state designation parameter area, a launch position parameter area, a game abnormality detection parameter area, a stop function state parameter area, and a stop function ball difference parameter area. The "stop function state parameter area" is an area that stores information on the state (game stop function phase) related to the game stop function, and the "stop function ball difference parameter area" is an area that stores ball difference information indicating the difference in the number of game balls. The "stop function state parameter area" and the "stop function ball difference parameter area" will be described in more detail below with reference to FIG. 142.

The "Other Various Data Area" is an area that mainly stores information such as errors, and as described below, includes a "Game Abnormality Detection Flag Area," a "Payout Status Notification Flag Area," a "Payout Management Counter Area," and a "Launch Permission Signal Management Area."

In addition, in this embodiment, the working area in the outside area of the main RAM 203 is arranged in the following order from the beginning: a backup preparation data area, a performance display monitor data area, a GAME STOP function phase area, a GAME STOP function counter area, a test firing signal related data area, and various other data areas.

The "backup preparation data area" is an area that stores the CRC value of the outside area that is calculated when power is restored after a power outage.

The "performance display monitor data area" is an area that stores data to be displayed on the performance display monitor 170, and includes a performance display status flag area, a normal prize ball count counter area, a normal out counter area, a total out counter area, etc.

The "GameStop function phase area" is an area that stores information about the state (GameStop function phase) of the GameStop function. This "GameStop function phase area" will be described in more detail later with reference to FIG. 142.

The "game stop function counter area" is an area that stores information such as the difference in the number of game balls related to the game stop function, and has a "counter area for managing the difference in balls", a "counter area for judging the difference in balls", a "counter buffer area for judging the difference in balls", a "ball difference notification information area", and a "counter area for the number of acquired game balls". The "counter area for managing the difference in balls", the "counter area for judging the difference in balls", the "counter buffer area for judging the difference in balls", the "ball difference notification information area", and the "counter area for the number of acquired game balls" are areas that store information such as the difference in the number of game balls. The "counter area for managing the difference in balls", the "counter area for judging the difference in balls", the "counter buffer area for judging the difference in balls", the "ball difference notification information area", and the "counter area for the number of acquired game balls" will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 142.

The "test firing signal related data area" is an area that stores data used in the certification test (test firing test) of the gaming machine.

The "Other Various Data Area" is an area that mainly stores information such as errors, and includes an "Out-of-area security signal request flag area" and an "Out-of-area gameplay abnormality detection flag area," as described below.

(RAM clear range address for game area)
As shown in FIG. 141, in the working area of the game area of the main RAM 203, the "start address of the RAM clear range in case of abnormality" is placed at the beginning of the data area for backup preparation, the "start address of the RAM clear range when the clear switch is activated" is placed at the beginning of the game stop function management area, the "start address of the RAM clear range when game stops" is placed at the beginning of the data area for game LED output processing, and the "start address of the RAM clear range when power is restored after power outage" is placed at the beginning of various other data areas.

The "first end address" is placed at the end of the stack area as the final address of the RAM clear range corresponding to the "first address of the RAM clear range when an abnormality occurs" and the "first address of the RAM clear range when the clear switch is activated". The "second end address" is placed at the beginning of the stack area as the final address of the RAM clear range corresponding to the "first address of the RAM clear range when power is restored after an interruption". The "end address of the RAM clear range when play stops" is placed at the beginning of the interrupt/timer area as the final address of the RAM clear range corresponding to the "first address of the RAM clear range when play stops".

(RAM clear range when abnormality occurs in the game area)
When the abnormal RAM clear range start address is set (when the start state when power is restored is "RAM abnormal"), the range from the abnormal RAM clear range start address to the first end address is set as the "abnormal RAM clear range" of the game area. Then, the data in the abnormal RAM clear range of the game area is cleared.

In this embodiment, the RAM clear range in the game area when an abnormality occurs includes all of the used areas in the game area of the main RAM 203, because it has been determined that there is an abnormality (corruption) in the data stored in the main RAM 203, and all of the used areas in the game area are cleared.

(RAM clear range when clear switch is activated in game area)
When the first address of the RAM clear range when the clear switch is activated is set (when the start-up state when power is restored is "RAM clear" or "settings being changed"), the range from the first address of the RAM clear range when the clear switch is activated to the first end address is set as the "RAM clear range when the clear switch is activated" of the play area. Then, data in the RAM clear range when the clear switch is activated of the play area is cleared.

In this embodiment, the RAM clear range when the clear switch in the game area is activated includes, excluding the data area for backup preparation and the data area related to setting operations, the GameStop function management area, the data area for game LED output processing, the data area for input processing, the interrupt/timer area, the external terminal board signal control data area, the pattern control data area, the payout control data area, the performance control data area, and various other data areas.
As a result, the data stored in the backup preparation data area and the setting operation related data area is protected, and the setting values when the startup state when power is restored and settings are being changed can be retained.

In particular, in this embodiment, the RAM clear range when the clear switch in the game area is activated includes all areas in the game area related to the game stop function, such as the game stop state flag area, the stop function completion command transmission flag area, the stop function state parameter area, and the stop function difference in number of balls parameter area.
For this reason, if the RAM clear switch 176 is ON when power is restored (if the start-up state when power is restored is RAM clear or setting change), all information related to the game stop function is cleared and the function and state related to the game stop function are reset. As a result, when a game is stopped by the game stop function, the game stop state will not be released unless the RAM clear switch 176 is turned ON when power is restored.

(RAM clear range when power is restored in the game area)
When the first address of the range for clearing the RAM when power is restored is set (when the start-up state when power is restored is "power restored" or "setting confirmation in progress"), the range from the first address of the range for clearing the RAM when power is restored to the second end address is set as the "RAM clear range when power is restored" of the play area. Then, the data in the range for clearing the RAM when power is restored of the play area is cleared.

In this embodiment, the RAM clear range when power is restored in the game area includes various other data areas, and excludes most of the work areas. That is, the data stored in the backup preparation data area, the setting operation related data area, the game stop function management area, the game LED output processing data area, the input processing data area, the interrupt/timer area, the external terminal board signal control data area, the symbol control data area, the payout control data area, and the performance control data area is retained.
Therefore, the state before the power outage is maintained, and after the power outage is restored, the game can be continued from the state before the power outage was restored. In addition, in the various other data areas, data such as a game abnormality detection flag is stored, and the error is temporarily released.

In particular, in this embodiment, the RAM clear range of the game area when power is restored after a power outage excludes all areas of the game area related to the game stop function, such as the game stop state flag area, the stop function completion command transmission flag area, the stop function state parameter area, and the stop function difference number of balls parameter area.
For this reason, the RAM clear switch 176 is OFF when power is restored, and when power is restored normally, the game stop state of the game stop function, the request to send a command for the game stop function, information on the game stop function phase of the game area, and information on the difference balls in the game area are retained.

Although the details will be described later, the difference ball information of the game area is transferred from the difference ball information of the outside area. Therefore, the difference ball information stored in the stop function difference ball number parameter area of the game area is not included in the RAM clear range and is not directly cleared, but when the power is restored, the difference ball information of the outside area is cleared, and the difference ball information of the game area is then also cleared (=0).
In other words, when the power is restored normally, the difference ball information stored in the stop function difference ball number parameter area of the game area is essentially cleared.

Similarly, as will be described later in detail, information on the game stop function phase in the game area is transferred from the game stop function phase in the outside area. Therefore, the game stop function phase stored in the stop function state parameter area in the game area is not included in the RAM clear range and is not directly cleared, but only when the game stop function operation notice phase (=1) is set, the game stop function phase area in the outside area is cleared and the information on the game stop function phase in the game area is also cleared (=0).
In other words, when power is restored normally, only if the game stop function activation notice phase (=1) is set, the game stop function phase information stored in the stop function status parameter area of the game area will be essentially cleared.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 141, the start address of the RAM clear range when power is restored is placed at the start of the other various data area, but it may also be configured to be placed at the start of the stop function ball difference parameter area, so that the RAM clear switch 176 is OFF when power is restored and, when power is restored normally, the ball difference information in the play area is directly cleared when power is restored.

(RAM clear range when game stops in game area)
When the game is stopped by the game stop function, the range from the start address of the RAM clear range at game stop to the end address of the RAM clear range at game stop is set as the "RAM clear range at game stop" of the game area. Then, data in the RAM clear range at game stop of the game area is cleared.

In this embodiment, the RAM clear range when play stops in the game area includes the output port buffer of the data area for game LED output processing and the input port buffer of the data area for input processing, and excludes other working areas.
For this reason, when game play is stopped by the game stop function, the output port buffer of the data area for processing game LED output is cleared, and game LEDs such as the normal pattern display unit 161, the normal pattern reserve display unit 162, the first special pattern display unit 163, the second special pattern display unit 164, the first special pattern reserve display unit 165, the second special pattern reserve display unit 166 and the time-saving notification display unit 168 are not lit (they remain off).
Furthermore, when the game is stopped by the game stop function, the input port buffer of the input processing data area is also cleared, so that various game ball switches for detecting game balls, such as the first start port switch 5121, the second start port switch 5141, the passing gate switch 5127, the first large prize port count switch 5132, the second large prize port count switch 5152, the game ball recovery switch 5179, and the general prize port switch 123, are no longer detected.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 141, the end address of the RAM clear range when game play is stopped is placed at the beginning of the interrupt/timer area, but it may also be placed at the beginning of the data area for input processing so that the data in the data area for input processing is not cleared even when game play is stopped by the game stop function. However, when configuring in this way, it is desirable to configure it so that the switch input detection process described below is not executed when game play is stopped by the game stop function.

(RAM clear range address outside the area)
In addition, in the working area in the area outside the main RAM 203, the "starting address of the RAM clearing range in case of abnormality" is placed at the beginning of the backup preparation data area, the "starting address of the RAM clearing range when the clear switch is activated" is placed at the beginning of the game stop function phase area, and the "starting address of the RAM clearing range when power is restored from power outage" is placed at the beginning of the game stop function counter area.

In addition, the "third end address" is placed at the beginning of the stack area as the final address of the RAM clear range corresponding to the "start address of the RAM clear range in case of an abnormality," "start address of the RAM clear range when the clear switch is activated," and "start address of the RAM clear range when power is restored."

(RAM clear range when abnormality occurs in outside area)
When the start address of the abnormal RAM clear range is set (when the start state when power is restored is "RAM abnormal"), the range from the start address of the abnormal RAM clear range to the third end address is set as the "abnormal RAM clear range" of the outside area. Then, data in the abnormal RAM clear range of the outside area is cleared.

In this embodiment, the RAM clear range in the abnormality outside area includes all of the working area except the stack area in the outside area, and all of the working area in the outside area except the stack area is cleared.

(RAM clear range when clear switch is activated outside the area)
When the top address of the RAM clear range when the clear switch is activated is set (when the start-up state when power is restored is "RAM clear" or "settings being changed"), the range from the top address of the RAM clear range when the clear switch is activated to the third end address is set as the "RAM clear range when the clear switch is activated" in the outside area. Then, data in the RAM clear range when the clear switch is activated in the outside area is cleared.

In this embodiment, the RAM clear range when the clear switch in the outside area is activated includes the backup preparation data area and performance display monitor data area, as well as the GAME STOP function phase area, GAME STOP function counter area, test firing signal related data area, and various other data areas.
Therefore, the data stored in the backup preparation data area and the performance display monitor data area is protected, and the data to be displayed on the performance display monitor 170 can be held.

In particular, in this embodiment, the RAM clear range when the clear switch is activated in the outside area includes all areas related to the Game Stop function, such as the Game Stop function phase area, the Game Stop function counter area (counter area for difference ball management, counter area for difference ball determination, counter buffer area for difference ball determination, difference ball notification information area, and acquired game ball number counter area).
Therefore, if the RAM clear switch 176 is ON when power is restored (if the startup state when power is restored is RAM clear or setting change), all information related to the game stop function is cleared and the function and state related to the game stop function are reset.

(RAM clear range when power is restored in the outside area)
When the start address of the RAM clear range at power recovery is set (when the start state at power recovery is "power recovery" or "setting confirmation in progress"), the range from the start address of the RAM clear range at power recovery to the third end address is set as the "RAM clear range at power recovery" of the outside area. Then, data in the RAM clear range at power recovery of the outside area is cleared.

In this embodiment, the RAM clear range when power is restored in the outside area includes the backup preparation data area, performance display monitor data area, and GAME STOP function phase area, as well as the GAME STOP function counter area, test firing signal related data area, and various other data areas.
Therefore, the data stored in the backup preparation data area, the performance display monitor data area, and the game stop function phase area is protected, and the data to be displayed on the performance display monitor 170 and the state of the game stop function phase can also be preserved.

In particular, in this embodiment, the RAM clear range when power is restored in the outside area excludes the Game Stop function phase area as areas related to the Game Stop function, but includes the Game Stop function counter area (counter area for difference ball management, counter area for difference ball determination, counter buffer area for difference ball determination, difference ball notification information area, and acquired game ball number counter area).
For this reason, when the power is restored after the RAM clear switch 176 is OFF, and when the power is restored normally, the information on the game stop function phase of the outside area is retained, but the difference ball information of the outside area is cleared.

Although more details will be given later, only when the Game Stop function activation notice phase (=1) is set in the Game Stop function phase area of the outside area, the Game Stop function phase will be cleared by special processing (see steps S5055, S5056, etc. in Figure 149).

[5-4. Data content related to the GameStop function]
Next, the data contents stored in the game stop state flag area, the stop function completion command transmission flag area, the stop function state parameter area, the stop function difference ball number parameter area, the game stop function phase area, the difference ball management counter area, the difference ball judgment counter area, the difference ball judgment counter buffer area, the difference ball notification information area, and the acquired game ball number counter area of the above-mentioned main RAM 203 as data related to the game stop function will be explained. Figure 142 is an example of an explanatory diagram for explaining the data contents related to the game stop function of the fifth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 142, the "game stop state flag area" has a capacity of 1 byte, and stores information on the playable state and the game stop state due to the game stop function. Specifically, when the game stop state flag area = 0, it indicates a "playable state", and when the game stop state flag area = 1, it indicates a "game stop state".

The "stop function completion command transmission flag area" has a capacity of 1 byte, and stores information indicating a request to transmit a command related to the game stop function (game stop function completion command). Specifically, when the game stop state flag area = 0, it indicates "no request to transmit" the game stop function completion command, and when the game stop state flag area = 1, it indicates "a request to transmit" the game stop function completion command. As will be described in more detail later, this "request to transmit" is information that is set in order to transmit the game stop function completion command when a game stop state is set by the game stop function.

The "stop function state parameter area" has a capacity of 1 byte, and stores information indicating the game stop function phase as a state related to the game stop function. The "game stop function phase" is information indicating a state related to the game stop function, and is classified into a "game stop function normal state phase" in which the difference in the number of game balls is less than a boundary value (e.g., 90,000 balls), a "game stop function activation notice phase" in which the difference in the number of game balls is equal to or greater than a boundary value (e.g., 90,000 balls), a "game stop function activation standby phase" in which the difference in the number of game balls is equal to or greater than a regulation value (e.g., 95,000 balls), and a "game stop function activation completion phase" in which the stop condition of the game stop state is satisfied. Specifically, the stop function state parameter area = 0 indicates the "game stop function normal state phase", and the stop function state parameter area = 1 indicates the "game stop function activation notice phase". In addition, the stop function state parameter area = 2 indicates the "game stop function activation standby phase", and the stop function state parameter area = 3 indicates the "game stop function activation completion phase".

In this embodiment, the regulated value is set to 95,000, and the boundary value below the regulated value is set to 90,000, but the regulated value and boundary value can be freely changed as needed.

The "stop function ball difference parameter area" has a capacity of 1 byte, and stores the first ball difference information indicating the number of game balls difference in units of 1000. Specifically, a stop function ball difference parameter area = 0 indicates that the number of game balls difference is less than 1000 (0 to 999 balls), and a stop function ball difference parameter area = 1 indicates that the number of game balls difference is in units of 1000 (1000 to 1999 balls). Also, a stop function ball difference parameter area = 96 indicates that the number of game balls difference is in units of 96000 (96000 to 96999 balls).

The "Game Stop function phase area" has a capacity of 1 byte, and like the stop function status parameter area, stores information indicating the game stop function phase. Specifically, a game stop function phase area of 0 indicates a "game stop function normal state phase", and a game stop function phase area of 1 indicates a "game stop function activation notice phase". In addition, a game stop function phase area of 2 indicates a "game stop function activation standby phase", and a game stop function phase area of 3 indicates a "game stop function activation completion phase". As will be described in more detail later, the game stop function phase information stored in the game stop function phase area of the outside area is transferred (stored) to the stop function status parameter area of the play area.

The "difference ball management counter area" has a capacity of 2 bytes, and stores second difference ball information that indicates the difference in the number of game balls that is less than 1000.

The "counter area for ball difference determination" has a capacity of 1 byte, and stores the first ball difference information indicating the number of game balls difference in units of 1000, similar to the stop function ball difference parameter area.

More details will be given later, but the 2-byte "counter area for ball difference management" and the 1-byte "counter area for ball difference determination" are also used as a "3-byte counter" that indicates all ball difference information (first ball difference information + second ball difference information), with the lower 2 bytes corresponding to the second ball difference information in the "counter area for ball difference management" and the upper 1 byte corresponding to the first ball difference information in the "counter area for ball difference determination".

The "counter buffer area for ball difference determination" has a capacity of 1 byte, and stores the previous first ball difference information stored in the counter area for ball difference determination in order to check changes in the number of game balls difference.

The "difference ball notification information area" has a capacity of 1 byte, and when the change in the difference in the number of game balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the first difference ball information stored in the difference ball judgment counter area is stored. As will be described in detail later, the first difference ball information stored in the difference ball notification information area of the outside area is transferred (stored) to the stop function difference ball number parameter area of the game area.

The "number of acquired game balls counter area" has a capacity of 1 byte, and stores information on the number of acquired game balls. The "number of acquired game balls" is an additional value added to the difference in the number of game balls, and is information that is temporarily stored until the number of game balls paid out when a game ball enters a winning slot is added to the difference in the number of game balls.

[5-5. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 143 and 144. The fifth pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

The fifth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a type 1/type 2 mixed machine, and is capable of playing in either the normal game mode or the time-saving game mode. Although the special probability control is not executed, the special probability control may be executed.

[Special symbol winning judgment table]
143 is an example of a special symbol winning judgment table in the fifth pachinko game machine. The special symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 143 is a table for judging a "big win", a "small win" or a "miss", and is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 143 specifies the type of special symbol, the random number value for jackpot determination, and the hit/miss determination value data (jackpot determination value data, minor hit determination value data, miss determination value data) in correspondence with each other. Note that the total random number value for jackpot determination is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In other words, the random number value for jackpot determination is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

According to the hit determination table for the special symbols shown in FIG. 143, the hit determination process for the first special symbol determines whether it is a "big hit" or a "miss" but not a "small hit", and the hit determination process for the second special symbol determines whether it is a "big hit", "small hit" or a "miss".

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 5120, the main CPU 201 determines the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol as a "big hit" with a selection rate of about 1/319.7 based on the hit determination process for the first special symbol, and determines the result as a "miss" otherwise. Also, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 5140, the main CPU 201 determines the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol as a "big hit" with a selection rate of about 1/319.7 based on the hit determination process for the second special symbol, and determines the result as a "small hit" with a high selection rate of about 1/3.0, and determines the result as a "miss" otherwise.

In this way, in this embodiment, the special pattern hit determination table shown in FIG. 143 is configured so that a "small hit" is more likely to be determined when the game ball enters the second starting hole 5140 than when the game ball enters the first starting hole 5120.

In addition, the system may be configured to determine a "small win" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, but if a "small win" is determined, it is preferable to determine a "small win" with a relatively low selection rate so that the determination made in the hit determination process for the second special symbol is more favorable than the determination made in the hit determination process for the first special symbol.

As described above, in the time-saving game state, it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second start hole 5140, and in the normal game state, it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second start hole 5140. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the second start hole 5140, in addition to the first route triggered by a big win, it is possible to easily transition to the big win game state from the second route triggered by a small win.

The range (width) of random numbers that are determined to be a "big hit", a "small hit", and a "miss", that is, the various selection rates, are not limited to the above values and can be freely designed and modified as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, a "time-saving hit" that transitions to a time-saving play state without triggering a jackpot play state is not determined, but a "time-saving hit" may be determined by a hit determination process for the first special symbol or a hit determination process for the second special symbol.

Furthermore, instead of or in addition to changing the selection rate of a big win or a small win according to the set value, for example, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning port 5156 may be changed for each set value to change the passage rate to the V winning port 5156, or the number of times the time-saving continues may be changed for each set value. In other words, by adopting one or more of the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the probability of a big win, the probability of a small win, the opening frequency of the V winning port 5156 (i.e., the operation frequency of the second special electric shutter 5154), the opening time, and the number of times the time-saving continues, the expected value controlled in the big win game state may be configured to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting.

[Special symbol determination table]
144 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 144 is a table for determining the “special symbol to be stopped”, and is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The "special symbol stopping pattern" is information for determining the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit. In addition, the information on the special symbol stopping pattern is included in the third parameter of the "special symbol performance start command" and sent to the sub-control circuit 300 when the variable display of the special symbol begins, and a decorative pattern corresponding to the special symbol stopping pattern is stopped and displayed in the display area of the display device 7 based on the information of the third parameter of the special symbol performance start command.

In the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 144, the type of special symbol, the winning/losing determination value data described above, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol obtained when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 5120 or the second starting hole 5140 are specified in correspondence with the "stopping symbol of the special symbol." The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). In other words, the symbol random number value of the above-mentioned special symbol is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 99.

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 144, when the main CPU 201 obtains jackpot determination value data as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any value between 0 and 59, it determines "z1" as the stopping symbol for the special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any value between 60 and 79, it determines "z2" as the stopping symbol for the special symbol, and if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any value between 80 and 99, it determines "z3" as the stopping symbol for the special symbol.

When the main CPU 201 obtains jackpot determination value data as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines "z4" as the stopping symbol for the special symbol, regardless of the value of the symbol random number value for the special symbol.

In addition, when the main CPU 201 obtains small win determination value data as a result of the win determination process for the second special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any value between 0 and 79, it determines "z5" as the stopping symbol for the special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any value between 80 and 84, it determines "z6" as the stopping symbol for the special symbol, and if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any value between 85 and 99, it determines "z7" as the stopping symbol for the special symbol.

The range of the random number value of the special symbol that determines the "stopping symbol of the special symbol", i.e., the selection rate, is not limited to the above values and can be freely changed as needed.

Although a detailed explanation of the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be omitted, as shown in the remarks column of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 144, the opening mode of the big win gaming state, the opening mode of the small win gaming state, and the gaming state to which the player will transition after the big win gaming state ends (destination) are determined based on the stopped symbol of the determined special symbol.

[5-6. Main control processing]
In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be described.

Note that some of the processing performed in the fifth pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, but below, the same processing as the processing performed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[Main control main processing]
145 and 146, the main processing (main control main processing) under the control of the main CPU 201 will be described. Note that, Fig. 145 and Fig. 146 are flow charts showing an example of the main control main processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

First, in step S5001, the main CPU 201 determines whether the power interruption signal bit is "0." If the main CPU 201 determines that the power interruption signal bit is "0," it determines that a power interruption is being detected and repeats the determination process of step S5001.

If the main CPU 201 determines in step S5001 that the power interruption signal bit is not "0", the main CPU 201 determines that a power interruption is not being detected and proceeds to step S5002.

In step S5002, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting a stack pointer for the game area. Here, for example, the stack pointer is set to the final address of the stack area (game area) + 1. Then, during subsequent processing, if the stack is used, 1 is subtracted from the stack pointer, and register values, etc. are stored at that address, and thereafter, the stack areas (game areas) are used in the same manner, from areas with larger address values to areas with smaller address values. When this process is completed, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5003.

In step S5003, the main CPU 201 performs an initial setting process for the built-in registers. Here, for example, the built-in register initial setting data table is referenced to perform the initial setting of the built-in registers. Also, the top address (upper side) "F000H" of the working area (game area) of the main RAM 203 is set in a specified register (for example, the Q register). When this process is completed, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5004.

In step S5004, the main CPU 201 stores and saves in a specified register (e.g., the E register) the state information (on/off state) of the RAM clear switch 176 at startup and the state information of the setting key 174 inserted into the setting key slot. This allows the state information to be checked in a later startup state check process. When this process ends, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5005.

In step S5005, the main CPU 201 performs a wait process as a startup wait process on the sub-control circuit 300 side. The startup wait time (wait period) is approximately 12,000 msec. During this startup wait time, the main CPU 201 checks whether an interrupt request signal (XINT) has occurred, outputs a WDT when an interrupt request signal has occurred, and outputs a magnetic sensor initialization signal at a predetermined timing. This process is performed using a timeout register. Even during interrupt inhibition, for example, it is possible to control the timer counter to be updated, and to determine whether a timer counter timeout has occurred with one command using the timeout register, thereby branching the process, so that the process branches in a pseudo manner depending on whether a timer interrupt has occurred. When this process is completed, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5006.

In step S5006, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM access setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 transmits an access permission command to the main RAM 203 to the corresponding register. Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5007.

In step S5007, the main CPU 201 performs a designated area CRC inspection process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a CRC calculation on the game area and outside area of the main RAM 203, and performs a CRC inspection. If the CRC inspection determines that there is an abnormality (error), a flag "1" indicating that there is a backup abnormality is set in a specified register (e.g., register B), and if the CRC inspection determines that there is no abnormality, a flag "0" indicating that there is no abnormality is set in a specified register (e.g., register B). Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5008.

Note that a CRC check involves, for example, dividing the data in a specified area by a specific, predetermined value, and using the remainder as a value to check whether or not there is an abnormality. If this check value is calculated at different points in time and the values do not match, it can be determined that there has been a change in the data in the specified area (that there is an abnormality in the data's position or value).

In step S5008, the main CPU 201 performs a startup state check process. In this process, the startup state when power is restored is determined based on the results of the CRC check, the ON/OFF state of the RAM clear switch 176, and the ON/OFF state of the setting key 174. Then, based on the startup state when power is restored, the "RAM clear range start address" in the game area of the main RAM 203 is determined, and the RAM clear range in the game area of the main RAM 203 is set. When this process is completed, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5009.

In this embodiment, if the CRC check in the startup state check process determines that there is an abnormality (error), the startup state is determined to be "RAM abnormal". If the CRC check determines that there is a normal state, and the RAM clear switch 176 is ON and the setting key 174 is OFF, the startup state is determined to be "RAM clear", and if the RAM clear switch 176 is ON and the setting key 174 is ON, the startup state is determined to be "settings being changed". If the CRC check determines that there is a normal state, and the RAM clear switch 176 is OFF and the setting key 174 is OFF, the startup state is determined to be "power outage recovery", and if the RAM clear switch 176 is OFF and the setting key 174 is ON, the startup state is determined to be "settings being checked". In this way, in this embodiment, the startup states at the time of power outage recovery are classified into "RAM abnormal", "RAM clear", "settings being changed", "power outage recovery", and "settings being checked".

Then, in the startup status check process, when the startup status at the time of power recovery is determined, the "RAM clear range start address" in the game area of the main RAM 203 is determined as follows.

(When power is restored, the startup state is a RAM abnormality)
In the startup state check process, if it is determined that the startup state when power is restored is "RAM abnormal", the "abnormal RAM clear range start address" of the game area is determined and the determined RAM clear range start address is set in the pair register as shown in Fig. 141. This sets the "abnormal RAM clear range" as the RAM clear range of the game area.

(When the power is restored, the startup state is RAM clear or settings are being changed)
In the startup state check process, if it is determined that the startup state when power is restored is "RAM clear" or "settings being changed", the "first address of the RAM clear range when the clear switch is activated" for the game area is determined, and the first address of the determined RAM clear range is set in the pair register, as shown in Fig. 141. This sets the "RAM clear range when the clear switch is activated" as the RAM clear range for the game area.

(If the startup state when power is restored is "Power has been restored" or "Settings are being checked")
In the startup status check process, if it is determined that the startup status when power is restored is "power restoration" or "setting confirmation in progress", the "start address of the RAM clear range when power is restored" for the play area is determined, and the determined start address of the RAM clear range is set in the pair register, as shown in Fig. 141. This sets the "RAM clear range when power is restored" as the RAM clear range for the play area.

When this startup status check process is completed, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5009.

In step S5009, the main CPU 201 performs a designated range clear process. In this process, data is cleared in the RAM clear range of the game area of the main RAM 203 and in the RAM clear range of the outside area of the main RAM 203. The details of this designated range clear process will be described in detail later. Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5010.

In step S5010, the main CPU 201 sets the address of a data table for power-on initialization stored in an area outside the main RAM 203 in the pair register, and stores the data for power-on initialization in the working area by referencing this register. Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5011.

In step S5011, the main CPU 201 performs a data storage process to store the data of the power-on initialization data table in the storage target area using the address of the power-on initialization data table set in step S5010. This data storage process is similar to the data storage process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine (see FIG. 121). Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5012.

In step S5012, the main CPU 201 performs a setting change confirmation process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a setting update or setting change process when the setting key 174 is inserted into the setting key slot and is in the "on" state. This setting change confirmation process is similar to the setting change confirmation process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine (see Figures 122 and 123). Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5013.

In step S5013, the main CPU 201 performs a game return process. In this game return process, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the RAM clear switch 176 is "on" or "off". If the RAM clear switch 176 is "off", the main CPU 201 determines that it is time for power recovery, and in order to return to play, performs initial settings of the main RAM 203 at the time of power recovery, then refers to the power recovery command management data table to generate a power return command, and transmits the generated power return command to the sub-control circuit 300. Also, if the RAM clear switch 176 is "on", the main CPU 201 determines that it is time for RAM clear, and in order to return to play, performs initial settings of the main RAM 203 at the time of backup clear, then refers to the initialization command management data table to generate an initialization command, and transmits the generated initialization command to the sub-control circuit 300. When this process is completed, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5014.

In this embodiment, the power interruption recovery command management data table contains at least the information on the game state, the special symbol control state number, and the game stop function phase stored in the game state designation parameter area, the special symbol control state number area, and the stop function state parameter area of the main RAM 203. Therefore, the power interruption recovery command contains information on the game state before the power interruption, the special symbol control state number, and the game stop function phase. As a result, when the power interruption recovery occurs and the RAM is not cleared by the RAM clear switch 176, the sub-control circuit 300 can grasp the game state before the power interruption, the special symbol control state (jackpot state, etc.), and the game stop function phase information by receiving the power interruption recovery command.

In step S5014, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt disable processing. This processing disables maskable interrupts. In this processing, the main CPU 201 executes an interrupt disable command, which results in the value of interrupt enable register 1 becoming "0", and the value of interrupt enable register 2 also becoming "0". In this way, when the interrupt disable command is executed (while the value of interrupt enable register 1 is "0"), maskable interrupts are disabled. Upon completing this processing, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5015.

In step S5015, the main CPU 201 performs a power interruption determination process. In this power interruption determination process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a power interruption has been detected (i.e., whether or not XINT has been detected), and performs a power interruption setting process if a power interruption has been detected. In the power interruption setting process, the main CPU 201 stores a power interruption detection flag in the work area (outside area area) of the main RAM 203, performs a CRC calculation on the game area and outside area of the main RAM 203, and stores the CRC calculation result (designated area CRC value) in a pair register. Thereafter, a RAM access prohibition command is sent to a specified register to prohibit access to the main RAM 203, and the machine waits until a power interruption occurs. This power interruption setting process is the same as the power interruption setting process (see Figures 125 and 126) executed in the fourth pachinko game machine. When this process is completed, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5016.

In step S5016, the main CPU 201 performs an initial random number value update process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs an update process of the initial random number value for determining the special symbol. When this process ends, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5017.

In step S5017, the main CPU 201 performs a performance display monitor tally division process. This process is called by an outside area process call command, and processes a program in the outside area of the main ROM 202, using the outside area of the main RAM 203. The main CPU 201 calculates and updates various base values, and each process is performed using the outside area of the main RAM 203. This performance display monitor tally division process is the same as the performance display monitor tally division process executed in the fourth pachinko gaming machine (see Figures 127 and 128). Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5018.

In step S5018, the main CPU 201 performs a game stop function game stop processing. This processing is performed when the game is stopped by the game stop function. The details of this game stop function game stop processing will be described in detail later. When this processing ends, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to step S5019.

In step S5019, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. This process allows a maskable interrupt. Here, the values of interrupt permission register 1 and interrupt permission register 2 are both set to "1". Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5020.

In step S5020, the main CPU 201 determines whether the system cycle time (6 msec: 3 times the interrupt cycle (2 msec)) has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the value stored in the interrupt counter in the interrupt/timer area of the game area in the work area of the main RAM 203 (the current count value of the interrupt counter) is "0". The interrupt counter value is incremented by 1 each time the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 165), which will be described later, is executed, and becomes "3" when the system cycle time has elapsed. Therefore, if the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the interrupt counter value is "0", the determination in step S5020 is "YES", and if the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the interrupt counter value is not "0", the determination in step S5020 is "NO".

If the main CPU 201 determines in step S5020 that the system period time has not elapsed, it returns the process to step S5014, and if it determines that the system period time has elapsed, it transfers the process to step S5021.

As described above, in this embodiment, within the main control process, a 6 msec interrupt inhibition period (the processing period from step S5014 to step S5019) is provided before the various processes related to game control described below are executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the various processes related to game control described below are executed every 6 msec (every system cycle). Note that, although an example in which the interrupt inhibition period is three times the interrupt cycle has been described in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the interrupt inhibition period may be more than twice the interrupt cycle but other than three times.

In step S5021, the main CPU 201 refers to the game stop state flag area in the game area of the main RAM 203 and determines whether or not the game is stopped (game stop state flag area = 1). If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is stopped, it transfers the process to step S5028, and if it determines that the game is not stopped, it transfers the process to step S5022.

In step S5022, the main CPU 201 performs a timer counter update process. In this process, various timer counters such as the special symbol waiting time counter and the normal symbol waiting time counter are updated by subtraction (timekeeping). When this process ends, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5023.

In step S5023, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol control processing. In this processing, the main CPU 201 performs control processing for the special symbol game. The details of this special symbol control processing will be described in detail later. Upon completing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to step S5024.

In step S5024, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing. In this processing, the main CPU 201 performs control processing for the normal symbol game. The details of this normal symbol control processing will be described in detail later. When this processing ends, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to step S5025.

In step S5025, the main CPU 201 performs a game action display unit control process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a display data setting process for turning on and off game LEDs such as the normal symbol display section 161, the normal symbol reserved display section 162, the first special symbol display section 163, the second special symbol display section 164, the first special symbol reserved display section 165, the second special symbol reserved display section 166, and the time-saving notification display section 168. When this process ends, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5026.

In step S5026, the main CPU 201 performs a game information data generation process. In this process, the main CPU 201 generates external signals such as a big win signal, a small win signal, an out signal, and a security signal to be output to the hall computer 186 (output port) based on the information stored in the external terminal board signal control data area (win signal management data area, out ball number management counter area, and security signal request flag area) of the main RAM 203, and performs an output data setting process to output the generated external signals to the external terminal board 184. Note that, as will be described later, only the "specific security signal" indicating that the game is stopped by the game stop function is set in the game stop function game stop process (see step S5067 in FIG. 150). When this process is completed, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5027.

In step S5027, the main CPU 201 performs a test firing signal generation process. This process is called by an outside area processing call command, and processes the program in the outside area of the main ROM 202, and uses the outside area of the main RAM 203. In this process, the main CPU 201 generates test firing signals for the game state, such as a normal electric device operation signal, a special electric device operation signal, a special pattern changing signal, a normal pattern changing signal, and a signal before the game stop function is activated, so that the game state can be confirmed in a certification test (test firing test) of the gaming machine, and performs output data setting process for outputting the generated test firing signals from an output port dedicated to the test firing test. When this process is completed, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5028.

In particular, in this embodiment, the test firing signal generation process refers to the game stop function phase area in the outside area of the main RAM 203, and if the data stored in the game stop function phase area is either the game stop function activation notice phase (=1) or the game stop function activation standby phase (=2), a game stop function pre-activation signal is generated and the game stop function pre-activation signal is output from an output port dedicated to the test firing test.

When the game is stopped by the game stop function (YES in step S5021), the test firing signal will not be generated or output (the test firing signal is ignored while the game is stopped).

In step S5028, the main CPU 201 performs a main control command transmission/reception process (prize ball control). In this process, the main CPU 201 transmits and receives data to and from the payout/launch control circuit 400, issues instructions to pay out game balls, and checks for abnormalities related to the payout of game balls. The details of this main control command transmission/reception process will be described in detail later. When this process ends, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5029.

In step S5029, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing. In this processing, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set (transfer) output data to the output port. In addition, the main CPU 201 clears the WDT and performs processing to restart the WDT. Upon completing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to step S5030.

In step S5030, the main CPU 201 performs a status monitoring process. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether there is a launch position abnormality, a game abnormality, or a payout abnormality, and if there is an abnormality, it performs a transmission reservation process for a command corresponding to that abnormality. The details of this status monitoring process will be described in detail later.

Then, after processing step S5030, the main CPU 201 returns the process to processing step S5014 and performs processing from step S5014 onwards.

As described above, in the main control process of this embodiment, when the game is stopped by the game stop function (YES in step S5021), the execution of the timer counter update process (step S5022), special symbol control process (step S5023), normal symbol control process (step S5024), game action display unit control process (step S5025), game information data generation process (step S5026), and test firing signal generation process (step S5026) is stopped.

In particular, when the game is stopped by the game stop function, the execution of the special symbol control process and the normal symbol control process is stopped, so the progress of the game can be stopped.

Furthermore, when the game is stopped by the game stop function, the execution of the game operation display unit control process is stopped, and the game LEDs such as the normal symbol display unit 161, the normal symbol reserve display unit 162, the first special symbol display unit 163, the second special symbol display unit 164, the first special symbol reserve display unit 165, the second special symbol reserve display unit 166 and the time-saving notification display unit 168 are turned off, so that the player can recognize that the game has stopped without being confused.

In addition, when the game is stopped due to the game stop function, the execution of the test firing signal generation process is stopped, which reduces the control burden.

On the other hand, in the main control main processing of this embodiment, even if play is stopped by the game stop function (YES in step S5021), the performance display monitor tally division processing (step S5017), game stop function game stop processing (step S5018), main control command transmission/reception processing (step S5028), port output processing (step S5029), and status monitoring processing (step S5030) will continue to be executed.

For this reason, even if the game is stopped by the Game Stop function, the performance display monitor tallying and division process continues to be executed, so the gaming facility can grasp details such as the payout rate when the difference in the number of game balls exceeds the regulated value and the game is stopped by the Game Stop function.

In addition, even if the game is stopped by the game stop function, the main control command transmission and reception process continues to be executed, so game balls acquired before the game is stopped can be paid out even after the game is stopped, and delays in the payment of game balls can also be dealt with.

In addition, even if the game is stopped by the game stop function, the status monitoring process continues to be executed, so if there is a payout abnormality when game balls are being paid out with a delay during the game stop state, the payout abnormality can be reported.

As described above, in this embodiment, a 6 msec interrupt prohibited section (processing section from step S5014 to step S5019) is provided in the main control main processing before various processes related to game control (processing from step S5020 onwards), and power cut processing (step S5015), initial value random number update processing (step S5016), performance display monitor tally division processing (step S5017), and game stop function game stop processing (step S5018) are performed in the interrupt prohibited section. That is, in this embodiment, the performance display monitor tally division processing and game stop function game stop processing are performed in the interrupt prohibited section. Therefore, by providing such an interrupt prohibited section, game management is simplified, the processing performed by the main control circuit 200 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load on the main control circuit 200 can be reduced.

[Clear specified range]
Next, the designated range clear process (step S5009 in Fig. 145) executed in the main control process will be described with reference to Fig. 147. Fig. 147 is a flow chart showing an example of the designated range clear process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

First, in step S5031, the main CPU 201 saves information such as the state information of the RAM clear switch 4176 at the time of power recovery and the state information of the setting key 4174a to the stack. This state information is realized, for example, by saving data in a general-purpose register to the stack. When this process ends, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5032.

In step S5032, the main CPU 201 sets the RAM clear range determination data by storing the value of the pair register in which the RAM clear range start address was set by the startup status check process (step S5008) in the game area of the main RAM 203. Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5033.

In step S5033, the main CPU 201 performs outside area designated area clear processing. This processing is called by an outside area processing call command, and processes a program in the outside area of the main ROM 202, and uses the outside area of the main RAM 203. In this outside area designated area clear processing, the designated range of the outside area of the main RAM 203 is cleared based on the RAM clear range determination data set in step S5032 above. The details of this outside area designated area clear processing will be described in detail later. When this processing ends, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to step S5034.

In step S5034, the main CPU 201 returns to processing the game area and calculates the size of the RAM clear range for the game area. In this process, the start address of the RAM clear range for the game area is referenced to set the end address of the RAM clear range, and the size of the RAM clear range for the game area is calculated from the start address of the RAM clear range and the end address of the RAM clear range. When this process ends, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5035.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 141, when the first address of the RAM clear range of the play area is the "first address of the RAM clear range when abnormal", the last "first end address" of the stack area is set as the final address of the RAM clear range, and the size of the "RAM clear range when abnormal" of the play area is calculated. Also, when the first address of the RAM clear range of the play area is the "first address of the RAM clear range when the clear switch is activated", the last "first end address" of the stack area is set as the final address of the RAM clear range, and the size of the "RAM clear range when the clear switch is activated" of the play area is calculated. When the first address of the RAM clear range of the play area is the "first address of the RAM clear range when power is restored", the first "second end address" of the stack area is set as the final address of the RAM clear range, and the size of the "RAM clear range when power is restored" of the play area is calculated.

In step S5035, the main CPU 201 executes clearing of the RAM clear range for the game area of the main RAM 203. In this process, when the start address of the RAM clear range to be cleared and the size of the clear range calculated in step S5034 are specified, all data in that range is cleared (=0) for the game area of the main RAM 203. When this process ends, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5036.

In this way, if the startup status check process (step S5008) determines that the startup status when power is restored is "RAM abnormal", the "RAM clear range when abnormal" in the play area will be cleared. Also, if the startup status check process determines that the startup status when power is restored is "RAM clear" or "settings being changed", the "RAM clear range when clear switch is activated" in the play area will be cleared. Also, if the startup status check process determines that the startup status when power is restored is "power restored" or "settings being checked", the "RAM clear range when power is restored" in the play area will be cleared.

In step S5036, the main CPU 201 restores from the stack the state information of the RAM clear switch 4176 at the time of power recovery, and the state information of the setting key 4174a. This state information is realized by storing it in a general-purpose register. Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the current designated range clear process, and moves the process to step S5010.

As described above, in the designated range clearing process of this embodiment, if the startup state when power is restored is "RAM abnormal," the "abnormal RAM clear range" of the play area is cleared as shown in FIG. 141, so that all used areas in the play area can be cleared.

In addition, if the startup state when power is restored is "RAM clear" or "settings being changed," the "RAM clear range when clear switch is activated" in the play area is cleared as shown in FIG. 141, so all information related to the game stop function is cleared and the function and state related to the game stop function can be reset.

In addition, if the startup state when power is restored is "Power restored" or "Checking settings", the "RAM clear range when power is restored" of the game area is cleared as shown in FIG. 141, so that the game stop state of the game stop function, the request to send a command for the game stop function, information on the game stop function phase of the game area, and ball difference information for the game stop function are retained.

[Clearing specified areas outside the area]
Next, the outside designated area clearing process (step S5033 in FIG. 147) executed in the designated range clearing process will be described with reference to FIG. 148 and FIG. 149. FIG. 148 and FIG. 149 are a flow chart showing an example of the outside designated area clearing process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, the outside area clearing process is a process that is called by an outside area process call command, and the program for executing this process is a program stored in the outside area of main ROM 202, and uses the outside area of main RAM 203.

First, in step S5041, the main CPU 201 acquires RAM clear range determination data stored in the game area of the main RAM 203. This RAM clear range determination data is data stored by the main CPU 201 in step S5032 of FIG. 147. Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5042.

In step S5042, the main CPU 201 saves the acquired RAM clear range determination data from the general-purpose register. Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5043.

In step S5043, the main CPU 201 sets the start address of the abnormality RAM clear range in the outside area of the main RAM 203 in the pair register to compare with the RAM clear range determination data acquired in step S5041. Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5044.

In step S5044, the main CPU 201 compares the abnormal RAM clear range start address set in the pair register with the RAM clear range determination data, and determines whether the RAM clear range determination data matches the abnormal RAM clear range start address, i.e., whether it is within the abnormal RAM clear range. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is within the abnormal RAM clear range (matches), it transfers processing to step S5048, and if it determines that it is not within the abnormal RAM clear range (does not match), it transfers processing to step S5045.

In step S5045, the main CPU 201 sets the top address of the RAM clear range when the clear switch is activated in the outside area of the main RAM 203 in the pair register for next comparison with the RAM clear range determination data obtained in step S5041. When this process ends, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5046.

In step S5046, the main CPU 201 compares the clear switch activation RAM clear range start address set in the pair register with the RAM clear range determination data, and determines whether the RAM clear range determination data matches the clear switch activation RAM clear range start address, i.e., whether it is within the clear switch activation RAM clear range. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is within the clear switch activation RAM clear range (matches), it transfers processing to step S5048, and if it determines that it is not within the clear switch activation RAM clear range (does not match), it transfers processing to step S5047.

In step S5047, the main CPU 201 sets the start address of the RAM clear range when power is restored in the outside area of the main RAM 203 in the pair register because the RAM clear range determination data is neither the abnormal RAM clear range nor the clear switch activation RAM clear range. When this process ends, the main CPU 201 proceeds to step S5048.

In step S5048, the main CPU 201 calculates the size of the RAM clear range of the outside area. In this process, the start address of the RAM clear range of the outside area is referenced to set the end address of the RAM clear range, and the size of the RAM clear range of the outside area is calculated from the start address of the RAM clear range and the end address of the RAM clear range. When this process ends, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5049.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 141, when the start address of the RAM clear range in the out-of-area area is the "start address of the RAM clear range in abnormality", the "third end address" at the start of the stack area is set as the final address of the RAM clear range, and the size of the "RAM clear range in abnormality" in the out-of-area area is calculated. Also, when the start address of the RAM clear range in the game area is the "start address of the RAM clear range when the clear switch is activated", the "third end address" at the start of the stack area is set as the final address of the RAM clear range, and the size of the "RAM clear range when the clear switch is activated" in the out-of-area area is calculated. When the start address of the RAM clear range in the game area is the "start address of the RAM clear range when power is restored", the "third end address" at the start of the stack area is set as the final address of the RAM clear range, and the size of the "RAM clear range when power is restored" in the out-of-area area is calculated.

In step S5049, the main CPU 201 executes clearing of the RAM clear range for the area outside the area of the main RAM 203. In this process, when the start address of the RAM clear range to be cleared stored in the pair register and the size of the clear range calculated in step S5048 are specified, all data in that range is cleared (=0) for the area outside the area of the main RAM 203. When this process ends, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5050.

In this way, if the startup status check process (step S5008) determines that the startup status when power is restored is "RAM abnormal", the "RAM clear range when abnormal" in the outside area will be cleared. Also, if the startup status check process determines that the startup status when power is restored is "RAM clear" or "settings being changed", the "RAM clear range when clear switch is activated" in the outside area will be cleared. Also, if the startup status check process determines that the startup status when power is restored is "power restored" or "settings being checked", the "RAM clear range when power is restored" in the outside area will be cleared.

In step S5050, the main CPU 201 restores the RAM clear range determination data that was saved in step S5041 by storing it in a general-purpose register. Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5051.

Next, in step S5051, the main CPU 201 compares the abnormal RAM clear range start address with the RAM clear range determination data, and determines whether the RAM clear range determination data matches the abnormal RAM clear range start address, i.e., whether it is within the abnormal RAM clear range. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is within the abnormal RAM clear range (matches), it transfers processing to step S5052, and if it determines that it is not within the abnormal RAM clear range (does not match), it transfers processing to step S5053.

In step S5052, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the performance display monitor control initial table. This processing sets the address of the performance display monitor control initial table stored in the main ROM 202 in a pair register, references the pair register in which the address of the performance display monitor control initial table has been set, and stores initial values related to the control of the performance display monitor in a work area outside the area of the main RAM 203. The initial values related to the control of the performance display monitor include, for example, the timing of switching the blinking of the LED and the number of times the blinking is repeated. When this processing is completed, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to step S5053.

In step S5053, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting a data table for power-on initialization. This process sets the address of the data table for power-on initialization stored in the main ROM 202 in a pair register, references the pair register in which the address of the data table for power-on initialization has been set, and stores data for power-on initialization in a work area outside the area of the main RAM 203. The data for power-on initialization includes, for example, the multiplication result of the LED blinking switching timing and the number of blinking repetitions. Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5054.

In step S5054, the main CPU 201 sets the data stored in the game stop function phase area in the outer area of the main RAM 203 to the pair register. Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5054.

In step S5055, the main CPU 201 determines whether the game stop function phase data set in the pair register corresponds to the "game stop function activation notice phase (=1)," i.e., whether the game stop function activation notice phase is in effect. If the main CPU 201 determines that the game stop function activation notice phase is in effect, it transfers processing to step S5056, and if it determines that the game stop function activation notice phase is not in effect, it terminates the outside area designated area clear processing.

In step S5056, the main CPU 201 initializes the game stop function phase area in the outside area of the main RAM 203. That is, the game stop function phase area in the outside area is set to 0. Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the outside area designated area clear process.

When the outside area clearing process is completed, the main CPU 201 switches the process from the outside area processing to the game area processing by a game area processing return command.

In this way, in the outside area clearing process, the clear range for the outside area of the main RAM 203 is determined using the clear range for the game area of the main RAM 203 determined in the startup status check process (step S5008), so the main RAM 203 clearing process is executed in an efficient and simple configuration.

In the outside area specified area clearing process of this embodiment, if the startup state when power is restored is "RAM abnormality," the "RAM clear range in abnormality" in the outside area is cleared as shown in FIG. 141, so that all work areas in the outside area can be cleared.

In addition, if the startup state when power is restored is "RAM clear" or "settings being changed," the "RAM clear range when clear switch is activated" in the outside area is cleared as shown in FIG. 141, so all information related to the Game Stop function is cleared and the function and state related to the Game Stop function can be reset.

In addition, if the startup state when power is restored is "Power restored" or "Checking settings", the "RAM clear range when power is restored" in the outside area is cleared as shown in FIG. 141, so that with regard to the game stop function, the ball difference information in the outside area can be cleared while retaining the information on the game stop function phase in the outside area.

Furthermore, in the outside area designated area clearing process of this embodiment, when power is restored, the process of steps S5054 to S5056 initializes the game stop function phase of the outside area if the game stop function phase is the game stop function activation notice phase (=1), regardless of the startup state when power is restored. Note that the initialization process is omitted for the game stop function normal state phase (=0), since it is the initial value data (=0) in the first place. Therefore, when power is restored, regardless of the startup state when power is restored, if the game stop function phase is 1 or less, the game stop function phase can be started from the initialized state.

On the other hand, if the GameStop function phase is the GameStop function activation standby phase (=2) or the GameStop function activation completion phase (=3), that GameStop function phase will be maintained unless the startup state when power is restored is a RAM abnormality, RAM is being cleared, or settings are being changed.

[Game Stop function processing during gameplay stop]
Next, the process during game stop function play stop (step S5018 in FIG. 146) executed in the main control main process will be described with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing an example of the process during game stop function play stop in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

First, in step S5061, the main CPU 201 refers to the game stop state flag area in the game area of the main RAM 203 and determines whether or not the game is stopped (game stop state flag area = 1). If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is stopped, it transfers the process to step S5062, and if it determines that the game is not stopped, it ends the current game stop function game stop process and transfers the process to step S5019 (see FIG. 146).

In step S5062, the main CPU 201 refers to the stop function completion command transmission flag area in the game area of the main RAM 203 and determines whether or not there is a request to transmit a game stop function completion command (stop function completion command transmission flag area = 1). If the main CPU 201 determines that there is a request to transmit a game stop function completion command, it transfers processing to step S5063, and if it determines that there is no request to transmit a game stop function completion command, it transfers processing to step S5065.

In step S5063, the main CPU 201 sets a "game stop function completion command." In this process, the game stop function completion command table is referenced, and a game stop function completion command is generated from the identification data of the game stop function completion command (e.g., D4H) and the information stored in the stop function state parameter area and the stop function number of balls difference parameter area in the game area of the main RAM 203. In other words, the game stop function completion command is composed of the identification data, game stop function phase information, and first ball difference information. The game stop function completion command may be composed of only the identification data and game stop function phase information without including the first ball difference information. The configuration of this game stop function completion command will be described in detail later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5064.

In step S5064, the main CPU 201 performs a performance control command transmission process to transmit a game stop function completion command to the sub-control circuit 300. In this process, the game stop function completion command generated in step S5063 above is set in the transmission buffer. Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5065.

In step S5065, the main CPU 201 initializes (clears) all of the multiple output port buffers except for a specific output port buffer. For example, the output port buffers cleared here are output port buffers for outputting external signals indicating the state of a game in progress, such as a jackpot signal or a symbol confirmation signal. The specific output port buffer is excluded in order to set a "specific security signal" indicating that play has been stopped by the game stop function in the specific output port buffer, as described later in step S5067. After completing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5066.

In step S5066, the main CPU 201 initializes (to 0) the stop function completion command transmission flag area in the game area of the main RAM 203, and clears the request to transmit the game stop function completion command. Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5067.

In step S5067, the main CPU 201 sets a "specific security signal" as an external signal in a specific output port buffer. Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5068.

In this way, in the game stop function game stop processing of this embodiment, when game play is stopped by the game stop function, a specific security signal as an external signal is output from a specific output port to the hall computer 186, so that the gaming facility can know that a gaming machine is in a game stop state due to the game stop function without having to visually check the operating status of each gaming machine.

In step S5068, the main CPU 201 performs a game stop function initialization process. In this game stop function initialization process, the output data of the display unit (LED) related to the special and normal symbols is cleared, and the input data of the various switches that detect the game ball is cleared. Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the current game stop function game stop process, and moves the process to step S5019 (see FIG. 146).

[GameStop function initialization process]
Next, referring to Fig. 151, the game stop function initialization process (step S5068 in Fig. 150) executed in the game stop function game stop process will be described. This game stop function game stop process will also be executed in the game stop function control process (Fig. 168) described later. Fig. 151 is a flow chart showing an example of the game stop function initialization process in the fifth pachinko game machine.

First, in step S5069, the main CPU 201 calculates the size of the RAM clear range when game play is stopped. In this process, the size of the RAM clear range when game play is stopped is calculated from the start address of the RAM clear range when game play is stopped and the end address of the RAM clear range when game play is stopped. When this process ends, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5070.

In step S5070, the main CPU 201 executes clearing of the game stop RAM clear range for the game area of the main RAM 203. In this process, when the start address of the game stop RAM clear range and the size of the game stop RAM clear range calculated in step S5069 are specified, all data in that range is cleared (=0) for the game area of the main RAM 203. When this process ends, the main CPU 201 ends the current game stop function game stop processing.

In this way, in the game stop function initialization process of this embodiment, when the game is stopped by the game stop function, the "RAM clear range when game is stopped" in the game area is cleared, and as shown in FIG. 141, the output port buffer in the data area for game LED output processing and the input port buffer in the data area for input processing are continuously cleared.

For this reason, when the game is stopped by the game stop function, the game LEDs of the normal symbol display section 161, the normal symbol reserved display section 162, the first special symbol display section 163, the second special symbol display section 164, the first special symbol reserved display section 165, the second special symbol reserved display section 166 and the time-saving notification display section 168 will not be lit (they will remain off).

Furthermore, when the game is stopped by the game stop function, various game ball switches for detecting game balls, such as the first start port switch 5121, the second start port switch 5141, the passing gate switch 5127, the first large prize port count switch 5132, the second large prize port count switch 5152, the game ball recovery switch 5179, and the general prize port switch 123, are also no longer detected.

[Main control command transmission/reception processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 152, a main control command transmission/reception process (step S5028 in Fig. 146) executed in the main control process under the control of the main CPU 201 will be described. Fig. 152 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control command transmission/reception process in the fifth pachinko game machine.

First, in step S5071, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not XINT has been detected. If the main CPU 201 determines that XINT has been detected (i.e., if a power interruption has been detected), it ends the main control command transmission/reception process, and if it determines that XINT has not been detected (i.e., if a power interruption has not been detected), it moves the process to step S5072.

In step S5072, the main CPU 201 sets the main control command control state number stored in the main control command control state number area of the game area to a specified general-purpose register. Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5073.

Here, the main control command control state number is as follows: "main control command control state number = 0" indicates the main control command transmission start value, "main control command control state number = 1" indicates the payout communication mode reception value, and "main control command control state number = 2" indicates the payout communication event reception value. The main control command control state number is set in each of the main control command transmission start processing, payout communication mode reception processing, payout communication event reception processing, etc.

In step S5073, the main CPU 201 selects an address corresponding to the main control command control state number. This process refers to a payout communication control branch table that defines the address (program start address) of the process corresponding to the main control command control state number, for example, to find the address of the process corresponding to the main control command control state number set in a specified general-purpose register. When this process ends, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5074.

In step S5074, the main CPU 201 refers to the receive FIFO status check value in a status register (e.g., a register for asynchronous serial transmission and reception) to determine whether a receive FIFO error has been detected. If the main CPU 201 determines that a receive FIFO error has been detected, it determines that there is an abnormality and moves the process to step S5075. If the main CPU 201 determines that no receive FIFO error has been detected, it determines that there is no abnormality and moves the process to step S5076.

In step S5075, if a receive FIFO error is detected, the main CPU 201 sends a command to clear the receive FIFO to a specified command register and clears the receive FIFO. When this process is completed, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5076.

In step S5076, the main CPU 201 calls the address of the process corresponding to the main control command control state number selected in step S5073 above, and then performs one of the processes in steps S5077 to S5079 corresponding to the main control command control state number.

Step S5077 is the main control command transmission start process that is performed when the main control command control state number = 0.

In this main control command transmission start process, the main CPU 201 refers to the payout management counter area of the game area in the main RAM 203 to check the number of game balls to be paid out (number of prize balls), generates a prize ball control command according to the number of prize balls, and transmits the generated prize ball control command to the payout/launch control circuit 400. Furthermore, to check the communication status of the prize ball control command, the generated prize ball control command is set in the main control command transmission area of the game area. Finally, the value of the main control command control status number is incremented by 1 so that the payout communication mode reception process will be performed in the next main control command transmission/reception process, and the main control command transmission/reception process is terminated.

Step S5078 is the payout communication mode reception process that is performed when the main control command control state number = 1.

In this payout communication mode reception process, the main CPU 201 refers to the main control command transmission area of the game area in the main RAM 203 to determine whether the prize ball control command has been transmitted normally. If the main CPU 201 determines that the prize ball control command has not been transmitted normally, it performs a retransmission process of the prize ball control command and ends the main control command transmission/reception process. If the main CPU 201 determines that the prize ball control command has been transmitted normally, it clears the payout management counter and transmits a main control event command to the payout/launch control circuit 400. Finally, it adds 1 to the main control command control state number area of the game area (main control command control state number = 2) so that the payout communication event reception process will be performed in the next main control command transmission/reception process, and ends the main control command transmission/reception process.

Step S5079 is the payout communication event reception process that is performed when the main control command control state number = 2.

This payout communication event reception process involves a payout abnormality event information extraction process that extracts payout abnormality event information received from the payout/launch control circuit 400, and a payout completion information reception process that receives payout completion information that indicates the completion of the payout of the game balls corresponding to the prize ball control command.

In this payout abnormality event information extraction process, the main CPU 201 takes a logical sum of the multiple payout abnormality event information extracted, and sets the logical sum in the payout status notification flag area of the game area in the main RAM 203.

The payout abnormality event information includes multiple abnormality information such as card unit communication abnormality, tray full, ball jam abnormality, payout sensor abnormality, and payout motor abnormality.

Here, the payout abnormality event information includes multiple abnormality information such as, for example, a card unit communication abnormality, a tray full, a ball jam abnormality, a payout sensor abnormality, and a payout motor abnormality. In addition, the payout status notification flag area of the game area of the main RAM 203 is composed of 1 byte, and is configured such that, for example, the 0th bit indicates the presence or absence of a card unit communication abnormality, the 1st bit indicates the presence or absence of a tray full, the 2nd bit indicates the presence or absence of a ball jam abnormality, the 3rd bit indicates the presence or absence of a payout sensor abnormality, the 4th bit indicates the presence or absence of a payout motor abnormality, the 5th bit indicates the presence or absence of a response abnormality, and the 6th bit indicates the presence or absence of a touch state. Then, when multiple payout abnormality event information is extracted, a logical OR is taken so that the corresponding bits are ON (=1). For example, when two abnormalities, a card unit communication abnormality and a tray full state, occur, the 0th bit and the 1st bit are ON (=1).

In addition, in the payout completion information reception process, when the main CPU 201 receives payout completion information indicating the completion of the payout of the game balls corresponding to the prize ball control command, it generates a payout completion command corresponding to the number of prize balls in the prize ball command, sets the generated payout completion command in the transmission buffer, and transmits the payout completion command to the sub-control circuit 300. By receiving the payout completion command, the sub-control circuit 300 can know that the payout of a predetermined number of game balls has been completed.

Then, in the payout communication event reception process, when the payout abnormality event information extraction process and the payout completion information reception process are completed, the main CPU 201 clears the main control command control state number area of the game area (main control command control state number = 0) so that the main control command transmission start process will be performed in the next main control command transmission/reception process, and ends the main control command transmission/reception process.

In this way, the main control command transmission/reception process of this embodiment transmits and receives data between the main control circuit 200 and the payout/launch control circuit 400 to instruct the payout of game balls and check for abnormalities related to the payout of game balls. As shown in FIG. 146, even if the game is stopped by the game stop function, the execution of the main control command transmission/reception process continues. As a result, even if the game is stopped by the game stop function, the payout of game balls continues, and game balls acquired before the game stop state can be paid out even after the game stop state. In other words, it is also possible to deal with delays in the payout of game balls.

In addition, in the main control command transmission/reception process of this embodiment, in order to continue processing regardless of whether or not there is received data, the reception FIFO is cleared according to the result of the reception FIFO error detection in step S5074. For example, if there is received data and there is no error in the reception FIFO, normal data is obtained and the selected process is called, if there is no received data and there is no error in the reception FIFO, 0 data is obtained and the selected process is called, if there is received data and there is an error in the reception FIFO, the reception FIFO is cleared, 0 data is obtained and the selected process is called, if there is no received data and there is an error in the reception FIFO, the reception FIFO is cleared, 0 data is obtained and the selected process is called, and since the reception trigger level and reception status monitor are not checked, the processing burden can be reduced.

[Status monitoring process]
Next, a description will be given of the state monitoring process (step S5030 in FIG. 146) executed in the main control process under the control of the main CPU 201 with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a flow chart showing an example of the state monitoring process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

First, in step S5081, the main CPU 201 refers to the game stop state flag area in the game area of the main RAM 203 and determines whether or not the game is stopped (game stop state flag area = 1). If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is stopped, it transfers the process to step S5089, and if it determines that the game is not stopped, it transfers the process to step S5082.

In step S5082, if the main CPU 201 determines that the game is not stopped, it determines whether the launch position is abnormal. More specifically, it compares the launch position designation signal management data value stored in the launch position designation signal management data area in the game area of the main RAM 203 with the launch position parameter stored in the launch position parameter area in the game area of the main RAM 203, and determines whether the launch position is abnormal (different). If the main CPU 201 determines that the launch position is abnormal, it transfers the process to step S5083, and if it determines that the launch position is not abnormal, it transfers the process to step S5086.

In step S5083, the main CPU 201 sets the launch position designation signal management data value in the launch position parameter area in the game area. Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5084.

In step S5084, the main CPU 201 sets a launch position command. In this process, the launch position command table is referenced, and a launch position command is generated from the identification data of the launch position command (e.g., C2H) and the information stored in the launch position parameter area in the play area. Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5085.

In step S5085, the main CPU 201 performs a performance control command transmission process to transmit a launch position command to the sub-control circuit 300. In this process, the launch position command generated in step S5084 above is set in the transmission buffer. When this process ends, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5086.

In step S5086, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a gaming abnormality has been detected. More specifically, the main CPU 201 refers to a gaming abnormality detection parameter area in the game area of the main RAM 203, and determines whether or not data indicating an abnormality is stored in the gaming abnormality detection parameter area. If the main CPU 201 determines that a gaming abnormality has been detected, it transfers processing to step S5087, and if it determines that a gaming abnormality has not been detected, it transfers processing to step S5089.

In this embodiment, the gaming abnormality detection parameter area of the gaming area can store gaming abnormality information such as abnormal winning, sensor abnormality, and door/frame opening/closing abnormality. When each gaming abnormality is determined by processing the input from various sensors, the gaming abnormality information corresponding to the gaming abnormality detection parameter area of the gaming area is stored.

In step S5087, the main CPU 201 sets a gaming abnormality detection command. In this process, the gaming abnormality detection command table is referenced, and a gaming abnormality detection command is generated from the identification data of the gaming abnormality detection command (e.g., C0H) and the information stored in the gaming abnormality detection parameter area in the gaming area. Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5088.

In step S5088, the main CPU 201 performs a presentation control command transmission process to transmit a gaming abnormality detection command to the sub-control circuit 300. In this process, the gaming abnormality detection command generated in step S5087 is set in the transmission buffer. When this process ends, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5089.

In step S5089, the main CPU 201 performs an update process for the notification interval management timer. In this process, an increment process is performed for the notification interval management timer stored in the notification interval management timer area in the game area of the main RAM 203. Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5090.

In step S5090, the main CPU 201 refers to the notification interval management timer area in the game area and determines whether or not it is the notification interval management time. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is the notification interval management time, it transfers the process to step S5091 to send a payout status notification command, and if it determines that it is not the notification interval management time, it ends the status monitoring process.

In this embodiment, the notification interval management time is set to 200 ms, and the dispensing status notification command is sent periodically every 200 ms, as described below.

In step S5091, the main CPU 201 sets a payout status notification command relating to the payout status of the game balls. In this process, the payout status notification command table is referenced, and a payout status notification command is generated from the identification data of the payout status notification command (e.g., C1H) and the information stored in the payout status notification flag area in the game area. The configuration of this payout status notification command will be described in detail later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5092.

In step S5092, the main CPU 201 performs a performance control command transmission process to transmit a payout status notification command to the sub-control circuit 300. In this process, the payout status notification command generated in step S5091 above is set in the transmission buffer. When this process ends, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5093.

In step S5093, the main CPU 201 clears the payout status notification flag area in the game area of the main RAM 203. Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the status monitoring process.

In this way, in the state monitoring process of this embodiment, when play is stopped by the game stop function, the abnormality determination of the launch position (steps S5082 to S5085) and the detection determination of game abnormality (steps S5086 to S5088) are not performed, so the processing burden during play stop by the game stop function can be reduced.

On the other hand, even when play is stopped by the game stop function, the sending of payout status notification commands regarding the payout status of game balls can continue to be executed, so if there is a payout abnormality when game balls are being paid out with a delay during a game stop state, the payout abnormality can be reported.

[Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in the main control process will be described with reference to Fig. 154. Fig. 154 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

First, in step S5111, the main CPU 201 determines whether the special pattern waiting time (special pattern waiting time counter in the main RAM 203) is 0. This special pattern waiting time is set in the special pattern waiting time counter in the main RAM 203 as the waiting time for various processes in the special pattern control process, and the special pattern waiting time is timed (decremented) in the timer counter update process (step S5022) of the main control main process described above. If the main CPU 201 determines that the special pattern waiting time is not 0, it ends the special pattern control process, and if it determines that the special pattern waiting time is 0, it moves the process to step S5112.

In step S5112, the control state number of the special symbol is loaded from the special symbol control state number area of the main RAM 203. The control state number of the special symbol is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of step S5112, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5113. The main CPU 201 performs the processes from step S5113 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of step S5112.

The numbers ("0" to "7") written in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 154 are the control state numbers of the special symbols that are the subject of the process. The main CPU 201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process that corresponds to the control state number.

In step S5113, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This step S5113 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". This special symbol variable display start processing includes shifting the start information of the special symbol, drawing a lottery for the special symbol, determining the stop symbol of the special symbol, and determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 155. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the processing to step S5114.

In step S5114, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This step S5114 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". In this special symbol variable display end processing, the stop time of the special symbol is set, etc. Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 156. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the processing to step S5115.

In step S5115, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game play determination process. This step S5115 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". This special symbol game play determination process determines whether or not it is a big win, a small win, or a miss, and performs a process of preparing for the start of a big win or small win and updating the number of time-saving times. Details of this special symbol game play determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 157. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5116.

In step S5116, the main CPU 201 performs a process to prepare for the opening of the large prize opening. This process in step S5116 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this process to prepare for the opening of the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 159. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5117.

In step S5117, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process in step S5117 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 161. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5118.

In step S5118, the main CPU 201 performs a process to end the jackpot game state. This process in step S5118 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this process to end the jackpot game state will be described later with reference to FIG. 163.

After completing steps S5113 to S5118, the main CPU 201 ends the special pattern control processing and transfers processing to the normal pattern control processing (see FIG. 146).

[Special pattern variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed in the special symbol control process will be described with reference to Fig. 155. Fig. 155 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In step S5121, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol control state number area of the main RAM 203 and determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", it ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 154), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "0", it moves the process to step S5122.

In step S5122, the main CPU 201 performs a game standby determination process. In this special symbol game standby process, first, it is determined whether there are no reserved numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. If the main CPU 201 determines that there are no reserved numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it sets data indicating a "game standby state" in a specified general-purpose register, generates a demo display command, and sets the generated demo display command in the transmission buffer. In addition, if it determines that there are reserved numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it sets data indicating a "game start state" in a specified general-purpose register. When this process is completed, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5123.

In step S5123, the main CPU 201 refers to a predetermined general-purpose register and determines whether or not the game is in a standby state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is in a standby state, it ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 154), and if it determines that the game is not in a standby state (it is in a game start state), it transfers the process to step S5124.

In step S5124, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the start information of the special pattern. In this shift process of the start information of the special pattern, if the start information of the second special pattern is stored, the shift process of the start information of the second special pattern is performed in priority to the start information of the first special pattern. For example, when performing the shift process of the start information of the second special pattern, the start information stored in the second special pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special pattern determination memory area (0), and the start information stored in the second special pattern start memory area (2) to the second special pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the second special pattern start memory area (1) to the second special pattern start memory area (3). Furthermore, when performing a shift process of the start information of the first special symbol, the start information stored in the first special symbol start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determination memory area (0), and the start information stored in the first special symbol start memory area (2) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) is shifted to the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (3). Then, after shifting the start information of the special symbol, a reserved subtraction command indicating the reserved number of the subtracted special symbol is generated, and the generated reserved subtraction command is set in the transmission buffer. When this process is completed, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5125.

In this embodiment, a priority variable machine has been described in which, when start information for the second special pattern is stored, the special pattern control process is executed with a higher priority than the first special pattern, but this is not limited to this. For example, when start information for the first special pattern is stored, the priority variable machine may be one in which the special pattern control process is executed with a higher priority than the second special pattern, or a sequential variable machine in which the special pattern control process is executed in the order of winning (ball entry order) into the first start port 11120 or the second start port 5140.

In addition, it is preferable to set an interruption prohibited area at the start of the shifting process of the start information of the special pattern, and to perform the shifting process of the start information of the special pattern within the interruption prohibited area.

In step S5125, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol hit determination process to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss. In this special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 143 is referenced, and hit/miss determination value data is determined based on the special symbol hit determination random number value as the special symbol start information shifted to the special symbol determination memory area (0), and the determined hit/miss determination value data is set in the special symbol hit flag area of the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5126.

In step S5126, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process to determine the special symbol to be stopped. In this special symbol determination process, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 144 is referenced, and the special symbol to be stopped is determined based on the winning/losing determination value data and the special symbol random number value as the start information of the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination memory area (0), and the determined information on the special symbol to be stopped is set in the special symbol stop symbol number area of the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5127.

In step S5127, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. Here, the "special symbol variation pattern" is information that defines the variation mode of the special symbol, and is associated with at least the variation display time of the special symbol. In the special symbol variation pattern determination process, a special symbol variation pattern table (not shown) is referenced, and the special symbol variation pattern is determined based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win/lose), the stopped symbol of the special symbol, the random number value for performance selection, etc. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5128.

In addition, by including information on the variation pattern of the special symbol in the parameters of the "special symbol effect start command" described below, the sub-CPU 301 that receives the special symbol effect start command can control the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern of the special symbol.

In step S5128, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display time setting process to set the variable display time of the special symbol. In this special symbol variable display time setting process, the variable display time of the special symbol is determined based on the variable pattern of the special symbol determined in step S5127 above, and the determined variable display time of the special symbol is set in the special symbol waiting time counter in the main RAM 203. This starts the variable display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164. After performing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5129.

In step S5129, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In other words, it sets "1" in the special symbol control state number area of the main RAM 203. By performing the process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1" in this way, after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 154) is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5130.

In step S5130, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are updated. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5131.

In step S5131, the main CPU 201 performs a process of transmitting a special symbol effect start command. In this process, a special symbol effect start command is generated based on the game state, the variation pattern of the special symbol, the stopping symbol of the special symbol, and the setting value. In other words, the special symbol effect start command includes information on the game state, the variation pattern of the special symbol, the stopping symbol of the special symbol, and the setting value. Then, the generated special symbol effect start command is set in the transmission buffer, the special symbol variable display start process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 154).

[Special pattern variable display end processing]
Next, a special symbol variable display end process executed in the special symbol control process will be described with reference to Fig. 156. Fig. 156 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In step S5141, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol control state number area of the main RAM 203 and determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", it ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 154), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "1", it moves the process to step S5142.

The processing of step S5141 is performed when the variable display time of the special pattern set in the special pattern waiting time counter in the main RAM 203 becomes 0, that is, when the variable display time of the special pattern has elapsed.

In step S5142, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination time setting process to set the symbol determination time of the special symbol. In this symbol determination time setting process, a predetermined symbol determination time of the special symbol (e.g., 540 ms) is set in a special symbol waiting time counter in the main RAM 203. This stops the variable display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5143.

The time for determining the special symbol may be determined based on at least one of the game state, the result of the special symbol winning/losing determination process, and the variation pattern of the special symbol.

In step S5143, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". That is, it sets "2" in the special symbol control state number area of the main RAM 203. By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" in this way, after the special symbol variable display ending process is completed, the special symbol game determination process (see S5115 in FIG. 154) is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5144.

In step S5144, the main CPU 201 performs a process for transmitting a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a special symbol effect stop command is generated based on the game state and the special symbol to be stopped. In other words, the special symbol effect stop command includes information on the game state and the special symbol to be stopped. Then, the generated special symbol effect stop command is set in the transmission buffer, the special symbol variable display end process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 154).

[Special symbol game determination process]
Next, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in the special symbol control process will be described with reference to Fig. 157. Fig. 157 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In step S5161, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol control state number area of the main RAM 203 and determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol control process, and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "2", it moves the process to step S5162.

The processing of step S5161 is performed when the pattern determination time of the special pattern set in the special pattern waiting time counter of the main RAM 203 becomes 0, that is, when the pattern determination time of the special pattern has elapsed.

In step S5162, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol hit flag area of the main RAM 203 and determines whether or not the hit/miss determination value data for a jackpot is stored, i.e., whether or not a jackpot has occurred. If the main CPU 201 determines that a jackpot has occurred, it transfers the process to step S5163, and if it determines that a jackpot has not occurred, it transfers the process to step S5172.

In step S5163, the main CPU 201 performs initialization processing of the game state.
In the initialization process of the game state, the time-saving state flag indicating that the game state is in the time-saving game state and the time-saving count counter which is the end condition of the time-saving game state are cleared. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to step S5164.

In step S5164, the main CPU 201 performs a first route jackpot start preparation setting process from the first route triggered by a jackpot. In this first route jackpot start preparation setting process, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol stop symbol number area of the main RAM 203, determines the OP waiting time (opening time) based on the "special symbol stop symbol" of the jackpot, and sets the determined OP waiting time (opening time) in the special symbol wait time counter of the main RAM 203. In addition, the main CPU 201 determines the maximum number of rounds based on the "special symbol stop symbol" of the jackpot, and sets the determined maximum number of rounds in the jackpot round number upper limit value area of the main RAM 203. In addition, the main CPU 201 sets a "jackpot open state flag" indicating a jackpot state in the open state area of the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5165.

In step S5165, the main CPU 201 performs a process for generating an external signal for a jackpot from the first route. In this process for generating an external signal for a jackpot, the main CPU 201 references the special symbol stop symbol number area of the main RAM 203, generates a jackpot signal corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol, and sets the generated jackpot signal in the hit signal management data area of the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5166.

In step S5166, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". That is, it sets "3" in the special symbol control state number area of the main RAM 203. By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the process of preparing to open the large prize opening, which will be described later, will be performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5167.

In step S5167, the main CPU 201 performs processing to transmit a jackpot start display command. In this processing, the jackpot start display command is generated based on the game status and the stopped special symbols. In other words, the jackpot start display command includes information on the game status and the stopped special symbols. The generated jackpot start display command is then set in the transmission buffer, and processing proceeds to step S5168.

In step S5168, the main CPU 201 clears the winning/losing determination value data. In other words, it clears the special symbol winning flag area of the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display ending process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 154).

In step S5172, if the main CPU 201 determines that the reel is not a big win, it refers to the special symbol win flag area of the main RAM 203 and determines whether or not the win/loss determination value data for a small win is stored, i.e., whether or not the reel is a small win. If the main CPU 201 determines that the reel is a small win, it transfers the process to step S5173, and if it determines that the reel is not a small win (i.e., a miss), it transfers the process to step S5182.

In step 5173, the main CPU 201 performs a small win start preparation setting process. In this small win start preparation setting process, the special symbol stop symbol number area of the main RAM 203 is referenced, and the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "special symbol stop symbol" of the small win, and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is set in the special symbol waiting time counter of the main RAM 203. In addition, the maximum number of openings is determined based on the "special symbol stop symbol" of the small win, and the determined maximum number of openings is set as the upper limit value of the small win opening number of the main RAM 203. Furthermore, a "small win opening state flag" indicating a small win state is set in the opening state area of the main RAM 203. Furthermore, in the small win start preparation setting process, the opening waiting time is determined as the opening pattern of the V winning hole 5156 based on the "stop pattern of the special pattern" of the small win, and the determined opening waiting time is set in the V winning hole closing timer counter of the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5174.

In step S5174, the main CPU 201 performs external signal generation processing for a small win. In this external signal generation processing for a small win, the main CPU 201 references the special symbol stop symbol number area of the main RAM 203, generates a small win signal corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol, and sets the generated small win signal in the hit signal management data area of the main RAM 203.

In step S5175, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". That is, it sets "3" in the special symbol control state number area of the main RAM 203. By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the process of preparing to open the large prize opening, which will be described later, will be performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. After performing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5176.

In step S5176, the main CPU 201 performs processing to transmit a small win start display command. In this processing, a small win start display command is generated based on the game state and the stopped special symbols. In other words, the small win start display command includes information on the game state and the stopped special symbols. The generated small win start display command is then set in the transmission buffer, and processing proceeds to step S5168.

In step S5181, if the main CPU 201 determines that the winning combination is neither a big win nor a small win, it performs a time-saving count counter update process. In this process, it subtracts 1 from the time-saving count counter in the main RAM 203 to update it, and determines whether the updated time-saving count counter = 0. If it determines that the time-saving count counter = 0, it clears the time-saving state flag area in the main RAM 203 and transitions the game state from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5182.

In step S5182, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 158. Note that, when the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end processing, it returns the processing to the special symbol control processing.

It is preferable to set an interruption prohibited area at the start of the special symbol game determination process, and to perform the special symbol game determination process within the interruption prohibited area.

[Special symbol game end processing]
Next, the special symbol game ending process executed in the special symbol game determination process will be described with reference to Fig. 158. Fig. 158 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game ending process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In step S5191, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In other words, it sets "0" in the special symbol control state number area of the main RAM 203. In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5192.

In step S5192, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of confirming and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5193.

In step S5193, the main CPU 201 performs a process for transmitting a special symbol game end command. In this process, a special symbol game end command is generated based on the game state and the stopped special symbols. In other words, the special symbol game end command includes information on the game state and the stopped special symbols. Then, after setting the generated special symbol game end command in the transmission buffer, the special symbol game end process is terminated and the process is returned to the special symbol game determination process.

[Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, the special prize opening preparation process executed by the special symbol control process will be described with reference to Fig. 159. Fig. 159 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In step S5201, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol control state number area of the main RAM 203 and determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", it ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol control process, and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "3", it moves the process to step S5202.

In step S5202, the main CPU 201 refers to the open state area of the main RAM 203 and determines whether the open state flag is a "jackpot state flag" corresponding to a jackpot, i.e., whether or not a jackpot has occurred. If the main CPU 201 determines that a jackpot has occurred, it transfers processing to step S5203, and if it determines that a jackpot has not occurred, it transfers processing to step S5220.

In step S5203, the main CPU 201 loads a "round counter value" from the round counter in the main RAM 203. The "round counter" is a counter that counts the number of rounds played in the jackpot game state. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5204.

In step S5204, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded round counter value is the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds. If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of jackpot rounds is the upper limit, it transfers processing to step S5205, and if it determines that the number of jackpot rounds is not the upper limit, it transfers processing to step S5209.

In step S5205, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end preparation setting process. In this jackpot end preparation setting process, the ED waiting time (ending time) is determined based on the "stopped special symbol" of the jackpot, and the determined ED waiting time (ending time) is set in the special symbol waiting time counter in the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5206.

In step S5206, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In other words, "5" is set in the special symbol control state number area of the main RAM 203. By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" in this way, the jackpot game state end process, which will be described later, will be performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5207.

In step S5207, the main CPU 201 performs processing for transmitting a jackpot end display command. In this processing, a jackpot end display command is generated based on the game state and the stopped special symbols. In other words, the jackpot end display command includes information on the game state and the stopped special symbols. Then, after setting the generated jackpot end display command in the transmission buffer, the jackpot opening preparation processing is terminated and processing is returned to the special symbol control processing.

In step S5208, the main CPU 201 performs processing to add 1 to the round counter value in the main RAM 203. After performing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to step S5209.

In step S5209, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening setting process to open the first large prize opening 5131. In this first large prize opening setting process, the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 5131 in the current round is determined based on the "stopped special symbol" of the jackpot and the current round number (round counter value), and the determined maximum opening time is set in the special symbol waiting time counter of the main RAM 203. Then, first large prize opening opening control data for opening the first large prize opening 5131 is generated for the first special power solenoid 5135. This causes the first large prize opening 5131 to open. After performing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5210.

In step S5210, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4." In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4," the large prize opening opening control process is performed after the large prize opening opening preparation process is completed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5211.

In step S5211, the main CPU 201 performs processing to transmit a command to display when the large prize opening is in progress. In this processing, the command to display when the large prize opening is in progress is generated based on the game status and the special symbols that are stopped. In other words, the command to display when the large prize opening is in progress contains information on the game status and the special symbols that are stopped. Then, after setting the generated command to display when the large prize opening is in progress in the transmission buffer, the process to prepare to open the large prize opening is terminated, and processing is returned to the special symbol control processing.

In step S5220, the main CPU 201 performs a small win game closure process. This small win game closure process will be described later with reference to FIG. 160. After the main CPU 201 ends the small win game closure process, it returns the process to the special symbol control process.

[Small hit game closure processing]
Next, the small win game closing process executed by the large prize opening preparation process will be described with reference to Fig. 160. Fig. 160 is a flow chart showing an example of the small win game closing process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In step S5221, the main CPU 201 loads the "small win opening count counter value" from the small win opening count counter in the main RAM 203. The "small win opening count counter" is a counter that counts the number of times a small win has been opened. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5222.

In step S5222, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded small win opening counter value is the upper limit of the small win opening count. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is the upper limit of the small win opening count, it transfers processing to step S5227, and if it determines that it is not the upper limit of the small win opening count, it transfers processing to step S5223.

In step S5223, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls entering the second large prize opening 5151 in the small win game state (number of winning balls in the second large prize opening 5151) is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value of the second large prize opening counter counted by the second large prize opening count switch 5152 is the predetermined maximum number of winning balls for the second large prize opening 5151 (for example, 10 balls). If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of winning balls in the second large prize opening 5151 is not the maximum number of winning balls, it transfers the process to step S5224, and if it determines that the number of winning balls in the second large prize opening 5151 is the maximum number of winning balls, it transfers the process to step S5227.

In step S5224, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the small win opening count counter value. After performing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5225.

In step S5225, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening setting process to open the second large prize opening 5151. In this second large prize opening setting process, the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 5151 is determined based on the "stopped special symbol" of the small prize and the current number of openings (small prize opening counter value), and the determined maximum opening time is set in the special symbol waiting time counter of the main RAM 203. Then, second large prize opening opening control data for opening the second large prize opening 5151 is generated for the second special electric solenoid 5155. This causes the second large prize opening 5151 to open. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5226.

In step S5226, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". That is, "4" is set in the special symbol control state number area of the main RAM 203. In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4", the large prize opening control process is performed after the small prize game closure process ends. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the small prize game closure process and returns the process to the special symbol control process.

In step S5227, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a V winning has been detected. In this process, it determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the V winning port 5156 within a specified time (i.e., whether or not detection has occurred by the V winning port switch 5157). If the main CPU 201 determines that a V winning has been detected, it transfers processing to step S5228, and if it determines that a V winning has not been detected, it transfers processing to step S5235.

In step S5228, the main CPU 201 performs initialization processing of the game state.
In the initialization process of the game state, the time-saving state flag indicating that the game state is in the time-saving game state and the time-saving count counter which is the end condition of the time-saving game state are cleared. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to step S5229.

In step S5229, the main CPU 201 performs a second route jackpot start preparation setting process from the second route triggered by a small jackpot. In this second route jackpot start preparation setting process, the maximum number of rounds is determined based on the "stopped special symbols" of the small jackpot, and the determined maximum number of rounds is set as the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds in the main RAM 203. In addition, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "stopped special symbols" of the small jackpot, and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is set in the special symbol waiting time counter in the main RAM 203. In addition, a "jackpot open state flag" indicating a jackpot state is set in the open state area of the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5230.

In step S5230, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the jackpot game state from the second route starts from the second round of round play. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5231.

In step S5231, the main CPU 201 performs external signal generation processing for a jackpot from the second route. In this external signal generation processing for a jackpot, the special symbol stop symbol number area of the main RAM 203 is referenced, a jackpot signal corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol is generated, and the generated jackpot signal is set in the hit signal management data area of the main RAM 203. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S5232.

In step S5232, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", after the small win game closure process ends, the large prize opening opening preparation process is performed as the big win game state. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5233.

In step S5233, the main CPU 201 performs a process for transmitting a V hit start display command. In this process, a V hit start display command is generated based on the game state and the stopped special symbol. In other words, the V hit start display command includes information on the game state and the stopped special symbol. Then, the generated V hit start display command is set in the transmission buffer, the small hit game open process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol control process.

In step S5234, the main CPU 201 performs a small win end preparation setting process. In this small win end preparation setting process, the ED waiting time (ending time) is determined based on the "stopped special symbol" of the small win, and the determined ED waiting time (ending time) is set to the special symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5235.

In step S5235, the main CPU 201 performs a process for transmitting a small win end display command. In this process, the small win end display command is generated based on the game status and the stopped special symbols. In other words, the small win end display command includes information on the game status and the stopped special symbols. The generated small win end display command is then set in the transmission buffer, and the process proceeds to step S5236.

In step S5236, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 158 is performed. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 ends the small win game closure processing and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing.

[Big prize opening control process]
Next, the special prize opening control process executed in the special symbol control process will be described with reference to Fig. 161. Fig. 161 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In step S5241, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol control state number area of the main RAM 203 and determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", it ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol control process, and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "4", it moves the process to step S5242.

In step S5242, the main CPU 201 refers to the open state area of the main RAM 203 and determines whether the open state flag is a "jackpot state flag" corresponding to a jackpot, i.e., whether or not a jackpot has occurred. If the main CPU 201 determines that a jackpot has occurred, it transfers processing to step S5243, and if it determines that a jackpot has not occurred, it transfers processing to step S5250.

In step S5243, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of winning game balls that entered the first large prize opening 5131 in one round when the first large prize opening 5131 was opened is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value of the first large prize opening counter counted by the first large prize opening count switch 5132 is the predetermined maximum number of winning balls for the first large prize opening 5131 (e.g., 10 balls).

If the main CPU 201 determines in step S5243 that the number of winnings at the first large winning slot 5131 is not the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to step S5244, and if it determines that the number of winnings at the first large winning slot 5131 is the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to step S5245.

In step S5244, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 5131 in one round has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the opening setting process for the first large prize opening (see FIG. 159) has elapsed.

If the main CPU 201 determines in step S5144 that the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 5131 has not elapsed, it ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol control process. If the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 5131 has elapsed, it transfers the process to step S5245.

In step S5245, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening closure setting process to close the first large prize opening 5131. In this first large prize opening closure setting process, the closure time of the first large prize opening 5131 in the current round is determined based on the "stopped special symbol" and the current round number (round counter value), and the determined closure time is set in the special symbol waiting time counter in the main RAM 203. Then, first large prize opening closure control data for closing the first large prize opening 5131 is generated for the first special power solenoid 5135. This causes the first large prize opening 5131 to close. After performing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5246.

In step S5246, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In other words, "3" is set in the special symbol control state number area of the main RAM 203. By performing the process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" in this way, the large prize opening preparation process will be performed again after this large prize opening control process is completed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5247.

In step S5247, the main CPU 201 performs processing for transmitting an inter-round display command. In this processing, the inter-round display command is generated based on the game state and the stopped special symbols. In other words, the inter-round display command includes information on the game state and the stopped special symbols. Then, after setting the generated inter-round display command in the transmission buffer, the large prize opening control processing is terminated and processing is returned to the special symbol control processing.

In step S5250, the main CPU 201 performs a process during the opening of the small win game. This process during the opening of the small win game will be described later with reference to FIG. 162. After the main CPU 201 ends the process during the opening of the small win game, it returns the process to the special symbol control process.

[Small hit game open processing]
Next, the small win game open process executed in the large prize opening control process will be described with reference to Fig. 162. Fig. 162 is a flow chart showing an example of the small win game open process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In step S5251, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 5151 in the small win game state (the number of winning balls in the second large winning opening 5151) is the maximum number of winning balls. If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of winning balls in the second large winning opening 5151 is the maximum number of winning balls, it transfers the process to step S5253, and if it determines that the number of winning balls in the second large winning opening 5151 is not the maximum number of winning balls, it transfers the process to step S5252.

In step S5252, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 5151 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the second large prize opening opening setting process (see FIG. 160) has elapsed. If the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 5151 has not elapsed, it ends the small win game opening process and returns the process to the special symbol control process. In addition, if the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 5151 has elapsed, it transfers the process to step S5253.

In step S5253, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening closure setting process to close the second large prize opening 5151. In this second large prize opening closure setting process, the current closure time of the second large prize opening 5151 is determined based on the "stopped special symbol" and the current number of openings (small win opening count counter value), and the determined closure time is set in the special symbol waiting time counter in the main RAM 203. Then, second large prize opening closure control data for closing the second large prize opening 5151 is generated for the second special current solenoid 5155. This causes the second large prize opening 5151 to close. After performing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5254.

In step S5254, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". That is, it sets "3" in the special symbol control state number area of the main RAM 203. By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" in this way, the large prize opening preparation process will be performed again after the small prize game opening process ends. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the small prize game opening process and returns the process to the special symbol control process.

[Jackpot game state termination process]
Next, a big win gaming state ending process executed by the special symbol control process will be described with reference to Fig. 163. Fig. 163 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win gaming state ending process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In step S5261, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol control state number area of the main RAM 203 and determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", it ends the jackpot game state end process and returns the process to the special symbol control process, and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "5", it transfers the process to step S5262.

In step S5262, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot game information initialization process. In this jackpot game information initialization process, various flags and data used in the jackpot game state or the small jackpot game state, and the values of various counters (e.g., round counters, large prize slot winning counters, etc.) are cleared or reset. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5263.

In step S5263, the main CPU 201 performs a post-jackpot state setting process to set the game state after the end of the jackpot game state. In this post-jackpot state setting process, a time-saving state flag and a time-saving count counter corresponding to the variable display count of the special pattern are set based on the stopped special pattern. After performing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5264.

In step S5264, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 158 is performed. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot game state end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing.

It is preferable that the jackpot game state end process be performed within an interrupt prohibited section set at the start of the jackpot game state end process.

[Normal symbol control process]
Next, the normal symbol control process executed by the main control main process will be described with reference to Fig. 164. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in Fig. 164, the main CPU 201 stores the start information of the normal symbol, and judges whether the judgment start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

Figure 164 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the numbers ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in Figure 164 are control state numbers for the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

In step S5300, the main CPU 201 determines whether the normal pattern waiting time (the normal pattern waiting time counter in the main RAM 203) is 0. This normal pattern waiting time is set as the waiting time for various processes in the normal pattern control process, and the normal pattern waiting time is timed (decremented) in the timer counter update process (step S5022) of the main control main process described above. If the main CPU 201 determines that the normal pattern waiting time is not 0, it ends the normal pattern control process and returns the process to the main control main process, and if it determines that the normal pattern waiting time is 0, it moves the process to step S5301.

In step S5301, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5310. The main CPU 201 performs the processes from step S5310 onward based on the control state number read in the process of S5201.

In step S5310, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol variable display start process. This process is performed when the normal symbol control state number is "0" by referring to the normal symbol control state number area of the main RAM 203. If the normal symbol control state number is not "0", the main CPU 201 executes this process and then transfers the process to step S5230.

In this normal pattern variable display start process, if there are balls reserved for the normal pattern, the main CPU 201 shifts the normal pattern start information (random number value for determining whether the normal pattern is a hit, the pattern random number value of the normal pattern, etc.) stored in the normal pattern start memory area to the normal pattern determination area. After that, based on the random number value for determining whether the normal pattern is a hit stored in the normal pattern determination area, the "normal pattern hit/miss determination value data (normal pattern hit or normal pattern miss)" is determined. Next, based on the above-mentioned normal pattern hit/miss determination value data and the pattern random number value of the normal pattern stored in the normal pattern determination area, the "normal pattern stop pattern" is determined. Furthermore, based on the game state and the normal pattern stop pattern, etc., the "second start hole opening pattern" that defines the opening mode of the second start hole is determined. Then, based on the game state, etc., the "normal symbol variable display time" is determined, the determined normal symbol variable display time is set in the normal symbol waiting time counter in the main RAM 203, and the normal symbol control state number is set to "1."

In step S5320, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol variable display end process. This process is performed when the normal symbol control state number is "1" by referring to the normal symbol control state number area of the main RAM 203. If the normal symbol control state number is not "1", the main CPU 201 executes this process and then transfers the process to step S5230.

In this normal pattern variable display end process, the main CPU 201 judges whether the normal pattern variable display time has ended, and when it judges that the normal pattern variable display time has ended, it sets a predetermined normal pattern pattern determination time (e.g., 540 msec) in the normal pattern waiting time counter in the main RAM 203, and sets the normal pattern control state number to "2". If the normal pattern variable display time has not ended, it holds the normal pattern control state number at "1" and waits for the normal pattern variable display time to end.

In step S5330, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol game play determination process. This process is performed when the normal symbol control state number area of the main RAM 203 is referenced and the normal symbol control state number is "2". If the normal symbol control state number is not "2", the main CPU 201 executes this process and then moves to step S5340.

In this normal symbol game judgment process, the main CPU 201 performs a judgment process of the stopped symbol (e.g., normal symbol winning or normal symbol missing) of the stopped normal symbol. If the main CPU 201 judges that the stopped symbol of the stopped normal symbol corresponds to a normal symbol winning, it sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "3", and if it judges that the result of the normal symbol winning judgment process corresponds to a losing, it sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "0".

In step S5340, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric role release process. This process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3" by referring to the normal symbol control state number area of the main RAM 203. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 executes this process and then moves to step S5350.

In this normal electric device opening process, the main CPU 201 operates the normal power shutter 5147 in accordance with the operation of the second start hole opening pattern to open and close the second start hole 5140. Then, when a specified number of game balls for normal power (e.g., three) enter the second start hole 5140 or when all the operations of the determined second start hole opening pattern are completed, the second start hole 5140 is closed, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4", and the normal electric device opening process is terminated.

In step S5350, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol hit end process. This process is performed when the normal symbol control state number area in the main RAM 203 is referenced and the normal symbol control state number is "4". In this normal symbol hit end process, various data set in the normal electric role release process in S5340 above is cleared. If the normal symbol control state number is not "4", the main CPU 201 returns the process to the main control main process.

[System timer interrupt processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 165, the system timer interrupt process will be described. This process is called when a timeout interrupt input from a timer counter occurs, and is executed, for example, at a period (interrupt period) of 2 msec. Fig. 165 is a flow chart showing an example of the system timer interrupt process in the fifth pachinko game machine.

In step S5411, the main CPU 201 performs a protection register save process to save a protection register (e.g., an AF register) to a stack. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5412.

In step S5412, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt counter increment update process to increment the interrupt counter in the main RAM 203 by "1". After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5413.

In step S5413, the main CPU 201 performs a random number update process to update various random number counters (e.g., random number values for determining a jackpot, etc.). In this way, by performing a random number update process at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are an important factor in determining balls dispensed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5414.

In step S5414, the main CPU 201 performs a read process of the input port of the I/O port 205. In this input port read process, an input filter process is performed to read information from various switches such as the first start port switch 5121, the second start port switch 5141, the passing gate switch 5127, the first large prize port count switch 5132, the second large prize port count switch 5152, the game ball recovery switch 5179, and the general prize port switch 123.

In addition, in this input port reading process, first, the game stop state flag area in the game area of the main RAM 203 is referenced to determine whether or not the game is stopped (game stop state flag area = 1). If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is stopped, it transfers processing to step S5415 without reading information about the various switches from the input port buffer. On the other hand, the main CPU 201 reads information about the various switches from the input port buffer only if it determines that the game is not stopped, and transfers processing to step S5415 when reading is completed.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the game is stopped due to the game stop function, information from various switches is not read from the input port.

In step S5415, the main CPU 201 performs a switch input detection process. Details of this switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 166. After performing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5416.

The switch input detection process of step S5415 is also executed when the game is stopped by the game stop function, but as described above, when the game is stopped by the game stop function, the input port buffer is cleared in the game stop function initialization process (FIG. 151), the input port reading process is not performed in step S5414, and the information in the input port buffer is not updated. Therefore, when the game is stopped by the game stop function, the on edge of the input port buffer is not detected, and the switch input detection process of step S5415 can be disabled.

The game stop state flag area in the game area of the main RAM 203 may be referenced, and if the game is stopped (game stop state flag area = 1), the switch input detection process of step S5415 may not be performed. However, the switch input detection process of step S5415 may be performed only if the game is not stopped (game stop state flag area = 0).

In step S5416, the main CPU 201 performs a game LED lighting data output process. In this game LED lighting data output process, LED data for lighting the game LEDs of the normal symbol display unit 161, the normal symbol reserved display unit 162, the first special symbol display unit 163, the second special symbol display unit 164, the first special symbol reserved display unit 165, the second special symbol reserved display unit 166, and the time-saving notification display unit 168 is set in the output port buffer in accordance with the game status, and the LED output is controlled. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5417.

The game LED lighting data output process of step S5416 is executed even when the game is stopped by the game stop function, but as described above, when the game is stopped by the game stop function, the output port buffer is cleared in the game stop function initialization process (FIG. 151) of the main control main process, and the output port buffer is also cleared in the game stop function initialization process of the game stop function control process, as described below. Therefore, when the game is stopped by the game stop function, the output port buffer set in the game LED lighting data output process of step S5416 is cleared, and the game LED lighting data output process of step S5416 can be disabled.

The game stop state flag area in the game area of the main RAM 203 may be referenced, and if the game is stopped (game stop state flag area = 1), the game LED lighting data output process may not be performed. However, the game LED lighting data output process of step S5416 may be performed only if the game is not stopped (game stop state flag area = 0).

In step S5417, the main CPU 201 performs a prize information command setting process. In this prize information command setting process, the main CPU 201 references a prize information command table, generates a prize information command based on information from the various input port buffers, and sets the generated prize information command in the transmission buffer. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5418.

The winning information command setting process in step S5417 is executed even when play is stopped by the game stop function. However, as described above, when play is stopped by the game stop function, the input port buffer is cleared in the game stop function initialization process (FIG. 151), the input port reading process is not performed in step S5414, and the information in the input port buffer is not updated. Therefore, when play is stopped by the game stop function, the winning information command setting process in step S5417 can be disabled.

The game stop state flag area in the game area of the main RAM 203 may be referenced, and if the game is in a stopped state (game stop state flag area = 1), the winning information command setting process may not be performed, but only if the game is not in a stopped state (game stop state flag area = 0), the winning information command setting process of step S5417 may be performed.

In step S5418, the main CPU 201 performs a performance display monitor control process. The performance display monitor control process is performed using the working area (outside area) of the main RAM 203. This performance display monitor control process includes determining the game status, updating the winning ball counter and out counter, and updating the display contents of the performance display monitor 6170. This performance display monitor control process will be described in detail later. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5419.

In step S5419, the main CPU 201 performs a game stop function control process. In this game stop function control process, the difference in the number of game balls is updated, the game stop function phase is updated, a game stop state related to the game stop function is set, and a game stop function command is sent. This game stop function control process will be described in detail later. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5420.

In step S5420, the main CPU 201 performs a protection register restore process to restore from the stack the contents of the protection register that were saved in step S5411, and then in step S5421, enables interrupts.

In this way, according to the system timer interrupt process of this embodiment, when the game is stopped by the game stop function, the input port reading process of step S5414 and the switch input detection process of step S5415 are disabled. This makes it possible to disable the entry and passage of game balls into the first start gate 5120, the second start gate 5140, the passing gate 5126, the first large prize gate 5131, the second large prize gate 5151, and the general prize gate 122.

In addition, when the game is stopped by the game stop function, the game LED lighting data output process of step S5416 is disabled. This makes it possible to turn off the game LEDs of the normal symbol display unit 161, the normal symbol reserved display unit 162, the first special symbol display unit 163, the second special symbol display unit 164, the first special symbol reserved display unit 165, the second special symbol reserved display unit 166, and the time-saving notification display unit 168.

In addition, even if play is stopped by the game stop function, the performance display monitor control process of step S5418 can be executed, so the gaming facility can grasp the game results (ball payout rate, etc.) when play is stopped by the game stop function via the performance display monitor 170.

[Switch input detection process]
Next, a switch input detection process executed in the system timer interrupt process will be described with reference to Fig. 166. Fig. 166 is a flow chart showing an example of the switch input detection process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

(Out-of-area abnormality monitoring process)
In step S5501, the main CPU 201 performs outside area abnormal state monitoring processing. This processing is called by an outside area processing call command, and processes the program in the outside area of the main ROM 202, and uses the outside area of the main RAM 203. In this processing, the main CPU 201 first clears the outside area security signal request flag area and the outside area game abnormality detection flag area of the main RAM 203 used for abnormal state monitoring. After that, the main CPU 201 performs normal electric role illegal winning processing and special electric role illegal winning processing. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 switches the processing from the processing related to the outside area to the processing related to the game area by a game area processing return command.

In the normal electric device illegal winning processing, the main CPU 201 monitors for illegal winning at the second start port 5140 while the normal electric device 5146 is not in operation, and if an illegal winning occurs (for example, if a ball enters the second start port 5140 while the normal electric device 5146 is not in operation), it sets a request flag in the outside area security signal request flag area and sets a request flag in the outside area game abnormality detection flag area. Then, it clears the input port buffer of the second start port 5140 and invalidates the entry of the game ball into the second start port 5140.

In the special electric device illegal winning processing, the main CPU 201 monitors the first large winning opening 5131 or the second large winning opening 5151 for illegal winning while the special electric device is not in operation (while the first large winning opening 5131 or the second large winning opening 5151 is opening or closing), and if an illegal winning occurs (for example, when a game ball enters the first large winning opening 5131 while the first large winning opening 5131 is closed), it sets a request flag in the outside area security signal request flag area and sets a request flag in the outside area game abnormality detection flag area. Then, it clears the input port buffer of the first large winning opening 5131 or the second large winning opening 5151, and invalidates the entry of game balls into the first large winning opening 5131 or the second large winning opening 5151.

(Abnormal state monitoring process)
In step S5502, the main CPU 201 performs an abnormal state monitoring process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a game machine abnormality detection information reflection process and a security signal request setting. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to step S5510.

In the gaming machine abnormality detection information reflection process, the main CPU 201 loads a request flag from the out-of-area gaming abnormality detection flag area in the out-of-area area of the main RAM 203, sets the loaded request flag in the gaming abnormality detection flag area in the gaming area of the main RAM 203, and updates the gaming abnormality detection flag.

When setting a security signal request, the main CPU 201 loads a request flag from the outside security signal request flag area in the outside area of the main RAM 203, sets the loaded request flag in the security signal request flag area in the game area of the main RAM 203, and updates the security signal request flag.

As described above, in the outside area abnormal state monitoring process and abnormal state monitoring process of this embodiment, with regard to the illegal entry of game balls, taking into consideration that the entry of game balls has a significant impact on the progress of the game, the process of detecting the illegal entry is a process related to the outside area of the main RAM 203 (outside area abnormal state monitoring process), and the process of reflecting the detection result is a process related to the game area of the main RAM 203 (abnormal state monitoring process).

(Normal pattern related check processing)
In step S5510, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol related check process. In this process, the main CPU 201 checks the input port buffers of the pass gate switch 5127 and the second start port switch 5141, and when the on edge of the pass gate switch 5127 is detected, it performs a normal symbol operation switch detection process, and when the on edge of the second start port switch 5141 is detected, it performs a normal electric role winning process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5520.

In the process when the normal symbol activation switch is detected, if there is free space in the normal symbol start memory area (1) to the normal symbol start memory area (4), the main CPU 201 acquires various random number values (for example, random number values for determining whether the normal symbol is a hit, random number values for the normal symbol, etc.) as start information for the normal symbol, and stores the acquired various random number values in a single normal symbol start memory area in FIFO (First In, First Out) format. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the normal symbol start memory areas (1) to (4), the process when the normal symbol activation switch is detected will end without acquiring various random number values.

When processing a normal electric device winning, the main CPU 201 updates the normal electric device winning counter only when the normal electric device 5146 is in operation.

(Special pattern related check processing)
In step S5520, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol related check process. In this process, the input port buffers of the first start port switch 6121, the second start port switch 6141, the first large prize port count switch 5132, the second large prize port count switch 5152, and the V prize port switch 5157 are checked, and when the on edge of the first start port switch 6121 is detected, a first special symbol operation switch detection process is performed, and when the on edge of the second start port switch 6141 is detected, a second special symbol operation switch detection process is performed. Also, when the on edge of the first large prize port count switch 5132 is detected, a first large prize port switch detection process is performed, and when the on edge of the second large prize port count switch 5152 is detected, a second large prize port switch detection process is performed. Also, when the on edge of the V prize port switch 5157 is detected, a V prize port switch detection process is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5530.

In the first special symbol activation switch detection process, if the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) have free space, the main CPU 201 acquires various random numbers (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for symbol random numbers, random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for effect selection, etc.) as start information for the first special symbol, and stores the acquired various random numbers in a single first special symbol start memory area in a FIFO format. Then, a reserved addition command indicating the reserved number of special symbols is generated, and the generated reserved addition command is set in the transmission buffer. This reserved addition command includes information corresponding to the start information of the first special symbol in addition to the reserved number of special symbols so that a pre-reading effect can be executed under certain conditions. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the first special symbol start memory areas (1) to (4), the first special symbol activation switch detection process is terminated without acquiring various random numbers.

In the process when the second special symbol activation switch is detected, similarly to the process when the first special symbol activation switch is detected, when the main CPU 201 determines that there is free space in the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (4), it acquires various random number values (e.g., random number values for jackpot determination, pattern random number values, random number values for reach determination, random number values for effect selection, etc.) as start information for the second special symbol, and stores the acquired various random number values in a single second special symbol start memory area in a FIFO format. Then, it generates a reserved addition command indicating the reserved number of special symbols, and sets the generated reserved addition command in the transmission buffer. This reserved addition command also contains information corresponding to the start information for the second special symbol, in addition to information on the reserved number of special symbols, so that a look-ahead effect can be executed under certain conditions. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the second special symbol start memory areas (1) to (4), the various random number values will not be acquired and the process upon detection of the second special symbol activation switch will end.

In this embodiment, the maximum number of first special symbols that can be reserved and the maximum number of second special symbols that can be reserved are set to four, but the maximum number of first special symbols that can be reserved and the maximum number of second special symbols that can be reserved may be different, and the design may be freely changed as appropriate, but it is preferable to keep them within four.

In the process of detecting the first large prize opening switch, the main CPU 201 determines whether the first large prize opening 5131 is open or not, and if the first large prize opening 5131 is open, updates the first large prize opening counter by adding 1.

In the process of detecting the second large prize opening switch, the main CPU 201 determines whether the second large prize opening 5151 is open, and if the second large prize opening 5151 is open, updates the second large prize opening counter by adding 1.

In the V entry port switch detection process, the main CPU 201 turns on the V entry port passing flag. Then, it generates a V passing command indicating that the game ball has passed through the V entry port 5156, and sets the generated V passing command in the transmission buffer.

(Touch status signal check process)
In step S5530, the main CPU 201 performs a touch state signal check process. In this process, a change in the touch state is determined from the input port buffer, and when an ON state of the touch state is detected, the flag is set in the payout state notification flag area of the main RAM 203 (for example, the sixth bit is turned ON). In addition, when an ON state of the touch state is detected, a launch permission signal is set in the launch permission signal management area of the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5540.

(Winning ball related switch check process)
In step S5540, the main CPU 201 performs a prize ball related switch check process. In this process, when the main CPU 201 detects an on edge of each switch (first start port switch 6121, second start port switch 6141, first large prize port count switch 5132, second large prize port count switch 5152, general prize port switch 123) from the input port buffer, it sets the number of prize balls corresponding to each switch in the payout management counter area of the main RAM 203 and updates the payout management counter. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5550.

(Out ball related switch check processing)
In step S5550, the main CPU 201 performs an out-ball-related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 201 checks the input port buffer of the game ball recovery switch 5179, and when an on-edge of the game ball recovery switch 5179 is detected, "1" is added to the out-ball number management counter area of the main RAM 203 to update the out-ball number management counter. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the current switch input detection process.

[Performance display monitor control process]
Next, a performance display monitor control process executed in the system timer interrupt process will be described with reference to Fig. 167. Fig. 167 is a flow chart showing an example of the performance display monitor control process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, the performance display monitor control process is a process that is called by an outside area process call command, and the program for executing this process is a program stored in the outside area of main ROM 202, and uses the outside area of main RAM 203.

First, in step S5561, the main CPU 201 performs a state determination process to determine the game state. In this state determination process, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the game is in a time-saving game state, a big win game state, or a small win game state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is in a time-saving game state, a big win game state, or a small win game state, it sets 0 in the performance display state flag area of the outside area. On the other hand, if the main CPU 201 determines that the game is not in a time-saving game state, a big win game state, or a small win game state, it sets a performance display state flag (=1) indicating a normal game state in the performance display state flag area of the outside area. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5562.

In step S5562, the main CPU 201 performs a prize ball number calculation process to calculate the number of prize balls as an additional value. In this prize ball number calculation process, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning detection SW processing data table, and when the on-edge of the first start port switch 6121, the second start port switch 6141, the first large winning port count switch 5132, the second large winning port count switch 5152, and the general winning port switch 123 is detected from the input port buffer, the main CPU 201 calculates the number of prize balls corresponding to the various switches as an additional value. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5563.

In step S5563, the main CPU 201 performs a normal prize ball counter addition process that increments the normal prize ball counter. In this normal prize ball counter addition process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a performance display state flag (normal game state) is set in the performance display state flag area of the outside area. If the main CPU 201 determines that the performance display state flag is set, it adds the addition value (number of prize balls) calculated in step S5562 above to the normal prize ball counter area of the outside area and moves the process to step S5564. On the other hand, if the main CPU 201 determines that the performance display state flag is not set, it does not perform addition to the normal prize ball counter area of the outside area and moves the process to step S5564.

As a result, the number of prize balls in normal game mode will be stored in the normal prize ball counter area in the outside area of the main RAM 203.

In step S5564, the main CPU 201 performs an acquired game ball counter addition process that increments the acquired game ball counter. In this acquired game ball counter addition process, the main CPU 201 adds the addition value (number of prize balls) calculated in step S5562 above to the acquired game ball counter area in the outside area, and then proceeds to step S5565.

In step S5565, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there has been an input to the game ball recovery switch 5179. More specifically, the input port buffer of the game ball recovery switch 5179 is checked, and the on-edge of the game ball recovery switch 5179 is determined. If the main CPU 201 determines that there has been an input to the game ball recovery switch 5179, it transfers the process to step S5564, and if it determines that there has been no input to the game ball recovery switch 5179, it transfers the process to step S5568.

In step S5566, the main CPU 201 performs a normal out counter increment process to increment the normal out counter. In this normal out counter increment process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a performance display state flag (normal game state) is set in the performance display state flag area of the outside area. If the main CPU 201 determines that the performance display state flag is set, it adds "1" to the normal out counter area of the outside area and moves the process to step S5567. On the other hand, if the main CPU 201 determines that the performance display state flag is not set, it does not increment the normal out counter area of the outside area and moves the process to step S5567.

As a result, the number of out balls in normal gameplay will be stored in the normal out counter area in the outside area of the main RAM 203.

In step S5567, the main CPU 201 performs a total out counter increment process to increment the total out counter. In this total out counter increment process, the main CPU 201 adds "1" to the total out counter area of the outside area, and then proceeds to step S5568.

As a result, the total out counter area in the outside area of the main RAM 203 will store the number of out balls regardless of the game state.

In step S5068, the main CPU 201 performs a performance display monitor display process to turn on and off the LED of the performance display monitor 170. In this process, the main CPU 201 sets a blinking cycle timer so that the identification segment switches every predetermined cycle (e.g., 5 seconds), and sets the data of the identification segment and ratio segment to be displayed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the current performance display monitor control process.

In this way, in the performance display monitor control process of this embodiment, the added value (number of prize balls) calculated by the prize ball number calculation process in step S5562 above is added to the normal prize ball number counter area in the area outside the area used by the performance display monitor 17, and is also added to the acquired game ball number counter area in the area outside the area used by the game stop function. This means that part of the control process (module) used in the game stop function is shared with the control process used by the performance display monitor 17, making it possible to reduce the capacity of the control program and alleviate the control burden.

[GameStop function control process]
Next, a game stop function control process executed in the system timer interrupt process will be described with reference to Fig. 168. Fig. 168 is a flow chart showing an example of the game stop function control process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In step S5601, the main CPU 201 refers to the game stop state flag area in the game area of the main RAM 203 and determines whether or not the game is stopped (game stop state flag area = 1). If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is stopped, it ends the current game stop function control process, and if it determines that the game is not stopped, it moves the process to step S5602.

In step S5602, the main CPU 201 performs a game stop function status check process. This process is called by an outside area process call command, and processes a program in the outside area of the main ROM 202, and uses the outside area of the main RAM 203. In the game stop function status check process, the difference in the number of game balls is updated, the game stop function phase is updated, and so on. This game stop function status check process will be described in detail later. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5603.

In step S5603, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load a game stop function phase from a game stop function phase area in an area outside the main RAM 203. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to step S5604.

In step S5604, the main CPU 201 stores the game stop function phase loaded from the area outside the main RAM 203 in the stop function state parameter area in the game area of the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5605.

In this way, by the processing of steps S5603 and S5604, the game stop function phase stored in the outer area of the main RAM 203 can be transferred to the game area of the main RAM 203.

In step S5605, the main CPU 201 refers to the stop function state parameter area in the game area of the main RAM 203 and determines whether the game stop function phase is the game stop function operation completion phase (=3). If the main CPU 201 determines that it is the game stop function operation completion phase, it transfers processing to step S5611, and if it determines that it is not the game stop function operation completion phase, it transfers processing to step S5606.

In step S5606, the main CPU 201 performs a process to load the difference ball notification information (first difference ball information) from the difference ball notification information area in the outside area of the main RAM 203. After performing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5607.

In step S5607, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded difference ball notification information is not equal to 0, that is, whether there is difference ball notification information. If the main CPU 201 determines that there is difference ball notification information, it moves the process to step S5608, and if it determines that there is no difference ball notification information, it ends the current game stop function control process.

As will be described in more detail later, the ball difference notification information is normally cleared each time, and when the change in the difference in the number of game balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the first ball difference information is stored as the ball difference notification information. Therefore, the determination of the presence or absence of ball difference notification information in step S5607 above corresponds to the determination of whether or not the change in the difference in the number of game balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined value.

In step S5608, the main CPU 201 stores (transfers) the difference ball notification information (first difference ball information) loaded from the outside area of the main RAM 203 to the stop function difference ball number parameter area in the game area of the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5609.

In this way, the processing of steps S5606 and S5608 above allows the first ball difference information stored in the outside area of the main RAM 203 to be transferred to the game area of the main RAM 203. Note that in this embodiment, the first ball difference information stored in the ball difference notification information area of the outside area is configured to be transferred to the stop function ball difference number parameter area in the game area, but the first ball difference information stored in the ball difference judgment counter area of the outside area may also be configured to be transferred to the stop function ball difference number parameter area in the game area.

In step S5609, the main CPU 201 sets a "game stop function state command." In this process, the main CPU 201 references the game stop function state command table and generates a game stop function state command from the identification data of the game stop function state command (e.g., D3H) and the information stored in the stop function state parameter area and the stop function number of balls difference parameter area in the game area of the main RAM 203. In other words, the game stop function state command is composed of the identification data, game stop function phase information, and first ball difference information. The composition of this game stop function state command will be described in detail later. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5610.

In step S5610, the main CPU 201 performs a presentation control command transmission process to transmit a game stop function status command to the sub-control circuit 300. In this process, the game stop function completion command generated in step S5609 above is set in the transmission buffer. Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the current game stop function control process.

In step S5611, the main CPU 201 performs a game stop function initialization process. This game stop function initialization process is as described above in FIG. 151, and clears the output data of the display unit (LED) related to the special and normal symbols, and clears the input data of the various switches that detect the game ball. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5612.

In step S5612, the main CPU 201 clears the winning flags for the special and normal symbols. Specifically, the main CPU 201 clears the special symbol winning flag area in the main RAM 203 and the normal symbol winning flag area in the main RAM 203, and clears the winning/losing determination value data for the special and normal symbols. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5613.

In step S5613, the main CPU 201 sets information indicating a game stop state (=1) in the game stop state flag area in the game area of the main RAM 203. This causes the game progress to be stopped by the game stop function. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5614.

In step S5614, the main CPU 201 sets transmission request information (=1) in the stop function completion command transmission flag area in the game area of the main RAM 203. Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the current game stop function control process.

[GameStop function status check process]
Next, a game stop function status check process executed in the game stop function control process will be described with reference to Fig. 169. Fig. 169 is a flow chart showing an example of the game stop function status check process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, the game stop function status check process is a process that is called by an outside area process call command, and the program for executing this process is a program stored in the outside area of main ROM 202, and uses the outside area of main RAM 203.

In step S5621, the main CPU 201 performs a game stop function counter update process. In the game stop function counter update process, the difference in the number of game balls is updated, etc. This game stop function counter update process will be described in detail later. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5622.

In step S5622, the main CPU 201 performs a game stop function counter check process. In the game stop function counter check process, the difference ball notification information (first difference ball information) is cleared or set. This game stop function counter check process will be described in detail later. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5623.

In step S5623, the main CPU 201 performs a game stop function state management process. In the game stop function state management process, the game stop function phase is updated, etc. This game stop function state management process will be described in detail later. When this process ends, the main CPU 201 ends the current game stop function state check process.

[GameStop function counter update process]
Next, the game stop function counter update process executed in the game stop function state check process will be described with reference to Fig. 170. Fig. 170 is a flow chart showing an example of the game stop function counter update process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, the game stop function counter update process is a process that is called by an outside area process call command, and the program for executing this process is a program stored in the outside area of main ROM 202, and uses the outside area of main RAM 203.

In step S5631, the main CPU 201 clears the added value stored in a specified register and loads the number of acquired game balls from the acquired game ball counter area in the outside area of the main RAM 203. The loaded acquired game ball number is then set in the specified register as a new added value. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5632.

In step S5632, the main CPU 201 performs a 3-byte difference ball counter addition process. In the 3-byte difference ball counter addition process, an addition process of the difference in the number of game balls is performed. This 3-byte difference ball counter addition process will be described in detail later. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5633.

In step S5633, the main CPU 201 checks the input port buffer of the game ball recovery switch 5179, and when an on edge of the game ball recovery switch 5179 is detected, a subtraction value (e.g., 1) is set in a predetermined register. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5634.

In step S5634, the main CPU 201 performs a 3-byte subtraction process on the difference ball counter. In the 3-byte subtraction process on the difference ball counter, a subtraction process is performed on the difference in the number of game balls. This 3-byte subtraction process on the difference ball counter will be described in detail later. When this process ends, the main CPU 201 ends the current game stop function counter update process.

[3-byte addition process for ball difference counter]
Next, the difference ball counter 3 byte addition process executed in the game stop function counter update process will be described with reference to Fig. 171. Fig. 171 is a flow chart showing an example of the difference ball counter 3 byte addition process in the fifth pachinko game machine.

As described above, the 3-byte difference ball counter addition process is a process that is called by an outside area process call command, and the program for executing this process is a program stored in the outside area of main ROM 202, and uses the outside area of main RAM 203.

In step S5641, the main CPU 201 determines whether the added value (number of acquired game balls) stored in a specified register is 0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the added value is 0, it ends the 3-byte addition process of the difference ball counter, and if it determines that the added value is not 0, it moves the process to step S5642.

In step S5642, the main CPU 201 loads the second ball difference information from the lower 2 bytes of the 3-byte counter (counter area for ball difference management + counter area for ball difference determination) in the area outside the main RAM 203. In other words, the second ball difference information is loaded from the counter area for ball difference management in the area outside the main RAM 203. The loaded second ball difference information is then set in the first pair register. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5643.

In step S5643, the main CPU 201 adds an additional value (the number of acquired game balls) to the second ball difference information set in the first pair register. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5644.

In step S5644, the main CPU 201 divides the result of the addition in step S5643 by 1000. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5645.

In step S5645, the main CPU 201 sets the remainder of the division result in step S5644 in the second pair register as the updated second ball difference information. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5646.

In step S5646, the main CPU 201 loads the first ball difference information from the most significant byte of the 3-byte counter in the outside area of the main RAM 203. That is, the first ball difference information is loaded from the ball difference determination counter area in the outside area of the main RAM 203. The loaded first ball difference information is then set in the single register. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5647.

In step S5647, the main CPU 201 adds the quotient of the division result in step S5644 to the first ball difference information stored in the single register to update it. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5648.

In step S5648, the main CPU 201 stores the result of the addition of the first ball difference information and the second ball difference information. That is, the first ball difference information stored in the second pair register is stored in a ball difference management counter area in the area outside the main RAM 203 to update the second ball difference information. Also, the first ball difference information stored in the single register is stored in a ball difference determination counter area in the area outside the main RAM 203 to update the first ball difference information. When this process is completed, the main CPU 201 ends the current ball difference counter 3 byte addition process.

In this way, in the 3-byte addition process of the difference ball counter in this embodiment, after adding the addition value (number of acquired game balls) to the second difference ball information in the lowest 2 bytes, the addition result is divided by 1000, the remainder of the division result is set as the updated second difference ball information, and the quotient of the division result is added to the first difference ball information to update it. Therefore, without counting all values of the 3-byte counter (000000H to FFFFFFH), the second difference ball information in the lowest 2 bytes can count values from 0 to 999, and the first difference ball information in the highest 1 byte can count values from 0 to 255.

[3-byte subtraction process for ball difference counter]
Next, referring to Fig. 172, a difference ball counter 3 byte subtraction process executed in the game stop function counter update process will be described. Fig. 172 is a flowchart showing an example of a difference ball counter 3 byte subtraction process in the fifth pachinko game machine.

As described above, the 3-byte subtraction process of the difference ball counter is a process that is called by an outside area process call command, and the program for executing this process is a program stored in the outside area of the main ROM 202, and uses the outside area of the main RAM 203.

In step S5651, the main CPU 201 determines whether the subtraction value (out ball) stored in a specified register is 0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the subtraction value is 0, it ends the 3-byte subtraction process of the difference ball counter, and if it determines that the subtraction value is not 0, it moves the process to step S5652.

In step S5652, the main CPU 201 loads the second ball difference information from the lower 2 bytes of the 3-byte counter in the outside area of the main RAM 203. That is, the second ball difference information is loaded from the ball difference management counter area in the outside area of the main RAM 203. The loaded second ball difference information is then set in the pair register. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5653.

In step S5653, the main CPU 201 subtracts the subtraction value (out ball) from the second ball difference information set in the pair register. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5654.

In step S5654, the main CPU 201 loads the first ball difference information from the most significant byte of the 3-byte counter in the outside area of the main RAM 203. That is, the first ball difference information is loaded from the ball difference determination counter area in the outside area of the main RAM 203. The loaded first ball difference information is then set in the single register. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5655.

In step S5655, the main CPU 201 determines whether the second ball difference information set in the pair register as the subtraction result of step S5653 is ≧0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the second ball difference information is ≧0, it transfers processing to step S5660, and if it determines that the second ball difference information is not ≧0, it transfers processing to step S5656.

In step S5656, the main CPU 201 corrects the second ball difference information stored in the pair register by adding 1000. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5657.

In step S5657, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the first ball difference information set in the single register to update it. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5658.

In step S5658, the main CPU 201 determines whether the first ball difference information set in the single register as the subtraction result of step S5657 is ≧0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the first ball difference information is ≧0, it transfers processing to step S5660, and if it determines that the first ball difference information is not ≧0, it transfers processing to step S5659.

In step S5659, the main CPU 201 clears the first ball difference information set in the single register and the second ball difference information set in the pair register.

In step S5660, the main CPU 201 stores the subtraction results of the first ball difference information and the second ball difference information. That is, the first ball difference information stored in the pair register is stored in a ball difference management counter area in the area outside the main RAM 203 to update the second ball difference information. Also, the first ball difference information stored in the single register is stored in a ball difference determination counter area in the area outside the main RAM 203 to update the first ball difference information. When this process is completed, the main CPU 201 ends the current 3 byte subtraction process of the ball difference counter.

In this way, in the 3-byte subtraction process of the difference ball counter in this embodiment, after subtracting the subtraction value (out balls) from the second difference ball information in the lowest 2 bytes, if the subtraction result of the second difference ball information is not 0 or more (i.e., when it is negative), 1000 is added to the second difference ball information and 1 is subtracted from the first difference ball information to update it. Therefore, without counting all values of the 3-byte counter (000000H to FFFFFFH), the second difference ball information in the lowest 2 bytes can count values from 0 to 999, and the first difference ball information in the highest 1 byte can count values from 0 to 255.

Furthermore, in the 3-byte subtraction process of the difference ball counter in this embodiment, when the difference ball information (first difference ball information and second difference ball information) becomes negative, the first difference ball information and the second difference ball information are cleared to prevent the difference ball information from becoming negative.

[GameStop function counter check process]
Next, a game stop function counter check process executed in the game stop function state check process will be described with reference to Fig. 173. Fig. 173 is a flow chart showing an example of the game stop function counter check process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, the game stop function counter check process is a process that is called by an outside area process call command, and the program for executing this process is a program stored in the outside area of main ROM 202, and uses the outside area of main RAM 203.

In step S5661, the main CPU 201 clears the ball difference notification information (first ball difference information) in the ball difference notification information area in the outside area of the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5662.

In step S5662, the main CPU 201 loads the current first ball difference information from the ball difference determination counter area in the outside area of the main RAM 203, and sets the loaded current first ball difference information in a specified register. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5663.

In step S5663, the main CPU 201 judges whether the current first ball difference information is greater than the previous first ball difference information. Specifically, the main CPU 201 compares the current first ball difference information set in a predetermined register with the previous first ball difference information stored in the counter buffer area for ball difference judgment in the outside area of the main RAM 203 to judge whether the current first ball difference information is greater than the previous first ball difference information (i.e., whether the first ball difference information has increased). If the main CPU 201 judges that the current first ball difference information is greater than the previous first ball difference information, it transfers the process to step S5666, and if it judges that the current first ball difference information is not greater than the previous first ball difference information, it transfers the process to step S5664.

In step S5664, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the current first ball difference information set in a predetermined register to make a correction. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5665.

In step S5665, the main CPU 201 judges whether the current first ball difference information corrected in step S5664 is equal to or greater than the previous first ball difference information. Specifically, the main CPU 201 compares the current first ball difference information after addition set in a predetermined register with the previous first ball difference information stored in the counter buffer area for ball difference judgment in the outside area of the main RAM 203 to judge whether the current first ball difference information is equal to or greater than the previous first ball difference information. If the main CPU 201 judges that the current first ball difference information is equal to or greater than the previous first ball difference information, it ends the current game stop function counter check process, and if it judges that the current first ball difference information is not equal to or greater than the previous first ball difference information, it moves the process to step S5666.

In step S5666, the main CPU 201 stores the first ball difference information stored in the ball difference determination counter area in the ball difference determination counter buffer area in the outside area of the main RAM 203. This updates the previous first ball difference information for the next comparison. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5667.

In step S5667, the main CPU 201 stores and sets the first ball difference information stored in the ball difference determination counter area in the ball difference notification information area in the outside area of the main RAM 203. Storing the first ball difference information in this ball difference notification information area results in a game stop function state command being sent to the sub-control circuit 300 as described above (steps S5607 to S5610). Also, storing the first ball difference information in the ball difference notification information area in the outside area results in the first ball difference information being transferred to the stop function ball difference number parameter area in the game area, and the first ball difference information in the game area is updated. When this process is completed, the main CPU 201 ends the current game stop function counter check process.

In this way, in the game stop function counter check process of this embodiment, when the first ball difference information increases (YES in step S5663), the first ball difference information is stored in the ball difference determination counter buffer area and the ball difference notification information area, and a game stop function status command is sent to the sub-control circuit 300.

In addition, when the first ball difference information is maintained or when the first ball difference information has decreased by only 1 (NO in step S5663 and YES in step S5665), a new game stop function status command will not be sent to the sub-control circuit 300. On the other hand, when the first ball difference information has decreased by 2 or more (NO in step S5663 and NO in step S5665), the first ball difference information is stored in the ball difference determination counter buffer area and the ball difference notification information area, and a game stop function status command will be sent to the sub-control circuit 300.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first ball difference information increases or decreases by 2 or more, a game stop function state command is sent to the sub-control circuit 300.

As described above, since the first ball difference information indicates the number of balls difference in units of 1000, when there is a change in units of 1000 in the number of balls difference, a game stop function state command is sent to the sub-control circuit 300. That is, in this embodiment, when the number of balls difference in the number of balls increases by 1000 or more, a game stop function state command is sent to the sub-control circuit 300, and when the number of balls difference in the number of balls difference decreases by 1001 or more, a game stop function state command is sent to the sub-control circuit 300. When the change in the number of balls difference is between -1000 and 999, a game stop function state command is not sent to the sub-control circuit 300.

In this embodiment, the game stop function status command is configured to be sent to the sub-control circuit 300 when the first ball difference information is reduced by 2 or more, but the game stop function status command may be configured to be sent to the sub-control circuit 300 when the first ball difference information is reduced by 1 or more (i.e., when the first ball difference information is simply reduced).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first ball difference information is used as a standard to check for fluctuations in the difference in the number of game balls in units of 1000 balls, but the second ball difference information may be used as a standard to check for fluctuations in the difference in the number of game balls in units of less than 1000 balls (in units of 1 ball).

[GameStop function state management process]
Next, a game stop function state management process executed in the game stop function state check process will be described with reference to Fig. 174. Fig. 174 is a flow chart showing an example of the game stop function state management process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, the game stop function state management process is a process that is called by an outside area process call command, and the program for executing this process is a program stored in the outside area of main ROM 202, and uses the outside area of main RAM 203.

In step S5671, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load a game stop function phase from a game stop function phase area in an outside area of the main RAM 203. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to step S5672.

In step S5672, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded game stop function phase is ≧2. That is, it determines whether the game stop function phase is the game stop function activation standby phase (=2) or the game stop function activation completion phase (=3). If the main CPU 201 determines that the game stop function phase is ≧2, it transfers processing to step S5677, and if it determines that the game stop function phase is not ≧2, it transfers processing to step S5673.

In step S5673, the main CPU 201 loads the first ball difference information from the ball difference determination counter buffer area in the outside area of the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5674.

In this embodiment, the first ball difference information is loaded from a counter buffer area for ball difference determination in an area outside the main RAM 203, but the first ball difference information may be loaded from a counter area for ball difference determination in an area outside the main RAM 203.

In step S5674, the main CPU 201 performs a first ball difference information judgment process to determine whether the loaded first ball difference information is equal to or greater than the judgment value. In this first ball difference information judgment process, it is judged whether the first loaded first ball difference information is equal to or greater than the judgment value corresponding to the regulation value (for example, 95 corresponding to 95,000 balls). Next, if the first ball difference information is not equal to the regulation value, it is judged whether it is equal to or greater than the judgment value corresponding to the boundary value (for example, 90 corresponding to 90,000 balls). Then, if the first ball difference information is equal to or greater than the judgment value corresponding to the regulation value, it sets the game stop function operation standby phase (=2) in a specified register, if the first ball difference information is equal to or greater than the judgment value corresponding to the boundary value, it sets the game stop function operation notice phase (=1) in a specified register, and if the first ball difference information is not equal to or greater than the judgment value corresponding to the boundary value, it sets the game stop function normal state phase (=0) in a specified register. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to step S5675.

In step S5675, the main CPU 201 stores the game stop function phase set in the specified register in step S5674 in the game stop function phase area in the outside area of the main RAM 203, thereby updating the game stop function phase. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5676.

In step S5676, the main CPU 201 determines whether the game stop function phase set in the specified register in step S5674 is the game stop function activation standby phase (=2). If the main CPU 201 determines that it is the game stop function activation standby phase (=2), it transfers processing to step S5677, and if it determines that it is not the game stop function activation standby phase (=2), it terminates this game stop function state management processing.

In step S5677, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol from the special symbol control state number area in the game area of the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5678.

In step S5678, the main CPU 201 refers to the control state number of the loaded special symbol and determines whether or not the game is in a big win game state or a small win game state. Specifically, it determines whether or not the control state number of the loaded special symbol is one of the special symbol control state numbers "3 to 5" corresponding to the big win game state or the small win game state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is in a big win game state or a small win game state, it ends the current game stop function state management process, and if it determines that the game is not in a big win game state or a small win game state, it moves the process to step S5679.

In step S5679, the main CPU 201 stores the game stop function activation completion phase (=3) in the game stop function phase area in the outside area of the main RAM 203. Upon completing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the current game stop function state management process.

In this way, in the game stop function state management process of this embodiment, the game stop function phase is determined (updated) based on the first ball difference information (steps S5673 to S5675).

Here, in the game stop function state management process of this embodiment, the game stop function phase is determined (updated) based on the first difference ball information when the game stop function phase is the game stop function normal state phase (= 0) or the game stop function activation notice phase (= 1) (step S5672).
For this reason, when in the Game Stop function normal state phase (=0) or the Game Stop function operation notice phase (=1), the value of the Game Stop function phase can be carried up or down based on the difference in the number of game balls (can be changed from 0 to 1, 1 to 2, or 1 to 0). However, when in the Game Stop function operation standby phase (=2) or the Game Stop function operation completion phase (=3), where the difference in the number of game balls is equal to or greater than the regulated value, the value of the Game Stop function phase cannot be carried down (changed from 2 to 1) even if the difference in the number of game balls falls below the regulated value.

In addition, in the game stop function state management process of this embodiment, if the first difference ball information is equal to or greater than the judgment value corresponding to the regulation value, the game stop function operation standby phase (=2) is determined, but if the game is in a big win game state or a small win game state, the game stop function operation completion phase (=3) is not determined, and if the game is not in a big win game state or a small win game state, the game stop function operation completion phase (=3) is determined and the game is stopped (step S5613). Therefore, if the difference ball information is equal to or greater than the regulation value when the game is not in a big win game state or a small win game state, the game is immediately stopped, but if the difference ball information is equal to or greater than the regulation value when the game is in a big win game state or a small win game state, the game is stopped when the big win game state or the small win game state ends.

[GameStop function commands]
Next, the configuration of commands related to the game stop function (game stop function status command and game stop function completion command) will be described with reference to Fig. 175. Fig. 175 is an example of a configuration diagram of commands related to the game stop function in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As mentioned above, there are two types of commands related to the game stop function: a game stop function status command and a game stop function completion command.

As shown in FIG. 175, the game stop function state command is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 when the difference ball information changes in units of 1,000 balls (see step S5609, etc.).

The game stop function state command is a three-byte command consisting of identification data (e.g., D3H), a first parameter consisting of information on the game stop function phase, and a second parameter consisting of game ball difference information (first ball difference information).

In addition, the information on the game stop function phase in the first parameter of the game stop function status command is set to one of the following information: game stop function normal state phase (=0), game stop function activation notice phase (=1), or game stop function activation standby phase (=2). The reason why the game stop function activation completion phase (=3) is not included in the first parameter is that when play stops, a game stop function completion command is sent, not a game stop function status command.

In addition, the difference in balls information in the second parameter of the game stop function status command is set to the first difference in balls information in units of 1000. In this way, the reason why only the first difference in balls information is set in the second parameter is to reduce the transmission capacity of the command. In other words, if difference in balls information for 0 to 95,000 or more game balls in units of one ball were to be transmitted, including the second difference in ball information, a capacity of 3 bytes would be required just for the difference in balls information for game balls, so by setting only the first difference in ball information, the capacity is reduced to 1 byte.

On the sub-control circuit 300 side, various notifications can be made by receiving the game stop function state command. Specifically, when a game stop function state command with the game stop function activation notification phase (=1) is received, a "first game stop notification" is made on the display device 7, etc., to notify in advance that the game will be stopped when the difference in the number of game balls reaches the regulation value. Also, when a game stop function state command with the game stop function activation standby phase (=2) is received, a "second game stop notification" is made on the display device 7, etc., to notify in advance that the game will be stopped after the big win game state or the small win game state ends. Note that when a game stop function state command with the game stop function normal state phase (=0) is received, it is sufficient to restrict notifications regarding the game stop function. Examples of notifications of the "first game stop notification" and the "second game stop notification" will be described later.

Also, as shown in FIG. 175, the game stop function completion command is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 when the game stop function operation is completed (i.e., when play is stopped by the game stop function) (see step S5063, etc.).

The game stop function completion command is a three-byte command consisting of identification data (e.g., D4H), a first parameter consisting of information on the game stop function phase, and a second parameter consisting of game ball difference information (first ball difference information).

In addition, only the game stop function operation completion phase (=3) is set as the game stop function phase information in the first parameter of the game stop function completion command. The reason that only the game stop function operation completion phase is set in the first parameter is because when play is stopped, only the game stop function operation completion phase is set as the game stop function phase.

In addition, the difference in number of game balls in the second parameter of the game stop function completion command is set to the first difference in number of game balls in units of 1000. In this way, the reason why only the first difference in number of game balls is set in the second parameter is to reduce the transmission capacity of the command.

The game stop function completion command may be composed of identification data (e.g., D4H) and a first parameter consisting of information on the game stop function phase, without including a second parameter consisting of game ball difference information (first ball difference information).

On the sub-control circuit 300 side, when the game stop function completion command is received, a "game stop notification" is issued on the display device 7 etc. to notify that the game has been stopped by the game stop function. An example of this "game stop notification" will be described later.

In addition, information on the game stop function phase is also included in the power interruption recovery command sent when power is restored, and when power is restored, the sub-control circuit 300 can determine the game stop function phase by receiving the power interruption recovery command.

[More Commands]
Next, an example of the configuration of other commands excluding the command related to the game stop function described above will be described with reference to Fig. 176. Fig. 176 is an example of the configuration of other commands in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 176, the winning information command is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 when various switches are detected (see step S5417).

The winning information command is a 3-byte command consisting of identification data (e.g., B3H), a first parameter indicating whether the first start port switch 6121, the second start port switch 6141, and the game ball recovery switch 5179 have been detected, and a second parameter indicating whether the first large prize port count switch 5132, the second large prize port count switch 5152, the general prize port switch 123, the V prize port switch 5157, and the pass gate switch 5127 have been detected.

By receiving the winning information command, the sub-control circuit 300 can grasp the number of game balls to be paid out and the number of game balls that have been fired (used), and can issue various notifications.

Also, as shown in FIG. 176, the dispensing status notification command is periodically sent to the sub-control circuit 300 (see steps S5090 to S5092).

The dispensing status notification command is a two-byte command consisting of identification data (e.g., C1H) and a first parameter related to multiple dispensing abnormal event information.

The payout abnormality event information in the first parameter of the payout status notification command is configured as follows: bit 0 indicates whether or not there is a card unit communication abnormality, bit 1 indicates whether or not the tray is full, bit 2 indicates whether or not there is a ball jam abnormality, bit 3 indicates whether or not there is a payout sensor abnormality, bit 4 indicates whether or not there is a payout motor abnormality, bit 5 indicates whether or not there is a response abnormality, and bit 6 indicates whether or not there is a touch state.

By receiving the payout status notification command, the sub-control circuit 300 can grasp abnormalities regarding the payout status of game balls and can issue various notifications. As described above, even when the game is stopped by the game stop function, the transmission of the payout status notification command can be continued.

In this embodiment, the dispensing status notification command includes information on whether or not a touch state is present, but it may be configured without including information on the touch state.

[5-7. Sub-control circuit]
Next, the control contents of the sub-control circuit 300 based on various commands etc. transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 will be described.

[Sub-control circuit processing]
The contents of various processes executed by the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 177. Fig. 177 is a flow chart showing an example of the sub-control circuit process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

177, the sub CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (step S5900), which includes, for example, RAM access permission, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, and the like.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to step S5910.

In step S5910, the sub-CPU 301 performs a data input process for inputting data. In this data input process, a command is input from the command input port 308, and operation information by the player detected by the effect button 54 is input.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to step S5920.

In step S5920, the sub-CPU 301 executes a command reception process. In this process, the command input in the process of step S5910 is analyzed. In this command reception process, a performance pattern is determined and various information is set based on various commands received from the main control circuit 200. Details of this command reception process will be described later with reference to Figs. 178 to 180.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to step S5930.

In step S5930, the sub-CPU 301 executes a performance mode determination process. In this process, when a performance pattern is determined in step S5920, various requests (e.g., a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, a role request, a performance button drive request, etc.) for operating various performance devices are generated based on the determined performance pattern.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to step S5940.

In step S5940, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304. The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on the message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to step S5950.

In step S5950, the sub CPU 301 executes a sound control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the sound control circuit 305. The sound control circuit 305 performs sound control for outputting sound from the speaker 32 based on the message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to step S5960.

In step S5960, the sub CPU 301 executes an LED control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a lamp request to the LED control circuit 306. The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking all or a part of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on the message (lamp request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to step S5970.

In step S5970, the sub-CPU 301 executes a role control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a role request to the role control circuit 307. The role control circuit 307 performs drive control for operating the performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the roles constituting the performance role group 58 based on the message (role request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to step S5980.

In step S5980, the sub CPU 301 executes an effect button control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an effect button drive request to the button control circuit 310. The button control circuit 310 performs drive control such as changing the operation mode of the effect button 54 or vibrating the effect button 54 based on the message (effect button drive request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to step S5990.

In step S5990, the sub CPU 301 executes a performance progression process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 executes a process of updating a performance timer counter, etc., for progressing the execution of various performances.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 returns the process to step S5910.

[Command reception process]
Next, the details of the effect pattern determination process executed in the effect mode determination process will be described with reference to Figures 178 to 180. Figures 178 to 180 are a flow chart showing an example of the effect pattern determination process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In step S5921-1, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the command received from the main CPU 201 is an "initialization winning command."
If the sub-CPU 301 determines that it is an "initialization winning command", it transfers the process to step S5921-2, and if it determines that it is not an "initialization winning command", it transfers the process to step S5921-3.

In step S5921-2, the sub CPU 301 performs an initialization process, in which the registers of the sub CPU 301 and the work area of the work RAM 303 are initialized.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current command reception process.

In step S5921-3, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "power interruption recovery command."
If the sub-CPU 301 determines that it is a "power interruption recovery command", it transfers processing to step S5921-4, and if it determines that it is not a "power interruption recovery command", it transfers processing to step S5921-7.

In step S5921-4, the sub-CPU 301 performs a power interruption recovery setting process to restore the state before the power interruption. In this power interruption recovery setting process, the sub-CPU 301 sets various information in the registers of the sub-CPU 301 and the work area of the work RAM 303 based on various information included in the power interruption recovery command. In particular, in this embodiment, the game stop function phase information included in the power interruption recovery command is set in the game stop function phase area of the work RAM 303. However, the progress state of the presentation (presentation timer counter, etc.) managed only by the sub-control circuit 300 side will not be restored from the state before the power interruption, but will be newly reset. For example, the story presentation of the jackpot presentation pattern in the jackpot game state will not be resumed from the middle of the story presentation before the power interruption, but will be resumed from the first story presentation.

In step S5921-5, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the game stop function phase area of the work RAM 303 is 2 or greater, that is, whether it is either the game stop function operation wait phase (=2) or the game stop function operation completion phase (=3).
If the sub-CPU 301 determines that the game stop function phase is 2 or greater, it transfers processing to step S5921-6, and if it determines that the game stop function phase is not 2 or greater, it terminates this command reception processing.

In step S5921-6, the sub-CPU 301 performs a game stop related re-notification process. In this game stop related re-notification process, the sub-CPU 301 performs a second stop notice return process if the game stop function is in the game stop function operation waiting phase (=2), and performs a game stop notice return process if the game stop function is in the game stop function operation completion phase (=3).

In the second stop notice return process in the game stop related re-notification process, the sub-CPU 301 determines a second stop notice notification pattern for executing the second stop notice notification, and sets the second stop notice notification pattern in the game stop function notification area of the work RAM 303. This resumes the "second game stop notice" on the display device 7 etc., which notifies in advance that the game will stop after the big win game state or small win game state ends.

In the game stop notification return process in the game stop related re-notification process, the sub-CPU 301 determines a game stop notification pattern for executing the game stop notification, and sets the game stop notification pattern in the game stop function notification area of the work RAM 303. This restarts the "game stop notification" on the display device 7 etc., which notifies the user that game play has been stopped by the game stop function.

In the GameStop related re-notification process, when the second stop notice return process or the game stop notice return process is completed, the current command reception process is terminated and the process moves to the presentation mode determination process (see FIG. 177).

In step S5921-7, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "pending addition command."
If the sub-CPU 301 determines that it is a "reserved addition command", it transfers the process to step S5921-8, and if it determines that it is not a "reserved addition command", it transfers the process to step S5921-11.

In step S5921-8, the sub-CPU 301 performs a reserved number addition process for special symbols to add the reserved number of special symbols. In this reserved number addition process for special symbols, the reserved number of special symbols included in the reserved number addition command is set in the reserved number counter of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to step S5921-9.

In step S5921-9, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the game stop function phase set in the game stop function phase area of the work RAM 303 is 2, that is, whether or not it is the game stop function operation standby phase (=2).
If the sub-CPU 301 determines that the game stop function phase is 2, it ends the current command reception process, and if it determines that the game stop function phase is not 2, it transfers the process to step S5921-10.

In step S5921-10, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process to determine the pre-reading effect during the jackpot game state when the game is in the normal game stop function state phase (=0) or the game stop function activation notice phase (=1).

In this look-ahead performance determination process, the sub-CPU 301 determines a look-ahead performance pattern for executing a look-ahead performance performed during a jackpot game state based on the start information of a special pattern included in the pending addition command, and sets the look-ahead performance pattern in the performance notification area of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the current command reception process is terminated and processing moves to the presentation mode determination process (see FIG. 177).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game is in the game stop function operation standby phase (=2), the pre-reading effect is restricted from being executed during the jackpot gaming state. This is because, after the jackpot gaming state ends when the game stop function operation standby phase (=2), the game is stopped by the game stop function. Note that when the game stop function operation completion phase (=3) is in effect, the pre-reading effect is not executed in the first place.

In step S5921-11, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "reserved subtraction command."
If the sub-CPU 301 determines that it is a "reserved subtraction command", it transfers the process to step S5921-12, and if it determines that it is not a "reserved subtraction command", it transfers the process to step S5921-20.

In step S5921-12, the sub CPU 301 performs a reserved number subtraction process for subtracting the reserved number of special symbols. In this reserved number subtraction process, the reserved number of special symbols included in the reserved number subtraction command is set in the reserved number counter of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the current command reception process is terminated and processing moves to the presentation mode determination process (see FIG. 177).

In step S5921-20, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol effect start command."
If the sub-CPU 301 determines that it is a "special symbol effect start command", it shifts the process to step S5921-21, and if it determines that it is not a "special symbol effect start command", it shifts the process to step S5921-30.

In step S5921-21, the sub CPU 301 performs a decorative symbol determination process to determine the type of decorative symbol to be stopped. In this decorative symbol determination process, the sub CPU 301 determines the decorative symbol to be stopped based on the information on the special symbol to be stopped included in the special symbol effect start command, and stores the determined decorative symbol in the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 shifts the process to step S5921-22.

In step S5921-22, the sub-CPU 301 performs a pattern presentation pattern determination process to determine the pattern presentation pattern.

In this pattern presentation pattern determination process, the sub-CPU 301 determines a pattern presentation pattern for executing the decorative pattern variation presentation based on information on the special pattern variation pattern included in the special pattern presentation start command, and stores the determined pattern presentation pattern in the presentation notification area of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 shifts the process to step S5921-23.

In step S5921-23, the sub-CPU 301 performs a preview performance pattern determination process to determine the preview performance pattern.

In this preview performance pattern determination process, the sub-CPU 301 determines a preview performance pattern for executing a preview performance that suggests the lottery result of the special pattern in advance, based on information on the variation pattern of the special pattern included in the special pattern performance start command, and stores the determined preview performance pattern in the performance notification area of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the current command reception process is terminated and processing moves to the presentation mode determination process (see FIG. 177).

In step S5921-30, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol effect stop command."
If the sub-CPU 301 determines that it is a "special symbol effect stop command", it shifts the process to step S5921-31, and if it determines that it is not a "special symbol effect stop command", it shifts the process to step S5921-40.

In step S5921-31, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process of ending the effect of ending the variable effect of the decorative symbols. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the variable effect of the decorative symbols and stops the display of the stopped decorative symbols.
When this process is completed, the current command reception process is terminated and processing moves to the presentation mode determination process (see FIG. 177).

In step S5921-40, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "game stop function state command."
If the sub-CPU 301 determines that it is a "game stop function state command", it transfers the process to step S5921-41, and if it determines that it is not a "game stop function state command", it transfers the process to step S5921-50.

In step S5921-41, the sub CPU 301 performs a game stop function phase update process to update the game stop function phase. In this game stop function phase update process, the sub CPU 301 sets the game stop function phase included in the game stop function state command in the game stop function phase area of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to step S5921-42.

In step S5921-42, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the game stop function phase set in the game stop function phase area of the work RAM 303 is 0, that is, whether or not it is the game stop function normal state phase (=0).
If the sub-CPU 301 determines that the game stop function phase is 0, it transfers the process to step S5921-43, and if it determines that the game stop function phase is not 0, it transfers the process to step S5921-45.

In step S5921-43, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the first game stop notice is being executed. Specifically, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the first game stop notice pattern is set in the game stop function notice area of the work RAM 303.
If the sub-CPU 301 determines that the first game stop notice is being executed, it transfers processing to step S5921-44, and if it determines that the first game stop notice is not being executed, it terminates the current command reception processing and transfers processing to the presentation mode determination processing (see FIG. 177).

In step S5921-44, the sub CPU 301 performs a first stop notice end process. In this first stop notice end process, the sub CPU 301 clears the first stop notice notification pattern set in the performance notification area of the work RAM 303. This allows the first stop notice to end when the difference in the number of game balls decreases and the game stop function phase is moved down from the game stop function activation notice phase (=1) to the game stop function normal state phase (=0).
When this process is completed, the current command reception process is terminated and processing moves to the presentation mode determination process (see FIG. 177).

In step S5921-45, the sub-CPU 301 performs a ball difference storage process to store the difference in the number of game balls. In this ball difference storage process, the sub-CPU 301 once clears the ball difference counter in the work RAM 303, and then newly sets the first ball difference information in units of 1000 balls included in the game stop function state command to the cleared ball difference counter. This allows the sub-control circuit 300 to grasp the difference in the number of game balls in units of 1000 balls managed by the main control circuit 200.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to step S5921-46.

In the difference ball number storage process of this embodiment, when a game stop function state command is received, the difference ball number counter of the work RAM 303 is cleared once. This is because the difference ball number counter is corrected by one ball unit based on the winning information command as described below, and the difference ball number of the corrected game balls and the difference ball number actually managed by the main control circuit 200 are eliminated. Note that, in this embodiment, when a game stop function state command is received, the difference ball number counter of the work RAM 303 is cleared once, but it may be configured to overwrite and update the first difference ball information included in the game stop function state command to the difference ball number counter.

In step S5921-46, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the game stop function phase set in the game stop function phase area of the work RAM 303 is 1, that is, whether it is the game stop function operation notice phase (=1).
If the sub-CPU 301 determines that the game stop function phase is 1, it transfers the process to step S5921-47, and if it determines that the game stop function phase is not 1, it transfers the process to step S5921-49.

In step S5921-47, the sub-CPU 301 performs a first stop notice notification process. In this first stop notice notification process, the sub-CPU 301 determines a first stop notice notification pattern for executing the notification of the first stop notice, and sets the first stop notice notification pattern in the game stop function notification area of the work RAM 303. As a result, a "first game stop notice" is performed on the display device 7, etc., which notifies in advance that the game will be stopped when the difference in the number of game balls reaches the regulation value.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to step S5921-48.

In step S5921-48, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process to display the remaining number of balls that can be stopped up to the regulated value.

In this remaining number display process, the sub-CPU 301 first subtracts the difference in the number of balls set in the difference in the number of balls counter of the work RAM 303 from a predetermined regulation value (for example, 95,000 balls) to calculate the remaining number of balls to be stopped, and sets the calculated remaining number of balls to the remaining number of balls counter of the work RAM 303. Next, a remaining number of balls to be stopped display pattern is determined based on the remaining number of balls to be stopped set in the remaining number of balls counter of the work RAM 303, and the determined remaining number of balls to be stopped display pattern is set in the game stop function remaining number notification area of the work RAM 303. As a result, the remaining number of balls to be stopped, such as "xxx balls remaining" until the game stops, is notified on the display device 7 or the like.
When this process is completed, the current command reception process is terminated and processing moves to the presentation mode determination process (see FIG. 177).

In step S5921-49, the sub-CPU 301 performs a second stop notice notification process. In this second stop notice notification process, the sub-CPU 301 determines a second stop notice notification pattern for executing the notification of the second stop notice, and sets the second stop notice notification pattern in the game stop function notification area of the work RAM 303. If the first stop notice notification pattern is set in the game stop function notification area, it is overwritten (the first stop notice notification pattern is cleared) and the second stop notice notification pattern is set. As a result, a "second game stop notice" is performed on the display device 7, etc., which notifies in advance that the game will be stopped after the big win game state or the small win game state ends.
When this process is completed, the current command reception process is terminated and processing moves to the presentation mode determination process (see FIG. 177).

In step S5921-50, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "winning information command."
If the sub-CPU 301 determines that it is a "winning information command", it shifts the process to step S5921-51, and if it determines that it is not a "winning information command", it shifts the process to step S5921-60.

In step S5921-51, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the game stop function phase set in the game stop function phase area of the work RAM 303 is 1, that is, whether it is the game stop function operation notice phase (=1).
If the sub-CPU 301 determines that the game stop function phase is 1, it transfers the process to step S5921-52, and if it determines that the game stop function phase is not 1, it ends this command reception process.

In step S5921-52, the sub-CPU 301 performs a ball difference correction process to correct the ball difference based on the winning information command received this time.

In this ball difference correction process, the sub-CPU 301 first calculates an addition/subtraction value based on the winning information command received this time. For example, if the winning information command contains information that the first large winning port count switch 5132 has been detected, the sub-CPU 301 calculates "15" corresponding to the prize ball for the first large winning port as the addition/subtraction value, and if the winning information command contains information that the game ball recovery switch 5179 has been detected, the sub-CPU 301 calculates "-1" corresponding to one game ball being shot as the addition/subtraction value. Next, the sub-CPU 301 adds (subtracts) the calculated addition/subtraction value to the ball difference counter in the work RAM 303. This allows the ball difference stored in the ball difference counter in the work RAM 303 to be updated (corrected) in units of one ball.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to step S5921-53.

In this embodiment, the game stop function state command sent from the main control circuit 200 contains only the first difference ball information in units of 1000 balls, but this difference ball number correction process makes it possible to grasp the difference ball number in units of 1 ball. For example, after the difference ball number counter is set to "92000 balls" by the game stop function state command containing the first difference ball information of 92000 balls, when a game ball enters the first large winning hole, the difference ball number counter is corrected to "92015" by the winning information command, and when the game ball is collected, the difference ball number counter is corrected to "92014" by the winning information command. Therefore, the difference ball number of game balls from 0 to 999 can be corrected by the difference ball number correction process for the first difference ball information in units of 1000 balls by the game stop function state command.

In step S5921-53, the sub-CPU 301 performs a remaining number of balls to be stopped update display process to update and display the remaining number of balls to be stopped up to the regulation value.

In this remaining stop number update display process, the sub-CPU 301 first subtracts the difference in the number of balls in the difference in the number of balls counter of the work RAM 303 corrected by the above step S5921-52 from a predetermined regulated value (e.g., 95,000 balls) to calculate the remaining stop number, and sets the calculated remaining stop number in the remaining stop number counter of the work RAM 303.
Next, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of stops set in the remaining number of stops counter has changed beyond a predetermined display boundary value (for example, in units of 100), and if it is determined that there has been no change in the remaining number of stops that exceeds the display boundary value, the remaining number of stops notification is not updated and the current command reception process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there has been a change in the remaining number of stops that exceeds the display boundary value, a remaining number of stops display pattern (for example, a remaining number of stops displayed in units of 100) corresponding to the display boundary value is determined based on the remaining number of stops set in the remaining number of stops counter of the work RAM 303, and the determined remaining number of stops display pattern is set in the remaining number of stops notification area of the game stop function of the work RAM 303. For example, if the display boundary value is set to 100, if the remaining number of stops is "2500 to 2599", a remaining number of stops display pattern that displays "2500 remaining until the game stops" is determined, and if the remaining number of stops is "2400 to 2499", a remaining number of stops display pattern that displays "2400 remaining until the game stops" is determined. As a result, when there is a change in the remaining stop number on the display device 7 or the like that causes the remaining stop number to exceed the display boundary value, the remaining stop number notification is updated.
When this process is completed, the current command reception process is terminated and processing moves to the presentation mode determination process (see FIG. 177).

In the remaining stop number update display process of this embodiment, the remaining stop number notification is configured to be updated only when there is a change in the remaining stop number that exceeds the display boundary value. This makes it possible to absorb, within the range of the display boundary value, the error (deviation) in the difference in the number of game balls actually managed by the main control circuit 200 and the difference in the number of game balls due to the display timing displayed on the display device 7 etc. based on the game stop function status command and winning information command sent from the main control circuit 200.

In the remaining stop number update display process of this embodiment, the remaining stop number notification is updated only when there is a change in the remaining stop number that exceeds the display boundary value. However, it may be configured to determine the remaining stop number display pattern based on the current remaining stop number and update the remaining stop number notification without determining whether there is a change in the remaining stop number that exceeds the display boundary value. In other words, it may be configured to update the remaining stop number notification on a one-by-one basis.

In step S5921-60, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "small win start display command."
If the sub-CPU 301 determines that it is a "small win start display command", it transfers the process to step S5921-61, and if it determines that it is not a "small win start display command", it transfers the process to step S5921-62.

In step S5921-61, the sub-CPU 301 performs a small win start effect determination process. In this small win start effect determination process, the sub-CPU 301 determines a small win effect pattern for executing a small win game effect in a small win game state, and stores the determined small win effect pattern in the effect notification area of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the current command reception process is terminated and processing moves to the presentation mode determination process (see FIG. 177).

In step S5921-62, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "jackpot start display command."
If the sub-CPU 301 determines that it is a "jackpot start display command", it transfers the process to step S5921-63, and if it determines that it is not a "jackpot start display command", it transfers the process to step S5921-70.

In step S5921-51, the sub-CPU 301 performs a jackpot start effect determination process. In this jackpot start effect determination process, the sub-CPU 301 determines a jackpot effect pattern for executing a jackpot game effect (such as a story effect) in a jackpot game state, and stores the determined jackpot effect pattern in the effect notification area of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the current command reception process is terminated and processing moves to the presentation mode determination process (see FIG. 177).

In step S5921-70, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "game stop function completion command."
If the sub-CPU 301 determines that it is a "game stop function completion command", it transfers the process to step S5921-71, and if it determines that it is not a "game stop function completion command", it transfers the process to step S5921-80.

In step S5921-71, the sub CPU 301 performs a game stop function phase update process. In this game stop function phase update process, the sub CPU 301 sets the game stop function operation completion phase (=3) included in the game stop function completion command in the game stop function phase area of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to step S5921-72.

In step S5921-72, the sub-CPU 301 performs a difference ball number storage process to store the difference ball number of game balls. In this difference ball number storage process, the sub-CPU 301 once clears the difference ball number counter of the work RAM 303, and then newly sets the first difference ball information in units of 1000 balls included in the game stop function state command to the cleared difference ball number counter. This allows the sub-control circuit 300 to grasp the difference ball number in units of 1000 balls managed by the main control circuit 200 when the game is stopped by the game stop function. In particular, when the game stop function operation completion phase (=3) is set after the end of the big win game state, the difference ball number of game balls may exceed the regulation value (for example, 96,000 balls), but even in such a case, the difference ball number of game balls can be grasped.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to step S5921-73.

In step S5921-73, the sub-CPU 301 performs a game stop notification process. In this game stop notification process, the sub-CPU 301 determines a game stop notification pattern for executing a game stop notification, and sets the game stop notification pattern in the game stop function notification area of the work RAM 303. If the second stop advance notification pattern is set in the game stop function notification area, the game stop notification pattern is overwritten (the second stop advance notification pattern is cleared) and set. As a result, a "game stop notification" is performed on the display device 7 or the like to notify that the game is stopped by the game stop function.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to step S5921-74.

In step S5921-74, the sub-CPU 301 performs a payout display process. In this payout display process, when the payout of game balls is being continued, the sub-CPU 301 determines a payout continuation notification pattern for notifying the user that the payout of game balls is continuing, and sets the payout continuation notification pattern in the game stop function sub-notification area of the work RAM 303. This allows the display device 7, etc. to notify the user that the payout of game balls is continuing when the game is stopped by the game stop function.
When this process is completed, the current command reception process is terminated and processing moves to the presentation mode determination process (see FIG. 177).

In this embodiment, when the game is stopped by the game stop function, the system is configured to notify the player that payout of game balls is still ongoing, but the system may be configured not to notify the player that payout of game balls is still ongoing. In other words, the system may be configured not to perform the processing of steps S5921-74.

In step S5921-80, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "payout completion command."
If the sub-CPU 301 determines that it is a "payout completion command", it shifts the process to step S5921-81, and if it determines that it is not a "payout completion command", it shifts the process to step S5921-90.

In step S5921-81, the sub-CPU 301 performs the remaining payout display process only if the game is stopped by the game stop function.

In this remaining payout display process, the sub-CPU 301 first judges whether or not the game stop function operation completion phase (=3) is set in the game stop function phase area of the work RAM 303, and if it judges that the game stop function operation completion phase (=3) is not set, it ends this remaining payout display process. If the sub-CPU 301 judges that the game stop function operation completion phase (=3) is set, it calculates a subtraction value based on the number of prize balls included in the payout completion command received this time. Next, it subtracts the calculated subtraction value from the first difference ball information at the time of the game stop function's ...
When this process is completed, the current command reception process is terminated and processing moves to the presentation mode determination process (see FIG. 177).

In this embodiment, the number of remaining game balls to be paid out is updated and displayed when the game is stopped by the game stop function, but the number of remaining game balls to be paid out may be configured not to be displayed. In other words, the processing of the above steps S5921-80 and S5921-81 may be configured not to be performed.

In step S5921-90, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "payout status notification command."
If the sub-CPU 301 determines that it is a "payout status notification command", it transfers the process to step S5921-91, and if it determines that it is not a "payout status notification command", it transfers the process to step S5921-99.

In step S5921-91, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process to extract abnormal payout event information.

In this payout abnormality event information extraction process, the sub-CPU 301 extracts all payout abnormality event information that is abnormal from the currently received payout status notification command. Then, to count the number of consecutive detections of the extracted payout abnormality event information, the sub-CPU 301 adds 1 to a predetermined consecutive detection counter (0th to 6th consecutive detection counters) in the work RAM 303 that corresponds to the extracted payout abnormality event information, and updates it. In addition, the consecutive detection counts that correspond to the payout abnormality event information that was not extracted are cleared.

Furthermore, in the payout abnormality event information extraction process, the sub-CPU 301 counts the number of consecutive undetected occurrences of the payout abnormality event information that was not extracted, by adding 1 to a predetermined consecutive undetected occurrence counter (the 0th to 6th consecutive undetected occurrence counters) in the work RAM 303 that corresponds to the payout abnormality event information that was not extracted, and updates it. In addition, the sub-CPU 301 clears the consecutive undetected occurrences that correspond to the extracted payout abnormality event information.

For example, if a card unit communication abnormality is extracted from the currently received payout status notification command, the 0th consecutive detection counter is incremented by 1, if a tray full is extracted, the 1st consecutive detection counter is incremented by 1, if a ball jam abnormality is extracted, the 2nd consecutive detection counter is incremented by 1, if a payout sensor abnormality is extracted, the 3rd consecutive detection counter is incremented by 1, if a payout motor abnormality is extracted, the 4th consecutive detection counter is incremented by 1, if a response abnormality is extracted, the 5th consecutive detection counter is incremented by 1, if a touch state is extracted, the 6th consecutive detection counter is incremented by 1. In addition, a predetermined consecutive detection counter corresponding to the payout abnormality event information that was not extracted is set to 0, and the consecutive detection count is cleared.
Furthermore, if no card unit communication abnormality is detected, the 0th consecutive undetected count counter is incremented by 1, if no tray full is detected, the 1st consecutive undetected count counter is incremented by 1, if no ball jam abnormality is detected, the 2nd consecutive undetected count counter is incremented by 1, if no payout sensor abnormality is detected, the 3rd consecutive undetected count counter is incremented by 1, if no payout motor abnormality is detected, the 4th consecutive undetected count counter is incremented by 1, if no response abnormality is detected, the 5th consecutive undetected count counter is incremented by 1, if no touch state is detected, the 6th consecutive undetected count counter is incremented by 1. Also, a predetermined consecutive undetected count counter corresponding to the extracted payout abnormality event information is set to 0, and the consecutive undetected count is cleared.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to step S5921-92.

In step S5921-92, the sub-CPU 301 performs a payout abnormality determination notification process.

In this payout abnormality determination and notification process, the sub-CPU 301 refers to each consecutive detection counter in the work RAM 303 and determines whether the number of abnormality determinations for each payout abnormality event information is equal to or exceeds a predetermined number. If the number of abnormality determinations is equal to or exceeds the number of abnormality determinations, the sub-CPU 301 determines an abnormality notification pattern or the like for that payout abnormality event information, and sets the determined abnormality notification pattern in an abnormality notification area or the like in the work RAM 303. This makes it possible to start notifying the display device 7 or the like of the abnormality in the payout of game balls when there is an abnormality in the payout of game balls.

Furthermore, in the payout abnormality determination and notification process, the sub-CPU 301 refers to each consecutive undetected count counter in the work RAM 303 and determines whether the number of abnormal terminations is equal to or exceeds a predetermined number for each payout abnormality event information. If the number of abnormal terminations is equal to or exceeds the number, the sub-CPU 301 clears the abnormality notification pattern, etc. set in the abnormality notification area, etc., of the work RAM 303. This makes it possible to end the notification of the payout abnormality of the game balls on the display device 7, etc., after the abnormality is released.

For example, if any of the 0th consecutive detection counter corresponding to the card unit communication abnormality, the 2nd consecutive detection counter corresponding to the ball jam abnormality, the 3rd consecutive detection counter corresponding to the payout sensor abnormality, the 4th consecutive detection counter corresponding to the payout motor abnormality, and the 5th consecutive detection counter corresponding to the response abnormality is 33 times or more as the abnormality determination number, a payout abnormality notification pattern indicating abnormality in the payout of game balls is set. Also, if the 1st consecutive detection counter corresponding to the tray full is 15 times or more as the abnormality determination number, a tray abnormality notification pattern indicating the tray full is set. Also, if the 6th consecutive detection counter corresponding to the touch state is 2 times or more as the abnormality determination number, a demo release information indicating the touch state is set.
Furthermore, if any of the 0th consecutive undetected counter corresponding to the card unit communication abnormality, the 2nd consecutive undetected counter corresponding to the ball jam abnormality, the 3rd consecutive undetected counter corresponding to the payout sensor abnormality, the 4th consecutive undetected counter corresponding to the payout motor abnormality, and the 5th consecutive undetected counter corresponding to the response abnormality is 3 or more times as the abnormal end number, the payout abnormality notification pattern indicating the payout abnormality of the game balls is cleared. Also, if the 1st consecutive undetected counter corresponding to the tray full is 3 or more times as the abnormal end number, the tray abnormality notification pattern indicating the tray full is cleared. Also, if the 6th consecutive undetected counter corresponding to the touch state is 2 or more times as the abnormal end number, the demo release information indicating the touch state is cleared.
When this process is completed, the current command reception process is terminated and processing moves to the presentation mode determination process (see FIG. 177).

In the payout abnormality event information extraction process and payout abnormality determination and notification process of this embodiment, a payout abnormality of game balls, etc. is determined based on the number of consecutive detections and the number of consecutive non-detections for each payout abnormality event information, and notification of the payout abnormality of game balls is started and ended on the display device 7, etc.

In this way, by determining abnormalities in the payout of game balls, etc., based on the number of consecutive detections and the number of consecutive non-detections for each payout abnormality event information, it is possible to remove noise (remove chatter) from the payout status notification command that is sent periodically. Furthermore, it is also possible to adjust the start and end times of the notification of a payout abnormality for each payout abnormality event information. For example, with regard to a tray full abnormality, if the notification is given immediately after the detection of the tray full abnormality, this may be an annoyance to the player, so the start time of the notification of the payout abnormality can be delayed.

In the payout abnormality event information extraction process and payout abnormality judgment and notification process of this embodiment, the payout abnormality related to the payout abnormality event information is distinguished between card unit communication abnormality, ball jam abnormality, payout sensor abnormality, payout motor abnormality, and response abnormality, and the number of consecutive detections and the number of consecutive non-detections are counted. However, it may be configured to count the number of consecutive detections and the number of consecutive non-detections without distinguishing between card unit communication abnormality, ball jam abnormality, payout sensor abnormality, payout motor abnormality, and response abnormality. In this configuration, it is sufficient to take the logical sum of one bit of the card unit communication abnormality, ball jam abnormality, payout sensor abnormality, payout motor abnormality, and response abnormality, and count the number of consecutive detections if any abnormality is present, and count the number of consecutive non-detections if none of the abnormalities is present. Then, a common abnormality notification pattern related to the payout abnormality may be determined and cleared.

In step S5921-99, the sub-CPU 301 determines a presentation pattern in response to various commands received from the main CPU 201, updates other counters, etc. For example, it updates the cumulative payout information of game balls in response to receiving a first large prize winning command or a second large prize winning command.
When this process is completed, the current command reception process is terminated and processing moves to the presentation mode determination process (see FIG. 177).

[5-8. Time chart for game stop notice]
Next, the timing of notification by the game stop function performed in the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 181 to 183. Figures 181 to 183 are examples of time charts of notifications by the game stop function in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, the notifications by the Game Stop function include a "first game stop notice" that notifies in advance that game play will stop when the difference in the number of game balls reaches a regulated value, a "second game stop notice" that notifies in advance that game play will stop after the big win game state or small win game state ends, and a "game stop notice" that notifies that game play has stopped due to the Game Stop function.

The time charts shown in Figures 181 to 183 show, from top to bottom, the "game state (special symbol control state)", the "notification device (display device 7, speaker 32, LED group 46)", the "game stop function phase", and the "difference in number of game balls". As mentioned above, the game stop function phase indicates any of the following phases: the game stop function normal state phase (=0), the game stop function activation notice phase (=1), the game stop function activation standby phase (=2), and the game stop function activation completion phase (=3).

Figure 181 (a) is an example of a time chart 1 in which the first game stop notice is executed when the difference in the number of game balls reaches or exceeds a boundary value (e.g., 90,000 balls).

The timing (A) shown in FIG. 181(a) is when the difference in the number of game balls becomes equal to or greater than the boundary value. At this time, the game stop function phase is updated from 0 to 1 (see step S5675 shown in FIG. 174), and a game stop function state command is sent from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 (see step S5609 shown in FIG. 168). Then, the sub-control circuit 300, which has received the game stop function state command, starts executing the first game stop notice in the notification device (see step S5921-47 shown in FIG. 179). An example of the notification content of the first game stop notice will be described in detail later.

In this way, when the difference in the number of game balls is equal to or greater than the boundary value and is approaching the regulated value, the first game stop notice can notify the player in advance that the game will be stopped when the difference in the number of game balls reaches the regulated value.

Figure 181 (b) is an example of a time chart 2 in which a second game stop notice and a game stop notification are executed when the difference in the number of game balls exceeds a regulated value (e.g., 95,000 balls) during a winning game state (a small win game state or a big win game state).

At timing (A) shown in FIG. 181(b), as in time chart 1 shown in FIG. 181(a), the difference in the number of game balls becomes equal to or exceeds the boundary value, so the game stop function phase is updated from 0 to 1, and the notification device starts executing the first game stop notice.

The timing (i) shown in FIG. 181(b) is when the difference in the number of game balls exceeds the regulation value during a small win game state. At this time, the game stop function phase is updated from 1 to 2 (see step S5675 shown in FIG. 174), and a game stop function state command is sent from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 (see step S5609 shown in FIG. 168). Then, the sub-control circuit 300, which has received the game stop function state command, starts executing the second game stop notice in the notification device (see step S5921-49 shown in FIG. 179). An example of the notification content of the second game stop notice will be described in detail later.

The timing (c) shown in FIG. 181(b) is when the game ball passes through the V winning port 5156 during the small win game state, transitioning from the small win game state to the big win game state. Even at this time, the game stop function activation standby phase (=2) is maintained, and the second game stop notice is continued in the notification device. Note that if the game ball does not pass through the V winning port 5156 during the small win game state, the game does not transition to the big win game state, the second game stop notice is ended in the notification device, and execution of the game stop notice is started.

The timing (E) shown in FIG. 181(b) is when the jackpot game state in which the difference in the number of game balls exceeds the regulated value ends. At this time, the game stop function phase is updated from 2 to 3 (see step S5679 shown in FIG. 174), and the main control circuit 200 sends a game stop function completion command to the sub-control circuit 300 (see step S5063 shown in FIG. 150). Then, the sub-control circuit 300, which has received the game stop function completion command, starts executing a game stop notification in the notification device (see step S5921-73 shown in FIG. 180). An example of the notification content of the game stop notification will be described in detail later.

In this way, if the game is stopped by the game stop function after the small win game state or the big win game state ends, the second game stop notice during the small win game state or the big win game state can notify in advance that the game will be stopped after the big win game state or the small win game state ends. In addition, the game stop notice can notify that the game has been stopped by the game stop function.

Figure 181 (c) is an example of a time chart 3 that issues a game stop notification when the difference in the number of game balls exceeds a regulated value (e.g., 95,000 balls) when the game is not in a winning game state.

At timing (A) shown in FIG. 181(c), as in time chart 1 shown in FIG. 181(a), the difference in the number of game balls becomes equal to or exceeds the boundary value, so the game stop function phase is updated from 0 to 1, and the notification device starts executing the first game stop notice.

The timing (i) shown in FIG. 181(c) is when the difference in the number of game balls exceeds the regulation value when the game is not in a small win game state or a big win game state. At this time, the game stop function phase is updated from 1 to 2, but the game stop function phase is immediately updated from 2 to 3 (see step S5675, step S5679, etc. shown in FIG. 174). After that, the main control circuit 200 sends a game stop function completion command to the sub-control circuit 300 (see step S5063 shown in FIG. 150). Then, the sub-control circuit 300 that has received the game stop function completion command starts executing a game stop notification in the notification device (see step S5921-73 shown in FIG. 180).

For this reason, when the difference in the number of game balls exceeds the regulated value when the game is not in a small win game state or a big win game state, the second game stop notice will not be executed.

Figure 181 (d) is an example of a time chart 4 that terminates the execution of the first game stop notice when the difference in the number of game balls exceeds a boundary value (e.g., 90,000 balls), and then the difference in the number of game balls that exceeds the boundary value decreases and falls below the boundary value.

At timing (A) shown in FIG. 181(d), as in time chart 1 shown in FIG. 181(a), the difference in the number of game balls becomes equal to or exceeds the boundary value, so the game stop function phase is updated from 0 to 1, and the notification device starts executing the first game stop notice.

The timing (F) shown in FIG. 181(d) is when the difference in the number of game balls that exceeded the boundary value decreases and falls below the boundary value (for example, 89,999 balls). At this time, the game stop function phase is updated from 1 to 0 on the main control circuit 200 side (see step S5675 shown in FIG. 174), but the main control circuit 200 does not send a game stop function state command to the sub-control circuit 300 (see the game stop function counter check process shown in FIG. 173), and the sub-control circuit 300 determines that the game stop function phase remains at 1, and the first game stop notice is continued in the notification device.

The timing of (K) shown in FIG. 181(d) is when the difference in the number of game balls that has exceeded the boundary value decreases and falls below a held value (e.g., 89,000 balls) that is smaller than the boundary value (e.g., 88,999 balls). At this time, the main control circuit 200 transmits a game stop function status command to the sub-control circuit 300 (see the game stop function counter check process in FIG. 173, step S5609 shown in FIG. 168, etc.). Then, the sub-control circuit 300 that has received the game stop function status command determines that the game stop function phase has been updated from 1 to 0, and ends the execution of the first game stop notice in the notification device (see step S5921-44 shown in FIG. 179).

In this way, when the difference in the number of game balls that has exceeded the boundary value decreases and falls below the boundary value, the first game stop notice does not immediately end, so it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience of starting the execution of the first game stop notice and then immediately ending the execution of the first game stop notice. For example, during a jackpot game state, a game ball enters the first big winning opening 5131, the difference in the number of game balls reaches the boundary value, and the execution of the first game stop notice begins, but then the game ball does not enter the first big winning opening 5131 for a while, the execution of the first game stop notice ends once, and when a game ball enters the first big winning opening 5131 again, the execution of the first game stop notice begins again, which is an annoyance that can be eliminated.

Here, when the Game Stop function phase is the Game Stop function activation waiting phase (= 2) or the Game Stop function activation completion phase (= 3), even if the difference in the number of game balls falls below the regulated value or boundary value, the value of the Game Stop function phase cannot be carried down (see the Game Stop function status check process in Figure 174, etc.).
For this reason, in this embodiment, the first game stop notice is terminated when the difference in the number of game balls falls below a holding value that is smaller than the boundary value, but the second game stop notice and game stop notification do not end even if the difference in the number of game balls falls below a regulation value or a boundary value. The second game stop notice based on the game stop function operation standby phase (=2) continues to be executed until the small win game state or the big win game state ends, regardless of the difference in the number of game balls, and the game stop notification based on the game stop function operation completion phase (=3) continues to be executed until the RAM is cleared by the RAM clear switch 176.

Figure 182 is an example of a time chart 5 in which the power is restored when the machine is in a jackpot game state in which the difference in the number of game balls exceeds the boundary value.

As shown in the upper part of Figure 182, in the state before the power is cut off, during a jackpot game state, the difference in the number of game balls that exceeds the boundary value (e.g., 92,000 balls) is stored, the Game Stop function activation notice phase (=1) is stored as the Game Stop function phase, and the first game stop notice is executed in the notification device.

More specifically, information regarding the jackpot game state is stored in the pattern control data area, etc., in the game area of the main RAM 203 (see Figure 141).

In addition, information regarding the difference in the number of game balls is stored in the stop function difference in the number of game balls parameter area in the game area of the main RAM 203, the counter area for managing the difference in the number of game balls, the counter area for determining the difference in the number of game balls, the counter buffer area for determining the difference in the number of game balls, and the difference in the number of game balls notification information area in the outside area of the main RAM 203 (see FIG. 141).

In addition, information regarding the game stop function phase is stored in a stop function state parameter area in the game area of the main RAM 203 and in a game stop function phase area in an outside area of the main RAM 203 (see FIG. 141).

Then, as shown in the lower part of Figure 182, with regard to the jackpot game state, if the power is restored without the RAM being cleared by the RAM clear switch 176, the information stored in the pattern control data area, etc. in the game area will not be cleared (see step S5035, etc. in Figure 147), and the power will be restored.
Therefore, information regarding the jackpot game status is retained when power is restored.

Regarding the difference in the number of game balls, when the power is restored without clearing the RAM by the RAM clear switch 176, the information on the difference in the number of game balls stored in the counter area for managing the difference in balls, the counter area for judging the difference in balls, the counter buffer area for judging the difference in balls, and the difference in the number of game balls notification area in the area outside the area is cleared (see step S5049 in FIG. 148, etc.). Here, when the power is restored, the stop function difference in the number of balls parameter area in the game area is not directly cleared, but the first difference in ball information stored in the difference in the ball notification information area in the area outside the area is transferred to the stop function difference in the number of balls parameter area in the game area (see step S5608 in FIG. 168, etc.), so as a result, the stop function status parameter area in the game area is also cleared when the power is restored.
As a result, all information regarding the difference in the number of game balls is cleared and the power is restored.

In addition, with regard to the game stop function phase, when the power is restored without the RAM being cleared by the RAM clear switch 176, if the game stop function operation notice phase (=1) is stored in the game stop function phase area of the outside area, the game stop function phase is also cleared (see steps S5055, S5056, etc. in FIG. 149). Here, the stop function state parameter area in the play area is not directly cleared when the power is restored, but the game stop function phase stored in the game stop function phase area of the outside area is transferred to the stop function state parameter area in the play area (see step S5604, etc. in FIG. 168), and as a result, the stop function state parameter area in the play area is also cleared when the power is restored.
Therefore, if the game stop function activation notice phase (=1) is set, the game stop function phase will be cleared and the power will be restored.

Then, when power is restored, the main control circuit 200 sends a power restoration command including the game stop function normal state phase (=0) to the sub-control circuit 300 (see step S5013 shown in FIG. 145).
Therefore, when the sub-control circuit 300 receives the power interruption recovery command, the execution of the first game stop notification is terminated without being resumed in the notification device.

Figure 183 is an example of a time chart 6 when the power is restored after a power outage during a jackpot game state in which the difference in the number of game balls exceeds the regulated value.

As shown in the upper part of Figure 183, in the state before the power failure, during a jackpot game state, the difference in the number of game balls that exceeds the regulated value (e.g. 96,000 balls) is stored, the Game Stop function activation notice phase (=2) is stored as the Game Stop function phase, and the second game stop notice is executed in the alarm device.

As shown in the lower part of Figure 183, when the power is restored after a jackpot game state without the RAM being cleared by the RAM clear switch 176, the information regarding the jackpot game state is retained and the power is restored, similar to time chart 5 in Figure 182.

In addition, with regard to the difference in the number of game balls, if the power is restored without the RAM being cleared by the RAM clear switch 176, all information regarding the difference in the number of game balls will be cleared and the power will be restored, just as in time chart 5 of FIG. 182.

Regarding the game stop function phase, if the power is restored without the RAM being cleared by the RAM clear switch 176, unlike time chart 5 in FIG. 182, the game stop function activation standby phase (=2) is stored in the game stop function phase area in the outside area, so the game stop function phase is not cleared (see step S5055 in FIG. 149, etc.) and power is restored.

Then, when power is restored, the main control circuit 200 sends a power restoration command including a game stop function activation standby phase (=2) to the sub-control circuit 300 (see step S5013 shown in FIG. 145).
As a result, the sub-control circuit 300 that receives the power interruption recovery command will cause the alarm device to continue (resume) the execution of the second game stop notice.

Although not shown in the figures, if power is restored when the game is stopped by the game stop function, the information regarding the difference in the number of game balls is cleared, but the game stop function phase is not cleared, and a power restoration command including the game stop function operation completion phase (=3) is sent, and the game stop notification will continue (resume) in the notification device.

[5-9. Notification contents]
Regarding the effects and notifications executed under the control of the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300, etc., an example of the notification content of the display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 will be described.

(Game suspension notice)
Next, the contents of the notification of the game stop notice will be described with reference to Fig. 184. Fig. 184 is an example of a display image of the game stop notice in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 184 (a) is an example of a display image when the first game stop notice is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 184(a), when the first game stop notification is executed, the message "Approximately XX00 balls left until game stop" is displayed at the top of the display area in accordance with the display contents of the first game stop notification pattern and the remaining number of balls to be stopped display pattern.

The text "Approximately XX00 balls" corresponds to the display content of the remaining number of balls to be stopped display pattern, which shows the remaining number of balls to be stopped up to the regulated value, and is updated in units of 100 balls corresponding to the display boundary value, such as approximately 2000 balls → approximately 1900 balls → approximately 1800 balls.

This first game stop notice allows the player to know that the difference in the number of game balls is approaching the regulated value, and also allows the player to specifically know the number of game balls remaining until the game is stopped.

In this embodiment, the specific number of game balls (numbers) is displayed as an example of the display content of the remaining number display pattern, but the remaining number of game balls may also be displayed using an abstract meter, memory, etc.

Figure 184 (b) is an example of a display image when the second game stop notice is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 184(b), when the second game stop notice is executed, the words "Game will stop after this big win game ends" are displayed in the center of the display area in accordance with the display content of the second stop notice notification pattern. This second game stop notice will continue to be displayed until the big win game state ends.

This second game stop notice lets the player know that the game will stop after the big win game state ends.

In addition, behind the image displayed for the second game stop notice, characters and the like that correspond to the display content of the jackpot presentation pattern are displayed.

Here, during a jackpot game state where the game stop function activation standby phase (=2) is not set (so-called normal jackpot game state), it is possible for a character or the like to execute a look-ahead performance. For example, if start information for a special pattern corresponding to a jackpot is stored in the reserved memory, an effect in which the character says "Cheers!" is executed. However, during a jackpot game state where the game stop function activation standby phase (=2) is set, it is restricted so that look-ahead performance is not executed.

By restricting the execution of the look-ahead effect during a jackpot game state in which the game stop function activation standby phase (=2) is set, it is possible to prevent excessive expectations of the game from being given even though the game is about to stop.

(Game stop notification)
Next, the contents of the game stop notification will be described with reference to Fig. 185. Fig. 185 is an example of a display image of the game stop notification in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 185 (a) is an example of a display image when a game stop notification is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 185(a), when a game stop notification is executed, the words "Game has stopped. Today's game has ended" are displayed in the center of the display area in accordance with the display content of the game stop notification pattern. This game stop notification will continue to be displayed until the RAM is cleared by the RAM clear switch 176.

This game stop notification allows the player to clearly understand that the game has been stopped by the Game Stop function.

Figure 185 (b) is an example of a display image when a game stop notification is executed and payout of game balls continues.

As shown in FIG. 185(b), if payout of game balls continues when a game stop notification is being executed, the text "Payout of game balls is in progress. Please wait until payout is complete" is added to the bottom of the display area to notify the user that payout of game balls is continuing, in accordance with the display content of the payout continuation notification pattern. Furthermore, the text "XXX balls remaining" is added to display the number of game balls remaining to be paid out, in accordance with the display content of the remaining payout display pattern.

The display content of this payout continuation notification pattern lets the player know that although the game has been stopped by the game stop function, payout of game balls is continuing, and prevents the player from immediately leaving the seat when the game is stopped by the game stop function. Furthermore, the display content of the remaining payout number display pattern lets the player know the number of game balls remaining to be paid out.

As described above, the payout continuation notification pattern and the remaining payout display pattern may not be determined, and the system may be configured not to display that payout of game balls is continuing or the remaining payout number of game balls.

Figure 185 (c) is an example of a display image when a game stop notification is executed and an abnormality occurs in the payout of game balls.

As shown in FIG. 185(c), if there is an abnormality in the dispensing of game balls while a game stop notification is being executed, the following text will be additionally displayed at the bottom of the display area in accordance with the display content of the abnormality notification pattern to notify the player of the abnormality in the dispensing of game balls.

The display of this abnormality notification pattern lets the player know that there is an abnormality in the payout of game balls and that payout has stopped.

In this embodiment, an example of the game stop notice and game stop notification using a display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 has been described, but the game stop notice and game stop notification may be performed using a lighting pattern of the LED group 46 or an audio notification from the speaker 32 without using a display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7.

In this way, the fifth pachinko gaming machine is equipped with a game stop function that can stop the game when the difference in the number of game balls reaches a regulated value (e.g., 95,000 balls), so the gambling nature of the game can be appropriately suppressed.

In addition, in the fifth pachinko game machine, when power is restored without the RAM being cleared by the RAM clear switch 176 (when the start-up state at the time of power restoration is "power restoration"), the initial setting is performed by retaining information such as the control data of the special symbol stored in the main RAM 203 and information on the game stop state, and when power is restored by clearing the RAM by the RAM clear switch 176 (when the start-up state at the time of power restoration is "RAM clear"), the information such as the control data of the special symbol stored in the main RAM 203 and information on the game stop state are initialized and the initial setting is performed. For this reason, in order to release the game stop state due to the game stop function, the RAM clear switch 176, which is an intentional operation, must be operated, and even if power is restored due to a power outage or the like while the game is stopped due to the game stop function, the game stop state due to the game stop function is maintained, and the gambling nature of the game can be appropriately suppressed.

In addition, in the fifth pachinko game machine, the notification device (display device 7, speaker 32, LED group 46) can execute a first game stop notice that notifies the player in advance that the game will be stopped, provided that the difference in the number of game balls becomes equal to or greater than a boundary value (e.g., 90,000 balls), and can execute a game stop notice that notifies the player that the game has been stopped when the game is stopped by the game stop function. Furthermore, when the first game stop notice is executed, the notification device can suggest the number of game balls that will remain until the difference in the number of game balls reaches the regulated value. Therefore, the player can know that the game may soon be stopped by the game stop function, and that the game has been stopped by the game stop function. Furthermore, the player can know the period until the game is stopped by the game stop function, based on the number of game balls that will remain until the difference in the number of game balls reaches the regulated value.

<Fifth modified example of pachinko game machine>
In the fifth pachinko game machine, the information regarding the difference in the number of game balls for the game stop function is updated by the main control circuit 200 (main CPU 201), but it may also be configured to be updated by the payout/launch control circuit 400.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, the game stop function allows the game to be stopped when the difference in the number of game balls reaches a regulated value (for example, 95,000 balls), but the game may be stopped when the increase in the number of game balls reaches a regulated value, instead of the difference in the number of game balls.

The technology described in the embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine may be applied to a slot machine. When applied to a slot machine, the "difference in number of game balls" may be replaced with the "difference in number of medals." The "difference in number of medals" may be calculated by subtracting the cumulative number of medals inserted (number of medals inserted) from the cumulative number of medals paid out (number of medals paid out). The various effects and notifications executed in the fifth pachinko gaming machine may be replaced with effects provided by a display device, reels, etc. provided in the slot machine. The big win gaming state or small win gaming state may be replaced with a bonus gaming state (BB, RB).

(others)
The fifth pachinko gaming machine described above can apply the techniques of each embodiment, including modified examples. The above-mentioned embodiment does not limit the contents of the present invention, and modifications can be made to the extent that they do not deviate from the scope of the claims.

Furthermore, the effects described in the fifth pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most favorable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention.

Furthermore, the above [4. Expansion Example] can also be applied to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, as long as there is no inconsistency in its gameplay or control.

[9. The 7th Pachinko Game Machine]
Next, the seventh pachinko gaming machine will be described. The seventh pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a one-type two-type mixed machine, like the third pachinko gaming machine. The seventh pachinko gaming machine is different from the third pachinko gaming machine in terms of gameplay and presentation content, and accordingly, the configuration of various components arranged in the game area is also partially different.

The seventh pachinko gaming machine, like the third pachinko gaming machine, is a priority variable machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in parallel, and the start condition of the second special symbol is established in priority over the start condition of the first special symbol. However, it is not limited to this, and may be a sequential variable machine as described above.

Hereinafter, when explaining the seventh pachinko gaming machine, the same components as those in the first pachinko gaming machine will be given the same symbols and step numbers, and detailed explanations of their configuration and processing will be omitted.

In this embodiment, "entering a game ball" into an entry port (e.g., a starting port or a big prize entry port) that can give the player a certain benefit (payout of game balls, transition of game state) is also referred to as "winning", as appropriate. Also, in this embodiment, the "variable display" of the pattern is a concept that includes both a "variable display" in which the pattern changes and is displayed, and a "stationary display" in which the pattern stops and is displayed, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stationary display is referred to as one "variable display".

[9-1. Game board unit]
A game board unit 7010 provided in the seventh pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 186. This game board unit 7010 is also disposed in front of the base door 3 (see Fig. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see Fig. 2) like the first pachinko game machine.

Figure 186 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 7010 equipped in a seventh pachinko game machine. The game board unit 7010 has a game panel 7100 as a game board, various components are arranged on the game panel 7100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game panel 7100, in which the released game balls can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 186, the game board unit 7010 of the seventh pachinko gaming machine differs from the first pachinko gaming machine mainly in the configuration and arrangement of the passing gate 7126, the second starting port 7140, the normal electric role unit 7145, the first special electric role unit 7130, and the second special electric role unit 7150. The configuration and arrangement of each are explained below.

The first start hole 7120 located in the play area 105 of the seventh pachinko game machine is functionally the same as the first start hole 120 located in the play area 105 of the first pachinko game machine, but because of its relationship with the second start hole 7140, it will be described again using a different reference number from that of the first pachinko game machine.

(Passing gate)
The passing gate 7126 is disposed above a normal electric role unit 7145 described later in the right side area 107, and allows game balls hit from the right to pass through (game balls hit from the left have difficulty or no ability to pass through). The passing gate 7126 is provided with a passing gate switch 7127 (see FIG. 187 described later) that detects the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 7126.

When a game ball passes through the passing gate 7126, it is used for the normal symbol lottery (the process of determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol) and for the variable display of normal symbols. Note that in this embodiment, even if a game ball passes through the passing gate 7126, no prize balls are paid out, but a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball) may be paid out.

The passing gate 7126 may also function as a trigger for activating a consecutive operation device for special features. Assuming that the condition device is in operation (the special symbol that will result in a jackpot is displayed frozen), the passing gate 7126 may activate the consecutive operation device for special features, causing a transition to a jackpot gaming state.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 7120 is disposed in the game area 105 below the display area of the display device 7, and is configured so that game balls hit to the left can enter the hole, and game nails or the like make it difficult or impossible for game balls hit to the right to enter the hole. The first starting hole 7120 is provided with a first starting hole switch 7121 (see FIG. 187 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 7120.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 7120, a first special symbol lottery (a process for determining whether the first special symbol is a winning symbol), a variable display of the first special symbol, and a prize ball for the first starting hole (e.g., three game balls) are paid out. The process after the game ball enters the first starting hole 7120 will be described in detail later.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 7140 is located in the right side area 107 below (downstream) the passing gate 7126 described later, and is provided in a normal electric role unit 7145 described later, so that game balls hit to the right can enter the hole (game balls hit to the left are difficult or impossible to enter the hole). The second starting hole 7140 is provided with a second starting hole switch 7141 (see FIG. 187 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 7140.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second starting opening 7140 is located below (downstream) the passing gate 7126, so that a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 7126 can enter the second starting opening 7140 when the normal electric device 7146 described below is in operation.

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 7140, a second special symbol lottery (a process for determining whether the second special symbol is a winning symbol), a variable display of the second special symbol, and a prize ball for the second starting hole (for example, one game ball) are paid out. The process after the game ball enters the second starting hole 7140 will be described in detail later.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 7145 is located in the right area 107 below (downstream of) the passing gate 7126, and is located so that the game ball hit to the right can pass through it. The normal electric accessory unit 7145 is a unit body that integrates the second start hole 7140, the second start hole switch 7141 that detects the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 7140, and the normal electric accessory 7146.

The normal electric device 7146 is equipped with a protruding plate-type normal power shutter 7147 that can move forward and backward, and a normal power solenoid 7148 (see FIG. 187 described below) that operates the normal power shutter 7147. The normal electric device 7146, i.e., the normal power shutter 7147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 7140, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 7140.

Specifically, the normal power shutter 7147 is composed of a substantially triangular ball entry prevention section disposed near the entrance of the second starting port 7140 and a flat ball entry guidance section inclined toward the second starting port 7140. When the normal power shutter 7147 is in the closed state, the substantially triangular ball entry prevention section is located in an opposing area facing the entrance of the second starting port 7140 and prevents balls from entering the second starting port 7140, and the flat ball entry guidance section is embedded in the surface of the game panel 7100 and allows game balls to flow downward without accepting game balls flowing down into the right side area 107. On the other hand, when the normal power shutter 7147 is in the open state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention section is located in an avoidance area that does not face the entrance of the second starting hole 7140, and does not hinder the entry of balls into the second starting hole 7140, and the flat ball entry guidance section protrudes from the surface of the game panel 7100 to receive game balls flowing down to the right area 107 and guide the received game balls to the second starting hole 7140. Note that instead of the above-mentioned normal power shutter 7147 that can move forward and backward, a movable member called a so-called electric chute may be used.

In addition, when the second starting hole 7140 is open and a specified number of game balls (e.g., one) for normal power enter the hole, the normal electric device 7146 closes the second starting hole 7140 even if the opening time has not elapsed.

(First special electric feature unit)
The first special electric role unit 7130 is disposed below (downstream) the pass gate 7126, the normal electric role unit 7145, and the second special electric role unit 7150 described later in the right area 107. The first special electric role unit 7130 may be provided upstream of at least one of the pass gate 7126, the normal electric role unit 7145, and the second special electric role unit 7150 described later, or may be provided in the left area 106.

The first special electric device unit 7130 is a unitary body that integrates a first large prize opening 7131, a first large prize opening count switch 7132 (see FIG. 187 described below) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 7131, a first special electric shutter 7134 that can move back and forth, and a first special electric solenoid 7135 (see FIG. 187 described below) that operates the first special electric shutter 7134.

The first large prize opening 7131 is an opening that opens when a jackpot is hit, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the first large prize opening 7131 in one round of a jackpot is set (for example, 7 balls). Each time a ball enters the first large prize opening 7131, prize balls for the first large prize opening (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The first large prize opening 7131 transitions from a closed state to an open state in the first route when a special stop display mode is derived indicating that the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a "big hit" and in the second route when a specific stop display mode is derived indicating that the result of the special pattern determination is a "small hit" and the second large prize opening 7151 is opened, and a game ball that enters the opened second large prize opening 7151 enters the V prize opening within the second large prize opening 7151.

The first special electric shutter 7134 is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 7131, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 7131, by the operation of the first special electric solenoid 7135 (see Figure 187 described below).

Specifically, the first special electric shutter 7134 is composed of an opening and closing door with a pivot support at the bottom. When the first special electric shutter 7134 is in the open state, the opening and closing door falls to the front side to open the first large winning opening 7131, and receives game balls flowing down into the right side area 107 and guides the received game balls to the first large winning opening 7131. On the other hand, when the first special electric shutter 7134 is in the closed state, the opening and closing door is inverted to close the first large winning opening 7131, making it impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the first large winning opening 7131.

(Second special electric feature unit)
The second special electric role unit 7150 is provided below (downstream) the passing gate 7126 and the normal electric role unit 7145 in the right area 107. The second special electric role unit 7150 may be provided upstream of at least one of the passing gate 7126 or the normal electric role unit 7145, or may be provided in the left area 106.

The second special electric device unit 7150 includes a second large prize opening 7151 that is opened to allow game balls to enter the inside of the second special electric device unit 7150, a second large prize opening count switch 7152 that detects the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 7151, a second special electric shutter 7154 that can open and close the second large prize opening 7151, a second special electric solenoid 7155 (see FIG. 187 below) that operates the second special electric shutter 7154 to open and close the second large prize opening 7151, and a second special electric solenoid 7155 that operates the second special electric shutter 7154 to open and close the second large prize opening 7151. It is a unit that integrates a V winning opening 7156 through which game balls that enter 151 can pass, a V winning opening switch 7157 that detects when a game ball has passed through the V winning opening 7156, a losing opening 7158 through which game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 7151 but have not entered the V winning opening 7156 can pass, a V shutter 7159 that opens and closes the V winning opening 7156, and a V shutter solenoid 7160 (see Figure 187 described below) that operates the V shutter 7159 to open and close the V winning opening 7156.

The second large prize opening 7151 is an opening that opens when a small win occurs, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the second large prize opening 7151 in one small win (for example, 10 balls) is specified. Each time one game ball enters this second large prize opening 7151, prize balls for the second large prize opening (for example, 10 game balls) are paid out.

The second special electric shutter 7154 is made of a protruding plate-shaped member that can move forward and backward, and is configured so that by operating the second special electric solenoid 7155 (see Figure 187 described below), the second special electric shutter 7154 can move forward to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 7151, and the second special electric shutter 7154 can move backward to an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 7151.

The V winning hole 7156 is a winning hole that can be opened and closed by the V shutter 7159, and is also a winning hole through which the game ball passes, triggering control of the jackpot game state via the second route described above.

When the game is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, the opening of the second large prize opening 7151 when the game ball passes through the V prize opening 7156 is counted as the first round, and after the game ball passes through the V prize opening 7156 (from the second round onwards), a round game is executed in which the first large prize opening 7131 transitions from a closed state to an open state. Note that when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, a round game in which the second large prize opening 7151 transitions from a closed state to an open state may be executed for a predetermined number of rounds, even after the game ball passes through the V prize opening 7156 (from the second round onwards).

In addition, for example, a V entry port may be provided inside the first large prize opening 7131, so that there is one V entry port and one attacker that is opened in the big win game state. In this case, when a stop display mode indicating a "small win" is derived, the first large prize opening 7131 is opened, and when a game ball enters the V entry port provided inside the first large prize opening 7131, the game is controlled to the big win game state (the big win game state via the second route).

The losing port 7158 is configured to allow game balls that have entered the second large winning port 7151 but have not passed through the V winning port 7156 to enter (pass through). Game balls that pass through the losing port 7158 are ejected outside the machine. Note that if all game balls that have entered the second large winning port 7151 pass through the losing port 7158 and no game balls pass through the V winning port 7156, the game will end without being controlled to a jackpot game state.

The V-shutter 7159 is configured to be able to transition between a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for game balls to pass through the V-entry opening 7156, and an open state in which it is possible (or easy) for game balls to pass through the V-entry opening 7156, by the operation of the V-shutter solenoid 7160 (see Figure 187 described below).

[9-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the seventh pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 187. Fig. 187 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 187, the seventh pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the seventh pachinko gaming machine differs from the first pachinko gaming machine in some respects in the configuration of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300. The configuration and layout of each are explained below.

[9-2-1. Main control circuit]
Compared to the first pachinko game machine, the main control circuit 200 has slightly different configurations in the normal power solenoid 7148, the first special power solenoid 7135, the second special power solenoid 7155, the V shutter solenoid 7160, the first start port switch 7121, the second start port switch 7141, the passing gate switch 7127, the first large prize port count switch 7132, the second large prize port count switch 7152, and the V prize port switch 7157 which are connected to the main control circuit 200.

(Solenoid for general purpose power supply)
The normal power solenoid 7148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the normal power shutter 7147. When the normal power solenoid 7148 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it advances the normal power shutter 7147 forward to open the second starting port 7140, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the normal power shutter 7147 backward to close the second starting port 7140.

(First special solenoid)
The first special electric solenoid 7135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the first special electric shutter 7134, which is an opening and closing door. When the main CPU 201 applies electricity to the first special electric solenoid 7135 (ON), the first special electric shutter 7134 is tilted forward to open the first large prize opening 7131, and when the main CPU 201 does not apply electricity to the first special electric solenoid 7135 (OFF), the first special electric shutter 7134 is inverted backward to close the first large prize opening 7131.

(Second special solenoid)
The second special electric solenoid 7155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the second special electric shutter 7154. When the main CPU 201 energizes the second special electric solenoid 7155 (ON), the second special electric solenoid 7155 moves the second special electric shutter 7154 backward to open the second large winning opening 7151, and when the main CPU 201 does not energize the second special electric solenoid 7155 (OFF), the second special electric shutter 7154 advances forward to close the second large winning opening 7151.

(Solenoid for V-shutter)
The V-shutter solenoid 7160 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V-shutter 7159. When the V-shutter solenoid 7160 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V-shutter 7159 backward to open the V-winning opening 7156, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V-shutter 7159 forward to close the V-winning opening 7156. In addition, in this embodiment, the V-shutter solenoid 7160 operates in conjunction with the opening of the second large winning opening 7151 to open the V-winning opening 7156. That is, the V-shutter opening 7156 is in an open state when the second large winning opening 7151 is opened, and when a game ball enters the second large winning opening 7151, it will also pass through the V-winning opening 7156 in principle.

(First start switch)
The first start hole switch 7121 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 7120.

When the first start hole switch 7121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 7120, the main CPU 201 determines that the first start condition is met and acquires start information for the first special symbol (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for a symbol, random number value for determining a reach, random number value for selecting a performance, etc.). The acquired start information for the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (first special symbol start memory area (1) to first special symbol start memory area (4) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of first special symbols (e.g., four)." When the judgment start condition for the first special symbol (e.g., the special electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, etc.) is met, the information is used for the hit judgment process for the first special symbol and the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, when the first start hole switch 7121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 7120, the main CPU 201 instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of the prize balls for the first start hole (e.g., three game balls).

(Second start switch)
The second start hole switch 7141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 7140.

When the second start hole switch 7141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 7140, the main CPU 201 determines that the second start condition is established and acquires start information for the second special symbol (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for symbol, random number value for reaching a reach, random number value for selecting a performance, etc.). The acquired start information for the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start memory area (second special symbol start memory area (1) to second special symbol start memory area (3) in that order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of second special symbols (e.g., 3)," and when the judgment start condition for the second special symbol (e.g., the special electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, etc.) is established, the information is used for the hit judgment process for the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, when the second start port switch 7141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start port 7140, the main CPU 201 instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of a prize ball (e.g., one game ball) for the second start port.

In addition, in the embodiment, the winning judgment process for the first special pattern based on the start information of the first special pattern is also called the "lottery for the first special pattern," and the winning judgment process for the second special pattern based on the start information of the second special pattern is also called the "lottery for the second special pattern," and the lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern are collectively called the "lottery for the special patterns."

(Passing gate switch)
The passing gate switch 7127 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 7126.

When the pass gate switch 7127 detects the passage of a game ball through the pass gate 7126, the main CPU 201 acquires the start information of the normal symbol (random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a hit, random number value of the normal symbol, etc.). The acquired start information of the normal symbol is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (normal symbol start memory area (1) to normal symbol start memory area (4) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of normal symbols (for example, 4)". When the normal symbol judgment start condition (for example, the normal electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the normal symbol is not being performed, etc.) is satisfied, it is used for the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit judgment process) and the variable display of the normal symbol. Note that even if the pass gate switch 7127 detects the passage of a game ball through the pass gate 7126, the prize ball is not paid out.

(First prize slot count switch)
The first large prize opening count switch 7132 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 7131. When the first large prize opening count switch 7132 detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 7131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that have entered the first large prize opening 7131 per round, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of prize balls for the first large prize opening (e.g., 15 game balls).

(Second major prize slot count switch)
The second large prize opening count switch 7152 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 7151. When the second large prize opening count switch 7152 detects the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 7151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 7151 and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of prize balls for the second large prize opening (e.g., 10 game balls).

(V prize entry switch)
The V winning hole switch 7157 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 7156. When the V winning hole switch 7157 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 7156, the main CPU 201 performs control to transition to a big win game state. Note that even if the V winning hole switch 7157 detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 7156, no prize balls are paid out.

[9-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300, like the first pachinko game machine, is equipped with a sub-CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a gimmick control circuit 307 and a command input port 308, but differs in that it further comprises a button control circuit 310 and a performance button 54.

(Button Control Circuit 310)
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving the effect button 54. In other words, the button control circuit 310 is a circuit for changing the operation mode of the effect button 54 and vibrating the effect button 54. The button control circuit 310 drives the effect button 54 in response to a drive command from the sub-CPU 301.

The button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal related to a player's operation detected by the effect button 54. When the button control circuit 310 inputs an operation signal from the effect button 54, it outputs predetermined operation information to the sub-CPU 301.

[9-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the seventh pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 188 to 200. The seventh pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In the seventh pachinko gaming machine, although the probability variable control is not executed, a time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed and a normal gaming state in which the time-saving control is not executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 is capable of progressing the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. Note that, although the probability variable control is not executed in this seventh pachinko gaming machine, this is not essential, and it is also possible to execute the probability variable control by setting the probability variable flag on depending on the type of jackpot, etc., for example.

In this embodiment, in a general normal game state (the first normal game state described later), left-handed play is generally considered to be the normal game mode, while right-handed play is the normal game mode in the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B. When the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B are not differentiated, the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B are collectively simply referred to as the "time-saving game state." The sub-CPU 301 displays the play style that is considered to be the normal game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 7.

[9-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
188 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol winning determination table shown in FIG. 188 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table for determining whether a hit is a "big hit", "small hit" or "miss".

In the special symbol hit determination table, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a hit that is determined to be a "hit" or a "miss" and the corresponding hit/miss determination value data (hit determination value data, miss determination value data) is specified as the data used in the hit determination process of the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first starting hole 7120. In addition, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a hit that is determined to be a "hit", a "small hit" or a "miss" and the corresponding hit/miss determination value data (hit determination value data, small hit determination value data, miss determination value data) is specified as the data used in the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the ball entering the second starting hole 7140. In addition, the total random number value of the random number value for determining a hit is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In other words, the random number value for determining a hit is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

As shown in FIG. 188, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 7120, the main CPU 201 determines the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol as a "jackpot" with a selection rate of about 1/199.8 based on the hit determination process of the first special symbol using the random number value for the hit determination of the first special symbol, and determines the result as a "miss" otherwise. Also, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 7140, the main CPU 201 determines the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol as a "jackpot" with a selection rate of about 1/199.8 based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol using the random number value for the hit determination of the second special symbol, and determines the result as a "miss" otherwise.

The range (width) of the random numbers that determine a "jackpot", i.e., the selection rate, is not limited to the above values and can be freely modified as needed.

In addition, the system may be configured so that a "small win" is determined when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, but if a "small win" is determined, it is preferable to set a relatively low selection rate for the "small win" so that the determination made in the hit determination process for the second special symbol is more favorable than the determination made in the hit determination process for the first special symbol.

In addition, when the first special symbol hit determination process or the second special symbol hit determination process is performed, a "time-saving hit" that transitions directly to a time-saving game state (C time-saving game state) without transitioning to a jackpot game state may be determined.

In addition, if the seventh pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the selection rate of a big win and/or a small win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting. However, even if the seventh pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, it is preferable that the selection rate of a time-saving win, for example, be a common probability for all settings.

In addition to or instead of changing the selection rate of a big win or a small win according to the set value, for example, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning port 7156 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning port 7156, or the number of times the time-saving continues may be changed for each set value. In other words, by adopting one or more of the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the probability of a big win, the probability of a small win, the opening frequency of the V winning port 7156 (i.e. the operation frequency of the second special electric shutter 7154), the opening time, and the number of times the time-saving continues, the expected value controlled in the big win game state may be configured to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting.

[9-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
189 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 189 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The special symbol determination table is a table that determines the "selected symbol information" and "symbol designation command" that determine the special symbol that will be displayed when it stops.

The "selection symbol command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the type of win when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a win, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for specifying the special symbol that will be displayed in a stopped state.

The special symbol determination table specifies the type of special symbol, the winning/losing determination value data described above, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol obtained when the game ball enters the first starting hole 7120 or the second starting hole 7140 in association with the "select symbol command" and the "symbol designation command." The symbol random number value of the special symbol is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 189, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 0 and 89, the main CPU 201 determines "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 90 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In this way, in this embodiment, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 189 is configured to determine the selected symbol command in the order of "z2" < "z1."

In addition, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 19, the main CPU 201 determines "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. In addition, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 20 and 79, the main CPU 201 determines "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. In addition, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 80 and 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and determines "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

In this way, in this embodiment, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 189 is configured to easily determine the selected symbol command in the order of "z3" = "z5" < "z4".

In addition, when small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the win determination process for the second special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 19, the main CPU 201 determines "z6" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. In addition, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 20 and 79, the main CPU 201 determines "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. In addition, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 80 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z8" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In this way, in this embodiment, when small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the win determination process for the second special pattern, the special pattern determination table shown in Figure 189 is configured to easily determine the selected pattern command in the order of "z6" = "z8" < "z7".

The range of the random number value of the special symbol that determines the "selected symbol command", i.e., the selection rate, is not limited to the above values and can be freely changed as needed.

Although the seventh pachinko gaming machine will not be described, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is a table that is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 187) when the special symbol is stopped, in response to a selection symbol command. In addition, the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 display the stop mode of a big win, a small win, or a miss, based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. In addition, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table described in the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 12(B)) is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

[9-3-3. Winning Type Determination Table]
190 is an example of a winning type determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table shown in FIG. 190 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The hit type determination table is a table that determines the operation content of a hit, and is a table that determines the "state of the big hit game state," the "state of the small hit game state," and the "state of the subsequent game state (time-saving flag, A time-saving end condition)."

As shown in FIG. 190, the winning type determination table associates the selected symbol command with the "state of the big win game state," the "state of the small win game state," and the "state of the subsequent game state (time-saving flag, A time-saving end condition)."

"Opening mode of jackpot gaming state" indicates the opening mode of the first large prize winning port 7131 that is opened during a jackpot gaming state. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time (e.g., 28 seconds) and closing time (e.g., 2 seconds) per round during a jackpot gaming state are specified in advance, and the opening mode of the first large prize winning port 7131 indicates the maximum number of rounds during a jackpot gaming state. Note that the maximum opening time per round may be different, or the closing time (round interval time) of each round may be differently determined. Furthermore, the number of openings and the opening time may be determined so that the first large prize winning port 6131 is opened and closed multiple times per round.

The "opening mode of the big win game state" corresponding to the "selected symbol command z6-8" of the small win of the second special symbol is the opening mode when the game ball that entered the second big winning hole 7151 opened in the small win game state passes through the V winning hole 7156 and transitions to the big win game state via the second route. When the game state transitions to the big win game state via this second route, the opening of the second big winning hole 7151 in the small win game state is the first round, and after the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 (from the second round onwards), a round game is executed to open the first big winning hole 7131. Also, when the game ball that entered the second big winning hole 7151 opened in the small win game state does not pass through the V winning hole 7156, the game state does not transition to the big win game state, and the mode of the game state thereafter is not determined.

"Opening mode in small win game state" indicates the opening mode of the second large prize opening 7151 that opens in a small win game state. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time (e.g., 0.1 seconds) and closing time (e.g., 0.6 seconds) per opening in a small win game state are specified in advance, and indicate the maximum number of openings in a small win game state. Note that the maximum opening time per opening may be determined differently, or the closing time for each opening may be determined differently.

Here, the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one small win game state (for example, 1 small win x 10 balls (second specified number) x 10 balls (number of prize balls) = 100 balls) is set to be less than the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one big win game state (for example, 5R x 7 balls (first specified number) x 15 balls (number of prize balls) = 525 balls), and it can be said that the big win game state is the advantageous "first special game state," and the small win game state is the "second special game state" that is less profitable than the big win game state.

In addition, the maximum opening time for one round in a small win game state (e.g., 0.1 seconds) is set shorter than the maximum opening time for one round in a large win game state (e.g., 28 seconds), so that in a large win game state, the first large winning opening 7131 opens in a favorable "first opening mode," and in a small win game state, the second large winning opening 7151 opens in a less favorable "second opening mode" than the first opening mode.

The "state of the subsequent game state" indicates the state of the game state after the end of the big win game state, and indicates the settings of the "time-saving flag" and "A time-saving end condition." In addition, in this embodiment, the settings of the "time-saving flag" and "A time-saving end condition" are configured to differ depending on the game state at the time of winning when it is determined that there is a big win or a small win (whether it is "normal game state" or "time-saving game state").

The "time-saving flag" is a flag that indicates whether or not a time-saving game state is being executed and the type of time-saving game state that is being executed, with a time-saving flag of 0 indicating a normal game state, a time-saving flag of 1 indicating an "A time-saving game state," and a time-saving flag of 2 indicating a "B time-saving game state." Note that in this embodiment, the C time-saving game state is not being executed, but if the C time-saving game state can be executed, a time-saving flag of 3 will indicate the C time-saving game state.

The "A time-saving end condition" is a special condition for ending the A time-saving game state as a time-saving game state, and when either the "total number of special symbol time-savings" which is the total number of times that either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the A time-saving game state, or the "number of time-savings of the second special symbol" which is the total number of times that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the A time-saving game state, is met, the A time-saving game state ends and transitions to the normal game state.

In addition, in all time-saving game states (time-saving game state A, time-saving game state B), a "time-saving common ending condition" is set as a condition for transitioning to a big win game state or a small win game state. Therefore, in the time-saving game state A, if the "time-saving ending condition A" or the "time-saving common ending condition" is met, the time-saving game state will end and a transition to the normal game state will occur.

Here, the "A time-saving end condition" includes not only the "number of times the second special symbol has been shortened," but also the "total number of times the special symbol has been shortened," which is the cumulative number of times the first special symbol has changed display. This is to avoid an event in which, during normal play mode in which left-handed play is the regular play mode, the start information for the first special symbol may be stored up to the reserved number of first special symbols (e.g., four), and when switching from normal play mode to time-saving play mode, the player is unable to receive the benefit of the time-saving play mode for the "number of times the second special symbol has been shortened." For this reason, the "total number of times the special symbol has been shortened" is set to at least the sum of the "number of times the second special symbol has been shortened" and the "reserved number of first special symbols (e.g., four)," plus a safe number of times (e.g., two) to allow for some leeway.

Thus, even if we set the condition of the "total number of times the second special symbol has been shortened" which is the cumulative number of times the first special symbol has changed in addition to the "number of times the second special symbol has been shortened", in a time-shortened game state where right-hand hitting is the regular game mode, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first starting hole 7120, but it is easy for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 7140. Therefore, except in irregular game modes, the condition of the "total number of times the second special symbol has been shortened" is not met, and the time-shortened game state ends when the condition of the "number of times the second special symbol has been shortened" is met.

The "A time-saving end condition" may be configured to include only the condition "number of times the second special symbol has been shortened" without including the condition "total number of times the special symbol has been shortened."

The main CPU 201 refers to the hit type determination table and determines the mode of the big hit game state, the mode of the small hit game state, the time-saving flag, and the A time-saving end condition based on the selected symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 190, in the normal game state, when the first special symbol hit determination process determines that a jackpot has been reached, the selected symbol command "z1" is selected 90% of the time, and the A time-saving end condition is easily determined after the end of the jackpot game state, with the condition that either the "total number of times that the special symbols have been shortened" = 7 times or the "second number of times that the second special symbols have been shortened" = 1 time being met as the "first A time-saving end condition" after the end of the jackpot game state. In contrast, in the time-saving game state, the A time-saving end condition is determined after the end of all jackpot game states, with the condition that either the "total number of times that the special symbols have been shortened" = 11 times or the "second number of times that the second special symbols have been shortened" = 5 times being met as the "second A time-saving end condition" which is more advantageous to the player than the "first A time-saving end condition".

In this embodiment, when the A time-saving game state in the time-saving game state is further differentiated, the time-saving game state when the A time-saving end conditions are determined to be "total number of time-saving times for special symbols = 7" and "number of time-saving times for the second special symbol = 1" is also called the "first time-saving game state," and the time-saving game state when the A time-saving end conditions are determined to be "total number of time-saving times for special symbols = 11" and "number of time-saving times for the second special symbol = 5" is also called the "second time-saving game state." The B time-saving game state is also called the "third time-saving game state." As described above, the "A time-saving end condition" may be configured to include only the condition of the "second special symbol time-saving number of times" without including the condition of the "total number of times of time-saving for special symbols." Therefore, the first time-saving game state may be the time-saving game state when the "second special symbol time-saving number of times = 1" is determined, and the second time-saving game state may be the time-saving game state when the "second special symbol time-saving number of times = 5" is determined. In addition, when the "first time-saving game state" and the "second time-saving game state" are not clearly distinguished, they will continue to be called the "A time-saving game state," and when the "A time-saving game state" and the "B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state)" are not clearly distinguished, they will continue to be called the "time-saving game state."

[9-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
191 and 192 are examples of a variation pattern table of special symbols of the seventh pachinko game machine. Fig. 191 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in a normal game state of the seventh pachinko game machine, and Fig. 192 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in a time-saving game state of the seventh pachinko game machine. The variation pattern tables of special symbols shown in Figs. 191 and 192 are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

As shown in Figures 191 and 192, the special symbol variation pattern table associates the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or lose), the random number value for reach determination, the random number value for effect selection, the special symbol variation pattern, and the special symbol variation display time. The reach determination random number value is selected, for example, from 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number value is selected, for example, from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number values is not limited to the above. Also, the "Notes" column in Figures 191 and 192 conveniently shows the time when the special symbol is determined and the content of the effect execution, etc., for ease of understanding.

The main CPU 201 determines the special pattern variation pattern table of either FIG. 191 or FIG. 192 depending on the game status, etc., and refers to the determined special pattern variation pattern table to determine the special pattern variation pattern and the special pattern variation display time based on the type of special pattern, the result of the special pattern hit determination process, the reach determination random number value, and the performance selection random number value.

When the main CPU 201 determines the fluctuation pattern, it transmits a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the sub-CPU 301. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201. The fluctuation pattern command is configured to be able to identify whether the fluctuation pattern is triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 7120 or the second starting hole 7140.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 191, three special symbol variation pattern tables are provided as the special symbol variation pattern tables in the normal game state: special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in Fig. 191(1), special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in Fig. 191(2), and special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in Fig. 191(3). Note that the number of special symbol variation pattern tables in the normal game state is not limited to three, and may be one or two or more.

In this embodiment, when distinguishing between normal game states in detail, the normal game state in which left-handed hits are the normal game mode is referred to as the "first normal game state," and the normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol that is performed based on the start information of the second special symbol that was stored in the second special symbol start memory area of the main RAM 203 when the time-saving game state ends (i.e., the normal game state in which the reserved number of second special symbols stored in the time-saving game state is being consumed) is referred to as the "second normal game state."

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 191 (1) is a fluctuation pattern table that is selected in the first normal game state, and is a fluctuation pattern table that is selected in the general presentation state after the seventh pachinko game machine has been backed up and cleared (i.e., the initial value fluctuation pattern table) or after a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation displays have been performed since the first normal game state began (i.e., after transitioning from the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 191 (3) described below).

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 191 (2) is a fluctuation pattern table exclusively for the second special symbol that is selected in the second normal game state, and is a fluctuation pattern table that is selected in the "continuous battle" described below.

The special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 191 (3) is a variation pattern table that is selected during the first normal game state, and is a variation pattern table that is selected during the limited presentation state from the start of the first normal game state until a predetermined number of special symbol variation displays are performed.

The transition relationship of the special symbol variation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal game state shown in Figures 191 (1) to (3) will be described in detail later using Figure 193.

Here, in the first normal game state where hitting from the left is considered the normal game mode, it is extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 7140, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol should not be determined (the variation display of the second special symbol is not performed). However, in case the game ball irregularly enters the second starting hole 7140, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is specified.

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1 in the first normal game state shown in FIG. 191 (1), the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol is set to the same time (for example, 15,000 ms) as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, regardless of the result of the winning determination process of the second special symbol. However, as described below, even if the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol is the same, different performance contents are executed.

In this embodiment, the pattern determination time for the special symbol is determined based on the game state and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win/lose), but in the normal game state, the pattern determination time is set to the same time (for example, 540 ms) regardless of the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win/lose).

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in time-saving game mode)
In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 192, four special symbol variation pattern tables are provided as variation pattern tables of special symbols in the time-saving game state: a special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in Fig. 192(1), a special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in Fig. 192(2), a special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in Fig. 192(3), and a special symbol variation pattern table J4 shown in Fig. 192(4). Note that the number of special symbol variation pattern tables in the time-saving game state is not limited to four, and may be one or two or more.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 192 (1) is the fluctuation pattern table selected at the time of the final fluctuation of the first time-saving game state, and is the fluctuation pattern table selected at the time of the "Sengoku Entry Chance" described below.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 192 (2) is a fluctuation pattern table that is selected at times other than the final fluctuation of the first time-saving game state, and is a fluctuation pattern table that is selected at the time of the "Chance to Enter the Sengoku Period."

Here, other than the final change of the first time-saving game state, it is limited to when the first special pattern is changing and both conditions "time-saving number of times for the second special pattern = 1" and "total time-saving number of times for special patterns = 7" are not met (when the second special pattern is changing, "time-saving number of times for the second special pattern = 1" is met, resulting in the final change), so the special pattern change pattern table J2 is a change pattern table exclusively for the first special pattern, and the change pattern of the second special pattern is not determined.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 192 (3) is a fluctuation pattern table that is selected at times other than the final fluctuation of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, and is a fluctuation pattern table that is selected during the "Sengoku Time" described below.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table J4 shown in FIG. 192 (4) is the fluctuation pattern table selected at the time of the final fluctuation of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, and is the fluctuation pattern table selected during the "Sengoku Time" described below.

In this embodiment, the same variation pattern table is determined for the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state, but it may be configured so that different variation pattern tables are determined for the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state.

The transition relationship of the special symbol change pattern tables J1 to J4 in the time-saving play state shown in Figures 192 (1) to (4) will be described in detail later using Figure 193.

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 in the time-saving play state shown in FIG. 192 (1), the fluctuation display time of the special symbol is determined to be an extremely short first fluctuation display time (e.g., 200 ms) except when the hit determination process of the first special symbol results in a jackpot, and when the hit determination process of the first special symbol results in a jackpot, the fluctuation display time of the special symbol is determined to be a long second fluctuation display time (e.g., 89,000 ms). Also, at the time of the final fluctuation of the first time-saving play state, the pattern determination time of the special symbol is determined to be an extremely long pattern determination time (e.g., 89,000 ms).

This will be described in more detail later using Figure 199, but by determining the variable display time of the special symbol to be the extremely short first variable display time, the time-saving game state is quickly ended, and the specified number for normal power on the normal electric device 7146 is set to 1, etc., so that in the first time-saving game state, the reserved number of the second special symbol is not accumulated, and the winning determination process for the second special symbol (variable display of the second special symbol) can be performed only once.

In addition, as the "A time-saving end condition", the "total number of times the special symbols have been shortened" is set to be equal to or greater than the sum of the "number of times the second special symbols have been shortened" and the "number of reserved first special symbols (e.g., 4)" (see FIG. 190), and at the time of the final change in the time-saving play state, the change display of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, which corresponds to the irregular play mode when the "total number of times the special symbols have been shortened" is established.

In the special symbol variation pattern table J1 in the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 192(1), when it is based on the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, all the variable display times of the special symbols are configured to be determined to the same first variable display time (e.g., 200 ms), but they may be configured to be different from each other, or only some of them may be configured to be different. For example, when the hit determination process of the second special symbol results in a big hit, the variable display time of the special symbol may be determined to be the long variable display time A (e.g., 89,000 ms), when the hit determination process of the second special symbol results in a small hit, the variable display time of the special symbol may be determined to be the short variable display time B (e.g., 300 ms), and when the hit determination process of the second special symbol results in a miss, the variable display time of the special symbol may be determined to be the extremely short variable display time C (e.g., 200 ms).

In the special symbol variation pattern table J3 in the time-saving play state shown in FIG. 192(3), when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a small hit, the third variable display time (e.g., 2000 ms) in which the variable display time of the special symbol is short, or the fourth variable display time (e.g., 5000 ms, 12000 ms) longer than the third variable display time is determined. Also, in the special symbol variation pattern table J3 in the time-saving play state shown in FIG. 192(3), when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is based on the result, the third variable display time (e.g., 2000 ms) in which the variable display time of the special symbol is short is determined in order to quickly end the variable display of the first special symbol and to display the variable display of the second special symbol from the next time onwards.

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J3 in the time-saving play state shown in FIG. 192 (3), when the hit determination process for the second special symbol results in a small hit, the special symbol fluctuation display time is configured to be determined as the third fluctuation display time or the fourth fluctuation display time, but the third fluctuation display time may be the same as the first fluctuation display time (e.g., 200 ms), and the fourth fluctuation display time may be the same as the second fluctuation display time (e.g., 89,000 ms).

In the special symbol variation pattern table J4 in the time-saving play state shown in FIG. 192 (4), the variation display time of the special symbol is the same as that in the special symbol variation pattern table J3 in the time-saving play state shown in FIG. 192 (3), but the variation pattern of the special symbol is configured so that if the hit determination process for the first special symbol or the second special symbol results in a miss, the content that is executed is different.

In addition, at the time of the final change between the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special pattern or the second special pattern is a miss, the pattern determination time for the special pattern is determined to be longer (for example, 15,000 ms) than if the result of the hit determination process for the first special pattern or the second special pattern is a big hit or a small hit.

In this way, in the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, if the special symbol hit determination process results in a miss, a long symbol determination time (for example, 15,000 ms) is determined. This is because when a long symbol determination time is displayed, the game results in "Sengoku Time" (payout, number of consecutive wins, etc.) are displayed at the end of "Sengoku Time" (described below).

[9-3-5. Special symbol variation pattern table transition diagram]
Fig. 193 is an example of a transition diagram of the special symbol variation pattern table in the seventh pachinko game machine. The transition diagram of the special symbol variation pattern table shown in Fig. 193 shows an example of a transition diagram when a left hit is performed as a regular game mode in the first normal game mode, and a right hit is performed as a regular game mode in the time-saving game mode, and an irregular game mode is excluded.

(Normal gameplay state after power-on after initialization)
First, in the first normal game state after the power is turned on after initialization, as described above, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 191(1) is selected.

In the first normal game state where hitting from the left is the normal game mode, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 7140, and when the game ball enters the first starting hole 7120, a hit determination process for the first special symbol (variable display of the first special symbol) is performed.

(When the selection symbol command "z1" is determined in normal game mode)
In the normal game state, when the first special symbol is judged as a jackpot as a result of the hit judgment process and the selected symbol command "z1" is determined, the game state transitions to the first time-saving game state in which the "second special symbol time-saving number of times" = 1 is determined after the end of the jackpot game state. In this first time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 7140, the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 192 (1) is selected.

In the first time-saving game state, if a game ball does not enter the second start hole 7140 and there are reserved numbers of the first special pattern, the special pattern variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 192 (2) is selected, and if a game ball enters the second start hole 7140 after the reserved number of the first special pattern is consumed, the special pattern variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 192 (1) is selected.

After the first time-saving game state ends, the number of reserved second special symbols should not be stored, as described later with reference to FIG. 199. Therefore, after the first time-saving game state ends, the game transitions to the first normal game state, and the special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 191 (3) is selected until the number of times the special symbol variation display has been performed reaches 20 spins since the first normal game state began.

Then, when the number of times the special symbol changes display exceeds 20 spins after the first normal game state is started, the special symbol change pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 191 (1) will be selected.

(When the selection symbol command "z1" is determined in the time-saving game state)
In the time-saving game state, if the first special symbol is judged to be a jackpot as a result of the hit judgment process and the selected symbol command "z1" is determined, the game moves to a second time-saving game state in which the "second special symbol time-saving number of times" = 5 is determined after the end of the jackpot game state. In this second time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 7140, the special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 192 (3) is selected.

When the second time-saving game state reaches its final change, the special symbol change pattern table J4 shown in FIG. 192 (4) is selected.

After the second time-saving game state ends, the number of reserved second special symbols is generally stored, so the game transitions to the second normal game state after the second time-saving game state ends. During the control period of the second special symbol in the second normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 191 (2) is selected.

After the second normal game state ends (i.e., after the reserved number of second special symbols is consumed), the game transitions to the first normal game state, and the special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 191 (3) is selected until the number of times the special symbol variation display has been performed reaches 20 spins since the first normal game state began.

Then, when the number of times the special symbol changes display exceeds 20 spins after the first normal game state is started, the special symbol change pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 191 (1) will be selected.

(When the selection command "z2-5" is confirmed)
If the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot and the selected symbol command "z2" is determined, and if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot and the selected symbol command "z3-5" is determined, a transition to the second time-saving game state will occur, which is the same as when the selected symbol command "z1" is determined in the time-saving game state described above, so explanation will be omitted.

(When the selection command "z6-8" is confirmed)
If a small win is determined as a result of the hit determination process for the second special pattern, the game state changes depending on whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning port 7156, and the variation pattern table of the selected special pattern will differ.

Here, the determination of a small win as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is premised on the premise that the time-saving game state in which the game ball can enter the second starting hole 7140 has been controlled. When the game state transitions to the small win game state, the "time-saving common ending condition" is met as described above, and the time-saving game state ends once (the same applies when the game state transitions to the big win game state). Then, if the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156, the game state transitions to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, the game state transitions to the second time-saving game state. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V winning hole 7156, the game state does not transition to the big win game state, but transitions to the normal game state.

If the hit determination process for the second special symbol determines that there has been a small hit and the game ball has not passed through the V winning hole 7156, the number of reserved second special symbols is generally stored after the small hit game state ends, and therefore the game transitions to the second normal game state after the time-saving game state ends. During the control period of the second special symbol in the second normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 191 (2) is selected.

After the second normal game state ends (i.e., after the reserved number of second special symbols is consumed), the game transitions to the first normal game state, and the special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 191 (3) is selected until the number of times the special symbol variation display has been performed reaches 20 spins since the first normal game state began.

Then, when the number of times the special symbol changes display exceeds 20 spins after the first normal game state is started, the special symbol change pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 191 (1) will be selected.

If the hit determination process for the second special symbol determines that there has been a small hit and the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156, the game will transition to the second time-saving game state, which is the same as when the selected symbol command "z1" is determined in the time-saving game state described above, and so no further explanation will be given.

(When transitioning to B time-saving game mode)
As described later, after the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a normal game state reaches a ceiling value (for example, 599 times), the game state transitions to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state). Here, the "B time-saving end condition" of the B time-saving game state is that either the "total number of times of time-saving of special symbols" = 11 times or the "number of times of time-saving of second special symbols" = 5 times is established, and is set to be the same as the special condition for ending the second time-saving game state. Therefore, when the game state transitions to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state), the special symbol variation pattern table transitions in the same way as when the game state transitions to the second time-saving game state.

[9-3-6. Special symbol pre-reading related data]
FIG. 194 is an example of data related to the look-ahead of the special symbol in the seventh pachinko game machine. Here, "look-ahead" refers to analyzing the start information of the special symbol acquired before the lottery of the special symbol when the game ball enters the first start hole 7120 or the second start hole 7140 and the main control circuit 200 (main CPU 201) acquires the start information of the special symbol (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for a symbol, random number value for determining a reach, random number value for selecting a performance, etc.). Then, the analyzed information (look-ahead command) is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 (sub CPU 301), and the "look-ahead performance" can be executed based on the look-ahead command.

Figure 194 (1) is a look-ahead execution correspondence table that determines whether or not to perform look-ahead depending on the game status as data related to look-ahead of special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 194 (1), in the normal game state, both pre-reading based on the start information of the first special symbol and pre-reading based on the start information of the second special symbol can be performed. Also, in the time-saving game state, big win game state, and small win game state, only pre-reading based on the start information of the second special symbol can be performed.

Figure 194 (2) shows an example of the configuration of a look-ahead command based on the analyzed information after analyzing the start information for a special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 194 (2), the look-ahead command is composed of the "type of special symbol" - either the first special symbol or the second special symbol - and multiple "parameters 1 to 3."

"Parameter 1" is the winning/losing information that is analyzed in advance to determine whether it is a big win, a small win, or a miss based on a random number value for determining a big win, and Figure 194 (3) is an example of a setting table for parameter 1.

"Parameter 2" is pattern information that is obtained by analyzing in advance the special pattern (selected pattern) that will be displayed when the reel stops based on the random number value for determining a jackpot and the random number value for the pattern. Figure 194 (4) is an example of a setting table for parameter 2.

"Parameter 3" is fluctuation information that analyzes the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in advance based on the random number value for determining a jackpot, the random number value for determining a reach, and the random number value for selecting a performance. Figure 194 (5) is an example of a setting table for parameter 3.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol from when the start information of the special symbol is read ahead until the special symbol is drawn based on the start information of the special symbol is also called "pre-variation." Also, the variable display of the special symbol when the special symbol is drawn based on the start information of the special symbol is also called "the said variation."

[9-3-7. Normal symbol winning judgment table]
195 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. The winning determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 195 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol winning judgment table is a table referenced in the normal symbol winning judgment process, and is a table referenced when determining by lottery whether a "normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol losing" is made based on the normal symbol winning judgment random number value obtained when the game ball passes through the passing gate 7126.

The winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 195 specifies the range (width) of random numbers for winning judgment of normal symbols and winning/losing judgment value data for normal symbols ("normal symbol win" or "normal symbol miss") in correspondence with each other. Note that the random numbers for winning judgment of normal symbols are obtained in the range of 0 to 65535 (65536 types), for example. However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 195, and determines the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal symbols based on the range (width) of the random number value for winning judgment for normal symbols.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern shown in FIG. 195, and when the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern is any value between 1 and 65535, it judges it as a "normal pattern winning" and determines the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal pattern as "normal pattern winning/losing judgment value data". In addition, when the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern is 0, the main CPU 201 judges it as a "normal pattern losing" and determines the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal pattern as "normal pattern losing judgment value data".

In this embodiment, a "normal hit" is determined with a selection rate of approximately 1/1.00, and a "normal hit" is more likely to be determined than a "normal miss." Note that it is preferable that a "normal hit" is more likely to be determined than a "normal miss," and the selection rate of a "normal hit" is not limited to approximately 1/1.00.

In this embodiment, the selection rate for "normal symbol hit" is set to the same regardless of whether the game state is normal or time-saving, but the opening pattern of the normal electric device 7146 is changed depending on the game state, as described below, to give the player different benefits depending on the game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" is set to the same regardless of whether the game state is the normal game state or the time-saving game state, but the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" may be made different depending on the game state. When making the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" different depending on the game state, it is desirable to configure it so that the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" in the time-saving game state is higher than the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" in the normal game state. Furthermore, the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" may be made different depending on the type of time-saving game state between the A time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) and the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state).

[9-3-8. Normal symbol determination table]
196 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 196 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting "normal symbol selection symbol data" that determines the normal symbol stopping symbol based on the above-mentioned normal symbol winning/losing determination value data and the normal symbol random number value obtained when the game ball passes through the passing gate 7126.

The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 196 specifies the above-mentioned normal symbol win/loss determination value data ("normal symbol win" or "normal symbol miss"), the normal symbol random number value, and the normal symbol selection symbol data in correspondence with each other. The normal symbol random number value is obtained, for example, from 0 to 100 (101 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 196 and determines the normal pattern selection pattern data based on the normal pattern hit determination value data and the pattern random number value of the normal pattern.

According to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 196, when normal pattern hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal pattern hit determination process, for example, the normal pattern selection pattern data is selected as follows.

For example, when normal symbol winning judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f1" as the normal symbol selection symbol data if the normal symbol random number value is any value between 0 and 49, and selects "f2" as the normal symbol selection symbol data if the normal symbol random number value is any value between 50 and 99. In addition, when normal symbol losing judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f3" as the normal symbol selection symbol data regardless of the normal symbol random number value.

In particular, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, the normal symbol selection symbol data is selected based on the normal symbol win/loss determination value data (the result of the normal symbol win determination process) and the normal symbol random number value, regardless of the gaming state. Note that, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the normal symbol selection symbol data may be selected depending on the gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern (see FIG. 195) and determines the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal pattern based on the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern, and then refers to the normal pattern judgment table (see FIG. 196) and determines the normal pattern selection pattern data based on the pattern random number value of the normal pattern, but is not limited to this. For example, the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal pattern (whether the normal pattern is winning or losing) and the normal pattern selection pattern data may be determined together based on the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern and the pattern random number value of the normal pattern.

[9-3-9. Table for determining the opening pattern of normal electric accessories]
197 is an example of a normal electric role opening pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. The normal electric role opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 197 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

When normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol (in the case of a hit for a normal symbol), the opening pattern determination table for the normal electric device 7146 is referenced when determining the opening pattern of the normal electric device 7146 as the opening mode of the normal electric device 7146 according to the game state and the normal symbol selection symbol data.

The normal electric role opening pattern determination table shown in Figure 197 specifies the game state, the normal symbol selection symbol data, and the opening pattern of the normal electric role 7146 in correspondence with each other.

In this embodiment, the "opening pattern of the normal electric role 7146" is composed of the "first opening time" in the first opening state of the second starting port 7140, the "first waiting time" in the first closing state of the second starting port 7140, the "second opening time" in the second opening state of the second starting port 7140, the "second waiting time" in the second closing state of the second starting port 7140, and the "ending time" in which the second starting port 7140 is closed and the operation of the normal electric role 7146 is terminated. The opening pattern of the normal electric role 7146 is not limited to the above-mentioned configuration, and may be configured to be capable of repeating the opening state and the closing state three or more times, or may be configured to be composed of only one opening state. Furthermore, it may be configured to have an "opening time" in which the second starting port 7140 is waiting for the first opening before the "first opening time".

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal electric role opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 197, and determines the opening pattern of the normal electric role 7146 based on the game state and the normal pattern selection pattern data. When the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric role 7146, it transmits to the sub-CPU 301 a normal electric role opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the normal electric role 7146.

According to the opening pattern determination table for normal electric roles shown in Figure 197, when a normal symbol is hit during normal play, regardless of the normal symbol selection symbol data, the opening pattern (91H01H) of the first normal electric role 7146 is determined to be a first opening time of 72 ms, no first wait time, no opening from the second time onwards, and an ending time of 12 ms.

In addition, according to the opening pattern determination table for normal electric devices shown in Figure 197, when a normal symbol is hit during time-saving play, the opening pattern (91H02H) of the second normal electric device 7146 is determined to be a first opening time of 5400 ms, a first waiting time of 120 ms, a second opening time of 72 ms, and an ending time of 12 ms, regardless of the normal symbol selection symbol data.

In this way, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 7146 differs depending on the game state, and in the case of a normal symbol hit in the normal game state, an "unfavorable opening mode (also called a "short opening")" in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 7140 is determined, and in the case of a normal symbol hit in the time-saving game state, an "advantageous opening mode (also called a "long opening")" in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 7140 is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of which normal electric role 7146 opening pattern is activated, the specified number for normal power is set to one, and when one game ball enters the second start hole 7140 while the opening pattern of the normal electric role 7146 is in operation (while the second start hole 7140 is open), the operation of the opening pattern of that normal electric role 7146 ends (the second start hole 7140 closes). In other words, only one game ball can enter the second start hole 7140 for one normal pattern hit, and even if there is 5,400 ms of remaining opening time in the time-saving game state, the second start hole 7140 will close.

In this embodiment, the A time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) and the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) are treated as the same time-saving game state without distinction, and the same opening pattern of the normal electric device 7146 is determined. However, it may be configured to determine different opening patterns of the normal electric device 7146 for the A time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) and the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state).

Furthermore, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 7146 may be different depending on the normal pattern selection pattern data. However, it is desirable that when a normal pattern is hit in the normal game state, the opening pattern is a group of "unfavorable opening patterns" compared to when a normal pattern is hit in the time-saving game state, and when a normal pattern is hit in the time-saving game state, the opening pattern is a group of "favorable opening patterns" compared to when a normal pattern is hit in the normal game state.

[9-3-10. Normal pattern variation table]
198 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 198 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 198 corresponds the game state, the normal symbol selection symbol data, the normal symbol variation pattern, and the normal symbol variation display time. Also, the "Notes" column in FIG. 198 conveniently shows the normal symbol pattern determination time for ease of understanding.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variation display time based on the game state and the normal symbol selection symbol data. Then, when the main CPU 201 determines the normal symbol variation pattern, it transmits to the sub-CPU 301 a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern.

According to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 198, in the normal game state, the normal symbol variation display time is determined to be 414 ms, and in the time-saving game state, the normal symbol variation display time is determined to be 408 ms. Also, in this embodiment, the normal symbol pattern determination time is always determined to be the same time (for example, 540 ms) regardless of the game state or the result of the normal symbol winning determination process.

In this embodiment, the normal game state is configured so that all the same normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol fixed times are determined, but different normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol fixed times may be determined according to the normal symbol selection symbol data. Similarly, in the time-saving game state, the same normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol fixed times are determined, but different normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol fixed times may be determined according to the normal symbol selection symbol data. Furthermore, different normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol fixed times may be determined between the A time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) and the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state).

Next, an example of the operation of the normal electric device 7146 in the first time-saving play state will be described with reference to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 190, the special symbol variation pattern table J1 in the time-saving play state shown in FIG. 192, the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 196, the normal electric device opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 197, and the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 198.

[9-3-11. Operation of normal electric devices in the first time-saving game state]
FIG. 199 shows an example of the operation of the normal electric device 7146 in the first time-saving play state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 199, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 7126 in the first time-saving game state, the first normal symbol variable display is started. At this time, the normal symbol is variably displayed in the normal symbol display section 161 for a variable display time of 408 ms by referring to the normal symbol variable pattern table shown in FIG. 198, and then the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (symbol fixed) for a symbol fixation time of 540 ms.

When the first normal pattern has been determined and a normal pattern has been hit, the normal electric device opening pattern determination table shown in Figure 197 is referenced and a long opening is determined as the opening pattern for the normal electric device 7146, and the second starting hole 7140 remains open for a maximum of 5,400 ms.

And because the specified number of normal power devices for the normal electric device 7146 is one, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 7140, the operation of the normal electric device ends and the second starting hole 7140 closes.

When the game ball enters the second starting hole 7140, the second special symbol display section 164 references the special symbol variation pattern table J1 in the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 192 and displays the variation of the second special symbol with an extremely short first variation display time of 200 ms.

When the variation of the second special symbol ends, the A time-saving end condition "number of times the second special symbol has been shortened = 1" is met, the first time-saving game state ends, and the game transitions to the normal game state (first normal game state). Therefore, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 7140, the first time-saving game state can be quickly ended.

When the variation of the second special symbol has finished, the second special symbol will be displayed stationary (symbol fixed) for an extremely long symbol fixation time of 89,000 ms.

When the second special symbol is determined, which takes an extremely long time of 89,000 ms, a presentation (boss battle presentation) related to the result of the winning determination process for the second special symbol is performed on the display device 7, as described below.

In addition, even if the game ball enters the second starting hole 7140 and the operation of the normal electric device ends, if the reserved number of normal symbols is stored, the second display of the normal symbol variations will start immediately after the operation of the normal electric device ends. In other words, it is also possible for the second display of the normal symbol variations and the second special symbol variations to start approximately simultaneously in the first time-saving game state.

The variable display of the normal symbol in the first time-saving game state is performed by referring to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 198, and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable display time of 408 ms, after which the normal symbol is fixed (stopped display) in a pattern fixing time of 540 ms.

In this embodiment, the relationship is set such that the first variable display time of the second special symbol in the first time-saving game state (200 ms) ≦ the variable display time of the normal symbol (408 ms) holds. Therefore, even if the first time-saving game state is in effect when the second variable display of the normal symbol starts, the game state will have already transitioned to the normal game state (first normal game state) when the second variable display of the normal symbol ends.

For this reason, even if the second normal symbol determination is completed and a normal symbol is hit, the normal electric device opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 197 is referenced and a short opening (72 ms) is determined as the opening pattern for the normal electric device 7146 in the normal game state, making it extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 7140.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the variable display time of the second special symbol is set to the extremely short first variable display time to quickly end the first time-saving game state, the specified number for normal power on the normal electric device 7146 is set to one, and the variable display time of the normal symbol in the first time-saving game state is set to be equal to or longer than the first variable display time of the second special symbol, so that when the first time-saving game state is being controlled, a game state is controlled in which the start information of the second special symbol is not stored in the second special symbol start memory area of the main RAM 203 (the reserved number of the second special symbol is not stored), and the variable display of the second special symbol can be limited to only one time.

In contrast, when the second time-saving game state is being controlled, a game state is controlled in which the start information of the second special pattern can be stored in the second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203 (the number of reserved second special patterns can be stored).

[9-3-12. Right-hand hit instruction period setting table]
200 is an example of a right-hit instruction period setting table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. The right-hit instruction period setting table shown in FIG. 200 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

As shown in FIG. 200, three conditions are set as "right hit instruction conditions" for issuing a right hit instruction: the first right hit instruction condition is "during control of the big win game state or the small win game state", the second right hit instruction condition is "during control of the time-saving game state", and the third right hit instruction condition is "during the control period of the second special pattern after the time-saving game state ends".

The first right-hit instruction condition, "While controlling the big win game state or the small win game state," is a condition that is met during the period from the start to the end of the big win game state or the small win game state.

The second right-hit instruction condition "during control of the time-saving game state" is a condition that is met during the period from the "time-saving start condition" to the "time-saving end condition." Note that the time-saving game state here does not distinguish between time-saving game state A (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) and time-saving game state B (third time-saving game state). The same is true for the third right-hit instruction condition "during the control period of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving game state."

The "time-saving start condition" refers to the end of the big win game state (including the end of the big win game state after the game ball passes through the V winning port 7156 from the small win game state). The "time-saving end condition" refers to either the start of the time to determine the special symbol in the final change of the time-saving game state, the end of the big win game state, or the end of the small win game state.

The third right-hit instruction condition, "during the control period of the second special symbol after the time-saving play state ends", is a condition that is met when the reserved number of second special symbols is stored at the end of the time-saving play state, during the period until the variable display of all second special symbols corresponding to that reserved number of second special symbols ends (until all reserved numbers of second special symbols are used up). Note that even if the reserved number of second special symbols is forcibly saved after the control period of the second special symbol after the time-saving play state ends, the third right-hit instruction condition is not met and no right-hit instruction is issued.

When any of the first right hit instruction condition through the third right hit instruction condition is met, a right hit instruction is issued to the player to make a right hit.

[9-4. Main control processing]
In the seventh pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are the same as those in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23), except for some special symbol control process and normal symbol control process. Therefore, the following will explain the special symbol control process and normal symbol control process, and will not explain the other processes executed by the main CPU 201.

Note that some of the processes performed in the special symbol control process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine are the same as those performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, the jackpot game state end process (Figure 42, Figure 214)), but below, the same processes as those performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[9-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 201. Fig. 201 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 201, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S7001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S7001, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the process of S7001, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the work area for the special symbol in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register.

In S7002, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S7001 is 0, i.e., whether the special symbol is in a state of waiting for variable display. If the main CPU 201 determines that the control number of the special symbol is not 0, it transfers processing to S7008, and if it determines that the control number of the special symbol is 0, it transfers processing to S7003.

In S7003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not start information for the second special pattern is stored in the second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203, i.e., whether or not there is a reserved number of second special patterns. If the main CPU 201 determines that start information for the second special pattern is not stored, it transfers processing to S7004, and if it determines that start information for the second special pattern is stored, it transfers processing to S7005.

In S7004, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information for the first special pattern is stored in the first special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203, i.e., whether or not there is a reserved number of the first special pattern. If the main CPU 201 determines that the start information for the first special pattern is not stored, it transfers the process to S7007, and if it determines that the start information for the first special pattern is stored, it transfers the process to S7006.

In S7005, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the second special pattern stored in the second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203 to the special pattern determination area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the start information stored in the second special pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the second special pattern start memory area (2) to the second special pattern start memory area (3) is shifted to the second special pattern start memory area (1) to the second special pattern start memory area (2).

In S7006, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the first special pattern stored in the first special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203 to the special pattern determination area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the start information stored in the first special pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the first special pattern start memory area (2) to the first special pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the first special pattern start memory area (1) to the first special pattern start memory area (3).

In S7007, if the special symbol start information (reserved number of first and second special symbols) has not been stored in the first and second special symbol start memory areas of the main RAM 203 for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. When the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demo display command, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demo display performance.

In S7008, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 202. After executing the processing of S7003, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S7001 to S7008) within the interrupt prohibited section.

In this manner, in this embodiment, a priority variation machine in which the special pattern management process is executed with a higher priority than the first special pattern when start information for the second special pattern is stored has been described as the seventh pachinko gaming machine, but this is not limited to this. For example, when start information for the first special pattern is stored, the priority variation machine may be one in which the special pattern management process is executed with a higher priority than the second special pattern, or a sequential variation machine in which the special pattern management process is executed in the order of winning (ball entry order) into the first start port 7120 or the second start port 7140.

[9-4-2. Special symbol management process]
Next, a special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol control process (see Fig. 201) will be described with reference to Fig. 202. Fig. 202 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The numbers ("0" to "7") written in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 202 are the control state numbers of the special symbols that are the subject of the process. The main CPU 201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process that corresponds to the control state number.

In S7011, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the special pattern is 0. This waiting time for the special pattern is set as the waiting time for various processes in the special pattern management process, and is decremented as a special pattern timer counter within the system timer interrupt process that is performed at 2 msec intervals, for example. If the main CPU 201 determines that the waiting time for the special pattern is not 0, it ends the special pattern management process and returns the process to the special pattern control process (see FIG. 201), and if it determines that the waiting time for the special pattern is 0, it transfers the process to S7012.

In S7012, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S7012, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7013. The main CPU 201 performs the process from S7013 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S7012.

In S7013, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. This S7013 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 203. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7014.

In S7014, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. This S7014 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 205. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7015.

In S7015, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This process of S7015 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 208. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7016.

In S7016, the main CPU 201 performs a small win game state setting process. This process of S7016 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this small win game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 210. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7017.

In S7017, the main CPU 201 performs a small win game state control process. This process of S7017 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this small win game state control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 211. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7018.

In S7018, the main CPU 201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process of S7018 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 212. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7019.

In S7019, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process of S7019 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 213. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7020.

In S7020, the main CPU 201 performs a process to end the jackpot game state. This process of S7020 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this process to end the jackpot game state will be described later with reference to FIG. 214.

After completing steps S7013 to S7020, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 201). In this case, the process returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

[9-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 202) will be described with reference to Fig. 203. Fig. 203 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7021, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", it ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 202), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "0", it transfers the process to S7022.

In S7022, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol hit determination process to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss. In this special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 188 is referenced, and a hit determination of the special symbol is made based on the random number value for big hit determination of the special symbol as the starting information of the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination area (0), and a hit/lose determination value data is determined according to the determination result. After executing the process of S7022, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7023.

In S7023, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol. In this special symbol determination process, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 189 is referenced, and a "select symbol command" or a "symbol designation command" is determined based on the hit/lose determination value data as the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process in S7022 and the special symbol random number value as the start information of the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination area (0). After executing the process of S7023, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7024.

In S7024, the main CPU 201 performs a win type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of win when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a win (big win or small win). In this win type determination process, the win type determination table shown in FIG. 190 is referenced, and the type of win is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process of S7023. Furthermore, in order to determine the number of time-saving times and the like based on the game state at the time of the win after the end of the big win game state, the main CPU 201 sets the game state data at the time of the win, which indicates the game state at the time of the win when it is determined that there is a big win or a small win, in the win state area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S7024, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7025.

In S7025, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this special symbol variation pattern determination process, a special symbol variation pattern table of either FIG. 191 or FIG. 192 is determined depending on the game state, etc., and the determined special symbol variation pattern table is referenced to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the reach determination random number value, and the performance selection random number value. Details of this special symbol variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 204. After executing the process of S7025, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7026.

In S7026, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display time setting process to set the variable display time of the special symbol. In this special symbol variable display time setting process, the special symbol variable display time setting process refers to the special symbol variable pattern table determined in the special symbol variable pattern determination process in S7025 above, and determines the variable display time of the special symbol based on the determined special symbol variable pattern. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 sets the determined variable display time of the special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and causes the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 to start displaying the variable special symbol. After executing the process of S7026, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7027.

In S7027, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1", after the special symbol variable display start process ends, a special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 202) is performed. After executing the process of S7027, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7028.

In S7028, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, confirmation and update processes of parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203 are performed. Then, a process of reserving transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state is performed. Note that the game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (Figure 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S7028, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7029.

In S7029, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. This processing mainly involves updating various flags related to game status management (e.g., time-saving flags, etc.). After executing S7029, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S7030.

In S7030, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for the special symbol effect start command. In this process, the transmission reservation process for the "symbol designation command" and the "special symbol variation pattern command" is performed as the special symbol effect start command. In the pattern designation command transmission reservation process, the symbol designation command determined in S7023 is transmitted. In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation process, the special symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined in S7025 is transmitted so that the type of special symbol can be identified. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly the game status management process (S7029) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S7030)) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[9-4-4. Special symbol variation pattern determination process]
Next, the details of the special symbol variation pattern determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 203) will be described with reference to FIG. 204. FIG. 204 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variation pattern determination process in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In S7025-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether the current gaming state is a normal gaming state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming state is a normal gaming state, it transfers processing to S7025-2, and if it determines that the current gaming state is not a normal gaming state (i.e., it is a time-saving gaming state), it transfers processing to S7025-4.

In S7025-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the control period for the second special symbol after the time-saving game state ends. More specifically, in the second normal game state after the time-saving game state ends (when the special 2 control period flag is on), it determines whether or not it is a special symbol control process when the start information for the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol start memory area of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determination area (0). If the main CPU 201 determines that it is in the control period for the second special symbol after the time-saving game state ends, it transfers the process to S7025-3, and if it determines that it is not in the control period for the second special symbol after the time-saving game state ends, it transfers the process to S7025-4.

In S7025-3, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 191 (2).

In S7025-4, the main CPU 201 performs a performance variation counter update process in which the performance variation counter in the main RAM 203 is updated by subtracting 1 from it. Here, the "performance variation counter" is set to a predetermined number of times (e.g., 20 times) when the control period for the second special symbol ends after the time-saving game state ends, as described below. In addition, after the seventh pachinko gaming machine is backed up and cleared, the performance variation counter is also cleared, and the performance variation counter becomes 0.

In S7025-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether the performance change counter in the main RAM 203 is 0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the performance change counter is 0, it transfers processing to S7025-6, and if it determines that the performance change counter is not 0, it transfers processing to S7025-7.

In S7025-6, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 191 (1).

In S7025-7, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 191 (2).

In S7025-8, the main CPU 201 determines whether the current game state is the first time-shortened game state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current game state is the first time-shortened game state, it transfers processing to S7025-9, and if it determines that the current game state is not the first time-shortened game state, it transfers processing to S7025-12.

In S7025-9, the main CPU 201 determines whether the current change in the special symbol is the final change in the first time-saving game state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current change in the special symbol is the final change in the first time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S7025-10, and if the main CPU 201 determines that the current change in the special symbol is not the final change in the first time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S7025-11.

In S7025-10, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 192 (1).

In S7025-11, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 192 (2).

In S7025-12, the main CPU 201 determines whether the current change in the special symbol is the final change in the time-saving game state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current change in the special symbol is the final change in the time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S7025-13, and if the main CPU 201 determines that the current change in the special symbol is not the final change in the time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S7025-14.

In S7025-13, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J4 shown in FIG. 192 (4).

In S7025-14, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 192 (3).

In S7025-15, the main CPU 201 refers to the variation pattern table of the determined special symbol, and determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the type of special symbol (type of starting information), the result of the special symbol winning determination process in S7022, and the reach determination random number value and the performance selection random number value as the starting information of the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination area (0).

[9-4-5. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 202) will be described with reference to Fig. 205. Fig. 205 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7041, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", it ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 202), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "1", it transfers the process to S7042.

In S7042, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination time setting process to set the symbol determination time for the special symbol. In this special symbol determination time setting process, the symbol determination time for the special symbol is determined based on the game state and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or lose). In this embodiment, as shown in the special pattern change pattern tables of Figures 191 and 192, when in a normal game state, the pattern determination time of the special pattern is determined to be the first pattern determination time of 540 ms, when it is the final change of the first time-saving game state, the pattern determination time of the special pattern is determined to be the extremely long second pattern determination time of 89,000 ms, when it is the final change of the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state and the special pattern hit determination process results in a miss, the pattern determination time of the special pattern is determined to be the third pattern determination time of 15,000 ms, and when it is a time-saving game state other than those mentioned above, the pattern determination time of the special pattern is determined to be the fourth pattern determination time of 540 ms. After that, the main CPU 201 sets the symbol determination time of the determined special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and causes the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 to display the special symbol in a stopped state. After executing the process of S7042, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7043.

The time it takes for the special symbol to be determined may be determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, or based only on the game state. Furthermore, a predetermined symbol determination time (e.g., 540 msec) may be determined.

In S7043, the main CPU 201 performs time-saving management processing. In the seventh pachinko game machine, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished, a ceiling counter update processing is performed in which 1 is added to the ceiling counter, and a time-saving counter update processing is performed in which 1 is subtracted from the time-saving count counter. When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the time-saving flag is set to 2 (the time-saving flag is turned on), which indicates the B time-saving game state, and the time-saving count counter is set to a specified number of times, and transition control is performed to the B time-saving game state. In addition, when the time-saving count counter becomes 0, the time-saving flag is cleared (the time-saving flag is set to 0), and transition control is performed from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. Details of this time-saving management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 206. After executing the processing of S7043, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S7044.

In S7044, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", after the special symbol variable display end process is completed, the special symbol game determination process (see S7015 in FIG. 202) is performed. After executing the process of S7044, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7045.

In S7045, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S7045, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7046.

In S7046, the main CPU 201 increments the value of the determined symbol counter by 1. As described above in the explanation of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol has been determined (the number of times a special symbol game has been played), but it may also manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions, such as the number of times a special symbol game has remained or the number of times a time-saving game has remained. After executing the process of S7046, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 202).

[9-4-6. Time-saving management process]
Next, a time-saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 205) will be described with reference to Fig. 206. Fig. 206 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving management process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7043-1, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving counter update process to update the time-saving counter. In particular, the seventh pachinko gaming machine differs in that the "time-saving counter" in the main RAM 203 is made up of two types of counters: a "first time-saving counter" corresponding to the total number of time-saving times for the special symbols, and a "second time-saving counter" corresponding to the number of time-saving times for the second special symbol. Details of this time-saving counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 207. After executing the process of S7043-1, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-2.

In S7043-2, the main CPU 201 performs a ceiling counter update process to update the ceiling counter. This ceiling counter update process adds 1 to the ceiling counter when the ceiling count prohibition flag is off, and is the same as the ceiling counter update process shown in FIG. 35 of the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process of S7043-2, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7043-3.

In S7043-3, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving transition judgment process to judge whether to transition to the B time-saving game state. This time-saving transition judgment process is a process for preparing to transition to the B time-saving game state by turning on the ceiling flag and the ceiling count prohibition flag when the ceiling counter reaches a ceiling value (for example, 599 times), and is similar to the time-saving transition judgment process shown in FIG. 37 for the first pachinko game machine. However, since the seventh pachinko game machine is not controlled to a high probability game state, the time-saving transition judgment process executed in the seventh pachinko game machine does not turn on the probability variable flag, and the on/off judgment of the probability variable flag is judged as "probability variable flag off". After executing the process of S7043-3, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-4.

In S7043-4, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving transition process to transition to the B time-saving gaming state. This time-saving transition process transitions to the B time-saving gaming state when the ceiling flag is on, and is the same as the time-saving transition process shown in FIG. 38 of the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process of S7043-4, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-5.

However, the time-saving transition process executed in the seventh pachinko gaming machine differs in some respects from the time-saving transition process shown in Figure 38 of the first pachinko gaming machine.
The first difference is that since the seventh pachinko gaming machine is not controlled to a high probability gaming state, the time-saving transition process executed in the seventh pachinko gaming machine does not turn on the high probability flag, and the on/off determination of the high probability flag is determined as "high probability flag off."
In addition, as a second difference, since the seventh pachinko gaming machine is not controlled to the C time-saving gaming state, the on/off determination of the time-saving hit flag is always determined as "the time-saving hit flag is off."
As a third difference, the setting contents set in the B time-saving control mode determination process (S208 shown in FIG. 38) are different. In the B time-saving control mode determination process of the seventh pachinko game machine, the time-saving flag = 2 indicating the B time-saving game state is set (the time-saving flag is on), and the "first time-saving counter = 11 (total number of time-saving times of special symbols = 11)" and the "second time-saving counter = 5 (number of time-saving times of the second special symbol = 5)" are determined so as to be the same end condition as the A time-saving end condition of the second time-saving game state. In addition, the number of time-saving times may be determined for the first time-saving counter and the second time-saving counter so as to be the end condition different from the A time-saving end condition of the second time-saving game state.

In S7043-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether the first time-saving counter or the second time-saving counter is equal to 0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the time-saving counter is equal to 0, the process proceeds to S7043-6. If the main CPU 201 determines that the time-saving counter is not equal to 0, the process proceeds to S7043-10.

In S7043-6, the main CPU 201 clears the time-saving information. Here, the time-saving information includes clearing (setting to 0) the "first time-saving counter", the "second time-saving counter", the "time-saving flag" for identifying whether the game state is a normal game state, an A-time-saving game state, or a B-time-saving game state, and the "A-time-saving flag" for identifying the A-time-saving game state as a first time-saving game state or a second time-saving game state. After executing the process of S7043-6, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-7.

In S7043-7, the main CPU 201 refers to the second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203 and determines whether the reserved number of second special patterns is > 0 (whether start information for the second special pattern is stored in any of the second special pattern start memory areas (1) to (3)). If the main CPU 201 determines that the reserved number of second special patterns is > 0, it transfers processing to S7043-8, and if it determines that the reserved number of second special patterns is not > 0, it transfers processing to S7043-10.

In S7043-8, the main CPU 201 turns on the special 2 control period flag. This "special 2 control period flag" is a flag that identifies whether or not the "second normal game state" is in effect, and when the special 2 control period flag is on, it indicates that the second normal game state is in effect. After executing the process of S7043-8, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7043-10.

In S7043-10, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state is performed. In particular, in this embodiment, depending on whether the flag during the special 2 control period is on or off, it is possible to identify whether the normal game state is the "first normal game state" or the "second normal game state" and generate a game state designation command. After executing the process of S7043-10, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-11.

In S7043-11, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a time-saving transition command when transitioning to a time-saving gaming state. The time-saving transition command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After processing S7043-11, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving management process and returns the process to the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 205).

[9-4-7. Time-saving counter update process]
Next, a time-saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 during the time-saving management process (see FIG. 206) will be described with reference to Fig. 207. Fig. 207 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving counter update process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7043-21, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving flag is on (time-saving flag is other than 0). If the main CPU 201 determines that the time-saving flag is on, it transfers the process to S7043-22, and if it determines that the time-saving flag is not on, it ends the current time-saving counter update process.

In S7043-22, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the "first time-saving counter" in the main RAM 203 to update it. After executing the process of S7043-22, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7043-23.

In S7043-23, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information shifted to the special symbol determination area (0) of the main RAM 203 is start information for the second special symbol.
If the main CPU 201 determines that it is start information for the second special pattern, it transfers processing to S7043-24, and if it determines that it is not start information for the second special pattern, it terminates this time-saving counter update processing.

In S7043-24, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the "second time-saving counter" in the main RAM 203 to update it. After executing the process of S7043-24, the main CPU 201 ends the current time-saving counter update process.

[9-4-8. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 202) will be described with reference to Fig. 208. Fig. 208 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7051, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 202), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "2", it transfers the process to S7052.

In S7052, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot. If the main CPU 201 determines that a jackpot has been reached, it transfers processing to S7054, and if it determines that a jackpot has not been reached, it transfers processing to S7061.

In S7054, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a jackpot. In this processing, an external signal (e.g., a jackpot signal according to the type of special symbol) is generated that is output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 187 for both) via the external terminal board 184 when a jackpot occurs. The generated external signal is then output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the processing of S7054, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S7055.

In S7055, the main CPU 201 refers to the win type determination table shown in FIG. 190, determines the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot game state according to the jackpot "selection symbol command", and performs processing to set the determined maximum number of rounds as the upper limit value of the number of jackpot rounds in the main RAM 203. After executing processing of S7055, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S7056.

In S7056, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot status display process. In this jackpot status display process, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right hit instruction data that notifies the player to hit to the right is set. After executing the process of S7056, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7057.

In S7057, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In the game status management processing when it is determined that a jackpot has been reached, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the time-saving flag and the time-saving counters (the first time-saving counter and the second time-saving counter). After executing the processing of S7057, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S7058.

In S7058, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S7058, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7059.

In S7059, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the process of preparing to open the large prize opening (see S7018 in FIG. 202) will be performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. After executing the process of S7059, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7059.

In S7060, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot start display command. After executing the process of S7060, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 202).

In S7061, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there has been a small win. If the main CPU 201 determines that there has been a small win, it transfers processing to S7063, and if it determines that there has not been a small win (i.e., a miss), it transfers processing to S7071.

In S7063, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a small win. In this processing, an external signal (e.g., a small win signal) is generated that is output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 187 for both) via the external terminal board 184 when a small win occurs. The generated external signal is then output to the external terminal board 184.
After executing the process of S7063, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7064.

In S7064, the main CPU 201 refers to the win type determination table shown in FIG. 190, determines the maximum number of times to be opened in the small win game state in response to the "selected symbol command", and performs processing to set the determined maximum number of times to the upper limit of the number of times to be opened for small wins in the main RAM 203. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times to be opened for small wins set in this processing is, for example, 16 times. After executing the processing of S7064, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S7066.

In S7065, the main CPU 201 performs a small win status display process. In this small win status display process, right hit instruction data is set to notify the player that a right hit is to be performed. After executing the process of S7065, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7066.

In S7066, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In the game status management processing when it is determined that a small win has occurred, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the time-saving flag and the time-saving counters (the first time-saving counter and the second time-saving counter). After executing the processing of S7066, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S7067.

In S7067, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S7067, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7068.

In S7068, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the small win game state setting process (see S7016 in FIG. 202) will be performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. After executing the process of S7068, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7069.

In S7069, the main CPU 201 processes the transmission reservation process for the small win start display command. After executing the process of S7069, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 202).

In S7071, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 209. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 202).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S7051 to S7071) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[9-4-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 208) will be described with reference to Fig. 209. Fig. 209 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game ending process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7072, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". By carrying out the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" in this way, the current special symbol game ends, and it becomes possible to carry out the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game. After carrying out the process of S7072, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7073.

In S7073, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. In addition, in the game state designation parameter setting process in the special pattern game end process, the start information stored in the special pattern determination area (0) in the main RAM 203 is cleared. After executing the process of S7073, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7074.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the game state designation parameter setting process in the special pattern game end process, the second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203 is referenced, and if the start information of the second special pattern is not stored in any of the second special pattern start memory areas (1) to (3) (number of reserved second special patterns = 0), the flag is turned off during the special 2 control period.

In S7074, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After processing S7074, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 208).

[9-4-10. Small hit game state setting process]
Next, referring to Fig. 210, the small win game state setting process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 202) will be described. Fig. 210 is a flow chart showing an example of the small win game state setting process in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In S7081, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", it ends the small win game state setting process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 202), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "3", it transfers the process to S7082.

In S7082, the main CPU 201 refers to the win type determination table shown in FIG. 190 and determines the opening mode of the second large prize opening 7151 as the opening mode of the small prize game state, as well as the operation mode of the V shutter 7159 that opens and closes the V prize opening 7156. In this embodiment, the operation mode of the V shutter 7159 is determined to be an operation mode that opens the V prize opening 7156 from the time the second large prize opening 7151 is opened. After executing the process of S7082, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7083.

In S7083, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening opening/closing control process. In this second large prize opening opening/closing control process, opening/closing pattern data (e.g., time-series control data such as the opening time, wait time, and maximum number of openings of the second large prize opening 7151) is generated to open and close the second large prize opening 7151 based on the opening mode of the determined small win game state. Then, control based on the generated opening/closing pattern data is started. After executing the process of S7083, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7084.

In S7084, the main CPU 201 performs V prize opening/closing control processing. In this V prize opening/closing control processing, operation pattern data (e.g., time-series control data such as the opening time, wait time, and maximum number of openings of the V prize opening 7156) is generated for opening and closing the V prize opening 7156 based on the determined operation mode of the V shutter 7159. Then, control based on the generated operation pattern data is started. After executing the processing of S7084, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S7085.

In S7085, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S7085), the small win game state control process (see S7017 in FIG. 202) will be performed after the small win game state setting process is completed. After executing the process of S7085, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7086.

In S7086, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. The main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of confirming and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S7086, the main CPU 201 ends the small win game state setting process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 202).

[9-4-11. Small hit game state control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 211, the small win game state control process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 202) will be described. Fig. 211 is a flow chart showing an example of the small win game state control process in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In S7091, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", it ends the small win game state control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 202), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "4", it transfers the process to S7092.

In S7092, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that entered the second large prize opening 7151 (number of winning balls in the second large prize opening 7151) is the maximum number of winning balls when the second large prize opening 7151 is opened by the operation of the second special power shutter 7154. In this process, it is determined whether the value of the second large prize opening counter counted by the second large prize opening count switch 7152 (see FIG. 187) is the predetermined maximum number of winning balls for the second large prize opening 7151 (e.g. 10 balls).

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7092 that the number of winnings at the second large winning slot 7151 is not the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to S7093, and if the main CPU 201 determines in S7092 that the number of winnings at the second large winning slot 7151 is the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to S7094.

In S7093, the main CPU 201 determines whether all opening modes of the second large prize opening 7151 have been completed. In this process, it is determined whether control based on the opening/closing pattern data generated in the process of S7084 (see FIG. 210) has been completed.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7093 that all opening modes of the second large prize opening 7151 have not been completed, it ends the small win game state control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 202), and if it determines in S7093 that all opening modes of the second large prize opening 7151 have been completed, it transfers the process to S7094.

In S7094, the main CPU 201 performs a process to close the second large prize opening 7151. After executing the process of S7094, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7095.

In S7095, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a V winning has been detected. In this process, it determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the V winning hole 7156 within a specified time (i.e., whether or not detection has been performed by the V winning hole switch 7157).

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7095 that a V winning was detected, it transfers processing to S7097, and if it determines in S7095 that a V winning was not detected, it transfers processing to S7105.

In S7097, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a jackpot from the second route. In this processing, an external signal (e.g., a jackpot signal according to the type of special symbol) is generated that is output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 187 for both) via the external terminal board 184 when a jackpot occurs. The generated external signal is then output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the processing of S7097, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S7098.

In S7098, the main CPU 201 refers to the win type determination table shown in FIG. 190, determines the maximum number of rounds in the big win game state according to the "selection symbol command" of the small win, and performs processing to set the determined maximum number of rounds as the upper limit value of the number of big win rounds in the main RAM 203. After executing the processing of S7098, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S7099.

In S7099, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the opening of the second large prize opening 7151 (i.e., the operation of the second special electric shutter 7154), which was first performed based on a small prize, is processed as the first round of round play. In other words, the large prize play state that is executed when it is determined that a V prize has been detected (S7095 is determined as YES), will start from the second round of round play. After performing the process of S7099, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7100.

In S7100, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot status display process. In this jackpot status display process, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right hit instruction data that notifies the player to hit to the right is set. After executing the process of S7100, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7101.

In S7101, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In the game status management processing when it is determined that a jackpot has been hit, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the time-saving flag and the time-saving counters (the first time-saving counter and the second time-saving counter). After executing the processing of S7101, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S7102.

In S7102, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S7102, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7103.

In S7103, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5." By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5," the process of preparing to open the large prize opening (FIG. 202) will be performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. After executing the process of S7103, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7104.

In S7104, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a V hit start display command. After executing the process of S7104, the main CPU 201 ends the small hit game state control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 202).

In S7105, the main CPU 201 performs processing to reserve the transmission of a small win end display command. After executing processing in S7105, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S7106.

In S7106, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 209 is performed. After executing the processing of S7106, the main CPU 201 ends the small win game state control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 202).

[9-4-12. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 212, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 202) will be described. Fig. 212 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In S7111, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5," it ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 202), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "5," it transfers the process to S7112.

In S7112, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of rounds played in the jackpot game state. The count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S7112, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7113.

In S7113, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded round counter value is the upper limit for the number of jackpot rounds.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7113 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is the upper limit, it transfers processing to S7114, and if the main CPU 201 determines in S7113 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is not the upper limit, it transfers processing to S7117.

In S7114, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7." In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7," the jackpot game state end process (FIG. 202) is performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing S7114, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7115.

In S7115, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S7115, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7116.

In S7116, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command. The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After processing S7116, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 202).

In S7117, the main CPU 201 performs processing to add 1 to the round counter value. After executing processing of S7117, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S7118.

In S7118, the main CPU 201 performs a process of selecting the large prize opening to be opened. In this process, the first large prize opening 7131 is selected as the large prize opening to be opened for the large prize game state. Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a large prize and the large prize game control process is started because the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small prize, and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small prize and the large prize game control process is started because a V win has been detected, the second large prize opening 7151 may be selected as the large prize opening to be opened, instead of the first large prize opening 7131. After executing the process of S7118, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7119.

In S7119, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the first large prize opening 7131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 7131, the maximum number of prizes won by the first large prize opening 7131, etc. are set. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the first large prize opening 7131 is opened multiple times in one round. In this case, however, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the first large prize opening 7131 is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S7119, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7120.

In S7120, the main CPU 201 performs a process for generating opening control data. In this process, opening control data for opening the first large prize opening 7131 is generated based on the information set in the large prize opening related various setting process in S7119 above. Then, control based on the generated opening control data is started. After executing the process of S7120, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7121.

In S7121, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6", the large prize opening opening control process (see FIG. 202) will be performed after the large prize opening opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S7121, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7122.

In S7122, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S7122, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7123.

In S7123, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S7123, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 202).

[9-4-13. Large prize opening control process]
Next, the special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 202) will be described with reference to Fig. 213. Fig. 213 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In S7131, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", it ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 202), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "6", it transfers the process to S7132.

In S7132, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that entered the first large prize opening 7131 when the first large prize opening 7131 was opened (number of winning balls in the first large prize opening 7131) is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value of the first large prize opening counter counted by the first large prize opening count switch 7132 (see FIG. 187) is the predetermined maximum number of winning balls for the first large prize opening 7131 (e.g., 7 balls).

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7132 that the number of winnings at the first large winning slot 7131 is not the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to S7133, and if the main CPU 201 determines in S7132 that the number of winnings at the first large winning slot 7131 is the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to S7134.

In S7133, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 7131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the large prize opening related various setting process (see S7119 in FIG. 212) has elapsed.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7133 that the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 7131 has not elapsed, it ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 202). If the main CPU 201 determines in S7133 that the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 7131 has elapsed, it transfers the process to S7134.

In S7134, the main CPU 201 performs processing to close the first large prize opening 7131. After executing processing of S7134, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S7135.

In S7135, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the large prize opening control processing is completed, the large prize opening opening preparation processing (see FIG. 212) is performed again. After executing the processing of S7135, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S7136.

In S7136, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S7136, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7137.

In S7137, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S7137, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 202).

[9-4-14. Big win game state end process]
Next, a big win game state end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 202) will be described with reference to Fig. 214. Fig. 214 is a flow chart showing an example of a big win game state end process in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In S7141, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7", it ends the jackpot game state end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 202), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "7", it transfers the process to S7142.

In S7142, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this special symbol game end setting process, various flag data used in the big win game state and the values of various counters (e.g., round counter, big prize slot winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing S7142, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7143.

In S7143, the main CPU 201 performs a state setting process after the end of the jackpot. In this state setting process after the end of the jackpot, the main CPU 201 refers to the win type determination table shown in FIG. 190, and determines the mode of the game state after the jackpot game state (time-saving flag and number of time-saving times) based on the selected symbol command determined in the special symbol determination process in S7023 above and the game state data at the time of winning that indicates the game state at the time of winning set in the win type determination process in S7024 above, and sets the data of the determined game state mode. After executing the process of S7143, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7144.

Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning is normal game state and the selected symbol command is "z1", the time-saving flag is set to 1 (time-saving flag is turned on), the first time-saving count counter is set to 7, and the second time-saving count counter is set to 1. Also, if the game state at the time of winning is normal game state and the selected symbol command is "z2-8", the time-saving flag is set to 1 (time-saving flag is turned on), the first time-saving count counter is set to 11, and the second time-saving count counter is set to 5. And, if the game state at the time of winning is time-saving game state, the time-saving flag is set to 1 (time-saving flag is turned on) for all selected symbol commands, the first time-saving count counter is set to 7, and the second time-saving count counter is set to 1.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the A time-saving flag is set to 1 to identify the A time-saving game state in which the first time-saving count counter is set to 7 and the second time-saving count counter is set to 1 as the "first time-saving game state," and the A time-saving flag is set to 2 to identify the A time-saving game state in which the first time-saving count counter is set to 11 and the second time-saving count counter is set to 5 as the "second time-saving game state." Then, a game state designation command can be generated based on the A time-saving flag.

In S7144, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 209 is performed. After executing the processing of S7144, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot game state end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 218).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 set an interrupt prohibited section and perform the above-mentioned jackpot game state end processing within the interrupt prohibited section.

[9-6-15. Normal symbol control process]
Next, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 215. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in Fig. 215, the main CPU 201 stores the start information of the normal symbol, and judges whether the judgment start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

Figure 215 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol control process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Note that the numbers ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in Figure 215 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the waiting time for normal symbols is 0 (S7300).

If it is determined in S7300 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is not 0, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and transfers the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7301.

In S7301, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S7301, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7310. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S7310 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S7301.

In S7310, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This S7310 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". Details of this normal symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 216. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S7320.

In S7320, the main CPU 201 performs processing to end the variable display of normal symbols. This processing of S7320 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S7330.

In this normal symbol variable display end process, the main CPU 201 judges whether the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, and when it judges that the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, it sets the predetermined normal symbol pattern determination time (for example, 540 msec as shown in FIG. 198) to the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "2". This waiting time of the normal symbol is subtracted as a normal symbol timer counter in the system timer interrupt process that is performed at a cycle of, for example, 2 msec. If the variable display time of the normal symbol has not ended, it holds the control state number of the normal symbol at "1" and waits for the variable display time of the normal symbol to end.

The pattern determination time for normal patterns may differ depending on the type of normal pattern, or may differ depending on the game state. For example, in the normal game state, the pattern determination time may be a fifth pattern determination time (e.g., 540 msec), and in the time-saving game state, the pattern determination time may be a sixth pattern determination time (e.g., 132 msec) that is shorter than the fifth pattern determination time.

In S7330, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol gameplay determination processing. This S7330 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S7340.

In this normal symbol game judgment process, the main CPU 201 performs a judgment process of the derived result of the normal symbol (for example, normal symbol hit or normal symbol miss). Then, if the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is a normal symbol hit, the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric device 7146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is a miss, the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric device 7146 is not performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0".

In the process of setting the opening pattern of the normal electric device 7146, the opening pattern (number of times to open, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the normal electric device 7146 is determined based on the game state and the normal symbol selection symbol data by referring to the opening pattern determination table for the normal electric device shown in FIG. 197, and the determined opening pattern is set. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub-CPU 301 a normal electric device opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the normal electric device 7146.

In S7340, the main CPU 201 performs the normal electric role release process. This S7340 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7350.

In this normal electric device opening process, the main CPU 201 opens the second start hole 7140 according to the opening pattern of the normal electric device 7146 determined in the normal symbol game judgment process of S7330, and closes the second start hole 7140 when a specified number of game balls for normal power (e.g., one ball) enter the second start hole 7140 or when all opening patterns of the normal electric device 7146 have ended. Then, when the opening process of the normal electric device 7146 has ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4".

In S7350, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit end processing. This S7350 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol hit end processing, it sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "0", ends the normal symbol control processing, and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see Figures 20 to 23).

In this normal symbol winning end process, the main CPU 201 performs a process to reset (clear) various parameters related to the normal symbol determined in steps S7310 to S7340 above, and various random number values stored in the normal symbol determination area.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the normal symbol control process (S7300 to S7350) described above within the interrupt prohibited section.

[9-6-16. Normal symbol variable display start process]
Next, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 215) will be described with reference to FIG. 216. FIG. 216 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal symbol variable display start process in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 216, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the normal pattern is "0" (S7311).

If it is determined in S7311 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 215). On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7312.

In S7312, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the start information of the normal pattern. In this process, the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (2) to the normal pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (3). After executing the process of S7312, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7313.

In S7313, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol winning judgment process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 195, and determines winning/losing judgment value data ("normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol losing") based on the game state and the normal symbol winning judgment random number value stored in the normal symbol judgment area (0). After executing S7313, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7314.

In S7314, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 196, and determines "normal symbol selection symbol data" based on the above-mentioned winning/losing determination value data (the result of the normal symbol winning/losing determination process) and the normal symbol random number value stored in the normal symbol determination area (0). After executing S7314, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7315.

In S7315, the main CPU 201 performs processing to determine the normal symbol variation pattern. In this processing, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 198, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and normal symbol variation display time based on the game state and the normal symbol selection symbol data. After executing the processing of S7315, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S7316.

In S7316, the main CPU 201 performs a process for setting the variable display time of the normal pattern. In this process, the variable display time of the normal pattern determined in the normal pattern variable pattern determination process (S7315) is set to the waiting time of the normal pattern in the main RAM 203, and the normal pattern display unit 161 is caused to start displaying the variable normal pattern. This waiting time of the normal pattern is decremented as a normal pattern timer counter in a system timer interrupt process that is performed, for example, at 2 msec intervals. After executing the process of S7316, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7317.

In S7317, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after this normal symbol variable display start process ends, a normal symbol variable display end process (see S7320 in FIG. 215) is performed. After executing the process of S7317, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7318.

In S7318, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the normal symbol variation pattern command. The normal symbol variation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[9-4-17. Switch input detection process]
Next, a switch input detection process executed by the main CPU 201 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described with reference to Fig. 217. Fig. 217 is a flow chart showing an example of the switch input detection process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

Compared to the first pachinko game machine, the seventh pachinko game machine has the additional configuration of a first large prize slot count switch 7132, a second large prize slot count switch 7152, and a V prize slot switch 7157, and therefore some of the above processing has been added.

In S7381, the main CPU 201 executes the first start port winning detection process. After executing the process of S7381, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7382.

In this first start port winning detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects a game ball entering the first start port 7120 by the first start port switch 7121, it sets payout information corresponding to the first start port 7120 and determines whether there is any free space in the first special pattern start memory area (1) to the first special pattern start memory area (4).
When it is determined that there is free space in the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4), various random number values (for example, random number values for jackpot determination, random number values for symbol random number, random number values for reach determination, random number values for effect selection, etc.) are obtained as start information for the first special symbol, and the various random number values obtained are stored in one first special symbol determination area in a FIFO (First In, First Out) format. Then, a transmission reservation process is performed for a winning command for the first special symbol indicating the winning of the first start port 7120 and the number of reserved first special symbols. The winning command for the first special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the first special pattern start memory areas (1) to (4), the first start port winning detection process will be terminated without acquiring various random number values.

In S7382, the main CPU 201 executes the second start port winning detection process. After executing the process of S7382, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7383.

In this second start port winning detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects a game ball entering the second start port 7140 by the second start port switch 7141, it sets payout information corresponding to the second start port 7140 and determines whether there is any free space in the second special pattern start memory area (1) to the second special pattern start memory area (3).
When it is determined that there is free space in the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (3), various random numbers (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for symbol random numbers, random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for effect selection, etc.) are obtained as start information for the second special symbol, and the various random numbers obtained are stored in a single second special symbol determination area in a FIFO format. Then, a transmission reservation process is performed for a winning command for the second special symbol indicating the winning of the second start port 7140 and the number of reserved second special symbols. The winning command for the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the second special pattern start memory areas (1) to (3), the second start port winning detection process will be terminated without acquiring various random number values.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are four first special symbol start memory areas for the first special symbol, but there are three first special symbol start memory areas for the second special symbol. Therefore, the number of reserved first special symbols is four, and the number of reserved second special symbols is three. Note that the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols can be freely changed as needed, but it is preferable to keep it within four.

In S7383, the main CPU 201 executes a general prize opening passage detection process. In the general prize opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts etc. when a prize is won through the general prize opening 122 is set. After executing the process of S7383, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7384.

In S7384, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening passage detection process. In the first large prize opening passage detection process, when the first large prize opening count switch 7132 detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 7131, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the first large prize opening 7131 and adds 1 to the first large prize opening counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the first large prize opening 7131 to update it. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a first large prize opening entry command indicating an entry into the first large prize opening 7131. The first large prize opening entry command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S7384, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7385.

In S7385, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening passage detection process. In the second large prize opening passage detection process, when the second large prize opening count switch 7152 detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 7151, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the second large prize opening 7151 and adds 1 to the second large prize opening counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 7151 to update it. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a second large prize opening entry command indicating an entry into the second large prize opening 7151. The second large prize opening entry command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S7385, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7386.

In S7386, the main CPU 201 performs a V prize opening passage detection process. In the V prize opening passage detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects the passage of a gaming ball into the V prize opening 7156 by the V prize opening switch 7157, it turns on the V prize opening passage flag. Then, it performs a transmission reservation process for a V passage command indicating that the gaming ball has passed through the V prize opening 7156. The V passage command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Note that even if a gaming ball passes through the V prize opening 7156, no payout information is set. After executing the process of S7386, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7387.

In S7387, the main CPU 201 performs gate passage detection processing. After executing S7387, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S7388.

In this gate passage detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 7126 by the passing gate switch 7127, it determines whether there is any free space in the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (4).
When it is determined that there is free space in the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (4), various random number values (for example, random number values for determining whether the normal pattern is a hit, pattern random number values of the normal pattern, etc.) are obtained as start information for the normal pattern, and the various obtained random number values are stored in one normal pattern start memory area in FIFO format.
On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the normal pattern start memory areas (1) to (4), the gate passage detection process will be terminated without acquiring various random number values.

In S7388, the main CPU 201 performs a look-ahead command generation process. After executing the process of S7388, the main CPU 201 ends the current switch input detection process.

In this look-ahead command generation process, the look-ahead related data in FIG. 194 is referenced, and the various random number values obtained in the current first start port winning detection process or second start port winning detection process are analyzed based on the game state, and a look-ahead command is generated. As shown in the look-ahead related data in FIG. 194, in the time-saving game state, big win game state, and small win game state, only look-ahead commands based on the various random number values obtained in the second start port winning detection process (look-ahead commands for the second special pattern) can be generated. Then, a look-ahead command transmission reservation process is performed to transmit the generated look-ahead command to the sub-control circuit 300. The look-ahead command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[9-5-1. Game state transition diagram]
Next, a transition of a game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 218. Fig. 218 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing a transition of a game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, the "first normal game state" is a normal game state in which hitting from the left is considered the normal game mode, and while it is easy for a game ball to enter the first starting hole 7120, it is a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 7140.

The "second normal game state" is the normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol that is performed based on the start information of the second special symbol that was stored in the second special symbol start memory area of the main RAM 203 when the time-saving game state ended (i.e., the normal game state during which the reserved number of second special symbols stored in the time-saving game state is being consumed). Here, the second normal game state may be either left-handed or right-handed as the regular game mode, but since the return rate of transitioning back to the second time-saving game state during the consumption of the reserved number of second special symbols is high (about 70%), right-handed hitting is set as the regular game mode (see FIG. 200).

In the time-saving game state consisting of the first to third time-saving game states, right-hand play is the normal game mode in all cases, and while it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first starting hole 7120, it is easy for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 7140. As described above, the time-saving game state when "time-saving number of times for the second special symbol = 1" is determined as the A time-saving end condition is called the "first time-saving game state", the time-saving game state when "time-saving number of times for the second special symbol = 5" is determined as the A time-saving end condition is called the "second time-saving game state", and the time-saving game state B is called the "third time-saving game state".

(Transition Control of First Normal Gaming State)
As shown in Fig. 218, in the first normal game state, when a game ball enters the first start hole 7120, a "jackpot" or "miss" is determined based on the start information of the first special symbol (see Fig. 188), and when a "jackpot" is determined, a jackpot game state is entered. Then, after the jackpot game state triggered by the start information of the first special symbol in the first normal game state ends, 90% of the game state is entered into the first time-saving game state, and 10% of the game state is entered into the second time-saving game state according to the selected symbol command (see Figs. 189 and 190).

Although not shown, in the first normal game state, when a game ball enters the second start hole 7140 due to an irregular game mode or the like, a "big win", "small win" or "miss" is determined based on the start information of the second special pattern (see FIG. 188). If a "big win" is determined, the game state transitions to a big win game state, and if a "small win" is determined, the game state transitions to a small win game state. Then, after the big win game state triggered by the start information of the second special pattern in the first normal game state ends, all game states transition to the second time-saving game state (see FIG. 190).

In addition, in the first normal game state (including the second normal game state), after the number of times the special symbol changes display reaches 599, the game state transitions from the normal game state to the third time-saving game state.

(Transition Control of the First Time-Reduction Gaming State)
In the first time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the second start hole 7140, a "big win", a "small win" or a "miss" is determined (see FIG. 188), and if a "big win" is determined based on the start information of the second special symbol, the game state transitions to a big win game state, and if a "small win" is determined, the game state transitions to a small win game state. In particular, in this embodiment, when based on the start information of the second special symbol, a "small win" is determined with a high probability of about 1/3 regardless of the game state, and it is configured to be possible to transition to the big win game state via the second route from the small win game state.

Here, in the first time-saving game state, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first start hole 7120, but there are cases where the reserved number of first special symbols stored during the normal game state remains. In such cases, a "jackpot" or "miss" is determined based on the start information of the first special symbol (see FIG. 188), and if a "jackpot" is determined, the game transitions to the jackpot game state.

When the game state at the time of winning a big win or a small win is the first time-saving game state, after the big win game state ends, the game state will transition to the second time-saving game state (see Figure 190).

In addition, when in the first time-saving play state, if a "miss" is determined (non-winning) based on the start information of the second special symbol, the state will transition from the first time-saving play state to the first normal play state.

Furthermore, when the A time-saving end condition "total number of times the special symbols have been shortened = 7 times" is met due to an irregular game mode or the like in the first time-saving game state, that is, when the game ball does not enter the second starting hole 7140 and 7 "miss" judgments (7 changes in the first special symbol) are made based on the start information of the first special symbol, the game state will transition from the first time-saving game state to the first normal game state.

(Transition control between second and third time-saving gaming states)
In the second time-saving play state or the third time-saving play state, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 7140, a "jackpot,""smallhit," or "miss" is determined based on the start information of the second special pattern (see Figure 188), and if a "jackpot" is determined, the game state transitions to a big hit game state, and if a "small hit" is determined, the game state transitions to a small hit game state.

Here, in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first starting hole 7120, but there are cases where the reserved number of first special symbols stored in the normal game state before transitioning to the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state remains. In such cases, a "jackpot" or "miss" is determined based on the start information of the first special symbol (see FIG. 188), and if a "jackpot" is determined, a transition is made to the jackpot game state.

If the game state when a big win or small win is won is the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, the game state will transition to the second time-saving game state after the big win game state ends (see Figure 190).

In addition, if five "miss" judgments (five changes in the first special symbol) are made based on the start information of the second special symbol, or eleven "miss" judgments (eleven changes in the special symbol) are made based on the start information of the first special symbol or the start information of the second special symbol, the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state ends.

When the second time-saving play state or the third time-saving play state ends, if there are reserved numbers of the second special symbol (start information for the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start memory area of the main RAM 203), the game state transitions to the second normal play state. On the other hand, when the second time-saving play state or the third time-saving play state ends, if there are no reserved numbers of the second special symbol (start information for the second special symbol is not stored in the second special symbol start memory area of the main RAM 203), the game state transitions to the first normal play state.

(Transition Control of Second Normal Gaming State)
In the second normal game state, a "big hit,""smallhit," or "miss" is determined based on the starting information of the second special pattern (see Figure 188), and if a "big hit" is determined, the game state transitions to a big hit game state, and if a "small hit" is determined, the game state transitions to a small hit game state.

Then, after the end of the jackpot gaming state triggered by the start information of the second special symbol in the second normal gaming state, the game transitions again to the second time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 190).

In addition, when the reserved number of second special symbols at the end of the second time-saving game state is consumed (when all start information for the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol start memory area of the main RAM 203 is determined to be a "miss" and erased), the second normal game state ends and the game transitions to the first normal game state.

[9-5-2. Production flow]
Next, the outline of the effects performed in the seventh pachinko gaming machine will be described using the overall flow of the effects. Figure 219 shows an example of the flow of effects in the gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The effects performed in the seventh pachinko gaming machine include a variable effect consisting of a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to special symbols displayed in the display area of the display device 7, a display effect of characters, etc., a sound effect output from the speaker 32, a lamp effect emitted from the group of LEDs 46, a special effect effect that drives the group of special effect symbols 58, and an effect of changing the operation mode of the effect button 54. Note that in this embodiment, the decorative symbols are composed of three main symbols, a left symbol, a center symbol, and a right symbol, and a sub-symbol that is much smaller than the main symbols. Note that the number and type of decorative symbols are not limited to this.

In addition, in the embodiment, the effect based on the drawing of the first special symbol is also referred to as the "first special symbol effect," and the effect based on the drawing of the second special symbol is also referred to as the "second special symbol effect."

(Effects in the First Normal Gaming State)
In the first normal game state, the effects that can be executed are different between the general effect state and the limited effect state.

In the general presentation state of the first normal game state, at least "normal variation," "normal reach," "super reach," and "ultra super reach" are configured to be executable as "first special symbol presentations," and at least "normal variation" and "card presentation" are configured to be executable as "second special symbol presentations."

In addition, in the limited presentation state of the first normal game state, at least "normal fluctuation" and "step-up reach" are configured to be executable as the "first special symbol presentation," and at least "normal fluctuation" and "card presentation" are configured to be executable as the "second special symbol presentation."

In addition, in the first normal game state, when the number of times the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner reaches the ceiling value of 599 spins, a "door effect" can be executed. Note that the "door effect" can also be executed in other game states.

In addition, as a preview effect of the "first special symbol effect" in the first normal game state, a "window preview" is configured to be executable during the change, and a "hold change preview" and a "flash preview" are configured to be executable as pre-reading effects during the advance change.

"Normal change" is a change in which all decorative symbols start changing at high speed and stop displaying in order, and can be performed when the special symbol lottery is lost.

"Normal reach", "super reach", and "ultra super reach" are exclusive effects for the first special symbol that can be executed in the normal performance state, and are reach effects that suggest that the lottery result for the first special symbol may be a jackpot. A "normal reach" is a reach effect that is performed when the left and right symbols are temporarily displayed as the same type of symbol, and as an example, it is a reach effect in which the middle symbol changes display at a slow speed. In a "normal reach", if the middle symbol is displayed as a different type of symbol from the left and right symbols, it is a miss, and if the middle symbol is displayed as the same type of symbol as the left and right symbols, it is a jackpot. In addition, a "normal reach" may develop into a "super reach" without the middle symbol being displayed as a stationary symbol, and is configured so that a "super reach" can further develop into a "ultra super reach".

According to the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 191(1),
The random number values for selecting the effects are set so that the expected probability of a jackpot increases in the order of "Normal Reach"<"SuperReach"<"Super Super Reach".

The "card effect" is an effect exclusive to the second special symbol, and is a reach effect that suggests that the lottery result for the second special symbol may be a big hit or a small hit. One example of the "card effect" is an effect in which a card with a specified pattern is displayed, and when the card is slowly flipped over, text suggesting a big hit or a small hit is displayed.

The "step-up reach" is a special effect for the first special symbol that can be executed in the limited effect state, and is a reach effect that suggests that the lottery result for the first special symbol may be a jackpot. As an example of a "step-up reach", a specific character is displayed that can grow from STEP 1 to STEP 3, and if it finally grows to STEP 3, it is a jackpot, and if it only grows to STEP 1 or STEP 2, it is a miss.

The "door effect" is an effect that can be executed regardless of the type of special symbol, its duration is indefinitely specified (there is no end time specified), and it is also an effect that suggests a transition between different game states. As an example of the "door effect", half-open doors are displayed from the left and right, and the half-open doors are displayed rattling for a specified period of time. When the doors close completely and then open completely again, the background etc. changes, and it is announced that the game state has transitioned.

In the first normal game state, when the number of times the special symbol changes display reaches the ceiling value of 599 spins, a "door effect" is executed, and from the next special symbol (600 spins), a notification is issued that the game has transitioned to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state).

A "window preview" is a presentation that, when a special symbol is being displayed in a changing state, predicts a change in the stage, the presentation content of the symbol presentation pattern, or the result of the special symbol drawing. As an example of a "window preview," a window is displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and a predetermined preview content is displayed in the window.

"Reserved change notice" is an example of a look-ahead effect, which suggests the results of the special symbol lottery and information about changes in the special symbols before the special symbol lottery is held by the display mode of a reserved image showing the number of reserved special symbols.

The "flash preview" is an example of a pre-reading effect, in which the LED group 46 emits a predetermined amount of light from the time when the winning ball enters the first starting hole 7120 until the fluctuation starts.

(Effects in the first time-saving gaming state)
In the first time-saving game state, at least a "boss battle effect," a "super-shortened variation," and a "door effect" are executable as the "first special pattern effect," and at least a "boss battle effect" is executable as the "second special pattern effect."

"Ultra-short change" refers to a change pattern in which all decorative patterns start to change at high speed and independently, and then all decorative patterns stop changing in an extremely short time (e.g. 200 ms).

The "boss battle effect" is a special effect that can be executed in the first time-saving play state, and is a reach effect that suggests that the result of the special pattern lottery may be a big hit or a small hit. As an example of a "boss battle effect", a boss character appears and faces off against the main character; if the main character wins ("boss battle effect (win)"), a big hit or a small hit will be obtained, and if the main character loses ("boss battle effect (lose)"), a miss will be obtained.

As described above, in the first time-saving play state, since "time-saving count for second special symbol = 1" is determined as the A time-saving end condition, a lottery is held for the second special symbol, and if it is a big win or a small win, the game moves to the second time-saving play state, and if it is a miss, the game moves to the first normal play state. Then, in the first time-saving play state, a lottery is held for the second special symbol, and if it is a big win or a small win, a "boss battle performance (win)" is executed, and if it is a miss, a "boss battle performance (lose)" is executed.

In addition, in the first time-saving game state, if there are still reserved numbers of the first special symbol stored during the normal game state remaining, a lottery is held for the first special symbol, and if there is a jackpot, a "boss battle performance (victory)" is executed, and if there is a miss, an "ultra-shortened time variation" is executed.

When the A time-saving end condition "total number of times special symbols have been shortened = 7 times" is met due to an irregular game mode or the like in the first time-saving game state, that is, when the game ball does not enter the second starting hole 7140 and the first special symbol is drawn 7 times, if there is a jackpot, a "boss battle effect (victory)" is executed, and if there is a miss, a "door effect" is executed. Here, when the "door effect" is executed in the first time-saving game state, a transition to the first normal game state is announced.

(Effects in the second and third time-saving game states)
At least a "Sengoku time effect" is configured to be executable other than the final change of the special symbols in the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state, and at least a "Sengoku time effect," a "door effect," and a "continuous battle entry effect" are configured to be executable in the final change of the special symbols in the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state.

"Sengoku Time Effects" refers to a series of effects that take place from the second or third time-saving game state to the small win game state, and the period that takes place from the second or third time-saving game state to the small win game state is also called "Sengoku Time." Details of this "Sengoku Time Effects" will be described later using Figures 243 and 244.

The "Continuous Battle Entry Effect" is a special effect that can be executed in the second or third time-saving play state, and is an effect that notifies the player that the second or third time-saving play state has ended (Sengoku Time has ended) and that a consecutive battle reach will be performed next time.

As described above, when the second time-saving play state or the third time-saving play state ends, if there are reserved numbers of the second special pattern, the game state transitions to the second normal play state, and if there are no reserved numbers of the second special pattern, the game state transitions to the first normal play state. Then, at the final change of the special pattern in the second time-saving play state or the third time-saving play state, if there are reserved numbers of the second special pattern, a "continuous battle entry effect" is executed, and if there are no reserved numbers of the second special pattern, a "door effect" is executed. Here, when a "door effect" is executed in the second time-saving play state or the third time-saving play state, a transition to the first normal play state is notified.

(Effects in the Second Normal Gaming State)
In the second normal gaming state, at least a "continuous battle presentation" is executable as the "second special symbol presentation".

The "continuous battle effect" is a special effect that can be executed in the second normal game state, and is a reach effect that suggests that the result of the lottery for the special symbol may be a big hit or a small hit. As an example of the "continuous battle effect", a rival character appears and the main character and the rival character face off against each other up to three times in succession; if the main character wins any of the battles ("continuous battle effect (win)"), it results in a big hit or a small hit, and if the main character loses ("continuous battle effect (lose)"), it results in a miss.

In addition to the effects shown in FIG. 219, this embodiment also includes various other effects during a jackpot, as well as multiple detailed stages that serve as the basis for the effects (the motifs of the effects), but these will be described in more detail later.

[9-6. Sub-control circuit]
In order to execute the above-mentioned effects, the control contents of the sub-control circuit 300 based on various commands etc. transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 will be described.

First, the details of the various tables stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be explained using Figures 220 to 232.

[9-6-1. Symbol Presentation Pattern Determination Table for First Normal Game State]
A symbol presentation pattern determination table E1 for determining a symbol presentation pattern in the first normal gaming state will be described below. Fig. 220 shows an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table in the first normal gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

"Performance pattern" refers to information that defines the display performance of characters, etc., audio performance, and performance of changes in the operation mode of the performance button 54. Also, "design performance pattern" refers to information that defines the display performance of related characters, audio performance, and performance of changes in the operation mode of the performance button 54, centering on the changing mode of the decorative pattern corresponding to the special pattern. In addition to the design performance pattern, various display performances such as preview performance patterns can be superimposed and executed.

As shown in FIG. 220, the symbol presentation pattern determination table E1 for the first normal game state associates the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the presentation stage that determines the presentation display state, the number of times the special symbol variation display has occurred counted since the normal game state started, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol presentation pattern.

Here, a "presentation stage" is information that defines the presentation display state of the presentation background, motif, etc. For example, "presentation stage 0" indicates the mountain village stage in the general presentation state of the first normal game state, "presentation stage 1" indicates the castle town stage in the general presentation state of the first normal game state, and "presentation stage 2" indicates the seaside stage in the limited presentation state of the first normal game state. Note that in this embodiment, only two stages are provided in the general presentation state of the first normal game state, but three or more different stages may be provided.

In addition, the "selection rate" corresponds to the first random number being within a predetermined range for the first random number value consisting of the first random number range, but for ease of explanation, it is described as selection rate. Note that the selection rate may include 0% in addition to 1-100%, and the term "selection rate of 0%" is not excluded. The above also applies to the "selection rate" in the tables shown in Figures 222 to 232, etc. In this embodiment, multiple types of random number values with different random number ranges are provided, and explanations of the types of random number values will be omitted as appropriate.

According to the symbol presentation pattern determination table E1 for the first normal game state shown in FIG. 220, even if the variation pattern command for the same special symbol is used, different symbol presentation patterns (different presentations) can be determined depending on the presentation stage.

According to the symbol presentation pattern determination table E1 in the first normal game state shown in FIG. 220, even if the special symbol variation pattern command is the same, different symbol presentation patterns (different presentations) can be determined according to the number of times the special symbol is varied. And when the number of times the special symbol is varied is 599 and the special symbol lottery is a "miss" (i.e., when moving to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state)), presentation pattern 100 for executing the door presentation is determined. Even if the number of times the special symbol is varied is 599, when the special symbol lottery is a "big hit" or "small hit", the game does not move to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) but moves to the big hit game state or small hit game state, so that a symbol presentation pattern for executing a presentation suggesting a big hit or small hit (a card presentation in the case of the second special symbol presentation) is determined. Note that performance stage 2 is a dedicated stage in the limited performance state, and the number of times the special symbol is displayed will never be 599, so performance pattern 100 that executes the door performance will never be determined.

[9-6-2. Second normal game state start determination table]
When the second normal game state starts, a start time determination table for determining a symbol effect pattern determination table will be described. Figure 221 shows an example of a start time determination table for the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In the second normal game state, when the second normal game state starts, i.e., when the first variable display of the second special symbol in the second normal game state starts, one symbol presentation pattern determination table is determined from among the multiple symbol presentation pattern determination tables, and when the variable display of the second special symbol starts thereafter, the symbol presentation pattern determination table that was already determined when the second normal game state started is referenced.

As shown in FIG. 221, the start determination table for the second normal game state associates the number of reserved second special symbols, the number of winning symbols among the reserved number of second special symbols, the pull-back information, and symbol presentation pattern determination tables E2 to E8.

Here, "the number of winning symbols among the reserved number of second special symbols" refers to the number of start information (random number value for determining a big win) that is determined to be a big win or a small win stored in the second special symbol start memory area of the main RAM 203, and since the reserved number of second special symbols is set to a maximum of three, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts (one is subtracted), the reserved number of second special symbols is a maximum of two.

"Return information" refers to the change information that is determined to be a big hit or small hit first among the start information including the first change and reserved memory in the second normal game state, and the information that is determined to be a big hit or small hit first when the second special pattern change is displayed in the second normal game state is set to "1", the information that is determined to be a big hit or small hit first when the second special pattern change is displayed for the second time is set to "2", the information that is determined to be a big hit or small hit first when the second special pattern change is displayed for the third time is set to "3", and when there is no information that is determined to be a big hit or small hit, it is set to "0".

Then, from the "number of winning symbols among the reserved symbols of the second special symbol" and the "pullback information", it is possible to determine the "number of consecutive reserved symbols" that correspond to the number of times a jackpot or small jackpot will be determined again after the current jackpot game state (the jackpot game state transitioned from the small jackpot state) ends.

For this reason, the start time determination table for the second normal game state shown in FIG. 221 can be said to determine the pattern presentation pattern determination table for the second normal game state according to the order (number of times) of the variable display of the second special pattern that is first determined to be a big win or small win in the second normal game state and the number of reserved consecutive stocks.

[9-6-3. Second normal game state symbol effect pattern determination table]
The symbol presentation pattern determination tables E2 to E8 for determining the symbol presentation pattern in the second normal gaming state will be described below. Figure 222 shows an example of the symbol presentation pattern determination table in the second normal gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The symbol presentation pattern determination table E2 in the second normal game state shown in FIG. 222 (1) is a table that is determined when all symbols are misses (pull-back information 0) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 0, and corresponds to the variation pattern command of the second special symbol received from the main control circuit 200, the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol presentation pattern.

In addition, according to the symbol presentation pattern determination table E2 for the second normal game state shown in FIG. 222 (1), even if the variation pattern command for the same special symbol is used, different symbol presentation patterns (different presentations) can be determined depending on the number of reserved second special symbols, and when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 (final variation of the second normal game state), symbol presentation pattern R3 is determined in which a presentation indicating the end of the second normal game state is executed.

As shown in FIG. 222 (2), the symbol presentation pattern determination table E3 for the second normal game state is a table that is determined when one variation hit occurs (pull-back information 1) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 0, and the variation pattern command for the second special symbol received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol presentation pattern are associated with each other.

The symbol presentation pattern determination table E4 in the second normal game state shown in FIG. 222 (3) is a table that is determined when there is one variation hit (pull-back information 1) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1, and corresponds to the variation pattern command of the second special symbol received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol presentation pattern.

The symbol presentation pattern determination table E5 in the second normal game state shown in FIG. 222 (4) is a table that is determined when there is one variation hit (pull-back information 1) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 2, and corresponds to the variation pattern command of the second special symbol received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol presentation pattern.

The symbol presentation pattern determination table E6 in the second normal game state shown in FIG. 222 (5) is a table that is determined when there is a double winning combination (pull-back information 2) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 0, and it corresponds to the second special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol presentation pattern.

The symbol presentation pattern determination table E7 in the second normal game state shown in FIG. 222 (6) is a table that is determined when there is a 2-variation hit (pull-back information 2) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1, and corresponds to the variation pattern command of the second special symbol received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol presentation pattern.

The symbol presentation pattern determination table E8 in the second normal game state shown in FIG. 222 (7) is a table that is determined when a 3-variation hit occurs (pull-back information 3) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 0, and corresponds to the variation pattern command of the second special symbol received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol presentation pattern.

And according to the symbol presentation pattern determination tables E2 to E8 for the second normal game state shown in FIG. 222, different symbol presentation patterns can be determined depending on the order of the variable display of the second special symbol that is first determined to be a big win or a small win (pull-back information) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks ("number of winning symbols among the reserved number of second special symbols" and "pull-back information").

[9-6-4. Symbol Presentation Pattern Determination Table for First Time-Reduction Game State]
A symbol presentation pattern determination table E9 for determining a symbol presentation pattern in the first time-saving gaming state will be described. Fig. 223 shows an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table in the first time-saving gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 223, the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200 is associated with the selection rate (first random number value) and the symbol presentation pattern.

In addition, according to the symbol presentation pattern determination table E9 for the first time-saving game state shown in FIG. 223, when an irregular game mode is played and a first special symbol change pattern command (83H12H, see FIG. 192) corresponding to a miss is sent at the time of the final change of the first time-saving game state, a presentation pattern 100 for executing a door presentation is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol presentation patterns C4 to C9 of the second special symbol determined at the time of the final change of the first time-saving game state are configured to execute a boss battle presentation over the time for the variable display of the second special symbol and the time for the symbol to be determined. Similarly, the presentation pattern 100 determined at the time of the final change of the first time-saving game state is configured to execute a door presentation over the time for the variable display of the first special symbol and the time for the symbol to be determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, the pattern presentation pattern C1 of the first special symbol corresponding to a jackpot is configured so that a boss battle presentation is executed over the time that the first special symbol is displayed, and when the first time-saving game state reaches its final change, the boss battle presentation is executed again over the time that the first special symbol is determined (the boss battle presentation is executed in a loop).

[9-6-5. Symbol presentation pattern determination table for the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state]
The symbol presentation pattern determination table E10, E11 for determining the symbol presentation pattern in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state will be described. Fig. 224 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table other than the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. Fig. 225 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table at the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

(Other than the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state)
Except for the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, the symbol presentation pattern determination table E10 shown in FIG. 224 is referenced.

The symbol presentation pattern determination table E10 shown in FIG. 224 associates the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200 with the presentation stage, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol presentation pattern.

Here, "presentation stage 30" indicates the male character stage in the second and third time-saving play states, and "presentation stage 31" indicates the female character stage in the second and third time-saving play states. These "presentation stage 30" and "presentation stage 31" are stages that can be selected by the player when a predetermined selection condition is met. Note that in this embodiment, only two stages are provided as stages that can be selected by the player in the second and third time-saving play states, but three or more different stages may be provided.

In addition, "presentation stage 40" indicates a premier stage for female characters that suggests the number of reserved consecutive stocks is ≧1 in the second and third time-saving play states, "presentation stage 41" indicates premier stage 1 for male characters that suggests the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1 in the second and third time-saving play states, and "presentation stage 42" indicates premier stage 2 for male characters that suggests the number of reserved consecutive stocks is ≧2 in the second and third time-saving play states.

According to the symbol presentation pattern determination table E10 for the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state shown in FIG. 224, even if the variation pattern command for the same special symbol is used, different symbol presentation patterns (presentations with different background display modes) can be determined depending on the presentation stage.

However, the symbol presentation patterns associated with the symbol presentation pattern determination table E10 for the second time-saving play state and the third time-saving play state shown in FIG. 224 have different background display modes and character presentations depending on the presentation stage, but the presentation mode of the decorative symbols is a normal presentation mode in which, except for some jackpots (movie presentation of the variation pattern command 84H14H), all decorative symbols start to vary at high speed independently, and the left and right symbols do not temporarily stop in sequence, but all decorative symbols stop and display approximately simultaneously. This is also the case for the symbol presentation patterns associated with the symbol presentation pattern determination table E11 for the second time-saving play state and the third time-saving play state shown in FIG. 225, except when the special symbol lottery is a "miss."

(At the time of the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state)
At the time of final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, the symbol presentation pattern determination table E11 shown in FIG. 225 is referenced.

The symbol presentation pattern determination table E11 for the second time-saving play state and the third time-saving play state shown in FIG. 225 associates the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the presentation stage, the reserved number of second special symbols, and the symbol presentation pattern.

According to the symbol presentation pattern determination table E11 for the second time-saving play state and the third time-saving play state shown in FIG. 225, even if the variation pattern command for the same special symbol is used, it is possible to determine different symbol presentation patterns (different presentations) depending on the number of reserved second special symbols.

In the case where the lottery for the special symbol is a "miss" at the time of the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, if the reserved number of the second special symbol is ≧1 (when there is a reserved number of the second special symbol), a result presentation showing the game result of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state is performed, and then one of the symbol presentation patterns F10 to F13 for executing a consecutive battle entry presentation is determined. If the reserved number of the second special symbol is 0 (when there is no reserved number of the second special symbol), then a result presentation is performed, and then one of the symbol presentation patterns F20 to F23 for executing a door presentation is determined. Note that presentation stages 40 to 42 are dedicated stages with a reserved consecutive stock number, and the lottery for the special symbol is never a "miss" at the time of the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, the pattern presentation patterns F10-13 and F20-23 that are determined when the special symbol lottery result is a "miss" at the time of the final change in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state execute a result presentation while the special symbol is being displayed, and execute a consecutive battle entry presentation or a door presentation while the special symbol shape is being displayed, but a consecutive battle entry presentation or a door presentation may also be executed while the special symbol is being displayed.

[9-6-6. Window notice effect pattern determination table for first normal gaming state]
A notice presentation pattern determination table for determining a notice presentation pattern of a window notice in the first normal game state will be described. Figure 226 is an example of a notice presentation pattern determination table of a window notice in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 226, the preview performance pattern determination table for the window preview in the first normal game state corresponds the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the performance stage that determines the performance display state, the selection rate (second random number value), and the preview performance pattern.

In this embodiment, the preview performance patterns include preview performance pattern 1, in which the word "Stage Change" is displayed to indicate a change in stage, preview performance pattern 2, in which the word "Reach" is displayed as the performance content of the pattern performance pattern to suggest a reach, and preview performance pattern 3, in which the word "Super Hot" is displayed as the lottery result of the special pattern lottery to suggest a high possibility of a jackpot. Note that, although only three types of preview performance patterns are provided in this embodiment, the preview content may be subdivided to provide four or more display modes.

When preview presentation pattern 1 is determined, in which the word "Stage Change" is displayed to indicate a change in stage, presentation stage 0 and presentation stage 1 in the first normal game state are alternately switched. Note that if the general presentation state of the first normal game state has three or more different stages, the switching can be done according to a predetermined rule (for example, a predetermined order).

[9-6-7. Hold notice performance pattern determination table for hold change notice in first normal gaming state]
A reserve notice presentation pattern determination table for determining a reserve notice presentation pattern of the reserve change notice in the first normal game state will be described. Figure 227 is an example of a reserve notice presentation pattern determination table of the reserve change notice in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 227, the hold notice presentation pattern determination table for the hold change notice in the first normal game state corresponds the look-ahead command (see FIG. 194) received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (third random number value), and the hold notice presentation pattern.

As described below, when a special symbol winning command is received, a reserved image is displayed in a predetermined display mode based on the current presentation stage and the number of reserved special symbols. In this embodiment, when the first normal game state is in the general presentation state (presentation stages 0 and 1), "Normal Reserve 1" is displayed as the predetermined display mode, and when the first normal game state is in the limited presentation state (presentation stage 2), "Normal Reserve 2" is displayed as the predetermined display mode.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the reserve change notice is configured to be changeable to "special reserve 1" which suggests a reach or higher as the special pattern change information, or "special reserve 2" which suggests a super reach or higher and a high possibility of a jackpot as the result of the lottery for the special pattern when the first normal game state is in the general presentation state (presentation stage 0, 1), and to "special reserve 3" which suggests a reach or higher as the special pattern change information and a high possibility of a jackpot as the result of the lottery for the special pattern when the first normal game state is in the limited presentation state (presentation stage 2). Note that, although only three display modes are provided as the display mode of the reserve change notice in this embodiment, the contents suggested in advance may be subdivided to provide four or more display modes.

For example, in the case of hold notice presentation pattern 10, when the first starting gate 7120 is won, "Normal Hold 1" is displayed as the display mode of the hold image, and when the change occurs, "Normal Hold 1" is changed to "Special Hold 1." In the case of hold notice presentation pattern 11, "Special Hold 1" will continue to be displayed as the display mode of the hold image from the time of winning the first starting gate 7120 until the change occurs.

In addition, in the case of hold notice presentation pattern 20, when the first starting gate 7120 is won, "Normal hold 1" is displayed as the display mode of the hold image, and when the change occurs, "Normal hold 1" is changed to "Special hold 2." In the case of hold notice presentation pattern 21, "Special hold 2" will continue to be displayed as the display mode of the hold image from the time of winning the first starting gate 7120 until the change occurs.

In addition, in the case of hold notice presentation pattern 30, when the first starting gate 7120 is won, "Normal hold 2" is displayed as the display mode of the hold image, and when the change occurs, "Normal hold 2" is changed to "Special hold 3." In the case of hold notice presentation pattern 21, "Special hold 3" will continue to be displayed as the display mode of the hold image from the time of winning the first starting gate 7120 until the change occurs.

[9-6-8. First normal game state flash notice winning time notice performance pattern determination table]
A winning notice performance pattern determination table for determining a winning notice performance pattern of the flash notice in the first normal game state will be described. Figure 228 is an example of a winning notice performance pattern determination table of the flash notice in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 228, the winning notice presentation pattern determination table for the flash notice in the first normal game state corresponds the look-ahead command (see FIG. 194) received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (fourth random number value), and the winning notice presentation pattern.

In this embodiment, the winning notice performance patterns include winning notice performance pattern 1, in which the LED group 46 emits white light from the time of winning at the first starting port 7120 until the fluctuation starts, and winning notice performance pattern 2, in which the LED group 46 emits rainbow light from the time of winning at the first starting port 7120 until the fluctuation starts. Note that, although this embodiment has only two types of winning notice performance patterns, it is also possible to configure it with three or more types of winning notice performance patterns by subdividing the suggested content.

In this embodiment, when winning preview performance pattern 1 is determined and the LED group 46 emits white light, it indicates that there is a high possibility of a jackpot as the result of the lottery for the special symbol, and when winning preview performance pattern 2 is determined and the LED group 46 emits rainbow light, it indicates that the lottery for the special symbol will result in a jackpot.

[9-6-9. Table for setting prohibition conditions for pre-reading effects]
A table for setting a prohibition condition for a pre-reading effect for determining whether or not to execute a pre-reading effect (reserved change notice, flash notice) in the first normal game state will be described. Figure 229 is an example of a table for setting a prohibition condition for a pre-reading effect in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 229, the prohibition conditions for prohibiting the execution of the pre-reading performance include a "common prohibition condition" that prohibits the execution of both the hold change notice and the flash notice, and a "first prohibition condition" that prohibits the execution of only the flash notice.

There are five common prohibition conditions, common prohibition conditions 1 to 5. "Common prohibition condition 1" is met when there are reserved numbers of the second special symbol, "common prohibition condition 2" is met during the control period of the second special symbol (during the variable display of the second special symbol), "common prohibition condition 3" is met within five variable displays before and after the stage is switched, "common prohibition condition 4" is met when a full rotation effect is being displayed, and "common prohibition condition 5" is met when the same look-ahead effect is already being executed by referring to the look-ahead flag.

If any of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 5 is met, neither the hold change notice nor the flash notice will be executed.

The first prohibited condition is set to four prohibited conditions, first prohibited condition 1 to 4. "First prohibited condition 1" is met when the first start gate 7120 is won when a variable performance other than normal variation is being performed, "First prohibited condition 2" is met when the first start gate 7120 is won during the period from 1500 ms before the first special symbol is determined to the period during which the symbol is determined, "First prohibited condition 3" is met when the first start gate 7120 is won within 500 ms from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, and "First prohibited condition 4" is met when the first start gate 7120 is won during demo display.

If any of the first prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is met, the flash notice will not be executed, but the hold change notice will be executable.

[9-6-10. Small hit performance pattern determination table]
A small win presentation pattern determination table for determining a presentation pattern in a small win gaming state will be described. Figure 230 shows an example of a small win presentation pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 230, the small win presentation pattern determination table includes a small win start presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 230(1) and a small win end presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 230(2).

The small win start presentation pattern determination table shown in Figure 230 (1) corresponds the small win start display command received from the main control circuit 200, the game state information (presentation stage) at the time of winning when it is determined that there is a big win or small win, the number of reserved consecutive stocks, the selection rate (fifth random number value), and the small win start presentation pattern.

Here, the "small win start presentation pattern" refers to the presentation that is performed at the start of a small win game state, and refers to information that specifies the display presentation of characters, etc., audio presentation, and presentation of changes in the operation mode of the presentation button 54, etc.

In this embodiment, the small win start presentation patterns determined when a small win start display command is received are small win start presentation pattern 1 in which a normal character instructs the player to pass the game ball through the V winning opening 7156 in a small win game state, small win start presentation pattern 10 in which a male character instructs the player to pass the game ball through the V winning opening 7156 in a small win game state with a background A1 (e.g., a blue background), and small win start presentation pattern 11 in which a male character instructs the player to pass the game ball through the V winning opening 7156 in a small win game state with a background A2 (e.g., a blue background). A2 (e.g., red background) game ball is instructed to pass through the V winning opening 7156, a small win start presentation pattern 20 instructing a female character to pass a game ball through the V winning opening 7156 with background A1 (e.g., blue background) in a small win game state, and a small win start presentation pattern 21 instructing a female character to pass a game ball through background A2 (e.g., red background) in a small win game state.

And according to the small win start presentation pattern determination table shown in Figure 230 (1), when the game is in the first normal game state (presentation stages 0 to 2), the second normal game state (presentation stage 10), or the first time-saving game state (presentation stage 20), small win start presentation pattern 1 is determined as the normal small win presentation.

In contrast, in the second time-saving game state, different small win start presentation patterns (different presentations) can be determined based on the stages "presentation stage 30" and "presentation stage 31" selectable by the player.
Specifically, when it is the "presentation stage 30" of a male character, small win start presentation pattern 10 or small win start presentation pattern 11 is determined, and when it is the "presentation stage 31" of a female character, small win start presentation pattern 20 or small win start presentation pattern 21 is determined.

In addition, as described below, "Production Stage 41" and "Production Stage 42" are only transitioned from "Production Stage 30" of the male character selected by the player, and "Production Stage 40" is only transitioned from "Production Stage 31" of the female character selected by the player. For this reason, when it is "Production Stage 41" or "Production Stage 42", small win start production pattern 10 or small win start production pattern 11 is determined, similar to "Production Stage 30" of the male character, and when it is "Production Stage 40", small win start production pattern 20 or small win start production pattern 21 is determined, similar to "Production Stage 31" of the female character.

Furthermore, in the second time-saving game state, different small win start presentation patterns (different presentations) can be determined based on the number of reserved consecutive stocks.
Specifically, the greater the number of reserved consecutive stocks, the more likely it is that small win start presentation pattern 11 will be determined rather than small win start presentation pattern 10 when the presentation stage is for a male character (30, 41, 42), and the more likely it is that small win start presentation pattern 21 will be determined rather than small win start presentation pattern 20 when the presentation stage is for a female character (31, 40).

As a result, when in the second time-saving play state, the number of reserved consecutive stocks can be suggested by the small win start presentation pattern.

The small win end presentation pattern determination table shown in Figure 230 (2) corresponds the small win end display command received from the main control circuit 200, the reserved number of second special symbols, the presentation pattern for executing the door presentation, and the presentation stage after the small win ends.

Here, the "small win end presentation pattern" refers to the presentation that is performed when the small win game state ends, and refers to information that defines the display presentation of characters, etc., audio presentation, and presentation of changes in the operation mode of presentation button 54. Also, as described above, the small win end display command is a command that is sent when the small win game state ends without the game ball passing through V winning port 7156 (see S7105 in FIG. 211), and also results in the time-saving game state ending.

In this embodiment, the small win end presentation patterns include presentation pattern 101, which executes a door presentation and then executes a stage change presentation to presentation stage 2, and presentation pattern 102, which executes a consecutive battle entry presentation and then executes a door presentation.

According to the small win end presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 230 (2), when there are no reserved second special symbols at the end of the small win game state, presentation pattern 101 and presentation stage 2 are determined, and when there are reserved second special symbols at the end of the small win game state, presentation pattern 102 and presentation stage 10 are determined.

In this embodiment, the presentation patterns 101 and 102 determined as the small win end presentation patterns are performed in the end interval time when the small win game state ends, but part of the presentation may be performed in the variable display of the special symbol immediately after the end of the small win game state. For example, a door presentation may be performed in the end interval time of the small win game state, and a stage change presentation or continuous battle entry presentation may be performed in the variable display of the special symbol immediately after the end of the small win game state.

[9-6-11. V Passing Performance Pattern Determination Table]
A V-passing performance pattern determination table for determining a V-passing performance pattern in a small winning gaming state will be described. Fig. 231 is an example of a V-passing performance pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The "V-passing effect pattern" refers to an effect that is performed when the game ball passes through the V-entry port 7156 during a small win game state, and refers to information that specifies the display effects of characters, etc., audio effects, changes in the operation mode of the effect button 54, etc.

As shown in FIG. 231, the V-passing performance pattern determination table associates the V-passing command received from the main control circuit 200, the game state information (performance stage) at the time of winning when a big win or small win is determined, the number of reserved consecutive stocks, the selection rate (sixth random number value), and the V-passing performance pattern.

In this embodiment, the V passing performance patterns include V passing performance pattern 1 which displays V in the normal display mode, V passing performance pattern 10 which displays V in the first display mode, V passing performance pattern 11 which displays V in the first display mode and displays "STOCK1" suggesting that the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1, V passing performance pattern 12 which displays V in the first display mode and displays "STOCK2" suggesting that the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 2, V passing performance pattern 20 which displays V in the second display mode, and V passing performance pattern 21 which displays V in the special display mode suggesting that the number of reserved consecutive stocks ≧ 1.

And according to the V-passing presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 231, when the game is in the first normal game state (presentation stages 0-2), the second normal game state (presentation stage 10), or the first time-saving game state (presentation stage 20), V-passing presentation pattern 1 is determined as the normal V-passing presentation.

In contrast, in the second time-saving game state, a different V-passing presentation pattern (different presentation) can be determined based on the presentation stage.
Specifically, when the male character is on "performance stage 30, 41, 42", V-passing performance pattern 10, V-passing performance pattern 11 or V-passing performance pattern 12 is determined, and when the female character is on "performance stage 31, 40", V-passing performance pattern 20 or V-passing performance pattern 21 is determined.

Furthermore, when in the second time-saving game state, a different V-passing presentation pattern (different presentation) can be determined based on the number of reserved consecutive stocks.
Specifically, in the case of a male character's performance stage (30, 41, 42), when the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 1, V-pass performance pattern 11 is more likely to be determined than V-pass performance pattern 10, and when the number of reserved consecutive stocks is ≧2, V-pass performance pattern 12 is more likely to be determined than V-pass performance pattern 10. Also, in the case of a female character's performance stage (31, 40), when the number of reserved consecutive stocks is ≧1, V-pass performance pattern 21 is more likely to be determined than V-pass performance pattern 20.

As a result, when in the second time-saving play state, the number of reserved consecutive stocks can be indicated by the V-passing presentation pattern.

In addition, according to the small win start presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 230(1) and the V-pass presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 231, presentations based on the same presentation stage selected in the second time-saving play state are performed from the second time-saving play state to the small win play state. This allows a series of presentations to be performed from the second time-saving play state to the small win play state, further enhancing the excitement of the game. More details will be given later using FIG. 243 and FIG. 244.

[9-6-12. Stage selection table after jackpot game state ends]
The following describes a presentation stage selection table for determining the presentation stage to be performed after the big win gaming state has ended. Figure 232 shows an example of a presentation stage selection table for the seventh pachinko gaming machine after the big win gaming state has ended.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 232, there are two presentation stage selection tables after the end of the jackpot game state: presentation stage selection table 1 after the end of the jackpot game state in the first normal game state, the second normal game state, and the first time-limited game state shown in FIG. 232 (1), and presentation stage selection table 2 after the end of the jackpot game state in the second time-limited game state shown in FIG. 232 (2).

As shown in FIG. 232 (1), the presentation stage selection table 1 after the end of the big win game state corresponds to the game state at the time of winning when a big win or small win is determined, the winning pattern, and the presentation stage.

Here, the "selection permission flag ON" shown in FIG. 232 (1) indicates that the selection permission flag that allows the player to select "performance stage 30" for a male character or "performance stage 31" for a female character is on (permitted).

According to the presentation stage selection table 1 after the end of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 232 (1), if the game state at the time of winning is the first normal game state (presentation stages 0 to 2), and the winning symbol is the "first special symbol_5R jackpot symbol 1" corresponding to the symbol designation command "zA1", the game will transition to the first time-saving game state, and "presentation stage 20", which indicates the Sengoku entry chance stage in the first time-saving game state, will be selected.

According to the presentation stage selection table 1 after the end of the big win game state shown in FIG. 232 (1), if the game state at the time of winning is the first normal game state (presentation stages 0-2) and the winning symbol corresponds to the symbol designation command "zA2-4", if the game state at the time of winning is the second normal game state (presentation stage 10), or if the game state at the time of winning is the first time-limited game state (presentation stage 20), in either case, a transition to the second time-limited game state will occur as a so-called first win or a pull-back win, and therefore the "selection permission flag is ON" to allow the player to select "presentation stage 30" or "presentation stage 31".

As shown in FIG. 232 (2), the presentation stage selection table 2 after the end of the big win game state corresponds to information on the game state (presentation stage) at the time of winning when a big win or small win is determined, the V-passing presentation pattern described above, the number of reserved consecutive stocks, and the presentation stage.

According to the presentation stage selection table 2 after the end of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 232 (2), the presentation stage selected after the end of the jackpot game state differs depending on whether or not the number of reserved consecutive stocks has been notified by the V-pass presentation pattern.

Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning is presentation stage 30, and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not announced by V-pass presentation pattern 10, presentation stage 30 is selected again (presentation stage 30 continues), and when the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1 is announced by V-pass presentation pattern 11, presentation stage 41 is selected, and when the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 2 is announced by V-pass presentation pattern 12, presentation stage 42 is selected.

In addition, if the game state at the time of winning is presentation stage 41, and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not announced by V-pass presentation pattern 10, presentation stage 30 is selected, and when the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1 is announced by V-pass presentation pattern 11, presentation stage 41 is selected (presentation stage 41 continues), and when the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 2 is announced by V-pass presentation pattern 12, presentation stage 42 is selected.

In addition, if the game state at the time of winning is presentation stage 42, and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not announced by V-pass presentation pattern 10 and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 1, presentation stage 41 is selected, and if the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not announced by V-pass presentation pattern 10 but the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 2, presentation stage 42 is selected (presentation stage 42 continues), and if the number of reserved consecutive stocks is announced by V-pass presentation pattern 11 and 1 is announced, presentation stage 42 is selected (presentation stage 42 continues).

As a result, "presentation stage 41", which is premier stage 1 for male characters, can suggest at least the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1 in the second and third time-saving play states, and "presentation stage 42", which is premier stage 2 for male characters, can suggest at least the number of reserved consecutive stocks ≧ 2 in the second and third time-saving play states. Therefore, when the presentation by presentation stages 41 and 42 is being executed, the player can know the number of reserved consecutive stocks and can play with peace of mind.

In addition, if the game state at the time of winning is presentation stage 31, and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not announced by V-pass presentation pattern 20, presentation stage 31 is selected (presentation stage 31 continues), and if the number of reserved consecutive stocks ≧1 is announced by V-pass presentation pattern 21, presentation stage 40 is selected.

In addition, if the game state at the time of winning is presentation stage 40, and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not announced by V-pass presentation pattern 20 and the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 0, presentation stage 31 is selected, and if the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not announced by V-pass presentation pattern 20 but the number of reserved consecutive stocks is ≧ 1, presentation stage 40 is selected (presentation stage 40 continues), and also when the number of reserved consecutive stocks ≧ 1 is announced by V-pass presentation pattern 21, presentation stage 40 is selected (presentation stage 40 continues).

As a result, "production stage 40," the premier stage for female characters, can suggest that the number of reserved consecutive stocks is ≥ 1 in the second and third time-saving play states. Therefore, when the production by production stage 40 is being performed, it is possible to make the player interested in how many reserved consecutive stocks there are and how long production stage 40 will continue.

[9-7-1. Sub-control circuit processing]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 233. Fig. 233 is a flow chart showing an example of the sub-control circuit process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 233, the sub-CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S7500). In this initialization process, for example, RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7510.

The initialization process (S7500) described above is executed when the power is turned on or the backup is cleared. After the power is turned on, the processes S7510 to S7580 described below are executed repeatedly.

In S7510, the sub-CPU 301 performs a data input process to input data. In this data input process, both the command input port 308 reading process and the effect button 54 input process are performed.

The command input port 308 read process reads the command sent from the main control circuit 200 that is set in the command input port 308.

In addition, in the input process of the effect button 54, operation information regarding the player's operation detected by the effect button 54 is input from the button control circuit 310. In addition, when the sub-CPU 301 inputs operation information from the button control circuit 310, it determines whether to validate the input operation information or discard it as invalid, and sets the acceptance time during which input of operation information is permitted, the validity time during which the input operation information is valid, and the invalidity period during which the input operation information is invalid, depending on the current situation such as the effect.

When the reading process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the effect button 54 are completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7520.

In S7520, the sub-CPU 301 executes a command analysis process. In this process, the command read in the process of S7510 is analyzed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7530.

At S7530, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation mode determination process. In this process, for example, a presentation pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, and various requests for operating various presentation devices (for example, a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, a role request, a presentation button activation request, etc.) are generated based on the determined presentation pattern. Details of this presentation mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 234. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S7540.

In S7540, the sub-CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304. The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on the message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S7550.

At S7550, the sub-CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305. The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to output audio from the speaker 32 based on the message (sound request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S7560.

In S7560, the sub-CPU 301 executes an LED control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends an LED request to the LED control circuit 306. Based on the message (LED request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to light up or blink all or a portion of the LEDs that make up the LED group 46. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7570.

At S7570, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends a reel request to the reel control circuit 307. Based on the message (reel request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the reel control circuit 307 performs drive control to operate the performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the reels that make up the performance reel group 58. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7580.

At S7580, the sub-CPU 301 executes effect button control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 sends an effect button drive request to the button control circuit 310. Based on the message (effect button drive request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the button control circuit 310 performs drive control such as changing the operation mode of the effect button 54 and vibrating the effect button 54. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the sub-control circuit processing.

[9-7-2. Presentation mode determination process]
Next, the details of the presentation mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 233) will be described with reference to Fig. 234. Fig. 234 is a flow chart showing an example of the presentation mode determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7531, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation pattern determination process to determine a presentation pattern. In this process, a presentation pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, the presentation pattern defining the type of display presentation to be displayed on the display device 7, the type of sound presentation to be output from the speaker 32, the operation type of the presentation button 54, etc. Details of this presentation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 235 to 238. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S7532.

In S7532, the sub-CPU 301 executes a process for generating an animation request. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S7531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7533.

In S7533, the sub-CPU 301 executes a process for generating a drawing request. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S7532. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7534.

At S7534, the sub-CPU 301 executes a sound request generation process. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the performance pattern determined at S7531 above. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7535.

In S7535, the sub-CPU 301 executes a lamp request generation process. In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S7531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7536.

In S7536, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel request generation process. In this process, a reel request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S7531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7537.

At S7537, the sub-CPU 301 executes a process for generating a performance button actuation request. In this process, a performance button actuation request is generated based on the performance pattern determined at S7531 above. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the performance mode determination process and returns the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 233).

[9-7-3. Presentation pattern determination process]
Next, with reference to Figures 235 to 237, the details of the effect pattern determination process executed by the sub-CPU 301 in the effect mode determination process (see Figure 234) will be described. Figures 235 to 237 are flow charts showing an example of the effect pattern determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7531-1, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol winning command."

If it is determined in S7531-1 that the command is a "special symbol winning command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-2. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol winning command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-3.

In S7531-2, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process to add the number of reserved special symbols, etc.

In this reserved number addition process for special symbols, it is determined whether it is a "winning command for the first special symbol" or a "winning command for the second special symbol", and when it is a "winning command for the first special symbol", 1 is added to the reserved number of the first special symbol (reserved number counter for the first special symbol) in the work RAM 303, and when it is a "winning command for the second special symbol", 1 is added to the reserved number of the second special symbol (reserved number counter for the second special symbol) in the work RAM 303. Also, by referring to the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303, a display mode of the reserved image is determined based on the current performance stage and the reserved number of the special symbol added this time, and a reserved display pattern for displaying the reserved image in the determined display mode on the display device 7 is determined.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 234).

In S7531-3, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "pre-read command" for a special symbol.

If it is determined in S7531-3 that the command is a "read-ahead command," the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-4. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "read-ahead command," the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-10.

In S7531-4, the sub-CPU 301 performs pending information storage processing to store the contents of the start information for the special symbol.

In this pending information storage process, it is determined whether it is a ``first special pattern pre-read command'' or a ``second special pattern pre-read command'', and various parameters of the pre-read command (see Figure 194) are stored in the decorative pattern determination area, first decorative pattern start memory area, and second decorative pattern start memory area of the work RAM 303 so as to correspond to the special pattern determination area, first special pattern start memory area, and second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-5.

In S7531-5, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead performance determination process to determine a look-ahead performance. The details of this look-ahead performance determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 234).

In S7531-10, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "symbol designation command."

If it is determined in S7531-10 that the command is a "designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-11. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-20.

In S7531-11, the sub-CPU 301 performs a decorative pattern determination process to determine a decorative pattern.

In this decorative symbol determination process, a stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined based on the type of the symbol designation command and the state information (current game state) stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and the determined stop symbol is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 303. When the type of the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a big win or a small win, information on the current game state is stored in the win-time state storage area of the work RAM 303 in order to hold the game state at the time of winning. Furthermore, if the game state at the time of winning is not the first normal game state (i.e., the second normal game state or the first to third time-saving game states), 1 is added to the consecutive win counter of the work RAM 303, and if the game state at the time of winning is the first normal game state, the consecutive win counter of the work RAM 303 is cleared (set to 0).
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 234).

In S7531-20, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command."

If it is determined in S7531-20 that the command is a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-21. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-30.

In S7531-21, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process to subtract the number of reserved special symbols, etc.

In this reserved number subtraction process for special symbols, it is determined whether the command is a "first special symbol variation pattern command" or a "second special symbol variation pattern command", and when the command is a "first special symbol variation pattern command", 1 is subtracted from the reserved number counter for the first special symbol in the work RAM 303, and when the command is a "second special symbol variation pattern command", 1 is subtracted from the reserved number counter for the second special symbol in the work RAM 303. In addition, a reserved shift display pattern for shifting and displaying the reserved image of the special symbol subtracted this time is determined.
Furthermore, various parameters stored in the decorative pattern determination area, first decorative pattern start memory area, and second decorative pattern start memory area of the work RAM 303 are shifted in the same manner as the special pattern determination area, first special pattern start memory area, and second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-22.

In S7531-22, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the state information (current game state) stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and performs a count counter update process to update various count counters.

In this count counter update process, in the normal game state, the "normal variable display count counter" of the work RAM 303, which counts the number of times the special symbol is variably displayed in the normal game state, is updated by adding 1.
In addition, when the game is in a time-saving game state, if the command is a variation pattern of the first special symbol, 1 is subtracted from the "first time-saving number sub-counter" and the "second time-saving number sub-counter" of the work RAM 303, and if the command is a variation pattern of the second special symbol, 1 is subtracted from the "second time-saving number sub-counter" of the work RAM 303.
Furthermore, when a first read-ahead flag indicating that a pending change notice is being executed is on, the "first read-ahead count counter" in the work RAM 303 is updated by subtracting 1 from it, and when a second read-ahead flag indicating that a flash notice is being executed is on, the "second read-ahead count counter" in the work RAM 303 is updated by subtracting 1 from it. Note that when the first read-ahead count counter = 0, the first read-ahead flag is turned off, and when the second read-ahead count counter = 0, the second read-ahead flag is turned off.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-23.

In S7531-23, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the state information (current game state) stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and determines whether the current game state is the "first normal game state."

If it is determined in S7531-23 that the game is in the "first normal game state", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-24. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is not in the "first normal game state", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-26.

In S7531-24, the sub-CPU 301 performs a first symbol presentation pattern determination process that determines the symbol presentation pattern in the first normal gaming state.

In this first pattern presentation pattern determination process, after obtaining a first random number value, the pattern presentation pattern determination table E1 shown in FIG. 220 is referenced to determine a pattern presentation pattern based on the received special pattern variation pattern command, the presentation stage stored in the presentation stage memory area of the work RAM 303, the number of times the special pattern has been varied and displayed stored in the normal variation display number counter of the work RAM 303, and the obtained first random number value.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-25.

At S7531-25, the sub-CPU 301 performs a preview presentation pattern determination process to determine the preview presentation pattern for the window preview in the first normal game state.

In this preview performance pattern determination process, after obtaining the second random number value, a preview performance pattern is determined based on the received special symbol variation pattern command, the performance stage stored in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303, and the obtained second random number value, with reference to a preview performance pattern determination table for window preview shown in Fig. 226. Here, when preview performance pattern 1 indicating a change of stage is determined, performance stage 0 stored in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303 is switched to performance stage 1, or performance stage 1 is switched to performance stage 0 for update.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 234).

In S7531-26, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the state information (current game state) stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and determines whether the current game state is the "second normal game state."

If it is determined in S7531-26 that the game is in the "second normal game state", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-27. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is not in the "second normal game state", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-29.

In S7531-27, the sub-CPU 301 performs a symbol presentation pattern table determination process to determine the symbol presentation pattern determination table for the second normal game state.

In this pattern presentation pattern table determination process, first, various parameters stored in the decorative pattern determination area and the second decorative pattern start memory area of the work RAM 303 are referenced to calculate the "number of winning symbols within the reserved number of second special symbols" and "pull-back information."
Then, by referring to the start determination table for the second normal game state shown in FIG. 221, one of the pattern presentation pattern determination tables E2 to E8 is determined based on the number of reserved second special symbols stored in the reserved number counter for the second special symbol in the work RAM 303, the calculated "number of winning symbols within the reserved number of second special symbols" and the "pull-back information."
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-28.

In S7531-28, the sub-CPU 301 performs a second symbol presentation pattern determination process to determine the symbol presentation pattern in the second normal gaming state.

In this second symbol presentation pattern determination process, after obtaining the first random number value, the symbol presentation pattern determination table determined in S7531-27 above is referenced to determine the symbol presentation pattern based on the received special symbol variation pattern command, the number of reserved second special symbols stored in the reserved number counter for the second special symbol in the work RAM 303, and the obtained first random number value.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 234).

In S7531-29, the sub-CPU 301 performs a third symbol presentation pattern determination process that determines the symbol presentation pattern in the time-saving game state.

In this third symbol presentation pattern determination process, the game state storage area of the work RAM 303 is first referenced to determine whether the game state is the first time-saving game state or the second or third time-saving game state.

In the third symbol presentation pattern determination process, if the first time-saving game state is in effect, the first random number value is obtained, and then the symbol presentation pattern is determined based on the received special symbol variation pattern command and the obtained first random number value, with reference to the symbol presentation pattern determination table E9 shown in FIG. 223. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and moves the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 234).

In the third symbol presentation pattern determination process, if the second or third time-saving game state is selected, it is determined whether or not the time-saving game state is in its final change. Here, the "first time-saving count sub-counter" and "second time-saving count sub-counter" in the work RAM 303 are referenced to determine whether or not the time-saving game state is in its final change. If either time-saving count sub-counter is 0, it is determined that the time-saving game state is in its final change.

In the third symbol presentation pattern determination process, when the second or third time-saving game state is in effect and other than the final change in the time-saving game state, the symbol presentation pattern determination table E10 shown in FIG. 224 is referenced to determine the symbol presentation pattern based on the received special symbol change pattern command and the presentation stage stored in the presentation stage memory area of the work RAM 303. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 234).

In the third symbol presentation pattern determination process, when the second or third time-saving play state is in the second or third time-saving play state, if it is the final change in the time-saving play state, the symbol presentation pattern determination table E11 shown in FIG. 224 is referenced to determine the symbol presentation pattern based on the received special symbol change pattern command, the presentation stage stored in the presentation stage memory area of the work RAM 303, and the reserved number of the second special symbol stored in the reserved number counter of the work RAM 303. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process and moves the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 234).

In S7531-30, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol effect stop command."

If it is determined in S7531-30 that the command is a "special symbol effect stop command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-31. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol effect stop command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-32.

In S7531-31, the sub-CPU 301 performs a pattern presentation end process to end the pattern presentation.

In this pattern presentation end processing, the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, the "first time-saving count sub-counter" and the "second time-saving count sub-counter" are referenced to determine whether or not this is the final change of the first to third time-saving game states. If this is other than the final change of the first to third time-saving game states, pattern presentation execution end data is created to end the execution of the presentation by the pattern presentation pattern and the presentation pattern 100 of the door presentation. If this is the final change of the first to third time-saving game states, the pattern presentation end processing is ended without creating pattern presentation execution end data in order to execute the presentation over the special pattern variation display time and the pattern determination time.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 234).

In S7531-32, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol game end command."

If it is determined in S7531-32 that the command is a "special symbol game end command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-33. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol game end command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-40.

In S7531-33, the sub-CPU 301 performs a full effect end process to end all effects related to the lottery for special symbols, excluding some effects such as the background.

In this all-effects end process, all-effects execution end data for ending the execution of all effects related to the lottery of special symbols is created. Even if the symbol effect execution end data is not created in the above S7531-31 when the first to third time-saving game states are the final change, the execution of the effect by the symbol effect pattern when the first to third time-saving game states are the final change is ended by this all-effects execution end data.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 234).

In S7531-40, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "small win start display command."

If it is determined in S7531-40 that the command is a "small win start display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-41. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "small win start display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-42.

In S7531-41, the sub-CPU 301 performs a small win start effect determination process to determine the small win start effect pattern for performing a small win start effect.

In this process of determining the small win effect, first, various parameters stored in the second decorative pattern start memory area of the work RAM 303 are referenced, and the "number of reserved consecutive stocks", which is the number of parameters that will result in a big win or a small win, is calculated, and the calculated "number of reserved consecutive stocks" is overwritten and stored in the reserved consecutive stock number counter of the work RAM 303.
Then, after obtaining the fifth random number value, the small win start presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 230 (1) is referenced, and a small win start presentation pattern is determined based on the game state information stored in the winning state memory area of the work RAM 303, the presentation stage stored in the presentation stage memory area of the work RAM 303, the number of reserved consecutive stocks stored in the reserved consecutive stock number counter of the work RAM 303, and the obtained fifth random number value.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 234).

In S7531-42, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "V pass command."

If it is determined in S7531-42 that the command is a "V pass command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-43. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "V pass command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-44.

In S7531-43, the sub-CPU 301 performs a V-passing effect determination process to determine a V-passing effect pattern for performing a V-passing effect.

In this V passing performance determination process, after obtaining the sixth random number value, the V passing performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 231 is referenced, and a V passing performance pattern is determined based on the game state information stored in the winning state memory area of the work RAM 303, the performance stage stored in the performance stage memory area of the work RAM 303, the number of reserved consecutive stocks stored in the reserved consecutive stock number counter of the work RAM 303, and the obtained sixth random number value.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 234).

In S7531-44, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "small win end display command."

If it is determined in S7531-44 that the command is a "small win end display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-45. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "small win end display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-50.

In S7531-45, the sub-CPU 301 performs a small win end effect determination process to determine the effect pattern for performing the small win end effect.

In this small win end effect determination process, the small win end effect pattern determination table shown in Fig. 230 (2) is referenced, and the small win end effect pattern and effect stage are determined based on the reserved number of the second special symbol stored in the reserved number counter of the second special symbol in the work RAM 303. Then, the information of the determined effect stage is overwritten and stored in the effect stage storage area of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 234).

In S7531-50, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "jackpot start display command."

If it is determined in S7531-50 that the command is a "jackpot start display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-51. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "jackpot start display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-52.

In S7531-51, the sub-CPU 301 performs a jackpot start effect determination process to determine an effect pattern for performing a jackpot start effect. In this jackpot start effect determination process, the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 303 is referenced, and the effect pattern of the jackpot start effect is determined according to the stop symbol (winning symbol).
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 234).

In S7531-52, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "jackpot end display command."

If it is determined in S7531-52 that the command is a "jackpot end display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-53. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "jackpot end display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-70.

In S7531-53, the sub-CPU 301 performs a presentation stage determination process to determine the presentation stage after the end of the jackpot game state.

In this production stage determination process, the winning state memory area of the work RAM 303 is referenced to determine whether the game state at the time of winning is the second time-saving game state.

If the game state at the time of winning is not the second time-limited game state in the presentation stage determination process (if it is the first normal game state, the second normal game state, or the first time-limited game state), the presentation stage selection table 1 after the end of the big win game state shown in FIG. 232 (1) is referenced, and a new presentation stage (presentation stage 20 or selection permission flag ON) is determined based on the game state information stored in the winning state memory area of the work RAM 303 and the winning pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area of the work RAM 303.

When a new performance stage 20 is determined, the information about the performance stage 20 is overwritten and stored in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303, the current performance stage determination process ends, and processing proceeds to S7531-54.

When the selection permission flag is set to ON, a valid operation time is set within the end interval time at the end of the jackpot game state, and the initial selection stage is set to presentation stage 30, with the selection stage being switched between presentation stage 30 and presentation stage 31 each time the player operates presentation button 54. When the valid operation time has elapsed, the selection permission flag is set to OFF, the presentation stage selected as the selection stage is newly determined, and the information of the newly determined presentation stage is overwritten and stored in the presentation stage storage area of work RAM 303. Note that if the game state at the time of winning is the second time-saving game state, the selection permission flag will not be set to ON. When this process is completed, the process moves to S7531-54.

In addition, if the game state at the time of winning in the performance stage determination process is the second time-saving game state, first, various parameters stored in the second decorative pattern start memory area of the work RAM 303 are referenced, and the "number of reserved consecutive stocks", which is the number of parameters that will result in a big hit or a small hit, is calculated, and the calculated "number of reserved consecutive stocks" is overwritten and stored in the reserved consecutive stock number counter of the work RAM 303.
Then, referring to the performance stage selection table 2 after the end of the big win game state shown in Fig. 232 (2), a new performance stage is determined based on the performance stage stored in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303, the V-pass performance pattern determined (executed) in the above S7531-43, and the reserved consecutive stock number stored in the reserved consecutive stock number counter of the work RAM 303. After that, the information of the newly determined performance stage is overwritten and stored in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-54.

In S7531-54, the sub-CPU 301 performs a big win end effect determination process to determine an effect pattern for performing a big win end effect. In this big win end effect determination process, the effect pattern of the big win end effect is determined according to the stop symbol (winning symbol) stored in the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 303, the effect stage newly determined in the above S7531-53, and the selection permission flag ON/OFF.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 234).

In S7531-70, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "game state designation command."

If it is determined in S7531-70 that the command is a "game state designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-71. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "game state designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-80.

In S7531-71, the sub-CPU 301 performs a state information update process to update and store state information indicating the current game state in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303 according to the type of game state designation command. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-72.

In addition, in the state information update process of this embodiment, when the state information is updated from the normal game state to the first time-shortened game state (when the first time-shortened game state starts), the "first time-shortened number sub-counter" in the work RAM 303 is set to 7, and the "second time-shortened number sub-counter" is set to 1, and when the state information is updated from the normal game state to the second time-shortened game state (when the second time-shortened game state starts), the "first time-shortened number sub-counter" in the work RAM 303 is set to 11, and the "second time-shortened number sub-counter" is set to 5.

At S7531-72, the sub-CPU 301 performs a presentation stage transition determination process to determine whether or not to transition to a presentation stage.

In this presentation stage transition determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there has been a change in the state information stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and when the state information is changed from the first to third time-saving game states or the second normal game state to the first normal game state (when transitioning to the first normal game state), presentation stage 2 is determined, when the state information is changed from the second or third time-saving game state to the second normal game state (when transitioning to the second normal game state), presentation stage 10 is determined, and when the state information is changed from the first normal game state to the third time-saving game state (when transitioning to the B time-saving game state), presentation stage 30 is determined. Next, the normal variable display count counter of the work RAM 303 is referenced, and when the variable display of the special symbol has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) in the first normal game state, presentation stage 0 is determined.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 234).

In S7531-80, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "demo display command."

If it is determined in S7531-80 that the command is a "demo display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-81. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "demo display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-90.

In S7531-81, the sub-CPU 301 executes a demo display presentation pattern determination process for determining a demo display presentation pattern for performing presentation during standby of a game.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 234).

In S7531-90, the sub-CPU 301 determines a presentation pattern according to various commands sent from the main CPU 201. For example, the sub-CPU 301 updates the cumulative payout information of game balls in response to receiving the first large prize winning port command and the first large prize winning port command. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the presentation pattern determination process and moves the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 234).
[9-7-4. Pre-reading performance decision process]
Next, details of the look-ahead effect determination process executed by the sub-CPU 301 in the effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 235) will be described with reference to Fig. 238. Fig. 238 is a flow chart showing an example of the look-ahead effect determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7601, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the state information (current game state) stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and determines whether the current game state is the "first normal game state."

If it is determined in S7601 that the game is in the "first normal game state", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7602. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is not in the "first normal game state", the sub-CPU 301 ends the current pre-reading performance determination process and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see Figures 234 and 235).

In S7602, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the forbidden condition setting table for the look-ahead performance shown in FIG. 229, and determines whether any of the forbidden conditions among the common forbidden conditions 1 to 4 has not yet been met.

If it is determined in S7602 that none of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is satisfied, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7603. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is satisfied, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7606.

In S7603, the sub-CPU 301 performs hold change notice presentation determination processing to determine the hold change notice presentation pattern for the hold change notice.

In this reserve change notice performance determination process, after obtaining the third random number value, the reserve notice performance pattern determination table for the reserve change notice shown in FIG. 227 is referred to, and the reserve notice performance pattern is determined based on the received look-ahead command (see FIG. 194) and the obtained third random number value. Then, when the reserve notice performance pattern for performing the reserve change notice is determined, in order to determine whether the common prohibition condition 5 (see FIG. 229) is satisfied, it is determined whether the first look-ahead flag is already set in the flag storage area of the work RAM 303 (whether the reserve change notice is being executed or not). If the first look-ahead flag is already set, the reserve notice performance pattern determined this time is discarded and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the first look-ahead flag is not set, the first look-ahead flag is set in the flag storage area of the work RAM 303 (the first look-ahead flag is turned on), and the number of times corresponding to the number of reserved first special symbols is set in the first look-ahead number counter of the work RAM 303 with reference to the reserved number counter of the first special symbol of the work RAM 303, and this process is terminated.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S7604.

In S7604, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the prohibition condition setting table for the look-ahead performance shown in FIG. 229, and determines whether any of the first prohibition conditions 1 to 4 has not been satisfied.

If it is determined in S7604 that none of the first prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is satisfied, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7603. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the first prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is satisfied, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7606.

In S7605, the sub-CPU 301 performs a winning preview performance determination process to determine the winning preview performance pattern of the flash preview.

In this winning notice performance determination process, after obtaining the fourth random number, the winning notice performance pattern is determined based on the received look-ahead command (see FIG. 194) and the obtained fourth random number, with reference to the winning notice performance pattern determination table for flash notice shown in FIG. 228. Then, when the winning notice performance pattern for performing flash notice is determined, in order to determine whether the common prohibition condition 5 (see FIG. 229) is satisfied, it is determined whether the second look-ahead flag is already set in the flag storage area of the work RAM 303 (whether the flash notice is being executed or not). If the second look-ahead flag is already set, the winning notice performance pattern determined this time is discarded and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second look-ahead flag is not set, the second look-ahead flag is set in the flag storage area of the work RAM 303 (the second look-ahead flag is turned on), and the number of times corresponding to the reserved number of the first special symbol is set in the second look-ahead number counter of the work RAM 303 with reference to the reserved number counter of the first special symbol of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S7606.

In S7606, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the received look-ahead command is a look-ahead command for the second special symbol, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the second start hole 7140 in the first normal game state.

If it is determined in S7606 that the received look-ahead command is a look-ahead command for the second special symbol, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7607. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received look-ahead command is not a look-ahead command for the second special symbol, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current look-ahead performance determination process and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see Figures 234 and 235).

In S7607, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process of erasing the pre-reading information of the first special symbol. In this process, the first pre-reading flag, the second pre-reading flag, the first pre-reading count counter, the second pre-reading count counter, the pending preview performance pattern, and the winning preview performance pattern are erased (=0).

Even if a pre-reading effect such as a hold change notice or a flash notice is being performed in the first normal game state, if a game ball enters the second start hole 7140, the execution of the pre-reading effect is stopped.

[9-8. Production Contents]
Regarding the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300, etc., an example of the effects of the display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 will be described below.

(Normal display image)
First, a normal display image in the first normal gaming state will be described with reference to Fig. 239. Fig. 239 is an example of a normal display image in the first normal gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 239, in the normal display image in the first normal game state, the left pattern 7071L, the middle pattern 7071C, and the right pattern 7071R are configured to be displayed as main patterns of decorative patterns corresponding to the first special pattern at the center of the display area of the display device 7.

In addition, the right corner of the display area of the display device 7 is configured to be able to display a small first sub-pattern 7072 as a sub-pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, and a small second sub-pattern 7073 as a sub-pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern.

In this embodiment, when the special symbol is displayed in the first normal game state, in addition to the main symbols, left symbol 7071L, middle symbol 7071C, and right symbol 7071R, the sub-symbols, first sub-symbol 7072 or second sub-symbol 7073, are displayed in accordance with the type of special symbol. This is the same for the second normal game state and the first to third time-saving game states. However, when the special symbol is displayed in the first time-saving game state, the main symbols, left symbol 7071L, middle symbol 7071C, and right symbol 7071R, are not displayed, and only the first sub-symbol 7072 or second sub-symbol 7073 are displayed in accordance with the type of special symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main symbols of the left symbol 7071L, the middle symbol 7071C, and the right symbol 7071R are composed of numbers "1-9" or character symbols, and when a big win or a small win occurs, the same symbols are all displayed in a stopped state. In contrast, the sub-symbols of the first sub-symbol 7072 and the second sub-symbol 7073 are composed of symbols such as "circle, cross, square, or triangle," and are configured so that different combinations of symbols are displayed in a stopped state even when a big win or a small win occurs.

In the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the first special pattern can be displayed, and a first reserved image 7074a indicating that start information is stored in the first special pattern start memory area (1), a second reserved image 7074b indicating that start information is stored in the first special pattern start memory area (2), a third reserved image 7074c indicating that start information is stored in the first special pattern start memory area (3), and a fourth reserved image 7074d indicating that start information is stored in the first special pattern start memory area (4) can be displayed according to the reserved number of the first special pattern. Also, in response to the reserved image, the reserved image 7075 indicating that the variable display of the special pattern is being performed is displayed. Note that in this embodiment, a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the second special pattern is not displayed, but a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the second special pattern may be displayed.

(Card and door effects)
Next, the card presentation and the door presentation when the second special symbol is displayed in the first normal game state will be described with reference to Fig. 240. Fig. 240 is an example of a display image for explaining the card presentation and the door presentation in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In addition, when explaining the card effects, the symbols in Figure 239 will be omitted because the characters will be small and difficult to see, which may interfere with the explanation of the effect content. In addition, the first sub-pattern 7072 and second sub-pattern 7073, which are displayed very small, will also be omitted. This also applies to the effects explained in Figures 241 to 247.

The left columns (a), (b-1), (c-1), and (d-1) in Figure 240 are examples of card presentations that are executed in the symbol presentation pattern A14 (see Figure 220) when the number of times the special symbol is displayed variably in the first normal game state is 599 and the lottery result for the second special symbol is a jackpot.

The right columns (a), (b-2), (c-2), and (d-2) in Figure 240 are examples of door presentations that are executed in presentation pattern 100 (see Figure 220) without executing a card presentation when the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner is 599 in the first normal game state and the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss.

Figure 240 (a) is an example of a display image before the variable display of the second special symbol begins on the 599th spin in the first normal gaming state.

Figure 240 (b-1) shows an example of a display image when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the card presentation has begun. As shown in Figure 240 (b-1), when symbol presentation pattern A14 (see Figure 220) is determined and the card presentation begins, chance cards with the words "big win," "small win," and "miss" written on them are shuffled face down and a presentation is given in which one of the cards is selected. In addition, the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols that were displayed large in the center of the display area are displayed in a reduced size in the bottom right of the display area so as not to interfere with the card presentation and are easily distinguishable by the player.

Figure 240 (c-1) shows an example of a display image when the second special symbol is displayed in a varying manner and the result of the card presentation is displayed. As shown in Figure 240 (c-1), when one card is selected in the card presentation, the card is slowly flipped over and a chance card with the word "jackpot" written on it is displayed.

Figure 240 (d-1) is an example of a display image in which, when the variable display of the second special symbol has finished, a jackpot has been reached as the result of the lottery for the second special symbol. As shown in Figure 240 (d-1), when a chance card with the word jackpot written on it is displayed, the main symbols of the left, middle and right symbols, which are displayed in reduced size in the bottom right of the display area, are displayed large in the center of the display area, and all the main symbols are displayed as the same symbol, notifying the player that a jackpot has been reached.

Figure 240 (b-2) is an example of a display image when the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed and the door effect is started without executing a card effect. As shown in Figure 240 (b-2), when effect pattern 100 (see Figure 220) is determined and the door effect is started, half-open doors are displayed on the left and right of the display area, and the half-open doors are made to rattle for a predetermined period of time. Here, the end time of the door effect effect pattern is not specified, and the effect of the half-open doors rattling is repeated for a predetermined period of time until an instruction to end the effect is given.

Figure 240 (c-2) is an example of a display image when the variable display of the second special symbol ends and the door effect ends. As shown in Figure 240 (c-2), when the variable display of the second special symbol ends (when the special symbol effect stop command is received), the door is displayed as closing, and all decorative symbols are displayed as stopped.

Figure 240 (d-2) is an example of a display image when the display of the special symbol changes at the 600th spin is started, continuing from Figure 240 (c-2). As shown in Figure 240 (d-2), when the display of the special symbol changes at the 600th spin is started from the first normal game state, a door is opened, and the transition from the first normal game state to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) is notified by the background, etc. Note that, as described above in S7531-72 of Figure 240, when the transition from the first normal game state to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) occurs, the male character's presentation stage 30 is determined as the initial presentation stage.

(Chance to enter the Sengoku Period)
Next, the performance of the Sengoku entry chance in the first time-saving gaming state will be described with reference to Fig. 241. Fig. 241 is an example of a display image for explaining the performance of the Sengoku entry chance in the first time-saving gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 241 shows an example of a boss battle presentation executed with symbol presentation patterns C4 to C7 (see Figure 223) as a presentation of a chance to enter the Sengoku period when the lottery result for the second special symbol in the first time-saving game state is a big win or a small win.

Figure 241 (a) is an example of a display image when the Sengoku Entry Chance in the first time-saving game state starts. As shown in Figure 241 (a), in the Sengoku Entry Chance in the first time-saving game state, as an example, an operation instruction image for causing the player to hit to the right is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area, and the background of "presentation stage 20" showing the stage for the Sengoku Entry Chance is displayed.

Figure 241 (b) is an example of a display image of a boss battle effect that is performed when the game ball enters the second starting hole 7140 in the first time-saving game state and the second special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner.

Here, as described above in FIG. 192 (1) and FIG. 223, the lottery for the second special symbol, which is conducted by the game ball entering the second starting hole 7140 in the first time-saving game state, occurs at the final change time of the first time-saving game state, and the change display time of the second special symbol is determined to be an extremely short change display time (0.2 seconds), and the pattern determination time of the second special symbol is determined to be an extremely long pattern determination time (89 seconds).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 241(b), when a game ball enters the second starting hole 7140 in the first time-saving game state, the main symbol is not displayed, and the variable display of the second sub-symbol 7073 is immediately stopped. At this time, the boss battle presentation that started when the variable display of the second special symbol was started is not terminated in conjunction with the stopped display of the second special symbol, and the boss character continues to be displayed.

Figure 241 (c) is an example of a display image of a boss battle effect that is performed when the second special symbol is being displayed as a confirmed symbol. As shown in Figure 241 (c), when the second special symbol is being displayed as a confirmed symbol, an effect in which a player fights a boss character is performed, and the boss battle effect that started during the variable display of the second special symbol continues to be executed.

Figure 241 (d) is an example of a display image when the result of the boss battle effect that is performed while the second special symbol is being displayed as a confirmed symbol. As shown in Figure 241 (d), when the player wins the battle against the boss character, the player is notified that the lottery result for the second special symbol is a big win or small win, and the game moves to a big win game state or a small win game state.

Then, when the big win game state (including the case where the small win game state is passed through) from the first time-saving game state ends, the selection permission flag turns ON, allowing the player to select the Sengoku Time presentation stage.

(Selection of Production Stage by Player)
Next, the selection of the performance stage in Sengoku Time by the player will be described with reference to Fig. 242. Fig. 242 is an example of a display image for explaining the selection of the performance stage by the player in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As described above in FIG. 232 (1), if the game state at the time of winning is the first normal game state and the winning symbol corresponds to the symbol designation command "zA2-4", if the game state at the time of winning is the second normal game state, or if the game state at the time of winning is the first time-limited game state, in either case, a transition to the second time-limited game state will occur as a so-called first win or a pull-back win, allowing the player to select the Sengoku Time presentation stage during the ending interval at the end of the jackpot game state.

Figure 242 (a) is an example of a display image when selecting the Sengoku Time presentation stage in the end interval at the end of the jackpot game state. As shown in Figure 241 (a), in the end interval at the end of the jackpot game state, an operation instruction image for having the player hit to the right, a presentation button operation image indicating the operation of the presentation button 54, a remaining time image indicating the remaining time of the effective operation time of the presentation button 54, an operation explanation image explaining the operation method of stage selection using the presentation button 54, and a stage selection image indicating the selection between the male character stage (presentation stage 30) and the female character stage (presentation stage 30) are displayed.

Figure 242 (b) is an example of a display image when the Sengoku Time presentation stage is determined in the end interval at the end of the jackpot gaming state. As shown in Figure 241 (b), when the effective operation time for the presentation button 54 has elapsed (when the remaining time image becomes zero) in the end interval at the end of the jackpot gaming state, the presentation stage that was selected will be determined as the Sengoku Time presentation stage.

(Sengoku Time Production)
Next, the Sengoku Time presentation will be described with reference to Fig. 243 and Fig. 244. Fig. 243 is an example of a display image for explaining the Sengoku Time presentation when a male character stage is selected in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Fig. 244 is an example of a display image for explaining the Sengoku Time presentation when a female character stage is selected in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 243(a) is an example of a display image when the Sengoku Time presentation in the second time-saving play state is started. As shown in Figure 243(a), in the Sengoku Time presentation in the second time-saving play state, as an example, a remaining number image showing the remaining number of variable display times (second time-saving number) of Sengoku Time is displayed in the upper left of the display area, an operation instruction image for the player to hit to the right, and the background of the Sengoku Time presentation stage are displayed. Note that Figure 243(a) displays a star-patterned background of "presentation stage 41" showing Premier Stage 1 (number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1) for male characters. Also, "presentation stage 30" showing the normal stage for male characters has a plain background.

Figure 243 (b) is an example of a display image of the Sengoku Time effect (for example, an effect executed by the pattern effect patterns P10, P13, and P16 (see Figures 224 and 225)) that is performed when the game ball enters the second starting hole 7140 in the second time-saving game state and the second special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner. As shown in Figure 243 (b), a male character and a star pattern background are displayed corresponding to the "effect stage 41", and the main patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns that were displayed large in the center of the display area are displayed in a reduced size in the lower right of the display area so that the player can distinguish them. At this time, as a decorative pattern effect, the main patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns all start to display a high-speed variable display separately, and the left and right patterns do not stop temporarily in order, but all the patterns stop and display approximately simultaneously, in a normal variable mode effect.

Figure 243 (c) is an example of a display image of a Sengoku Time presentation (for example, a presentation executed by the pattern presentation patterns P10, P13, and P16) in which, when the variable display of the second special pattern ends, it is announced that the result of the special pattern drawing is a big win or a small win. As shown in Figure 243 (c), the main patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the display area are displayed large in the center of the display area, and all the main patterns are displayed as the same pattern, announcing that the drawing of the second special pattern has resulted in a big win or a small win. Note that, if the drawing of the second special pattern is a miss, the main patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns are displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the display area and are displayed as different patterns.

Figure 243 (d) is an example of a display image of a Sengoku Time presentation (e.g., a presentation executed by small win start presentation pattern 10 (see Figure 230)) that is performed when a male character presentation stage is selected and a small win game state is started. As shown in Figure 243 (d), in the small win game state, a presentation is performed in which a male character instructs the player to pass the game ball through the V winning hole 7156 against background A1 (e.g., a blue background). At this time, the number of reserved consecutive stocks can be suggested in advance by background A1 (e.g., a blue background) or background A2 (e.g., a red background).

Figure 243 (e) is an example of a display image of a Sengoku Time effect (for example, an effect executed by V-passing effect pattern 11 (see Figure 231)) that is performed when a male character's effect stage is selected and the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 in a small win game state. As shown in Figure 243 (e), when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 in a small win game state, a V is displayed in the first display mode, and if the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 1, "STOCK1" can be displayed, indicating that the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 1. In this way, when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 in a male character's effect stage, the number of reserved consecutive stocks can be notified.

Figure 244(a) is an example of a display image when the Sengoku Time presentation in the second time-saving play state is started. As shown in Figure 244(a), in the Sengoku Time presentation in the second time-saving play state, as an example, a remaining number image showing the remaining number of variable display times (second time-saving number) of Sengoku Time is displayed in the upper left of the display area, an operation instruction image for causing the player to hit to the right, and the background of the Sengoku Time presentation stage are displayed. Note that in Figure 244(a), a heart-patterned background is displayed for "presentation stage 40," which indicates the premier stage for female characters (number of reserved consecutive stocks ≧1). Also, "presentation stage 31," which indicates the normal stage for female characters, has a plain background.

Figure 244 (b) is an example of a display image of the Sengoku Time effect (for example, an effect executed by the pattern effect patterns P12, P15, and P18 (see Figures 224 and 225)) that is performed when the game ball enters the second starting hole 7140 in the second time-saving game state and the second special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner. As shown in Figure 244 (b), a female character and a heart-patterned background are displayed corresponding to the "effect stage 40", and the main patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns that were displayed large in the center of the display area are displayed in a reduced size in the lower right of the display area so that the player can distinguish them. At this time, as a decorative pattern effect, the main patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns all start to display a high-speed variable display separately, and the left and right patterns do not stop temporarily in order, but all the patterns stop and display approximately simultaneously, in a normal variable mode effect.

Figure 244 (c) is an example of a display image of a Sengoku Time presentation (for example, a presentation executed by the pattern presentation patterns P12, P15, and P18) in which, when the variable display of the second special pattern ends, it is announced that the special pattern lottery result is a big win or a small win. As shown in Figure 244 (c), the main patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the display area are displayed large in the center of the display area, and all the main patterns are displayed as the same pattern, announcing that the lottery for the second special pattern has resulted in a big win or a small win. Note that, if the lottery for the second special pattern is a miss, the main patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns are displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the display area and are displayed as different patterns.

Figure 244 (d) is an example of a display image of a Sengoku Time presentation (e.g., a presentation executed by small win start presentation pattern 20 (see Figure 230)) that is performed when a female character presentation stage is selected and a small win game state is started. As shown in Figure 244 (d), in the small win game state, a presentation is performed in which a female character instructs the player to pass the game ball through the V winning hole 7156 in background A1 (e.g., a blue background). At this time, the number of reserved consecutive stocks can be suggested in advance by background A1 (e.g., a blue background) or background A2 (e.g., a red background).

Figure 244 (e-1) is an example of a display image of a Sengoku Time effect (for example, an effect executed by V-passing effect pattern 20 (see Figure 231)) that is performed when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 in a small win game state when a female character's performance stage is selected and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 0. As shown in Figure 244 (e-1), when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 when the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 0, a V can be displayed in the second display mode.

Figure 244 (e-2) is an example of a display image of a Sengoku Time effect (for example, an effect executed by V-passing effect pattern 21) that is performed when a game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 in a small win game state when a female character's performance stage is selected and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is ≧1. As shown in Figure 244 (e-2), when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 when the number of reserved consecutive stocks is ≧1, a V can be displayed in a special display mode.

In this way, when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 in the female character's performance stage, it is possible to notify the player that the number of reserved consecutive stocks is ≥ 1 (whether or not there is a number of reserved consecutive stocks).

(Small hit game state: punctured)
Next, referring to Fig. 245, the effect that is performed when the game ball does not pass through the V winning hole 7156 in the small winning game state (so-called blowout) will be described. Fig. 245 is an example of a display image that explains the effect that is performed when the game ball does not pass through the V winning hole in the small winning game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

Figure 245 (a) is an example of a display image of the Sengoku Time effect that is performed when a male character's effect stage is selected and a small win game state is started. As shown in Figure 245 (a), in a small win game state, an effect is performed in which the male character instructs the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 7156, but it is assumed that the game ball does not pass through the V winning hole 7156 because the player does not perform a right hit, etc.

Figure 245 (b) is an example of a display image of an effect (for example, an effect executed by effect patterns 101 and 102 (see Figure 230)) that is performed when the small win game state ends without the game ball passing through the V winning port 7156. As shown in Figure 245 (b), during the interval time at the end of the small win game state, a half-open door is displayed on the left and right of the display area, and after the half-open door rattles for a predetermined period of time, a door effect is performed in which the door closes.

Figure 245 (c-1) is an example of a display image of an effect (for example, an effect executed by effect pattern 102) that is performed when there are reserved second special symbols at the end of the small win game state after the door effect is performed. As shown in Figure 245 (c-1), when there are reserved second special symbols at the end of the small win game state, the door is opened and a continuous battle entry effect is performed to notify the player of a transition to a dedicated stage (effect stage 10) for continuous battles in the second normal game state.

Figure 245 (c-2) is an example of a display image of an effect (for example, an effect executed by effect pattern 101) that is performed when there are no reserved second special symbols at the end of the small win game state after the door effect has been performed. As shown in Figure 245 (c-2), when there are no reserved second special symbols at the end of the small win game state, the door is opened and a stage change effect is performed to notify the player of a transition to the seaside stage (effect stage 2) of the limited effect state in the first normal game state.

(End of Sengoku Time)
Next, the effects performed when the Sengoku Time ends will be described with reference to Fig. 246. Fig. 246 is an example of a display image for explaining the effects performed when the Sengoku Time ends in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 246 (a) is an example of a display image of the Sengoku Time effect that is performed when the variable display of special symbols begins at the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state. As shown in Figure 246 (a), a male character and a plain background are displayed corresponding to "performance stage 30," and the main symbols of the left, center, and right symbols are displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the display area.

Figure 246 (b) is an example of a display image of the Sengoku Time result presentation (for example, presentation executed by the pattern presentation patterns F10-F13, F20-F23 (see Figure 225)) which is performed when the special pattern lottery is determined to be a miss and the special pattern variation display is being performed. As shown in Figure 246 (b), the game results of Sengoku Time include information on the number of jackpots and points acquired which indicate the number of game balls paid out to the player, and when the variation display of the special pattern ends, the main patterns of the left, center, and right patterns, which are displayed in reduced size at the bottom right of the display area, are displayed as stopped patterns.

Figure 246 (c-1) is an example of a display image of the consecutive battle entry effect that is performed during the determined special pattern display when there are reserved numbers of the second special pattern when the variable display of the special pattern ends. As shown in Figure 246 (c-1), during the determined special pattern display, a consecutive battle entry effect is performed to notify the player of a transition to a dedicated stage (effect stage 10) for consecutive battles in the second normal game state.

Figure 246 (c-2) is an example of a display image of a door effect that is performed during the determined special pattern display when there are no reserved second special patterns when the variable display of the special pattern ends. As shown in Figure 246 (c-2), during the determined special pattern display, half-open doors are displayed on the left and right of the display area, and after the half-open doors rattle for a predetermined period of time, the doors close.

(Continuous battle scenes)
Next, the presentation of the continuous battle in the second normal gaming state will be described with reference to Fig. 247. Fig. 247 is an example of a display image for explaining the presentation of the continuous battle in the second normal gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 247 shows an example in which, when the second variation is a winning combination as a result of the lottery for the second special symbol in the second normal game state, the first variation is a continuous battle presentation using symbol presentation pattern R2 (see Figure 222), and the second variation is a continuous battle presentation using symbol presentation patterns R10 and R11 (see Figure 222).

Figure 247 (a) is an example of a display image when the presentation of the continuous battle in the second normal game state starts. As shown in Figure 247 (a), in the presentation of the continuous battle in the second normal game state, as an example, an operation instruction image for making the player hit to the right is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area, a display image of rounds 1 to 3 corresponding to the number of times the second special symbol is displayed in the left side of the display area, and the background of the dedicated stage (presentation stage 10) for the continuous battle, which imitates an arena, is displayed in the center of the display area. In addition, the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols are displayed in a reduced size in the lower right corner of the display area to an extent that they can be identified by the player so as not to interfere with the presentation of the continuous battle.

Figure 247 (b) is an example of a display image of a continuous battle effect that is performed when the display of the second special symbol for the first change begins in the second normal game state. As shown in Figure 247 (b), the continuous battle effect is an effect in which the main character and a rival character appear and face off against each other (continuous battle effect using symbol effect pattern R2).

Figure 247 (c) is an example of a display image of the continuous battle effect that is performed when the display of the second special symbol for the first change ends in the second normal game state. As shown in Figure 247 (c), the result of the continuous battle effect is an effect in which the battle is not concluded but the main character has the advantage and the game ends in a draw.

Figure 247 (d) is an example of a display image of a continuous battle effect that is performed when the variable display of the second special symbol for the second change starts in the second normal game state. As shown in Figure 247 (d), the continuous battle effect is an effect in which the main character and the rival character continue to face off against each other (continuous battle effect using symbol effect patterns R10 and R11).

Figure 247 (e) is an example of a display image of the continuous battle presentation that is performed when the display of the second special symbol for the second change in the second normal game state ends. As shown in Figure 247 (e), the result of the continuous battle presentation is a presentation in which the battle is concluded and the main character is victorious. In addition, the main symbols of the left, middle and right symbols, which are displayed in reduced size in the bottom right of the display area, are all displayed as the same symbol in a provisional stop state. After that, the main symbols, all of which are the same symbol in a provisional stop state, are displayed large in the center of the display area, and the player is notified that a big win or a small win has occurred.

In this way, the seventh pachinko gaming machine allows transitions to the first normal gaming state, the second normal gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state, and the third time-saving gaming state, and provides appropriate presentations according to each gaming state, thereby further enhancing the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, in the look-ahead performance (hold change notice, flash notice) in the first normal game state, as explained in FIG. 229 etc., whether or not to execute the look-ahead performance is determined depending on the game situation, etc., so that the look-ahead performance can be executed at an appropriate timing, further increasing the excitement of the game.

In addition, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, even when an irregular game mode is played, appropriate presentation patterns are executed in accordance with the transition of the game state due to the irregular game mode, thereby maintaining and improving gameplay.

In addition, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, as explained in FIG. 199 etc., the variable display time of the second special symbol is set to the extremely short first variable display time to quickly end the first time-saving gaming state, the specified number for normal power on the normal electric device 7146 is set to one, and the variable display time of the normal symbol in the first time-saving gaming state is set to be equal to or longer than the first variable display time of the second special symbol, so that the first time-saving gaming state can be controlled so that the reserved number of the second special symbol is not stored. Also, it is possible to control the second time-saving gaming state so that the reserved number of the second special symbol is stored.

In addition, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, as explained in FIG. 241 etc., in the presentation of the Sengoku Entry Chance in the first time-saving gaming state, the presentation is executed over the time during which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the time during which the symbol is determined, thereby improving the freedom of presentation and making the game more interesting.

In addition, in the seventh pachinko game machine, as explained in Figures 243 and 244, etc., in "Sengoku Time," which is the period from the second or third time-saving game state to the small win game state, presentations based on the same presentation stage are performed, so that a series of presentations can be executed from the second or third time-saving game state to the small win game state, further enhancing the excitement of the game. Furthermore, in the Sengoku Time presentation, the number of reserved consecutive stocks can be suggested by the small win start presentation pattern and the V passing presentation pattern, further enhancing the excitement of the game.

(others)
The seventh pachinko gaming machine described above can apply the techniques of each embodiment, including modified examples. The above-mentioned embodiment does not limit the contents of the present invention, and modifications can be made to the extent that they do not deviate from the scope of the claims.

In addition, the effects described in the seventh pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most favorable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention.

Furthermore, the above [4. Expansion Example] can also be applied to the seventh pachinko gaming machine, as long as there is no inconsistency in its gameplay or control.

[10. The 8th Pachinko Game Machine]
Next, the eighth pachinko gaming machine will be described. The eighth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a one-type two-type mixed machine, like the third pachinko gaming machine. The eighth pachinko gaming machine is different from the third pachinko gaming machine in terms of gameplay and presentation content, and accordingly, the configuration of various components arranged in the game area is also partially different.

The eighth pachinko gaming machine, like the third pachinko gaming machine, is a priority variable machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in parallel, and the start condition of the second special symbol is established in priority over the start condition of the first special symbol. However, this is not limited to this, and the machine may be a sequential variable machine as described above.

The eighth pachinko game machine also counts the number of consecutive jackpots that transition to a jackpot game state under specific conditions (time-saving game state), and is equipped with a "number limiter function" that partially restricts the game state to which the game transitions after the jackpot game state ends when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limiter number (e.g., 100 times). Furthermore, in addition to the "number limiter function," the eighth pachinko game machine also counts the cumulative number of jackpot balls paid out in the jackpot game state per day, and is equipped with a "ball payout limiter function" that partially restricts the game state to which the game transitions after the jackpot game state ends when the cumulative number of jackpot balls paid out reaches a predetermined limit number of balls (e.g., 100,000 balls).

Hereinafter, when explaining the eighth pachinko gaming machine, the same components as those in the first pachinko gaming machine will be given the same symbols and step numbers, and detailed explanations of their configuration and processing will be omitted.

In this embodiment, "entering a game ball" into an entry port (e.g., a starting port or a big prize entry port) that can give the player a certain benefit (payout of game balls, transition of game state) is also referred to as "winning", as appropriate. Also, in this embodiment, the "variable display" of the pattern is a concept that includes both a "variable display" in which the pattern changes and is displayed, and a "stationary display" in which the pattern stops and is displayed, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stationary display is referred to as one "variable display".

[10-1. Game board unit]
A game board unit 8010 provided in the eighth pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 248. This game board unit 8010 is also disposed in front of the base door 3 (see Fig. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see Fig. 2) like the first pachinko game machine.

Figure 248 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 8010 equipped in the eighth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 8010 has a game panel 8100 as a game board, various components are arranged on the game panel 8100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game panel 8100 in which the released game balls can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 248, the game board unit 8010 of the eighth pachinko gaming machine differs from the first pachinko gaming machine mainly in the configuration and arrangement of the passing gate 8126, the second starting port 8140, the normal electric role unit 8145, the first special electric role unit 8130, and the second special electric role unit 8150. The configuration and arrangement of each of these are explained below.

The first starting hole 8120 located in the play area 105 of the eighth pachinko game machine is functionally the same as the first starting hole 120 located in the play area 105 of the first pachinko game machine, but because of its relationship with the second starting hole 8140, it will be described again using a different reference number than in the first pachinko game machine.

(Passing gate)
The passing gate 8126 is disposed above a normal electric accessory unit 8145 described later in the right-side area 107, and allows game balls hit from the right side to pass through (game balls hit from the left side have difficulty or cannot pass through). The passing gate 8126 is provided with a passing gate switch 8127 (see FIG. 249 described later) that detects the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 8126. In this embodiment, the passing gate 8126 is disposed above the normal electric accessory unit 8145 in the right-side area 107, but the passing gate 8126 may be disposed below the normal electric accessory unit 8145 in the right-side area 107.

When a game ball passes through the passing gate 8126, it is used for the normal symbol lottery (a process for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol) and for the variable display of normal symbols. In this embodiment, even if a game ball passes through the passing gate 8126, no prize ball is paid out, but it may be a winning gate from which a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball) is paid out.

The passing gate 8126 may also function as a trigger for activating a consecutive operation device for special features. Assuming that the condition device is in operation (the special symbol that will result in a jackpot is displayed frozen), the passing gate 8126 may activate the consecutive operation device for special features, causing a transition to a jackpot gaming state.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 8120 is disposed in the game area 105 below the display area of the display device 7, and is configured so that game balls hit to the left can enter the hole, and game nails or the like make it difficult or impossible for game balls hit to the right to enter the hole. The first starting hole 8120 is provided with a first starting hole switch 8121 (see FIG. 249 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 8120.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 8120, a first special symbol lottery (a process for determining whether the first special symbol is a winning symbol), a variable display of the first special symbol, and a prize ball for the first starting hole (e.g., three game balls) are paid out. The process after the game ball enters the first starting hole 8120 will be described in detail later.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 8140 is located in the right side area 107 below (downstream) the passing gate 8126 described later, and is provided in a normal electric role unit 8145 described later, so that game balls hit to the right can enter the hole (game balls hit to the left are difficult or impossible to enter the hole). The second starting hole 8140 is provided with a second starting hole switch 8141 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 8140.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second starting port 8140 is located below (downstream) the passing gate 8126, so that a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 8126 can enter the second starting port 8140 when the normal electric device 8146 described below is in operation.

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140, a second special symbol lottery (a process for determining whether the second special symbol is a winning symbol), a variable display of the second special symbol, and a prize ball for the second starting hole (for example, one game ball) are paid out. The process after the game ball enters the second starting hole 8140 will be described in detail later.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric role unit 8145 is located in the right area 107 below (downstream of) the passing gate 8126, and is located so that the game ball hit to the right can pass through it. The normal electric role unit 8145 is a unit body that integrates the second start hole 8140, the second start hole switch 8141 that detects the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 8140, and the normal electric role 8146.

The normal electric device 8146 is equipped with a protruding plate-type normal power shutter 8147 that can move forward and backward, and a normal power solenoid 8148 (see FIG. 249 described below) that operates this normal power shutter 8147. The normal electric device 8146, i.e., the normal power shutter 8147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 8140, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 8140.

Specifically, the normal power shutter 8147 is composed of a substantially triangular ball entry prevention section disposed near the entrance of the second starting port 8140 and a flat ball entry guidance section inclined toward the second starting port 8140. When the normal power shutter 8147 is in the closed state, the substantially triangular ball entry prevention section is located in an opposing area facing the entrance of the second starting port 8140 and prevents balls from entering the second starting port 8140, and the flat ball entry guidance section is embedded in the surface of the game panel 8100 and allows game balls to flow downward without accepting game balls flowing down into the right side area 107. On the other hand, when the normal power shutter 8147 is in the open state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention section is located in an avoidance area (for example, the gap from the top of the game nail to the protective glass 43) that does not face the entrance of the second starting hole 8140, and does not hinder the ball from entering the second starting hole 8140, and the flat ball entry guide section protrudes from the surface of the game panel 8100 to receive the game ball flowing down to the right area 107 and guide the received game ball to the second starting hole 8140. Note that instead of the above-mentioned normal power shutter 8147 that can move forward and backward, a movable member called a so-called electric chute may be used.

In addition, when the second starting hole 8140 is open and a specified number of game balls (e.g., one) for normal power enter the hole, the normal electric device 8146 closes the second starting hole 8140 even if the opening time has not elapsed.

(First special electric feature unit)
The first special electric role unit 8130 is disposed below (downstream) the pass gate 8126, the normal electric role unit 8145, and the second special electric role unit 8150 described later in the right area 107. The first special electric role unit 8130 may be disposed upstream of at least one of the pass gate 8126, the normal electric role unit 8145, and the second special electric role unit 8150 described later in the right area 107, or may be disposed in the left area 106.

The first special electric device unit 8130 is a unitary body that integrates a first large prize opening 8131, a first large prize opening count switch 8132 (see FIG. 249 described below) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 8131, a first special electric shutter 8134 that can move back and forth, and a first special electric solenoid 8135 (see FIG. 249 described below) that operates the first special electric shutter 8134.

The first large prize opening 8131 is an opening that opens when a jackpot is hit, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the first large prize opening 8131 in one round of a jackpot is set (for example, 10 balls). Each time one game ball enters the first large prize opening 8131, prize balls for the first large prize opening (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The first large prize opening 8131 transitions from a closed state to an open state in the first route when a special stop display mode is derived indicating that the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a "big hit" and in the second route when a specific stop display mode is derived indicating that the result of the special pattern determination is a "small hit" and the second large prize opening 8151 opens, and a game ball that enters the opened second large prize opening 8151 enters the V prize opening 8156 within the second large prize opening 8151.

The first special electric shutter 8134 is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 8131, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 8131, by the operation of the first special electric solenoid 8135 (see Figure 249 described below).

Specifically, the first special electric shutter 8134 is configured as an opening and closing door with a pivot support at the bottom. When the first special electric shutter 8134 is in the open state, the opening and closing door is tilted forward to open the first large winning opening 8131, which receives the game balls flowing down to the right area 107 and guides the received game balls to the first large winning opening 8131. On the other hand, when the first special electric shutter 8134 is in the closed state, the opening and closing door is inverted to close the first large winning opening 8131, making it impossible or difficult for the game balls to enter the first large winning opening 8131. Note that instead of the above-mentioned first special electric shutter 8134, a movable member that is pivotally supported at the bottom and can be tilted to either the left or right side may be used.

(Second special electric feature unit)
The second special electric role unit 8150 is provided below (downstream) the passing gate 8126 and the normal electric role unit 8145 in the right area 107. The second special electric role unit 8150 may be provided upstream of at least one of the passing gate 8126 or the normal electric role unit 8145, or may be provided in the left area 106.

The second special electric device unit 8150 includes a second large prize opening 8151, a second large prize opening count switch 8152 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 8151, a second special electric shutter 8154 that can open and close the second large prize opening 8151, a second special electric solenoid 8155 (see FIG. 249 described below) that operates the second special electric shutter 8154 to open and close the second large prize opening 8151, and a V-entrance through which a game ball that has entered the second large prize opening 8151 can pass. It is a unitary body that integrates a prize opening 8156, a V winning opening switch 8157 that detects when a game ball has passed through the V winning opening 8156, a losing opening 8158 through which game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 8151 but have not entered the V winning opening 8156 can pass, a V shutter 8159 that opens and closes the V winning opening 8156, and a V shutter solenoid 8160 (see Figure 249 described below) that operates the V shutter 8159 to open and close the V winning opening 8156.

The second large prize opening 8151 is an opening that opens when a small win occurs, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the second large prize opening 8151 in one small win (for example, 10 balls) is specified. Each time one game ball enters this second large prize opening 8151, prize balls for the second large prize opening (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The second special electric shutter 8154 is made of a protruding plate-shaped member that can move forward and backward, and is configured so that by operating the second special electric solenoid 8155 (see Figure 249 described below), the second special electric shutter 8154 can be advanced forward to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 8151, and the second special electric shutter 8154 can be retracted backward to an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 8151.

The V winning hole 8156 is a winning hole that can be opened and closed by the V shutter 8159, and is also a winning hole through which the game ball passes and triggers control to a jackpot game state via the second route described above.

When the game is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, the opening of the second large prize opening 8151 when the game ball passes through the V prize opening 8156 is regarded as the first round, and after the game ball passes through the V prize opening 8156 (from the second round onwards), a round game is executed in which the first large prize opening 8131 transitions from a closed state to an open state. Note that when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, a round game in which the second large prize opening 8151 transitions from a closed state to an open state may be executed for a predetermined number of rounds even after the game ball passes through the V prize opening 8156 (from the second round onwards).

Also, for example, a V entry port may be provided inside the first large entry port 8131, so that there is one V entry port and one attacker that is opened in the big win game state. In this case, when a stop display mode indicating a "small win" is derived, the first large entry port 8131 is set to an open state, and when a game ball enters the V entry port provided inside the first large entry port 8131, the game is controlled to a big win game state (a big win game state via the second route).

The losing port 8158 is configured to allow game balls that have entered the second large winning port 8151 but have not passed through the V winning port 8156 to enter (pass through). Game balls that pass through the losing port 8158 are ejected outside the machine. Note that when a small win occurs, if all game balls that have entered the open second large winning port 8151 pass through the losing port 8158 and no game balls pass through the V winning port 8156, the game will not transition from the small win game state to the big win game state.

The V-shutter 8159 is configured to be able to transition between a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for game balls to pass through the V-entry opening 8156, and an open state in which it is possible (or easy) for game balls to pass through the V-entry opening 8156, by the operation of the V-shutter solenoid 8160 (see Figure 249 described below).

In particular, in the eighth pachinko game machine, even if it is the same small win (small win game state), the operating mode of the V shutter 8159 (operation timing of the V shutter solenoid 8160) creates different types of small wins: a "fall small win" in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through to the V winning hole 8156, and a "V small win" in which it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through to the V winning hole 8156.

[10-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the eighth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 249. Fig. 249 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 249, the eighth pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, compared to the first pachinko game machine, the eighth pachinko game machine differs in some respects in the configuration of the device connected to the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, and the payout/launch control circuit 400. The configuration and layout of each are explained below.

[10-2-1. Main control circuit]
Compared to the first pachinko game machine, the main control circuit 200 has slightly different configurations in the normal power solenoid 8148, the first special power solenoid 8135, the second special power solenoid 8155, the V shutter solenoid 8160, the first start port switch 8121, the second start port switch 8141, the passing gate switch 8127, the first large prize port count switch 8132, the second large prize port count switch 8152, and the V prize port switch 8157 which are connected to the main control circuit 200.

(Solenoid for general purpose power supply)
The normal power solenoid 8148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the normal power shutter 8147. When the normal power solenoid 8148 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it advances the normal power shutter 8147 forward to open the second starting port 8140, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the normal power shutter 8147 backward to close the second starting port 8140.

(First special solenoid)
The first special electric solenoid 8135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the first special electric shutter 8134, which is an opening and closing door. When the main CPU 201 energizes the first special electric solenoid 8135 (ON), the first special electric shutter 8134 is tilted forward to open the first large winning opening 8131, and when the main CPU 201 does not energize the first special electric solenoid 8135 (OFF), the first special electric shutter 8134 is inverted backward to close the first large winning opening 8131.

(Second special solenoid)
The second special electric solenoid 8155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the second special electric shutter 8154. When the main CPU 201 energizes the second special electric solenoid 8155 (ON), the second special electric solenoid 8155 moves the second special electric shutter 8154 backward to open the second large winning opening 8151, and when the main CPU 201 does not energize the second special electric solenoid 8155 (OFF), the second special electric shutter 8154 advances forward to close the second large winning opening 8151.

(Solenoid for V-shutter)
The V shutter solenoid 8160 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V shutter 8159. When the V shutter solenoid 8160 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V shutter 8159 backward to open the V winning opening 8156, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V shutter 8159 forward to close the V winning opening 8156.

(First start switch)
The first starting hole switch 8121 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 8120.

When the first start hole switch 8121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 8120, the main CPU 201 determines that the first start condition is met and acquires start information for the first special symbol (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for a symbol, random number value for determining a reach, random number value for selecting a performance, etc.). The acquired start information for the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (first special symbol start memory area (1) to first special symbol start memory area (4) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of first special symbols (e.g., four)," and when the judgment start condition for the first special symbol (e.g., the special electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, etc.) is met, it is used for the hit judgment process for the first special symbol and the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, when the first start hole switch 8121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 8120, the main CPU 201 instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of the prize balls for the first start hole (e.g., three game balls).

(Second start switch)
The second starting hole switch 8141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 8140.

When the second start hole switch 8141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 8140, the main CPU 201 determines that the second start condition is met and acquires start information for the second special symbol (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for symbol, random number value for reach determination, random number value for effect selection, etc.). The acquired start information for the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start memory area (second special symbol start memory area (1) to second special symbol start memory area (4) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of second special symbols (e.g., four)," and when the judgment start condition for the second special symbol (e.g., the special electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, etc.) is met, it is used for the hit judgment process for the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, when the second start hole switch 8141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 8140, the main CPU 201 instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of a prize ball (e.g., one game ball) for the second start hole.

In addition, in the embodiment, the winning judgment process for the first special pattern based on the start information of the first special pattern is also called the "lottery for the first special pattern," and the winning judgment process for the second special pattern based on the start information of the second special pattern is also called the "lottery for the second special pattern," and the lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern are collectively called the "lottery for the special patterns."

(Passing gate switch)
The passing gate switch 8127 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 8126.

When the pass gate switch 8127 detects the passage of a game ball through the pass gate 8126, the main CPU 201 acquires the start information of the normal symbol (random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a hit, random number value of the normal symbol, etc.). The acquired start information of the normal symbol is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (normal symbol start memory area (1) to normal symbol start memory area (4) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of normal symbols (for example, 4)". When the normal symbol judgment start condition (for example, the normal electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the normal symbol is not being performed, etc.) is satisfied, it is used for the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit judgment process) and the variable display of the normal symbol. Note that even if the pass gate switch 8127 detects the passage of a game ball through the pass gate 8126, the prize ball is not paid out.

(First prize slot count switch)
The first large prize opening count switch 8132 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of game balls into the first large prize opening 8131. When the first large prize opening count switch 8132 detects the entry of game balls into the first large prize opening 8131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that enter the first large prize opening 8131 per round, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of prize balls for the first large prize opening (for example, 15 game balls).

(Second major prize slot count switch)
The second large prize opening count switch 8152 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 8151. When the second large prize opening count switch 8152 detects the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 8151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 8151 and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of prize balls for the second large prize opening (e.g., 15 game balls).

(V prize entry switch)
The V winning hole switch 8157 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 8156. When the V winning hole switch 8157 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 8156, the main CPU 201 performs control to transition to a big win game state. Note that even if the V winning hole switch 8157 detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 8156, no prize balls are paid out.

[10-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300, like the first pachinko game machine, is equipped with a sub-CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a gimmick control circuit 307 and a command input port 308, but differs in that it further comprises a button control circuit 310 and a performance button 54.

(Button Control Circuit 310)
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving the effect button 54. In other words, the button control circuit 310 is a circuit for changing the operation mode of the effect button 54 and vibrating the effect button 54. The button control circuit 310 drives the effect button 54 in response to a drive command from the sub-CPU 301.

The button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal related to a player's operation detected by the effect button 54. When the button control circuit 310 inputs an operation signal from the effect button 54, it outputs predetermined operation information to the sub-CPU 301.

[10-2-3. Payout/launch control circuit]
The payout/launch control circuit 400, like the first pachinko game machine, controls the payout/launch of game balls, and this payout/launch control circuit 400 is connected to a payout device 82 capable of paying out game balls, a launch device 6 capable of launching game balls, a card unit 180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

Furthermore, in the payout/launch control circuit 400 of the eighth pachinko game machine, when the cumulative number of game balls paid out during a jackpot game state per day reaches a predetermined number of balls to be stopped (for example, 100,000 balls), the "ball payout limiter function" is activated, and control related to the game-disabled state is performed, such as stopping the firing of game balls by the launch device 6 (stopping the supply of power to the launch solenoid) and prohibiting the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82. The control related to the game-disabled state will be described in more detail later.

[10-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the eighth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 250 to 261. The eighth pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In the eighth pachinko gaming machine, although the probability variable control is not executed, a time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed and a normal gaming state in which the time-saving control is not executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 is capable of progressing the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. Note that, although the probability variable control is not executed in this eighth pachinko gaming machine, this is not essential, and it is also possible to execute the probability variable control by, for example, setting the probability variable flag on depending on the type of jackpot, etc.

In addition, in the eighth pachinko game machine, as described later, as time-saving game states distinguished from the viewpoint of time-saving end conditions, there are a "special time-saving game state" in which the next jackpot is practically guaranteed, and a "general time-saving game state" in which the next jackpot is not guaranteed. In addition, as time-saving game states distinguished from the viewpoint of time-saving transition conditions (time-saving occurrence conditions), there are an "A time-saving game state" which is transitioned to after the end of the jackpot game state triggered by a jackpot, and a "B time-saving game state" which is transitioned to after the variable display count of the special pattern reaches the ceiling value without being triggered by a jackpot. As described later in detail, in this embodiment, from the viewpoint of time-saving end conditions and time-saving transition conditions, the "general time-saving game state" is composed of the "A time-saving game state" consisting of the first time-saving end condition, and the "special time-saving game state" is composed of the "B time-saving game state" consisting of the second time-saving end condition, or the "A time-saving game state" consisting of the second time-saving end condition. In addition, in this embodiment, when there is no distinction between the special time-saving game state, the general time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, and the B time-saving game state, they are simply referred to as the "time-saving game state."

In addition, in this embodiment, in a typical normal game state (the first normal game state described below), left-handed hitting is generally considered to be the normal game mode, and in a time-saving game state, right-handed hitting is the normal game mode. The sub-CPU 301 displays the hitting method that is considered to be the normal game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 7.

[10-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
250 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol winning determination table shown in FIG. 250 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table for determining whether a hit is a "big hit", "small hit" or "miss".

In the special symbol hit determination table, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for the hit determination that is determined to be a "big hit" or a "miss" and the corresponding hit/miss determination value data (big hit determination value data, miss determination value data) is specified as the data used in the hit determination process of the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first starting hole 8120. In addition, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for the hit determination that is determined to be a "big hit", "small hit" or "miss" and the corresponding hit/miss determination value data (big hit determination value data, small hit determination value data, miss determination value data) is specified as the data used in the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the ball entering the second starting hole 8140. In addition, the total random number value of the random number value for the hit determination is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In other words, the random number value for the hit determination is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

As shown in FIG. 250, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 8120, the main CPU 201 judges the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol to be a "big hit" with a selection rate of about 1/319.7 based on the hit determination process of the first special symbol using the random number value for the hit determination of the first special symbol, and judges the result as a "miss" otherwise. Also, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140, the main CPU 201 judges the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol to be a "big hit" with a selection rate of about 1/319.7 based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol using the random number value for the hit determination of the second special symbol, and judges the result as a "miss" otherwise.

The range (width) of the random numbers that determine whether a "big hit" or "small hit" occurs, i.e., the selection rate, is not limited to the above values and can be freely modified as needed.

In addition, the system may be configured to determine a "small win" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, but if a "small win" is determined, it is preferable to determine a "small win" with a relatively low selection rate so that the determination made in the hit determination process for the second special symbol is more favorable than the determination made in the hit determination process for the first special symbol.

In addition, when the first special symbol hit determination process or the second special symbol hit determination process is performed, a "time-saving hit" that transitions directly to a time-saving game state (C time-saving game state) without transitioning to a jackpot game state may be determined.

In addition, if the eighth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the selection rate of a big win and/or a small win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting. However, even if the eighth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the selection rate of a time-saving win be set to a common probability for all settings.

In addition to or instead of changing the selection rate of a big win or a small win according to the set value, for example, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning port 8156 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning port 8156, or the time-saving end condition (number of small wins, etc.) may be changed for each set value. In other words, by adopting one or more of the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the probability of a big win, the probability of a small win, the opening frequency of the V winning port 8156 (i.e. the operation frequency of the second special electric shutter 8154), the opening time, and the time-saving end condition, the expectation value controlled to the big win game state may be configured to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting.

[10-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
251 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 251 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The special symbol determination table is a table that determines the "special symbol selection symbol" and "symbol designation command" that determine the special symbol that will be stopped and displayed.

The "selected special symbol" is information for determining the special symbol that will be displayed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit, and the "symbol designation command" is a command sent to the sub-control circuit 300 to display a decorative symbol that corresponds to the special symbol that will be displayed in the display area of the display device 7.

The special symbol determination table specifies the type of special symbol, the winning/losing determination value data described above, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol obtained when the game ball enters the first starting hole 8120 or the second starting hole 8140 in association with the "special symbol selection symbol" and the "symbol designation command." The symbol random number value of the special symbol is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 251, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 0 and 19, the main CPU 201 determines "z1" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA1" as the symbol designation command. If the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 20 and 59, the main CPU 201 determines "z2" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 60 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z3" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

When jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, regardless of the value of the symbol random number value for the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines "z4" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

When small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the win determination process for the second special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 5, the main CPU 201 determines "z5" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA5" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any of 6 to 75, the main CPU 201 determines "z6" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA5" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any of 76 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z7" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA6" as the symbol designation command.

In this way, in this embodiment, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the special symbol selection table shown in FIG. 251 is configured so that the relationship of the selection rate of the special symbols is "z1" < "z2" = "z3".

As will be described in more detail later with reference to FIG. 253, when small win determination value data is obtained, if "z5" or "z6" is determined as the selected special symbol, a small win game state of a "V small win" in which it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through to the V winning hole 8156 is performed, and when "z7" is determined as the selected special symbol, a small win game state of a "fall small win" in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through to the V winning hole 8156 is performed. When a small win game state of a "V small win" is performed, the game ball passes through the V winning hole 8156, resulting in a transition to a big win game state from the second route. In contrast, when a small win game state is played as a "fall small win", it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156, and the game does not transition to a big win game state. If the game is in a time-saving game state, the number of small wins won as the A time-saving ending condition described below is deducted, and this also triggers the end of the time-saving game state.

The right column of the special symbol determination table in Fig. 251 shows for reference the "combined probability" of each selected symbol of the special symbol calculated by combining the "random number value for determining a big win (see Fig. 250)" and the "symbol random number value (see Fig. 251)." In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140, the combined probability of the selected symbols "z5, z6" of the special symbols corresponding to a "V small win" is approximately 1/48.2, and the combined probability of the selected symbol "z7" of the special symbol corresponding to a "fall small win" is approximately 1/152.6. In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140, the combined probability of the selected special pattern "z4" corresponding to a "big win" on the first route and the selected special patterns "z5, z6" corresponding to a "V small win" on the second route, that is, the actual probability of transitioning to a big win game state via the first route and the second route when a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140, is configured to be approximately 1/41.9.

Although the eighth pachinko gaming machine will not be described, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is a table that is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 249) when the special symbol is stopped, according to the "selected special symbol". In addition, the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 display the stop mode of a big win, a small win, or a miss, based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. In addition, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table described in the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 12(B)) is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

The range of the random number value of the special pattern that determines the "selected special pattern", i.e., the selection rate, is not limited to the above values and can be freely changed as needed.

[10-3-3. Jackpot Type Determination Table]
252 is an example of a big win type determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. The big win type determination table shown in FIG. 252 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The jackpot type determination table is a table that determines the operation content of the jackpot game state, and is a table that determines the "opening mode of the jackpot game state." In the eighth pachinko game machine, different jackpot type determination tables are referenced depending on whether or not a limiter number is set by the number of times limiter function (whether or not a limiter operation flag, described later), and the remaining number of times the limiter number in the number of times limiter function is set.

The jackpot type determination table 1 shown in FIG. 252(a) is a jackpot type determination table that is referenced when the jackpot limiter number is not set (when the limiter activation flag = 0). In other words, it is a jackpot type determination table that is referenced at the time of the first jackpot (the so-called first hit) in a game state other than the A time-saving game state (normal game state or B time-saving game state).

The jackpot type determination table 2 shown in FIG. 252(b) is a jackpot type determination table that is referenced when the limiter activation flag is set to 1 and the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts is 91 or more.

The jackpot type determination table 3 shown in FIG. 252(c) is a jackpot type determination table that is referenced when the limiter activation flag is set to 1 and the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts is 90 or less.

As shown in FIG. 252, in the jackpot type determination tables 1 to 3, the "opening mode of the jackpot game state" is associated with the selected special symbol.

The "opening mode in the jackpot gaming state" specifies the maximum number of rounds of the first large prize opening 8131 that is opened in the jackpot gaming state, and the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 8131. The opening pattern of the first large prize opening 8131 specifies the OP waiting time (opening time), the maximum opening time of each round, the closing time of each round, the ED waiting time (ending time), etc. Note that the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 8131 may specify a different maximum opening time for each round, or a different closing time for each round (round interval time). Furthermore, the number of openings and the opening time may be specified so that the first large prize opening 6131 is opened and closed multiple times per round.

Here, the "opening mode of the jackpot game state" corresponding to the "selected special pattern z5-7" of the small jackpot of the second special pattern is the opening mode when the game ball that entered the second large prize opening 8151 that was opened during the small jackpot game state transitions to the jackpot game state via the second route that passes through the V prize opening 8156. When the game state transitions to the jackpot game state via this second route, the opening of the second large prize opening 8151 during the small jackpot game state is considered the first round, and from the second round onwards, the jackpot game state in which the first large prize opening 8131 is opened is initiated.

In addition, if a game ball that enters the second large prize opening 8151 that is opened during a small prize game state does not pass through the V prize opening 8156, the big prize game state will not be executed. In particular, in this embodiment, when the selected special pattern "z7" corresponding to a "fall small prize" is determined, it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V prize opening 8156, and the big prize game state will not essentially be executed.

As shown in FIG. 252, according to jackpot type determination tables 1 to 3, the OP waiting time (opening time) and ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 8131 are configured to differ depending on whether or not a limiter count is set by the count limiter function and the remaining number of limiter counts in the count limiter function.

In particular, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 252, the fewer the remaining limiter counts in the count limiter function (the more consecutive jackpots are counted), the shorter the OP waiting time (opening time) and ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 8131 become.

In this embodiment, the OP waiting time (opening time) and ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 8131 are configured to differ depending on whether or not a limiter count is set by the count limiter function and the remaining number of limiter counts in the count limiter function. However, the jackpot type determination tables 1 to 3 may be configured so that only the OP waiting time (opening time) or only the ED waiting time (ending time) is different.

Furthermore, the jackpot type determination tables 1 to 3 may be configured so that at least one of the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 8131, the maximum opening time of each round, the closing time of each round, and the ED waiting time (ending time) differs depending on whether or not a limiter count is set by the count limiter function and the remaining number of limiter counts in the count limiter function.

[10-3-4. Small Win Type Determination Table]
253 is an example of a small win type determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. The small win type determination table shown in FIG. 253 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The small win type determination table is a table that determines the operation content of the small win game state, and is a table that determines the "opening mode of the small win game state." In the eighth pachinko game machine, different small win type determination tables are referenced depending on whether or not a limiter number is set by the number limiter function (whether or not a limiter operation flag, described later), and the remaining number of limiter numbers in the number limiter function.

The small win type determination table 1 shown in FIG. 253(a) is a small win type determination table that is referenced when the limiter number of big wins is not set (when the limiter activation flag = 0). In other words, it is a small win type determination table that is referenced at the time of the first small win (the so-called first win) in a game state other than the A time-saving game state (normal game state or B time-saving game state).

The small win type determination table 2 shown in FIG. 253(b) is a small win type determination table that is referenced when the limiter activation flag is set to 1 and the remaining number of big win limiter counts is 91 or more.

The small win type determination table 3 shown in FIG. 253(c) is a small win type determination table that is referenced when the limiter activation flag is set to 1 and the remaining number of big win limiter counts is 90 or less.

As shown in FIG. 253, in small win type determination tables 1 to 3, the "opening mode of the small win game state" is associated with the selected special symbol.

The "opening mode in the small win game state" specifies the maximum number of times the second large winning opening 8151 is opened during the small win game state, the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 8151, and the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156. The opening pattern of the second large winning opening 8151 specifies the OP waiting time (opening time), the maximum opening time for each number of times, the closing time for each number of times, the ED waiting time (ending time), etc. In addition, the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156 specifies the opening waiting time, opening time, etc. Note that the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156 may specify multiple opening times and closing times so that the V winning opening 8156 is opened and closed multiple times, like the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 8151.

At the start of the small win game state, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second large prize winning port 8151 and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V prize winning port 8156 are timed simultaneously.

When the special symbol selection patterns "z5, z6" corresponding to a "V small win" are determined, the second large winning opening 8151 opens a maximum of 16 times, and when the second large winning opening 8151 opens for the second or subsequent times, the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156 has elapsed, making it possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through to the V winning opening 8156. Therefore, when the special symbol selection patterns "z5, z6" corresponding to a "V small win" are determined, a favorable operation mode is determined as the opening mode of the small win game state.

In addition, when the special symbol selection pattern "z7" corresponding to a "small fall win" is determined, the second large prize opening 8151 opens once, and when the second large prize opening 8151 opens for the first time, the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V prize opening 8156 has not elapsed, making it impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through to the V prize opening 8156. For this reason, when the special symbol selection pattern "z7" corresponding to a "small fall win" is determined, an unfavorable operation mode is determined as the opening mode of the small win game state.

In this embodiment, the advantageous and unfavorable operating modes in the opening mode of the small win game state are configured using the opening timing of the second large winning opening 8151 (the operation timing of the second special electric solenoid 8155) and the opening timing of the V winning opening 8156 (the operation timing of the V shutter solenoid 8160), but the advantageous and unfavorable operating modes may be configured to have different pass-through rates to the V winning opening 8156 by changing the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning opening 8156.

And, as shown in FIG. 253, according to small win type determination tables 1 to 3, the OP waiting time (opening time), ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the second large winning port 8151, and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning port 8156 are configured to differ depending on whether or not a limiter count is set by the count limiter function and the remaining number of limiter counts in the count limiter function.

In particular, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 253, the fewer the remaining limiter counts in the count limiter function (the more consecutive jackpots are counted), the shorter the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second large prize opening 8151, the ED waiting time (ending time), and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V prize opening 8156 become.

In this embodiment, the OP waiting time (opening time), ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 8151, and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156 are configured to differ depending on whether or not a limiter count is set by the count limiter function and the remaining number of limiter counts in the count limiter function. However, the small win type determination tables 1 to 3 may be configured so that at least one of the OP waiting time (opening time), ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 8151, and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156 are different.

Furthermore, the small win type determination tables 1 to 3 may be configured so that at least one of the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second large winning port 8151, the maximum opening time for each number, the closing time for each number, the ED waiting time (ending time), and the opening waiting time, opening time, and closing time in the opening pattern of the V winning port 8156 differ depending on whether or not a limiter count is set by the count limiter function and the remaining number of limiter counts in the count limiter function.

In addition, the maximum opening time for one round in the big win game state (e.g., 0.1 seconds) is set shorter than the maximum opening time for one round in the big win game state (e.g., 28 seconds), so that in the big win game state, the first large prize winning port 8131 opens in a favorable "first opening mode," and in the small win game state, the second large prize winning port 8151 opens in a less favorable "second opening mode" than the first opening mode.

[10-3-5. Game status related setting table]
254 is an example of a game state related setting table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. The game state related setting table shown in FIG. 254 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The game state related setting table is a table for setting the game state after the end of a jackpot game state. In the eighth pachinko game machine, different game state related setting tables are referenced depending on whether or not a limiter number has been set by the number limiter function (whether or not a limiter activation flag is set) and the remaining number of limiter numbers in the number limiter function.

(Game Status Related Setting Table 1)
254(a) is a game state related setting table that is referred to when the jackpot limiter number is not set (when the limiter activation flag is 0). That is, it is a game state related setting table that is referred to at the time of the first jackpot (the so-called first win) in a game state other than the A time-saving game state (normal game state or the B time-saving game state) after the end of the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 254(a), in the game state related setting table 1, the "game state setting" consisting of the "state flag" and the "A time-saving end condition" is associated with the "limiter activation flag" and the "limiter count" based on the game state when the selected special symbol is determined to be a big hit or a small hit (game state at the time of winning).

The "state flag" is a flag that indicates the type of game state, and is stored in a specified memory area of the main RAM 203. A state flag of 0 indicates a "normal game state", a state flag of 1 indicates an "A time-shortened game state", and a state flag of 2 indicates a "B time-shortened game state". Note that in this embodiment, the C time-shortened game state is not executed, but if the C time-shortened game state is executable, a state flag of 3 indicates the C time-shortened game state.

The "A time-saving end condition" is a special condition that ends the A time-saving play state as a time-saving play state, and is composed of two end conditions: the "number of small wins" and the "number of time-saving play times." When either the "number of small wins" or the "number of time-saving play times" end conditions are met, the A time-saving play state ends and transitions to the normal play state.

In this embodiment, the "A time-saving end condition" is composed of two end conditions, the "number of small wins" and the "number of time-saving times", but it may be composed of only the "number of small wins" or only the "number of time-saving times". This also applies to the "B time-saving end condition" described later.

The "number of small wins" indicates the number of times a small win has been won in the time-saving play state, and is counted without distinguishing between the "V small win" and the "falling small win" described above. When a "V small win" is won, it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156, and it becomes possible to transition to a big win play state, but when a "falling small win" is won, it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156, and there is no transition to a big win play state, the number of small wins is deducted, and this triggers the end of the time-saving play state.

For example, if the number of small wins is set to 1, and a "fall small win" is won before a "V small win", it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156, and the time-saving game state ends without transitioning to a big win game state. In contrast, if the number of small wins is set to 255, the probability of winning a "V small win (approximately 1/48.2)" is higher than a "fall small win (approximately 1/152.6)", and at least a "V small win" can be won by the time 255 small wins have been won, so the time-saving game state does not end and it is possible to transition to a big win game state, and the next big win is essentially guaranteed. In this embodiment, the time-saving game state when the number of small wins is set to 1 or 2 as the first time-saving end condition is called the "normal time-saving game state," and the time-saving game state when the number of small wins is set to 255 as the second time-saving end condition is called the "special time-saving game state."

In addition, when the main CPU 201 sets the number of small wins to 255, it sets the special time-saving flag to 1 (special time-saving flag on) to identify that the game is in the special time-saving game mode. Similarly, when the main CPU 201 sets the number of small wins to 1 or 2, it sets the special time-saving flag to 0 (special time-saving flag off) to identify that the game is in the general time-saving game mode.

The "time-saving number of times" indicates the total number of times that either the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be variably displayed during the time-saving game mode.

In this embodiment, when the state flag is set to 1 (A time-saving game state), the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000, which is a number at which the end condition of the "time-saving number of times" cannot actually be met. However, it is also possible to set the number of time-saving times to 100, which is a number at which the end condition of the "time-saving number of times" can be met.

The "limiter operation flag" is a flag that indicates whether or not the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to a jackpot game state in a time-saving game state due to the count limiter function is being counted, and a limiter operation flag = 1 indicates that the number of consecutive jackpots due to the count limiter function is being counted, and a limiter operation flag = 0 indicates that the number of consecutive jackpots due to the count limiter function is not being counted. The limiter operation flag also corresponds to a status flag, and is configured so that when a status flag = 1 indicating the A time-saving game state is set, the limiter operation flag = 1 is set, and when a status flag = 0 indicating the normal game state is set, the limiter operation flag = 0 is set.

The "limiter count" indicates the number of times that is set at the time of the first jackpot in a game state other than the A time-saving game state (normal game state or B time-saving game state). When the limiter activation flag = 1 is set, the limiter count is decremented each time the time-saving game state transitions to the jackpot game state, and when the limiter activation flag = 1 and the limiter count = 0, the count limiter function is activated and game state related setting table 4 shown in Figure 254 (d) described later is referenced.

According to the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 254(a), when the game state at the time of winning is the normal game state, if the game ball enters the first starting hole 8120 and the lottery result for the first special symbol is a jackpot, after the jackpot game state ends, if the selected symbol for the first special symbol is "z1", the status flag is set to 1, the number of small jackpot wins is set to 255, the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000, the limiter activation flag is set to 1, and the number of limiter times is set to 98. If the selected symbol for the first special symbol is "z2", the status flag is set to 1, the number of small jackpot wins is set to 1, the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000, the limiter activation flag is set to 1, and the number of limiter times is set to 100. If the selected symbol for the first special symbol is "z3", the status flag is set to 0, and the limiter activation flag is set to 0.

In addition, according to the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 254(a), when the game state at the time of winning is the normal game state, if the game ball enters the second starting hole 8140 and the lottery result for the second special pattern is a big win or a small win, after the big win game state (including the big win game state from a V small win) ends, if the selected pattern for the second special pattern is "z4", "z5" or "z6", the following settings are set: status flag = 1, number of small wins = 1, number of time-saving times = 10,000, limiter activation flag = 1, number of limiters = 90; and when the selected pattern for the second special pattern is "z7", the following settings are set: status flag = 1, number of small wins = 1, number of time-saving times = 10,000, limiter activation flag = 1, number of limiters = 1.

In addition, according to the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 254(a), when the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving game state, if the game ball enters the first starting hole 8120 and the lottery result for the first special symbol is a jackpot, after the jackpot game state ends, if the selected symbol for the first special symbol is "z1", the following settings are set: status flag = 1, number of small wins = 255, number of time-saving times = 10,000, limiter activation flag = 1, and number of limiters = 97; and if the selected symbol for the first special symbol is "z2" or "z3", the following settings are set: status flag = 1, number of small wins = 1, number of time-saving times = 10,000, limiter activation flag = 1, and number of limiters = 99.

In addition, according to the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 254(a), when the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving game state, if the game ball enters the second starting hole 8140 and the lottery result for the second special pattern is a big win or a small win, after the big win game state (including the big win game state from a V small win) ends, if the selected pattern for the second special pattern is "z4", "z5" or "z6", the following settings are set: status flag = 1, number of small wins = 1, number of time-saving times = 10,000, limiter activation flag = 1, number of limiters = 96; and when the selected pattern for the second special pattern is "z7", the following settings are set: status flag = 1, number of small wins = 1, number of time-saving times = 10,000, limiter activation flag = 1, number of limiters = 1.

In addition, if the game ball enters the second starting hole 8140 and the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small win, and the selected symbol for the second special symbol "z7" corresponding to a "small fall win" is determined, it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156, and there is no transition to a big win game state, and the game state, limiter activation flag, and limiter count are not set. This is also the case for game state related setting tables 2 to 4 described below.

Next, by summarizing the lottery situation for special symbols in each game state for which the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 254(a) is referenced, the time-saving game state when the jackpot limiter number of times has not been set is limited to the B time-saving game state, which is entered after the variable display number of times the special symbol reaches the ceiling value, without being triggered by a jackpot. In other words, "the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving game state" in the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 254(a) indicates that the game state at the time of winning is the "B time-saving game state."

Here, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is performed as the regular game mode, and the game ball can enter the first starting hole 8120, but it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 8140. Also, in the time-saving game state (B time-saving game state), right-handed hitting is performed as the regular game mode, and the game ball can enter the second starting hole 8140, but it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first starting hole 8120.

For this reason, in the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 254(a), when the game state at the time of winning is the normal game state and the result of the lottery for the first special symbol is a jackpot, this corresponds to a case in which the lottery for the first special symbol is determined to be the first jackpot in the first normal game state described below.

In addition, during normal game mode, it is essentially possible for a game ball to enter the first starting hole 8120, and it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 8140. However, immediately after the time-saving game mode ends and transitions to the normal game mode, the reserved number of second special symbols stored in the time-saving game mode will be consumed.

For this reason, in the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 254(a), when the game state at the time of winning is the normal game state, if the lottery result for the second special symbol is a big win or a small win, this corresponds to the fact that in the second normal game state described below, the lottery for the second special symbol determines that it is a big win or a small win immediately after the time-saving game state ends, and the big win or the small win is won back.

In addition, when in the B time-saving game state, it is essentially possible for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 8140, and it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first starting hole 8120; however, immediately after transitioning from the normal game state to the time-saving game state, the reserved number of the first special symbol stored in the normal game state may be consumed, or, despite being in the time-saving game state (B time-saving game state), an irregular game mode may be performed in which a left hit is made, causing the game ball to enter the first starting hole 8120.

For this reason, in the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 254(a), when the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving game state (B time-saving game state), the case where the lottery result for the first special pattern is a jackpot corresponds to the case where the first special pattern is determined to be the first jackpot by lottery in the B time-saving game state in which the reserved number of first special patterns stored in the normal game state is consumed, or in the B time-saving game state in which the player is hitting from the left as an irregular game mode.

In addition, in the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 254(a), when the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving game state (B time-saving game state), the case where the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win or a small win corresponds to the case where the first big win is determined by the lottery of the second special symbol in the B time-saving game state during right-hand play.

(Limiter frequency characteristics)
Next, the characteristics of the limiter count set by the game status related setting table 1 shown in Figure 254 (a) will be described.

When the first jackpot is determined to be the first jackpot by drawing the first special symbol in the first normal game state and the limiter number of times is set, a different limiter number (98 times or 100 times) will be set depending on the selected first special symbol.

In the second normal game state, a big win or small win is determined immediately after the time-saving game state ends by drawing the second special symbol, and when the limiter number of times is set, a different limiter number (1 time or 90 times) is set according to the selected second special symbol.

When the first big win is determined by the drawing of the first special symbol during the B time-saving play state and the limiter number of times is set, a different limiter number (97 times or 99 times) will be set depending on the selected first special symbol.

When the first big win is determined by the drawing of the second special symbol during the B time-saving play state and the limiter number of times is set, a different limiter number (96 times or 1 time) will be set depending on the selected second special symbol.

In this way, according to the game state related setting table 1 shown in Figure 254 (a), different "limiter counts" are set depending on the game state at the time of winning and the selected special pattern.

In particular, according to the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 254(a), after the end of the jackpot game state resulting from the lottery of a special symbol in the B time-saving game state, it is possible to set a limiter number (97 times, 99 times, or 96 times) different from the limiter number (98 times, 100 times, or 90 times) set after the end of the jackpot game state resulting from the lottery of a special symbol in the normal game state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a large jackpot or small jackpot is determined by drawing the second special symbol in the second normal game state immediately after the time-saving game state ends and the limiter number is set (when a large jackpot or small jackpot is returned), the game state related setting table 1 is configured so that a smaller limiter number (90 times) is set than when a first large jackpot is determined by drawing the first special symbol in the first normal game state and when a first large jackpot is determined by drawing a special symbol in the B time-saving game state. In particular, the limiter number that is set when a big win or small win is determined by drawing the second special symbol in the second normal game state immediately after the time-saving game state ends corresponds to the remaining number of big win limiter numbers that determine the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2 (see FIG. 265) described below, and when the game state is returned to the general time-saving game state after the big win game state ends, a special symbol fluctuation pattern table that ends (consumes) the variable display of the special symbol more quickly can be adopted.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small win and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "small fall win" is determined, it is essentially impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156, and the game state is not set without transitioning to a big win game state. However, if the game ball passes through the V winning hole 8156 due to fraudulent or irregular behavior and transitions to a big win game state, the game state related setting table 1 is configured to set the limiter number of times (0 times) less than the number of times (90 times or 96 times) set when the selected symbol of the second special symbol "z4 to 6" corresponding to the "small V win" is selected.

In this embodiment, the limiter count is set to different values depending on the game state at the time of winning and the selected special symbol, but it may be set to the same limiter count (for example, all 100 times).

(Characteristics of the number of small wins)
According to the game state related setting table 1 shown in Fig. 254 (a), the "number of times of winning small wins" in the A time-saving end condition is configured to differ depending on the game state at the time of winning and the selected special symbol. The game state related setting table 1 may be configured so that the "number of times of winning small wins" in the A time-saving end condition is different depending on the game state at the time of winning or the selected special symbol.

In addition, in the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 254(a), the number of small wins = 255 can be set according to the selected pattern of the first special pattern by the lottery of the first special pattern, and a transition from the lottery of the first special pattern to the special time-saving game state is possible. However, the game state related setting table 1 may be configured so that the number of small wins = 255 can be set according to the selected pattern of the second special pattern by the lottery of the second special pattern, and a transition from the lottery of the second special pattern to the special time-saving game state may be made possible. However, when the number of small wins = 255 can be set according to the selected pattern of the second special pattern, it is desirable that the selection rate of the number of small wins = 255 set according to the selected pattern of the second special pattern is lower than the selection rate of the number of small wins = 255 set according to the selected pattern of the first special pattern.

Furthermore, according to game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 254(a), two types of numbers are set for the number of times that a small win can be won: 1 time or 255 times, depending on the selected special symbol. However, as shown in game state related setting table 2 described later, the number of times that a small win can be won may be set to three or more types: 1 time, 2 times, or 255 times. However, it is preferable that the number of times that a small win can be won is set to 255 times when the selected first special symbol is the first special symbol selected by lottery.

In this embodiment, the "number of times small wins can be won" in the A time-saving end condition is configured to differ depending on the game state at the time of winning and the selected special symbol, but it may also be configured so that the same "number of times small wins can be won" are set for all.

(Game Status Related Setting Table 2)
The game state related setting table 2 shown in Fig. 254(b) is a game state related setting table that is referenced when the limiter operation flag = 1 is set and the remaining number of the jackpot limiter number is 91 or more. Since the limiter operation flag = 1 is set, the game state related setting table 2 shown in Fig. 254(b) is a game state related setting table that is referenced only when the game state at the time of winning is a time-saving game state (A time-saving game state). The same applies to the game state related setting table 3 and the game state related setting table 4 described later.

As shown in FIG. 254(b), in the game state related setting table 2, the selected special symbol is associated with a "game state setting," a "limiter activation flag," and a "limiter count subtraction value."

According to game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 254(b), when a game ball enters the first starting hole 8120 and the lottery result for the first special symbol is a jackpot, after the jackpot game state ends, the "game state setting" and "limiter activation flag" are set in the same manner as game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 254(a), but when the selected symbol for the first special symbol is "z1" or "z2", 1 is subtracted from the limiter count.

As mentioned above, the limiter operation flag also corresponds to the state flag, and when the limiter operation flag = 1 is set, the state flag = 1 indicating the A time-saving game state is set. In the time-saving game state, right-hand shots are performed as a regular game mode, and it is essentially impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to enter the first start hole 8120, but it is possible for a game ball to enter the first start hole 8120 by performing a left-hand shot as an irregular game mode (which is disadvantageous to the player) in the time-saving game state. Therefore, the case where the lottery result of the first special pattern is a jackpot in the game state related setting table 2 shown in Figure 254 (b) corresponds to the case where a left-hand shot is performed as an irregular game mode in the time-saving game state, a game ball enters the first start hole 8120, and it is determined to be a jackpot. This also applies when the lottery result for the first special symbol in the game status related setting table 3 shown in Figure 254 (c) is a jackpot.

According to the game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 254(b), when a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140 and the lottery result for the second special symbol is a big win or a small win, if the selected symbol for the second special symbol is "z4" after the big win game state (including the big win game state from a V small win) ends, the state flag is set to 1, the number of small wins is set to 2, the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000, and the limiter activation flag is set to 1, and the limiter activation time is set to 3. is subtracted, and when the selected symbol for the second special symbol is "z5", the status flag is set to 1, the number of small wins is set to 2, the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000, and the limiter activation flag is set to 1, and 2 is subtracted from the limiter count; when the selected symbol for the second special symbol is "z6" or "z7", the status flag is set to 1, the number of small wins is set to 1, the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000, and the limiter activation flag is set to 1, and 1 is subtracted from the limiter count.

In this way, according to the game state related setting table 2 shown in Figure 254 (b), the "number of small wins" and the "limiter number of deductions" in the A time-saving end condition are configured to differ depending on the selected second special symbol.

In this embodiment, the game state related setting table 2 is configured so that the "number of small wins" and the "limiter count subtraction value" in the A time-saving end condition differ depending on the selected symbol of the second special symbol. However, the game state related setting table 2 may be configured so that only the "number of small wins" or only the "limiter count subtraction value" in the A time-saving end condition differs depending on the selected symbol of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, the game state related setting table 2 may be configured so that the "limiter count subtraction value" differs depending on the selected first special symbol.

Furthermore, the game state related setting table 2 may be configured so that the same "limiter count subtraction value (e.g., all 1)" is subtracted regardless of the selected second special symbol (selected first special symbol).

(Game Status Related Setting Table 3)
The game status related setting table 3 shown in Figure 254 (c) is a game status related setting table which is referenced when the limiter activation flag is set to 1 and the remaining number of jackpot limiter hits is 1 to 90.

As shown in FIG. 254(c), in the game state related setting table 3, similar to the game state related setting table 2, the "game state setting", the "limiter activation flag", and the "limiter count subtraction value" are associated with the selected special symbol.

According to game state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. 254(c), when a game ball enters the first starting hole 8120 and the lottery result for the first special symbol is a jackpot, after the jackpot game state ends, the "game state setting" and the "limiter activation flag" will be set, and the limiter count will be decremented, in the same manner as game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 254(b).

In addition, according to the game state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. 254(c), when a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140 and the lottery result for the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, after the big hit game state (including a big hit game state from a V small hit) ends, regardless of which second special symbol is selected, the status flag will be set to 1, the number of small hits won will be 1, the number of time-saving times will be 10,000, and the limiter activation flag will be set to 1, and 1 will be subtracted from the limiter count.

In this way, according to game status related setting table 2 in FIG. 254(b) and game status related setting table 3 in FIG. 254(c), the "number of small wins" and the "subtraction value of the limiter number" in the A time-saving end condition are configured to differ depending on the remaining number of big win limiter numbers.

In this embodiment, the "number of small wins" and the "limiter count subtraction value" in the A time-saving end condition are configured to differ depending on the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts, but it is also possible to configure only the "number of small wins" or only the "limiter count subtraction value" in the A time-saving end condition to differ depending on the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts.

Furthermore, it may be configured so that the "number of small wins" and the "limiter number subtraction value" in the A time-saving end condition do not differ depending on the remaining number of jackpot limiter times. If configured in this way, game state related setting table 2 in FIG. 254(b) may be deleted, and game state related setting table 3 in FIG. 254(c) may be made the game state related setting table referenced when the limiter activation flag is set to 1 and the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is not 0 (jackpot limiter number ≠ 0).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts reaches 90 (hereinafter also referred to as the "first switching count"), the game status related setting table is configured to switch (be referenced) from game status related setting table 2 in FIG. 254(b) to game status related setting table 3 in FIG. 254(c), but the first switching count can be freely redesigned as appropriate.

(Game Status Related Setting Table 4)
The game status related setting table 4 shown in Figure 254 (d) is a game status related setting table which is referenced when the number limiter function is activated (the limiter activation flag is set to 1, and the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts is 0).

As shown in FIG. 254(d), in the game state related setting table 4, all selected special symbols are associated with "state flag = 0" which sets the game state to the normal game state.

In this way, according to game state related setting table 4 in FIG. 254 (d), when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limit in the time-saving game state, the game state after the jackpot game state ends is forcibly transitioned to the normal game state, so that the game state after the jackpot game state ends can be regulated.

In this embodiment, the game state related setting table 4 is configured so that when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limit in the time-saving game state, the game state is forcibly switched to the normal game state after the jackpot game state ends. However, the game state related setting table 4 may also be configured so that when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limit in the time-saving game state, the game state is forcibly switched to the non-playing state after the jackpot game state ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, except for game state related setting table 4 which is referenced when the number limiter function is activated, game state related setting tables 1 to 3 are configured to transition to a "special time-shortened game state", "general time-shortened game state" or "normal game state" after the jackpot game state resulting from the drawing of the first special symbol ends, and are configured to transition only to the "general time-shortened game state" without transitioning to a "special time-shortened game state" or "general time-shortened game state" after the jackpot game state resulting from the drawing of the second special symbol ends.

In this embodiment, after the jackpot game state by the lottery of the first special symbol is ended, the game state is changed to the "special time-saving game state", the "general time-saving game state", or the "normal game state". However, after the jackpot game state by the lottery of the first special symbol is ended, the game state may be changed to either (a) the "special time-saving game state" only, (b) the "special time-saving game state" or the "general time-saving game state", or (c) the "special time-saving game state" or the "normal game state". Furthermore, after the jackpot game state by the lottery of the second special symbol is ended, the game state is changed to the "general time-saving game state" only, but the game state may be changed to (a) the "general time-saving game state" or the "special time-saving game state", (b) the "general time-saving game state" or the "normal game state", or (c) the "general time-saving game state", the "special time-saving game state", or the "normal game state".

In this embodiment, except for game state related setting table 4 that is referenced when the count limiter function is activated, game state related setting tables 1 to 3 are configured to transition to a "special time-saving game state" at a first rate that is relatively higher after the end of a jackpot game state resulting from the drawing of a first special symbol, than after the end of a jackpot game state resulting from the drawing of a second special symbol. Also, after the end of a jackpot game state resulting from the drawing of a second special symbol, the game state is configured to transition to a "general time-saving game state" at a second rate that is relatively higher than after the end of a jackpot game state resulting from the drawing of a first special symbol. Note that the first rate and second rate do not exclude the intention that the rates to be compared are 0% and 100%.

[10-3-6. Special symbol variation pattern table]
255 and 256 are examples of the variation pattern table of the special symbols of the eighth pachinko game machine. FIG. 255 is an example of the variation pattern table of the special symbols in the normal game state or the special time-saving game state of the eighth pachinko game machine, and FIG. 256 is an example of the variation pattern table of the special symbols in the normal time-saving game state of the eighth pachinko game machine. The variation pattern tables of the special symbols shown in FIG. 255 and FIG. 256 are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The special symbol change pattern table is a table that determines the "special symbol change pattern" and "special symbol change display time" as the change manner of the special symbol.

The main CPU 201 determines the special pattern variation pattern table of either FIG. 255 or FIG. 256 depending on the game status, etc., and refers to the determined special pattern variation pattern table to determine the special pattern variation pattern and the special pattern variation display time based on the type of special pattern, the result of the special pattern hit determination process, the selected special pattern, etc.

When the main CPU 201 determines the fluctuation pattern, it transmits a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the sub-CPU 301. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201. The fluctuation pattern command is configured to be able to identify whether the fluctuation pattern is triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 8120 or the second starting hole 8140.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
The special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 255(a) is a special symbol variation pattern table determined during normal game play.

As shown in FIG. 255(a), the special symbol variation pattern table T1 associates the type of special symbol, the lottery result (win or lose) of the special symbol, the selected special symbol, a random number value for reaching the limit, a random number value for selecting a performance, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation display time of the special symbol. Note that the random number value for reaching the limit is selected from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for selecting a performance is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

As described above, in the normal game mode, left-handed shots are performed as the regular game mode, so that a game ball can actually enter the first starting hole 8120, but it is impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 8140. However, immediately after the time-saving game mode ends and the normal game mode is entered, the reserved number of second special symbols stored in the time-saving game mode is consumed.

In this embodiment, when distinguishing between normal game states in detail, the normal game state during the control period of the first special symbol based on the start information of the first special symbol is called the "first normal game state", and the normal game state in which the reserved number of second special symbols stored in the time-saving game state is being consumed immediately after the time-saving game state ends and the game transitions to the normal game state (the normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol based on the start information of the second special symbol) is called the "second normal game state".

According to the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 255(a), in the first normal game state (first special symbol), different special symbol variation patterns can be determined according to the lottery result (win or lose) of the special symbol and the selected special symbol. However, in the second normal game state (second special symbol), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to a "fall small win" is determined, and when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss, the same variation pattern (00H) that executes normal variation can be determined.

In this embodiment, in the second normal game state, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win and the selected pattern of the second special symbol "z7" corresponding to the "fall small win" is determined, and when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a miss, the same variation pattern is determined. However, a different variation pattern may be determined. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win and the selected pattern of the second special symbol "z7" corresponding to the "fall small win" is determined, the same variation pattern (0AH) for executing the door opening performance (miss) may be determined without determining the same variation pattern (00H) for executing the normal variation.

(Special symbol variation pattern table for special time-saving game state)
The special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in Fig. 255(b) is a variation pattern table of the special symbol determined in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, the special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in Fig. 255(b) is also a variation pattern table of the special symbol determined in the A time-saving game state in which the number of times of winning small wins = 255 times is set as the second time-saving end condition, or in the B time-saving game state in which the number of times of winning small wins = 255 times is set as the second time-saving end condition.

As shown in FIG. 255(b), the special pattern variation pattern table S1 associates the type of special pattern, the lottery result (win or lose) of the special pattern, the selected special pattern, the random number value for selecting the effect, the variation pattern of the special pattern, and the variation display time of the special pattern.

As described above, in the special time-saving game state, a right-handed hit is performed as a regular game mode, and it is essentially impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to enter the first starting hole 8120. However, in the special time-saving game state, a left-handed hit is performed as an irregular game mode (which is disadvantageous to the player) and the game ball can enter the first starting hole 8120. Therefore, the first special symbol fluctuation pattern in the special symbol fluctuation pattern table S1 in FIG. 255(b) corresponds to the special symbol fluctuation pattern determined when a left-handed hit is performed as an irregular game mode in the special time-saving game state and the game ball enters the first starting hole 8120. This is also true for the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables J1 to J3 shown in FIG. 255, which are determined in the general time-saving game state.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. 255(b), in the special time-saving game state, if the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss, a special symbol variation pattern (10H) consisting of a variable display time of the special symbol that is extremely shorter (for example, 0.5 seconds) than in the normal game state can be determined. As a result, in the special time-saving game state, the variable display of the special symbol can be ended (consumed) extremely quickly compared to the normal game state.

Furthermore, according to the special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. 255(b), if the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small win and the selected symbol "z7" for the second special symbol corresponding to a "fall small win" is determined, it is treated as a miss and the same variation pattern (10H) as the variation pattern determined when the lottery for the second special symbol is a miss is determined. This is because, in the special time-saving game state, the number of times that a small win can be won in the A time-saving ending condition is set to 255, and the time-saving game state does not actually end due to a "fall small win".

In this embodiment, when the number of small wins in the A time-saving end condition is set to 255, the time-saving game state will not actually end due to a "falling small win". However, for security reasons, when the number of small wins is the 255th falling small win (when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a small win, the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small win" is determined, and the remaining number of small wins is 1), a variation pattern that executes an effect that ends the time-saving game state (for example, variation pattern 43H that executes a card effect described below) may be determined.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in general time-saving game mode)
The special symbol variation pattern table in the general time-saving game state includes three variation pattern tables: a special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in Fig. 256(a), a special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in Fig. 256(b), and a special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in Fig. 256(c). Note that the number of special symbol variation pattern tables in the general time-saving game state is not limited to three, and may be one or two or more.

The special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 256(a) is a special symbol variation pattern table that is determined when the general time-saving game mode is in effect, the limiter activation flag is set to 1, and the remaining number of jackpot limiter hits is 91 or more.

As shown in FIG. 256(a), the special pattern variation pattern table J1 associates the type of special pattern, the lottery result (win or lose) of the special pattern, the selected special pattern, the "remaining number of small wins as the A time-saving end condition," a random number value for reach determination, a random number value for effect selection, the special pattern variation pattern, and the special pattern variation display time.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 256(a), in the general time-saving game state when the remaining number of jackpot limiters is 91 or more, if the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss, a special symbol variation pattern (11H) consisting of a shorter special symbol variation display time (e.g., 3.0 seconds) than in the normal game state can be determined. As a result, in the general time-saving game state, the variable display of the special symbol can be ended (consumed) more quickly than in the normal game state.

In addition, according to the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 256(a), in the general time-saving play state when the remaining number of the jackpot limiter count is 91 or more, when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a small win and the selected pattern "z5, z6" of the second special symbol corresponding to a "V small win" is determined, and when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss, a special symbol variation pattern (40H or 41H) in which a common "battle performance" is executed can be determined. This allows the player to feel reassured that they have not won the "fall small win" that triggers the end of the general time-saving play state, while giving them hope that they have won the "V small win" that triggers the transition to the jackpot play state.

Furthermore, according to the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 256(a), in the general time-saving play state when the remaining number of the jackpot limiter number is 91 or more, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win and the selected pattern of the second special symbol "z5, z6" corresponding to the "V small win" or the selected pattern of the second special symbol "z7" corresponding to the "fall small win" is determined, and when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a miss, a variation pattern of the special symbol (30H, 31H, 32H, 3FH) in which a common "card performance" is executed can be determined. This allows the player to be interested in whether the "fall small win" that triggers the end of the general time-saving play state, the "V small win" that triggers the transition to the jackpot play state, or the "miss" has been won.

In this way, according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 256(a), in the general time-saving game state when the remaining number of jackpot limiters is 91 or more, more variety of effects can be executed, and the excitement of the game is further increased, compared to the general time-saving game state when the remaining number of jackpot limiters is 90 or less, which corresponds to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 256(b) described later.

The special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 256(b) is a special symbol variation pattern table that is determined when the general time-saving game mode is in effect, the limiter activation flag is set to 1, and the remaining number of jackpot limiter hits is between 1 and 90.

As shown in FIG. 256(b), the special pattern variation pattern table J2 associates the type of special pattern, the lottery result (win or lose) of the special pattern, the selected special pattern, the "remaining number of small wins as the A time-saving end condition," a random number value for reach determination, a random number value for effect selection, the special pattern variation pattern, and the special pattern variation display time.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 256(b), in the general time-saving play state when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 90 or less, if the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss, a special symbol variation pattern consisting of a shorter special symbol variation display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) can be determined than in the general time-saving play state when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 91 or more. As a result, in the general time-saving play state, as the remaining number of jackpot limiter times decreases, the variable display of the special symbol can be ended (consumed) more quickly.

In addition, according to the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 256(b), in the general time-saving game state when the remaining number of jackpot limiters is 90 or less, unlike the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 256(a), the special symbol variation pattern (40H or 41H) in which a "battle effect" with a long special symbol variation display time is executed is not determined. As a result, in the general time-saving game state when the remaining number of jackpot limiters is 90 or less, the special symbol variation pattern consisting of a long special symbol variation display time is not determined, and the variable display of the special symbol can be ended (consumed) more quickly than in the general time-saving game state when the remaining number of jackpot limiters is 91 or more.

In this embodiment, when the remaining number of times of the jackpot limiter reaches 90 (hereinafter referred to as the "second switching number"), the special symbol variation pattern table is switched (determined) from the special symbol variation pattern table J1 in FIG. 256(a) to the special symbol variation pattern table J2 in FIG. 256(b). However, the second switching number can be freely changed as desired. In particular, if the second switching number is designed to be the number of times that is obtained by subtracting 10% or less (1 to 10 times) from the limiter number (100 times) set at the time of the first jackpot, it becomes possible to switch at an earlier timing to the special symbol variation pattern table that ends (consumes) the variable display of the special symbol more quickly, which increases the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the second number of times the special symbol variation pattern table is switched is set to the same number (90) as the first number of times the game state related setting table is switched, but the first number of times and the second number of times may be set to a number different from each other.

The special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 256(c) is a special symbol variation pattern table that is determined when the general time-saving game state is in effect, the limiter activation flag is set to 1, and the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts is 0. In other words, the special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 256(c) is a special symbol variation pattern table that is determined when the count limiter function is activated.

As shown in FIG. 256(c), the special pattern change pattern table J3 associates the type of special pattern, the lottery result (win or lose) of the special pattern, the selected special pattern, the "remaining number of small wins as the A time-saving end condition," the special pattern change pattern, and the special pattern change display time.

According to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 256(c), in the general time-saving game state when the count limiter function is activated, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, a different special symbol fluctuation pattern (50H, 51H) is determined compared to the general time-saving game state when the count limiter function is not activated (special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1, J2). As a result, in the general time-saving game state when the count limiter function is activated, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, a special dedicated performance (ending success reach) can be executed.

[10-3-7. Special symbol pre-reading related data]
FIG. 257 is an example of data related to the look-ahead of the special symbol in the eighth pachinko game machine. Here, "look-ahead" refers to analyzing the start information of the special symbol acquired before the lottery of the special symbol when the game ball enters the first start hole 8120 or the second start hole 8140 and the main control circuit 200 (main CPU 201) acquires the start information of the special symbol (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for a symbol, random number value for determining a reach, random number value for selecting a performance, etc.). The analyzed information (look-ahead command) is then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 (sub-CPU 301), and the "look-ahead performance" can be executed based on the look-ahead command.

Figure 257 (a) shows a look-ahead execution correspondence table that determines whether or not to perform look-ahead depending on the game status as data related to look-ahead of special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 257(a), in the normal game state, both pre-reading based on the start information of the first special symbol and pre-reading based on the start information of the second special symbol can be performed. Also, in the time-saving game state, big win game state, and small win game state, only pre-reading based on the start information of the second special symbol can be performed.

Figure 257 (b) shows an example of the configuration of a look-ahead command based on the analyzed information that is the start information for a special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 257(b), the look-ahead command is composed of a "special symbol type" (either the first special symbol or the second special symbol) and multiple "parameters 1 to 3."

"Parameter 1" is the winning/losing information that is analyzed in advance to determine whether it is a big win, a small win, or a miss based on a random number value for determining a big win, and Figure 257 (c) is an example of a setting table for parameter 1.

"Parameter 2" is pattern information that is obtained by analyzing in advance the special pattern (selected pattern) that will be displayed when the reel stops based on the random number value for determining a jackpot and the random number value for the pattern. Figure 257 (d) is an example of a setting table for parameter 2.

"Parameter 3" is fluctuation information that analyzes the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols in advance based on the random number value for determining a jackpot, the random number value for determining a reach, and the random number value for selecting a performance. Figure 257 (e) is an example of a setting table for parameter 3.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol from when the start information of the special symbol is read ahead until the special symbol is drawn based on the start information of the special symbol is also called "pre-variation." Also, the variable display of the special symbol when the special symbol is drawn based on the start information of the special symbol is also called "the said variation."

[10-3-8. Normal symbol winning judgment table]
258 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. The winning determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 258 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol winning judgment table is a table referenced in the normal symbol winning judgment process, and is a table referenced when determining by lottery whether a "normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol losing" is made based on the normal symbol winning judgment random number value obtained when the game ball passes through the passing gate 8126.

The winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 258 specifies the range (width) of random numbers for winning judgment of normal symbols and winning/losing judgment value data for normal symbols ("normal symbol win" or "normal symbol miss") in correspondence with each other. Note that the random numbers for winning judgment of normal symbols are obtained in the range of 0 to 65535 (65536 types), for example. However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 258, and determines the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal symbols based on the range (width) of the random number value for winning judgment for normal symbols.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern shown in FIG. 258, and if the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern is any value between 1 and 65535, it judges it as a "normal pattern winning" and determines the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal pattern as "normal pattern winning/losing judgment value data". In addition, if the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern is 0, the main CPU 201 judges it as a "normal pattern losing" and determines the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal pattern as "normal pattern losing judgment value data".

In this embodiment, a "normal hit" is determined with a selection rate of approximately 1/1.00, and a "normal hit" is more likely to be determined than a "normal miss." Note that it is preferable that a "normal hit" is more likely to be determined than a "normal miss," and the selection rate of a "normal hit" is not limited to approximately 1/1.00.

In this embodiment, the selection rate for "normal symbol hit" is set to the same regardless of whether the game state is normal or time-saving, but the opening pattern of the normal electric device 8146 is changed depending on the game state, as described below, to give the player different benefits depending on the game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" is set to the same regardless of whether the game state is the normal game state or the time-saving game state, but the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" may be made different depending on the game state. When making the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" different depending on the game state, it is desirable to configure it so that the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" in the time-saving game state is higher than the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" in the normal game state. Furthermore, the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" may also be made different depending on the type of time-saving game state, between time-saving game state A and time-saving game state B, or between special time-saving game state and general time-saving game state.

[10-3-9. Normal symbol determination table]
259 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 259 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "selected normal symbol" that determines the normal symbol stopping pattern based on the winning/losing determination value data for the normal symbol described above and the normal symbol random number value obtained when the game ball passes through the passing gate 8126.

The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 259 specifies the above-mentioned normal symbol win/loss determination value data ("normal symbol win" or "normal symbol miss"), the normal symbol random number value, and the selected normal symbol pattern in correspondence with each other. The normal symbol random number value is obtained, for example, from 0 to 100 (101 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 259 and determines the selected normal pattern based on the normal pattern hit determination value data and the pattern random number value of the normal pattern.

According to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 259, when normal pattern hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal pattern hit determination process, for example, the selected normal pattern is selected as follows.

For example, when normal symbol winning judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f1" as the selected normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 0 and 49, and selects "f2" as the selected normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 50 and 99. In addition, when normal symbol losing judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f3" as the selected normal symbol, regardless of the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

In particular, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, the selected normal symbol is selected based on the win/lose determination value data for the normal symbol (the result of the win determination process for the normal symbol) and the symbol random number value for the normal symbol, regardless of the gaming state. Note that, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the selected normal symbol may be selected depending on the gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern (see FIG. 258) and determines the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal pattern based on the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern, and then refers to the normal pattern judgment table (see FIG. 259) and determines the selected pattern for the normal pattern based on the pattern random number value for the normal pattern, but this is not limited to this. For example, the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal pattern (whether the normal pattern is winning or losing) and the selected pattern for the normal pattern may be determined together based on the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern and the pattern random number value for the normal pattern.

[10-3-10. Table for determining the opening pattern of normal electric accessories]
260 is an example of a normal electric role opening pattern determination table in the pachinko gaming machine No. 8. The normal electric role opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 260 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

When normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol (in the case of a hit for a normal symbol), the opening pattern determination table for the normal electric device 8146 is referenced when determining the opening pattern of the normal electric device 8146 as the opening mode of the normal electric device 8146 according to the game state and the selected normal symbol.

The opening pattern determination table for the normal electric device shown in Figure 260 specifies the game state, the selected normal symbol, and the opening pattern of the normal electric device 8146 in correspondence with each other.

In this embodiment, the "opening pattern of the normal electric role 8146" is composed of the "first opening time" in the first opening state of the second starting port 8140, the "first waiting time" in the first closing state of the second starting port 8140, the "second opening time" in the second opening state of the second starting port 8140, the "second waiting time" in the second closing state of the second starting port 8140, and the "ending time" in which the second starting port 8140 is closed and the operation of the normal electric role 8146 is terminated. The opening pattern of the normal electric role 8146 is not limited to the above-mentioned configuration, and may be configured to be capable of repeating the opening state and the closing state three or more times, or may be configured to be composed of only one opening state. Furthermore, it may be configured to have an "opening time" in which the first opening of the second starting port 8140 is waited for before the "first opening time".

The main CPU 201 refers to the opening pattern determination table for normal electric roles shown in FIG. 260, and determines the opening pattern of the normal electric role 8146 based on the game state and the selected normal symbol. When the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric role 8146, it transmits to the sub-CPU 301 a normal electric role opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the normal electric role 8146.

According to the opening pattern determination table for normal electric roles shown in Figure 260, when a normal symbol is hit during normal play, regardless of which normal symbol is selected, the opening pattern (91H01H) of the first normal electric role 8146 is determined to be a first opening time of 72 ms, no first wait time, no opening from the second time onwards, and an ending time of 12 ms.

In addition, according to the opening pattern determination table for normal electric devices shown in Figure 260, when a normal symbol is hit during time-saving play, the opening pattern (91H02H) of the second normal electric device 8146 is determined to be a first opening time of 5400 ms, a first waiting time of 120 ms, a second opening time of 72 ms, and an ending time of 12 ms, regardless of which normal symbol is selected.

In this way, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 8146 differs depending on the game state, and in the case of a normal symbol hit in the normal game state, an "unfavorable opening mode (also called a "short opening")" in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 8140 is determined, and in the case of a normal symbol hit in the time-saving game state, an "advantageous opening mode (also called a "long opening")" in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 8140 is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of which normal electric role device 8146 opening pattern is activated, the specified number for normal power is set to one, and when one game ball enters the second start hole 8140 while the opening pattern of the normal electric role device 8146 is in operation (while the second start hole 8140 is open), the operation of the opening pattern of that normal electric role device 8146 ends (the second start hole 8140 closes). In other words, only one game ball can enter the second start hole 8140 for one normal pattern hit, and even if there is 5,400 ms of remaining opening time in the time-saving game state, the second start hole 8140 will close.

In this embodiment, the same opening pattern of the normal electric device 8146 is determined for the same time-saving game state without distinction between the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state, or between the special time-saving game state and the general time-saving game state. However, it may be configured to determine different opening patterns of the normal electric device 8146 for the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state, or between the special time-saving game state and the general time-saving game state.

Furthermore, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 8146 may be different depending on the selected normal symbol. However, it is desirable that when a normal symbol is hit in the normal game state, the opening pattern is a group of "unfavorable opening patterns" compared to when a normal symbol is hit in the time-saving game state, and when a normal symbol is hit in the time-saving game state, the opening pattern is a group of "favorable opening patterns" compared to when a normal symbol is hit in the normal game state.

[10-3-11. Normal pattern variation table]
261 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 261 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in Figure 261 corresponds the game state, the selected normal symbol, the normal symbol variation pattern, and the normal symbol variation display time.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variation display time based on the game state and the selected normal symbol. Then, when the main CPU 201 determines the normal symbol variation pattern, it transmits to the sub-CPU 301 a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern.

According to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 261, in the normal game state, the normal symbol variation display time is determined to be 414 ms, and in the time-saving game state, the normal symbol variation display time is determined to be 408 ms. Also, in this embodiment, the pattern determination time for normal symbols is always determined to be the same time (for example, 540 ms) regardless of the game state or the result of the normal symbol hit determination process.

In this embodiment, the normal game state is configured so that all the same normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol fixed times are determined, but different normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol fixed times may be determined depending on the selected normal symbol. Similarly, in the time-saving game state, the same normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol fixed times are determined, but different normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol fixed times may be determined depending on the selected normal symbol. Furthermore, different normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol fixed times may be determined between the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state, or between the special time-saving game state and the general time-saving game state.

[10-4. Main control processing]
In the eighth pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are the same as those in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23), except for some of the special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and system timer interrupt process. Therefore, the following will explain the special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and system timer interrupt process, and will not explain the other processes executed by the main CPU 201.

Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[10-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 262. Fig. 262 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 262, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S8001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S8001, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the processing of S8001, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the working area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register.

In S8002, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S8001 is 0, i.e., whether the special symbol is in a state of waiting for variable display. If the main CPU 201 determines that the control number of the special symbol is not 0, it transfers processing to S8008, and if it determines that the control number of the special symbol is 0, it transfers processing to S8003.

In S8003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not start information for the second special pattern is stored in the second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203, i.e., whether or not there is a reserved number of second special patterns. If the main CPU 201 determines that start information for the second special pattern is not stored, it transfers processing to S8004, and if it determines that start information for the second special pattern is stored, it transfers processing to S8005.

In S8004, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not start information for the first special pattern is stored in the first special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203, i.e., whether or not there is a reserved number of first special patterns. If the main CPU 201 determines that start information for the first special pattern is not stored, it transfers processing to S8007, and if it determines that start information for the first special pattern is stored, it transfers processing to S8006.

In S8005, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the second special pattern stored in the second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203 to the special pattern determination area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the start information stored in the second special pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the second special pattern start memory area (2) to the second special pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the second special pattern start memory area (1) to the second special pattern start memory area (3).

In S8006, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the first special pattern stored in the first special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203 to the special pattern determination area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the start information stored in the first special pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the first special pattern start memory area (2) to the first special pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the first special pattern start memory area (1) to the first special pattern start memory area (3).

In S8007, if the special symbol start information (number of reserved first and second special symbols) has not been stored in the first and second special symbol start memory areas of the main RAM 203 for a certain period of time, the main CPU 201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 279) during the next system timer interrupt process. When the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demo display command, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demo display performance.

In S8008, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 263. After executing the processing of S8003, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S8001 to S8008) within the interrupt prohibited section.

In this manner, in this embodiment, as the eighth pachinko gaming machine, a priority variable machine in which the special pattern management process is executed with a higher priority than the first special pattern when the start information of the second special pattern is stored has been described, but this is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special pattern is stored, the priority variable machine may be one in which the special pattern management process is executed with a higher priority than the second special pattern, or a sequential variable machine in which the special pattern management process is executed in the order of winning (ball entry order) into the first start port 8120 or the second start port 8140.

[10-4-2. Special symbol management process]
Next, a special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol control process (see Fig. 262) will be described with reference to Fig. 263. Fig. 263 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The numbers ("0" to "7") written in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 263 are the control state numbers of the special symbols that are the subject of the process. The main CPU 201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process that corresponds to the control state number.

In S8011, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the special pattern (special pattern timer counter) is 0. This waiting time for the special pattern is set as the waiting time for various processes in the special pattern management process, and is decremented as the special pattern timer counter within the system timer interrupt process that is performed, for example, at 2 msec intervals. If the main CPU 201 determines that the waiting time for the special pattern is not 0, it ends the special pattern management process and returns the process to the special pattern control process (see FIG. 262), and if it determines that the waiting time for the special pattern is 0, it transfers the process to S8012.

In S8012, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S8012, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8013. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S8013 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S8012.

In S8013, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This S8013 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 264. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S8014.

In S8014, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This S8014 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 266. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S8015.

In S8015, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This S8015 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 268. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8016.

In S8016, the main CPU 201 performs small win game closure processing. This S8016 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this small win game closure processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 271. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S8017.

In S8017, the main CPU 201 performs processing during the opening of the small win game. This processing of S8017 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this processing during the opening of the small win game will be described later with reference to FIG. 272. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S8018.

In S8018, the main CPU 201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process of S8018 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 273. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8019.

In S8019, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening control process. This S8019 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 274. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8020.

In S8020, the main CPU 201 performs a process to end the jackpot game state. This process of S8020 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this process to end the jackpot game state will be described later with reference to FIG. 275.

After completing steps S8013 to S8020, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 262). In this case, the process returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

[10-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 263) will be described with reference to Fig. 264. Fig. 264 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8021, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", it ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 263), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "0", it transfers the process to S8022.

In S8022, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol hit determination process to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss. In this special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 250 is referenced, and a hit determination of the special symbol is made based on the random number value for big hit determination of the special symbol as the starting information of the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination area (0), and a hit/lose determination value data is determined according to the determination result. After executing the process of S8022, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8023.

In S8023, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol. In this special symbol determination process, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 251 is referenced, and the selected symbol and symbol designation command for the special symbol are determined based on the hit/loss determination value data as the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process in S8022 and the symbol random number value of the special symbol as the start information of the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination area (0). After executing the process of S8023, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8024.

In S8024, the main CPU 201 performs a hit type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a hit (big hit or small hit). In this hit type determination process, if the hit determination process for the special symbol is a big hit, one of the big hit type determination tables 1 to 3 shown in FIG. 252 is determined based on the limiter operation flag and the remaining number of limiter times in the number limiter function (the "limiter number counter" of the main RAM 203 described later). Also, if the hit determination process for the special symbol is a small hit, one of the small hit type determination tables 1 to 3 shown in FIG. 253 is determined based on the limiter operation flag and the remaining number of limiter times in the number limiter function (the limiter number counter). Furthermore, in order to set the game state etc. based on the game state at the time of winning after the end of the big win game state, the game state data at the time of winning, which indicates the game state at the time of winning when it is determined that there is a big win or a small win, is set in the game state storage area at the time of winning of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S8024, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8025.

In S8025, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this special symbol variation pattern determination process, a special symbol variation pattern table of either FIG. 255 or FIG. 256 is determined depending on the game state, etc., and the determined special symbol variation pattern table is referenced to determine the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variation pattern command based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and the selected special symbol, etc. Details of this special symbol variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 265. After executing the process of S8025, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8026.

In S8026, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display time setting process to set the variable display time of the special symbol. In this special symbol variable display time setting process, the special symbol variable display time setting process refers to the special symbol variable pattern table determined in the special symbol variable pattern determination process in S8025 above, and determines the variable display time of the special symbol based on the determined special symbol variable pattern. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 sets the determined variable display time of the special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and causes the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 to start variable display of the special symbol. After executing the process of S8026, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8027.

In S8027, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1", after the special symbol variable display start process ends, a special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 263) is performed. After executing the process of S8027, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8028.

In S8028, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, confirmation and update processes of parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203 are performed. Then, a process of reserving transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state is performed. Note that the game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (Figure 279) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S8028, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8029.

In S8029, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for the special symbol effect start command. In this process, the transmission reservation process for the "symbol designation command" and the "special symbol variation pattern command" is performed as the special symbol effect start command. In the pattern designation command transmission reservation process, the symbol designation command determined in S8023 is transmitted. In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation process, the special symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined in S8025 is transmitted so that the type of special symbol can be identified. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 279) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process within the interrupt prohibited section.

[10-4-4. Special symbol variation pattern determination process]
Next, the details of the special symbol variation pattern determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 264) will be described with reference to Fig. 265. Fig. 265 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variation pattern determination process in the eighth pachinko game machine.

In S8025-1, the main CPU 201 refers to the status flag and determines whether or not the current gaming status is a normal gaming status. In other words, it determines whether or not the status flag indicating the normal gaming status is 0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming status is a normal gaming status, it transfers processing to S8025-2, and if it determines that the current gaming status is not a normal gaming status (i.e., it is in a time-saving gaming status), it transfers processing to S8025-3.

In S8025-2, if the current gaming state is a normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 255(a). After executing the process of S8025-2, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-3, the main CPU 201 refers to the state flag and determines whether the current game state (time-shortened game state) is the B time-shortened game state. That is, it determines whether the state flag indicating the B time-shortened game state is 2. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current game state is the B time-shortened game state, it transfers processing to S8025-4, and if it determines that the current game state is not the B time-shortened game state (that is, it is the A time-shortened game state), it transfers processing to S8025-5.

In S8025-4, if the current gaming state is the B time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. 255(b). After executing the process of S8025-4, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-5, the main CPU 201 refers to the special time-saving flag and determines whether or not the current game state (A time-saving game state) is a special time-saving game state. That is, it determines whether or not the special time-saving flag indicating a special time-saving game state is 1. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current game state is a special time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S8025-6, and if it determines that the current game state is not a special time-saving game state (that is, it is a general time-saving game state), it transfers processing to S8025-7.

In S8025-6, if the current gaming state is a special time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. 255(b). After executing the process of S8025-6, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-7, when the main CPU 201 is in the general time-saving game state, it determines whether the remaining number of jackpot limiter times (the "limiter number counter" in the main RAM 203 described later) is 91 or more. If the main CPU 201 determines that the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 91 or more, it transfers processing to S8025-8, and if it determines that the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is not 91 or more (i.e., the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 90 or less), it transfers processing to S8025-9.

In S8025-8, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 256(a). After executing the process of S8025-8, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-9, when the main CPU 201 is in the general time-saving game state, it determines whether the remaining number of jackpot limiter times (the "limiter number counter" in the main RAM 203 described later) is between 1 and 90. If the main CPU 201 determines that the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is between 1 and 90, it transfers processing to S8025-10, and if it determines that the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is not between 1 and 90 (i.e., the remaining number of jackpot limiter times = 0), it transfers processing to S8025-11.

In S8025-10, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 256(b). After executing the process of S8025-10, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-11, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 256(c). After executing the process of S8025-11, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-12, the main CPU 201 refers to the variation pattern table of the determined special symbol, and determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the type of special symbol (type of starting information), the result of the special symbol winning determination process in S8022, the selected special symbol, and the reach determination random number value and effect selection random number value, etc., as the starting information of the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination area (0). After executing the process of S8025-12, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8025-13.

In S8025-13, the main CPU 201 refers to the determined special symbol variation pattern table and determines the special symbol variation pattern command based on the determined special symbol variation pattern. After executing the process of S8025-13, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variation pattern determination process and moves the process to S8026 of the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 264).

[10-4-5. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 263) will be described with reference to Fig. 266. Fig. 266 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8041, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", it ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 263), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "1", it transfers the process to S8042.

In S8042, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol determination time setting process to set the symbol determination time for the special symbol. In this special symbol determination time setting process, the special symbol determination time (e.g., 540 ms) is determined based on the game state and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or lose). The main CPU 201 then sets the determined special symbol determination time to the special symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and causes the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 to stop displaying the special symbol. After executing the process of S8042, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8043.

The time it takes for the special symbol to be determined may be determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, or based only on the game state. Furthermore, a single predetermined symbol determination time (e.g., 540 ms) may be determined.

In S8043, the main CPU 201 performs time-saving management processing. In the eighth pachinko gaming machine, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished, a process is performed to update the "time-saving count counter" for counting the number of time-saving times as a condition for ending the time-saving game state, and the "ceiling counter" for counting the number of times the special symbol is variably displayed, which transitions to the B time-saving game state. When the time-saving count counter = 0, transition control from the time-saving game state to the normal game state is performed, and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, transition control to the B time-saving game state is performed. Details of this time-saving management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 267. After executing the process of S8043, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8044.

In S8044, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", after the special symbol variable display end process is completed, the special symbol game determination process (see S8015 in FIG. 263) is performed. After executing the process of S8044, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8045.

In S8045, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 279) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S8045, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8046.

In S8046, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol counter. As described above in the explanation of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol has been determined (the number of times a special symbol game has been played), but it may also manage the number of games of a special symbol game played under a specific condition, such as the number of times remaining in the special symbol mode or the number of times remaining in the time-saving mode. After executing the process of S8046, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 263).

[10-4-6. Time-saving management process]
Next, a time-saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 266) will be described with reference to FIG. 267. FIG. 267 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving management process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8043-1, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving count counter update process to update the time-saving count counter. In this time-saving count counter update process, if a time-saving game state is set (if state flag = 1 or 2 is set), the "time-saving count counter" in the main RAM 203 is updated by subtracting 1. After executing the process of S8043-1, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8043-2.

In S8043-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving counter = 0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the time-saving counter = 0, it transfers processing to S8043-3, and if it determines that the time-saving counter = 0, it transfers processing to S8043-4.

In S8043-3, the main CPU 201 clears the time-saving information and transitions from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. Here, the time-saving information is cleared by clearing (setting to 0) the status flag, the special time-saving flag, the time-saving count counter, and the small win count counter described below. After executing the process of S8043-3, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8043-4.

In S8043-4, the main CPU 201 performs a ceiling counter update process to update the ceiling counter. In this ceiling counter update process, the ceiling counter is updated by adding 1. After executing the process of S8043-4, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8043-5.

In S8043-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling counter is equal to the ceiling value (for example, 999 times). If the main CPU 201 determines that the ceiling counter is equal to the ceiling value, it transfers processing to S8043-6, and if it determines that the ceiling counter is not equal to the ceiling value, it transfers processing to S8043-9.

In S8043-6, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter (sets it to 0). After executing the process of S8043-6, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8043-7.

In S8043-7, the main CPU 201 performs a B time-saving game state setting process to transition to the B time-saving game state. In this B time-saving game state setting process, the state flag indicating the B time-saving game state is set to 2, and the number of small wins won is set to 255, and the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000 as the "B time-saving end condition" so as to transition to the "special time-saving game state". Then, the special time-saving flag is set to 1 so that it is possible to identify that the special time-saving game state is in effect. Note that in the B time-saving game state setting process, the number of small wins won may be set to 1, the number of time-saving times may be set to 10,000, and the special time-saving flag may be set to 0 so as to transition to the "normal time-saving game state". After executing the process of S8043-7, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8043-8.

In S8043-8, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a time-saving transition command when starting the B time-saving gaming state. The time-saving transition command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 279) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S8043-8, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8043-9.

In S8043-9, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S8043-9, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving management process and returns the process to the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 266).

[10-4-7. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 263) will be described with reference to FIG. 268. FIG. 268 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8051, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 263), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "2", it transfers the process to S8052.

In S8052, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbol and determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is the selected special symbol corresponding to a jackpot. If the main CPU 201 determines that a jackpot has been reached, it transfers processing to S8054, and if it determines that a jackpot has not been reached, it transfers processing to S8061.

In S8054, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a jackpot. In this external signal processing for a jackpot, the selected special symbol is referenced, and a "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is generated as an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 when a jackpot occurs. The generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is then output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the processing of S8054, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S8055.

In S8055, the main CPU 201 performs the first route jackpot start preparation setting process. In this first route jackpot start preparation setting process, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 252 determined in S8024 above is referenced, the maximum number of rounds is determined based on the "special symbol selected" of the jackpot, and the determined maximum number of rounds is set as the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds in the main RAM 203. Furthermore, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 252 determined in S8024 above is referenced, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "special symbol selected" of the jackpot, and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S8055, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8056.

In S8056, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot status display process. In this jackpot status display process, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right hit instruction data that notifies the player to hit to the right is set. After executing the process of S8056, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8057.

In S8057, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In the game status management processing when it is determined that a big win has occurred, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the status flag, the special time-saving flag, the time-saving count counter, and the small win count counter. After executing the processing of S8057, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S8058.

In S8058, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S8058, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8059.

In S8059, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the process of preparing to open the large prize opening (see S8018 in FIG. 263) will be performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. After executing the process of S8059, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8059.

In S8060, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot start display command. After executing the process of S8060, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 263).

In S8061, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbol and determines whether or not it is a small win, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is the selected special symbol corresponding to a small win. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is a small win, it transfers processing to S8063, and if it determines that it is not a small win (i.e., a miss), it transfers processing to S8071.

In S8063, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a small win. In this external signal processing for a small win, the selected special symbol is referenced, and when the selected second special symbol "z5, z6" corresponding to the "V small win" is determined, a "small win signal" is generated as an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184. The generated small win signal is then output to the external terminal board 184. In this embodiment, the "small win signal" is not generated when the selected second special symbol "z7" corresponding to the "fall small win" is determined, but the "small win signal" may be generated even when the selected second special symbol "z7" corresponding to the "fall small win" is determined. After executing the processing of S8063, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S8064.

In S8064, the main CPU 201 performs a small win start preparation setting process. In this small win start preparation setting process, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 253 determined in S8024 above is referenced, the maximum number of openings is determined based on the "selected special symbol", and the determined maximum number of openings is set as the upper limit of the number of small win openings in the main RAM 203. Next, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 253 determined in S8024 above is referenced, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "selected special symbol", and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is set as the waiting time for the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Furthermore, by referring to the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 253 determined in S8024 above, the opening waiting time is determined as the opening pattern of the V winning hole 8156 based on the "selected special pattern", and the determined opening waiting time is set in the V winning hole closing timer counter in the main RAM 203, and the V operation flag is turned on. Note that the V winning control process for the V shutter solenoid 8160 that opens and closes the V winning hole 8156 is performed in the system timer interrupt process (FIGS. 279 and 280) described later. After executing the process of S8064, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8066.

In S8065, the main CPU 201 performs a small win status display process. In this small win status display process, right hit instruction data is set to notify the player that a right hit is to be performed. After executing the process of S8065, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8066.

In S8066, the main CPU 201 performs a small win count update process in which the number of small wins that have been won is counted as a condition for ending the time-saving game state, and the small win count update process updates the "small win count counter" that indicates the remaining number of small wins. Details of this small win count update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 269. After executing the process of S8066, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8067.

In S8067, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S8067, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8068.

In S8068, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the small win game closure process (see S8016 in FIG. 263) will be performed after the special symbol game determination process ends. After executing the process of S8068, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8069.

In S8069, the main CPU 201 processes the transmission reservation process for the small win start display command. After executing the process of S8069, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 263).

In S8071, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 270. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 263).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S8051 to S8071) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[10-4-8. Small win count update process]
Next, referring to Fig. 269, a small win winning count update process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol game determination process (see Fig. 268) will be described. Fig. 269 is a flow chart showing an example of a small win winning count update process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8066-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether the current game state is a time-saving game state, i.e., whether the state flag is 1 or 2. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current game state is a time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S8066-2, and if it determines that the current game state is not a time-saving game state, it ends the small win count update processing and transfers processing to S8067 of the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 268).

In S8066-2, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the "small win count counter" in the main RAM 203 to update it. After executing the process of S8066-2, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8066-3.

In S8066-3, the main CPU 201 determines whether the small win count counter is 0 or not. If the main CPU 201 determines that the small win count counter is 0, it transfers the process to S8066-4, and if it determines that the small win count counter is not 0, it ends the small win count update process and transfers the process to S8067 of the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 268).

In S8066-4, the main CPU 201 clears the time-saving information and transitions from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. Here, the time-saving information is cleared by clearing (setting to 0) the status flag, special time-saving flag, time-saving count counter, and small win count counter. After executing the process of S8066-4, the main CPU 201 ends the small win count update process, and moves the process to S8067 of the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 268).

[10-4-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 268) will be described with reference to Fig. 270. Fig. 270 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game ending process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8072, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". By carrying out the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" in this way, the current special symbol game ends, and it becomes possible to carry out the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game. After carrying out the process of S8072, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8073.

In S8073, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. In addition, in the game state designation parameter setting process in the special pattern game end process, the start information stored in the special pattern determination area (0) in the main RAM 203 is cleared. After executing the process of S8073, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8074.

In S8074, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 279) during the next system timer interrupt process. After processing S8074, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 268).

[10-4-10. Processing during small win game closure]
Next, referring to Fig. 271, a small win game closing process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 263) will be described. Fig. 271 is a flow chart showing an example of a small win game closing process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8081, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", it ends the small win game closure process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 263), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "3", it transfers the process to S8082.

In S8082, the main CPU 201 loads the "small win opening count counter value." The "small win opening count counter" is a counter that counts the number of small win openings. The count value of the small win opening count counter (small win opening count counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S8082, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8083.

In S8083, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded small win opening count counter value is the upper limit of the small win opening count. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is the upper limit of the small win opening count, it transfers processing to S8089, and if it determines that it is not the upper limit of the small win opening count, it transfers processing to S8084.

In S8084, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 8151 in the small win game state (the number of winning balls in the second large prize opening 8151) is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value of the second large prize opening counter counted by the second large prize opening count switch 8152 is the predetermined maximum number of winning balls for the second large prize opening 8151 (for example, 10 balls). If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of winning balls in the second large prize opening 8151 is not the maximum number of winning balls, it transfers the process to S8085, and if it determines that the number of winning balls in the second large prize opening 8151 is the maximum number of winning balls, it transfers the process to S8089.

In S8085, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the small win opening count counter value. After executing the process of S8085, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8086.

In S8086, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening setting process to open the second large prize opening 8151. In this second large prize opening setting process, the small prize type determination table shown in FIG. 253 determined in S8024 is referenced, and the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 8151 is determined based on the "selected special pattern" of the small prize and the current opening count (small prize opening count counter value), and the determined maximum opening time is set as the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. Then, second large prize opening opening control data is generated for the second special electric solenoid 8155 to open the second large prize opening 8151. After executing the process of S8086, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8087.

In S8087, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4", after the small win game closed process ends, the small win game open process (see FIG. 272) is performed. After executing the process of S8087, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8088.

In S8088, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. The main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of confirming and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S8088, the main CPU 201 ends the small win game closure process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 263).

In S8089, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a V winning has been detected. In this process, it determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the V winning port 8156 within a specified time (i.e., whether or not there has been detection by the V winning port switch 8157). If the main CPU 201 determines that a V winning has been detected, it transfers the process to S8090, and if it determines that a V winning has not been detected, it transfers the process to S8098.

In S8090, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a jackpot from the second route. In this processing, the selected special symbol is referenced, and a "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is generated as an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 in the event of a jackpot. The generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is then output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the processing of S8090, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S8101.

In S8091, the main CPU 201 performs the second route jackpot start preparation setting process. In this second route jackpot start preparation setting process, first, based on the limiter operation flag and the remaining number of limiter times in the number limiter function (the "limiter number counter" of the main RAM 203 described later), one of the jackpot type determination tables 1 to 3 shown in FIG. 252 is determined. Then, referring to the determined jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 252, the maximum number of rounds is determined based on the "selected special pattern" of the jackpot, and the determined maximum number of rounds is set as the upper limit value of the number of jackpot rounds in the main RAM 203. Furthermore, referring to the determined jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 252, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "selected special pattern" of the jackpot, and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is set as the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. After executing processing of S8101, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S8092.

In S8092, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the jackpot game state from the second route starts from the second round of round play. After executing the process of S8092, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8093.

In S8093, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot status display process. In this jackpot status display process, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right hit instruction data that notifies the player to hit to the right is set. After executing the process of S8093, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8094.

In S8094, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In the game status management processing when it is determined that a jackpot has been hit, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the status flag, the special time-saving flag, the time-saving count counter, and the small jackpot win count counter. After executing the processing of S8094, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S8095.

In S8095, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S8095, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8096.

In S8096, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5." By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5," the large prize opening preparation process (FIG. 263) will be performed after the small prize game closure process ends. After executing the process of S8096, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8097.

In S8097, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a V hit start display command. After executing the process of S8097, the main CPU 201 ends the process during the small hit game opening and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 263).

In S8098, the main CPU 201 performs a small win end preparation setting process. In this small win end preparation setting process, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 253 determined in S8024 above is referenced, the ED waiting time (ending time) is determined based on the "selected special pattern" of the small win, and the determined ED waiting time (ending time) is set as the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S8098, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8099.

In S8099, the main CPU 201 performs processing to reserve the transmission of a small win end display command. After executing processing in S8099, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S8100.

In S8100, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 270 is performed. After executing the processing of S8100, the main CPU 201 ends the small win game closure processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 263).

[10-4-11. Processing during small win game opening]
Next, referring to Fig. 272, a small win game open process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 263) will be described. Fig. 272 is a flow chart showing an example of a small win game open process in the eighth pachinko game machine.

In S8101, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", it ends the small win game open process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 263), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "4", it transfers the process to S8102.

In S8102, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 8151 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the second large prize opening opening setting process (see S8086 in FIG. 271) has elapsed. If the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 8151 has not elapsed, it ends the small win game opening process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 263). Also, if the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 8151 has elapsed, it transfers the process to S8103.

In S8103, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening closure setting process to close the second large prize opening 8151. In this second large prize opening closure setting process, the small prize type determination table shown in FIG. 253 determined in S8024 above is referenced, and the current closure time of the second large prize opening 8151 is determined based on the "selected special pattern" of the small prize and the current number of openings (small prize opening count counter value), and the determined closure time is set as the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. Then, second large prize opening closure control data is generated for the second special electric solenoid 8155 to close the second large prize opening 8151. After executing the process of S8103, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8104.

In S8104, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", after the small win game open process ends, the small win game closed process (see FIG. 271) is performed. After executing the process of S8104, the main CPU 201 ends the small win game open process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 263).

[10-4-12. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 273, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 263) will be described. Fig. 273 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8111, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5," it ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 263), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "5," it transfers the process to S8112.

In S8112, the main CPU 201 loads the "round counter value." The "round counter" is a counter that counts the number of rounds played in a jackpot game state. The count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S8112, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8113.

In S8113, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded round counter value is the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds. If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of jackpot rounds is the upper limit, it transfers processing to S8114, and if it determines that the number of jackpot rounds is not the upper limit, it transfers processing to S8118.

In S8114, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end preparation setting process. In this jackpot end preparation setting process, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 252 determined in S8024 or S8101 above is referenced, an ED waiting time (ending time) is determined based on the "selected special pattern" of the jackpot, and the determined ED waiting time (ending time) is set as the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S8114, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8115.

In S8115, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7." In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7," the jackpot game state end process (FIG. 263) is performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing S8115, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8116.

In S8116, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S8116, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8117.

In S8117, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command. The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 279) during the next system timer interrupt process. After processing S8117, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 263).

In S8118, the main CPU 201 performs processing to add 1 to the round counter value. After executing processing of S8118, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S8119.

In S8119, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening setting process to open the first large prize opening 8131. In this first large prize opening setting process, the main CPU 201 refers to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 252 determined in S8024 or S8101 above, and determines the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 8131 in this round based on the "selected special pattern" of the jackpot and the current round number (round counter value), and sets the determined maximum opening time to the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. Then, it generates first large prize opening opening control data for the first special power solenoid 8135 to open the first large prize opening 8131. After executing the process of S8119, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8120.

In S8120, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6", the large prize opening opening control process (see FIG. 263) will be performed after the large prize opening opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S8120, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8121.

In S8121, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S8121, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8122.

In S8122, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 279) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S8122, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 263).

[10-4-13. Large prize opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 274, a special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 263) will be described. Fig. 274 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the eighth pachinko game machine.

In S8131, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6," it ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 263), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "6," it transfers the process to S8132.

In S8132, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of winning game balls that entered the first large prize opening 8131 in one round when the first large prize opening 8131 was opened is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value of the first large prize opening counter counted by the first large prize opening count switch 8132 is the predetermined maximum number of winning balls for the first large prize opening 8131 (e.g., 10 balls).

If the main CPU 201 determines in S8132 that the number of winnings at the first large winning slot 8131 is not the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to S8133, and if the main CPU 201 determines in S8132 that the number of winnings at the first large winning slot 8131 is the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to S8134.

In S8133, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 8131 in one round has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the opening setting process for the first large prize opening (see S8119 in FIG. 273) has elapsed.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S8133 that the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 8131 has not elapsed, it ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 263). If the main CPU 201 determines in S8133 that the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 8131 has elapsed, it transfers the process to S8134.

In S8134, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening closure setting process to close the first large prize opening 8131. In this first large prize opening closure setting process, the main CPU 201 refers to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 252 determined in S8024 or S8101 above, and determines the closure time of the first large prize opening 8131 in this round based on the "special symbol selection symbol" of the jackpot and the current round number (round counter value), and sets the determined closure time to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 generates first large prize opening closure control data for the first special electric solenoid 8135 to close the first large prize opening 8131. After executing the process of S8134, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8135.

In S8135, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the large prize opening control processing is completed, the large prize opening opening preparation processing (see FIG. 273) is performed again. After executing the processing of S8135, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S8136.

In S8136, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S8136, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8137.

In S8137, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 279) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S8137, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 263).

[10-4-14. Big win game state end processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 275, a big win game state end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 263) will be described. Fig. 275 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win game state end process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8141, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7," it ends the jackpot game state end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 263), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "7," it transfers the process to S8142.

In S8142, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot game information initialization process. In this jackpot game information initialization process, various flags and data used in the jackpot game state and the values of various counters (e.g., round counter, big prize slot winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing S8142, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8143.

In S8143, the main CPU 201 performs a post-jackpot state setting process to set the game state after the end of the jackpot game state. In this post-jackpot state setting process, one of the game state related setting tables 1 to 4 shown in FIG. 254 is selected based on the remaining number of jackpot limiter times (the value of the "limiter number counter" described later), and the game state (state flag, number of small jackpot wins, number of time-saving times, special time-saving flag) is set based on the game state at the time of the win and the selected special pattern by referring to the selected game state related setting table. After executing S8143, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8145.

In this embodiment, first, the limiter operation flag is referenced, and if the limiter operation flag = 0, the game state related setting table 1 shown in Figure 254 (a) is determined. Also, if the limiter operation flag = 1, when the "limiter number counter" is 91 or more (when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 91 or more), the game state related setting table 2 shown in Figure 254 (b) is determined, when the "limiter number counter" is 1 to 90 (when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 1 to 90), the game state related setting table 3 shown in Figure 254 (c) is determined, and when the "limiter number counter" is 0 (when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 0), the game state related setting table 4 shown in Figure 254 (d) is determined. Then, by referring to the determined game state related setting table, the game state (state flag, number of small wins, number of time-saving times, special time-saving flag) will be set based on the selected special pattern.

In this embodiment, when the limiter count counter = 0 and the game state related setting table 4 shown in FIG. 254 (d) is determined, the "state flag = 0" is set to set the normal game state for all selected special symbols, and the game will be forcibly switched to the normal game state after the big win game state ends.

In S8144, the main CPU 201 performs a limiter information update process to set and update the limiter information, including a "limiter activation flag" and a "limiter count counter" that corresponds to the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts and counts the number of consecutive jackpots in the time-saving game mode. Details of this limiter information update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 276. After executing the process of S8144, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8145.

In S8145, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 270 is performed. After executing the processing of S8145, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot game state end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 218).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 set an interrupt prohibited section and perform the above-mentioned jackpot game state end processing within the interrupt prohibited section.

[10-4-15. Limiter information update process]
Next, the limiter information update process executed by the main CPU 201 during the big win game state end process (see FIG. 275) will be described with reference to Fig. 276. Fig. 276 is a flow chart showing an example of the limiter information update process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8144-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether the selected special symbol at the end of the jackpot game state is the selected special symbol for transitioning to the time-saving game state. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is the selected special symbol for transitioning to the time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S8144-4, and if it determines that it is not the selected special symbol for transitioning to the time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S8144-2.

In S8144-2, the main CPU 201 clears the limiter count counter in the main RAM 203 (sets the limiter count counter to 0). After executing the process of S8144-2, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8144-3.

In S8144-3, the main CPU 201 sets the limiter activation flag to 0. After executing the process of S8144-3, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter information update process and transfers the process to S8145 for the jackpot game state end process (see FIG. 275).

In S8144-4, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is counting the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to a jackpot game state in the time-saving game state, i.e., whether or not the limiter activation flag is 1. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is counting the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to a jackpot game state in the time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S8144-7, and if it determines that it is not counting the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to a jackpot game state in the time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S8144-5.

In S8144-5, if the main CPU 201 is not counting the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to the jackpot game state in the time-saving game state (if the limiter activation flag is 0), the main CPU 201 performs a limiter number setting process to set a limiter number in the limiter number counter in the main RAM 203. In this limiter number setting process, the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 254(a) is referenced, the limiter number is determined based on the selected special symbol, and the determined limiter number is set in the limiter number counter. After executing the process of S8144-5, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8144-6.

In S8144-6, if the main CPU 201 sets a new limiter count, it sets the limiter activation flag to 1. After executing the process of S8144-6, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter information update process and moves the process to S8145 for the jackpot game state end process (see FIG. 275).

In S8144-7, if the main CPU 201 is counting the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to the jackpot game state in the time-saving game state (if the limiter activation flag is 1), it performs a limiter count subtraction process. In this limiter count subtraction process, it determines one of the game state related setting tables 1 to 4 shown in FIG. 254 based on the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts (the current value of the limiter count counter), and determines the limiter count subtraction value based on the selected special pattern by referring to the determined game state related setting table. Then, it subtracts the determined limiter count subtraction value from the limiter count counter in the main RAM 203 to update it. After executing the process of S8144-7, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter information update process and moves the process to S8145 of the jackpot game state end process (see FIG. 275).

[10-6-16. Normal symbol control process]
Next, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 277. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in Fig. 277, the main CPU 201 stores the start information of the normal symbol and judges whether the judgment start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

Figure 277 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol control process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the numbers ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in Figure 277 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

In S8200, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the normal pattern is 0. This waiting time for the normal pattern is set as the waiting time for various processes in the normal pattern control process, and is decremented as a normal pattern timer counter in the system timer interrupt process that is performed at 2 msec intervals, for example. If the main CPU 201 determines that the waiting time for the normal pattern is not 0, it ends the normal pattern control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process, and if it determines that the waiting time for the normal pattern is 0, it transfers the process to S8201.

In S8201, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S8201, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8210. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S8210 and subsequent processes based on the control state number read in the process of S8201.

In S8210, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This S8210 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". Details of this normal symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 278. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S8220.

In S8220, the main CPU 201 performs processing to end the variable display of normal symbols. This processing of S8220 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S8230.

In this normal symbol variable display end process, the main CPU 201 judges whether the normal symbol variable display time has ended, and when it judges that the normal symbol variable display time has ended, it sets the normal symbol's predetermined symbol determination time (e.g., 540 msec) to the normal symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and sets the normal symbol control state number to "2". If the normal symbol variable display time has not ended, it holds the normal symbol control state number at "1" and waits for the normal symbol variable display time to end.

In S8230, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol gameplay determination processing. This S8230 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S8240.

In this normal symbol game judgment process, the main CPU 201 performs a judgment process of the selected symbol (e.g., normal symbol winning or normal symbol losing) of the stopped normal symbol. Then, if the selected symbol of the stopped normal symbol corresponds to a normal symbol winning, the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric device 8146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol winning judgment process is a losing, the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric device 8146 is not performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0".

In the process of setting the opening pattern of the normal electric device 8146, the opening pattern (number of times to open, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the normal electric device 8146 is determined based on the game state and the selected normal symbol by referring to the opening pattern determination table of the normal electric device shown in FIG. 260, and the determined opening pattern is set. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub-CPU 301 a normal electric device opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the normal electric device 8146.

In S8240, the main CPU 201 performs the normal electric role release process. This S8240 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8250.

In this normal electric device opening process, the main CPU 201 opens the second start hole 8140 according to the opening pattern of the normal electric device 8146 determined in the normal symbol game play determination process of S8230 above, and closes the second start hole 8140 when a specified number of game balls for normal power (e.g., one ball) enter the second start hole 8140 or when all opening patterns of the normal electric device 8146 have ended. Then, when the opening process of the normal electric device 8146 has ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4".

In S8250, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit end processing. This S8250 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol hit end processing, it sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "0", ends the normal symbol control processing, and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see Figures 20 to 23).

In this normal symbol winning end process, the main CPU 201 performs a process to reset (clear) various parameters related to the normal symbol determined in steps S8210 to S8240 above, and various random number values stored in the normal symbol determination area.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the normal symbol control process (S8200 to S8250) described above within the interrupt prohibited section.

[10-6-17. Normal symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to Fig. 278, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in the normal symbol control process (see Fig. 277) will be described. Fig. 278 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal symbol variable display start process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 278, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the normal pattern is "0" (S8211).

If it is determined in S8211 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 277). On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8212.

In S8212, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the start information of the normal pattern. In this process, the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (2) to the normal pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (3). After executing the process of S8212, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8213.

In S8213, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol winning judgment process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 258, and determines winning/losing judgment value data ("normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol losing") based on the game state and the normal symbol winning judgment random number value stored in the normal symbol judgment area (0). After executing S8213, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8214.

In S8214, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 259, and determines the "selected normal symbol" based on the winning/losing determination value data (the result of the normal symbol winning/losing determination process) and the normal symbol random number value stored in the normal symbol determination area (0). After executing S8214, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8215.

In S8215, the main CPU 201 performs processing to determine the normal symbol variation pattern. In this processing, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 261, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and normal symbol variation display time based on the game state and the selected normal symbol. After executing the processing of S8215, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S8216.

In S8216, the main CPU 201 executes a process for setting the variable display time of the normal pattern. In this process, the variable display time of the normal pattern determined in the variable pattern determination process of the normal pattern (S8215) is set to the waiting time of the normal pattern in the main RAM 203, and the normal pattern display unit 161 starts displaying the variable normal pattern. After executing the process of S8216, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8217.

In S8217, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after this normal symbol variable display start process is completed, a normal symbol variable display end process (see S8220 in FIG. 277) is performed. After executing the process of S8217, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8218.

In S8218, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the normal symbol variation pattern command. The normal symbol variation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 279) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[10-6-18. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to Fig. 279 and Fig. 280, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt period of, for example, 2 msec will be described. Fig. 279 and Fig. 280 are a flow chart showing an example of the system timer interrupt process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8311, the main CPU 201 performs a process of saving the protected register. After executing the process of S8311, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8312.

In S8312, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off. If the main CPU 201 determines that the XINT detection flag is not off (i.e., a power interruption has been detected), it transfers processing to S8332, and if the main CPU 201 determines that the XINT detection flag is off (i.e., a power interruption has not been detected), it transfers processing to S8313.

In S8313, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing S8313, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S8314.

In S8314, the main CPU 201 performs processing to read the state of the input port of the I/O port 205. After executing processing of S8314, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S8315.

In S8315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted based on the game permission flag. The game permission flag indicates a game permitted state when it is on (=1), and indicates a game not permitted state when it is off (=0). As explained in the first pachinko game machine, the game permission flag is a flag that is set to off (=game not permitted state) as the start-up state when the power is turned on during recovery from power interruption and during RAM clearing, and is set to on (=play permitted state) after power is restored and RAM clearing is executed. If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is permitted, it transfers the process to S8317, and if it determines that the game is not permitted, it transfers the process to S8332.

In S8317, the main CPU 201 executes processing to increment the value of the interrupt counter by 1. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) interrupt prohibited intervals during the main control main processing (see Figures 20 to 23), and the count value of the interrupt counter is stored in an interrupt counter area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing processing of S8317, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S8318.

In S8318, the main CPU 201 performs an update process for the interrupt cycle timer. In the update process for the interrupt cycle timer, various timer counters in the working area of the main RAM 203, such as the special pattern timer counter, the normal pattern timer counter, the V prize opening timer counter, and the V prize opening timer counter, are decremented. After executing the process of S8318, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8319.

In S8319, the main CPU 201 performs a random number update process. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a jackpot of a random value for determining a jackpot, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are an important factor in determining the number of balls dispensed. After executing the process of S8319, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8320.

In S8320, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. Details of this switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 281. After executing the processing of S8320, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S8321.

In S8321, the main CPU 201 executes a winning information command setting process. In this process, a winning information command (payout information) setting process is performed. After executing S8321, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8322.

In S8322, if the V operation flag is on, the main CPU 201 performs a V winning control process to open and close the V winning hole 8156. In this V winning control process, if the V operation flag is on and the opening waiting time has elapsed (V winning hole closing timer counter = 0), the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 253 determined in S8024 above is referenced, and the opening time is determined as the opening pattern of the V winning hole 8156 based on the "selected special pattern", and the determined opening time is set in the V winning hole opening timer counter in the main RAM 203, and V winning hole opening control data for opening the V winning hole 8156 is output to the V shutter solenoid 8160. The V winning hole opening control data is continuously output unless the V winning hole opening timer counter is 0. Then, when the V operation flag is on and the V prize opening control data is being output, if the opening time has elapsed (V prize opening timer counter = 0), the output of the V prize opening control data is stopped and the V operation flag is turned off. After executing the process of S8322, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8323.

In S8323, the main CPU 201 refers to the "cumulative jackpot payout ball counter" which counts the cumulative number of jackpot payout balls of game balls paid out in a jackpot game state per day, and determines whether the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is 99900 or more. If the main CPU 201 determines that the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is 99900 or more, it transfers processing to S8324, and if it determines that the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is not 99900 or more, it transfers processing to S8328.

The "cumulative jackpot ball output counter" is a counter in the working area of the main RAM 203, and is configured to be initialized when the power is turned on (starting from 0 when the power is turned on). The "cumulative jackpot ball output counter" may also be configured not to be initialized when the power is turned on, but to be initialized each time the corresponding number of game balls fired or outs (e.g., 3,000 balls) are counted in a day.

In S8324, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a "play-disabled state preparation command" to notify the display device 7, speaker 32, etc. that a transition to a play-disabled state will soon occur. After executing the process of S8324, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8325.

In this embodiment, the game disallowed state preparation command is sent when the cumulative jackpot payout number, which is the condition for switching to the game disallowed state, is 99,900 or more, which is 100 less than 100,000 (100,000). However, the game disallowed state preparation command may be sent when the cumulative jackpot payout number is less than the cumulative jackpot payout number (100,000) which is the condition for switching to the game disallowed state, and is equal to or greater than the cumulative jackpot payout number (100,000) which is the condition for switching to the game disallowed state minus the maximum payout number that can be paid out in one jackpot game state (for example, 10R x 10 counts x 15 prize balls = 1,500).

In S8325, the main CPU 201 refers to the "cumulative jackpot payout ball counter" and determines whether the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is greater than or equal to 100,000. If the main CPU 201 determines that the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is greater than or equal to 100,000, it transfers processing to S8326, and if it determines that the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is not greater than or equal to 100,000, it transfers processing to S8328.

In S8326, the main CPU 201 performs a game disallowed state setting process to transition to a game disallowed state as the operation of the ball payout limiter function. In this game disallowed state setting process, the game permission flag is turned off (=0), the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is set to 0, and the special symbol control state number is set to 0 to end the special symbol game. Furthermore, game disallowed information is output to the payout/launch control circuit 400 to control the stopping of the launching of game balls by the launching device 6 and the prohibition of the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82. The game disallowed state will then transition to a game allowed state by clearing the RAM. After executing the process of S8326, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8327.

In S8327, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a "game disallowed state command" to notify the display device 7, speaker 32, etc. that a transition to a game disallowed state has occurred. After executing the process of S8327, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8328.

In this way, according to this embodiment, when the cumulative number of game balls paid out in a jackpot game state per day reaches the number of balls that can be dispensed at any one time (for example, 100,000 balls), the game state is forcibly shifted from the jackpot game state to a game non-permitted state, and the game state after the jackpot game state ends can be partially restricted.

In this embodiment, when the cumulative number of balls dispensed from a jackpot reaches the limit number of balls dispensed, the machine is forcibly switched from the jackpot game state to a non-playing state. However, it may be configured to forcibly switch to the normal game state after the jackpot game state ends when the cumulative number of balls dispensed from a jackpot reaches the limit number of balls dispensed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the game is not permitted, various switches through which game balls enter or pass (excluding the backup clear switch 176, etc.) are disabled, and the launch of game balls from the launching device 6 and the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82 are prohibited. However, it may be configured to at least one of disable various switches, prohibit the launch of game balls from the launching device 6 and prohibit the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82.

In addition, in this embodiment, the machine is configured to transition to a state in which play is not permitted when the cumulative number of balls dispensed from a jackpot reaches 100,000 (one hundred thousand balls) or more, but the cumulative number of balls dispensed from a jackpot that transitions to a state in which play is not permitted can be freely modified as appropriate.

In S8328, the main CPU 201 performs a performance control command transmission process. In this process, the command that has been scheduled for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300. After executing the process of S8328, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8329.

In S8329, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing S8329, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8330.

At S8330, the main CPU 201 performs a performance display monitor control process. In this process, game judgment process, prize ball addition judgment process, display content update process for the performance display monitor 170, etc. are performed. The data stored in this process is stored in an area separate from (outside) the working area in which data necessary for game progress is stored, that is, in an area that is backed up and where the data is not cleared even if, for example, the RAM is cleared. After executing the process of S8330, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8331.

In S8331, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the registers that were saved in S8329. After executing the process of S8331, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8332.

In S8332, the main CPU 201 performs the process of restoring the protection registers that were saved in S8311, and ends the system timer interrupt process.

[10-4-19. Switch input detection process]
Next, a switch input detection process executed by the main CPU 201 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 279) will be described with reference to Fig. 281. Fig. 281 is a flow chart showing an example of the switch input detection process in the eighth pachinko game machine.

Compared to the first pachinko game machine, the eighth pachinko game machine has the additional configuration of a first large prize slot count switch 8132, a second large prize slot count switch 8152, and a V prize slot switch 8157, and therefore some of the above processing has been added.

In S8401, the main CPU 201 executes the first start port winning detection process. After executing the process of S8401, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8402.

In this first start port winning detection process, when the first start port switch 8121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start port 8120, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the first start port 8120 and judges whether there is free space in the first special pattern start memory area (1) to the first special pattern start memory area (4). When it is judged that there is free space in the first special pattern start memory area (1) to the first special pattern start memory area (4), various random number values (for example, random number values for jackpot determination, pattern random number values, random number values for reach determination, random number values for performance selection, etc.) are obtained as start information for the first special pattern, and the various obtained random number values are stored in one first special pattern determination area in a FIFO (First In, First Out) format. Then, a transmission reservation process is performed for a first special pattern winning command indicating the winning into the first start port 8120 and the number of reserved first special patterns. The winning command for the first special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 279) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the first special symbol start memory areas (1) to (4), the first start port winning detection process will end without acquiring various random number values.

In S8402, the main CPU 201 executes the second start port winning detection process. After executing the process of S8402, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8403.

In this second start port winning detection process, when the second start port switch 8141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start port 8140, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the second start port 8140 and judges whether there is free space in the second special pattern start memory area (1) to the second special pattern start memory area (4). If it is judged that there is free space in the second special pattern start memory area (1) to the second special pattern start memory area (4), various random number values (for example, random number values for jackpot determination, pattern random number values, random number values for reach determination, random number values for performance selection, etc.) are obtained as start information for the second special pattern, and the various obtained random number values are stored in a single second special pattern determination area in a FIFO format. Then, a transmission reservation process is performed for a winning command for the second special pattern indicating the winning of the second start port 8140 and the number of reserved second special patterns. The winning command for the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 279) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the second special symbol start memory areas (1) to (4), the second start port winning detection process will end without acquiring various random number values.

In S8403, the main CPU 201 performs a general prize opening passage detection process. In the general prize opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts etc. is set when a prize is won through the general prize opening 122. After executing the process of S8403, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8404.

In S8404, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening passage detection process. In the first large prize opening passage detection process, when the first large prize opening count switch 8132 detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 8131, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the first large prize opening 8131 and adds 1 to the first large prize opening counter for counting the number of game balls entering the first large prize opening 8131 to update it. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the game is in a jackpot game state (when the control state number of the special pattern is 5 or 6), the "cumulative jackpot payout ball counter" in the main RAM 203 is updated by adding the number of prize balls (for example, 15 balls) of the game balls paid out when the ball enters the first large prize opening 8131. Then, a transmission reservation process for a first large prize opening entry command indicating entry into the first large prize opening 8131 is performed. The first large prize slot winning command scheduled for transmission in this process is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command sending process (see FIG. 279) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S8404, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8405.

In S8405, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening passage detection process. In the second large prize opening passage detection process, when the second large prize opening count switch 8152 detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 8151, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the second large prize opening 8151 and adds 1 to the second large prize opening counter for counting the number of game balls entering the second large prize opening 8151 to update it. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a jackpot game state is in progress, the "cumulative jackpot payout ball counter" in the main RAM 203 is updated by adding the number of prize balls (e.g., 15 balls) of the game balls paid out when the ball enters the second large prize opening 8151. Then, a transmission reservation process for a second large prize opening entry command indicating entry into the second large prize opening 8151 is performed. The second large prize winning slot winning command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 279) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S8405, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8406.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot game state is reached, the "cumulative jackpot payout ball counter" in the main RAM 203 is configured to add the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first large prize winning port 8131 and the second large prize winning port 8151; however, in addition to when a jackpot game state is reached, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first large prize winning port 8131 and the second large prize winning port 8151 may also be added when a small prize game state is reached (when the control state number of the special pattern is 3 or 4). Furthermore, when in a jackpot game state (when the control state number of the special symbol is 5 or 6), or when in a jackpot game state including a small jackpot game state (when the control state number of the special symbol is 3 to 6), the "cumulative jackpot payout ball counter" of the main RAM 203 may be configured to add the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first large prize winning hole 8131 and the second large prize winning hole 8151, as well as the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first start hole 8120, the second start hole 8140, and the general prize winning hole 122.

In S8406, the main CPU 201 performs a V prize opening passage detection process. In the V prize opening passage detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects the passage of a game ball into the V prize opening 8156 by the V prize opening switch 8157, it turns on the V prize opening passage flag. Then, it performs a transmission reservation process for a V passage command indicating that the game ball has passed through the V prize opening 8156. The V passage command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 279) during the next system timer interrupt process. Note that even if a game ball passes through the V prize opening 8156, no payout information is set. After executing the process of S8406, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8407.

In S8407, the main CPU 201 performs gate passage detection processing. After executing the processing of S8407, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S8408.

In this gate passage detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 8126 by the passing gate switch 8127, it judges whether there is free space in the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (4). If it judges that there is free space in the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (4), it acquires various random number values (for example, random number values for determining whether the normal pattern is a hit, pattern random number values of the normal pattern, etc.) as start information for the normal pattern, and stores the various acquired random number values in a single normal pattern start memory area in FIFO format. On the other hand, if it judges that there is no free space in any of the normal pattern start memory areas (1) to (4), it ends the gate passage detection process without acquiring various random number values.

In S8408, the main CPU 201 performs a look-ahead command generation process. After executing the process of S8408, the main CPU 201 ends the current switch input detection process.

In this look-ahead command generation process, the look-ahead related data in FIG. 257 is referenced, and the various random number values obtained in the current first start port winning detection process or second start port winning detection process are analyzed based on the game state, and a look-ahead command is generated. As shown in the look-ahead related data in FIG. 257, in the time-saving game state, big win game state, and small win game state, only look-ahead commands based on the various random number values obtained in the second start port winning detection process (look-ahead commands for the second special pattern) can be generated. Then, a look-ahead command transmission reservation process is performed to transmit the generated look-ahead command to the sub-control circuit 300. The look-ahead command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 279) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[10-5. Sub-control circuit]
Next, the control contents of the sub-control circuit 300 based on various commands etc. transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 will be described.

[10-5-1. Time-saving game state advance notice pattern determination table]
First, the details of the notice presentation pattern determination table stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 282. Fig. 282 is an example of a notice presentation pattern determination table for the time-saving game state in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 282, the advance notice presentation pattern determination table for the time-saving game state associates the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the type of time-saving game state (special time-saving game state or general time-saving game state), the selection rate (first random number value), and the advance notice presentation pattern.

Here, "effect pattern" refers to information that defines the display effects of characters, etc., audio effects, effects that change the operation mode of the effect button 54, etc. Also, "preview effect pattern" refers to information on effects that, among the effect patterns, give advance indications of the results of the lottery for special symbols and the contents of the effects that will be executed. In addition to the preview effect pattern, various effects such as the symbol effect pattern described below can be executed in a superimposed manner.

The term "selection rate (first random number value)" corresponds to the obtained second random number value being within a predetermined range for a second random number value consisting of a second random number range, but for ease of explanation, it is described as the selection rate. Note that the selection rate may include 0% in addition to 1-100%, and the term "selection rate of 0%" is not excluded.

In this embodiment, the preview performance patterns include "preview performance pattern A" which suggests in advance a "fall small hit", "preview performance pattern B1" which suggests in advance the possibility of a "V small hit", and "preview performance pattern B2" which develops from preview performance pattern B1 and suggests in advance that there is a high possibility that a "battle performance" will be executed. Note that, although only three types of preview performance patterns are provided in this embodiment, the preview content may be subdivided to provide four or more types of display modes.

The sub-CPU 301 refers to the preview presentation pattern determination table for the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 282, and determines the preview presentation pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern command, the type of time-saving game state (special time-saving game state or general time-saving game state), and the selection rate (first random number value).

According to the preview performance pattern determination table for the time-saving game state shown in Figure 282, a selection rate (first random number value) is associated with each preview performance pattern so that the possibility of a "V small hit" increases in the order of "preview performance pattern A" < "preview performance pattern B1" < "preview performance pattern B2".

Furthermore, according to the preview performance pattern determination table for the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 282, if the lottery result for the second special symbol in the special time-saving game state is a miss, the preview performance pattern is not determined (executed).

In addition, according to the advance notice pattern determination table for the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 282, in the special time-saving game state, the "advance notice pattern A," which suggests a "small fall win" in advance, is configured not to be determined (executed).

In addition, according to the preview performance pattern determination table for the time-saving game state shown in Figure 282, the "preview performance pattern B2" is determined (executed) only when a special symbol change pattern command that executes a battle performance is received.

In the time-saving game state preview performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 282, the "preview performance pattern A" which suggests a "small fall win" in advance is configured to be determined (executed) when a special symbol variation pattern command which executes a battle performance or a special symbol variation pattern command which executes a card performance is received, but the "preview performance pattern A" may be configured to be determined (executed) only when a special symbol variation pattern command which executes a card performance is received.

[10-5-2. Sub-control circuit processing]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 283. Fig. 283 is a flow chart showing an example of the sub-control circuit process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 283, the sub-CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S8500). In this initialization process, for example, RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8510.

The initialization process (S8500) described above is executed when the power is turned on or the backup is cleared. After the power is turned on, the processes S8510 to S8580 described below are executed repeatedly.

In S8510, the sub-CPU 301 performs a data input process to input data. In this data input process, both the command input port 308 reading process and the effect button 54 input process are performed.

The command input port 308 read process reads the command sent from the main control circuit 200 that is set in the command input port 308.

In addition, in the input process of the effect button 54, operation information regarding the player's operation detected by the effect button 54 is input from the button control circuit 310. In addition, when the sub-CPU 301 inputs operation information from the button control circuit 310, it determines whether to validate the input operation information or discard it as invalid, and sets the acceptance time during which input of operation information is permitted, the validity time during which the input operation information is valid, and the invalidity period during which the input operation information is invalid, depending on the current situation such as the effect.

When the reading process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the effect button 54 are completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8520.

In S8520, the sub-CPU 301 executes a command analysis process. In this process, the command read in the process of S8510 is analyzed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8530.

At S8530, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation mode determination process. In this process, for example, a presentation pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, and various requests for operating various presentation devices (for example, a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, a role request, a presentation button activation request, etc.) are generated based on the determined presentation pattern. Details of this presentation mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 284. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S8540.

In S8540, the sub-CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304. The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on the message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S8550.

At S8550, the sub-CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305. The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to output audio from the speaker 32 based on the message (sound request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S8560.

In S8560, the sub-CPU 301 executes an LED control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends an LED request to the LED control circuit 306. Based on the message (LED request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to light up or blink all or a portion of the LEDs that make up the LED group 46. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8570.

At S8570, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends a reel request to the reel control circuit 307. Based on the message (reel request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the reel control circuit 307 performs drive control to operate the performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the reels that make up the performance reel group 58. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8580.

At S8580, the sub-CPU 301 executes effect button control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 sends an effect button drive request to the button control circuit 310. Based on the message (effect button drive request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the button control circuit 310 performs drive control such as changing the operation mode of the effect button 54 and vibrating the effect button 54. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the sub-control circuit processing.

[10-5-3. Presentation mode determination process]
Next, the details of the presentation mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 283) will be described with reference to Fig. 284. Fig. 284 is a flow chart showing an example of the presentation mode determination process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8531, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation pattern determination process for determining a presentation pattern. In this presentation pattern determination process, a presentation pattern is determined that defines the display presentation mode displayed on the display device 7, the sound presentation mode output from the speaker 32, the operation mode of the presentation button 54, etc., based on the type of command received from the main CPU 201. Specifically, if the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command", a "symbol presentation pattern" is determined based on the received special symbol variation pattern command. In addition, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command" during a time-saving game state, a "preview presentation pattern" is determined based on the special symbol variation pattern command, the type of time-saving game state (special time-saving game state or general time-saving game state), and the selection rate (first random number value) by referring to the pre-notification presentation pattern determination table for the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 282. In addition, a presentation pattern is determined according to various commands transmitted from the main CPU 201. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8532.

In S8532, the sub-CPU 301 executes a process for generating an animation request. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S8531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8533.

In S8533, the sub-CPU 301 executes a drawing request generation process. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S8532. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8534.

In S8534, the sub-CPU 301 executes a sound request generation process. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S8531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8535.

In S8535, the sub-CPU 301 executes a lamp request generation process. In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S8531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8536.

In S8536, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel request generation process. In this process, a reel request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S8531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8537.

At S8537, the sub-CPU 301 executes a process for generating a performance button actuation request. In this process, a performance button actuation request is generated based on the performance pattern determined at S8531 above. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the performance mode determination process and transfers the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 283).

[10-6. Game state transition diagram]
The game states to which the game is changed by the various processes executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 as described above will be explained with reference to a game state transition diagram. Figure 285 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the eighth pachinko game machine.

The eighth pachinko gaming machine has a normal gaming state (first normal gaming state, second normal gaming state), a time-saving gaming state (special time-saving gaming state, general time-saving gaming state), and a non-playable state as gaming states.

As described above, the "first normal game state" is the normal game state during the control period of the first special symbol that is performed based on the start information of the first special symbol, and is a normal game state in which hitting from the left is the normal game mode. Therefore, in the first normal game state, it is easy for a game ball to enter the first start hole 8120, but it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second start hole 8140.

The "second normal game state" is a normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol based on the start information of the second special symbol, and is a normal game state in which the reserved number of second special symbols stored in the time-saving game state is being consumed immediately after the time-saving game state ends and the game state transitions to the normal game state. Here, the second normal game state specifies left-hand hitting as the normal game mode, but since the rate of return to the general time-saving game state is high while the reserved number of second special symbols is being consumed, right-hand hitting may also be specified as the normal game mode. In this way, since the second normal game state may specify left-hand hitting or right-hand hitting, it is preferable not to have the display device 7 notify the normal game mode during the second normal game state, and to have the display device 7 notify the left-hand hitting as the normal game mode when the game state transitions from the second normal game state to the first normal game state.

The "special time-saving game state" is a time-saving game state in which the number of small wins = 255 is set as the second time-saving end condition, and since the probability of winning a "V small win (approximately 1/48.2)" is higher than a "fall small win (approximately 1/152.6)," and since at least a V small win can be won before 255 small wins have been won, it is a time-saving game state in which the next big win is essentially guaranteed. In addition, when the special time-saving game state is entered after the end of a big win game state, it becomes the A time-saving game state, and when it is entered after the variable display number of special symbols reaches the ceiling value, it also becomes the B time-saving game state.

The "general time-saving play state" is a time-saving play state in which the first time-saving end condition is set to the number of small wins = 1 or 2, and if all the small wins are fall small wins, the time-saving play state ends without transitioning to the big win play state, so it is a time-saving play state in which the next big win is not guaranteed.

In both the special time-saving game state and the general time-saving game state, right-hand hits are considered the normal game mode, and while it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first start hole 8120, it is easy for the game ball to enter the second start hole 8140.

The "game not permitted state" is a game state in which the player is unable to play, and as described above, the various switches through which game balls enter or pass are disabled, game balls are prohibited from being launched from the launching device 6, and prize balls are prohibited from being paid out from the payout device 82.

(Transition Control of First Normal Gaming State)
As shown in Fig. 285, in the first normal game state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 8120, a "jackpot" or "miss" is determined based on the start information of the first special symbol (see Fig. 250), and when a "jackpot" is determined, a transition to a jackpot game state occurs. Then, after the end of the jackpot game state triggered by the start information of the first special symbol in the first normal game state, depending on the selected symbol of the special symbol, a transition to a "special time-saving game state" occurs with a selection rate of 20%, a transition to a "general time-saving game state" occurs with a selection rate of 40%, and a transition to a "normal game state" occurs with a selection rate of 40% (see Figs. 251 and 254).

In addition, in the first normal game state (including the second normal game state), after the number of times the special symbol changes display reaches 999 times, the game state transitions from the normal game state to a "special time-saving game state."

(Transition control of special time-saving game state)
In the special time-saving game state, when the game ball enters the second start port 8140, a "big win", "small win" or "miss" is determined based on the start information of the second special symbol (see FIG. 250), and when a "big win" is determined, the game state transitions to a big win game state, and when a "small win" is determined, the game state transitions to a small win game state. In particular, in this embodiment, when a small win game state is played as a V small win, it becomes possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning port 8156, and when the game ball passes through the V winning port 8156, the game state transitions to a big win game state from the second route.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140, the actual probability of transitioning to a jackpot game state via the first route or the second route is configured to be approximately 1 in 41.9 (see Figure 251).

In the special time-saving game state, after a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140 and the game state transitions to a jackpot game state, all games will transition to the general time-saving game state (see FIG. 254). As described above, in the special time-saving game state, after a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140 and the game state transitions to a jackpot game state, the game state may be configured to transition back to the special time-saving game state at a predetermined rate.

(Transition control of general time-saving gaming state)
In the general time-saving play state, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140, a "jackpot,""smallhit," or "miss" is determined based on the start information of the second special pattern (see Figure 250), and if a "jackpot" is determined, the game transitions to a big hit play state, and if a "small hit" is determined, the game transitions to a small hit play state.

In the general time-saving game state, the "number of small wins" is subtracted as the A time-saving end condition without distinguishing between V small wins and drop small wins, but if all the small wins won are drop small wins, the game cannot transition to the big win game state and transitions from the general time-saving game state to the second normal game state. Also, if the small win won is a V small win, the game will transition to a small win game state as a V small win in which it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156, and when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 8156, the game will transition to the big win game state from the second route.

In the general time-saving game state, after transitioning to the jackpot game state via the first route or the second route, if the number of consecutive jackpots due to the count limiter function has not reached the limiter number, the game state transitions back to the general time-saving game state, and if the number of consecutive jackpots due to the count limiter function has reached the limiter number, the game state transitions to the second normal game state (see FIG. 254). As described above, in the general time-saving game state, after a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140 and transitions to the jackpot game state, the game state may be configured to transition back to the special time-saving game state at a predetermined rate.

(Transition Control of Second Normal Gaming State)
In the second normal game state, a "big win", a "small win" or a "miss" is determined based on the start information of the second special symbol stored during the general time-saving game state (see FIG. 250), and if a "big win" is determined, the game state transitions to a big win game state, and if a "small win" is determined, the game state transitions to a small win game state. If the winning small win is a V small win, a small win game state is performed as a V small win in which the game ball can (or easily) pass through the V winning hole 8156, and when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 8156, the game state transitions to a big win game state from the second route.

Then, in the second normal game state, after transitioning to the jackpot game state via the first route or the second route, the game state will transition back to the general time-saving game state (see FIG. 254).

In addition, in the second normal game state, the start information for all second special symbols stored during the general time-saving game state is determined to be a "miss" or a "small hit by falling," and when all reserved numbers of second special symbols stored in the general time-saving game state are consumed, the second normal game state ends and the game transitions to the first normal game state.

(Transition control of gaming disallowed state)
Regardless of the current game state, when the cumulative number of balls paid out in a jackpot game state per day reaches a predetermined number of balls (for example, 100,000 balls), the game state will be forcibly shifted from the jackpot game state to a game-disallowed state. When the RAM is cleared or a setting change process is performed, this game-disallowed state will be shifted to the first normal game state, which is a game-allowed state. In addition, the shift to the game-disallowed state will be executed as the highest priority process in the shift control in each game state.

[10-7. Production flow]
Next, an outline of the presentation executed under the control of the main control circuit 200 and the sub control circuit 300 will be described using a flow of the entire presentation. Fig. 286 shows an example of a presentation flow in the game state in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The effects performed in the eighth pachinko gaming machine include a variable effect consisting of a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to special symbols displayed in the display area of the display device 7, a display effect of characters, etc., a sound effect output from the speaker 32, a lamp effect emitted from the group of LEDs 46, a special effect effect that drives the group of special effect devices 58, and an effect of changing the operation mode of the effect button 54. Note that in this embodiment, the decorative symbols are composed of three main symbols, a left symbol, a center symbol, and a right symbol, and a sub-symbol that is much smaller than the main symbols. Note that the number and type of decorative symbols are not limited to this.

In addition, in the embodiment, the effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol is also called the "first special symbol effect," and the effect based on the lottery of the second special symbol is also called the "second special symbol effect."

(Effects in the First Normal Gaming State)
In the first normal game state, at least "normal variation,""normalreach,""superreach,""ultra super reach," and "full rotation reach" are configured to be executable as "first special pattern presentations."

"Normal change" refers to a change in which all decorative symbols start to change at high speed and stop in order, and can be performed when the special symbol lottery result is a miss.

"Normal reach", "super reach" and "ultra super reach" are reach effects that suggest that the result of the lottery for the first special symbol may be a jackpot. A "normal reach" is a reach effect that occurs when the left and right symbols are temporarily displayed as the same type of symbol, and as an example, it is a reach effect in which the middle symbol changes display at a slow speed. In a "normal reach", if the middle symbol is displayed as a different type of symbol from the left and right symbols, it is a miss, and if the middle symbol is displayed as the same type of symbol as the left and right symbols, it is a jackpot. Also, in a "normal reach", the middle symbol may not be displayed as a stationary symbol, and it is configured so that a "super reach" can further develop into a "ultra super reach".

"Full rotation reach" refers to a state in which multiple decorative symbols indicating a jackpot fluctuate slowly when all of them are in line. In this embodiment, this is an effect that is only executed when the result of the lottery for the first special symbol is a jackpot and the selected symbol "z1" for the first special symbol that transitions to a special time-saving game state is determined.

And according to the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in Figure 255 (a), the random number values for effect selection, etc. are set so that the expectation of transitioning to a jackpot game state increases in the order of "Normal Reach" < "Super Reach" < "Ultra Super Reach" < "Full Rotation Reach".

In addition, in the first normal game state, the "card effect" and "battle effect" described below may be configured to be executed at a predetermined rate. When the "card effect" or "battle effect" is executed in the first normal game state, the random number value for effect selection, etc. is set so that the expectation of transitioning to the jackpot game state is high.

(Effects during special time-saving game mode)
In the special time-saving game state, at least a "super-shortened variation," a "instant win effect," and a "battle effect" can be executed as the "second special symbol effect."

"Ultra-short variation" refers to a variation mode in which all decorative symbols start to vary at high speed and then stop and display different types of symbols in an extremely short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and is an effect that can be executed when the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss. In addition, in the special time-saving game state, "ultra-short variation" is also configured to be executable when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a small hit and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to a "fall small hit" is determined (see Figure 255 (b)).

The "instant win effect" is an effect in which all decorative symbols start to change rapidly and independently, and in an extremely short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), all decorative symbols stop and display the same type of symbol. This effect can be executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, or when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a small win and the selected second special symbol patterns "z5, z6" corresponding to the "V small win" are determined.

The "battle effect" is an effect that can be executed when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a miss, or when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small hit and the selected second special symbol "z5, z6" corresponding to a "V small hit" is determined. The "battle effect" is an effect that suggests whether the "V small hit" that triggers the transition to a big hit game state has been won or has been a "miss" without suggesting that the "fall small hit" that triggers the end of the general time-saving game state has been won, and as an example, an effect in which an enemy character appears and the main character and the enemy character face off against each other, and if the main character wins, a V small hit is announced, and if the main character loses, a miss is announced.

(Presentation during normal time-saving game mode)
In the general time-saving game state, different presentations can be executed according to the remaining number of jackpot limiter times.

Specifically, when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times in the general time-saving play state is 91 or more (hereinafter also referred to as the "first half of the number limiter"), "shortened variation", "instant win effect", "card effect", and "battle effect" are configured to be executable. Also, when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times in the general time-saving play state is 90 or less (hereinafter also referred to as the "second half of the number limiter"), "ultra-shortened variation", "instant win effect", and "card effect" are configured to be executable. Also, when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times in the general time-saving play state is 0 (hereinafter also referred to as "when the number limiter is activated"), "ultra-shortened variation" and "ending effect" are configured to be executable.

"Shortened fluctuation" is a special effect during the "first half of the count limiter" in the general time-saving game mode, in which all decorative symbols start to fluctuate at high speed and stop displaying different types of symbols in a short period of time (e.g. 3 seconds) that is shorter than normal fluctuation and longer than ultra-shortened fluctuation, and is an effect that can be executed when the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss. Note that during the "second half of the count limiter" and "when the count limiter is activated" in the general time-saving game mode, "shortened fluctuation" will switch to the above-mentioned "ultra-shortened fluctuation."

The "card effect" is a special effect for the "first half of the count limiter" and the "second half of the count limiter" in the general time-saving play state, and is an effect that can be executed when the result of the lottery for the special pattern is a small win or a miss. The "card effect" is an effect that suggests whether the "fall small win" that triggers the end of the general time-saving play state has been won, the "V small win" that triggers the transition to the big win play state has been won, or it has been a "miss". As an example, it is an effect in which a card with a specified pattern is displayed, and when the card is slowly flipped over, text suggesting the result of the lottery for the second special pattern is displayed.

An "ending effect" is a special effect that occurs when the "number of times limiter is activated" in the general time-saving play state, and can be executed when the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. An "ending effect" is an effect that suggests whether a "big hit" that transitions to a big hit play state has been won, a "V small hit" that triggers a transition to a big hit play state has been won, or a "fall small hit" that triggers the end of the general time-saving play state has been won. As an example, it is an effect in which a specified story is displayed, and when the story is completed, a big hit or V small hit is announced, and when the story ends midway, a fall small hit is announced.

(Effects in the Second Normal Gaming State)
In the second normal game state, at least a "normal variation" and a "door opening effect" are executable as the "second special symbol effect".

As described above in the first normal game state, the "normal variation" is an effect that can be executed when the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss, but in the second normal game state, it is also configured to be executable when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a small win and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "fall small win" is determined (see FIG. 255(a)).

The "door opening effect" is an effect exclusive to the second normal game state, and can be executed when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a big hit, when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a small hit and the selected second special symbol patterns "z5, z6" corresponding to a "V small hit" are determined, or when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss. As an example of the "door opening effect", a half-open door is displayed from the left and right, and the half-open door is displayed rattling for a predetermined period of time, and when there is a big hit or a V small hit, the door is displayed as being completely closed, and when there is a miss, the door is displayed as not being completely closed.

In this embodiment, when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a small win and the selected pattern "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to a "fall small win" is determined during the second normal game state, a "normal change" is executable, but a "door opening effect" may also be executable. When the lottery result for the second special symbol is a small win and the selected pattern "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to a "fall small win" is determined during the second normal game state, when the "door opening effect" is executed, the same effect as when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a loss may be performed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the "door opening effect" is configured to be executable as a special effect for the second normal game state, but the above-mentioned "battle effect" may be configured to be executable instead of the "door opening effect."

[10-8. Display contents of the performance]
The display contents of the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300 etc. will be described using display images displayed in the display area of the display device 7.

(Battle effects)
First, referring to Fig. 287, a battle effect that can be executed in the first half of the number limiter in the special time-saving game state or the general time-saving game state will be described. Fig. 287 is an example of a display image that explains the battle effect in the eighth pachinko game machine.

The battle effect shown in FIG. 287 is an effect based on a pattern effect pattern executed based on the special pattern change pattern command (31H, 32H) that executes the battle effect, as shown in the special pattern change pattern table S1 in FIG. 255(b) and the special pattern change pattern table J1 in FIG. 256(a).

Figure 287(a) is an example of a display image when a battle performance starts. As shown in Figure 287(a), when a battle performance starts, a performance is performed in which a main character and a rival character appear and face off against each other. In addition, the decorative patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns are displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the display area so as not to interfere with the battle performance and so as to be easily distinguishable by the player.

Figure 287 (b-1) is an example of a display image of a battle effect that is performed when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a V small hit (when the special symbol variation pattern command is 31H). As shown in Figure 287 (b-1), as a result of the battle effect, the showdown is concluded and an effect is performed in which the main character is victorious. In addition, the decorative symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols, which are displayed in reduced size in the bottom right of the display area, are all displayed as the same symbol and temporarily stopped. After that, the decorative symbols, all of which are the same symbol and temporarily stopped, are displayed large in the center of the display area, and the player is notified that a V small hit has occurred.

Figure 287 (b-2) is an example of a display image of a battle effect that is performed when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss (when the variable pattern command for the special symbol is 32H). As shown in Figure 287 (b-2), the battle effect results in a showdown and an effect in which the main character is defeated is performed. In addition, the decorative symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols, which are displayed in reduced size at the bottom right of the display area, are displayed in a stopped state so that they are not all the same symbol.

In this way, the battle effects executed in the general time-saving play state in this embodiment are not executed when a "fall small hit" occurs, which is the trigger for ending the general time-saving play state. This gives the player a sense of security that the general time-saving play state will continue, while also giving the player a sense of anticipation for a V small hit, making the game even more exciting.

(Card presentation)
Next, a card effect that can be executed in the general time-saving gaming state will be described with reference to Fig. 288. Fig. 288 is an example of a display image that explains the card effect in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The card presentation shown in FIG. 288 is a presentation based on a pattern presentation pattern executed based on the special pattern variation pattern command (40H, 41H, 42H, 43H) that executes the card presentation, as shown in the special pattern variation pattern tables J1 and J2 in FIG. 256.

Figure 288(a) is an example of a display image when the card presentation starts. As shown in Figure 288(a), when the card presentation starts, a chance card is displayed with the words "Hit" indicating a V hit, "Mode Continue" indicating a miss and the continuation of the general time-saving play state, and "Mode End" indicating a small fall hit and the end of the general time-saving play state, and then a presentation is performed in which the chance card is turned over and shuffled. In addition, the decorative patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns that were displayed large in the center of the display area are displayed in a reduced size in the bottom right of the display area so as not to interfere with the card presentation and are easy for the player to distinguish.

Figure 288(b) is an example of a common display image from when the card presentation starts until the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is indicated. As shown in Figure 288(b), when the chance cards are turned face down and shuffled, a presentation is given in which one of the cards is selected.

Figure 288 (c-1) is an example of a display image of a card presentation that is performed when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a V small hit (when the special symbol variation pattern command is 41H). As shown in Figure 287 (c-1), when one card is selected in the card presentation, the card is slowly flipped over and a presentation is performed in which a chance card with the word "hit" written on it is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols, which are displayed in reduced size in the bottom right of the display area, are all displayed as the same symbol and temporarily stopped. After that, the decorative symbols, all of which are the same symbol and temporarily stopped, are displayed large in the center of the display area, and the player is notified that a V small hit has occurred.

Figure 288 (c-2) is an example of a display image of a card effect that is performed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small fall win (when the variable pattern command of the special symbol is 42H or 43H). As shown in Figure 287 (c-2), when one card is selected in the card effect, the card is slowly flipped over and a chance card with the words "mode end" is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols, which are displayed in reduced size at the bottom right of the display area, are displayed in a stopped state so that they are not all the same symbol.

Although not shown in the figure, when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss (when the special symbol variation pattern command is 40H), when one card is selected in the card presentation, the card is slowly flipped over and a chance card with the words "mode continue" written on it is displayed.

Figure 288 (d-2) is an example of a display image of a card presentation that follows Figure 288 (c-2) when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small drop hit and the remaining number of small hit wins is two or more (when the special symbol variation pattern command is 42H). As shown in Figure 287 (d-2), after a chance card with the words "mode end" is displayed, a female character is displayed and a presentation is performed indicating the continuation of the general time-saving game state.

In addition, even if the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss (when the variation pattern command for the special symbol is 40H), as shown in Figures 287 (c-2) and 287 (d-2), a chance card with the words "mode end" written on it may be displayed first, and then a female character may be displayed and a performance indicating the continuation of the general time-saving game state may be executed at a predetermined rate.

Furthermore, when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small V hit (when the special symbol variation pattern command is 41H), a chance card with the words "mode ended" or "mode continued" is displayed, and then a specific character is displayed, and a revival performance announcing a V hit is executed at a predetermined rate.

In this way, according to the card presentation executed in the general time-saving play state in this embodiment, whether it is a "fall small hit" that will trigger the end of the general time-saving play state, a "miss" that will cause the general time-saving play state to continue, or a "V small hit" that will trigger a transition to a big hit play state, the player can hope that it is not a "fall small hit" and be interested in the possibility of a "miss," thereby further increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(Ending performance)
Next, an ending effect that can be executed when the number limiter is activated in the general time-saving gaming state will be described with reference to Fig. 289. Fig. 289 is an example of a display image that explains the ending effect in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The ending effect shown in FIG. 289 is an effect based on a pattern effect pattern executed based on the special pattern change pattern command (50H, 51H, 52H) that executes the ending effect, as shown in the special pattern change pattern table J3 in FIG. 256.

Figure 289(a) is an example of a display image when an ending performance starts. As shown in Figure 289(a), when an ending performance starts, a performance is performed in which a predetermined story is displayed. In addition, the decorative patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns that were displayed large in the center of the display area are displayed in a reduced size in the bottom right of the display area so as not to interfere with the card performance and so as to be easily distinguishable by the player.

Figure 289 (b-1) is an example of a display image of an ending effect (successful ending effect) that is performed when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a big win or a V small win (when the variable pattern command of the special symbol is 51H or 52H). As shown in Figure 289 (b-1), the story is concluded, and the decorative symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols, which are displayed in reduced size at the bottom right of the display area, are all displayed as the same symbol in a temporary stop state.

Figure 289 (c-1) is an example of a display image of the ending presentation that follows on from Figure 289 (b-1). As shown in Figure 289 (c-1), after the story is completed, all the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are displayed as the same symbol large and stopped in the center of the display area, notifying the player that they have won a big prize or a V small prize.

Figure 289 (b-2) is an example of a display image of an ending effect (ending failure effect) that is performed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small fall hit (when the variation pattern command of the special symbol is 50H). As shown in Figure 289 (b-2), the display screen breaks down and a message is displayed indicating that the story has ended midway.

Figure 289 (c-2) is an example of a display image of the ending presentation that follows on from Figure 289 (b-2). As shown in Figure 289 (c-2), after the story ends midway, the decorative patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns are displayed large and statically in the center of the display area so that they are not all the same pattern. Then, the words "Mode Ended" are displayed to indicate that the general time-saving play state has ended.

In this way, the ending presentation executed in the general time-saving game state in this embodiment not only allows the player to recognize that the game state to which the player transitions after the end of the jackpot game state in the general time-saving game state is regulated by the number of times limiter function (transitioning to the normal game state), but also adds interest in whether the jackpot has been a jackpot, V-small jackpot, or drop jackpot, thereby making the game even more entertaining.

(Door opening performance)
Next, a door opening effect executable in the second normal gaming state will be described with reference to Fig. 290. Fig. 290 is an example of a display image illustrating a door opening effect in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The door opening effect shown in Figure 290 is an effect based on a pattern effect pattern executed based on the special pattern change pattern command (08H, 09H, 0AH) that executes the door opening effect, as shown in the special pattern change pattern table T1 in Figure 255 (a).

Figure 290(a) is an example of a display image when the door-opening effect starts. As shown in Figure 290(a), when the door-opening effect starts, half-open doors are displayed from the left and right, and the half-open doors are displayed rattling for a predetermined period of time. In addition, the decorative left, middle, and right patterns that were displayed large in the center of the display area are displayed in a reduced size in the bottom right of the display area so that they are easy for the player to distinguish and do not interfere with the door-opening effect.

Figure 290 (b-1) is an example of a display image of the door opening effect that is performed when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a big win or a V small win (when the special symbol variation pattern command is 08H or 09H). As shown in Figure 290 (b-1), after a display of a half-open door rattling for a predetermined period of time, the door is displayed as being completely closed.

Figure 290 (c-1) is an example of a display image of the door opening effect that follows Figure 290 (b-1). As shown in Figure 290 (c-1), after the door is displayed as completely closing, the door opens again and all the decorative patterns of the left, middle and right patterns are displayed large and stopped in the center of the display area as the same pattern, notifying the player that they have won a big win or a V small win.

Figure 290 (b-2) is an example of a display image of a door opening effect that is performed when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss (when the special symbol variation pattern command is 0AH). As shown in Figure 290 (b-2), after a display of a half-open door rattling for a predetermined period of time, a display is made of the door not completely closing.

Figure 290 (c-2) is an example of a display image of the door opening effect that follows Figure 290 (b-2). As shown in Figure 290 (c-2), after the door is displayed as not completely closed, the decorative patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns are displayed large and stopped in the center of the display area so that they are not all the same pattern.

In this way, the door opening effect executed in the second normal game state in this embodiment results in a big win or V small win after the normal time-saving game state ends, giving the player the expectation of returning to the normal time-saving game state again, further increasing the interest in the game.

(Preview performance)
Next, a notice effect that can be executed in the time-saving gaming state will be described with reference to Fig. 291. Fig. 291 is an example of a display image that explains a notice effect in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The preview performance shown in Figure 291 is a performance that includes "preview performance pattern A," which suggests in advance a small drop hit, "preview performance pattern B1," which suggests in advance that there is a possibility of a small V hit, and "preview performance pattern B2," which develops from preview performance pattern B1 and suggests in advance that there is a high possibility that a battle performance will be executed, as shown in the preview performance pattern determination table in Figure 282.

Figure 291 (a) is an example of a display image before the preview performance is executed. As shown in Figure 291 (a), the decorative patterns of the left pattern, center pattern, and right pattern are displayed in a changing manner in the center of the display area.

Figure 291 (b-1) is an example of a display image when a preview performance according to preview performance pattern A is executed. As shown in Figure 291 (b-1), the word "DANGER" is displayed to indicate in advance the possibility of a small hit.

Figure 291 (b-2) is an example of a display image when preview performances according to preview performance pattern B1 and preview performance pattern B2 are executed. As shown in Figure 291 (b-2), to suggest in advance that there is a possibility of a V small hit, a male character is displayed from a window along with the word "CHANCE."

Figure 291 (c-2) is an example of a display image when a preview performance according to preview performance pattern B2, which follows on from Figure 291 (b-2), is executed. As shown in Figure 291 (c-2), to indicate in advance that there is a high possibility that a battle performance will be executed, the window becomes larger, and a female character is displayed in the enlarged window along with the word "BATTLE."

In this way, according to the preview effect executed in the time-saving game mode in this embodiment, the content suggested by the preview effect allows players to guess the lottery results for the special symbols and the content of the effect that will be executed, thereby making the game even more interesting.

In this way, the eighth pachinko gaming machine allows transitions between the first normal gaming state, the second normal gaming state, the special time-saving gaming state, and the general time-saving gaming state, and provides appropriate effects according to each gaming state, thereby further increasing the excitement of the game.

The eighth pachinko game machine also has a "special time-saving game state" in which the time-saving end condition is set to 255 small wins, essentially guaranteeing the next big win, and a "general time-saving game state" in which the time-saving end condition is set to 1 or 2 small wins, not guaranteeing the next big win, creating unprecedented gameplay and making the game even more exciting.

<Modification of the eighth pachinko gaming machine>
In the eighth pachinko game machine, the "ball output limiter function" counts the cumulative number of balls that are paid out in a jackpot game state "per day", and when the cumulative number of balls that are paid out in a jackpot game state reaches a "predetermined number of balls that can be stopped (e.g., 100,000 balls)", the game state to which the game state to which the game state transitions after the jackpot game state ends is partially restricted. However, the "ball output limiter function" may be configured to count the cumulative number of balls that are paid out in a jackpot game state under a specific condition (time-saving game state) like the "count limiter function", and when the cumulative number of balls that are paid out in a jackpot game state reaches a "predetermined number of balls that can be stopped (e.g., 50,000 balls)", the game state to which the game state to which the game state transitions after the jackpot game state ends is partially restricted.

If the "ball payout limiter function" is configured to count the cumulative number of jackpot balls paid out of game balls paid out in a jackpot game state under specific conditions (time-saving game state), and to partially restrict the game state to which the player transitions after the jackpot game state ends when the cumulative number of jackpot balls reaches a specified number of consecutive balls paid out, then the processing can be modified as follows.
First, in S8325 of the system timer interruption process (FIG. 279), the "cumulative jackpot payout ball counter" in the main RAM 203 is referred to, and it is determined whether the value of the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is equal to or greater than the "predetermined consecutive payout ball number (for example, 50,000 balls)". If it is determined that the value of the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is equal to or greater than the "predetermined consecutive payout ball number", the process proceeds to S8326, and a setting process for a game non-permitted state is performed. In addition, in S8323 of the system timer interruption process (FIG. 279), it is determined whether the value is less than the predetermined consecutive payout ball number (for example, 49,000 balls). This allows the cumulative jackpot payout ball number to be switched from the "predetermined number of balls to be played (for example, 100,000 balls)" per day to the "predetermined consecutive payout ball number".
Next, in the jackpot end state setting process of S8323 in the jackpot end game state end process (see FIG. 275), it is determined whether the selected special symbol at the end of the jackpot game state is the selected special symbol for the time-saving game state. If it is not the selected special symbol for the time-saving game state (if it is the selected special symbol for the normal game state), the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is cleared (the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is set to 0). As a result, after the jackpot game state that transitions to the normal game state is ended, the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is cleared, and the cumulative jackpot payout ball number of the game balls paid out in the jackpot game state under a specific condition (time-saving game state) can be counted.

In the eighth pachinko game machine, as shown in S8325 and S8326 of the system timer interrupt processing (Figure 279), the main CPU 201 counts the cumulative number of balls dispensed in a jackpot, and the main control circuit 200 and the payout/launch control circuit 400 control the "ball dispense limiter function", but it may also be configured so that the payout/launch control circuit 400 counts the cumulative number of balls dispensed in a jackpot, and only the payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the "ball dispense limiter function".

The eighth pachinko game machine is equipped with two functions, a "count limiter function" and a "ball output limiter function", to partially restrict the game state to which the game state transitions after the end of the big win game state, but it may be configured with only the "count limiter function" or only the "ball output limiter function".

The technology described in the eighth embodiment of the pachinko game machine may be applied to a slot machine. When applied to a slot machine, the various effects executed in the eighth pachinko game machine may be replaced with effects by a display device, reels, etc. provided in the slot machine. In addition, the time-saving game state (special time-saving game state, general time-saving game state) may be replaced with any of the following states: replay time (RT state) in which the probability of replaying a replay is improved, assist time (AT state) in which a predetermined small role or the operation content of the stop button is notified, and assist replay time (ART state) in which the replay time and assist time are controlled simultaneously. In addition, the big win and small win (V small win, fall small win) may be replaced with any of the following: winning a specific role, a specific combination of symbols being stopped and displayed (a specific combination of symbols being awarded), winning an entry win into the RT state, winning an entry win into the AT state, and winning an entry win into the ART state. Furthermore, the number of times limiter function can be replaced with the number of times playable in either the RT state, AT state, or ART state, and the ball payout limiter function can be replaced with the number of gaming media (medals/balls) paid out under specific conditions (advantageous zones that can notify of specific minor winnings or the operation of the stop button).

(others)
The eighth pachinko gaming machine described above can apply the techniques of each embodiment, including modified examples. The above-mentioned embodiment does not limit the contents of the present invention, and modifications can be made to the extent that they do not deviate from the scope of the claims.

In addition, the effects described in the eighth pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most favorable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention.

Furthermore, the above [4. Expansion Example] can also be applied to the eighth pachinko gaming machine, as long as there is no inconsistency in its gameplay or control.

[11. The 9th Pachinko Game Machine]
Next, the ninth pachinko gaming machine will be described. The ninth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a one-type two-type mixed machine, similar to the third pachinko gaming machine. The ninth pachinko gaming machine is different from the third pachinko gaming machine in terms of gameplay and presentation content, and accordingly, the configuration of various components arranged in the game area is also partially different.

In particular, the ninth pachinko gaming machine differs from the third pachinko gaming machine in that in the time-saving gaming state, the gameplay is mainly composed of the variable display of normal symbols, and the condition for ending the time-saving gaming state is composed of the number of times that the variable display of normal symbols occurs, not the number of times that the variable display of special symbols occurs.

The ninth pachinko gaming machine, like the third pachinko gaming machine, is a priority variable machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in parallel, and the start condition of the second special symbol is established in priority over the start condition of the first special symbol. However, this is not limited to this, and the machine may be a sequential variable machine as described above.

Hereinafter, when explaining the ninth pachinko gaming machine, the same components as those in the first pachinko gaming machine will be given the same symbols and step numbers, and detailed explanations of their configuration and processing will be omitted.

In this embodiment, "entering a game ball" into an entry port (e.g., a starting port or a big prize entry port) that can give the player a certain benefit (payout of game balls, transition of game state) is also referred to as "winning", as appropriate. Also, in this embodiment, the "variable display" of the pattern is a concept that includes both a "variable display" in which the pattern changes and is displayed, and a "stationary display" in which the pattern stops and is displayed, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stationary display is referred to as one "variable display".

[11-1. Game board unit]
The game board unit 9010 of the ninth pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 292. This game board unit 9010 is also disposed in front of the base door 3 (see Fig. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see Fig. 2) like the first pachinko game machine.

Figure 292 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 9010 provided in the ninth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 9010 has a game panel 9100 as a game board, various components are arranged on the game panel 9100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game panel 9100, in which the released game balls can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 292, the game board unit 9010 of the ninth pachinko gaming machine differs from the first pachinko gaming machine mainly in the configuration and arrangement of the normal operation area 9126 in place of the passing gate, the second starting opening 9140, the normal electric role unit 9145, the first special electric role unit 9130, and the second special electric role unit 9150. The configuration and arrangement of each are explained below.

The first start hole 9120 located in the play area 105 of the ninth pachinko game machine is functionally the same as the first start hole 120 located in the play area 105 of the first pachinko game machine, but because of its relationship with the second start hole 9140, it will be described again using a different reference number from that of the first pachinko game machine.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 9120 is disposed in the game area 105 below the display area of the display device 7, and is configured so that game balls hit to the left can enter the hole, and game nails or the like make it difficult or impossible for game balls hit to the right to enter the hole. The first starting hole 9120 is provided with a first starting hole switch 9121 (see FIG. 293 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 9120.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 9120, a first special symbol lottery (a process for determining whether the first special symbol is a winning symbol), a variable display of the first special symbol, and a prize ball for the first starting hole (e.g., three game balls) are paid out. The process after the game ball enters the first starting hole 9120 will be described in detail later.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 9140 is located in the right side area 107 below (downstream) the first special electric role unit 9130 described later and above (upstream) the normal operation area 9126 and the second special electric role unit 9150, and is provided in the normal electric role unit 9145 described later, so that game balls hit to the right can enter the hole (game balls hit to the left are difficult or impossible to enter the hole). The second starting hole 9140 is provided with a second starting hole switch 9141 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 9140.

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 9140, a second special symbol lottery (a process for determining whether the second special symbol is a winning symbol), a variable display of the second special symbol, and a prize ball for the second starting hole (for example, one game ball) are paid out. The process after the game ball enters the second starting hole 9140 will be described in detail later.

(Normal operating area)
Unlike the passing gate of the first pachinko game machine, the normal map operation area 9126 is configured with a winning port (also called a "normal map operation port") through which game balls that have passed through the normal map operation area 9126 are collected by the game machine without returning to the game area 105 (right side area 107), and prize balls (for example, one game ball) for the normal map operation area are paid out. The normal map operation area 9126 is located below (downstream) the first special electric role unit 9130, the normal electric role unit 9145, and the second special electric role unit 9150 in the right side area 107, which will be described later, and game balls hit to the right can pass through (game balls hit to the left have difficulty or cannot pass through).

For this reason, when a game ball flowing down the right side area 107 does not enter the first large winning hole 9131 of the first special electric role unit 9130, the second starting hole 9140 of the normal electric role unit 9145, or the second large winning hole 9151 of the second special electric role unit 9150, it can pass through the normal map operation area 9126. As a result, when a right hit is being performed in a jackpot game state, a game ball flowing down the right side area 107 is more likely to enter the first large winning hole 9131 due to the operation of the first special electric role unit 9130 arranged above, and the number of game balls passing through the normal map operation area 9126 is reduced, so that the normal electric role unit 9145 is operated by the passage of the game ball into the normal map operation area 9126, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second starting hole 9140 unexpectedly outside the design of the game. In addition, when a right hit is performed as an irregular game mode in the normal game state, the normal game operation area 9126 is not a passing gate but also a normal game operation port (winning port), so the game ball that passes through the normal game operation area 9126 will not enter the second starting port 9140.

The normal map operation area 9126 is also provided with a normal map operation switch 9127 (see FIG. 293 described below) that detects the passage of a game ball into the normal map operation area 9126. When a game ball passes through the normal map operation area 9126, the normal map operation switch 9127 detects the passage of the game ball into the normal map operation area 9126, a prize ball for the normal map operation area (for example, one game ball) is paid out, and a normal pattern lottery (a process for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning pattern) and a variable display of the normal pattern are performed.

In this embodiment, the normal map operation area 9126 is configured as a normal map operation port, but it may also be configured as a passing gate as in the first pachinko game machine.

The passage of the game ball into the normal symbol operation area 9126 may also be made to function as a trigger for activating the consecutive operation device of the special device. Assuming that the condition device is in operation (the special symbol that will result in a jackpot is displayed frozen), the passing of the game ball into the normal symbol operation area 9126 may activate the consecutive operation device of the special device, transitioning to a jackpot game state.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric role unit 9145 is disposed below (downstream side) the first special electric role unit 9130 described later in the right side area 107 and above (upstream side) the normal play area 9126 and the second special electric role unit 9150, and is disposed so that the game ball hit to the right can pass through it. The normal electric role unit 9145 is a unit body that integrates the second start hole 9140, the second start hole switch 9141 that detects the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 9140, the upper and lower two-stage normal power shutter 9147 that can move forward and backward, and the normal power solenoid 9148 (see FIG. 293 described later) that operates the normal power shutter 9147.

The normal power shutter 9147 is configured to be displaceable between an open state in which it is possible or easy to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 9140 by moving backwards when the normal power solenoid 9148 is activated, and a closed state in which it is difficult or impossible to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 9140 by moving forwards.

Specifically, the normal power shutter 9147 has a roughly U-shape when viewed in cross section from the front-to-rear direction, and is configured with an upper upper plate 9147U on which the game ball can roll, a lower lower plate 9147D on which the game ball can roll, and a support plate that connects and supports the upper plate 9147U and the lower plate 9147D. In addition, the upper plate 9147U and the lower plate 9147D of the normal power shutter 9147 are configured to be gently inclined (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) toward a center line perpendicular to the left-right direction of the play area 105.

When the normal power shutter 9147 advances forward and is in a closed state, the upper plate 9147U and the lower plate 9147D protrude from the surface of the game panel 9100, and the protruding lower plate 9147D closes the second starting hole 9140, making it impossible or difficult for a game ball flowing down the right side area 107 to enter the second starting hole 9140. Also, when the normal power shutter 9147 is in a closed state, the game ball rolling on the upper plate 9147U is guided downstream to the general winning hole 122, the second special electric role unit 9150, or the normal map operation area 9126, and the game ball rolling on the lower plate 9147D is guided downstream to the second special electric role unit 9150 or the normal map operation area 9126.

The gaming panel 9100 is configured such that when the normal power shutter 9147 is closed by a gaming nail or the like, the gaming ball flowing down the right side area 107 is basically not guided onto the lower panel 9147D, but is instead guided onto the upper panel 9147U.

In addition, when the normal power shutter 9147 is retracted backward and in an open state, the upper panel 9147U and the lower panel 9147D are recessed into the game panel 9100, and the second starting hole 9140 is opened.

When the normal power shutter 9147 is in an open state for a predetermined time or longer, a game ball flowing down the right side area 107 passes through the upper plate 9147U and the lower plate 9147D, a game ball rolling on the upper plate 9147U falls toward the lower plate 9147D, or a game ball rolling on the lower plate 9147D falls toward the second starting hole 9140, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140.

On the other hand, when the normal power shutter 9147 is in an open state for an opening time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds or less), even if a game ball rolling on the upper plate 9147U falls toward the lower plate 9147D, the opening time ends immediately, causing the lower plate 9147D to protrude from the surface of the game panel 9100, and the game ball that fell from the upper plate 9147U will roll on the lower plate 9147D (and be caught by the lower plate 9147D), making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140. In addition, the game ball rolling on the lower panel 9147D falls toward the second starting hole 9140, allowing the game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140. However, as described above, when the normal power shutter 9147 is closed, the game ball is not guided to the lower panel 9147D, and the game ball is not basically rolling on the lower panel 9147D. Therefore, if the normal power shutter 9147 is only displaced to the open state once for a short opening time, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140.

In addition, in this embodiment, the route R1 that the game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIG. 293 described later) takes to reach the normal electric role unit 9145 (second starting hole 9140) is predetermined by the configuration of the game board unit 9010, as shown by the dashed line in FIG. 292. Therefore, in this embodiment, the average arrival time of the game ball launched from the launching device 6 to reach the normal electric role unit 9145 (second starting hole 9140) can be calculated to be an average of 5 seconds (approximately 4 to 6 seconds), depending on the launch strength of the launching device 6. It goes without saying that the average arrival time of the game ball launched from the launching device 6 to reach the normal electric role unit 9145 (second starting hole 9140) varies depending on the configuration of the game board unit 9010.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal power shutter 9147 is configured as a two-stage shutter with an upper plate 9147U and a lower plate 9147D that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, but the normal power shutter 9147 may be configured as a one-stage shutter with a lower plate 9147D that opens and closes the second starting port 9140, without the upper plate 9147U. Furthermore, instead of a shutter that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, the normal power shutter 9147 may be configured as a movable member that can move left and right, called an electric chute.

(First special electric feature unit)
The first special electric role unit 9130 is located in the right side area 107 above (upstream) the normal operation area 9126, the normal electric role unit 9145, and the second special electric role unit 9150 described later.

The first special electric device unit 9130 is a unitary body that integrates a first large prize opening 9131, a first large prize opening count switch 9132 (see FIG. 293 described below) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 9131, a first special electric shutter 9134 that can move left and right, and a first special electric solenoid 9135 (see FIG. 293 described below) that operates the first special electric shutter 9134.

The first large prize opening 9131 is a large prize opening that opens when a jackpot is hit, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the first large prize opening 9131 in one round of a jackpot is set (for example, 10 balls). Each time one game ball enters the first large prize opening 9131, prize balls for the first large prize opening (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The first large prize opening 9131 transitions from a closed state to an open state in the first route when a special stop display mode is derived indicating that the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a "big hit" and in the second route when a specific stop display mode is derived indicating that the result of the special pattern determination is a "small hit" and the second large prize opening 9151 opens, and a game ball that enters the opened second large prize opening 9151 enters the V prize opening 9156 within the second large prize opening 9151.

The first special electric shutter 9134 is configured to be displaceable between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 9131 and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 9131, by the operation of the first special electric solenoid 9135.

Specifically, the first special electric shutter 9134 is roughly fan-shaped when viewed from the front, is supported at the bottom by a pivot, and is made up of a blade member that can move left and right.

When the first special electric shutter 9134 is movable to the right and in an open state, the first large prize opening 9131 opens, receives game balls flowing down into the right area 107, and guides the received game balls to the first large prize opening 9131. On the other hand, when the first special electric shutter 9134 is movable to the left and in a closed state, the first large prize opening 9131 closes, making it impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the first large prize opening 9131. Note that instead of the above-mentioned first special electric shutter 9134, a door member that displaces approximately parallel and approximately perpendicular to the surface of the game panel 9100, or a protruding plate member that can advance and retreat in the forward and backward directions relative to the surface of the game panel 9100 may be used.

(Second special electric feature unit)
The second special electric device unit 9150 is located below (downstream) the first special electric device unit 9130 and the normal electric device unit 9145 in the right-side area 107 and above (upstream) the normal operating area 9126, and is positioned so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through it.

The second special electric device unit 9150 includes a second large prize opening 9151, a second large prize opening count switch 9152 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 9151, a second special electric shutter 9154 that can open and close the second large prize opening 9151, a second special electric solenoid 9155 (see FIG. 293 described below) that operates the second special electric shutter 9154 to open and close the second large prize opening 9151, and a V prize opening 915 through which a game ball that has entered the second large prize opening 9151 can pass. 6, a V entry port switch 9157 (see FIG. 293 described below) that detects when a game ball has passed through the V entry port 9156, a normal port 9158 through which game balls that have entered the second large entry port 9151 but have not entered the V entry port 9156 can pass, a V shutter 9159 that opens and closes the V entry port 9156, and a V shutter solenoid 9160 (see FIG. 293 described below) that operates the V shutter 9159 to open and close the V entry port 9156.

The second large prize opening 9151 is a large prize opening that opens when a small prize is won, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the second large prize opening 9151 in one small prize is specified (for example, 10 balls). Each time one game ball enters this second large prize opening 9151, prize balls for the second large prize opening (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The second special electric shutter 9154 is made of a protruding plate-shaped member that can move forward and backward, and is configured so that by operating the second special electric solenoid 9155, the second special electric shutter 9154 can be moved forward to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 9151, and the second special electric shutter 9154 can be moved backward to an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 9151.

The V winning hole 9156 is a winning hole that can be opened and closed by the V shutter 9159, and is also a winning hole through which the game ball passes, triggering control of the jackpot game state via the second route described above.

When the game is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, the opening of the second large prize opening 9151 when the game ball passes through the V prize opening 9156 is regarded as the first round, and after the game ball passes through the V prize opening 9156 (from the second round onwards), a round game is executed in which the first large prize opening 9131 transitions from a closed state to an open state. Note that when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, a round game in which the second large prize opening 9151 transitions from a closed state to an open state may be executed for a predetermined number of rounds even after the game ball passes through the V prize opening 9156 (from the second round onwards).

Also, for example, a V entry port may be provided inside the first large entry port 9131, so that there is one V entry port and one attacker that is opened in the big win game state. In this case, when a stop display mode indicating a "small win" is derived, the first large entry port 9131 is opened, and when a game ball enters the V entry port provided inside the first large entry port 9131, the game is controlled to the big win game state (the big win game state via the second route).

The normal opening 9158 is configured to allow game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 9151 but have not passed through the V prize opening 9156 to enter (pass through) it. Note that in the small prize game state, if all game balls that have entered the open second large prize opening 9151 pass through the normal opening 9158 and no game balls pass through the V prize opening 9156, the game state will not transition from the small prize game state to the large prize game state.

The V-shutter 9159 is configured to be displaceable between a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for game balls to pass through the V-winning opening 9156 and an open state in which it is possible (or easy) for game balls to pass through the V-winning opening 9156 by the operation of the V-shutter solenoid 9160.

In particular, in the ninth pachinko game machine, when a small win game state is reached, the V shutter solenoid 9160 is activated to open the V winning hole 9156, and the game ball that enters the second large winning hole 9151 is configured to be able to pass through the V winning hole 9156.

In addition, in this embodiment, the route taken by the game ball launched from the launching device 6 to reach the second special electric role unit 9150 is predetermined, similar to route R1, and the average arrival time taken by the game ball launched from the launching device 6 to reach the second special electric role unit 9150 can be calculated to be an average of 6 seconds (approximately 5 to 7 seconds), depending on the launch strength of the launching device 6. It goes without saying that the average arrival time taken by the game ball launched from the launching device 6 to reach the second special electric role unit 9150 varies depending on the configuration of the game board unit 9010.

The relative positions of the first special electric role unit 9130, the normal electric role unit 9145, the second special electric role unit 9150, and the normal play area 9126 arranged in the right area 107 can be freely changed as desired.

[11-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the ninth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 293. Fig. 293 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 293, the ninth pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the ninth pachinko gaming machine differs from the first pachinko gaming machine in some respects in the configuration of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300. The configuration and layout of each are explained below.

[11-2-1. Main control circuit]
Compared to the first pachinko game machine, the main control circuit 200 has slightly different configurations in the normal power solenoid 9148, the first special power solenoid 9135, the second special power solenoid 9155, the V shutter solenoid 9160, the first start port switch 9121, the second start port switch 9141, the normal operation switch 9127, the first large prize port count switch 9132, the second large prize port count switch 9152, and the V prize port switch 9157 which are connected to the main control circuit 200.

(Solenoid for general purpose power supply)
The normal power solenoid 9148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the normal power shutter 9147. When the normal power solenoid 9148 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the normal power shutter 9147 backward to open the second starting port 9140, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the normal power shutter 9147 forward to close the second starting port 9140.

(First special solenoid)
The first special electric solenoid 9135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the first special electric shutter 9134. When the first special electric solenoid 9135 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the first special electric shutter 9134 to the right to open the first large prize opening 9131, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the first special electric shutter 9134 to the left to close the first large prize opening 9131.

(Second special solenoid)
The second special electric solenoid 9155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the second special electric shutter 9154. When the main CPU 201 energizes the second special electric solenoid 9155 (ON), the second special electric solenoid 9155 moves the second special electric shutter 9154 backward to open the second large winning opening 9151, and when the main CPU 201 does not energize the second special electric solenoid 9155 (OFF), the second special electric shutter 9154 advances forward to close the second large winning opening 9151.

(Solenoid for V-shutter)
The V shutter solenoid 9160 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V shutter 9159. When the V shutter solenoid 9160 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V shutter 9159 backward to open the V winning opening 9156, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V shutter 9159 forward to close the V winning opening 9156.

(First start switch)
The first start hole switch 9121 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 9120.

When the first start hole switch 9121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 9120, the main CPU 201 determines that the first start condition is met and acquires start information for the first special symbol (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for a symbol, random number value for determining a reach, random number value for selecting a performance, etc.). The acquired start information for the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol determination memory area (0) or is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (first special symbol start memory area (1) to first special symbol start memory area (4) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of first special symbols (for example, four)". When the start condition for the first special symbol (for example, the special electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, etc.) is met, it is used for the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, when the first start hole switch 9121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 9120, the main CPU 201 instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of the prize balls for the first start hole (e.g., three game balls).

(Second start switch)
The second start hole switch 9141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 9140.

When the second start hole switch 9141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 9140, the main CPU 201 determines that the second start condition is met and acquires start information for the second special symbol (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for a symbol, random number value for determining a reach, random number value for selecting a performance, etc.). The acquired start information for the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol determination memory area (0) or is stored in the second special symbol start memory area (second special symbol start memory area (1) to second special symbol start memory area (2) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of second special symbols (e.g., two)." When the start condition for the second special symbol (e.g., the special electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, etc.) is met, the information is used for the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, when the second start hole switch 9141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 9140, the main CPU 201 instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of a prize ball (e.g., one game ball) for the second start hole.

In addition, in the embodiment, the winning judgment process for the first special pattern based on the start information of the first special pattern is also called the "lottery for the first special pattern," and the winning judgment process for the second special pattern based on the start information of the second special pattern is also called the "lottery for the second special pattern," and the lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern are collectively called the "lottery for the special patterns."

(Normal operation switch)
The normal ball activation switch 9127 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a game ball into the normal ball activation area 9126.

When the normal symbol activation switch 9127 detects the passage of the game ball into the normal symbol activation area 9126, the main CPU 201 acquires normal symbol start information (random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a hit, random number value for the normal symbol, etc.). The acquired normal symbol start information is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (normal symbol start memory area (1) to normal symbol start memory area (4) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of normal symbols (for example, 4)". When the normal symbol determination start condition (for example, the normal electric role is not in operation, the normal symbol variable display is not being performed, etc.) is met, it is used for the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit determination process) and the normal symbol variable display. In addition, when the normal play operation switch 9127 detects the passage of a game ball into the normal play operation area 9126, the main CPU 201 instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of a prize ball (e.g., one game ball) for the normal play operation area.

(First prize slot count switch)
The first large prize opening count switch 9132 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of game balls into the first large prize opening 9131. When the first large prize opening count switch 9132 detects the entry of game balls into the first large prize opening 9131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that enter the first large prize opening 9131 per round, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of prize balls for the first large prize opening (e.g., 15 game balls).

(Second major prize slot count switch)
The second large prize opening count switch 9152 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 9151. When the second large prize opening count switch 9152 detects the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 9151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 9151 and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of prize balls for the second large prize opening (e.g., 15 game balls).

(V prize entry switch)
The V winning hole switch 9157 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 9156. When the V winning hole switch 9157 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 9156, the main CPU 201 performs control to transition to a big win game state. Note that even if the V winning hole switch 9157 detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 9156, no prize balls are paid out.

[11-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300, like the first pachinko game machine, is equipped with a sub-CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a gimmick control circuit 307 and a command input port 308, but differs in that it further comprises a button control circuit 310 and a performance button 54.

(Button Control Circuit 310)
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving the effect button 54. In other words, the button control circuit 310 is a circuit for changing the operation mode of the effect button 54 and vibrating the effect button 54. The button control circuit 310 drives the effect button 54 in response to a drive command from the sub-CPU 301.

The button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal related to a player's operation detected by the effect button 54. When the button control circuit 310 inputs an operation signal from the effect button 54, it outputs predetermined operation information to the sub-CPU 301.

[11-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the ninth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 294 to 305. The ninth pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In the ninth pachinko gaming machine, although the probability variable control is not executed, a time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed and a normal gaming state in which the time-saving control is not executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 is capable of progressing the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. Note that in this ninth pachinko gaming machine, the probability variable control is not executed, but this is not essential, and for example, the probability variable control may be executed by setting the probability variable flag on depending on the type of jackpot, etc.

As described later, the ninth pachinko game machine has two time-saving game states, which are distinguished from the viewpoint of time-saving transition conditions (time-saving occurrence conditions): an "A time-saving game state" which is entered after the end of the jackpot game state triggered by a jackpot, and a "B time-saving game state" which is entered after the variable display count of the special symbol reaches a ceiling value without being triggered by a jackpot. The "A time-saving game state" is also distinguished from the viewpoint of time-saving termination conditions and the operation mode during the time-saving game state (operation pattern of the normal power shutter 9147), which are the "first time-saving game state", the "second time-saving game state" which is easier to transition to the next jackpot game state than the first time-saving game state, and the "third time-saving game state" which is practically guaranteed to transition to the next jackpot game state. In addition, in this embodiment, when there is no distinction between the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state, they are simply referred to as "time-saving game states."

In addition, in this embodiment, in a typical normal game state (the first normal game state described below), left-handed hitting is generally considered to be the normal game mode, and in a time-saving game state, right-handed hitting is the normal game mode. The sub-CPU 301 displays the hitting method that is considered to be the normal game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 7.

[11-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
294 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol winning determination table shown in FIG. 294 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table for determining whether a hit is a "big hit", "small hit" or "miss".

In the special symbol hit determination table, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a hit that is determined to be a "hit" or a "miss" and the corresponding hit/miss determination value data (hit determination value data, miss determination value data) is specified as the data used in the hit determination process of the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first starting hole 9120. In addition, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a hit that is determined to be a "hit", a "small hit" or a "miss" and the corresponding hit/miss determination value data (hit determination value data, small hit determination value data, miss determination value data) is specified as the data used in the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the ball entering the second starting hole 9140. Note that the total random number value of the random number value for determining a hit is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In other words, the random number value for determining a hit is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

As shown in FIG. 294, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 9120, the main CPU 201 judges the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol to be a "big hit" with a selection rate of about 1/231.6 based on the hit determination process of the first special symbol using the random number value for the hit determination of the first special symbol, and judges the result as a "miss" otherwise. Also, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 9140, the main CPU 201 judges the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol to be a "big hit" with a selection rate of about 1/231.6 based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol using the random number value for the hit determination of the second special symbol, and judges the result as a "small hit" with a selection rate of about 1/1.004, and judges the result as a "miss" otherwise.

The range (width) of the random number value that determines whether a "big hit" or a "small hit", i.e., the selection rate, is not limited to the above values and can be freely modified as appropriate. In particular, the process of determining whether a "miss" is determined for the second special symbol may be configured so that a "miss" is not determined. In other words, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 9140, either a "big hit" or a "small hit" is determined.

In addition, the system may be configured to determine a "small win" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, but if a "small win" is determined, it is preferable to determine a "small win" with a relatively low selection rate so that the determination made in the hit determination process for the second special symbol is more favorable than the determination made in the hit determination process for the first special symbol.

In addition, when the first special symbol hit determination process or the second special symbol hit determination process is performed, a "time-saving hit" that transitions directly to a time-saving game state (C time-saving game state) without transitioning to a jackpot game state may be determined.

In addition, if the ninth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the selection rate of a big win and/or a small win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting. However, even if the ninth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the selection rate of a time-saving win be set to a common probability for all settings.

In addition to or instead of changing the selection rate of a big win or a small win according to the set value, for example, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning port 9156 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning port 9156, or the time-saving end condition (number of small wins, etc.) may be changed for each set value. In other words, by adopting one or more of the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the probability of a big win, the probability of a small win, the opening frequency of the V winning port 9156 (i.e. the operation frequency of the second special electric shutter 9154), the opening time, and the time-saving end condition, the expectation value controlled to the big win game state may be configured to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting.

[11-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
295 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 295 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The special symbol determination table is a table that determines the "special symbol selection symbol" and "symbol designation command" that determine the special symbol that will be stopped and displayed.

The "selected special symbol" is information for determining the special symbol that will be displayed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit, and the "symbol designation command" is a command sent to the sub-control circuit 300 to display a decorative symbol that corresponds to the special symbol that will be displayed in the display area of the display device 7.

The special symbol determination table specifies the type of special symbol, the winning/losing determination value data described above, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol obtained when the game ball enters the first starting hole 9120 or the second starting hole 9140 in association with the "special symbol selection symbol" and the "symbol designation command." The symbol random number value of the special symbol is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 295, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 0 to 9, the main CPU 201 determines "z1" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA1" as the symbol designation command. If the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 10 to 54, the main CPU 201 determines "z2" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 55 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z3" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

When jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, regardless of the value of the symbol random number value for the special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines "z4" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

When small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the win determination process for the second special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 0 to 9, the main CPU 201 determines "z5" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA5" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 10 to 19, the main CPU 201 determines "z6" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 20 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z7" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

In this way, in this embodiment, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the random number value of the special symbol in the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 295 is configured so that the relationship of the selection rate of the special symbol is established as "z1" < "z2" = "z3". Note that the selection rate of the special symbol determined when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol may be configured to only be two types, "z1" and "z2", so that the relationship of the selection rate of "z1" < "z2" is established.

In addition, when small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the special symbol random number value in the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 295 is configured so that the relationship of the selection rate of the special symbol is "z5+z6" < "z7". It is also possible to configure so that the relationship of the selection rate of the special symbol is "z5" < "z6" < "z7".

Although the explanation of the ninth pachinko gaming machine is omitted, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) explained in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is a table that is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 293) when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, according to the "selected special symbol". In addition, the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 display the stop mode of a big win, a small win, or a miss, based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. In addition, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table described in the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 12(B)) is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

The range of the random number value of the special pattern that determines the "selected special pattern", i.e., the selection rate, is not limited to the above values and can be freely changed as needed.

[11-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
296 is an example of a big win type determination table in the pachinko gaming machine No. 9. The big win type determination table shown in FIG. 296 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The jackpot type determination table is a table that determines the operation content of the jackpot game state, and is a table that determines the "opening mode of the jackpot game state."

As shown in FIG. 296, the jackpot type determination table associates the "opening mode of the jackpot game state" with the selected special symbol.

The "opening mode of the jackpot game state" specifies the maximum number of rounds of the first large prize opening 9131 that is opened during the jackpot game state, and the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 9131. The opening pattern of the first large prize opening 9131 specifies the OP waiting time (opening time) which is the waiting state for the start of the jackpot game state, the maximum opening time of each round, the closing time of each round, the ED waiting time (ending time), etc. Note that the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 9131 may specify a different maximum opening time for each round, or a different closing time (round interval time) for each round. Furthermore, the number of openings and the opening time may be specified so that the first large prize opening 6131 is opened and closed multiple times per round.

Here, the "opening mode of the big win game state" corresponding to the "selected special pattern z5-7" determined when the small win judgment value data of the second special pattern is obtained is the opening mode when the game ball that entered the second large winning opening 9151 opened in the small win game state passes through the second route of the V winning opening 9156 and transitions to the big win game state. When transitioning to the big win game state via this second route, the opening of the second large winning opening 9151 in the small win game state is considered the first round, and from the second round onwards, the big win game state in which the first large winning opening 9131 is opened is started. Note that if the game ball that entered the second large winning opening 9151 opened in the small win game state does not pass through the V winning opening 9156, the big win game state is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 296, according to the jackpot type determination table, when the jackpot determination value data for the first special symbol is obtained, the maximum number of rounds is determined to be the first number of rounds (8 rounds) for all "special symbol selection symbols z1-3". Note that a different maximum number of rounds may be determined depending on the "special symbol selection symbols z1-3".

Also, as shown in FIG. 296, according to the big win type determination table, when the "special pattern selection pattern z5-7" is determined when the small win determination value data of the second special pattern is obtained, the maximum number of rounds is determined to be the third round number (10 rounds) or a fourth round number (4 rounds) less than the third round number, depending on the selected special pattern. In particular, according to the special pattern determination table shown in FIG. 295 above, the selected special pattern is configured so that the relational equation of the selection rate of "z5+z6"<"z7" is established, so that the fourth round number (4 rounds) is more likely to be determined than the third round number (10 rounds).

When the special symbol is selected as z5 to z7, a different number of rounds other than "10 rounds" or "4 rounds" may be determined, or the same maximum number of rounds may be determined for all of them.

In addition, depending on the special symbol selected, either the OP waiting time (opening time) or the ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the first large winning port 9131 may be configured to be different.

[11-3-4. Small Win Type Determination Table]
297 is an example of a small win type determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. The small win type determination table shown in FIG. 297 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The small win type determination table is a table that determines the operation content of the small win game state, and is a table that determines the "opening mode of the small win game state."

As shown in FIG. 297, the small win type determination table associates the "opening mode of the small win game state" with the selected special pattern.

The "opening mode of the small win game state" specifies the maximum number of times the second large winning opening 9151 is opened during the small win game state, the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 9151, and the opening pattern of the V winning opening 9156. The opening pattern of the second large winning opening 9151 specifies the OP waiting time (opening time) which is the waiting state for the start of the small win game state, the maximum opening time for each number, the closing time for each number, the ED waiting time (ending time), etc. Furthermore, the opening pattern of the V winning opening 9156 specifies the opening waiting time, opening time, etc.

Here, when the small win game state starts, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 9151 and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 9156 are timed simultaneously, and when the second large winning opening 9151 is open, the V winning opening 9156 is also configured to be open. Therefore, when the small win game state is performed, it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 9156. Note that, as the opening pattern of the V winning opening 9156, multiple opening and closing times may be specified so that the V winning opening 9156 is opened and closed multiple times, as in the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 9151.

The small win type determination table may be configured so that at least one of the following is different depending on the selected special symbol: OP waiting time (opening time), maximum opening time for each number of times, closing time for each number of times, ED waiting time (ending time), and opening waiting time, opening time, and closing time for the opening pattern of the V winning port 9156.

In particular, the small win type determination table may be configured to vary the opening pattern of the V winning hole 9156 depending on the selected special symbol, and to determine a favorable operation mode in which it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 9156 and an unfavorable operation mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 9156.

In addition, the maximum opening time for one round in the big win game state (e.g., 0.1 seconds) is set shorter than the maximum opening time for one round in the big win game state (e.g., 28 seconds), so that in the big win game state, the first large prize winning port 9131 opens in a favorable "first opening mode," and in the small win game state, the second large prize winning port 9151 opens in a less favorable "second opening mode" than the first opening mode.

[11-3-5. Game status related setting table]
298 is an example of a game state related setting table in the pachinko gaming machine No. 9. The game state related setting table shown in FIG. 298 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The game state related setting table is a table for setting the game state after the big win game state ends.

As shown in FIG. 298, the game state related setting table associates the "game state setting" consisting of the "state flag," "normal power operation pattern," and "A time-saving end condition" based on the game state when the selected special pattern is determined to be a big win or a small win (game state at the time of winning).

The "state flag" is a flag that indicates the type of game state, and is stored in a specified memory area of the main RAM 203. A state flag of 0 indicates a "normal game state", a state flag of 1 indicates an "A time-shortened game state", and a state flag of 2 indicates a "B time-shortened game state". Note that in this embodiment, the C time-shortened game state is not executed, but if the C time-shortened game state is executable, a state flag of 3 indicates a "C time-shortened game state".

The "normal power operation pattern" is information that defines the opening pattern of the second starting port 9140, and is stored in a specified memory area of the main RAM 203. A normal power operation pattern = 00 indicates a state in which the "long opening pattern" described below is difficult to determine and the "short opening pattern" described below is likely to be determined, a normal power operation pattern = 01 indicates a state in which both the "long opening pattern" and the "short opening pattern" are determined, and a normal power operation pattern = 02 indicates a state in which the "long opening pattern" is more likely to be determined and the "short opening pattern" is more difficult to determine than when the normal power operation pattern = 01.

In addition, in this embodiment, the "normal power operation pattern" has a corresponding relationship with the "status flag (game state)", and is configured so that when the status flag indicating the normal game state = 0, the normal power operation pattern = 00 is set, when the status flag indicating the A time-saving game state = 1, the normal power operation pattern = 01 or 02 is set, and when the status flag indicating the B time-saving game state = 2, the normal power operation pattern = 02 is set.

The "A time-saving end condition" is the end condition for the A time-saving game state, and the "variable number of times normal symbols are displayed" is set as the end condition for the number of times the time-saving game state is to be played. When the end condition for the "variable number of times normal symbols are displayed" is met, the A time-saving game state ends and the game transitions to the normal game state.

In this embodiment, the variable number of times the normal symbol is displayed is set as the A time-saving end condition, but in addition to the end condition of "the variable number of times the normal symbol is displayed," the "A time-saving end condition" may be set from multiple end conditions such as "the number of times a small jackpot is won" and "the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed," and when any of the end conditions is met, the A time-saving game state ends and the game transitions to the normal game state. This also applies to the B time-saving end condition described below.

When setting an end condition for the "variable number of times special symbols are displayed" in addition to the end condition for the "variable number of times normal symbols are displayed" as the A time-saving end condition or the B time-saving end condition, it is preferable that the end condition for the "variable number of times special symbols are displayed" is set to a variable number of times that is less than the variable number of times that is set as the end condition for the "variable number of times normal symbols are displayed". For example, when the end condition for the "variable number of times normal symbols are displayed" is set to 50 times, it is preferable to set the end condition for the "variable number of times special symbols are displayed" to the total variable number of times that the first special symbols and the second special symbols are displayed = 10 times, or to set the end condition to the satisfaction of either the variable number of times that the first special symbols are displayed = 5 times or the variable number of times that the second special symbols are displayed = 5 times.

According to the game status related setting table shown in FIG. 298, when the variable display number of normal symbols in the A time-saving end condition is set to 100 times, which is the "first time-saving number," depending on the selected symbol of the special symbol, the status flag is set to 1 and the normal power operation pattern is set to 01, and when the variable display number of normal symbols in the A time-saving end condition is set to 120 times, which is the "second time-saving number," or 10,000 times, which is the "third time-saving number," the status flag is set to 1 and the normal power operation pattern is set to 02.

In this embodiment, the time-saving game state in which the status flag = 1, normal power operation pattern = 01, and the first time-saving number of times (100 times) are set is called the "first time-saving game state." In addition, the time-saving game state in which the status flag = 1, normal power operation pattern = 02, and the second time-saving number of times (120 times) are set is called the "second time-saving game state" which is easier to transition to the next jackpot game state than the first time-saving game state. In addition, the time-saving game state in which the status flag = 1, normal power operation pattern = 02, and the third time-saving number of times (10,000 times) are set is called the "third time-saving game state" which is essentially guaranteed to transition to the next jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, the number of times of time-saving (the number of times of variable display of normal symbols) of the A time-saving end condition in the first time-saving game state is configured to be set to 100 times as the first time-saving number, but the first time-saving number can be freely changed in design as needed. Also, the number of times of variable display of normal symbols of the A time-saving end condition in the second time-saving game state is configured to be set to 120 times as the second time-saving number, but as long as the normal power operation pattern = 01 is set in the first time-saving game state and the normal power operation pattern = 02 is set in the second time-saving game state, the second time-saving number can be freely changed in design as needed as long as it is equal to or greater than the first time-saving number. Furthermore, the number of times of variable display of normal symbols of the A time-saving end condition in the third time-saving game state is configured to be set to 10,000 times as the third time-saving number, but the third time-saving number can be freely changed in design as needed as long as it is a number that practically guarantees a transition to the next big win game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal power operation pattern is provided, but the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state may be configured to be configured only from the difference in the number of time-saving times (the number of times that the normal pattern is variably displayed) of the A time-saving end condition, without providing the normal power operation pattern. In this case, the first time-saving number of times (e.g., 50 times) < the second time-saving number of times (e.g., 100 times) < the third time-saving number of times (e.g., 10,000 times).

According to the game state related setting table shown in FIG. 298, after the jackpot game state resulting from the drawing of the first special symbol ends, the game state is configured to transition to either the "first time-shortened game state" or the "second time-shortened game state" depending on the selected special symbol, and after the jackpot game state resulting from the drawing of the second special symbol ends, the game state is configured to transition to either the "second time-shortened game state" or the "third time-shortened game state" depending on the selected special symbol.

In this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state due to the drawing of the second special symbol, the game state is configured to transition to the "second time-saving game state" at a first rate that is relatively higher than after the end of the jackpot game state due to the drawing of the first special symbol. After the end of the jackpot game state due to the drawing of the second special symbol, the game state is configured to transition to the "third time-saving game state" at a second rate that is relatively higher than after the end of the jackpot game state due to the drawing of the first special symbol. After the end of the jackpot game state due to the drawing of the second special symbol, the game state is configured to transition to the "second time-saving game state" at a third rate that is relatively higher than the "third time-saving game state". Note that the above first rate, second rate, and third rate do not exclude the idea that the rates to be compared are 0% and 100%.

In this embodiment, after the jackpot game state resulting from the drawing of the first special symbol ends, the game is configured to transition to the "first time-shortened game state" or the "second time-shortened game state." However, after the jackpot game state resulting from the drawing of the first special symbol ends, the game may transition to any of the following: (a) only the "first time-shortened game state," (b) the "first time-shortened game state" or the "normal game state," (c) the "first time-shortened game state" or the "third time-shortened game state," (d) It may be configured to transition to the "first time-shortened game state", the "normal game state", or the "second time-shortened game state", (e) the "first time-shortened game state", the "normal game state", or the "third time-shortened game state", (f) the "first time-shortened game state", the "second time-shortened game state", or the "third time-shortened game state", (g) the "first time-shortened game state", the "normal game state", the "second time-shortened game state", or the "third time-shortened game state".

Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the jackpot game state resulting from the lottery for the second special symbol ends, the game state is configured to transition to a "second time-shortened game state" or a "third time-shortened game state", but the game state may be configured to transition to (a) only the "second time-shortened game state", (b) the "second time-shortened game state" or the "normal game state", (c) the "second time-shortened game state" or the "first time-shortened game state", (d) the "second time-shortened game state", "normal game state" or the "first time-shortened game state", (e) the "second time-shortened game state", "normal game state" or the "third time-shortened game state", (f) the "second time-shortened game state", "first time-shortened game state" or the "third time-shortened game state", or (g) the "second time-shortened game state", "normal game state", "first time-shortened game state" or the "third time-shortened game state". However, even if it is possible to transition to various game states as described above, it is desirable to maintain the relationship between the first ratio, second ratio, and third ratio described above.

In this embodiment, the game state related setting table is configured so that the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is set to the same state when the "game state at the time of winning is the normal game state" and when the "game state at the time of winning is the time-saving game state", but the game state after the end of the jackpot game state may be configured to differ depending on the game state at the time of winning.

[11-3-6. Special symbol variation pattern table]
299 and 300 are examples of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 299 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in a normal game state in the ninth pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 300 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in a time-saving game state in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. The variation pattern tables of special symbols shown in FIG. 299 and FIG. 300 are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table is a table that determines the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol and the fluctuation display time of the special symbol. "Special symbol fluctuation pattern" is information that defines the fluctuation mode of the special symbol, and at least the fluctuation display time of the special symbol is defined.

The main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table of either FIG. 299 or FIG. 300 depending on the game status, etc., and refers to the determined special symbol variation pattern table to determine the special symbol variation pattern based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol winning determination process, the selected special symbol, etc. Then, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation display time based on the determined special symbol variation pattern.

When the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern, it transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined special symbol variation pattern to the sub-CPU 301. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201. The special symbol variation pattern command is configured to be able to distinguish whether it is a first special symbol variation pattern triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 9120 or a second special symbol variation pattern triggered by a game ball entering the second starting hole 9140, and when distinguishing between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is also called the first special symbol variation pattern command or the second special symbol variation pattern command.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
The special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 299 is a special symbol variation pattern table that is determined during normal game play.

Here, in the normal game mode, left-handed shots are performed as the regular game mode, so essentially a game ball can enter the first starting hole 9120, but it is impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140. However, immediately after the time-saving game mode ends and transitions to the normal game mode, the reserved number of second special symbols stored in the time-saving game mode will be consumed.

In this embodiment, when distinguishing between normal game states in detail, the normal game state during the control period of the first special symbol, which is performed based on the start information of the first special symbol, is called the "first normal game state", and the normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol, which is performed based on the start information of the second special symbol (the normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol, which is performed when the variable display number of the normal symbol is the final time-saving number in the time-saving game state, the second start hole 9140 is opened based on the lottery of the normal symbol, and a game ball enters the second start hole 9140) is called the "second normal game state".

As shown in FIG. 299, according to the special symbol variation pattern table T1, in the first normal game state (first special symbol), the lottery result (win or lose) of the special symbol, the selected special symbol, the random number value for reach determination, the random number value for effect selection, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation display time of the special symbol are associated with each other. Note that the random number value for reach determination is selected from, for example, 0-249 (250 types), and the random number value for effect selection is selected from, for example, 0-99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In addition, in the second normal game state (second special symbol), the lottery result (win or lose) of the special symbol, the selected special symbol, the number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is met, the change pattern of the special symbol, and the change display time of the special symbol are associated with each other, and in the second normal game state (second special symbol), different change patterns of the special symbol and the change display time of the special symbol can be determined according to the number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is met.

Here, the "start condition of the second special symbol" specifically means that, at least under the condition that the special electric device is not operating (not in a big win game state or a small win game state) and the variable display of the second special symbol is not being performed, the start information of the second special symbol is stored in either the special symbol determination memory area (0) or the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (2) of the main RAM 203.

The "number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition for the second special symbol is satisfied" refers to the number of reserved second special symbols immediately before the start information for the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (2) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determination memory area (0).

For example, when three game balls enter the second start hole 9140 in succession under conditions that are not a big win or small win game state and the variable display of the second special symbol is not being performed, the start information of the second special symbol based on the first game ball that entered the second start hole 9140 is stored in the special symbol determination memory area (0), and the start condition of the second special symbol is immediately established, so that the "number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is established" = 0. Also, the start information of the second special symbol based on the second game ball that entered the second start hole 9140 is stored in the second special symbol start memory area (1), and the start information of the second special symbol based on the third game ball that entered the second start hole 9140 is stored in the second special symbol start memory area (2). Then, when the start condition of the second special symbol is established for the start information of the second special symbol based on the second game ball, the start information of the second special symbol is stored up to the second special symbol start memory area (2), so the number of reserved second special symbols just before being shifted to the special symbol determination memory area (0) is 2, and the "number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is established" = 2. Also, when the start condition of the second special symbol is established for the start information of the second special symbol based on the third game ball, the start information of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start memory area (1), so the number of reserved second special symbols just before being shifted to the special symbol determination memory area (0) is 1, and the "number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is established" = 1.

In this embodiment, in the case of the second normal game state (second special symbol), when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, if the number of reserved second special symbols = 0 when the start condition for the second special symbol is met, a "first special symbol change pattern (0AH)" can be determined in which a "BONUS entry effect" that notifies the player of entry into the BONUS state described below is executed, and if the number of reserved second special symbols > 0 when the start condition for the second special symbol is met, a "second special symbol change pattern (1AH)" can be determined in which a "BONUS continuation effect" in which the BONUS effect executed in the big hit game state and the small hit game state continues is executed.

In addition, the "first variable display time (e.g., 10 seconds)" associated with the first special symbol variable pattern (0AH) for executing the BONUS entry performance is set longer than the average arrival time (e.g., 5 seconds; hereinafter also referred to as the "normal electric average arrival time") for the game ball launched from the launching device 6 to reach the normal electric role unit 9145 (second starting port 9140).
Furthermore, the above-mentioned "first variable display time (e.g., 10 seconds)" is set to be longer than the average arrival time (e.g., 6 seconds) for the game ball launched from the launching device 6 to reach the second special electric gimmick unit 9150 (second large winning port 9151).

In addition, the "second variable display time (e.g., 1 second)" associated with the variable pattern (1AH) of the second special symbol in which the BONUS continuation performance is executed is set to be shorter than the "normal power average arrival time."
Furthermore, the above-mentioned "second variable display time (e.g., 1 second)" is set so that the variable display time of the special pattern is less than the OP waiting time (opening time, e.g., 2 seconds) of the jackpot game state and the OP waiting time (opening time, e.g., 2 seconds) of the small jackpot game state, in order to make it appear as if multiple jackpot game states or small jackpot game states are continuing.

In this way, when the number of reserved second special symbols = 0 when the start condition for the second special symbol is met, the variable display time of the second special symbol is set longer than the "average normal power arrival time", and when the number of reserved second special symbols > 0 when the start condition for the second special symbol is met, the variable display time of the second special symbol is set shorter than the "average normal power arrival time". Therefore, depending on the number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition for the second special symbol is met, the ball entry rate at which the game balls launched from the launching device 6 enter the normal electric role unit 9145 (second starting hole 9140) can be varied, and balls according to the design value can be provided to the player.

In addition, if the number of reserved second special symbols is greater than 0 when the start condition for the second special symbol is met, the variable display time of the second special symbol is set to be short. In the BONUS state described below, when multiple jackpot game states (up to three) are played consecutively, the variable display time of the second special symbol played between the multiple jackpot game states is shortened, making it possible to make the multiple jackpot game states appear seamless (as if they were a group of jackpot game states).

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in time-saving game mode)
The special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 300 is a special symbol variation pattern table that is determined during the time-saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 300, the special pattern change pattern table J1 associates the type of special pattern, the lottery result (win or lose) of the special pattern, the selected special pattern, the number of second special patterns reserved when the start condition of the second special pattern is met, the change pattern of the special pattern, and the change display time of the special pattern.

Here, in the time-saving play state, a right-handed hit is performed as a regular play mode, and it is essentially impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to enter the first starting hole 9120, but it is possible for a game ball to enter the first starting hole 9120 by a left-handed hit as an irregular play mode (that is disadvantageous to the player) in the time-saving play state. For this reason, the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 300 corresponds to the variation pattern of the special symbol that is determined when a left-handed hit is performed as an irregular play mode in the time-saving play state and the game ball enters the first starting hole 9120.

In the special pattern fluctuation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 300, when the type of special pattern is the second special pattern, similarly to the special pattern fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 299, the "first special pattern fluctuation pattern (0AH)" and the "second special pattern fluctuation pattern (1AH)" can be determined by referring to the number of reserved second special patterns when the start condition of the second special pattern is met.

[11-3-7. Special symbol pre-reading related data]
FIG. 301 is an example of data related to the look-ahead of the special symbol in the ninth pachinko game machine. Here, "look-ahead" refers to analyzing the start information of the special symbol acquired before the lottery of the special symbol when the game ball enters the first start hole 9120 or the second start hole 9140 and the main control circuit 200 (main CPU 201) acquires the start information of the special symbol (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for a symbol, random number value for determining a reach, random number value for selecting a performance, etc.). The analyzed information (look-ahead command) is then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 (sub-CPU 301), and the "look-ahead performance" can be executed based on the look-ahead command.

Figure 301 (a) is a look-ahead execution correspondence table that determines whether or not to perform look-ahead depending on the game status as data related to look-ahead of special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 301(a), in the normal game state, both pre-reading based on the start information of the first special symbol and pre-reading based on the start information of the second special symbol can be performed. In the time-saving game state, the big win game state, and the small win game state, only pre-reading based on the start information of the second special symbol can be performed.

Figure 301 (b) shows an example of the configuration of a look-ahead command that analyzes the start information for a special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 301(b), the look-ahead command is composed of a "special symbol type" (either the first special symbol or the second special symbol) and multiple "parameters 1 to 3."

"Parameter 1" is the winning/losing information that is analyzed in advance to determine whether it is a big win, a small win, or a miss based on a random number value for determining a big win, and Figure 301 (c) is an example of a setting table for parameter 1.

"Parameter 2" is pattern information that is obtained by analyzing in advance the special pattern (selected pattern) that will be displayed when the reel stops based on the random number value for determining a jackpot and the random number value for the pattern. Figure 301 (d) is an example of a setting table for parameter 2.

"Parameter 3" is fluctuation information that analyzes the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols in advance based on the random number value for determining a jackpot, the random number value for determining a reach, and the random number value for selecting a performance. Figure 301 (e) is an example of a setting table for parameter 3.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol from when the start information of the special symbol is read ahead until the special symbol is drawn based on the start information of the special symbol is also called "pre-variation." Also, the variable display of the special symbol when the special symbol is drawn based on the start information of the special symbol is also called "the said variation."

[11-3-8. Normal symbol winning judgment table]
302 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. The winning determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 302 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table referenced in the normal symbol hit determination process, and is a table referenced when determining by lottery whether a "normal symbol hit" or "normal symbol miss" is made based on the normal symbol hit determination random number value obtained when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation area 9126.

The winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 302 specifies the range (width) of the random number value for winning judgment of normal symbols and the winning/losing judgment value data for normal symbols ("normal symbol win" or "normal symbol miss") in correspondence with each other. Note that the random number value for winning judgment of normal symbols is obtained in the range of 0 to 65535 (65536 types), for example. However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning/losing determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 302, and determines the winning/losing determination value data for normal symbols based on the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol winning determination.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern shown in FIG. 302, and when the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern is any value between 0 and 956, it judges it as a "normal pattern winning" and determines the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal pattern as the "normal pattern winning/losing judgment value data". Therefore, in this embodiment, the "normal pattern winning" is determined with a selection rate of approximately 1/68.5. Also, when the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern is 957 to 65535, the main CPU 201 judges it as a "normal pattern losing" and determines the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal pattern as the "normal pattern losing judgment value data".

The range (width) of the random number value for determining whether a normal pattern is a hit or a miss, i.e., the selection rate, is not limited to the above values and can be freely designed and modified as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the selection rate for "normal symbol hit" is set to the same (the winning probability for normal symbol hit is the same) regardless of whether the game state is normal game state or time-saving game state, but by varying the opening pattern of the second start hole 9140 depending on the game state (normal power operation pattern) as described below, the degree of profit given to the player is varied depending on the game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" is set to the same regardless of whether the game state is the normal game state or the time-saving game state, but the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" may be made different depending on the game state. When making the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" different depending on the game state, it is desirable to configure it so that the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" in the time-saving game state is higher than the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" in the normal game state. Furthermore, the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" may be made different depending on the type of game state, time-saving game state A and time-saving game state B.

[11-3-9. Normal symbol determination table]
303 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 303 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "selected normal symbol" that determines the normal symbol stopping pattern based on the normal symbol winning/losing determination value data described above and the normal symbol random number value obtained when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation area 9126.

The normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 303 specifies the above-mentioned normal pattern winning/losing determination value data ("normal pattern winning determination value data" or "normal pattern losing determination value data"), the normal pattern random number value, and the selected normal pattern in correspondence with each other. The normal pattern random number value is obtained, for example, from 0 to 100 (101 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 303 and determines the selected normal pattern based on the normal pattern hit determination value data and the pattern random number value of the normal pattern.

According to the normal pattern determination table shown in Figure 303, when normal pattern hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal pattern hit determination process, for example, the selected normal pattern is selected as follows.

For example, when normal symbol winning judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f1" as the selected normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 0 and 49, and selects "f2" as the selected normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 50 and 99. In addition, when normal symbol losing judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f3" as the selected normal symbol, regardless of the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

The range (width) of the random number value of the normal pattern from which the "selected normal pattern" is selected, i.e., the selection rate, is not limited to the above value and can be freely designed and changed as appropriate.

In particular, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, the selected normal symbol is selected based on the win/lose determination value data for the normal symbol (the result of the win determination process for the normal symbol) and the symbol random number value for the normal symbol, regardless of the gaming state. Note that, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the selected normal symbol may be selected depending on the gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern (see FIG. 302) to determine the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal pattern based on the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern, and then refers to the normal pattern judgment table (see FIG. 303) to determine the selected pattern for the normal pattern based on the pattern random number value for the normal pattern, but is not limited to this. For example, the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal pattern (whether the normal pattern is winning or losing) and the selected pattern for the normal pattern may be determined together based on the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern and the pattern random number value for the normal pattern.

[11-3-10. Second starting port opening pattern determination table]
304 is an example of a second start opening pattern determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. The second start opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 304 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

When it is determined that a normal symbol has been hit, the second start hole opening pattern determination table is referenced when determining the opening pattern of the second start hole 9140 as the operation mode of the normal power shutter 9147 according to the game state (normal power operation pattern) and the selected normal symbol.

The second start hole opening pattern determination table shown in Figure 304 specifies the game state (normal power operation pattern), the selected normal pattern, and the opening pattern of the second start hole 9140 in correspondence with each other.

The "second start port opening pattern" is composed of a "first opening time" when the second start port 9140 is in the first open state, a "first wait time" when the second start port 9140 is in the first closed state, a "second opening time" when the second start port 9140 is in the second open state, a "second wait time" when the second start port 9140 is in the second closed state, and an "ending time" that closes the second start port 9140 and ends the operation of the normal power shutter 9147.

The main CPU 201 refers to the second start hole opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 304 and determines the opening pattern of the second start hole 9140 based on the game state (normal power operation pattern) and the selected normal pattern. When the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern of the second start hole 9140, it transmits to the sub-CPU 301 a second start hole opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the second start hole 9140.

In this embodiment, there are two types of opening patterns for the second starting port: a disadvantageous "short opening pattern (91H01H)" in which the opening time of the second starting port 9140 is short, and an advantageous "long opening pattern (91H02H)" in which the opening time of the second starting port 9140 is long. Note that the second starting port may be configured to have three or more opening patterns.

In particular, in this embodiment, the opening time of the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is set to an extremely short time (e.g., 0.072 seconds) during which, even if a game ball rolling on the upper plate 9147U of the normal power shutter 9147 falls toward the lower plate 9147D, the lower plate 9147D immediately protrudes, and the game ball that fell from the upper plate 9147U rolls on the lower plate 9147D (is caught by the lower plate 9147D). For this reason, even if a normal pattern is determined to be a hit, when the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is performed, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140, and it is essentially treated as a miss.

The opening time of the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is set to a long time (e.g., 5.4 seconds) so that even if a game ball rolling on the upper panel 9147U of the normal power shutter 9147 falls toward the lower panel 9147D, the lower panel 9147D does not protrude and the game ball passes through the lower panel 9147D, allowing it to enter the second starting hole 9140.

According to the second start hole opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 304, when the normal power operation pattern associated with the normal game state is 00, the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is determined as the second start hole opening pattern even when the selected normal pattern is "f1" or when the selected normal pattern is "f2" (the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is not determined).

In addition, when the normal power operation pattern associated with the first normal game state is 01, when the selected normal symbol is "f1", the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is determined as the opening pattern for the second starting hole, and when the selected normal symbol is "f2", the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is determined as the opening pattern for the second starting hole.

In addition, when the normal power operation pattern associated with the second normal game state and the third normal game state is 02, the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is determined as the opening pattern for the second starting hole when the selected normal symbol is "f1" or when the selected normal symbol is "f2."

For this reason, normal power operation pattern = 00 indicates a state in which the "long opening pattern" is difficult to determine and the "short opening pattern" is likely to be determined, normal power operation pattern = 01 indicates a state in which both the "long opening pattern" and the "short opening pattern" are determined, and normal power operation pattern = 02 indicates a state in which the "long opening pattern" is more likely to be determined and the "short opening pattern" is more difficult to determine than when normal power operation pattern = 01.

In addition, in the right column of the second starting hole opening pattern determination table shown in Figure 304, the "long opening probability" at which the "long opening pattern" is executed is shown for reference, calculated by adding up the "random number value for determining whether a normal pattern is a hit (see Figure 302)" and the "pattern random number value for a normal pattern (see Figure 303)". In this embodiment, when the normal power operation pattern = 00, the normal pattern hit is approximately 1/68.5, but the long opening pattern is never determined, so the "long opening probability" is 0. In addition, when the normal power operation pattern = 01, the normal pattern hit is approximately 1/68.5, and the selection rate of the selected pattern "f2" of the normal pattern that determines the long opening pattern is 51/101, so the "long opening probability" is approximately 1/135.6. Also, when the normal power operation pattern is 01, the normal symbol hit rate is approximately 1/68.5, and the long opening pattern is determined for all selected normal symbols (101/101), so the "long opening probability" is approximately 1/68.5.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specified number for normal power is set to three, and even if the opening pattern of any of the second start ports is determined and the second start port 9140 is open, when three game balls enter the second start port 9140, the opening pattern of that second start port ends (the second start port 9140 closes). In other words, only three game balls can enter the second start port 9140 for one normal pattern hit, and even if there is 5,400 ms of remaining opening time in the time-saving game state, the second start port 9140 will close.

[11-3-11. Normal pattern variation table]
305 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 305 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table is a table that determines the normal symbol fluctuation pattern and the normal symbol fluctuation display time. "Normal symbol fluctuation pattern" is information that defines the normal symbol fluctuation mode, and at least the normal symbol fluctuation display time is defined.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal pattern variation pattern table and determines the normal pattern variation pattern based on the game state, the selected normal pattern, the current opening pattern of the second start hole, the previous opening pattern of the second start hole, the random number value for normal pattern performance, and the number of reserved normal patterns. Then, the main CPU 201 determines the normal pattern variation display time based on the determined normal pattern variation pattern. In addition, when the main CPU 201 determines the normal pattern variation pattern, it transmits a normal pattern variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal pattern variation pattern to the sub CPU 301.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 305 corresponds to the game state, the selected normal symbol, the current opening pattern of the second start hole, the previous opening pattern of the second start hole, the random number value for the normal symbol performance, the number of reserved normal symbols, the normal symbol variation pattern, and the normal symbol variation display time. Note that in this embodiment, the time-saving game state is the same for all of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state without distinction.

According to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 305, in the normal game state, the effects related to the normal symbol are not executed, and a normal symbol variation pattern (01H or 02H) associated with a normal symbol variation display time that is relatively longer than that in the time-saving game state can be determined. However, the normal symbol variation pattern (01H) associated with the longest normal symbol variation display time that can be determined in the normal game state (e.g., 30 seconds) is a normal symbol variation pattern associated with a shorter normal symbol variation display time than the normal symbol variation pattern (16H) associated with the longest normal symbol variation display time that can be determined in the time-saving game state (e.g., 60 seconds).

In addition, according to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 305, in the time-saving game state, the opening pattern of the second starting hole is associated with the selected normal symbol (f1, f2) determined when the normal symbol hits, and when the opening pattern of the second starting hole is the "long opening pattern (91H02H)", the normal symbol variation pattern (13H-16H) that executes a winning effect in the time-saving game state is determined. Also, even if the selected normal symbol (f1, f2) is determined when the normal symbol hits, when the opening pattern of the second starting hole is the "short opening pattern (91H01H)", the normal symbol variation pattern (11H, 12H) that executes a losing effect in the time-saving game state is determined.

And according to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 305, in the time-saving game state, when the selected normal symbol is the selected normal symbol (f1, f2) determined when the normal symbol hits, a normal symbol variation pattern (13H, 15H or 16H) associated with a relatively longer normal symbol variation display time (for example, 40 seconds, 60 seconds) can be determined when the opening pattern of the current second starting hole is a "long opening pattern (91H02H)" rather than a "short opening pattern (91H01H)."

In this way, in the time-saving game state, the variable display time of the normal pattern is relatively longer for the "long opening pattern" than for the "short opening pattern," so it is possible to implement a presentation that makes the player look forward to the "long opening pattern," thereby increasing the interest of the game in the time-saving game state.

In addition, according to the normal pattern variation pattern table shown in FIG. 305, in the time-saving game state, when the selected normal pattern is the selected normal pattern (f1, f2) determined when the normal pattern hits, if the previous opening pattern of the second starting hole is "no opening" or "short opening pattern (91H01H)", a normal pattern variation pattern (13H-15H) associated with the third variable display time (e.g., 15 seconds, 12 seconds, 40 seconds) can be determined as the normal pattern variation display time, and if the previous opening pattern of the second starting hole is "long opening pattern (91H02H)", a normal pattern variation pattern (16H) associated with the fourth variable display time (e.g., 60 seconds) longer than the third variable display time can be determined as the normal pattern variation display time.

In this way, in the time-saving game mode, when "long opening patterns" are performed consecutively, a relatively long variable display time of the normal pattern is performed, so that by performing "long opening patterns" consecutively within a short period of time, it is possible to prevent more game balls than expected from entering the second starting hole 9140.

In this embodiment, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state are all treated as a common time-saving game state without any distinction being made, but it may be configured so that different normal symbol variation patterns are determined in the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state.

[11-4. Main control processing]
In the ninth pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are the same as those executed by the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23), except for some of the special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and system timer interrupt process. Therefore, the following will explain the special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and system timer interrupt process, and will not explain the other processes executed by the main CPU 201.

Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, the same processing as that performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[11-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 306. Fig. 306 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 306, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S9001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S9001, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the process of S9001, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, etc., in a predetermined register.

In S9002, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S9001 is 0, i.e., whether the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the control number of the special symbol is not 0, it transfers the process to S9008, and if it determines that the control number of the special symbol is 0, it transfers the process to S9003.

In S9003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not start information for the second special pattern is stored in the second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203, i.e., whether or not there is a reserved number of second special patterns. If the main CPU 201 determines that start information for the second special pattern is not stored, it transfers processing to S9004, and if it determines that start information for the second special pattern is stored, it transfers processing to S9005.

In S9004, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information for the first special pattern is stored in the first special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203, i.e., whether or not there is a reserved number of the first special pattern. If the main CPU 201 determines that the start information for the first special pattern is not stored, it transfers the process to S9007, and if it determines that the start information for the first special pattern is stored, it transfers the process to S9006.

In S9005, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the second special pattern stored in the second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203 to the special pattern determination memory area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the start information stored in the second special pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special pattern determination memory area (0), and the start information stored in the second special pattern start memory area (2) is shifted to the second special pattern start memory area (1). In this embodiment, the reserved number of second special patterns before the start information is shifted is temporarily stored in the main RAM 203 as the "reserved number of second special patterns when the start condition of the second special pattern is satisfied."

In S9006, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the first special pattern stored in the first special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203 to the special pattern determination memory area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the start information stored in the first special pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special pattern determination memory area (0), and the start information stored in the first special pattern start memory area (2) to the first special pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the first special pattern start memory area (1) to the first special pattern start memory area (3).

In S9007, if the special symbol start information (number of reserved first and second special symbols) has not been stored in the first and second special symbol start memory areas of the main RAM 203 for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 321) during the next system timer interrupt process. When the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demo display command, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demo display performance.

In S9008, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 307. After executing the processing of S9003, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S9001 to S9008) within the interrupt prohibited section.

In this manner, in this embodiment, as the ninth pachinko gaming machine, a priority variable machine in which the special pattern management process is executed with a higher priority than the first special pattern when the start information of the second special pattern is stored has been described, but this is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special pattern is stored, the priority variable machine may be one in which the special pattern management process is executed with a higher priority than the second special pattern, or a sequential variable machine in which the special pattern management process is executed in the order of winning (ball entry order) into the first start port 9120 or the second start port 9140.

[11-4-2. Special design management process]
Next, a special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol control process (see Fig. 306) will be described with reference to Fig. 307. Fig. 307 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The numbers ("0" to "7") written in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 307 are the control state numbers of the special symbols that are the subject of the process. The main CPU 201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process that corresponds to the control state number.

In S9011, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the special pattern (special pattern timer counter) is 0. This waiting time for the special pattern is set as the waiting time for various processes in the special pattern management process, and is decremented as the special pattern timer counter within the system timer interrupt process that is performed at 2 msec intervals, for example. If the main CPU 201 determines that the waiting time for the special pattern is not 0, it ends the special pattern management process and returns the process to the special pattern control process (see FIG. 306), and if it determines that the waiting time for the special pattern is 0, it moves the process to S9012.

In S9012, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S9012, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9013. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S9013 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S9012.

In S9013, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This S9013 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 308. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S9014.

In S9014, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This S9014 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 309. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S9015.

In S9015, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This S9015 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 311. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9016.

In S9016, the main CPU 201 performs small win game closure processing. This S9016 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this small win game closure processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 313. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S9017.

In S9017, the main CPU 201 performs processing during the opening of the small win game. This processing of S9017 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this processing during the opening of the small win game will be described later with reference to FIG. 314. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S9018.

In S9018, the main CPU 201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process of S9018 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 315. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9019.

In S9019, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process of S9019 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 316. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9020.

In S9020, the main CPU 201 performs a process to end the jackpot game state. This process of S9020 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this process to end the jackpot game state will be described later with reference to FIG. 317.

After completing steps S9013 to S9020, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 306). In this case, the process returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

[11-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 307) will be described with reference to Fig. 308. Fig. 308 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9021, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", it ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 307), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "0", it transfers the process to S9022.

In S9022, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol hit determination process to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss. In this special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 294 is referenced, and a hit determination of the special symbol is made based on the special symbol hit determination random number value as the starting information for the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination memory area (0), and a hit/lose determination value data is determined according to the determination result. After executing the process of S9022, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9023.

In S9023, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol. In this special symbol determination process, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 295 is referenced, and the selected symbol and symbol designation command for the special symbol are determined based on the hit/loss determination value data as the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process in S9022 and the special symbol random number value as the start information of the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination memory area (0). After executing the process of S9023, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9024.

In S9024, the main CPU 201 performs a win type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of win when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a win (big win or small win). In this win type determination process, if the special symbol win determination process is a big win, the big win type determination table shown in FIG. 296 is determined, and if the special symbol win determination process is a small win, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 297 is determined. Furthermore, in order to set the game state etc. based on the game state at the time of winning after the end of the big win game state, the game state data at the time of winning, which indicates the game state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a big win or a small win, is set in the game state storage area at the time of winning of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S9024, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9025.

In S9025, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this special symbol variation pattern determination process, a special symbol variation pattern table of either FIG. 299 or FIG. 300 is determined depending on the game state, etc., and the determined special symbol variation pattern table is referenced to determine the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variation pattern command based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the selected special symbol, the number of second special symbols reserved when the start condition of the second special symbol is established, etc. Specifically, when the state flag is referenced and the game is in a normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 299 is determined, and the determined special symbol variation pattern table T1 is referenced, and the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variation pattern command are determined based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or lose), the selected special symbol, the number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is established, the reach determination random number value, and the performance selection random number value. Also, when the game is in a time-saving game state, the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 300 is determined, and the determined special symbol variation pattern table J1 is referenced, and the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variation pattern command are determined based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or lose), the selected special symbol, and the number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is established. After executing processing of S9025, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S9026.

In S9026, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display time setting process to set the variable display time of the special symbol. In this special symbol variable display time setting process, the special symbol variable display time setting process refers to the special symbol variable pattern table determined in the special symbol variable pattern determination process in S9025 above, and determines the variable display time of the special symbol based on the determined special symbol variable pattern. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 sets the determined variable display time of the special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and causes the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 to start variable display of the special symbol. After executing the process of S9026, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9027.

In S9027, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1", after the special symbol variable display start process ends, a special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 307) is performed. After executing the process of S9027, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9028.

In S9028, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, confirmation and update processes of parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203 are performed. Then, a process of reserving transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state is performed. Note that the game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (Figure 321) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9028, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9029.

In S9029, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for the special symbol effect start command. In this process, the transmission reservation process for the "symbol designation command" and the "special symbol variation pattern command" is performed as the special symbol effect start command. In the pattern designation command transmission reservation process, the symbol designation command determined in S9023 is transmitted. In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation process, the special symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined in S9025 is transmitted so that the type of special symbol can be identified. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 321) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process within the interrupt prohibited section.

[11-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 307) will be described with reference to Fig. 309. Fig. 309 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9041, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1," it ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 307), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "1," it transfers the process to S9042.

In S9042, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination time setting process to set the symbol determination time for the special symbol. In this special symbol determination time setting process, the special symbol determination time (e.g., 540 ms) is determined based on the game state and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or lose). The main CPU 201 then sets the determined special symbol determination time to the special symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and causes the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 to stop displaying the special symbol. After executing the process of S9042, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9043.

The time it takes for the special symbol to be determined may be determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, or based only on the game state. Furthermore, a single predetermined symbol determination time (e.g., 540 ms) may be determined.

In S9043, the main CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether to transition to the B time-shortened game state. In the ninth pachinko gaming machine, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, a "ceiling counter" for counting the number of times the special symbol is variable displayed, which transitions to the B time-shortened game state, is updated, and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, transition control to the B time-shortened game state is performed. Details of this process of determining whether to transition to the B time-shortened game state will be described later with reference to FIG. 310. After executing the process of S9043, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9044.

In S9044, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", after the special symbol variable display end process is completed, the special symbol game determination process (see S9015 in FIG. 307) is performed. After executing the process of S9044, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9045.

In S9045, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 321) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9045, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9046.

In S9046, the main CPU 201 increments the value of the determined symbol counter by 1. As described above in the explanation of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol has been determined (the number of times a special symbol game has been played), but it may also manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions, such as the number of times a special symbol game has remained or the number of times a time-saving game has remained. After executing the process of S9046, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 307).

[11-4-5. B Time-saving gaming state transition determination process]
Next, referring to Fig. 310, the B time-saving game state transition judgment process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display end process (see Fig. 309) will be described. Fig. 310 is a flowchart showing an example of the B time-saving game state transition judgment process in the ninth pachinko game machine.

In S9043-4, the main CPU 201 performs a ceiling counter update process to update the ceiling counter. In this ceiling counter update process, the ceiling counter is updated by adding 1. After executing the process of S9043-4, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9043-5.

In S9043-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling counter is equal to the ceiling value (for example, 600 times). If the main CPU 201 determines that the ceiling counter is equal to the ceiling value, it transfers processing to S9043-6, and if it determines that the ceiling counter is not equal to the ceiling value, it transfers processing to S9043-9.

In S9043-6, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter (sets it to 0). After executing the process of S9043-6, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9043-7.

In S9043-7, the main CPU 201 performs a B time-saving game state setting process to transition to the B time-saving game state. In this B time-saving game state setting process, the state flag indicating the B time-saving game state is set to 2, the normal power operation pattern is set to 02, and the number of times that the normal symbols are variable displayed = 600 times is set in the time-saving count counter as the "B time-saving end condition". In the B time-saving game state setting process, the normal power operation pattern may be set to 01, or any number of times such as 100 times, 120 times, or 10,000 times may be set as the "B time-saving end condition". After executing the process of S9043-7, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9043-8.

In S9043-8, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a time-saving transition command when starting the B time-saving gaming state. The time-saving transition command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 321) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9043-8, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9043-9.

In S9043-9, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process for a game state designation command indicating the current game state is performed. After executing the process of S9043-9, the main CPU 201 ends the B time-saving game state transition determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 309).

[11-4-6. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 307) will be described with reference to FIG. 311. FIG. 311 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9051, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 307), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "2", it transfers the process to S9052.

In S9052, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbol and determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is the selected special symbol corresponding to a jackpot. If the main CPU 201 determines that a jackpot has been reached, it transfers processing to S9054, and if it determines that a jackpot has not been reached, it transfers processing to S9061.

In S9054, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a jackpot. In this external signal processing for a jackpot, the selected special symbol is referenced, and a "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is generated as an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 during a jackpot gaming state. The generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is then output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the processing of S9054, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S9055.

In S9055, the main CPU 201 performs the first route jackpot start preparation setting process. In this first route jackpot start preparation setting process, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 296 determined in S9024 above is referenced, the maximum number of rounds is determined based on the "special symbol selected" of the jackpot, and the determined maximum number of rounds is set as the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds in the main RAM 203. Furthermore, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 296 determined in S9024 above is referenced, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "special symbol selected" of the jackpot, and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S9055, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9056.

In S9056, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot status display process. In this jackpot status display process, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right hit instruction data that notifies the player to hit to the right is set. After executing the process of S9056, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9057.

In S9057, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In the game status management processing when it is determined that a jackpot has been reached, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the status flag, the normal power operation pattern, and the time-saving count counter. After executing the processing of S9057, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S9058.

In S9058, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S9058, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9059.

In S9059, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the process of preparing to open the large prize opening (see S9018 in FIG. 307) will be performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. After executing the process of S9059, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9059.

In S9060, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot start display command. After executing the process of S9060, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 307).

In S9061, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbol and determines whether or not it is a small win, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is the selected special symbol corresponding to a small win. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is a small win, it transfers processing to S9063, and if it determines that it is not a small win (i.e., a miss), it transfers processing to S9071.

In S9063, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a small win. In this external signal processing for a small win, the selected special symbol is referenced, and a "small win signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is generated as an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 during a small win gaming state. The generated small win signal is then output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the processing of S9063, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S9064.

In S9064, the main CPU 201 performs a small win start preparation setting process. In this small win start preparation setting process, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 297 determined in S9024 above is referenced, the maximum number of openings is determined based on the "selected special symbol", and the determined maximum number of openings is set as the upper limit of the number of small win openings in the main RAM 203. Next, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 297 determined in S9024 above is referenced, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "selected special symbol", and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is set as the waiting time for the special symbol in the main RAM 203.

Furthermore, in the small win start preparation setting process, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 297 determined in S9024 above is referenced, and the opening waiting time is determined as the opening pattern of the V winning hole 9156 based on the "selected special pattern", and the determined opening waiting time is set in the V winning hole closing timer counter in the main RAM 203, and the V operation flag is turned on. Note that the V winning control process for the V shutter solenoid 9160 that opens and closes the V winning hole 9156 is performed in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 321) described later. After executing the process of S9064, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9066.

In S9065, the main CPU 201 performs a small win status display process. In this small win status display process, right hit instruction data is set to notify the player that a right hit is to be performed. After executing the process of S9065, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9067.

In S9067, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S9067, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9068.

In S9068, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the small win game closure process (see S9016 in FIG. 307) will be performed after the special symbol game determination process ends. After executing the process of S9068, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9069.

In S9069, the main CPU 201 processes the transmission reservation process for the small win start display command. After executing the process of S9069, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 307).

In S9071, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 312. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 307).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S9051 to S9071) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[11-4-7. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 311) will be described with reference to FIG. 312. FIG. 312 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game ending process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9072, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game. After executing the process of S9072, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9073.

In S9073, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process of reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. In addition, in the game state designation parameter setting process in the special pattern game end process, the start information stored in the special pattern determination memory area (0) in the main RAM 203 is cleared. After executing the process of S9073, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9074.

In S9074, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 321) during the next system timer interrupt process. After processing S9074, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 311).

[11-4-8. Processing during small win game closure]
Next, referring to Fig. 313, a description will be given of a small win game closing process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 307). Fig. 313 is a flow chart showing an example of a small win game closing process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9081, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", it ends the small win game closure process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 307), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "3", it transfers the process to S9082.

In S9082, the main CPU 201 loads the "small win opening count counter value." The "small win opening count counter" is a counter that counts the number of small win openings. The count value of the small win opening count counter (small win opening count counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S9082, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9083.

In S9083, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded small win opening count counter value is the upper limit of the small win opening count. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is the upper limit of the small win opening count, it transfers processing to S9089, and if it determines that it is not the upper limit of the small win opening count, it transfers processing to S9084.

In S9084, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 9151 in the small win game state (the number of winning balls in the second large prize opening 9151) is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value of the second large prize opening counter counted by the second large prize opening count switch 9152 is the predetermined maximum number of winning balls for the second large prize opening 9151 (for example, 10 balls). If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of winning balls in the second large prize opening 9151 is not the maximum number of winning balls, it transfers the process to S9085, and if it determines that the number of winning balls in the second large prize opening 9151 is the maximum number of winning balls, it transfers the process to S9089.

In S9085, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the small win opening count counter value. After executing the process of S9085, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9086.

In S9086, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening setting process to open the second large prize opening 9151. In this second large prize opening setting process, the small prize type determination table shown in FIG. 297 determined in S9024 is referenced, and the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 9151 is determined based on the "selected special pattern" of the small prize and the current opening count (small prize opening count counter value), and the determined maximum opening time is set as the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. Then, second large prize opening opening control data for opening the second large prize opening 9151 is generated for the second special electric solenoid 9155. This causes the second large prize opening 9151 to open. After executing the process of S9086, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9087.

In S9087, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4", after the small win game closed process ends, the small win game open process (see FIG. 314) is performed. After executing the process of S9087, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9088.

In S9088, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. The main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of confirming and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process of reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S9088, the main CPU 201 ends the small win game closure process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 307).

In S9089, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a V winning has been detected. In this process, it determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the V winning port 9156 within a specified time (i.e., whether or not there has been detection by the V winning port switch 9157). If the main CPU 201 determines that a V winning has been detected, it transfers the process to S9090, and if it determines that a V winning has not been detected, it transfers the process to S9098.

In S9090, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a jackpot from the second route. In this processing, the selected special symbol is referenced, and a "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is generated as an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 in the event of a jackpot. The generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is then output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the processing of S9090, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S9101.

In S9091, the main CPU 201 performs a second route jackpot start preparation setting process. In this second route jackpot start preparation setting process, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 296 is referenced to determine the maximum number of rounds based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot, and the determined maximum number of rounds is set as the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds in the main RAM 203. Furthermore, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 296 is referenced to determine the OP waiting time (opening time) based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot, and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S9101, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9092.

In S9092, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the jackpot game state from the second route starts from the second round of round play. After executing the process of S9092, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9093.

In S9093, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot status display process. In this jackpot status display process, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right hit instruction data that notifies the player to hit to the right is set. After executing the process of S9093, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9094.

In S9094, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In the game status management processing when it is determined that a jackpot has been hit, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the status flag, the normal power operation pattern, and the time-saving count counter. After executing the processing of S9094, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S9095.

In S9095, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S9095, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9096.

In S9096, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the large prize opening preparation process (Fig. 307) will be performed after the small prize game closure process ends. After executing the process of S9096, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9097.

In S9097, the main CPU 201 performs processing to reserve the transmission of a V hit start display command. After executing the processing of S9097, the main CPU 201 ends the processing during the small hit game opening, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 307).

In S9098, the main CPU 201 performs a small win end preparation setting process. In this small win end preparation setting process, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 297 determined in S9024 above is referenced, the ED waiting time (ending time) is determined based on the "selected special pattern" of the small win, and the determined ED waiting time (ending time) is set as the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S9098, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9099.

In S9099, the main CPU 201 performs processing to reserve the transmission of a small win end display command. After executing processing in S9099, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S9100.

In S9100, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 312 is performed. After executing the processing of S9100, the main CPU 201 ends the small win game closure processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 307).

[11-4-9. Processing during small win game opening]
Next, referring to Fig. 314, a small win game open process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 307) will be described. Fig. 314 is a flow chart showing an example of a small win game open process in the ninth pachinko game machine.

In S9101, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", it ends the small win game open process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 307), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "4", it transfers the process to S9102.

In S9102, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 9151 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the second large prize opening opening setting process (see S9086 in FIG. 313) has elapsed. If the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 9151 has not elapsed, it ends the small win game opening process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 307). Also, if the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 9151 has elapsed, it moves the process to S9103.

In S9103, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening closure setting process to close the second large prize opening 9151. In this second large prize opening closure setting process, the main CPU 201 refers to the small prize type determination table shown in FIG. 297 determined in S9024 above, and determines the current closure time of the second large prize opening 9151 based on the "selected special pattern" of the small prize and the current number of openings (small prize opening count counter value), and sets the determined closure time to the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. Then, the second large prize opening closure control data for closing the second large prize opening 9151 is generated for the second special electric solenoid 9155. This causes the second large prize opening 9151 to close. After executing the process of S9103, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9104.

In S9104, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", after the small win game open process ends, the small win game closed process (see FIG. 313) is performed. After executing the process of S9104, the main CPU 201 ends the small win game open process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 307).

[11-4-10. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 315, a special symbol management process (see Fig. 307) executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. Fig. 315 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the ninth pachinko game machine.

In S9111, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5," it ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 307), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "5," it transfers the process to S9112.

In S9112, the main CPU 201 loads the "round counter value." The "round counter" is a counter that counts the number of rounds played in a jackpot game state. The count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S9112, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9113.

In S9113, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded round counter value is the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds. If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of jackpot rounds is the upper limit, it transfers processing to S9114, and if it determines that the number of jackpot rounds is not the upper limit, it transfers processing to S9118.

In S9114, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end preparation setting process. In this jackpot end preparation setting process, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 296 determined in S9024 or S9101 above is referenced, an ED waiting time (ending time) is determined based on the "selected special pattern" of the jackpot, and the determined ED waiting time (ending time) is set as the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S9114, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9115.

In S9115, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7." In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7," the jackpot game state end process (FIG. 307) is performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing S9115, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9116.

In S9116, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S9116, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9117.

In S9117, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command. The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 321) during the next system timer interrupt process. After processing S9117, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 307).

In S9118, the main CPU 201 performs processing to add 1 to the round counter value. After executing processing of S9118, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S9119.

In S9119, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening setting process to open the first large prize opening 9131. In this first large prize opening setting process, the main CPU 201 refers to the big prize type determination table shown in FIG. 296, and determines the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 9131 in this round based on the "selected special pattern" of the big prize and the current round number (round counter value), and sets the determined maximum opening time to the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 generates first large prize opening opening control data for the first special power solenoid 9135 to open the first large prize opening 9131. This opens the first large prize opening 9131. After executing the process of S9119, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9120.

In S9120, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6", the large prize opening opening control process (see FIG. 307) will be performed after the large prize opening opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S9120, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9121.

In S9121, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S9121, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9122.

In S9122, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 321) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9122, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 307).

[11-4-11. Big prize opening control process]
Next, a special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 307) will be described with reference to FIG. 316. FIG. 316 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the ninth pachinko game machine.

In S9131, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6," it ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 307), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "6," it transfers the process to S9132.

In S9132, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of winning game balls that entered the first large prize opening 9131 in one round when the first large prize opening 9131 was opened is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value of the first large prize opening counter counted by the first large prize opening count switch 9132 is the predetermined maximum number of winning balls for the first large prize opening 9131 (e.g., 10 balls).

If the main CPU 201 determines in S9132 that the number of winnings at the first large winning slot 9131 is not the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to S9133, and if the main CPU 201 determines in S9132 that the number of winnings at the first large winning slot 9131 is the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to S9134.

In S9133, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 9131 in one round has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the opening setting process for the first large prize opening (see S9119 in FIG. 315) has elapsed.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S9133 that the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 9131 has not elapsed, it ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 307). If the main CPU 201 determines in S9133 that the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 9131 has elapsed, it transfers the process to S9134.

In S9134, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening closure setting process to close the first large prize opening 9131. In this first large prize opening closure setting process, the main CPU 201 refers to the big win type determination table shown in FIG. 296, and determines the closure time of the first large prize opening 9131 in this round based on the "selected special pattern" of the big win and the current round number (round counter value), and sets the determined closure time to the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 generates first large prize opening closure control data for the first special power solenoid 9135 to close the first large prize opening 9131. This causes the first large prize opening 9131 to close. After executing the process of S9134, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9135.

In S9135, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the large prize opening control processing is completed, the large prize opening opening preparation processing (see FIG. 315) is performed again. After executing the processing of S9135, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S9136.

In S9136, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S9136, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9137.

In S9137, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 321) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S9137, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 307).

[11-4-12. Big win game state end processing]
Next, a big win game state end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 307) will be described with reference to FIG. 317. FIG. 317 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win game state end process in the ninth pachinko game machine.

In S9141, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7," it ends the jackpot game state end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 307), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "7," it transfers the process to S9142.

In S9142, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot game information initialization process. In this jackpot game information initialization process, various flags and data used in the jackpot game state and the values of various counters (e.g., round counter, big prize slot winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing S9142, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9143.

In S9143, the main CPU 201 performs a post-jackpot end state setting process to set the game state after the end of the jackpot game state. In this post-jackpot end state setting process, the game state related setting table shown in FIG. 298 is referenced, and the game state (state flag, normal power operation pattern, and variable display count of normal symbols as the number of time-saving times) is set based on the game state at the time of winning and the selected special symbol. After executing the process of S9143, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9144.

In this embodiment, if the selected special symbol is "z1", the status flag indicating the A time-saving game state is set to 1, the normal power operation pattern is set to 02, and the variable display count of the normal symbol is set to 120 in the time-saving count counter. If the selected special symbol is "z2" or "z3", the status flag indicating the A time-saving game state is set to 1, the normal power operation pattern is set to 01, and the variable display count of the normal symbol is set to 100 in the time-saving count counter. If the selected special symbol is "z4", "z6", or "z7", the status flag indicating the A time-saving game state is set to 1, the normal power operation pattern is set to 02, and the variable display count of the normal symbol is set to 120 in the time-saving count counter. In addition, if the selected special symbol is "z5", the state flag indicating the A time-saving game state is set to 1, the normal power operation pattern is set to 02, and the variable display count of the normal symbol is set to 10,000 times in the time-saving count counter.

In S9144, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 312 is performed. After executing the processing of S9144, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot game state end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 218).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 set an interrupt prohibited section and perform the above-mentioned jackpot game state end processing within the interrupt prohibited section.

[11-4-13. Normal symbol control process]
Next, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 318. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in Fig. 318, the main CPU 201 stores the start information of the normal symbol and judges whether the judgment start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

Figure 318 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the numbers ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in Figure 318 are control state numbers for the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

In S9200, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the normal pattern is 0. This waiting time for the normal pattern is set as the waiting time for various processes in the normal pattern control process, and is decremented as a normal pattern timer counter in the system timer interrupt process that is performed at 2 msec intervals, for example. If the main CPU 201 determines that the waiting time for the normal pattern is not 0, it ends the normal pattern control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process, and if it determines that the waiting time for the normal pattern is 0, it moves the process to S9201.

In S9201, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S9201, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9210. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S9210 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S9201.

In S9210, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This S9210 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". In this normal symbol variable display start processing, a normal symbol winning judgment process, a normal symbol determination process, a second start port opening pattern determination process, a normal symbol variation pattern determination process, etc. are performed, but details will be described later with reference to FIG. 319. Note that if the normal symbol control state number is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S9220.

In S9220, the main CPU 201 performs processing to end the variable display of normal symbols. This processing of S9220 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S9230.

In this normal symbol variable display end process, the main CPU 201 judges whether the normal symbol variable display time has ended, and when it judges that the normal symbol variable display time has ended, it sets the normal symbol's predetermined symbol determination time (e.g., 540 msec) to the normal symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and sets the normal symbol control state number to "2". If the normal symbol variable display time has not ended, it holds the normal symbol control state number at "1" and waits for the normal symbol variable display time to end.

In S9230, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol game play determination process. This S9230 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9240.

In this normal symbol game judgment process, the main CPU 201 performs a judgment process of the selected pattern of the stopped normal symbol (for example, normal symbol winning or normal symbol losing). If the main CPU 201 judges that the selected pattern of the stopped normal symbol corresponds to a normal symbol winning, it sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "3", and if it judges that the result of the normal symbol winning judgment process corresponds to a losing, it sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "0".

In S9240, the main CPU 201 performs the normal electric role release process. This S9240 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9250.

In this normal electric device opening process, the main CPU 201 refers to the second start hole opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 304, and operates the normal power shutter 9147 to open and close the second start hole 9140 according to the operation of the second start hole opening pattern determined in the second start hole opening pattern determination process of S9215 (FIG. 319) described later. Then, when a specified number of game balls for normal power (e.g., three balls) enter the second start hole 9140 or all the operations of the determined second start hole opening pattern are completed, the second start hole 9140 is closed, the control state number of the normal pattern is set to "4", and the normal electric device opening process is terminated.

In S9250, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit end processing. This S9250 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". In this normal symbol hit end processing, the number of time-saving times is updated and a determination is made as to when the number of time-saving times has ended, but details will be described later with reference to FIG. 320. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the normal symbol control process (S9200 to S9250) described above within the interrupt prohibited section.

[11-4-14. Normal symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to Fig. 319, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in the normal symbol control process (see Fig. 318) will be described. Fig. 319 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal symbol variable display start process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 319, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the normal pattern is "0" (S9211).

If it is determined in S9211 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 318). On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9212.

In S9212, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the start information of the normal pattern. In this process, the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (2) to the normal pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (3). After executing the process of S9212, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9213.

In S9213, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol winning judgment process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 302, and determines the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal symbol ("normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol losing") based on the normal symbol winning judgment random number value stored in the normal symbol judgment area (0). After executing S9213, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9214.

In S9214, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 303, and determines the "selected normal symbol" based on the winning/losing determination value data (the result of the normal symbol winning/losing determination process) and the normal symbol random number value stored in the normal symbol determination area (0). After executing S9214, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9215.

In S9215, the main CPU 201 performs processing to determine the opening pattern of the second starting hole. After executing processing of S9215, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S9216.

In the process of determining the second start port opening pattern, the main CPU 201 first shifts the data of the second start port opening pattern stored in the start port opening pattern memory area (0) of the main RAM 203 to the start port opening pattern memory area (1). The data of the second start port opening pattern stored in the start port opening pattern memory area (1) is overwritten and erased by shifting the data of the second start port opening pattern. As a result, the data of the second start port opening pattern stored in the start port opening pattern memory area (0) corresponds to the "second start port opening pattern determined this time," and the data of the second start port opening pattern stored in the start port opening pattern memory area (1) corresponds to the "second start port opening pattern determined previously."

In addition, in the process of determining the opening pattern of the second start hole, when the main CPU 201 determines that a normal symbol has been hit, after shifting the data of the opening pattern of the second start hole, it refers to the opening pattern determination table of the second start hole shown in FIG. 304 and determines the opening pattern of the second start hole based on the game state (normal power operation pattern) and the selected normal symbol, and stores the opening pattern of the second start hole determined this time in the start hole opening pattern memory area (0) of the main RAM 203.

In S9216, the main CPU 201 performs a process of determining the normal symbol variation pattern. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 305, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern based on the game state, the selected normal symbol, the current second start hole opening pattern stored in the start hole opening pattern memory area (0), the previous second start hole opening pattern stored in the start hole opening pattern memory area (1), the random number value for normal symbol performance, and the number of reserved normal symbols. Then, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 305, and determines the normal symbol variation display time based on the determined normal symbol variation pattern. After executing the process of S9216, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9217.

In S9217, the main CPU 201 executes a process for setting the variable display time of the normal pattern. In this process, the variable display time of the normal pattern determined in the normal pattern variable pattern determination process (S9216) is set to the waiting time of the normal pattern in the main RAM 203, and the normal pattern display unit 161 is caused to start displaying the variable display of the normal pattern. After executing the process of S9217, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9218.

In S9218, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after this normal symbol variable display start process is completed, a normal symbol variable display end process (see S9220 in FIG. 318) is performed. After executing the process of S9218, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9219.

In S9219, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a normal symbol variable pattern command. The normal symbol variable pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 321) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9219, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 318).

[11-4-15. End processing of normal pattern]
Next, with reference to Fig. 320, details of the normal symbol winning end process executed by the main CPU 201 in the normal symbol control process (see Fig. 318) will be described. Fig. 320 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal symbol winning end process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9251, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "4", it ends the normal symbol win end process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 318), and if it determines that the control state number of the normal symbol is "4", it transfers the process to S9252.

In S9252, the main CPU 201 executes a time-saving count counter update process to update the time-saving count counter. In this time-saving count counter update process, if a time-saving game state is set (if state flag = 1 or 2 is set), the "time-saving count counter" in the main RAM 203 is updated by subtracting 1. This makes it possible to count the number of times the normal pattern is variably displayed as the number of time-saving plays. After executing the process of S9252, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9253.

In S9253, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving counter is equal to 0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the time-saving counter is equal to 0, the process proceeds to S9254. If the main CPU 201 determines that the time-saving counter is not equal to 0, the process proceeds to S9255.

In S9254, the main CPU 201 clears the time-saving information and transitions from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. Here, the time-saving information is cleared by clearing (setting to 0) the status flag, normal power operation pattern, and time-saving count counter. After executing the process of S9254, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9255.

In S9255, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S9255, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9256.

In S9256, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "0", after the normal symbol hit end process is completed, the normal symbol variable display start process (see S9210 in FIG. 318) is performed. After executing the process of S9256, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol hit end process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 318).

In this embodiment, the normal symbol winning end process is configured to perform the time-saving count counter update process and the time-saving count end determination process as shown in S9252 to S9254 above, but it may also be configured to perform these processes in the normal symbol variable display end process (S9220 in FIG. 318).

[11-4-16. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt period of, for example, 2 msec will be described with reference to Fig. 321. Fig. 321 is a flow chart showing an example of the system timer interrupt process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9311, the main CPU 201 performs a process of saving the protected register. After executing the process of S9311, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9312.

In S9312, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off. If the main CPU 201 determines that the XINT detection flag is not off (i.e., a power interruption has been detected), the process proceeds to S9344. If the main CPU 201 determines that the XINT detection flag is off (i.e., a power interruption has not been detected), the process proceeds to S9313.

In S9313, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing S9313, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S9314.

In S9314, the main CPU 201 performs processing to read the state of the input port of the I/O port 205. After executing processing of S9314, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S9315.

In S9315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted based on the game permission flag. The game permission flag indicates a game permitted state when it is on (=1), and indicates a game not permitted state when it is off (=0). As described in the first pachinko game machine, the game permission flag is a flag that is set to off (=game not permitted state) as the start-up state when the power is turned on during recovery from power interruption and during RAM clearing, and is set to on (=play permitted state) after power is restored and RAM clearing is executed. If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is permitted, it transfers the process to S9317, and if it determines that the game is not permitted, it transfers the process to S9344.

In S9317, the main CPU 201 executes processing to increment the value of the interrupt counter by 1. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) interrupt prohibited intervals during the main control main processing (see Figures 20 to 23), and the count value of the interrupt counter is stored in an interrupt counter area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing processing of S9317, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S9318.

In S9318, the main CPU 201 performs an update process for the interrupt cycle timer. In the update process for the interrupt cycle timer, various timer counters in the working area of the main RAM 203, such as the special pattern timer counter, the normal pattern timer counter, the V prize opening timer counter, and the V prize opening timer counter, are decremented. After executing the process of S9318, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9319.

In S9319, the main CPU 201 performs a random number update process. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a jackpot of a random value for determining a jackpot, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are an important factor in determining the number of balls dispensed. After executing the process of S9319, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9320.

In S9320, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. Details of this switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 322. After executing the processing of S9320, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S9330.

In S9330, if the V operation flag is on, the main CPU 201 performs a V winning control process to open and close the V winning hole 9156. In this V winning control process, if the V operation flag is on and the opening waiting time has elapsed (V winning hole closing timer counter = 0), the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 297 is referenced, and the opening time is determined as the opening pattern of the V winning hole 9156 based on the "selected special pattern", and the determined opening time is set in the V winning hole opening timer counter in the main RAM 203, and V winning hole opening control data for opening the V winning hole 9156 is output to the V shutter solenoid 9160. The V winning hole opening control data is continuously output unless the V winning hole opening timer counter is 0. Then, when the V operation flag is on and the V prize opening control data is being output, if the opening time has elapsed (V prize opening timer counter = 0), the output of the V prize opening control data is stopped and the V operation flag is turned off. After executing the process of S9330, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9340.

At S9340, the main CPU 201 performs a performance control command transmission process. In this process, the command that has been scheduled for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300. After executing the process of S9340, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9341.

In S9341, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing S9341, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9342.

At S9342, the main CPU 201 performs a performance display monitor control process. In this process, game judgment process, prize ball addition judgment process, display content update process for the performance display monitor 170, etc. are performed. The data stored in this process is stored in an area separate from (outside) the working area in which data necessary for game progress is stored, that is, in an area that is backed up and where the data is not cleared even if, for example, the RAM is cleared. After executing the process of S9342, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9343.

In S9343, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the registers that were saved in S9341. After executing the process of S9343, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9344.

In S9344, the main CPU 201 performs the process of restoring the protection registers that were saved in S9311, and ends the system timer interrupt process.

[11-4-17. Switch input detection process]
Next, a switch input detection process executed by the main CPU 201 during the system timer interrupt process (see Fig. 321) will be described with reference to Fig. 322. Fig. 322 is a flow chart showing an example of the switch input detection process in the ninth pachinko game machine.

Compared to the first pachinko game machine, the ninth pachinko game machine has the additional configuration of a first large prize slot count switch 9132, a second large prize slot count switch 9152, and a V prize slot switch 9157, and therefore some of the above processing has been added.

In S9401, the main CPU 201 executes the first start port winning detection process. After executing the process of S9401, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9402.

In this first start port winning detection process, when the first start port switch 9121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start port 9120, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the first start port 9120 and determines whether there is free space in any of the special symbol determination memory area (0) or the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4). If it is determined that there is free space in any of the special symbol determination memory area (0) or the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4), various random number values (e.g., random number values for jackpot determination, pattern random number values, random number values for reach determination, random number values for performance selection, etc.) are obtained as start information for the first special symbol, and the various obtained random number values are stored in a single memory area in a FIFO (First In, First Out) format. Then, a process is performed to reserve the transmission of a winning command for the first special symbol, which indicates a winning entry into the first start port 9120 and the number of reserved first special symbols. The winning command for the first special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 321) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the first special symbol start memory areas (1) to (4), the first start port winning detection process is terminated without acquiring various random number values.

In S9402, the main CPU 201 executes the second start port winning detection process. After executing the process of S9402, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9403.

In this second start port winning detection process, when the second start port switch 9141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start port 9140, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the second start port 9140 and determines whether there is free space in any of the special symbol determination memory area (0), the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (2). If it is determined that there is free space in any of the special symbol determination memory area (0), the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (2), it acquires various random number values (for example, random number values for jackpot judgment, pattern random number values, random number values for reach judgment, random number values for performance selection, etc.) as start information for the second special symbol, and stores the acquired various random number values in a single memory area in FIFO format. Then, it performs a transmission reservation process for a winning command for the second special symbol indicating the winning of the second start port 9140 and the number of reserved second special symbols. The winning command for the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 321) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the second special symbol start memory areas (1) to (4), the second start port winning detection process will end without acquiring various random number values.

In S9403, the main CPU 201 performs a general prize opening passage detection process. In the general prize opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts etc. is set when a prize is won through the general prize opening 122. After executing the process of S9403, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9404.

In S9404, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening passage detection process. In the first large prize opening passage detection process, when the first large prize opening count switch 9132 detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 9131, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the first large prize opening 9131 and adds 1 to the first large prize opening counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the first large prize opening 9131 to update it. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a first large prize opening entry command indicating an entry into the first large prize opening 9131. The first large prize opening entry command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 321) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9404, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9405.

In S9405, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening passage detection process. In the second large prize opening passage detection process, when the second large prize opening count switch 9152 detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 9151, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the second large prize opening 9151 and adds 1 to the second large prize opening counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 9151 to update it. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a second large prize opening entry command indicating an entry into the second large prize opening 9151. The second large prize opening entry command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 321) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9405, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9406.

In S9406, the main CPU 201 performs a V prize opening passage detection process. In the V prize opening passage detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects the passage of a game ball into the V prize opening 9156 by the V prize opening switch 9157, it turns on the V prize opening passage flag. Then, it performs a transmission reservation process for a V passage command indicating that the game ball has passed through the V prize opening 9156. The V passage command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 321) during the next system timer interrupt process. Note that even if a game ball passes through the V prize opening 9156, no payout information is set. After executing the process of S9406, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9407.

In S9407, the main CPU 201 performs gate passage detection processing. After executing the processing of S9407, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S9408.

In this gate passage detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects the passage of the game ball into the normal symbol activation area 9126 by the normal symbol activation switch 9127, it determines whether there is free space in the normal symbol start memory area (1) to the normal symbol start memory area (4). If it determines that there is free space in the normal symbol start memory area (1) to the normal symbol start memory area (4), it acquires various random number values (for example, random number values for determining whether the normal symbol is a hit, pattern random number values for the normal symbol, etc.) as start information for the normal symbol, and stores the various acquired random number values in a single normal symbol start memory area in FIFO format. On the other hand, if it determines that there is no free space in any of the normal symbol start memory areas (1) to (4), it ends the gate passage detection process without acquiring various random number values.

In S9408, the main CPU 201 performs a look-ahead command generation process. After executing the process of S9408, the main CPU 201 ends the current switch input detection process.

In this look-ahead command generation process, the look-ahead related data in FIG. 301 is referenced, and the various random number values obtained in the current first start port winning detection process or second start port winning detection process are analyzed based on the game state, and a look-ahead command is generated. As shown in the look-ahead related data in FIG. 301, in the time-saving game state, big win game state, and small win game state, only look-ahead commands based on the various random number values obtained in the second start port winning detection process (look-ahead commands for the second special pattern) can be generated. Then, a look-ahead command transmission reservation process is performed to transmit the generated look-ahead command to the sub-control circuit 300. The look-ahead command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 321) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[11-5. Sub-control circuit]
Next, the control contents of the sub-control circuit 300 that performs control based on various commands and the like transmitted from the main control circuit 200 will be described.

[11-5-1. Sub-control circuit processing]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 323. Fig. 323 is a flow chart showing an example of the sub-control circuit process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 323, the sub-CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S9500). In this initialization process, for example, RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S9510.

The initialization process (S9500) described above is executed when the power is turned on or the backup is cleared. After the power is turned on, the processes S9510 to S9580 described below are executed repeatedly.

In S9510, the sub-CPU 301 performs a data input process to input data. In this data input process, both the command input port 308 reading process and the effect button 54 input process are performed.

The command input port 308 read process reads the command sent from the main control circuit 200 that is set in the command input port 308.

In addition, in the input process of the effect button 54, operation information regarding the player's operation detected by the effect button 54 is input from the button control circuit 310. In addition, when the sub-CPU 301 inputs operation information from the button control circuit 310, it determines whether to validate the input operation information or discard it as invalid, and sets the acceptance time during which input of operation information is permitted, the validity time during which the input operation information is valid, and the invalidity period during which the input operation information is invalid, depending on the current situation such as the effect.

When the reading process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the effect button 54 are completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S9520.

In S9520, the sub-CPU 301 executes a command analysis process. In this process, the command read in the process of S9510 is analyzed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S9530.

In this command analysis process, if the read command is a winning command for the first special symbol, the sub CPU 301 sets the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the winning command for the first special symbol in the "sub side first special symbol reserved number counter" of the work RAM 303, and if it is a winning command for the second special symbol, the sub CPU 301 sets the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the winning command for the second special symbol in the "sub side second special symbol reserved number counter" of the work RAM 303. Also, if the read command is a game state designation command, the sub CPU 301 sets game state information corresponding to the game state designation command in the "sub side game state area" of the work RAM 303.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the read command is a variation pattern command for the second special symbol, the sub-CPU 301 first sets and holds (ON) the BONUS flag in the "BONUS state flag area" of the work RAM 303. Next, in order to count the number of consecutive small win game states and big win game states in the BONUS state described below, the "consecutive number counter" of the work RAM 303 is incremented by 1. Note that the "BONUS flag" and "consecutive number counter" clear the stored information (set to OFF or 0) when the last big win game state in the BONUS state ends (when the read command is a big win end display command and the sub-side second special symbol reserved number counter = 0).

Furthermore, if the read command is the first large prize slot entry command or the second large prize slot entry command, the sub-CPU 301 adds the payout information (the number of paid-out game balls) corresponding to the first large prize slot entry command or the second large prize slot entry command to the "acquired game ball count counter" in the work RAM 303 so that the game balls are counted and displayed in the acquired game ball count image described below. The "acquired game ball count counter" is cleared when the sub-CPU 301 determines that the game status information in the "sub-side game status area" is the normal game status and the "sub-side second special symbol reserved number counter" is 0.

At S9530, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation mode determination process. In this process, for example, a presentation pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, and various requests for operating various presentation devices (for example, a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, a role-play request, a presentation button activation request, etc.) are generated based on the determined presentation pattern. Details of this presentation mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 324. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S9540.

At S9540, the sub-CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304. The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on the message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. Upon completing this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S9550.

At S9550, the sub-CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305. The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to output audio from the speaker 32 based on the message (sound request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S9560.

In S9560, the sub-CPU 301 executes an LED control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends an LED request to the LED control circuit 306. Based on the message (LED request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to light up or blink all or a portion of the LEDs that make up the LED group 46. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S9570.

At S9570, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends a reel request to the reel control circuit 307. Based on the message (reel request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the reel control circuit 307 performs drive control to operate the performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the reels that make up the performance reel group 58. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S9580.

At S9580, the sub-CPU 301 executes effect button control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 sends an effect button drive request to the button control circuit 310. Based on the message (effect button drive request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the button control circuit 310 performs drive control such as changing the operation mode of the effect button 54 and vibrating the effect button 54. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the sub-control circuit processing.

[11-5-2. Presentation mode determination process]
Next, the details of the presentation mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 323) will be described with reference to Fig. 324. Fig. 324 is a flow chart showing an example of the presentation mode determination process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

At S9531, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation pattern determination process to determine a presentation pattern. In this presentation pattern determination process, a presentation pattern is determined based on the type of command received from the main CPU 201, the presentation pattern defining the display presentation of the characters and the like displayed on the display device 7, the sound presentation output from the speaker 32, the operation of the presentation button 54, and the like. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S9532.

Here, as described above, "presentation pattern" refers to information that defines the display presentation of characters, etc., audio presentation, operation mode of presentation button 54, etc., while "symbol presentation pattern" refers to "variable presentation" information that, among presentation patterns, causes a predetermined decorative pattern to be variably displayed (variably displayed and stopped) in a predetermined variable manner at least on display device 7 during the variable display of special or normal patterns, and notifies a predetermined lottery result based on the stopping mode of the stopped decorative pattern. In addition, there are two types of predetermined decorative patterns: a "first decorative pattern (main pattern)" that is displayed large so that it is easy for the player to recognize, and a "second decorative pattern (sub-pattern)" that is displayed small so that it is difficult for the player to recognize. Note that, depending on the type of symbol presentation pattern, in addition to the variable display of the predetermined decorative pattern, information for displaying a predetermined character is also included.

The "small hit presentation pattern" refers to the information on the presentation that is performed in a small hit game state among the presentation patterns, and the "big hit presentation pattern" refers to the information on the presentation that is performed in a big hit game state among the presentation patterns. In addition to the symbol presentation pattern, small hit presentation pattern, and big hit presentation pattern, various presentation patterns are provided, and the presentation of various presentation patterns can be executed in a superimposed manner.

(An example of a process for determining a performance pattern when a command for changing a first special symbol is received)
In this embodiment, in the presentation pattern determination process, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a variation pattern command for the first special symbol, in the normal game state, a "first symbol presentation pattern" is determined in which the first decorative symbol (main symbol) and the second decorative symbol (sub-symbol) are variably displayed so that the presentation contents shown in the "remarks" column of the special symbol variation pattern table T1 in Fig. 299 are executed. Also, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a variation pattern command for the first special symbol, in the time-saving game state, a "second symbol presentation pattern" is determined in which the first decorative symbol (main symbol) is not displayed and the second decorative symbol (sub-symbol) is variably displayed so that the presentation contents shown in the "remarks" column of the special symbol variation pattern table J1 in Fig. 300 are executed.

In this way, when in the time-saving play state, a "second pattern presentation pattern" is determined in which the first decorative pattern (main pattern) is not displayed and the second decorative pattern (sub-pattern) is variably displayed as a variable presentation related to the lottery result of the first special pattern, so that a presentation using the first decorative pattern (main pattern) is not performed, and it is possible to prevent the variable presentation related to the lottery result of the first special pattern from interfering with the variable presentation related to the lottery result of the normal pattern using the sixth pattern presentation pattern described below.

(An example of a process for determining a performance pattern when a command for changing a second special symbol is received)
In addition, in the presentation pattern determination process, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a variation pattern command of the second special symbol, if it corresponds to the "variation pattern (0AH) of the first special symbol," a BONUS entry presentation that notifies the entry into the BONUS state described later is executed as shown in Fig. 299, and a "third symbol presentation pattern" is determined in which the first decorative symbol (main symbol) is not displayed and the second decorative symbol (sub-symbol) is variably displayed. In addition, if it corresponds to the "variation pattern (1AH) of the second special symbol," a BONUS continuation presentation is executed as shown in Fig. 299, and a "fourth symbol presentation pattern" is determined in which the first decorative symbol (main symbol) is not displayed and the second decorative symbol (sub-symbol) is variably displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, in the extremely rare case (1/65536), when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a special symbol variation pattern (00H) corresponding to a miss, a "fifth symbol presentation pattern" is determined in which the first decorative symbol (main symbol) is not displayed and the second decorative symbol (sub-symbol) is variably displayed.

In this way, when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the third symbol presentation pattern (BONUS entry presentation) or the fourth symbol presentation pattern (BONUS continuation presentation) is determined as the variable presentation, and presentations related to the "small hit presentation pattern" and the "big hit presentation pattern" are executed as shown in FIG. 327 described below, so that the variable presentation related to the result of the lottery for the second special symbol, the winning presentation performed in the small hit game state, and the winning presentation performed in the big hit game state can be made to look like a series of winning presentations (BONUS presentations), further increasing the interest of the game.

(An example of a process for determining a performance pattern when a normal symbol variation pattern command is received)
Also, in the presentation pattern determination process, if the command received from the main CPU 201 is a normal pattern variation pattern command, in the normal game state, the presentation pattern is not determined so that a presentation related to the normal pattern (first decorative pattern presentation) is not executed, but in the time-saving game state, a "sixth pattern presentation pattern" is determined that variably displays the first decorative pattern (main pattern) so that the presentation content shown in the "Remarks column" of the normal pattern variation pattern table in Figure 305 is executed based on the received normal pattern variation pattern command.

In this way, when in the normal game mode, no variable presentation is performed for the normal symbols, but when in the time-saving game mode, the sixth symbol presentation pattern is determined as the variable presentation for the lottery result for the normal symbols, and a presentation using the first decorative symbol (main symbol) is performed.

Furthermore, when in the time-saving play state, the third or fourth pattern presentation pattern is determined as the variable presentation when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a big win or a small win, so that both the variable presentation related to the normal symbol and the variable presentation related to the lottery result for the second special symbol can be executed, further increasing the interest of the game in the time-saving play state.

(An example of the presentation pattern determination process when a small win start display command is received)
In addition, in the presentation pattern determination process, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a small win start display command, the "continuous number counter" in the work RAM 303 is referenced, and a "small win presentation pattern" in which the first BONUS presentation is executed is determined. In particular, in this embodiment, when the "continuous number counter" = 1 (when the first small win game state is entered from the BONUS state), a "first small win presentation pattern" in which the "first BONUS presentation (first time)" is executed as shown in FIG. 327 (b) described later is determined, and when the "continuous number counter" = 2 or more (when the second or subsequent small win game state is entered from the BONUS state), a "second small win presentation pattern" in which the "first BONUS presentation (second or subsequent time)" is executed as shown in FIG. 327 (f) described later is determined.

Also, as described above, in the small win game state, when the passage of the game ball into the V winning hole 9156 is detected, the main CPU 201 sends a V pass command to the sub-control circuit 300. In the performance pattern determination process, if the command received from the main CPU 201 is a V pass command, the sub-CPU 301 determines a "V pass notification performance pattern" in which a V pass notification performance is executed. In addition, in this performance pattern determination process, if the command received from the main CPU 201 is a V pass command, it is desirable to refer to the "continuous number counter" in the work RAM 303, and determine the "V pass notification performance pattern" when the "continuous number counter" = 1 (when the game is in the first small win game state from the BONUS state), and not determine the "V pass notification performance pattern" when the "continuous number counter" = 2 or more (when the game is in the second or subsequent small win game state from the BONUS state).

(An example of a process for determining a presentation pattern when a jackpot start display command is received)
In addition, in the presentation pattern determination process, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a jackpot start display command, the "consecutive number counter" in the work RAM 303 is referenced, and a "jackpot presentation pattern" in which the second BONUS presentation is executed is determined. In particular, in this embodiment, when the "consecutive number counter" = 1 (when the first jackpot game state is entered from the BONUS state), a "first jackpot presentation pattern" in which the "second BONUS presentation (start)" and "second BONUS presentation (opening)" are executed as shown in Figs. 327(c) and (d) described later is determined, and when the "consecutive number counter" = 2 or more (when the second or subsequent jackpot game state is entered from the BONUS state), a "second jackpot presentation pattern" in which the "second BONUS presentation (opening)" is executed as shown in Fig. 327(d) described later is determined.

At S9532, the sub-CPU 301 executes an animation request generation process. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the performance pattern determined at S9531 above. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S9533.

In S9533, the sub-CPU 301 executes a drawing request generation process. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S9532. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S9534.

At S9534, the sub-CPU 301 executes a sound request generation process. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the performance pattern determined at S9531 above. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S9535.

In S9535, the sub-CPU 301 executes a lamp request generation process. In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S9531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S9536.

At S9536, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel request generation process. In this process, a reel request is generated based on the performance pattern determined at S9531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S9537.

At S9537, the sub-CPU 301 executes a process for generating a performance button actuation request. In this process, a performance button actuation request is generated based on the performance pattern determined at S9531 above. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the performance mode determination process and transfers the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 323).

[11-6. Game state transition diagram]
The game states to which the game is changed by the various processes executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 as described above will be explained with reference to a game state transition diagram. Figure 325 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the ninth pachinko game machine.

The ninth pachinko gaming machine has two game states: a normal game state in which the gameplay is mainly related to the drawing of the first special symbol, and a time-saving game state in which the gameplay is mainly related to the drawing of the normal symbol.

When distinguishing between normal game states in detail, the normal game state during the control period of the first special symbol, which is performed based on the start information of the first special symbol, is called the "first normal game state," and the normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol, which is performed based on the start information of the second special symbol, is called the "second normal game state."

As described above, the "first normal game state" is the normal game state during the control period of the first special symbol that is performed based on the start information of the first special symbol, and is a normal game state in which hitting from the left is the normal game mode. Therefore, in the first normal game state, it is easy for a game ball to enter the first start hole 9120, but it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second start hole 9140.

The "second normal game state" is a normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol that is performed based on the start information of the second special symbol, and is a normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol that is performed when the variable display number of the normal symbol is the final time-saving number in the time-saving game state, the second start hole 9140 is opened based on a lottery for the normal symbol, and a game ball enters the second start hole 9140. Here, the second normal game state specifies left-handed hitting as the regular game mode, but when the variable display of the second special symbol starts, the return rate that transitions back to the time-saving game state is extremely high, so right-handed hitting may also be specified as the regular game mode. In this way, since the second normal game state may specify left hitting or right hitting, it is desirable not to have the display device 7 notify the normal game mode in the second normal game state, but to have the display device 7 notify the left hitting as the normal game mode when transitioning from the second normal game state to the first normal game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the gaming state during the control period of the second special pattern, which is carried out based on the start information of the second special pattern, is also called the "BONUS state", and the "BONUS state" refers to a state that includes the above-mentioned "second normal gaming state", the time-saving gaming state during the control period of the second special pattern, which is carried out based on the start information of the second special pattern, the big win gaming state, and the small win gaming state.

As described above, the time-saving game state is distinguished from the viewpoint of the time-saving transition condition (time-saving occurrence condition), and includes the "A time-saving game state" which is transitioned to after the end of the jackpot game state triggered by a jackpot, and the "B time-saving game state" which is transitioned to after the variable display count of the special pattern reaches the ceiling value without being triggered by a jackpot. In addition, the "A time-saving game state" is distinguished from the viewpoint of the time-saving end condition and the operation mode during the time-saving game state (operation pattern of the normal power shutter 9147), and includes the "first time-saving game state", the "second time-saving game state" which is easier to transition to the next jackpot game state than the first time-saving game state, and the "third time-saving game state" which is practically guaranteed to transition to the next jackpot game state.

The "first time-saving game state" is a time-saving game state in which the state flag = 1 and the normal power operation pattern = 01 are set, and the first time-saving number (the number of times that the normal pattern is displayed = 100) is set as the time-saving number of times for the A time-saving end condition, and the time-saving game state in which right-hand hitting is the normal game mode. In the first time-saving game state, the normal power operation pattern = 01 is set, and the first long opening probability in which the long opening pattern is executed based on the normal pattern hit judgment process, normal pattern determination process, and second start hole opening pattern determination process (hereinafter referred to as "normal pattern lottery, etc.") shown in FIG. 319 is set to about 1/135.6 (see FIG. 304). As described above, even if the short opening pattern is executed, it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the second start hole 9140, and even if it is determined that the normal pattern is a hit, it is configured to be treated as a loss.

The "second time-saving game state" is a time-saving game state in which the state flag = 1 and the normal power operation pattern = 02 are set, and the second time-saving number (the number of times that the normal symbol is displayed = 120) is set as the time-saving number of times for the A time-saving end condition, and the right hit is the normal game mode. In the second time-saving game state, the normal power operation pattern = 02 is set, and the second long opening probability based on the lottery of the normal symbol is set to about 1/68.5. In addition, the second time-saving game state is set to a second long opening probability higher than the first long opening probability of the first time-saving game state, and the second time-saving number is set to a number higher than the first time-saving number of the first time-saving game state, so that it is a time-saving game state that is easier to transition to the next big win game state than the first time-saving game state.

The "third time-saving game state" is a time-saving game state in which the state flag = 1 and the normal power operation pattern = 02 are set, and the third time-saving number (the number of variable displays of normal symbols = 10,000 times) is set as the number of time-saving times for the A time-saving end condition, and right-hand hits are the regular game mode. In the third time-saving game state, the normal power operation pattern = 02 is set, and the second long opening probability based on the lottery of normal symbols is set to about 1/68.5. In the third time-saving game state, the third time-saving number (the number of variable displays of normal symbols = 10,000 times) is set as the number of time-saving times, which is substantially guaranteed to transition to the next big win game state, and this is a time-saving game state in which transition to the next big win game state is substantially guaranteed.

The "B time-saving game state" is a time-saving game state in which the state flag = 2 and the normal power operation pattern = 02 are set, and the fourth time-saving number (the number of times the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner = 600 times) is set as the time-saving number of times for the B time-saving end condition, and it is a time-saving game state in which right-hand hitting is the normal game mode. In the B time-saving game state, the normal power operation pattern = 02 is set, and the probability of opening the second long, based on the lottery of the normal symbol, is set to approximately 1/68.5.

(Transition Control of First Normal Gaming State)
As shown in Fig. 325, in the first normal game state, when a game ball enters the first start hole 9120, a "jackpot" or "miss" is determined based on the start information of the first special symbol (see Fig. 294), and if a "jackpot" is determined, a jackpot game state is entered. Then, after the jackpot game state triggered by the start information of the first special symbol in the first normal game state ends, depending on the selected special symbol, a "first time-saving game state" is entered with a selection rate of 90%, and a "second time-saving game state" is entered with a selection rate of 10% (see Fig. 298).

In addition, in the first normal game state (including the second normal game state), after the number of times the special symbol changes display reaches 600 times, the game state transitions from the normal game state to the "B time-saving game state."

(Transition control of first time-saving gaming state)
In the first time-saving game state, when a game ball passes through the normal symbol operation area 9126 and the first long opening probability (approximately 1/135.6) is won based on a normal symbol lottery, etc., the second starting hole 9140 opens, allowing the game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140.

When a game ball enters the second start hole 9140, start information for the second special pattern is acquired, and the acquired start information for the second special pattern is stored in a FIFO format in either the special pattern determination memory area (0), the second special pattern start memory area (1), or the second special pattern start memory area (2). In other words, when a game ball enters the second start hole 9140, it is possible to store start information for the second special pattern up to three times, the amount of change and the number of reserved second special patterns (2). Then, when a game ball enters the second start hole 9140, the game transitions from the "first time-saving game state" to the "BONUS state".

In addition, in the first time-saving game state, if the variable display of the normal pattern for the first time-saving number of times ends without a game ball entering the second starting hole 9140, the game state will transition from the "first time-saving game state" to the "first normal game state."

(Transition control of second time-saving gaming state)
In the second time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation area 9126 and the second long opening probability (approximately 1/68.5) is won based on a normal symbol lottery, etc., the second starting hole 9140 opens, allowing the game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140.

When a game ball enters the second start hole 9140, start information for up to three second special symbols is stored, similar to the first time-saving game state, and the game transitions from the "second time-saving game state" to the "BONUS state."

In addition, in the second time-saving game state, if the variable display of the normal pattern for the second time-saving number of times ends without a game ball entering the second starting hole 9140, the game state will transition from the "second time-saving game state" to the "first normal game state."

(Transition control of the third time-saving gaming state)
In the third time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation area 9126 and the second long opening probability (approximately 1/68.5) is won based on a normal symbol lottery, etc., the second starting hole 9140 opens, allowing the game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140.

When a game ball enters the second start hole 9140, start information for up to three second special symbols is stored, similar to the first time-saving game state, and the game transitions from the "third time-saving game state" to the "BONUS state."

In addition, in the third time-saving game state, the third time-saving number of times (the number of times the normal symbol is variable displayed = 10,000 times) is the number of times that essentially guarantees a transition to the next big win game state, and there is essentially no transition from the "third time-saving game state" to the "first normal game state."

(Transition control of B time-saving gaming state)
In the B time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation area 9126 and the second long opening probability (approximately 1/68.5) is won based on a normal symbol lottery, etc., the second starting hole 9140 opens, allowing the game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140.

When a game ball enters the second start hole 9140, start information for up to three second special symbols is stored, similar to the first time-saving game state, and the game transitions from the "B time-saving game state" to the "BONUS state."

In addition, even in the B time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving number (the number of times that the normal symbols are variable displayed = 600 times) is the number of times that essentially guarantees a transition to the next big win game state, and there is essentially no transition from the "B time-saving game state" to the "first normal game state."

(BONUS State Transition Control)
In the BONUS state, first, a lottery for the second special symbol is performed based on start information for the second special symbol.

Here, in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability of a big win is set to approximately 1/231.6, but the probability of a small win is set to approximately 1/1.004, so that a big win or small win is determined with a combined probability of 65535/65536 (see FIG. 294). In this embodiment, when a small win game state is played due to a small win being won, the game ball that enters the second big win opening 9151 is configured to be able to pass through the V win opening 9156 (see FIG. 292 and FIG. 297), and when the game ball passes through the V win opening 9156, the game transitions to a big win game state from the second route.

For this reason, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 9140, there is a 1/1 (65535/65536) chance of transitioning to a jackpot game state, and the game state during the control period of the second special symbol, which is carried out based on the start information of the second special symbol, corresponds to a BONUS state, just like the jackpot game state and the small jackpot game state.

In the BONUS state, after the second special symbol is selected, the jackpot game state will be played from the first route triggered by a jackpot, or the jackpot game state will be played from the second route triggered by a small jackpot. In addition, in the BONUS state, the start information for up to three second special symbols is stored, so that up to three jackpot game states can be played consecutively.

In the BONUS state, when all jackpot game states triggered by the start information of the second special symbol have ended, depending on the selected symbol of the second special symbol, there is a 90% selection rate for transition to the "second time-saving game state," and a 10% selection rate for transition to the "third time-saving game state" (see Figure 298).

In this way, in this embodiment, the game is composed of a first gameplay in which the player aims to enter a jackpot gameplay state by drawing a first special symbol during normal gameplay, and a second gameplay in which the player aims to open the second starting hole 9140 long by drawing a normal symbol during time-saving gameplay. This not only combines a so-called type 1 pachinko game machine with a so-called type 2 pachinko game machine, but also creates unprecedented gameplay and can increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of a long reel opening differs depending on the normal power operation pattern during the time-saving game state, so multiple time-saving game states with different long reel opening probabilities can be enjoyed, further increasing the excitement of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, the lottery for the second special symbol (the game ball entering the second starting hole 9140) is configured to effectively (approximately 1/1) allow a transition to a jackpot game state, so that when in the time-saving game state, the second gameplay of aiming for a long opening of the second starting hole 9140 by the lottery for a normal symbol and the transition results to multiple time-saving game states can be made even more interesting, and the excitement of the game can be further increased.

[11-7. Display contents of the performance]
The display contents of the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300 etc. will be described using display images displayed in the display area of the display device 7.

(Basic configuration of display image)
First, the basic configuration of the display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 will be described with reference to Fig. 326. Fig. 326 is an example of an explanatory diagram of the basic configuration of the display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. Fig. 326(a) shows the basic configuration of the display image in the first normal gaming state, and Fig. 326(b) shows the basic configuration of the display image in the time-saving gaming state excluding the BONUS state.

(Basic Configuration of Display Image in First Normal Gaming State)
As shown in Figure 326 (a), the basic configuration of the display image in the first normal game state is configured so that a left pattern 9071L, a middle pattern 9071C, and a right pattern 9071R can be displayed as main patterns of decorative patterns corresponding to the first special pattern at the center of the display area of the display device 7.

In addition, the right corner of the display area of the display device 7 is configured to be able to display small first sub-pattern 9072 as a sub-pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, second sub-pattern 9073 as a sub-pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern, and third sub-pattern 9075 as a sub-pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the normal pattern.

In this embodiment, when the first special symbol is displayed in the first normal game state, in addition to the main symbols, the left symbol 9071L, the middle symbol 9071C, and the right symbol 9071R, the first sub-symbol 9072 is also displayed in a variable manner. When the normal symbol is displayed in the first normal game state, only the third sub-symbol 9075 is displayed in a variable manner, and the main decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is not displayed. When the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, as will be described later in the BONUS state, only the second sub-symbol 9073 is displayed in a variable manner, and the main decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is not displayed.

In the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the first special symbol can be displayed, and a first reserved image 9074a indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (1), a second reserved image 9074b indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (2), a third reserved image 9074c indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (3), and a fourth reserved image 9074d indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (4) can be displayed according to the reserved number of the first special symbol. Also, in response to the reserved image, the reserved image 9075 indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed is displayed. In this embodiment, a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the second special symbol is not displayed in the first normal game state, but a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the second special symbol may be displayed.

(Basic configuration of display image in time-saving game state)
As shown in Figure 326 (b), the basic configuration of the display image in a time-saving game state excluding the BONUS state is such that a left pattern 9076L, a middle pattern 9076C and a right pattern 9076R can be displayed as main patterns of decorative patterns corresponding to normal patterns at the center of the display area of the display device 7.

In addition, in the right corner of the display area of the display device 7, a first sub-pattern 9072 corresponding to the first special pattern, a second sub-pattern 9073 corresponding to the second special pattern, and a third sub-pattern 9075 corresponding to the normal pattern can be displayed small, just as in the first normal game state.

In this embodiment, when the variable display of normal symbols is performed during time-saving play, in addition to the variable display of the main symbols, left symbol 9076L, middle symbol 9076C, and right symbol 9076R, the variable display of the third sub-symbol 9075 is also performed. Also, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed during time-saving play, only the variable display of the first sub-symbol 9072 is performed, and the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed.

In the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of normal symbols can be displayed, and a first reserved image 9077a indicating that start information is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (1), a second reserved image 9077b indicating that start information is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (2), a third reserved image 9077c indicating that start information is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (3), and a fourth reserved image 9077d indicating that start information is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (4) can be displayed according to the reserved number of normal symbols. Also, the reserved image 9078 indicating that the variable display of the normal symbol is being performed is displayed in response to the reserved image. In this embodiment, reserved images corresponding to the reserved number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in the time-saving game state, but reserved images corresponding to the reserved number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be displayed.

The upper right corner of the display area of the display device 7 is configured to display a right-hit instruction image 9079 that instructs right-hitting as the normal game mode.

The upper left corner of the display area of the display device 7 is configured to be able to display a time-saving count image 9080 indicating the remaining number of times the time-saving count is reached under the time-saving end condition. When the third time-saving count (the number of times the normal symbols are variable displayed = 10,000) is set in the third time-saving game state, the infinity symbol "∞" is displayed as the time-saving count image 9080 to indicate that a transition to the next big win game state is guaranteed.

In this way, in the first normal game state, the main symbol and reserved image of the decorative symbol correspond to the first special symbol so that it is easy to recognize the first game characteristic of aiming for a jackpot game state by drawing the first special symbol, and in the time-saving game state, the main symbol and reserved image of the decorative symbol correspond to the normal symbol so that it is easy to recognize the second game characteristic of aiming for a long opening of the second starting hole 9140 by drawing the normal symbol. Then, in the time-saving game state, a variable performance of the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol (left symbol 9076L, middle symbol 9076C, and right symbol 9076R) is performed. In other words, the first decorative symbol (main symbol) becomes a symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the normal game state, and is replaced with a symbol corresponding to the normal symbol in the time-saving game state.

(BONUS state effect)
Next, referring to Figure 327, we will explain the game state during the control period of the second special pattern, which is carried out based on the start information of the second special pattern, and the presentation of the BONUS state, including the big win game state and the small win game state.

In addition, in the presentation of the BONUS state, the first sub-pattern 9072, second sub-pattern 9073, third sub-pattern 9075, and right-hit instruction image 9079 described in FIG. 326 are displayed small, and since there is a risk of interfering with the explanation of the presentation contents, the symbols are omitted in the illustration. Also, the first sub-pattern 9072, second sub-pattern 9073, and third sub-pattern 9075 are configured to be always displayable in the game state (second normal game state and time-saving game state) during the control period of the second special pattern performed based on the start information of the second special pattern, but are configured to be hidden in the big win game state and small win game state.

Figure 327 (a) shows an example of a display image of a "BONUS entry effect" that can be executed during the initial variable display of the second special pattern when the game ball enters the second starting hole 9140, the number of reserved second special patterns is 0 when the starting condition of the second special pattern is met, and the "first special pattern variable pattern (0AH)" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 327(a), in the "BONUS entry performance", as an example, a right-hit instruction image 9079 and a congratulatory image announcing entry into the BONUS state are displayed in the display area. This "BONUS entry performance" can be executed over the "first variable display time (e.g., 10 seconds)" and "symbol determination time (e.g., 540 ms)" associated with the first special symbol variable pattern (0AH). In addition, in the "BONUS entry performance", only the second sub-symbol 9073, which is a sub-symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol, is variably displayed, and the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is not displayed.

Figure 327 (b) is an example of a display image of the "first BONUS presentation (first time)" that is performed when the variable display of the second special symbol ends and the game moves from the BONUS state to the first small win game state.

As shown in FIG. 327(b), in the "first BONUS performance (first time)", as an example, a right hit instruction image 9079, a specific character image, a specific background image, and a V instruction image such as "Aim for the V!" which instructs a right hit and instructs the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 9156 in the second large winning hole 9151 are displayed in the display area. Also, although not shown, in the "first BONUS performance (first time)", when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 9156, a V passing notification effect can also be executed which notifies the player that the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 9156.

Figure 327 (c) is an example of a display image of the "Second Bonus Presentation (at the start)" which is performed at the start of the first big win game state (the opening time of the first big win game state) after the game ball passes through the V winning port 9156 in the first small win game state.

As shown in FIG. 327(c), in the "second BONUS performance (at the start)," as an example, a right-hit instruction image 9079 and an image of the number of game balls to be acquired, such as "4500 BONUS!!," which indicates the number of game balls that the player can acquire in the BONUS state, are displayed in the display area.

As mentioned above, when the game transitions to the BONUS state, a maximum of three consecutive jackpot game states can be played. In this embodiment, the image of the number of game balls to be acquired shows the number of game balls that the player can acquire in a maximum of three jackpot game states (including the number of game balls that can be acquired in the small jackpot game state) (4,500 balls = 1,500 balls x 3 times).

The image of the number of game balls to be acquired displayed in this manner is configured to be able to display all combinations of the number of game balls to be acquired that correspond to the number of game balls that the player can acquire in a maximum of three jackpot game states. For example, in the case where the winning allocation of the second special symbol in the above-mentioned FIG. 298 is 10R in which 1500 balls can be acquired and 4R in which 600 balls can be acquired, an image corresponding to 4500 balls for three times per 10R, an image corresponding to 3600 balls for two times per 10R and one time per 4R, an image corresponding to 2700 balls for one time per 10R and two times per 4R, and an image corresponding to 1800 balls for three times per 4R are respectively able to be displayed.

If the player is unable to get the maximum three game balls to enter the second starting hole 9140 due to ball jamming or other reasons, an image corresponding to one win (an image corresponding to 1500 balls or an image corresponding to 600 balls) or an image corresponding to two wins (an image corresponding to 3000 balls, an image corresponding to 2100 balls, an image corresponding to 1200 balls) may be displayed. In this case, the player may lose interest because he or she is not awarded the maximum number of jackpots, but by accurately displaying the number of balls expected to be won, it is possible to prevent this loss of interest.

In this embodiment, the image of the number of game balls expected to be won is configured to be displayed in the "second BONUS presentation (start)" at the start of the first big win game state, but it may also be configured to be displayed in the "first BONUS presentation (first time)" after the game ball passes through the V winning hole 9156 during the first small win game state.

Figure 327 (d) is an example of a display image of the "Second Bonus Presentation (Opening)" that is performed in the jackpot gaming state after the opening time of the first jackpot gaming state has elapsed (during a round of the jackpot gaming state).

As shown in FIG. 327(d), in the "Second BONUS Presentation (Open)", as an example, the display area is configured to display a right-hit instruction image 9079, a specific character image, a specific background image, and an acquired ball count image that displays the cumulative number of game balls acquired by the player as a result of game balls entering the first large prize opening 9131 and the second large prize opening 9151.

In this embodiment, the acquired game ball number image is configured to display the cumulative number of game balls acquired by the player as a result of game balls entering the first large prize winning port 9131 and the second large prize winning port 9151 as the number of game balls acquired by the player in the small win game state and the big win game state, but it may be configured to display the cumulative number of game balls acquired by the player as a result of game balls entering the first large prize winning port 9131 as the number of game balls acquired by the player in the big win game state. Furthermore, the acquired game ball number image may be configured to display the cumulative number of game balls acquired by the player as a result of game balls entering the first large prize winning port 9131, the second large prize winning port 9151, and the general prize winning port 122.

Figure 327 (e) shows an example of a display image of a "BONUS continuation effect" that is executable during the variable display of the second special pattern from the second time onwards, when the number of reserved second special patterns > 0 when the start condition of the second special pattern is met after the big win game state ends (i.e., when the start information of the second special pattern is stored in the second special pattern start memory area (1) or the second special pattern start memory area (2)), and the "variable pattern of the second special pattern (1AH)" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 327(e), in the "BONUS continuation effect", as an example, a right hit instruction image 9079, a specific character image, a specific background image, and an image of the number of acquired game balls are displayed in the display area, and the effect is configured to be such that the BONUS effect performed in the big win game state or the small win game state is continuing. This "BONUS continuation effect" can be executed over the "second variable display time (e.g., 1 second)" and the "pattern determination time (e.g., 540 ms)" associated with the variable pattern (1AH) of the second special pattern. In addition, in the "BONUS continuation effect", only the second sub-pattern 9073 as the sub-pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern is variably displayed, and the main pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern is not displayed.

Figure 327 (f) is an example of a display image of the "First Bonus Presentation (2nd or later)" that is performed when the variable display of the second special symbol ends and the game transitions to the 2nd or later small win game state.

As shown in FIG. 327(f), in the "first BONUS effect (second or later)," as an example, a right hit instruction image 9079, a specific character image, a V instruction image, and an acquired game ball number image are displayed in the display area. Also, as described above, when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 9156 while FIG. 327(b) is displayed, the V passing notification effect can be executed. However, even if the game ball passes through the V winning hole 9156 while FIG. 327(f) is displayed, it is preferable not to execute the V passing notification effect. When the V passing notification effect is not executed, it becomes possible to show the player multiple jackpot game states seamlessly, which can increase the interest of the game.

Note that the V-passing notification performance may be executed when FIG. 327(f) is displayed, but when executing the V-passing notification performance when FIG. 327(f) is displayed, it is desirable to execute the V-passing notification performance in an execution time that is shorter than the execution time of the V-passing notification performance executed when FIG. 327(b) is displayed.

After the game ball passes through the V winning hole 9156 in the second or subsequent small win game state, the game transitions to the big win game state. However, at the start of the second or subsequent big win game state, the "second BONUS effect (at the start)" as shown in FIG. 327(c) is not performed, and even during the opening time of the big win game state, the "second BONUS effect (during opening)" as shown in FIG. 327(d) is performed.

In this way, as the effect of the BONUS state, a "BONUS entry effect" or a "BONUS continuation effect" is executed as a variable effect during the variable display of the second special symbol, a "first BONUS effect" is executed in a small win game state, and a "second BONUS effect" is executed in a big win game state. And, because the effects executed in the "BONUS entry effect", "first BONUS effect", "second BONUS effect" and "BONUS continuation effect" are related to each other, a group of cohesive effects can be executed as an effect of one BONUS state, which can further increase the interest of the game.

In particular, during the second or subsequent variable display of the second special pattern and during the small win and big win game states, no special effects like those in Figs. 327(a)-(c) are performed, but instead an effect similar to the "second BONUS effect (open)" in the big win game state as shown in Fig. 327(d) is performed, so that multiple big win game states can be made to appear seamless (like a group of big win game states), further enhancing the excitement of the game.

In addition, during the initial variable display of the second special pattern, during the small win game state, and during the big win game state, special effects such as those shown in Fig. 327 (a)-(c) are performed, so that it is possible to notify the player that the game has transitioned to the BONUS state, and to notify the player in advance of the number of game balls that the player can win in the BONUS state, thereby increasing the player's delight and making the game even more enjoyable.

<Ninth modified example of pachinko game machine>
The technology described in the embodiment of the ninth pachinko game machine may be applied to a slot machine. When applied to a slot machine, the various effects executed in the ninth pachinko game machine may be replaced with effects by a display device, reels, etc. provided in the slot machine. In addition, the time-saving game state (A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, and third time-saving game state) may be replaced with any of the following states: replay time (RT state) in which the replay probability of replay is improved, assist time (AT state) in which a predetermined small role or the operation content of the stop button is notified, and assist replay time (ART state) in which the replay time and assist time are controlled simultaneously. In addition, the big win and small win may be replaced with any of the following: winning a specific role, a specific combination of symbols being stopped and displayed (a specific combination of symbols being awarded), winning an entry win in the RT state, winning an entry win in the AT state, and winning an entry win in the ART state.

(others)
The above-mentioned ninth pachinko gaming machine can apply the techniques of each embodiment, including the modified examples. The above-mentioned embodiment does not limit the contents of the present invention, and can be modified to the extent that it does not deviate from the scope of the claims.

In addition, the effects described in the ninth pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most favorable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention.

Furthermore, the above [4. Expansion Example] can also be applied to the ninth pachinko gaming machine, as long as there is no inconsistency in its gameplay or control.

[12. The 10th Pachinko Game Machine]
Next, the tenth pachinko gaming machine will be described. The tenth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a one-type two-type mixed machine, like the third pachinko gaming machine. The tenth pachinko gaming machine is different from the third pachinko gaming machine in terms of gameplay and presentation content, and accordingly, the configuration of various components arranged in the game area is also partially different.

The tenth pachinko gaming machine, like the third pachinko gaming machine, is a priority variable machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in parallel, and the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. However, this is not limited to this, and the machine may be a sequential variable machine as described above.

Hereinafter, when explaining the tenth pachinko gaming machine, the same components as those in the first pachinko gaming machine will be given the same symbols and step numbers, and detailed explanations of their configuration and processing will be omitted.

In this embodiment, "entering a game ball" into an entry port (e.g., a starting port or a big prize entry port) that can give the player a certain benefit (payout of game balls, transition of game state) is also referred to as "winning", as appropriate. Also, in this embodiment, the "variable display" of the pattern is a concept that includes both a "variable display" in which the pattern changes and is displayed, and a "stationary display" in which the pattern stops and is displayed, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stationary display is referred to as one "variable display".

In addition, the "payout" of game balls is not limited to actually paying out game balls to a player, but in the case of gaming machines that progress the game by circulating enclosed game balls (so-called smart pachinko), it is a concept that also includes storing the number of game balls paid out (prize ball data) in the memory area of the gaming machine or in an electronic storage medium (game card).

[12-1. Game board unit]
The game board unit 10010 of the tenth pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 328. This game board unit 10010 is also disposed in front of the base door 3 (see Fig. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see Fig. 2) like the first pachinko game machine.

Figure 328 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 10010 equipped in the tenth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 10010 has a game panel 10100 as a game board, various components are arranged on the game panel 10100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game panel 10100, in which the launched game balls can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 328, the game board unit 10010 of the tenth pachinko gaming machine is different from the first pachinko gaming machine mainly in the configuration and arrangement of the first passing gate 10126R and the second passing gate 10126L, the second starting opening 10140, the normal electric role unit 10145, the first special electric role unit 10130, and the second special electric role unit 10150. The configuration and arrangement of each are explained below.

The first start hole 10120 located in the play area 105 of the tenth pachinko game machine is functionally the same as the first start hole 120 located in the play area 105 of the first pachinko game machine, but because of its relationship with the second start hole 10140, it will be described again using a different reference number from that of the first pachinko game machine.

(Passing gate)
The tenth pachinko gaming machine has two passing gates: a first passing gate 10126R arranged in the right area 107 and a second passing gate 10126L arranged in the left area 106.

The first passing gate 10126R is configured as a gate through which game balls can pass, and is located above (upstream of) the normal electric role unit 10145, so that game balls that pass through the first passing gate 10126R can enter the normal electric role unit 10145. In addition, since the first passing gate 10126R is located in the right side area 107, game balls hit from the right can pass through (game balls hit from the left have difficulty or cannot pass through).

The second passing gate 10126L is configured as a gate through which game balls can pass, and is located to the left of the center device 115 and above (upstream of) the first starting hole 10120, and game balls that pass through the second passing gate 10126L can enter the first starting hole 10120. The second passing gate 10126L is also located in the left side area 106, allowing game balls hit from the left to pass through (game balls hit from the right have difficulty or cannot pass through).

The second passage gate 10126L may be located directly above the first starting opening 10120, or the chance entrance 119 provided on the stage 118 may serve as the second passage gate 10126L.

When a game ball passes through the first passing gate 10126R or the second passing gate 10126L, it is used for the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol winning determination process) and for the variable display of normal symbols. Note that in this embodiment, even if a game ball passes through the first passing gate 10126R or the second passing gate 10126L, no prize balls are paid out; however, the first passing gate 10126R and the second passing gate 10126L may be configured as winning ports (normal symbol operation ports) to pay out a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball).

The first passing gate 10126R or the second passing gate 10126L may also function as a trigger for activating a consecutive operation device for special devices. Assuming that the condition device is operating (the special symbol that will result in a jackpot is displayed in a stopped state), the consecutive operation device for special devices may be activated when a game ball passes through the first passing gate 10126R or the second passing gate 10126L, and a transition to a jackpot game state may occur.

In this embodiment, the game area 105 is configured with two pass gates in both the right area 107 and the left area 106, but it may be configured with a pass gate only in the right area 107. In other words, it may be configured with only the first pass gate 10126R located in the right area 107, without the second pass gate 10126L located in the left area 106.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 10120 is disposed in the game area 105 below the display area of the display device 7, and is configured so that game balls hit to the left can enter the hole, and game balls hit to the right due to game nails or the like are difficult or impossible to enter the hole. The first starting hole 10120 is provided with a first starting hole switch 10121 (see FIG. 329 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 10120.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 10120, a first special symbol lottery (a process for determining whether the first special symbol is a winning symbol), a variable display of the first special symbol, and a prize ball for the first starting hole (e.g., three game balls) are paid out. The process after the game ball enters the first starting hole 10120 will be described in detail later.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 10140 is located in the right area 107 below (downstream) the first passing gate 10126R, and is provided in a normal electric role unit 10145 described later, so that game balls hit to the right can enter the hole (game balls hit to the left are difficult or impossible to enter the hole). The second starting hole 10140 is provided with a second starting hole switch 10141 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 10140.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 10140 is located below (downstream) the first passing gate 10126R, so that a game ball that has passed through the first passing gate 10126R can enter the second starting hole 10140 when the normal electric device 10146 described below is in operation.

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 10140, a second special symbol lottery (a process for determining whether the second special symbol is a winning symbol), a variable display of the second special symbol, and a prize ball for the second starting hole (for example, one game ball) are paid out. The process after the game ball enters the second starting hole 10140 will be described in detail later.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric role unit 10145 is located in the right area 107 below (downstream of) the first passing gate 10126R, and is located so that the game ball hit to the right can pass through it. The normal electric role unit 10145 is a unit body that integrates the second start hole 10140, the second start hole switch 10141 that detects the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 10140, and the normal electric role 10146.

The normal electric device 10146 is equipped with a protruding plate-type normal power shutter 10147 that can move forward and backward, and a normal power solenoid 10148 (see FIG. 329 described below) that operates the normal power shutter 10147. The normal electric device 10146, i.e., the normal power shutter 10147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 10140, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 10140.

Specifically, the normal power shutter 10147 is composed of a substantially triangular ball entry prevention section disposed near the entrance of the second starting port 10140 and a flat ball entry guidance section inclined toward the second starting port 10140. When the normal power shutter 10147 is in the closed state, the substantially triangular ball entry prevention section is located in an opposing area facing the entrance of the second starting port 10140 and prevents balls from entering the second starting port 10140, and the flat ball entry guidance section is embedded in the surface of the game panel 10100 and allows game balls to flow downward without accepting game balls flowing down into the right side area 107. On the other hand, when the normal power shutter 10147 is in the open state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention section is located in an avoidance area that does not face the entrance of the second starting hole 10140, and does not hinder the entry of balls into the second starting hole 10140, and the flat ball entry guide section protrudes from the surface of the game panel 10100 to receive game balls flowing down to the right area 107 and guide the received game balls to the second starting hole 10140. Note that instead of the above-mentioned normal power shutter 10147 that can move forward and backward, the normal power shutter 10147 may be configured with a movable member that can move left and right, called an electric chute.

In addition, when the second starting hole 10140 is open and a specified number of game balls (e.g., one) for normal power enter the hole, the normal electric device 10146 closes the second starting hole 10140 even if the opening time has not elapsed.

(First special electric feature unit)
The first special electric role unit 10130 is disposed below (downstream) the first passing gate 10126R, the normal electric role unit 10145, and the second special electric role unit 10150 described later in the right area 107. The first special electric role unit 10130 may be provided upstream of at least one of the first passing gate 10126R, the normal electric role unit 10145, and the second special electric role unit 10150 described later, or may be provided in the left area 106.

The first special electric device unit 10130 is a unit body that integrates a first large prize opening 10131, a first large prize opening count switch 10132 (see FIG. 329 described below) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 10131, a first special electric shutter 10134 that can move forward and backward, and a first special electric solenoid 10135 (see FIG. 329 described below) that operates the first special electric shutter 10134.

The first large prize opening 10131 is an opening that opens when a jackpot is hit, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the first large prize opening 10131 in one round of a jackpot is set (for example, 10 balls). Each time one game ball enters the first large prize opening 10131, prize balls for the first large prize opening (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The first large prize opening 10131 transitions from a closed state to an open state in the first route when a special stop display mode is derived indicating that the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a "big hit" and in the second route when a specific stop display mode is derived indicating that the result of the special pattern determination is a "small hit" and the second large prize opening 10151 opens, and a game ball that enters the opened second large prize opening 10151 enters the V prize opening 10156 within the second large prize opening 10151.

The first special electric shutter 10134 is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 10131, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 10131, by the operation of the first special electric solenoid 10135 (see Figure 329 described below).

Specifically, the first special electric shutter 10134 is composed of an opening and closing door with a pivot support at the bottom. When the first special electric shutter 10134 is in the open state, the opening and closing door falls to the front side to open the first large winning opening 10131, which receives game balls flowing down into the right side area 107 and guides the received game balls to the first large winning opening 10131. On the other hand, when the first special electric shutter 10134 is in the closed state, the opening and closing door is inverted to close the first large winning opening 10131, making it impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the first large winning opening 10131.

(Second special electric feature unit)
The second special electric role unit 10150 is provided below (downstream) the first passing gate 10126R and the normal electric role unit 10145 in the right area 107. The second special electric role unit 10150 may be provided upstream of at least one of the first passing gate 10126R or the normal electric role unit 10145, or may be provided in the left area 106.

The second special electric device unit 10150 includes a second large prize opening 10151 that is opened to allow game balls to enter the inside of the second special electric device unit 10150, a second large prize opening count switch 10152 that detects the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 10151, a second special electric shutter 10154 that can open and close the second large prize opening 10151, a second special electric solenoid 10155 (see FIG. 329 described below) that operates the second special electric shutter 10154 to open and close the second large prize opening 10151, and a second special electric solenoid 10155 that operates the second special electric shutter 10154 to open and close the second large prize opening 10151. It is a unit that integrates a V winning port 10156 through which game balls that enter 151 can pass, a V winning port switch 10157 that detects when a game ball has passed through the V winning port 10156, a normal port 10158 through which game balls that have entered the second large winning port 10151 but have not entered the V winning port 10156 can pass, a V shutter 10159 that opens and closes the V winning port 10156, and a V shutter solenoid 10160 (see Figure 329 described below) that operates the V shutter 10159 to open and close the V winning port 10156.

The second large prize opening 10151 is an opening that opens when a small win occurs, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the second large prize opening 10151 in one small win (for example, 10 balls) is specified. Each time one game ball enters this second large prize opening 10151, prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) for the second large prize opening are paid out.

The second special electric shutter 10154 is made of a protruding plate-shaped member that can move forward and backward, and is configured so that by operating the second special electric solenoid 10155 (see Figure 329 described below), the second special electric shutter 10154 can be advanced forward to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 10151, and the second special electric shutter 10154 can be retracted backward to an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 10151.

The V winning hole 10156 is a winning hole that can be opened and closed by the V shutter 10159, and is also a winning hole through which the game ball passes, triggering control to a jackpot game state via the second route described above.

When the game is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, the opening of the second large prize opening 10151 when the game ball passes through the V prize opening 10156 is regarded as the first round, and after the game ball passes through the V prize opening 10156 (from the second round onwards), a round game is executed in which the first large prize opening 10131 transitions from a closed state to an open state. Note that when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, a round game in which the second large prize opening 10151 transitions from a closed state to an open state may be executed for a predetermined number of rounds even after the game ball passes through the V prize opening 10156 (from the second round onwards).

Also, for example, a V entry port may be provided inside the first large entry port 10131, so that there is one V entry port and one attacker that is opened in the big win game state. In this case, when a stop display mode indicating a "small win" is derived, the first large entry port 10131 is set to an open state, and when a game ball enters the V entry port provided inside the first large entry port 10131, the game is controlled to a big win game state (a big win game state via the second route).

The normal opening 10158 is configured to allow game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 10151 but have not passed through the V prize opening 10156 to enter (pass through). Game balls that pass through the normal opening 10158 are ejected outside the machine. Note that if all game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 10151 pass through the normal opening 10158 and no game balls pass through the V prize opening 10156, the jackpot game state will not be controlled.

The V shutter 10159 is configured to be able to transition between a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for game balls to pass through the V winning opening 10156, and an open state in which it is possible (or easy) for game balls to pass through the V winning opening 10156, by the operation of the V shutter solenoid 10160 (see Figure 329 described below).

The relative positions of the first special electric role unit 10130, the normal electric role unit 10145, the second special electric role unit 10150, and the first passing gate 10126R arranged in the right area 107 can be freely changed as needed.

[12-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the tenth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 329. Fig. 329 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 329, the tenth pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the tenth pachinko gaming machine differs from the first pachinko gaming machine in some respects in the configuration of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300. The configuration and layout of each are described below.

[12-2-1. Main control circuit]
Compared to the first pachinko game machine, the main control circuit 200 has slightly different configurations in the normal power solenoid 10148, the first special power solenoid 10135, the second special power solenoid 10155, the V shutter solenoid 10160, the first start port switch 10121, the second start port switch 10141, the passing gate switch 10127, the first large prize port count switch 10132, the second large prize port count switch 10152, and the V prize port switch 10157 which are connected to the main control circuit 200.

(Solenoid for general purpose power supply)
The normal power solenoid 10148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the normal power shutter 10147. When the normal power solenoid 10148 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it advances the normal power shutter 10147 forward to open the second starting port 10140, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it retreats the normal power shutter 10147 backward to close the second starting port 10140.

(First special solenoid)
The first special electric solenoid 10135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the first special electric shutter 10134, which is an opening and closing door. When the first special electric solenoid 10135 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), it tilts the first special electric shutter 10134 forward to open the first large winning opening 10131, and when it is not energized by the main CPU 201 (OFF), it inverts the first special electric shutter 10134 backward to close the first large winning opening 10131.

(Second special solenoid)
The second special electric solenoid 10155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the second special electric shutter 10154. When the main CPU 201 energizes the second special electric solenoid 10155 (ON), the second special electric solenoid 10155 moves the second special electric shutter 10154 backward to open the second large winning opening 10151, and when the main CPU 201 does not energize the second special electric solenoid 10155 (OFF), the second special electric shutter 10154 advances forward to close the second large winning opening 10151.

(Solenoid for V-shutter)
The V shutter solenoid 10160 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V shutter 10159. When the V shutter solenoid 10160 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V shutter 10159 backward to open the V winning opening 10156, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V shutter 10159 forward to close the V winning opening 10156.

In addition, in this embodiment, the V shutter solenoid 10160 operates in conjunction with the opening of the second large winning opening 10151, opening the V winning opening 10156. In other words, the V winning opening 10156 is in an open state when the second large winning opening 10151 is opened, and when a game ball enters the second large winning opening 10151, it will in principle also pass through the V winning opening 10156.

(First start switch)
The first start hole switch 10121 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 10120.

When the first start hole switch 10121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 10120, the main CPU 201 determines that the first acquisition condition is met and acquires the start information of the first special pattern (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for a pattern, random number value for reaching a reach, random number value for selecting a performance, etc.). The acquired start information of the first special pattern is stored in the first special pattern start memory area (first special pattern start memory area (1) to first special pattern start memory area (4) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of first special patterns (for example, four)". When the judgment start condition of the first special pattern (for example, the special electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the special pattern is not being performed, etc.) is met, the information is used for the hit judgment process of the first special pattern and the variable display of the first special pattern. In addition, when the first start port switch 10121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start port 10120, the main CPU 201 instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of the prize balls for the first start port (e.g., three game balls).

(Second start switch)
The second start hole switch 10141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 10140.

When the second start hole switch 10141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 10140, the main CPU 201 determines that the second acquisition condition is met and acquires start information for the second special symbol (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for symbol, random number value for reaching a reach, random number value for selecting a performance, etc.). The acquired start information for the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start memory area (second special symbol start memory area (1) to second special symbol start memory area (3) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of second special symbols (e.g., 3)," and when the judgment start condition for the second special symbol (e.g., the special electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, etc.) is met, it is used for the hit judgment process for the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, when the second start port switch 10141 detects that a game ball has entered the second start port 10140, the main CPU 201 instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of a prize ball (e.g., one game ball) for the second start port.

In addition, in the embodiment, the winning judgment process for the first special pattern based on the start information of the first special pattern is also called the "lottery for the first special pattern," and the winning judgment process for the second special pattern based on the start information of the second special pattern is also called the "lottery for the second special pattern," and the lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern are collectively called the "lottery for the special patterns."

(Passing gate switch)
The pass gate switch 10127 is provided in each of the first pass gate 10126R and the second pass gate 10126L, and is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a game ball through the first pass gate 10126R or the second pass gate 10126L.

When the pass gate switch 10127 detects the passage of the game ball through the first pass gate 10126R or the second pass gate 10126L, the main CPU 201 acquires the start information of the normal symbol (random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a hit, random number value of the normal symbol, etc.) without distinguishing between the first pass gate 10126R and the second pass gate 10126L. The acquired start information of the normal symbol is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (normal symbol start memory area (1) to normal symbol start memory area (4) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of normal symbols (for example, 4)". When the normal symbol judgment start condition (for example, the normal electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the normal symbol is not being performed, etc.) is met, it is used for the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit judgment process) and the variable display of the normal symbol.

(First prize slot count switch)
The first large prize opening count switch 10132 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 10131. When the first large prize opening count switch 10132 detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 10131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that have entered the first large prize opening 10131 per round, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of prize balls for the first large prize opening (e.g., 15 game balls).

(Second major prize slot count switch)
The second large prize opening count switch 10152 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 10151. When the second large prize opening count switch 10152 detects the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 10151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 10151 and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of prize balls for the second large prize opening (e.g., 10 game balls).

(V prize entry switch)
The V winning hole switch 10157 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a gaming ball into the V winning hole 10156. When the V winning hole switch 10157 detects the entry of a gaming ball into the V winning hole 10156, the main CPU 201 performs control to transition to a big win gaming state.

(Game ball recovery switch)
The game ball recovery switch 10179 is a through-type proximity switch that detects game balls launched from the launching device 6 into the game area 105. The game ball recovery switch 10179 is located on the rear side of the game board unit 10010, in a collecting flow path through which game balls that have entered the outlet 178 and various winning ports (for example, the first start port 10120, the second start port 10140, the first large winning port 10131, the second large winning port 10151, the general winning port 122, etc.) pass, and detects not only game balls that have entered the outlet 178, but also game balls that have entered various winning ports without distinction. When the game ball recovery switch 10179 detects the entry of a game ball, the main CPU 201 counts the number of launched game balls that have been launched (counts a launched game ball number counter described later).

[12-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300, like the first pachinko game machine, is equipped with a sub-CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a gimmick control circuit 307 and a command input port 308, but differs in that it further comprises a button control circuit 310 and a performance button 54.

(Button Control Circuit 310)
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving the effect button 54. In other words, the button control circuit 310 is a circuit for changing the operation mode of the effect button 54 and vibrating the effect button 54. The button control circuit 310 drives the effect button 54 in response to a drive command from the sub-CPU 301.

The button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal related to a player's operation detected by the effect button 54. When the button control circuit 310 inputs an operation signal from the effect button 54, it outputs predetermined operation information to the sub-CPU 301.

In particular, in this embodiment, the effect button 54 includes multiple types of buttons (a decision button, a left/right button, and an up/down button), and different operation information is output depending on the type of effect button 54. Specifically, when an operation signal is input from the effect button 54 corresponding to the decision button, first operation information is output to the sub-CPU 301, when an operation signal is input from the effect button 54 corresponding to the left/right button, second operation information is output to the sub-CPU 301, and when an operation signal is input from the effect button 54 corresponding to the up/down button, third operation information is output to the sub-CPU 301.

[12-2-3. Payout/launch control circuit]
The payout/launch control circuit 400, like the first pachinko game machine, controls the payout/launch of game balls, and this payout/launch control circuit 400 is connected to a payout device 82 capable of paying out game balls, a launch device 6 capable of launching game balls, a card unit 180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

Furthermore, when the payout/launch control circuit 400 in the tenth pachinko game machine receives a game stop signal from the main control circuit 200 indicating that game play has been stopped based on the increased number of game balls, the payout/launch control circuit 400 stops the launch of game balls by the launch device 6 (stops the supply of power to the launch solenoid). Note that even if the main control circuit 200 indicates that game play has been stopped based on the increased number of game balls, the payout/launch control circuit 400 does not need to stop the launch of game balls by the launch device 6.

[12-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the tenth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 330 to 342. The tenth pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In the tenth pachinko gaming machine, although the probability variable control is not executed, a time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed and a normal gaming state in which the time-saving control is not executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 is capable of progressing the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. Note that, although the probability variable control is not executed in this tenth pachinko gaming machine, this is not essential, and it is also possible to execute the probability variable control by setting the probability variable flag on depending on the type of jackpot, etc., for example.

As described later, the tenth pachinko game machine has a time-saving game state that is distinguished from the viewpoint of time-saving transition conditions (time-saving occurrence conditions), which includes an "A time-saving game state" that is entered after the end of the jackpot game state triggered by a jackpot, a "B time-saving game state" that is entered after the number of times the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner reaches a ceiling value without being triggered by a jackpot, and a "C time-saving game state" that is entered after the end of the variable display of the special symbols triggered by a time-saving hit. Furthermore, the "A time-saving game state" and the "C time-saving game state" are classified into a plurality of time-saving game states as time-saving game states that are distinguished from the viewpoint of the operation mode during the time-saving game state (such as the operation pattern of the normal power shutter 10147), which will be described in detail later.

[12-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
330 is an example of a special symbol winning judgment table in the tenth pachinko game machine. The special symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 330 is a table for judging a "big win", a "small win", a "time-saving win" or a "miss", and is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 330, the special symbol hit determination table includes a special symbol hit determination table in the normal game state shown in FIG. 330(a) and a special symbol hit determination table in the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 330(b).

The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 330 associates the type of special symbol, the random number value for jackpot determination, and the hit/miss determination value data (jackpot determination value data, minor hit determination value data, time-saving hit determination value data, miss determination value data). Note that the total random number value for jackpot determination is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In other words, the random number value for jackpot determination is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

In addition, the hit determination table for the special symbol in the normal game state shown in FIG. 330(a) corresponds to the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit, which is determined to be a "big hit", a "time-saving hit", or a "miss", and the corresponding hit/miss determination value data (big hit determination value data, time-saving hit determination value data, miss determination value data) as data used in the hit determination process for the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first starting hole 10120. In addition, the hit determination table for the special symbol in the normal game state shown in FIG. 330(a) corresponds to the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit, which is determined to be a "big hit", a "small hit", or a "miss", and the corresponding hit/miss determination value data (big hit determination value data, small hit determination value data, miss determination value data) as data used in the hit determination process for the second special symbol executed based on the ball entering the second starting hole 10140.

In other words, according to the hit determination table for special symbols in the normal game state shown in Figure 330 (a), in the normal game state, the hit determination process for the first special symbol determines a "big hit", "time-saving hit" or "miss", but does not determine a "small hit", and the hit determination process for the second special symbol determines a "big hit", "small hit" or "miss", but does not determine a "time-saving hit".

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start hole 10120 in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 judges the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol as a "big hit" with a selection rate of about 1/319.7 based on the hit determination process of the first special symbol, judges it as a "time-saving hit" with a selection rate of about 1/49.9, and judges it as a "miss" otherwise. Also, when a game ball enters the second start hole 10140 in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 judges the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol as a "big hit" with a selection rate of about 1/319.7 based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol, judges it as a "small hit" with a selection rate of about 1/3.0, and judges it as a "miss" otherwise.

The hit determination table for the special symbol in the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 330(b) corresponds to the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit, which is determined to be a "big hit" or a "miss", and the corresponding hit/miss determination value data (big hit determination value data, time-saving hit determination value data, miss determination value data) as data used in the hit determination process for the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first starting hole 10120. Also, the hit determination table for the special symbol in the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 330(a) corresponds to the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit, which is determined to be a "big hit", a "small hit", or a "miss", and the corresponding hit/miss determination value data (big hit determination value data, small hit determination value data, miss determination value data) as data used in the hit determination process for the second special symbol executed based on the ball entering the second starting hole 10140.

In other words, according to the hit determination table for special symbols in the time-saving play state shown in FIG. 330(b), in the time-saving play state, neither the hit determination process for the first special symbol nor the hit determination process for the second special symbol determines a "time-saving hit," the hit determination process for the first special symbol determines a "big hit" or a "miss" but does not determine a "small hit," and the hit determination process for the second special symbol determines a "big hit," "small hit," or "miss."

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start hole 10120 in the time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 judges the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol as a "big hit" with a selection rate of about 1/319.7 based on the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and judges the result as a "miss" otherwise. Also, when a game ball enters the second start hole 10140 in the time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 judges the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol as a "big hit" with a selection rate of about 1/319.7 based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and judges the result as a "small hit" with a selection rate of about 1/3.0, and judges the result as a "miss" otherwise.

In this way, in this embodiment, the special pattern hit determination table shown in FIG. 330 is configured so that when the game ball enters the first starting hole 10120, it is more likely to be determined as a "small hit" than when the game ball enters the second starting hole 10140, both in the normal game mode and in the time-saving game mode.

In this embodiment, in the time-saving game state, the hit determination process of the first special symbol does not determine a "time-saving hit", but the hit determination process of the first special symbol may determine a "time-saving hit" even in the time-saving game state. When the hit determination process of the first special symbol is configured to determine a "time-saving hit" even in the time-saving game state, it is preferable to configure the hit determination process of the first special symbol in the time-saving game state to determine a "time-saving hit" at a relatively lower selection rate than the hit determination process of the first special symbol in the normal game state. Furthermore, the hit determination process of the second special symbol may also determine a "time-saving hit", but it is preferable to configure the hit determination process of the second special symbol to determine a "time-saving hit" at a relatively lower selection rate than the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

Furthermore, in the time-saving play state, a "time-saving hit" is determined by the hit determination process for the special symbol, but even if a "time-saving hit" is determined in the time-saving play state, it may be treated as a "miss" and the stopped symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the miss may be stopped and displayed. In other words, even if a "time-saving hit" is determined in the time-saving play state, the "time-saving hit" may be ignored in the time-saving play state.

In addition, in both the normal game mode and the time-saving game mode, when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, a "small hit" may be determined, but if a "small hit" is determined, it is preferable to determine a "small hit" with a relatively low selection rate so that the determination made in the hit determination process for the second special symbol is more favorable than the determination made in the hit determination process for the first special symbol.

The range (width) of random numbers that are determined to be a "big hit", a "small hit", a "time-saving hit", and a "miss", i.e., the selection rates, are not limited to the above values and can be freely designed and modified as appropriate.

In addition, if the tenth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the selection rate of a big win and/or a small win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting. However, even if the tenth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the selection rate of a time-saving win be set to a common probability for all settings.

In addition to or instead of changing the selection rate of a big win or a small win according to the set value, for example, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning port 10156 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning port 10156, or the number of times the time-saving continuation may be changed for each set value. In other words, by adopting one or more of the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the probability of a big win, the probability of a small win, the opening frequency of the V winning port 10156 (i.e., the operation frequency of the second special electric shutter 10154), the opening time, and the number of times the time-saving continuation may be changed, the expected value controlled for the big win game state may be configured to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting.

[12-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
331 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the tenth pachinko game machine. The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 331 is a table that determines the "selected special symbol" and the "symbol designation command" that determine the special symbol to be stopped and is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The "selected special symbol" is information for determining the special symbol that will be displayed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit, and the "symbol designation command" is a command sent to the sub-control circuit 300 to display a decorative symbol that corresponds to the special symbol that will be displayed in the display area of the display device 7.

In the special symbol determination table, the type of special symbol, the winning/losing determination value data described above, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol obtained when the game ball enters the first starting hole 10120 or the second starting hole 10140 are specified in correspondence with the "special symbol selection symbol" and the "symbol designation command." The symbol random number value of the special symbol is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 331, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 0 to 59, the main CPU 201 determines "z1" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA1" as the symbol designation command. If the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 60 to 79, the main CPU 201 determines "z2" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 80 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z3" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any value between 0 and 69, the main CPU 201 determines "z10" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA10" as the symbol designation command. If the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any value between 70 and 84, the main CPU 201 determines "z20" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA20" as the symbol designation command. In addition, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any value between 85 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z30" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA30" as the symbol designation command.

When jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, regardless of the value of the symbol random number value for the special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines "z4" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

When small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the win determination process for the second special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any value between 0 and 79, the main CPU 201 determines "z5" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA5" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any value between 80 and 89, the main CPU 201 determines "z6" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any value between 90 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z7" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

In this embodiment, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the random number value of the special symbol in the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 331 is configured to establish a relational equation of the selection rate of the special symbol, "z10" > "z20" and "z10" > "z30". Note that the relational equation of "z20" and "z30" is not limited to the selection rate of "z20" = "z30", and may be the selection rate of "z20" > "z30", or may be the selection rate of "z20" < "z30".

As will be described in more detail later, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, if "z10" is determined as the selected special symbol, the game will transition to a "first time-saving game state" after the variable display of the special symbol ends, if "z20" is determined as the selected special symbol, the game will transition to a "second time-saving game state" after the variable display of the special symbol ends, and if "z30" is determined as the selected special symbol, the game will transition to a "third time-saving game state" after the variable display of the special symbol ends. It is desirable that the selection rate of the selected special symbol "z20", which is the condition for transitioning to the "second time-saving game state", is 20% or less.

In addition, without providing the "third time-saving game state" described later, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, it may be configured to transition to either the "first time-saving game state" or the "second time-saving game state". In addition, when the time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, if the transition to either the "first time-saving game state" or the "second time-saving game state" is configured, the selection pattern of the special symbol determined when the time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol may be configured to only be two types, "z10" and "z20", and the relationship of the selection rate of "z10" > "z20" may be established. In this case, it is desirable that the selection rate of the selection pattern "z20" of the special symbol, which is the transition condition to the "second time-saving game state", is 20% or less.

Although the tenth pachinko gaming machine will not be described, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is a table that is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 when the special symbol is stopped, according to the "selected special symbol". In addition, the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 display the stop mode of a big win, a small win, a time-saving win, or a miss, based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. In addition, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table described in the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 12(B)) is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

The range of the random number value of the special pattern that determines the "selected special pattern", i.e., the selection rate, is not limited to the above values and can be freely changed as needed.

[12-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
332 is an example of a big win type determination table in the pachinko gaming machine No. 10. The big win type determination table shown in FIG. 332 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The jackpot type determination table is a table that determines the operation content of the jackpot game state, and is a table that determines the "opening mode of the jackpot game state."

As shown in FIG. 332, the jackpot type determination table associates the "opening mode of the jackpot game state" with the selected special symbol.

The "opening mode of the jackpot game state" specifies the maximum number of rounds of the first large prize opening 10131 that is opened during the jackpot game state, and the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 10131. The opening pattern of the first large prize opening 10131 specifies the OP waiting time (opening time) which is the waiting state for the start of the jackpot game state, the maximum opening time of each round, the closing time of each round, the ED waiting time (ending time), etc. Note that the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 10131 may specify a different maximum opening time for each round, or a different closing time (round interval time) for each round. Furthermore, the number of openings and the opening time may be specified so that the first large prize opening 6131 is opened and closed multiple times per round.

Here, the "opening mode of the big win game state" corresponding to the "selected special pattern z5-7" determined when the small win judgment value data of the second special pattern is obtained is the opening mode when the game ball that entered the second large winning hole 10151 opened in the small win game state passes through the second route of the V winning hole 10156 and transitions to the big win game state. When transitioning to the big win game state via this second route, the opening of the second large winning hole 10151 in the small win game state is regarded as the first round, and from the second round onwards, the big win game state in which the first large winning hole 10131 is opened is started. Note that if the game ball that entered the second large winning hole 10151 opened in the small win game state does not pass through the V winning hole 10156, the big win game state is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 332, according to the jackpot type determination table, when the "special pattern selected pattern z1" is determined when the jackpot determination value data for the first special pattern is obtained, the maximum number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds (10R), and when the "special pattern selected patterns z2, z3" are determined, the maximum number of rounds is determined to be 4 rounds (4R). Note that when the "special pattern selected patterns z1-3" are determined when the jackpot determination value data for the first special pattern is obtained, the maximum number of rounds may all be determined to be the same number of rounds (for example, 10 rounds).

In addition, for the "special pattern selected z7" which is determined when the big win determination value data for the second special pattern is obtained, the maximum number of rounds is set to 10 rounds (10R). For the "special pattern selected z5-7" which are determined when the small win determination value data for the second special pattern is obtained, the maximum number of rounds is set to 10 rounds (10R). Note that a different number of rounds may be determined depending on the "special pattern selected z5-7" which is determined when the small win determination value data for the second special pattern is obtained.

In addition, depending on the special symbol selected, either the OP waiting time (opening time) or the ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the first large winning port 10131 may be configured to be different.

[12-3-4. Small Win Type Determination Table]
333 is an example of a small win type determination table in the pachinko gaming machine No. 10. The small win type determination table shown in FIG.

The small win type determination table is a table that determines the operation content of the small win game state, and is a table that determines the "opening mode of the small win game state."

As shown in FIG. 333, in the small win type determination table, the "selected special pattern (z5-7)" that is determined when the small win determination value data for the second special pattern is obtained is associated with a "small win game state opening mode."

The "opening mode of the small win game state" specifies the maximum number of times the second large winning opening 10151 is opened during the small win game state, the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 10151, and the opening pattern of the V winning opening 10156. The opening pattern of the second large winning opening 10151 specifies the OP waiting time (opening time) which is the waiting state for the start of the small win game state, the maximum opening time for each number, the closing time for each number, the ED waiting time (ending time), etc. Also, the opening pattern of the V winning opening 10156 specifies the opening waiting time, opening time, etc.

When the small win game state starts, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 10151 and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 10156 are timed simultaneously, and when the second large winning opening 10151 is open, the V winning opening 10156 is also open. Therefore, when the small win game state is performed, it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 10156. Note that, as the opening pattern of the V winning opening 10156, multiple opening and closing times may be specified so that the V winning opening 10156 is opened and closed multiple times, as in the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 10151.

The small win type determination table may be configured so that at least one of the following is different depending on the selected special symbol: OP waiting time (opening time), maximum opening time for each number of times, closing time for each number of times, ED waiting time (ending time), and opening waiting time, opening time, and closing time for the opening pattern of the V winning port 10156.

In particular, the small win type determination table may be configured to vary the opening pattern of the V winning hole 10156 depending on the selected special symbol, and to determine a favorable operation mode in which it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 10156 and an unfavorable operation mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 10156.

Here, the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one small win game state (e.g., 1 small win x 10 (second specified number) x 15 (number of prize balls) = 150) is set to be less than the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one big win game state (e.g., 4R x 10 (first specified number) x 15 (number of prize balls) = 600), and it can be said that the big win game state is the advantageous "first special game state," and the small win game state is the "second special game state" that is less profitable than the big win game state.

In addition, the maximum opening time for one round in the big win game state (e.g., 0.1 seconds) is set shorter than the maximum opening time for one round in the big win game state (e.g., 28 seconds), so that in the big win game state, the first large winning opening 10131 opens in a favorable "first opening mode," and in the small win game state, the second large winning opening 10151 opens in a less favorable "second opening mode" than the first opening mode.

[12-3-5. Game Status Related Setting Table]
334 is an example of a game state related setting table in the pachinko gaming machine No. 10. The game state related setting table shown in FIG. 334 is a table for setting the game state, and is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 334, the game state related setting tables include game state related setting table 1, which is referenced after the end of the big win game state shown in FIG. 334(a), game state related setting table 2, which is referenced after the end of the variable display of the special symbol for the time-saving mode shown in FIG. 334(b), and game state related setting table 3, which is referenced after the number of times the special symbol is variable displayed reaches the ceiling value shown in FIG. 334(c).

As shown in FIG. 334, the game status related setting table associates "status flag," "normal power operation pattern," and "time-saving end condition" as "game status settings."

The "state flag" is a flag that indicates the type of game state, and is stored in a specified memory area of the main RAM 203. A state flag of 0 indicates a "normal game state", a state flag of 1 indicates an "A time-shortened game state", a state flag of 2 indicates a "B time-shortened game state", and a state flag of 3 indicates a "C time-shortened game state".

The "normal power operation pattern" is information that defines the opening pattern of the second starting port 10140, and is stored in a specified memory area of the main RAM 203. Normal power operation pattern = 00 indicates a state in which the "long opening pattern" described below is difficult to determine and the "short opening pattern" described below is easy to determine, normal power operation pattern = 01 indicates a state in which the "long opening pattern" and the "short opening pattern" are determined, and normal power operation pattern = 02 indicates a state in which the "long opening pattern" is more easily determined and the "short opening pattern" is more difficult to determine than when normal power operation pattern = 00 and normal power operation pattern = 01.
That is, the opening pattern of the second starting port 10140 is as follows:
The normal power operation pattern operates in the following order to be advantageous to the player: normal power operation pattern = 00 < normal power operation pattern = 01 < normal power operation pattern = 02.

The "time-saving end condition" is the end condition under which the time-saving game state ends, and the "variable number of times the special symbol is displayed" is set as the end condition. This "variable number of times the special symbol is displayed" indicates the total number of times the first special symbol is displayed and the variable number of times the second special symbol is displayed. Although not shown in the figure, a transition to a jackpot game state is also set as a time-saving end condition. When any of these time-saving end conditions are met, the time-saving game state ends and a transition to the normal game state occurs.

In this embodiment, in the C time-saving game state (state flag = 3), the time-saving game state in which normal power operation pattern = 00 is set is called the "first time-saving game state", the time-saving game state in which normal power operation pattern = 02 is set is called the "second time-saving game state", and the time-saving game state in which normal power operation pattern = 01 is set is called the "third time-saving game state".

In addition, in the B time-saving game state (state flag = 2), the time-saving game state in which normal power operation pattern = 02 is set is called the "fourth time-saving game state."

In addition, in the A time-saving game state (state flag = 1), the time-saving game state in which normal power operation pattern = 02 is set is called the "fifth time-saving game state," and the time-saving game state in which normal power operation pattern = 00 is set is called the "sixth time-saving game state."

Furthermore, in the time-saving game state (state flag = 1 to 3), the second time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving game state, and the fifth time-saving game state in which the normal power operation pattern = 02 is set are collectively referred to as the "RUSH game state", and the first time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, and the sixth time-saving game state in which the normal power operation pattern = 00 or 01 is set are collectively referred to as the "normal game state".

In this "normal game state" and "general game state (first time-saving game state, third time-saving game state, and sixth time-saving game state)," left-handed play is the normal game mode, the first special symbol can be selected, and the gameplay is centered around the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, in the "RUSH game state (second time-saving game state, fourth time-saving game state, and fifth time-saving game state)," right-hand play is the regular game mode, and it is possible to draw normal symbols and second special symbols, and the gameplay is mainly based on the variable display of the second special symbols. In this embodiment, by drawing the second special symbol, it is possible to transition to the big win game state from the first route triggered by a big win and the second route triggered by a small win in about 1/3 of cases (see Figure 330).

As shown in FIG. 334(a), the game state related setting table 1, which is referenced after the end of the big win game state, associates the "state flag," "normal power operation pattern," and "time-saving end condition" with the selected special pattern (big win pattern or small win pattern).

According to game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 334(a), the state flag indicating the A time-saving game state is set to 1 for all "selected special symbols." In addition, when the "selected special symbols are z1, z4, z5," the normal power operation pattern is set to 02, and the time-saving end condition is set to the variable number of times the special symbols are displayed = 10,000 times. In addition, when the "selected special symbols are z2, z3, z6, z7," the normal power operation pattern is set to 00, and the time-saving end condition is set to the variable number of times the special symbols are displayed = 10,000 times.

Furthermore, when the "special symbol z1" is selected, the number of switches is set to 1, and when the "special symbol z4, z5" is selected, the number of switches is set to 5. As will be described in more detail later, the "number of switches" refers to the variable number of times the second special symbol is displayed when the "fifth time-saving game state" described later switches to the "sixth time-saving game state".

In this manner, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state, the game is configured to transition to a "fifth time-saving game state" or a "sixth time-saving game state" depending on the selected special symbol.
Here, after the big win game state by the drawing of the first special symbol ends, the state transitions to the "sixth time-shortened game state" at the first transition rate (40%) and to the "fifth time-shortened game state" at the second transition rate (60%) according to the selection rate of the special symbol selection pattern (see FIG. 331). Alternatively, in the drawing of the second special symbol, after the big win game state from the first route triggered by the big win ends, the state transitions to the "fifth time-shortened game state" at the third transition rate (100%) according to the selection rate of the special symbol selection pattern (see FIG. 331), and after the big win game state from the second route triggered by the small win ends, the state transitions to the "fifth time-shortened game state" at the fourth transition rate (80%) and to the "sixth time-shortened game state" at the fifth transition rate (20%) according to the selection rate of the special symbol selection pattern (see FIG. 331).

In addition, when the game transitions to the "6th time-saving game state" after the end of the jackpot game state (when the normal power operation pattern = 00 is determined), the "variable number of times that the special symbol is displayed" of the time-saving end condition can be set to 10,000 times, which is the first number of time-saving times.

In addition, when the game transitions to the "Fifth Time-saving Game State" after the end of the jackpot game state (when normal power operation pattern = 02 is determined), the "variable number of times special symbols are displayed" of the time-saving end condition can be set to 10,000 times, which is the second number of time-saving times.

The first and second time-saving times, which are the variable display times of the special pattern, are 10,000 times, which are the times that cannot be achieved in one day of play, and are essentially equivalent to an infinite number of times. For this reason, if the game transitions to the "fifth time-saving game state" or the "sixth time-saving game state" after the end of the jackpot game state, the time-saving game state will not end unless the game transitions to the jackpot game state. Therefore, after the first jackpot game state, the game will loop infinitely unless the RAM is cleared between the jackpot game state and the time-saving game state of the fifth time-saving game state or the sixth time-saving game state. In other words, after the first jackpot game state, the game is configured not to transition to the normal game state except during the jackpot game state. Note that the first and second time-saving times are not limited to 10,000 times, and the first and second time-saving times may be different, as long as they are essentially equivalent to an infinite number of times.

As shown in FIG. 334(b), in the game status related setting table 2, which is referenced after the variable display of the special symbol per time-saving feature has ended, the selected special symbol (time-saving feature) is associated with a "status flag," "normal power operation pattern," and "time-saving feature end condition."

According to the game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 334(b), the state flag indicating the C time-saving game state is set to 3 for all "selected special symbols". Furthermore, when the "selected special symbol z10" is selected, the normal power operation pattern is set to 00, and the time-saving end condition is set to the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed = 950 times. Furthermore, when the "selected special symbol z20" is selected, the normal power operation pattern is set to 02, and the time-saving end condition is set to the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed = 950 times. Furthermore, when the "selected special symbol z30" is selected, the normal power operation pattern is set to 01, and the time-saving end condition is set to the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed = 950 times.

In this manner, in this embodiment, after the variable display of the special pattern per time-saving period has ended, the game is configured to transition to a "first time-saving game state," a "second time-saving game state," or a "third time-saving game state," depending on the selected special pattern.
Here, after the variable display of the special pattern per time reduction has ended, depending on the selection rate of the special pattern (see Figure 331), the state will transition to the "first time-shortened game state" at the sixth transition rate (70%), to the "second time-shortened game state" at the seventh transition rate (15%), and to the "third time-shortened game state" at the eighth transition rate (15%).

In addition, when the game transitions to the "first time-saving game state" after the variable display of the special symbol per time-saving has ended (when the normal power operation pattern = 00 has been determined), the "number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner" that is the time-saving end condition can be set to 950 times, which is the third number of time-saving times.

In addition, when the game transitions to the "second time-saving game state" after the variable display of the special symbol per time-saving has ended (when normal power operation pattern = 02 has been determined), the "number of times the special symbol is displayed" that is the time-saving end condition can be set to 950 times, which is the fourth number of time-saving times.

In addition, when the game transitions to the "third time-saving game state" after the variable display of the special symbol per time-saving has ended (when normal power operation pattern = 01 has been determined), the "number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner," which is the time-saving end condition, can be set to 950 times, which is the fifth time-saving number.

The variable display number of the special symbol, which is the third time-saving number, the fourth time-saving number, and the fifth time-saving number described above, 950 times, is set to the number of times that it is possible to transition from the C time-saving game state (the first to third time-saving game states) to the B time-saving game state (the fourth time-saving game state). Therefore, in the C time-saving game state (the first to third time-saving game states), the C time-saving game state will not end unless it transitions to a jackpot game state or to the B time-saving game state. In addition, as described later, when the time-saving game state B is transitioned to, it is guaranteed that it will essentially transition to a jackpot game state. Therefore, it is configured so that after transitioning to the C time-saving game state, it will not return to the normal game state again.

The fourth number of time-saving times in the second time-saving gaming state is also set to a number that is guaranteed to result in a transition to a jackpot gaming state. Note that the fourth number of time-saving times is not limited to 950 times, so long as it is a number that is guaranteed to result in a transition to a jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 334(c), the game status related setting table 3, which is referenced after the variable display count of the special symbol reaches the ceiling value, is associated with a "status flag," "normal power operation pattern," and "time-saving end condition."

According to game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 334(c), when the variable display count of the special symbol reaches the ceiling value (950 times), the state flag indicating the B time-saving game state is set to 2, the normal power operation pattern is set to 02, and the variable display count of the special symbol is set to 950 times as the time-saving end condition.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the number of times the special symbols are displayed reaches the ceiling value, the game is configured to transition to the "fourth time-saving game state." The number of times the special symbols are displayed can be set to 950 times, which is the sixth time-saving number.

The sixth time-saving number of times described above is set to a number that is guaranteed to result in a transition to a jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the game transitions to the B time-saving gaming state, it is guaranteed that the game will transition to a jackpot gaming state. Note that the sixth time-saving number of times is not limited to 950 times, so long as it is a number that is guaranteed to result in a transition to a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, the first transition rate to the eighth transition rate in each time-saving game state can be freely designed and modified as appropriate by changing the random number value of the special pattern in the special pattern determination table shown in FIG.
However, after the variable display of the special pattern per time-saving end, it is desirable that the seventh transition rate for transition to the "second time-saving game state" is lower than the sixth transition rate for transition to the "first time-saving game state".

In addition, the number of times set as the "time-saving end condition" from the first time-saving number to the sixth time-saving number can be freely changed as appropriate.
However, it is desirable that the first and second time-saving numbers are numbers that essentially correspond to an infinite number of times, that the third and fifth time-saving numbers are numbers that allow a transition to time-saving game state B (fourth time-saving game state), and that the fourth and sixth time-saving numbers are numbers that are guaranteed to essentially transition to a jackpot game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the "variable number of times the special symbol is displayed" is set as the "time-saving end condition," but in addition to the end conditions described above, the "variable number of times the normal symbol is displayed" or the "number of times a small jackpot is won" may also be set as a time-saving end condition.

In addition, in this embodiment, the system is configured with three types of normal power operation patterns (00, 01, 02), low, medium, and high, but if the system is configured without the "third time-saving game state", it is sufficient to configure with two types, normal power operation pattern = 00 and normal power operation pattern = 02. In this case, the "special pattern selection pattern z30", which triggers the setting of normal power operation pattern = 01, can be set to the same game state as the "special pattern selection pattern z10" or the "special pattern selection pattern z20".

In addition, in this embodiment, the game state related setting table is configured to set the game state regardless of the "game state at the time of winning", but it may be configured to set the game state according to the "game state at the time of winning". When setting the game state according to the "game state at the time of winning", it is desirable to set it so that when the "game state at the time of winning is the normal game state", it is easier for the player to transition to a game state that is advantageous to the player than when the "game state at the time of winning is the time-saving game state". For example, in the game state related setting table referenced after the end of the big win game state, when the "game state at the time of winning is the time-saving game state", as in the game state related setting table 1 shown in Figure 334 (a), the normal power operation pattern = 00 or 02 is set according to the "selected special pattern", but when the "game state at the time of winning is the normal game state", it is desirable to set the normal power operation pattern = 02 (advantageous) for all "selected special patterns".

[12-3-6. Special symbol variation pattern table]
335 and 336 are examples of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 335 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state and the general gaming state in the tenth pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 336 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the RUSH gaming state in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. The variation pattern tables of special symbols shown in FIG. 335 and FIG. 336 are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table is a table that determines the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol and the fluctuation display time of the special symbol. "Special symbol fluctuation pattern" is information that defines the fluctuation mode of the special symbol, and at least the fluctuation display time of the special symbol is defined.

As shown in Figures 335 and 336, the special symbol variation pattern table associates the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or lose), a random number value for reach determination, a random number value for effect selection, the special symbol variation pattern, and the special symbol variation display time. The reach determination random number value is selected from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number value is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random numbers is not limited to the above. Also, the "Notes" column in Figures 335 and 336 conveniently shows the content of the effects, etc., for ease of understanding.

The main CPU 201 determines the special pattern variation pattern table of either FIG. 335 or FIG. 336 depending on the game status, etc., and refers to the determined special pattern variation pattern table to determine the special pattern variation pattern and the special pattern variation display time based on the type of special pattern, the result of the special pattern hit determination process, the reach determination random number value, and the performance selection random number value.

When the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern, it transmits a special symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined special symbol variation pattern to the sub-CPU 301. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main CPU 201. The special symbol variation pattern command is configured to be able to distinguish whether it is a first special symbol variation pattern triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 10120 or a second special symbol variation pattern triggered by a game ball entering the second starting hole 10140. Here, when distinguishing between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is also called the first special symbol variation pattern command or the second special symbol variation pattern command.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
The special symbol variation pattern table T shown in FIG. 335(a) is a special symbol variation pattern table determined during normal game play.

As described above, in this embodiment, a "time-saving hit" can only be determined in normal game mode, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T in normal game mode shown in FIG. 335(a) is configured so that when the result (win or loss) of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," a special symbol fluctuation pattern (C1H to C4H) different from a "jackpot" can be determined.

Furthermore, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T in the normal game state shown in FIG. 335(a) is configured so that when the result (win/lose) of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-shortened hit," different fluctuation patterns can be determined for the "selected special symbol z10" which triggers a transition to the first time-shortened game state, the "selected special symbol z20" which triggers a transition to the second time-shortened game state, and the "selected special symbol z30" which triggers a transition to the third time-shortened game state.

In the normal game state, the special symbol change pattern (C1H-C4H) for when there is a "time-saving hit" can be used to execute a "card effect" or a "RUSH entry effect" (described below) as a special effect for when there is a "time-saving hit". Furthermore, since the change pattern can be determined according to the "selected special symbol" for when there is a "time-saving hit", an effect corresponding to the game state to which the player transitions can be performed according to the "selected special symbol" for the "time-saving hit".

In addition, the special symbol variation pattern table T in the normal game state shown in FIG. 335(a) is configured so that when the type of special symbol is the second special symbol, a variation pattern of the special symbol different from the first special symbol in the normal game state can be determined.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game mode)
The special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 335(b) is a special symbol variation pattern table determined during the general gaming state.

The special symbol variation pattern table J1 in the general gaming state shown in FIG. 335(b) is configured so that when the type of special symbol is the second special symbol, a variation pattern of the special symbol different from the first special symbol in the general gaming state can be determined.

In this embodiment, the same fluctuation pattern table J1 is configured for the first time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, and the fifth time-saving game state as the general game state, but different fluctuation pattern tables may be configured for the first time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, and the fifth time-saving game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time-saving hit is not won in the normal game state, but if it is possible to win the time-saving hit in the normal game state, it is sufficient to configure it so that when there is a time-saving hit, a special pattern of variation different from that of a jackpot can be determined. And when there is a time-saving hit, it is desirable to be able to determine a special pattern of variation different between the normal game state and the normal game state, and to perform a different effect between the normal game state and the normal game state as a special effect when there is a time-saving hit.

(Special symbol variation pattern table for RUSH game state)
The special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in Fig. 336(a) is a variation pattern table of the special symbol determined in the "second time-saving game state or the fourth time-saving game state" as the RUSH game state. The special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in Fig. 336(b) is a variation pattern table of the special symbol determined in the "fifth time-saving game state" as the RUSH game state.

Between the special pattern variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 336(a) and the special pattern variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 336(b), when the result of the special pattern hit determination process (win/lose) is "lose", the special pattern variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 336(b) is configured to be able to determine a special pattern variation pattern associated with a short special pattern variation display time.

In this embodiment, the same fluctuation pattern table J2 is configured for the second time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state in the RUSH game state, but different fluctuation pattern tables may be configured for the second time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state. Furthermore, the fifth time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state may be configured with the same fluctuation pattern table, and the fifth time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state may be configured with the same fluctuation pattern table.

[12-3-7. Special symbol pre-reading related data]
FIG. 337 is an example of data related to the look-ahead of the special symbol in the tenth pachinko game machine. Here, "look-ahead" refers to analyzing the start information of the special symbol acquired before the lottery of the special symbol when the game ball enters the first start hole 10120 or the second start hole 10140 and the main control circuit 200 (main CPU 201) acquires the start information of the special symbol (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for a symbol, random number value for determining a reach, random number value for selecting a performance, etc.). The analyzed information (look-ahead command) is then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 (sub-CPU 301), and the "look-ahead performance" can be executed based on the look-ahead command.

Figure 337 (a) shows a look-ahead execution correspondence table that determines whether or not to perform look-ahead depending on the game status as data related to look-ahead of special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 337(a), in the normal game state, both pre-reading based on the start information of the first special symbol and pre-reading based on the start information of the second special symbol can be performed. In the time-saving game state, the big win game state, and the small win game state, only pre-reading based on the start information of the second special symbol can be performed.

Figure 337 (b) shows an example of the configuration of a look-ahead command based on the analyzed information that is the start information for a special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 337(b), the look-ahead command is composed of a "special symbol type" (either the first special symbol or the second special symbol) and multiple "parameters 1 to 3."

"Parameter 1" is the winning/losing information that is analyzed in advance to determine whether it is a big win, a small win, a time-saving win, or a miss based on a random number value for determining a big win, and Figure 337 (c) is an example of a setting table for parameter 1.

"Parameter 2" is pattern information that is obtained by analyzing in advance the selected special pattern to be stopped and displayed based on the random number value for determining a jackpot and the random number value for the pattern. Figure 337 (d) is an example of a setting table for parameter 2.

"Parameter 3" is fluctuation information that analyzes the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols in advance based on the random number value for determining a jackpot, the random number value for determining a reach, and the random number value for selecting a performance. Figure 337 (e) is an example of a setting table for parameter 3.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol from when the start information of the special symbol is read ahead until the special symbol is drawn based on the start information of the special symbol is also called "pre-variation." Also, the variable display of the special symbol when the special symbol is drawn based on the start information of the special symbol is also called "the said variation."

[12-3-8. Normal symbol winning judgment table]
338 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. The winning determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 338 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol winning judgment table is a table referenced in the normal symbol winning judgment process, and is a table referenced when determining by lottery whether the "normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol losing" is based on the normal symbol winning judgment random number value obtained when the game ball passes through the first passing gate 10126R or the second passing gate 10126L.

The winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 338 specifies the range (width) of random numbers for winning judgment of normal symbols and winning/losing judgment value data for normal symbols ("normal symbol win" or "normal symbol miss") in correspondence with each other. Note that the random numbers for winning judgment of normal symbols are obtained in the range of 0 to 65535 (65536 types), for example. However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning/losing determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 338, and determines the winning/losing determination value data for normal symbols based on the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol winning determination.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern shown in FIG. 338, and if the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern is any value between 0 and 16383, it judges it as a "normal pattern winning" and determines the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal pattern as "normal pattern winning/losing judgment value data". In addition, if the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern is any value between 16384 and 65535, the main CPU 201 judges it as a "normal pattern losing" and determines the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal pattern as "losing judgment value data".

In this embodiment, a "normal hit" is determined with a selection rate of approximately 1/1.00, and a "normal hit" is more likely to be determined than a "normal miss." Note that it is preferable that a "normal hit" is more likely to be determined than a "normal miss," and the selection rate of a "normal hit" is not limited to approximately 1/1.00.

In this embodiment, the selection rate for "normal symbol hit" is set to the same (the winning probability for normal symbol hit is the same) regardless of whether the game state is normal game state or time-saving game state, but the degree of profit given to the player is varied by varying the opening pattern of the second start hole 10140 according to the game state (normal power operation pattern) as described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" is set to the same regardless of whether the game state is the normal game state or the time-saving game state, but the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" may be made different depending on the game state. When making the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" different depending on the game state, it is desirable to configure it so that the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" in the time-saving game state is higher than the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" in the normal game state. Furthermore, the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" may be made different depending on the type of time-saving game state between time-saving game state A and time-saving game state B.

[12-3-9. Normal symbol determination table]
339 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the pachinko gaming machine No. 10. The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 339 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "selected normal symbol" that determines the stopping symbol of the normal symbol based on the winning/losing determination value data of the normal symbol described above and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol obtained when the game ball passes through the first passing gate 10126R or the second passing gate 10126L.

The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 339 specifies the above-mentioned normal symbol win/loss determination value data ("normal symbol win" or "normal symbol miss"), the normal symbol random number value, and the selected normal symbol pattern in correspondence with each other. The normal symbol random number value is obtained, for example, from 0 to 100 (101 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 339 and determines the selected normal pattern based on the normal pattern hit determination value data and the pattern random number value of the normal pattern.

According to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 339, when normal pattern hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal pattern hit determination process, for example, the selected normal pattern is selected as follows.

For example, when normal symbol winning judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f1" as the selected normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 0 and 98, and selects "f2" as the selected normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 99 and 100. In addition, when normal symbol losing judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f3" as the selected normal symbol, regardless of the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

The range (width) of the random number value of the normal pattern from which the "selected normal pattern" is selected, i.e., the selection rate, is not limited to the above value and can be freely designed and changed as appropriate.

In particular, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, the normal symbol selection symbol is selected based on the normal symbol win/loss judgment value data (the result of the normal symbol win/loss judgment process) and the normal symbol random number value, regardless of the gaming state. Note that, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the normal symbol selection symbol may be selected depending on the gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern (see FIG. 338) to determine the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal pattern based on the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern, and then refers to the normal pattern judgment table (see FIG. 339) to determine the selected pattern for the normal pattern based on the pattern random number value for the normal pattern, but is not limited to this. For example, the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal pattern (whether the normal pattern is winning or losing) and the selected pattern for the normal pattern may be determined together based on the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern and the pattern random number value for the normal pattern.

[12-3-10. Second starting hole opening pattern determination table]
340 is an example of a second start opening pattern determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. The second start opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 340 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

When it is determined that a normal symbol has been hit, the second start hole opening pattern determination table is referenced when determining the opening pattern of the second start hole 10140 as the operation mode of the normal power shutter 10147 according to the game state (normal power operation pattern) and the selected normal symbol.

The second start hole opening pattern determination table shown in Figure 340 specifies the game state (normal power operation pattern), the selected normal pattern, and the opening pattern of the second start hole 10140 in correspondence with each other.

The "second start port opening pattern" is composed of a "first opening time" when the second start port 10140 is in the first open state, a "first wait time" when the second start port 10140 is in the first closed state, a "second opening time" when the second start port 10140 is in the second open state, a "second wait time" when the second start port 10140 is in the second closed state, and an "ending time" that closes the second start port 10140 and ends the operation of the normal power shutter 10147.

The main CPU 201 refers to the second start hole opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 340 and determines the opening pattern of the second start hole 10140 based on the game state (normal power operation pattern) and the selected normal pattern. When the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern of the second start hole 10140, it transmits to the sub-CPU 301 a second start hole opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the second start hole 10140.

In this embodiment, there are two types of opening patterns for the second starting port: a disadvantageous "short opening pattern (91H01H)" in which the opening time of the second starting port 10140 is short, and an advantageous "long opening pattern (91H02H)" in which the opening time of the second starting port 10140 is long. Note that the second starting port may be configured to have three or more types of opening patterns.

In particular, in this embodiment, the opening time of the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is set to an extremely short time (for example, 0.072 seconds). Therefore, even if a normal pattern is determined to be a winning combination, when the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is performed, it becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 10140, and it is essentially treated as a losing combination.

In addition, the opening time of the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is set to a long time (e.g., 5.4 seconds) that allows the game ball to enter the second starting hole 10140.

According to the second start hole opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 340, in the normal game state, the first time-saving game state, and the sixth time-saving game state, the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is determined as the opening pattern of the second start hole even when the selected normal pattern is "f1" or when the selected normal pattern is "f2" (the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is not determined).

In addition, in the third time-saving game state, when the selected normal symbol is "f1," the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is determined as the opening pattern for the second starting hole, and when the selected normal symbol is "f2," the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is determined as the opening pattern for the second starting hole.

In addition, in the second time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving game state, and the fifth time-saving game state, the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is determined as the opening pattern of the second starting hole when the selected normal symbol is "f1" or when the selected normal symbol is "f2."

For this reason, normal power operation pattern = 00 indicates a state in which the "long opening pattern" is difficult to determine and the "short opening pattern" is likely to be determined, normal power operation pattern = 01 indicates a state in which both the "long opening pattern" and the "short opening pattern" are determined, and normal power operation pattern = 02 indicates a state in which the "long opening pattern" is more likely to be determined and the "short opening pattern" is more difficult to determine than when normal power operation pattern = 01.

In addition, in the right column of the opening pattern determination table for the second starting hole shown in Figure 340, the "long opening probability" at which the "long opening pattern" is executed is shown for reference, which is calculated by adding up the "random number value for determining whether a normal pattern is a hit (see Figure 338)" and the "pattern random number value for a normal pattern (see Figure 339)". In this embodiment, when the normal power operation pattern = 00, the normal pattern hit is 1/4, but the long opening pattern is never determined, so the "long opening probability" is 0. In addition, when the normal power operation pattern = 01, the normal pattern hit is 1/4.0, and the selection rate of the selected pattern "f2" of the normal pattern that determines the long opening pattern is 2/101, so the "long opening probability" is approximately 1/202.0. Also, when the normal power operation pattern is 01, the normal symbol hit rate is 1/4.0, and the long opening pattern is determined for all selected normal symbols (101/101), so the "long opening probability" is 1/4.0.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specified number for normal power is set to three, and even if the opening pattern of any of the second starting holes is determined and the second starting hole 10140 is opened, when three game balls enter the second starting hole 10140, the opening pattern of that second starting hole ends (the second starting hole 10140 closes).

[12-3-11. Normal pattern variation table]
341 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 341 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table is a table that determines the normal symbol fluctuation pattern and the normal symbol fluctuation display time. "Normal symbol fluctuation pattern" is information that defines the normal symbol fluctuation mode, and at least the normal symbol fluctuation display time is defined.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 341 associates the selected normal symbol, the random number value for the normal symbol's effect, the normal symbol's variation pattern, and the normal symbol's variation display time. Also, the "Notes" column in FIG. 341 conveniently shows the contents of the effect, etc., for easy understanding.

FIG. 341(a) is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table F1 in a normal game state.
FIG. 341(b) is an example of a variation pattern table F2 of normal symbols in the first time-saving game state and the sixth time-saving game state in the general game state.
FIG. 341(c) is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table F3 in the third time-saving game state in the normal game state.
FIG. 341(d) is an example of a variation pattern table F4 of normal symbols in the second time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state in the RUSH game state.
FIG. 341 (e) is an example of a normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F5 for the fifth time-saving gaming state in the RUSH gaming state.

The main CPU 201 determines one of the normal symbol variation pattern tables in FIG. 341 according to the game status, references the determined normal symbol variation pattern table, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variation display time based on the selected normal symbol and other elements. Then, when the main CPU 201 determines the normal symbol variation pattern, it transmits to the sub-CPU 301 a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F1 in the normal game state shown in Figure 341 (a) is configured to be able to determine the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (00H, 01H) associated with the longest normal symbol fluctuation display time than the normal symbol fluctuation pattern tables F2 to F5 shown in Figures 341 (b) to 341 (e).

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F2 in the first time-saving game state and the sixth time-saving game state shown in FIG. 341(b) is configured to be able to determine normal symbol fluctuation patterns (10H, 11H) associated with normal symbol fluctuation display times that are shorter than those in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F1 in the normal game state shown in FIG. 341(a).

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F3 in the third time-saving play state shown in FIG. 341(c) is configured to be able to determine normal symbol fluctuation patterns (20H, 21H, 22H, 23H) associated with normal symbol fluctuation display times that are shorter than those in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F2 in the first time-saving play state and the sixth time-saving play state shown in FIG. 341(b).

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F4 in the second time-saving play state and the fourth time-saving play state shown in FIG. 341(d) is configured to be able to determine normal symbol fluctuation patterns (30H, 31H, 32H, 33H) associated with shorter normal symbol fluctuation display times than the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F3 in the third time-saving play state shown in FIG. 341(c).

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F5 in the fifth time-saving play state shown in FIG. 341(e) is configured to be able to determine normal symbol fluctuation patterns (40H, 41H, 42H, 43H) associated with shorter normal symbol fluctuation display times than the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F4 in the second time-saving play state and the fourth time-saving play state shown in FIG. 341(d).

That is, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table is configured so that the average fluctuation display time of the normal pattern is relatively short in the following order: normal pattern fluctuation pattern table F1 in the normal game state, normal pattern fluctuation pattern table F2 in the first time-saving game state and the sixth time-saving game state, normal pattern fluctuation pattern table F3 in the third time-saving game state, normal pattern fluctuation pattern table F4 in the second time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state, and normal pattern fluctuation pattern table F5 in the fifth time-saving game state.

In addition, the normal symbol variation pattern table F3 in the third time-saving game state shown in FIG. 341(c) is configured to be able to determine a normal symbol variation pattern (23H) in which a "telop effect" suggesting that the second start hole 10140 will open is executed when the "normal symbol selection symbol f2" is selected. In this embodiment, the normal symbol variation pattern table F3 is configured to be able to determine a normal symbol variation pattern (22H) in which a dummy "telop effect" is executed even when the "normal symbol selection symbol f1" is selected, but it may be configured to be able to determine a normal symbol variation pattern in which a "telop effect" is executed only when the "normal symbol selection symbol f2" is selected. Furthermore, the normal symbol variation pattern table F3 may be configured to be able to determine a normal symbol variation pattern (22H) in which a dummy "telop effect" is executed even when the "normal symbol selection symbol f3" is selected.

In this embodiment, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table in the RUSH game state is configured to be separated into normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F4 in the second time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state, and normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F5 in the fifth time-saving game state, but the second time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving game state, and the fifth time-saving game state may be configured with a common normal symbol fluctuation pattern table.

[12-3-12. Game stop command determination table]
342 is an example of a game stop command determination table in the pachinko gaming machine No. 10. The game stop command determination table shown in FIG. 342 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

In this embodiment, as described below, when the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulated value (95,000 balls), the game will be stopped as a general rule. However, if the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulated value during a small win game state or a big win game state, the game will be stopped after the small win game state or the big win game state ends.

The "game stop command" is a command that transmits information to the sub-control circuit 300 about the fact that the game will be stopped according to the increased number of game balls (MY). By receiving the game stop command, the sub-control circuit 300 is able to give a "game stop notice" in advance on the display device 7, etc., to notify the user that the game will be stopped, or a "game stop notification" that the game has been stopped.

The game stop command determination table shown in FIG. 342 associates a "game stop function activation management phase," a "game stop notice start condition," and a "game stop command."

The "game stop function activation management phase" here refers to one piece of related information for stopping a game based on the increased number of game balls, and is information that is set based on the increased number of game balls (MY) and indicates the state of the game stop function.

As described later, this "game stop function activation management phase" is set to "00H" when the number of game balls (MY) is 84999 or less, which is less than the initial boundary value, "01H" is set when the number of game balls (MY) is in the "first counting range (85000-89999)" from the initial boundary value or more to the first boundary value or less, and "02H" is set when the number of game balls (MY) is in the "second counting range (90000-94999)" from the first boundary value or more to the regulation value or less. In addition, when the number of game balls (MY) is in the "third counting range (95000 or more)" that is the regulation value or more, "03H" is set when the game is in a small win game state or a big win game state (before the game stop state), and "04H" is set when the game is not in a small win game state or a big win game state (during the game stop state).

The "increase in number of game balls (MY)" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out (number of paid-out game balls) minus the cumulative number of game balls fired (number of fired game balls). As will be explained in more detail later, the "increase in number of game balls (MY)" corresponds to the "difference in number of game balls counter" (increase in number of game balls (MY) = value of the difference in number of game balls counter).

In this way, the increased number of game balls (MY) is divided into an "initial counting range (84,999 or less)," a "first counting range (85,000-89,999)," a "second counting range (90,000-94,999)," and a "third counting range (95,000 or more)," and is configured to be identifiable by the game stop function activation management phase. Note that the initial boundary value, first boundary value, and regulation value can be freely designed and modified as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 342, the game stop command decision table is configured so that when the increased number of game balls (MY) is within the initial counting range (84999 or less), i.e., when the game stop function activation management phase is 00H, the game stop command is not decided and no notification regarding the increased number of game balls (MY) is made.

The game stop command determination table shown in FIG. 342 is configured so that when the increased number of game balls (MY) is in the first counting range (85,000 to 89,999), i.e., when the game stop function activation management phase is 01H, if the "game stop notice start condition" (hereinafter also referred to as the "first game stop notice start condition") in the first counting range is satisfied, a game stop command = 01H capable of executing the first game stop notice is determined.

The first game stop notice based on the game stop command = 01H will continue to be executed until the "first game stop notice end condition" described below is met.

The game stop command determination table shown in FIG. 342 is configured so that when the increased number of game balls (MY) is in the second counting range (90,000 to 94,999), i.e., when the game stop function activation management phase is 02H, if the "game stop notice start condition" (hereinafter also referred to as the "second game stop notice start condition") in the second counting range is satisfied, a game stop command = 02H capable of executing the second game stop notice is determined.

The second game stop notice based on game stop command = 02H will be executed in a notification manner that is partially different from the first game stop notice, and will continue to be executed until the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulated value.

In this embodiment, the first and second game stop notifications are different, but they may be a common notification. The notification mode of the game stop notification will be described in detail later.

The game stop command determination table shown in FIG. 342 is configured so that when the number of game balls increased (MY) is within the third counting range (95,000 and up) and the game is in a small win game state or a big win game state, that is, when the game stop function activation management phase is 03H, a game stop command = 03H that can execute the third game stop notice is determined.

The third game stop notice based on game stop command = 03H will be executed in a notification manner that is partially different from the first and second game stop notices, and will continue to be executed until the game is stopped (until the small win game state or the big win game state ends).

The game stop command determination table shown in FIG. 342 is configured so that when the increase in the number of game balls (MY) is in the third counting range (95,000 and up) and the game is not in a small win or big win game state, that is, when the game stop function activation management phase is 04H, a game stop command = 04H that can execute a game stop notification is determined.

The game stop notification based on the game stop command = 04H will continue to be executed in a manner different from the game stop notice until the RAM is cleared by the backup clear switch 176.

Here, as shown in FIG. 342, the "first game stop notice start condition" for the first counting range is set to be any one of the following game states: during a jackpot game state for the selected special symbol z1, during a jackpot game state for the selected special symbol z4, during a jackpot game state for the selected special symbol z5, the second time-saving game state (RUSH game state), the fourth time-saving game state (RUSH game state), or the fifth time-saving game state (RUSH game state).

The second time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving game state, and the fifth time-saving game state are all RUSH game states, and when a game state transitions to a RUSH game state, it becomes easier to transition to a jackpot game state, and the game state is one in which the player can expect to acquire a large amount of game value (game balls). During the jackpot game state of the special symbol z1, during the jackpot game state of the special symbol z4, and during the jackpot game state of the special symbol z5, the game state transitions to the fifth time-saving game state (RUSH game state) after the jackpot game state ends, and the game state is one in which the player can expect to acquire a large amount of game value (game balls).
Therefore, the "first game stop notice start condition" of the first counting range sets a game state in which the player can be expected to acquire a large amount of game value (game balls). Therefore, in a game state in which the player can be expected to acquire a large amount of game value (game balls), the execution of the game stop notice can be started earlier than the second counting range.

The "second game stop notice start condition" of the second counting range is first branched by the execution flag. This "execution flag" is a flag for determining whether the first game stop notice has been executed, and an execution flag of 0 indicates that the first game stop notice has not been executed, and an execution flag of 1 indicates that the first game stop notice has already been executed.

The second counting range's "second game stop notice start condition" is set to be when the execution flag is 0 and the increase in the number of game balls (MY) reaches the first boundary value of 90,000.

Therefore, if the first game stop notice has not been executed, the execution of the game stop notice will be started even when the increase in the number of game balls (MY) reaches the first boundary value by a game ball entering the first start port 10120 or the general winning port 122, etc., and a predetermined number of prize balls being paid out.

The second counting range's "second game stop notice start condition" is set to be in any of the following game states: second time-saving game state (RUSH game state), fourth time-saving game state (RUSH game state), or fifth time-saving game state (RUSH game state) when the execution flag is 1, among all jackpot game states not limited to the selected special symbol.

Therefore, if the first game stop notice has already been executed, the execution of the game stop notice will start when the game state is reached where the player can expect to acquire a predetermined game value (game balls).

On the other hand, if the first game stop notice has already been executed, the execution of the game stop notice will not be started even when the increase in the number of game balls (MY) reaches the first boundary value as a result of game balls entering the first start port 10120 or the general winning port 122, etc. and a predetermined prize ball being paid out. Therefore, even if the increase in the number of game balls (MY) reaches the first boundary value as a result of game balls entering the first start port 10120 or the general winning port 122, etc. and a predetermined prize ball being paid out, but the increase in the number of game balls (MY) falls below the first boundary value again as a result of the launch of the game balls (such as when the first counting range and the second counting range go back and forth), the execution of the game stop notice will not be started when the first game stop notice has already been executed, and the hassle of the game stop notice can be eliminated.

[12-4. Main control processing]
In the tenth pachinko gaming machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are the same as those in the first pachinko gaming machine, except for some of the main control main process, special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and system timer interrupt process. Therefore, the main control main process, special symbol control process, and normal symbol control process will be described below, and the description of the other processes executed by the main CPU 201 will be omitted.

Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, the same processing as that performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[12-4-1. Main control main processing]
Next, the main processing (main control main processing) under the control of the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 343 and Fig. 344. Fig. 343 and Fig. 344 are flow charts showing an example of the main control main processing in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether the power interruption signal bit is "0" (step S10001). If the main CPU 201 determines in step S10001 that the power interruption signal bit is "0" (if step S10001 returns a YES determination), the main CPU 201 determines that a power interruption is being detected and repeats the determination process of step S10001.

If the main CPU 201 determines in step S10001 that the power interruption signal bit is not "0" (if step S10001 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 determines that a power interruption is not being detected and proceeds to step S10002.

Next, in step S10002, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting a stack pointer for the game area. Here, for example, the stack pointer is set to the final address of the stack area (game area) + 1. Then, during subsequent processing, if the stack is used, 1 is subtracted from the stack pointer, and register values, etc. are stored at that address, and thereafter, the stack areas (game areas) are used in the same manner, from areas with larger address values to areas with smaller address values.

Next, in step S10003, an initial setting process for the built-in registers is performed. Here, for example, the initial setting of the built-in registers is performed by referring to a built-in register initial setting data table. Also, the top address (upper side) "F0"H of the working area (game area) of the main RAM 203 is set in a specific register (for example, the Q register).

Then, in step S10004, the state information (on/off state) of the backup clear switch 176 at startup and the state information of the setting key 174 inserted into the setting key socket are stored in a specified register (e.g., E register) so that these states can be checked later in the startup state check process.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a wait process (step S10005). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of waiting for the sub-control circuit 300 to start up. The start-up wait time (wait period) is approximately 12,000 msec. During this start-up wait time, the main CPU 201 checks whether an interrupt request signal (XINT) has occurred, outputs a WDT when an interrupt request signal has occurred, and outputs a magnetic sensor initialization signal at a predetermined timing. This process is performed using a timeout register. Even while interrupts are prohibited, for example, the timer counter can be controlled to be updated, and a timeout register can be used to determine with one instruction whether the timer counter has timed out, and the process can be branched, so that the process branches in a pseudo manner depending on whether a timer interrupt has occurred.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM access setting process (step S10006). In this process, the main CPU 201 sends an access permission command to the main RAM 203 to the corresponding register.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a designated area CRC inspection process (step S10007). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a CRC calculation on the game area and the outside area of the main RAM 203, and performs a CRC inspection. If the CRC inspection determines that there is an abnormality (error), a flag "1" indicating that there is a backup abnormality is set in a specified register (e.g., register B), and if the CRC inspection determines that there is no abnormality, a flag "0" indicating that there is no abnormality is set in a specified register (e.g., register B).

Note that a CRC check involves, for example, dividing the data in a specified area by a specific, predetermined value, and using the remainder as a value to check whether or not there is an abnormality. If this check value is calculated at different points in time and the values do not match, it can be determined that there has been a change in the data in the specified area (that there is an abnormality in the data's position or value).

Next, in step S10008, the main CPU 201 performs a startup status check process. In this process, the startup status is determined based on whether or not there is an abnormality in the main RAM 203 through a CRC check, the operation of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on, and whether or not power is restored during a setting change, and the clear range of the main RAM 203 (RAM clear range) is set based on the determined startup status.

If the CRC check determines that there is an abnormality (error), the start-up state is determined to be "RAM abnormal", the RAM clear range is set to the "abnormal RAM clear range", and an error process that makes it impossible to return to play is performed. In the error process that makes it impossible to return to play, the WDT clear process and the restart process are repeated in an infinite loop, and for example, the performance display monitor 170 is controlled to display the letter "E", and play is stopped. Note that the abnormal RAM clear range is set as the clear range, but it is also possible to leave the game stopped without setting this clear range (abnormal RAM clear range).

Also, if the CRC check is determined to be normal, the backup clear switch 176 is "off," and the setting key 174 is "off," the startup state is determined to be "power outage recovery," the RAM clear range is set to "RAM clear range when power outage is restored," and the process ends.

In addition, if the CRC check is determined to be normal, the backup clear switch 176 is "off," and the setting key 174 is "on," the startup state is determined to be "checking settings," the RAM clear range is set to the "RAM clear range when power is restored," and the process ends.

Also, if the CRC check is normal, the backup clear switch 176 is "on," and the setting key 174 is "on," the startup state is determined to be "settings being changed," the RAM clear range is set to "RAM clear range when setting is changed," and processing ends.

Also, if the CRC check is determined to be normal, the backup clear switch 176 is "on," and the setting key 174 is "off," the startup state is determined to be "RAM clear," the RAM clear range is set to the "RAM clear range when setting is changed," and processing ends.

Next, in step S10009, the main CPU 201 performs a designated range clear process. In this process, the main CPU 201 clears the RAM clear range that was set in step S10008 above.

If the startup state is determined to be "settings changing" and "RAM cleared," the "RAM clear range when settings are changed" will be cleared.

In addition, the "RAM clear range when changing settings" includes at least the "status flag" and "normal power operation pattern" related to information on the game status, and the "game stop function operation management phase" described below.
Therefore, when the start-up state is determined as "setting changing" and "RAM clear", the "RAM clear range when setting is changed" is cleared, so that the state flag and the normal power operation pattern are cleared and the initial "normal game state" is set. Furthermore, when the start-up state is determined as "setting changing" and "RAM clear", the "RAM clear range when setting is changed" is cleared, so that the "game stop function operation management phase" is cleared and the game stop state based on the increased number of game balls can be released. In other words, by "clearing the RAM" using the backup clear switch 176, the initial "normal game state" is set and the game stop state can be released.

The "RAM clear range when changing settings" may also include the "number of acquired game balls," "difference in number of balls counter," and "MY determination counter," which will be described later.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the start-up state is determined as "setting change in progress" and "RAM clear", a common "setting change RAM clear range" is cleared, but it may be configured so that when the start-up state is determined as "setting change in progress", the "first RAM clear range" is cleared, and when the start-up state is determined as "RAM clear", the "second RAM clear range" is cleared. Even when configured in this way, it is desirable that the "second RAM clear range" when the start-up state is determined as "RAM clear" includes at least the "status flag", "normal power operation pattern", and "game stop function operation management phase".

Next, in step S10010, the main CPU 201 sets the address of a data table for power-on initialization stored in an area outside the main RAM 203 in a specified register (e.g., the HL register), and references this register to store the data for power-on initialization in the working area.

Next, in step S10011, the main CPU 201 performs a data storage process to store the data of the power-on initialization data table in the storage target area using the address of the power-on initialization data table set in step S10010. This data storage process is similar to the data storage process (see FIG. 121) executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

Next, in step S10012, the main CPU 201 performs a setting change confirmation process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a setting update or setting change process when the setting key 174 is inserted into the setting key slot and is in the "on" state. This setting change confirmation process is similar to the setting change confirmation process (see Figures 122 and 123) executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

Next, in step S10013, the main CPU 201 performs a game recovery process. In this process, when the game machine is powered on (started up), the main CPU 201 performs an initial setting process for when power is restored after a power outage, depending on the start-up state. This game recovery process will be described in detail later.

Next, in step S10014, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt disable processing. This processing disables maskable interrupts. In this processing, the main CPU 201 executes an interrupt disable command, and as a result, the value of interrupt enable register 1 becomes "0", and the value of interrupt enable register 2 also becomes "0". In this way, when the interrupt disable command is executed (while the value of interrupt enable register 1 is "0"), maskable interrupts are disabled.

Next, in step S10015, the main CPU 201 performs a power interruption determination process. In this power interruption determination process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a power interruption has been detected (i.e., whether or not XINT has been detected), and performs a power interruption setting process if a power interruption has been detected. In the power interruption setting process, the main CPU 201 stores a power interruption detection flag in the working area (outside area area) of the main RAM 203, performs a CRC calculation on the game area and outside area of the main RAM 203, and stores the CRC calculation result (designated area CRC value) in a specified register (e.g., HL register). Thereafter, by sending a RAM access prohibition command to the specified register, access to the main RAM 203 is prohibited and the machine waits until a power interruption occurs. This power interruption setting process is similar to the power interruption setting process (see Figs. 125 and 126) executed in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment.

Next, in step S10016, the main CPU 201 performs an initial random number value update process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs an update process of the initial random number value for determining the special symbol.

After this, in step S10017, the main CPU 201 performs a performance display monitor tally division process. This process is called by an outside area process call command, and becomes outside area processing. The main CPU 201 calculates and updates various base values, and each process is performed using the main RAM 203 working area (outside area). This performance display monitor tally division process is similar to the performance display monitor tally division process (see Figures 127 and 128) executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

Next, in step S10018, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. This processing allows maskable interrupts. Here, the values of interrupt permission register 1 and interrupt permission register 2 are both set to "1."

Next, in step S10019, the main CPU 201 determines whether the system cycle time (6 msec: 3 times the interrupt cycle (2 msec)) has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value (current interrupt counter count value) stored in the interrupt counter area of the working area (game area) of the main RAM 203 minus 3 is "0". The interrupt counter value is incremented by 1 each time the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 363) described later is performed, and becomes "3" when the system cycle time has elapsed. Therefore, if the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the interrupt counter value is "0", the determination in step S10019 is "YES", and if the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the interrupt counter value is not "0", the determination in step S10019 is "NO".

If the main CPU 201 determines in step S10019 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (if step S10019 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 returns the process to step S10014 and performs the processes from step S10014 onward.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 201 determines in step S10019 that the system period has elapsed (YES in step S10019), the main CPU 201 performs a timer counter update process in step S10020. This process subtracts 1 from the value stored in the interrupt counter area (interrupt counter value) three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process (to "0").

As described above, in this embodiment, within the main control process, a 6 msec interrupt inhibition period (the processing period from step S10014 to step S10018) is provided before the various processes related to game control described below are executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the various processes related to game control described below are executed every 6 msec (every system cycle). Note that, although an example in which the interrupt inhibition period is three times the interrupt cycle has been described in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the interrupt inhibition period may be more than twice the interrupt cycle but other than three times.

Then, the main CPU 201 performs a main control command transmission/reception process (step S10021). In this process, the main CPU 201 mainly performs a command transmission/reception process for payout control. This main control command transmission/reception process is similar to the main control command transmission/reception process (see FIG. 129) executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol control processing (step S10022). In this processing, the main CPU 201 performs control processing for the special symbol game. This special symbol control processing will be described in detail later.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing (step S10023). In this processing, the main CPU 201 performs control processing for the normal symbol game. This normal symbol control processing will be described in detail later.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a game action display unit control process (step S10024). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the display data to be output to the first special symbol display LED, the second special symbol display LED, the normal symbol display LED, the hold display LED, etc.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a game information data generation process (step S10025). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs control processes for the external terminal board pulse signal, setting processes for output data, etc. After that, in step S10026, the main CPU 201 performs a test firing signal generation process. Note that the test firing signal generation process is performed using the working area (outside area area) of the main RAM 203.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing (step S10027). In this processing, the main CPU 201 sets (transfers) the output data to the output port and outputs the WDT.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a status monitoring process (step S10028). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a launch position determination process (if there is a change in the launch position, a process for reserving the transmission of a launch position command is performed), a game abnormality detection determination process (if there is an abnormality, a process for reserving the transmission of a game abnormality detection command is performed), and a payout abnormality detection determination process (if there is an abnormality, a process for reserving the transmission of a payout abnormality detection command is performed).

Then, after processing step S10028, the main CPU 201 returns the process to step S10014 and performs processing from step S10014 onwards.

As described above, in the main control main process of this embodiment, after startup, before executing the wait process (step S10005), the status information of the backup clear switch 176 and the status information of the setting key 174 are saved (step S10004). When such a process is provided, even if the setting key 174 is operated (turned on/off) in the setting key slot during the wait period, this status information can be secured at the time of power-on. Therefore, in this embodiment, the operation status of the backup clear switch 176 and the operation status of the setting key 174 at startup can be grasped more reliably, and the operation on the gaming machine can be accurately identified.

As described above, in this embodiment, a 6 msec interruption prohibited section (processing section from step S10014 to step S10018) is provided in the main control main processing before various processes related to game control (processing from step S10020 onwards), and power cut processing (step S10015), initial value random number update processing (step S10016), performance display monitor tally division processing (step S10017), etc. are performed in the interruption prohibited section. That is, in this embodiment, management processing of values that affect the ball output performance of the game and values that are tally throughout the game is performed in the interruption prohibited section. Therefore, by providing such an interruption prohibited section, game management is simplified, the processing performed by the main control circuit 200 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load on the main control circuit 200 can be reduced.

[12-4-2. Game return process]
Next, a game return process performed during the main control main process will be described with reference to Fig. 345. Fig. 345 is a flow chart showing an example of the game return process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10040, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load the startup state. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S10041.

In this embodiment, the startup state value has five state values: "RAM abnormality", "Power outage recovery", "Checking settings", "Changing settings", and "RAM clear". However, when the startup state value is "RAM abnormality", an infinite loop is repeated in the startup state check process of step S10008 above, and the process does not proceed to this process. Therefore, in this process, the startup state value is loaded with four state values: "Power outage recovery", "Checking settings", "Changing settings", and "RAM clear".

In S10041, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup state is a value indicating "power interruption recovery." If the main CPU 201 determines that the value of the startup state is a value indicating "power interruption recovery," it transfers processing to S10042, and if the main CPU 201 determines that the value of the startup state is not a value indicating "power interruption recovery," it transfers processing to S10043.

In S10042, the main CPU 201 performs a second initial value setting process. In this second initial value setting process, data stored in the backup area in the main RAM 203 is read out, and the read out data is stored in the constructed work area in the main RAM 203. The above data is, for example, various information required for progressing the game, such as game status information, the on/off state of the hit flags for special and normal symbols, and reserved number information. In other words, by restoring the data backed up at the time of power outage to the work area in the main RAM 203 again, it is possible to return to the same game status as before the power outage. After that, the play permission flag is set to on, the game is permitted, and a transmission reservation process for a "power outage recovery command" is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10046.

In S10043, the main CPU 201 determines whether the startup state value is a value indicating "settings being changed" or "settings being checked." If the main CPU 201 determines that the startup state value is a value indicating "settings being changed" or "settings being checked," it transfers processing to S10044, and if the startup state value is determined to not be a value indicating "settings being changed" or "settings being checked" (i.e., if it is determined that the value indicates RAM clearing), it transfers processing to S10045.

In S10044, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a "setting operation command." The setting operation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 363) during the system timer interrupt process. In addition, the play permission flag is set to OFF. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10046.

In S10045, the main CPU 201 performs a first initial value setting process. In this first initial value setting process, initial data is generated, and the generated initial data is stored in the respective work areas constructed in the main RAM 203. In other words, the data backed up at the time of power outage is erased, and it becomes possible to return the game state to the initialized state. After that, the play permission flag is set to ON, the game is permitted, and a process for reserving the transmission of an "initialization command" is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10046.

In S10047, the main CPU 201 performs a game stop function initial value setting process. In this game stop function initial value setting process, initial settings are made for the "game stop function activation management phase," "number of acquired game balls," "number of difference balls counter," "MY determination counter," and the like, which are stored in the out-of-area area of the main RAM 203. Details of this game stop function initial value setting process will be described in detail later. After executing the process of S10047, the main CPU 201 ends the game return process and returns the process to the main control main process.

[12-4-3. Game stop function initial value setting process]
Next, a game stop function initial value setting process performed during the game return process will be described with reference to Fig. 346. Fig. 346 is a flow chart showing an example of the game stop function initial value setting process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10047-1, the main CPU 201 performs a process to save the protected registers. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10047-2.

In S10047-2, the main CPU 201 clears the "number of acquired game balls" stored in the outside area of the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10047-3.

Here, the "number of acquired game balls" is one of the related information for stopping the game based on the increased number of game balls, and is information for temporarily storing information on the number of prize balls paid out when game balls enter various winning holes, and adding the stored number of prize balls to the "difference ball number counter."

In S10047-3, the main CPU 201 clears the "MY determination counter" stored in an area outside the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S10047-3, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10047-4.

Here, the "MY judgment counter" is one of the related information for stopping the game based on the increased number of game balls, and is information for judging the increased number of game balls. As described below, this "MY judgment counter" corresponds to the information obtained by dividing the "difference in number of balls counter" by 1000 ("difference in number of balls counter"/1000). For example, if the difference in number of balls counter is 89,000 to 89,999, the MY judgment counter = 89, and if the difference in number of balls counter is 90,000 to 90,999, the MY judgment counter = 90.

In S10047-4, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load the "game stop function activation management phase." After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S10047-5.

As described above, the "game stop function activation management phase" is one of the related information for stopping a game based on the increase in the number of game balls, is set based on the increase in the number of game balls, and is information that indicates the state of the game stop function.

In this "game stop function activation management phase", when the difference ball counter is equal to or less than 84,999 and less than the initial boundary value, "00H" is set, when the difference ball counter is equal to or greater than the initial boundary value and less than the first boundary value (first counting range), between 85,000 and 89,999, "01H" is set, and when the difference ball counter is equal to or greater than the first boundary value and less than the regulated value, between 90,000 and 94,999 (second counting range), "02H" is set.
In addition, when the difference ball number counter is equal to or greater than the regulated value (95,000 or more), "03H" is set when the game is in a small hit or big hit game state (before the game is stopped), and "04H" is set when the game is not in a small hit or big hit game state (during the game is stopped).

The initial boundary value (85,000), first boundary value (90,000), and regulation value (95,000) can be freely changed as needed. Furthermore, multiple boundary values (initial boundary value, first boundary value) may be eliminated and a single boundary value may be used. When a single boundary value is used, it is preferable to adopt the value of the first boundary value described above.

In S10047-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the "game stop function activation management phase" is 03H or greater (03H or 04H). If the main CPU 201 determines that the value of the "game stop function activation management phase" is 03H or greater, it transfers processing to S10047-6, and if it determines that the value of the "game stop function activation management phase" is not 03H or greater, it transfers processing to S10047-7.

In S10047-6, the main CPU 201 clears the "game stop function activation management phase" stored in the outer area of the main RAM 203 (i.e., sets the "game stop function activation management phase" to 01). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10047-7.

In S10047-7, the main CPU 201 clears the "difference ball number counter" stored in an area outside the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10047-8.

Here, the "difference in number of balls counter" is one of the related information for stopping the game based on the increased number of game balls, and is information for counting the increased number of game balls (MY). This "difference in number of balls counter" corresponds to the number obtained by subtracting the cumulative number of game balls fired (number of fired game balls) from the cumulative number of game balls paid out (number of paid out game balls).

In S10047-8, the main CPU 201 performs the process of restoring the protection register that was saved in S10047-1, and ends the process of setting the initial value of the game stop function.

In this way, according to the game stop function initial value setting process of this embodiment, after the power to the gaming machine is turned on (after power is restored), the "number of acquired game balls," "number of difference balls counter," and "MY judgment counter" are cleared.

Furthermore, after the power to the gaming machine is turned on (after power is restored), if the difference ball counter is less than the regulated value (94,999 or less), the "game stop function activation management phase" is cleared, and if the difference ball counter is equal to or greater than the regulated value (95,000 or more), the "game stop function activation management phase" is maintained. As a result, if the difference ball counter is equal to or greater than the regulated value (game stop function activation management phase = 03H and 04H), the game stop state will be maintained unless the backup clear switch 176 is used to "clear the RAM."

[12-4-4. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in the main control process will be described with reference to Fig. 347. Fig. 347 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 347, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S10101. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S10101, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10102.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the processing of S10101, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the working area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, etc., in a predetermined register.

In S10102, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S10101 is 0, i.e., whether the special symbol is in a state of waiting for variable display. If the main CPU 201 determines that the control number of the special symbol is not 0, it transfers processing to S10108, and if it determines that the control number of the special symbol is 0, it transfers processing to S10103.

In S10103, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not start information for the second special pattern is stored in the second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203, i.e., whether or not there is a reserved number of second special patterns. If the main CPU 201 determines that start information for the second special pattern is not stored, it transfers processing to S10104, and if it determines that start information for the second special pattern is stored, it transfers processing to S10105.

In S10104, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information for the first special pattern is stored in the first special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203, i.e., whether or not there is a reserved number of the first special pattern. If the main CPU 201 determines that the start information for the first special pattern is not stored, it transfers the process to S10107, and if it determines that the start information for the first special pattern is stored, it transfers the process to S10106.

In S10105, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the second special pattern stored in the second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203 to the special pattern determination memory area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the start information stored in the second special pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special pattern determination memory area (0), and the start information stored in the second special pattern start memory area (2) is shifted to the second special pattern start memory area (1).

In S10106, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the first special pattern stored in the first special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203 to the special pattern determination memory area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the start information stored in the first special pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special pattern determination memory area (0), and the start information stored in the first special pattern start memory area (2) to the first special pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the first special pattern start memory area (1) to the first special pattern start memory area (3).

In S10107, if the special symbol start information (number of reserved first and second special symbols) has not been stored in the first and second special symbol start memory areas of the main RAM 203 for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 363) during the next system timer interrupt process. When the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demo display command, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demo display performance.

In S10108, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 348. After executing the processing of S10103, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S10101 to S10108) within the interrupt prohibited section.

In this manner, in this embodiment, as the tenth pachinko gaming machine, a priority variable machine in which the special pattern management process is executed with a higher priority than the first special pattern when the start information of the second special pattern is stored has been described, but this is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special pattern is stored, the priority variable machine may be one in which the special pattern management process is executed with a higher priority than the second special pattern, or a sequential variable machine in which the special pattern management process is executed in the order of winning (ball entry order) into the first start port 11120 or the second start port 10140.

[12-4-5. Special design management process]
Next, a special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol control process (see Fig. 347) will be described with reference to Fig. 348. Fig. 348 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

The numbers ("0" to "7") written in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 348 are the control state numbers of the special symbols that are the subject of the process. The main CPU 201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process that corresponds to the control state number.

In S10111, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the special pattern (special pattern timer counter) is 0. This waiting time for the special pattern is set as the waiting time for various processes in the special pattern management process, and is decremented as the special pattern timer counter within the system timer interrupt process that is performed at 2 msec intervals, for example. If the main CPU 201 determines that the waiting time for the special pattern is not 0, it ends the special pattern management process and returns the process to the special pattern control process (see FIG. 347), and if it determines that the waiting time for the special pattern is 0, it moves the process to S10112.

In S10112, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S10112, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10113. The main CPU 201 performs the process from S10113 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S10112.

In S10113, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This S10113 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 349. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S10114.

In S10114, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This S10114 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 350. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S10115.

In S10115, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This S10115 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 354. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10116.

In S10116, the main CPU 201 performs small win game closure processing. This S10116 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this small win game closure processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 356. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S10117.

In S10117, the main CPU 201 performs processing during the opening of the small win game. This processing of S10117 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this processing during the opening of the small win game will be described later with reference to FIG. 357. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S10118.

In S10118, the main CPU 201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process of S10118 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 358. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10119.

In S10119, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening control process. This S10119 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 359. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10120.

In S10120, the main CPU 201 performs a process to end the jackpot game state. This process of S10120 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this process to end the jackpot game state will be described later with reference to FIG. 360.

After completing steps S10113 to S10120, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 347). In this case, the process returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

[12-4-6. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 348) will be described with reference to Fig. 349. Fig. 349 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10121, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", it ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 348), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "0", it transfers the process to S10122.

In S10122, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol hit determination process to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, a time-saving hit, or a miss. In this special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 330 is referenced, and a hit determination of the special symbol is made based on the random number value for big hit determination of the special symbol as the starting information of the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination memory area (0), and a hit/lose determination value data is determined according to the determination result. After executing the process of S10122, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10123.

In S10123, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol. In this special symbol determination process, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 331 is referenced, and the selected symbol and symbol designation command for the special symbol are determined based on the hit/loss determination value data as the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process in S10122 and the special symbol random number value as the start information of the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination memory area (0). After executing the process of S10123, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10124.

As mentioned above, if the time-saving play state is controlled to ignore the "time-saving hit", even if a "time-saving hit" is determined in the time-saving play state, the selected symbol and symbol designation command for the special symbol that will result in a losing stop state can be determined.

In S10124, the main CPU 201 performs a win type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of win when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a big win or a small win. In this win type determination process, if the special symbol win determination process is a big win, the big win type determination table shown in FIG. 332 is determined, and if the special symbol win determination process is a small win, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 333 is determined. In addition, when setting the game state etc. based on the game state at the time of winning after the end of the big win game state, the game state data at the time of winning indicating the game state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a big win or a small win is set in the game state storage area at the time of winning of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S10124, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10125.

In S10125, the main CPU 201 performs a special pattern change pattern determination process to determine the change pattern of the special pattern. In this special pattern change pattern determination process, a special pattern change pattern table of either FIG. 335 or FIG. 336 is determined depending on the game status, etc., and the determined special pattern change pattern table is referenced to determine the change pattern of the special pattern and a special pattern change pattern command based on the type of special pattern, the result of the special pattern hit determination process (win or lose), and the selected special pattern, etc. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10126.

In the special symbol variation pattern determination process of this embodiment, when the game is in a normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table T shown in Fig. 335 (a) is determined by referring to the state flag and the normal power operation pattern. Then, the special symbol variation pattern table T thus determined is referred to, and the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variation pattern command are determined based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol win determination process (win or lose), the selected special symbol, the reach determination random number value, and the performance selection random number value.
Also, when the state flag and the normal power operation pattern are referenced and it is in a normal game state (first time-saving game state, third time-saving game state, sixth time-saving game state), the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in Fig. 335(b) is determined. Then, the special symbol variation pattern table J1 thus determined is referenced and the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variation pattern command are determined based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol win determination process (win or lose), the selected special symbol, the reach determination random number value, and the performance selection random number value.
Also, by referring to the state flag and the normal power operation pattern, if the second time-saving game state or the fourth time-saving game state is selected, the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in Fig. 336(a) is determined, and if the fifth time-saving game state is selected, the special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in Fig. 336(b) is determined. Then, by referring to the determined special symbol variation pattern tables J2 and J3, the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variation pattern command are determined based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or lose), and the selected symbol of the special symbol.

In S10126, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display time setting process to set the variable display time of the special symbol. In this special symbol variable display time setting process, the special symbol variable display time setting process refers to the special symbol variable pattern table determined in the special symbol variable pattern determination process in S10125 above, and determines the variable display time of the special symbol based on the determined special symbol variable pattern. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 sets the determined variable display time of the special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and causes the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 to start variable display of the special symbol. After executing the process of S10126, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10127.

In S10127, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1", after the special symbol variable display start process ends, a special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 348) is performed. After executing the process of S10127, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10128.

In S10128, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, confirmation and update processes of parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203 are performed. Then, a process of reserving transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state is performed. Note that the game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 363) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S10128, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10129.

In S10129, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for the special symbol effect start command. In this process, the transmission reservation process for the "symbol designation command" and the "special symbol variation pattern command" is performed as the special symbol effect start command. In the pattern designation command transmission reservation process, the symbol designation command determined in S10123 is transmitted. In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation process, the special symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined in S10125 is transmitted so that the type of special symbol can be identified. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 363) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process within the interrupt prohibited section.

[13-4-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 348) will be described with reference to Fig. 350. Fig. 350 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10141, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1," it ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 348), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "1," it transfers the process to S10142.

In S10142, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination time setting process to set the symbol determination time for the special symbol. In this special symbol determination time setting process, the special symbol determination time (e.g., 540 ms) is determined based on the game state and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or lose). The main CPU 201 then sets the determined special symbol determination time to the special symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and causes the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 to display the special symbol in a stopped state. After executing the process of S10142, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10143.

The time it takes for the special symbol to be determined may be determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, or based only on the game state. Furthermore, a single predetermined symbol determination time (e.g., 540 ms) may be determined.

In S10143, the main CPU 201 performs time-saving management processing. In this time-saving management processing, when the variable display of the special pattern ends, a determination is made as to whether the time-saving game state has ended, or whether to transition to time-saving game state B or time-saving game state C. Details of this time-saving management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 351. After executing the processing of S10143, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S10144.

In S10144, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", after the special symbol variable display end process is completed, the special symbol game determination process (see S10115 in FIG. 348) is performed. After executing the process of S10144, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10145.

In S10145, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. This special symbol effect stop command is composed of a first special symbol effect stop command corresponding to the first special symbol and a second special symbol effect stop command corresponding to the second special symbol. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 363) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S10145, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 348).

[12-4-8. Time-saving management process]
Next, a time-saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display ending process will be described with reference to Fig. 351. Fig. 351 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving management process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

At S10151, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol time-saving counter decrement process to decrement the special symbol time-saving counter.

Here, in this embodiment, the "time-saving counter" in the main RAM 203 is composed of a "special pattern time-saving counter" that corresponds to the number of times the special pattern, which is the time-saving end condition, is displayed in a variable manner. This "special pattern time-saving counter" is decremented each time the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern ends.

In this special symbol time-saving counter subtraction process, if the time-saving game state is reached by referring to the state flag, the special symbol time-saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 from it. Note that if the game state is reached in normal play, the special symbol time-saving counter is not subtracted. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10152.

In S10152, the main CPU 201 refers to the state flag to determine whether or not the game is in a time-saving game state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is in a time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S10153, and if it determines that the game is not in a time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S10154.

In S10153, the main CPU 201 determines whether the special symbol time-saving counter is equal to 0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol time-saving counter is equal to 0, the process proceeds to S10154. If the main CPU 201 determines that the time-saving counter is not equal to 0, the process proceeds to S10155.

In S10154, the main CPU 201 clears the time-saving information. Here, the time-saving information includes clearing (setting to 0) the special symbol time-saving counter, the status flag, and the normal power operation pattern. Therefore, when the time-saving information is cleared, the game transitions to the normal game state. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10155.

In S10155, the main CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether to transition to the B time-saving gaming state.
In this B time-shortened game state transition judgment process, a "ceiling counter" for counting the number of times the special symbol is displayed to transition to the B time-shortened game state is incremented, and when the ceiling counter reaches a ceiling value, transition control to the B time-shortened game state is performed. Details of this B time-shortened game state transition judgment process will be described later with reference to FIG. 352. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S10156.

In S10156, the main CPU 201 performs a C time-shortened gaming state transition determination process.
In this C time-saving game state transition judgment process, it is judged whether or not the time-saving win has occurred, and if the time-saving win has occurred, transition control to the C time-saving game state is performed based on the selected special symbol (time-saving symbol). Details of this C time-saving game state transition judgment process will be described later with reference to FIG. 353. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10158.

In S10157, the main CPU 201 refers to the state flag, and when the state flag indicating the A time-saving game state is 1, it performs the A time-saving game state transition judgment process. In this A time-saving game state transition judgment process, when the A time-saving game state is in and the variable display of the second special symbol has ended, the switching count counter that stores the switching count is updated by subtracting 1. Then, when the switching count counter = 0, the normal power operation pattern = 00 is set. As a result, when in the A time-saving game state, it is possible to transition from the fifth time-saving game state to the sixth time-saving game state, and it is possible to change from the right-hand play mode to the left-hand play mode. Therefore, the switching count is also the number of times that the left hand is returned to due to the variable display count of the second special symbol. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10158.

In S10158, the game status is confirmed by referring to the status flag and the normal power operation pattern, and a game status designation command indicating the current game status is determined. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10159.

In this embodiment, when the status flag is 1, the 0th game state designation command indicating the normal game state is determined. When the status flag is 3 and the normal power operation pattern is 00, the first game state designation command indicating the first time-saving game state is determined. When the status flag is 3 and the normal power operation pattern is 02, the second game state designation command indicating the second time-saving game state is determined. When the status flag is 3 and the normal power operation pattern is 01, the third game state designation command indicating the third time-saving game state is determined. When the status flag is 2, the fourth game state designation command indicating the fourth time-saving game state is determined. When the status flag is 1 and the normal power operation pattern is 02, the fifth game state designation command indicating the fifth time-saving game state is determined. When the status flag is 1 and the normal power operation pattern is 00, the sixth game state designation command indicating the sixth time-saving game state is determined.

In S10159, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation command transmission reservation process, which sets the game state designation command determined in S10158 above in the transmission buffer. The game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 363) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after this process, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving management process and returns the process to the special pattern variable display end process.

[12-4-9. B time-saving gaming state transition determination process]
Next, a description will be given of a B time-shortened gaming state transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the time-shortened management process with reference to Fig. 352. Fig. 352 is a flow chart showing an example of a B time-shortened gaming state transition determination process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10155-1, the main CPU 201 performs a ceiling counter update process that increments the ceiling counter. In this ceiling counter update process, the ceiling counter is updated by incrementing it by 1. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10155-2.

In S10155-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling counter is equal to the ceiling value (for example, 950 times). If the main CPU 201 determines that the ceiling counter is equal to the ceiling value, it transfers the process to S10155-3, and if it determines that the ceiling counter is not equal to the ceiling value, it ends the B time-saving game state transition determination process and returns the process to the time-saving management process.

In S10155-3, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter (sets it to 0). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10155-4.

In S10155-4, the main CPU 201 performs a B time-saving game state setting process to transition to the B time-saving game state. In this B time-saving game state setting process, the game state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. 334(c) is referenced, the state flag indicating the B time-saving game state is set to 2, the normal power operation pattern is set to 02, and the number of time-saving times (e.g., 950 times) is set in the "special pattern time-saving counter" as the "B time-saving end condition." Note that in the B time-saving game state setting process, the normal power operation pattern may be set to 01 or 00. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the B time-saving game state transition determination process and returns the process to the time-saving management process.

[12-4-10. C Time-saving gaming state transition judgment process]
Next, a C time-shortened gaming state transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the time-shortened management process will be described with reference to Fig. 353. Fig. 353 is a flow chart showing an example of a C time-shortened gaming state transition determination process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10156-1, the main CPU 201 refers to the state flag to determine whether or not the game is in a normal game state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is in a normal game state, it transfers processing to S10156-2, and if it determines that the game is not in a normal game state, it ends the C time-saving game state transition determination processing and returns processing to the time-saving management processing.

In S10156-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a time-saving hit has occurred. If the main CPU 201 determines that a time-saving hit has occurred, it transfers processing to S10156-3, and if it determines that a time-saving hit has not occurred, it ends the C time-saving game state transition determination processing and returns processing to the time-saving management processing.

In S10156-3, the main CPU 201 performs a C time-saving game state setting process to transition to the C time-saving game state. In this C time-saving game state setting process, the game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 334(b) is referenced, and based on the selected symbol (time-saving symbol) of the special symbol, the state flag is set to 3, and the number of time-saving times (e.g., 950 times) is set in the "special symbol time-saving counter" as the normal power operation pattern and the "C time-saving end condition." After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving game state transition determination process, and returns the process to the time-saving management process.

In this way, in this embodiment, transition to the C time-saving game state is possible only when a time-saving hit is determined in the normal game state. However, it may be configured so that transition to the C time-saving game state is possible when a time-saving hit is determined regardless of the game state.

[12-4-11. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process will be described with reference to Fig. 354. Fig. 354 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10161, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process, and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "2", it transfers the process to S10162.

In S10162, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbol and determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is the selected special symbol corresponding to a jackpot. If the main CPU 201 determines that a jackpot has been reached, it transfers processing to S10163, and if it determines that a jackpot has not been reached, it transfers processing to S10172.

In S10163, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a jackpot. In this external signal processing for a jackpot, the selected special symbol is referenced, and a "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is generated as an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 during a jackpot gaming state. The generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is then output to the external terminal board 184. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10164.

In S10164, the main CPU 201 performs the first route jackpot start preparation setting process. In this first route jackpot start preparation setting process, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 332 is referenced to determine the maximum number of rounds based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot, and the determined maximum number of rounds is set as the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds in the main RAM 203. Furthermore, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 332 is referenced to determine the OP waiting time (opening time) based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot, and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10165.

In S10165, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot status display process. In this jackpot status display process, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right hit instruction data that notifies the player to hit to the right is set. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10166.

In S10166, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In the game status management processing when it is determined that a jackpot has been hit, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the status flag, the normal power operation pattern, and the number of time-saving times. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S10167.

In S10167, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10168.

In S10168, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the process of preparing to open the large prize opening, which will be described later, will be performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. After performing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10169.

In S10169, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot start display command. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

In S10172, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbol and determines whether or not it is a small win, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is the selected special symbol corresponding to a small win. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is a small win, it transfers processing to S10173, and if it determines that it is not a small win (i.e., a miss), it transfers processing to S10181.

In S10173, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a small win. In this external signal processing for a small win, the selected special symbol is referenced, and a "small win signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is generated as an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 during a small win gaming state. The generated small win signal is then output to the external terminal board 184. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10174.

In S10174, the main CPU 201 performs a small win start preparation setting process. In this small win start preparation setting process, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 333 is referenced, the maximum number of openings is determined based on the "selected special symbol", and the determined maximum number of openings is set as the upper limit of the number of small win openings in the main RAM 203. Next, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 333 is referenced, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "selected special symbol", and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is set as the waiting time for the special symbol in the main RAM 203.

Furthermore, in the small win start preparation setting process, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 333 is referenced, and the opening waiting time is determined as the opening pattern of the V winning hole 10156 based on the "selected special pattern", and the determined opening waiting time is set in the V winning hole closing timer counter in the main RAM 203, and the V operation flag is turned on. Note that the V winning control process for the V shutter solenoid 11160 that opens and closes the V winning hole 10156 is performed in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 363) described later. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10175.

In S10175, the main CPU 201 performs a small win status display process. In this small win status display process, right hit instruction data is set to notify the player that a right hit is to be performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10177.

In S10177, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10178.

In S10178, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the small win game closure process described below will be performed after the special symbol game determination process ends. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10179.

In S10179, the main CPU 201 processes the transmission reservation process for the small win start display command. After executing the process of S10169, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

In S10181, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 355. Note that, after performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing.

[12-4-12. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol game determination process will be described with reference to Fig. 355. Fig. 355 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game ending process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10191, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10192.

In S10192, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. In addition, in the game state designation parameter setting process in the special pattern game end process, the start information stored in the special pattern determination memory area (0) in the main RAM 203 is cleared. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10193.

In S10193, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 363) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process.

[12-4-13. Processing during small win game closure]
Next, a small win game closing process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process will be described with reference to Fig. 356. Fig. 356 is a flow chart showing an example of a small win game closing process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10201, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", it ends the small win game closure process and returns the process to the special symbol management process, and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "3", it transfers the process to S10202.

In S10202, the main CPU 201 loads the "small win opening count counter value." The "small win opening count counter" is a counter that counts the number of small win openings. The count value of the small win opening count counter (small win opening count counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to SS10203.

In S10203, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded small win opening counter value is the upper limit of the small win opening count. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is the upper limit of the small win opening count, it transfers processing to S10209, and if it determines that it is not the upper limit of the small win opening count, it transfers processing to S10204.

In S10204, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls entering the second large winning port 10151 in the small win game state (the number of winnings in the second large winning port 10151) is the maximum number of winnings. In this process, it is determined whether the value of the second large winning port counter counted by the second large winning port count switch 10152 is the predetermined maximum number of winnings for the second large winning port 10151 (for example, 10). If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of winnings in the second large winning port 10151 is not the maximum number of winnings, it transfers the process to S10205, and if it determines that the number of winnings in the second large winning port 10151 is the maximum number of winnings, it transfers the process to S10209.

In S10205, the main CPU 201 performs a process to add 1 to the small win opening count counter value. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10206.

In S10206, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening setting process to open the second large prize opening 10151. In this second large prize opening setting process, the small prize type determination table shown in FIG. 333 determined in S10124 is referenced, and the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 10151 is determined based on the "selected special pattern" of the small prize and the current opening count (small prize opening count counter value), and the determined maximum opening time is set as the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. Then, second large prize opening opening control data for opening the second large prize opening 10151 is generated for the second special electric solenoid 10155. This causes the second large prize opening 10151 to open. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10207.

In S10207, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4", the small win game open process described below will be performed after the small win game closed process ends. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10208.

In S10208, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. The main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of confirming and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the small win game closure process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

In S10209, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a V winning has been detected. In this process, it determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the V winning port 10156 within a specified time (i.e., whether or not there has been detection by the V winning port switch 10157). If the main CPU 201 determines that a V winning has been detected, it transfers the process to S10210, and if it determines that a V winning has not been detected, it transfers the process to S10218.

In S10210, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a jackpot from the second route. In this processing, the selected special symbol is referenced, and a "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is generated as an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 in the event of a jackpot. The generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is then output to the external terminal board 184. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to SS10211.

In S10211, the main CPU 201 performs a second route jackpot start preparation setting process. In this second route jackpot start preparation setting process, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 332 is referenced to determine the maximum number of rounds based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot, and the determined maximum number of rounds is set as the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds in the main RAM 203. Furthermore, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 332 is referenced to determine the OP waiting time (opening time) based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot, and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10212.

In S10212, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the jackpot game state from the second route starts from the second round of round play. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10213.

In S10213, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot status display process. In this jackpot status display process, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right hit instruction data that notifies the player to hit to the right is set. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10214.

In S10214, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In the game status management processing when it is determined that a jackpot has been reached, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the status flag, the normal power operation pattern, and the time-saving count counter. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S10215.

In S10215, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10216.

In S10216, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the process of preparing to open the large prize opening will be performed after the small prize game closure process ends. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10217.

In S10217, the main CPU 201 performs processing to reserve the transmission of a V hit start display command. After executing the processing of S10197, the main CPU 201 ends the processing during the small hit game opening and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing.

In S10218, the main CPU 201 performs a small win end preparation setting process. In this small win end preparation setting process, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 333 is referenced, and the ED waiting time (ending time) is determined based on the "selected special pattern" of the small win, and the determined ED waiting time (ending time) is set as the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10219.

In S10219, the main CPU 201 performs a process to reserve the transmission of a small win end display command. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10220.

In S10220, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 355 is performed. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 ends the small win game closure processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing.

[12-4-14. Processing during small win game opening]
Next, a small win game open process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process will be described with reference to Fig. 357. Fig. 357 is a flow chart showing an example of a small win game open process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10221, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", it ends the small win game open processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing, and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "4", it transfers the processing to S10222.

In S10222, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the second large winning opening 10151 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the second large winning opening opening setting process (see FIG. 356) has elapsed. If the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second large winning opening 10151 has not elapsed, it ends the small win game opening process and returns the process to the special pattern management process. Also, if the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second large winning opening 10151 has elapsed, it transfers the process to S10223.

In S10223, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening closure setting process to close the second large prize opening 10151. In this second large prize opening closure setting process, the small prize type determination table shown in FIG. 333 is referenced, and the current closure time of the second large prize opening 10151 is determined based on the "selected special pattern" of the small prize and the current number of openings (small prize opening count counter value), and the determined closure time is set as the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. Then, second large prize opening closure control data for closing the second large prize opening 10151 is generated for the second special electric solenoid 10155. This closes the second large prize opening 10151. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10224.

In S10224, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the above-mentioned small win game closed process is performed after the small win game open process ends. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the small win game open process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

[12-4-15. Preparation for opening the large prize hole]
Next, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process will be described with reference to Fig. 358. Fig. 358 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10231, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5," it ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process, and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "5," it transfers the process to S10232.

In S10232, the main CPU 201 loads the "round counter value." The "round counter" is a counter that counts the number of rounds played in the jackpot game state. The count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10233.

In S10233, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded round counter value is the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds. If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of jackpot rounds is the upper limit, it transfers processing to S10234, and if it determines that the number of jackpot rounds is not the upper limit, it transfers processing to S10238.

In S10234, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end preparation setting process. In this jackpot end preparation setting process, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 332 is referenced, and the ED waiting time (ending time) is determined based on the "selected special pattern" of the jackpot, and the determined ED waiting time (ending time) is set as the waiting time for the special pattern in the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10235.

In S10235, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7", the jackpot game state end process, which will be described later, will be performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10236.

In S10236, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10237.

In S10237, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command. The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 363) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

In S10238, the main CPU 201 performs processing to add 1 to the round counter value. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S10239.

In S10239, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening setting process to open the first large prize opening 10131. In this first large prize opening setting process, the main CPU 201 refers to the big win type determination table shown in FIG. 332, and determines the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 10131 in this round based on the "selected special pattern" of the big win and the current round number (round counter value), and sets the determined maximum opening time to the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. Then, it generates first large prize opening opening control data for the first special power solenoid 10135 to open the first large prize opening 10131. This opens the first large prize opening 10131. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10240.

In S10240, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6", the large prize opening opening control process is performed after the large prize opening opening preparation process is completed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10241.

In S10241, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10242.

In S10242, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 363) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

[12-4-16. Big prize opening control process]
Next, a special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process will be described with reference to Fig. 359. Fig. 359 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10251, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6," it ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process, and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "6," it transfers the process to S10252.

In S10252, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of winning balls that entered the first large prize opening 10131 in one round when the first large prize opening 10131 was opened is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value of the first large prize opening counter counted by the first large prize opening count switch 10132 is the predetermined maximum number of winning balls for the first large prize opening 10131 (e.g., 10 balls).

If the main CPU 201 determines in S10252 that the number of winnings at the first large winning slot 10131 is not the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to S10253, and if it determines that the number of winnings at the first large winning slot 10131 is the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to S10254.

In S10253, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 10131 in one round has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the opening setting process for the first large prize opening (see FIG. 358) has elapsed.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S10133 that the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 10131 has not elapsed, it ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process. If the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 10131 has elapsed, it transfers the process to S10254.

In S10254, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening closure setting process to close the first large prize opening 10131. In this first large prize opening closure setting process, the main CPU 201 refers to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 332, and determines the closure time of the first large prize opening 10131 in this round based on the jackpot "special symbol selection pattern" and the current round number (round counter value), and sets the determined closure time to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Then, the first large prize opening closure control data for closing the first large prize opening 10131 is generated for the first special power solenoid 10135. This causes the first large prize opening 10131 to close. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10255.

In S10255, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the large prize opening preparation process will be performed again after the large prize opening control process is completed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10256.

At S10256, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10257.

At S10257, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 363) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 then ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

[13-4-17. Big win game state end process]
Next, a big win gaming state ending process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process will be described with reference to Fig. 360. Fig. 360 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win gaming state ending process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10261, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7," it ends the jackpot game state end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process, and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "7," it transfers the process to S10262.

In S10262, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot game information initialization process. In this jackpot game information initialization process, various flags and data used in the jackpot game state and the values of various counters (e.g., round counter, big prize slot winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10263.

In S10263, the main CPU 201 performs a post-jackpot state setting process to set the game state after the end of the jackpot game state. In this post-jackpot state setting process, the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 334(a) is referenced, and a state flag, a normal power operation pattern, and a "special symbol time-saving counter" corresponding to the variable display number of the special symbol as the number of time-saving times are set based on the selected special symbol. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10264.

In this embodiment, the state flag is set to 1, which indicates the A time-saving gaming state.
In addition, when the selected special symbol is "z1", the normal power operation pattern is set to 02, the special symbol time-saving counter is set to 10000, and the switching count counter is set to 1.
In addition, when the selected special symbol is "z2" or "z3", the normal power operation pattern is set to 00 and the special symbol time-saving counter is set to 10000.
In addition, when the selected special symbols are "z4" or "z5", the normal power operation pattern is set to 02, the special symbol time-saving counter is set to 10000, and the switching count counter is set to 5.
In addition, when the selected special symbol is "z6" or "z7", the normal power operation pattern is set to 00 and the special symbol time-saving counter is set to 10000.

In S10264, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 355 is performed. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot game state end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing.

[12-4-18. Normal symbol control process]
Next, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in the main control main process will be described with reference to Fig. 361. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in Fig. 361, the main CPU 201 stores the start information of the normal symbol and judges whether the judgment start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

Figure 361 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol control process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the numbers ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in Figure 361 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

In S10300, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the normal pattern is 0. This waiting time for the normal pattern is set as the waiting time for various processes in the normal pattern control process, and is decremented as a normal pattern timer counter in the system timer interrupt process that is performed, for example, at 2 msec intervals. If the main CPU 201 determines that the waiting time for the normal pattern is not 0, it ends the normal pattern control process and returns the process to the main control main process, and if it determines that the waiting time for the normal pattern is 0, it moves the process to S10301.

In S10301, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10310. The main CPU 201 performs the process from S10310 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S10201.

In S10310, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This S10210 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". In this normal symbol variable display start processing, a normal symbol winning judgment process, a normal symbol determination process, a second start port opening pattern determination process, a normal symbol variation pattern determination process, etc. are performed, but details will be described later with reference to FIG. 362. Note that if the normal symbol control state number is not "0", the main CPU 201 executes this process and then moves the processing to S10220.

In S10320, the main CPU 201 performs a process to end the variable display of normal symbols. This process of S10220 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 executes this process and then transfers the process to S10230.

In this normal symbol variable display end process, the main CPU 201 judges whether the normal symbol variable display time has ended, and when it judges that the normal symbol variable display time has ended, it sets the normal symbol's predetermined symbol determination time (e.g., 540 msec) to the normal symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and sets the normal symbol control state number to "2". If the normal symbol variable display time has not ended, it holds the normal symbol control state number at "1" and waits for the normal symbol variable display time to end.

In S10330, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol game play determination process. This S10330 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 executes this process and then transfers the process to S10340.

In this normal symbol game judgment process, the main CPU 201 performs a judgment process of the selected pattern of the stopped normal symbol (for example, normal symbol winning or normal symbol losing). If the main CPU 201 judges that the selected pattern of the stopped normal symbol corresponds to a normal symbol winning, it sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "3", and if it judges that the result of the normal symbol winning judgment process corresponds to a losing, it sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "0".

In S10340, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric role release process. This S10340 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 executes this process and then moves to S10350.

In this normal electric device opening process, the main CPU 201 refers to the second start hole opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 340, and operates the normal power shutter 10147 to open and close the second start hole 10140 according to the operation of the second start hole opening pattern determined in the second start hole opening pattern determination process (see FIG. 362) described later. Then, when a specified number of game balls for normal power (e.g., three balls) enter the second start hole 10140 or all the operations of the determined second start hole opening pattern are completed, the second start hole 10140 is closed, the control state number of the normal pattern is set to "4", and the normal electric device opening process is terminated.

In S10350, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol hit end process. This S10350 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". In this normal symbol hit end process, various data set in the normal electric role release process in S10340 above is cleared. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 returns the process to the main control main process.

[12-4-19. Normal symbol variable display start process]
Next, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the normal symbol control process will be described with reference to Fig. 362. Fig. 362 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal symbol variable display start process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 362, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the normal pattern is "0" (S10211).

If it is determined in S10311 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10312.

In S10312, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the start information of the normal pattern. In this process, the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (2) to the normal pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (3). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10313.

In S10313, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol winning judgment process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 338, and determines the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal symbol ("normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol losing") based on the normal symbol winning judgment random number value stored in the normal symbol judgment area (0). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10314.

In S10314, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 339, and determines the "selected normal symbol" based on the winning/losing determination value data (the result of the normal symbol winning/losing determination process) and the normal symbol random number value stored in the normal symbol determination area (0). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10315.

In S10315, the main CPU 201 performs processing to determine the opening pattern of the second starting hole. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S10316.

In the process of determining the opening pattern of the second start hole, the main CPU 201 refers to the opening pattern determination table of the second start hole shown in FIG. 340, and when it is determined that a normal pattern has been hit, it determines the opening pattern of the second start hole based on the game state (state flag and normal power operation pattern) and the selected normal pattern.

In S10316, the main CPU 201 performs a process for determining the normal symbol variation pattern. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 341, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern based on the game state, the selected normal symbol, and the normal symbol performance random number value. The main CPU 201 then refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 341, and determines the normal symbol variation display time based on the determined normal symbol variation pattern. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10317.

In S10317, the main CPU 201 performs a process for setting the variable display time of the normal pattern. In this process, the variable display time of the normal pattern determined in the above-mentioned process for determining the variable pattern of the normal pattern is set to the waiting time of the normal pattern in the main RAM 203, and the normal pattern display unit 161 is caused to start displaying the variable display of the normal pattern. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10318.

In S10318, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after this normal symbol variable display start process ends, a normal symbol variable display end process (Fig. 361) is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10319.

In S10319, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a normal symbol variable pattern command. The normal symbol variable pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 363) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process.

[12-4-20. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 363, the system timer interrupt process will be described. This process is called based on the entry address (program address) of the PTC2 timeout interrupt defined in the setting area corresponding to the timeout interrupt input from the timer counter (PTC2) when the timeout interrupt input occurs, and is executed, for example, at a period (interrupt period) of 2 msec. Fig. 363 is a flow chart showing an example of the system timer interrupt process in the tenth pachinko game machine.

In S10411, the main CPU 201 performs a process of saving a protected register (e.g., an AF register). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10412.

In S10412, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off. If the main CPU 201 determines that the XINT detection flag is not off (i.e., a power interruption has been detected), it transfers processing to S10470, and if the main CPU 201 determines that the XINT detection flag is off (i.e., a power interruption has not been detected), it transfers processing to S10413.

In S10413, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S10414.

In S10414, the main CPU 201 performs processing to read the state of the input port of the I/O port 205. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S10415.

In S10415, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted to play. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted to play based on the game permission flag. The game permission flag indicates a game permitted state when it is on (=1), and indicates a game not permitted state when it is off (=0). The game permission flag is a start-up state when the power is turned on. When the power is restored after a power outage and the RAM is cleared, the game permission flag is set to on (=play permitted state), and when the settings are being changed or checked, the game permission flag is set to off (=play not permitted state). If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is permitted to play, it transfers the process to S10416, and if it determines that the game is not permitted to play, it transfers the process to S10440.

In S10415, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is not stopped. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is not stopped based on the game stop state flag.

Here, the "game stop state flag" is information that indicates whether or not the game is stopped based on the increased number of game balls. When the game stop state flag is on (=1), it indicates a "game stop state," and when the game stop state flag is off (=0), it indicates a "game progress state." As will be described in more detail later, the game stop state flag is turned on when the game stop function activation management phase is 04H.

If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is not stopped, it transfers processing to S10417, and if it determines that the game is stopped, it transfers processing to S10450.

In S10417, the main CPU 201 executes a process to increment the value of the interrupt counter by 1. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) the number of interrupt-prohibited intervals during the main control main process, and the count value of the interrupt counter is stored in an interrupt counter area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10418.

In S10418, the main CPU 201 performs an update process for the interrupt cycle timer. In the update process for the interrupt cycle timer, various timer counters in the working area of the main RAM 203, such as the special pattern timer counter, the normal pattern timer counter, the V prize opening timer counter, and the V prize opening timer counter, are decremented. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10419.

In S10419, the main CPU 201 performs a random number update process. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a jackpot of a random value for determining a jackpot, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are an important factor in determining the number of balls dispensed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10420.

In S10420, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. Details of this switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 367. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S10430.

At S10430, the main CPU 201 performs a game LED lighting data output process. This game LED lighting data output process controls the output of LED data to light up the LEDs of the normal symbol display unit 161, the normal symbol reserved display unit 162, the first special symbol display unit 163, the second special symbol display unit 164, the first special symbol reserved display unit 165, the second special symbol reserved display unit 166, and the time-saving notification display unit 168 in accordance with the game status, etc. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10431.

In S10431, when the V operation flag is on, the main CPU 201 performs a V winning control process to open and close the V winning port 10156. In this V winning control process, when the V operation flag is on and the opening waiting time has elapsed (V winning port closing timer counter = 0), the opening time is determined as the opening pattern of the V winning port 10156 based on the "selected special pattern", and the determined opening time is set in the V winning port opening timer counter in the main RAM 203, and V winning port opening control data for opening the V winning port 10156 is output to the V shutter solenoid 10160. The V winning port opening control data is continuously output unless the V winning port opening timer counter is 0. Then, when the V operation flag is on and the V winning port opening control data is being output, if the opening time has elapsed (V winning port opening timer counter = 0), the output of the V winning port opening control data is stopped and the V operation flag is turned off. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S10451.

In S10440, the main CPU 201 performs setting control processing. In this setting control processing, settings are changed or settings are confirmed. This setting control processing is similar to the setting control processing executed in the first gaming machine (see Figures 46 to 48). After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S10431.

At S10450, the main CPU 201 performs a game stop function setting process. In this game stop function setting process, various commands related to the function of stopping the game based on the increased number of game balls and the setting of a game stop state flag are performed. The game stop function setting process will be described in detail later. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10430.

In S10451, the main CPU 201 performs a performance control command transmission process. In this process, the command that is scheduled for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10452.

At S10452, the main CPU 201 performs a performance display monitor control process. The performance display monitor control process is performed using the working area (outside area) of the main RAM 203. In this performance display monitor control process, game play determination process, prize ball addition determination process, display content update process of the performance display monitor 170, etc. are performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10435.

At S10460, the main CPU 201 performs a game stop data update process. The game stop data update process is performed using the working area (outside area) of the main RAM 203. This game stop data update process performs update control of the game stop function activation management phase, the number of acquired game balls, the difference ball number counter, and the MY judgment counter. The game stop data update process will be described in detail later. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10470.

In S10470, the main CPU 201 performs the restoration process of the protection registers that were saved in S10411, and ends the system timer interrupt process.

In this way, according to the system timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, when the game is stopped, the switch input detection processing is not performed. In other words, when the game is stopped, even if a game ball enters or passes through the first start port 10120, the second start port 10140, the first large prize port 10131, the second large prize port 10151, the general prize port 122, etc., the game ball will not be paid out and various random number values will not be obtained (the entry or passage of the game ball into the various prize ports will be invalidated).

[12-4-21. Game stop function setting process]
Next, a game stop function setting process performed during the system timer interrupt process will be described with reference to Fig. 364. Fig. 364 is a flow chart showing an example of the game stop function setting process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10450-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is stopped based on the game stop state flag.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is stopped, it transfers processing to S10450-11, and if it determines that the game is not stopped, it transfers processing to S10450-2.

In S10450-2, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load the "game stop function activation management phase." After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S10450-3.

In S10450-3, the main CPU 201 performs processing to determine a game stop command. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S10450-4.

As described above, the "game stop command" is a command that transmits information to the sub-control circuit 300 about the fact that the game will be stopped according to the increased number of game balls (MY). By receiving the game stop command, the sub-control circuit 300 is able to perform a "game stop notice" in advance on the display device 7, etc., to notify the user that the game will be stopped, or a "game stop notification" that the game is in a stopped state.

In the process of determining the game stop command, the game stop function activation management phase is loaded, and when the game stop function activation management phase is updated and the game stop function activation management phase is ≧01H, the value of the game stop function activation management phase is determined as the game stop command based on the updated value of the game stop function activation management phase and the "predetermined game stop notice start condition."

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 342, when the updated game stop function operation management phase is 01H, if the "first game stop notice start condition" is satisfied, 01H is determined as the game stop command capable of executing the first game stop notice, and when the updated game stop function operation management phase is 02H, if the "second game stop notice start condition" is satisfied, 02H is determined as the game stop command capable of executing the second game stop notice. Also, when the updated game stop function operation management phase is 03H, 03H is determined as the game stop command capable of executing the third game stop notice, and when the updated game stop function operation management phase is 04H, 04H is determined as the game stop command capable of executing the game stop notice.

In addition, in this embodiment, if 01H is determined as the game stop command that can execute the first game stop notice, the execution flag is set to 01H, and it is stored that the first game stop notice has been executed.

If the updated game stop function activation management phase is 00H or if the game stop function activation management phase has not been updated, the game stop command will not be determined and the process of determining the difference ball number command will end.

In S10450-4, the main CPU 201 performs a game stop command transmission reservation process that sets the game stop command determined in S10450-3 above in the transmission buffer. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10450-5.

In S10450-5, the main CPU 201 performs a process to load the "MY determination counter." After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10450-6.

In S10450-6, the main CPU 201 performs processing to determine the difference in number of balls command. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S10450-7.

Here, the "difference in number of balls command" is a command that transmits information regarding the value of the MY determination counter (value of the difference in number of balls counter) to the sub-control circuit 300. By receiving the difference in number of balls command, the sub-control circuit 300 is able to notify information regarding the increase in the number of game balls (MY) on the display device 7, etc.

In the process of determining this difference in number of balls command, the value of the MY judgment counter is loaded, and when the MY judgment counter is updated, the value of the MY judgment counter is determined as the difference in number of balls command.
Also, if the MY judgment counter has not been updated, the process of determining the difference in the number of balls command will end without determining the difference in the number of balls command.

In S10450-7, the main CPU 201 performs a difference ball command transmission reservation process to set the difference ball command determined in S10450-6 above in the transmission buffer. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10450-11.

In this embodiment, the system is configured to send the difference in ball count command in addition to the game stop command, but it may be configured to determine and send only the game stop command without determining and sending the difference in ball count command. When configured in this way, the processes of S10450-5 to S10450-7 described above can be omitted (deleted).

In S10450-11, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is stopped based on the game stop state flag.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is stopped, it transfers the process to S10450-21, and if it determines that the game is not stopped, it transfers the process to S10450-12.

In S10450-12, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load the "game stop function activation management phase." After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S10450-13.

In S10450-13, the main CPU 201 judges whether the game stop function operation management phase is 04H. That is, it is judged that the difference ball number counter is equal to or greater than the regulation value (95000 or more) and is not in a small win game state or a big win game state because the game stop function operation management phase is 04H.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game stop function activation management phase is 04H, it transfers the process to S10450-14, and if it determines that the game stop function activation management phase is not 04H, it transfers the process to S10450-21.

In S10450-14, the main CPU 201 performs a process to turn on (=1) the "game stop state flag." After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10450-21.

In this way, when the difference ball counter is equal to or greater than the regulated value and the game is not in a small win or big win game state, the game stop state flag is turned on and the game is stopped.

In S10450-21, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is stopped based on the game stop state flag.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is stopped, it transfers the process to S10450-22, and if it determines that the game is not stopped, it terminates the game stop function setting process.

In S10450-22, the main CPU 201 performs a process to initialize various solenoid data. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the game stop function setting process.

By processing S10450-22, when the game stop state flag is turned on and the game is stopped, various solenoids are not driven. In other words, when the game is stopped, the second start opening 10140, the first large prize opening 10131, the second large prize opening 10151, etc. will not be opened.

[12-4-22. Game stop data update process]
Next, a game stop data update process performed during the system timer interrupt process will be described with reference to Fig. 365 and Fig. 366. Fig. 365 and Fig. 366 are a flow chart showing an example of the game stop data update process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10460-1, the main CPU 201 performs a process of saving the contents of a register (e.g., an AF register, etc.). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10412.

In S10460-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not various prize ball switches (first start port switch 10121, second start port switch 10141, first large prize port count switch 10132, second large prize port count switch 10152, general prize port switch 123) from which game balls are paid out have been detected.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the prize ball switch has been detected, it transfers processing to S10460-3, and if it determines that the prize ball switch has not been detected, it transfers processing to S10460-11.

In S10460-3, the main CPU 201 performs a process to load the "number of prize balls" of the winning slot detected by the prize ball switch. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10460-4.

In S10460-4, the main CPU 201 performs a process to load the "number of acquired game balls." After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10460-5.

In S10460-5, the main CPU 201 performs a process to add the number of winning balls to the number of acquired game balls. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10460-11.

In S10460-11, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is stopped based on the game stop state flag.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is stopped, it transfers the process to S10460-21, and if it determines that the game is not stopped, it transfers the process to S10460-12.

In S10460-12, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of acquired game balls is 0 or not.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of acquired game balls is 0, it transfers the process to S10460-15, and if it determines that the number of acquired game balls is not 0, it transfers the process to S10460-13.

In S10460-13, the main CPU 201 performs a process to load the "difference ball number counter." After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10460-14.

In S10460-14, the main CPU 201 performs a process to add the number of acquired game balls to the difference ball counter. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10460-15.

In S10460-15, the main CPU 201 performs a process to clear the number of acquired game balls. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10460-16.

In S10460-16, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game ball recovery switch 10179 has been detected.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game ball recovery switch 10179 has been detected, it transfers processing to S10460-17, and if it determines that the game ball recovery switch 10179 has not been detected, it transfers processing to S10460-21.

In S10460-17, the main CPU 201 performs a process to subtract 1 from the difference ball counter. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10460-18.

In S10460-18, the main CPU 201 judges whether the difference ball counter is equal to or less than the lower limit. Here, the lower limit of the difference ball counter is set to "0".
If the main CPU 201 determines that the difference ball number counter is below the lower limit value (=0), it transfers processing to S10460-19, and if it determines that the difference ball number counter is not below the lower limit value (=0), it transfers processing to S10460-21.

In S10460-19, the main CPU 201 sets the difference ball counter to 0. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10460-21.

When the difference ball counter becomes 0 as a result of the processing of S10460-18 and S10460-19, it will no longer be decremented. Note that the processing of S10460-18 and S10460-19 may be omitted (deleted) so that the difference ball counter becomes 0 or less.

In addition, by processing S10460-2 to S10460-19, the difference ball counter becomes the cumulative number of game balls paid out (number of paid out game balls) minus the cumulative number of game balls fired (number of fired game balls), which corresponds to the "increased number of game balls (MY)."

In S10460-21, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load the "MY determination counter." After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S10460-22.

In S10460-22, the main CPU 201 judges whether the MY judgment counter is ≧95. Here, the value of the MY judgment counter is a value corresponding to the information obtained by dividing the "difference in number of balls counter" by 1000 ("difference in number of balls counter"/1000). Therefore, whether the MY judgment counter is ≧95 judges whether the difference in number of balls counter is equal to or greater than the regulation value (95000 or greater).
If the main CPU 201 determines that the MY determination counter is not greater than or equal to 95, it transfers the process to S10460-31, and if it determines that the MY determination counter is not greater than or equal to 95, it transfers the process to S10460-23.

In S10460-23, the main CPU 201 performs a process to load the "difference ball number counter." After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10460-24.

In S10460-24, the main CPU 201 performs a division process of the difference ball counter, dividing the difference ball counter by 1000 ("difference ball counter"/1000). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10460-25.

In S10460-25, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the division result of S10460-24 in the MY determination counter. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10460-26.

By the process of S10460-25, the value of the MY determination counter becomes a value corresponding to the information obtained by dividing the "difference in number of balls counter" by 1000 ("difference in number of balls counter"/1000). Note that the processes of S10460-22 to S10460-25 above may be omitted (deleted) so that the value of the MY determination counter becomes equal to the difference in number of balls counter.

In S10460-31, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the MY determination counter has been updated.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the MY determination counter has been updated, it transfers the process to S10460-32, and if it determines that the MY determination counter has not been updated, it transfers the process to S10460-41.

In S10460-32, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is stopped based on the game stop state flag.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is stopped, it transfers the process to S10460-41, and if it determines that the game is not stopped, it transfers the process to S10460-33.

In S10460-33, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load the "game stop function activation management phase." After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S10460-34.

In S10460-34, the main CPU 201 judges whether the game stop function operation management phase is ≧03H. Here, the game stop function operation management phase ≧03H is a value set when the game stop function operation management phase is 03H or 04H and the difference ball number counter is equal to or greater than the regulation value (95000 or more).
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game stop function activation management phase is greater than or equal to 03H, it transfers processing to S10460-41, and if it determines that the game stop function activation management phase is not greater than or equal to 03H, it transfers processing to S10460-35.

In S10460-35, the main CPU 201 performs a game stop function activation management phase setting process based on the value of the MY determination counter. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10460-41.

In this game stop function activation management phase setting process, when the value of the MY judgment counter is a value corresponding to less than the initial boundary value of the difference ball number counter (MY judgment counter < 85), the game stop function activation management phase is set to "00H".
In addition, when the value of the MY judgment counter is a value corresponding to a value between the initial boundary value of the difference ball number counter and less than the first boundary value (85≦MY judgment counter<90), the game stop function activation management phase is set to “01H”.
In addition, when the value of the MY judgment counter is a value corresponding to a value greater than or equal to the first boundary value of the difference ball number counter and less than the regulated value (90≦MY judgment counter<95), the game stop function activation management phase is set to “02H”.
In addition, when the value of the MY judgment counter is a value corresponding to or greater than the regulated value of the difference ball number counter (MY judgment counter ≧ 95), the game stop function activation management phase is set to "03H".

In this way, in the game stop function activation management phase setting process, the value of the game stop function activation management phase is updated based on the value of the MY determination counter.

In addition, in the game stop function activation management phase setting process, if the game stop function activation management phase is already 03H or 04H as a result of the processing of S10460-34 above, it will not be updated here. In other words, in the game stop function activation management phase setting process, when the game stop function activation management phase is 00H, 01H, or 02H, the game stop function activation management phase will be updated to 00H, 01H, 02H, or 03H.

In S10460-41, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load the "game stop function activation management phase." After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S10460-42.

In S10460-42, the main CPU 201 judges whether or not the game stop function operation management phase is 03H. Here, the game stop function operation management phase is 03H, which is the value set before the game is stopped when the difference ball number counter is equal to or greater than the regulation value (95,000 or more). Therefore, the game stop function operation management phase is 03H, and it is judged whether or not the game is not stopped even though the difference ball number counter is equal to or greater than the regulation value (95,000 or more).
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game stop function activation management phase is 03H, it transfers the process to S10460-43, and if it determines that the game stop function activation management phase is not 03H, it transfers the process to S10460-50.

In S10460-43, the main CPU 201 judges whether the control state number of the special symbol is ≧03. Here, the control state number of the special symbol ≧03 is a value set when the game is in a small win game state or a big win game state, as described later. Therefore, whether the game is in a small win game state or a big win game state is judged by the control state number of the special symbol ≧03.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is greater than or equal to 03, it transfers the process to S10460-50, and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not greater than or equal to 03, it transfers the process to S10460-44.

In S10460-44, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the game stop function activation management phase to "04H". After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S10460-50.

In this way, if the difference ball counter is equal to or greater than the regulated value (95,000 or greater), when the game is not in a small win or big win game state, the game stop function operation management phase will be updated from "03H" to "04H." Also, as described above, the game stop function operation management phase of "04H" will be maintained (unchanged) unless the backup clear switch 176 is used to "clear the RAM."

In S10460-50, the main CPU 201 performs the process of restoring the registers that were saved in S10460-1, and ends the game stop data update process.

In this way, according to the game stop data update process of this embodiment, when the game stop function activation management phase corresponding to the difference in ball number counter being less than the regulated value is 00H, 01H or 02H, the value of the game stop function activation management phase is changed appropriately based on the value of the MY judgment counter (the value of the difference in ball number counter), and it is possible to either move it forward or backward.
However, when the game stop function activation management phase, which corresponds to the difference ball number counter being equal to or greater than the regulated value, is 03H or 04H, the value of the game stop function activation management phase cannot be carried down (changed from 03H to 02H) even if the value of the MY judgment counter (value of the difference ball number counter) falls below the regulated value.

[12-4-23. Switch input detection process]
Next, a switch input detection process executed by the main CPU 201 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 363) will be described with reference to Fig. 367. Fig. 367 is a flow chart showing an example of the switch input detection process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

Compared to the first pachinko game machine, the tenth pachinko game machine has the additional configuration of a first large prize slot count switch 10132, a second large prize slot count switch 10152, and a V prize slot switch 10157, and therefore some of the above processing has been added.

In S10501, the main CPU 201 executes the first start port winning detection process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10502.

In this first start port winning detection process, when the first start port switch 10121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start port 10120, the main CPU 201 sets payout information according to the prize balls indicating the number of payouts from the first start port 10120, and determines whether there is free space in the first special pattern start memory area (1) to the first special pattern start memory area (4). If it is determined that there is free space in the first special pattern start memory area (1) to the first special pattern start memory area (4), various random number values (for example, random number values for jackpot determination, pattern random number values, random number values for reach determination, random number values for performance selection, etc.) are obtained as start information for the first special pattern, and the various obtained random number values are stored in a single first special pattern determination area in a FIFO (First In, First Out) format. Then, a process is performed to reserve the transmission of a winning command for the first special symbol, which indicates a winning entry into the first start port 10120 and the number of reserved first special symbols. The winning command for the first special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 363) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the first special symbol start memory areas (1) to (4), the first start port winning detection process is terminated without acquiring various random number values.

In S10502, the main CPU 201 executes the second start port winning detection process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10503.

In this second start port winning detection process, when the second start port switch 10141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start port 10140, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the winning balls indicating the number of payouts from the second start port 10140, and judges whether there is free space in the second special pattern start memory area (1) to the second special pattern start memory area (3). If it is judged that there is free space in the second special pattern start memory area (1) to the second special pattern start memory area (3), various random number values (for example, random number values for jackpot determination, pattern random number values, random number values for reach determination, random number values for performance selection, etc.) are obtained as start information for the second special pattern, and the various obtained random number values are stored in a single second special pattern determination area in a FIFO format. Then, a transmission reservation process is performed for a winning command for the second special pattern indicating the winning of the second start port 10140 and the number of reserved second special patterns. The winning command for the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 363) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the second special symbol start memory areas (1) to (3), the second start port winning detection process will end without acquiring various random number values.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are four first special symbol start memory areas for the first special symbol, but there are three first special symbol start memory areas for the second special symbol. Therefore, the number of reserved first special symbols is four, and the number of reserved second special symbols is three. Note that the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols can be freely changed as needed, but it is preferable to keep it within four.

In S10503, the main CPU 201 performs a general prize opening passage detection process. In the general prize opening passage detection process, for example, payout information corresponding to the prize balls indicating the number of payouts from the general prize opening 122 is set. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S10504.

In S10504, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening passage detection process. In the first large prize opening passage detection process, when the first large prize opening count switch 10132 detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 10131, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the prize balls indicating the number of payouts from the first large prize opening 10131, and adds 1 to the first large prize opening counter for counting the number of game balls entering the first large prize opening 10131 to update it. Then, it performs a transmission reservation process for a first large prize opening entry command indicating an entry into the first large prize opening 10131. The first large prize opening entry command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 363) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S10505.

In S10505, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening passage detection process. In the second large prize opening passage detection process, when the second large prize opening count switch 10152 detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 10151, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the prize balls indicating the number of payouts from the second large prize opening 10151, and adds 1 to the second large prize opening counter for counting the number of game balls entering the second large prize opening 10151 to update it. Then, it performs a transmission reservation process for a second large prize opening entry command indicating an entry into the second large prize opening 10151. The second large prize opening entry command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 363) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S10506.

In S10506, the main CPU 201 performs a V winning port passage detection process. In the V winning port passage detection process, when the V winning port switch 10157 detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning port 10156, the main CPU 201 turns on the V winning port passage flag. Then, it performs a transmission reservation process for a V passing command indicating that the game ball has passed through the V winning port 10156. The V passing command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 363) during the next system timer interrupt process. Note that payout information is not set even if the game ball passes through the V winning port 10156. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S10507.

In S10507, the main CPU 201 performs gate passage detection processing. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S10508.

In this gate passage detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects the passage of the game ball through the first passing gate 10126R or the second passing gate 10126L by the passing gate switch 10127, it judges whether there is free space in the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (4). If it judges that there is free space in the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (4), it acquires various random number values (for example, random number values for determining whether the normal pattern is a hit, pattern random number values of the normal pattern, etc.) as start information for the normal pattern, and stores the acquired various random number values in a single normal pattern start memory area in FIFO format. On the other hand, if it judges that there is no free space in any of the normal pattern start memory areas (1) to (4), it ends the gate passage detection process without acquiring various random number values.

In S10508, the main CPU 201 performs a look-ahead command generation process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the current switch input detection process.

In this look-ahead command generation process, the look-ahead related data in FIG. 337 is referenced, and the various random number values obtained in the current first start port winning detection process or second start port winning detection process are analyzed based on the game state, and a look-ahead command is generated. As shown in the look-ahead related data in FIG. 337, in the time-saving game state, big win game state, and small win game state, only look-ahead commands based on the various random number values obtained in the second start port winning detection process (look-ahead commands for the second special pattern) can be generated. Then, a look-ahead command transmission reservation process is performed to transmit the generated look-ahead command to the sub-control circuit 300. The look-ahead command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 363) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[12-5. Sub-control circuit]
Next, the contents of control by the sub-control circuit 300 based on various commands etc. transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 will be described.

First, the details of the various tables stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be explained using Figures 368 to 375.

[12-6-1. Presentation mode determination table]
A description will now be given of a presentation mode determination table for determining a presentation mode in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. Figure 368 shows an example of the presentation mode determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

Here, "performance mode" refers to information that defines the state of various performances performed by the sub-control circuit 300.

As shown in FIG. 368, the presentation mode determination table associates the game state with the mode transition conditions and presentation mode information that defines the presentation mode. The game state is determined by the game state designation command received from the main control circuit 200.

The "mode transition condition" is determined based on the presence or absence of start information for the second special symbol.

The "presentation mode information" is composed of presentation mode information = 00H indicating chance presentation mode, presentation mode information = 01H indicating normal presentation mode, presentation mode information = 10H indicating heaven presentation mode, and presentation mode information = 0FH indicating Sengoku time presentation mode.

In this embodiment, the four presentation modes are the chance presentation mode, the general presentation mode, the heaven presentation mode, and the Sengoku time presentation mode, but five or more presentation modes may be provided. For example, as the Sengoku time presentation mode, the Sengoku time presentation mode in the A time-saving play state may be the first RUSH presentation mode, the Sengoku time presentation mode in the B time-saving play state may be the second RUSH presentation mode, and the Sengoku time presentation mode in the C time-saving play state may be the second RUSH presentation mode, with the first RUSH presentation mode, the second RUSH presentation mode, and the third RUSH presentation mode being different presentation modes.

The sub-CPU 301 in the sub-control circuit 300 refers to the presentation mode determination table shown in FIG. 368 and determines the presentation mode information based on the game state and the mode transition conditions.

[12-6-2. Symbol effect pattern determination table]
Next, a symbol effect pattern determination table for determining a symbol effect pattern will be described. Figures 369, 370 and 371 show an example of a presentation mode determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

Here, "effect pattern" refers to information that defines the display effects of characters, etc., audio effects, and effects that change the operation mode of the effect button 54. Also, "design effect pattern" refers to information that defines that during the variable display of special patterns, at least the "first decorative pattern (main pattern)" described below is variably displayed in a predetermined variable manner on the display device 7. Note that, depending on the type of design effect pattern, in addition to the variable display of the first decorative pattern, background display modes and display effects of characters, etc., audio effects, and effects that change the operation mode of the effect button 54 may also be defined. Also, in addition to the design effect pattern, display effects of various effect patterns can be superimposed and executed.

The sub-CPU 301 in the sub-control circuit 300 determines the pattern presentation pattern by referring to the pattern presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 369, FIG. 370, or FIG. 371.

[Chance Production Mode Symbol Production Pattern Determination Table]
As shown in Figure 369 (a), the pattern presentation pattern determination table CZ for the chance presentation mode corresponds to a special pattern variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, a look-ahead flag, a selection rate (first random number value), and a pattern presentation pattern.

Here, the "look-ahead flag" is information that determines whether or not a look-ahead performance is being executed, with a look-ahead flag of 00H indicating that a look-ahead performance is not being executed, and a look-ahead flag of 01H indicating that a look-ahead performance is being executed.

The "selection rate" corresponds to the first random number being within a predetermined range for a first random number value that is made up of a first random number range, but for ease of explanation, it is described as selection rate. Note that the selection rate may include 0% in addition to 1-100%, and the term "selection rate of 0%" is not excluded. The above also applies to the "selection rate" in the table described below. In this embodiment, multiple types of random number values with different random number ranges are provided, and explanations of the types of random number values will be omitted as appropriate.

According to the symbol presentation pattern determination table CZ of the chance presentation mode shown in Fig. 369(a), when the special symbol variation pattern command is a variation pattern command corresponding to "time-saving hit", a specific symbol presentation pattern (symbol presentation patterns CZ10 to CZ15, CZ20, CZ21) can be determined as a dedicated symbol presentation pattern. Also, when the special symbol variation pattern command is a variation pattern command corresponding to "miss", a specific symbol presentation pattern (symbol presentation patterns CZ22, CZ23) can be determined.
Therefore, when the time-saving winning is achieved by the lottery of the special symbol, a special symbol presentation can be performed.

This particular symbol presentation pattern is made up of a symbol presentation pattern that executes a "card presentation" and a symbol presentation pattern that executes a "RUSH entry presentation."

The pattern presentation pattern for executing this "card presentation" is determined when a time-saving hit occurs and the "selected special pattern z10" is the trigger for transitioning to the first time-saving play state, the "selected special pattern z20" is the trigger for transitioning to the second time-saving play state, and the "selected special pattern z30" is the trigger for transitioning to the third time-saving play state.
Therefore, the "card effect" can suggest a transition to any one of the first time-shortened game state, the second time-shortened game state, and the third time-shortened game state.

In addition, the "RUSH entry effect" is determined when the "special symbol selection symbol z20" is displayed, which is a hit in the time-saving mode and a trigger for transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state, or when it is a miss.
Therefore, the "RUSH entry effect" can execute an effect as to whether or not to transition to the second time-saving gaming state (RUSH gaming state).

Furthermore, the "card effect" and "RUSH entry effect" are composed of a "weak effect (white card effect or RUSH entry effect A)" and a "strong effect (red card effect or RUSH entry effect B)" that has a higher expected value of transitioning to the second time-saving game state than the weak effect, depending on the selection rate (first random number value).

According to the pattern determination table CZ for the chance presentation mode shown in Figure 369 (a), when a pre-reading presentation is executed (pre-reading flag = 01H), the pattern presentation pattern (patterns CZ11, CZ13, CZ15, CZ21, CZ23) of a "strong presentation (red card presentation or RUSH entry presentation B)" can be determined.
As a result, when a pre-reading effect is executed, a "strong effect (red card effect or RUSH entry effect B)" is executed during the corresponding change, so that the player can play the game with a sense of expectation.

[Table for determining the design effect pattern in the general effect mode]
As shown in FIG. 369(b), in the symbol presentation pattern determination table NR for the general presentation mode, the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200 is associated with the symbol presentation pattern.

Note that the symbol presentation pattern determination table NR for the general presentation mode shown in FIG. 369(b) does not have a selection rate (first random number value) associated with it, but multiple symbol presentation patterns may be associated with it by the first random number value based on the variation pattern command for one special symbol.

According to the symbol presentation pattern determination table NR for the general presentation mode shown in FIG. 369(b), even if the variation pattern command for the same special symbol is used, a symbol presentation pattern different from that in the chance presentation mode can be determined. The difference in the symbol presentation pattern may be at least one of the display mode (symbol design) and the background display mode of the first decorative symbol.

In this embodiment, different symbol presentation patterns can be determined in the general presentation mode and the chance presentation mode, but the same symbol presentation pattern can also be determined in the general presentation mode and the chance presentation mode. In particular, it is desirable to configure the same symbol presentation pattern to be determined so that a common background display mode is used in the general presentation mode and the chance presentation mode when the power is turned on, regardless of whether the RAM has been cleared. In this manner, it becomes difficult to tell at a glance whether the RAM has been cleared when the gaming establishment opens, and even gaming machines whose RAM has not been cleared can be operated from the time the gaming establishment opens.

In addition, if it is possible to win a time-saving hit even in the normal game mode, it is sufficient to configure it so that when there is a time-saving hit, a dedicated pattern presentation pattern different from that of a jackpot can be determined. And when there is a time-saving hit, it is desirable to make it possible to determine a pattern presentation pattern that differs between the normal game mode and the normal game mode, and to perform a different presentation between the normal game mode and the normal game mode as a dedicated presentation when there is a time-saving hit.

[Heavenly performance mode pattern determination table]
As shown in FIG. 370, the symbol presentation pattern determination table TE for the heaven presentation mode associates special symbol variation pattern commands received from the main control circuit 200 with symbol presentation patterns.

Note that the symbol presentation pattern determination table TE for the heaven presentation mode shown in FIG. 370 does not have a selection rate (first random number value) associated with it, but multiple symbol presentation patterns may be associated with it by the first random number value based on the variation pattern command for one special symbol.

According to the symbol presentation pattern determination table TE for the heaven presentation mode shown in FIG. 370, even if the variation pattern command for the same special symbol is used, a symbol presentation pattern different from that in the chance presentation mode and the general presentation mode can be determined. The difference in the symbol presentation pattern may be at least one of the display mode (symbol design) and the background display mode of the first decorative symbol.

In this embodiment, different symbol presentation patterns can be determined in the heaven presentation mode, the general presentation mode, and the chance presentation mode, but the same symbol presentation pattern may be determined in the heaven presentation mode, the general presentation mode, and the chance presentation mode. In particular, it is desirable to configure the heaven presentation mode, the general presentation mode, and the chance presentation mode so that the same symbol presentation pattern can be determined so that a common background display mode is obtained when the power is turned on, regardless of whether the RAM is cleared or not. With this configuration, it becomes difficult to tell at a glance whether the RAM has been cleared when the gaming establishment opens, and even gaming machines whose RAM has not been cleared can be operated from the time the gaming establishment opens.

[Sengoku Time Mode Design Pattern Determination Table]
As shown in FIG. 371, the symbol presentation pattern determination table RU for the Sengoku Time presentation mode associates the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol presentation pattern.

According to the symbol presentation pattern determination table RU for the heaven presentation mode shown in FIG. 371, when the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200 is a second special symbol variation pattern command sent in the first time-limited game state, the third time-limited game state, or the sixth time-limited game state (general game state) (84H01H to 84H03H: see FIG. 335), a different symbol presentation pattern can be determined when the special symbol variation pattern command sent in the second time-limited game state, the fourth time-limited game state, or the fifth time-limited game state (RUSH game state) (84H21H to 84H26H: see FIG. 336).

In this embodiment, when the special symbol variation pattern command is a second special symbol variation pattern command sent in the general gaming state, the symbol presentation pattern (symbol presentation patterns RU11 to RU16) that executes the Sengoku Time presentation in which "Character Z" appears can be determined. Also, when the special symbol variation pattern command is a second special symbol variation pattern command sent in the RUSH gaming state, the symbol presentation pattern (symbol presentation patterns RU21 to RU26) that executes the Sengoku Time presentation in which "Character A" or "Character B" appears can be determined.

This allows for different parts (characters) of the presentation when the game ball enters the second starting hole 10140 due to a long opening in the normal game mode and when the game ball enters the second starting hole 10140 due to a long opening in the rush game mode, making it possible to provide presentations that correspond to the game mode.

The presentation when the game ball enters the second starting hole 10140 due to a long opening in the normal game state may be the same as the presentation when the game ball enters the second starting hole 10140 due to a long opening in the rush game state. In other words, the symbol presentation patterns RU11 to RU16 and the symbol presentation patterns RU21 to RU26 may be the same.

In addition, according to the symbol presentation pattern determination table RU for the heaven presentation mode shown in FIG. 371, even if the variation pattern command for the same special symbol is used, a symbol presentation pattern different from that in the chance presentation mode, the general presentation mode, and the heaven presentation mode can be determined. The difference in the symbol presentation pattern may be at least one of the display mode (symbol design) and the background display mode of the first decorative symbol.

[12-6-3. Telop effect pattern determination table]
Next, a caption effect pattern determination table for determining a caption effect pattern will be described. Figure 372 shows an example of the caption effect pattern determination table in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

Here, "caption performance pattern" refers to information that defines a caption performance that suggests in advance that the second starting port 10140 will be long-opened. This "caption performance pattern" is composed of "caption performance pattern K01" that suggests that the second starting port 10140 will be long-opened and notifies the player that it will be long-opened, and "caption performance pattern K02" that suggests that the second starting port 10140 will be long-opened and notifies the player that it will not be long-opened.

As shown in FIG. 372, the caption effect pattern determination table associates the normal symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (second random number value), and the caption effect pattern.

In addition, the normal pattern change pattern command associated with the caption presentation pattern determination table shown in Figure 372 is a normal pattern change pattern command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 during the third time-saving game state (see Figure 341).
Therefore, in the third time-saving gaming state, which is the general gaming state, the telop effect according to the telop effect pattern can be executed.

In addition, in the first time-saving game state and the sixth time-saving game state, which are the general game states, the second start hole 10140 will not open long, but it may be configured so that a "telop presentation pattern K02" that notifies the player that the second start hole 10140 will not open long can be determined by a normal symbol variation pattern command sent from the main control circuit 200 in the first time-saving game state and the sixth time-saving game state.

The sub-CPU 301 in the sub-control circuit 300 determines the subtitle performance pattern by referring to the subtitle performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 372.

[12-6-4. Look-ahead performance pattern determination table]
Next, a look-ahead performance pattern determination table for determining a look-ahead performance pattern will be described. Fig. 373 is an example of a look-ahead performance pattern determination table in the tenth pachinko game machine. Fig. 373(a) is an example of a look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z1 in a normal game state, and Fig. 373(b) is an example of a look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z2 in a first time-saving game state, a third time-saving game state, and a sixth time-saving game state, which are general game states.

Here, the "pre-reading performance pattern" refers to information that defines a pre-reading performance that suggests the lottery result of the special pattern in advance when the game ball enters the first starting hole 10120 or the second starting hole 10140.

The sub-CPU 301 in the sub-control circuit 300 refers to the look-ahead performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 373 and determines the look-ahead performance pattern.

[Normal game state pre-reading performance pattern determination table]
As shown in FIG. 373(a), the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z1 in the normal game state corresponds to the look-ahead command received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (third random number value), and the look-ahead performance pattern.

According to the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z1 in the normal game state shown in Figure 373 (a), when the look-ahead command is a look-ahead command corresponding to "jackpot or miss" and "super reach, super super reach or RUSH entry performance", or when the look-ahead command is a look-ahead command corresponding to "time-saving hit" and "selected special pattern z20", a look-ahead performance pattern (look-ahead performance pattern Z01) that executes an "expectation UP zone" can be determined.
For this reason, the "expectation UP zone" can indicate in advance that a predetermined presentation will be performed and that a transition will be made to a jackpot game state or a second time-saving game state (RUSH game state).

In addition, according to the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z1 in the normal game state shown in Figure 373 (a), when the look-ahead command is a look-ahead command corresponding to a "time-saving hit" or a look-ahead command corresponding to a "miss", a look-ahead performance pattern (look-ahead performance pattern Z02) that executes a "mode transition zone" can be determined as the look-ahead performance pattern.
For this reason, the "mode transition zone" can indicate in advance that a time-saving hit has occurred and that a transition will occur from the normal gaming state to either the first time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state.

In addition, according to the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z1 in the normal game state shown in Figure 373 (a), when the look-ahead command is a look-ahead command corresponding to a "time-saving hit" and the "selected special pattern z20", or when the look-ahead command is a look-ahead command corresponding to a "miss", a look-ahead performance pattern (look-ahead performance pattern Z03) that executes a "RUSH expectation zone" can be determined.
For this reason, the "RUSH expectation zone" can indicate in advance that a transition to the second time-shortened gaming state (RUSH gaming state) will occur.

[Table for determining pre-reading performance pattern in normal game state]
As shown in FIG. 373 (b), in the general gaming state, the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z2 corresponds the look-ahead command received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (third random number value), and the look-ahead performance pattern.

According to the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z2 shown in FIG. 373(b), when the look-ahead command is a look-ahead command corresponding to "jackpot or miss" and "super reach, super super reach", a look-ahead performance pattern (look-ahead performance pattern Z01) that executes the "expectation UP zone" can be determined.

Furthermore, when comparing the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z1 shown in Figure 373 (a) with the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z2 shown in Figure 373 (b), it is configured so that the look-ahead performance pattern that executes the ``expectation UP zone'' is more easily determined in the normal gaming state than in the general gaming state.
For this reason, the "expectation UP zone" is more likely to be executed in the normal game state than in the general game state, and the interest in the game in the normal game state (chance presentation mode) can be further increased.

In this embodiment, the game is configured with three types of look-ahead performance patterns, which are "Expectation UP Zone," "Mode Transition Zone," and "RUSH Expectation Zone." However, the game may be configured with four or more types of look-ahead performance patterns by further subdividing the suggested content, or may be configured with two or less types of look-ahead performance patterns by integrating (or abbreviating) the suggested content.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to determine the pre-reading performance pattern in the second time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving game state, and the fifth time-saving game state, which are RUSH game states.

[12-6-5. Table for setting prohibition conditions for pre-reading effects]
A prohibition condition setting table for the pre-reading performance for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading performance (expectation UP zone, mode transition zone, RUSH expectation zone) will be described. FIG. 374 is an example of a prohibition condition setting table for the pre-reading performance in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 374, the prohibition conditions for prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead performance include a "common prohibition condition" that prohibits the execution of the look-ahead performance in each of the expectation UP zone, the mode transition zone, and the RUSH expectation zone, and a "specific prohibition condition" that prohibits the look-ahead performance in both the mode transition zone and the RUSH expectation zone.

There are three common prohibition conditions, common prohibition conditions 1 to 3. "Common Prohibition Condition 1" is met when there are reserved numbers of the second special symbol, "Common Prohibition Condition 2" is met during the control period of the second special symbol (during the variable display of the second special symbol), and "Common Prohibition Condition 3" is met when the look-ahead performance is already being executed by referring to the look-ahead flag.

If any of the common prohibited conditions 1 to 3 is met, the look-ahead performance pattern will not be determined, and the look-ahead performance of any of the expectation UP zone, mode transition zone, and RUSH expectation zone will not be executed.

There are two unique prohibition conditions: unique prohibition condition 1 and unique prohibition condition 2. "Unique prohibition condition 1" is met when the game ball enters the first start hole 10120 or the second start hole 10140 and start information that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the previous reserved memory, and "Unique prohibition condition 2" is met when the game ball enters the first start hole 10120 or the second start hole 10140 and start information that is determined to be a time-saving hit and a special pattern selected pattern z20 is stored in the previous reserved memory.

If either of the unique prohibition conditions 1 and 2 is met, the look-ahead performance of the mode transition zone and RUSH expectation zone will not be executed, but the look-ahead performance of the expectation UP zone is configured to be executable.

In this way, as "unique prohibition condition 1" that prohibits the pre-reading effects of both the mode transition zone and the RUSH expectation zone, it is set that starting information that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the previous reserved memory. This prevents the content suggested by the mode transition zone and the RUSH expectation zone from changing based on the transition of the jackpot game state, and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

[12-6-6. First game stop notice end determination table]
A first game stop notice end judgment table for ending the execution of the first game stop notice that is started when the increase in the number of game balls (MY) is within the first counting range will be described. Figure 375 is an example of the first game stop notice end judgment table in the tenth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 375, four termination conditions, termination conditions 1 to 4, are set as the "first game stop notice termination conditions" that terminate the execution of the first game stop notice.

"Termination condition 1" is met when in the normal game state. However, "Termination condition 1" is not met when in the normal game state during a jackpot game state. Furthermore, "Termination condition 2" is met when in the first time-saving game state, "Termination condition 3" is met when in the third time-saving game state, and "Termination condition 4" is met when in the sixth time-saving game state. In other words, the first game stop notice ends when the game transitions to the normal game state or the general game state.

When the first game stop notice is being executed, if any of the above-mentioned "first game stop notice termination conditions" is met, the execution of the first game stop notice will end.

[12-7-1. Sub-control circuit processing]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 376. Fig. 376 is a flow chart showing an example of the sub-control circuit process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 376, the sub-CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S10600). In this initialization process, for example, RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10610.

In S10610, the sub-CPU 301 performs a data input process for inputting data. In this data input process, a command is input from the command input port 308, and operation information by the player detected by the effect button 54 is input. The details of this data input process will be described later with reference to FIG.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S10620.

In S10620, the sub CPU 301 executes a command analysis process, in which the command input in the process of S10610 is analyzed.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10630.

In S10630, the sub-CPU 301 executes a performance mode determination process. In this process, for example, a performance pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, and various requests (for example, a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, a role request, a performance button drive request, etc.) for operating various performance devices are generated based on the determined performance pattern. Details of this performance mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 377.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10640.

In S10640, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304. The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on the message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10650.

In S10650, the sub CPU 301 executes a sound control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the sound control circuit 305. The sound control circuit 305 performs sound control for outputting sound from the speaker 32 based on the message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10660.

In S10660, the sub CPU 301 executes an LED control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306. The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking all or a part of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on the message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10670.

In S10670, the sub-CPU 301 executes a role control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a role request to the role control circuit 307. Based on the message (role request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301, the role control circuit 307 performs drive control to operate the performance drive motors (not shown) for all or part of the roles constituting the performance role group 58.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10680.

In S10680, the sub CPU 301 executes an effect button control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an effect button drive request to the button control circuit 310. The button control circuit 310 performs drive control such as changing the operation mode of the effect button 54 or vibrating the effect button 54 based on the message (effect button drive request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10690.

In S10690, the sub CPU 301 executes a performance progression process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 executes a process of updating a performance timer counter for progressing the execution of various performances, a forced notification timer (to be described later), and the like.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 returns the process to S10610.

[12-7-2. Presentation mode determination process]
Next, the details of the presentation mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 376) will be described with reference to Fig. 377. Fig. 377 is a flow chart showing an example of the presentation mode determination process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10631, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation pattern determination process for determining a presentation pattern only when a game stop flag described later is off (=00H). In this process, a presentation pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, the presentation pattern being determined based on the type of display presentation displayed on the display device 7, the type of sound presentation output from the speaker 32, the operation type of the presentation button 54, and the like. Note that if the game stop flag is on (=01H), the presentation pattern determination process is not executed. Details of this presentation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to Figs. 378 to 381.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10632.

In S10632, the sub CPU 301 executes a process for generating an animation request. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S10631.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10633.

In S10633, the sub CPU 301 executes a process for generating a drawing request. In this process, the sub CPU 301 generates a drawing request based on the animation request generated in S10632.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10634.

In S10634, the sub CPU 301 executes a sound request generation process. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S10631.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10635.

In S10635, the sub CPU 301 executes a lamp request generation process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 generates a lamp request based on the effect pattern determined in S10631.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10636.

In S10636, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel request generation process. In this process, the reel request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S10631.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10637.

In S10637, the sub CPU 301 executes a process for generating a performance button drive request. In this process, the sub CPU 301 generates a performance button drive request based on the performance pattern determined in S10631.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10638.

In S10638, the sub-CPU 301 executes the process of generating a special request related to a game stop only if the game stop flag described below is on (=01H).

In this game stop related special request generation process, when the game stop flag is on (=01H), if the forced notification time described later has not elapsed, a drawing request, a sound request, and a lamp request for executing a game stop notification in a first notification mode are generated. Also, when the game stop flag is on (=01H), if the forced notification time has elapsed, a drawing request, a sound request, and a lamp request for executing a game stop notification in a second notification mode are generated.
Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 terminates the presentation mode determination process and returns the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 376).

[12-7-3. Presentation pattern determination process]
Next, with reference to Fig. 378 to Fig. 380, the details of the effect pattern determination process executed by the sub-CPU 301 in the effect mode determination process (see Fig. 377) will be described. Fig. 378 to Fig. 380 are a flow chart showing an example of the effect pattern determination process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In S10631-1, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol winning command."

If it is determined in S10631-1 that the command is a "special symbol winning command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S10631-2. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol winning command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S10631-3.

In S10631-2, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process to add the number of reserved special symbols, etc.

In this process of adding the number of reserved special symbols, it is determined whether the command is a "winning command for the first special symbol" or a "winning command for the second special symbol", and if the command is a "winning command for the first special symbol", 1 is added to the number of reserved first special symbols in work RAM 303 (reserved number counter for first special symbol), and if the command is a "winning command for the second special symbol", 1 is added to the number of reserved second special symbols in work RAM 303 (reserved number counter for second special symbol).
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 377).

In S10631-3, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "pre-read command" for a special symbol.

If it is determined in S10631-3 that the command is a "read-ahead command," the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S10631-4. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "read-ahead command," the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S10631-10.

In S10631-4, the sub-CPU 301 performs pending information storage processing to store the contents of the start information for the special symbol.

In this pending information storage process, it is determined whether it is a "first special symbol look-ahead command" or a "second special symbol look-ahead command", and various parameters of the look-ahead command (see FIG. 337) are stored in the decorative symbol determination area, the first decorative symbol start memory area, and the second decorative symbol start memory area of the work RAM 303 so as to correspond to the special symbol determination area, the first special symbol start memory area, and the second special symbol start memory area of the main RAM 203. That is, information corresponding to the start information of the special symbol stored in the main RAM 203 of the main control circuit 200 is also stored in the work RAM 303 of the sub-control circuit 300.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S10631-5.

In S10631-5, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead performance determination process to determine a look-ahead performance pattern for executing the look-ahead performance. The details of this look-ahead performance determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 377).

In S10631-10, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "symbol designation command."

If it is determined in S10631-10 that the command is a "designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10631-11. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10631-20.

In S10631-11, the sub-CPU 301 performs a decorative symbol determination process to determine the type of decorative symbol to be displayed in a stopped state.

In this decorative symbol determination process, the decorative symbols to be stopped are determined based on the contents of the symbol designation command, and the determined stopped symbols are stored in the stopped symbol storage area of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 377).

In S10631-20, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command."

If it is determined in S10631-20 that the command is a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S10631-21. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S10631-30.

In S10631-21, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process to subtract the number of reserved special symbols, etc.

In this process of subtracting the reserved number of special symbols, it is determined whether the command is a "first special symbol variation pattern command" or a "second special symbol variation pattern command", and when the command is a "first special symbol variation pattern command", 1 is subtracted from the reserved number counter of the first special symbol in the work RAM 303, and when the command is a "second special symbol variation pattern command", 1 is subtracted from the reserved number counter of the second special symbol in the work RAM 303. In addition, a reserved shift display pattern for shifting and displaying the reserved image of the special symbol subtracted this time is determined. Furthermore, various information stored in the decorative symbol determination area, the first decorative symbol start memory area, and the second decorative symbol start memory area of the work RAM 303 is shifted in the same manner as the special symbol determination area, the first special symbol start memory area, and the second special symbol start memory area of the main RAM 203.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S10631-22.

In S10631-22, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the presentation mode information stored in the presentation mode information storage area of the work RAM 303, and performs a pattern presentation table determination process to determine the pattern presentation pattern determination table.

In this symbol effect table determination process, in the chance effect mode, the symbol effect pattern determination table CZ shown in Fig. 369(a) is determined, in the general effect mode, the symbol effect pattern determination table NR shown in Fig. 369(b) is determined, in the heaven effect mode, the symbol effect pattern determination table TE shown in Fig. 370 is determined, and in the Sengoku time effect mode, the symbol effect pattern determination table RU shown in Fig. 371 is determined.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S10631-23.

In S10631-23, the sub-CPU 301 performs a pattern presentation pattern determination process to determine the pattern presentation pattern.

In this pattern presentation pattern determination process, after acquiring a first random number value, the pattern presentation pattern determination table determined in the pattern presentation table determination process is referred to, and a pattern presentation pattern is determined based on various information associated with the pattern presentation pattern determination table.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S10631-24.

At S10631-24, the sub-CPU 301 performs a preview performance pattern determination process to determine the preview performance pattern.

In this preview performance pattern determination process, after obtaining a predetermined random number value, a preview performance pattern determination table (not shown) is referenced to determine the preview performance pattern to be executed for that variation based on the received special pattern variation pattern command and the obtained second random number value, etc.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 377).

In S10631-30, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol effect stop command."

If it is determined in S10631-30 that the command is a "special symbol effect stop command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S10631-31. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol effect stop command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S10631-40.

In S10631-31, the sub-CPU 301 performs a pattern presentation end process to end the pattern presentation.

In the symbol effect end process, symbol effect execution end data for ending the execution of the symbol effect by the symbol effect pattern is created. Also, in the symbol effect end process, symbol stop display data for stopping and displaying the stop pattern of the decorative pattern determined by the decorative pattern determination process is created.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S10631-32.

In S10631-32, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the state information (current game state) stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and performs a count counter update process to update various counters.

In this count counter update process, when in normal game mode, the "normal variation count counter" in work RAM 303, which counts the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in normal game mode, is updated by adding 1. Also, when in time-saving game mode and the first special symbol performance stop command is issued, the "sub special symbol time-saving counter" in work RAM 303, which counts the number of times the special symbol is displayed in time-saving game mode, is updated by subtracting 1.

Furthermore, when the fifth time-saving play state is reached, the "sub-switch count counter" in the work RAM 303, which counts the number of times the special symbol has switched in the fifth time-saving play state, is updated by subtracting 1 from it.

In addition, in the count counter update process, when the look-ahead flag indicating that the look-ahead performance is being executed is on, the "look-ahead count counter" in the work RAM 303 is updated by subtracting 1 from it.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S10631-33.

At S10631-33, the sub-CPU 301 performs a presentation mode transition process to transition between presentation modes, etc.

In this processing for transitioning to a presentation mode, when the game is in a time-saving game state, the sub-special symbol time-saving counter is referenced, and when the sub-special symbol time-saving counter = 0, the game state information for the normal game state is stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303.

In addition, in the process of transitioning to a presentation mode, etc., when the look-ahead flag indicating that a look-ahead presentation is being executed is on, the "look-ahead count counter" in the work RAM 303 is referenced, and if the look-ahead count counter = 0, the look-ahead flag is turned off (= 00H).
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 377).

In S10631-40, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "small win start display command."

If it is determined in S10631-40 that the command is a "small win start display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S10631-41. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "small win start display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S10631-42.

In S10631-41, the sub-CPU 301 performs a small win start effect determination process to determine a small win start effect pattern for performing a small win start effect.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 377).

In S10631-42, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "V pass command."

If it is determined in S10631-42 that the command is a "V pass command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10631-43. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "V pass command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10631-44.

In S10631-43, the sub-CPU 301 performs a V passing effect determination process to determine a V passing effect pattern for performing a V passing effect.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 377).

In S10631-44, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "small win end display command."

If it is determined in S10631-44 that the command is a "small win end display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S10631-45. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "small win end display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S10631-50.

In S10631-45, the sub-CPU 301 performs a small win end presentation determination process to determine a presentation pattern for performing a small win end presentation.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 377).

In S10631-50, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "jackpot start display command."

If it is determined in S10631-50 that the command is a "jackpot start display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S10631-51. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "jackpot start display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S10631-52.

In S10631-51, the sub-CPU 301 performs a jackpot start effect determination process to determine an effect pattern for performing a jackpot start effect. In this jackpot start effect determination process, the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 303 is referenced, and the effect pattern of the jackpot start effect is determined according to the stop symbol (winning symbol).
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 377).

In S10631-52, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "jackpot end display command."

If it is determined in S10631-52 that the command is a "jackpot end display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S10631-53. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "jackpot end display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S10631-60.

In S10631-53, the sub-CPU 301 performs a big win end effect determination process to determine an effect pattern for performing a big win end effect. In this big win end effect determination process, the effect pattern of the big win end effect is determined according to the stop symbol (winning symbol) stored in the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S10631-54.

In S10631-54, the sub-CPU 301 performs a count counter setting process to set various counters when the jackpot game state ends.

In this count counter setting process, the stopped symbol memory area of the work RAM 303 is referenced, and when the stopped symbol (winning symbol) transitions to a time-saving play state, the number of times (see FIG. 334(a)) corresponding to the "variable number of times special symbols are displayed" which is the time-saving end condition in that time-saving play state is set in the "sub special symbol time-saving counter" of the work RAM 303.

In addition, when the stopping pattern (winning pattern) transitions to the fifth time-saving game state, the number of times (see FIG. 334(a)) corresponding to the "switching count" of the stopping pattern (winning pattern) is set in the "sub-switching count counter" of the work RAM 303.

For example, as shown in FIG. 334(a), when the "special pattern selected pattern z1" is selected, the sub special pattern time-saving counter is set to 10,000 times and the sub switching count counter is set to 1 time, corresponding to the variable display count of the special pattern = 10,000 times and the switching count = 1 time as the time-saving end conditions.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 377).

In S10631-60, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "normal symbol variation pattern command."

If it is determined in S10631-60 that the command is a "regular symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S10631-61. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "regular symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S10631-70.

In S10631-61, the sub-CPU 301 performs a caption presentation pattern determination process to determine the caption presentation pattern.

In this caption presentation pattern determination process, after obtaining the second random number value, the caption presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 372 is referenced, and the caption presentation pattern is determined based on the received normal pattern variation pattern command and the second random number value.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 377).

In S10631-70, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "game state designation command."

If it is determined in S10631-70 that the command is a "game state designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S10631-71. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "game state designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S10631-80.

In S10631-71, the sub-CPU 301 analyzes the current game state from the game state designation command received this time, and determines whether the analyzed current game state differs from the state information stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, i.e., whether the game state has been updated.

If it is determined in S10631-71 that the game status has been updated, the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S10631-72. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game status has not been updated (the game status is maintained), the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S10631-80.

In S10631-72, the sub-CPU 301 performs a state information update process to update and store the state information indicating the current game state analyzed in S10631-71 above in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10631-73.

In S10631-73, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the state information updated in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and if the game is in the B time-shortened game state (fourth time-shortened game state) or the C time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state, second time-shortened game state, third time-shortened game state), it performs a BC time-shortened game state setting process.

In this BC time-saving game state setting process, when the current game state is updated to the B time-saving game state (fourth time-saving game state), the number of times (see FIG. 334(c)) corresponding to the "variable number of times the special symbol is displayed" of the time-saving end condition in the fourth time-saving game state is set in the "sub special symbol time-saving counter" of the work RAM 303. For example, in the fourth time-saving game state, the sub special symbol time-saving counter is set to 950 times.

In addition, when the current game state is updated to the C time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state), the number of times (see FIG. 334(b)) corresponding to the time-saving end condition "variable number of times of special symbol display" is set in the "sub special symbol time-saving counter" of the work RAM 303 according to the game state. For example, in the first time-saving game state, the sub special symbol time-saving counter is set to 950 times.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S10631-74.

In S10631-74, the sub-CPU 301 performs a presentation mode setting process to set the presentation mode.

In this presentation mode setting process, the presentation mode determination table shown in FIG. 368 is referenced to determine presentation mode information based on the current game state, and the determined presentation mode information is stored in the presentation mode information storage area of the work RAM 303.

Here, when the current game state is updated to the third time-saving game state or the sixth time-saving game state, the decorative pattern determination area and the second decorative pattern start memory area of the work RAM 303 are referenced, and when information corresponding to the start information of the second special pattern is stored, presentation mode information (0FH) indicating the Sengoku Time presentation mode is determined.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S10631-75.

In S10631-75, the sub-CPU 301 performs a first game stop notice end determination process to determine whether or not to end the execution of the first game stop notice.

In this first game stop notice termination judgment process, the first game stop notice termination judgment table shown in FIG. 375 is referenced to determine whether or not any of the termination conditions "Termination Condition 1" to "Termination Condition 4" is met, and if any of the termination conditions is met, the execution of the first game stop notice is terminated.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 377).

In S10631-80, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "demo display command."

If it is determined in S10631-80 that the command is a "demo display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10631-81. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "demo display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10631-90.

In S10631-81, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demo display presentation pattern determination process for determining a demo display presentation pattern for performing presentation during game standby.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 377).

In S10631-90, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "difference in number of balls command."

If it is determined in S10631-90 that the command is a "difference in number of balls command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10631-91. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "difference in number of balls command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10631-92.

In S10631-92, the sub-CPU 301 performs a ball difference storage process to store the ball difference.

In this difference in ball number storage process, the value of the MY judgment counter (value of the difference in ball number counter) corresponding to the received difference in ball number command is stored in the sub difference in ball number counter of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 377).

In S10631-92, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "game stop command."

If it is determined in S10631-92 that the command is a "game stop command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S10631-93. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "game stop command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S10631-99.

In S10631-93, the sub-CPU 301 performs a game stop notification process to provide a notification in response to the received game stop command.

In this first game stop notice end determination process, when the game stop command = 01H, execution of the first game stop notice is started, when the game stop command = 02H, execution of the second game stop notice is started, when the game stop command = 03H, execution of the third game stop notice is started, and when the game stop command = 04H, execution of the game stop notification is started.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S10631-94.

In S10631-94, the sub-CPU 301 performs game stop setting processing to set a game stop flag, etc.

In this game stop flag setting process, when the received game stop command is game stop command=04H, the game stop flag in the work RAM 303 is turned on (=01H). Furthermore, when the received game stop command is game stop command=04H, a predetermined counter (e.g., 5 minutes) corresponding to the forced alarm time is set in the forced alarm timer.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 377).

In S10631-99, the sub-CPU 301 also determines a presentation pattern in response to various commands received from the main CPU 201, and updates other counters. For example, the sub-CPU 301 updates the cumulative payout information of game balls in response to reception of a first large prize winning port command or a second large prize winning port command. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the presentation pattern determination process, and moves the process to the generation process of an animation request (see FIG. 377).
[12-7-4. Pre-reading performance decision process]
Next, with reference to Fig. 381, details of the look-ahead effect determination process executed by the sub-CPU 301 in the effect pattern determination process (see Fig. 378) will be described. Fig. 381 is a flow chart showing an example of the look-ahead effect determination process in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

At S10701, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the prohibition condition setting table for the look-ahead performance shown in FIG. 374, and determines whether any of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 3 has not been satisfied.

If it is determined in S10701 that none of the common prohibited conditions 1 to 3 are satisfied, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10702. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the common prohibited conditions 1 to 3 are satisfied, the sub-CPU 301 ends this pre-reading performance determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 377).

In S10702, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the state information (current game state) stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and performs a look-ahead performance table determination process to determine the look-ahead performance table.

In this look-ahead performance table determination process, when the game is in a normal game state, the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z1 shown in FIG. 373(a) is determined, and when the game is in the general game state, which is the first time-shortened game state, the third time-shortened game state, or the sixth time-shortened game state, the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z2 shown in FIG. 373(b) is determined.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S10703.

At S10703, the sub-CPU 301 performs a look-ahead performance pattern determination process to determine a look-ahead performance pattern.

In this look-ahead performance pattern determination process, after obtaining the third random number value, the look-ahead performance pattern determination table determined in the look-ahead performance table determination process is referenced, and the look-ahead performance pattern is determined based on the look-ahead command received from the main control circuit 200 and the third random number value.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S10704.

In S10704, the sub-CPU 301 performs a read-ahead count counter setting process to set the read-ahead count counter.

In this look-ahead count counter setting process, when a look-ahead performance pattern (look-ahead performance patterns Z01 to Z03) is determined, the look-ahead flag is turned on (=01H), and the reserved number counter for the first special pattern in work RAM 303 is referenced, and the number of times corresponding to the reserved number of the first special pattern is set in the look-ahead count counter in work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S10705.

At S10705, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether a specific look-ahead performance pattern (look-ahead performance patterns Z02, Z03) that executes a mode transition zone or a RUSH expectation zone has been determined.

If it is determined in S10705 that a specific look-ahead performance pattern has been determined, the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S10706. On the other hand, if it is determined that a specific look-ahead performance pattern has not been determined, the current look-ahead performance determination process is terminated, and processing is transferred to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 377).

At S10706, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the forbidden condition setting table for the look-ahead performance shown in FIG. 374 and determines whether or not either the unique forbidden condition 1 or the unique forbidden condition 2 has been met.

If it is determined in S10706 that either the unique prohibition condition 1 or the unique prohibition condition 2 has been met, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10707. On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the unique prohibition condition 1 nor the unique prohibition condition 2 has been met, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current look-ahead performance determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 377).

In S10707, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process of clearing the specific look-ahead performance pattern, the look-ahead flag, and the look-ahead count counter. That is, the specific look-ahead performance pattern is discarded, the look-ahead flag is turned off (=00H), and the look-ahead count counter is set to 0.
Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current look-ahead performance determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 377).

In this way, when any of the common prohibited conditions 1 to 3 is satisfied, the look-ahead performance of the expectation UP zone, the mode transition zone, and the RUSH expectation zone will not be executed. Also, when any of the specific prohibited conditions 1 or 2 is satisfied, the look-ahead performance of the expectation UP zone can be executed, but the look-ahead performance of the mode transition zone and the RUSH expectation zone will not be executed.
[12-7-5. Data Entry Processing]
Next, details of the data input process executed by the sub CPU 301 in the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 376) will be described with reference to Fig. 382. Fig. 382 is a flow chart showing an example of the data input process in the tenth pachinko game machine.

In S<b>10611 , the sub CPU 301 performs a command read process to read a command from the command input port 308 .
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S10612.

At S10612, the sub-CPU 301 performs effect button permission setting processing for each of the multiple effect buttons 54 (decision button, left/right button, up/down button) based on various effect conditions, etc., to set an operation valid period during which the input of operation information by the player using the effect button 54 is valid, and an operation invalid period during which the input of operation information by the player is invalid.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the game stop flag is on (=01H) and the forced notification time has not elapsed, an operation invalid time is set for all of the effect buttons 54. Also, when the game stop flag is on (=01H) and the forced notification time has elapsed, an operation valid period is set for some of the effect buttons 54 (left/right buttons, up/down buttons).
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S10613.

At S10613, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether operation information for any of the multiple effect buttons 54 has been input within the valid operation period.

If it is determined in S10613 that operation information for any of the multiple effect buttons 54 has been input within the valid operation period, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10614. On the other hand, if it is determined that operation information for none of the multiple effect buttons 54 has been input within the valid operation period, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current data input process and transfers the process to the command analysis process (see FIG. 376).

In S10614, when the sub-CPU 301 is executing a presentation based on a symbol presentation pattern, and inputs the first operation information corresponding to the decision button presentation button 54, the sub-CPU 301 performs a variable button setting process.

In this variable button setting process, a setting is made to execute a variable button effect (for example, a button cut-in effect) based on the contents of the executed symbol effect pattern and the lottery result of the special symbol.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S10615.

In S10615, when a presentation based on a symbol presentation pattern is not being executed, when the first operation information corresponding to the presentation button 54 of the decision button is input, a standby menu setting process is performed to display various presentation adjustment menus and QR codes (registered trademark).
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S10616.

In S10616, when the sub-CPU 301 inputs second operation information corresponding to the left and right button effect buttons 54, it performs a volume adjustment process to adjust the volume output from the speaker 32. Specifically, when the sub-CPU 301 inputs second operation information L corresponding to the left button effect button 54, it adjusts the volume down by one level, and when the sub-CPU 301 inputs second operation information R corresponding to the right button effect button 54, it adjusts the volume up by one level.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S10617.

In this embodiment, the volume adjustment process is performed by operating the effect button 54, but the volume may be automatically adjusted when an adjustment condition is met, without operating the effect button 54. For example, when the forced notification time has elapsed as a result of the adjustment condition being met by the generation process for the game stop related special request described above (see FIG. 377), the volume may be automatically adjusted to lower the volume.

In S10617, when the sub-CPU 301 inputs third operation information corresponding to the up/down button effect button 54, it performs a light intensity adjustment process to adjust the brightness of the emitted LED. Specifically, when the sub-CPU 301 inputs third operation information D corresponding to the down button effect button 54, it adjusts the brightness down by one step, and when the sub-CPU 301 inputs second operation information U corresponding to the up button effect button 54, it adjusts the brightness up by one step.
Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current data input process, and transfers the process to the command analysis process (see FIG. 376).

In this embodiment, the light intensity adjustment process is performed by operating the effect button 54, but the light intensity may be automatically adjusted when an adjustment condition is met, without operating the effect button 54. For example, when the forced notification time has elapsed as a result of the adjustment condition being met by the game stop related special request generation process described above (see FIG. 377), the light intensity may be automatically adjusted to be lowered.

[12-8. Game state transition diagram]
Next, a transition of a game state in the tenth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 383. Fig. 383 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing a transition of a game state in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, in the C time-saving game state (state flag = 3), the time-saving game state in which the normal power operation pattern = 00 is set is called the "first time-saving game state", the time-saving game state in which the normal power operation pattern = 02 is set is called the "second time-saving game state", and the time-saving game state in which the normal power operation pattern = 01 is set is called the "third time-saving game state". In the B time-saving game state (state flag = 2), the time-saving game state in which the normal power operation pattern = 02 is set is called the "fourth time-saving game state". In the A time-saving game state (state flag = 1), the time-saving game state in which the normal power operation pattern = 02 is set is called the "fifth time-saving game state", and the time-saving game state in which the normal power operation pattern = 00 is set is called the "sixth time-saving game state".

(Transition control of normal game state)
In the normal game state, left-handed hitting is considered the normal game mode, and the game ball can enter the first starting hole 10120, and the game ball can also pass through the second passing gate 10126L.

As shown in FIG. 383, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 10120 in normal game mode, a "big win," "time-saving win," or "miss" is determined by drawing a first special symbol (see FIG. 330). Regardless of the game mode, a "small win" is never determined by drawing a first special symbol.

When a "jackpot" is determined in the normal game state, the game transitions to the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends from the first route triggered by the jackpot, 60% of the time the game transitions to the fifth time-saving game state and 40% of the time the game transitions to the sixth time-saving game state depending on the selected pattern of the first special pattern (see Figures 331 and 334).

In addition, when a "time-saving hit" is determined in the normal game state, after the variable display of the first special symbol has ended, the game will transition to one of the C time-saving game states, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, or the third time-saving game state. Here, when a "time-saving hit" is determined, depending on the selected special symbol, 70% of the time will transition to the first time-saving game state, 15% of the time will transition to the second time-saving game state, and 15% of the time will transition to the third time-saving game state (see Figures 331 and 334).

In particular, in this embodiment, the "time-saving hit" is determined only in the drawing of the first special symbol in the normal game state (see FIG. 330). Therefore, it is possible to transition to the C time-saving game state, which is either the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, or the third time-saving game state, only from the normal game state.

In addition, in the normal game state, when a game ball passes through the second passing gate 10126L, a "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern miss" is determined by a normal pattern lottery, but the "long opening probability" that determines the long opening pattern is "0" because the normal power operation pattern is 00 (see Figure 340). In other words, in the normal game state, it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 10140.

In addition, if the number of times the special symbols are displayed reaches the ceiling value (950 times) without transitioning to the jackpot game state, the game will transition from the normal game state to the fourth time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state.

As a result, the normal game state will transition to a jackpot game state, a first time-saving game state, a second time-saving game state, a third time-saving game state, and a fourth time-saving game state.

(Transition control of first time-saving gaming state)
In the first time-saving gaming state, left-handed hitting is considered the normal gaming mode, and the gaming ball can enter the first starting hole 10120 and can also pass through the second passing gate 10126L.

In the first time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 10120, a "jackpot" or "miss" is determined by drawing a lottery for the first special symbol (see Figure 330). Note that a "time-saving hit" is not determined by drawing a lottery for the first special symbol in any time-saving game state.

When a "jackpot" is determined in the first time-saving game state, the game transitions to a jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends from the first route triggered by the jackpot, 60% of the time will transition to a fifth time-saving game state, and 40% of the time will transition to a sixth time-saving game state, depending on the selected first special symbol (see Figures 331 and 334).

In addition, in the first time-saving game state, when a game ball passes through the second passing gate 10126L, a "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern miss" is determined by a normal pattern lottery, but because the normal power operation pattern is 00, the "long opening probability" that determines the long opening pattern is "0" (see Figure 340). In other words, in the first time-saving game state, it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 10140.

The first time-saving game state has the same "long opening probability" as the normal game state, and since a "time-saving hit" is not derived as in the normal game state, it is a disadvantageous game state in which it is more difficult to transition to a big hit game state than when in the normal game state.

In addition, if the number of times the special symbols are displayed reaches the ceiling value (950 times) without transitioning to the big win game state, the game will transition from the first time-saving game state to the fourth time-saving game state, which is the B time-saving game state.

Here, when the game is shifted to the first time-saving game state, the third time-saving number of times, 950 times, is set as the "number of times of variable display of special symbols" of the time-saving end condition (see FIG. 334). However, in the first time-saving game state, the number of times of variable display of special symbols will have reached the ceiling value (950 times) before the third time-saving number is counted.
For this reason, the first time-shortened game state can only be transitioned to the big win game state or the fourth time-shortened game state.

(Transition control of the third time-saving gaming state)
In the third time-saving gaming state, left-handed hitting is the normal gaming mode, and the gaming ball can enter the first starting hole 10120 and can also pass through the second passing gate 10126L.

In the third time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 10120, a "jackpot" or "miss" is determined by drawing lots for the first special pattern (see Figure 330).

Then, if a "jackpot" is determined in the third time-saving game state, the game will transition to a jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends from the first route triggered by the jackpot, 60% of the time will transition to a fifth time-saving game state, and 40% of the time will transition to a sixth time-saving game state, depending on the selected pattern of the first special pattern (see Figures 331 and 334).

In addition, in the third time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the second passing gate 10126L, a "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern miss" is determined by a normal pattern lottery, but the "long opening probability" that determines the long opening pattern due to normal power operation pattern = 01 is "approximately 1/202" (see Figure 340). In other words, in the third time-saving game state, it is possible for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 10140 with a predetermined probability (approximately 1/202).

Here, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 10140, regardless of the game state, it is judged to be a "small hit" with a high probability of approximately 1/3 (see Figure 330), and it is configured so that it is possible to transition from the small hit game state to a big hit game state via a second route.
Therefore, when the game is in the third time-shortened game state, the game state becomes more advantageous in that it is easier to transition to a big win game state than when the game is in the first time-shortened game state.

In addition, if the number of times the special symbols are displayed reaches the ceiling value (950 times) without transitioning to the big win game state, the game will transition from the third time-saving game state to the fourth time-saving game state, which is the B time-saving game state.

Here, when the game state is shifted to the third time-saving game state, the fifth time-saving number of times, 950 times, is set as the "number of times of variable display of special symbols" of the time-saving end condition (see FIG. 334). However, in the third time-saving game state, the number of times of variable display of special symbols will have reached the ceiling value (950 times) before the fifth time-saving number is counted.
For this reason, the third time-saving game state can only be transitioned to the big win game state or the fourth time-saving game state.

(Transition control of the sixth time-saving gaming state)
In the sixth time-saving gaming state, left-handed hitting is considered the normal gaming mode, and the gaming ball can enter the first starting hole 10120 and can also pass through the second passing gate 10126L.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 10120 in the sixth time-saving game state, a "jackpot" or "miss" is determined by drawing lots for the first special pattern (see Figure 330).

Then, if a "jackpot" is determined in the sixth time-saving game state, the game will transition to a jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends from the first route triggered by the jackpot, 60% of the time will transition to the fifth time-saving game state, and 40% of the time will transition to the sixth time-saving game state, depending on the selected pattern of the first special pattern (see Figures 331 and 334).

In addition, in the sixth time-saving game state, when a game ball passes through the second passing gate 10126L, a normal symbol is drawn to determine whether it is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", but because the normal power operation pattern is 00, the "long opening probability" that determines the long opening pattern is "0" (see Figure 340). In other words, in the sixth time-saving game state, it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 10140.

In addition, if the number of times the special symbols are displayed reaches the ceiling value (950 times) without transitioning to the big win game state, the game will transition from the sixth time-saving game state to the fourth time-saving game state, which is the B time-saving game state.

Here, when the game state is shifted to the sixth time-saving game state, the first time-saving number of times, 10,000 times, is set as the "variable number of times of displaying special symbols" of the time-saving end condition (see FIG. 334). However, the second time-saving number of times, 10,000 times, is a number that cannot be achieved in one day of play, and is essentially equivalent to an infinite number of times.
For this reason, from the sixth time-saving game state, it is only possible to transition to the big win game state or the fourth time-saving game state.

(RUSH Game State Transition Control)
In the second time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving game state, and the fifth time-saving game state, which are RUSH game states, right-hand hitting is considered the normal game mode, the game ball can pass through the first passing gate 10126R, and the second starting gate 10140 is opened long by a normal pattern lottery, allowing the game ball to enter the second starting gate 10140.

In the RUSH game state, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 10140, a "big win", "small win" or "miss" is determined by drawing a second special symbol (see FIG. 330). In particular, in this embodiment, the drawing of the second special symbol is configured to determine a "small win" with a high probability of about 1/3.

When a "small win" is determined in the RUSH game state, the game state transitions to the small win game state, and when the game ball enters the V winning hole 10156 provided inside the second large winning hole 10151 in the small win game state, the game state transitions to the large win game state. Note that in this embodiment, when the game ball enters the second large winning hole 10151 in the small win game state, the game ball is configured to pass through the V winning hole 10156 as a general rule.
Then, after the end of the big win game state from the second route triggered by a small win, 80% of the time will transition to the fifth time-shortened game state, and 20% of the time will transition to the sixth time-shortened game state, depending on the selected special pattern (see Figures 331 and 334).

In addition, when a "jackpot" is determined in the RUSH gaming state, the game transitions to the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends from the first route triggered by the jackpot, the game transitions to the fifth time-saving gaming state 100% depending on the selected symbol of the second special symbol (see Figures 331 and 334).

In addition, in the RUSH gaming state, when the gaming ball passes through the first passing gate 10126R, a "normal symbol hit" or "normal symbol miss" is determined by a normal symbol lottery, but the "long opening probability" that determines the long opening pattern is "1/4" due to the normal power operation pattern = 02 (see Figure 340). In other words, in the RUSH gaming state, there is a predetermined probability (1/4) that the gaming ball will enter the second starting hole 10140.

In addition, when the RUSH game state transitions to the second time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving number of times, 950 times, is set as the "variable number of times of displaying special symbols" of the time-saving end condition (see FIG. 334). This fourth time-saving number of times is the number of times that is guaranteed to transition to the big win game state, since the "small win" is determined by the lottery of the second special symbol in about 1/3.
Therefore, the second time-saving gaming state of the RUSH gaming state will transition to a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, when the RUSH game state transitions to the fourth time-saving game state, the sixth time-saving number of times, 950 times, is set as the "variable number of times of displaying special symbols" of the time-saving end condition (see FIG. 334). This sixth time-saving number of times is the number of times that is guaranteed to transition to the big win game state, since the "small win" is determined by the lottery of the second special symbol in about 1/3.
Therefore, the fourth time-saving gaming state of the RUSH gaming state will transition to a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, when the RUSH gaming state transitions to the fifth time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving number of times, 10,000 times, is set as the "variable display number of special symbols" of the time-saving end condition, and the switching number of times, 1 or 5, is set according to the selected special symbol (see FIG. 334). Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed 1 or 5 times, which is the switching number, without transitioning to the jackpot gaming state, the fifth time-saving gaming state transitions to the sixth time-saving gaming state.
Therefore, the fifth time-saving game state of the RUSH game state will transition to a jackpot game state or a sixth time-saving game state.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when a "time-saving hit" is determined only in the drawing of the first special symbol in the normal game state, the game state can be shifted to the second time-saving game state in the RUSH game state. Also, the game state can be shifted to the big win game state from the second time-saving game state in the RUSH game state.
As a result, the rate of transition from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state can be increased, making the game even more enjoyable.

And because the normal game state is also the initial game state after the RAM is cleared, when the power is turned on after the RAM is cleared, the game can be started in the normal game state, which is more advantageous than the first time-saving game state, which is the general game state, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved after the opening of the gaming facility.

In particular, in this embodiment, the normal game state (first time-saving game state, third time-saving game state, sixth time-saving game state) can only be transitioned to the jackpot game state or the fourth time-saving game state, and the fourth time-saving game state can only be transitioned to the jackpot game state. Furthermore, if the jackpot game state is transitioned to the fifth time-saving game state or the sixth time-saving game state after the jackpot game state ends, the time-saving game state will not end unless the jackpot game state is transitioned to.
Therefore, after the first big win game state, the big win game state and the time-saving game state of the fifth or sixth time-saving game state will be looped infinitely unless the RAM is cleared. In other words, after the first big win game state, the game is configured not to transition to the normal game state except during the big win game state.
This allows the machine to transition to the normal game state only by clearing the RAM, and it is also possible to suppress gambling (balls dispensed) during normal business hours without clearing the RAM, or to clear the RAM and transition to the normal game state during a special event.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of a long reel opening differs depending on the normal power operation pattern during the time-saving game state, so multiple time-saving game states with different long reel opening probabilities can be enjoyed, further increasing the excitement of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the game is in the third time-saving game state, which is the general game state, it is an advantageous game state in which a long opening is more likely to occur and it is easier to transition to a jackpot game state than when the game is in the first time-saving game state, which is the general game state.
As a result, even if a "time-saving hit" is determined in the normal game state but the game state is not shifted to the RUSH game state, the player can have the expectation of the third time-saving game state in the general game state, thereby maintaining interest in the game.

[12-9. Production flow]
Next, an outline of the effects performed in the tenth pachinko gaming machine will be described using the overall flow of the effects. FIG. 384 shows an example of the flow of the effects in the effect mode in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the game is configured with four presentation modes: chance presentation mode, general presentation mode, heaven presentation mode, and Sengoku time presentation mode.

And, based on each presentation mode, it is possible to execute presentations such as a pattern presentation consisting of a display of a predetermined decorative pattern during the change, a preview presentation that suggests in advance the result of the lottery for the special pattern during the change, a caption presentation that suggests in advance the result of the lottery for the normal pattern during the change, and a pre-reading presentation that suggests in advance the result of the lottery for the special pattern during the advance change.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol is also called the "first special symbol effect," and the effect based on the lottery of the second special symbol is also called the "second special symbol effect."

(Chance mode)
The chance presentation mode can be executed in the normal gaming state. This chance presentation mode can suggest that the normal gaming state is more advantageous than the first time-saving gaming state.

In the chance presentation mode, the system is configured to be able to execute effects such as pattern presentation, advance notice presentation, and pre-reading presentation based on the chance presentation mode. Note that in the chance presentation mode, the second starting hole 10140 is not opened for a long time, so the subtitle presentation cannot be executed.

In addition, in the chance presentation mode, at least the "card presentation" and "RUSH entry presentation" can be executed as pattern presentations.

As described above, the "card effect" is an effect that suggests that the game state will transition to one of the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state during the change. In addition, the "RUSH entry effect" is an effect that suggests whether or not the game state will transition to the second time-saving game state (RUSH game state) during the change.

In addition, in the chance performance mode, at least the "mode transition zone," "expectation UP zone," and "RUSH expectation zone" can be executed as pre-reading performances.

As described above, the "mode transition zone" is a presentation that suggests in advance that a time-saving hit has occurred and that the game state will transition from the normal game state to either the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, or the third time-saving game state in a pre-change. The "expectation UP zone" is a presentation that suggests in advance that a specified presentation (super reach) will occur in a pre-change, and that the game state will transition to a jackpot game state or the second time-saving game state (RUSH game state). The "RUSH expectation zone" is a presentation that suggests in advance that the game state will transition to the second time-saving game state (RUSH game state) in a pre-change.

When a jackpot is hit in chance mode, the game transitions to jackpot play mode, and the jackpot performance can be executed.

In the chance presentation mode, if a time-saving hit is won, when transitioning to the first time-saving play state, the mode transitions to the general presentation mode, when transitioning to the second time-saving play state, the mode transitions to the Sengoku Time presentation mode, and when transitioning to the third time-saving play state, the mode transitions to the Heaven presentation mode. Note that in the chance presentation mode, if a time-saving hit is won, when transitioning to the third time-saving play state, the mode transitions to the Heaven presentation mode or the general presentation mode may be configured.

In the chance mode, if the number of times the special symbols are displayed reaches the ceiling value (950 times) without transitioning to a jackpot game state, the game will transition from the chance mode to the Sengoku time mode.

(General performance mode)
The general presentation mode can be executed in the first time-saving game state or the sixth time-saving game state in the general game state. This general presentation mode can suggest that the general game state is unfavorable.

In the general presentation mode, the system is configured to be able to execute effects such as pattern effects, preview effects, and pre-reading effects based on the general presentation mode. Note that in the general presentation mode, the second starting port 10140 is not opened for a long time, so subtitle effects cannot be executed, but subtitle effects may be executed in the general presentation mode.

In addition, in the general presentation mode, the "Expectation Up Zone" can be implemented as a pre-reading presentation, but since there is no chance of winning the time-saving jackpot, the "Mode Transition Zone" and "RUSH Expectation Zone" cannot be implemented.

When a jackpot is won in the general presentation mode, the game transitions to the jackpot play state, and the jackpot presentation can be executed.

In the general presentation mode, if the number of times the special symbols are displayed reaches the ceiling value (950 times) without transitioning to a jackpot game state, the mode will transition from the general presentation mode to the Sengoku Time presentation mode.

(Heaven production mode)
The heaven effect mode can be executed in the third time-saving gaming state in the general gaming state. This heaven effect mode can suggest that the general gaming state (third time-saving gaming state) is advantageous.

In the heavenly performance mode, the device is configured to be able to execute performances such as pattern performances, advance notice performances, pre-reading performances, and subtitle performances based on the heavenly performance mode.

When a jackpot is hit in the Heaven Presentation Mode, the game transitions to the jackpot game state, and the jackpot presentation can be executed.

In the Heaven Presentation Mode, when the second start hole 10140 is opened long and a game ball enters the second start hole 10140, the Heaven Presentation Mode transitions to the Sengoku Time Presentation Mode.

In the Heaven Presentation Mode, if the number of times the special symbols are displayed reaches the ceiling value (950 times) without transitioning to a jackpot game state, the game will transition from the Heaven Presentation Mode to the Sengoku Time Presentation Mode.

As mentioned above, regardless of whether the RAM is cleared or not, when the power is turned on, if the same pattern presentation pattern can be determined so that the heaven presentation mode, general presentation mode, and chance presentation mode have a common background display mode, it is desirable to start from a common presentation mode (for example, chance presentation mode) when the power is turned on.

(Sengoku time production mode)
The Sengoku time presentation mode can be executed in the second short play state, the fourth short play state, and the fifth short play state in the RUSH play state, and when the game ball enters the second start hole 10140 in the heaven play mode. This Sengoku time presentation mode can suggest that the game is in a state where it is easy to transition to a big win play state.

In the Sengoku Time presentation mode, the system is configured to be able to execute effects such as pattern presentations, preview presentations, and pre-reading presentations based on the Sengoku Time presentation mode.

When a jackpot is hit in Sengoku Time mode, the game transitions to jackpot play mode, and the jackpot performance can be executed.

In the Sengoku Time presentation mode, if a game ball enters the second start hole 10140 during the Heaven presentation mode, when the start information for the second special pattern disappears, the mode will transition (return) from the Sengoku Time presentation mode to the Heaven presentation mode.

In the Sengoku Time presentation mode, if the fifth time-saving play state is reached, the game will not transition to a big win play state, and if the special symbol is displayed variably one or five times (the number of times the game is switched), the game will transition from the Sengoku Time presentation mode to the general presentation mode.

[12-10. Time chart for game stop notice]
Next, an outline of the game stop notice performed in the tenth pachinko gaming machine will be described. FIG. 385 is an example of a time chart of the game stop notice by the game stop command in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 385 shows the "game status", the "alarm device (display device 7, speaker 32, LED group 46)", the "game stop flag" indicating that the game has stopped, and the "increased number of game balls (MY)" at the top and bottom.

Figure 385 (a) is an example of a time chart 1 in which the first game stop notice is executed when the first game stop notice start condition is met if the increase in the number of game balls (MY) is within the first counting range (85,000 to 89,999).

At the timing (A) shown in FIG. 385(a), when the increase in the number of game balls (MY) is within the first counting range, the first game stop notice start condition is met, and the notification device starts executing the first game stop notice. Here, as an example of the first game stop notice start condition being met, it is met when the special symbol selected symbol z1 is in a jackpot game state (see FIG. 342). An example of the notification mode of the first game stop notice will be described in detail later.

At the timing (i) shown in FIG. 385(a), if the increase in the number of game balls (MY) does not reach the second counting range and the increase in the number of game balls (MY) is within the first counting range, the first game stop notice termination condition is met and the execution of the first game stop notice ends in the notification device. Here, as an example of the first game stop notice termination condition being met, the game state transitions to the sixth time-saving game state (see FIG. 375).

In this way, according to the time chart 1 shown in FIG. 385(a), when the game state is such that the player can be expected to acquire a large amount of game value (game balls), the execution of the first game stop notice can be started before the second counting range. Then, when the increase in the number of game balls (MY) does not reach the second counting range due to that game state, the execution of the first game stop notice can be terminated.

Figure 385 (b) is an example of a time chart 2 in which a second game stop notice and game stop notification are executed when the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches a second counting range (90,000 to 94,999) after the execution of the first game stop notice is completed.

The timing of (A) and (B) shown in FIG. 385(b) is the same as the timing of (A) and (B) shown in FIG. 385(a) described above. In other words, when the increase in the number of game balls (MY) is within the first counting range, the execution of the first game stop notice is started when the first game stop notice start condition is met, and the execution of the first game stop notice is ended when the first game stop notice end condition is met.

At the timing (u) shown in Figure 385 (b), the small win game state, the big win game state, and the RUSH game state are not being executed, and game balls enter the first start port 10120, the general winning port 122, etc., and a specified number of prize balls are paid out, causing the increase in the number of game balls (MY) to reach the second counting range (90,000 to 94,999).
At this time, since the first game stop notification has already been executed, the second game stop notification start condition is not met, and the second game stop notification is not executed (see Figure 342).

At the timing (E) shown in FIG. 385(b), the jackpot game state is executed, and the second game stop notification start condition is met, and the notification device starts executing the second game stop notification. This second game stop notification is executed continuously until the increase in the number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulated value (95,000). An example of the notification mode of the second game stop notification will be described in detail later.

At the timing (O) shown in Figure 385 (b), the small hit game state or the big hit game state is not being executed, and the increase in the number of game balls (MY) has reached the regulated value (95,000).
At this time, the game stop flag is turned on, and a first game stop notification is executed in the notification device as a game stop notification.

At timing (f) shown in Figure 385 (b), the forced notification time has elapsed after the game stop flag was turned on.
At this time, as a game stop notification, a second game stop notification different from the first game stop notification is executed in the notification device. Also, when the second game stop notification is executed, input of operation information of a predetermined effect button 54 becomes effective, and volume adjustment and light amount adjustment become possible. An example of the notification mode of the first game stop notification and the second game stop notification will be described in detail later.

In this way, according to time chart 2 shown in Figure 385 (b), if the first game stop notice has already been executed, the execution of the second game stop notice can be started when the player reaches a game state (such as a jackpot game state) in which he or she can expect to acquire a predetermined game value (game balls).

Furthermore, if the first game stop notice has already been executed, the execution of the second game stop notice will not be started even when the increase in the number of game balls (MY) reaches the second counting range as a result of game balls entering the first start port 10120 or the general winning port 122, etc., and a specified number of prize balls being paid out (period (C) to (E)).
As a result, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 10120 or the general winning port 122, etc., and a specified number of prize balls are paid out so that the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the second counting range, but the increased number of game balls (MY) falls below the second counting range due to the release of the game ball (such as when it is around the first boundary value of 90,000), the game stop notice will not be executed or terminated, thereby eliminating the annoyance caused by the game stop notice.

Furthermore, as a game stop notification, a first game stop notification is executed when the game stop flag is turned on, and a second game stop notification is executed after the forced notification time has elapsed, so that an appropriate notification can be made depending on the time that has elapsed since the game stop notification.

Figure 385 (c) is an example of a time chart 3 in which a second game stop notice and game stop notification are executed when the increase in the number of game balls (MY) reaches the second counting range (90,000 to 94,999) without executing the first game stop notice.

At the timing (u) shown in Figure 385 (c), the small win game state, the big win game state, and the RUSH game state are not being executed, and game balls enter the first start port 10120, the general winning port 122, etc., and a specified number of prize balls are paid out, causing the increase in the number of game balls (MY) to reach the second counting range (90,000 to 94,999).
At this time, since the first game stop notice was not executed, the second game stop notice start condition is established, and the notification device starts executing the second game stop notice (see FIG. 342). This second game stop notice is continuously executed until the increase in the number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulation value (95,000).

Then, at the timings (e) and (f) shown in FIG. 385(c), the first game stop notification and the second game stop notification are executed in the notification device, similar to the time chart 2 shown in FIG. 385(b).

In this way, according to time chart 3 shown in Figure 385 (c), when the first game stop notice is not executed and the increase in the number of game balls (MY) approaches the regulated value (95,000), the second game stop notice is quickly executed to notify the player in advance that the game will be stopped.

Figure 385 (d) is an example of a time chart 4 that executes the first game stop notice, the second game stop notice, the third game stop notice, and the game stop notification.

At the timing (A) shown in FIG. 385(d), if the increase in the number of game balls (MY) is within the first counting range, the first game stop notification start condition is met, and the notification device starts executing the first game stop notification.

At the timing (c) shown in Figure 385 (d), in the RUSH gaming state, the increased number of game balls (MY) has reached the second counting range (90,000 to 94,999).
At this time, the second game stop notice start condition is satisfied, and the notification device starts executing the second game stop notice (see FIG. 342). This second game stop notice is continuously executed until the increase in the number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulation value (95,000).

At the timing (K) shown in Figure 385 (d), when a jackpot game state is being played, the increase in the number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulated value (95,000).
At this time, the game is not stopped, the game stop flag is kept off, and during the big win game state, the notification device starts executing the third game stop notice (see FIG. 342). An example of the notification mode of the third game stop notice will be described in detail later.

At the timing (k) shown in Figure 385 (d), the jackpot game state ends after the increase in the number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulated value (95,000).
At this time, the game stop flag is turned on, and a first game stop notification is executed in the notification device as a game stop notification.

Then, at timing (f) shown in FIG. 385(d), the second game stop notification is executed in the notification device, similar to time chart 2 shown in FIG. 385(b).

In this way, according to time chart 4 shown in Figure 385 (d), if play stops after the big win game state ends, the third game stop notice during the big win game state can notify the specific game stop content (for example, "game will stop after this big win game state ends").

[12-11. Production Contents]
Regarding the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300, etc., an example of the effects of the display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 will be described below.

(Basic configuration of display image)
First, the basic structure of a display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 will be described with reference to Fig. 386. Fig. 386 is an example of an explanatory diagram of the basic structure of a display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 in the tenth pachinko gaming machine. Fig. 386(a) shows the basic structure of a display image in the normal gaming state and the general gaming state, and Fig. 386(b) shows the basic structure of a display image in the RUSH gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 386, the decorative patterns are composed of two types: a "main pattern" as a first decorative pattern that is displayed large so that it is easy for the player to recognize in the display area of the display device 7, and a "sub-pattern" as a second decorative pattern that is displayed small so that it is difficult for the player to recognize. Note that the types of decorative patterns are not limited to this.

(Basic configuration of display images in normal gaming state and general gaming state)
As shown in Fig. 386(a), the basic configuration of the display image in the normal game state and the general game state is configured so that a left pattern 10071L, a middle pattern 10071C, and a right pattern 10071R can be displayed as main patterns corresponding to the first special pattern at the center side of the display area of the display device 7. The number of main patterns is not limited to three.

In addition, the right corner of the display area of the display device 7 is configured to be able to display small first sub-pattern 10072 as a sub-pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, second sub-pattern 10073 as a sub-pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern, and third sub-pattern 10075 as a sub-pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the normal pattern.

In this embodiment, when the first special symbol is variable displayed during normal or general game play, in addition to the variable display of the main symbols, the left symbol 10071L, the middle symbol 10071C, and the right symbol 10071R, the first sub-symbol 10072 is also variable displayed.

In addition, when the second special symbol is variably displayed during normal game mode or normal game mode, only the second sub-symbol 10073 is variably displayed, and the main decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is not displayed. In addition, when the normal symbol is variably displayed during normal game mode or normal game mode, only the third sub-symbol 10075 is variably displayed, and the main decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is not displayed.

In the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the first special symbol can be displayed, and a first reserved image 10074a indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (1), a second reserved image 10074b indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (2), a third reserved image 10074c indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (3), and a fourth reserved image 10074d indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (4) can be displayed according to the reserved number of the first special symbol. Also, in response to the reserved image, the reserved image 10074z indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed is displayed. In this embodiment, a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the second special symbol is not displayed in the normal game state, but a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the second special symbol may be displayed.

(Basic configuration of display image in RUSH gaming state)
As shown in Figure 386 (b), the basic configuration of the display image in the RUSH game state is such that a left pattern 10076L, a middle pattern 10076C and a right pattern 10076R can be displayed as main patterns of decorative patterns corresponding to the second special pattern at the center of the display area of the display device 7.

In addition, in the right corner of the display area of the display device 7, a first sub-pattern 10072 corresponding to the first special pattern, a second sub-pattern 10073 corresponding to the second special pattern, and a third sub-pattern 10075 corresponding to the normal pattern can be displayed small, just as in the normal game mode and the general game mode.

In this embodiment, when the second special symbol is displayed in a RUSH game state, in addition to the main symbols, left symbol 10076L, middle symbol 10076C, and right symbol 10076R, the second sub-symbol 10073 is also displayed in a variable manner. When the first special symbol is displayed in a RUSH game state, only the first sub-symbol 10072 is displayed in a variable manner, and the main decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed. When the normal symbol is displayed in a RUSH game state, only the third sub-symbol 10075 is displayed in a variable manner, and the main decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is not displayed.

In the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the second special symbol can be displayed. According to the reserved number of the second special symbol, a first reserved image 10077a indicating that start information is stored in the second special symbol start memory area (1), a second reserved image 10077b indicating that start information is stored in the second special symbol start memory area (2), a third reserved image 10077c indicating that start information is stored in the second special symbol start memory area (3), and a fourth reserved image 10077d indicating that start information is stored in the second special symbol start memory area (4) can be displayed. In addition, the reserved image 10077z indicating that the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed is displayed in response to the reserved image. In this embodiment, reserved images corresponding to the reserved numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in the RUSH game state, but reserved images corresponding to the reserved numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be displayed.

The upper right corner of the display area of the display device 7 is configured to display a right-hit instruction image 10079 that instructs right-hitting as the correct game mode.

In this way, in the normal game state and the general game state, the main symbol and reserved image of the decorative symbol correspond to the first special symbol so that it is easy to recognize the first game characteristic in which the player aims to reach the big win game state by drawing the first special symbol, and in the RUSH game state, the main symbol and reserved image of the decorative symbol correspond to the second special symbol so that it is easy to recognize the second game characteristic in which the player aims to reach the big win game state or the small win game state by drawing the second special symbol. In other words, the first decorative symbol (main symbol) becomes a symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the normal game state and the general game state, and is replaced with a symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the RUSH game state.

(Card presentation)
Next, the card effects in the chance effect mode will be described with reference to Fig. 387. Fig. 387 is an example of a display image for explaining the card effects in the chance effect mode in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, in explaining the card effects, the symbols in Figure 386 will be omitted because the characters will be small and difficult to see, which may interfere with the explanation of the effect content. In addition, the first sub-pattern 10072, second sub-pattern 10073, and third sub-pattern 10075, which are displayed very small, will also be omitted. This also applies to the effects explained in Figures 387 to 392.

Figure 387 (a) is an example of a display image before the variable display of the first special symbol begins in the chance presentation mode.

Figure 387 (b) shows an example of a display image when the first special symbol that was won during the time-saving hit is displayed in a changing state and the card performance begins.

As shown in FIG. 387(b), when the symbol presentation pattern (see FIG. 369) for executing the card presentation is decided and the card presentation starts, the chance cards with the words "General Presentation Mode", "Heaven Presentation Mode", and "Sengoku Time Presentation Mode" written on them are shuffled face down, and a presentation is performed in which one of the cards is selected. Here, there are two types of card presentation: a white card presentation in which a white card is displayed, and a red card presentation in which a red card is displayed. The red card presentation has a higher expected value of transitioning to the Sengoku Time Presentation Mode (second time-saving game state) than the white card presentation. In addition, the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols that were displayed large in the center of the display area are displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the display area so as not to interfere with the card presentation and are easily identifiable by the player.

Figure 387 (c) is an example of a display image when the first special pattern is displayed in a changing manner and the results of the card presentation are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 387(c), when one card is selected in the card presentation, the card is slowly flipped over and a chance card with the words "General Presentation Mode" written on it is displayed.

Figure 387 (d) is an example of a display image that notifies the user that the display of the first special symbol has ended and that the general presentation mode has been entered.

As shown in FIG. 387(d), when a chance card with the words "General Presentation Mode" is displayed, the main left, middle, and right symbols, which are displayed in reduced size at the bottom right of the display area, are displayed stopped large in the center of the display area. After that, the display mode of the background changes, and it is announced that the mode has been switched to general presentation mode.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the background in the chance presentation mode and the display mode of the background in the general presentation mode are configured to be different, but the display mode of the background may be the same.

In this way, the card presentation can suggest a transition to one of the first, second, or third time-saving game states, making the game even more exciting.

(RUSH entry performance)
Next, the RUSH entry presentation in the chance presentation mode will be described with reference to Fig. 388. Fig. 388 is an example of a display image for explaining the RUSH entry presentation in the chance presentation mode in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 388 (a) is an example of a display image before the variable display of the first special symbol begins in the chance presentation mode.

Figure 388 (b) shows an example of a display image when the first special symbol that was won during the time-saving hit is displayed in a changing state and the RUSH entry effect begins.

As shown in Figure 388 (b), when the symbol presentation pattern (see Figure 369) for executing the RUSH entry presentation is determined and the RUSH entry presentation starts, half-open doors are displayed on the left and right sides of the display area, and the half-open doors are made to rattle and close for a predetermined period of time.

Figure 388 (c) is an example of the display image when the varying display of the first special symbol has finished and the RUSH entry performance has been successful.

As shown in FIG. 388(c), if the RUSH entry effect is successful, the door will close and all decorative symbols will stop displaying. If the RUSH entry effect is unsuccessful, the door will open instead of closing.

Figure 388 (d) is an example of a display image that notifies the player that the display of the first special pattern has ended and that the game has transitioned to the Sengoku Time mode.

As shown in FIG. 387(d), when a completely closed door is opened, the display mode of the background changes, and a transition to the Sengoku Time presentation mode is announced.

In this way, the RUSH entry effect can be used to execute an effect that determines whether or not to transition to the RUSH gaming state (second time-saving gaming state), further enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

(Subtitle production)
Next, the telop effect in the heaven effect mode will be described with reference to Fig. 389. Fig. 389 is an example of a display image for explaining the telop effect in the heaven effect mode in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 389 (a) is an example of a display image before the variable display of the first special symbol and normal symbol begins in the heaven performance mode.

Figure 389(b) is an example of a display image when the normal symbol is being displayed and a telop effect is started by drawing a lottery for the normal symbol. Note that in Figure 389(b), the first special symbol is also being displayed, but the first special symbol may or may not be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 389(b), when the caption performance pattern (see FIG. 372) for executing the caption performance is determined and the caption performance starts, the words "Emergency News: A chance opening is about to open..." are displayed at the top of the display area, indicating that the second starting opening 10140 will be opened for a long time.

Figure 388 (c) is an example of a display image of the caption effect when the variable display of the normal pattern ends and the second starting hole 10140 opens long.

As shown in FIG. 388(c), when the second starting hole 10140 opens long, the player is instructed to hit the ball to the right so that the game ball will enter the second starting hole 10140, and the words "Aim for the chance hole" are displayed at the top of the display area. In addition, in the caption effect, when the second starting hole 10140 does not open long, the words "The chance hole did not open..." are displayed at the top of the display area.

In this way, the subtitle effect suggests that the second starting hole 10140 will be opened long, allowing the game ball to enter the second starting hole 10140.

When the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, it is desirable to display the above-mentioned caption effect in an area that does not interfere with the variable display of the first decorative symbol (main symbol) corresponding to the first special symbol, such as the lower left of the display area. Furthermore, when the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the caption effect may be displayed behind the first decorative symbol (back layer, etc.) so as not to interfere with the variable display of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol.

(Preview performance)
Next, a look-ahead effect performed in advance variation will be described with reference to Fig. 390. Fig. 390 is an example of a display image for explaining the look-ahead effect in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 390 (a) is an example of a display image when the "Expectation Up Zone" pre-reading effect is being executed during pre-change in the chance effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 390(a), when the "Expected UP Zone" is executed, a band with the words "Expected UP Zone" is displayed on the left and right of the display area.

This "Expectation Up Zone" can indicate in advance that a specific presentation will be performed and that the game will transition to a jackpot game state or a second time-saving game state (RUSH game state), heightening the player's sense of anticipation for the transition to the advantageous jackpot game state or RUSH game state, further enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Figure 390 (b) is an example of a display image when the "mode transition zone" of the pre-reading performance is being executed during a pre-change of the chance performance mode.

As shown in FIG. 390(b), when the "mode transition zone" is executed, a band with the words "mode transition zone" is displayed at the top of the display area.

This "mode transition zone" can indicate in advance that a time-saving hit has occurred and that the game state will transition from the normal game state to either the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, or the third time-saving game state, heightening the sense of anticipation for the transition to the game state and making the game even more enjoyable.

Figure 390 (c) is an example of a display image when the pre-reading effect "RUSH expectation zone" is being executed during pre-change in the chance effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 390(c), when the "RUSH expectation zone" is executed, the background display mode of the chance presentation mode is switched to a special background display mode. In addition, by switching to the special background display mode, the size of the main pattern is also changed to a smaller size.

This "RUSH expectation zone" can indicate in advance that a transition to the second time-saving game state (RUSH game state) will occur, heightening the sense of anticipation for the transition to the RUSH game state and making the game even more enjoyable.

In this embodiment, the look-ahead performance performed during pre-change is configured to display a specified image additionally or to change the background display mode, but the look-ahead performance may also be performed by changing the display mode of the reserved image during pre-change.

(Game suspension notice)
Next, the contents of the notification of the game stop notice will be described with reference to Fig. 391. Fig. 391 is an example of a display image of the game stop notice in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 391 (a) is an example of a display image when the first game stop notice is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 391(a), when the first game stop notice is executed, the words "Game stop is approaching" are displayed at the top of the display area.

The message "Game suspension is approaching" will continue to be displayed until the first game suspension notice termination condition is met.

This first game stop notice allows the player to know in advance that the game is about to stop due to an increase in the number of game balls (MY).

Figure 391 (b) is an example of a display image when the second game stop notice is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 391(b), when the second game stop notice is executed, the words "Approximately XX00 shots until game stop" are displayed at the top of the display area.

The message "Approximately XX00 balls left until gameplay stops" continues to be displayed until the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulated value (95,000), and "Approximately XX00 balls" is updated as follows, based on the value stored in the sub-ball difference counter in work RAM 303: approximately 5,000 balls → approximately 4,000 balls → approximately 3,000 balls → approximately 2,000 balls → approximately 1,000 balls.

This second game stop notice allows the player to specifically grasp the number of game balls that will increase until the game stops.

In this embodiment, the number of balls that will be added until the game stops is notified by the text "Approximately XX00 balls." However, it is not necessary to notify the number of balls that will be added until the game stops.

Figure 391 (c) is an example of a display image when the third game stop notice is being executed.

As described above, the third game stop notice is executed when the increase in the number of game balls (MY) during the jackpot game state reaches the regulated value (95,000), and the game is stopped after the jackpot game state ends.

As shown in FIG. 391(c), when the third game stop notice is executed, the words "Game will stop after this jackpot game ends" are displayed in the center of the display area.

The message "Game will stop after this jackpot play ends" will continue to be displayed until the jackpot play ends.

This third game stop notice lets the player know that the game will stop after the big win game state ends.

(Stop notification)
Next, the contents of the game stop notification will be described with reference to Fig. 392. Fig. 392 is an example of a display image of the game stop notification in the tenth pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 392 (a) is an example of a display image when the first game stop notification is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 392(a), when the first game stop notification is executed, only the text "Game has stopped. Today's game has ended" is displayed in the display area, indicating that game has stopped. In addition, when the first game stop notification is executed, no decorative patterns or other information are displayed, and input of operation information for all of the effect buttons 54 is also disabled.

This first game stop notification allows the player to clearly understand that gameplay has stopped.

Figure 392 (b) is an example of a display image when the first game stop notification is executed, and after the forced notification time has elapsed, the second game stop notification is started.

As shown in FIG. 392(b), when the second game stop notification is executed, the display image of the first game stop notification is displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the display area. Then, behind the reduced display image of the first game stop notification, a demo image corresponding to when game play is stopped is displayed.

The demo image may display a specific character, or a QR code may be displayed by operating the decision button 54. Note that the QR code may be configured to be displayed automatically, without operating the decision button 54.

In addition, in this embodiment, the demo image shown in FIG. 392(b) is a demo image used exclusively when the game is stopped, but it may also be a common demo image used when the game is in progress.

After this second game stop notification clearly indicates that gameplay has stopped (after the forced notification time has elapsed), the fact that gameplay has stopped is still notified, while a decorative demo image can be displayed until the gaming establishment closes.

Figure 392 (c) is an example of a display image of the volume adjustment that is performed when the second operation information corresponding to the left and right buttons 54 is input while the second game stop notification is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 392(c), when the volume is adjusted while the second game stop notification is being executed, the demo image is switched to an adjustment image for volume adjustment. When the left button, effect button 54, is operated, the volume is adjusted to be lowered by one level, and when the right button, effect button 54, is operated, the volume is adjusted to be higher by one level.

In this way, since the volume can be adjusted when the second game stop notification is being executed, the volume can be adjusted according to the demo image when game play is stopped.

Although not shown in the figures, when the second game stop notification is being executed, if the third operation information corresponding to the effect button 54 of the up and down buttons is input, a display image for adjusting the light intensity is displayed in the same manner as for adjusting the volume. Also, since light intensity adjustment is possible when the second game stop notification is being executed, it is possible to adjust the light intensity according to the demo image when the game is stopped.

In this way, the tenth pachinko gaming machine has a normal gaming state in which a time-saving jackpot can be won, and multiple time-saving gaming states (first time-saving gaming state to sixth time-saving gaming state) according to a normal power operation pattern in which the opening pattern of the second starting hole 10140 is determined. By providing further changes to the gaming state and performing presentations according to the new gaming state, unprecedented gameplay can be created, and the excitement of the game can be further increased.

In particular, in the tenth pachinko gaming machine, when the left hand hit is the regular gaming mode, the normal gaming state, the first time-shortened gaming state, the third time-shortened gaming state, or the sixth time-shortened gaming state is controlled, and when the right hand hit is the regular gaming mode, the second time-shortened gaming state, the fourth time-shortened gaming state, or the fifth time-shortened gaming state is controlled, so that even in each gaming mode, further changes can be made to the gaming state, further increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in the tenth pachinko gaming machine, a time-saving win can only be won in the normal gaming state, and it is configured to be possible to transition from a time-saving win to a second time-saving gaming state in the RUSH gaming state. This increases the transition rate from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state via the RUSH gaming state, making the game even more exciting.

And because the normal game state is also the initial game state after the RAM is cleared, when the power is turned on after the RAM is cleared, the game can be started in the normal game state where a time-saving jackpot can be won, improving the operation of gaming machines after the opening of the gaming establishment.

In particular, in the tenth pachinko game machine, after the first jackpot game state, the game does not transition to the normal game state except during the jackpot game state. For this reason, the game can only be transitioned to the normal game state by clearing the RAM, and it is also possible to reduce gambling (ball payout) during normal business hours without clearing the RAM, or to clear the RAM and transition to the normal game state during special events.

In addition, in the tenth pachinko gaming machine, as explained in FIG. 374 etc., whether or not to execute the look-ahead performance is determined based on the game situation, etc., so that the look-ahead performance can be executed at an appropriate timing, further increasing the excitement of the game.

In addition, in the tenth pachinko gaming machine, when a pre-reading effect is executed, a "strong effect (red card effect or RUSH entry effect B)" is executed during the corresponding change, which heightens the anticipation for the RUSH gaming state and further enhances the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the tenth pachinko gaming machine, the game can be stopped when the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches a regulated value (e.g., 95,000 balls), so the gambling nature of the game can be appropriately suppressed.

Before play is stopped, a game stop notice can be given according to the count range of the increase in the number of game balls (MY), so that appropriate information can be announced according to the count range of the increase in the number of game balls (MY). Furthermore, even after play is stopped, an appropriate game stop announcement can be made by the forced announcement time.

<Tenth modified example of pachinko gaming machine>
In the tenth pachinko game machine, the update control of the game stop function operation management phase, the number of acquired game balls, the difference ball number counter, and the MY judgment counter as data related to the stop of the game is configured to be performed by the main control circuit 200 (main CPU 201), but it may also be configured to be performed by the payout/launch control circuit 400.

In addition, in the tenth pachinko gaming machine, the processing related to data related to the stop of the game may be replaced with the processing related to the game stop function in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. That is, the main control main processing (Figs. 343 to 346) and system timer interrupt processing (Figs. 363 to 367) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 of the tenth pachinko gaming machine may be replaced with the main control main processing (Figs. 145 to 153) and system timer interrupt processing (Figs. 165 to 174) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The technology described in the tenth embodiment of the pachinko game machine may be applied to a slot machine. When applied to a slot machine, the various effects executed in the tenth pachinko game machine may be replaced with effects by a display device, reels, etc. provided in the slot machine. In addition, the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state to sixth time-saving game state) may be replaced with any of the following states: replay time (RT state) in which the probability of replaying a replay is improved, assist time (AT state) in which a predetermined small role or the operation content of the stop button is notified, and assist replay time (ART state) in which the replay time and assist time are controlled simultaneously. In addition, the big win, time-saving win, and small win may be replaced with any of the following: winning a specific role, a specific combination of symbols being stopped and displayed (a specific combination of symbols being awarded), winning an entry win into the RT state, winning an entry win into the AT state, and winning an entry win into the ART state.

(others)
The tenth pachinko gaming machine described above can apply the techniques of each embodiment, including modified examples. The above-mentioned embodiments do not limit the contents of the present invention, and modifications can be made to the extent that they do not deviate from the scope of the claims.

Furthermore, the effects described in the tenth pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most favorable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention.

Furthermore, the above [4. Expansion Example] can also be applied to the 10th pachinko gaming machine, as long as there is no inconsistency in its gameplay or control.

[13. 11th Pachinko Game Machine]
Next, the eleventh pachinko gaming machine will be described. The eleventh pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a one-type two-type mixed machine, like the third pachinko gaming machine. The eleventh pachinko gaming machine is different from the third pachinko gaming machine in terms of gameplay and presentation content, and accordingly, the configuration of various components arranged in the game area is also partially different.

In particular, the eleventh pachinko gaming machine differs from the third pachinko gaming machine in that in a specific time-saving gaming state (a RUSH gaming state described below), the gameplay is mainly comprised of the variable display of normal symbols, and the condition for ending the time-saving gaming state is not the number of times that special symbols are variable displayed, but the number of times that normal symbols are variable displayed.

The eleventh pachinko gaming machine, like the third pachinko gaming machine, is a priority variable machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in parallel, and the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. However, this is not limited to this, and the machine may be a sequential variable machine as described above.

Hereinafter, when describing the eleventh pachinko gaming machine, the same components as those in the first pachinko gaming machine will be given the same symbols and step numbers, and detailed descriptions of their configurations and processing will be omitted.

In this embodiment, "entering a game ball" into an entry port (e.g., a starting port or a big prize entry port) that can give the player a certain benefit (payout of game balls, transition of game state) is also referred to as "winning", as appropriate. Also, in this embodiment, the "variable display" of the pattern is a concept that includes both a "variable display" in which the pattern changes and is displayed, and a "stationary display" in which the pattern stops and is displayed, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stationary display is referred to as one "variable display".

In addition, the "payout" of game balls is not limited to actually paying out game balls to a player, but in the case of gaming machines that progress the game by circulating enclosed game balls (so-called smart pachinko), it is a concept that also includes storing the number of game balls paid out (prize ball data) in the memory area of the gaming machine or in an electronic storage medium (game card).

[13-1. Game board unit]
The game board unit 11010 of the eleventh pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 393. This game board unit 11010 is also disposed in front of the base door 3 (see Fig. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see Fig. 2) like the first pachinko game machine.

Figure 393 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 11010 equipped in the eleventh pachinko game machine. The game board unit 11010 has a game panel 11100 as a game board, various components are arranged on the game panel 11100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game panel 11100, in which the launched game balls can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 393, the game board unit 11010 of the eleventh pachinko gaming machine is different from the first pachinko gaming machine mainly in the configuration and arrangement of the first passing gate 11126R and the second passing gate 11126L, the second starting opening 11140, the normal electric role unit 11145, the first special electric role unit 11130, and the second special electric role unit 11150. The configuration and arrangement of each are explained below.

The first start hole 11120 located in the play area 105 of the eleventh pachinko game machine is functionally the same as the first start hole 120 located in the play area 105 of the first pachinko game machine, but because of its relationship with the second start hole 11140, it will be explained again using a different reference number from that of the first pachinko game machine.

(Passing gate)
The eleventh pachinko gaming machine has two passing gates, a first passing gate 11126R arranged in the right area 107 and a second passing gate 11126L arranged in the left area 106.

The first passing gate 11126R is composed of a gate through which game balls can pass, and is located below (downstream) the first special electric role unit 11130, the normal electric role unit 11145, and the second special electric role unit 11150, which will be described later, in the right-side area 107. In addition, since the first passing gate 11126R is located in the right-side area 107, game balls hit from the right can pass through it (game balls hit from the left have difficulty or cannot pass through it).

Therefore, when a game ball flowing down the right-side area 107 does not enter the first large prize opening 11131 of the first special electric feature unit 11130, the second starting opening 11140 of the normal electric feature unit 11145, or the second large prize opening 11151 of the second special electric feature unit 11150, it can pass through the first passing gate 11126R. As a result, when a right hit is being made during a jackpot game state, game balls flowing down the right side area 107 are more likely to enter the first big prize opening 11131 due to the operation of the first special electric role unit 11130 located above, reducing the number of game balls passing through the first passing gate 11126R, so that the normal electric role unit 11145 is activated when a game ball passes through the first passing gate 11126R, preventing the game ball from unexpectedly entering the second starting opening 11140 outside the game design.

In addition, the general winning opening 122 is located directly below the first passing gate 11126R, and game balls that pass through the second passing gate 11126L can enter the general winning opening 122 very easily, making it possible to pay out prize balls for the general winning opening (e.g., three game balls). Note that the general winning opening 122 does not have to be located directly below the first passing gate 11126R.

The second passing gate 11126L is configured as a gate through which game balls can pass, and is located directly above the first starting hole 11120. In addition, since the second passing gate 11126L is located in the left side area 106, game balls hit from the left can pass through it (game balls hit from the right have difficulty or cannot pass through it).

Because the first starting hole 11120 is located directly below the second passing gate 11126L, a game ball that passes through the second passing gate 11126L can enter the first starting hole 11120 very easily, and can participate in both the "first special symbol lottery" and the "normal symbol lottery" described below. However, the second passing gate 11126L and the first starting hole 11120 are separated by a distance of approximately one game ball, and although it is extremely rare, a game ball that passes through the second passing gate 11126L may not enter the first starting hole 11120.

The second passing gate 11126L may be located to the left of the center gimmick 115, or the chance entrance 119 provided on the stage 118 may serve as the second passing gate 11126L.

When a game ball passes through the first passing gate 11126R or the second passing gate 11126L, a normal symbol lottery (a process for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol) and a variable display of the normal symbol are performed. Note that in this embodiment, no prize balls are paid out when a game ball passes through the first passing gate 11126R or the second passing gate 11126L, but the first passing gate 11126R and the second passing gate 11126L may be configured as winning ports (normal symbol operation ports) to pay out a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball).

The passage of a game ball through the first passing gate 11126R or the second passing gate 11126L may also be made to function as a trigger for activating a consecutive operation device for a special device. Assuming that the condition device is operating (the special symbol that will be a jackpot is displayed frozen), the passing of a game ball through the first passing gate 11126R or the second passing gate 11126L may activate the consecutive operation device for a special device, and transition to a jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, the play area 105 is configured with two pass gates in both the right area 107 and the left area 106, but it may be configured with a pass gate only in the right area 107. In other words, it may be configured with only the first pass gate 11126R located in the right area 107, without the second pass gate 11126L located in the left area 106.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 11120 is disposed in the game area 105 below the display area of the display device 7, and is configured so that game balls hit from the left can enter the hole, and game nails or the like make it difficult or impossible for game balls hit from the right to enter the hole. The first starting hole 11120 is provided with a first starting hole switch 11121 (see FIG. 394 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 11120.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 11120, a first special symbol lottery (a process for determining whether the first special symbol is a winning symbol), a variable display of the first special symbol, and a prize ball for the first starting hole (e.g., three game balls) are paid out. The process after the game ball enters the first starting hole 11120 will be described in detail later.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 11140 is located in the right area 107 below (downstream) the first special electric role unit 11130 described later and above (upstream) the first passing gate 11126R and the second special electric role unit 11150, and is provided in the normal electric role unit 11145 described later, so that game balls hit to the right can enter the hole (game balls hit to the left are difficult or impossible to enter the hole). The second starting hole 11140 is provided with a second starting hole switch 11141 (see FIG. 394 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 11140.

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 11140, a second special symbol lottery (a process for determining whether the second special symbol is a winning symbol), a variable display of the second special symbol, and a prize ball for the second starting hole (for example, one game ball) are paid out. The process after the game ball enters the second starting hole 11140 will be described in detail later.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric role unit 11145 is disposed below (downstream side) the first special electric role unit 11130 described later and above (upstream side) the first passing gate 11126R and the second special electric role unit 11150 in the right area 107, and is disposed so that the game ball hit to the right can pass through it. The normal electric role unit 11145 is a unit body that integrates the second start hole 11140, the second start hole switch 11141 that detects the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 11140, the normal power shutter 11147 that can move forward and backward, and the normal power solenoid 11148 (see FIG. 394 described later) that operates the normal power shutter 11147.

The normal power shutter 11147 is configured to be displaceable between an open state in which it is possible or easy to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 11140 by moving backwards when the normal power solenoid 11148 is activated, and a closed state in which it is difficult or impossible to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 11140 by moving forwards. Note that instead of a shutter that can move forward and backward, the normal power shutter 11147 may be configured with a movable member that can move left and right, known as an electric chute.

(First special electric feature unit)
The first special electric role unit 11130 is located in the right side area 107 above (upstream from) the first passing gate 11126R, the normal electric role unit 11145, and the second special electric role unit 11150 described later.

The first special electric device unit 11130 is a unitary body that integrates a first large prize opening 11131, a first large prize opening count switch 11132 (see FIG. 394 described below) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 11131, a first special electric shutter 11134 that can move left and right, and a first special electric solenoid 11135 (see FIG. 394 described below) that operates the first special electric shutter 11134.

The first large prize opening 11131 is a large prize opening that opens when a jackpot is hit, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the first large prize opening 11131 in one round of a jackpot is set (for example, 10 balls). Each time one game ball enters this first large prize opening 11131, prize balls for the first large prize opening (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The first large prize opening 11131 transitions from a closed state to an open state in the first route when a special stop display mode is derived indicating that the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a "big hit" and in the second route when a specific stop display mode is derived indicating that the result of the special pattern determination is a "small hit" causing the second large prize opening 11151 to open and a game ball that enters the opened second large prize opening 11151 enters the V prize opening 11156 within the second large prize opening 11151.

The first special electric shutter 11134 is configured to be displaceable between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 11131 and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 11131, by the operation of the first special electric solenoid 11135.

Specifically, the first special electric shutter 11134 is roughly fan-shaped when viewed from the front, is supported at the bottom by a shaft, and is composed of a blade member that can move left and right.

When the first special electric shutter 11134 is movable to the right and in an open state, the first large winning opening 11131 opens, receives game balls flowing down into the right area 107, and guides the received game balls to the first large winning opening 11131. On the other hand, when the first special electric shutter 11134 is movable to the left and in a closed state, the first large winning opening 11131 closes, making it impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the first large winning opening 11131. Note that instead of a blade member that can move left and right, the first special electric shutter 11134 may be configured with a door member that displaces approximately parallel and approximately perpendicular to the surface of the game panel 11100, or a protruding plate member that can move forward and backward in the front and rear directions relative to the surface of the game panel 11100.

(Second special electric feature unit)
The second special electric device unit 11150 is located in the right-side area 107 below (downstream) the first special electric device unit 11130 and the normal electric device unit 11145 and above (upstream) the first passing gate 11126R, and is positioned so that almost all game balls hit to the right can pass through.

The second special electric device unit 11150 comprises a second large prize opening 11151, a second large prize opening count switch 11152 which detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 11151, a second special electric shutter 11154 capable of opening and closing the second large prize opening 11151, a second special electric solenoid 11155 (see FIG. 394 described below) which operates the second special electric shutter 11154 to open and close the second large prize opening 11151, and a V prize opening 11152 through which a game ball that has entered the second large prize opening 11151 can pass. 56, a V winning port switch 11157 (see FIG. 394 described below) that detects when a game ball has passed through the V winning port 11156, a normal port 11158 through which game balls that have entered the second large winning port 11151 but have not entered the V winning port 11156 can pass, a V shutter 11159 that opens and closes the V winning port 11156, and a V shutter solenoid 11160 (see FIG. 394 described below) that operates the V shutter 11159 to open and close the V winning port 11156.

The second large prize opening 11151 is a large prize opening that opens when a small prize is won, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the second large prize opening 11151 in one small prize is specified (for example, 10 balls). Each time one game ball enters this second large prize opening 11151, prize balls for the second large prize opening (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The second special electric shutter 11154 is made of a protruding plate-shaped member that can move forward and backward, and is configured so that by operating the second special electric solenoid 11155, the second special electric shutter 11154 can be moved forward to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 11151, and the second special electric shutter 11154 can be moved backward to an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 11151.

The V winning hole 11156 is a winning hole that can be opened and closed by the V shutter 11159, and is also a winning hole through which the game ball passes, triggering control of the jackpot game state via the second route described above.

When the game is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, the opening of the second large prize opening 11151 when the game ball passes through the V prize opening 11156 is regarded as the first round, and after the game ball passes through the V prize opening 11156 (from the second round onwards), a round game is executed in which the first large prize opening 11131 transitions from a closed state to an open state. Note that when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, a round game in which the second large prize opening 11151 transitions from a closed state to an open state may be executed for a predetermined number of rounds, even after the game ball passes through the V prize opening 11156 (from the second round onwards).

In addition, for example, a V entry port may be provided inside the first large entry port 11131, so that there is one V entry port and one attacker that is opened in the big win game state. In this case, when a stop display mode indicating a "small win" is derived, the first large entry port 11131 is opened, and when a game ball enters the V entry port provided inside the first large entry port 11131, the game is controlled to the big win game state (the big win game state via the second route).

The normal opening 11158 is configured to allow game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 11151 but have not passed through the V prize opening 11156 to enter (pass through) it. Note that in the small prize game state, if all game balls that have entered the open second large prize opening 11151 pass through the normal opening 11158 and no game balls pass through the V prize opening 11156, there will be no transition from the small prize game state to the big prize game state.

The V shutter 11159 is configured to be displaceable between a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for game balls to pass through the V winning opening 11156 and an open state in which it is possible (or easy) for game balls to pass through the V winning opening 11156, by the operation of the V shutter solenoid 11160.

In particular, in the eleventh pachinko game machine, when a small win game state is reached, the V shutter solenoid 11160 is activated, causing the V winning hole 11156 to open, so that the game ball that enters the second large winning hole 11151 can pass through the V winning hole 11156.

The relative positions of the first special electric role unit 11130, the normal electric role unit 11145, the second special electric role unit 11150, and the first passing gate 11126R arranged in the right area 107 can be freely changed as desired.

[13-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the eleventh pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 394. Fig. 394 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 394, the eleventh pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the eleventh pachinko gaming machine differs from the first pachinko gaming machine in some respects in the configuration of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300. The configuration and layout of each are explained below.

[13-2-1. Main control circuit]
Compared to the first pachinko game machine, the main control circuit 200 has slightly different configurations in the normal power solenoid 11148, the first special power solenoid 11135, the second special power solenoid 11155, the V shutter solenoid 11160, the first start port switch 11121, the second start port switch 11141, the normal operation switch 11127, the first large prize port count switch 11132, the second large prize port count switch 11152, and the V prize port switch 11157 which are connected to the main control circuit 200.

(Solenoid for general purpose)
The normal power solenoid 11148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the normal power shutter 11147. When the normal power solenoid 11148 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the normal power shutter 11147 backward to open the second starting port 11140, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the normal power shutter 11147 forward to close the second starting port 11140.

(First special solenoid)
The first special electric solenoid 11135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the first special electric shutter 11134. When the first special electric solenoid 11135 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the first special electric shutter 11134 to the right to open the first large prize opening 11131, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the first special electric shutter 11134 to the left to close the first large prize opening 11131.

(Second special solenoid)
The second special electric solenoid 11155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the second special electric shutter 11154. When the main CPU 201 energizes the second special electric solenoid 11155 (ON), the second special electric solenoid 11155 moves the second special electric shutter 11154 backward to open the second large winning opening 11151, and when the main CPU 201 does not energize the second special electric solenoid 11155 (OFF), the second special electric shutter 11154 advances forward to close the second large winning opening 11151.

(Solenoid for V-shutter)
The V shutter solenoid 11160 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V shutter 11159. When the V shutter solenoid 11160 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V shutter 11159 backward to open the V winning opening 11156, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V shutter 11159 forward to close the V winning opening 11156.

(First start switch)
The first start hole switch 11121 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 11120.

When the first start hole switch 11121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 11120, the main CPU 201 determines that the first acquisition condition is met and acquires the start information of the first special pattern (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for a pattern, random number value for reaching a reach, random number value for selecting a performance, etc.). The acquired start information of the first special pattern is stored in the special pattern determination memory area (0) or is stored in the first special pattern start memory area (first special pattern start memory area (1) to first special pattern start memory area (4) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of first special patterns (for example, four)". When the start condition of the first special pattern (for example, the special electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the special pattern is not being performed, etc.) is met, it is used for the hit determination process of the first special pattern and the variable display of the first special pattern. In addition, when the first start port switch 11121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start port 11120, the main CPU 201 instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of the prize balls for the first start port (e.g., three game balls).

(Second start switch)
The second start hole switch 11141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 11140.

When the second start hole switch 11141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 11140, the main CPU 201 determines that the second start condition is met and acquires start information for the second special symbol (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for a symbol, random number value for determining a reach, random number value for selecting a performance, etc.). The acquired start information for the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol determination memory area (0) or is stored in the second special symbol start memory area (second special symbol start memory area (1) to second special symbol start memory area (2) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of second special symbols (e.g., two)." When the start condition for the second special symbol (e.g., the special electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, etc.) is met, the information is used for the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, when the second start port switch 11141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start port 11140, the main CPU 201 instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of a prize ball (e.g., one game ball) for the second start port.

In addition, in the embodiment, the winning judgment process for the first special pattern based on the start information of the first special pattern is also called the "lottery for the first special pattern," and the winning judgment process for the second special pattern based on the start information of the second special pattern is also called the "lottery for the second special pattern," and the lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern are collectively called the "lottery for the special patterns."

(Normal operation switch)
The normal operation switch 11127 is a through-type proximity switch that is provided on each of the first passing gate 11126R and the second passing gate 11126L and detects the passage of a game ball through the first passing gate 11126R or the second passing gate 11126L.

When the normal symbol operation switch 11127 detects the passage of the game ball through the first passing gate 11126R or the second passing gate 11126L, the main CPU 201 acquires the normal symbol start information (random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a hit, random number value for the normal symbol, etc.) without distinguishing between the first passing gate 11126R and the second passing gate 11126L. The acquired normal symbol start information is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (normal symbol start memory area (1) to normal symbol start memory area (4) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "number of reserved normal symbols (for example, 4)". When the normal symbol judgment start condition (for example, the normal electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the normal symbol is not being performed, etc.) is met, it is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (the normal symbol hit judgment process) and the variable display of the normal symbol.

(First prize slot count switch)
The first large prize opening count switch 11132 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 11131. When the first large prize opening count switch 11132 detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 11131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that enter the first large prize opening 11131 per round, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of prize balls for the first large prize opening (e.g., 15 game balls).

(Second major prize slot count switch)
The second large prize opening count switch 11152 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 11151. When the second large prize opening count switch 11152 detects the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 11151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 11151 and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of prize balls for the second large prize opening (e.g., 15 game balls).

(V prize entry switch)
The V winning hole switch 11157 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 11156. When the V winning hole switch 11157 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 11156, the main CPU 201 performs control to transition to a big win game state. Note that even if the V winning hole switch 11157 detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 11156, no prize balls are paid out.

(Game ball recovery switch)
The game ball recovery switch 11179 is a through-type proximity switch that detects game balls launched from the launching device 6 into the game area 105. The game ball recovery switch 11179 is located on the rear side of the game board unit 11010, in a collecting flow path through which game balls that have entered the outlet 178 and various winning ports (for example, the first start port 11120, the second start port 11140, the first large winning port 11131, the second large winning port 11151, the general winning port 122, etc.) pass, and detects not only game balls that have entered the outlet 178, but also game balls that have entered various winning ports without distinction. When the game ball recovery switch 11179 detects the entry of a game ball, the main CPU 201 counts the number of launched game balls that have been launched (counts a launched game ball number counter described later).

[13-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300, like the first pachinko game machine, is equipped with a sub-CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a gimmick control circuit 307 and a command input port 308, but differs in that it further comprises a button control circuit 310 and a performance button 54.

(Button Control Circuit 310)
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving the effect button 54. In other words, the button control circuit 310 is a circuit for changing the operation mode of the effect button 54 and vibrating the effect button 54. The button control circuit 310 drives the effect button 54 in response to a drive command from the sub-CPU 301.

The button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal related to a player's operation detected by the effect button 54. When the button control circuit 310 inputs an operation signal from the effect button 54, it outputs predetermined operation information to the sub-CPU 301.

In particular, in this embodiment, the effect button 54 includes multiple types of buttons (a decision button, a left/right button, and an up/down button), and different operation information is output depending on the type of effect button 54. Specifically, when an operation signal is input from the effect button 54 corresponding to the decision button, first operation information is output to the sub-CPU 301, when an operation signal is input from the effect button 54 corresponding to the left/right button, second operation information is output to the sub-CPU 301, and when an operation signal is input from the effect button 54 corresponding to the up/down button, third operation information is output to the sub-CPU 301.

[13-2-3. Payout/launch control circuit]
The payout/launch control circuit 400, like the first pachinko game machine, controls the payout/launch of game balls, and this payout/launch control circuit 400 is connected to a payout device 82 capable of paying out game balls, a launch device 6 capable of launching game balls, a card unit 180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

Furthermore, when the payout/launch control circuit 400 in the eleventh pachinko game machine receives a game stop signal from the main control circuit 200 indicating that game play has been stopped based on the increased number of game balls, the payout/launch control circuit 400 stops the launch of game balls by the launch device 6 (stops the supply of power to the launch solenoid). Note that even if the main control circuit 200 indicates that game play has been stopped based on the increased number of game balls, the payout/launch control circuit 400 does not need to stop the launch of game balls by the launch device 6.

[13-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the eleventh pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 395 to 408. The eleventh pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In the eleventh pachinko gaming machine, although the probability variable control is not executed, a time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed and a normal gaming state in which the time-saving control is not executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 is capable of progressing the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. Note that, although the probability variable control is not executed in this eleventh pachinko gaming machine, this is not essential, and it is also possible to execute the probability variable control by setting the probability variable flag on depending on the type of jackpot, etc., for example.

As described later, the eleventh pachinko game machine has a time-saving game state that is distinguished from the viewpoint of the time-saving transition condition (time-saving occurrence condition), which includes an "A time-saving game state" that is entered after the end of the jackpot game state triggered by a jackpot, a "B time-saving game state" that is entered after the number of times the special symbol is displayed reaches the ceiling value without being triggered by a jackpot, and a "C time-saving game state" that is entered after the end of the variable display of the special symbol triggered by a time-saving hit. Furthermore, the "A time-saving game state" and the "C time-saving game state" are classified into a plurality of time-saving game states as time-saving game states that are distinguished from the viewpoint of the operation mode during the time-saving game state (such as the operation pattern of the normal power shutter 11147), which will be described in detail later.

[13-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
395 is an example of a special symbol winning judgment table in the eleventh pachinko game machine. The special symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 395 is a table for judging a "big win", a "small win", a "time-saving win" or a "miss", and is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 395, the special symbol hit determination table includes a special symbol hit determination table in the normal game state shown in FIG. 395(a) and a special symbol hit determination table in the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 395(b).

The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 395 associates the type of special symbol, the random number value for jackpot determination, and the hit/miss determination value data (jackpot determination value data, minor hit determination value data, time-saving hit determination value data, miss determination value data). Note that the total random number value for jackpot determination for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 65536. In other words, the random number value for jackpot determination is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

In addition, the hit determination table for the special symbol in the normal game state shown in FIG. 395(a) corresponds to the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit, which is determined to be a "big hit", a "time-saving hit", or a "miss", and the corresponding hit/miss determination value data (big hit determination value data, time-saving hit determination value data, miss determination value data) as data used in the hit determination process for the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first starting hole 11120. In addition, the hit determination table for the special symbol in the normal game state shown in FIG. 395(a) corresponds to the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit, which is determined to be a "big hit", a "small hit", or a "miss", and the corresponding hit/miss determination value data (big hit determination value data, small hit determination value data, miss determination value data) as data used in the hit determination process for the second special symbol executed based on the ball entering the second starting hole 11140.

In other words, according to the hit determination table for special symbols in the normal game mode shown in Figure 395 (a), in the normal game mode, the hit determination process for the first special symbol determines a "big hit", "time-saving hit" or "miss", but does not determine a "small hit", and the hit determination process for the second special symbol determines a "big hit", "small hit" or "miss", but does not determine a "time-saving hit".

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start hole 11120 in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 judges the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol as a "big hit" with a selection rate of about 1/319.7 based on the hit determination process of the first special symbol, judges it as a "time-saving hit" with a selection rate of about 1/49.9, and judges it as a "miss" otherwise. Also, when a game ball enters the second start hole 11140 in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 judges the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol as a "big hit" with a selection rate of about 1/319.7 based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol, judges it as a "small hit" with a selection rate of about 1/1.004, and judges it as a "miss" otherwise.

The hit determination table for the special symbol in the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 395(b) corresponds to the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit, which is determined to be a "big hit" or a "miss", and the corresponding hit/miss determination value data (big hit determination value data, time-saving hit determination value data, miss determination value data) as data used in the hit determination process for the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first starting hole 11120. Also, the hit determination table for the special symbol in the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 395(a) corresponds to the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit, which is determined to be a "big hit", a "small hit", or a "miss", and the corresponding hit/miss determination value data (big hit determination value data, small hit determination value data, miss determination value data) as data used in the hit determination process for the second special symbol executed based on the ball entering the second starting hole 11140.

In other words, according to the hit determination table for special symbols in the time-saving play state shown in FIG. 395(b), in the time-saving play state, neither the hit determination process for the first special symbol nor the hit determination process for the second special symbol determines a "time-saving hit," the hit determination process for the first special symbol determines a "big hit" or a "miss" but does not determine a "small hit," and the hit determination process for the second special symbol determines a "big hit," "small hit," or "miss."

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start hole 11120 in the time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 judges the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol as a "big hit" with a selection rate of about 1/319.7 based on the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and judges the result as a "miss" otherwise. Also, when a game ball enters the second start hole 11140 in the time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 judges the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol as a "big hit" with a selection rate of about 1/319.7 based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and judges the result as a "small hit" with a selection rate of about 1/1.004, and judges the result as a "miss" otherwise.

In this way, in this embodiment, the hit determination table for the special pattern shown in FIG. 395 is configured so that when a game ball enters the first starting hole 11120, it is more likely to be determined as a "small hit" when the game ball enters the second starting hole 11140, both in the normal game state and in the time-saving game state. Also, the hit determination table for the special pattern shown in FIG. 395 is configured so that when a game ball enters the second starting hole 11140, it is more likely to be determined as a "big hit" or "small hit" than as a "miss", both in the normal game state and in the time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the time-saving game state, the hit determination process of the first special symbol does not determine a "time-saving hit", but the hit determination process of the first special symbol may determine a "time-saving hit" even in the time-saving game state. When the hit determination process of the first special symbol is configured to determine a "time-saving hit" even in the time-saving game state, it is preferable to configure the hit determination process of the first special symbol in the time-saving game state to determine a "time-saving hit" at a relatively lower selection rate than the hit determination process of the first special symbol in the normal game state. Furthermore, the hit determination process of the second special symbol may also determine a "time-saving hit", but it is preferable to configure the hit determination process of the second special symbol to determine a "time-saving hit" at a relatively lower selection rate than the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

Furthermore, in the time-saving play state, a "time-saving hit" is determined by the hit determination process for the special symbol, but even if a "time-saving hit" is determined in the time-saving play state, it may be treated as a "miss" and the stopped symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the miss may be stopped and displayed. In other words, even if a "time-saving hit" is determined in the time-saving play state, the "time-saving hit" may be ignored in the time-saving play state.

In addition, in both the normal game mode and the time-saving game mode, when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, a "small hit" may be determined, but if a "small hit" is determined, it is preferable to determine a "small hit" with a relatively low selection rate so that the determination made in the hit determination process for the second special symbol is more favorable than the determination made in the hit determination process for the first special symbol.

In addition, in both the normal game mode and the time-saving game mode, the process for determining whether the second special symbol has been hit may be configured so that a "miss" is not determined. In other words, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 11140, either a "big hit" or a "small hit" may be determined.

The range (width) of random numbers that are determined to be a "big hit", a "small hit", a "time-saving hit", and a "miss", i.e., the selection rates, are not limited to the above values and can be freely designed and modified as appropriate.

In addition, if the eleventh pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the selection rate of a big win and/or a small win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting. However, even if the eleventh pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the selection rate of a time-saving win be set to a common probability for all settings.

In addition to or instead of changing the selection rate of a big win or a small win according to the set value, for example, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning port 11156 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning port 11156, or the time-saving end condition (number of small wins, etc.) may be changed for each set value. In other words, by adopting one or more of the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the probability of a big win, the probability of a small win, the opening frequency of the V winning port 11156 (i.e. the operation frequency of the second special electric shutter 11154), the opening time, and the time-saving end condition, the expectation value controlled to the big win game state may be configured to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting.

[13-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
396 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the eleventh pachinko game machine. The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 396 is a table that determines the "selected special symbol" and the "symbol designation command" that determine the special symbol to be stopped and is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The "selected special symbol" is information for determining the special symbol that will be displayed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit, and the "symbol designation command" is a command sent to the sub-control circuit 300 to display a decorative symbol that corresponds to the special symbol that will be displayed in the display area of the display device 7.

The special symbol determination table specifies the type of special symbol, the winning/losing determination value data described above, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol obtained when the game ball enters the first starting hole 11120 or the second starting hole 11140, in correspondence with the "special symbol selection symbol" and the "symbol designation command." The symbol random number value of the special symbol is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 396, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 0 to 59, the main CPU 201 determines "z1" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA1" as the symbol designation command. If the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 60 to 79, the main CPU 201 determines "z2" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 80 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z3" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 0 to 29, the main CPU 201 determines "z10" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA10" as the symbol designation command, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 30 to 49, the main CPU 201 determines "z11" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA11" as the symbol designation command, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 50 to 69, the main CPU 201 determines "z12" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA12" as the symbol designation command. If the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 70 to 84, the main CPU 201 determines "z20" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA20" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the random number value of the special symbol is any value between 85 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z30" as the selected symbol for the special symbol, and determines "zA30" as the symbol designation command.

When jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, regardless of the value of the symbol random number value for the special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines "z4" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

When small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the win determination process for the second special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any value between 0 and 79, the main CPU 201 determines "z5" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA5" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any value between 80 and 89, the main CPU 201 determines "z6" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any value between 90 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z7" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

In this embodiment, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the special symbol random number value in the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 396 is configured to satisfy the relational equation of the selection rate of the special symbol, "total selection rate of z10-12" > "z20" and "total selection rate of z10-12" > "z30". Note that the relational equation of "z20" and "z30" is not limited to the selection rate of "z20" = "z30", and may be the selection rate of "z20" > "z30", or may be the selection rate of "z20" < "z30".

As will be described in more detail later, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, if "z10-12" is determined as the selected special symbol, the game will transition to a "first time-saving game state" after the variable display of the special symbol ends, if "z20" is determined as the selected special symbol, the game will transition to a "second time-saving game state" after the variable display of the special symbol ends, and if "z30" is determined as the selected special symbol, the game will transition to a "third time-saving game state" after the variable display of the special symbol ends. It is desirable that the selection rate of the selected special symbol "z20", which is the condition for transitioning to the "second time-saving game state", is 20% or less.

In addition, without providing the "third time-saving game state" described later, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, it may be configured to transition to either the "first time-saving game state" or the "second time-saving game state". Note that, if the configuration is such that the transition to either the "first time-saving game state" or the "second time-saving game state" is made when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the selection pattern "z30" of the special symbol that triggers the transition to the "third time-saving game state" can be made undeterminable, and the relationship of the selection rate of "total selection rate of z10 to 12" > "z20" can be established. In this case, too, it is desirable that the selection rate of the selection pattern "z20" of the special symbol that is the transition condition to the "second time-saving game state" is 20% or less.

Although the explanation of the eleventh pachinko gaming machine is omitted, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) explained in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is a table that is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 when the special symbol is stopped, according to the "selected special symbol". In addition, the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 display the stop mode of a big win, a small win, a time-saving win, or a miss, based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. In addition, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table described in the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 12(B)) is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

The range of the random number value of the special pattern that determines the "selected special pattern", i.e., the selection rate, is not limited to the above values and can be freely changed as needed.

[13-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
397 is an example of a big win type determination table in the pachinko gaming machine No. 11. The big win type determination table shown in FIG. 397 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The jackpot type determination table is a table that determines the operation content of the jackpot game state, and is a table that determines the "opening mode of the jackpot game state."

As shown in FIG. 397, the jackpot type determination table associates the "opening mode of the jackpot game state" with the selected special symbol.

The "opening mode of the jackpot game state" specifies the maximum number of rounds of the first large prize opening 11131 that is opened during the jackpot game state, and the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 11131. The opening pattern of the first large prize opening 11131 specifies the OP waiting time (opening time) which is the waiting state for the start of the jackpot game state, the maximum opening time of each round, the closing time of each round, the ED waiting time (ending time), etc. Note that the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 11131 may specify a different maximum opening time for each round, or a different closing time (round interval time) for each round. Furthermore, the number of openings and the opening time may be specified so that the first large prize opening 6131 is opened and closed multiple times per round.

Here, the "opening mode of the big win game state" corresponding to the "selected special pattern z5-7" determined when the small win judgment value data of the second special pattern is obtained is the opening mode when the game ball that entered the second big winning opening 11151 opened in the small win game state passes through the second route of the V winning opening 11156 and transitions to the big win game state. When transitioning to the big win game state via this second route, the opening of the second big winning opening 11151 in the small win game state is regarded as the first round, and from the second round onwards, the big win game state in which the first big winning opening 11131 is opened is started. Note that if the game ball that entered the second big winning opening 11151 opened in the small win game state does not pass through the V winning opening 11156, the big win game state is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 397, according to the jackpot type determination table, when the "special pattern selected pattern z1" is determined when the jackpot determination value data for the first special pattern is obtained, the maximum number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds (10R), and when the "special pattern selected patterns z2, z3" are determined, the maximum number of rounds is determined to be 4 rounds (4R). Note that when the "special pattern selected patterns z1-3" are determined when the jackpot determination value data for the first special pattern is obtained, the maximum number of rounds may all be determined to be the same number of rounds (for example, 10 rounds).

In addition, for the "special pattern selected z7" which is determined when the big win determination value data for the second special pattern is obtained, the maximum number of rounds is set to 10 rounds (10R). For the "special pattern selected z5-7" which are determined when the small win determination value data for the second special pattern is obtained, the maximum number of rounds is set to 10 rounds (10R). Note that a different number of rounds may be determined depending on the "special pattern selected z5-7" which is determined when the small win determination value data for the second special pattern is obtained.

In addition, depending on the special symbol selected, either the OP waiting time (opening time) or the ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the first large winning port 11131 may be configured to be different.

[13-3-4. Small Win Type Determination Table]
398 is an example of a small win type determination table in the pachinko gaming machine No. 11. The small win type determination table shown in FIG. 398 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The small win type determination table is a table that determines the operation content of the small win game state, and is a table that determines the "opening mode of the small win game state."

As shown in FIG. 398, in the small win type determination table, the "selected special pattern (z5-7)" that is determined when the small win determination value data for the second special pattern is obtained is associated with a "small win game state opening mode."

The "opening mode of the small win game state" specifies the maximum number of times the second large winning opening 11151 can be opened during the small win game state, the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 11151, and the opening pattern of the V winning opening 11156. The opening pattern of the second large winning opening 11151 specifies the OP waiting time (opening time) which is the waiting state for the start of the small win game state, the maximum opening time for each number, the closing time for each number, the ED waiting time (ending time), etc. Also, the opening pattern of the V winning opening 11156 specifies the opening waiting time, opening time, etc.

Here, when the small win game state starts, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 11151 and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 11156 are timed simultaneously, and when the second large winning opening 11151 is open, the V winning opening 11156 is also configured to be open. Therefore, when the small win game state is performed, it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 11156. Note that, as the opening pattern of the V winning opening 11156, multiple opening and closing times may be specified so that the V winning opening 11156 is opened and closed multiple times, as in the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 11151.

The small win type determination table may be configured so that at least one of the following is different depending on the selected special symbol: OP waiting time (opening time), maximum opening time for each number of times, closing time for each number of times, ED waiting time (ending time), and opening waiting time, opening time, and closing time for the opening pattern of the V winning port 11156.

In particular, the small win type determination table may be configured to vary the opening pattern of the V winning hole 11156 depending on the selected special symbol, and to determine a favorable operating mode in which it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 11156 and an unfavorable operating mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 11156.

Here, the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one small win game state (e.g., 1 small win x 10 (second specified number) x 15 (number of prize balls) = 150) is set to be less than the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one big win game state (e.g., 4R x 10 (first specified number) x 15 (number of prize balls) = 600), and it can be said that the big win game state is the advantageous "first special game state," and the small win game state is the "second special game state" that is less profitable than the big win game state.

In addition, the maximum opening time for one round in the big win game state (e.g., 0.1 seconds) is set shorter than the maximum opening time for one round in the big win game state (e.g., 28 seconds), so that in the big win game state, the first large prize winning port 11131 opens in a favorable "first opening mode," and in the small win game state, the second large prize winning port 11151 opens in a less favorable "second opening mode" than the first opening mode.

[13-3-5. Game Status Related Setting Table]
399 is an example of a game state related setting table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. The game state related setting table shown in FIG. 399 is a table for setting the game state, and is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 399, the game state related setting tables include game state related setting table 1, which is referenced after the end of the big win game state shown in FIG. 399(a), game state related setting table 2, which is referenced after the end of the variable display of the special pattern for the time-saving mode shown in FIG. 399(b), and game state related setting table 3, which is referenced after the number of times the special pattern is variable displayed reaches the ceiling value shown in FIG. 399(c).

As shown in FIG. 399, the game status related setting table associates "status flag," "normal power operation pattern," and "time-saving end condition" as "game status settings."

The "state flag" is a flag that indicates the type of game state, and is stored in a specified memory area of the main RAM 203. A state flag of 0 indicates a "normal game state", a state flag of 1 indicates an "A time-shortened game state", a state flag of 2 indicates a "B time-shortened game state", and a state flag of 3 indicates a "C time-shortened game state".

The "normal power operation pattern" is information that determines the opening pattern of the second start hole 11140, and is stored in a specified memory area of the main RAM 203. Normal power operation pattern = 00 indicates a state in which the "long opening pattern" described below is difficult to determine and the "short opening pattern" described below is likely to be determined, normal power operation pattern = 01 indicates a state in which the "long opening pattern" and the "short opening pattern" are determined, and normal power operation pattern = 02 indicates a state in which the "long opening pattern" is more likely to be determined and the "short opening pattern" is more difficult to determine than when normal power operation pattern = 00 and normal power operation pattern = 01. In other words, the opening patterns of the second start hole 11140 operate in the order of normal power operation pattern = 00 < normal power operation pattern = 01 < normal power operation pattern = 02, in a way that is advantageous to the player.

The "time-saving end condition" is the end condition under which the time-saving game state ends, and the "variable number of times the special symbol is displayed" and/or the "variable number of times the normal symbol is displayed" are set as the end condition. This "variable number of times the special symbol is displayed" indicates the total number of times the first special symbol is displayed and the variable number of times the second special symbol is displayed. Although not shown in the figure, a transition to a jackpot game state is also set as a time-saving end condition. When any of these time-saving end conditions are met, the time-saving game state ends and a transition to a normal game state occurs.

In this embodiment, in the C time-saving game state (state flag = 3), the time-saving game state in which normal power operation pattern = 00 is set is called the "first time-saving game state", the time-saving game state in which normal power operation pattern = 02 is set is called the "second time-saving game state", and the time-saving game state in which normal power operation pattern = 01 is set is called the "third time-saving game state".

In addition, in the B time-saving game state (state flag = 2), the time-saving game state in which normal power operation pattern = 02 is set is called the "fourth time-saving game state."

In addition, in the A time-saving game state (state flag = 1), the time-saving game state in which normal power operation pattern = 02 is set is called the "fifth time-saving game state."

Furthermore, in the time-saving game state (state flag = 1 to 3), the second time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving game state, and the fifth time-saving game state in which the normal power operation pattern = 02 is set are collectively referred to as the "RUSH game state", and the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state in which the normal power operation pattern = 00 or 01 is set are collectively referred to as the "normal game state".

In this "normal game state" and "general game state (first time-saving game state and third time-saving game state)," left-handed play is the normal game mode, the first special symbol can be selected, and the gameplay is centered around the variable display of the first special symbol.

In the "RUSH game state (second time-saving game state, fourth time-saving game state, and fifth time-saving game state)," right-hand play is the regular game mode, and it is possible to draw normal symbols and second special symbols, and the game is mainly structured around the variable display of normal symbols. In this embodiment, as described below, the second start hole 11140 is opened long by drawing a normal symbol with a probability of about 1/68.5, and when a game ball enters the second start hole 11140, there is a probability of about 1/1 that the game state can be transitioned to the big win game state from the first route triggered by a big win or the second route triggered by a small win by drawing a second special symbol (see FIG. 395).

As shown in FIG. 399(a), the game state related setting table 1, which is referenced after the end of the jackpot game state, associates the selected special symbol (jackpot symbol or small jackpot symbol) with a "state flag," "normal power operation pattern," and "time-saving end condition." Also, in the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 399(a), the "variable number of times the special symbol is displayed" and the "variable number of times the normal symbol is displayed" are set as "time-saving end conditions."

According to the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 399(a), when the "special symbol selection symbols z1, z4, z5" are selected, the status flag indicating the A time-saving game state is set to 1, the normal power operation pattern is set to 02, and the time-saving end conditions are set as the variable display number of special symbols = 10,000 times and the variable display number of normal symbols = 120 times. Also, when the "special symbol selection symbols z2, z3, z6, z7" are selected, the status flag indicating the normal game state is set to 0, the normal power operation pattern is set to 00, and the time-saving end conditions are not set.

In this way, in this embodiment, after the big win game state ends, the game is configured to transition to either the "normal game state" or the "fifth time-saving game state" depending on the special symbol selected.

Here, after the big win game state due to the drawing of the first special symbol ends, the game state transitions to the "normal game state" at the first transition rate (40%) and to the "fifth time-saving game state" at the second transition rate (60%) depending on the selection rate of the special symbol selection (see FIG. 396). Alternatively, in the drawing of the second special symbol, after the big win game state from the first route triggered by the big win ends, the game state transitions to the "fifth time-saving game state" at the third transition rate (100%) depending on the selection rate of the special symbol selection (see FIG. 396), and after the big win game state from the second route triggered by the small win ends, the game state transitions to the "fifth time-saving game state" at the fourth transition rate (80%) and to the "normal game state" at the fifth transition rate (20%) depending on the selection rate of the special symbol selection (see FIG. 396).

In addition, when the game transitions to the "5th time-saving game state" after the end of the big win game state (when the normal power operation pattern = 02 is determined), the "variable number of times that the normal symbol is displayed" is set as a condition that makes it easier for the time-saving end condition to be met. The variable number of times that the normal symbol is displayed here can be set to 120 times, which is the 6th time-saving number of times.

After the jackpot game state ends and the game transitions to the "fifth time-saving game state," if the time-saving end condition is met, the game will transition from the fifth time-saving game state to the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 399(b), the game status related setting table 2, which is referenced after the variable display of the special symbol per time-saving period has ended, associates the selected special symbol (time-saving symbol) with a "status flag," "normal power operation pattern," and "time-saving end condition." Also, in the game status related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 399(b), the "variable number of times the special symbol is displayed" or the "variable number of times the normal symbol is displayed" is set as the "time-saving end condition."

According to the game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 399(b), the state flag = 3 indicating the C time-saving game state is set for all "selected special symbols". In addition, when "selected special symbols z10-12" are selected, the normal power operation pattern = 00 is set, and as the time-saving end condition, when "selected special symbols z10" the variable display number of special symbols = 50 times is set, when "selected special symbols z11" the variable display number of special symbols = 100 times is set, and when "selected special symbols z12" the variable display number of special symbols = 150 times is set. In addition, when "selected special symbols z20" are selected, the normal power operation pattern = 02 and the time-saving end condition of the variable display number of normal symbols = 950 times are set. In addition, when "selected special symbols z30" are selected, the normal power operation pattern = 01 and the time-saving end condition of the variable display number of special symbols = 950 times are set.

In this manner, in this embodiment, after the variable display of the special pattern per time-saving period has ended, the game is configured to transition to a "first time-saving game state," a "second time-saving game state," or a "third time-saving game state," depending on the selected special pattern.
Here, after the variable display of the special pattern per time reduction has ended, depending on the selection rate of the special pattern (see Figure 396), the state will transition to the "first time-shortened game state" at the sixth transition rate (70%), to the "second time-shortened game state" at the seventh transition rate (15%), and to the "third time-shortened game state" at the eighth transition rate (15%).

In addition, when the game transitions to the "first time-saving game state" after the variable display of the special symbol per time-saving has ended (when the normal power operation pattern = 00 has been determined), the "variable display count of the special symbol" is set as a condition that makes it easier for the time-saving end condition to be established. The variable display count of the special symbol here can be set to 50 times, which is the minimum first time-saving count, 100 times, which is the second time-saving count, and 150 times, which is the third time-saving count, and the second time-saving count and the third time-saving count are set to integral multiples of the minimum first time-saving count.
Then, in the case where the state transitions to the "first time-saving game state" after the variable display of the special pattern per time-saving has ended, the state transitions to the normal game state when the time-saving end condition is met (at every predetermined period).

In addition, when the game transitions to the "second time-saving game state" after the variable display of the special symbol per time-saving is completed (when the normal power operation pattern = 02 is determined), the "variable display count of normal symbols" is set as a condition that makes it easier for the time-saving end condition to be established. The variable display count of normal symbols here can be set to 950 times, which is the fourth time-saving count.
In addition, the fourth time-saving number of times is set to a number that is guaranteed to substantially transition to a jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the game transitions to the second time-saving gaming state, it is guaranteed to substantially transition to a jackpot gaming state. Note that the fourth time-saving number of times is not limited to 950 times, as long as it is a number that is guaranteed to substantially transition to a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, when the game transitions to the "third time-saving game state" after the variable display of the special symbol per time-saving is completed (when the normal power operation pattern = 01 is determined), the "number of times of variable display of special symbols" is set as a condition that makes it easier for the time-saving end condition to be established. The number of times of variable display of special symbols here can be set to 950 times, which is the fifth time-saving number.
In addition, the fifth time-saving number of times is set to the number of times that the third time-saving game state can be shifted to the B time-saving game state (fourth time-saving game state). Therefore, in the third time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state will not end unless the state is shifted to the big win game state or the B time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 399(c), the game state related setting table 3, which is referenced after the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed reaches the ceiling value, is associated with a "state flag," a "normal power operation pattern," and a "time-saving end condition." Also, in the game state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. 399(c), the "variable number of times the normal symbol is displayed" is set as the "time-saving end condition."

According to game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 399(c), when the variable display count of the special symbol reaches the ceiling value (950 times), the state flag indicating the B time-saving game state is set to 2, the normal power operation pattern is set to 02, and the variable display count of the normal symbol is set to 950 times as the time-saving end condition.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the number of times that the special symbols are displayed reaches the ceiling value, the game is configured to transition to the "fourth time-saving game state." The number of times that the normal symbols are displayed can be set to 950 times, which is the seventh time-saving number.

The above-mentioned seventh time-saving number of times is set to a number that is guaranteed to result in a transition to a jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the game transitions to the B time-saving gaming state, it is guaranteed that the game will transition to a jackpot gaming state. Note that the seventh time-saving number of times is not limited to 950 times, so long as it is a number that is guaranteed to result in a transition to a jackpot gaming state.

The first to eighth transition rates in each time-saving game state can be freely designed and modified as needed by changing the random number value of the special symbol in the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 396. However, it is desirable that the seventh transition rate for transition to the "second time-saving game state" after the variable display of the special symbol per time-saving game has ended be lower than the sixth transition rate for transition to the "first time-saving game state".

The number of times set as the "time-saving end condition" from the first time-saving number to the seventh time-saving number may be freely changed as appropriate. However, it is desirable that the second time-saving number and the third time-saving number in the first time-saving game state are integer multiples of the first time-saving number.

In addition, in this embodiment, the "variable number of times special symbols are displayed" and/or the "variable number of times normal symbols are displayed" are set as the "time-saving end condition", but in addition to the end conditions described above, the "number of times small jackpots are won" may also be set as a time-saving end condition.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game is configured with three types of normal power operation patterns (00, 01, 02), low, medium, and high, but if the game is configured without the "third time-saving game state", it can be configured with two types, normal power operation pattern = 00 and normal power operation pattern = 02. In this case, the "special pattern selection pattern z30", which triggers the setting of normal power operation pattern = 01, can be set to the same game state as the "special pattern selection pattern z10-12" or the "special pattern selection pattern z20".

In addition, in this embodiment, the game state related setting table is configured to set the game state regardless of the "game state at the time of winning", but it may be configured to set the game state according to the "game state at the time of winning". When setting the game state according to the "game state at the time of winning", it is desirable to set it so that when the "game state at the time of winning is the normal game state", it is easier for the player to transition to a game state that is advantageous to the player than when the "game state at the time of winning is the time-saving game state". For example, in the game state related setting table referenced after the end of the big win game state, when the "game state at the time of winning is the time-saving game state", as in the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 399 (a), the state flag = 0 or state flag = 1 is set according to the "selected special pattern", but when the "game state at the time of winning is the normal game state", it is desirable to set the state flag = 1 and the normal power operation pattern = 02 (advantageous) for all "selected special patterns".

[13-3-6. Special symbol variation pattern table]
400, 401, and 402 are examples of the variation pattern table of the special symbols of the eleventh pachinko game machine. 400 is an example of the variation pattern table of the special symbols of the normal game state of the eleventh pachinko game machine, 401 is an example of the variation pattern table of the special symbols of the general game state of the eleventh pachinko game machine, and 402 is an example of the variation pattern table of the special symbols of the RUSH game state of the eleventh pachinko game machine. The variation pattern tables of the special symbols shown in 400, 401, and 402 are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table is a table that determines the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol and the fluctuation display time of the special symbol. "Special symbol fluctuation pattern" is information that defines the fluctuation mode of the special symbol, and at least the fluctuation display time of the special symbol is defined.

As shown in Figures 400, 401 and 402, the special symbol variation pattern table associates the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win/lose), the random number value for reach determination, the random number value for effect selection, the special symbol variation pattern, and the special symbol variation display time. The reach determination random number value is selected from, for example, 0-249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number value is selected from, for example, 0-99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number values is not limited to the above. Also, the "Notes" column in Figures 400, 401 and 402 conveniently shows the content of the effects, etc., for easy understanding.

The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern table of the special symbol of either Figure 400, Figure 401, or Figure 402 depending on the game status, etc., and determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol winning determination process, the selected special symbol, etc., by referring to the determined variation pattern table of the special symbol. The main CPU 201 then determines the variation display time of the special symbol based on the determined variation pattern of the special symbol.

When the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern, it transmits a special symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined special symbol variation pattern to the sub-CPU 301. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201. The special symbol variation pattern command is configured to be able to distinguish whether it is a first special symbol variation pattern triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 11120 or a second special symbol variation pattern triggered by a game ball entering the second starting hole 11140. Here, when distinguishing between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is also called the first special symbol variation pattern command or the second special symbol variation pattern command.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
The special symbol variation pattern table T shown in FIG. 400 is a special symbol variation pattern table that is determined during normal game play.

As described above, in this embodiment, a "time-saving hit" can only be determined in normal game mode, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T in normal game mode shown in FIG. 400 is configured so that when the result (win or loss) of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," a special symbol fluctuation pattern different from a "jackpot" can be determined.

Furthermore, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T in the normal game state shown in FIG. 400 is configured so that when the result (win/lose) of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," different fluctuation patterns (C1H-C4H) can be determined for the "special symbol selection pattern z10-12" that triggers a transition to the first time-saving game state, the "special symbol selection pattern z20" that triggers a transition to the second time-saving game state, and the "special symbol selection pattern z30" that triggers a transition to the third time-saving game state.

In the normal game state, the special symbol change pattern (C1H-C4H) for when there is a "time-saving hit" can be used to execute a "card effect" or a "RUSH entry effect" (described below) as a special effect for when there is a "time-saving hit". Furthermore, since the change pattern can be determined according to the "selected special symbol" for when there is a "time-saving hit", an effect corresponding to the game state to which the player transitions can be performed according to the "selected special symbol" for the "time-saving hit".

The special symbol variation pattern table T in the normal game state shown in FIG. 400 is configured so that when the type of special symbol is the second special symbol, a variation pattern of the special symbol different from the first special symbol can be determined.

As described above, in the lottery for the second special symbol, there is approximately a 1/1 chance of transitioning to a jackpot gaming state from the first route triggered by a jackpot or the second route triggered by a small jackpot (see Figure 395). Therefore, when the type of special symbol is the second special symbol, it is possible to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol that will execute a "jackpot notification effect" that notifies the player of the transition to the jackpot gaming state.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game mode)
The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 401 is a special symbol variation pattern table that is determined during the general game state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 401, there are three special pattern variation tables in the general game state: special pattern variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 401(a), special pattern variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 401(b), and special pattern variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 401(c). The main CPU 201 determines the special pattern variation pattern table J1-J3 of any of FIG. 401(a), FIG. 401(b), and FIG. 401(c) based on the "number of times N of variable display of first special pattern" that is subtracted each time the variable display of the first special pattern is performed.

The above-mentioned "variable number of times N the first special symbol is displayed" is initially set when the general game state is started, and is then newly set if the general game state continues even after the variable number of times N the first special symbol is displayed becomes 0.

The special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 401(a) is a special symbol variation pattern table that is determined when the "variable display count N of the first special symbol>10" in the normal game state.

The special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 401(b) is a special symbol variation pattern table that is determined when "0<variable display count N of first special symbol≦10" in the normal game state.

The special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 401(c) is a special symbol variation pattern table that is determined when the "variable display count N of the first special symbol = 0" in the general gaming state.

Furthermore, the special pattern variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 401(a), the special pattern variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 401(b), and the special pattern variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 401(c) are configured so that when the result (win/lose) of the hit determination process for the first special pattern is "lose", a special pattern variation pattern (00H, 10H, 11H) corresponding to the varying display time of the different special patterns can be determined.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 401(a), when the result (win/lose) of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "miss," the normal special symbol variation pattern 00H can be determined.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 401(b), when the result (win/lose) of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "miss," the suggestive special symbol variation pattern 10H can be determined as the exclusive special symbol variation pattern.

This suggestive special symbol variation pattern 10H corresponds to a longer special symbol variation display time (15 seconds) than the normal special symbol variation pattern 00H.

In addition, according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 401(c), when the result (win/lose) of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "lose," the judgment special symbol fluctuation pattern 11H can be determined as the dedicated special symbol fluctuation pattern.

The special pattern change pattern 11H for this judgment corresponds to a longer special pattern change display time (20 seconds) than the special pattern change pattern 10H for suggestion.

In this way, when the result of the winning/losing determination process for the first special pattern is a "lose," the predetermined performance can be performed for a long period of time as the "number of times N the first special pattern is variable displayed" approaches 0 (as the number of times N the first special pattern is variable displayed is counted).

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 401(b) may be configured to determine a special symbol fluctuation pattern associated with a shorter special symbol fluctuation display time than the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 401(a). The special symbol fluctuation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 401(c) may be configured to determine a special symbol fluctuation pattern associated with a shorter special symbol fluctuation display time than the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 401(b).

In addition, the special pattern change pattern table J3 shown in Figure 401 (c) is configured to be able to determine a dedicated special pattern change pattern (11H) when the result (win/lose) of the hit determination process for the first special pattern is "lose."
As a result, when "the number of times N of variable display of the first special symbol is 0", a special performance based on a special special symbol variation pattern (11H) can be performed.

As described later, when the general game state is the first time-saving game state, the number of times "50 times" is initially set, which is the same as the minimum number of times the first time-saving game state is set. After that, if the general game state continues even when the number of times N of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes 0, a new number of times "50 times" is set, and this is repeated. Here, when the general game state is the first time-saving game state, the "number of times the variable display of the special symbol" as the time-saving end condition is set to either 50 times, 100 times, or 150 times, and when the time-saving end condition is established, the game state transitions to the normal game state.
For this reason, in the first time-saving game state as the general game state, the special pattern variation pattern tables are switched in the order of special pattern variation pattern table J1, special pattern variation pattern table J2, and special pattern variation pattern table J3, with the first special pattern being variable displayed 50 times as one cycle, and a special presentation can be made as to whether or not to transition to the normal game state based on the special pattern variation pattern (11H) of special pattern variation pattern table J3.

In addition, when the general game state is the third time-saving game state, the number of times of the first time-saving game state, which is the minimum number of times of the first time-saving game state, is set to "50 times". After that, when the number of times of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes N=0 but the general game state continues, the number of times of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes N=0, the number of times of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes N=0.
Here, when the general gaming state is the third time-saving gaming state, the "variable number of times of displaying special symbols" as the time-saving ending condition is set to 950 times.
For this reason, in the third time-saving game state as the general game state, the special pattern variation pattern tables are switched in the order of special pattern variation pattern table J1, special pattern variation pattern table J2, and special pattern variation pattern table J3, and a special presentation can be performed to notify that the third time-saving game state is being entered based on the special pattern variation pattern (11H) of special pattern variation pattern table J3.

In addition, when the type of special pattern is the second special pattern, the special pattern change pattern tables J1 to J3 in Fig. 401(a), 401(b) and 401(c) are configured to be able to determine a change pattern of a special pattern different from the first special pattern, similar to the special pattern change pattern table T in the normal game state shown in Fig. 400, and are configured to be able to determine a change pattern of a special pattern in which a "jackpot notification performance" is executed.

In this embodiment, three variation pattern tables are provided as variation pattern tables for special symbols in the general game state, but the number of variation pattern tables J1 to J3 for special symbols in the general game state is not limited to three, and may be one, or two or more.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the same variation pattern table is configured for the first time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, and the fifth time-saving game state as the general game state, but different variation pattern tables may be configured for the first time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, and the fifth time-saving game state.

(Special symbol variation pattern table for RUSH game state)
The special symbol variation pattern table J4 shown in Fig. 402(a) is a variation pattern table of the special symbol determined in the "second time-saving game state or the fourth time-saving game state" as the RUSH game state. The special symbol variation pattern table J5 shown in Fig. 402(b) is a variation pattern table of the special symbol determined in the "fifth time-saving game state" as the RUSH game state.

Between the special pattern variation pattern table J4 shown in FIG. 402(a) and the special pattern variation pattern table J5 shown in FIG. 402(b), the special pattern variation pattern table J5 shown in FIG. 402(b) is configured to be able to determine a special pattern variation pattern associated with a short special pattern variation display time when the special pattern type is the first special pattern.

Furthermore, the special pattern variation pattern table J4 shown in FIG. 402(a) and the special pattern variation pattern table J5 shown in FIG. 402(b) are configured to be able to determine a variation pattern of a special pattern different from the first special pattern when the type of special pattern is the second special pattern, similar to the special pattern variation pattern table T in the normal game state shown in FIG. 400, and are configured to be able to determine a variation pattern of a special pattern in which a "jackpot notification performance" is executed.

In this embodiment, the same fluctuation pattern table J2 is configured for the second time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state in the RUSH game state, but different fluctuation pattern tables may be configured for the second time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state. Furthermore, the fifth time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state may be configured with the same fluctuation pattern table, and the fifth time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state may be configured with the same fluctuation pattern table.

[13-3-7. Special symbol pre-reading related data]
FIG. 403 is an example of data related to the look-ahead of the special symbol in the eleventh pachinko game machine. Here, "look-ahead" refers to analyzing the start information of the special symbol acquired before the lottery of the special symbol when the game ball enters the first start hole 11120 or the second start hole 11140 and the main control circuit 200 (main CPU 201) acquires the start information of the special symbol (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for a symbol, random number value for determining a reach, random number value for selecting a performance, etc.). The analyzed information (look-ahead command) is then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 (sub-CPU 301), and the "look-ahead performance" can be executed based on the look-ahead command.

Figure 403 (a) is a look-ahead execution correspondence table that determines whether or not to execute look-ahead depending on the game status as data related to look-ahead of special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 403(a), in the normal game state, both pre-reading based on the start information of the first special symbol and pre-reading based on the start information of the second special symbol can be performed. Also, in the time-saving game state, big win game state, and small win game state, only pre-reading based on the start information of the second special symbol can be performed.

Figure 403 (b) shows an example of the configuration of a look-ahead command as analyzed information after analyzing the start information of a special pattern.

As shown in FIG. 403(b), the look-ahead command is composed of a "special symbol type" - either the first special symbol or the second special symbol - and multiple "parameters 1 to 3."

"Parameter 1" is the winning/losing information that is analyzed in advance to determine whether it is a big win, a small win, a time-saving win, or a miss based on a random number value for determining a big win, and Figure 403 (c) is an example of a setting table for parameter 1.

"Parameter 2" is pattern information that is obtained by analyzing in advance the selected special pattern to be stopped and displayed based on the random number value for determining a jackpot and the random number value for the pattern, and Figure 403 (d) is an example of a setting table for parameter 2.

"Parameter 3" is fluctuation information that analyzes the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in advance based on the random number value for determining a jackpot, the random number value for determining a reach, and the random number value for selecting a performance, and Figure 403 (e) is an example of a setting table for parameter 3.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol from when the start information of the special symbol is read ahead until the special symbol is drawn based on the start information of the special symbol is also called "pre-variation." Also, the variable display of the special symbol when the special symbol is drawn based on the start information of the special symbol is also called "the said variation."

[13-3-8. Normal symbol winning judgment table]
404 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. The winning determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 404 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol winning judgment table is a table referenced in the normal symbol winning judgment process, and is a table referenced when determining by lottery whether the "normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol losing" is based on the normal symbol winning judgment random number value obtained when the game ball passes through the first passing gate 11126R or the second passing gate 11126L.

The winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 404 specifies the range (width) of the random number value for winning judgment of normal symbols and the winning/losing judgment value data for normal symbols ("normal symbol win" or "normal symbol miss") in correspondence with each other. Note that the random number value for winning judgment of normal symbols is obtained in the range of 0 to 65535 (65536 types), for example. However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning/losing determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 404, and determines the winning/losing determination value data for normal symbols based on the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol winning determination.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern shown in FIG. 404, and when the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern is any value between 0 and 956, it judges it as a "normal pattern winning" and determines the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal pattern as the "normal pattern winning/losing judgment value data". Therefore, in this embodiment, the "normal pattern winning" is determined with a selection rate of approximately 1/68.5. Also, when the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern is 957 to 65535, the main CPU 201 judges it as a "normal pattern losing" and determines the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal pattern as the "normal pattern losing judgment value data".

The range (width) of the random number value for determining whether a normal pattern is a hit or a miss, i.e., the selection rate, is not limited to the above values and can be freely designed and modified as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the selection rate for "normal symbol hit" is set to the same (the winning probability for normal symbol hit is the same) regardless of whether the game state is normal game state or time-saving game state, but the degree of profit given to the player is varied by changing the opening pattern of the second start hole 11140 according to the game state (normal power operation pattern) as described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" is set to the same regardless of whether the game state is the normal game state or the time-saving game state, but the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" may be made different depending on the game state. When making the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" different depending on the game state, it is desirable to configure it so that the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" in the time-saving game state is higher than the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" in the normal game state. Furthermore, the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" may be made different depending on the type of game state, time-saving game state A and time-saving game state B.

[13-3-9. Normal symbol determination table]
405 is an example of the normal symbol determination table in the pachinko gaming machine No. 11. The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 405 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "selected normal symbol" that determines the stopping symbol of the normal symbol based on the winning/losing determination value data of the normal symbol described above and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol obtained when the game ball passes through the first passing gate 11126R or the second passing gate 11126L.

The normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 405 specifies the above-mentioned normal pattern winning/losing determination value data ("normal pattern winning determination value data" or "normal pattern losing determination value data"), the normal pattern random number value, and the selected normal pattern, in correspondence with each other. Note that the normal pattern random number value is obtained, for example, from 0 to 100 (101 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 405 and determines the selected normal pattern based on the normal pattern hit determination value data and the pattern random number value of the normal pattern.

According to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 405, when normal pattern winning determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal pattern winning determination process, for example, the selected normal pattern is selected as follows.

For example, when normal symbol winning judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f1" as the selected normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 0 and 75, and selects "f2" as the selected normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 76 and 100. In addition, when normal symbol losing judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f3" as the selected normal symbol, regardless of the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

The range (width) of the random number value of the normal pattern from which the "selected normal pattern" is selected, i.e., the selection rate, is not limited to the above value and can be freely designed and changed as appropriate.

In particular, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, the selected normal symbol is selected based on the win/lose determination value data for the normal symbol (the result of the win determination process for the normal symbol) and the symbol random number value for the normal symbol, regardless of the gaming state. Note that, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the selected normal symbol may be selected depending on the gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern (see FIG. 404) and determines the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal pattern based on the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern, and then refers to the normal pattern judgment table (see FIG. 405) and determines the selected pattern for the normal pattern based on the pattern random number value for the normal pattern, but this is not limited to this. For example, the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal pattern (whether the normal pattern is winning or losing) and the selected pattern for the normal pattern may be determined together based on the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern and the pattern random number value for the normal pattern.

[13-3-10. Second starting hole opening pattern determination table]
406 is an example of a second start opening pattern determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. The second start opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 406 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

When it is determined that a normal symbol has been hit, the second start hole opening pattern determination table is referenced when determining the opening pattern of the second start hole 11140 as the operation mode of the normal power shutter 11147 according to the game state (normal power operation pattern) and the selected normal symbol.

The second start hole opening pattern determination table shown in Figure 406 specifies the game state (normal power operation pattern), the selected normal pattern, and the opening pattern of the second start hole 11140 in correspondence with each other.

The "second start port opening pattern" is composed of a "first opening time" when the second start port 11140 is in the first open state, a "first wait time" when the second start port 11140 is in the first closed state, a "second opening time" when the second start port 11140 is in the second open state, a "second wait time" when the second start port 11140 is in the second closed state, and an "ending time" that closes the second start port 11140 and ends the operation of the normal power shutter 11147.

The main CPU 201 refers to the second start hole opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 406 and determines the opening pattern of the second start hole 11140 based on the game state (normal power operation pattern) and the selected normal pattern. When the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern of the second start hole 11140, it transmits to the sub-CPU 301 a second start hole opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the second start hole 11140.

In this embodiment, there are two types of opening patterns for the second starting port: a disadvantageous "short opening pattern (91H01H)" in which the opening time of the second starting port 11140 is short, and an advantageous "long opening pattern (91H02H)" in which the opening time of the second starting port 11140 is long. Note that the second starting port may be configured to have three or more opening patterns.

In particular, in this embodiment, the opening time of the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is set to an extremely short time (for example, 0.072 seconds). Therefore, even if a normal pattern is determined to be a winning combination, when the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is performed, it becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 11140, and it is essentially treated as a losing combination.

In addition, the opening time of the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is set to a long time (e.g., 5.4 seconds) that allows the game ball to enter the second starting hole 11140.

According to the second start hole opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 406, in the normal game state and the first time-saving game state, when the selected normal symbol is "f1" and when the selected normal symbol is "f2", the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is determined as the opening pattern of the second start hole (the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is not determined).

In addition, in the third time-saving game state, when the selected normal symbol is "f1," the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is determined as the opening pattern for the second starting hole, and when the selected normal symbol is "f2," the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is determined as the opening pattern for the second starting hole.

In addition, in the second time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving game state, and the fifth time-saving game state, the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is determined as the opening pattern of the second starting hole when the selected normal symbol is "f1" or when the selected normal symbol is "f2."

For this reason, normal power operation pattern = 00 indicates a state in which the "long opening pattern" is difficult to determine and the "short opening pattern" is likely to be determined, normal power operation pattern = 01 indicates a state in which both the "long opening pattern" and the "short opening pattern" are determined, and normal power operation pattern = 02 indicates a state in which the "long opening pattern" is more likely to be determined and the "short opening pattern" is more difficult to determine than when normal power operation pattern = 01.

In addition, in the right column of the second starting hole opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 406, the "long opening probability" at which the "long opening pattern" is executed is shown for reference, calculated by adding up the "random number value for determining whether a normal pattern is a hit (see FIG. 404)" and the "pattern random number value for a normal pattern (see FIG. 405)". In this embodiment, when the normal power operation pattern = 00, the normal pattern hit is approximately 1/68.5, but the long opening pattern is never determined, so the "long opening probability" is 0. In addition, when the normal power operation pattern = 01, the normal pattern hit is approximately 1/68.5, and the selection rate of the selected pattern "f2" of the normal pattern that determines the long opening pattern is 35/101, so the "long opening probability" is approximately 1/197.6. Also, when the normal power operation pattern is 01, the normal symbol hit rate is approximately 1/68.5, and the long opening pattern is determined for all selected normal symbols (101/101), so the "long opening probability" is approximately 1/68.5.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specified number for normal power is set to three, and even if the opening pattern of any of the second starting holes is determined and the second starting hole 11140 is opened, when three game balls enter the second starting hole 11140, the opening pattern of that second starting hole ends (the second starting hole 11140 closes).

[13-3-11. Normal pattern variation table]
407 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 407 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table is a table that determines the normal symbol fluctuation pattern and the normal symbol fluctuation display time. "Normal symbol fluctuation pattern" is information that defines the normal symbol fluctuation mode, and at least the normal symbol fluctuation display time is defined.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 407 associates the selected normal symbol, the random number value for the normal symbol's effect, the normal symbol's variation pattern, and the normal symbol's variation display time. Also, the "Notes" column in FIG. 407 conveniently shows the contents of the effect, etc., for easy understanding.

FIG. 407(a) is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table F1 in a normal game state.
FIG. 407(b) is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table F2 in the first time-saving game state in the normal game state.
FIG. 407(c) is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table F3 in the third time-saving game state in the normal game state.
FIG. 407(d) is an example of a variation pattern table F4 of normal symbols in the second time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state in the RUSH game state.
FIG. 407(e) is an example of a normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F5 for the fifth time-saving gaming state in the RUSH gaming state.

The main CPU 201 determines one of the normal symbol variation pattern tables in FIG. 407 according to the game state, references the determined normal symbol variation pattern table, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variation display time based on the selected normal symbol and other elements. Then, when the main CPU 201 determines the normal symbol variation pattern, it transmits to the sub-CPU 301 a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F1 in the normal game state shown in FIG. 407(a) is configured to be able to determine the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (00H, 01H) associated with the longest normal symbol fluctuation display time than the normal symbol fluctuation pattern tables F2 to F5 shown in FIG. 407(b) to FIG. 407(e).

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F2 in the first time-saving play state shown in FIG. 407(b) is configured to be able to determine normal symbol fluctuation patterns (10H, 11H) associated with normal symbol fluctuation display times that are shorter than those in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F1 in the normal play state shown in FIG. 407(a).

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F3 in the third time-saving play state shown in FIG. 407(c) is configured to be able to determine normal symbol fluctuation patterns (20H, 21H, 22H, 23H) associated with normal symbol fluctuation display times that are shorter than those in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F2 in the first time-saving play state shown in FIG. 407(b).

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F4 in the second time-saving play state and the fourth time-saving play state shown in FIG. 407(d) is configured to be able to determine a normal symbol fluctuation pattern (30H) associated with a normal symbol fluctuation display time that is shorter than that of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F3 in the third time-saving play state shown in FIG. 407(c) when the result (win/lose) of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss."

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F5 in the fifth time-saving play state shown in FIG. 407(e) is configured to be able to determine a normal symbol fluctuation pattern (40H) associated with a normal symbol fluctuation display time that is shorter than that of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F4 in the second time-saving play state and the fourth time-saving play state shown in FIG. 407(d) when the result (win/lose) of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss."

That is, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table is configured so that the average fluctuation display time of the normal pattern is relatively short in the order of normal pattern fluctuation pattern table F1 in the normal game state, normal pattern fluctuation pattern table F2 in the first time-saving game state, normal pattern fluctuation pattern table F3 in the third time-saving game state, normal pattern fluctuation pattern table F4 in the second and fourth time-saving game states, and normal pattern fluctuation pattern table F5 in the fifth time-saving game state.

In addition, the normal symbol variation pattern table F3 in the third time-saving game state shown in FIG. 407(c) is configured to be able to determine a normal symbol variation pattern (23H) in which a "telop effect" suggesting that the second start hole 11140 will open is executed when the "normal symbol selection pattern f2" is selected. In addition, in this embodiment, the normal symbol variation pattern table F3 is configured to be able to determine a normal symbol variation pattern (22H) in which a dummy "telop effect" is executed even when the "normal symbol selection pattern f1" is selected, but it may be configured to be able to determine a normal symbol variation pattern in which a "telop effect" is executed only when the "normal symbol selection pattern f2" is selected. Furthermore, the normal symbol variation pattern table F3 may be configured to be able to determine a normal symbol variation pattern (22H) in which a dummy "telop effect" is executed even when the "normal symbol selection pattern f3" is selected.

As described above, in the RUSH gaming states (second time-saving gaming state, fourth time-saving gaming state, and fifth time-saving gaming state), right-hitting is the normal gaming mode, and the gameplay is structured around the display of changing normal symbols. For this reason, the normal symbol change pattern tables F4 and F5 in the RUSH gaming states shown in Figures 407(d) and (e) are structured to be able to determine normal symbol change patterns (30H, 31H, 32H, 33H, 34H, 35H, 40H) in which a performance (symbol performance) suggesting the lottery result of the normal symbols is executed.

In this embodiment, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table in the RUSH game state is configured to be separated into normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F4 in the second time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state, and normal symbol fluctuation pattern table F5 in the fifth time-saving game state, but the second time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving game state, and the fifth time-saving game state may be configured with a common normal symbol fluctuation pattern table.

[13-3-12. Game stop command determination table]
408 is an example of a game stop command determination table in the pachinko gaming machine No. 11. The game stop command determination table shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, as described below, when the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulated value (95,000 balls), the game will be stopped as a general rule. However, if the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulated value during a small win game state or a big win game state, the game will be stopped after the small win game state or the big win game state ends.

The "game stop command" is a command that transmits information to the sub-control circuit 300 about the fact that the game will be stopped according to the increased number of game balls (MY). By receiving the game stop command, the sub-control circuit 300 is able to give a "game stop notice" in advance on the display device 7, etc., to notify the user that the game will be stopped, or a "game stop notification" that the game has been stopped.

The game stop command determination table shown in FIG. 408 associates a "game stop function activation management phase," a "game stop notice start condition," and a "game stop command."

The "game stop function activation management phase" here refers to one piece of related information for stopping a game based on the increased number of game balls, and is information that is set based on the increased number of game balls (MY) and indicates the state of the game stop function.

As described later, this "game stop function activation management phase" is set to "00H" when the number of game balls (MY) is 84999 or less, which is less than the initial boundary value, "01H" is set when the number of game balls (MY) is in the "first counting range (85000-89999)" from the initial boundary value or more to the first boundary value or less, and "02H" is set when the number of game balls (MY) is in the "second counting range (90000-94999)" from the first boundary value or more to the regulation value or less. In addition, when the number of game balls (MY) is in the "third counting range (95000 or more)" that is the regulation value or more, "03H" is set when the game is in a small win game state or a big win game state (before the game stop state), and "04H" is set when the game is not in a small win game state or a big win game state (during the game stop state).

The "increase in number of game balls (MY)" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out (number of paid-out game balls) minus the cumulative number of game balls fired (number of fired game balls). As will be explained in more detail later, the "increase in number of game balls (MY)" corresponds to the "difference in number of game balls counter" (increase in number of game balls (MY) = value of the difference in number of game balls counter).

In this way, the increased number of game balls (MY) is divided into an "initial counting range (84,999 or less)," a "first counting range (85,000-89,999)," a "second counting range (90,000-94,999)," and a "third counting range (95,000 or more)," and is configured to be identifiable by the game stop function activation management phase. Note that the initial boundary value, first boundary value, and regulation value can be freely designed and modified as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 408, the game stop command decision table is configured so that when the increased number of game balls (MY) is within the initial counting range (84999 or less), i.e., when the game stop function activation management phase is 00H, the game stop command is not decided and no notification regarding the increased number of game balls (MY) is made.

The game stop command determination table shown in FIG. 408 is configured so that when the increase in the number of game balls (MY) is in the first counting range (85,000 to 89,999), i.e., when the game stop function activation management phase is 01H, if the "game stop notice start condition" (hereinafter also referred to as the "first game stop notice start condition") in the first counting range is met, a game stop command = 01H capable of executing the first game stop notice is determined.

The first game stop notice based on the game stop command = 01H will continue to be executed until the "first game stop notice end condition" described below is met.

The game stop command determination table shown in FIG. 408 is configured so that when the increased number of game balls (MY) is in the second counting range (90,000 to 94,999), i.e., when the game stop function activation management phase is 02H, if the "game stop notice start condition" (hereinafter also referred to as the "second game stop notice start condition") in the second counting range is met, a game stop command = 02H capable of executing the second game stop notice is determined.

The second game stop notice based on game stop command = 02H will be executed in a notification manner that is partially different from the first game stop notice, and will continue to be executed until the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulated value.

In this embodiment, the first and second game stop notifications are different, but they may be a common notification. The notification mode of the game stop notification will be described in detail later.

The game stop command determination table shown in FIG. 408 is configured so that when the number of game balls increased (MY) is in the third counting range (95,000 and up) and the game is in a small win game state or a big win game state, that is, when the game stop function activation management phase is 03H, a game stop command = 03H that can execute the third game stop notice is determined.

The third game stop notice based on game stop command = 02H will be executed in a notification manner that is partially different from the first and second game stop notices, and will continue to be executed until the game is stopped (until the small win game state or the big win game state ends).

The game stop command determination table shown in FIG. 408 is configured so that when the number of game balls (MY) is in the third counting range (95,000 and up) and the game is not in a small win or big win state, that is, when the game stop function activation management phase is 04H, a game stop command = 04H that can execute a game stop notification is determined.

The game stop notification based on the game stop command = 04H is a notification mode different from a game stop notice, and will continue to be executed until the RAM is cleared by the backup clear switch 176.

Here, as shown in FIG. 408, the "first game stop notice start condition" for the first counting range is set to be in any one of the following game states: during a jackpot game state for the selected special symbol z1, during a jackpot game state for the selected special symbol z4, during a jackpot game state for the selected special symbol z5, the second time-saving game state (RUSH game state), the fourth time-saving game state (RUSH game state), or the fifth time-saving game state (RUSH game state).

The second time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving game state, and the fifth time-saving game state are all RUSH game states, and when a game state transitions to a RUSH game state, it becomes easier to transition to a jackpot game state, and the game state is one in which the player can expect to acquire a large amount of game value (game balls). During the jackpot game state of the special symbol z1, during the jackpot game state of the special symbol z4, and during the jackpot game state of the special symbol z5, the game state transitions to the fifth time-saving game state (RUSH game state) after the jackpot game state ends, and the game state is one in which the player can expect to acquire a large amount of game value (game balls).
Therefore, the "first game stop notice start condition" of the first counting range sets a game state in which the player can be expected to acquire a large amount of game value (game balls). Therefore, in a game state in which the player can be expected to acquire a large amount of game value (game balls), the execution of the game stop notice can be started earlier than the second counting range.

The "second game stop notice start condition" of the second counting range is first branched by the execution flag. This "execution flag" is a flag for determining whether the first game stop notice has already been executed, and an execution flag of 0 indicates that the first game stop notice has not been executed, and an execution flag of 1 indicates that the first game stop notice has already been executed.

The second game stop notification start condition for the second counting range is set to be when the execution flag is 0 and the increase in the number of game balls (MY) reaches the first boundary value of 90,000.

Therefore, if the first game stop notice has not been executed, the execution of the game stop notice will start even when the increase in the number of game balls (MY) reaches the first boundary value by a game ball entering the first start port 11120 or the general winning port 122, etc., and a predetermined number of prize balls being paid out.

The second counting range's "second game stop notice start condition" is set to be in any of the following game states: second time-saving game state (RUSH game state), fourth time-saving game state (RUSH game state), or fifth time-saving game state (RUSH game state) when the execution flag is 1, among all jackpot game states not limited to the selected special symbol.

Therefore, if the first game stop notice has already been executed, the execution of the game stop notice will start when the game state is reached where the player can expect to acquire a predetermined game value (game balls).

On the other hand, if the first game stop notice has already been executed, the execution of the game stop notice will not be started even when the increase in the number of game balls (MY) reaches the first boundary value as a result of game balls entering the first start port 11120 or the general winning port 122, etc. and a predetermined prize ball being paid out. Therefore, even if the increase in the number of game balls (MY) reaches the first boundary value as a result of game balls entering the first start port 11120 or the general winning port 122, etc. and a predetermined prize ball being paid out, but the increase in the number of game balls (MY) falls below the first boundary value again as a result of the launch of the game balls (such as when the first counting range and the second counting range go back and forth), the execution of the game stop notice will not be started when the first game stop notice has already been executed, and the hassle of the game stop notice can be eliminated.

[13-4. Main control processing]
In the eleventh pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are the same as those in the first pachinko game machine, except for some of the main control main process, special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and system timer interrupt process. Therefore, the following will explain the main control main process, special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and system timer interrupt process, and will not explain the other processes executed by the main CPU 201.

Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, the same processing as that performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[13-4-1. Main control main processing]
Next, the main processing (main control main processing) under the control of the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 409 and Fig. 410. Fig. 409 and Fig. 410 are flow charts showing an example of the main control main processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether the power interruption signal bit is "0" (step S11001). If the main CPU 201 determines in step S11001 that the power interruption signal bit is "0" (YES in step S11001), the main CPU 201 determines that a power interruption is being detected and repeats the determination process of step S11001.

If the main CPU 201 determines in step S11001 that the power interruption signal bit is not "0" (if step S11001 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 determines that a power interruption is not being detected and proceeds to step S11002.

Next, in step S11002, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting a stack pointer for the game area. Here, for example, the stack pointer is set to the final address of the stack area (game area) + 1. Then, during subsequent processing, if the stack is used, 1 is subtracted from the stack pointer, and register values, etc. are stored at that address, and thereafter, the stack areas (game areas) are used in the same manner, from areas with larger address values to areas with smaller address values.

Next, in step S11003, an initial setting process for the built-in registers is performed. Here, for example, the initial setting of the built-in registers is performed by referring to a built-in register initial setting data table. Also, the top address (upper side) "F0"H of the working area (game area) of the main RAM 203 is set in a specific register (for example, the Q register).

Then, in step S11004, the state information (on/off state) of the backup clear switch 176 at startup and the state information of the setting key 174 inserted into the setting key socket are stored in a specified register (e.g., E register) so that these states can be checked later in the startup state check process.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a wait process (step S11005). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a wait process for the sub-control circuit 300 to start up. The wait time for startup (wait period) is approximately 12,000 msec. During this wait time for startup, the main CPU 201 checks whether an interrupt request signal (XINT) has occurred, outputs a WDT when an interrupt request signal has occurred, and outputs a magnetic sensor initialization signal at a predetermined timing. This process is performed using a timeout register. Even while interrupts are prohibited, for example, the timer counter can be controlled to be updated, and a timeout register can be used to determine with one instruction whether the timer counter has timed out, and the process can be branched, so that the process branches in a pseudo manner depending on whether a timer interrupt has occurred.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM access setting process (step S11006). In this process, the main CPU 201 sends an access permission command to the main RAM 203 to the corresponding register.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a designated area CRC inspection process (step S11007). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a CRC calculation on the game area and the outside area of the main RAM 203, and performs a CRC inspection. If the CRC inspection determines that there is an abnormality (error), a flag "1" indicating that there is a backup abnormality is set in a specified register (e.g., register B), and if the CRC inspection determines that there is no abnormality, a flag "0" indicating that there is no abnormality is set in a specified register (e.g., register B).

Note that a CRC check involves, for example, dividing the data in a specified area by a specific, predetermined value, and using the remainder as a value to check whether or not there is an abnormality. If this check value is calculated at different points in time and the values do not match, it can be determined that there has been a change in the data in the specified area (that there is an abnormality in the data's position or value).

Next, in step S11008, the main CPU 201 performs a startup status check process. In this process, a startup status is determined based on whether or not there is an abnormality in the main RAM 203 through a CRC check, the operation of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on, and whether or not power is restored during a setting change, and the clear range of the main RAM 203 (RAM clear range) is set based on the determined startup status.

If the CRC check determines that there is an abnormality (error), the start-up state is determined to be "RAM abnormal", the RAM clear range is set to the "abnormal RAM clear range", and an error process that makes it impossible to return to play is performed. In the error process that makes it impossible to return to play, the WDT clear process and the restart process are repeated in an infinite loop, and for example, the performance display monitor 170 is controlled to display the letter "E", and play is stopped. Note that the abnormal RAM clear range is set as the clear range, but it is also possible to leave the game stopped without setting this clear range (abnormal RAM clear range).

Also, if the CRC check is determined to be normal, the backup clear switch 176 is "off," and the setting key 174 is "off," the startup state is determined to be "power outage recovery," the RAM clear range is set to "RAM clear range when power outage is restored," and the process ends.

In addition, if the CRC check is determined to be normal, the backup clear switch 176 is "off," and the setting key 174 is "on," the startup state is determined to be "checking settings," the RAM clear range is set to the "RAM clear range when power is restored," and the process ends.

Also, if the CRC check is normal, the backup clear switch 176 is "on," and the setting key 174 is "on," the startup state is determined to be "settings being changed," the RAM clear range is set to "RAM clear range when setting is changed," and processing ends.

Also, if the CRC check is determined to be normal, the backup clear switch 176 is "on," and the setting key 174 is "off," the startup state is determined to be "RAM clear," the RAM clear range is set to the "RAM clear range when setting is changed," and processing ends.

Next, in step S11009, the main CPU 201 performs a designated range clear process. In this process, the main CPU 201 clears the RAM clear range that was set in step S11008 above.

If the startup state is determined to be "settings changing" and "RAM cleared," the "RAM clear range when settings are changed" will be cleared.

In addition, the "RAM clear range when changing settings" includes at least the "status flag" and "normal power operation pattern" related to information on the game status, and the "game stop function operation management phase" described below.
Therefore, when the start-up state is determined as "setting changing" and "RAM clear", the "RAM clear range when setting is changed" is cleared, so that the state flag and the normal power operation pattern are cleared and the initial "normal game state" is set. Furthermore, when the start-up state is determined as "setting changing" and "RAM clear", the "RAM clear range when setting is changed" is cleared, so that the "game stop function operation management phase" is cleared and the game stop state based on the increased number of game balls can be released. In other words, by "clearing the RAM" using the backup clear switch 176, the initial "normal game state" is set and the game stop state can be released.

The "RAM clear range when changing settings" may also include the "number of acquired game balls," "difference in number of balls counter," and "MY determination counter," which will be described later.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the start-up state is determined as "setting change in progress" and "RAM clear", a common "setting change RAM clear range" is cleared, but it may be configured so that when the start-up state is determined as "setting change in progress", the "first RAM clear range" is cleared, and when the start-up state is determined as "RAM clear", the "second RAM clear range" is cleared. Even when configured in this way, it is desirable that the "second RAM clear range" when the start-up state is determined as "RAM clear" includes at least the "status flag", "normal power operation pattern", and "game stop function operation management phase".

Next, in step S11010, the main CPU 201 sets the address of a data table for power-on initialization stored in an area outside the main RAM 203 in a specified register (e.g., the HL register), and references this register to store the data for power-on initialization in the working area.

Next, in step S11011, the main CPU 201 performs a data storage process to store the data of the power-on initialization data table in the storage target area using the address of the power-on initialization data table set in step S11010. This data storage process is similar to the data storage process (see FIG. 121) executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

Next, in step S11012, the main CPU 201 performs a setting change confirmation process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a setting update or setting change process when the setting key 174 is inserted into the setting key slot and is in the "on" state. This setting change confirmation process is similar to the setting change confirmation process (see Figures 122 and 123) executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

Next, in step S11013, the main CPU 201 performs a game return process. In this process, when the game machine is powered on (started up), the main CPU 201 performs an initial setting process for when power is restored after a power outage, depending on the start-up state. This game return process will be described in detail later.

Next, in step S11014, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt disable processing. This processing disables maskable interrupts. In this processing, the main CPU 201 executes an interrupt disable instruction, and as a result, the value of interrupt enable register 1 becomes "0", and the value of interrupt enable register 2 also becomes "0". In this way, when the interrupt disable instruction is executed (while the value of interrupt enable register 1 is "0"), maskable interrupts are disabled.

Next, in step S11015, the main CPU 201 performs a power interruption determination process. In this power interruption determination process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a power interruption has been detected (i.e., whether or not XINT has been detected), and performs a power interruption setting process if a power interruption has been detected. In the power interruption setting process, the main CPU 201 stores a power interruption detection flag in the working area (outside area area) of the main RAM 203, performs a CRC calculation on the game area and outside area of the main RAM 203, and stores the CRC calculation result (designated area CRC value) in a specified register (e.g., HL register). Thereafter, by sending a RAM access prohibition command to the specified register, access to the main RAM 203 is prohibited and the machine waits until a power interruption occurs. This power interruption setting process is similar to the power interruption setting process (see Figs. 125 and 126) executed in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment.

Next, in step S11016, the main CPU 201 performs an initial random number value update process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs an update process of the initial random number value for determining the special symbol.

After this, in step S11017, the main CPU 201 performs a performance display monitor tally division process. This process is called by an outside area process call command, and becomes outside area processing. The main CPU 201 calculates and updates various base values, and each process is performed using the main RAM 203 working area (outside area). This performance display monitor tally division process is similar to the performance display monitor tally division process (see Figures 127 and 128) executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

Next, in step S11018, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. This processing allows maskable interrupts. Here, the values of interrupt permission register 1 and interrupt permission register 2 are both set to "1."

Next, in step S11019, the main CPU 201 determines whether the system cycle time (6 msec: 3 times the interrupt cycle (2 msec)) has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value (current interrupt counter count value) stored in the interrupt counter area of the working area (game area) of the main RAM 203 minus 3 is "0". The interrupt counter value is incremented by 1 each time a system timer interrupt process (described later) is performed, and becomes "3" when the system cycle time has elapsed. Therefore, if the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the interrupt counter value is "0", the determination in step S11019 is "YES", and if the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the interrupt counter value is not "0", the determination in step S11019 is "NO".

If the main CPU 201 determines in step S11019 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (if step S11019 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 returns the process to step S11014 and performs the processes from step S11014 onward.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 201 determines in step S11019 that the system period has elapsed (YES in step S11019), the main CPU 201 performs a timer counter update process in step S11020. This process subtracts 1 from the value stored in the interrupt counter area (interrupt counter value) three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process (to "0").

As described above, in this embodiment, within the main control process, a 6 msec interrupt prohibition section (the processing section from step S11014 to step S11018) is provided before the execution of various processes related to game control, which will be described later. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed every 6 msec (every system cycle). Note that, although an example in which the interrupt prohibition section is three times the interrupt cycle has been described in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the interrupt prohibition section may be set to a value that is more than twice the interrupt cycle but other than three times.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a main control command transmission/reception process (step S11021). In this process, the main CPU 201 mainly performs a command transmission/reception process for payout control. This main control command transmission/reception process is similar to the main control command transmission/reception process (see FIG. 129) executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol control processing (step S11022). In this processing, the main CPU 201 performs control processing for the special symbol game. This special symbol control processing will be described in detail later.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing (step S11023). In this processing, the main CPU 201 performs control processing for the normal symbol game. This normal symbol control processing will be described in detail later.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a game action display unit control process (step S11024). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the display data to be output to the first special symbol display LED, the second special symbol display LED, the normal symbol display LED, the hold display LED, etc.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a game information data generation process (step S11025). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs control processing of the external terminal board pulse signal, setting processing of output data, etc. After that, in step S11026, the main CPU 201 performs a test firing signal generation process. Note that the test firing signal generation process is performed using the working area (outside area area) of the main RAM 203.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing (step S11027). In this processing, the main CPU 201 sets (transfers) the output data to the output port and outputs the WDT.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a status monitoring process (step S11028). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a launch position determination process (if there is a change in the launch position, a process for reserving the transmission of a launch position command is performed), a game abnormality detection determination process (if there is an abnormality, a process for reserving the transmission of a game abnormality detection command is performed), and a payout abnormality detection determination process (if there is an abnormality, a process for reserving the transmission of a payout abnormality detection command is performed).

Then, after processing step S11028, the main CPU 201 returns the process to step S11014 and performs processing from step S11014 onwards.

As described above, in the main control main process of this embodiment, after startup, and before executing the wait process (step S11005), the status information of the backup clear switch 176 and the status information of the setting key 174 are saved (step S11004). When such a process is provided, even if the setting key 174 is operated (turned on/off) in the setting key slot during the wait period, this status information can be secured at the time of power-on. Therefore, in this embodiment, the operation status of the backup clear switch 176 and the operation status of the setting key 174 at startup can be grasped more reliably, and the operation on the gaming machine can be accurately identified.

As described above, in this embodiment, a 6 msec interruption prohibited section (processing section from step S11014 to step S11018) is provided in the main control main processing before various processes related to game control (processing from step S11020 onwards), and power cut processing (step S11015), initial value random number update processing (step S11016), performance display monitor tally division processing (step S11017), etc. are performed in the interruption prohibited section. That is, in this embodiment, management processing of values that affect the ball output performance of the game and values that are tally throughout the game is performed in the interruption prohibited section. Therefore, by providing such an interruption prohibited section, game management is simplified, the processing performed by the main control circuit 200 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load on the main control circuit 200 can be reduced.

[13-4-2. Game return process]
Next, a game return process performed during the main control main process will be described with reference to Fig. 411. Fig. 411 is a flow chart showing an example of the game return process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11040, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load the startup state. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S11041.

In this embodiment, the startup state value has five state values: "RAM abnormality", "Power outage recovery", "Checking settings", "Changing settings", and "RAM clear". However, when the startup state value is "RAM abnormality", an infinite loop is repeated in the startup state check process of step S11008 above, and the process does not proceed to this process. Therefore, in this process, the startup state value is loaded with four state values: "Power outage recovery", "Checking settings", "Changing settings", and "RAM clear".

In S11041, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup state is a value indicating "power interruption recovery." If the main CPU 201 determines that the value of the startup state is a value indicating "power interruption recovery," it transfers processing to S11042, and if the main CPU 201 determines that the value of the startup state is not a value indicating "power interruption recovery," it transfers processing to S11043.

In S11042, the main CPU 201 performs a second initial value setting process. In this second initial value setting process, data stored in the backup area in the main RAM 203 is read out, and the read out data is stored in the constructed work area in the main RAM 203. The above data is, for example, various information required to proceed with the game, such as game status information, the on/off state of the hit flags for special and normal symbols, and reserved number information. In other words, by restoring the data backed up at the time of the power outage to the work area in the main RAM 203 again, it is possible to return to the same game status as before the power outage. After that, the play permission flag is set to on, the game is permitted, and a transmission reservation process for a "power outage recovery command" is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11046.

In S11043, the main CPU 201 determines whether the startup state value is a value indicating "settings being changed" or "settings being checked." If the main CPU 201 determines that the startup state value is a value indicating "settings being changed" or "settings being checked," it transfers processing to S11044, and if the main CPU 201 determines that the startup state value is not a value indicating "settings being changed" or "settings being checked" (i.e., if it determines that the value is a value indicating RAM clearing), it transfers processing to S11045.

In S11044, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a "setting operation command." The setting operation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the system timer interrupt process. In addition, the play permission flag is set to OFF. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11046.

In S11045, the main CPU 201 performs a first initial value setting process. In this first initial value setting process, initial data is generated, and the generated initial data is stored in the respective work areas constructed in the main RAM 203. In other words, the data backed up at the time of power outage is erased, and it becomes possible to return the game state to the initialized state. After that, the play permission flag is set to ON, the game is permitted, and a process for reserving the transmission of an "initialization command" is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11046.

In S11047, the main CPU 201 performs a game stop function initial value setting process. In this game stop function initial value setting process, initial settings are made for the "game stop function activation management phase," "number of acquired game balls," "number of difference balls counter," "MY determination counter," and the like, which are stored in the out-of-area area of the main RAM 203. Details of this game stop function initial value setting process will be described in detail later. After executing the process of S11047, the main CPU 201 ends the game return process and returns the process to the main control main process.

[13-4-3. Game stop function initial value setting process]
Next, a game stop function initial value setting process performed during the game return process will be described with reference to Fig. 412. Fig. 412 is a flow chart showing an example of a game stop function initial value setting process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11047-1, the main CPU 201 performs a process to save the protected register. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11047-2.

In S11047-2, the main CPU 201 clears the "number of acquired game balls" stored in the outside area of the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11047-3.

Here, the "number of acquired game balls" is one of the related information for stopping the game based on the increased number of game balls, and is information for temporarily storing information on the number of prize balls paid out when game balls enter various winning holes, and adding the stored number of prize balls to the "difference ball number counter."

In S11047-3, the main CPU 201 clears the "MY determination counter" stored in an area outside the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S11047-3, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11047-4.

Here, the "MY judgment counter" is one of the related information for stopping the game based on the increased number of game balls, and is information for judging the increased number of game balls. As described below, this "MY judgment counter" corresponds to the information obtained by dividing the "difference in number of balls counter" by 1000 ("difference in number of balls counter"/1000). For example, if the difference in number of balls counter is 89,000 to 89,999, the MY judgment counter = 89, and if the difference in number of balls counter is 90,000 to 90,999, the MY judgment counter = 90.

In S11047-4, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load the "game stop function activation management phase." After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S11047-5.

As described above, the "game stop function activation management phase" is one of the related information for stopping a game based on the increase in the number of game balls, is set based on the increase in the number of game balls, and is information that indicates the state of the game stop function.

In this "game stop function activation management phase", when the difference ball counter is equal to or less than 84,999 and less than the initial boundary value, "00H" is set, when the difference ball counter is equal to or greater than the initial boundary value and less than the first boundary value (first counting range), between 85,000 and 89,999, "01H" is set, and when the difference ball counter is equal to or greater than the first boundary value and less than the regulated value, between 90,000 and 94,999 (second counting range), "02H" is set.
In addition, when the difference ball number counter is equal to or greater than the regulated value (95,000 or more), "03H" is set when the game is in a small hit or big hit game state (before the game is stopped), and "04H" is set when the game is not in a small hit or big hit game state (during the game is stopped).

The initial boundary value (85,000), first boundary value (90,000), and regulation value (95,000) can be freely changed as needed. Furthermore, multiple boundary values (initial boundary value, first boundary value) may be eliminated and a single boundary value may be used. When a single boundary value is used, it is preferable to adopt the value of the first boundary value described above.

In S11047-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the "game stop function activation management phase" is 03H or greater (03H or 04H). If the main CPU 201 determines that the value of the "game stop function activation management phase" is 03H or greater, it transfers processing to S11047-6, and if it determines that the value of the "game stop function activation management phase" is not 03H or greater, it transfers processing to S11047-7.

In S11047-6, the main CPU 201 clears the "game stop function activation management phase" stored in the outer area of the main RAM 203 (i.e., sets the "game stop function activation management phase" to 01). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11047-7.

In S11047-7, the main CPU 201 clears the "difference ball number counter" stored in an area outside the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11047-8.

Here, the "difference in number of balls counter" is one of the related information for stopping the game based on the increased number of game balls, and is information for counting the increased number of game balls (MY). This "difference in number of balls counter" corresponds to the number obtained by subtracting the cumulative number of game balls fired (number of fired game balls) from the cumulative number of game balls paid out (number of paid out game balls).

In S11047-8, the main CPU 201 performs the process of restoring the protection register that was saved in S11047-1, and ends the process of setting the initial value of the game stop function.

In this way, according to the game stop function initial value setting process of this embodiment, after the power to the gaming machine is turned on (after power is restored), the "number of acquired game balls," "number of difference balls counter," and "MY judgment counter" are cleared.

Furthermore, after the power to the gaming machine is turned on (after power is restored), if the difference ball counter is less than the regulated value (94,999 or less), the "game stop function activation management phase" is cleared, and if the difference ball counter is equal to or greater than the regulated value (95,000 or more), the "game stop function activation management phase" is maintained. As a result, if the difference ball counter is equal to or greater than the regulated value (game stop function activation management phase = 03H and 04H), the game stop state will be maintained unless the backup clear switch 176 is used to "clear the RAM."

[13-4-4. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in the main control process will be described with reference to Fig. 413. Fig. 413 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 413, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S11101. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S11101, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11102.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the processing of S11101, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the working area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, etc., in a predetermined register.

In S11102, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S11101 is 0, i.e., whether the special symbol is in a state of waiting for variable display. If the main CPU 201 determines that the control number of the special symbol is not 0, it transfers processing to S11108, and if it determines that the control number of the special symbol is 0, it transfers processing to S11103.

In S11103, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not start information for the second special pattern is stored in the second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203, i.e., whether or not there is a reserved number of second special patterns. If the main CPU 201 determines that start information for the second special pattern is not stored, it transfers processing to S11104, and if it determines that start information for the second special pattern is stored, it transfers processing to S11105.

In S11104, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information for the first special pattern is stored in the first special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203, i.e., whether or not there is a reserved number of the first special pattern. If the main CPU 201 determines that the start information for the first special pattern is not stored, it transfers processing to S11107, and if it determines that the start information for the first special pattern is stored, it transfers processing to S11106.

In S11105, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the second special pattern stored in the second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203 to the special pattern determination memory area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the start information stored in the second special pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special pattern determination memory area (0), and the start information stored in the second special pattern start memory area (2) is shifted to the second special pattern start memory area (1).

In S11106, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the first special pattern stored in the first special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203 to the special pattern determination memory area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the start information stored in the first special pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special pattern determination memory area (0), and the start information stored in the first special pattern start memory area (2) to the first special pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the first special pattern start memory area (1) to the first special pattern start memory area (3).

In S11107, if the special symbol start information (number of reserved first and second special symbols) has not been stored in the first and second special symbol start memory areas of the main RAM 203 for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 430) during the next system timer interrupt process. When the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demo display command, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demo display performance.

In S11108, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 414. After executing the processing of S11103, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S11101 to S11108) within the interrupt prohibited section.

In this manner, in this embodiment, as the eleventh pachinko gaming machine, a priority variation machine in which the special pattern management process is executed with a higher priority than the first special pattern when the start information of the second special pattern is stored has been described, but this is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special pattern is stored, the priority variation machine may be a priority variation machine in which the special pattern management process is executed with a higher priority than the second special pattern, or a sequential variation machine in which the special pattern management process is executed in the order of winning (ball entry order) into the first start port 11120 or the second start port 11140.

[13-4-5. Special design management process]
Next, a special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol control process (see Fig. 413) will be described with reference to Fig. 414. Fig. 414 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

The numbers ("0" to "7") written in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 414 are the control state numbers of the special symbols that are the subject of the process. The main CPU 201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process that corresponds to the control state number.

In S11111, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the special pattern (special pattern timer counter) is 0. This waiting time for the special pattern is set as the waiting time for various processes in the special pattern management process, and is decremented as the special pattern timer counter within the system timer interrupt process that is performed at 2 msec intervals, for example. If the main CPU 201 determines that the waiting time for the special pattern is not 0, it ends the special pattern management process and returns the process to the special pattern control process (see FIG. 413), and if it determines that the waiting time for the special pattern is 0, it moves the process to S11112.

In S11112, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S11112, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11113. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S11113 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S11112.

In S11113, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This S11113 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 415. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S11114.

In S11114, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This S11114 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 416. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S11115.

In S11115, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This S11115 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 420. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11116.

In S11116, the main CPU 201 performs small win game closure processing. This S11116 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this small win game closure processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 422. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S11117.

In S11117, the main CPU 201 performs processing during the opening of the small win game. This processing of S11117 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this processing during the opening of the small win game will be described later with reference to FIG. 423. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S11118.

In S11118, the main CPU 201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process of S11118 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 424. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11119.

In S11119, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening control process. This S11119 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 425. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11120.

In S11120, the main CPU 201 performs a process to end the jackpot game state. This process of S11120 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this process to end the jackpot game state will be described later with reference to FIG. 426.

After completing steps S11113 to S11120, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 413). In this case, the process returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

[13-4-6. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 414) will be described with reference to FIG. 415. FIG. 415 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11121, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", it ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 414), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "0", it transfers the process to S11122.

In S11122, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol hit determination process to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, a time-saving hit, or a miss. In this special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 395 is referenced, and a hit determination of the special symbol is made based on the random number value for big hit determination of the special symbol as the starting information of the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination memory area (0), and a hit/lose determination value data is determined according to the determination result. After executing the process of S11122, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11123.

In S11123, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol. In this special symbol determination process, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 396 is referenced, and the selected symbol and symbol designation command for the special symbol are determined based on the hit/loss determination value data as the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process in S11122 and the special symbol random number value as the start information of the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination memory area (0). After executing the process of S11123, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11124.

As mentioned above, if the time-saving play state is controlled to ignore the "time-saving hit", even if a "time-saving hit" is determined in the time-saving play state, the selected symbol and symbol designation command for the special symbol that will result in a losing stop state can be determined.

In S11124, the main CPU 201 performs a win type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of win when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a big win or a small win. In this win type determination process, if the special symbol win determination process is a big win, the big win type determination table shown in FIG. 397 is determined, and if the special symbol win determination process is a small win, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 398 is determined. In addition, when setting the game state etc. based on the game state at the time of winning after the end of the big win game state, the game state data at the time of winning indicating the game state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a big win or a small win is set in the game state memory area at the time of winning of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S11124, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11125.

In S11125, the main CPU 201 performs a special pattern change pattern determination process to determine the change pattern of the special pattern. In this special pattern change pattern determination process, a special pattern change pattern table of either FIG. 400, FIG. 401, or FIG. 402 is determined depending on the game state, etc., and the determined special pattern change pattern table is referenced to determine the change pattern of the special pattern and a special pattern change pattern command based on the type of special pattern, the result of the special pattern hit determination process (win or lose), the selected special pattern, etc. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11126.

In the special symbol variation pattern determination process of this embodiment, when the game is in a normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 400 is determined by referring to the state flag and the normal power operation pattern. Then, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 thus determined is referred to, and the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variation pattern command are determined based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol win determination process (win or lose), the selected special symbol, the reach determination random number value, and the performance selection random number value.
Also, in the case of a normal game state (first time-saving game state, third time-saving game state) with reference to the state flag and the normal power operation pattern, if the number of times N of variable display of the first special symbol is greater than 10, the special symbol variation pattern table J1 is determined, if the number of times N of variable display of the first special symbol is greater than 10, the special symbol variation pattern table J2 is determined, and if the number of times N of variable display of the first special symbol is greater than 0, the special symbol variation pattern table J3 is determined. Then, with reference to the determined special symbol variation pattern tables J1 to J3, the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variation pattern command are determined based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or lose), the selected special symbol, the reach determination random number value, and the performance selection random number value.
Also, by referring to the state flag and the normal power operation pattern, if the game is in the second time-saving game state or the fourth time-saving game state, the special symbol variation pattern table J4 is determined, and if the game is in the fifth time-saving game state, the special symbol variation pattern table J5 is determined. Then, by referring to the determined special symbol variation pattern tables J4 and J5, the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variation pattern command are determined based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or lose), and the selected symbol of the special symbol.

In S11126, the main CPU 201 performs a special pattern variable display time setting process to set the variable display time of the special pattern. In this special pattern variable display time setting process, the special pattern variable display time setting process refers to the special pattern variable pattern table determined in the special pattern variable pattern determination process in S11125 above, and determines the variable display time of the special pattern based on the determined special pattern variable pattern. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 sets the determined variable display time of the special pattern to the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203, and causes the first special pattern display unit 163 or the second special pattern display unit 164 to start displaying the variable special pattern. After executing the process of S11126, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11127.

In S11127, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1", after the special symbol variable display start process ends, a special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 414) is performed. After executing the process of S11127, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11128.

In S11128, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, confirmation and update processes of parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203 are performed. Then, a process of reserving transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state is performed. Note that the game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the presentation control command transmission process (Figure 430) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S11128, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11129.

In S11129, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for the special pattern effect start command. In this process, the transmission reservation process for the "pattern designation command" and the "special pattern variation pattern command" is performed as the special pattern effect start command. In the pattern designation command transmission reservation process, the pattern designation command determined in S11123 is transmitted. In addition, in the special pattern variation pattern command transmission reservation process, the special pattern variation pattern command corresponding to the special pattern variation pattern determined in S11125 is transmitted so that the type of special pattern can be identified. The special pattern effect start command that is transmitted and reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 430) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process within the interrupt prohibited section.

[13-4-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 414) will be described with reference to Fig. 416. Fig. 416 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the eleventh pachinko game machine.

In S11141, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", it ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 414), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "1", it transfers the process to S11142.

In S11142, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination time setting process to set the symbol determination time for the special symbol. In this special symbol determination time setting process, the special symbol determination time (e.g., 540 ms) is determined based on the game state and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win/lose). The main CPU 201 then sets the determined special symbol determination time to the special symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and causes the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 to display the special symbol in a stopped state. After executing the process of S11142, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11143.

The time it takes for the special symbol to be determined may be determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, or based only on the game state. Furthermore, a single predetermined symbol determination time (e.g., 540 ms) may be determined.

In S11143, the main CPU 201 performs time-saving management processing. In this time-saving management processing, when the variable display of the special pattern ends, a determination is made as to whether the time-saving game state has ended, or whether to transition to time-saving game state B or time-saving game state C. Details of this time-saving management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 417. After executing the processing of S11143, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S11144.

In S11144, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", after the special symbol variable display end process is completed, the special symbol game determination process (see S11115 in FIG. 414) is performed. After executing the process of S11144, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11145.

In S11145, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. This special symbol effect stop command is composed of a first special symbol effect stop command corresponding to the first special symbol and a second special symbol effect stop command corresponding to the second special symbol. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 430) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S11145, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 414).

[13-4-8. Time-saving management process]
Next, a time-saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display ending process will be described with reference to Fig. 417. Fig. 417 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving management process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S11151, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol time-saving counter decrement process to decrement the special symbol time-saving counter.

In this embodiment, the "time-saving counter" in the main RAM 203 is composed of two types: a "special pattern time-saving counter" that corresponds to the variable number of times the special pattern, which is the time-saving end condition, is displayed, and a "normal pattern time-saving counter" that corresponds to the variable number of times the normal pattern, which is the time-saving end condition, is displayed. This "special pattern time-saving counter" is decremented each time the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern ends. Note that the "normal pattern time-saving counter" is not decremented here, but is decremented in the normal pattern hit end process (see FIG. 429) described later.

In this special symbol time-saving counter subtraction process, if the time-saving game state is reached by referring to the state flag, the special symbol time-saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 from it. Note that if the game state is reached in normal play, the special symbol time-saving counter is not subtracted. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11152.

In S11152, the main CPU 201 refers to the state flag to determine whether or not the game is in a time-saving game state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is in a time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S11153, and if it determines that the game is not in a time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S11154.

In S11153, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving counter for either the "special pattern time-saving counter" or the "normal pattern time-saving counter" is 0. If the main CPU 201 determines that either time-saving counter is 0, it transfers processing to S11154, and if it determines that the time-saving counter is not 0, it transfers processing to S11155.

In S11154, the main CPU 201 clears the time-saving information. Here, the time-saving information includes clearing (setting to 0) the special symbol time-saving counter, the normal symbol time-saving counter, the status flag, and the normal power operation pattern. Therefore, when the time-saving information is cleared, the game transitions to the normal game state. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11155.

In S11155, the main CPU 201 performs a B time-saving gaming state transition determination process.
In this B time-shortened game state transition judgment process, a "ceiling counter" for counting the number of times the special symbol is displayed to transition to the B time-shortened game state is incremented, and when the ceiling counter reaches a ceiling value, transition control to the B time-shortened game state is performed. Details of this B time-shortened game state transition judgment process will be described later with reference to FIG. 418. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S11156.

In S11156, the main CPU 201 performs a C time-shortened gaming state transition determination process.
In this C time-saving game state transition judgment process, it is judged whether or not the time-saving win has occurred, and if the time-saving win has occurred, transition control to the C time-saving game state is performed based on the selected special symbol (time-saving symbol). Details of this C time-saving game state transition judgment process will be described later with reference to FIG. 419. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S11157.

In S11157, the game status is confirmed by referring to the status flag and the normal power operation pattern, and a game status designation command indicating the current game status is determined. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11158.

In this embodiment, when the status flag = 1, the 0th game state designation command indicating the normal game state is determined. When the status flag = 3 and the normal power operation pattern = 00, the first game state designation command indicating the first time-saving game state is determined. When the status flag = 3 and the normal power operation pattern = 02, the second game state designation command indicating the second time-saving game state is determined. When the status flag = 3 and the normal power operation pattern = 01, the third game state designation command indicating the third time-saving game state is determined. When the status flag = 2, the fourth game state designation command indicating the fourth time-saving game state is determined. When the status flag = 1 and the normal power operation pattern = 02, the fifth game state designation command indicating the fifth time-saving game state is determined.

In S11158, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation command transmission reservation process, which sets the game state designation command determined in S11157 above in the transmission buffer. The game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (Figure 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S11158, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving management process, and returns the process to the special pattern variable display end process.

[13-4-9. B time-saving gaming state transition determination process]
Next, a description will be given of a B time-shortened gaming state transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the time-shortened management process with reference to Fig. 418. Fig. 418 is a flow chart showing an example of a B time-shortened gaming state transition determination process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11155-1, the main CPU 201 performs a ceiling counter update process that increments the ceiling counter. In this ceiling counter update process, the ceiling counter is updated by incrementing it by 1. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11155-2.

In S11155-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling counter is equal to the ceiling value (for example, 950 times). If the main CPU 201 determines that the ceiling counter is equal to the ceiling value, it transfers the process to S11155-3, and if it determines that the ceiling counter is not equal to the ceiling value, it ends the B time-saving game state transition determination process and returns the process to the time-saving management process.

In S11155-3, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter (sets it to 0). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11155-4.

In S11155-4, the main CPU 201 performs a B time-saving game state setting process to transition to the B time-saving game state. In this B time-saving game state setting process, the game state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. 399(c) is referenced, the state flag indicating the B time-saving game state is set to 2, the normal power operation pattern is set to 02, and the number of time-saving times (e.g., 950 times) is set in the "normal pattern time-saving counter" as the "B time-saving end condition." Note that in the B time-saving game state setting process, the normal power operation pattern may be set to 01 or 00. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the B time-saving game state transition determination process and returns the process to the time-saving management process.

[13-4-10. C Time-saving gaming state transition determination process]
Next, a C time-saving gaming state transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the time-saving management process will be described with reference to Fig. 419. Fig. 419 is a flow chart showing an example of a C time-saving gaming state transition determination process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11156-1, the main CPU 201 refers to the state flag to determine whether or not the game is in a normal game state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is in a normal game state, it transfers processing to S11156-2, and if it determines that the game is not in a normal game state, it ends the C time-saving game state transition determination processing and returns processing to the time-saving management processing.

In S11156-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a time-saving hit has occurred. If the main CPU 201 determines that a time-saving hit has occurred, it transfers processing to S11156-3, and if it determines that a time-saving hit has not occurred, it ends the C time-saving game state transition determination processing and returns processing to the time-saving management processing.

In S11156-3, the main CPU 201 performs a C time-saving game state setting process to transition to the C time-saving game state. In this C time-saving game state setting process, the game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 399(b) is referenced, and based on the selected special symbol (time-saving symbol), the state flag is set to 3, and a predetermined number of time-saving cycles is set in the "special symbol time-saving counter" or "normal symbol time-saving counter" as the normal power operation pattern and the "C time-saving end condition". After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the B time-saving game state transition determination process, and returns the process to the time-saving management process.

In this way, in this embodiment, transition to the C time-saving game state is possible only when a time-saving hit is determined in the normal game state. However, it may be configured so that transition to the C time-saving game state is possible when a time-saving hit is determined regardless of the game state.

[13-4-11. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process will be described with reference to Fig. 420. Fig. 420 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11161, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process, and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "2", it transfers the process to S11162.

In S11162, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbol and determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is the selected special symbol corresponding to a jackpot. If the main CPU 201 determines that a jackpot has been reached, it transfers processing to S11163, and if it determines that a jackpot has not been reached, it transfers processing to S11172.

In S11163, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a jackpot. In this external signal processing for a jackpot, the selected special symbol is referenced, and a "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is generated as an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 during a jackpot gaming state. The generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is then output to the external terminal board 184. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11164.

In S11164, the main CPU 201 performs the first route jackpot start preparation setting process. In this first route jackpot start preparation setting process, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 397 is referenced, the maximum number of rounds is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot, and the determined maximum number of rounds is set as the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds in the main RAM 203. Furthermore, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 397 is referenced, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot, and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11165.

In S11165, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot status display process. In this jackpot status display process, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right hit instruction data that notifies the player to hit to the right is set. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11166.

In S11166, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In the game status management processing when it is determined that a jackpot has been reached, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the status flag, the normal power operation pattern, and the number of time-saving cycles. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S11167.

In S11167, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11168.

In S11168, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the process of preparing to open the large prize opening, which will be described later, will be performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11169.

In S11169, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot start display command. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

In S11172, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbol and determines whether or not it is a small win, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is the selected special symbol corresponding to a small win. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is a small win, it transfers processing to S11173, and if it determines that it is not a small win (i.e., a miss), it transfers processing to S11181.

In S11173, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a small win. In this external signal processing for a small win, the selected special symbol is referenced, and a "small win signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is generated as an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 during a small win gaming state. The generated small win signal is then output to the external terminal board 184. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11174.

In S11174, the main CPU 201 performs a small win start preparation setting process. In this small win start preparation setting process, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 398 is referenced, the maximum number of openings is determined based on the "selected special symbol", and the determined maximum number of openings is set as the upper limit of the number of small win openings in the main RAM 203. Next, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 398 is referenced, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "selected special symbol", and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is set as the waiting time for the special symbol in the main RAM 203.

Furthermore, in the small win start preparation setting process, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 398 is referenced, and the opening waiting time is determined as the opening pattern of the V winning hole 11156 based on the "selected special pattern", and the determined opening waiting time is set in the V winning hole closing timer counter in the main RAM 203, and the V operation flag is turned on. Note that the V winning control process for the V shutter solenoid 11160 that opens and closes the V winning hole 11156 is performed in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 430) described later. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11175.

In S11175, the main CPU 201 performs a small win status display process. In this small win status display process, right hit instruction data is set to notify the player that a right hit is to be performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11177.

At S11177, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11178.

In S11178, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the small win game closure process described below will be performed after the special symbol game determination process ends. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11179.

In S11179, the main CPU 201 processes the transmission reservation process for the small win start display command. After executing the process of S11169, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

In S11181, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 421. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing.

[13-4-12. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol game determination process will be described with reference to Fig. 421. Fig. 421 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game ending process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11191, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11192.

In S11192, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. In addition, in the game state designation parameter setting process in the special pattern game end process, the start information stored in the special pattern determination memory area (0) in the main RAM 203 is cleared. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11193.

In S11193, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 430) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11194.

In S11194, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of times the first special symbol is variable displayed N = 0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of times the first special symbol is variable displayed N = 0, it transfers processing to S11195, and if it determines that the number of times the first special symbol is variable displayed N = 0 is not, it transfers processing to S11196.

In S11195, the main CPU 201 performs a process of resetting the variable display count N of the first special symbol. After performing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11196.

In this process of resetting the variable number of times N for the first special symbol to be displayed, the variable number of times N for the first special symbol to be displayed is reset to "50 times," which is the same as the minimum number of times for the first time-saving game state.

In S11196, the main CPU 201 performs a subtraction process on the variable display count N of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the variable display count N of the first special symbol to update it. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process.

[13-4-13. Processing during small win game closure]
Next, a small win game closing process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process will be described with reference to Fig. 422. Fig. 422 is a flow chart showing an example of a small win game closing process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11201, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", it ends the small win game closure process and returns the process to the special symbol management process, and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "3", it transfers the process to S11202.

In S11202, the main CPU 201 loads the "small win opening count counter value." The "small win opening count counter" is a counter that counts the number of small win openings. The count value of the small win opening count counter (small win opening count counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to SS11203.

In S11203, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded small win opening count counter value is the upper limit of the small win opening count. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is the upper limit of the small win opening count, it transfers processing to S11209, and if it determines that it is not the upper limit of the small win opening count, it transfers processing to S11204.

In S11204, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the second large winning port 11151 in the small win game state (the number of winnings in the second large winning port 11151) is the maximum number of winnings. In this process, it is determined whether the value of the second large winning port counter counted by the second large winning port count switch 11152 is the predetermined maximum number of winnings for the second large winning port 11151 (e.g., 10 balls). If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of winnings in the second large winning port 11151 is not the maximum number of winnings, it transfers the process to S11205, and if it determines that the number of winnings in the second large winning port 11151 is the maximum number of winnings, it transfers the process to S11209.

In S11205, the main CPU 201 performs a process to add 1 to the small win opening count counter value. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11206.

In S11206, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening setting process to open the second large prize opening 11151. In this second large prize opening setting process, the small prize type determination table shown in FIG. 398 determined in S11124 is referenced, and the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 11151 is determined based on the "selected special pattern" of the small prize and the current opening count (small prize opening count counter value), and the determined maximum opening time is set as the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. Then, second large prize opening opening control data for opening the second large prize opening 11151 is generated for the second special electric solenoid 11155. This causes the second large prize opening 11151 to open. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11207.

In S11207, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4", the small win game open process described below will be performed after the small win game closed process ends. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11208.

In S11208, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. The main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of confirming and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the small win game closure process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

In S11209, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a V winning has been detected. In this process, it determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the V winning port 11156 within a specified time (i.e., whether or not there has been detection by the V winning port switch 11157). If the main CPU 201 determines that a V winning has been detected, it transfers the process to S11210, and if it determines that a V winning has not been detected, it transfers the process to S11218.

In S11210, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a jackpot from the second route. In this processing, the selected special symbol is referenced, and a "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is generated as an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 in the event of a jackpot. The generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is then output to the external terminal board 184. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to SS11211.

In S11211, the main CPU 201 performs the second route jackpot start preparation setting process. In this second route jackpot start preparation setting process, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 397 is referenced, the maximum number of rounds is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot, and the determined maximum number of rounds is set as the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds in the main RAM 203. Furthermore, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 397 is referenced, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot, and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11212.

In S11212, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the jackpot game state from the second route starts from the second round of round play. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11213.

In S11213, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot status display process. In this jackpot status display process, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right hit instruction data that notifies the player to hit to the right is set. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11214.

In S11214, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In the game status management processing when it is determined that a jackpot has been reached, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the status flag, the normal power operation pattern, and the time-saving count counter. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S11215.

At S11215, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11216.

In S11216, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the process of preparing to open the large prize opening will be performed after the small prize game closure process ends. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11217.

In S11217, the main CPU 201 performs processing to reserve the transmission of a V hit start display command. After executing the processing of S11197, the main CPU 201 ends the processing during the small hit game opening and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing.

In S11218, the main CPU 201 performs a small win end preparation setting process. In this small win end preparation setting process, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 398 is referenced, and the ED waiting time (ending time) is determined based on the "selected special pattern" of the small win, and the determined ED waiting time (ending time) is set as the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11219.

In S11219, the main CPU 201 performs a process for scheduling the transmission of a small win end display command. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11220.

In S11220, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 421 is performed. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 ends the small win game closure processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing.

[13-4-14. Processing during small win game opening]
Next, a small win game open process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process will be described with reference to Fig. 423. Fig. 423 is a flow chart showing an example of a small win game open process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11221, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", it ends the small win game open processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing, and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "4", it transfers the processing to S11222.

In S11222, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 11151 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the second large prize opening opening setting process (see FIG. 422) has elapsed. If the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 11151 has not elapsed, it ends the small win game opening process and returns the process to the special pattern management process. Also, if the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 11151 has elapsed, it transfers the process to S11223.

In S11223, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening closure setting process to close the second large prize opening 11151. In this second large prize opening closure setting process, the small prize type determination table shown in FIG. 398 is referenced, and the current closure time of the second large prize opening 11151 is determined based on the "selected special pattern" of the small prize and the current number of openings (small prize opening count counter value), and the determined closure time is set as the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. Then, second large prize opening closure control data for closing the second large prize opening 11151 is generated for the second special electric solenoid 11155. This causes the second large prize opening 11151 to close. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11224.

In S11224, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the above-mentioned small win game closed process is performed after the small win game open process ends. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the small win game open process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

[13-4-15. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process will be described with reference to Fig. 424. Fig. 424 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11231, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5," it ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process, and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "5," it transfers the process to S11232.

In S11232, the main CPU 201 loads the "round counter value." The "round counter" is a counter that counts the number of rounds played in a jackpot game state. The count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11233.

In S11233, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded round counter value is the upper limit value for the number of jackpot rounds. If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of jackpot rounds is the upper limit value, it transfers processing to S11234, and if it determines that the number of jackpot rounds is not the upper limit value, it transfers processing to S11238.

In S11234, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end preparation setting process. In this jackpot end preparation setting process, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 397 is referenced, and the ED waiting time (ending time) is determined based on the "selected special pattern" of the jackpot, and the determined ED waiting time (ending time) is set as the waiting time for the special pattern in the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11235.

In S11235, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7", the jackpot game state end process, which will be described later, will be performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11236.

In S11236, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11237.

In S11237, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command. The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 430) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

In S11238, the main CPU 201 performs processing to add 1 to the round counter value. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S11239.

In S11239, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening setting process to open the first large prize opening 11131. In this first large prize opening setting process, the main CPU 201 refers to the big prize type determination table shown in FIG. 397, and determines the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 11131 in this round based on the "selected special pattern" of the big prize and the current round number (round counter value), and sets the determined maximum opening time to the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 generates first large prize opening opening control data for the first special power solenoid 11135 to open the first large prize opening 11131. This opens the first large prize opening 11131. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11240.

In S11240, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6", the large prize opening opening control process is performed after the large prize opening opening preparation process is completed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11241.

In S11241, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11242.

In S11242, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 430) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

[13-4-16. Large prize opening control process]
Next, a special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process will be described with reference to Fig. 425. Fig. 425 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11251, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", it ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process, and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "6", it transfers the process to S11252.

In S11252, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of winning balls that entered the first large prize opening 11131 in one round when the first large prize opening 11131 was opened is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value of the first large prize opening counter counted by the first large prize opening count switch 11132 is the predetermined maximum number of winning balls for the first large prize opening 11131 (e.g. 10 balls).

If the main CPU 201 determines in S11252 that the number of winnings at the first large winning slot 11131 is not the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to S11253, and if it determines that the number of winnings at the first large winning slot 11131 is the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to S11254.

In S11253, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 11131 in one round has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the opening setting process for the first large prize opening (see FIG. 424) has elapsed.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S11133 that the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 11131 has not elapsed, it ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process. If the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 11131 has elapsed, it transfers the process to S11254.

In S11254, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening closure setting process to close the first large prize opening 11131. In this first large prize opening closure setting process, the main CPU 201 refers to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 397, and determines the closure time of the first large prize opening 11131 in this round based on the jackpot "special symbol selection pattern" and the current round number (round counter value), and sets the determined closure time to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Then, the first large prize opening closure control data for closing the first large prize opening 11131 is generated for the first special electric solenoid 11135. This causes the first large prize opening 11131 to close. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11255.

In S11255, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the large prize opening preparation processing will be performed again after the large prize opening control processing is completed. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S11256.

At S11256, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11257.

In S11257, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 430) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 then ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process.

[13-4-17. Big win game state end process]
Next, a big win gaming state ending process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process will be described with reference to Fig. 426. Fig. 426 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win gaming state ending process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11261, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7," it ends the jackpot game state end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process, and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "7," it transfers the process to S11262.

In S11262, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot game information initialization process. In this jackpot game information initialization process, various flags and data used in the jackpot game state and the values of various counters (e.g., round counter, big prize slot winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11263.

In S11263, the main CPU 201 performs a post-jackpot state setting process to set the game state after the end of the jackpot game state. In this post-jackpot state setting process, the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 399(a) is referenced, and based on the selected special symbol, a state flag, a normal power operation pattern, and a "special symbol time-saving counter" corresponding to the number of times the special symbol is variably displayed as the number of times the time-saving count is set, and a "normal symbol time-saving counter" corresponding to the number of times the normal symbol is variably displayed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11264.

In this embodiment, when the selected special symbol is "z1", the status flag is set as follows: status flag indicating A time-saving game state = 1, normal power operation pattern = 02, special symbol time-saving counter = 10000, and normal symbol time-saving counter = 120.
In addition, when the selected special symbol is "z2" or "z3", the status flag indicating the normal game state is set to 0, the normal power operation pattern is set to 00, the special symbol time-saving counter is set to 0, and the normal symbol time-saving counter is set to 0.
In addition, when the selected special symbol is "z4" or "z5", the status flag indicating the A time-saving game state is set to 1, the normal power operation pattern is set to 02, the special symbol time-saving counter is set to 10000, and the normal symbol time-saving counter is set to 120.
In addition, when the selected special symbol is "z6" or "z7", the status flag indicating the normal game state is set to 0, the normal power operation pattern is set to 00, the special symbol time-saving counter is set to 0, and the normal symbol time-saving counter is set to 0.

In S11264, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 421 is performed. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot game state end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing.

[13-4-18. Normal symbol control process]
Next, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in the main control main process will be described with reference to Fig. 427. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in Fig. 427, the main CPU 201 stores the start information of the normal symbol and judges whether the judgment start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

Figure 427 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. Note that the numbers ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in Figure 427 are control state numbers for the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

In S11300, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the normal pattern is 0. This waiting time for the normal pattern is set as the waiting time for various processes in the normal pattern control process, and is decremented as a normal pattern timer counter in the system timer interrupt process that is performed at 2 msec intervals, for example. If the main CPU 201 determines that the waiting time for the normal pattern is not 0, it ends the normal pattern control process and returns the process to the main control main process, and if it determines that the waiting time for the normal pattern is 0, it transfers the process to S11301.

In S11301, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11310. The main CPU 201 performs the process from S11310 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S11201.

In S11310, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This S11210 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". In this normal symbol variable display start processing, a normal symbol winning judgment process, a normal symbol determination process, a second start port opening pattern determination process, a normal symbol variation pattern determination process, etc. are performed, but details will be described later with reference to FIG. 428. Note that if the normal symbol control state number is not "0", the main CPU 201 executes this process and then moves the processing to S11220.

In S11320, the main CPU 201 performs processing to end the variable display of normal symbols. This processing of S11220 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 executes this processing and then transfers the processing to S11230.

In this normal symbol variable display end process, the main CPU 201 judges whether the normal symbol variable display time has ended, and when it judges that the normal symbol variable display time has ended, it sets the normal symbol's predetermined symbol determination time (e.g., 540 msec) to the normal symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and sets the normal symbol control state number to "2". If the normal symbol variable display time has not ended, it holds the normal symbol control state number at "1" and waits for the normal symbol variable display time to end.

In S11330, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol game play determination process. This S11330 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 executes this process and then transfers the process to S11340.

In this normal symbol game judgment process, the main CPU 201 performs a judgment process of the selected pattern of the stopped normal symbol (for example, normal symbol winning or normal symbol losing). If the main CPU 201 judges that the selected pattern of the stopped normal symbol corresponds to a normal symbol winning, it sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "3", and if it judges that the result of the normal symbol winning judgment process corresponds to a losing, it sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "0".

In S11340, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric role release process. This S11340 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 executes this process and then transfers the process to S11350.

In this normal electric device opening process, the main CPU 201 refers to the second start hole opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 406, and operates the normal power shutter 11147 to open and close the second start hole 11140 according to the operation of the second start hole opening pattern determined in the second start hole opening pattern determination process (see FIG. 428) described below. Then, when a specified number of game balls for normal power (e.g., three balls) enter the second start hole 11140 or all the operations of the determined second start hole opening pattern are completed, the second start hole 11140 is closed, the control state number of the normal pattern is set to "4", and the normal electric device opening process is terminated.

In S11350, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit end processing. This S11350 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". In this normal symbol hit end processing, the number of time-saving times is updated and a determination is made as to when the number of time-saving times has ended, but details will be described later with reference to FIG. 429. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the main control main processing.

[13-4-19. Normal symbol variable display start process]
Next, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the normal symbol control process will be described with reference to Fig. 428. Fig. 428 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal symbol variable display start process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 428, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the normal pattern is "0" (S11211).

If it is determined in S11311 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11312.

In S11312, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the start information of the normal pattern. In this process, the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (2) to the normal pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (3). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11313.

In S11313, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol winning judgment process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 404, and determines the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal symbol ("normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol losing") based on the normal symbol winning judgment random number value stored in the normal symbol judgment area (0). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11314.

In S11314, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 405, and determines the "selected normal symbol" based on the winning/losing determination value data (the result of the normal symbol winning/losing determination process) and the normal symbol random number value stored in the normal symbol determination area (0). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11315.

In S11315, the main CPU 201 performs processing to determine the opening pattern of the second starting hole. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S11316.

In the process of determining the opening pattern of the second start hole, the main CPU 201 refers to the opening pattern determination table of the second start hole shown in FIG. 406, and if it is determined that a normal pattern has been hit, it determines the opening pattern of the second start hole based on the game status (status flag and normal power operation pattern) and the selected normal pattern.

In S11316, the main CPU 201 performs processing to determine the normal symbol variation pattern. In this processing, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 407, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern based on the game state, the selected normal symbol, and the normal symbol performance random number value. The main CPU 201 then refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 407, and determines the normal symbol variation display time based on the determined normal symbol variation pattern. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S11317.

In S11317, the main CPU 201 performs a process for setting the variable display time of the normal pattern. In this process, the variable display time of the normal pattern determined in the above-mentioned process for determining the variable pattern of the normal pattern is set to the waiting time of the normal pattern in the main RAM 203, and the normal pattern display unit 161 is caused to start displaying the variable display of the normal pattern. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11318.

In S11318, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after this normal symbol variable display start process ends, a normal symbol variable display end process (FIG. 427) is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11319.

In S11319, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for the normal symbol variable pattern command. The normal symbol variable pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 430) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process.

[13-4-20. End processing of normal pattern hit]
Next, details of the normal symbol winning end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the normal symbol control process will be described with reference to Fig. 429. Fig. 429 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal symbol winning end process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11351, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "4", it ends the normal symbol win end process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process, and if it determines that the control state number of the normal symbol is "4", it transfers the process to S11352.

In S11352, the main CPU 201 performs a normal pattern time-saving counter subtraction process to subtract the normal pattern time-saving counter. In this normal pattern time-saving counter subtraction process, when the time-saving game state is in reference to the state flag, a process is performed to subtract 1 from the normal pattern time-saving counter and update it. This allows the number of times the normal pattern is displayed to be counted as the number of time-saving times. Note that when the normal game state is in, the normal pattern time-saving counter is not subtracted.
After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11253.

In S11353, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving counter for the normal symbol is 0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the time-saving counter for the normal symbol is 0, the process proceeds to S11354. If the main CPU 201 determines that the time-saving counter for the normal symbol is not 0, the process proceeds to S11355.

In S11354, the main CPU 201 clears the time-saving information. Here, the time-saving information includes clearing (setting to 0) the special symbol time-saving counter, the normal symbol time-saving counter, the status flag, and the normal power operation pattern. Therefore, when the time-saving information is cleared, the game transitions to the normal game state. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11355.

At S11355, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11356.

In S11356, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "0", after the normal symbol hit end process is completed, the normal symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 427) is performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol hit end process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process.

In this embodiment, the normal pattern hit end process is configured to update the normal pattern time-saving count counter and determine the end of the normal pattern time-saving count as shown in S11352 to SS11354 above, but it may also be configured to perform this during the normal pattern variable display end process (S11320 in FIG. 427).

[13-4-21. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 430, the system timer interrupt process will be described. This process is called based on the entry address (program address) of the PTC2 timeout interrupt defined in the setting area corresponding to the timeout interrupt input from the timer counter (PTC2) when the timeout interrupt occurs, and is executed, for example, at a period (interrupt period) of 2 msec. Fig. 430 is a flow chart showing an example of the system timer interrupt process in the eleventh pachinko game machine.

In S11411, the main CPU 201 performs a process of saving a protected register (e.g., an AF register). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11412.

In S11412, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off. If the main CPU 201 determines that the XINT detection flag is not off (i.e., a power interruption has been detected), the process proceeds to S11470. If the main CPU 201 determines that the XINT detection flag is off (i.e., a power interruption has not been detected), the process proceeds to S11413.

In S11413, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S11414.

In S11414, the main CPU 201 performs processing to read the state of the input port of the I/O port 205. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S11415.

In S11415, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted based on the game permission flag. The game permission flag indicates a game permitted state when it is on (=1), and indicates a game not permitted state when it is off (=0). The game permission flag is a start-up state when the power is turned on. When the power is restored after a power outage and the RAM is cleared, the game permission flag is set to on (=play permitted state), and when the settings are being changed or checked, the game permission flag is set to off (=play not permitted state). If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is permitted, it transfers the process to S11416, and if it determines that the game is not permitted, it transfers the process to S11440.

In S11415, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is not stopped. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is not stopped based on the game stop state flag.

Here, the "game stop state flag" is information that indicates whether or not the game is stopped based on the increased number of game balls. When the game stop state flag is on (=1), it indicates a "game stop state," and when the game stop state flag is off (=0), it indicates a "game progress state." As will be described in more detail later, the game stop state flag is turned on when the game stop function activation management phase is 04H.

If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is not stopped, it transfers processing to S11417, and if it determines that the game is stopped, it transfers processing to S11450.

In S11417, the main CPU 201 executes a process to increment the value of the interrupt counter by 1. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) interrupt prohibited intervals during the main control main process, and the count value of the interrupt counter is stored in an interrupt counter area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11418.

In S11418, the main CPU 201 performs an update process for the interrupt cycle timer. In the update process for the interrupt cycle timer, various timer counters in the working area of the main RAM 203, such as the special pattern timer counter, the normal pattern timer counter, the V prize opening timer counter, and the V prize opening timer counter, are decremented. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11419.

In S11419, the main CPU 201 performs a random number update process. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a jackpot of a random value for determining a jackpot, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are an important factor in determining the number of balls dispensed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11420.

In S11420, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. Details of this switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 434. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S11430.

At S11430, the main CPU 201 performs a game LED lighting data output process. This game LED lighting data output process controls the output of LED data to light up the LEDs of the normal symbol display unit 161, the normal symbol reserved display unit 162, the first special symbol display unit 163, the second special symbol display unit 164, the first special symbol reserved display unit 165, the second special symbol reserved display unit 166, and the time-saving notification display unit 168 in accordance with the game status, etc. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11431.

In S11431, when the V operation flag is on, the main CPU 201 performs a V winning control process to open and close the V winning port 11156. In this V winning control process, when the V operation flag is on and the opening waiting time has elapsed (V winning port closing timer counter = 0), the opening time is determined as the opening pattern of the V winning port 11156 based on the "selected special pattern", and the determined opening time is set in the V winning port opening timer counter in the main RAM 203, and V winning port opening control data for opening the V winning port 11156 is output to the V shutter solenoid 11160. The V winning port opening control data is continuously output unless the V winning port opening timer counter is 0. Then, when the V operation flag is on and the V winning port opening control data is being output, if the opening time has elapsed (V winning port opening timer counter = 0), the output of the V winning port opening control data is stopped and the V operation flag is turned off. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S11451.

In S11440, the main CPU 201 performs setting control processing. In this setting control processing, settings are changed or settings are confirmed. This setting control processing is similar to the setting control processing executed in the first gaming machine (see Figures 46 to 48). After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S11431.

At S11450, the main CPU 201 performs a game stop function setting process. In this game stop function setting process, various commands related to the function of stopping the game based on the increased number of game balls and the setting of a game stop state flag are performed. The game stop function setting process will be described in detail later. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11430.

In S11451, the main CPU 201 performs a performance control command transmission process. In this process, the command that is scheduled for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11452.

At S11452, the main CPU 201 performs a performance display monitor control process. The performance display monitor control process is performed using the working area (outside area) of the main RAM 203. In this performance display monitor control process, game play determination process, prize ball addition determination process, display content update process of the performance display monitor 170, etc. are performed. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11435.

At S11460, the main CPU 201 performs a game stop data update process. The game stop data update process is performed using the working area (outside area) of the main RAM 203. This game stop data update process performs update control of the game stop function activation management phase, the number of acquired game balls, the difference ball number counter, and the MY judgment counter. The game stop data update process will be described in detail later. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11470.

In S11470, the main CPU 201 performs the restoration process of the protection registers that were saved in S11411, and ends the system timer interrupt process.

In this way, according to the system timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, when the game is stopped, the switch input detection processing is not performed. In other words, when the game is stopped, even if a game ball enters or passes through the first start port 11120, the second start port 11140, the first large prize port 11131, the second large prize port 11151, the general prize port 122, etc., the game ball will not be paid out and various random number values will not be obtained (the entry or passage of the game ball into the various prize ports will be invalidated).

[13-4-22. Game stop function setting process]
Next, a game stop function setting process performed during the system timer interrupt process will be described with reference to Fig. 431. Fig. 431 is a flow chart showing an example of the game stop function setting process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11450-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is stopped based on the game stop state flag.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is stopped, it transfers processing to S11450-11, and if it determines that the game is not stopped, it transfers processing to S11450-2.

In S11450-2, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load the "game stop function activation management phase." After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S11450-3.

In S11450-3, the main CPU 201 performs a process to determine a game stop command. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11450-4.

As described above, the "game stop command" is a command that transmits information to the sub-control circuit 300 about the fact that the game will be stopped according to the increased number of game balls (MY). By receiving the game stop command, the sub-control circuit 300 is able to perform a "game stop notice" in advance on the display device 7, etc., to notify the user that the game will be stopped, or a "game stop notification" that the game is in a stopped state.

In the process of determining the game stop command, the game stop function activation management phase is loaded, and when the game stop function activation management phase is updated and the game stop function activation management phase is ≧01H, the value of the game stop function activation management phase is determined as the game stop command based on the updated value of the game stop function activation management phase and the "predetermined game stop notice start condition."

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 408, when the updated game stop function operation management phase is 01H, if the "first game stop notice start condition" is satisfied, 01H is determined as the game stop command capable of executing the first game stop notice, and when the updated game stop function operation management phase is 02H, if the "second game stop notice start condition" is satisfied, 02H is determined as the game stop command capable of executing the second game stop notice. Also, when the updated game stop function operation management phase is 03H, 03H is determined as the game stop command capable of executing the third game stop notice, and when the updated game stop function operation management phase is 04H, 04H is determined as the game stop command capable of executing the game stop notice.

In addition, in this embodiment, if 01H is determined as the game stop command that can execute the first game stop notice, the execution flag is set to 01H, and it is stored that the first game stop notice has been executed.

If the updated game stop function activation management phase is 00H or if the game stop function activation management phase has not been updated, the game stop command will not be determined and the process of determining the difference ball number command will end.

In S11450-4, the main CPU 201 performs a game stop command transmission reservation process that sets the game stop command determined in S11450-3 above in the transmission buffer. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11450-5.

In S11450-5, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load the "MY determination counter." After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S11450-6.

In S11450-6, the main CPU 201 performs processing to determine the difference ball number command. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S11450-7.

Here, the "difference in number of balls command" is a command that transmits information regarding the value of the MY determination counter (value of the difference in number of balls counter) to the sub-control circuit 300. By receiving the difference in number of balls command, the sub-control circuit 300 is able to notify information regarding the increase in the number of game balls (MY) on the display device 7, etc.

In the process of determining this difference in number of balls command, the value of the MY judgment counter is loaded, and when the MY judgment counter is updated, the value of the MY judgment counter is determined as the difference in number of balls command.
Also, if the MY judgment counter has not been updated, the process of determining the difference in the number of balls command will end without determining the difference in the number of balls command.

In S11450-7, the main CPU 201 performs a difference ball command transmission reservation process to set the difference ball command determined in S11450-6 above in the transmission buffer. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11450-11.

In this embodiment, the system is configured to send the difference in ball count command in addition to the game stop command, but it may be configured to determine and send only the game stop command without determining and sending the difference in ball count command. When configured in this way, the above processes S11450-5 to S11450-7 can be omitted (deleted).

In S11450-11, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is stopped based on the game stop state flag.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is stopped, it transfers processing to S11450-21, and if it determines that the game is not stopped, it transfers processing to S11450-12.

In S11450-12, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load the "game stop function activation management phase." After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S11450-13.

In S11450-13, the main CPU 201 judges whether the game stop function operation management phase is 04H or not. That is, it is judged that the difference ball number counter is equal to or greater than the regulation value (95000 or more) and is not in a small win game state or a big win game state because the game stop function operation management phase is 04H.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game stop function activation management phase is 04H, it transfers processing to S11450-14, and if it determines that the game stop function activation management phase is not 04H, it transfers processing to S11450-21.

In S11450-14, the main CPU 201 performs a process to turn on (=1) the "game stop state flag." After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11450-21.

In this way, when the difference ball counter is equal to or greater than the regulated value and the game is not in a small win or big win game state, the game stop state flag is turned on and the game is stopped.

In S11450-21, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is stopped based on the game stop state flag.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is stopped, it transfers the process to S11450-22, and if it determines that the game is not stopped, it terminates the game stop function setting process.

In S11450-22, the main CPU 201 performs a process to initialize various solenoid data. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the game stop function setting process.

By processing S11450-22, when the game stop state flag is turned on and the game is stopped, various solenoids will not be driven. In other words, when the game is stopped, the second start opening 11140, the first large prize opening 11131, the second large prize opening 11151, etc. will not be opened.

[13-4-23. Game stop data update process]
Next, a game stop data update process performed during the system timer interrupt process will be described with reference to Fig. 432 and Fig. 433. Fig. 432 and Fig. 433 are a flow chart showing an example of the game stop data update process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11460-1, the main CPU 201 performs a process of saving the contents of a register (e.g., an AF register). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11412.

In S11460-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not various prize ball switches (first start port switch 11121, second start port switch 11141, first large prize port count switch 11132, second large prize port count switch 11152, general prize port switch 123) from which game balls are paid out have been detected.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the prize ball switch has been detected, it transfers processing to S11460-3, and if it determines that the prize ball switch has not been detected, it transfers processing to S11460-11.

In S11460-3, the main CPU 201 performs a process to load the "number of prize balls" of the winning slot detected by the prize ball switch. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11460-4.

In S11460-4, the main CPU 201 performs a process to load the "number of acquired game balls." After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11460-5.

In S11460-5, the main CPU 201 performs a process to add the number of winning balls to the number of acquired game balls. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11460-11.

In S11460-11, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is stopped based on the game stop state flag.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is stopped, it transfers processing to S11460-21, and if it determines that the game is not stopped, it transfers processing to S11460-12.

In S11460-12, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of acquired game balls is 0 or not.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of acquired game balls = 0, it transfers processing to S11460-15, and if it determines that the number of acquired game balls = 0 is not, it transfers processing to S11460-13.

In S11460-13, the main CPU 201 performs a process to load the "difference ball number counter." After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11460-14.

In S11460-14, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding the number of acquired game balls to the difference ball counter. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11460-15.

In S11460-15, the main CPU 201 performs a process to clear the number of acquired game balls. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11460-16.

In S11460-16, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game ball recovery switch 11179 has been detected.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game ball recovery switch 11179 has been detected, it transfers processing to S11460-17, and if it determines that the game ball recovery switch 11179 has not been detected, it transfers processing to S11460-21.

In S11460-17, the main CPU 201 performs a process to subtract 1 from the difference ball counter. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11460-18.

In S11460-18, the main CPU 201 judges whether the difference ball counter is equal to or less than the lower limit. Here, the lower limit of the difference ball counter is set to "0".
If the main CPU 201 determines that the difference ball number counter is below the lower limit value (=0), it transfers processing to S11460-19, and if it determines that the difference ball number counter is not below the lower limit value (=0), it transfers processing to S11460-21.

In S11460-19, the main CPU 201 sets the difference ball counter to 0. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11460-21.

When the difference ball counter becomes 0 as a result of the processing of S11460-18 and S11460-19, it will no longer be decremented. Note that the processing of S11460-18 and S11460-19 may be omitted (deleted) so that the difference ball counter becomes 0 or less.

In addition, by processing S11460-2 to S11460-19, the difference ball counter becomes the cumulative number of game balls paid out (number of paid game balls) minus the cumulative number of game balls fired (number of fired game balls), which corresponds to the "increased number of game balls (MY)."

In S11460-21, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load the "MY determination counter." After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S11460-22.

In S11460-22, the main CPU 201 judges whether the MY judgment counter is ≧95. Here, the value of the MY judgment counter is a value corresponding to the information obtained by dividing the "difference in number of balls counter" by 1000 ("difference in number of balls counter"/1000). Therefore, whether the MY judgment counter is ≧95 judges whether the difference in number of balls counter is equal to or greater than the regulation value (95000 or greater).
If the main CPU 201 determines that the MY determination counter is not greater than or equal to 95, it transfers the process to S11460-31, and if it determines that the MY determination counter is not greater than or equal to 95, it transfers the process to S11460-23.

In S11460-23, the main CPU 201 performs a process to load the "difference ball number counter." After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11460-24.

In S11460-24, the main CPU 201 performs a division process of the difference ball counter, dividing the difference ball counter by 1000 ("difference ball counter"/1000). After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11460-25.

In S11460-25, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the division result of S11460-24 in the MY determination counter. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11460-26.

By the process of S11460-25, the value of the MY determination counter becomes a value corresponding to the information obtained by dividing the "difference in number of balls counter" by 1000 ("difference in number of balls counter"/1000). Note that the processes of S11460-22 to S11460-25 above may be omitted (deleted) so that the value of the MY determination counter becomes equal to the difference in number of balls counter.

In S11460-31, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the MY determination counter has been updated.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the MY determination counter has been updated, it transfers the process to S11460-32, and if it determines that the MY determination counter has not been updated, it transfers the process to S11460-41.

In S11460-32, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is stopped based on the game stop state flag.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is stopped, it transfers processing to S11460-41, and if it determines that the game is not stopped, it transfers processing to S11460-33.

In S11460-33, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load the "game stop function activation management phase." After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S11460-34.

In S11460-34, the main CPU 201 judges whether the game stop function operation management phase is ≧03H. Here, the game stop function operation management phase ≧03H is a value set when the game stop function operation management phase is 03H or 04H and the difference ball number counter is equal to or greater than the regulation value (95000 or more).
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game stop function activation management phase is greater than or equal to 03H, it transfers processing to S11460-41, and if it determines that the game stop function activation management phase is not greater than or equal to 03H, it transfers processing to S11460-35.

In S11460-35, the main CPU 201 performs a game stop function activation management phase setting process based on the value of the MY determination counter. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11460-41.

In this game stop function activation management phase setting process, when the value of the MY judgment counter is a value corresponding to less than the initial boundary value of the difference ball number counter (MY judgment counter < 85), the game stop function activation management phase is set to "00H".
In addition, when the value of the MY judgment counter is a value corresponding to a value between the initial boundary value of the difference ball number counter and less than the first boundary value (85≦MY judgment counter<90), the game stop function activation management phase is set to “01H”.
In addition, when the value of the MY judgment counter is a value that corresponds to a value that is greater than or equal to the first boundary value of the difference ball number counter and less than the regulated value (90≦MY judgment counter<95), the game stop function activation management phase is set to “02H”.
In addition, when the value of the MY judgment counter is a value corresponding to or greater than the regulated value of the difference ball number counter (MY judgment counter ≧ 95), the game stop function activation management phase is set to "03H".

In this way, in the game stop function activation management phase setting process, the value of the game stop function activation management phase is updated based on the value of the MY determination counter.

In addition, in the game stop function activation management phase setting process, if the game stop function activation management phase is already 03H or 04H as a result of the processing of S11460-34 above, it will not be updated here. In other words, in the game stop function activation management phase setting process, when the game stop function activation management phase is 00H, 01H, or 02H, the game stop function activation management phase will be updated to 00H, 01H, 02H, or 03H.

In S11460-41, the main CPU 201 performs processing to load the "game stop function activation management phase." After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S11460-42.

In S11460-42, the main CPU 201 judges whether or not the game stop function operation management phase is 03H. Here, the game stop function operation management phase is 03H, which is the value set before the game is stopped when the difference ball number counter is equal to or greater than the regulated value (95,000 or more). Therefore, the game stop function operation management phase is 03H, and it is judged whether or not the game is not stopped even though the difference ball number counter is equal to or greater than the regulated value (95,000 or more).
If the main CPU 201 determines that the game stop function activation management phase is 03H, it transfers processing to S11460-43, and if it determines that the game stop function activation management phase is not 03H, it transfers processing to S11460-50.

In S11460-43, the main CPU 201 judges whether the control state number of the special symbol is ≧03. Here, the control state number of the special symbol ≧03 is a value set when the game is in a small win game state or a big win game state, as described later. Therefore, whether the game is in a small win game state or a big win game state is judged by the control state number of the special symbol ≧03.
If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is greater than or equal to 03, it transfers processing to S11460-50, and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not greater than or equal to 03, it transfers processing to S11460-44.

In S11460-44, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the game stop function activation management phase to "04H". After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S11460-50.

In this way, if the difference ball counter is equal to or greater than the regulated value (95,000 or greater), when the game is not in a small win or big win game state, the game stop function operation management phase will be updated from "03H" to "04H." Also, as described above, the game stop function operation management phase of "04H" will be maintained (unchanged) unless the backup clear switch 176 is used to "clear the RAM."

In S11460-50, the main CPU 201 performs the process of restoring the registers that were saved in S11460-1, and ends the game stop data update process.

In this way, according to the game stop data update process of this embodiment, when the game stop function activation management phase corresponding to the difference in ball number counter being less than the regulated value is 00H, 01H or 02H, the value of the game stop function activation management phase is changed appropriately based on the value of the MY judgment counter (the value of the difference in ball number counter), and it is possible to either move it forward or backward.
However, when the game stop function activation management phase, which corresponds to the difference ball number counter being equal to or greater than the regulated value, is 03H or 04H, the value of the game stop function activation management phase cannot be carried down (changed from 03H to 02H) even if the value of the MY judgment counter (value of the difference ball number counter) falls below the regulated value.

[13-4-24. Switch input detection process]
Next, a switch input detection process executed by the main CPU 201 during the system timer interrupt process (see Fig. 430) will be described with reference to Fig. 434. Fig. 434 is a flow chart showing an example of the switch input detection process in the eleventh pachinko game machine.

Compared to the first pachinko game machine, the eleventh pachinko game machine has the additional configuration of a first large prize slot count switch 11132, a second large prize slot count switch 11152, and a V prize slot switch 11157, and therefore some of the above processing has been added.

In S11501, the main CPU 201 executes the first start port winning detection process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11502.

In this first start port winning detection process, when the first start port switch 11121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start port 11120, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the prize balls indicating the number of payouts from the first start port 11120, and determines whether there is free space in the special symbol determination memory area (0) or the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4). If it is determined that there is free space in the special symbol determination memory area (0) or the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4), it obtains various random number values (for example, random number values for jackpot determination, pattern random number values, random number values for reach determination, random number values for performance selection, etc.) as start information for the first special symbol, and stores the various obtained random number values in a single memory area in FIFO (First In, First Out) format. Then, a process is performed to reserve the transmission of a winning command for the first special symbol, which indicates a winning entry into the first start port 11120 and the number of reserved first special symbols. The winning command for the first special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 430) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the first special symbol start memory areas (1) to (4), the first start port winning detection process is terminated without acquiring various random number values.

In S11502, the main CPU 201 executes the second start port winning detection process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11503.

In this second start port winning detection process, when the second start port switch 11141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start port 11140, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the prize balls indicating the number of payouts from the second start port 11140, and determines whether there is free space in the special pattern determination memory area (0), the second special pattern start memory area (1) to the second special pattern start memory area (2). If it is determined that there is free space in the special pattern determination memory area (0), the second special pattern start memory area (1) to the second special pattern start memory area (2), it obtains various random number values (for example, random number values for jackpot determination, pattern random number values, random number values for reach determination, random number values for performance selection, etc.) as start information for the second special pattern, and stores the various obtained random number values in a single memory area in FIFO format. Then, a process is performed to reserve the transmission of a winning command for the second special symbol, which indicates a winning entry into the second start port 11140 and the number of reserved second special symbols. The winning command for the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 430) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the second special symbol start memory areas (1) to (2), the second start port winning detection process is terminated without acquiring various random number values.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are four first special symbol start memory areas for the first special symbol, but there are not two first special symbol start memory areas for the second special symbol. Therefore, the number of reserved first special symbols is four, and the number of reserved second special symbols is two. Note that the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols can be freely changed as needed, but it is preferable to keep it within four.

In S11503, the main CPU 201 performs a general prize opening passage detection process. In the general prize opening passage detection process, for example, payout information corresponding to the prize balls indicating the number of payouts from the general prize opening 122 is set. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S11504.

In S11504, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening passage detection process. In the first large prize opening passage detection process, when the first large prize opening count switch 11132 detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 11131, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the prize balls indicating the number of payouts from the first large prize opening 11131, and adds 1 to the first large prize opening counter for counting the number of game balls entering the first large prize opening 11131 to update it. Then, it performs a transmission reservation process for a first large prize opening entry command indicating an entry into the first large prize opening 11131. The first large prize opening entry command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 430) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S11505.

In S11505, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening passage detection process. In the second large prize opening passage detection process, when the second large prize opening count switch 11152 detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 11151, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the prize balls indicating the number of payouts from the second large prize opening 11151, and adds 1 to the second large prize opening counter for counting the number of game balls entering the second large prize opening 11151 to update it. Then, it performs a transmission reservation process for a second large prize opening entry command indicating an entry into the second large prize opening 11151. The second large prize opening entry command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 430) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S11506.

In S11506, the main CPU 201 performs a V winning port passage detection process. In the V winning port passage detection process, when the V winning port switch 11157 detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning port 11156, the main CPU 201 turns on the V winning port passage flag. Then, it performs a transmission reservation process for a V passing command indicating that the game ball has passed through the V winning port 11156. The V passing command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 430) during the next system timer interrupt process. Note that even if a game ball passes through the V winning port 11156, no payout information is set. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S11507.

In S11507, the main CPU 201 performs gate passage detection processing. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S11508.

In this gate passage detection process, when the normal symbol operation switch 11127 detects the passage of the game ball through the first passing gate 11126R or the second passing gate 11126L, the main CPU 201 judges whether there is free space in the normal symbol start memory area (1) to the normal symbol start memory area (4). If it is judged that there is free space in the normal symbol start memory area (1) to the normal symbol start memory area (4), various random number values (for example, random number values for determining whether the normal symbol is a hit, pattern random number values of the normal symbol, etc.) are acquired as start information for the normal symbol, and the various acquired random number values are stored in a single normal symbol start memory area in FIFO format. On the other hand, if it is judged that there is no free space in any of the normal symbol start memory areas (1) to (4), the gate passage detection process is terminated without acquiring various random number values.

In S11508, the main CPU 201 performs a look-ahead command generation process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the current switch input detection process.

In this look-ahead command generation process, the look-ahead related data in FIG. 403 is referenced, and the various random number values obtained in the current first start port winning detection process or second start port winning detection process are analyzed based on the game state, and a look-ahead command is generated. As shown in the look-ahead related data in FIG. 403, in the time-saving game state, big win game state, and small win game state, only look-ahead commands based on the various random number values obtained in the second start port winning detection process (look-ahead commands for the second special pattern) can be generated. Then, a look-ahead command transmission reservation process is performed to transmit the generated look-ahead command to the sub-control circuit 300. The look-ahead command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 430) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[13-5. Sub-control circuit]
Next, the control contents of the sub-control circuit 300 based on various commands etc. transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 will be described.

First, the details of the various tables stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be explained using Figures 435 to 442.

[13-6-1. Presentation mode determination table]
A presentation mode determination table for determining a presentation mode in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine will be described below. Figure 435 shows an example of the presentation mode determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

Here, "performance mode" refers to information that defines the state of various performances performed by the sub-control circuit 300.

As shown in FIG. 435, the presentation mode determination table associates the game state, the mode transition conditions, and presentation mode information that defines the presentation mode. The game state is determined by the game state designation command received from the main control circuit 200.

The "mode transition condition" is configured to be determined by the "transition flag" and the "variable number of times N the first special symbol is displayed." This "transition flag" is information that identifies whether or not the heaven presentation mode has been notified by the "mode transition effect" described below (whether or not the symbol presentation pattern ZT12 has been executed), with transition flag = 00H indicating that the heaven presentation mode has not been notified by the mode transition effect, and transition flag = 01H indicating that the heaven presentation mode has been notified by the mode transition effect.

The "presentation mode information" is composed of presentation mode information = 00H indicating the chance presentation mode, presentation mode information = 01H indicating the general presentation mode, presentation mode information = 02H indicating the premonition presentation mode, presentation mode information = 10H indicating the heaven presentation mode, and presentation mode information = 0FH indicating the rush presentation mode.

In this embodiment, the five presentation modes are a chance presentation mode, a general presentation mode, a premonition presentation mode, a heaven presentation mode, and a rush presentation mode, but six or more presentation modes may be included. For example, the rush presentation mode may be a first rush presentation mode in the A time-saving play state, a second rush presentation mode in the B time-saving play state, and a second rush presentation mode in the C time-saving play state, with the first rush presentation mode, the second rush presentation mode, and the third rush presentation mode being different presentation modes.

The sub-CPU 301 in the sub-control circuit 300 refers to the presentation mode determination table shown in FIG. 435 and determines the presentation mode information based on the game state and the mode transition conditions.

[13-6-2. Symbol effect pattern determination table]
Next, a symbol effect pattern determination table for determining a symbol effect pattern will be described. Figures 436, 437 and 438 show an example of the effect mode determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

Here, "effect pattern" refers to information that defines the display effects of characters, etc., audio effects, and effects that change the operation mode of the effect button 54. Also, "design effect pattern" refers to information that defines that during the variable display of special or normal patterns, at least the "first decorative pattern (main pattern)" described below is variably displayed in a predetermined variable manner on the display device 7. Note that, depending on the type of design effect pattern, in addition to the variable display of the first decorative pattern, background display modes and display effects of characters, etc., audio effects, and effects that change the operation mode of the effect button 54 may also be defined. Also, in addition to the design effect pattern, display effects of various effect patterns can be superimposed and executed.

The sub-CPU 301 in the sub-control circuit 300 determines the pattern presentation pattern by referring to the pattern presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 436, FIG. 437, or FIG. 438.

[Chance Production Mode Symbol Production Pattern Determination Table]
As shown in FIG. 436 (a), the pattern presentation pattern determination table CZ in the chance presentation mode corresponds to a special pattern variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, a look-ahead flag, a selection rate (first random number value), and a pattern presentation pattern.

Here, the "look-ahead flag" is information that determines whether or not a look-ahead performance is being executed, with a look-ahead flag of 00H indicating that a look-ahead performance is not being executed, and a look-ahead flag of 01H indicating that a look-ahead performance is being executed.

The "selection rate" corresponds to the first random number being within a predetermined range for a first random number value that is made up of a first random number range, but for ease of explanation, it is described as selection rate. Note that the selection rate may include 0% in addition to 1-100%, and the term "selection rate of 0%" is not excluded. The above also applies to the "selection rate" in the table described below. In this embodiment, multiple types of random number values with different random number ranges are provided, and explanations of the types of random number values will be omitted as appropriate.

According to the symbol presentation pattern determination table CZ of the chance presentation mode shown in Fig. 436 (a), when the special symbol variation pattern command is a variation pattern command corresponding to "time-saving hit", a specific symbol presentation pattern (symbol presentation patterns CZ10 to CZ15, CZ20, CZ21) can be determined as a dedicated symbol presentation pattern. Also, when the special symbol variation pattern command is a variation pattern command corresponding to "miss", a specific symbol presentation pattern (symbol presentation patterns CZ22, CZ23) can be determined.
Therefore, when the time-saving winning is achieved by the lottery of the special symbol, a special symbol presentation can be performed.

This particular symbol presentation pattern is made up of a symbol presentation pattern that executes a "card presentation" and a symbol presentation pattern that executes a "RUSH entry presentation."

The pattern presentation pattern for executing this "card presentation" is determined when a time-saving hit occurs and the "selection of special patterns z10 to z12" triggers a transition to the first time-saving play state, the "selection of special patterns z20" triggers a transition to the second time-saving play state, and the "selection of special patterns z30" triggers a transition to the third time-saving play state.
Therefore, the "card effect" can suggest a transition to any one of the first time-shortened game state, the second time-shortened game state, and the third time-shortened game state.

In addition, the "RUSH entry effect" is determined when the "special symbol selection symbol z20" is displayed, which is a hit in the time-saving mode and a trigger for transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state, or when it is a miss.
Therefore, the "RUSH entry effect" can execute an effect as to whether or not to transition to the second time-saving gaming state (RUSH gaming state).

Furthermore, the "card effect" and "RUSH entry effect" are composed of a "weak effect (white card effect or RUSH entry effect A)" and a "strong effect (red card effect or RUSH entry effect B)" that has a higher expected value of transitioning to the second time-saving game state than the weak effect, depending on the selection rate (first random number value).

According to the pattern determination table CZ for the chance presentation mode shown in Figure 436 (a), when a pre-reading presentation is executed (pre-reading flag = 01H), the pattern presentation pattern (patterns CZ11, CZ13, CZ15, CZ21, CZ23) of a "strong presentation (red card presentation or RUSH entry presentation B)" can be determined.
As a result, when a pre-reading effect is executed, a "strong effect (red card effect or RUSH entry effect B)" is executed during the corresponding change, so that the player can play the game with a sense of expectation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol presentation pattern determination table CZ in the chance presentation mode shown in FIG. 436(a) is configured to determine an "announcement presentation pattern" instead of the symbol presentation pattern when the special symbol variation pattern command corresponds to the second special symbol. In this "announcement presentation pattern", a notification presentation is executed to notify the result of the special symbol lottery without displaying the variation of the first decorative symbol (main symbol). The same applies to the symbol presentation pattern determination table described later.

In this way, when the special symbol variation pattern command corresponds to the second special symbol, the announcement presentation pattern is determined instead of the symbol presentation pattern, so that the announcement presentation regarding the lottery result of the second special symbol, the small win presentation performed in the small win game state, and the big win presentation performed in the big win game state can be made to look like a series of winning presentations (BONUS presentations), further increasing the excitement of the game.

[Table for determining the design effect pattern in the general effect mode]
As shown in FIG. 436(b), in the symbol presentation pattern determination table NR for the general presentation mode, the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200 is associated with the symbol presentation pattern.

Note that the symbol presentation pattern determination table NR for the general presentation mode shown in FIG. 436(b) does not have a selection rate (first random number value) associated with it, but multiple symbol presentation patterns may be associated with it by the first random number value based on the variation pattern command for one special symbol.

According to the symbol presentation pattern determination table NR for the general presentation mode shown in FIG. 436(b), even if the variation pattern command for the same special symbol is used, a symbol presentation pattern different from that in the chance presentation mode can be determined. The difference in the symbol presentation pattern may be at least one of the display mode (symbol design) and the background display mode of the first decorative symbol.

[Table for determining the symbol effect pattern in the premonition effect mode]
As shown in Figure 437 (a), the pattern presentation pattern determination table ZT for the premonition presentation mode corresponds to the special pattern variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the current game state, the destination game state, the selection rate (first random number value), and the pattern presentation pattern.

Here, the "current game state" is determined by the game state designation command received from the main control circuit 200, and the "destination game state" is determined from the current game state and the number of times the special symbol has been shortened (the "sub special symbol time-saving counter" described later).

According to the pattern presentation pattern determination table ZT of the premonition presentation mode shown in Figure 437 (a), when the special pattern variation pattern command is a special pattern variation pattern (10H) dedicated to when the variable display count N of the first special pattern is 1 to 10 (see Figure 401 (b)), a suggestive pattern presentation pattern (pattern presentation pattern ZT09) is configured to be able to be determined as a dedicated pattern presentation pattern.
Therefore, when the variable display number N of the first special symbol is 1 to 10, a dedicated symbol presentation can be performed.

This suggestive symbol presentation pattern (symbol presentation pattern ZT09) is a symbol presentation pattern that executes a "mode transition prompting presentation."
This "mode transition teasing effect" makes it possible to suggest in advance that the effect mode may transition by variable display of the first special pattern a predetermined number of times.

In addition, according to the pattern presentation pattern determination table ZT of the premonition presentation mode shown in Figure 437 (a), when the special pattern change pattern command is a special pattern change pattern (11H) dedicated to when the number of variable display times N of the first special pattern is 0 (see Figure 401 (c)), a pattern presentation pattern for judgment (pattern presentation patterns ZT10 to ZT12) can be determined as a dedicated pattern presentation pattern.
Therefore, when the variable display count N of the first special symbol is 0, a special symbol presentation can be performed.

The symbol presentation patterns for this judgment (symbol presentation patterns ZT10 to ZT12) are determined based on the current game state and the game state to be transitioned to, and are symbol presentation patterns for executing the "mode transition presentation".
This "mode transition effect" can notify the player that the performance mode will be transitioned from the premonition effect mode to the general effect mode, the chance effect mode, or the heaven effect mode. Also, by executing a symbol effect pattern (symbol effect pattern ZT12) that executes a mode transition effect that notifies the player of the transition to the heaven effect mode, the transition flag becomes 01H (see FIG. 435).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the current game state is the third time-saving game state, the pattern presentation pattern for judgment is configured to be able to determine, based on the selection rate (first random number value), either a pattern presentation pattern (pattern presentation pattern ZT10) that executes a mode transition presentation to notify of a transition to the general presentation mode, or a pattern presentation pattern (pattern presentation pattern ZT12) that executes a mode transition presentation to notify of a transition to the heaven presentation mode.
As a result, even if the mode transition presentation notifies the player of a transition to the general presentation mode, the player can retain the sense of expectation that the player is in the third time-shortened gaming state, thereby maintaining interest in the game.

In addition, the pattern presentation pattern for judgment may be configured so that when the current gaming state is the third time-saving gaming state, only the pattern presentation pattern (pattern presentation pattern ZT12) that executes a mode transition presentation that notifies of a transition to the heaven presentation mode is determined.

In addition, according to the pattern presentation pattern determination table ZT of the premonition presentation mode shown in Figure 437 (a), when the special pattern change pattern command is a special pattern change pattern (10H) corresponding to a miss in the lottery result of the first special pattern (see Figure 401 (b)), a provocative pattern presentation pattern (pattern presentation pattern ZT09) can be determined as a dedicated pattern presentation pattern.
This teasing design pattern can suggest that a "mode transition effect" is about to be executed.

In this embodiment, different symbol presentation patterns can be determined in the general presentation mode, the premonition presentation mode, and the chance presentation mode, but the same symbol presentation pattern can be determined in the general presentation mode, the premonition presentation mode, and the chance presentation mode. In particular, it is desirable to configure the same symbol presentation pattern to be determined so that a common background display mode is achieved in the general presentation mode, the premonition presentation mode, and the chance presentation mode when the power is turned on, regardless of whether the RAM is cleared or not. With this configuration, it becomes difficult to tell at a glance whether the RAM has been cleared when the gaming establishment opens, and even gaming machines whose RAM has not been cleared can be operated from the time the gaming establishment opens.

[Heavenly performance mode pattern determination table]
As shown in FIG. 437(b), the symbol presentation pattern determination table TE for the heaven presentation mode associates special symbol variation pattern commands received from the main control circuit 200 with symbol presentation patterns.

Note that the symbol presentation pattern determination table TE for the heaven presentation mode shown in FIG. 437(b) does not have a selection rate (first random number value) associated with it, but multiple symbol presentation patterns may be associated with it by the first random number value based on the variation pattern command for one special symbol.

According to the symbol presentation pattern determination table TE for the heaven presentation mode shown in FIG. 437(b), even if the variation pattern command for the same special symbol is used, a symbol presentation pattern different from that in the chance presentation mode, general presentation mode, and premonition presentation mode can be determined. The difference in the symbol presentation pattern may be at least one of the display mode (symbol design) and the background display mode of the first decorative symbol.

[Rush Mode Design Pattern Determination Table]
As shown in FIG. 438, the symbol presentation pattern determination table RU in the RUSH presentation mode corresponds the normal symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (second random number value), and the symbol presentation pattern.

According to the pattern presentation pattern determination table RU for the RUSH presentation mode shown in Figure 438, unlike the pattern presentation pattern determination tables shown in Figures 436 and 437, it is associated with a normal pattern variation pattern command rather than a special pattern variation pattern command.
As a result, in a RUSH game state (RUSH presentation mode) in which right-hand hitting is the normal game mode, a presentation using the first decorative pattern (main pattern) is carried out as a variable presentation related to the lottery result of the normal pattern, making it possible to clearly show gameplay that is primarily based on the lottery result of the normal pattern.

In this embodiment, when a special pattern change pattern command is received during the RUSH presentation mode, a pattern presentation pattern that determines the change mode of the first decorative pattern (main pattern) is not determined, but a sub-pattern presentation pattern that determines the change mode of the second decorative pattern (sub-pattern) is determined.
As a result, when in the RUSH game state (RUSH presentation mode), the second decorative pattern (sub-pattern) is variably displayed as a variable presentation related to the lottery result of the first special pattern, so that the variable presentation related to the lottery result of the first special pattern can be prevented from interfering with the variable presentation related to the lottery result of the normal pattern.

[13-6-3. Telop effect pattern determination table]
Next, a caption effect pattern determination table for determining a caption effect pattern will be described. Figure 439 shows an example of the caption effect pattern determination table in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

Here, "caption performance pattern" refers to information that defines a caption performance that suggests in advance that the second starting port 11140 will be long-opened. This "caption performance pattern" is composed of "caption performance pattern K01" that suggests that the second starting port 11140 will be long-opened and notifies the player that it will be long-opened, and "caption performance pattern K02" that suggests that the second starting port 11140 will be long-opened and notifies the player that it will not be long-opened.

As shown in FIG. 439, the caption effect pattern determination table associates the normal symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (second random number value), and the caption effect pattern.

In addition, the normal pattern change pattern command associated with the caption presentation pattern determination table shown in Figure 439 is a normal pattern change pattern command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 during the third time-saving game state (see Figure 407).
Therefore, in the third time-saving gaming state, which is the general gaming state, the telop effect according to the telop effect pattern can be executed.

In addition, when the second starting hole 11140 is in the first time-saving game state, which is the general game state, the second starting hole 11140 will not open long, but the device may be configured to determine a "telop presentation pattern K02" that notifies the player that the second starting hole 11140 will not open long by a normal symbol variation pattern command sent from the main control circuit 200 when the device is in the first time-saving game state.

The sub-CPU 301 in the sub-control circuit 300 refers to the caption presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 439 and determines the caption presentation pattern.

[13-6-4. Look-ahead performance pattern determination table]
Next, a look-ahead performance pattern determination table for determining a look-ahead performance pattern will be described. Fig. 440 is an example of a look-ahead performance pattern determination table in the eleventh pachinko game machine. Fig. 440(a) is an example of a look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z1 in a normal game state, and Fig. 440(b) is an example of a look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z2 in a first time-saving game state and a third time-saving game state, which are general game states.

Here, the "pre-reading performance pattern" refers to information that defines a pre-reading performance that suggests the lottery result of the special pattern in advance when the game ball enters the first starting hole 11120 or the second starting hole 11140.

The sub-CPU 301 in the sub-control circuit 300 refers to the look-ahead performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 440 to determine the look-ahead performance pattern.

[Normal game state pre-reading performance pattern determination table]
As shown in FIG. 440(a), the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z1 in the normal game state corresponds the look-ahead command received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (third random number value), and the look-ahead performance pattern.

According to the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z1 in the normal game state shown in Figure 440 (a), when the look-ahead command is a look-ahead command corresponding to "jackpot or miss" and "super reach, super super reach or RUSH entry performance", or when the look-ahead command is a look-ahead command corresponding to "time-saving hit" and "selected special pattern z20", a look-ahead performance pattern (look-ahead performance pattern Z01) that executes an "expectation UP zone" can be determined.
For this reason, the "expectation UP zone" can indicate in advance that a predetermined presentation will be performed and that a transition will be made to a jackpot game state or a second time-saving game state (RUSH game state).

In addition, according to the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z1 in the normal game state shown in Figure 440 (a), when the look-ahead command is a look-ahead command corresponding to a "time-saving hit" or a look-ahead command corresponding to a "miss", a look-ahead performance pattern (look-ahead performance pattern Z02) that executes a "mode transition zone" can be determined as the look-ahead performance pattern.
For this reason, the "mode transition zone" can indicate in advance that a time-saving hit has occurred and that a transition will occur from the normal gaming state to either the first time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state.

In addition, according to the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z1 in the normal game state shown in Figure 440 (a), when the look-ahead command is a look-ahead command corresponding to a "time-saving hit" and the "selected special pattern z20", or when the look-ahead command is a look-ahead command corresponding to a "miss", a look-ahead performance pattern (look-ahead performance pattern Z03) that executes a "RUSH expectation zone" can be determined.
For this reason, the "RUSH expectation zone" can indicate in advance that a transition to the second time-shortened gaming state (RUSH gaming state) will occur.

[Table for determining pre-reading performance pattern in normal game state]
As shown in FIG. 440 (b), in the general gaming state, the look-ahead command received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (third random number value), and the look-ahead performance pattern are associated with each other in the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z2.

According to the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z2 shown in FIG. 440(b), when the look-ahead command is a look-ahead command corresponding to "jackpot or miss" and "super reach, super super reach", a look-ahead performance pattern (look-ahead performance pattern Z01) that executes the "expectation UP zone" can be determined.

Furthermore, when comparing the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z1 shown in Figure 440 (a) with the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z2 shown in Figure 440 (b), it is configured so that the look-ahead performance pattern that executes the "expectation UP zone" is more easily determined in the normal gaming state than in the general gaming state.
For this reason, the "expectation UP zone" is more likely to be executed in the normal game state than in the general game state, and the interest in the game in the normal game state (chance presentation mode) can be further increased.

In this embodiment, the game is configured with three types of look-ahead performance patterns, which are "Expectation UP Zone," "Mode Transition Zone," and "RUSH Expectation Zone." However, the game may be configured with four or more types of look-ahead performance patterns by further subdividing the suggested content, or may be configured with two or less types of look-ahead performance patterns by integrating (or abbreviating) the suggested content.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to determine the pre-reading performance pattern in the second time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving game state, and the fifth time-saving game state, which are RUSH game states.

[13-6-5. Table for setting prohibition conditions for pre-reading effects]
A prohibition condition setting table for the pre-reading performance for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading performance (expectation UP zone, mode transition zone, RUSH expectation zone) will be described. Figure 441 is an example of a prohibition condition setting table for the pre-reading performance in the eleventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 441, the prohibition conditions for prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead performance include a "common prohibition condition" that prohibits the execution of the look-ahead performance in each of the expectation UP zone, the mode transition zone, and the RUSH expectation zone, and a "specific prohibition condition" that prohibits the look-ahead performance in both the mode transition zone and the RUSH expectation zone.

There are three common prohibition conditions, common prohibition conditions 1 to 3. "Common Prohibition Condition 1" is met when there are reserved numbers of the second special symbol, "Common Prohibition Condition 2" is met during the control period of the second special symbol (during the variable display of the second special symbol), and "Common Prohibition Condition 3" is met when the look-ahead performance is already being executed by referring to the look-ahead flag.

If any of the common prohibited conditions 1 to 3 is met, the look-ahead performance pattern will not be determined, and the look-ahead performance of any of the expectation UP zone, mode transition zone, and RUSH expectation zone will not be executed.

There are two unique prohibition conditions: unique prohibition condition 1 and unique prohibition condition 2. "Unique prohibition condition 1" is met when the game ball enters the first start hole 11120 or the second start hole 11140 and start information that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the previous reserved memory, and "Unique prohibition condition 2" is met when the game ball enters the first start hole 11120 or the second start hole 11140 and start information that is determined to be a time-saving hit and a special pattern selected pattern z20 is stored in the previous reserved memory.

If either of the unique prohibition conditions 1 and 2 is met, the look-ahead performance of the mode transition zone and RUSH expectation zone will not be executed, but the look-ahead performance of the expectation UP zone is configured to be executable.

[12-6-6. First game stop notice end determination table]
A first game stop notice end judgment table for ending the execution of the first game stop notice that is started when the increase in the number of game balls (MY) is within the first counting range will be described. Figure 442 is an example of the first game stop notice end judgment table in the eleventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 442, three termination conditions, termination conditions 1 to 3, are set as the "first game stop notice termination conditions" that terminate the execution of the first game stop notice.

"Termination condition 1" is met when in the normal game state. However, "Termination condition 1" is not met when in the normal game state during a jackpot game state. Furthermore, "Termination condition 2" is met when in the first time-saving game state, and "Termination condition 3" is met when in the third time-saving game state. In other words, the first game stop notice ends when the game transitions to the normal game state or the general game state.

When the first game stop notice is being executed, if any of the above-mentioned "first game stop notice termination conditions" is met, the execution of the first game stop notice will end.

[13-7-1. Sub-control circuit processing]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 443. Fig. 443 is a flow chart showing an example of the sub-control circuit process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 443, the sub-CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S11600). In this initialization process, for example, RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11610.

In S11610, the sub-CPU 301 performs a data input process for inputting data. In this data input process, a command is input from the command input port 308, and operation information by the player detected by the effect button 54 is input. The details of this data input process will be described later with reference to FIG.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11620.

In S11620, the sub CPU 301 executes a command analysis process, in which the command input in the process of S11610 is analyzed.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11630.

In S11630, the sub-CPU 301 executes a performance mode determination process. In this process, for example, a performance pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, and various requests (for example, a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, a role request, a performance button drive request, etc.) for operating various performance devices are generated based on the determined performance pattern. Details of this performance mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11640.

In S11640, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304. The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on the message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11650.

In S11650, the sub CPU 301 executes a sound control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the sound control circuit 305. The sound control circuit 305 performs sound control for outputting sound from the speaker 32 based on the message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11660.

In S11660, the sub CPU 301 executes an LED control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306. The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking all or a part of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on the message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11670.

In S11670, the sub-CPU 301 executes a role control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a role request to the role control circuit 307. Based on the message (role request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301, the role control circuit 307 performs drive control to operate the performance drive motors (not shown) for all or part of the roles constituting the performance role group 58.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11680.

In S11680, the sub CPU 301 executes an effect button control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an effect button drive request to the button control circuit 310. The button control circuit 310 performs drive control such as changing the operation mode of the effect button 54 or vibrating the effect button 54 based on the message (effect button drive request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11690.

In S11690, the sub CPU 301 executes a performance progression process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 executes a process of updating a performance timer counter for progressing the execution of various performances, a forced notification timer (to be described later), and the like.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 returns the process to S11610.

[13-7-2. Presentation mode determination process]
Next, the details of the presentation mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 443) will be described with reference to Fig. 444. Fig. 444 is a flow chart showing an example of the presentation mode determination process in the eleventh pachinko game machine.

In S11631, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation pattern determination process for determining a presentation pattern only when a game stop flag described later is off (=00H). In this process, a presentation pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, the presentation pattern being determined based on the type of display presentation displayed on the display device 7, the type of sound presentation output from the speaker 32, the operation type of the presentation button 54, and the like. Note that if the game stop flag is on (=01H), the presentation pattern determination process is not executed. Details of this presentation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to Figs. 445 to 448.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11632.

In S11632, the sub CPU 301 executes a process for generating an animation request. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S11631.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11633.

In S11633, the sub CPU 301 executes a process for generating a drawing request. In this process, the sub CPU 301 generates a drawing request based on the animation request generated in S11632.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11634.

In S11634, the sub CPU 301 executes a sound request generation process. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S11631.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11635.

In S11635, the sub CPU 301 executes a lamp request generation process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 generates a lamp request based on the effect pattern determined in S11631.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11636.

In S11636, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel request generation process. In this process, the reel request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S11631.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11637.

In S11637, the sub CPU 301 executes a process for generating a performance button drive request. In this process, the sub CPU 301 generates a performance button drive request based on the performance pattern determined in S11631.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11638.

In S11638, the sub-CPU 301 executes the process of generating a special request related to a game stop only if the game stop flag described below is on (=01H).

In this game stop related special request generation process, when the game stop flag is on (=01H), if the forced notification time described later has not elapsed, a drawing request, a sound request, and a lamp request for executing a game stop notification in a first notification mode are generated. Also, when the game stop flag is on (=01H), if the forced notification time has elapsed, a drawing request, a sound request, and a lamp request for executing a game stop notification in a second notification mode are generated.
Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 terminates the presentation mode determination process and returns the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 443).

[13-7-3. Presentation pattern determination process]
Next, with reference to Fig. 445 to Fig. 447, the details of the effect pattern determination process executed by the sub-CPU 301 in the effect mode determination process (see Fig. 444) will be described. Fig. 445 to Fig. 447 are a flow chart showing an example of the effect pattern determination process in the eleventh pachinko game machine.

In S11631-1, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol winning command."

If it is determined in S11631-1 that the command is a "special symbol winning command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11631-2. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol winning command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11631-3.

In S11631-2, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process to add the number of reserved special symbols, etc.

In this process of adding the number of reserved special symbols, it is determined whether the command is a "winning command for the first special symbol" or a "winning command for the second special symbol", and if the command is a "winning command for the first special symbol", 1 is added to the number of reserved first special symbols in work RAM 303 (reserved number counter for first special symbol), and if the command is a "winning command for the second special symbol", 1 is added to the number of reserved second special symbols in work RAM 303 (reserved number counter for second special symbol).
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 444).

In S11631-3, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "pre-read command" for a special symbol.

If it is determined in S11631-3 that the command is a "read-ahead command," the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11631-4. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "read-ahead command," the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11631-10.

In S11631-4, the sub-CPU 301 performs pending information storage processing to store the contents of the start information for the special symbol.

In this pending information storage process, it is determined whether it is a "first special symbol look-ahead command" or a "second special symbol look-ahead command", and various parameters of the look-ahead command (see FIG. 403) are stored in the decorative symbol determination area, the first decorative symbol start memory area, and the second decorative symbol start memory area of the work RAM 303 so as to correspond to the special symbol determination area, the first special symbol start memory area, and the second special symbol start memory area of the main RAM 203. That is, information corresponding to the start information of the special symbol stored in the main RAM 203 of the main control circuit 200 is also stored in the work RAM 303 of the sub-control circuit 300.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S11631-5.

In S11631-5, the sub-CPU 301 performs a look-ahead performance determination process to determine a look-ahead performance pattern for executing the look-ahead performance. The details of this look-ahead performance determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 444).

In S11631-10, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "symbol designation command."

If it is determined in S11631-10 that the command is a "symbol designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11631-11. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "symbol designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11631-20.

In S11631-11, the sub-CPU 301 performs a decorative symbol determination process to determine the type of decorative symbol to be displayed.

In this decorative symbol determination process, the decorative symbols to be stopped are determined based on the contents of the symbol designation command, and the determined stopped symbols are stored in the stopped symbol storage area of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 444).

In S11631-20, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command."

If it is determined in S11631-20 that the command is a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11631-21. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11631-30.

In S11631-21, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process to subtract the number of reserved special symbols, etc.

In this process of subtracting the reserved number of special symbols, it is determined whether the command is a "first special symbol variation pattern command" or a "second special symbol variation pattern command", and when the command is a "first special symbol variation pattern command", 1 is subtracted from the reserved number counter of the first special symbol in the work RAM 303, and when the command is a "second special symbol variation pattern command", 1 is subtracted from the reserved number counter of the second special symbol in the work RAM 303. In addition, a reserved shift display pattern for shifting and displaying the reserved image of the special symbol subtracted this time is determined. Furthermore, various information stored in the decorative symbol determination area, the first decorative symbol start memory area, and the second decorative symbol start memory area of the work RAM 303 is shifted in the same manner as the special symbol determination area, the first special symbol start memory area, and the second special symbol start memory area of the main RAM 203.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S11631-22.

In S11631-22, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the presentation mode information stored in the presentation mode information storage area of the work RAM 303, and performs a pattern presentation table determination process to determine a pattern presentation pattern determination table.

In this symbol effect table determination process, in the chance effect mode, the symbol effect pattern determination table CZ shown in Fig. 436(a) is determined, and in the general effect mode, the symbol effect pattern determination table NR shown in Fig. 436(b) is determined. In addition, in the premonition effect mode, the symbol effect pattern determination table ZT shown in Fig. 437(a) is determined, and in the heaven effect mode, the symbol effect pattern determination table TE shown in Fig. 437(b) is determined. In addition, in the RUSH effect mode, the symbol effect pattern determination table is not determined.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S11631-23.

In S11631-23, the sub-CPU 301 performs a pattern presentation pattern determination process to determine the pattern presentation pattern.

In this symbol presentation pattern determination process, after acquiring the first random number value, the symbol presentation pattern determination table determined in the symbol presentation table determination process is referenced, and a symbol presentation pattern is determined based on various information associated with the symbol presentation pattern determination table. After the symbol presentation pattern is determined, a sub-symbol presentation pattern that determines the variation mode of the second decorative symbol (sub-symbol) is also determined.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S11631-24.

Here, in the pattern presentation pattern, the pattern presentation pattern determination table ZT for the premonition presentation mode shown in Figure 437 (a) is referenced, and if the pattern presentation pattern ZT12 which notifies of the heaven presentation mode by the "mode transition presentation" is determined, a transition flag = 01H is set in the work RAM 303, and presentation mode information (10H) indicating the heaven presentation mode is stored in the presentation mode information memory area.
As a result, the next time the first special pattern is variable displayed, the presentation mode will transition from the premonition presentation mode to the heaven presentation mode, and the pattern presentation pattern determination table TE for the heaven presentation mode shown in Figure 437 (b) will be referenced (determined).

In this embodiment, as described above, even if a special symbol variation pattern command is received in the RUSH presentation mode, the symbol presentation pattern determination table is not determined, and the symbol presentation pattern is not determined, but the sub-symbol presentation pattern is determined.

In S11631-24, the sub-CPU 301 performs a preview performance pattern determination process to determine the preview performance pattern.

In this preview performance pattern determination process, after obtaining a predetermined random number value, a preview performance pattern determination table (not shown) is referenced to determine the preview performance pattern to be executed for that variation based on the received special pattern variation pattern command and the obtained second random number value, etc.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 444).

In S11631-30, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol effect stop command."

If it is determined in S11631-30 that the command is a "special symbol effect stop command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11631-31. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol effect stop command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11631-40.

In S11631-31, the sub-CPU 301 performs pattern presentation end processing to end the pattern presentation.

In the symbol effect end process, symbol effect execution end data for ending the execution of the symbol effect by the symbol effect pattern is created. Also, in the symbol effect end process, symbol stop display data for stopping and displaying the stop pattern of the decorative pattern determined by the decorative pattern determination process is created.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S11631-32.

In S11631-32, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the state information (current game state) stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and performs a count counter update process to update various counters.

In this count counter update process, when in normal game mode, the "normal variation count counter" in work RAM 303, which counts the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in normal game mode, is updated by adding 1. Also, when in time-saving game mode and the first special symbol performance stop command is issued, the "sub special symbol time-saving counter" in work RAM 303, which counts the number of times the special symbol is displayed in time-saving game mode, is updated by subtracting 1.

Furthermore, when the time-saving game state is reached and the first special symbol display stop command is issued, the display mode information stored in the display mode information storage area of the work RAM 303 is referenced, and when the general display mode or premonition display mode is reached, the "sub variable display count N counter" of the work RAM 303, which counts the number of times N the first special symbol is displayed, is updated by subtracting 1 from it.

In addition, in the count counter update process, when the look-ahead flag indicating that the look-ahead performance is being executed is on, the "look-ahead count counter" in the work RAM 303 is updated by subtracting 1 from it.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S11631-33.

In S11631-33, the sub-CPU 301 performs a presentation mode transition process to transition between presentation modes, etc.

In this processing for transitioning to a presentation mode, when the game is in a time-saving game state, the sub-special symbol time-saving counter is referenced, and when the sub-special symbol time-saving counter = 0, the game state information for the normal game state is stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303.

Furthermore, the presentation mode information stored in the presentation mode information storage area of the work RAM 303 is referenced, and when the presentation mode is the general presentation mode or the premonition presentation mode, the sub variable display count N counter is referenced, and when the sub variable display count N counter = 10, presentation mode information (02H) indicating the premonition presentation mode is stored in the presentation mode information storage area. Also, when the sub variable display count N counter = 0, presentation mode information (01H) indicating the general presentation mode is stored in the presentation mode information storage area, and the sub variable display count N = 50 is reset.

In addition, in the process of transitioning to a presentation mode, etc., when the look-ahead flag indicating that a look-ahead presentation is being executed is on, the "look-ahead count counter" in the work RAM 303 is referenced, and if the look-ahead count counter = 0, the look-ahead flag is turned off (= 00H).
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 444).

In S11631-40, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "small win start display command."

If it is determined in S11631-40 that the command is a "small win start display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11631-41. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "small win start display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11631-42.

In S11631-41, the sub-CPU 301 performs a small win start effect determination process to determine a small win start effect pattern for performing a small win start effect.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 444).

In S11631-42, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "V pass command."

If it is determined in S11631-42 that the command is a "V pass command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11631-43. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "V pass command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11631-44.

In S11631-43, the sub-CPU 301 performs a V passing performance determination process to determine a V passing performance pattern for performing a V passing performance.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 444).

In S11631-44, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "small win end display command."

If it is determined in S11631-44 that the command is a "small win end display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11631-45. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "small win end display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11631-50.

In S11631-45, the sub-CPU 301 performs a small win end presentation determination process to determine a presentation pattern for performing a small win end presentation.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 444).

In S11631-50, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "jackpot start display command."

If it is determined in S11631-50 that the command is a "jackpot start display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11631-51. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "jackpot start display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11631-52.

In S11631-51, the sub-CPU 301 performs a jackpot start effect determination process to determine an effect pattern for performing a jackpot start effect. In this jackpot start effect determination process, the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 303 is referenced, and the effect pattern of the jackpot start effect is determined according to the stop symbol (winning symbol).
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 444).

In S11631-52, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "jackpot end display command."

If it is determined in S11631-52 that the command is a "jackpot end display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11631-53. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "jackpot end display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11631-60.

In S11631-53, the sub-CPU 301 performs a big win end effect determination process to determine an effect pattern for performing a big win end effect. In this big win end effect determination process, the effect pattern of the big win end effect is determined according to the stop symbol (winning symbol) stored in the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S11631-54.

In S11631-54, the sub-CPU 301 performs a count counter setting process to set various counters when the jackpot game state ends.

In this count counter setting process, the stopped symbol memory area of the work RAM 303 is referenced, and when the stopped symbol (winning symbol) transitions to a time-saving play state, the number of times (see FIG. 399(a)) corresponding to the "variable number of times special symbols are displayed" which is the time-saving end condition in that time-saving play state is set in the "sub special symbol time-saving counter" of the work RAM 303.

In this count counter setting process, the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 303 is referenced, and when the stop symbol (winning symbol) is one that transitions to a time-saving game state, the number of times (see FIG. 399(a)) corresponding to the "variable display number of special symbols" and the "variable display number of normal symbols" of the time-saving end conditions in the time-saving game state are set in the "sub special symbol time-saving counter" and the "sub normal symbol time-saving counter" of the work RAM 303. For example, as shown in FIG. 399(a), when the "selected symbol z1 of the special symbol" is selected, the sub special symbol time-saving counter is set to 10,000 times and the sub normal symbol time-saving counter is set to 120 times in response to the variable display number of special symbols=10,000 times and the variable display number of normal symbols=120 times as the time-saving end conditions.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 444).

In S11631-60, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "normal symbol variation pattern command."

If it is determined in S11631-60 that the command is a "regular symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11631-61. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "regular symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11631-70.

In S11631-61, the sub-CPU 301 performs a caption presentation pattern determination process to determine the caption presentation pattern.

In this caption presentation pattern determination process, after obtaining the second random number value, the caption presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 439 is referenced, and the caption presentation pattern is determined based on the received normal pattern variation pattern command and the second random number value.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S11631-62.

In S11631-62, the sub-CPU 301 performs a RUSH symbol presentation pattern determination process to determine the symbol presentation pattern when in the RUSH presentation mode.

In this RUSH symbol presentation pattern determination process, the presentation mode information stored in the presentation mode information storage area of the work RAM 303 is referenced, and in the case of the RUSH presentation mode, the second random number value is obtained, and then the symbol presentation pattern determination table RU shown in FIG. 438 is referenced, and the symbol presentation pattern is determined based on the received normal symbol variation pattern command and the second random number value. Note that, in the case of a non-RUSH presentation mode, the symbol presentation pattern is not determined based on the normal symbol variation pattern command.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 444).

In S11631-70, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "game state designation command."

If it is determined in S11631-70 that the command is a "game state designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11631-71. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "game state designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11631-80.

In S11631-71, the sub-CPU 301 analyzes the current game state from the game state designation command received this time, and determines whether the analyzed current game state differs from the state information stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, i.e., whether the game state has been updated.

If it is determined in S11631-71 that the game status has been updated, the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11631-72. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game status has not been updated (the game status is maintained), the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11631-80.

In S11631-72, the sub-CPU 301 performs a state information update process to update and store the state information indicating the current game state analyzed in S11631-71 above in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11631-73.

In S11631-73, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the state information updated in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and if the game is in the B time-shortened game state (fourth time-shortened game state) or the C time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state, second time-shortened game state, third time-shortened game state), it performs a BC time-shortened game state setting process.

In this BC time-saving game state setting process, when the current game state is updated to the B time-saving game state (fourth time-saving game state), the number of times (see FIG. 399(c)) corresponding to the "variable number of times normal symbols are displayed" which is the time-saving end condition in the fourth time-saving game state is set in the "sub-normal symbol time-saving counter" of the work RAM 303. For example, in the fourth time-saving game state, the sub-normal symbol time-saving counter is set to 950 times.

In addition, when the current game state is updated to the C time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state), the stop pattern memory area of the work RAM 303 is referenced, and the number of times (see FIG. 399(b)) corresponding to the time-saving end condition "variable display number of special patterns" or "variable display number of normal patterns" according to the stop pattern (winning pattern) is set in the "sub special pattern time-saving counter" or "sub normal pattern time-saving counter" of the work RAM 303. For example, in the first time-saving game state and "selected special pattern z10", the sub special pattern time-saving counter is set to 50 times. In the second time-saving game state, the sub normal pattern time-saving counter is set to 950 times, and in the third time-saving game state, the sub special pattern time-saving counter is set to 950 times.

Furthermore, when the current game state is updated to the first time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state, "50 times", which is the same as the minimum first time-shortened number of times in the first time-shortened game state, is set in the "sub-variable display number N counter" of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S11631-74.

In this embodiment, when the current game state is updated to the first time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times set in the sub special pattern time-saving counter is not notified to the player, but the number of times set in the "sub variable display number N counter" is notified to the player.

In S11631-74, the sub-CPU 301 performs a presentation mode setting process to set the presentation mode.

In this presentation mode setting process, the presentation mode determination table shown in FIG. 435 is referenced to determine presentation mode information based on the current game state, and the determined presentation mode information is stored in the presentation mode information storage area of the work RAM 303.

Here, when the current game state is updated to the first time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, the presentation mode information is determined by also referring to the transition flag and the sub variable display count N counter of the work RAM 303. Note that in this embodiment, when the game state is initially updated to the first time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, the transition flag = 00H and the sub variable display count N counter = 50, so that the presentation mode information (01H) indicating the general presentation mode is determined.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S11631-75.

In S11631-75, the sub-CPU 301 performs a first game stop notice end determination process to determine whether or not to end the execution of the first game stop notice.

In this first game stop notice termination judgment process, the first game stop notice termination judgment table shown in FIG. 442 is referenced to determine whether or not any of the termination conditions, "Termination Condition 1" to "Termination Condition 3," is met, and if any of the termination conditions is met, the execution of the first game stop notice is terminated.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 444).

In S11631-80, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "demo display command."

If it is determined in S11631-80 that the command is a "demo display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11631-81. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "demo display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11631-90.

In S11631-81, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demo display presentation pattern determination process for determining a demo display presentation pattern for performing presentation during game standby.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 444).

In S11631-90, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "difference in number of balls command."

If it is determined in S11631-90 that the command is a "difference in number of balls command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11631-91. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "difference in number of balls command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11631-92.

In S11631-92, the sub-CPU 301 performs a ball difference storage process to store the ball difference.

In this difference in ball number storage process, the value of the MY judgment counter (value of the difference in ball number counter) corresponding to the received difference in ball number command is stored in the sub difference in ball number counter of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 444).

In S11631-92, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "game stop command."

If it is determined in S11631-92 that the command is a "game stop command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11631-93. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "game stop command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11631-99.

In S11631-93, the sub-CPU 301 performs a game stop notification process to provide a notification in response to the received game stop command.

In this first game stop notice end determination process, when the game stop command = 01H, execution of the first game stop notice is started, when the game stop command = 02H, execution of the second game stop notice is started, when the game stop command = 03H, execution of the third game stop notice is started, and when the game stop command = 04H, execution of the game stop notification is started.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S11631-94.

In S11631-94, the sub-CPU 301 performs game stop setting processing to set a game stop flag, etc.

In this game stop flag setting process, when the received game stop command is game stop command=04H, the game stop flag in the work RAM 303 is turned on (=01H). Furthermore, when the received game stop command is game stop command=04H, a predetermined counter (e.g., 5 minutes) corresponding to the forced alarm time is set in the forced alarm timer.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 444).

In S11631-99, the sub-CPU 301 also determines a presentation pattern in response to various commands received from the main CPU 201, and updates other counters. For example, the sub-CPU 301 updates the cumulative payout information of game balls in response to receiving a first large prize slot winning command or a second large prize slot winning command. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the presentation pattern determination process, and moves the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 444).
[13-7-4. Pre-reading performance decision process]
Next, with reference to Fig. 448, the details of the look-ahead effect determination process executed by the sub-CPU 301 in the effect pattern determination process (see Fig. 445) will be described. Fig. 448 is a flow chart showing an example of the look-ahead effect determination process in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S11701, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the forbidden condition setting table for the look-ahead performance shown in FIG. 441, and determines whether any of the forbidden conditions among the common forbidden conditions 1 to 3 has not yet been met.

If it is determined in S11701 that none of the common prohibited conditions 1 to 3 are satisfied, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11702. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the common prohibited conditions 1 to 3 are satisfied, the sub-CPU 301 ends this pre-reading performance determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 444).

In S11702, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the state information (current game state) stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and performs a look-ahead performance table determination process to determine the look-ahead performance table.

In this look-ahead performance table determination process, when the game is in a normal game state, the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z1 shown in FIG. 440(a) is determined, and when the game is in the first time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, which are general game states, the look-ahead performance pattern determination table Z2 shown in FIG. 440(b) is determined.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S11703.

In S11703, the sub-CPU 301 performs a look-ahead performance pattern determination process to determine a look-ahead performance pattern.

In this look-ahead performance pattern determination process, after obtaining the third random number value, the look-ahead performance pattern determination table determined in the look-ahead performance table determination process is referenced, and the look-ahead performance pattern is determined based on the look-ahead command received from the main control circuit 200 and the third random number value.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S11704.

In S11704, the sub-CPU 301 performs a read-ahead count counter setting process to set the read-ahead count counter.

In this look-ahead count counter setting process, when a look-ahead performance pattern (look-ahead performance patterns Z01 to Z03) is determined, the look-ahead flag is turned on (=01H), and the reserved number counter for the first special pattern in work RAM 303 is referenced, and the number of times corresponding to the reserved number of the first special pattern is set in the look-ahead count counter in work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S11705.

In S11705, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether a specific look-ahead performance pattern (look-ahead performance patterns Z02, Z03) that executes a mode transition zone or a RUSH expectation zone has been determined.

If it is determined in S11705 that a specific look-ahead performance pattern has been determined, the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S11706. On the other hand, if it is determined that a specific look-ahead performance pattern has not been determined, the current look-ahead performance determination process is terminated, and processing is transferred to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 444).

In S11706, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the prohibition condition setting table for the look-ahead performance shown in FIG. 441 and determines whether or not the prohibition condition of either unique prohibition condition 1 or unique prohibition condition 2 has been met.

If it is determined in S11706 that either the unique prohibition condition 1 or the unique prohibition condition 2 has been met, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11707. On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the unique prohibition condition 1 nor the unique prohibition condition 2 has been met, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current look-ahead performance determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 444).

In S11707, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process of clearing the specific look-ahead performance pattern, the look-ahead flag, and the look-ahead count counter. That is, the specific look-ahead performance pattern is discarded, the look-ahead flag is turned off (=00H), and the look-ahead count counter is set to 0.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current look-ahead performance determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 444).

In this way, when any of the common prohibited conditions 1 to 3 is met, the look-ahead performance of the expectation UP zone, mode transition zone, and RUSH expectation zone will not be executed. Also, when either the specific prohibited condition 1 or specific prohibited condition 2 is met, the look-ahead performance of the expectation UP zone can be executed, but the look-ahead performance of the mode transition zone and RUSH expectation zone will not be executed.

[13-7-5. Data Entry Processing]
Next, details of the data input process executed by the sub CPU 301 in the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 443) will be described with reference to Fig. 449. Fig. 449 is a flow chart showing an example of the data input process in the eleventh pachinko game machine.

In S<b>11611 , the sub CPU 301 performs a command read process to read a command from the command input port 308 .
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S11612.

At S11612, the sub-CPU 301 performs effect button permission setting processing for each of the multiple effect buttons 54 (decision button, left/right button, up/down button) based on various effect conditions, etc., to set an operation valid period during which the input of operation information by the player using the effect button 54 is valid, and an operation invalid period during which the input of operation information by the player is invalid.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the game stop flag is on (=01H) and the forced notification time has not elapsed, an operation invalid time is set for all of the effect buttons 54. Also, when the game stop flag is on (=01H) and the forced notification time has elapsed, an operation valid period is set for some of the effect buttons 54 (left/right buttons, up/down buttons).
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S11613.

At S11613, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether operation information for any of the multiple effect buttons 54 has been input within the valid operation period.

If it is determined in S11613 that operation information for any of the multiple effect buttons 54 has been input within the valid operation period, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11614. On the other hand, if it is determined that operation information for none of the multiple effect buttons 54 has been input within the valid operation period, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current data input process and transfers the process to the command analysis process (see FIG. 443).

In S11614, when the sub-CPU 301 is executing a presentation based on a symbol presentation pattern, and inputs the first operation information corresponding to the presentation button 54 of the decision button, the sub-CPU 301 performs a variable button setting process.

In this variable button setting process, a setting is made to execute a variable button effect (for example, a button cut-in effect) based on the contents of the executed symbol effect pattern and the lottery result of the special symbol.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11615.

In S11615, when a presentation based on a symbol presentation pattern is not being executed, when the first operation information corresponding to the presentation button 54 of the decision button is input, a standby menu setting process is performed to display various presentation adjustment menus and QR codes (registered trademark).
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11616.

In S11616, when the sub-CPU 301 inputs second operation information corresponding to the left and right button effect button 54, it performs a volume adjustment process to adjust the volume output from the speaker 32. Specifically, when the sub-CPU 301 inputs second operation information L corresponding to the left button effect button 54, it adjusts the volume down by one level, and when the sub-CPU 301 inputs second operation information R corresponding to the right button effect button 54, it adjusts the volume up by one level.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S11617.

In this embodiment, the volume adjustment process is performed by operating the effect button 54, but the volume may be automatically adjusted when an adjustment condition is met, without operating the effect button 54. For example, when the forced notification time has elapsed as a result of the adjustment condition being met by the generation process for the game stop related special request described above (see FIG. 444), the volume may be automatically adjusted to lower the volume.

In S11617, when the sub-CPU 301 inputs third operation information corresponding to the up/down button effect button 54, it performs a light intensity adjustment process to adjust the brightness of the emitted LED. Specifically, when the sub-CPU 301 inputs third operation information D corresponding to the down button effect button 54, it adjusts the brightness down by one step, and when the sub-CPU 301 inputs second operation information U corresponding to the up button effect button 54, it adjusts the brightness up by one step.
Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current data input process, and transfers the process to the command analysis process (see FIG. 443).

In this embodiment, the light intensity adjustment process is performed by operating the effect button 54, but the light intensity may be automatically adjusted when an adjustment condition is met, without operating the effect button 54. For example, when the forced notification time has elapsed as a result of the adjustment condition being met by the game stop related special request generation process described above (see FIG. 444), the light intensity may be automatically adjusted to be lowered.

[13-8. Game state transition diagram]
Next, a transition of a game state in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 450. Fig. 450 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing a transition of a game state in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, in the C time-saving game state (state flag = 3), the time-saving game state in which normal power operation pattern = 00 is set is called the "first time-saving game state", the time-saving game state in which normal power operation pattern = 02 is set is called the "second time-saving game state", and the time-saving game state in which normal power operation pattern = 01 is set is called the "third time-saving game state". Also, in the B time-saving game state (state flag = 2), the time-saving game state in which normal power operation pattern = 02 is set is called the "fourth time-saving game state". Also, in the A time-saving game state (state flag = 1), the time-saving game state in which normal power operation pattern = 02 is set is called the "fifth time-saving game state".

(Transition control of normal game state)
In the normal game state, a left hit is the regular game mode, and the game ball can enter the first starting hole 11120 and can also pass through the second passing gate 11126L. In the normal game state, the game progresses mainly with respect to the game feature related to the lottery for the first special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 450, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 11120 in normal game mode, a "big win," "time-saving win," or "miss" is determined by drawing a first special symbol (see FIG. 395). Regardless of the game mode, a "small win" is never determined by drawing a first special symbol.

When a "jackpot" is determined in the normal game state, the game transitions to the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends from the first route triggered by the jackpot, 60% of the time the game transitions to the fifth time-saving game state and 40% of the time the game transitions to the normal game state, depending on the selected pattern of the first special pattern (see Figures 396 and 399).

In addition, when a "time-saving hit" is determined in the normal game state, after the variable display of the first special symbol has ended, the game will transition to one of the C time-saving game states, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, or the third time-saving game state. Here, when a "time-saving hit" is determined, depending on the selected special symbol, 70% of the time will transition to the first time-saving game state, 15% of the time will transition to the second time-saving game state, and 15% of the time will transition to the third time-saving game state (see Figures 396 and 399).

In particular, in this embodiment, the "time-saving hit" is determined only in the drawing of the first special symbol in the normal game state (see FIG. 395). Therefore, it is possible to transition to the C time-saving game state, which is either the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, or the third time-saving game state, only from the normal game state.

In addition, in the normal game state, when a game ball passes through the second passing gate 11126L, a "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern miss" is determined by a normal pattern lottery, but the "long opening probability" that determines the long opening pattern is "0" because the normal power operation pattern is 00 (see Figure 406). In other words, in the normal game state, it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 11140.

In addition, if the number of times the special symbols are displayed reaches the ceiling value (950 times) without transitioning to the jackpot game state, the game will transition from the normal game state to the fourth time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state.

As a result, the normal game state will transition to a jackpot game state, a first time-saving game state, a second time-saving game state, a third time-saving game state, and a fourth time-saving game state.

(Transition control of first time-saving gaming state)
In the first time-saving game state, a left hit is considered to be a regular game mode, and a game ball can enter the first starting hole 11120 and can also pass through the second passing gate 11126L. In the first time-saving game state, a game progresses mainly with respect to the game feature regarding the lottery of the first special symbol.

In the first time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 11120, a "jackpot" or "miss" is determined by drawing a lottery for the first special symbol (see Figure 395). Note that a "time-saving hit" is never determined by drawing a lottery for the first special symbol in any time-saving game state.

When a "jackpot" is determined in the first time-saving game state, the game transitions to the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends from the first route triggered by the jackpot, 60% of the time the game transitions to the fifth time-saving game state and 40% of the time the game transitions to the normal game state depending on the selected first special symbol (see Figures 396 and 399).

In addition, in the first time-saving game state, when a game ball passes through the second passing gate 11126L, a "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern miss" is determined by a normal pattern lottery, but because the normal power operation pattern is 00, the "long opening probability" that determines the long opening pattern is "0" (see Figure 406). In other words, in the first time-saving game state, it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 11140.

The first time-saving game state has the same "long opening probability" as the normal game state, and since a "time-saving hit" is not derived as in the normal game state, it is a disadvantageous game state in which it is more difficult to transition to a jackpot game state than when in the normal game state.

In addition, if the number of times the special symbols are displayed reaches the ceiling value (950 times) without transitioning to the big win game state, the game will transition from the first time-saving game state to the fourth time-saving game state, which is the B time-saving game state.

When the game transitions to the first time-saving game state, the "variable number of times special symbols are displayed" of the time-saving end conditions is set to either the minimum first time-saving number of times, 50 times, the second time-saving number of times, 100 times, or the third time-saving number of times, 150 times (see FIG. 399). Then, if the special symbols are variably displayed for the set number of times of time-saving without transitioning to the jackpot game state, the game transitions from the first time-saving game state to the normal game state.

As a result, the first time-saving game state will transition to a jackpot game state, a normal game state, and a fourth time-saving game state.

(Transition control of the third time-saving gaming state)
In the third time-saving game state, the normal game mode is to hit from the left, and the game ball can enter the first starting hole 11120 and can also pass through the second passing gate 11126L. In the third time-saving game state, the game progresses mainly with respect to the game feature regarding the lottery for the first special symbol.

In the third time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 11120, a "jackpot" or "miss" is determined by drawing lots for the first special pattern (see Figure 395).

Then, if a "jackpot" is determined in the third time-saving game state, the game will transition to the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends from the first route triggered by the jackpot, 60% of the time will transition to the fifth time-saving game state, and 40% of the time will transition to the normal game state, depending on the selected pattern of the first special pattern (see Figures 396 and 399).

In addition, in the third time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the second passing gate 11126L, a "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern miss" is determined by a normal pattern lottery, but the "long opening probability" that determines the long opening pattern due to normal power operation pattern = 01 is "approximately 1/197.6" (see Figure 406). In other words, in the third time-saving game state, it is possible for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 11140 with a predetermined probability (approximately 1/197.6).

Here, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 11140, regardless of the game state, it is judged to be a "small hit" with an extremely high probability of approximately 1/1 (see Figure 395), and it is configured so that it is possible to transition from the small hit game state to a big hit game state via a second route.
Therefore, when the game is in the third time-shortened game state, the game state becomes more advantageous in that it is easier to transition to a big win game state than when the game is in the first time-shortened game state.

In addition, if the number of times the special symbols are displayed reaches the ceiling value (950 times) without transitioning to the big win game state, the game will transition from the third time-saving game state to the fourth time-saving game state, which is the B time-saving game state.

Here, when the game is shifted to the third time-saving game state, the fifth time-saving number of times, 950 times, is set as the "number of times of variable display of special symbols" of the time-saving end condition (see FIG. 399). However, in the third time-saving game state, the number of times of variable display of special symbols reaches the ceiling value (950 times) before the fifth time-saving number is counted.
For this reason, the third time-saving game state can only be transitioned to the big win game state or the fourth time-saving game state.

(RUSH Game State Transition Control)
In the second time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving game state, and the fifth time-saving game state, which are RUSH game states, right-hand play is the normal game mode, the game ball can pass through the first passing gate 11126R, and the second starting hole 11140 is opened long by the drawing of a normal symbol, so that the game ball can enter the second starting hole 11140. In the RUSH game state, the game progresses mainly with respect to the game characteristics related to the drawing of a normal symbol.

In the RUSH gaming state, when the game ball passes through the first passing gate 11126R, a normal symbol is drawn to determine whether it is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", but the "long opening probability" that determines the long opening pattern due to normal power operation pattern = 02 is "approximately 1/68.5" (see Figure 406). In other words, in the RUSH gaming state, there is a certain probability (approximately 1/68.5) that the game ball will enter the second starting hole 11140.

In addition, in the RUSH game state, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 11140, a "big win", "small win" or "miss" is determined by drawing a second special pattern (see FIG. 395). In particular, in this embodiment, the drawing of the second special pattern is configured to determine a "small win" with an extremely high probability of approximately 1/1.

When a "small win" is determined in the RUSH game state, the game state transitions to the small win game state, and when the game ball enters the V winning hole 11156 provided inside the second large winning hole 11151 in the small win game state, the game state transitions to the large win game state. Note that in this embodiment, when the game ball enters the second large winning hole 11151 in the small win game state, the game ball is configured to pass through the V winning hole 11156 as a general rule.
Then, after the end of the big win game state from the second route triggered by a small win, 80% of the time the game state will transition to the fifth time-saving game state, and 20% of the time the game state will transition to the normal game state, depending on the selected special pattern (see Figures 396 and 399).

In addition, when a "jackpot" is determined in the RUSH gaming state, the game transitions to the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends from the first route triggered by the jackpot, the game transitions to the fifth time-saving gaming state 100% depending on the selected symbol of the second special symbol (see Figures 396 and 399).

In addition, when the RUSH game state transitions to the second time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving number of times, 950 times, is set as the "variable number of times of displaying normal symbols" of the time-saving end condition (see FIG. 399). This fourth time-saving number of times is the number of times that is guaranteed to transition to the big win game state, since the "probability of opening a long ball" by lottery of normal symbols is "about 1/68.5".
Therefore, the second time-saving gaming state of the RUSH gaming state will transition to a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, when the RUSH game state transitions to the fourth time-saving game state, the seventh time-saving number of times, 950 times, is set as the "variable number of times of displaying normal symbols" of the time-saving end condition (see FIG. 399). This seventh time-saving number of times is the number of times that is guaranteed to transition to the big win game state, since the "probability of opening a long ball" by lottery of normal symbols is "about 1/68.5".
Therefore, the fourth time-saving gaming state of the RUSH gaming state will transition to a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, when the RUSH game state transitions to the fifth time-saving game state, the "variable number of times normal symbols are displayed" of the time-saving end condition is set to 120 times, which is the sixth time-saving number (see FIG. 399).
In addition, the "variable display number of special symbols" of the time-saving end condition is set to 10,000 times, but 10,000 times is a number that cannot be achieved in one day of play, so the time-saving end condition of the "variable display number of special symbols" will never be achieved. Then, if the variable display of normal symbols is performed for the sixth time-saving number of times without transitioning to the jackpot game state, the game state transitions from the fifth time-saving game state to the normal game state.
Therefore, the fifth time-saving gaming state of the RUSH gaming state will transition to a jackpot gaming state or a normal gaming state.

In this way, in this embodiment, the first gameplay is comprised of a game in which the player aims to reach the jackpot game state by drawing a first special symbol during normal game play and in the general game play state, and the second gameplay is comprised of a game in which the player aims to open the second starting hole 11140 long by drawing a normal symbol during the RUSH game play. This not only combines a so-called type 1 pachinko game machine with a so-called type 2 pachinko game machine, but also creates unprecedented gameplay and can improve the excitement of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, the lottery for the second special symbol (the game ball entering the second starting hole 11140) is configured to allow a transition to a jackpot game state in effect (approximately 1/1), so that when in the RUSH game state, it is even more interesting to open the second starting hole 11140 for a long time by drawing a normal symbol, and this can further increase the excitement of the game.

In this embodiment, when a "time-saving hit" is determined only in the drawing of the first special symbol in the normal game state, the game state can be shifted to the second time-saving game state in the RUSH game state. Also, the game state can be shifted to the big win game state from the second time-saving game state in the RUSH game state.
As a result, the rate of transition from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state can be increased, making the game even more enjoyable.

And because the normal game state is also the initial game state after the RAM is cleared, when the power is turned on after the RAM is cleared, the game can be started in the normal game state, which is more advantageous than the first time-saving game state, which is the general game state, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved after the opening of the gaming facility.

Furthermore, even if a "time-saving hit" is determined in the normal game state and a transition is made to a first time-saving game state which is less favorable than the normal game state, when a variable display of special symbols is made for the number of time-saving times (50, 100 or 150) set in the first time-saving game state, it is possible to transition from the first time-saving game state to the normal game state.
Thus, even if the game state is shifted to a first time-shortened game state which is less favorable than the normal game state, the game state can be shifted to the normal game state by the variable display of the special symbols, so that interest in the game can be maintained.

In particular, in this embodiment, the number of time-saving times set in the first time-saving game state is not notified to the player, and one of multiple time-saving times is set, and the second number of time-saving times (100 times) and the third number of time-saving times (150 times) are set to integer multiples of the minimum first number of time-saving times (50 times).
As a result, the player can expect to periodically transition from the first time-saving game state to the normal game state, with the minimum number of first time-saving times (50 times) being one cycle, thereby making the player more interested in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of a long reel opening differs depending on the normal power operation pattern during the time-saving game state, so multiple time-saving game states with different long reel opening probabilities can be enjoyed, further increasing the excitement of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the game is in the third time-saving game state, which is the general game state, it is an advantageous game state in which a long opening is more likely to occur and it is easier to transition to a jackpot game state than when the game is in the first time-saving game state, which is the general game state.
As a result, even if a "time-saving hit" is determined in the normal game state but the game state is not shifted to the RUSH game state, the player can have the expectation of the third time-saving game state in the general game state, thereby maintaining interest in the game.

[13-9. Production flow]
Next, the outline of the effects performed in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine will be described using the overall flow of the effects. FIG. 451 shows an example of the flow of the effects in the effect mode in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, in this embodiment, the presentation modes are configured with five presentation modes: chance presentation mode, general presentation mode, premonition presentation mode, heaven presentation mode, and rush presentation mode.

And, based on each presentation mode, it is possible to execute presentations such as a pattern presentation consisting of a display of a predetermined decorative pattern during the change, a preview presentation that suggests in advance the result of the lottery for the special pattern during the change, a caption presentation that suggests in advance the result of the lottery for the normal pattern during the change, and a pre-reading presentation that suggests in advance the result of the lottery for the special pattern during the advance change.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol is also called the "first special symbol effect," and the effect based on the lottery of the second special symbol is also called the "second special symbol effect."

(Chance mode)
The chance presentation mode can be executed in the normal gaming state. This chance presentation mode can suggest that the normal gaming state is more advantageous than the first time-saving gaming state.

In the chance presentation mode, the system is configured to be able to execute effects such as pattern presentation, advance notice presentation, and pre-reading presentation based on the chance presentation mode. Note that in the chance presentation mode, the second starting hole 11140 is not opened for a long time, so the subtitle presentation cannot be executed.

In addition, in the chance presentation mode, at least the "card presentation" and "RUSH entry presentation" can be executed as symbol presentations.

As described above, the "card effect" is an effect that suggests that the game state will transition to one of the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state during the change. In addition, the "RUSH entry effect" is an effect that suggests whether or not the game state will transition to the second time-saving game state (RUSH game state) during the change.

In addition, in the chance performance mode, at least the "mode transition zone," "expectation UP zone," and "RUSH expectation zone" can be executed as pre-reading performances.

As described above, the "mode transition zone" is a presentation that suggests in advance that a time-saving hit has occurred and that the game state will transition from the normal game state to either the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, or the third time-saving game state in a pre-change. The "expectation UP zone" is a presentation that suggests in advance that a specified presentation (super reach) will occur in a pre-change, and that the game state will transition to a jackpot game state or the second time-saving game state (RUSH game state). The "RUSH expectation zone" is a presentation that suggests in advance that the game state will transition to the second time-saving game state (RUSH game state) in a pre-change.

When a jackpot is hit in chance mode, the game transitions to jackpot play mode, and the jackpot performance can be executed.

When a time-saving hit is won in the chance presentation mode, the mode will switch to the general presentation mode when transitioning to the first time-saving play state or the third time-saving play state, which are general play states, and will switch to the RUSH presentation mode when transitioning to the second time-saving play state.

In the chance presentation mode, if the number of times the special symbols are displayed reaches the ceiling value (950 times) without transitioning to a jackpot game state, the game will transition from the chance presentation mode to the RUSH presentation mode.

(General performance mode)
The general presentation mode can be executed when the number of variable display times N of the first special pattern is greater than 10 (1st to 39th spins from the start of the general presentation mode) in the first time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state in the general game state.

In the general presentation mode, the system is configured to be able to execute effects such as pattern presentations, preview presentations, pre-reading presentations, and subtitle presentations based on the general presentation mode.

In addition, in the general presentation mode, the "Expectation Up Zone" can be implemented as a pre-reading presentation, but since there is no chance of winning the time-saving jackpot, the "Mode Transition Zone" and "RUSH Expectation Zone" cannot be implemented.

When a jackpot is won in the general presentation mode, the game transitions to the jackpot play state, and the jackpot presentation can be executed.

In the general presentation mode, if the number of variable display times N of the first special symbol reaches 10 (40th spin from the start of the general presentation mode) without transitioning to a jackpot game state, the mode will transition from the general presentation mode to the premonition presentation mode.

In the general presentation mode, if the number of times the special symbols are displayed reaches the ceiling value (950 times) without transitioning to a jackpot game state, the mode will transition from the general presentation mode to the RUSH presentation mode.

(Premonition mode)
The premonition presentation mode can be executed when the variable display number N of the first special pattern is 0 to 10 (40th to 50th spins from the start of the general presentation mode) in the first time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state in the general game state.

In the premonition performance mode, the system is configured to be able to execute effects such as pattern effects, advance notice effects, pre-reading effects, and subtitle effects based on the premonition performance mode.

In addition, in the premonition mode, when the variable number of times N that the first special symbol is displayed is between 1 and 10 (40 to 49 spins from the start of the general presentation mode), a "mode transition teaser" can be executed as a symbol effect. In addition, when the variable number of times N that the first special symbol is displayed is 0 (50 spins from the start of the general presentation mode), a "mode transition" can be executed.

As mentioned above, the "mode transition teasing effect" is an effect that suggests in advance that the effect mode may transition by performing a predetermined number of variable displays of the first special pattern during the relevant change. In addition, the "mode transition effect" is an effect that notifies the player that the relevant change will transition from the premonition effect mode to one of the following effect modes: the general effect mode, the chance effect mode, or the heaven effect mode.

If a jackpot is hit in premonition mode, the game will transition to jackpot play mode, and the jackpot performance will be possible.

In the premonition performance mode, when a mode transition performance is executed and it is announced that there will be a transition to the general performance mode, the mode will transition from the premonition performance mode to the general performance mode. Also, when a mode transition performance announces that there will be a transition to the chance performance mode, the mode will transition from the premonition performance mode to the chance performance mode. Also, when a mode transition performance announces that there will be a transition to the heaven performance mode, the mode will transition from the premonition performance mode to the heaven performance mode.

In the premonition mode, if the number of times the special symbols are displayed reaches the ceiling value (950 times) without transitioning to a jackpot game state, the premonition mode will transition to the RUSH mode.

As mentioned above, regardless of whether the RAM is cleared or not, when the power is turned on, if the same pattern presentation pattern can be determined so that the general presentation mode, premonition presentation mode, and chance presentation mode have a common background display mode, it is desirable to start from a common presentation mode (for example, chance presentation mode or premonition presentation mode) when the power is turned on.

(Heaven production mode)
The heaven presentation mode can be executed when a "mode transition presentation" is issued to notify a player that the game will transition to the heaven presentation mode in the first time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state in the general game state. This heaven presentation mode can suggest that the game is in a favorable general game state (third time-saving game state).

In the heavenly performance mode, the device is configured to be able to execute performances such as pattern performances, advance notice performances, pre-reading performances, and subtitle performances based on the heavenly performance mode.

When a jackpot is hit in the Heaven Presentation Mode, the game transitions to the jackpot game state, and the jackpot presentation can be executed.

In the Heaven Presentation Mode, if the number of times the special symbols are displayed reaches the ceiling value (950 times) without transitioning to a jackpot game state, the Heaven Presentation Mode will transition to the RUSH Presentation Mode.

(RUSH mode)
The RUSH presentation mode can be executed in the second short game state, the fourth short game state, and the fifth short game state in the RUSH gaming state. This RUSH presentation mode can suggest that the state is likely to transition to the big win gaming state.

In the RUSH presentation mode, the system is configured to be able to execute presentations such as pattern presentations, preview presentations, and pre-reading presentations based on the RUSH presentation mode.

When a jackpot is won in RUSH mode, the game transitions to the jackpot game mode, and the jackpot performance can be executed.

In the RUSH presentation mode, when variable display of normal symbols corresponding to the number of time-saving times is performed without transition to a big win game state, the mode transitions from the RUSH presentation mode to a chance presentation mode.
In addition, in the second time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state of the RUSH game state, the "variable number of times of display of normal symbols" of the time-saving end condition is set to the number of times (950 times) that is essentially guaranteed to result in a transition to a jackpot game state, so there is no transition from the RUSH presentation mode to the chance presentation mode, and the only time the game state transitions from the RUSH presentation mode to the chance presentation mode is in the fifth time-saving game state of the RUSH game state.

[13-10. Time chart for game stop notice]
Next, an outline of the game stop notice performed in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine will be described. FIG. 452 is an example of a time chart of the game stop notice by the game stop command in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 452 shows the "game status", the "alarm device (display device 7, speaker 32, LED group 46)", the "game stop flag" indicating that the game has stopped, and the "increased number of game balls (MY)" at the top and bottom.

Figure 452 (a) is an example of a time chart 1 in which the first game stop notice is executed when the first game stop notice start condition is met if the increase in the number of game balls (MY) is within the first counting range (85,000 to 89,999).

At the timing (A) shown in FIG. 452(a), when the increase in the number of game balls (MY) is within the first counting range, the first game stop notice start condition is met, and the notification device starts executing the first game stop notice. Here, as an example of the first game stop notice start condition being met, it is met when the special symbol selected symbol z1 is in a jackpot game state (see FIG. 408). An example of the notification mode of the first game stop notice will be described in detail later.

At the timing (i) shown in FIG. 452(a), if the increase in the number of game balls (MY) does not reach the second counting range and the increase in the number of game balls (MY) is within the first counting range, the first game stop notice termination condition is met and the execution of the first game stop notice ends in the notification device. Here, as an example of the first game stop notice termination condition being met, the game state transitions to a normal short game state (see FIG. 442).

In this way, according to the time chart 1 shown in FIG. 452(a), when the game state is such that the player can be expected to acquire a large amount of game value (game balls), the execution of the first game stop notice can be started before the second counting range. Then, when the increase in the number of game balls (MY) does not reach the second counting range due to that game state, the execution of the first game stop notice can be terminated.

Figure 452 (b) is an example of a time chart 2 in which a second game stop notice and game stop notification are executed when the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches a second counting range (90,000 to 94,999) after the execution of the first game stop notice is completed.

The timing of (A) and (B) shown in FIG. 452(b) is the same as the timing of (A) and (B) shown in FIG. 452(a) described above. In other words, when the increase in the number of game balls (MY) is within the first counting range, the execution of the first game stop notice is started when the first game stop notice start condition is met, and the execution of the first game stop notice is ended when the first game stop notice end condition is met.

At the timing (u) shown in Figure 452 (b), the small win game state, the big win game state, and the RUSH game state are not being executed, and game balls enter the first start port 11120, the general winning port 122, etc., and a specified number of prize balls are paid out, causing the increase in the number of game balls (MY) to reach the second counting range (90,000 to 94,999).
At this time, since the first game stop notification has already been executed, the second game stop notification start condition is not met, and the second game stop notification is not executed (see Figure 408).

At the timing (E) shown in FIG. 452(b), the jackpot game state is executed, and the second game stop notification start condition is met, and the notification device starts executing the second game stop notification. This second game stop notification is executed continuously until the increase in the number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulated value (95,000). An example of the notification mode of the second game stop notification will be described in detail later.

At the timing (O) shown in Figure 452 (b), the small hit game state or the big hit game state is not being executed, and the increase in the number of game balls (MY) has reached the regulated value (95,000).
At this time, the game stop flag is turned on, and a first game stop notification is executed in the notification device as a game stop notification.

At timing (f) shown in Figure 452 (b), the forced notification time has elapsed after the game stop flag was turned on.
At this time, as a game stop notification, a second game stop notification different from the first game stop notification is executed in the notification device. Also, when the second game stop notification is executed, input of operation information of a predetermined effect button 54 becomes effective, and volume adjustment and light amount adjustment become possible. An example of the notification mode of the first game stop notification and the second game stop notification will be described in detail later.

In this way, according to time chart 2 shown in FIG. 452(b), if the first game stop notice has already been executed, the execution of the second game stop notice can be started when the player reaches a game state (such as a jackpot game state) in which he or she can expect to acquire a predetermined game value (game balls).

Furthermore, if the first game stop notice has already been executed, the execution of the second game stop notice will not be started even when the increase in the number of game balls (MY) reaches the second counting range as a result of game balls entering the first start port 11120 or the general winning port 122, etc., and a specified number of prize balls being paid out (period (c) to (d)).
As a result, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 11120 or the general winning port 122, etc., and a specified number of prize balls are paid out so that the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the second counting range, but the increased number of game balls (MY) falls below the second counting range due to the release of the game ball (such as when it is around the first boundary value of 90,000), the game stop notice will not be executed or terminated, thereby eliminating the annoyance caused by the game stop notice.

Furthermore, as a game stop notification, a first game stop notification is executed when the game stop flag is turned on, and a second game stop notification is executed after the forced notification time has elapsed, so that an appropriate notification can be made depending on the time that has elapsed since the game stop notification.

Figure 452 (c) is an example of a time chart 3 in which a second game stop notice and game stop notification are executed when the increase in the number of game balls (MY) reaches the second counting range (90,000 to 94,999) without executing the first game stop notice.

At the timing (u) shown in Figure 452 (c), the small win game state, the big win game state, and the RUSH game state are not being executed, and game balls enter the first start port 11120, the general winning port 122, etc., and a specified number of prize balls are paid out, causing the increase in the number of game balls (MY) to reach the second counting range (90,000 to 94,999).
At this time, since the first game stop notice was not executed, the second game stop notice start condition is satisfied, and the notification device starts executing the second game stop notice (see FIG. 408). This second game stop notice is continuously executed until the increase in the number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulation value (95,000).

Then, at the timings (e) and (f) shown in FIG. 452(c), the first game stop notification and the second game stop notification are executed in the notification device, similar to the time chart 2 shown in FIG. 452(b).

In this way, according to time chart 3 shown in Figure 452 (c), when the first game stop notice is not executed and the increase in the number of game balls (MY) approaches the regulated value (95,000), the second game stop notice is quickly executed to notify the player in advance that the game will be stopped.

Figure 452 (d) is an example of a time chart 4 that executes the first game stop notice, the second game stop notice, the third game stop notice, and the game stop notification.

At the timing (A) shown in FIG. 452(d), if the increase in the number of game balls (MY) is within the first counting range, the first game stop notification start condition is met, and the notification device starts executing the first game stop notification.

At the timing (c) shown in FIG. 452(d), in the RUSH gaming state, the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the second counting range (90,000 to 94,999).
At this time, the second game stop notice start condition is satisfied, and the notification device starts executing the second game stop notice (see FIG. 408). This second game stop notice is continuously executed until the increase in the number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulation value (95,000).

At the timing (K) shown in FIG. 452(d), when a jackpot game state is being played, the increase in the number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulated value (95,000).
At this time, the game is not stopped, the game stop flag is kept off, and during the big win game state, the notification device starts executing the third game stop notice (see FIG. 408). An example of the notification mode of the third game stop notice will be described in detail later.

At the timing (k) shown in Figure 452 (d), the jackpot game state ends after the increase in the number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulated value (95,000).
At this time, the game stop flag is turned on, and a first game stop notification is executed in the notification device as a game stop notification.

Then, at timing (f) shown in FIG. 452(d), the second game stop notification is executed in the notification device, similar to time chart 2 shown in FIG. 452(b).

In this way, according to time chart 4 shown in FIG. 452(d), if play stops after the big win game state ends, the third game stop notice during the big win game state can notify the specific game stop content (for example, "game will stop after this big win game state ends").

[13-11. Display contents of the performance]
The display contents of the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300 etc. will be described using display images displayed in the display area of the display device 7.

(Basic configuration of display image)
First, the basic structure of a display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 will be described with reference to Fig. 453. Fig. 453 is an example of an explanatory diagram of the basic structure of a display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. Fig. 453(a) shows the basic structure of a display image in the normal gaming state and the general gaming state, and Fig. 453(b) shows the basic structure of a display image in the RUSH gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 453, the decorative patterns are composed of two types: a "main pattern" as a first decorative pattern that is displayed large so that the player can easily recognize it in the display area of the display device 7, and a "sub-pattern" as a second decorative pattern that is displayed small so that the player cannot easily recognize it. Note that the types of decorative patterns are not limited to this.

(Basic configuration of display images in normal gaming state and general gaming state)
As shown in Fig. 453(a), the basic configuration of the display image in the normal game state and the general game state is configured so that a left pattern 11071L, a middle pattern 11071C, and a right pattern 11071R can be displayed as main patterns corresponding to the first special pattern at the center side of the display area of the display device 7. The number of main patterns is not limited to three.

In addition, the right corner of the display area of the display device 7 is configured to be able to display small first sub-pattern 11072 as a sub-pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, second sub-pattern 11073 as a sub-pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern, and third sub-pattern 11075 as a sub-pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the normal pattern.

In this embodiment, when the first special symbol is variable displayed during normal game mode or general game mode, in addition to the variable display of the main symbols, the left symbol 11071L, the middle symbol 11071C, and the right symbol 11071R, the first sub-symbol 11072 is also variable displayed.

In addition, when the second special symbol is variably displayed during normal game mode or normal game mode, only the second sub-symbol 11073 is variably displayed, and the main decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is not displayed. In addition, when the normal symbol is variably displayed during normal game mode or normal game mode, only the third sub-symbol 11075 is variably displayed, and the main decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is not displayed.

In the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the first special symbol can be displayed, and a first reserved image 10074a indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (1), a second reserved image 10074b indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (2), a third reserved image 10074c indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (3), and a fourth reserved image 10074d indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (4) can be displayed according to the reserved number of the first special symbol. Also, in response to the reserved image, the reserved image 10074z indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed is configured to be displayed. In this embodiment, a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the second special symbol is not displayed in the normal game state, but a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the second special symbol may be configured to be displayed.
(Basic configuration of display image in RUSH gaming state)
As shown in Figure 453 (b), the basic configuration of the display image in the RUSH game state is such that a left pattern 11076L, a middle pattern 11076C and a right pattern 11076R can be displayed as main patterns of decorative patterns corresponding to ordinary patterns at the center of the display area of the display device 7.

In addition, in the right corner of the display area of the display device 7, a first sub-pattern 11072 corresponding to the first special pattern, a second sub-pattern 11073 corresponding to the second special pattern, and a third sub-pattern 11075 corresponding to the normal pattern can be displayed small, just as in the normal game mode and the general game mode.

In this embodiment, when the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner during a RUSH game state, in addition to the variable display of the main symbols, the left symbol 11076L, the middle symbol 11076C, and the right symbol 11076R, the third sub-symbol 11075 is also displayed in a variable manner. Also, when the first special symbol is displayed in a RUSH game state, only the first sub-symbol 11072 is displayed in a variable manner, and the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed. When the second special symbol is displayed in a RUSH game state, only the second sub-symbol 11073 is displayed in a variable manner, and the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is not displayed.

In the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of normal symbols can be displayed. According to the reserved number of normal symbols, a first reserved image 11077a indicating that start information is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (1), a second reserved image 11077b indicating that start information is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (2), a third reserved image 11077c indicating that start information is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (3), and a fourth reserved image 11077d indicating that start information is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (4) can be displayed. In addition, the reserved image 11077z indicating that the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner can be displayed in response to the reserved image. In this embodiment, reserved images corresponding to the reserved number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in the RUSH game state, but reserved images corresponding to the reserved number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be displayed.

The upper right corner of the display area of the display device 7 is configured to display a right-hit instruction image 11079 that instructs right-hitting as the correct game mode.

In this way, in the normal game state and the general game state, the main symbol and reserved image of the decorative symbol correspond to the first special symbol so that it is easy to recognize the first game characteristic of aiming for a jackpot game state by drawing a first special symbol, and in the RUSH game state, the main symbol and reserved image of the decorative symbol correspond to a normal symbol so that it is easy to recognize the second game characteristic of aiming for a long opening of the second starting hole 11140 by drawing a normal symbol. In other words, the first decorative symbol (main symbol) becomes a symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the normal game state, and is replaced with a symbol corresponding to the normal symbol in the RUSH game state.

(Card presentation)
Next, the card effects in the chance effect mode will be described with reference to Fig. 454. Fig. 454 is an example of a display image for explaining the card effects in the chance effect mode in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, in explaining the card effects, the symbols in Figure 453 will be omitted because the characters will be small and difficult to see, which may interfere with the explanation of the effect content. In addition, the first sub-pattern 11072, second sub-pattern 11073, and third sub-pattern 11075, which are displayed very small, will also be omitted. This also applies to the effects explained in Figures 454 to 460.

Figure 454 (a) is an example of a display image before the variable display of the first special symbol begins in the chance presentation mode.

Figure 454 (b) shows an example of a display image when the first special symbol that was won during the time-saving hit is displayed in a changing manner and the card performance begins.

As shown in FIG. 454(b), when the symbol presentation pattern (see FIG. 436) for executing the card presentation is decided and the card presentation starts, chance cards with the words "General Presentation Mode" and "RUSH Presentation Mode" written on them are shuffled face down and a presentation is given in which one of the cards is selected. There are two types of card presentation: a white card presentation in which a white card is displayed, and a red card presentation in which a red card is displayed. The red card presentation has a higher expected value of transitioning to the RUSH presentation mode (second time-saving game state) than the white card presentation. In addition, the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols that were displayed large in the center of the display area are displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the display area so as not to interfere with the card presentation and are easily identifiable by the player.

Figure 454 (c) is an example of a display image when the first special pattern is displayed in a changing manner and the results of the card presentation are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 454(c), when one card is selected in the card presentation, the card is slowly flipped over and a chance card with the words "General Presentation Mode" written on it is displayed.

Figure 454 (d) is an example of a display image that notifies the user that the display of the first special symbol has ended and that the general presentation mode has been entered.

As shown in FIG. 454(d), when a chance card with the words "General Presentation Mode" is displayed, the main left, middle, and right symbols, which are displayed in reduced size at the bottom right of the display area, are displayed stopped large in the center of the display area. After that, the display mode of the background changes, and it is announced that the mode has been switched to the general presentation mode.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the background in the chance presentation mode and the display mode of the background in the general presentation mode are configured to be different, but the display mode of the background may be the same.

In this way, the card presentation can suggest a transition to one of the first, second, or third time-saving game states, making the game even more exciting.

(RUSH entry performance)
Next, the RUSH entry presentation in the chance presentation mode will be described with reference to Fig. 455. Fig. 455 is an example of a display image for explaining the RUSH entry presentation in the chance presentation mode in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 455 (a) is an example of a display image before the variable display of the first special symbol begins in the chance presentation mode.

Figure 455 (b) shows an example of a display image when the first special symbol that was won during the time-saving hit is displayed in a changing state and the RUSH entry effect begins.

As shown in FIG. 455(b), when the symbol presentation pattern (see FIG. 436) for executing the RUSH entry presentation is determined and the RUSH entry presentation starts, half-open doors are displayed on the left and right sides of the display area, and the half-open doors are made to rattle and close for a predetermined period of time.

Figure 455 (c) is an example of the display image when the varying display of the first special symbol has finished and the RUSH entry performance has been successful.

As shown in FIG. 455(c), if the RUSH entry effect is successful, the door will close and all decorative symbols will stop displaying. Note that if the RUSH entry effect is unsuccessful, the door will not close and will instead open.

Figure 455 (d) is an example of a display image that notifies the user that the display of the first special symbol has ended and that the game has transitioned to RUSH mode.

As shown in FIG. 454(d), when a completely closed door opens, the display mode of the background changes, and a transition to RUSH mode is announced.

In this way, the RUSH entry effect can be used to execute an effect that determines whether or not to transition to the RUSH gaming state (second time-saving gaming state), further enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

(Subtitle production)
Next, the telop effect in the heaven effect mode will be described with reference to Fig. 456. Fig. 456 is an example of a display image for explaining the telop effect in the heaven effect mode in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 456 (a) is an example of a display image before the variable display of the first special symbol and normal symbol begins in the heaven performance mode.

Figure 456 (b) is an example of a display image when the normal symbol is displayed and a caption effect is started by drawing a lottery for the normal symbol. Note that in Figure 456 (b), the first special symbol is also displayed, but the first special symbol may or may not be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 456(b), when a caption effect pattern (see FIG. 439) for executing the caption effect is determined and the caption effect starts, the words "Emergency News: A chance opening is about to open..." are displayed at the top of the display area, indicating that the second starting opening 11140 will be opened for a long time.

Figure 455 (c) is an example of a display image of the caption effect when the variable display of the normal pattern ends and the second starting hole 11140 opens long.

As shown in FIG. 455(c), when the second starting hole 11140 opens long, the player is instructed to hit the ball to the right so that the game ball will enter the second starting hole 11140, and the words "Aim for the chance hole" are displayed at the top of the display area. In addition, in the caption effect, when the second starting hole 11140 does not open long, the words "The chance hole did not open..." are displayed at the top of the display area.

In this way, the subtitle effect suggests that the second starting hole 11140 will be opened long, allowing the game ball to enter the second starting hole 11140.

When the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, it is desirable to display the above-mentioned caption effect in an area that does not interfere with the variable display of the first decorative symbol (main symbol) corresponding to the first special symbol, such as the lower left of the display area. Furthermore, when the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the caption effect may be displayed behind the first decorative symbol (back layer, etc.) so as not to interfere with the variable display of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol.

(Preview performance)
Next, a pre-reading effect performed in advance variation will be described with reference to Fig. 457. Fig. 457 is an example of a display image for explaining the pre-reading effect in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 457 (a) is an example of a display image when the "Expectation Up Zone" pre-reading effect is being executed during pre-change in the chance effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 457(a), when the "Expected UP Zone" is executed, a band with the words "Expected UP Zone" is displayed on the left and right of the display area.

This "Expectation Up Zone" can indicate in advance that a specific presentation will be performed and that the game will transition to a jackpot game state or a second time-saving game state (RUSH game state), heightening the player's sense of anticipation for the transition to the advantageous jackpot game state or RUSH game state, further enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Figure 457 (b) is an example of a display image when the "mode transition zone" of the pre-reading performance is being executed during pre-change of the chance performance mode.

As shown in FIG. 457(b), when the "mode transition zone" is executed, a band with the words "mode transition zone" is displayed at the top of the display area.

This "mode transition zone" can indicate in advance that a time-saving hit has occurred and that the game state will transition from the normal game state to either the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, or the third time-saving game state, heightening the sense of anticipation for the transition to the game state and making the game even more enjoyable.

Figure 457 (c) is an example of a display image when the pre-reading effect "RUSH expectation zone" is being executed during pre-change in the chance effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 457(c), when the "RUSH expectation zone" is executed, the background display mode of the chance presentation mode is switched to a special background display mode. In addition, by switching to the special background display mode, the size of the main pattern is also changed to a smaller size.

This "RUSH expectation zone" can indicate in advance that a transition to the second time-saving game state (RUSH game state) will occur, heightening the sense of anticipation for the transition to the RUSH game state and making the game even more enjoyable.

In this embodiment, the look-ahead performance performed during pre-change is configured to display a specified image additionally or to change the background display mode, but the look-ahead performance may also be performed by changing the display mode of the reserved image during pre-change.

(Mode transition effect)
Next, the mode transition effect performed in the premonition effect mode will be described with reference to Fig. 458. Fig. 458 is an example of a display image for explaining the general effect mode, the premonition effect mode, and the mode transition effect in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 458 (a) is an example of the display image when the general presentation mode is started.

As shown in FIG. 458(a), in the general presentation mode, the "number of remaining games" that counts the number of times N the first special symbol has been displayed is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area. When the general presentation mode is started, this "number of remaining games" is set to "50 times" and is decremented by one each time the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

Figure 458 (b) is an example of a display image when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the general presentation mode and the premonition presentation mode is started when the "number of remaining games" reaches "10."

As shown in FIG. 458(b), in the premonition mode, the "number of remaining games" is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area, as in the general presentation mode. In addition, when switching from the general presentation mode to the premonition mode, the display mode of the background changes. In this premonition mode, a "mode transition teaser" can also be executed if the first special symbol is not drawn (see FIG. 437(a)).

Figure 458 (c) is an example of a display image when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the premonition effect mode, the "number of remaining games" becomes "0", and the mode transition effect starts.

As shown in FIG. 458(c), during mode transition presentation, a specified character is displayed to notify the player that a transition will occur to either the general presentation mode, chance presentation mode, or heaven presentation mode.

Figure 458 (d-1) is an example of a display image when a mode transition effect notifies the player that a chance presentation mode will be entered. When a mode transition effect notifies the player that a chance presentation mode will be entered, the display image shown in Figure 454 (a) will be displayed.

Figure 458 (d-2) is an example of a display image when a mode transition presentation notifies the player that they will be transitioning to the general presentation mode. When a mode transition presentation notifies the player that they will be transitioning to the general presentation mode, the "number of games remaining" is reset to "50 times" and the display image returns to that shown in Figure 458 (a).

This "mode transition effect" variably displays the first special symbol a predetermined number of times, thereby announcing a transition from premonition effect mode to either general effect mode, chance effect mode, or heaven effect mode, heightening the player's sense of anticipation about the transition to a more favorable gaming state and making the game even more enjoyable.

In this embodiment, the "number of remaining games" is displayed, which counts the number of times N the first special symbol is variably displayed, during the general presentation mode and the premonition presentation mode. However, the "number of remaining games" may be configured not to be displayed.

(Game suspension notice)
Next, the contents of the notification of the game stop notice will be described with reference to Fig. 459. Fig. 459 is an example of a display image of the game stop notice in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 459 (a) is an example of a display image when the first game stop notice is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 459(a), when the first game stop notice is executed, the words "Game stop is approaching" are displayed at the top of the display area.

The message "Game suspension is approaching" will continue to be displayed until the first game suspension notice termination condition is met.

This first game stop notice allows the player to know in advance that the game is about to stop due to an increase in the number of game balls (MY).

Figure 459 (b) is an example of a display image when the second game stop notice is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 459(b), when the second game stop notice is executed, the words "Approximately XX00 shots until game stop" are displayed at the top of the display area.

The message "Approximately XX00 balls left until gameplay stops" continues to be displayed until the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches the regulated value (95,000), and "Approximately XX00 balls" is updated as follows, based on the value stored in the sub-ball difference counter in work RAM 303: approximately 5,000 balls → approximately 4,000 balls → approximately 3,000 balls → approximately 2,000 balls → approximately 1,000 balls.

This second game stop notice allows the player to specifically grasp the number of game balls that will increase until the game stops.

In this embodiment, the number of balls that will be added until the game stops is notified by the text "Approximately XX00 balls." However, it is not necessary to notify the number of balls that will be added until the game stops.

Figure 459 (c) is an example of a display image when the third game stop notice is being executed.

As described above, the third game stop notice is executed when the increase in the number of game balls (MY) during the jackpot game state reaches the regulated value (95,000), and the game is stopped after the jackpot game state ends.

As shown in FIG. 459(c), when the third game stop notice is executed, the words "Game will stop after this jackpot game ends" are displayed in the center of the display area.

The message "Game will stop after this jackpot play ends" will continue to be displayed until the jackpot play ends.

This third game stop notice lets the player know that the game will stop after the big win game state ends.

(Stop notification)
Next, the contents of the game stop notification will be described with reference to Fig. 460. Fig. 460 is an example of a display image of the game stop notification in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 460 (a) is an example of a display image when the first game stop notification is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 460(a), when the first game stop notification is executed, only the text "Game has stopped. Today's game has ended" is displayed in the display area, indicating that game has stopped. In addition, when the first game stop notification is executed, no decorative patterns or other information are displayed, and input of operation information for all of the effect buttons 54 is also disabled.

This first game stop notification allows the player to clearly understand that gameplay has stopped.

Figure 460 (b) is an example of a display image when the first game stop notification is executed, and after the forced notification time has elapsed, the second game stop notification is started.

As shown in FIG. 460(b), when the second game stop notification is executed, the display image of the first game stop notification is displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the display area. Then, behind the reduced display image of the first game stop notification, a demo image corresponding to when game play is stopped is displayed.

The demo image may display a specific character, or a QR code may be displayed by operating the decision button 54. Note that the QR code may be configured to be displayed automatically, without operating the decision button 54.

In addition, in this embodiment, the demo image shown in FIG. 460(b) is a demo image used exclusively when the game is stopped, but it may also be the same as the demo image used when the game is in progress.

After this second game stop notification clearly indicates that gameplay has stopped (after the forced notification time has elapsed), the fact that gameplay has stopped is still notified, while a decorative demo image can be displayed until the gaming establishment closes.

Figure 460 (c) is an example of a display image of the volume adjustment that is performed when the second operation information corresponding to the left and right buttons 54 is input while the second game stop notification is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 460(c), when the volume is adjusted while the second game stop notification is being executed, the demo image is switched to an adjustment image for volume adjustment. When the left button, effect button 54, is operated, the volume is adjusted to be lowered by one level, and when the right button, effect button 54, is operated, the volume is adjusted to be higher by one level.

In this way, since the volume can be adjusted when the second game stop notification is being executed, the volume can be adjusted according to the demo image when game play is stopped.

Although not shown in the figures, when the second game stop notification is being executed, if the third operation information corresponding to the effect button 54 of the up and down buttons is input, a display image for adjusting the light intensity is displayed in the same manner as for adjusting the volume. Also, since light intensity adjustment is possible when the second game stop notification is being executed, it is possible to adjust the light intensity according to the demo image when the game is stopped.

In this way, the eleventh pachinko gaming machine has a normal gaming state in which a time-saving jackpot can be won, and multiple time-saving gaming states (first time-saving gaming state to fifth time-saving gaming state) according to a normal power operation pattern in which the opening pattern of the second starting hole 10140 is determined. By providing further changes to the gaming state and performing presentations according to the new gaming state, unprecedented gameplay can be created, and the excitement of the game can be further increased.

In particular, in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine, when the left hand is the regular game mode, the normal game mode, the first time-saving game mode, or the third time-saving game mode is controlled, and when the right hand is the regular game mode, the second time-saving game mode, the fourth time-saving game mode, or the fifth time-saving game mode is controlled, so that even in each game mode, further changes can be made to the game state, further increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine, a time-saving win can only be won in the normal gaming state, and it is configured to be possible to transition from a time-saving win to a second time-saving gaming state of the RUSH gaming state. This increases the transition rate from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state via the RUSH gaming state, making the game even more exciting.

And because the normal game state is also the initial game state after the RAM is cleared, when the power is turned on after the RAM is cleared, the game can be started in the normal game state where a time-saving jackpot can be won, improving the operation of gaming machines after the opening of the gaming establishment.

In addition, in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine, even if a win in the time-saving jackpot causes a transition from the normal gaming state to the unfavorable first time-saving gaming state, when the special symbols are displayed variably for the set number of time-saving cycles, the first time-saving gaming state can be transitioned back to the normal gaming state. Therefore, since the normal gaming state can be returned to by the necessity of the variable number of times the special symbols are displayed, rather than by chance through a lottery, it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine without reducing interest in the game.

When the game transitions to the first time-saving game state, one of a number of time-saving times (the first time-saving number to the third time-saving number) is set, which adds interest in when the game will return from the first time-saving game state to the normal game state, making the game even more exciting.

In particular, in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine, the number of time-saving times in the first time-saving game state can be set to a minimum of 50 times, a second number of time-saving times of 100 times, and a third number of time-saving times of 150 times, and the second and third numbers of time-saving times are set to integer multiples of the minimum number of first time-saving times. Therefore, in the first time-saving game state, it can be expected that the game state will periodically return to the normal game state, with one cycle being the minimum number of first time-saving times, 50, of the variable display of the first special symbol.

Furthermore, within one cycle (within 50 spins) of the first time-saving game state, the special symbol variation pattern table, symbol presentation pattern table, and presentation mode are switched based on the variable number of times N the first special symbol is displayed, and a special presentation (mode transition teasing presentation) is performed to indicate that the time to transition to the normal game state is approaching, and a special presentation (mode transition presentation) is performed to indicate whether or not to transition to the normal game state, thereby further increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in the eleventh pachinko game machine, the game can be stopped when the increased number of game balls (MY) reaches a regulated value (e.g., 95,000 balls), so the gambling nature of the game can be appropriately suppressed.

Before play is stopped, a game stop notice can be given according to the count range of the increase in the number of game balls (MY), so that appropriate information can be announced according to the count range of the increase in the number of game balls (MY). Furthermore, even after play is stopped, an appropriate game stop announcement can be made by the forced announcement time.

<Eleventh modified example of pachinko game machine>
In the 11th pachinko game machine, the update control of the game stop function operation management phase, the number of acquired game balls, the difference ball number counter, and the MY judgment counter as data related to the stop of the game is configured to be performed by the main control circuit 200 (main CPU 201), but it may also be configured to be performed by the payout/launch control circuit 400.

In addition, in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine, the processing related to data related to the stop of the game may be replaced with the processing related to the game stop function in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. That is, the main control main processing (Figs. 409 to 412) and the system timer interrupt processing (Figs. 430 to 434) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 of the eleventh pachinko gaming machine may be replaced with the main control main processing (Figs. 145 to 153) and the system timer interrupt processing (Figs. 165 to 174) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The technology described in the embodiment of the eleventh pachinko game machine may be applied to a slot machine. When applied to a slot machine, the various effects executed in the eleventh pachinko game machine may be replaced with effects by a display device, reels, etc. provided in the slot machine. In addition, the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state to fifth time-saving game state) may be replaced with any of the following states: replay time (RT state) in which the probability of replaying a replay is improved, assist time (AT state) in which a predetermined small role or the operation content of the stop button is notified, and assist replay time (ART state) in which the replay time and assist time are controlled simultaneously. In addition, the big win and small win may be replaced with any of the following: winning a specific role, a specific combination of symbols being stopped and displayed (a specific combination of symbols being awarded), winning an entry win into the RT state, winning an entry win into the AT state, and winning an entry win into the ART state.

(others)
The above-mentioned eleventh pachinko gaming machine can apply the technology of each embodiment including the modified examples. The above-mentioned embodiment does not limit the contents of the present invention, and can be modified to the extent that it does not deviate from the scope of the claims.

In addition, the effects described in the eleventh pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most favorable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention.

Furthermore, the above [4. Expansion Example] can also be applied to the eleventh pachinko gaming machine, so long as there is no inconsistency in its gameplay or control.

The following describes the configuration of the gaming machine described above and the effects that result from that configuration.

<Appendix 4-1>

Conventionally, a gaming machine called a pachinko gaming machine is known, and this pachinko gaming machine generally comprises a gaming area in which a gaming ball launched onto a gaming board can roll, a starting area provided in this gaming area, a pattern display device, and a variable display control means for controlling the pattern display device. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition is met, such as the gaming ball passing through the starting area (entering the starting hole of the gaming ball), the variable display control means controls the pattern display device to variably display identification information (such as a special pattern, which will be described later) on the display area of the pattern display device. Then, when the identification information finally derived and displayed on the display area of the pattern display device forms a predetermined combination (a specific display mode), the gaming state transitions to a jackpot gaming state (a so-called "jackpot") which is advantageous to the player.

Also, conventionally, pachinko gaming machines are known in which the main control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine is configured to use separate ROM (Read Only Memory) and RAM (Random Access Memory) by switching banks (for example, JP 2021-53443 A).

In such pachinko gaming machines, for example, the ROM is divided into a game area containing programs and data related to game processing, and an outside area containing data related to non-game processing, and the RAM is divided into a game area containing a work area related to game processing, and an outside area containing a work area related to non-game processing, and further, the ROM game area and RAM game area are assigned to bank 0, and the ROM outside area and RAM outside area are assigned to bank 1.

In this way, by allocating separate areas in ROM and RAM for each bank, when a program is executed on the pachinko machine, the bank can be switched and the processes that use the game area and the processes that use the outside area can be managed separately, making it possible to separate the programs and data used for game-related processes from those for non-game-related processes so that they do not become confused.

However, in conventional configurations, when clearing a specified area or setting data, if the bank is switched, the settings for prohibiting and allowing interrupts during that time may not be maintained. Therefore, when switching banks, it is necessary to manage the settings for prohibiting and allowing interrupts by turning on and off a specified flag, and also to be aware of the timing and processing order when turning on and off such specified flags.

The present invention was made in consideration of these points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can call up a specified process without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time it is called up.

A further object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can properly maintain the settings for interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission when a specified process, such as clearing a specified area or storing data, is called, without the user being aware of the interrupt control state at the time the process is called.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a calculation processing means (e.g., a main CPU 4201) for performing calculation processing for controlling game operations (e.g., processing related to a game area) and calculation processing for performing processing other than games (e.g., processing related to an outside area),
The arithmetic processing means
A feature of this embodiment is that when executing a specified process (e.g., data storage process or clearing process of a specified area), the interrupt control state (e.g., an interrupt enable register) indicating whether the interrupt is disabled or enabled is saved (e.g., a pachinko machine according to the third embodiment).

With this configuration of the present invention, it is possible to call a specific process without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time it is called.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
The interrupt control state is set to an interrupt disabled state by an interrupt disable instruction and an interrupt enabled state by an interrupt enable instruction, and is managed by a first value (e.g., the value of an interrupt enable register 2) and a second value (e.g., the value of an interrupt enable register 1) that can identify whether the interrupt is disabled or enabled, respectively;
It is desirable to configure the first value and the second value to be set to the same value by the interrupt disable instruction and the interrupt enable instruction (e.g., disable "0" by the interrupt disable instruction and enable "1" by the interrupt enable instruction).

With this configuration of the present invention, it is possible to call a specific process without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time it is called.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
The interrupt control state is set to an interrupt disabled state by an interrupt disable instruction and to an interrupt enabled state by an interrupt enable instruction,
It is desirable to configure so that the interrupt disable instruction is executed after the interrupt control state is saved (for example, after the value of the interrupt enable register 2 is stored in a flag register).

According to the configuration of the present invention, a specific process can be called without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of calling. In addition, the interrupt control state at the time of calling can be maintained while disabling interrupts in the called process.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
the interrupt control state is set to an interrupt disabled state by an interrupt disable instruction and to an interrupt enabled state by an interrupt enable instruction, and is managed by a first value and a second value that can identify whether the interrupt disabled state or the interrupt enabled state is,
It is desirable to configure so that after the interrupt disable instruction is executed, the first value is saved (for example, the value of the interrupt enable register 2 stored in a flag register is saved to a stack).

According to the configuration of the present invention, a specific process can be called without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of calling. In addition, interrupts can be disabled in the called process while retaining the interrupt control state at the time of calling.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
the interrupt control state is set to an interrupt disabled state by an interrupt disable instruction and to an interrupt enabled state by an interrupt enable instruction, and is managed by a first value and a second value that can identify whether the interrupt disabled state or the interrupt enabled state is,
It is desirable that, after the first value is saved, a data storage process or a clear process is executed on the designated area.

With this configuration of the present invention, it is possible to call a process that stores data or clears it in a specified area without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time the process is called.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
the interrupt control state is set to an interrupt disabled state by an interrupt disable instruction and to an interrupt enabled state by an interrupt enable instruction, and is managed by a first value and a second value that can identify whether the interrupt disabled state or the interrupt enabled state is,
After saving the first value, a data storage process or a clear process is executed on the designated area;
It is desirable that the first value that has been saved be restored after the data storage process or the clear process is completed.

According to the configuration of the present invention, it is possible to call a process that executes data storage or clearing processing for a specified area without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of the call. Also, by retaining the called interrupt control state, the interrupt control state can be restored to the saved state when returning to the caller, so there is no need to worry about the timing or order of processing. Also, it is possible to properly maintain the settings for prohibiting and allowing interrupts without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of the call.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
the interrupt control state is set to an interrupt disabled state by an interrupt disable instruction and to an interrupt enabled state by an interrupt enable instruction, and is managed by a first value and a second value that can identify whether the interrupt disabled state or the interrupt enabled state is,
After saving the first value, a data storage process or a clear process is executed on the designated area;
After the data storage process or the clear process is completed, the first value that was saved is restored;
It is desirable that, if the first value that is returned is a value indicating an interrupt disabled state, the interrupt enable instruction is not executed.

According to the configuration of the present invention, it is possible to call a process that executes data storage or clearing in a specified area without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of the call, and by retaining the called interrupt control state, the interrupt control state can be restored to the saved state when returning to the caller, eliminating the need to worry about the timing or order of the processes, and also allowing the interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission settings to be properly maintained without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of the call. Furthermore, if the interrupt prohibition state is set at the time of the call, duplicate interrupt prohibition commands are not issued in order to maintain the interrupt prohibition state, making it possible to simplify the program configuration and reduce its size.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
the interrupt control state is set to an interrupt disabled state by an interrupt disable instruction and to an interrupt enabled state by an interrupt enable instruction, and is managed by a first value and a second value that can identify whether the interrupt disabled state or the interrupt enabled state is,
After saving the first value, a data storage process or a clear process is executed on the designated area;
After the data storage process or the data clear process is completed, the first value that was saved is restored;
It is preferable that the processor is configured to execute an interrupt enable instruction if the returned first value indicates an interrupt enable state.

According to the configuration of the present invention, it is possible to call a process that executes data storage or clearing processing for a specified area without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of the call. Also, by retaining the called interrupt control state, the interrupt control state can be restored to the saved state when returning to the caller, so there is no need to worry about the timing or order of processing. Also, it is possible to properly maintain the settings for prohibiting and allowing interrupts without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of the call.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
the interrupt control state is set to an interrupt disabled state by an interrupt disable instruction and to an interrupt enabled state by an interrupt enable instruction, and is managed by a first value and a second value that can identify whether the interrupt disabled state or the interrupt enabled state is,
Further, a storage means (e.g., a main RAM 4203) is provided in which information necessary for the execution of the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is stored,
The storage means includes an area for gaming (e.g., a gaming area of the main RAM 4203) and an area other than for gaming (e.g., an area outside the main RAM 4203),
It is desirable that when the specified processing is called from processing related to the gaming area as processing related to the non-gaming area, the first value is not used and a specified value is set to the second value (for example, "0" is set to interrupt permission register 1).

According to the configuration of the present invention, it is possible to call a process that executes data storage or clearing processing for a specified area without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of the call. Also, by retaining the called interrupt control state, the interrupt control state can be restored to the saved state when returning to the caller, so there is no need to worry about the timing or order of processing. Also, it is possible to properly maintain the settings for prohibiting and allowing interrupts without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of the call.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
the interrupt control state is set to an interrupt disabled state by an interrupt disable instruction and to an interrupt enabled state by an interrupt enable instruction, and is managed by a first value and a second value that can identify whether the interrupt disabled state or the interrupt enabled state is,
Further, a storage means is provided for storing information necessary for the execution of the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means,
The storage means includes a gaming area and a non-gaming area,
It is desirable that the specified processing be configured so that, after being called from processing related to the gaming area as processing related to the non-gaming area, when returning to processing related to the gaming area, the first value is set to the second value (for example, the value of interrupt permission register 2 is set to interrupt permission register 1).

According to the configuration of the present invention, it is possible to call a process that executes data storage or clearing processing for a specified area without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of the call. Also, by retaining the called interrupt control state, the interrupt control state can be restored to the saved state when returning to the caller, so there is no need to worry about the timing or order of processing. Also, it is possible to properly maintain the settings for prohibiting and allowing interrupts without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of the call.

With the gaming machine configured as above, it is possible to call a specific process without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time it is called.

In addition, with the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a specified process such as clearing a specified area or setting data is called, the interrupt control state at the time of the call is saved, and the called process is performed in an interrupt disabled state. Then, when returning to the caller, the interrupt control state can be restored to the saved state, so there is no need to worry about the timing or order of the processes, and the settings for interrupt disable and interrupt enable can be properly maintained without having to be aware of the interrupt control state at the time of the call.

Furthermore, by describing the control of the interrupt control state, the process of clearing a specified area, and the process of storing data in that specified process as a single unit in the program, further efficiency is achieved in terms of management and processing.

<Appendix 4-2>
Conventionally, a gaming machine called a pachinko gaming machine is known, and this pachinko gaming machine generally comprises a gaming area in which a gaming ball launched onto a gaming board can roll, a starting area provided in this gaming area, a symbol display device, and a variable display control means for controlling the symbol display device. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition is met, such as the gaming ball passing through the starting area (entering the starting hole of the gaming ball), the variable display control means controls the symbol display device to variably display identification information (such as a special symbol, which will be described later) on the display area of the symbol display device. Then, when the identification information finally derived and displayed on the display area of the symbol display device becomes a predetermined combination (a specific display mode), the gaming state transitions to a jackpot gaming state (so-called "jackpot") which is advantageous to the player.

Also, conventionally, pachinko gaming machines are known in which the main control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine is configured to use separate ROM (Read Only Memory) and RAM (Random Access Memory) by switching banks (for example, JP 2021-53443 A).

In such pachinko gaming machines, for example, the ROM is divided into a game area containing programs and data related to game processing, and an outside area containing data related to non-game processing, and the RAM is divided into a game area containing a work area related to game processing, and an outside area containing a work area related to non-game processing, and further, the ROM game area and RAM game area are assigned to bank 0, and the ROM outside area and RAM outside area are assigned to bank 1.

In addition, some of the registers used for data calculations and storage are provided for each bank, and a stack pointer that indicates the current operation position in the stack, which is a memory area for temporarily storing data, is also set for each bank.

In this way, by allocating separate areas in ROM and RAM for each bank, and further setting up separate registers and stacks, when executing a program on the pachinko machine, it is possible to switch banks and separately manage processes that use the game area and processes that use the outside area, and separate the programs and data used for game-related processes and non-game processes so that they do not become confused.

However, although the setting of the stack pointer in the initialization process is performed by processing (program) related to bank 0 for the game area of the RAM, and for the area outside the RAM, bank switching from bank 0 is required to perform processing (program) related to bank 1, there was no consideration given to an efficient and simple configuration for the process of setting the stack pointer or the timing and order of bank switching. Furthermore, even when clearing the RAM in the initialization process, there was no consideration given to an efficient and simple configuration for the process of determining the range.

The present invention was made in consideration of these points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can set the stack pointers provided for each bank and execute the initialization process that determines the RAM clear range in an efficient and simple configuration.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a calculation processing means (e.g., a main CPU 4201) for performing calculation processing for controlling game operations (e.g., processing related to a game area) and calculation processing for performing processing other than games (e.g., processing related to an outside area);
A storage means (e.g., a main RAM 4203) for storing information necessary for the execution of the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means,
The storage means includes an area for gaming (e.g., a gaming area of the main RAM 4203) and an area other than for gaming (e.g., an area outside the main RAM 4203),
Furthermore, a stack provided in the gaming area (e.g., a stack area (gaming area)) is used by a process related to the gaming area, and a stack provided in a non-gaming area (e.g., a stack area (outside area)) is used by a process related to the non-gaming area,
A feature of this embodiment is that when processing related to the non-game area is called for the first time, a stack pointer of a stack provided in the non-game area is set (for example, a pachinko machine according to the third embodiment).

This configuration of the present invention allows the stack pointers provided for each bank to be set, and the initialization process related to the setting of the stack area can be performed efficiently and simply.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
The process related to the non-game area is called from the process related to the game area,
The processing related to the non-game area is configured to set a stack pointer of a stack provided in the non-game area, and then perform a CRC calculation of a specified area (for example, a CRC calculation for the game area of main RAM 4203 and an area outside the area).

With this configuration of the present invention, it is possible to set the stack pointers provided for each bank, and it is desirable to be able to execute the initialization process related to the setting of the stack area with an efficient and simple configuration.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
When the power is turned on, a CRC calculation is performed on the specified area.
It is desirable to configure the device to perform a comparison process between the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation at the time of power-on and the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation of the designated area at the time of power interruption prior to power-on.

This configuration of the present invention makes it possible to detect abnormalities in a specified area of the main RAM before and after power is turned on.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
When the power is turned on, a CRC calculation is performed on the specified area.
performing a comparison process between the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation at the time of power-on and the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation of the designated area at the time of power interruption before the power-on;
It is desirable to configure the CRC calculation at power-on and the CRC calculation at power-off to be a common process.

This configuration of the present invention makes it possible to detect abnormalities in a specified area of the main RAM before and after power is turned on.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
When the power is turned on, a CRC calculation is performed on the specified area.
performing a comparison process between the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation at the time of power-on and the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation of the designated area at the time of power interruption before the power-on;
When the power is turned on, a clear range in the storage means (e.g., a range in which data is cleared in the main RAM 4203) is set according to a start-up state (e.g., power recovery, setting confirmation, clearing of the main RAM 4203, and setting change),
If the comparison process shows that the CRC values do not match and a setting change is instructed when the power is turned on, it is desirable to configure the first address of the clear range to be set to the first address of the clear range that is set in the event of an abnormality (for example, the first address of the RAM clear range in the event of an abnormality).

With this configuration of the present invention, the main RAM clear range can be adjusted depending on the startup state when the power is turned on.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
When the power is turned on, a CRC calculation is performed on the specified area.
performing a comparison process between the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation at the time of power-on and the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation of the designated area at the time of power interruption before the power-on;
When the power is turned on, the clear range in the storage means is set according to the start-up state;
The clear range determination data for determining the clear range (for example, the lowest byte of the clear range head address for the game area of the main RAM 4203) is set in the process for the game area,
It is desirable that the process relating to the non-game area is configured to determine a clear range for the non-game area based on the clear range determination data.

This configuration of the present invention allows the clear range of the main RAM to be adjusted depending on the startup state when the power is turned on, and furthermore, by determining the clear range of the outside area based on a portion of the clear range determined for the play area, processing can be made more efficient and the program size can be reduced.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
When the power is turned on, a CRC calculation is performed on the specified area.
performing a comparison process between the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation at the time of power-on and the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation of the designated area at the time of power interruption before the power-on;
Further, a first input means (e.g., a setting key slot 4174) and a second input means (e.g., a RAM clear switch 4176) are provided for instructing a setting change when the power is turned on,
When the power is turned on, the clear range in the storage means is set according to the start-up state;
If the comparison process shows that the CRC values match and the power has been restored during a setting change, it is desirable to set the status information of the first input means and the second input means at the time of this power-on to the previous status information of the first input means and the second input means.

With this configuration of the present invention, even if a power outage occurs during a previous setting change, you can continue changing the settings when you turn the power back on.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
When the power is turned on, a CRC calculation is performed on the specified area.
performing a comparison process between the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation at the time of power-on and the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation of the designated area at the time of power interruption before the power-on;
The device further includes a first input means and a second input means for instructing a setting change when the device is powered on,
When the power is turned on, the clear range in the storage means is set according to the start-up state;
If the comparison process results in a match between the CRC values, and if the first input means and the second input means are off when the power is turned on (for example, when the startup state is power recovery), it is desirable to configure the first address of the clear range to be set to the first address of the clear range that is set when power recovery is performed.

With this configuration of the present invention, the main RAM clear range can be adjusted depending on the startup state when the power is turned on.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
When the power is turned on, a CRC calculation is performed on the specified area.
performing a comparison process between the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation at the time of power-on and the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation of the designated area at the time of power interruption before the power-on;
The device further includes a first input means and a second input means for instructing a setting change when the device is powered on,
When the power is turned on, the clear range in the storage means is set according to the start-up state;
If the comparison process shows that the CRC values match, and if the first input means is on when the power is turned on (for example, when the startup state is setting confirmation or setting change), it is desirable to configure the first address of the clear range not to be set to the first address of the clear range that is set when power is restored.

With this configuration of the present invention, the main RAM clear range can be adjusted depending on the startup state when the power is turned on.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
When the power is turned on, a CRC calculation is performed on the specified area.
performing a comparison process between the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation at the time of power-on and the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation of the designated area at the time of power interruption before the power-on;
The device further includes a first input means and a second input means for instructing a setting change when the device is powered on,
When the power is turned on, the clear range in the storage means is set according to the start-up state;
If the CRC values match as a result of the comparison process, and if the first input means and the second input means are on when the power is turned on (for example, when the startup state is a setting change), set the top address of the clear range to the top address of the clear range that is set when the setting is changed;
If the CRC values match as a result of the comparison process, and if the first input means is off and the second input means is on when the power is turned on (for example, when the start-up state is to clear the main RAM 4203), set the top address of the clear range to the top address of the clear range that is set when the setting is changed,
When the CRC values match as a result of the comparison process, and when the first input means and the second input means are off when the power is turned on (for example, when the start-up state is power-off recovery), the top address of the clear range is set to the top address of the clear range that is set when the power is restored;
It is desirable to configure the memory area that stores the starting address of the clear range that is set when the setting is changed and the memory area (e.g., a register) that stores the starting address of the clear range that is set when the power is restored to be the same.

With this configuration of the present invention, the clear range of the main RAM can be adjusted depending on the startup state when the power is turned on, and since the clear range is stored in the same memory area, it is only necessary to refer to one memory area when determining the clear range of the outside area of the main RAM 4203, simplifying and streamlining the process.

With the gaming machine configured as above, initialization processes such as setting the stack pointers provided for each bank, and bank switching for this purpose, can be performed efficiently and simply.

<Appendix 4-3>
Conventionally, a gaming machine called a pachinko gaming machine has been known, and this pachinko gaming machine generally comprises a gaming area in which a gaming ball launched onto a gaming board can roll, a starting area provided in this gaming area, a symbol display device, and a variable display control means for controlling the symbol display device. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition is met, such as the gaming ball passing through the starting area (entering the starting hole of the gaming ball), the variable display control means controls the symbol display device to variably display identification information (such as a special symbol, which will be described later) on the display area of the symbol display device. Then, when the identification information finally derived and displayed on the display area of the symbol display device becomes a predetermined combination (a specific display mode), the gaming state transitions to a jackpot gaming state (so-called "jackpot") which is advantageous to the player.

Also, conventionally, pachinko gaming machines are known in which the main control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine is configured to use separate ROM (Read Only Memory) and RAM (Random Access Memory) by switching banks (for example, JP 2021-53443 A).

In such pachinko gaming machines, for example, the ROM is divided into a game area containing programs and data related to game processing, and an outside area containing data related to non-game processing, and the RAM is divided into a game area containing a work area related to game processing, and an outside area containing a work area related to non-game processing, and further, the ROM game area and RAM game area are assigned to bank 0, and the ROM outside area and RAM outside area are assigned to bank 1.

In addition, some of the registers used for data calculations and storage are provided for each bank, and a stack pointer that indicates the current operation position in the stack, which is a memory area for temporarily storing data, is also set for each bank.

In this way, by allocating separate areas in ROM and RAM for each bank, and further setting up separate registers and stacks, when executing a program on the pachinko machine, it is possible to switch banks and separately manage processes that use the game area and processes that use the outside area, and separate the programs and data used for game-related processes and non-game processes so that they do not become confused.

In a gaming machine with a play area and an outside area, the initialization process must perform separate clearing processes for the play area and the outside area, and the RAM clear range must be adjusted depending on the situation when the gaming machine is started.

In addition, in conventional configurations, when performing a specific process, if a bank is switched, the settings for prohibiting and allowing interrupts during that time may not be maintained. For this reason, when switching banks, it is necessary to manage the settings for prohibiting and allowing interrupts by turning on and off a specific flag, and also to be aware of the timing and processing order when turning on and off such a specific flag.

However, there was no RAM clearing process that considered effectively setting information about the clear range of the play area and the outside area, and there was no configuration that allowed a specified process to be called without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time it was called.

The present invention was made in consideration of these points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that effectively sets information regarding the clear range of the play area and the outside area in relation to the RAM clearing process, and that can properly maintain the settings for interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission when a specified process is called, without the player being aware of the interrupt control state at the time the process is called.

To achieve the above objective, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a calculation processing means (e.g., a main CPU 4201) for performing calculation processing for controlling game operations (e.g., processing related to a game area) and calculation processing for performing processing other than games (e.g., processing related to an outside area);
A storage means (e.g., a main RAM 4203) for storing information necessary for the execution of the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means,
The storage means includes an area for gaming (e.g., a gaming area of the main RAM 4203) and an area other than for gaming (e.g., an area outside the main RAM 4203),
When the power is turned on, a clear control is executed to clear at least a part of the gaming area and the non-gaming area;
The clear control is
When clearing an area other than the game area, the clear range can be set according to the clear range of the game area (information specifying the clear range of the game area, for example, the lowest byte of the top address of the clear range of the game area) (for example, a pachinko machine according to the third embodiment).

With this configuration of the present invention, it is possible to effectively set information regarding the clearing range of the play area and the outside area in relation to the RAM clearing process, thereby making it possible to improve the efficiency of the clearing process, and further simplify the program structure and reduce the program size.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
The clear control is
If the startup state when the power is turned on is not power recovery, it is desirable to adjust the clear range (for example, excluding several bytes from the clear range from the initial setting address of the stack pointer SP in the stack area (game area)) to protect the return address stored in the game area.

With this configuration of the present invention, the called program can return to the return address normally, ensuring correct clear processing.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
The clear control is performed when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the storage means.
Clearing the corresponding clear range of the non-gaming area;
It is desirable to configure the configuration so that the setting values for controlling the performance display monitor are stored in an area other than that used for play (for example, the performance monitor control initial table is stored in the working area (outside area) of the main RAM 4203).

With this configuration of the present invention, even if all non-game areas are cleared, initial values for controlling the performance display monitor (e.g., initial values related to LED settings, etc.) are set, so that control of the performance display monitor can begin based on those initial values after power is turned on.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
The clear control is performed when it is determined that no abnormality occurs in the storage means.
The setting values for controlling the performance display monitor are not stored in the storage means,
It is desirable to configure the power-on initialization setting values to be stored in an area other than that used for gaming (for example, to store power-on initialization data in the working area (outside area) of main RAM 4203).

With this configuration of the present invention, even if a portion of the non-game area is cleared, the initialization setting values (e.g., setting values related to LED settings, etc.) used when powering on are stored, so that control can be started based on those setting values after powering on.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
The clear control is
In the case where the start-up state at the time of power-on is not power-off recovery, the clear range is adjusted in order to protect the return address stored in the gaming area;
Thereafter, the game area is cleared based on the adjusted clear range.

With this configuration of the present invention, it is desirable to be able to effectively separate the range of RAM to be cleared depending on the startup state when the power is turned on.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
The clear control is
The clear range of the non-game area can be set according to judgment data (e.g., RAM clear range judgment data) associated with the clear range of the game area;
It is desirable to configure the device so that after the judgment data is saved in an area different from the non-game area (for example, a specified register), the clear range of the non-game area is cleared.

With this configuration of the present invention, the judgment data that can identify the clear range of the gaming area and the clear range of the non-gaming area can be used even after the clear range of the non-gaming area has been cleared, eliminating the need to be aware of the timing when the judgment data is available.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
The arithmetic processing means
It is desirable to configure the system so that, when executing a specified process (e.g., data storage process or clearing process of a specified area), an interrupt control state (e.g., an interrupt enable register) indicating whether the interrupt is disabled or enabled is saved.

With this configuration of the present invention, it is possible to call a specific process without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time it is called.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
The arithmetic processing means
When executing a predetermined process, an interrupt control state indicating whether the interrupt is disabled or enabled is saved;
The interrupt control state is set to an interrupt disabled state by an interrupt disable instruction and an interrupt enabled state by an interrupt enable instruction, and is managed by a first value (e.g., the value of an interrupt enable register 2) and a second value (e.g., the value of an interrupt enable register 1) that can identify whether the interrupt is disabled or enabled, respectively;
It is desirable to configure the first value and the second value to be set to the same value by the interrupt disable instruction and the interrupt enable instruction (e.g., disable "0" by the interrupt disable instruction and enable "1" by the interrupt enable instruction).

With this configuration of the present invention, it is possible to call a specific process without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time it is called.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
The arithmetic processing means
When executing a predetermined process, an interrupt control state indicating whether an interrupt is disabled or enabled is saved;
The interrupt control state is set to an interrupt disabled state by an interrupt disable instruction and to an interrupt enabled state by an interrupt enable instruction,
It is desirable to configure so that the interrupt disable instruction is executed after the interrupt control state is saved (for example, after the value of the interrupt enable register 2 is stored in a flag register).

According to the configuration of the present invention, a specific process can be called without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of calling. In addition, the interrupt control state at the time of calling can be maintained while disabling interrupts in the called process.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
The arithmetic processing means
When executing a predetermined process, an interrupt control state indicating whether an interrupt is disabled or enabled is saved;
the interrupt control state is set to an interrupt disabled state by an interrupt disable instruction and to an interrupt enabled state by an interrupt enable instruction, and is managed by a first value and a second value that can identify whether the interrupt disabled state or the interrupt enabled state is,
It is desirable to configure so that after the interrupt disable instruction is executed, the first value is saved (for example, the value of the interrupt enable register 2 stored in a flag register is saved to a stack).

According to the configuration of the present invention, a specific process can be called without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of calling. In addition, the interrupt control state at the time of calling can be maintained while disabling interrupts in the called process.

With the gaming machine configured as above, information regarding the clear range of the play area and the outside area can be effectively set for the RAM clearing process, which makes it possible to improve the efficiency of the clearing process and further simplifies the program configuration and reduces the program size. In addition, when a specified process is called, the interrupt control state at the time of the call is saved, so that the specified process can be called without being aware of the interrupt control state at the time of the call.

<Appendix 4-4>
Conventionally, a gaming machine called a pachinko gaming machine has been known, and this pachinko gaming machine generally comprises a gaming area in which a gaming ball launched onto a gaming board can roll, a starting area provided in this gaming area, a symbol display device, and a variable display control means for controlling the symbol display device. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition is met, such as the gaming ball passing through the starting area (entering the starting hole of the gaming ball), the variable display control means controls the symbol display device to variably display identification information (such as a special symbol, which will be described later) on the display area of the symbol display device. Then, when the identification information finally derived and displayed on the display area of the symbol display device becomes a predetermined combination (a specific display mode), the gaming state transitions to a jackpot gaming state (so-called "jackpot") which is advantageous to the player.

Also, there is a known pachinko game machine in which the main control circuit of the pachinko game machine is configured to execute interrupt processing in response to an external interrupt request that occurs when the power to the pachinko game machine is cut off, etc. (for example, JP 2021-53443 A).

In the interrupt processing of such pachinko gaming machines, the state of the input port is read, and if it is determined that a power interruption signal is being detected, a specified flag is set to on, and other processing is configured to perform a specified power interruption processing if the specified flag is on.

However, with this type of pachinko machine configuration, if another interrupt occurs after the interrupt process has started, the program must be written to anticipate that situation, which creates the problem of the program becoming more complex and larger in size. Furthermore, the problem of programs becoming more complex and larger in size is not limited to those related to interrupts as described above.

In addition, because it is assumed that another interrupt factor may occur after interrupt processing has started, the problem arises that the interrupt processing related to the power cut cannot be executed immediately, and it is necessary to consider the execution timing and processing order for the interrupt processing corresponding to each interrupt factor.

The present invention was made in consideration of these points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can limit the occurrence of other interrupts after a power outage occurs. It also aims to provide a gaming machine that can solve the problem of programs becoming complicated and large in size due to interrupt processing and other factors.

To achieve the above objective, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a calculation processing means (e.g., a main CPU 4201) for performing calculation processing for controlling game operations (e.g., processing related to a game area) and calculation processing for performing processing other than games (e.g., processing related to an outside area),
The arithmetic processing means
When an interrupt caused by a power interruption is detected, an interrupt process related to the power interruption (for example, an external maskable interrupt process shown in FIG. 131) is executed.
In the interrupt processing related to the power cut, it is characterized in that it is set so as not to execute interrupt processing (for example, the system timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 132) whose interrupt cause is a timer counter (for example, timer counter PTC2) (for example, the pachinko machine of the third embodiment).

According to the configuration of the present invention, the occurrence of other interrupts after a power outage can be restricted by using the interrupt cause mask, so there is no need to write branch instructions for processing the other interrupts, and as a result, the program structure is simplified and the size can be reduced. In addition, according to the gaming machine configured as above, the occurrence of other interrupts after a power outage can be restricted by using the interrupt cause mask, so processing related to the power outage can be executed immediately after the power outage is detected, and there is no need to consider the execution timing or processing order of the processing due to the other interrupts.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
Further, a storage means (e.g., a main RAM 4203) is provided in which information necessary for the execution of the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is stored,
the storage means stores a setting area having an entry address (e.g., a start address of a corresponding interrupt process) corresponding to the interrupt cause;
It is preferable that the arithmetic processing means is configured to, when it detects an interrupt, execute an interrupt process indicated by the entry address corresponding to the cause of the interrupt.

According to the configuration of the present invention, the corresponding interrupt processing is executed according to the interrupt cause, and individual processing for each interrupt cause can be set simply by writing the interrupt processing in the corresponding entry address.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
Further, a storage means is provided for storing information necessary for the execution of the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means,
the storage means stores a setting area having an entry address corresponding to the interrupt cause;
When the arithmetic processing means detects an interrupt, the arithmetic processing means executes an interrupt process indicated by the entry address corresponding to the interrupt cause of the interrupt;
the setting area includes, for each interrupt cause, the entry address and a priority of a corresponding interrupt process;
It is desirable that the entry address and the priority level are configured to be separated by a predetermined data (for example, bit "0").

According to the configuration of the present invention, the corresponding interrupt process is executed according to the interrupt cause, and the priority of the interrupt cause can be set.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
Further, a storage means is provided for storing information necessary for the execution of the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means,
the storage means stores a setting area having an entry address corresponding to the interrupt cause;
When the arithmetic processing means detects an interrupt, the arithmetic processing means executes an interrupt process indicated by the entry address corresponding to the interrupt cause of the interrupt;
It is desirable that the setting area be configured to include, as the interrupt causes, an entry address and priority level relating to a plurality of timer counter interrupts (e.g., timer counters PTC0 to PTC2), a plurality of asynchronous serial transmission/reception receive interrupts (e.g., asynchronous serial transmission/reception RX0, RX1), and at least an external interrupt input from an external terminal (XINT).

With this configuration of the present invention, it is possible to set corresponding interrupt processing for multiple different interrupt causes.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
In order to set the interrupt processing related to the power cut not to execute the interrupt processing whose interrupt cause is a timer counter, mask data is stored in a dedicated register (e.g., an interrupt cause mask register) (e.g., the interrupt cause mask is updated with the interrupt cause mask),
It is preferable that each bit of the mask data is configured to be used to determine whether or not to execute a corresponding interrupt process when an interrupt cause corresponding to that bit occurs.

With this configuration of the present invention, it is possible to control whether or not to execute interrupt processing corresponding to a specific interrupt cause by adjusting the contents of the mask data.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
Further, a storage means is provided for storing information necessary for the execution of the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means,
The storage means includes a gaming area and a non-gaming area,
The arithmetic processing means
When an interrupt caused by a timer counter (e.g., timer counter PTC2) is detected, an interrupt process related to the timer counter is executed;
It is desirable that the interrupt processing related to the timer counter is configured to execute an abnormal state monitoring processing (for example, the abnormal state monitoring processing (outside area) shown in FIG. 135) for the area other than the gaming area.

According to the configuration of the present invention, the occurrence of other interrupts after a power outage can be restricted by using an interrupt cause mask. Therefore, even when processing an interrupt related to a timer counter, there is no need to consider the execution timing or processing order of other interrupt processing, including the interrupt processing when a power outage occurs. This increases the freedom of design and allows various processing, such as monitoring abnormal conditions, to be written in a simple program.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
The arithmetic processing means
When an interrupt caused by a timer counter is detected, an interrupt process related to the timer counter is executed;
The interrupt process related to the timer counter executes a lighting data output process (for example, the game LED lighting data output process of FIG. 136) for outputting lighting data of an LED.
The lighting data output process performs an update process for LED common data related to the gaming LED for displaying symbols with one command,
In the update process, when 1 is added to the LED common data,
If the result of the addition is equal to or greater than a specified maximum value, set the first calculation result area to 0 and also set the second calculation result area to 0;
It is desirable to configure the process so that, when the result of the addition is less than a specified maximum value, the result of the addition is set in a first calculation result area and also in a second calculation result area (for example, the process shown in step S4482 in FIG. 136).

According to the configuration of the present invention, the occurrence of other interrupts after a power outage can be restricted by using an interrupt cause mask, so that when processing an interrupt related to a timer counter, there is no need to consider the execution timing or processing order of other interrupt processes, including the interrupt process when a power outage occurs, improving design freedom and allowing various processes, such as monitoring of abnormal conditions, to be written in a simple program. In addition, in the update process related to the LED common data related to the game LED for displaying patterns, a process of setting a value in the second calculation result area depending on the conditions can be performed with a single command, allowing the writing of a simple program.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
The arithmetic processing means
When an interrupt caused by a timer counter is detected, an interrupt process related to the timer counter is executed;
The interrupt process related to the timer counter executes a lighting data output process for outputting lighting data for an LED;
The lighting data output process performs an update process for LED common data related to the gaming LED for displaying symbols with one command,
In the update process, when 1 is added to the LED common data,
If the result of the addition is equal to or greater than a specified maximum value, set the first calculation result area to 0 and also set the second calculation result area to 0;
If the result of the addition is less than a specified maximum value, set the result of the addition in a first calculation result area and also set the result of the addition in a second calculation result area;
It is desirable to configure the device to divide the value set in the second calculation result area by the number of areas for storing the LED data of the game LEDs, set the quotient in the second calculation result area, and set the remainder in a third calculation result area (for example, the processing shown in step S4483 in FIG. 136).

According to the configuration of the present invention, the occurrence of other interrupts after a power outage can be restricted by using an interrupt cause mask, so that when processing an interrupt related to a timer counter, there is no need to consider the execution timing or processing order of other interrupt processes, including the interrupt process when a power outage occurs, improving design freedom and allowing various processes, such as monitoring of abnormal conditions, to be written in a simple program. In addition, in the update process related to the LED common data related to the game LED for displaying patterns, a process of setting a value in the second calculation result area depending on the conditions can be performed with a single command, allowing the writing of a simple program.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
The arithmetic processing means
When an interrupt caused by a timer counter is detected, an interrupt process related to the timer counter is executed;
The interrupt process related to the timer counter executes a lighting data output process for outputting lighting data for an LED;
It is desirable that the lighting data output process is configured to use a constant (for example, a bit string "10000000") as an initial value of common data for dynamic lighting of the LEDs.

According to the configuration of the present invention, the occurrence of other interrupts after a power outage can be restricted by using an interrupt cause mask. Therefore, even when processing an interrupt related to a timer counter, there is no need to consider the execution timing or processing order of other interrupt processing, including the interrupt processing when a power outage occurs. This increases the freedom of design and allows various processing, such as monitoring abnormal conditions, to be written in a simple program.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
The arithmetic processing means
Execute a game status information update process (for example, a game status information update process shown in FIG. 137) for updating information related to the game status;
The game status information update process includes:
A command generation process is executed in one instruction to generate a 2-byte command based on 1-byte data stored in a specified area (e.g., a 2-byte register) (e.g., the process shown in step S4513 of FIG. 137 ),
It is desirable that the command generation process is configured to divide the 1-byte data into specified bit positions, set the most significant bit to 0 to create 1-byte data, and combine these 1-byte data to generate a 2-byte data command.

With this configuration of the present invention, the process of generating a two-byte command based on one byte of data stored in a two-byte register can be performed with one instruction, making it possible to simplify program writing.

In a gaming machine with the above configuration, the interrupt cause mask can be used to limit the occurrence of other interrupts after a power outage, making it unnecessary to write branch instructions to process the other interrupts. As a result, the program can be simplified and made smaller in size.

In addition, with the gaming machine configured as described above, the configuration that utilizes the interrupt cause mask can limit the occurrence of other interrupts after a power outage occurs, so that processing related to the power outage can be executed immediately after the power outage is detected, and there is no need to consider the execution timing or processing order of the processing caused by the other interrupts.

Furthermore, when processing other interrupts, there is no need to consider the execution timing or processing order of other interrupt processes, including interrupt processes when a power outage occurs, improving design freedom.

It also solves problems related not only to interrupt factors, but also to programs becoming more complex and larger in size.

<Additional Note: Fifth Pachinko Game Machine (First Characteristic Part)>
Conventionally, a gaming machine (so-called pachinko gaming machine) is known in which a starting hole and a big prize hole are provided in a gaming area where a gaming ball flows down, and a lottery for a special symbol is held when a gaming ball enters the starting hole, and when the lottery for the special symbol is won, the big prize gaming state is controlled.Furthermore, a gaming machine (a reel type gaming machine also called a slot machine) is also known in which a certain number of medals or the like are inserted, and multiple reels are rotated by operating a start lever, and a special prize such as a specific number of medals or a bonus game is awarded based on the combination of symbols on the reels that are stopped and displayed.

In addition, in pachinko gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, multiple game states are provided, such as game states with different probability of winning special symbols (low probability game state, high probability game state) and game states with different rates of balls entering the starting hole (time-saving game state, non-time-saving game state) (see JP 2013-59682 A).

In such pachinko machines, the jackpot game state can be controlled in a short period of time in the high probability game state or the time-saving game state, allowing the player to obtain a large amount of game value (game balls).

However, as the cumulative gaming value acquired by a player increases (as the number of balls paid out increases), there is a risk that the gambling nature of the game will increase, and so it was necessary to appropriately suppress the gambling nature of the game.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately suppresses the gambling aspect of the game.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a fifth pachinko gaming machine) comprises:
A storage means (e.g., main RAM 203) having a working area, a power interruption recovery setting means (e.g., main CPU 201 that performs designated range clear processing or the like when the start-up state at the time of power interruption recovery is "power interruption recovery") that sets the working area of the storage means when the supply of power is stopped and then power is supplied and power is restored, a specific operation initialization means (e.g., main CPU 201 that performs designated range clear processing or the like when the start-up state at the time of power interruption recovery is "RAM clear") that initializes a predetermined working area of the storage means by a specific operation (e.g., operation by RAM clear switch 176), a game execution means (e.g., main CPU 201 that performs special symbol control processing and normal symbol control processing or the like) that can execute a game, and a game value granting means (e.g., the main CPU 201 which performs main control command transmission/reception processing and the like, and the payout/launch control circuit 400) which grants to the player the game value acquired in accordance with the execution result of the above; a difference number calculation means (e.g., the main CPU 201 which performs game stop function counter update processing and the like) which calculates a difference number of game values based on an increase in the game value granted to the player and the number of game values consumed for the game; and a game stop means (e.g., the main CPU 201 which performs game stop function game stop processing, game stop function control processing and the like) which is capable of stopping the game executed by the game execution means on the condition that the difference number of game values calculated by the difference number calculation means reaches a regulation value (e.g., 95,000 pieces),
The storage means stores at least progress information of the game executed by the game execution means (e.g., control data of special symbols stored in a symbol control data area of the main RAM 203), information on a game stop state in which the game is stopped by the game stop means (e.g., a game stop state stored in a game stop function management area of the main RAM 203), and a difference in the game value calculated by the difference number calculation means (e.g., information on the difference in the number of game balls stored in a game stop function counter area of the main RAM 203),
the power interruption recovery setting means, when the power interruption recovery occurs without the specific operation initialization means initializing the predetermined working area, retains the game progress information and the game stop state information stored in the storage means;
The specific operation initialization means initializes at least the game progress information and the game stop state information stored in the storage means.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
the power interruption recovery setting means, when the power interruption recovery occurs without the specific operation initialization means initializing the predetermined working area, initializes the difference number of the game value stored in the storage means while retaining the game progress information and the game stop state information stored in the storage means;
It is preferable that the specific operation initialization means initializes at least the game progress information, the game stop state information, and the difference in the game value stored in the storage means.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
It is desirable that the game value granting means be capable of granting to the player the game value acquired according to the result of the game execution before the game stopped state even in the game stopped state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
The game device further includes a game abnormality monitoring means (e.g., the main CPU 201 that performs processing of the first part of the state monitoring process, etc.) for monitoring a game abnormality related to the game executed by the game execution means, and an award abnormality monitoring means (e.g., the main CPU 201 that performs processing of the second part of the state monitoring process, etc.) for monitoring an award abnormality related to the game value awarded by the game value awarding means,
the game abnormality monitoring means does not monitor the game abnormality when the game is stopped,
It is desirable that the grant abnormality monitoring means is capable of monitoring the grant abnormality even when the game is stopped.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
Further comprising a performance control unit (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300) having a notification means (e.g., a display device 7, a speaker 32, an LED group 46, etc.) capable of executing a predetermined notification,
The grant abnormality monitoring means transmits a grant status notification command (e.g., a payout status notification command) including information on the monitoring results of a plurality of grant abnormalities to the performance control unit,
When the performance control unit receives the grant status notification command, it desirably determines the number of consecutive receptions of the grant abnormality contained in the grant status notification command, and if the determined number of consecutive receptions is equal to or greater than the abnormality determination number, causes the notification means to issue a notification of the grant abnormality.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
Further comprising a performance control unit (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300) having a notification means (e.g., a display device 7, a speaker 32, an LED group 46, etc.) capable of executing a predetermined notification,
When the game stop means stops the game, the game stop means transmits a game stop function completion command to the performance control unit,
When the performance control unit receives the game stop function completion command, the performance control unit causes the notification means to execute a game stop notification,
It is desirable that the notification means be capable of notifying the player that the game has been stopped as the game stop notification, and, when game value is being awarded to the player by the game value awarding means, of notifying the player that the awarding of game value is continuing.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
Further comprising a performance control unit (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300) having a notification means (e.g., a display device 7, a speaker 32, an LED group 46, etc.) capable of executing a predetermined notification,
When the game stop means stops the game, the game stop means transmits a game stop function completion command including the difference in game value calculated by the difference calculation means to the performance control unit,
When the game value providing means has completed providing a predetermined number of game values to the player, the game value providing means transmits a payout completion command including information on the predetermined number of game values to the performance control unit;
When the performance control unit receives the game stop function completion command, the performance control unit causes the notification means to execute a game stop notification, and when the performance control unit receives the payout completion command, the performance control unit calculates the remaining number of game values to be awarded based on the difference in game values included in the game stop function completion command and information on a predetermined number of game values included in the payout completion command,
It is preferable that the notification means is capable of notifying the player that the game has been stopped and indicating the remaining number of the awarded game values as the game stop notification.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
Further comprising a performance control unit (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300) having a notification means (e.g., a display device 7, a speaker 32, an LED group 46, etc.) capable of executing a predetermined notification,
The game execution means transmits game commands to the performance control unit in accordance with game progress information, and causes an operation display means consisting of a plurality of light-emitting units (e.g., game LEDs such as the normal symbol display unit 161, the first special symbol display unit 163, and the second special symbol display unit 164) to emit light in a manner in accordance with the game progress information,
when receiving the game command, the performance control unit causes the notification means to execute a performance of the game;
It is preferable that the operation display means is turned off when the game is stopped.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
The game device further includes a game information output unit (e.g., a main CPU 201 that performs a game information data generation process, etc.) that executes a process of outputting game information corresponding to game progress information from an external terminal board,
It is desirable that, when the game is stopped, the game stop means disables the execution of the game information output means and outputs a specific security signal indicating that the game is stopped from an external terminal board.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
Further comprising a performance control unit (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300) having a notification means (e.g., a display device 7, a speaker 32, an LED group 46, etc.) capable of executing a predetermined notification,
The game stop means does not stop the game, and when the difference number of the game values calculated by the difference number calculation means becomes a boundary value (e.g., 90,000) smaller than the regulation value, transmits a game stop function state command including the difference number of the game values to the performance control unit,
When the performance control unit receives the game stop function state command, the performance control unit causes the notification unit to execute a first game stop notice that notifies the player in advance that the game will be stopped;
It is desirable that the game stop means does not output a security signal according to the state by the game stop means even when the difference in the game values becomes the boundary value and the first game stop notice is given to the notification means.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
Further comprising a test firing test signal output means (e.g., a main CPU 201 that performs a test firing test signal generation process, etc.) that executes a process of outputting a test signal for use in a test firing test of the gaming machine from an output port dedicated to the test firing test;
When the difference number of the game values calculated by the difference number calculation means becomes the boundary value, the test firing test signal output means outputs a specific test signal from an output port dedicated to the test firing test,
It is desirable that the game stop means disables the execution of the test firing signal output means when the game is in the game stopped state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
The game machine further includes a performance display means (e.g., a performance display monitor 170) that displays performance information calculated based on the game value granted by the game value granting means, and a performance display control means (e.g., a main CPU 201 that performs a performance display monitor tallying and division process, a performance display monitor control process, etc.) that calculates the performance information and executes a process to cause the performance display means to display the calculated performance information,
It is preferable that the performance display control means is executable even when the game is stopped.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
The difference number calculation means includes a difference number addition means (e.g., the main CPU 201 which performs a 3-byte difference ball counter addition process, etc.) which calculates an increase in the game value by adding the game value acquired according to the result of the execution of the game to the difference number of the game value and updating it, and a difference number subtraction means (e.g., the main CPU 201 which performs a 3-byte difference ball counter subtraction process, etc.) which subtracts the number of game values consumed in the game from the increase in the game value,
the performance display control means calculates a game value acquired according to an execution result of the game as an additional value, and adds the calculated additional value to the performance information to update it;
It is preferable that the difference number adding means updates the difference number of the game values by adding the addition value calculated by the performance display control means.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
The difference number calculation means includes a difference number addition means (e.g., the main CPU 201 which performs a difference ball counter 3 byte addition process, etc.) which calculates an increase in the game value by adding a predetermined number of game values acquired according to the execution result of the game to the difference number of the game values to update the game value, and a difference number subtraction means (e.g., the main CPU 201 which performs a difference ball counter 3 byte subtraction process, etc.) which subtracts the number of game values consumed in the game from the increase in the game value,
The difference in the game value is divided into a first difference in a predetermined amount (e.g., a first difference in a number of balls in units of 1000) and a second difference in a unit smaller than the predetermined amount (e.g., a second difference in a number of balls in units of 1).
It is desirable that the difference number addition means adds the game value acquired according to the result of the game execution to a second difference number, divides the addition result by the predetermined amount, updates the second difference number with the remainder of the division result, and adds the quotient of the division result to the first difference number to update it.

According to the present invention, it is possible to appropriately suppress the gambling nature of games.

<Additional Note: Fifth Pachinko Game Machine (Second Characteristic Part)>

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a fifth pachinko gaming machine) comprises:
the main CPU 201 for performing a game execution means capable of executing a game (e.g., a main CPU 201 for performing a special symbol control process and a normal symbol control process, etc.); game value granting means for granting a player a game value acquired according to a result of execution of the game (e.g., a main CPU 201 for performing a main control command transmission/reception process, etc., and a payout/launch control circuit 400); difference number calculation means for calculating a difference number of game values based on an increase in the game value granted to a player and a consumption number of game values used in the game (e.g., a main CPU 201 for performing a game stop function counter update process, etc.); game stop means for stopping the game executed by the game execution means on the condition that the difference number of game values calculated by the difference number calculation means reaches a regulation value (e.g., 95,000 pieces); and notification means for executing a predetermined notification (e.g., a display device 7, a speaker 32, a group of LEDs 46, etc.);
The notification means is capable of at least executing a first game stop notice that notifies in advance that the game will be stopped, on condition that the difference number of the game value calculated by the difference number calculation means becomes a boundary value (e.g., 90,000 balls) that is smaller than the regulated value, and a game stop notification that notifies that the game has been stopped when the game has been stopped by the game stop means, and is characterized in that when the first game stop notice is being executed, it is capable of executing a difference number suggestion notification that suggests the difference number of the game value calculated by the difference number calculation means (e.g., the remaining number of game balls to be stopped until the difference number of skill balls reaches the regulated value).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
The game execution means has a special game state control means (e.g., a main CPU 201 which performs a special prize opening preparation process, a special prize opening control process, etc.) for controlling a special game state in which a game value can be awarded to a player when the execution result of the game satisfies a special result,
the game stopping means is capable of not stopping the game when the difference number of the game values calculated by the difference number calculation means becomes the regulation value while the special game state is being controlled by the special game state control means, and of stopping the game after the control of the special game state is terminated;
It is desirable that the notification means be capable of executing a second game stop notice to notify in advance that the game will be stopped after the special game state ends when the special game state is controlled by the special game state control means and the difference number of the game values calculated by the difference number calculation means becomes the regulated value.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
It is preferable that the notification means does not perform the difference number suggestion notification when the second game stop notice is being executed.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
the special game state control means controls a first special game state (e.g., a big win game state) when the execution result of the game satisfies a first special result (e.g., a big win), and controls a second special game state (e.g., a small win game state) in which the game value given to the player is relatively lower than that of the first special game state when the execution result of the game satisfies a second special result (e.g., a small win) different from the first special result, and is capable of controlling the first special game state from the second special game state when a specific condition (e.g., a game ball passing through the V winning port 5156) is satisfied while controlling the second special game state;
It is desirable that the notification means is capable of executing the second game stop notice if the difference in game values calculated by the difference calculation means becomes the regulated value when the first special game state or the second special game state is controlled by the special game state control means, and that the notification means continues to issue the second game stop notice if the specific condition is satisfied when the second special game state is controlled by the special game state control means, and terminates the execution of the second game stop notice if the specific condition is not satisfied when the second special game state is controlled.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
The game execution means includes a start information acquisition means (e.g., the main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol related check process or the like) that acquires start information when a start condition is satisfied, a reserved storage means (e.g., the main RAM 203 having a special symbol start storage area or the like) that stores the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means up to a predetermined reserved number, a game result determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol hit determination process or the like) that determines the execution result of the game based on the start information stored by the reserved storage means, and a pre-determination means (e.g., the sub-CPU 301 that performs a look-ahead performance determination process or the like) that determines whether the start information stored in the reserved storage means satisfies the special result before the game result determination means makes a determination.
In the special game state when the difference number of the game values calculated by the difference number calculation means is less than the regulated value, the notification means is capable of executing a pre-reading notification display (e.g., a pre-reading display) based on the judgment result of the advance judgment means, but in the special game state when the difference number of the game values calculated by the difference number calculation means is equal to or greater than the regulated value, it is desirable to restrict the execution of the pre-reading notification display.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
When the first game stop notice is being executed, it is desirable for the notification means to terminate the execution of the first game stop notice on condition that the difference number of the game values calculated by the difference number calculation means becomes a release value (e.g., 88,999) that is smaller than the boundary value.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
It is desirable that, when the second game stop notice is being executed, the notification means continues the execution of the second game stop notice without terminating it even if the difference number of the game values calculated by the difference number calculation means falls below the regulated value, and terminates the execution of the second game stop notice and starts the execution of the game stop notification, provided that the control of the special game state is terminated.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
The power interruption recovery setting means sets the working area of the storage means when the power supply is stopped and then the power supply is resumed and power is restored (for example, the main CPU 201 performs a designated range clear process, etc. when the startup state at the time of power interruption recovery is "power interruption recovery"); and a specific operation initialization means initializes a predetermined working area of the storage means by a specific operation (for example, an operation by the RAM clear switch 176) (for example, the main CPU 201 performs a designated range clear process, etc. when the startup state at the time of power interruption recovery is "RAM clear").
When a specified working area is not initialized by the specific operation initialization means and power is restored by the power interruption restoration setting means, it is desirable for the notification means to terminate execution of the first game stop notification if the first game stop notification was executed before the power interruption when the power supply was stopped, resume execution of the second game stop notification if the second game stop notification was executed before the power interruption, and resume execution of the game stop notification if the game stop notification was executed before the power interruption.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
When the special game state is controlled by the special game state control means, the notification means is capable of executing a special notification presentation (e.g., a jackpot presentation) consisting of multiple chronologically consecutive notification presentations, and when a specified working area is not initialized by the specific operation initialization means and power is restored by the power interruption restoration setting means, if the second game stop notice was executed in the special game state before the power interruption, it is desirable to resume execution of the second game stop notice and start the special notification presentation from the first notification presentation.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
Further comprising a performance control unit (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300) having the notification means,
The game stop means does not stop the game, and when the difference number of the game values calculated by the difference number calculation means becomes the boundary value, transmits a game stop function state command including the difference number of the game values to the performance control unit, and when the game is stopped, transmits a game stop function completion command to the performance control unit;
It is desirable that when the presentation control unit receives the game stop function completion command, it causes the notification means to execute the game stop notification, and when it receives the game stop function status command, it causes the notification means to execute the first game stop notice.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
The difference in the game value is divided into a first difference in a predetermined amount (e.g., a first difference in a number of balls in units of 1000) and a second difference in a number of balls in units smaller than the predetermined amount (e.g., a second difference in a number of balls in units of 1).
It is desirable that the game stop means does not stop the game, and when the difference number of the game value calculated by the difference number calculation means becomes the boundary value, the game stop function status command including the first difference number as the difference number of the game value excluding the second difference number is transmitted to the presentation control unit.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
It is desirable that the game stop means compares the amount of change between the current first difference number calculated by the difference number calculation means and the previous first difference number when the game stop function status command was most recently sent to the performance control unit, and, provided that the amount of change is not zero, newly sends the game stop function status command including the current first difference number to the performance control unit.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
It is desirable that, when the amount of change is increasing, the game stop means newly transmits the game stop function status command including the current first difference number to the performance control unit, and, when the amount of change has decreased below a predetermined change value (e.g., 1), newly transmits the game stop function status command including the current first difference number to the performance control unit, and, when the amount of change has not decreased below the predetermined change value, does not transmit the game stop function status command to the performance control unit.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
a winning information command transmission means for transmitting a winning information command including information on the game value acquired by the game value providing means and information on the game value consumed in the game to the performance control unit,
It is desirable that, upon receiving the winning information command, the presentation control unit calculates the second difference number based on information on the acquired game value and the consumed game value included in the winning information command and the first difference number included in the game stop function status command, complements the difference number of the game value calculated by the game value granting means, and causes the notification means to execute the difference number indication notification based on the complemented difference number of the game value.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the fifth pachinko gaming machine),
It is desirable that the presentation control unit causes the notification means to execute the difference number suggestion notification based on the complemented difference number of the game value in display units (e.g., in units of 100 or 500) smaller than the smallest unit in which the first difference number is calculated and larger than the smallest unit in which the second difference number is calculated.

According to the present invention, it is possible to appropriately suppress the gambling nature of games.

<Addendum: The 7th Pachinko Game Machine (Part 1)>
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big prize hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a lottery for a special symbol is held, and when the lottery for the special symbol is won, the big prize game state is controlled (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), and when the game ball enters the starting hole, the big prize hole is changed to an open state, and the big prize game state is controlled on the condition that the game ball that entered the big prize hole enters a specific area (so-called type 2 pachinko game machine) are known. Furthermore, a game machine (a reel type game machine called a slot machine) is also known in which a predetermined number of medals or the like are inserted, a start lever is operated to rotate multiple reels, and a special prize such as a specific number of medals or a bonus game is awarded based on the combination of symbols on the stopped reels.

In addition, in pachinko gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, multiple game states are provided, such as game states with different probability of winning special symbols (low probability game state, high probability game state) and game states with different rates of balls entering the starting hole (time-saving game state, non-time-saving game state) (see JP 2013-59682 A).

There was a demand for more exciting gaming experiences that could be enhanced by providing appropriate effects according to the gaming status and playing situation of the gaming machine.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the enjoyment of gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a seventh pachinko gaming machine) is a gaming machine capable of variably displaying identification symbols,
The game machine includes a performance execution means (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 that control the display device 7, the speaker 32, and the LED group 46) that executes a predetermined performance, and a game state control means (e.g., a main CPU 201) that transitions the game state and controls the transitioned game state,
The game state control means is capable of transitioning to a special game state (e.g., a big win game state or a small win game state) in which a special benefit can be given to the player when the execution result of the variable display of the identification pattern satisfies a special condition, and is capable of controlling at least a normal game state (e.g., a first normal game state) and a specific game state (e.g., the first to third time-saving game states and the second normal game state) which are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state as game states in which the variable display of the identification pattern can be executed, and the performance execution means is capable of executing one normal performance (e.g., a normal reach performance or the like executed when hitting from the left) out of a plurality of types of normal performances in the normal game state, and is capable of executing one specific performance (e.g., a boss battle performance, a Sengoku time performance, a battle performance, or the like executed when hitting from the right) out of a plurality of types of specific performances in the specific game state.

Preferably, the multiple types of normal effects of the gaming machine according to the present invention include at least multiple types of normal effects that can be executed by the variable display of the identification pattern that satisfies the special condition (e.g., window preview effects, normal reach effects, etc. in the variation) and multiple types of pre-normal effects that can be executed by the variable display of the identification pattern prior to the variable display of the identification pattern that satisfies the special condition (e.g., pre-reading effects in the pre-variation).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the multiple types of pre-regular effects include at least a first pre-regular effect (e.g., a flash notice when the ball enters the starting hole) and a second pre-regular effect (e.g., a hold change notice), and it is desirable that the effect execution means is capable of executing the second pre-regular effect while not executing the first pre-regular effect when a predetermined condition is met at the start of the pre-regular effect (e.g., when the ball enters the starting hole).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, if a specific condition different from the predetermined condition (for example, common prohibited condition 1, "when there is a reserved number of second special symbols") is satisfied at the start of the pre-regular performance, the performance execution means will not execute either the first pre-regular performance or the second pre-regular performance.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific gaming state (e.g., the second time-saving gaming state) is a gaming state in which a normal display state (e.g., a male character stage or a female character stage) and a special display state (e.g., a premier stage indicating the number of reserved consecutive stocks) whose display state is different from the normal display state can be executed, the specific effects include a first specific effect (e.g., an effect based on the background display mode of the male character stage) and a second specific effect (e.g., an effect based on the background display mode of the female character stage), and while the effect execution means is capable of executing either the first specific effect or the second specific effect in the normal display state, it is preferable that the effect execution means does not execute either the first specific effect or the second specific effect in the special display state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific game state includes at least a first specific game state (e.g., a second time-saving game state) that can be executed after the special game state ends, and a second specific game state (e.g., a second normal game state) that is different from the first specific game state, and the presentation execution means has a presentation mode execution means that executes one of a plurality of presentation modes that define the presentation state, and a presentation mode selection means that selects the presentation mode executed by the presentation mode execution means, and the presentation mode execution means can execute one of a plurality of specific presentation modes that include at least a first specific presentation mode (e.g., a male character stage) and a second specific presentation mode (e.g., a female character stage) that is different from the first mode in the first specific game state, and it is preferable that the presentation mode selection means allows the player to select at least one of the first specific presentation mode and the second specific presentation mode when a predetermined selection condition is met.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined selection condition may be established in the special gaming state entered based on the special condition when the special condition is satisfied in the variable display of the identification pattern executed in the second specific gaming state, but it is preferable that the predetermined selection condition may not be established in the special gaming state entered based on the special condition when the special condition is satisfied in the variable display of the identification pattern executed in the first specific gaming state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the special condition is satisfied by the variable display of the identification pattern executed in the first specific game state, the presentation mode execution means continues to execute the presentation mode executed when the special condition is satisfied in the first specific game state after the special game state ends.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises: a start information acquisition means for acquiring start information when a predetermined start condition is established; a special condition determination means for determining whether or not the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means satisfies the special condition; and a reservation storage means for storing up to a predetermined reservation number of start information acquired by the start information acquisition means when the variable display of the identification pattern has already been executed or the variable display of the identification pattern cannot be executed;
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect (for example, displaying the number of reserved consecutive stocks using a V-passing effect pattern) when start information satisfying the special condition is stored in the reserve memory means in the special game state, and when the special condition is satisfied by the variable display of the identification pattern executed in the first specific game state, the special effect can be executed in the special game state entered based on the special condition, whereas it is desirable not to execute the special effect in the special game state entered based on the special condition when the special condition is satisfied by the variable display of the identification pattern executed in the second specific game state, even if start information satisfying the special condition is stored in the reserve memory means.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes at least a first predetermined condition satisfaction pattern that can be satisfied depending on the execution state of the variable display of the identification pattern being executed at the start of the pre-regular performance (e.g., first prohibited condition 3, "when the first start gate is won within 500 ms from the start of the variable display of the first special pattern"), and a second predetermined condition satisfaction pattern that can be satisfied when the variable display of the identification pattern is not being executed at the start of the pre-regular performance (e.g., first prohibited condition 4, "when the first start gate is won during demo display").

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises: first identification symbol variable display control means for variably displaying the first identification symbol up to a predetermined variation time and then stopping the first identification symbol in a predetermined stopped manner as execution of the variable display of the first identification symbol; variation pattern table switching means for switching to one of a plurality of variation pattern tables in which a plurality of variation patterns for determining at least the variation time of the first identification symbol are defined; and variation time determination means for determining a variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern table switched by the variation pattern table switching means and determining the variation time of the first identification symbol based on the determined variation pattern;
It is desirable that the patterns in which the specific condition can be satisfied include a first specific condition satisfaction pattern which can be satisfied when a specified normal performance is being executed with the variable display of the identification pattern being executed at the start time of the pre-normal performance (for example, common prohibited conditions 4 and 5, ``when the same pre-reading performance is already being executed while a full rotation performance is being displayed''), and a second specific condition satisfaction pattern which can be satisfied when the specified number of times after or before the variable pattern table is switched by the variable pattern table switching means at the start time of the pre-normal performance (for example, common prohibited condition 3, ``when within five variable displays before and after the stage is switched'').

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises: a first identification symbol variable display control means for variably displaying the first identification symbol for a predetermined variation time and then statically displaying the first identification symbol in a predetermined stopped manner as the execution of the variable display of the first identification symbol; and a second identification symbol variable display control means for variably displaying the second identification symbol for a predetermined variation time and then statically displaying the second identification symbol in a predetermined stopped manner as the execution of the variable display of the second identification symbol;
It is desirable that the patterns in which the specific condition can be established include a third specific condition establishment pattern which can be established when the variable display of the identification pattern being executed at the start time of the pre-normal performance is variably displaying the second identification pattern by the second identification pattern variable display control means (for example, ``during the control period of the second special pattern (during the variably display of the second special pattern)'', which is common prohibited condition 2).

The present invention can improve the enjoyment of games.

<Addendum: The 7th Pachinko Machine (Part 2)>
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big prize hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a lottery for a special symbol is held, and when the lottery for the special symbol is won, the big prize game state is controlled (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), and when the game ball enters the starting hole, the big prize hole is changed to an open state, and the big prize game state is controlled on the condition that the game ball that entered the big prize hole enters a specific area (so-called type 2 pachinko game machine) are known. Furthermore, a game machine (a reel type game machine called a slot machine) is also known in which a predetermined number of medals or the like are inserted, a start lever is operated to rotate multiple reels, and a special prize such as a specific number of medals or a bonus game is awarded based on the combination of symbols on the stopped reels.

In addition, in pachinko gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, multiple game states are provided, such as game states with different probability of winning special symbols (low probability game state, high probability game state) and game states with different rates of balls entering the starting hole (time-saving game state, non-time-saving game state) (see JP 2013-59682 A).

Therefore, it was desirable to maintain and improve gameplay by setting an appropriate game state according to the gameplay of the gaming machine and by carrying out appropriate processing.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can maintain and improve playability.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises: identification symbol variable display control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for variably displaying at least one of a first identification symbol (e.g., a first special symbol) and a second identification symbol (e.g., a second special symbol) for a predetermined variation time, and then for stopping and displaying the identification symbol in a predetermined stopped state; effect execution means (e.g., the sub-control circuit 300 and the sub-CPU 301 for controlling the display device 7, the speaker 32, and the LED group 46); and game state control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for shifting a game state and controlling the shifted game state.
The game state control means is capable of transitioning to a special game state (e.g., a big win game state or a small win game state) in which a special benefit can be given to a player when a stop mode of at least one of the first and second identification patterns satisfies a special condition, and is provided with at least a normal game state (e.g., a normal game state) and a specific game state (e.g., a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to a player than the normal game state, as game states in which the variable display of the identification pattern can be executed, and the normal game state is a first normal game state (e.g., a first normal game state) and and a second normal game state (e.g., a second normal game state) different from the first normal game state, and the specific game state includes a first specific game state (e.g., a first time-saving game state), a second specific game state (e.g., a second time-saving game state) different from the first specific game state, and a third specific game state (e.g., a third time-saving game state) different from the first specific game state and the second specific game state, and the game state control means is capable of transitioning from the normal game state to the third specific game state when the number of times that the changing display of the identification pattern has been performed reaches a predetermined specific number.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the first identification symbol is primarily displayed in a variable manner, the second normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the second identification symbol is primarily displayed in a variable manner, and at least one of the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, and the third specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the second identification symbol is primarily displayed in a variable manner.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state control means is capable of transitioning to the second normal gaming state after the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state has ended, and is capable of transitioning to the first normal gaming state after the second normal gaming state has ended.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the identification pattern variable display control means is capable of variably displaying the first identification pattern in the first specific gaming state when the first identification pattern is variably displayed in a first variation time (e.g., 0.2 seconds) when the first identification pattern is variably displayed in a state where the stopping mode of the first identification pattern does not satisfy the special condition (e.g., a miss), variably displaying the first identification pattern in a second variation time (e.g., 89 seconds) longer than the first variation time when the first identification pattern is variably displayed in a state where the stopping mode of the first identification pattern satisfies the special condition (e.g., in the case of a big win or a small win), and variably displaying the second identification pattern in a variation time longer than the first variation time and shorter than the second variation time (e.g., 0.2 seconds) when the second identification pattern is variably displayed in a state where the stopping mode of the second identification pattern satisfies the special condition (e.g., in the case of a big win or a small win).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the identification pattern variable display control means variably displays the second identification pattern in the second specific gaming state such that the stopping mode of the second identification pattern satisfies the special condition (for example, in the case of a big win or a small win), the identification pattern variable display control means is capable of variably displaying the second identification pattern using any of a third variation time (for example, 2 seconds) and a fourth variation time (for example, 5 seconds or 12 seconds) that is longer than the third variation time, and when the stopping mode of the first identification pattern satisfies the special condition (for example, in the case of a big win or a small win), When the first identification pattern is variably displayed (for example, in the case of a big win or a small win), it is possible to variably display the first identification pattern using the third variation time, while not variably displaying the first identification pattern using the fourth variation time, and it is desirable that the performance execution means be able to execute the same performance (for example, a performance of a normal variation mode as a decorative pattern performance) when the second identification pattern is variably displayed using the third variation time and when the first identification pattern is variably displayed using the fourth variation time.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the identification pattern variable display control means variably displays the second identification pattern when the number of variations reaches the specific number, the identification pattern variable display control means is capable of variably displaying the second identification pattern using the same fifth variation time (e.g., 15 seconds) regardless of the stopping state of the second identification pattern, and when the second identification pattern variably displays when the number of variations reaches the specific number, the performance execution means is capable of executing different performances (e.g., a card performance or a door opening performance) when the second identification pattern is variably displayed using the fifth variation time and when the stopping state of the second identification pattern satisfies the special condition and when the special condition is not satisfied.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises: a start information acquisition means for acquiring start information when a predetermined start condition is established; a special condition determination means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means; and a reservation storage means for storing up to a predetermined reservation number of start information acquired by the start information acquisition means when the display of changes in the identification symbols has already been executed or the display of changes in the identification symbols cannot be executed;
It is desirable that, in the second normal game state, the presentation pattern determination means is capable of determining different presentation patterns depending on the number of start information items that satisfy the special condition stored in the pending memory means and the determination result by the special condition determination means.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect (e.g., a door opening effect) in which the end time of the effect is not specified.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises: a start information acquisition means for acquiring start information when a predetermined start condition is established; a special condition determination means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means; and a reservation storage means for storing up to a predetermined reservation number of start information acquired by the start information acquisition means when the display of changes in the identification symbols has already been executed or the display of changes in the identification symbols cannot be executed;
When the game state control means controls at least one of the first specific game state or the second specific game state, and when the first identification pattern is variably displayed when an end condition for the first specific game state or the second specific game state being controlled is satisfied, it is desirable that the effect execution means executes a first transition effect (e.g., a continuous battle entry effect) for transitioning to the second normal game state if start information corresponding to the second identification pattern is stored in the pending memory means, and executes the special effect (e.g., a door opening effect) without executing the first transition effect if start information corresponding to the second identification pattern is not stored in the pending memory means.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the game state control means controls the third specific game state and the first identification pattern is displayed in a variable manner when an end condition for the controlled third specific game state is met, the effect execution means is capable of executing the special effect at the start of the variable display of the first identification pattern, and desirably ends the execution of the special effect when the first identification pattern is displayed stationary.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises: a start information acquisition means for acquiring start information when a predetermined start condition is established; a special condition determination means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means; and a reservation storage means for storing up to a predetermined reservation number of start information acquired by the start information acquisition means when the display of changes in the identification symbols has already been executed or the display of changes in the identification symbols cannot be executed;
The effect execution means is capable of executing the special effect when a specific condition is not met (for example, when the ball does not pass through a V winning port) while the special game state (for example, a small win game state) is being controlled, and when start information corresponding to the second identification pattern is stored in the pending memory means, it is desirable to execute a first transition effect (for example, a continuous battle entry effect) for transitioning to the second normal game state after the special effect ends, and when start information corresponding to the second identification pattern is not stored in the pending memory means, it is desirable to execute a first transition effect (for example, a stage change effect) for transitioning to the first normal game state after the special effect ends.

The present invention makes it possible to maintain and improve gameplay.

<Additional Note: The 8th Pachinko Machine>
Conventionally, a starting hole and a large prize hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a lottery for a special pattern is held, and when the lottery for this special pattern is won, the large prize hole is controlled, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, the large prize hole is changed to an open state, and the large prize hole is controlled on the condition that the game ball that entered the large prize hole enters a specific area, and there are also known game machines (so-called type 2 pachinko game machines).

Furthermore, in order to increase the interest of pachinko machines, so-called type 1/type 2 pachinko machines are also known, which are a combination of a so-called type 1 pachinko machine and a so-called type 2 pachinko machine (see JP 2009-178259 A).

However, rather than simply combining the so-called Type 1 pachinko gaming machine with the so-called Type 2 pachinko gaming machine, there was a desire to create unprecedented gameplay and increase the interest of the game.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the enjoyment of gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention (e.g., an eighth pachinko gaming machine) is a gaming machine including a main control means (e.g., a main control circuit 200, a main CPU 201) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300, a sub-CPU 301) capable of executing control related to presentation,
the main control means comprises: a game execution means capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition; a special condition determination means for determining whether or not a result of the execution of the game satisfies a special condition; a special game state control means for controlling a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be awarded to a player after the end of the game when it is determined that the special condition is satisfied; a game state control means for controlling a game state in which the game is executed; and a game execution mode determination means for determining an execution mode of the game (e.g., a variation pattern of a special symbol) to be executed based on the game execution means and to notify the result of the execution of the game,
The presentation control means is capable of executing any one of a plurality of presentations in a predetermined presentation execution means, and the game state control means is capable of controlling the game state to at least one of a normal game state and a specific game state (e.g., a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the special game state includes a predetermined special game state (e.g., a small win game state) and a specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state) in which the game value awarded to the player is relatively higher than that of the predetermined special game state, and it is desirable that the specific special game state includes a first specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state with selected symbol z1) and a second specific special game state different from the first specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state with selected symbol z2).

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a threshold determination means capable of determining whether the number of times the special gaming state has been executed (e.g., the number of consecutive jackpots) or the number of gaming values granted to the player (e.g., the cumulative number of jackpot balls) has reached a predetermined threshold, and a limiting means (e.g., a main control circuit 200 that controls a number limiter function or a ball output limiter function) capable of controlling the gaming state controlled by the gaming state control means to the normal gaming state based on the determination by the threshold determination means.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is equipped with a threshold determination means capable of determining whether the number of times the special gaming state has been executed (e.g., the number of consecutive jackpots) or the number of gaming values granted to the player (e.g., the cumulative number of jackpot balls) has reached a predetermined threshold, and a limiting means (e.g., a main control circuit 200 that controls a number-of-times limiter function or a ball-out limiter function) capable of controlling the gaming state controlled by the gaming state control means to the unplayable state based on the determination of the threshold determination means.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the presentation control means does not issue a notification related to the threshold before the threshold determination means determines that the predetermined threshold has been reached, but when the threshold determination means determines that the threshold has been reached, it is desirable for the predetermined presentation execution means to notify that the predetermined threshold has been reached (for example, by executing an ending presentation).

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a table storage means (e.g., a main ROM 202) for storing at least a first table (e.g., a special symbol variation pattern table J1) to which the game execution mode is associated, and a second table (e.g., a special symbol variation pattern table J2) different from the first table,
The game execution mode determination means is capable of determining an execution mode including an execution time of the game as an execution mode of the game by using any of the tables stored in the table storage means, and it is desirable that the second table is a table to which an execution mode including an execution time of the game that is relatively shorter than that of the first table (for example, a variation pattern 10H of a special pattern) is associated.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the game execution mode determination means is capable of determining the execution mode of the game using the first table when the remaining threshold value until the predetermined threshold value is reached (for example, the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts) is a predetermined value, and is capable of determining the execution mode of the game using the second table when the remaining threshold value until the predetermined threshold value is a specific value different from the predetermined value.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the threshold determination means is capable of setting a first threshold value (e.g., a limiter count of 98 times) as the predetermined threshold value when the first specific special gaming state is executed, and is capable of setting a second threshold value different from the first threshold value (e.g., a limiter count of 100 times) as the predetermined threshold value when the second specific special gaming state is executed.

Preferably, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the gaming state control means is capable of controlling the gaming state to the normal gaming state after the end of the specified special gaming state when the specified special gaming state is executed a specified number of times (e.g., the number of small wins is 1 or 255, etc.) while controlled to the specific gaming state, and the threshold determination means is capable of executing a process of counting a specified count value (e.g., a value obtained by subtracting the number of limiter counts) on the threshold based on the transition to the specified special gaming state, and then determining whether the counted threshold value has reached the specified threshold value.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined special game state includes a first predetermined special game state (e.g., a small win game state of the selected symbol z5) and a second predetermined special game state different from the first predetermined special game state (e.g., a small win game state of the selected symbol z6), and the threshold value determination means, when transitioning to the first predetermined special game state, counts a first count value (e.g., the subtraction value of the limiter count is 2) as the predetermined count value to the threshold value, and, when transitioning to the second predetermined special game state, desirably counts a second count value (e.g., the subtraction value of the limiter count is 1) that is a value different from the first count value to the threshold value.

Preferably, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the game state control means sets the predetermined number of times to a first specified number (e.g., one small win) when the remaining threshold until the predetermined threshold is reached is a predetermined value, and sets the predetermined number of times to a second specified number greater than the first specified number (e.g., two small wins) when the remaining threshold until the predetermined threshold is reached is a specific value different from the predetermined value.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state (e.g., time-saving gaming state A) that can be executed after the special gaming state ends, and a second specific gaming state (e.g., time-saving gaming state B) that can be executed without going through the special gaming state, and the threshold value determination means is capable of setting a third threshold value (e.g., a limiter count of 98 or 100) as the predetermined threshold value when the special gaming state (e.g., a first win) first transitioned to from a gaming state other than the first specific gaming state is a special gaming state transitioned to from the normal gaming state, and is capable of setting a fourth threshold value different from the third threshold value (e.g., a limiter count of 99) as the predetermined threshold value when the special gaming state (e.g., a first win) first transitioned to from a gaming state other than the first specific gaming state is a special gaming state transitioned to from the second specific gaming state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific game state includes a first specific game state (e.g., time-saving game state A) that can be executed after the special game state ends, and a second specific game state (e.g., time-saving game state B) that can be executed without going through the special game state, and the game execution mode determination means is capable of determining the game execution mode (e.g., the special symbol fluctuation pattern according to special symbol fluctuation pattern tables J1 to J4) based on the threshold determined by the threshold determination means during execution of the first specific game state, while being capable of determining the game execution mode (e.g., the special symbol fluctuation pattern according to special symbol fluctuation pattern table S1) regardless of the threshold determined by the threshold determination means during execution of the second specific game state.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a special game control mode determination means for determining a control mode of the special game state (for example, an opening mode of a big win game state or a small win game state),
It is preferable that the special game control mode determination means is capable of determining the control mode of the special game state based on a remaining threshold value until the predetermined threshold value is reached.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention (e.g., an eighth pachinko gaming machine) is a gaming machine including a main control means (e.g., a main control circuit 200, a main CPU 201) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300, a sub-CPU 301) capable of executing control related to a presentation executed by a presentation execution means,
the main control means comprises: a game execution means capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition; a special condition determination means for determining whether or not a special condition is satisfied by a result of the execution of the game; a special game state control means for controlling a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be awarded to a player after the end of the game when it is determined that the special condition is satisfied; and a game state control means for controlling a game state in which the game is executed;
The game state control means is capable of controlling the game state to any one of a normal game state and a specific game state (e.g., a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the specific game state includes at least a normal specific game state (e.g., a general time-saving game state) which can be terminated when a first termination condition (e.g., one small win is won) is satisfied, and a special specific game state (e.g., a special time-saving game state) which can be terminated when a second termination condition different from the first termination condition (e.g., 255 small wins is won) is satisfied.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the special game state includes a predetermined special game state (e.g., a small win game state) to which a player can be shifted when a predetermined special condition is met, and a specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state) to which a player can be shifted when a specific special condition is met and in which the game value given to the player is relatively higher than that of the predetermined special game state, and the specific special game state includes a first specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state with selected symbol z2) and a second specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state with selected symbol z1) different from the first specific special game state, and it is preferable that the game state control means is capable of controlling the game state to the normal specific game state after the first specific special game state ends, and is capable of controlling the game state to the special specific game state after the second specific special game state ends.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first end condition is an end condition that is met relatively more frequently than the second end condition.

Preferably, the special game state of the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a predetermined special game state (e.g., a small win game state) to which a player can enter when a predetermined special condition is met, and a specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state) to which a player can enter when a specific special condition is met and in which the game value awarded to the player is relatively higher than that of the predetermined special game state, and the specific special game state is a first specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state for the selected symbol z2) that is different from the first specific special game state. and a second specific special game state (e.g., a jackpot game state of selected symbol z1) in which the first termination condition is met when the specific special game state is executed a first specified number of times (e.g., one small jackpot win) during execution of the normal specific game state, and the second termination condition is preferably met when the specific special game state is executed a second specified number of times (e.g., 255 small jackpot wins) that is greater than the first number of times during execution of the special specific game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state control means is capable of terminating either the normal specific gaming state or the special specific gaming state that is being executed when a third termination condition different from either the first termination condition or the second termination condition (e.g., the number of time-saving times is 10,000) is met during execution of the normal specific gaming state or the special specific gaming state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the third end condition is an end condition that is met at a relatively lower rate than the first end condition is met during the execution of the normal specific gaming state.

Preferably, the game machine according to the present invention includes a first game execution means capable of executing a first game (e.g., drawing a lottery for a first special symbol) when a first start condition among the predetermined start conditions is established, and a second game execution means capable of executing a second game (e.g., drawing a lottery for a second special symbol) different from the first game when a second start condition different from the first start condition among the predetermined start conditions is established,
It is desirable that a transition to the special game state based on the execution result of the first game execution means occurs at a relatively higher rate after the end of the special game state than a transition to the special specific game state based on the execution result of the second game execution means.

Preferably, the game machine according to the present invention includes a first game execution means capable of executing a first game (e.g., drawing a lottery for a first special symbol) when a first start condition among the predetermined start conditions is established, and a second game execution means capable of executing a second game (e.g., drawing a lottery for a second special symbol) different from the first game when a second start condition different from the first start condition among the predetermined start conditions is established,
It is desirable that a transition to the special game state based on the execution result of the second game execution means results in a relatively higher rate of transition to the normal specific game state after the end of the special game state than a transition to the special game state based on the execution result of the first game execution means.

Preferably, the game machine according to the present invention includes a first game execution means capable of executing a first game (e.g., drawing a lottery for a first special symbol) when a first start condition among the predetermined start conditions is established, and a second game execution means capable of executing a second game (e.g., drawing a lottery for a second special symbol) different from the first game when a second start condition different from the first start condition among the predetermined start conditions is established,
When a transition to the special game state is made based on the execution result of the first game execution means, it is possible to transition to any of the normal game state, the normal specific game state, and the special specific game state at a predetermined rate after the special game state ends, while when a transition to the special game state is made based on the execution result of the second game execution means, it is desirable to transition to the normal specific game state after the special game state ends without transitioning to the normal game state or the special specific game state.

Preferably, the special game state of the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a predetermined special game state (e.g., a small win game state) to which a player can enter when a predetermined special condition is met, and a specific special game state (e.g., a jackpot game state) to which a player can enter when a specific special condition is met and in which the game value awarded to the player is relatively higher than that of the predetermined special game state, and the specific special game state includes a first specific special game state (e.g., a jackpot game state for the selected symbol z2) and a second specific special game state (e.g., a jackpot game state for the selected symbol z2) and the first specific special game state (e.g., a jackpot game state for the selected symbol z2). The predetermined special game state includes a first predetermined special game state (e.g., a small win game state of a small win of a small win) to which the game can be shifted when a first predetermined condition (e.g., a small win of a small win of a small win of a falling) among the predetermined special conditions is satisfied, and a second predetermined special game state (e.g., a small win of a small win of a small win of a falling) to which the game can be shifted when a second predetermined condition (e.g., a small win of ... and a second predetermined special game state (for example, a small win game state of a V small win) that is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined special game state. The presentation control means has a predetermined presentation execution means capable of executing a predetermined presentation (for example, a continuation end presentation by a card presentation) related to the establishment of the first predetermined condition when the first predetermined condition is established, and a specific presentation execution means capable of executing a specific presentation (for example, a victory presentation by a battle presentation, or a door opening presentation) related to the establishment of the second predetermined condition when the second predetermined condition is established. The specific presentation execution means is capable of executing the specific presentation when the second predetermined condition can be established in either the normal specific game state or the special specific game state, and it is preferable that the predetermined presentation execution means is capable of executing the predetermined presentation when the first predetermined condition can be established in the normal specific game state, but does not execute the predetermined presentation when the first predetermined condition can be established in the special specific game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific performance execution means is capable of executing the specific performance if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the gaming machine is controlled to the normal gaming state, while the predetermined performance execution means is capable of not executing the predetermined performance if the first predetermined condition is satisfied when the gaming machine is controlled to the normal gaming state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect control means is provided with a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect (for example, a notice effect by notice effect pattern B1 or notice effect pattern B2) having a relatively high expectation of transitioning to the special game state,
When the special effect execution means is controlled to the normal specific gaming state, it is possible to execute the special effect in both games in which the special condition is met and games in which the special condition is not met, whereas when the special effect execution means is controlled to the special specific gaming state, it is possible to execute the special effect in games in which the special condition is met, but it is desirable not to execute the special effect in games in which the special condition is not met.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the main control means includes a game execution time determination means capable of determining an execution time of the game executed based on the game execution means (for example, a variable display time of a special symbol);
It is preferable that the game execution time determination means is capable of determining a game in which the normal specific game state has a relatively longer variable time than the special specific game state in a game in which the special condition is not established.

The present invention can improve the enjoyment of games.

<Additional Note: The 9th Pachinko Machine>
Conventionally, a starting port and a large prize port are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting port, a lottery for a special pattern is held, and when the lottery for this special pattern is won, the large prize port is controlled, and when the game ball enters the starting port, the large prize port is changed to an open state, and the large prize port is controlled on the condition that the game ball that entered the large prize port enters a specific area, and there are also known game machines (so-called type 2 pachinko game machines).

Furthermore, in order to increase the interest of pachinko machines, so-called type 1/type 2 pachinko machines are also known, which are a combination of a so-called type 1 pachinko machine and a so-called type 2 pachinko machine (see JP 2009-178259 A).

However, rather than simply combining the so-called Type 1 pachinko gaming machine with the so-called Type 2 pachinko gaming machine, there was a desire to create unprecedented gameplay and increase the entertainment value of the game.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the enjoyment of gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention (e.g., the ninth pachinko gaming machine) comprises: a start variable display game execution means (e.g., a main control circuit 200 and a sub-control circuit 300, etc.) capable of executing a start variable display game (e.g., variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbols, etc.) based on the passage of a gaming medium into a start area (e.g., a first start port 9120 or a second start port 9140); a specific variable display game execution means (e.g., a main control circuit 200 and a sub-control circuit 300, etc.) capable of executing a specific variable display game (e.g., variable display of normal symbols and decorative symbols corresponding to the normal symbols, etc.) based on the passage of a gaming ball into a specific area (e.g., a normal symbol operation area 9126); a special judgment means (e.g., a main CPU 201 that performs a lottery for special symbols) that judges whether the start variable display game satisfies a special result; and a specific judgment means (e.g., a normal symbol operation area 9126) that judges whether the specific variable display game satisfies a predetermined result. a first displacement device operation control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) capable of displacing a first displacement device (e.g., the first special electric role unit 9130 or the second special electric role unit 9150) provided in the game area from a state in which it is difficult for the game medium to win a prize to a state in which it is easy for the game medium to win a prize when it is determined based on the determination result of the special determination means that the execution result of the start variable display game satisfies the special result; a second displacement device operation control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) capable of displacing a second displacement device (e.g., the normal electric role unit 9145) provided in the game area from a state in which it is difficult for the game medium to win a prize to a state in which it is easy for the game medium to win a prize when it is determined based on the determination result of the specific determination means that the execution result of the specific variable display game satisfies the predetermined result; and a game state control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) capable of controlling a game state.
The game state control means is capable of controlling the game state to any one of a normal game state and a specific game state (e.g., a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to a player than the normal game state,
The special results include at least a first special result (e.g., a big win) and a second special result (e.g., a small win) which is relatively less game value awarded to the player than the first special result, and the predetermined results include at least a first predetermined result (e.g., a short opening of the second starting hole 9140) and a second predetermined result (e.g., a long opening of the second starting hole 9140) which takes a relatively longer time to make the second displacement device easier to win than the first predetermined result.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state control means, when controlled to the specific gaming state, is capable of controlling to the normal gaming state on the condition that the specific variable display game has been executed a specific number of times.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific game state includes at least a first specific game state (e.g., a first time-saving game state) and a second specific game state (e.g., a second time-saving game state or a third time-saving game state) in which the rate at which the specific determination means determines the second predetermined result is relatively higher than in the first specific game state.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a reserve means (e.g., a main RAM 203 having a special symbol start memory area) capable of reserving a predetermined number of executions of the start variable display game, and a start variable display mode determination means (e.g., a main CPU 201) capable of determining the variable display mode (e.g., the variable pattern of the special symbol) of the start variable display game,
It is desirable that the start variable display mode determination means be capable of determining a first variable display mode (e.g., a first special pattern variable pattern 0AH) that can vary over a first time period (e.g., 10 seconds) when the start variable display game is not held by the holding means when the start condition of the start variable display game is satisfied, and of determining a second variable display mode (e.g., a second special pattern variable pattern 1AH) that can vary over a second time period (e.g., 1 second) that is shorter than the first time period when the start variable display game is held by the holding means when the start condition of the start variable display game is satisfied.

Preferably, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the first time is a time longer (e.g., the first variable display time of 10 seconds) than the average time it takes for the gaming medium launched from the launching device to reach the second displacement device (e.g., the normal average arrival time of 5 seconds), and the second time is a time shorter (e.g., the second variable display time of 1 second) than the average time it takes for the gaming medium launched from the launching device to reach the second displacement device.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second displacement device is provided downstream of the first displacement device and upstream of the specific area, and the specific area is provided below the gaming area below the first displacement device and the second displacement device, and it is desirable that the frequency of passing through the specific area is relatively low by the first displacement device or the second displacement device being in a state where it is easy to win.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a specific variable display mode determination means (e.g., main CPU 201) capable of determining the variable display mode of the specific variable display game (e.g., the normal symbol variable pattern), and the specific variable display mode determination means is capable of determining a variable display mode (e.g., normal symbol variable pattern 13H, 15H or 16H) that can vary over a relatively longer period of time (e.g., 15 seconds, 40 seconds or 60 seconds) when it is determined that the second predetermined result is satisfied based on the judgment result of the specific judgment means than when it is determined that the first predetermined result is satisfied based on the judgment result of the specific judgment means.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a specific variable display mode determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201) capable of determining the variable display mode (e.g., the normal symbol variable pattern) of the specific variable display game, and the specific variable display mode determination means is capable of determining a third variable display mode (e.g., normal symbol variable pattern 13H to 15H) that can vary over a third time (e.g., 15 seconds, 12 seconds, or 40 seconds) when the execution result of the previously changed specific variable display game is a losing result that does not satisfy the predetermined result or the first predetermined result, and is capable of determining a fourth variable display mode (e.g., normal symbol variable pattern 16H) that can vary over a fourth time (e.g., 60 seconds) that is longer than the third time when the execution result of the previously changed specific variable display game is the second predetermined result.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a specific variable display mode determination means (e.g., main CPU 201) capable of determining the variable display mode of the specific variable display game (e.g., the normal pattern variable pattern), and the specific variable display mode determination means is capable of determining a variable display mode (e.g., normal pattern variable patterns 10H, 11H, etc.) that can vary over a relatively shorter variable time (e.g., 3 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.) in the specific game state than in the normal game state, and it is desirable that the variable display mode (e.g., normal pattern variable pattern 01H) that can vary over the longest variable time (e.g., 30 seconds) that can be determined in the normal game state is a variable display mode with a shorter variable time than the variable display mode (e.g., normal pattern variable pattern 16H) that can vary over the longest variable time (e.g., 60 seconds) that can be determined in the specific game state.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a presentation execution means (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 for controlling the display device 7, the speaker 32 and the group of LEDs 46) capable of executing a predetermined presentation, the presentation execution means being capable of executing a presentation relating to the variable display of the start variable display game in the normal gaming state while not executing a presentation relating to the variable display of the specific variable display game, being capable of executing a presentation relating to the variable display of the specific variable display game in the specific gaming state, and being capable of executing a presentation relating to the variable display of the start variable display game when the execution result of the specific variable display game becomes the predetermined result.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a presentation execution means capable of executing a predetermined presentation (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 that control the display device 7, the speaker 32, and the LED group 46) and a hold means capable of holding a predetermined number of executions of the start variation display game (e.g., a main RAM 203 having a special pattern start memory area), and the presentation execution means executes a first presentation (e.g., a BONUS entry presentation) when the start variation display game satisfies the special result and the start variation display game is not held by the hold means when the start condition of the start variation display game is established, and executes a second presentation (e.g., a BONUS continuation presentation) different from the first presentation when the start variation display game satisfies the special result and the start variation display game is held by the hold means when the start condition of the start variation display game is established.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 that control the display device 7, the speaker 32, and the LED group 46), a hold means capable of holding the execution of the start variable display game for a predetermined number of times (e.g., a main RAM 203 having a special pattern start memory area), and a special game state control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) that can control the start variable display game executed by the start variable display game execution means to a special game state (e.g., a jackpot game state) in which a predetermined number of game values can be awarded to the player after the special result is established when the special result is established, and the performance execution means controls the start variable display game when the special result is established. If the start variable display game is not held by the holding means when the start condition of the start variable display game is satisfied, it is preferable that the start variable display game be capable of displaying the number of game media expected to be acquired (for example, displaying an image of the number of game balls expected to be acquired) relating to the number of game values that the player can acquire at the start of the special game state, and if the start variable display game is held by the holding means when the start condition of the start variable display game is satisfied, the start variable display game when the special result is satisfied be capable of displaying the number of acquired game media (for example, displaying an image of the number of acquired game balls) relating to the number of game values acquired in the special game state previously executed at the start of the special game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the start variable display game execution means is a first start variable display game execution means capable of executing a first start variable display game (e.g., variable display of a first special symbol and a decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, etc.) based on the passage of a gaming medium through a first start area (e.g., a first start opening 9120), and a second start variable display game execution means capable of executing a second start variable display game (e.g., variable display of a second special symbol and a decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol, etc.) based on the passage of a gaming medium through a second start area (e.g., a second start opening 9140). and the effect execution means executes a first effect if the second start variation display game satisfies the special result and the second start variation display game is not on hold by the hold means when the start condition of the second start variation display game is established, and executes a second effect different from the first effect if the second start variation display game satisfies the special result and the second start variation display game is on hold by the hold means when the start condition of the second start variation display game is established.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the start variable display game execution means has a first start variable display game execution means capable of executing a first start variable display game (e.g., variable display of a first special symbol and a decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, etc.) based on the passage of a gaming medium into a first start area (e.g., a first start opening 9120), and a second start variable display game execution means capable of executing a second start variable display game (e.g., variable display of a second special symbol and a decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol, etc.) based on the passage of a gaming medium into a second start area (e.g., a second start opening 9140), and the special determination means is The game has a first special determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201 that draws the first special symbol) that determines whether the game satisfies the special result or is a miss that does not satisfy the special result, and a second special determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201 that draws the second special symbol) that determines whether the second start variable display game satisfies the special result or is a miss, and it is desirable that the first special determination means has a relatively higher probability of determining that the game is a miss than that the game satisfies the special result, and that the second special determination means has a relatively higher probability of determining that the game is a miss than that the game is a miss.

Preferably, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the second time is set to be equal to or less than the time it takes for the first displacement device to reach a state in which it is easy to win (e.g., 2 seconds).

[Effects of the Invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to further increase the enjoyment of the game.

<Additional Note: 10th Pachinko Machine>
Conventionally, a starting port and a large prize port are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting port, a lottery for a special pattern is held, and when the lottery for this special pattern is won, the large prize port is controlled, and when the game ball enters the starting port, the large prize port is changed to an open state, and the large prize port is controlled on the condition that the game ball that entered the large prize port enters a specific area, and there are also known game machines (so-called type 2 pachinko game machines).

In order to increase the interest of the game, pachinko machines are provided with multiple game states, such as game states with different probability of winning special symbols (low probability game state, high probability game state) and game states with different rates of balls entering the starting hole (time-saving game state, non-time-saving game state) (see JP 2013-59682 A).

However, there was a desire to create unprecedented gameplay and improve the entertainment value of the game by adding further changes to the game state and providing effects that correspond to the new game state.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the enjoyment of gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a tenth pachinko gaming machine) comprises:
a game machine including: a start information acquisition means for acquiring start information when an acquisition condition is satisfied; a holding means capable of holding a predetermined number of start information acquired by the start information acquisition means; a pattern change execution means for executing a pattern change based on the start information held by the holding means when a start condition is satisfied; a determination means for determining a result of the execution of the pattern change; a prior determination means for determining a result of the execution of the pattern change prior to a determination by the determination means; a game state control means for controlling a game state; and a performance execution means for executing either the performance that can be executed based on the determination result of the determination means or a prior performance (e.g., a look-ahead performance) that can be executed based on the determination result of the prior determination means,
The judgment result judged by the judgment means or the preceding judgment means includes at least a specific result (e.g., a time-saving pattern) and a special result different from the specific result (e.g., a big win pattern or a small win pattern),
The game state control means is capable of controlling the game state to any one of a normal game state, a specific game state (e.g., a time-saving game state) to which the game state can be shifted when the specific result is derived as the judgment result of the judgment means, and a special game state (e.g., a jackpot game state) to which the game state can be shifted when the special result is derived as the judgment result of the judgment means and to which a predetermined game value can be awarded,
The specific result includes a first specific result (e.g., time-saving pattern 10) and a second specific result (e.g., time-saving pattern 20) different from the first specific result,
The specific game state is characterized in that it includes a first specific game state (e.g., a first time-saving game state) to which a transition can be made when the first specific result is derived, and a second specific game state (e.g., a second time-saving game state) to which a transition can be made when the second specific result is derived and which is more advantageous to the player than the first specific game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
It is desirable that the judgment means allows the derivation of the specific result when the specific result is derived when the game state control means is controlling the game to the normal game state, while not allowing the derivation of the specific result when the specific result is derived when the game state control means is controlling the game to the first specific game state or the second specific game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
and a firing operation means for firing the gaming medium in response to a firing operation by the player to progress the game, and it is desirable that when the normal game state or the first specific game state is controlled, the game be progressed with a first firing operation (e.g., left hit) as the normal mode, and when the second specific game state is controlled, the game be progressed with a second firing operation (e.g., right hit) as the normal mode.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
It is preferable that the first specific gaming state is a gaming state that is less favorable than the normal gaming state or has the same degree of advantage as the normal gaming state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
It is preferable that the rate at which the first specific result is derived in the normal gaming state is greater than the rate at which the second specific result is derived in the specific gaming state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
It is desirable that the determination means is capable of deriving the special result with a first probability as the proportion at which the special result is derived, and is capable of deriving the specific result with a second probability higher than the first probability as the proportion at which the specific result is derived.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The game state control means is capable of controlling the game state to a third specific game state (e.g., a fourth time-saving game state) different from the first specific game state and the second specific game state when a specific condition is satisfied that the number of times the pattern fluctuations have reached a predetermined number (e.g., a ceiling value of 950 times) while the game state is controlled to the normal game state or the specific game state, and the third specific game state is a game state that is at least more advantageous to a player than the first specific game state,
It is preferable that the specific condition is satisfied at a relatively higher rate when the game machine is controlled to the first specific game state than when the game machine is controlled to the normal game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The game state control means is capable of controlling the game state to a fourth specific game state (e.g., a fifth time-saving game state) different from the first specific game state and the second specific game state after the special game state has been controlled, and it is desirable that the fourth specific game state allows the game to proceed with the second firing operation as the normal mode until the number of times the pattern change has changed is executed a specific number of times (e.g., 1 or 5 switching times), while allowing the game to proceed with the first firing operation as the normal mode when the number of times the pattern change has changed has exceeded the specific number of times.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
It is desirable that, when the earlier start information held in the holding means derives the special result, the performance execution means is capable of not executing an advance performance related to the deriving of the specific result, regardless of whether the later start information held after the earlier start information is the first specific result or the second specific result.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The advance performance includes at least a specific advance performance (e.g., an expectation UP zone, a RUSH expectation zone) that suggests that the specific result may be derived,
It is desirable that the specific advance performance is a performance that can be executed on the start information from which the second specific result is derived when the start information from which the second specific result is derived is present in the holding means, while it is not executed on the start information from which the first specific result is derived when the start information from which the first specific result is derived is present.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
It is desirable that the performance execution means is capable of not executing the advance performance for later start information that is held after the earlier start information when the earlier start information held in the holding means derives the second identification result, while being capable of executing the advance performance for the later start information when the earlier start information held in the holding means derives the first identification result.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
the relevant performance includes a specific relevant performance (e.g., a card performance) suggesting that the first specific result or the second specific result may be derived, the advance performance includes a specific advance performance (e.g., an expectation UP zone, a mode transition zone, a RUSH expectation zone) suggesting that the first specific result or the second specific result may be derived, and the specific relevant performance can be executed in any performance mode including at least a first performance mode (e.g., a white card performance) and a second performance mode (e.g., a red card performance) in which the rate at which the second specific result is derived is relatively higher than in the first performance mode;
It is desirable that, when the specific advance performance has been executed in the previous pattern change, the performance execution means is capable of executing the specific performance in the second performance mode at a relatively higher rate than when the specific advance performance has not been executed in the previous pattern change.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The advance performance includes at least a special advance performance (e.g., an expectation UP zone) which can be executed when the result of the pattern change determined by the advance determination means is either the special result or the specific result, and the special advance performance is an effect which can be executed at least in the normal game state and the first specific game state,
It is desirable that the performance execution means be capable of executing the special advance performance at a relatively higher rate when controlled in the normal game state than when controlled in the first specific game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
It is desirable that, when the determination means determines the first specific result or the second specific result, the effect execution means is capable of executing the effect which differs between when the normal game state is controlled by the game state control means and when the first specific game state or the second specific game state is controlled by the game state control means.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A game board (e.g., a game panel 10100) in which a game area in which game balls flow down is formed;
The game system includes a starting area (e.g., a first starting gate 10120) and a specific area (e.g., a second passing gate 10126L) that are provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter, and an auxiliary variable winning device (e.g., a normal electric device 10146) that is provided in the game area and can be changed between an open state where the game ball can enter and a closed state where the game ball cannot enter, on the condition that the game ball has entered the specific area;
The first specific game state includes an unfavorable first specific game state (e.g., a first time-saving game state) and an advantageous first specific game state (e.g., a third time-saving game state) in which a game ball is relatively more likely to enter the auxiliary variable winning device than in the unfavorable first specific game state,
The start information acquisition means acquires first start information (e.g., start information of a first special symbol) when the game ball enters the start area, and acquires second start information (e.g., start information of a second special symbol) when the game ball enters the auxiliary variable winning device, with the acquisition condition being that the game ball enters the start area or the auxiliary variable winning device;
The determination means is more likely to determine the execution result of the pattern variation based on the second start information as the special result than the execution result of the pattern variation based on the first start information,
It is desirable that the starting region is provided downstream of the specific region.

The present invention can improve the enjoyment of games.

<Additional Note: 11th Pachinko Machine>
Conventionally, a starting hole and a large prize hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a lottery for a special pattern is held, and when the lottery for this special pattern is won, the large prize hole is controlled, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, the large prize hole is changed to an open state, and the large prize hole is controlled on the condition that the game ball that entered the large prize hole enters a specific area, and there are also known game machines (so-called type 2 pachinko game machines).

In order to increase the interest of the game, pachinko machines are provided with multiple game states, such as game states with different probability of winning special symbols (low probability game state, high probability game state) and game states with different rates of balls entering the starting hole (time-saving game state, non-time-saving game state) (see JP 2013-59682 A).

However, there was a desire to create unprecedented gameplay and improve the entertainment value of the game by adding further changes to the game state and providing effects that correspond to the new game state.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the enjoyment of gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, an eleventh pachinko gaming machine) comprises:
a special condition determination means for determining whether a result of execution of the variable display of the identification pattern satisfies a special condition; a special game state control means for controlling a special game state (e.g., a big win game state or a small win game state) in which a predetermined game value can be awarded to a player after the variable display of the identification pattern has ended when a first special condition (e.g., a big win or a small win) is determined to be satisfied by the special condition determination means; a game state control means for controlling at least one game state in which the variable display of the identification pattern is executed, the game state including a non-easy-to-win state (e.g., a normal game state) in which it is not easy for a game ball to enter a predetermined area, and an easy-to-win state (e.g., a time-saving game state) in which it is relatively easier for a game ball to enter the predetermined area than in the non-easy-to-win state; and a performance execution means for executing a predetermined performance,
The easy-to-win state includes a state to which a player can enter when the special condition determination means determines that the first special condition is satisfied (for example, a fifth time-saving game state), and a normal easy-to-win state to which a player can enter when the special condition determination means determines that a second special condition different from the first special condition (for example, a time-saving win) is satisfied,
The normal easy-to-win state includes at least a first normal easy-to-win state (e.g., a first time-saving game state) and a second normal easy-to-win state (e.g., a second time-saving game state) that is more advantageous than the first normal easy-to-win state and the non-easy-to-win state;
the special condition determination means is capable of determining that the second special condition is satisfied when the non-easy-to-win state is controlled by the gaming state control means, whereas when the easy-to-win state is controlled by the gaming state control means, the special condition determination means does not determine that the second special condition is satisfied or makes it more difficult to determine that the second special condition is satisfied than when the non-easy-to-win state is controlled;
The game state control means is capable of transitioning to the non-easily winning state when the variable display of the identification pattern executed by the variable display execution means reaches a specified number of times (for example, a first time-saving number to a third time-saving number) in the first normal easy-to-win state,
The effect execution means is characterized in that, in the first normal easy-to-win state, it is capable of executing general effects (e.g., effects in a general effect mode and a premonition effect mode) based on the number of times the variable display of the identification pattern is executed by the variable display execution means.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A launch operation means is provided for launching game media in response to a launch operation by a player to progress the game,
It is desirable that when the non-easy-to-win state or the first normal easy-to-win state is controlled by the game state control means, the game proceeds with the first firing operation (e.g., left hit) as the normal mode, and when the second normal easy-to-win state is controlled, the game proceeds with the second firing operation (e.g., right hit) as the normal mode.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
It is desirable that, in the first normal easy-to-win state, the effect execution means be capable of executing a first general effect (e.g., an effect in a general effect mode) when the number of times the variable display of the identification pattern is executed is a first execution number that is less than the specified number of times (e.g., when the number of times the variable display of the first special pattern is 1 to 39), and be capable of executing a second general effect (e.g., a mode transition encouraging effect in a premonition effect mode) different from the first general effect when the number of times the variable display of the identification pattern is executed is a second execution number that is less than the specified number of times and exceeds the first execution number (e.g., when the number of times the variable display of the first special pattern is 40 to 49).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
When the number of times that the variable display of the identification pattern is executed is the specified number of times, the effect execution means is capable of executing a specific general effect (for example, a mode transition effect of a premonition effect mode) different from the first general effect and the second general effect,
It is desirable that the specific general presentation indicates that the normal easy-to-win state or the first normal easy-to-win state is being held.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A variation pattern determination means is provided for determining a variation pattern to which at least the variable display time of the identification symbol is associated based on a game state,
The variation pattern determination means is capable of determining a first variation pattern (e.g., a variation pattern of a normal special pattern, 00H) when the number of times the variable display of the identification pattern is executed is the first number of times in the first normal winning likelihood state, and is capable of determining a second variation pattern (e.g., a variation pattern of a suggestive special pattern, 10H) different from the first variation pattern when the number of times the variable display of the identification pattern is executed is the second number of times,
It is preferable that the variable display executing means is capable of executing a variable display of the identification pattern based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A variation pattern determination means is provided for determining a variation pattern to which at least the variable display time of the identification symbol is associated based on a game state,
It is desirable that the variation pattern determination means be capable of determining a specific variation pattern (for example, variation pattern 11H of a special pattern for judgment) when the number of times the variable display of the identification pattern is executed reaches the specified number of times in the first normal easy-to-win state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A variation pattern determination means is provided for determining a variation pattern to which at least the variable display time of the identification symbol is associated based on a game state,
The variation pattern determination means is capable of determining a variation pattern different between the first normal easy-to-win state and the second normal easy-to-win state,
It is preferable that the variable display executing means is capable of executing a variable display of the identification pattern based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
It is desirable that the variation pattern determination means is capable of determining different variation patterns between the second normal easy-to-win state and the special easy-to-win state, and is also capable of determining a shortened variation pattern associated with a variable display time of the identification pattern that is shorter in the special easy-to-win state than in the second normal easy-to-win state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A specified number of times determination means is provided for determining one of a plurality of specified numbers (for example, a first time-saving number of times to a third time-saving number of times) when the state transitions to the first normal winning-prone state;
It is desirable that the multiple prescribed numbers include a predetermined prescribed number (for example, 50 times as the first time-saving number) and a specific prescribed number that is greater than the predetermined prescribed number (for example, 100 times as the second time-saving number or 150 times as the third time-saving number).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
When the specific prescribed number of times is determined by the prescribed number of times determination means, the first execution number less than the predetermined prescribed number of times (for example, the variable display number of the first special symbol is 1 to 39) and the second execution number less than the predetermined prescribed number of times and exceeding the first execution number (for example, the variable display number of the first special symbol is 40 to 49) can be set,
It is desirable that, in the first normal easy-to-win state, the performance execution means be capable of executing the first general performance when the number of times the variable display of the identification pattern is executed reaches a third execution number that is greater than the first execution number and/or the second execution number (for example, the number of times the variable display of the first special pattern is 51 to 89), and be capable of executing the second general performance when the number of times the variable display of the identification pattern is executed reaches a fourth execution number that is greater than the second execution number and/or the third execution number (for example, when the number of times the variable display of the first special pattern is 90 to 99).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
When the specific prescribed number of times is determined by the prescribed number of times determination means, the effect execution means is capable of executing a specific general effect different from the first general effect and the second general effect when the number of times the variable display of the identification pattern is executed in the first normal winning-prone state becomes the predetermined prescribed number of times and/or the specific prescribed number of times;
It is desirable that the specific general presentation indicates that the normal easy-to-win state or the first normal easy-to-win state is being held.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The first normal easy-to-win state has an unfavorable first normal easy-to-win state (e.g., a first time-saving game state) and an advantageous first normal easy-to-win state (e.g., a third time-saving game state) that is relatively more favorable than the unfavorable first normal easy-to-win state,
It is desirable that the effect execution means is capable of executing a specific general effect (e.g., a mode transition effect) indicating the normal easy-to-win state, the unfavorable first normal easy-to-win state, or the advantageous first normal easy-to-win state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The game board (e.g., game panel 11100) has a game area formed through which game balls flow down, a starting area (e.g., first starting gate 11120) and a specific area (e.g., second passing gate 11126L) are provided in the game area and into which the game balls can enter, and an auxiliary variable winning device (e.g., ordinary electric device 11146) is provided in the game area and can be changed between an open state in which the game balls can enter and a closed state in which the game balls cannot enter, on the condition that the game ball has entered the specific area,
The first normal easy winning state has an unfavorable first normal easy winning state and an advantageous first normal easy winning state which is relatively more favorable than the unfavorable first normal easy winning state, and the advantageous first normal easy winning state makes it relatively more difficult for a game ball to enter the auxiliary variable winning device than the second normal easy winning state, but makes it relatively easier for a game ball to enter the auxiliary variable winning device than the unfavorable first normal easy winning state,
the variable display execution means is capable of variable displaying a first identification symbol (e.g., a first special symbol) when the gaming ball enters the starting area, and is capable of variable displaying a second identification symbol (e.g., a second special symbol) when the gaming ball enters the auxiliary variable winning device;
the special condition determination means is more likely to determine that the execution result of the variable display of the second identification pattern satisfies the first special condition than the execution result of the variable display of the first identification pattern, and is more likely to determine that the execution result of the variable display of the second identification pattern satisfies the first special condition than a miss;
It is desirable that the starting region is provided downstream of the specific region.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
It is desirable that, in the advantageous first normal easy winning state, when it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the auxiliary variable winning device, the effect execution means is capable of executing an opening suggestion effect (e.g., a caption effect) which suggests that the game ball will be able to enter the auxiliary variable winning device.

The present invention can improve the enjoyment of games.

<Additional Note: 10th and 11th Pachinko Machines>
Conventionally, a gaming machine (so-called pachinko gaming machine) is known in which a starting hole and a big prize hole are provided in a gaming area where a gaming ball flows down, and a lottery for a special symbol is held when a gaming ball enters the starting hole, and when the lottery for the special symbol is won, the big prize gaming state is controlled.Furthermore, a gaming machine (a reel type gaming machine also called a slot machine) is also known in which a certain number of medals or the like are inserted, and multiple reels are rotated by operating a start lever, and a special prize such as a specific number of medals or a bonus game is awarded based on the combination of symbols on the reels that are stopped and displayed.

In addition, in pachinko gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, multiple game states are provided, such as game states with different probability of winning special symbols (low probability game state, high probability game state) and game states with different rates of balls entering the starting hole (time-saving game state, non-time-saving game state) (see JP 2013-59682 A).

In such pachinko machines, the jackpot game state can be controlled in a short period of time in the high probability game state or the time-saving game state, allowing the player to obtain a large amount of game value (game balls).

However, as the cumulative gaming value acquired by a player increases (as the number of balls paid out increases), there is a risk that the gambling nature of the game will increase, and so it was necessary to appropriately suppress the gambling nature of the game.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately suppresses the gambling aspect of the game.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a tenth pachinko gaming machine or an eleventh pachinko gaming machine) comprises:
a game execution means for executing a game; a game state control means for controlling a game state in which the game is executed, the game state including at least an unfavorable game state (e.g., a normal game state or a general game state) that is unfavorable to a player, and an advantageous game state (e.g., a jackpot game state, a rush game state) that is advantageous to a player; a game value granting means for granting a predetermined number of game values to a player according to a result of execution of the game; and a cumulative increase in the game value granted to a player (e.g., an increase in the number of game balls) a counting means capable of counting the cumulative increase in the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the
The notification means is characterized in that when the cumulative increase number is within a predetermined counting range (e.g., 85,000 to 94,999) that is lower than the regulated value, and a notification start condition is established, a notification regarding the game stop notification can be made.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The predetermined count range is divided into a first count range (e.g., 85,000 to 89,999 pieces) that is less than a first boundary value, and a second count range (e.g., 90,000 to 94,999 pieces) that is equal to or greater than the first boundary value and less than the regulatory value,
It is desirable that when the cumulative increase counted by the counting means is within the first counting range, the notification means is capable of notifying about the game stop notification when a first notification start condition (e.g., during a specific jackpot game state which transitions to a RUSH game state, RUSH game state) is established, and when the cumulative increase counted by the counting means is within the second counting range, the notification means is capable of notifying about the game stop notification when a second notification start condition (e.g., during a jackpot game state, etc.) is established.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
It is desirable that the advantageous game state has a plurality of advantageous game states (e.g., a jackpot game state) having different degrees of advantageousness, and that the fulfillment of the first advance notice start condition results in a transition to a specific advantageous game state (e.g., a specific jackpot game state which transitions to a RUSH game state), and that the fulfillment of the second advance notice start condition results in a transition to any of the multiple advantageous game states.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
It is desirable that the notification means be capable of terminating the game stop notice that was initiated when the counting range was within the first counting range based on the game state controlled by the game state control means, and that the notification means be capable of continuing the game stop notice that was initiated when the counting range was within the second counting range until the regulated value is counted by the counting means.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
It is desirable that the notification means be capable of terminating the game stop notification when the game state control means initiates the disadvantageous game state while the cumulative increase is within the first counting range, in response to the game stop notification initiated when the cumulative increase is within the first counting range, and continuing the game stop notification when the cumulative increase reaches the second counting range until the regulated value is counted by the counting means.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
a notice history storage unit for storing execution information indicating that a notice regarding the game stop notice has been issued when the first counting range is included;
It is desirable that when the cumulative increase counted by the counting means reaches the second counting range from the first counting range while the disadvantageous game state is being controlled by the game state control means, if the executed information is not stored in the notification history memory unit, the notification means issues a notification regarding the game stop notification, assuming that the second notification start condition has been established, and if the executed information is stored in the notification history memory unit, the notification means is capable of not issuing a notification regarding the game stop notification.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
It is desirable that the notification means be capable of notifying about a first game stop notification when the cumulative increase counted by the counting means is within the first counting range and the first notification start condition is established, and that the notification means be capable of notifying about a second game stop notification different from the first game stop notification when the cumulative increase counted by the counting means is within the second counting range and the second notification start condition is established.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
the game state control means is capable of controlling a special advantageous game state (e.g., a jackpot game state) capable of awarding a game value to a player when a result of execution of the game satisfies a special condition;
The game stopping means is capable of stopping the game after the special advantageous game state is ended when the special advantageous game state is controlled by the game state control means and the cumulative increase number counted by the counting means becomes equal to or greater than the regulation value,
It is desirable that the notification means is capable of making a notification regarding a third game stop notice different from the first game stop notice and the second game stop notice when the special advantageous game state is controlled by the game state control means and the cumulative increase counted by the counting means becomes equal to or greater than the regulated value.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
When the game is stopped by the game stopping means, the notification means issues a game stop notification in connection with the fact that the game has been stopped, and issues the game stop notification in a first notification manner until a change condition (e.g., the passage of a forced notification time) is satisfied, and once the change condition is satisfied, it is desirable to issue a game stop notification in a second notification manner different from the first notification manner.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The notification means includes at least an image display means for displaying a regulation image as the game stop notification,
It is desirable that the image display means displays a first regulating image until the change condition is satisfied, and when the change condition is satisfied, displays a second regulating image having a different size from the first regulating image.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
and a demo presentation means for executing a demo presentation which is performed when the game is not being executed, and it is desirable that, when the game is stopped by the game stopping means, the demo presentation means is unable to execute the demo presentation when the first regulating image is being displayed by the image display means, and is able to execute the demo presentation when the second regulating image is being displayed by the image display means.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A presentation operation means for receiving a presentation operation from a player,
It is desirable that, when the image display means is displaying the second regulating image, when a presentation operation is accepted by the presentation operation means, the image display means is capable of displaying a special image (e.g., a QR code image) through the player's operation.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A volume adjustment unit adjusts the volume of the notification unit,
It is desirable that, when the game is stopped by the game stopping means, the volume adjustment means is unable to adjust the volume until the change condition is satisfied, and is able to adjust the volume when the change condition is satisfied.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A light amount adjusting means for adjusting the amount of light related to the notification means,
It is desirable that, when the game is stopped by the game stopping means, the light amount adjusting means is unable to adjust the light amount until the change condition is satisfied, and is able to adjust the light amount when the change condition is satisfied.

According to the present invention, it is possible to appropriately suppress the gambling nature of games.

6 Launch device 7 Display device 200 Main control circuit 201 Main CPU
202 Main ROM
203 Main RAM
300 Sub control circuit 301 Sub CPU
303 Work RAM

Claims (1)

A storage means having a working area;
A power interruption recovery setting means for setting a working area stored in the storage means when power is supplied;
a specific operation initialization means for initializing a predetermined working area of the storage means by a specific operation;
A game control means capable of controlling a game;
a game value granting means for granting a game value acquired according to a game result to a player;
a difference calculation means for calculating a difference between the game value and a predetermined reference value based on an increased number of game values granted to a player and a consumed number of game values used in a game;
a game stop means for stopping a game controlled by the game control means on condition that the difference number of the game values calculated by the difference number calculation means becomes a regulation value;
A performance control means capable of controlling a predetermined suggestion;
Equipped with
the game control means has a special game state control means for controlling a special game state capable of awarding a game value to a player when a game result satisfies a special result;
the game stopping means, when the special game state is controlled by the special game state control means, does not stop the game if the difference number of the game values calculated by the difference number calculation means becomes the regulation value, but can stop the game after the control of the special game state is terminated;
the presentation control means is capable of controlling at least a first game stop notice which is executable when the difference number of the game values calculated by the difference number calculation means is a boundary value smaller than the regulated value, a second game stop notice which can suggest in advance that the game will be stopped after the special game state ends when the difference number of the game values calculated by the difference number calculation means becomes the regulated value while the special game state is being controlled by the special game state control means, and a game stop suggestion which can suggest the stop of the game when the game is stopped by the game stop means;
When the first game stop notice is being controlled, a difference suggestion that suggests a difference in game value calculated by the difference calculation means can be controlled;
When the presentation control means is controlling the second game stop notice, the presentation control means continues the control of the second game stop notice without terminating it even if the difference number of the game value calculated by the difference number calculation means becomes a value smaller than the regulated value from the regulated value, and terminates the control of the second game stop notice and starts the control of the game stop suggestion on the condition that the control of the special game state is terminated;
The game control means is capable of transmitting difference ball information corresponding to the difference in the game value to the presentation control means when there is a predetermined change in the difference in the game value,
As the difference ball information, it is possible to transmit information on a higher-order difference consisting of a value in units of a predetermined number of digits, without including information on a lower-order difference consisting of a value less than a predetermined number of digits, among the difference in game value;
The performance control means includes:
When a power outage occurs while the first game stop notice is being executed, and the power is restored by the power outage restoration setting means without the specific operation being performed after the power outage, the first game stop notice is not executed,
When a power outage occurs while the game stop suggestion is being executed, and when the power is restored by the power outage restoration setting means without the specific operation being performed after the power outage, the game stop suggestion is executed;
When a power outage occurs while the second game stop notice is being executed, and the power is restored by the power restoration setting means without the specific operation being performed after the power outage, the second game stop notice is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images